



** ^ ' » & * 

■> & * V 

t, ei- 4 

S ' n „ . * ' \ O *, 

. 


•w 

3 \« ^ Oo - ^" ' : .v: *5 ■*, ‘ ■ 

5 . ^ \°o % ^ 

xf‘ >V 

\ V ^ 


>V 0 ^ ’ : 








* ip S ^ -Q^' a. <i y 

C^V A ^ 'J> O 0 i / -\_c4SNv 

A 








0 *r. -• 


50 A.V •/>., 

» 4> ^ %'^W’ ~ oV 

-« ' / -- ,/.' ^:> :v?rJu '’ bo ' t *<= 

;“■'= ^ '-S.&fj: **+ • 

\ .** ■ '"b. ' 1 


Vy^*: #** .-y; : 

*r 







^ ^ & I •>^ . ' J . \P 

V. S s V/* > v *V 

A' ^ r%. * .p ,/\ 

„ 


, <%£T-* - *V 
O -Or « * V ' * 't 




- . 


f N B « '^O. 7 * *’ S , 0 ^'L^ ' » * ^ ^ # # * jA' » r O v ,Pji 

o 5 *- V = \ 0 ^. - . y: a-++ \ V" J ■ = \ 0 o x. 

* ^ * - ; .... •<, • * 4 - JpjiJiL : '%$ « ?' J ; : •■. 1 -* 7 

P, * * 

&a^l- * 

■< M 0 ' 

v* reft* ^ £. ' :a a» * -\ ■ , %. , * J0M&* \ 









«p, V— ap -fc 
*7- < * * N “s 

^7 V 

A\ *7^ 

x v 

% ^.V 'Pr «/ <: a 0 

9 " a v> N ;. ^^ 4f,N0 > v'*v ^ 

* ^ \ ^ \ > • o 






*1 


VI f\ 


** ’.^pr, 4 

<0 N 
4» 

x &?rti//S2- * 


\ ' Q, ** 1 













'°^T S " A 0 ' , . C ' 0 » > 

ff o -0 v * v 8 * <£» ' c 

* Jt-,-1 ' , *V -f “3T* 0 l> <s 

<? 


$°y. 


o/ * ' * ^ 0/ c 

* •% ^ ; 

</' \X 

c >» 

«r. /-uiujiiiimr, - ^ O 

C> o -» b 

> XV 1 " ^ 





0 - O » S ,A* ^ 

.9* % s 4 », 7 c- v v s VoL ^ 

^ .VW*\ % ^ 

t/> \v 

>>*- : "mr : „ V ! .„. „ w ^ 

,x^ 

■* f\ 


<y * v * o t- '*o- 

\ *■ a a * i 




<\V '/> - ? II | 7 O r 1 t> 'C<, O * .'A' 

* -\ V '% * V—La * 0 V> ^ * -v 

r£. ✓ A. ,•• -W N 0^ 

,/V".:; * " C ‘ *V>■:,:: <\ 7 " ’ x / .<■: 

■ -• * ' W K g v 


\° ^ 


o N 


* / ^ 

s ^ *c. ** 

\ \ s * o . 


c> ^Ca, 




* ' » * v * A 

A ♦* 

^ .a\ s. ^ 


o >* ,o° % *■ 7?"7^\# x %- y *, N o 1 

^ r ^*v V $ * 0gh'* ^ «$ 

\\^ 'Qa 

V,^ *<• >J “ L ■ ,V k '\ N «> 4-i <^- >/> >, V, v ^ - ur - 1 

/* ^ >-#• s a> o <3 c? A • <A, x \.> ,-^f<- ^ flV ^ 4 l 

'?/ X// ^ -<t N C y 0ov^ A -x *r, ■ ^ \a 0 V <r^ ' 0 ^ V ^ A 

. ftV * V » » * <2^ A^ X C o N (< ^ '*b * * cv <* v 1 8 * 4 

* ^S<V, * O G v V />^5. ^ 


0 






'^o o* 


■0 N 


,o-' c b A 

n> «. "< * o /• ^ 8 1 ' v X s' 

r V ^ V, 

tA 

- 

v . V * -J ^ ^ ■* ^ 

< ■ y 0 , », * 

, *% A ^ X c 0 c « ’’O 

o 

✓ 


s. ♦ 

^ s » 0 ^ ^ 



y 

& ^ 

C* /. /, ^ / S N a 

» * , *^v w o n 


z: w ^ 

V 5 4 

b . V? 


^ y , ^>w ^ a* 

V — S 0^° % 

^ rP v N ^ 

* ^ 

■dP* ^ V 


^ . T >V., a V> 

'/* * « S ^ , l A V. 

'*o o^ ;/;.«•.., : ^ v 1 . ... 

x°o* 

V^* ys - v .'. > ^ ^ , ■vM’ a \^ 

V X O' s/ * /"yO O ^ \ , CL ^ 

/ * <, S ' 

fp- o’ 



\V </> 

^ ^ "* . oV 
*A rj^ ■/ " \.i., ^ . \^- 

% ''‘ , ~ s ^ v 
^ -° ‘ “ 

•;< 


'» N 




V ^ 

V\V <A„ 

'V ,J V, 





'£<* J "" A' ,° n c 

, * A' ^ -^y- : T|<^ ^ 

-" ^ v : ; -o o x 

' 

>*V C °A*~TA y 'A' ** 

_ *s. -> u i * \ N c * * , 

n ‘zkJ?, ' <■■ r .v. <*• j’ .-^vA « £ 

,V 






v *«% A dlA*, ^ 0 

+ A < < r < . ‘;V ^ 

L o c . N< I A + > y* V 





0°,' 

C? ,V^O, % / . 


I 




oS 

v^;' *' ,V* 5 h0 '/°\' *• >c'' 81 ' v v ; 

v S. O .*>■ Tr a S % ■*> =, 

V 

*, , v. . - > •/* t\ ' 



^ * 






•vv-s'V vl , <<, 

■J C° d-yy?^. -1 . <t 


* ,^ v ^ 

•V 




' •’• " *> • •" Aof^''/C ' v * /v **'*•«■. 


v* "b- ; c i, *«,,,*'\#' ,." A.'*,,o' 1 c? c o 

.y’.s-.,^ '> »“'• , 0 S »'•«, '% V s .' A'* > <1 v »'"», ■% V> >'••'■ 

A At'". <'■' ■■ >."' ■ 'dA-- 


• A 

.-.V» > '’‘*, V % 


c 0 N ‘ « ^b ' * * 

' •*’■ '-^>; n»o' 

" =<. * - ^ *. 






; > t ^ 




; r oo< 

" At 

y ,\^ r- 

,; ^r C- 


















AFRICA 













Co Ticpre ss 


ft^xyc-oeo 


\5T\ 


AFRICA 


South of 
the Sahara 


A Selected, Annotated 
hist of Writings 


Compiled by 

HELEN F. CONOVER 

African Section 



GENERAL REFERENCE AND BIBLIOGRAPHY DIVISION 
REFERENCE DEPARTMENT 

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

WASHINGTON : 1963 c i.e., 





L.C. card 63-60087 


For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office 
Washington, D.C., 20402 - Price $2.25 














Introduction 


«- 

CO 

]> 

DC 


This bibliographical analysis of writings on Africa 
south of the Sahara replaces two earlier Library of 
Congress bibliographies, both now out of print. When 
the first one, Introduction to Africa, was compiled in 
1951 the continent was still obscure to the average 
American and only a handful of scholars in this coun¬ 
try had made it their field of study. Such is emphati¬ 
cally no longer the case. Even when in 1957 it was 
decided to compile a revision covering new writings, 
the literature over a 6-year period had reached such 
proportions that two lists resulted: Africa South of the 
Sahara . . . 1951—1956,, and North and Northeast 
Africa, 1951-1957. In 1963 Africa has been headline 
news for several years, more and more American uni¬ 
versities are announcing courses in African studies, 
and the magazine reader is bombarded with feature 
articles on the African scene. An introductory survey 
of works suited to a general audience is no longer an 
appropriate undertaking for the Library of Congress, 
where the African Section has been set up to advance 
scholarly research in this area. The present broadly 
based bibliography is designed to provide the student 
of African affairs, for whom specialized subject matter 
is assuming vast proportions, with a beginning of bibli¬ 
ographical data in many fields. 

In our scheme of coverage we interpret Africa south 
of the Sahara in the widest sense, including all coun¬ 
tries except those of the Mediterranean littoral— 
Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Libya, Egypt—and the 
Spanish Sahara. Thus we treat three countries, the 
Sudan, Ethiopia, and Somalia, which in 1957 were 
designated as Northeast Africa. The arrangement, as 
shown in the Table of Organization, is necessarily arbi¬ 
trary; after the first long part in which works relating 
to Africa in general are arranged by discipline, the 
groupings are of regional, geographical, or even politi¬ 
cal import. This is because they reflect not so much 
the actualities of the recently changed and changing 
scene as they do the body of literature, much of which 
goes back to preindependence days. A good many items 
have been repeated from the two earlier bibliographies, 
with annotations rewritten to suit present perspectives. 

The selection of references has been slanted toward 
the student on the graduate level or doing advanced 

(m) 


research. With so large a canvas it has been impos¬ 
sible to suggest more than a minimum on each topic, 
and no attempt has been made to track down obscure 
material; rather, we have tried to use books available 
in the Library of Congress collections so that our ap¬ 
praisals might be based on firsthand examination. 
When that was not possible, we have resorted to book 
reviews and notices. As the list is designed for serious 
scholars, it is assumed that those working on countries 
whose written language is other than English will be 
conversant with French, Portuguese, Spanish, or what¬ 
ever is needed, and no preference has been given to less 
valuable material in English. Material in Arabic has 
not been considered. The annotations are written to 
indicate scope and character of works without critical 
comment. In a number of cases the user is referred 
to analytical reviews in certain well-known Africanist 
journals. Annotations frequently include biographical 
data on writers, and we trust that authors who find 
themselves identified by institutional connections now 
long in their past will understand that we have not al¬ 
ways been able to get up-to-date information. Where 
titles of related works are placed in notes in fine print 
following other entries, it by no means implies that 
they are of secondary importance; it is a space-saving 
device by means of which we have added in the index 
about 1,000 references to the 2,173 numbered items. 

The form of entry follows the bibliographical prac¬ 
tice of the Library of Congress with some slight sim¬ 
plification—such as the omission in British official 
documents published by H.M. Stationery Office of the 
lengthy insertion [Gt. Brit. Parliament. Papers by 
command] and the use of the Command Paper num¬ 
ber only. Library of Congress call numbers follow 
entries for material now cataloged in the collections, 
and the symbol DLC is used to indicate that the vol¬ 
ume is known to have been received by early 1963. 
Attempts are being made to acquire almost everything 
for which no location symbol is shown, and by the time 
this list appears in print many of these may be duly 
recorded in the Library’s public catalog. A fair pro¬ 
portion will no doubt also appear in the volumes of 
The National Union Catalog, which has reported 
holdings of the chief American libraries since 1953. 


The compiler wishes to acknowledge help and ad¬ 
vice generously given during the course of this work. 
One section, that on Music, was supplied in its entirety 
by Mr. Darius L. Thieme of the Library of Congress 
staff. The section on Linguistics was read and criti¬ 
cized by Professor William A. Welmers, that on popu¬ 
lation by Dr. Frank Lorimer, and the section and sub¬ 
sections on Anthropology and Ethnology by Dr. 
Conrad C. Reining. Mrs. Helen Kitchen reviewed 
and gave much-needed advice on the long general 
section on Politics, where choice was particularly 
debatable. 

It has been difficult to terminate this bibliography, 
which has been in process for more than a year and a 
half. Throughout the list, no section or subsection 
(especially those pertaining to politics) could be con¬ 


sidered closed, as every week’s acquisitions in the Li¬ 
brary of Congress have brought titles of new books 
that should be examined, and every journal opened has 
shown tantalizing references to new material of poten¬ 
tial importance. We have often felt that we were 
working slowly backwards. The final entries were 
made in late April 1963, on the eve of the Addis Ababa 
Conference at which in May, just before this introduc¬ 
tion was written, the Charter of the Organization of 
African Unity was signed by 30 independent African 
States. However the immediate future may change 
African realities, it is our purpose and hope that this 
background guide may serve American scholars in their 
search for an understanding of African questions. 

Helen F. Conover. 

June 1963. 


(IV) 


Table of Organization 


Introduction 

General 

Note on Bibliography (p. 1) 

Items 

Surveys_ 1-28 

Travel and Description_ 29-41 

Guides and Maps_ 42-52 

History (including Archaeology, Pre¬ 
history and Pre-Colonial His¬ 
tory) - 53-73 

The Colonial Era_ 74-86 

Government (including Colonial 

Administration) _ 87-104 

Politics: 

Political Affairs and Nationalism. 105-131 

The Race Question_ 132-145 

International Relations: 

General- 146-151 

United Nations and Africa_ 152-155 

United States and Africa_ 156-174 

Communism and Africa_ 175-183 

Law_„_ 184-192 

Economics_ 193-225 

Social Studies_ 226-246 

Labor_ 247-256 

Population_ 257-261 

Anthropology and Sociology_ 262-285 

The Supernatural_ 286-292 

Linguistics_ 293-313 

Arts and Culture_ 314-335 

Music_ 336-347 

Letters_ 348-363 

Education _ 364-390 

Christianity and Islam_ 391-422 

Agriculture _ 423-446 

Natural Sciences_ 447-456 

Geology and Mineral Resources_ 457-462 

Science and Technology- 463^467 

Medicine_ 468^478 

West Africa: 

Bibliographies_ 479-480 

General _ 481-493 

History_ 494-503 


West Africa—Continued Items 

Politics and Economics_ 504-519 

Anthropology, Sociology, and Reli¬ 
gion _ 520-530 

Education and Culture_ 531-538 

Natural Sciences_ 539-543 

Gambia_ 544-563 

Ghana: 

Bibliography_ 564-565 

General _ 566-577 

History_ 578-587 

Politics_ 588-600 

Economics_ 601-620 

Anthropology and Social Studies_ 621-650 

Liberia_ 651-683 

Nigeria: 

Bibliography _ 684-688 

General _ 689-700 

History_ 701-714 

Politics_ 715-735 

Economics and Social Studies_ 736-759 

Anthropology and Sociology_ 760-790 

Arts, Letters, and Education_ 791-808 

Sierra Leone_ 809-837 

French-Speaking Africa (General): 

Bibliography _ 838 

General (History, Description, etc.)_ 839-852 

Politics_ 853-872 

Economics_ 873-890 

Cultural (including Anthropology 

and Education)_ 891-895 

Former French West Africa- 896-929 

Dahomey- 930-944 

Guinea_ 945-960 

Ivory Coast_ 961-981 

Mali (former Sudan)_ 982-1002 

Mauritania - 1003-1019 

Niger_ 1020-1024 

Sahara _ 1025-1044 

Senegal _ 1045-1068 

Togo_ 1069-1086 

Upper Volta_ 1087-1094 


(V) 




































































Items 

Former French Equatorial Africa_ 1095-1117 

Cameroon (Federal Republic)_1118-1152 

Central African Republic_1153-1163 

Chad_ 1164-1178 

Congo (Brazzaville)-1179-1185 

Gabon _ 1186-1204 

Malagasy Republic: 

Bibliography_ 1205-1206 

General (including Anthropology, 

History, and Political develop¬ 
ment) _ 1207-1242 

Economics_ 1243-1249 

Reunion_ 1250-1258 

French Somaliland_ 1259-1266 

East Africa: 

Bibliography_ 1267-1268 

General (including History, etc.)_ 1269-1286 

Politics and Economics_ 1287-1298 

Anthropology, Linguistics, Sociology, 

etc._ 1299-1307 

Kenya_ 1308-1339 

Tanganyika_ 1340-1371 

Uganda_„_ 1372-1409 

Zanzibar_ 1410-1422 

Somalia_ 1423-1449 

Sudan: 

Bibliography_ 1450-1451 

General and Miscellaneous_ 1452-1462 

History_ 1463-1480 

Economics (including Nile Waters 

Question) _ 1481-1491 

Anthropology, etc_ 1492-1503 

Ethiopia: 

Bibliography_ 1504 

General_ 1505-1518 

History and Archaeology_1519-1529 

Politics and Economics_ 1530-1545 

Anthropology, etc- 1546-1557 

Mauritius - 1558-1576 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland (Federation): 

Bibliography- 1577 

General (including History, Anthro¬ 
pology, etc.)- 1578-1600 

Politics and Economics_1601-1619 

Northern Rhodesia: 

General (including History)_ 1620-1627 

Politics and Economics_ 1628-1634 

Anthropology and Sociology_ 1635-1655 

Nyasaland- 1656-1675 


Rhodesia and Nyasaland (Federation) — 
Continued 

General (including Politics and Ec¬ 
onomics) _ 

History and Archaeology_ 

Anthropology and Sociology_ 

High Commission Territories_ 

Basutoland _ 

Bechuanaland_ 

Swaziland_ 

South West Africa_ 

South Africa: 

Bibliography_ 

General_ 

History (including Archaeology)_ 

Politics and Race Relations_ 

Economics and Urban Sociology_ 

Anthropology, etc_ 

Arts and Letters- 

Congo (Leopoldville) : 

Bibliography_ 

General_ 

History_ 

Politics_ 

Economics (including Population)_ 

Social Sciences_ 

Ethnology and Linguistics_ 

Missions, Education, and Arts- 

Katanga- 

Rwanda and Burundi_ 

Portuguese Africa: 

Bibliography_ 

General (including History)_ 

Politics and Economics_ 

Anthropology, Sociology, and Cul¬ 
ture _ 

Angola: 

General (including History and Ec¬ 
onomics) _ 

Politics (Nationalist Revolt)_ 

Anthropology, etc_ 

Cape Verde Islands and Portuguese 

Guinea_ 

Sao Tome and Principe_ 

Mozambique_ 

Spanish Guinea (Rio Muni and Fernando 
Poo)_ 


Index 


Items 

1676-1688 

1689-1696 

1697-1703 

1704-1711 

1712-1721 

1722-1739 

1740-1746 

1747-1760 

1761-1768 

1769-1779 

1780-1803 

1804-1822 

1823-1834 

1835-1849 

1850-1859 

1860-1868 

1869-1883 

1884-1898 

1899-1927 

1928-1940 

1941-1952 

1953-1972 

1973-1984 

1985-1998 

1999-2017 

2018-2022 

2023-2033 

2034-2049 

2050-2057 


2058-2073 

2074-2083 

2084-2094 

2095-2113 

2114-2116 

2117-2141 

2142-2173 

Pages 

_ 325-354 


(VI) 









































































GENERAL 


NOTE ON BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Of the numerous bibliographies on Africa, most 
are concerned with particular regions or subject fields 
and are entered in the present compilation under the 
appropriate section headings. Certain types of bib¬ 
liography, however, have general application to the 
continent as a whole or to all sub-Saharan Africa. 
Primarily, the continuing records of new publications 
in serial form are indispensable. 

Foremost among these serials, perhaps, is Africa, 
the quarterly journal of the International African 
Institute, in which approximately 20 reviews of nota¬ 
ble books are regularly followed by a classified listing 
of 300-odd books, pamphlets, and periodical references 
in all languages and in general fields as well as those 
of its special interests, ethnology and linguistics. (The 
Africa Bibliography Series now being published in 
regional volumes by the Library of the Institute is 
here mentioned in the appropriate sections; its other 
serial, African Abstracts, is preponderantly ethnolog¬ 
ical.) The bibliographical section of the Journal de 
la Societe des Africanistes (Paris, Musee de l’Homme) 
is comparable in coverage to that in Africa but is less 
extensive, being carried in only one of two annual 
numbers. The American monthly for Africanists, 
Africa Report, (see no. 1), has steadily increased its 
bibliographic content, so that its book review section 
is now eminently useful. In 1962 approximately 300 
books were reviewed; in addition, in most issues from 
2 to 20 other titles were listed as “Books Received.” 
The coverage is largely of monographic works, though 
an occasional bibliographical article is devoted to pe¬ 
riodical literature; with few exceptions the works re¬ 
viewed are in English. In African Affairs, the journal 
of the Royal African Society, the book reviews and the 
regionally classified general list of 70 to 100 titles of 
new material carried in the quarterly issues are sim¬ 
ilarly limited to monographs, mostly in English; this 
source is notable for its inclusion of documents and 
pamphlets published in Africa. The long “Bibli¬ 
ographic courante” of periodical references formerly 
published in the Belgian Zaire ceased with the discon¬ 
tinuance of that journal; it was of international cover¬ 


age but was heavily weighted with references on the 
Congo. Book review and bibliographical sections in 
the leading Spanish and Italian Africanist journals— 
Africa (Madrid), Africa; rivista bimestrale di docu- 
mentazione (Rome)—are not long, but include the 
interesting feature of contents notes for recent issues 
of periodicals from many countries. 

There is general coverage of both current and retro¬ 
spective material in the serial acquisition lists now 
being issued by several American libraries specializing 
in Africana, and a joint effort has been launched by 
a group of university libraries having large African 
programs. A Joint Acquisitions List of Africana, rep¬ 
resenting their new holdings and those of the Library 
of Congress, is compiled and issued quarterly by the 
African Department of Northwestern University Li¬ 
brary (v. 2, 1963). Catalogs of their African col¬ 
lections have been published by Howard University 
(Washington, 1958. 398 p.) and by Northwestern 

University (Boston, G. K. Hall, 1962. 2 v.). Three 
catalogs, listing respectively serials, annual reports, 
and books held in the Library of the United Nations 
Economic Commission for Africa, are described in 
the annotation for UNECA (see no. 196n). 

Among basic reading lists on Africa as a whole, 
two conspicuous examples of the last few years are 
the sections for Africa in the American Historical 
Association’s Guide to Historical Literature (New 
York, Macmillan, 1961. Part 7, “Africa,” by Vernon 
McKay, p. 745-769) and in the American Uni¬ 
versities Field Staff’s Select Bibliography: Asia, Africa, 
Eastern Europe, Latin America (New York, 1960. 
“Africa,” by L. Gray Cowan and Edwin S. Munger, 
p. 195-253); entries in both are highly selective and 
evaluatively annotated. Another annotated list, 
Africa, Its Problems and Prospects; A Bibliographic 
Survey, issued in September 1962 by the Headquar¬ 
ters, U.S. Department of the Army (DA pamphlet 
20-62, 195 p.), is continentwide but is slanted to¬ 
ward specific use in connection with strategic implica¬ 
tions. Three Library of Congress publications, the 
List of American Doctoral Dissertations on Africa 
(1962. 69 p.), United States and Canadian Publica¬ 
tions on Africa in 1960 (1962. 98 p.), and Serials for 


1 


African Studies (1961. 163 p.), are of general geo¬ 
graphical coverage but limited as to form of material. 
Incidentally, in the index to Serials for African Studies 
there is a heading “Bibliographies,” under which are 
cited over 50 bibliographical periodicals and about 30 
more serials which include bibliography. 

The fundamental guide to African bibliographies 
is that of the South African Public Library in Cape 
Town, Bibliography of African Bibliographies South 
of the Sahara, now in its fourth edition (1961. 79 p.) 
It contains an impressive number of monographic bib¬ 
liographies as well as reading lists included in other 
works. It is kept up to date by entries in the regular 
bibliographical sections of that library’s Quarterly 
Bulletin. The arrangement is by Universal Decimal 
Classification, and titles of most of the old standard 
bibliographies can be found therein. 

SURVEYS 

1. Africa report, v. l,no. 1+ July 5, 1956+ Wash¬ 

ington, African-American Institute, monthly. 

Edited by Helen Kitchen. DTI.A217 

The African-American Institute was incorporated 
in 1954 as the Institute of African-American Rela¬ 
tions, and has become increasingly influential in its 
avowed aim of “establishing closer bonds between the 
peoples of Africa and the United States.” This it 
accomplishes through scholarship programs, teacher 
placement in Africa, lectures, guidance and visitor 
service, and notably through the publication of this 
journal, which is the foremost American organ for 
authoritative information of the survey type regard¬ 
ing Africa. In addition to articles and news notes in 
political, economic, social, and cultural fields, it has 
in each issue a significant section reviewing important 
recent books and articles on Africa. 

A specially useful issue is that of November 1961 (v. 6, 
no. 10) constituting a “Country-by-Country Guide to Africa,” 
with capsule summaries of current political and economic 
trends in 56 African states and territories. 

Of the other leading magazines readily available to Ameri¬ 
can readers at least three, Africa Today (New York), Africa 
Digest (London), and African Affairs (London) are almost 
exclusively concerned with politico-economic developments, 
Africa (London, International African Institute) with eth¬ 
nology and linguistics, and so on with other special interest 
periodicals. 

2. Africa seen by American Negroes. Paris, Presence 

africaine, 1958. 418 p. illus. DT14.A35 

Includes bibliography. 

Essays by leading American Negro Africanists, 
grouped in three sections, “Analysis of African So¬ 


cieties,” “African Art, Dance and Literature,” and, 
taking up half the text, “American Negro Relations 
with Africa.” The introduction is by Mr. John A. 
Davis, Director of the American Society of African 
Culture, which has ties with Presence Africaine. 
Among the twenty-odd contributors are the sociologists 
Professor St. Clair Drake of Roosevelt University, 
Professor E. Franklin Frazier of Howard University, 
Professor Hugh H. Smythe of Brooklyn University, 
the historians Dr. W. E. B. DuBois, known as the 
founder of Pan-Africanism, and Rayford W. Logan 
of Howard University. The last three papers by, re¬ 
spectively, Adelaide C. Hill of Boston University, 
Dorothy Porter of Howard University, and Ulysses 
Lee, editor of the Journal of Negro History, are 
African studies programs in the United States, a 
bibliography of writings by American Negroes about 
Africa, and American scholarly interest in Africa. 

3. Afrika heute. 1957+ Bonn, L. Rohrscheid. illus. 

Edited for the Deutsche Afrika Gesellschaft by 
Oskar Splett. DT1.A27 

An excellent symposium of articles on many aspects 
of African affairs by noted and competent writers, 
chosen on an international scale. In the 1960 edition 
(326 p.) there are contributions by Eugen Gersten- 
maier, L. S. Senghor, Julius Nyerere, H. H. and M. M. 
Smythe, Franz Ansprenger, Mary Holdsworth, P. J. 
Idenburg, Mekki Abbas, J. S. Trimingham, and many 
others. Appendixes include bibliography, chronology, 
a brief almanac of products by country, various tables, 
and directories of groups concerned with Africa. 

4. Akademiia nauk SSSR. Institut etnografii. Na- 

rody Afriki [Peoples of Africa] edited by D. A. Ol’- 
derogge and I. I. Potekhin. Moskva, 1954. 
731 p. illus., col. plates, and maps. (Narody 
mira; etnograficheski-ocherki) DT15.A45 

Bibliography: p. 665-677. (Includes many titles of works 
in western languages) 

Edited by the Soviet’s two leading specialists 
on Africa, this big volume is more a general than 
an ethnological survey, covering the continent and 
tracing the emergence of peoples and of national com¬ 
munities. Heavy emphasis is laid on “imperial ex¬ 
ploitation” and the struggle for national independence. 

A revised and updated edition is published in German 
translation, Die Volker Afrikas; ihre Vergangenheit und 
Gegenwart (Berlin, VEB Deutscher Verlag der Wissen- 
schaften, 1961. 2 v.). 

A more recent survey by Dr. Potekhin was published as a 
pamphlet, Afrika smotrit v budushchee [Africa Looks to the 
Future] (Moscow, Akademiia nauk SSSR. Institut Afriki, 


2 


1960. 86 p.). In this evaluation of the immediate present, 
imperialism and colonialism still loom as the chief menace 
threatening the young nations. 

A shorter review in pamphlet form for popular orientation 
issued by the Institut Etnografii is by Antonina Semenovna 
Orlova, Afrikanski narody; ocherki kultury, khoziaistva i 
byta [African Nations: Outline of Culture, Economy and 
Life] (Moscow, 1958. 98 p. illus.). 

The marked increase in recent Soviet publications relating 
to Africa is noticeable to Western scholars. In this connec¬ 
tion there should be mentioned a bibliographical paper by 
Mary Holdsworth, Soviet African Studies, 1918-59; An An¬ 
notated Bibliography (London, Distributed for the Royal In¬ 
stitute of International Affairs by Oxford University Press, 

1961. 2 pts. Chatham House Memoranda). A supple¬ 
mentary paper, Soviet Writing on Africa, 1959-61: An Anno¬ 
tated Bibliography, compiled by the staff of the Central Asian 
Research Centre, London, was similarly published by the 
Oxford University Press as another of the Chatham House 
Memoranda (Jan. 1963. 93 p.). An example of the more 
substantial Russian works is an encyclopedic handbook that 
has been announced by the publishing house “Sovetskafa 
entsiklopedifa” for appearance in early 1963: Afrika: priroda; 
narody; istorim; ekonomika; kuVtura [Africa: Natural Condi¬ 
tions; Peoples; History; Economics; Culture] (Moscow, 2 v.). 

5. American Academy of Political and Social Sci¬ 

ence, Philadelphia. Contemporary Africa trends 
and issues, edited by William O. Brown. Phila¬ 
delphia, 1955. 248 p. maps. (Its Annals, 

v. 298) H1.A4, v.298 

Bibliographical footnotes. 

A symposium of introduction to modern Africa, its 
changing scene and problems, by regional and sub¬ 
ject specialists. The editor is Director of the African 
Research and Studies Program at Boston University. 
The essays fall in four groups, the first on environment, 
cultures, and place in world affairs. The second set 
outlines general characteristics of African economics 
and special aspects in French West Africa, the Belgian 
Congo, and the Union of South Africa. The third 
group is on political framework and evolution, and the 
last on social change under the Western influences of 
urbanization, Christianity, and education. 

Because of the general nature of the subjects treated, this 
group of papers has become less outdated than another issue 
of the Annals, published in the following year: Africa and 
the Western World, edited by Thorsten Sellen (Philadelphia, 
1956. 101 p. Annals, v. 306). 

6. American Society of African Culture. Pan- 

Africanism reconsidered. Berkeley, University of 
California Press, 1962. xix, 376 p. tables. 

DT30.A53 

Speeches, papers, and comments at the important 
Third Annual Conference of the American Society of 
African Culture in Philadelphia in 1960, on the theme 


of “African Unities and Pan-Africanism.” The 30- 
odd contributors were about equally divided between 
Africans and Americans. Subjects examined were 
Pan-Africanism per se and its main manifestations in 
politics, economics, education, social thought, art, 
African culture, and negritude. The closing address 
was by J. A. Wachuku of Nigeria. 

7. Buell, Raymond Leslie. The native problem in 

Africa. New York, Macmillan, 1928. 2 v. maps, 

tables. DT31.B8 

Bibliography: v. 2, p. 983-1049. 

Monumental study by a leading American expert on 
foreign affairs, a basis for all subsequent investigations. 
Prepared following 15 months of fieldwork and study 
of all available documents, which are listed by region 
in a 66-page bibliography. For each of the British, 
French, and Belgian territories south of the Sahara 
and for free Liberia, Dr. Buell surveyed analytically 
history, government, labor conditions, racial questions, 
and colonial policy, with the aim of determining how 
and to what extent the governments concerned were 
solving the problems raised by the impact of industrial 
civilization on primitive peoples. 

8. Cameron, James. The African revolution. New 

York, Random House, 1961. 279 p. illus. 

DT30.C3 1961a 

Quick journalistic review of past colonial history 
and present political development in Southern, East, 
and West Africa, country by country. Written by a 
British foreign correspondent and designed for the 
novice in African affairs, it necessarily lends itself to 
charges of overgeneralization and oversimplification. 
The current information is brought through March 
1961. 

9. Des africanistes russes parlent de VAfrique. Paris, 

Presence africaine, 1960. 289 p. DT21.D4 

Includes bibliographies. 

The first essay in this compilation is by Professor 
Potekhin, on African studies in the Soviet Union from 
1786 to 1959. He includes a list of the books and 
articles published in the second half of 1958, 18 titles 
in all. Then comes a paper on Russian travelers and 
scholars in Africa by Maria Rait, with full bibliogra¬ 
phy. Among other contributions are translation of 
an article by Basil Davidson on the history of Matabe- 
leland, a study by Mme. Orlova of the fokon’olona 
(village communes) of Madagascar, and a second 
paper by Potekhin on the intelligentsia and the waken¬ 
ing of national consciousness. In conclusion there is 


692 - 756—63 - 2 


3 


an annotated list of books and articles in Russian from 
1953-1958, a few foreign titles, and long critical re¬ 
views of Cloete’s African Giant and Chardonnet’s 
UIndustrialisation de VAfrique, both of which the re¬ 
viewers find typical of imperialist exploitation. 

10. Deutsche Afrika-Gesellschaft. Die Lander 

Afrikas [series] Bonn, Schroeder, 1958 + 

A notable series of country studies, in which all 
states of Africa are being covered. They are written 
by specialists, and give a well-rounded survey, in under 
200 pages, of land and people, political history and 
present developments, economy, cultural and social 
development. The volumes include statistical tables, 
bibliographies, indexes, and folded maps. Some in¬ 
dividual titles are here listed under the separate 
countries. 

11. Fitzgerald, Walter. Africa; a social, economic 

and political geography of its major regions. 

9th ed., rev. by W. C. Brice. London, Methuen; 

New York, Dutton, 1961. 511 p. maps. 

DT5.F5 1961 

Includes bibliographies. 

Standard advanced manual of economic geography 
of Africa by the late professor of geography at the Uni¬ 
versity of Manchester, formerly at the University of 
South Africa. Originally published in 1933, the ninth 
posthumous edition was revised by a former student. 
It embodies extensive changes in text, bibliography, 
and maps. The first two sections survey the physical 
environment and the people, immigrant and native, 
sketching the outlines of African history and character¬ 
izing main ethnic groups. Over three-fourths of the 
book is devoted to regional studies, with sections on 
South Africa, East Africa, Madagascar, Central Africa, 
West Africa, the Barbary States, the Nile Valley, and 
Abyssinia and its borderlands. In the references to 
sources at the end of each chapter the editor has added 
a few recent works without basic revision. 

12. Gould, Peter R. Africa, continent of change. 

Belmont, Calif., Wadsworth Pub. Co., 1961. 
256 p. DT4.G68 

Issued as a paperback, this is a well-chosen collection 
of readings, “edited with the intelligent inquirer in 
mind.” The editor, of the Department of Geography 
of Syracuse University, chooses excerpts from Prime 
Minister Macmillan’s famous speech to the South 
African Parliament in 1960, “The Wind of Change,” 
to open his volume. The selections by authoritative 


spokesmen, a number of them African leaders, are in 
three sections, illustrating political, economic, and 
social change. 

13. Hailey, William Malcolm Hailey, baron. An 
African survey; a study of problems arising in 
Africa south of the Sahara. Issued under the 
auspices of the Royal Institute of International 
Affairs. Rev. 1956. London, New York, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1957. 1,676 p. 

DT3.H3 1957 

The Survey directed by Lord Hailey was set up in 
response to a plea by General Smuts, in a Rhodes Me¬ 
morial Lecture in 1929, for the compilation of an 
overall review of the development of Africa under 
differing European controls. The original research 
was conducted during the midthirties, the first publi¬ 
cation (1,837 p.) appearing in 1938. A second edi¬ 
tion in 1945 was a reprint without revision, and did 
not take account of the changes in colonial policies 
which followed the Second World War—policies in 
the formulation of which this comprehensive com¬ 
parative study had been an indispensable step. The 
third edition, for which revision was begun in 1952, 
while similar to the earlier volume in objective and 
arrangement of material, has been so extensively re¬ 
written that it is in many respects a new work. 

The Survey, since its first appearance, and notably 
in its latest form, has provided an invaluable reference 
book in all fields of modem knowledge regarding the 
territory south of the Sahara. The treatment, which 
includes a resume of historic development with analy¬ 
sis of the situation as of the midfifties (statistics in most 
cases to 1955), is by subject field, with most chapters 
subdivided into sections by individual countries. The 
main divisions cover physical background, African 
peoples, languages, population records, political and 
social objectives, systems of government, non-European 
immigrant communities, administration of African af¬ 
fairs, law and justice, taxation, the land, agriculture 
and animal husbandry, forestry, water supply and ir¬ 
rigation, soil conservation, health, education and cul¬ 
tural agencies, economic development, development 
projects, labor problems, cooperative institutions, min¬ 
erals and mines, transport and communications, and 
the organization of research. The elaborate index (p. 
1617-1676) cross references topics and regions. It is 
frequently spoken of as the most important work ever 
published on Africa. A new edition of the Survey is 
in progress in 1962. 


4 


14. Hatch, John C. Africa today—and tomorrow; 

an outline of basic facts and major problems. 
Rev. ed. New York, Praeger, 1962. 343 p. 
(Books that matter) DT31.H33 1962 

Published in London in 1959 under title: Everyman’s 
Africa. 

The author, former commonwealth officer of the 
Labour Party and in 1961 Director of Extra-Mural 
Studies at the University College of Sierra Leone, had 
written in 1952 on South Africa ( The Dilemma of 
South Africa. London, Dobson. 255 p.). In 1956 he 
had covered then British Africa in a quick perspective 
of political developments, New from Africa (Dobson. 
123 p.). He speaks of the present work as “a simple 
outline book which provides the basic facts of the Afri¬ 
can continent”—a concentrated synthesis of political 
history in countries of British influence, with the rest 
of the continent lumped in 30 pages as “Other Euro¬ 
peans in Africa.” His last chapter is on future per¬ 
spectives for Africa as a whole. A chronology and 
summary of data through 1959 form appendixes. 

Somewhat similar in intent, although almost the opposite 
in style, is a book for junior readers by Ellen and Attilio 
Gatti, The New Africa (New York, Scribner, 1960. 213 p. 

illus. World Background Book series). The photographs, 
many of them taken by the authors (Mr. Gatti is well known 
as a writer on adventure and big game hunting), are a 
notable feature of this simple and instructive work. 

15. Havlik, Jiri. Africa. Kolektiv autoru; Jin 

Havlik, Jiri Kettner, Dusan Provaznik. [Vyd. 

1.] Praha, Statni nakl. politicke literatury, 
1962. 450 p. DT30.H32 

A compendium of general information, with sys¬ 
tematic country-by-country review and emphasis on 
anticolonial politics. 

16. Herskovits, Melville J. The human factor in 

changing Africa. New York, Knopf, 1962. 

500 p. (A Borzoi book) DT352.H43 

In the latest of his many works on Africa Professor 
Herskovits examines on a broad scale the reactions of 
the African peoples to the changes of the presentday 
world. “I began my research,” he writes, “many years 
ago, with a question: How have the aboriginal simi¬ 
larities and differences in African culture been affected 
by the similarities and differences in the innovations 
to which the peoples of Africa and African descent 
have been exposed? I have not answered this ques¬ 
tion, but such beginnings as I have been able to make 
are to be found in this book.” 


17. Hughes, John. The new face of Africa, south of 

the Sahara. New York, Longmans, Green, 
1961. 296 p. DT352.H8 

By a journalist who had been an Africa correspond¬ 
ent for the Christian Science Monitor for 6 years, this 
book tells of the metamorphosis of a continent. As 
his title indicates, Mr. Hughes has described the Africa 
(sub-Saharan) of the moment, his record of events 
carrying up to the early summer of 1961. His report¬ 
ing is as paced and dramatic as the evolving political 
history he recounts. Physical description and back¬ 
ground history are limited to occasional brief sen¬ 
tences; his concern is to give an understanding of the 
new Africa, its leaders, and its policies, now that in¬ 
dependence is so widely achieved that anti-colonialism 
is losing force as a unifying motive. 

18. Jarrett, Harold R. Africa. London, Macdon¬ 

ald & Evans, 1962. 350 p. illus., maps, tables. 
(New certificate geography series, advanced 
level) DLG 

This author has also a new Outline Geography of 
Africa (London, Methuen, 1962. 248 p.), for the 
secondary school certificate level. 

19. Journal of Human Relations. Dawn in the 

dark continent: Politics, problems, promises. 
Wilberforce, Ohio, Central State College Press, 
1960. 868 p. H1.S55, v. 8 

Special issue, spring and summer, 1960, v. 8, nos. 3-4. 

Collection of essays illustrative of modern Africa. 
Among the many scholars who have contributed in 
their special fields, a number are native Africans. Sec¬ 
tions are on “Ancient African Civilizations,” “Tribal 
Roots and Influences,” “The Sine Qua Non: The 
Mature Mind” (health and psychology), “Clash of 
Color and Creed,” “Toward Self-Determination,” 
“Basic Aspects of Africa’s Economy,” “Social Services,” 
“Cultural Arts,” “Religion and Education,” “Some 
Evaluative Considerations” (including “An African 
Balance Sheet: 1960,” by H. H. and M. M. Smythe, 
with tabulated “assets and liabilities,” economic, politi¬ 
cal, social, religious, and general). The big volume 
ends with an inspirational poem, “O Africa, My 
Africa,” by Ralph Templin of Central State College. 

20. Kimble, George H. T. Tropical Africa. New 

York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1960. 2 v. 

illus., port., maps. DT352.K48 

Bibliographical footnotes. 

The broadest recent geographical study of Africa 
in English, this work is the result of a project of sev- 


5 


eral years’ duration in which many scholars collabo¬ 
rated. The list of 46 contributors of working papers 
is given opposite the title page. The geographer Dr. 
Kimble, now at the University of Indiana, served as 
director and put together the final text, which, though 
massive in its assemblage of facts, is eminently reada¬ 
ble. The first volume covers the continent in terms 
of physical and economic geography. The second 
volume opens with an account of “The Old Order,” 
and goes through the factors of social and political 
change to “The Price of Growth,” and “The Shape of 
Things.” In general, the Africa reflected is that of 
the midfifties, although some sources used for the ap¬ 
pendix of “Selected Territorial Data” were of 1959. 

A pamphlet by Dr. Kimble in the Foreign Policy Associa¬ 
tion Headline Series, Tropical Africa: Problems and Promises 
(New York, 1961. 62 p. no. 147), serves in part as a 

precis of the full-length work. 

21. Legum, Colin, ed. Africa: a handbook to the 

continent. New York, Praeger, 1962. 553 p. 

DT30.L38 1962 
One of the most useful and perhaps the most com¬ 
prehensive of the many reference guides to the fast¬ 
changing nations of Africa, this work is described by 
its editor, the African specialist for the London Ob¬ 
server , as halfway between Lord Hailey and John 
Gunther, written by experts for well-informed non¬ 
experts. The 40 articles by British and American spe¬ 
cialists are in two sections, the first on the countries, 
some in regional groupings; for each there is a general 
sketch, a succinct statement of political development 
and economic situation, basic data of the almanac type, 
a brief who’s who, and bibliography. In the second 
part are essays on international attitudes toward Africa, 
African art, changing cultural patterns, religion, eco¬ 
nomics, and the role of the United Nations. 

22. Meyers Handbuch fiber Afrika. Mannheim, Bib- 

liographisches Institut, 1962. 779 p. 

DT12.2.M4 

A huge reference work, covering the continent and 
its peoples in general aspects, and country-by-country 
survey of economic and human geography. 

23. Migliorini, Elio. UAfrica. Torino, Unione 

tipografico-editrice torinese, 1955. 821 p. illus., 

plates, maps. DT3.M5 

Includes bibliographies. 

An impressive volume covering all Africa in terms 
of physical, social, and politicoeconomic geography. 
Arrangement, after a general section, is by region. 
The folded, colored maps, supplemented generously 


by subject sketch maps, are of high quality and value. 
The author is Director of the Institute of Geography 
at the University of Naples. 

While American and British geographers now tend to 
treat regions or continents in independent studies of moderate 
length, continental writers continue the tradition of multi¬ 
volume sets of world geography. The great French Geogra¬ 
phic universelle edited by Vidal de la Blache and L. Gallois 
reached its 15th and final volume after the war (Paris, A. 
Colin, 1927-48), though those devoted to Africa south of 
the Sahara, t. 11, ptie 2, Afrique occidentale, by Augustin 
Bernard (p. 285-529), and t. 12, Afrique equatoriale , orien¬ 
tal et australe , by Fernand Maurette (398 p.), appeared in 
1939 and 1938 respectively. Little attention is paid in these 
to political and economic factors, the stress being on physical 
and human geography. An even more lavish publishing 
venture is the Geografia universale illustrata; la fisonomia 
attuale del mondo considerat a nelVas petto fisico antropico 
ed economico, edited by Roberto Almagia (Torino, Unione 
tip-editrice torinese). Vol. 5, UAfrica, by Elio Migliorini, 
was announced in 1960. It has not yet become available for 
examination in the Library of Congress, so we are unable to 
determine whether or not it is a revision of the work cited 
above. Another expected tome is the volume on Africa of 
the Geographic universelle Larousse (Paris, Larousse, 1959+ 
edited by Pierre Deffontaines). An edition is being pub¬ 
lished in English; the volume on Europe was released in 
1961 (New York, Prometheus Press). 

24. Prasad, Bisheshwar, ed. Contemporary Africa. 

Bombay, New York, Asia Pub. House, 1960. 
133 p. ' DT30.P7 

The attention being paid to Africa in Indian studies 
is exemplified in this volume based on a lecture series 
at the University of Delhi, organized by Peter S. 
Wright, 1954 to 1958. The emphasis is largely on 
politics. The separate papers are factual essays on 
geopolitics, traditions, history of European relations, 
colonial policies, political and national movements of 
East Africa and of Ghana, waterpower projects, land 
relations, and social change. 

25. Sampson, Anthony. Common sense about 

Africa. New York, Macmillan, 1961. 175 p. 

illus. (Common sense series, 3) 

DT353.S3 1961 

One of a new series of area studies halfway between 
academic scholarship and weekly journalism. The 
writer, former editor of Drum and now on the staff of 
the Observer, has tried to give a general picture of the 
continent south of the Sahara with stress on present 
rather than past, and the central theme nationalism. 
The preface is dated October 1959. “The preponder¬ 
ance of politics leaves little room [in 45,000 words] for 
Animal Africa, Explorers’ Africa, Engineers’ Africa or 
even Missionary Africa,” but all these facets are 


6 


touched on. A reviewer in the Times Literary Supple¬ 
ment comments that it makes an excellent introduction 
to Lord Hailey. 

26. Sillery, Anthony. Africa; a social geography. 

London, G. Duckworth, 1961. 244 p. illus. 

DT12.2.S5 

A region-by-region survey of Africa, presenting a 
picture of the country as it was toward the end of 1960. 
The writer, who tries for a balance between the work 
of the journalist and that of the specialist researcher, 
explains that he has concentrated on geography, eth¬ 
nology, culture, economics, and racial relations— 
things “which, if not immutable, at least change more 
slowly than politics.” He includes historical back¬ 
ground, most of it in his introductory general section 
on the continent and its people. This and the regional 
sections are written in strictly objective style. In a 
brief final chapter the author expresses his own views 
as to future prospects for Africa. 

27. Social research in Africa; edited by Robert Lystad. 

To be published under the auspices of the Afri¬ 
can Studies Association. In preparation in 
1963. 

A set of 16 essays reviewing research in various dis¬ 
ciplines of the social sciences, humanities, and physical 
sciences. According to the editor’s report to the ASA 
meeting in 1961, “The book was intended to sum¬ 
marize and interrelate recent and pertinent earlier so¬ 
cial research and generalizations within each discipline, 
in such a manner as to be usable both by scholars with¬ 
in the discipline and also by those of other disciplines.” 
Chapters “would not be primarily descriptive but 
would be analytic and integrative as to problems de¬ 
fined for research, theoretical and methodological con¬ 
siderations, gaps in knowledge, trends in research, etc.” 
(African Studies Bulletin, v. 4, no. 4, Dec. 1961, p. 31). 

28. Stamp, Laurence Dudley. Africa; a study in 

tropical development. New York, Wiley, 1953. 

568 p. illus., maps. DT12.S7 

By the Director of the World Land Use Survey, 
this economic geography was expanded from lectures 
given in America and with its tremendous coverage is 
necessarily reduced to essentials. The first part sur¬ 
veys the continent in general, its exploration, physical 
background, climates and water problem, soils, forest, 
grassland and desert, peoples and ways of life, plagues 
and diseases, transportation. The second part is an 
analysis by region (not political but geographical), 
with a statement for each of physical geography, back¬ 
ground history, and politico-economic trends at mid¬ 


century. Part III discusses briefly past, present, and 
future problems of Africa, and gives a statistical sum¬ 
mary by country of area, population, religion, land 
use, minerals, trade, and currency. 

Professor Stamp edited the report of a geographical sym¬ 
posium held at Makerere College, Kampala, Uganda, in Sep¬ 
tember 1955 under the auspices of the International Geo¬ 
graphical Union, Natural Resources, Food and Population in 
Inter-tropical Africa (London, Geographical Publications, 
1956. 104 p. maps). 

TRAVEL AND DESCRIPTION 

29. Cloete, Stuart. The African giant, the story of 

a journey. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 
400 p. illus. DT12.C559 

Report on a year of travel covering all Africa south 
of the Sahara, by a well-known South African novel¬ 
ist. In both style and content Mr. Cloete inclines to¬ 
ward the sensational, finding everywhere the over¬ 
powering evidences of savagery beneath the new trap¬ 
pings of Western culture. Writing at the height of 
Mau Mau, he declared that all Africa was watching 
Kenya with sympathetic approval. “No one can civil¬ 
ize the African. He must do it for himself. The 
question remains. Does he want to? Will he pay 
the price?” The author’s conclusion was that he will 
not—that, if the white man leaves, in a few years “the 
forest will return.” 

30. Considine, John J. Africa , world of new men. 

New York, Dodd, Mead, 1954. 398 p. illus. 

DT12.C57 

The author, of the Maryknoll Fathers (Catholic 
Foreign Mission Society of America), in this account 
of Africa south of the Sahara reported optimistically 
on changing conditions and progress from the view¬ 
point of Catholic missions, which he had visited from 
Dakar to Cape Town, and back on the East Coast to 
Nairobi. The appendixes carry statistics of the various 
religions in Africa and of personnel of Catholic mis¬ 
sions. 

31. Eskelund, Karl. While God slept; travels in 

Africa. London, A. Redman, 1961. 190 p. 

illus. DT12.2.E813 1961 

Impressions of a globe-trotting Danish writer who 
with his Chinese wife traveled in Africa in 1960—the 
Congo, including pygmies and elephants, Ruanda- 
Urundi, the Rhodesias, Mozambique, South Africa, 
Nigeria. His emphasis is on the question of color 
discrimination, which, needless to say, he views with 
horror. An earlier work had been Black Man’s 


7 








Country; A Journey through Ghana (London, Red¬ 
man, 1958. 164 p.). In both his photographs, some 

of them in color, are excellent. 

32. Farson, Negley. Behind God’s hack. New 

York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 555 p. 

DT12.F3 

Narrative of travel in Africa, from coast to coast, 
beginning in Southwest Africa, through South Africa, 
Eastern Africa, the Congo, French Equatorial Africa 
in 1939, just before the beginning of the war. The 
author, a well-known writer and foreign correspond¬ 
ent, was much concerned with the former German 
colonies and the contrasts in attitudes of the British 
and French settlers and administrators to those of the 
Germans. His story, vivid, in part entertainingly per¬ 
sonal, in part keenly analytical, is considered one of 
the best travel accounts of prewar years. The contrast 
between his reportage of conditions and society and 
that presented by journalists in the sixties is eloquent 
proof of the changes that have come in two startling 
decades. 

33. Franck, Frederick. African sketchbook. Text 

and drawings by Frederick Franck. New York, 

Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1961. 180 p. illus. 

NC1145.F5A45 

A dentist-artist’s pen sketches and text written 
around them setting down impressions of West Africa, 
Kenya, Ethiopia, Sudan, and back through the Congo 
to Gabon, where he paid his third visit to Dr. 
Schweitzer at Lambarene (see also no. 1200n). He 
found the great doctor aged and saddened, overtaken 
by the new god of young Africa, “the cruel god Prog¬ 
ress.” Graham Greene, writing the Preface, says: 
“The accuracy of feeling with which [Dr. Franck] de¬ 
scribes what I know [Lagos, Freetown, etc.] gives me 
complete confidence in his picture of the unfamiliar 
. . . and of the new aspects of the familiar (for the 
wind of change is blowing through every scene in his 
sketchbook).” 

34. Gosset, Pierre, and Renee Gosset. L’Afrique, 

les Africains. Paris, R. Julliard, 1958-59. 2 v. 

DT12.G66 

By two experienced French travel writers, these are 
revealing objective impressions of modern Africa. In 
the first volume the countries then still officially known 
as AfriqueOccidentaleFrangaise (A.O.F) andAfrique 
Equatoriale Frangaise (A.E.F.) are covered in almost 
pure description and interpretation of present-day life. 


The second volume treats Ghana, Liberia, the Belgium 
Congo, Mozambique, the Union of South Africa, 
Libya, the Sudan, Ethiopia, Kenya, Rhodesia, ending 
with the islands, Reunion, Mauritius, and “the for¬ 
gotten island,” Madagascar. For the non-French 
countries the writers include a larger measure of his¬ 
torical background. 

35. Gunther, John. Inside Africa. New York, 

Harper, 1955. xxiii, 952 p. maps, diagrs. 

DT12.G86 

Bibliography: p. 895-906. 

For this “Inside” book Mr. Gunther and his wife 
covered 40,000 miles of Africa, taking in most of the 
44 separate political units of that time. These are 
listed in a thumbnail tabulation of area, political status, 
description, population, etc., in the introductory pages, 
a glance at which in 1961 gives a striking picture of 
the evolution of the continent during the last 7 years. 
It is understandable that much of Gunther’s analysis 
of social and political conditions in the continent which 
he found “trembling and astir with acute nationalist 
uplift” is now outdated. However, he synthesizes an 
enormous amount of assorted information on each 
place visited, touching on background and history and 
describing aspects and personalities. Although scholars 
have criticized him for occasional inaccuracies, the 
book remains a valuable source for quick and stimu¬ 
lating reference on all parts of Africa. 

An inevitable comparison is drawn between Gunther and a 
survey similarly based on a far-ranging trip, Le Poids de 
VAfrique, by Charles-Henri Favrod, a Swiss political journalist 
(Paris, Editions du Seuil, 1958. 410 p.). M. Favrod con¬ 
tented himself with 24 countries, leaving out all north of the 
Sahara and south of the Zambezi, but his writing is as spirited 
and his observation as keen, with rather more of economic 
and political emphasis than that of his American confrere. 
For his more recent work see under Politics (no. 114). 

36. Harcourt, FRANgois d\ L’Afrique a I’heure H. 

Paris, Gallimard, 1960. 312 p. illus. (L’Air 
du temps) DT12.2.H3 

Account of a trip from Algiers through the center 
of the continent, 35,000 kilometers of desert, forest, 
and new cities, by three young journalists who were 
out for adventure. They found it at every step, in 
the desert, Tchad, Congo, from Uganda to Zanzibar, 
Rhodesias, and South Africa, with nature and man. 
M. d’Harcourt’s writing conveys a high degree of 
excitement and wonder. Naive regarding historical 
legend or fact, his political comment on interviews 
with European and African leaders is perspicacious. 


8 


37. Hempstone, Smith. Africa—angry young giant. 

New York, Praeger, 1961. 664 p. illus. (Books 

that matter) DT352.H4 

English ed., Faber & Faber, has title, The New Africa. 

An ambitious work, aimed perhaps at replacing 
Gunther as picture and explanation of present-day 
Africa for the intelligent layman. Mr. Hempstone, a 
Washington journalist, spent 30 months of the late 
fifties in Africa south of the Sahara, his “mind . . . 
reasonably uncluttered with misinformation, facts or 
ideas” about the countries he visited. He attempted 
a limited coverage: “The Horn” (Sudan, Ethiopia, 
Somalia); “The Gallic Giant” (former French Equa¬ 
torial Africa and French West Africa); “The Saxon 
West” (including Liberia with former British West 
Africa). For each country he gives well-summarized 
historical and cultural background and analysis of the 
current situation. All is interwoven with descriptive 
passages which, though vivid, depend heavily on per¬ 
sonal travel difficulties, satire, and paradox. 

38. Meeker, Oden. Report on Africa. New York, 

Scribner, 1954. 410 p. illus. D12.M39 

Some of the chapters of this narrative of a wide- 
ranging tour of Africa south of the Sahara had ap¬ 
peared as articles in The New Yorker and The Re¬ 
porter, and the style is typical of these magazines, pic¬ 
turesquely informative, humorous, the turns of phrase 
relating the strange places to American experience. 
Mr. Meeker’s trip was made in 1952, covering 25 ter¬ 
ritories of West, Central, Southern, and East Africa. 
He was in Kenya at the time of the first big outbreak 
of Mau Mau, his account of which forms a high point 
in the report. 

39. Munger, Edwin S. African field reports, 1952- 

61. Cape Town, C. Struik, 1961. 808 p. 

DT352.M8 

Since 1951 the intimate reports sent in by the world¬ 
traveling corps of the American Universities Field 
Staff have been privately circulated among scholarly 
circles, providing firsthand insight into contemporary 
affairs in the areas studied. Mr. Munger has been 
traveling in and reporting on Africa for over 10 years. 
This selection of his letters is in two parts, the first 
touching on highlights of the era in tropical Africa, 
from Ghana and Liberia to the Congo and Mozambi¬ 
que, the second on the land of his particular observ¬ 
ance, South Africa. 


40. Schulthess, Emil. Africa. New York, Simon 

and Schuster, 1959. 1 v. (various pagings) 

plates. 32 cm. DT12.S423 

An album of 127 magnificent color photographs 
taken by a Swiss photographer in a 10-month trip from 
Tunis to Tripoli, Chad, Congo, and down the east 
coast of Africa to Capetown. A reviewer in African 
Affairs (January 1960), while overcome by the “feast 
of beauty,” regrets that the shots of Africans “tend to 
portray the semi-naked and the primitive, while sophis¬ 
ticated and intelligent Africans are missing.” 

41. Wollschlager, Alfred. Gross ist Afrika, Eu- 

ropas dunkle Schwester [von] A. E. Johann 
[pseud.] Gutersloh, C. Bertelsmann, 1957. 
335 p. illus. DT12.W62 1961 

An exceptionally thorough travel book based on re¬ 
search as well as 50,000 kilometers of land and water 
travel in 1955-56. The author had made his first 
extensive tour of Africa in 1939-40. Many drawings, 
maps, and photographs illustrate the diversity of the 
continent. 

Note: Feature articles or sections on Africa have become 
increasingly numerous in general magazines of America and 
Europe. They vary from such scholarly surveys of political, 
social and economic changes as those presented in the Queen’s 
Quarterly summer 1960 issue (Kingston, Queen’s University, 
v. 67, p. 157-238), or the handsome special issue of the 
English language edition of RealitSs (New York, Sept. 1960), 
to the sections, largely of full-page color photographs, in the 
April 1959 Holiday, the Mar. 28, 1961 issue of Look, or the 
September 1960 issue of the National Geographic Magazine. 
Special issues concerned with particular themes—education, 
politics, etc.—are noted in the appropriate sections of the 
present list. For identification of such material, reference 
should be made under subject entry to the usual library 
tools, Readers’ Guide to Periodical Literature, International 
Index, Public Affairs Information Service Bulletin, etc., also 
to the special listing on Africa in the quarterly Journal of 
Negro Education. 

GUIDES AND MAPS 
Bibliography 

42. Dahlberg, Richard E., and Benjamin E. 

Thomas. “An analysis and bibliography of 
recent African atlases.” African studies bul¬ 
letin, v. 5, no. 3, Oct. 1962: 23-33. DLG 
The bibliography cites 92 atlases, examined by the 
authors at the Library of Congress, the American 
Geographical Society, and the University of California 
at Los Angeles. 


9 





43. Automobile Association of South Africa. 

Trans-African highways , a route book of the 
main trunk roads in Africa. 4th ed. Johannes¬ 
burg, 1958. 539 p. maps. 

GV1025.A2A84 1958 

Earlier editions of this useful volume were in 1929, 
1949 (408 p.), 1952 (480 p.). It carries sketch maps 
and detailed route descriptions of highways, including 
comment on facilities available at each stop. A full 
index of place names follows appendixes of practical 
information for motorists. Road .guides are published 
also by regional automobile associations in East Africa, 
former French West Africa, and elsewhere. 

44. Boyd, Andrew, and Patrick van Rensburg. An 

atlas of African affairs, with maps by W. H. 
Bromage. New York, Praeger, 1962. 133 p. 

G2445.B6 1962 

A useful guide for the background and explanation 
of the fast-changing map of Africa, prepared with 
“the plain newspaper reader” in mind. The 50 sketch 
maps are “General” (population, regions and barriers, 
a few relating to history, the new political scene as of 
late 1962, United Nations activity, Pan-Africanism 
and regional unity, education, health, minerals, trans¬ 
port, power development) and “Sectional.” They are 
explained succinctly on facing pages. Available in 
hardcover and paperback editions. 

45. Horrabin, J. F. An atlas of Africa. New York, 

Praeger, 1960. 126 p. G2445.H6 

The author is known for his political maps of cur¬ 
rent affairs and history. This little collection of 50 
maps with facing pages of interpretation summarizes 
background information needed for understanding of 
current news. The first 22 maps are grouped as 
“Background,” and explain history from the ancient 
world to the present. Part II is “Today,” illustrating 
issues, regions, and trends. Part III is “Tomorrow,” 
touching problems of linguistics, settlement, economic 
development, and the like. 

46. Kane, Robert S. Africa A to Z; a guide for 

travelers—armchair and actual. Maps by 
Louise E. Jefferson; photos, by the author. 
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 408 p. 
illus. DT12.2.K3 

An agreeable travel guide in essay style. The com¬ 
pendium of country-by-country information begins 
with chapters on background and general travel ad¬ 
vice. Following sections on regions and chapters on 
individual countries include historical notes, condensed 


itinerary for “your visit,” “What to Buy,” and “Crea¬ 
ture Comforts,” listing hotels and restaurants. 

Charles R. Joy’s Africa: A Handbook for Travelers (New 
York, Duell, Sloan and Pearce, 1958. 171 p.) is a useful sys¬ 

tematic travel guide in compressed baedeker style, and of a 
size to be carried in the vestpocket or handbag. Two older 
guides, revisions of which may be hoped for, are McKay’s 
Guide to Africa, by Joseph I. Touchette (New York, McKay, 
1954. 311 p.), and the delightfully illustrated, interpreta¬ 

tive guide in the McGraw-Hill World in Color Series, South 
and Central Africa, edited by Dore Ogrizek (New York, 1954. 
431 p.). 

47. Pearcy, George E. Africa: names and concepts. 

Washington, U.S. Dept, of State, 1961. 9 p. 
maps. (U.S. Dept, of State. Publication 7129. 
African series 9) DTI2.2.P4 

Reprinted from the Department of State Bulletin of Decem¬ 
ber 26, 1960. 

By the Geographer of the Department of State, this 
is a concise review of the regions of Africa and the 
new names of states. A table gives adjective and noun 
forms applicable to 54 major political entities. A still 
more concise statement of Political Divisions of Africa 
is issued by the Office of Research and Analysis for 
the Mid-East and Africa of the Department of State 
(1962. 4 p. Publication 7067. African series 3). 
New revised versions will presumably appear peri¬ 
odically, to keep apace of events. 

48. Philip (George) & Son, ltd. Modern college 

atlas for Africa. Edited by Harold Fullard, 
cartographic editor. [New ed.] London, 1961. 
136, 31 p. G1019.P5705 1961 

World atlas with special application to Africa, pre¬ 
pared with needs of African as well as non-African 
students in mind. Of the 136 pages of maps, well 
over a third (p. 24-73) relate to regions and countries 
of Africa. The scales vary according to space allotted 
to the region, from 1:1 1/2M to 1:8 M. 

49. Scientific Council for Africa South of the 

Sahara [CSA] Cartes topographiques de 
VAfrique au sud du Sahara. Topographical 
maps of Africa south of the Sahara. [New ed.] 
London, C.C.T.A. [Commission for Technical 
Co-operation in Africa South of the Sahara] 
1955. 2 v. (40, 70 p.) ( Its Publication no. 15, 

17) AZ800.S35, no. 15, 17 

Pt. 2 has title: Cartographie de VAfrique au sud du Sahara. 
Maps of Africa south of the Sahara. Cartes spidales. 
Special subject maps. 

These two catalogs form the revision of a single list, 
Maps of Africa South of the Sahara, which was issued 
at Bukavu, then the site of CCTA/GSA, in April 1953 


10 


(122 p. Publication no. 4). That work had been 
based on a provisional list of maps prepared by Dr. 
R. J. H. Church of the London School of Economics 
and Miss Rudd of University College, Ibadan, aug¬ 
mented by information from many institutions and 
departments in and outside of Africa. It omitted ob¬ 
solete material and historical maps and gave only 
samples of maps included in books, but was an at¬ 
tempt to record “all maps believed to be useful.” Ar¬ 
rangement was by political divisions rather than geo¬ 
graphic areas. For each region or country there were 
listed first topographical maps or series of maps, then 
the special maps in systematic subject classification. 
For the revision, the first part is limited to topo¬ 
graphical maps, and the special maps—town plans and 
cadastral, maps of geology, climatology and hydrology, 
soils, vegetation and forests, agricultural and animal 
husbandry, entomology, medicine, population and 
tribal boundaries, administrative and political bound¬ 
aries, communications—are in the second part. For 
CCTA/CSA Africa south of the Sahara includes So¬ 
maliland and offshore islands in the Indian Ocean, but 
omits Ethiopia and the Sudan. 

A specialized climatological atlas for Africa, to be pub¬ 
lished by CSA, has been in preparation for several years. It 
is being prepared by S. P. Jackson of the University of the 
Witwatersrand, with a group of assistants, and will show 
meteorological conditions of the whole continent. 

Nonserial publications of CCTA/CSA are published by its 
Publications Bureau, Watergate House, York Buildings, Lon¬ 
don W.C. 2. Those above mentioned are undoubtedly now 
out of print; however, microfilm reproductions may be or¬ 
dered from the Bureau. 

50. The Times, London. The Times atlas of the 

world. Mid-century edition. Edited by John 
Bartholomew, v. 4. Southern Europe and 
Africa . . . with an index-gazetteer. London, 
The Times Pub. Co., 1956. 96 col. plates; 

50 p. index. 49 cm. G1019.T52 1955 

One of the best general atlases of Africa. 

51. United Nations Educational, Scientific and 

Cultural Organization. Division of Natural 
Sciences. [Natural resources series. No. 2] 
Chap. I. Review of topographic mapping of 
Africa, by A. Rumeau. Annex I. Inventory 
of topographical maps of the African continent 
at the end of 1959. Petris, UNESCO, 1961. 
11, 16 p. DLC 

The essay by the Director of the French National 
Geographic Institute discusses the evolution of Af¬ 
rican topographic mapping between 1949 and 1959, 
having regard to reconnaissance maps, provisional 


maps, sketch maps and aerial photography, the work 
done by the British Commonwealth, Belgians, Portu¬ 
guese, French, and former French territories, the gen¬ 
eral situation in 1959, and international organizations 
concerned with cartography and geodesy of Africa. 
The 16-page inventory is limited to maps published 
since 1930 on scales comprised between 1/10,000 and 
1/250,000, inclusive, thus bringing up to date a part 
of the matter covered in the CSA study of 1955. Two 
plates on supplementary pages show the parts of Af¬ 
rica topographically mapped in 1949 and 1959, 
respectively. 

52. U.S. Hydrographic Office. Sailing directions 

[series] Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off. 
H.O. Publication no. 105. Southwest coast of Africa, 
Cape Palmas to the Cape of Good Hope. 4th ed. 
1952- 314 p. VK877.U62 1951 

H.O. Publication no. 134. West coast of Spain, Portugal, 
and Northwest Africa and off-lying islands . . . 5th 
ed. 1952. 530 p. VK876.U6 1952 

H.O. Publication no. 156. Southeast coast of Africa; 
Cape of Good Hope to Ras Hafun. 4th ed. 1951— 
1 v. (loose-leaf) VK887.U52 1952 

H.O. Publication no. 161. South Indian Ocean, 
Madagascar and the islands west of longitude 90° 
east. 4th ed. 1952- 1 v. VK885.U72 1952 

The volumes for Africa in the Sailing Directions 
series begun in 1916 as the Africa Pilot, of which the 
above are examples, are in looseleaf binders allowing 
for supplementary material and including folded maps 
and charts. New editions are based on all available 
sources, including the recent volumes and supple¬ 
ments of the British Hydrographic Office Africa Pilot. 
The first chapter of each volume contains general re¬ 
marks, and information on buoyage, lifesaving sta¬ 
tions, signals, regulations, wind and weather, currents, 
routes. Then come detailed chapters describing shore 
features and sailing conditions point to point along 
the coast. There are appendixes listing principal ports, 
with particulars of depths, meteorological tables, and 
an index of place names. 

HISTORY 

(including Archaeology, Prehistory, and 
Pre-Colonial History) 

53. Alimen, Henriette. The prehistory of Africa. 

Translated by Alan Houghton Brodrick. Lon¬ 
don, Hutchinson, 1957 xviii, 438 p. illus., maps, 
tables. GN861.A563 

Includes bibliographies. 

Professor Alimen of the Institute of Ethnology in 
Paris is a former president of the Societe Prehistorique 


11 




Frangaise; her field is one in which French scholarship 
has been in the vanguard. This work came out in 
the French edition in 1955 and serves as synthesis and 
summary of existing knowledge regarding geologic 
ages and remains of prehistoric man in Africa. There 
are included many comparative tables, maps, draw¬ 
ings, and plates (28, some in color) of artifacts and 
rock drawings. In the few references on prehistory in 
general following the introduction the periodical 
L’Anthropologie is noted, with the comment that it 
carries notices of most works of importance for Africa. 

A scholarly study by the French anthropologist, Denis- 
Pierre de Pedrals, Archeologie de I’Afrique noire (Paris, 
Payot, 1950. 233 p.), treats the “protohistoric” past of 

Africa (Nubia, Ethiopia, the upper and lower regions of the 
Niger, the Tchad area, Zimbabwe, Senegambia, the Belgian 
Congo) in terms of “classical archaeology” (i.e., remains of 
art or written records), “ethonyms,” “toponyms,” “theonyms,” 
and other evidences from philological speculation. 

54. Cornevin, Robert. Histoire des peuples de 

I’Afrique noire. Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1960. 
715 p. illus., plates, maps, geneal. tables. 
(Mondes d’outre-mer. Serie histoire) 

DT352.C6 

Includes bibliographies. 

Dr. Comevin, a former chief administrator of 
France Overseas and now Director of the Centre 
d’Etude et de Documentation sur l’Afrique et l’Outre- 
Mer in Paris, writes from the viewpoint of archaeol¬ 
ogist and anthropologist, putting together from many 
scholarly sources the prehistoric and pre-European 
history of the peoples of Africa. His valuable, though 
rather difficult, study is in three parts: 1, African 
historiography and origins in general; 2, the ancient 
kingdoms of West Africa; 3, East, Central and South¬ 
ern Africa. The extensive bibliographical references 
are arranged by chapter (p. 671-686). This work 
expands and supplements the writer’s earlier Histoire 
de I’Afrique des origines a nos jours (Paris, Payot, 
1956. 404 p.), in which the broader scope included 
North and Northeast Africa. Professor Cornevin is 
now preparing an Histoire de I’Afrique for Payot’s 
series, Bibliotheque historique, the first volume of 
which has appeared in 1962. 

55. Dart, Raymond A. Africa’s place in the emer¬ 

gence of civilization. Johannesburg, South Af¬ 
rican Broadcasting Corporation, 1960. 96 p. 

illus., maps. GN645.D3 

Popular discussion of the origins of man, which the 
author, emeritus professor of anatomy at the University 
of Witwatersrand and noted for his studies of “the 


missing link,” relates to the remains of man-apes 
found in southern Africa. 

Dart’s collection of bones of the australopithecines was 
the starting point of a study of the animal inheritance, 
physical and social, of man by Robert Ardrey: African 
Genesis; A Personal Investigation into the Animal Origins 
and Nature of Man (New York, Atheneum, 1961. 380 p.). 
The author, an anthropologist and playwright, preludes his 
discussion of past and present relationships between animal 
and human with a review of the latest discoveries of the 
physical anthropologists, Dr. Leakey, Dart, and others, and 
the proof they offer of “the rough but indisputable outline 
of the human emergence on the African highland.” 

56. Davidson, Basil. The lost cities of Africa. 

Boston, Little, Brown, 1959. 366 p. illus. 

DT25D3 1959a 

London ed. (Gollancz) has title: Old Africa rediscovered. 

Includes bibliography. 

The author, a well-known British journalist, has 
written a number of works on Africa (see, e.g., his 
African Awakening, no. 1874). This is a history of 
the 15 or 20 “proto-historic” centuries before the 
written records of European trade and penetration 
began. Addressed to a less scholarly audience than 
the earlier pioneer work by Westermann (no. 72), he 
takes into account almost two decades of rapid ad¬ 
vances in scholarly research. His story, starting with 
the claims for the origin of man in East Africa, ranges 
over the continent from the Kush and Meroe of an¬ 
tiquity through the kingdoms of the old Sudan in the 
years of Mohammedan expansion, the less well identi¬ 
fied societies of central Africa whose art remains pro¬ 
vide the few clues to their culture, and the civiliza¬ 
tions of East and Southeast Africa, culminating in the 
great stone ruins of Zimbabwe. The style, dramatic 
and exciting, lends itself with some justification to 
certain critics’ charges of romanticism and overen¬ 
thusiasm for things African. 

Mr. Davidson has expanded the material covered suc- 
cintly in a little collection of essays, The Dawn of African 
History , edited by Roland Oliver (London, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1961. 103 p. maps). By specialists who have 

themselves contributed to original research, the chapters 
originated as talks on the BBC Third Programme, and sum¬ 
marize in 6 to 10 pages the known or deduced pre-European 
history of the different regions. Scholars represented include 
Thomas Hodgkin, Gervase Mathew, D. H. Jones, J. D. Fage, 
G. R. Boxer, J. Vansina, W. M. Macmillan. In his conclu¬ 
sion the editor emphasizes the geographical causes of Africa’s 
isolation, and the political achievement against overwhelm¬ 
ing odds. 

The same ground is covered in a French thumbnail history, 
published with acknowledgments to Radio-S6negal, Breve 
histoire de VAfrique noire by Louis G. Joos (Issy-les-Mouli- 
neaux, Editions Saint-Paul, 1961, 207 p. Afrique-monde). 


12 


57. - Black mother; the years of the African 

slave trade. Boston, Little, Brown, 1961. 311 p. 

DT352.D33 1961 
Continuing his presentation of African history for 
the general audience, Mr. Davidson in a second book 
examines the connections of Africa and Europe from 
the 15th to the 19th centuries, through commerce and 
its development into the slave trade. Quoting exten¬ 
sively from contemporary sources, he endeavors to 
show that in the earliest contacts the races met on a 
basis of equality, the “feudal” societies of Africa under¬ 
standable to Europeans still not emancipated from 
their own feudal traditions into the full era of com¬ 
mercialism; that in the latter age the subordination of 
all other values to the profit motive alone resulted in 
the appalling horrors of the traffic in slaves and 
its concomitant European assumption of African 
inferiority. 

Mr. Davidson’s book is focused directly on Africa and the 
conditions resulting from the slave trade, rather than, as is 
the case in many works on this subject, on the countries en¬ 
gaged in the traffic. Typical of such is Kenneth G. Davies’ 
heavily documented study. The Royal African Company 
(London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1957. 390 p.). 

58. De Graft-Johnson, John G. African glory; the 

story of vanished Negro civilizations. New 
York, Praeger, 1955. 209 p. illus. (Books that 
matter) DT22.D4 1955 

One of the earlier works asserting what is now 
spoken of as “the African personality.” The writer, 
an African scholar and member of a Ghana family dis¬ 
tinguished as leaders in education, based his history on 
extensive study of sources in English. He accepts the 
view that Negro peoples at one time inhabited all 
North Africa, so that his narrative starts with ancient 
Egypt and the Roman world before sketching the 
Arab conquests and the rise and fall of the Moslem 
empires of West Africa, Ghana, Almoravid, Almohade, 
Mali, and Songhai. He reviews the European dis¬ 
coveries and settlement, and the era of slavery, ending 
with a long chapter on the evolution of the Gold Coast 
toward self-determination during the past century. 

59. Diop, Cheikh Anta. L’Afrique noire pre - 

coloniale; etude comparee des systemes politi- 
ques et sociaux de l’Europe et de l’Afrique noire, 
de l’antiquite a la formation des etats modernes. 
Paris, Presence africaine, 1960. 213 p. illus. 

(part col.), maps. (Collection Presence 
africaine) DT25.D5 

One of the leaders of the Presence Africaine group 
of French-speaking African intellectuals, Cheikh Anta 


Diop has written extensively on African cultural and 
linguistic history from a Marxist viewpoint. This 
book, a comparison of precolonial Sudanese Africa 
with ancient and medieval Europe, not to the advan¬ 
tage of the latter, he calls “a study in African historical 
sociology.” His canvas is West Africa, mainly the 
former French territories. For source material he has 
depended heavily on the medieval Arabic accounts, 
El-Bakri, Idrisi, Batuta, etc. The book has as ap¬ 
pendix a comparative study of four Sudanese lan¬ 
guages. A section of plates, some in color, are drawn 
after the contemporary descriptions. Other books by 
M. Diop study even more closely specific aspects of the 
same general theme: Nations negres et culture (Paris, 
Editions africaines, 1955. 390 p.), and UUnite cul- 
turelle de VAfrique noire; domaines du patriarcat et 
du matriarcat dans Vantiquite classique (Paris, Pres¬ 
ence africaine, 1959. 203 p.). 

60. Fage, J. D. An atlas of African history. London, 
E. Arnold, 1958. 64 p. 62 maps. 

G2446.S1F3 1958 

The author, who at the time of writing was profes¬ 
sor of history at the University of Ghana, is one of the 
editors of the Journal of African History (Cambridge, 
University Press, 1960+). In this first work of its 
kind for Africa, 62 sketch maps in diagrammatic form 
illustrate stages of African history from the eve of the 
Muslim Arab invasions to the present. Captions vary 
from thumbnail sketches of the historic situation to 
keys to symbols used to indicate, e.g., the spread of 
Christian missions. Sixteen maps show Northern 
Africa from the Roman world of the 4th century 
through the 18th century, and the empires of the 
western Sudan from the 5th to 18th centuries; four 
more show what is known of northeastern Africa and 
the Bantu states prior to the first Portuguese voyages 
and patterns of trade between the continents. Maps 
24—57 illustrate European penetration from the 15th 
century on and the patterns of alien rule between 1830 
and 1957. The last five are regional maps presenting 
modern economic development. An extended review 
of this book, by P. C. Lloyd, appeared in Africa , v. 29, 
January 1959, p. 98-100. 

Of somewhat the same nature but greatly simplified, being 
designed as a text for secondary schools in Africa, is The Map 
Approach to African History, by Allan M. Healy and E. R. 
Vere-Hodge (London, University Tutorial Press, 1959. 64 
p.). Both authors are teachers at the Duke of York School. 
Their booklet contains 28 sketch maps with facing explana¬ 
tory text. 


13 



61. Ibn Batuta, 1304-1377. Travels. A.D. 1325- 

1354. Translated with revisions and notes from 
the Arabic text, edited by C. Defremery and B. 
R. Sanguinetti by H. A. R. Gibb. Cambridge 
[Eng.] Published for the Hakluyt Society at 
the Cambridge University Press, 1958-62. 2 v. 

illus., maps. (Hakluyt Society works, 2d series, 
no. 110, 117) G370.I23 

The early Arabic sources for African history are 
being increasingly studied for evidences of the me¬ 
dieval empires of sub-Saharan Africa. This 14th cen¬ 
tury traveler visited the Emperor of Mali. Modern 
texts in English or French translation are also available 
for the works of the 11th and 12th century geogra¬ 
phers, al-Bakri and Idrisi, who describe the ancient 
Ghana. 

These earlier sources are not included in Edward G. Cox’s 
Reference Guide to the Literature of Travel (Seattle, Uni¬ 
versity of Washington, 1935. 2 v.) which cites most of the 

known texts of travelers’ accounts of Africa from 1500 to 1800 
(see Vol. l,p. 354-401). 

62. International Seminar on Ethno-History in 

Africa, Dakar, Dec. 1961. 

A note on this seminar, sponsored by the Inter¬ 
national African Institute and organized with aid of 
a Ford Foundation grant, appears in Africa , v. 32, 
April 1962, p. 172. The meetings organized by M. R. 
Mauny, Director of the Section of Prehistoric Archae¬ 
ology, Institut Frangais d’ Afrique Noire, and Sociology 
Professor L. V. Thomas of the University of Dakar, 
were held at the IFAN Ethnographical Museum. 
Conclusions stressed “the importance of drawing the 
attention of African Government to the urgency of 
oral traditions.” Papers and an introductory survey 
on methodology of historical research are being pre¬ 
pared for “early publication.” 

63. Jones, Hugh W. Africa in perspective. Lon¬ 

don, Quadriga Press, 1960. 214 p. illus. 

DT20.J6 

The writer describes this as “a plain man’s guide to 
the study of Africa ... as simple, factual, objective, 
and balanced as the subject permits.” Chapters move 
quickly over high points of prehistory, Egypt, Christian 
and Muslim Middle Ages, Portuguese ascendancy, evo¬ 
lution of South Africa, the slave trade, the great ex¬ 
plorers, Europe in Africa, changing economy of pres¬ 
ent and future. As an introduction this work serves 
well its author’s purpose of bringing the African con¬ 
tinent more into focus for the nonspecialist reader. 


64. Journal of African history, v. 1, no. 1+ May 

1960+ London, Cambridge University Press. 

Published for the School of Oriental and African 
Studies, University of London and edited by R. A. 
Oliver and J. D. Fage. Two issues each appeared in 
1960 and 1961, and three in 1962. This new journal 
is designed to represent the highest scholarly standards 
in its contributions to the broad field of African history. 

65. Kingsnorth, G. W. Africa south of the Sahara. 

Cambridge, University Press, 1962. 160 p. 

(Cambridge books on the history of Africa) 

DT352.K493 

An outline history, comprehensive but extremely 
condensed, and intended for use in secondary schools 
in Africa. 

66. Leakey, Louis S. B. Stone age Africa •• an out¬ 

line of prehistory in Africa. London, Oxford 

University Press, 1936. 218 p. GN776.A15L4 
Lectures at Edinburgh University in 1935-36. 
Professor Leakey, Curator of the Coryndon Museum 
in Nairobi, is among the best-known of African ar¬ 
chaeologists, and foremost exponent of the theory that 
man originated in East Africa during the glacial epoch. 
The question, as he emphasizes here, was—and is 
still— sub judice, as is also his conviction that a frag¬ 
ment of jawbone found in 1932 “represents the type 
of man who was living in East Africa during Lower 
Pleistocene times and that it represents a form an¬ 
cestral to Homo sapiens.” Professor Leakey’s many 
other contributions to archaeological knowledge in 
journals and book form have related usually to East 
Africa only. Two short addresses in early 1961, briefly 
summarizing his theories, were published with the title 
The Progress and Evolution of Man in Africa (Lon¬ 
don, Oxford University Press, 1961. 50 p. plates). 
In the first lecture he stressed the idea that Africans 
are not inferior to but different from Europeans, and 
that there is a cruel fallacy in judging African ad¬ 
vances by European standards. 

67. Lhote, Henri. The search for the Tassili fres¬ 

coes; the story of the prehistoric rock-paintings 

of the Sahara. Translated from the French by 

Alan Houghton Brodrick. New York, E. P. 

Dutton, 1959. 236 p. GN799.P4L513 

Story of the expedition led by the author, which 
made dramatic archaeological finds in the Ahaggar 
mountains of the Sahara. The rock paintings, of 
which careful tracings, here reproduced in color, were 
made, bear striking evidence of the routes of culture 
migrations in prehistoric Africa. 


14 


68. London. University. School of Oriental and 

African Studies. History and archaeology in 
Africa; report of a conference held in July 1953 
at the School of Oriental & African Studies, 
edited by R. A. Hamilton. London, 1955. 
99 p. maps. DT349.L6 

“A list of the conference papers . . . [with] bibliographical 
notes”: p. 84—96. Bibliographical footnotes. 

This conference, organized at the School of Oriental 
and African Studies, was the first international gather¬ 
ing bringing together British, French, and African 
scholars concerned with the African past before the 
period of European administration. Its purpose was 
to stimulate the collection and preservation of ma¬ 
terials for the unwritten history of the African peoples. 
The two main sources of this history, oral tradition and 
archaeology, formed the subject matter of papers, a 
selected few of which are reproduced in this volume. 
A second conference was held at the School of Orien¬ 
tal and African Studies on July 16-18, 1957. Its pro¬ 
ceedings were published by the School in 1959: History 
and Archaeology in Africa, edited by D. H. Jones 
(London. 58 p.). At this meeting a panel was set up 
to explore the practicability of publishing an inter¬ 
national journal of African history. This was accom¬ 
plished in 1960 with the launching of The Journal of 
African History (no 14). A third conference was 
held in August 1961; its resolutions are reported in 
Africa, v. 31, October 1961, p. 579-80. 

A number of regional or national conferences on African 
history have been held of recent years, notably in Nigeria, 
Ghana, East Africa, the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasa- 
land. They are reported regularly in the “Notes and News” 
section of the International African Institute journal, Africa. 

69. Oliver, Roland A. and J. D. Face. A short 

history of Africa. Baltimore, Md., Penguin 
Books, 1962. 279 p. (Penguin African library, 
AP 2) DT20.O4 

By the editors of the Journal of African History, this 
concentrated survey of the entire course of African 
history has received, according to reviewers, “nothing 
but praise.” Published in England and America in 
a paperback edition ($1.25), it is within the reach of 
every student of African affairs. The legend on the 
back cover explains that “Drawing on archaeology, 
oral tradition, language relationships, social institu¬ 
tions, and material cultures [the work] not only as¬ 
sembles the most authoritative views [on African 
history] into an absorbing narrative, but also contains 
some original conclusions that take the study of Africa 
a stage further.” 


70. Pan-African Congress on Prehistory. Pro¬ 

ceedings. 1st H- 1947+ London [etc.] Chatto 

Windus [etc.] illus., maps. GN700.P3 

Professor Leakey was moving spirit of the first Pan- 
African Congress on Prehistory, which was convened in 
Nairobi in 1947, and edited the Proceedings (published 
by Blackwell, Oxford, 1952. 239 p.). The second 
Congress was held in Algiers in 1952 ( Proceedings 
published by Arts et Metiers Graphiques, 18 rue Se- 
guier, Paris 6 e ), and the third in Livingstone, North¬ 
ern Rhodesia, in 1955 ( Proceedings, edited by J. Des¬ 
mond Clark and Sonia Cole, London, Chatto & 
Windus, 1957. 440 p.). The fourth Congress took 
place in Leopoldville in August 1959 (Actes . . . 
Tervuren, Musee Royal de 1’Afrique centrale, 1962. 
505 p. Annales, Ser. in-8°, Sciences humaines, 40), 
and the fifth is scheduled to meet in Tenerife, Canary 
Islands, in 1963. All papers are highly technical. 

71. Ward, William E. F. A history of Africa. Lon¬ 

don, G. Allen & Unwin, 1960. DT20.W3 

Book 1. The old kingdom of the Sudan. Nigeria be¬ 
fore the British came: South Africa. 

The author was formerly history master at Achimota 
College, before it became the University College of 
Ghana. This book is the first volume of a series for 
secondary schools and teacher training colleges of 
Africa, for “a generation of young people who are 
thinking of Africa as one whole.” The treatment is in 
dialogue form, questions and historical narrative as 
answers. Each part is to contain three topics; this 
first has also an introductory section on the nature 
of history, then on the old Sudan, Nigeria before the 
British, and South Africa. 

72. Westermann, Diedrich. Geschichte Afrikas; 

Staatenbildungen siidlich der Sahara. Kbln, 

Greven-Verlag, 1952. 492 p. illus. 

DT351.W433 

Bibliography: p. 455-470. 

The late Dr. Westermann, Emeritus Professor of 
African Languages at the University of Berlin and a 
founder and Director of the International African In¬ 
stitute, was Germany’s foremost Africanist of the first 
half of the 20th century. This history of the building 
of states in Africa south of the Sahara was begun in 
1939, and represents the sum total of scholarship to 
that date. The manuscript was twice destroyed in 
air raids during the war, so that the work was finished 
only in 1950. In chronicling the rise, rulers, reigns, 
battles, declines, and falls of 64 African kingdoms of 
the Sudan, Nigeria and the Guinea Coast, East, Cen- 


15 


tral and Southern Africa, the writer touched lightly 
on European contacts and domination, treating them 
merely as episodes in the story of independent peoples. 
The volume forms a standard reference work. It in¬ 
cludes good illustrations, a long bibliography (p. 455- 
470), and comprehensive indexes of place, tribal, and 
personal names. 

73. Wiedner, Donald L. A history of Africa south 

of the Sahara. New York, Random House, 
1962. 578 p. DT352.W48 

By an American scholar who teaches history at the 
University of Alberta, this big work is reviewed by 
R. W. Logan in Africa Report of August 1962 as 
“scholarly, comprehensive, and lucid.” It is also rapid 
and readable. 

THE COLONIAL ERA 

74. Farwell, Byron. The man who presumed: a 

biography of Henry M. Stanley. New York, 
Holt, 1957. 334 p. illus. DT351.S6A42 

Full story of Stanley’s life and explorations, based 
on a five-page bibliography, mainly of secondary 
sources, which begins with the titles of the subject’s 
books. These formed the important adventure read¬ 
ing of their day: How I Found Livingstone (New 
York, Scribner, 1872); Through the Dark Continent 
(Harper. 1878. 2 v.); In Darkest Africa (Harper, 

1890. 2 v.), and nine others. There have recently 

appeared two volumes of additional primary source 
material, H. M. Stanley: Unpublished Letters , by Al¬ 
bert Maurice (London, W. & R. Chambers, 1957. 
183 p. Originally published in French, 1955), and 
The Exploration Diaries of H. M. Stanley, edited by 
Richard Stanley and Alan Neame (New York, Van¬ 
guard Press, 1961. 203 p.). 

Another recent book on Stanley is concerned with the 
search for Livingstone and its aftermath: Ian Anstruther, 
I Presume: Stanley’s Triumph and Disaster (London, G. 
Bles, 1956. 207 p.). The first five chapters are background 

of Stanley’s early life, then chapters 6 to 13 tell in great 
detail of the expedition. Part 2 is “The Disaster,” the ridi¬ 
cule Stanley met on his return from the triumph. “It was 
a great personal tragedy to him that at the proudest moment 
of his life he himself had created the joke . . . Stanley said, 
Dr. Livingstone, I presume?, and the world said, Ha ha!” 

75 Guernier, Eugene L. L’Afrique, champ d’ex¬ 
pansion de VEurope. Paris, A. Colin, 1933. 
283 p. DT31.G8 

This study by a prominent French geographer and 
philosopher of colonialism appeared shortly after the 


International Colonial Exposition of Paris (1931) in 
which France displayed lavishly the results of her 
mission civilisatrice in her oversea empire, still frankly 
spoken of as colonies. The dedication is to “Lyautey 
the African, Marshal of France, Builder of Cities, Re¬ 
storer of Empires,” with whom Guernier had worked 
in North Africa. The scope of the book includes dis¬ 
cussion of European overpopulation and need for emi¬ 
gration, the history of European penetration into 
Africa, the importance of Africa in modem economy, 
and European enterprise in the “moral and material” 
development of Africa. 

76. Hanna, Alexander J. European rule in Africa. 

London, Published for the Historical Associa¬ 
tion by Routledge and K. Paul, 1961. 36 p. 

(General series, G. 46) DT31.H26 

Skillful summarization of colonial history from the 
mid-nineteenth century to the present day, by a lec¬ 
turer in modern history at the University of South¬ 
ampton. Moves and motives of the “Great Scramble” 
are outlined in capsule form. 

77. Livingstone, David. Livingstone’s travels, edited 

by James I. NcNair, with geographical sections 
by Ronald Miller. London, Dent, 1954. 429 p. 
illus., maps. DT731.L747 1954 

Extracts from Dr. Livingstone’s three big books re¬ 
cording his explorations, Missionary Travels and Re¬ 
searches in South Africa (1857), The Zambezi and Its 
Tributaries (1865), Livingstone’s Last Journal (2 v. 
edited by Horace Waller, 1874), all published by John 
Murray, London. The generous selections provide, 
in the great missionary explorer’s own words, a fairly 
full account of the travels that made him famous. 
Four geographical sections are interspersed, explaining 
the African background, South and West Central 
Africa, the Lower Zambezi and Nyasaland, and the 
East African plateau. Brief appendixes are in the 
nature of extended notes. 

Another modern edition is The Zambezi Expedition of 
David Livingstone, 1858—1863, edited by J. P. R. Wallis and 
published as No. 9 of the Central African Archives, Oppen- 
heimer Series (London, Chatto & Windus, 1956. 2 v. col. 
plates, map). The first volume contains a part of the Jour¬ 
nals, the second continues the Journals, with letters and 
dispatches therefrom. Among the many lives of Livingstone, 
a notable biography emphasizing his role as explorer is by the 
geographer Frank Debenham, The Way to Ilala; David Liv¬ 
ingstone’s Pilgrimage (London, New York, Longmans, Green, 
1955. 336 p. illus., maps). Other works by and about 

Livingstone are noted in the section of this list on Christian 
missions (see no. 404). 


16 


78. Lucas, Sir Charles. The partition and coloniza¬ 

tion of Africa. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1922. 
228 p. DT31.L8 

A set of lectures given at the Royal Colonial Insti¬ 
tute by a noted Oxford historian of the British Empire, 
who had formerly been head of the Dominions De¬ 
partment of the Colonial Office. The first two chap¬ 
ters give pre- 19th-century background, then nine 
talks expound with exemplary clarity the phases of the 
European penetration, rivalries, and wars in Africa. 
The last chapter assesses the results of World War I 
on the map of Africa and speculates on problems of 
the future, as “millions of natives [become] year by 
year less unsophisticated and possessed of more race 
consciousness and more self-respect.” 

The 19th-century standard history is Sir John Scott Kel- 
tie’s Partition of Africa (1st ed., 1893; 2d ed., rev., 1895), 
which according to Hanna has not been superseded. It was 
further revised and edited by Professor Albert Galloway 
Keller of Yale and published with the title Africa in the 
History of Nations series edited by Henry Cabot Lodge (New 
York, P. F. Collier & Son, Memorial edition, 1928. 335 p.). 

Documentation on the diplomatic aspects of the European 
takeover of Africa is provided in one of the Peace Hand¬ 
books series prepared by the British Foreign Office, Historical 
Section: Partition of Africa (London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1920. 82 p. Handbooks, no. 89). The appendix gives texts 
of the bilateral agreements and treaties of Great Britain with 
the other European powers concerning African colonies, 
1890-1904. 

An anti-imperialist view of European colonization also 
found expression in England and America during the first 
decades of the 20th century. Typical is the English Fabian 
Leonard S. Woolf’s Empire and Commerce in Africa: A 
Study in Economic Imperialism (Westminster, The Labour 
Research Dept.; London, G. Allen & Unwin, 1919. 374 p.). 
Two American interpretations are written by Professor 
Norman Dwight Harris of Northwestern University in his 
Intervention and Colonization in Africa (Boston, 1914; re¬ 
vised, with title, Europe and Africa, Houghton Mifflin, 1927. 
479 p. International Politics, v. 1), and by the journalist 
and foreign correspondent, Lamar Middleton. In a frankly 
sensational book, The Rape of Africa (New York, Harrison 
Smith and Robert Haas, 1936. 331 p.), Middleton sought 

to expose “the recorded moves and remarks of a small group 
of statesmen who stole a continent, in the pious conviction 
that the African races craved the delights of Civilization.” 
The book is spirited but not necessarily accurate. 

79. Macmillan, William M. The road to self-rule; 

a study in colonial evolution. London, Faber & 
Faber, 1959. 296 p. JV1062.M25 

An historical study of the process of change from 
colonial rule to independent government, by a leading 
historian who after many years at the University of 
Witwatersrand in his native South Africa had been 
from 1947-54 Director of Colonial Studies at the Uni¬ 


versity of St. Andrews. His primary attention is to 
African evolution, though he begins with general 
factors, “a preliminary glance at America, which set 
a bad example,” and a chapter on the West Indies 
where he had recently been a visiting professor. He 
then limits his examination to British Africa, from 
“The Rule of Law at the Cape of Good Hope” to the 
new patterns, in which government has become “The 
Black Man’s Burden.” The book ends with a warning 
to the new rulers, that, though they feel themselves 
successful leaders of a revolution, “in fact the revolu¬ 
tion has hardly yet begun,” and the task of building 
nations out of the disparate elements of elite and 
masses, new urban centres and “bush,” is yet to be 
accomplished. 

80. Oliver, Roland A. Sir Harry Johnston & the 

scramble for Africa. New York, St. Martin’s 
Press, 1958. 368 p. illus. DA17.J604 1958 

A satisfactory telling of history through the medium 
of biography. In ten years of intensive study of Afri¬ 
can history, says Mr. Oliver, “no one personality has 
more constantly crossed my path” than Johnston, 
whose career as naturalist, explorer, civil servant, ad¬ 
ministrator, and historian extended to most parts of 
Black Africa. Johnston’s own works, including The 
Colonization of Africa (1899) and The Opening up 
of Africa (1911), as well as regional histories, linguis¬ 
tics, and zoological writings, are among the most im¬ 
portant source works of his period. 

81. Perham, Margery. Lugard. London, Collins, 

1956-60. 2 v. illus., ports., maps, facsims. 

DA566.9.L82P4 

Circulated in America by Essential Books. 

Includes bibliographies. 

These two volumes by one of England’s foremost 
colonial scholars trace every phase of the career of the 
famous administrator who established the 20th-century 
British concept of indirect rule in native administra¬ 
tion. “It is fortunate,” writes Lord Hailey in a review 
of the second volume ( Africa , v. 31, April 1961, p. 185— 
186), “that Miss Perham found herself able to accept 
the role of biographer which Lugard himself had 
hoped that she might assume. A friend bound to him 
by close ties of affection and respect, she nevertheless 
exhibits the virtues of an objective and scholarly 
historian.” 

Miss Perham has also edited three volumes of Lord Lugard’s 
diaries, covering his East African experience (see no. 1278). 
His own work (Lugard, F. J. D., baron. The Dual Mandate 
in British Tropical Africa, Edinburgh and London, Black¬ 
wood, 1922. 643 p.) enunciates the philosophy of local ad- 


17 


ministration based on the use of the traditional Native 
Authorities, which presumably would allow the African a 
gradual introduction to modern civilization. 

82. Perham, Margery and J. Simmons, eds. Afri¬ 

can discovery , an anthology of exploration. 
London, Faber & Faber, 1946. 280 p. plates, 

ports., maps. DT3.P4 1946 

From the works of the British explorers of Africa, covering 
the period from 1769 to 1873. List of books: p. 274-277. 

The most considerable modern selection of original 
sources, this volume edited by the Director of the In¬ 
stitute of Colonial Research, now Official Fellow of 
Nuffield College at Oxford, contains generous extracts 
from the books of 11 British explorers, arranged in the 
order in which the writers had arrived in Africa (2 for 
Livingstone). Introductions by Miss Perham on the 
purpose and character of the anthology and by Mr. 
Simmons briefly sketching the geography of the con¬ 
tinent and the explorers, are followed by the selections, 
each preceded by a few paragraphs of details regard¬ 
ing careers of the travelers. Those represented are 
James Bruce, Mungo Park, Clapperton and Lander, 
Livingstone (1), Baikie, Burton, Speke, Baker, Liv¬ 
ingstone and Stanley. The bibliography, p. 274-277, 
names the chief works by these men and biographies or 
other sources of information about them. Fuller se¬ 
lections from the British explorers have been published 
in volumes for West Africa (no. 500) and East Africa 
(no. 1284). 

83. Robinson, Ronald, John Gallagher, with 

Alice Denny. Africa and the Victorians; the 
climax of imperialism in the Dark Continent. 
New York, St. Martins Press, 1961. 491 p. 

DT32.R55 

Two British historians trained in African studies sur¬ 
vey the age of imperialist expansion, particularly from 
the British side. It is their thesis that strategy and 
defensive measures against other European powers 
were the motivating force in the partition, and that 
trade, plantations, and economic exploitation followed 
rather than led the way. British ministers were not 
impelled, they argue, by “new sustained or compelling 
impulses towards African empire,” but their territorial 
claims were “little more than by-products of an en¬ 
forced search for better security” in the Mediterranean 
and the East. 

Anti-imperialism presumably finds vigorous expression in a 
work now being published in Hungary: Endre Sik, Histoire 
de VAfrique noire (Budapest, Akademiai Kiado for the Hun¬ 
garian Academy of Sciences). The first of three volumes 


appeared in French in 1961 (408 p.), covering African his¬ 
tory from earliest times through the 19th century. The 
book is not yet available at the Library of Congress, but the 
publisher’s announcement gives the table of contents and 
explains that Professor Sik examines first the history of the 
African peoples themselves, and then, from their point of 
view, the history of the conquerors and their conquests. “He 
denounces the falsifications of [previous] literature and shows 
the true face of colonization, stressing above all the secular 
struggles of the peoples of Africa for their liberty.” 

84. Schiffers, Heinrich. The quest for Africa; two 

thousand years of exploration. Translated from 
the German by Diana Pyke. New York, Put¬ 
nam, 1958. 352 p. illus. DT20.S353 1958 

Translation of Wilder Erdteil Afrika. 

The title of this German retelling of selected chap¬ 
ters from the history of European penetration of Africa 
is somewhat misleading. A few paragraphs on Egyp¬ 
tians and Carthaginians account for 1,500 of the 
author’s “two thousand” years. The arrangement is 
regional, beginning with the quest for the sources of 
the Nile, a section which includes the story of the 
Mahdi’s rebellion in the Sudan. Other sections record 
voyages on the seacoasts, the Boer trek from the Cape, 
the opening of Central Africa (mostly Livingstone and 
Stanley), the gold discoveries, a long chapter on Emin 
Pasha, and some French travels in the North African 
desert. The style is popular to the point of sensation¬ 
alism. 

A more condensed treatment is by a French Catholic his¬ 
torian, Bernard de Vaulx, En Afrique: cinq mille ans d’ex¬ 
ploration (Paris, Fayard, 1960. 318 p.). The author begins 
with the Egyptian legends of the land of Punt and of Ophir 
and the periplus of Hannon, reviews voyages of the middle 
ages and the first discoveries around the coast, then the ex¬ 
plorations into the interior, from Mungo Park in the late 18 th 
century to the French in the Sahara in recent years. Basing 
his account on secondary sources, he leaves out few names, 
but practically all detail. He is concerned to show scientific 
or spiritual motives, though—to quote the editor’s foreword— 
“he has none the less retained the passage from the Essay on 
Manners in which Voltaire relentlessly asserted the role of 
‘cupidity’ in discovery.” 

85. Thomson, Arthur A. M., and Dorothy Mid¬ 

dleton. Lugard in Africa. London, R. Hale, 
1959, 189 p. illus. DA566.9.L82T5 

Includes bibliography. 

Published almost simultaneously with the first vol¬ 
ume of Miss Perham’s far more extended study of 
Lugard, this is a well-told narrative biography of the 
great administrator from his early command against 
the slave trade in East Africa through his introduction 
of indirect rule as Governor-General of Nigeria. 


18 


86. Townsend., Mary E., and Cyrus H. Peake. 

European colonial expansion since 1871. Ed¬ 
ited by Walter Consuelo Langsam. Philadel¬ 
phia, Lippincott, 1941. 629 p. JV105.T6 
A useful synthesis of colonial history, designed as 
a textbook for college courses. Beginning with Stan¬ 
ley’s discoveries in Central Africa and the formation 
of the Association Internationale Africaine by Leopold 
II of Belgium, the account of the rivalry of the Euro¬ 
pean Powers for territory in the opening continent is 
reduced to bare bones. Each chapter is followed by an 
evaluative reading list. 

An earlier study by Dr. Townsend was on the former 
German territories, The Rise and Fall of Germany’s Colonial 
Empire, 1884-1918 (New York, Macmillan, 1930. 424 p.). 

The efforts of Germany to recover the territories during the 
interwar period were carefully examined by Rayford W. 
Logan, Howard University historian, in The African Man¬ 
dates in World Politics (Washington, Public Affairs Press, 
1949. 220 p.). 

GOVERNMENT 

(including Colonial Administration) 

Note: For this section the series of bibliographies now being 
compiled by the Library of Congress on official publications 
of the indvidual African countries are particularly applica¬ 
ble. To mid-1963 lists have been published for Nigeria, 
former French West Africa, Somalia, and a series for British 
East Africa (former) in four parts, East Africa High Com¬ 
mission, Tanganyika, Kenya and Zanzibar, Uganda. These 
lists, while including currently published documents as com¬ 
prehensively as possible, are perhaps of greatest value for 
retrospective studies. The same is true of the British and 
French official listings of documents of their overseas pos¬ 
sessions (now mostly former): Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. 
Library Reference and Research Section. Monthly List of 
Official Colonial Publications (London, June 1948+ Mimeo¬ 
graphed) ; Bibliographic selective des publications officielles 
frangaises (Paris, La Documentation frangaise, 1952+ semi¬ 
monthly). 

87. Akpan, Ntieyong U. Epitaph to indirect rule; 

a discourse on local government in Africa. Lon¬ 
don, Cassell, 1956. 204 p. JS7525.A45 

By an administrative officer of the Eastern Region 
of Nigeria, himself a native of the country. Much 
of his discussion of the current system of local govern¬ 
ment—functions and responsibility, financing, admin¬ 
istrative organization, etc.—in British West Africa is 
illustrated by the experience of the Eastern Region, 
the first territory in which the change from indirect 
rule was instituted by the Local Government Ordi¬ 
nance of 1950. 


88. Cohen, Sir Andrew. British policy in changing 

Africa. Evanston, Northwestern University 
Press, 1959. 116 p. (Northwestern University. 
African studies, no. 2) DT32.C6 

Sir Andrew Cohen came to America as Permanent 
British Member of the Trusteeship Council in 1957, 
and this book consists of a series of lectures given at 
Northwestern University in the spring of 1958. As 
former Governor of Uganda, famed for his progressive 
policies, he is uniquely qualified to talk about British 
government in Africa. The four talks, informal and 
absorbingly interesting, were on “Africa and the West: 
Encounter and Period of Building,” “The Nation and 
the Tribe,” “The Tasks of Government,” “Africa and 
the West: Needs of the Future.” He concluded by 
pointing out the similarity of interests of the United 
States and Britain in Africa. 

89. Crocker, Walter Russell. Self-government 

for the colonies. London, G. Allen & Unwin, 
1949. 177 p. JV412.C7 

The Australian author of this forceful statement of 
post-war colonial theory had formerly been an ad¬ 
ministrator in Nigeria, an official with the League of 
Nations, and from 1946-49 Chief of the African Sec¬ 
tion of the U.N. Secretariat. His study in 1946, On 
Governing Colonies (Allen & Unwin, 152 p.) was a 
thoughtful “outline of the real issues and a comparison 
of the British, French, and Belgian approach to them.” 
In the 1949 work he examined the colonial world of 
the postwar era. His conclusion was that, in spite 
of increasing good government by England and the 
other colonial powers, the pace of progress toward 
political independence must be faster, that the old 
form of colonialism was dead or dying, and that future 
relations must be voluntary partnership, to come at 
a moment which the colony itself must decide. 

During the years just before and after the Second World 
War statements and comparative analyses of colonial policy 
on the part of the European powers were numerous. Among 
conspicuous general and theoretical treatments, attention 
might be called to the following: 

Colonial administration by European powers. London, 
New York, Royal Institute of International Affairs, 
1947. 97 p. JV412.C6 

Papers by leading spokesmen for colonial policy of 
France (H. Laurentie), Indonesia (A. M. Joekes), Bel¬ 
gian Congo (Robert Godding), Portugal (Jose de 
Almada), Great Britain (Lord Hailey). 

Du Bois, W. E. Burghardt. Color and democracy: 
colonies and peace. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 
1945. 143 p. D816.D8 

Argument for freedom of dependent peoples, by an 
internationally known leader of Negro thought whose 


19 


anti-imperialism, at the time of writing, was considered 
by many American critics to be a moderate viewpoint 
and “a tract for the times.” 

Walker, Eric A. Colonies. Cambridge, England, Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1944. 168 p. (Current problems, 

20) JV185.W25 

Survey of world conditions of colonies, the policies of 
the powers, comparative political, economic and social 
development of colonial peoples, and future prospects, 
by an authority on South Africa. 

90. Dowson, Sir Ernest, and Vivian L. O. Shep¬ 

pard. Land registration. 2d ed. London, 

H.M. Stationery Office, 1956. 265 p. diagr. 

(Colonial research publications no. 13) 

JV33.G7A52, no. 13 
Second edition of a book first published in 1948 at 
the request of the Colonial Land Tenure Advisory 
Panel specifically for the use of colonial officers. Most 
of the text gives history of land records from early 
Egyptian times in Europe and modem India, but a 
chapter is devoted to the system of land registrations 
in French colonies and Belgian Congo, and accounts 
of the evolution in tribal areas of the British African 
possessions were added in the 1956 volume. 

91. Elias, Taslim Ola wale. Government and 

politics in Africa. New York, Asia Pub. House, 
1961. 228 p. JQ1872.E4 

This volume by Nigeria’s first Attorney General, the 
best known African writer on Nigerian and customary 
law (see no. 724) is put together from a series of 
lectures at the University of Delhi in 1956, conse¬ 
quently somewhat dated. Dr. Elias carried back his 
account of indigenous institutions to the medieval 
empires, then discussed forms of constitutions and fed¬ 
erations, as well as many questions of common law 
and customary law. 

92. Fabian colonial essays. With an introduction by 

A. Creech Jones. Edited by Rita Hinden. 

London, G. Allen & Unwin, 1945. 261 p. 

JV1027.F3 

This collection of essays on colonial policy expresses 
the views of the Socialist thinkers who in 1945 were 
to take over colonial administration (A. Creech Jones 
was Minister of Colonies in the Labour Government). 
Most of the papers are concerned with the colonial 
world in general, but three deal directly with Africa: 
“The Challenge of African Poverty,” by Rita Hinden, 
secretary of the Fabian Colonial Bureau (her answer 
is perhaps through cooperatives, and “to put an end 
to extraction of wealth from Africa in the European 
interest”); “Language and the African,” by Ida 


Ward; “Is Literacy Necessary in Africa?” by Margaret 
Wrong. 

In interesting contrast to the idealistic hopes expressed in 
this work is the tone of a later volume also edited by Mr. 
A. Creech Jones, New Fabian Colonial Essays (New York, 
Praeger, 1959. 271 p.). The dilemma of British Socialists 
faced with problems of plural societies, world politics, ec¬ 
onomic dependence of the underdeveloped countries, educa¬ 
tion barely begun, etc., etc., were voiced by several leading 
thinkers, including Rita Hinden, Kenneth Younger, Thomas 
Balogh, and others. The former editor of African Affairs, 
H. V. L. Swanzy, commented in a review in that journal 
(January 1960, p. 64-65), “the lessons of the last 15 years 
have added a colder light to the rose-pink spectacles.” 

93. Furse, Sir Ralph D. Aucuparius: recollections 

of a recruiting officer. London, New York, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1962. 330 p. illus. 

JV1076.F8 

The title is a classical allusion (perhaps a myth, 
says Sir Ralph, like the British Empire) to a mythologi¬ 
cal birdcatcher. The development of the recruit¬ 
ment and training system of the British Colonial Civil 
Service is explained through the urbane reminiscences 
of the author, who had been deeply involved in this 
task for 40 years. 

94. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Annual reports on 

the colonies. London, H.M. Stationery 
Office . . . 

This valuable series, providing an authoritative gen¬ 
eral survey of the current situation and background of 
each of the British colonial possessions, was suspended 
in 1940, and begun again with the Reports for 1946. 
They are published annually, or in some cases bien¬ 
nially, in uniform booklets, varying from about 50 to 
over 100 pages, including a few pages of photographs 
and a folded map. For anyone reading on particular 
British colonies in Africa, the Reports are perhaps 
the most useful preliminary to be found, and, after 
discontinuance of the current report as each country 
reaches independence, will continue to be of prime 
importance for background study. The arrangement 
of contents is systematic, with slight variations: Part 
I has a general review of the year’s developments. 
Part II gives brief factual and statistical paragraphs 
regarding population, occupations, wages and labor, 
public finance and taxation, currency and banking, 
commerce, production, social services (health, educa¬ 
tion, etc.), legislation, justice, police and prisons, pub¬ 
lic utilities, communications and public works, re¬ 
search, land tenure, etc. Part III outlines geography 
and climate, history, administration and public rela¬ 
tions, explains weights and measures used, lists news- 


20 


papers and periodicals, and gives bibliography, which 
includes governmental and nongovernmental publica¬ 
tions. Appendixes give texts of special documents 
and statistical tables. 

The quarterly Journal of African Administration (since 
January 1962 Journal of Local Administration Overseas) has 
been edited since 1949 in the African Studies Branch of the 
Colonial Office. In 1962 it was published by the new Depart¬ 
ment of Technical Co-operation. Its articles are the exchange 
of information on techniques and practices of administration. 
It contains also sections of book reviews, summarization of 
reports, and notes on legislation. 

95. -. Colonial research. 1944/45+ Lon¬ 

don. annual. JV1027.A32 

This annual report includes the overall report of the 
Colonial Research Council and the individual reports 
of its branches: in 1959/60, the Committee for Co¬ 
lonial Agricultural, Animal Health and Forestry Re¬ 
search, Colonial Economic Research Committee, Co¬ 
lonial Fisheries Advisory Committee, Colonial Medical 
Research Council, Colonial Pesticides Committee, Co¬ 
lonial Road Research Committee, Colonial Social 
Science Research Council, Tsetse Fly and Trypano¬ 
somiasis Committee, and the report of the Director, 
Anti-Locust Research Centre. The last section sum¬ 
marizes research matters not covered by the specialist 
advisory bodies, including African administration, 
building research, geological surveys, industrial and 
engineering research, meteorology, road research, water 
pollution research. For each subject of research, proj¬ 
ects are outlined as to scope and results and titles given 
of research publications. 

96. Hailey, William M. H., baron. Native adminis¬ 

tration in the British African territories. Lon¬ 
don, H.M. Stationery Off., 1950-53. 5 v. 

JQ1890.H28 

At head of title, pt. 1-4; Colonial Office; pt. 5: Common¬ 
wealth Relations Office. 

Lord Hailey’s African Survey (see no. 13) had ap¬ 
peared first in 1938. In 1941 he reported following 
journeys in the British colonies during the two previous 
years, examining administration under wartime con¬ 
ditions. After an inspection in 1947-48 he found the 
situation so much changed that he rewrote his report, 
the first four volumes of which (East Africa, Central 
Africa, West Africa, General Survey) appeared in 
1950-51, the fifth, on the High Commission Terri¬ 
tories, in 1953. The work is little concerned with po¬ 
litical or constitutional development, but is a detailed 
statement of administrative systems in the colonies 


under review, including the administration of justice 
through native tribunals and changes in land law and 
customary law—the whole forming a handbook for 
administrative officers in the colonial service. 

97. Jeffries, Sir Charles Joseph. Transfer of 

power; problems of the passage to self-govern¬ 
ment. London, Pall Mall Press, 1960. 148 p. 

JV1060.J4 

The author was for many years an official of the 
Colonial Office, a history of which he published in 
1956 ( The Colonial Office. London, Allen & Unwin; 
New York, Oxford University Press. 222 p. The 
New Whitehall series). In this book he examines the 
phases and problems of the British withdrawal, ac¬ 
complished or approaching, from administrative au¬ 
thority in general, in Ceylon, Ghana, Malaya, Nigeria, 
and elsewhere. 

98. Kimble, David. The machinery of self-govern¬ 

ment. London, Penguin Books, 1953. 124 p. 

(Penguin West African series, WA 4) 

JQ2998.A2K5 

One of a series of little books adapted to the needs 
of African students. The first chapters are on public 
opinion, its formation, organization, and expression. 
Then comes a simple exposition of the legislative as¬ 
sembly and its procedure, political parties, the role of 
the executive, the civil service, the head of state. The 
author was at the time Director of Extra-Mural Studies 
at the University College of the Gold Coast. 

99. Mair, Lucy P. Native policies in Africa. Lon¬ 

don, G. Routledge, 1936. 303 p. maps. 

DT21.M3 

Bibliography: p. 295-298. 

In a comparative analysis of European control, the 
London School of Economics specialist in colonial 
administration contrasted the policies of British admin¬ 
istration in countries of white settlement and in the col¬ 
onies governed through systems of native administra¬ 
tion, making a strong case for the latter. She then 
outlined policies of France, Belgium, and Portugal in 
their African colonies, concluding with a plea for the 
study and application of social anthropology in the 
government of dependent peoples. 

100. - Primitive government. Baltimore, Pen¬ 

guin Books, 1962. 288 p. (A Pelican book, 
A542) DT365.M25 

In this book, published in a series for the informed 
layman, Dr. Mair examines systems of government in 


21 




a number of tribal societies of East Africa and Ruanda- 
Urundi. Her thesis is that the concepts essential to 
ordered rule exist among “peoples of simple technol¬ 
ogy”—e.g., those who have no written records. 

Another of Dr. Mair’s recent works is written especially 
for an African audience, with suggestions as to the pitfalls 
that may be awaiting them as they initiate their own govern¬ 
ments: Safeguards for Democracy (London, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1961. 90 p. The New Africa Library). 

101. Perham, Margery F. The colonial reckoning; 

the end of imperial rule in Africa in the light 
of British experience. New York, Knopf, 
1962. 203 p. DT31.P37 1962 

An expanded version of the Reith lectures given 
through the BBC in late 1961 by this distinguished pro¬ 
fessor of colonial administration. (A note about the 
author at the end of the book outlines her career.) 
Miss Perham’s talks were on the changing significance 
of the terms colonialism and imperialism, on African 
nationalism, the politics of the newly “liberated” states, 
the huge and disturbing problem of white settlement, 
the colonial balance-sheet—much of it on the credit 
side for Britain—and future prospects, more hopeful 
than pessimistic. To her British listeners, although 
in no sense does the biographer of Lugard offer an 
apology for British action, the lectures must have 
brought a measure of satisfaction with the largely 
well-meaning past of their colonial empire and its 
present, for the most part well-accomplished, 
liquidation. 

102. Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, Lusaka, 

Northern Rhodesia. 13th conference, 1959. 
From tribal rule to modern government; pro¬ 
ceedings. Edited with an introd. by Raymond 
Apthorpe. Lusaka, 1959. xix, 216 p. maps. 

JQ1872.R53 1959 

Includes bibliographies. 

Papers regarding the transition from the traditional 
tribal, usually chiefly, government under indirect rule 
to the politics of modern Western-style bureaucracy. 
Chiefs, councils, courts, and political organization are 
considered in case studies of tribes in Northern and 
Southern Rhodesia, Tanganyika, Nigeria, Nyasaland, 
and Somalia. The contributors were social anthro¬ 
pologists and administrators. The editor, who wrote 
the introductory essay generalizing on the aspects of 
political change, is Research Secretary of the Rhodes- 
Livingstone Institute. 


103. Wieschhoff, Heinrich A. Colonial policies in 

Africa. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl¬ 
vania Press, 1944. 138 p. (African hand¬ 

books, edited by H. A. Wieschhoff. 5) 

DT31.W5 

Bibliography: p. 126-132. 

A clear and simple statement of the principles and 
aims of the colonial powers in their rule of Africa, 
written in anticipation of the Peace Conference to 
follow the Second World War. The last chapter dis¬ 
cussed the application of the Atlantic Charter to the 
future of the African colonies. A well-chosen bibliog¬ 
raphy of 132 references included many of the most 
authoritative works of the between-wars period on . 
theory and practice of colonialism. 

An interesting book applicable also in regard to colonial 
theory is the more recent study by D. O. Mannoni, Prospero 
and Caliban. As it applies the “psychology of colonization” 
to the special case study of Madagascar, it is described in this 
list under the regional heading (see no. 1232). 

104. Younger, Kenneth G. The public service in 

new states; a study in some trained manpower 
problems. London, New York, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1960. 113 p. JQ1876.Y6 

By the Director-General of the Royal Institute of 
International Affairs, this is an objective and factual 
study of administrative cadres in the transition period 
from colonial to independent government. In con¬ 
trast to India and Malaya, where trained and compe¬ 
tent nationals were available, in the new countries of 
Africa the withdrawal of expatriate officers and the 
Africanization of the higher grades of public services 
have presented serious problems. Mr. Younger studies 
the methods adopted by the British Government in the 
cases of Ghana, Malaya, the Sudan, and especially the 
Federation and Regions of Nigeria. 

The question of the national elites and the European civil 
service formed the theme of the 32d Study Session of INCIDI 
(International Institute of Differing Civilization) held in 
Munich in September 1960. The detailed reports and papers 
were published with the title, Problemes des cadres dans les 
pays tropicaux et subtropicaux. Staff Problems in Tropical 
and Subtropical Countries, by INCIDI (Bruxelles, 1961. 
681 p.). Shorter papers under the same title were printed in 
the Inter-African Labour Institute Bulletin of May 1961 (see 
no. 248). 

POLITICS 

Note: The fluidity of African politics results in a literary 
situation aptly described by a Belgian scholar: “Today, to 
write on Africa is to write in the sand, to describe a momen¬ 
tary reality which is no longer that of yesterday and which 
tomorrow will overthrow” (E. Bustin, Decentralisation ad- 


22 


ministrative et Involution des structures politiques en Afrique 
orientale britannique. Liege, Faculty de Droit de Liege, 
1958, p. 2). The consequence is that works of timely interest 
of the past decade are quickly outdated. Into this category, 
for which many other titles might be cited, fall Vernon 
Bartlett’s Struggle for Africa (New York, Praeger, 1953. 
246 p.), Transition in Africa: Studies in Political Adaptation, 
edited by Gwendolen M. Garter and William O. Brown 
(Boston, Boston University Press, 1958. 158 p.), and the 

symposium edited by Calvin W. Stillman, Africa in the 
Modern World (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1955. 
341 p.). A fair proportion of the works listed below may 
have joined these as sources for historical research by the time 
the present bibliography is published. 

In the study of politics, more perhaps than in any other 
field, it is essential to make use of the current periodical 
press. The daily and weekly newspapers are of first impor¬ 
tance—the London Times, Observer, and Economist, the 
Manchester Guardian, Paris Le Monde, New York Times, to 
mention a few of the most accessible. Of the periodicals 
devoted in whole or large part to African affairs listed in 
the Library of Congress Serials for African Studies (1961), 
over 70 are indexed as political journals and about an equal 
number as news weeklies. (A year and a half after publica¬ 
tion of that list of over 2,000 serial titles, the African Section 
has in its card files titles of at least 300 new periodicals.) 
Among those found most useful in research on current politi¬ 
cal questions are: Africa Diary (Delhi, India, weekly); Africa 

» Digest (London, bimonthly); Africa Report (Washington, 
D.C., monthly); Africa Today (New York, monthly); 
Afrique nouvelle (Dakar, weekly); Bulletin de VAfrique noire 
(Paris, weekly); Chronologic politique africaine (Paris, 
weekly); Jeune Afrique (Tunis, weekly); West Africa 
(London, weekly). These journals give general coverage to 
the continent or large portions of it; others of more limited 
regional scope are noted in appropriate sections of this 
bibliography. 




POLITICAL AFFAIRS AND 
NATIONALISM 

105. Adam, Thomas R. Government and politics in 
Africa, south of the Sahara. Revised and en¬ 
larged edition. New York, Random House, 
1962. 185 p. (Studies in political science, 

PS28) JQ1872.A33 

Includes bibliography. 

This handy booklet, now in its second edition (1st 
1959), is by a political scientist at New York Univer¬ 
sity, and is slanted toward scholastic use. The concise 
summary of political history and current situation is 
brought up to mid-1961. There are for this edition 
two appendixes, one of party organization in countries 
of French expression, one of political status, area, pop¬ 
ulation, and education in all countries of sub-Saharan 
Africa. 


106. African one-party states, edited by Gwendolen M. 

Carter. Contributors, Charles F. Gallagher, 
Ernest Milcent, L. Gray Cowan, Virginia 
Thompson, J. Gus Liebenow, and Margaret 
L. Bates. Ithaca, New York, Cornell Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1962. 501 p. DT30.A38 

Includes bibliographies. 

Substantial, authoritative summaries of political 
backgrounds of six African countries which have de¬ 
veloped one-party governments: Tunisia, Senegal, 
Guinea, the Ivory Coast, Liberia, and Tanganyika, by 
one French and five American specialists. Especially 
useful because the countries were selected partly be¬ 
cause of paucity of available information. The book 
is reviewed in the March 1963 issue of Africa Report. 

107. Baulin, Jacques. The Arab role in Africa. 

Baltimore, Penguin Books, 1962. 143 p. illus. 
(Penguin African library, AP6) DT176.B3 

By a French journalist who has specialized in Arab 
problems, this is a serious study of relationships between 
Arab Africa and Africa south of the Sahara. The 
special focus is the Casablanca group and the efforts 
of Nasser for Pan-African unity and Egyptian influ¬ 
ence. Reviewed in Africa Report of December 1962. 

108. Carter, Gwendolen M. Independence for 

Africa. New York, Praeger, 1960. 172 p. 

illus. (Books that matter) DT31.C33 

Includes bibliography. 

An illuminating introduction to the changing polit¬ 
ical scene in the new Africa. Dr. Carter, a professor 
of political science at Smith College and one of Amer¬ 
ica’s leading Africanists (see her The Politics of In¬ 
equality, no. 1806), bases her survey on a recent trip 
in which she had observed at first hand the interactions 
between the many rival groups and factions of Africans, 
and, in Central and East Africa, of Asians and Euro¬ 
peans, in the countries approaching independence. 

109. Chisiza, Dunduzu Kaluli. Africa—what lies 

ahead. New York, The African-American In¬ 
stitute, 1962. 64 p. (Occasional papers) 

DLC-AFR 

The first of a new pamphlet series, to be written 
principally by Africans. The author, a Nyasaland 
leader who functioned brilliantly as Parliamentary 
Secretary to the Ministry of Finance of his country 
until his tragic death in an automobile accident in late 
1962, expounded lucidly and simply what he con¬ 
sidered the chief and lasting problems facing the new 
states. These he grouped as secular and religious; in 


23 













the first he treated political problems, leadership, social 
and economic problems. The second is concerned 
chiefly with indifference to religion, which the writer 
considered “a continent-wide phenomenon which de¬ 
serves to rank as one of the major social problems of 
Africa.” The booklet is reviewed at length by F. 
Taylor Ostrander in Africa Report of August 1962. 

110. Coleman, James S. “Politics of sub-Saharan 

Africa.” In Almond, Gabriel A., and James 
S. Coleman, eds. The politics of the develop¬ 
ing areas. Princeton, N.J., Princeton Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1960: p. 247-368. JF31.A53 

In a volume of comparative analysis of political sys¬ 
tems in Asia, Africa, and Latin America, the essay on 
African politics by the coauthor, Professor Coleman, 
is focused on the great diversity of African traditional 
and evolving political systems and on the racial and 
tribal pluralism which complicates the establishment 
of new governments. He does not find that these 
factors will necessarily retard the building of unified 
nations, nor that they are necessarily unhealthy. 
Rather, “it could be argued that such a rich pluralism 
[of tribes within a state] makes dictatorship less likely 
by providing countervailing power centers which can¬ 
not be coerced into a single authoritarian system.” 
His discussion is illustrated with notable tables of pop¬ 
ulation, degree of commercialization, political groups, 
party strengths, types of elites, etc. 

111. Coleman, James S., and Belmont Brice, Jr. 

“The role of the military in sub-Saharan 
Africa.” In Johnson, John J., ed. The role 
of the military in underdeveloped countries. 
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 
1962: p. 359-405. U21.5.J6 

Published also by African Studies Center, University of 
California at Los Angeles as its African studies paper no. 3. 

The volume in which this paper appears results from 
a RAND Corporation conference of August 1959, 
revised with data through 1960. The authors of the 
paper for Africa examine the military legacy of the 
colonial powers and the national military situation, 
buildup, and policies in the new nations. Reviewed 
in Africa Report , July 1962. 

112. Duffy, James, and Robert A. Manners, eds. 

Africa speaks. Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand, 
1961. 223 p. DT30.D8 

For this compilation the editors obtained from about 
twenty eminent African and European spokesmen es¬ 
says giving their views on the present and future of 
Africa in general, or in regard to their particular re¬ 


gions or subjects. The collection, they feel, expresses 
in essence the conflicts and aspirations of Africa south 
of the Sahara, which “cannot be written simply in 
terms of nationalism and colonialism.” In all, “change 
itself is inevitably stressed, and the direction of the 
change is towards freedom of the new and gestating 
African nations to choose their own way and to make 
their own mistakes.” Sections are “The Independence 
of Africa” (by Mboya, Nyerere, Sekou Toure, and 
Nkrumah); “The Problems of Freedom” (in Ghana, 
Togo, and the former Belgian Congo, including papers 
by Olympio and Lumumba); “Africa in Transition” 
(Tanganyika, Kenya, the Central African Federa¬ 
tion) ; “An Antique Colonialism” (Portuguese Africa, 
by Henrique Galvao); and “Union of South Africa.” 
This last shows strikingly the impasse in South Africa; 
the three papers are by Ruth First, leader of the South 
African National Congress, M. D. C. de Wet Nel, the 
Minister of Bantu Administration and Development 
(to whom “The essence of the apartheid policy is . . . 
to imbue the Bantu with a spirit of independence and 
self-help . . .”), and an essay written just before the 
Sharpeville riots by Ronald Segal, then editor of 
Africa South, “The Free World’s Other Face.” 

113. Emerson, Rupert. From empire to nation; the 

rise to self-assertion of Asian and African peo¬ 
ples. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 
1960. 466 p. JC311.E49 

Includes bibliography. 

This book by a professor of international relations at 
Harvard, known for studies of African as well as Asian 
politics, begins on the decline of imperialism and the 
rise of nationalism with historical background. The 
author then analyzes brilliantly the elements of race, 
culture, and economic interest that lead to national¬ 
ism, the relationship of nationalism to democracy, and 
the difficulties of self-determination in plural societies. 
In the last part he reviews main causes and events of 
recent history in the emerging states, and considers the 
problems of bringing the new societies into the mod¬ 
ern and, to be hoped, the free world. 

114. Favrod, Charles Henri. UAfrique seule. 

Paris, Editions du Seuil, 1961. 255 p. 

DT30.F3 

In this book, written 3 years after his travel narra¬ 
tive (see no. 35n) M. Favrod analyzed objectively 
recent political developments of Black Africa, rather 
particularly West Africa, with emphasis on Guinea 
and Ghana, in vivid and unusual style. His chapters 
are in terms of the categories of African elite, to whom 


24 


the destinies of the new countries must be trusted, 
“The Jurist” (Toure’s efforts to win independence and 
yet remain in the Community), “The Chief,” “The 
Townsman,” “The Salaried Man,” “The Fighter,” 
“The Business Man,” “The Planner.” He shows ex¬ 
tensive familiarity with recent political and economic 
studies as well as with the usual tools of journalism. 

115. Hodgkin, Thomas. Nationalism in colonial 

Africa. London, F. Muller, 1956. 216 p. 

illus. DT31.H56 

116. - African political parties, an introductory 

guide. Harmondsworth, Middlesex, Penguin 
Books, 1961. 217 p. (Penguin African series, 
WA 12) JQ1879.A795H6 

With the first named of these works the author, who 
had been writing and lecturing on adult education and 
African affairs, acquired the reputation of a foremost 
authority on the politics of the developing countries of 
Africa. He had been carrying on investigations in what 
was then French West Africa and the Belgian Congo as 
well as in the British possessions, and in this book made 
use of extensive study of French, English, and other 
sources on African politics, sociology, and history. He 
compared in tabular form the self-contradictions of 
French, British, and Belgian policies, examined the 
institutions of African nationalism and the ideologies 
behind them, and foresaw accurately what would be 
the results of the chain reactions of nationalism in the 
territories then considered calm in their colonial status. 
African Political Parties, issued in paperback, is a con¬ 
cise and valuable guide, sketching the setting, the 
origins, the types of political parties, party organiza¬ 
tions, activities, and objectives, with a conclusion of 
generalized “hypotheses” regarding them. A bibli¬ 
ography of sources is followed by an appendix listing 
the major parties from 1945 to 1960. The book was 
reviewed by Harvey Glickman in Africa Report, v. 7, 
April 1962, p. 19-22. In 1962 Dr. Hodgkin went to 
the University of Ghana in Legon to head a new pro¬ 
gram of African studies. 

117. International Affairs. [Africa] London. 

1960. p. 423^94. JX1.I53, v. 36 

Special issue, v. 36, Oct. 1960. 

This issue of the quarterly of the Royal Institute of 
International Affairs contains a group of articles by 
experts on African political and governmental affairs. 
The contributions are: “Frontiers in Africa,” by C. E. 
Carrington; “Economic Aspects of Political Independ¬ 
ence in Africa,” by S. Herbert Frankel; “Social 
Change in Africa,” by L. P. Mair; “Multi-Racialism 


in Africa,” by Gwendolen M. Carter; “African Na¬ 
tionalism in East and Central Africa,” by B. T. G. 
Chidzero; “The New Africa and the United Nations,” 
by Sir Andrew Cohen; “New Lamps for Old: Review 
article on Kenneth Younger’s ‘The Public Service in 
New States’,” by Hugh Tinker. 

Two recent issues of the American monthly of world affairs, 
Current History, have also been devoted to surveys of political 
movements in Africa: “Changing Africa,” February 1961 
(v. 40: 65-110), and “Africa: a New Nationalism,” October 
1961 (v. 41: 193-239). The issue of July 1959 had also 
been on “New States of Africa” (the former French West 
and Equatorial Africa). 

118. Jackson, Barbara Ward. Five ideas that 

change the world. New York, Published for 
the University College of Ghana by Norton, 
1959. 188 p. JC311.J24 

In a series of brilliant popular lectures at the Uni¬ 
versity College of Ghana, Barbara Ward of the London 
Economist analyzed nationalism, industrialism, coloni¬ 
alism, communism and internationalism as the power¬ 
ful forces of the present age. Her lucid picture of the 
world complex included an appeal to the small “un¬ 
committed” nations, notably those whose preoccupa¬ 
tion is anti-colonialism, to follow a policy of neutrality 
which, rather than playing off the great power blocs 
against one another, would take what she calls “a truly 
positive approach” to world order under the rule of 
law. 

119. The Journal of modern African studies; a quar¬ 

terly survey of politics, economics and related 
topics in contemporary Africa. To be edited 
by David and Helen Kimble. Cambridge 
[Eng.] University Press. 

Advance notice in mid-1962. 

“Interest will centre on the present, not on the more 
distant past.the aim will be to bring to¬ 

gether the best current work on a wide and important 
range of related subjects that have not hitherto found 
a common published forum.” Articles to be 3,000 to 
6,000 words, occasionally 10,000. 128 pages per issue. 

The journal will be concerned not only with academic 
studies and specialist interests, but also with pro¬ 
moting more informed general discussion of contem¬ 
porary African affairs. Editorial policy will avoid 
commitment to any political viewpoint or ideology. 
The only comparable journal is Cahiers d’etudes af- 
ricaines (Paris, ficole pratique des hautes etudes, 
Sorbonne. 6e section; sciences economiques et so- 
ciales, 1960+) 


25 



120. Legum, Colin. Pan-Africanism; a short polit¬ 

ical guide. London, Pall Mall Press, 1962. 
296 p. map. DT30.L39 1962 b 

Bibliography: p. 279-285 

By the well-known expert on Africa of the London 
Observer , this masterly explanation of the ideas and 
programs of Pan-Africanism is expanded from the 
1961 Annual Address of the Africa Bureau, delivered 
by Mr. Legum. Pan-Africanism, he asserts, is not a 
declaration of political principles, but essentially a 
“movement of ideas and emotions,” its fullest expres¬ 
sion the “casting aside by Africans of subservience to 
foreign masters in all forms, and their confident as¬ 
sertion that African interests are paramount.” He ex¬ 
amines emotional roots, citing many fervent expres¬ 
sions in poetry of negritude, then summarizes the his¬ 
tory of the movement from the first Congress in 1900, 
its growth abroad and its return to Africa in the newly 
independent states, the African regroupings since in¬ 
dependence, the conflicting attitudes toward East and 
West, and the political concepts which involve pri¬ 
marily nonalinement and the “African personality.” 
A chapter on trade unions, “Africa’s Divided Work¬ 
ers,” is contributed by Mrs. Legum. About half the 
text, which the author calls the most useful part, con¬ 
sists of an appendix of documents, containing 25 major 
texts of Pan-Africanism. 

121. Mackenzie, William J. M. and Kenneth Rob¬ 

inson, eds. Five elections in Africa; a group 
of electoral studies. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 
1960. 496 p. illus., maps. JQ1879.A5M3 

Bibliographical footnotes. 

A set of analytical papers, edited by, respectively, a 
Professor of Government at the University of Man¬ 
chester, and the Director of the Institute of Common¬ 
wealth Studies at the University of London. The 
pioneer elections examined, all orderly beyond ex¬ 
pectation, are those of the Western Region of Nigeria 
in 1956, the Eastern Region in 1957, Sierra Leone in 
1957, Senegal in 1957, and African elections in Kenya 
in March 1957. The papers are by Dr. Philip Whit¬ 
aker and G. F. Engholm of the University College of 
East Africa (Makerere), J. H. Price of the University 
College of Ghana, D. J. R. Scott of Manchester, and 
Professor Robinson (on Senegal). In a chapter of 
conclusions Professor Mackenzie discusses the way in 
which the electoral system, a characteristically West¬ 
ern device, can and should be adapted to African 
society. 

The same theme is treated in broader context by T. E. 
Smith in his Elections in Developing Countries; A Study of 


Electoral Procedures Used in Tropical Africa, South-east Asia 
and the British Caribbean (London, Macmillan; New York, 
St. Martins Press, 1960. 278 p.). 

122. Macmillan, William M. The road to self-rule; 

a study in colonial evolution. London, Faber 
and Faber, 1959. 296 p. JV1062.M25 

An historical study of the process of change from 
colonial rule to independent government, by a leading 
historian who after many years at the University of 
Witwatersrand in his native South Africa had been 
from 1947-54 Director of Colonial Studies at the Uni¬ 
versity of St. Andrews. His primary attention is to 
African evolution, though he begins with general fac¬ 
tors, “a preliminary glance at America, which set a bad 
example,” and a chapter on the West Indies where he 
had recently been a visiting professor. He then limits 
his examination to British Africa, from “The Rule of 
Law at the Cape of Good Hope” to the new patterns, 
in which government has become “The Black Man’s 
Burden.” The book ends with a warning to the new 
rulers that, though they feel themselves successful lead¬ 
ers of a revolution, “in fact the revolution has hardly 
yet begun,” and the task of building nations out of the 
disparate elements of elite and masses, new urban cen¬ 
ters and “bush,” is yet to be accomplished. 

123. Padmore, George. Pan-Africanism or commu¬ 

nism? The coming struggle for Africa. New 

York, Roy Publishers, 1956. 463 p. illus. 

DT31.P3 

Standard work on the history of Pan-Africanism by 
the late West Indian journalist and politician who from 
his London headquarters was the councilor and friend 
of all nationalist leaders of English-speaking Africa. 
This book is a straightforward account of nationalist 
movements in West Africa, East and Central Africa, 
and Liberia, and of the Pan-African movement, its 
launching by the American Negro leader W. E. B. 
Dubois, its international congresses, and leaders in 
the individual countries who follow its aims. Pad- 
more also traced the history of Communist attempts 
to influence African movements, exposing the policy 
as false and cynical. Although in general advocating 
all forms of African nationalism, even, despite its ter¬ 
rorism, Mau Mau, he credited the empirical system 
of British “imperialism” with being more workable 
than that of other colonial powers. 

A recent quick survey of this subject in French is by Phi¬ 
lippe Decraene, Le pan-africanisme (Paris, Presses universi- 
taires de France, 1959. “Que sais-je”). A translation, 
Panafricanism, was issued in the Penguin Book series, Har- 
mondsworth, England, in 1961. 


26 







124. Panikkar, K. Madhu. Revolution in Africa. 

New York, Asia Pub. House, 1961. 202 p. 

DT30.P3 

Study by a young Indian political scientist, who 
writes of nationalism and the rise of the new states in 
Africa from an anticolonial viewpoint. Following his 
appraisal of political patterns, pan-Africanism, and 
efforts of East and West to control Africa’s natural 
resources, he devotes the last third of his book to a 
sympathetic case study of Guinea, likening Toure to 
Nehru. Mr. Panikkar is the son of Kavalam Mad- 
hava Panikkar, former Ambassador of India to China 
and Egypt, and now Ambassador to France, whose 
lectures at the Sorbonne in 1957 on Afro-Asian States 
and their Problems were published by the John Day 
Co., New York (1960. 104 p.). Like his son he em¬ 
phasized nonalinement and antineocolonialism. 

125. The Political economy of contemporary Africa. 

by Immanuel Wallerstein, David E. Apter, 
Carl G. Rosberg, Edward Marcus. Washing¬ 
ton, National Institute of Social and Behavioral 
Science, George Washington University, 1960. 
24 p. (Symposia series no. 1) 

Four articles by American specialists in African po¬ 
litical and social sciences, analyzing the general pat¬ 
terns and concepts for African society. Wallerstein 
discusses “Evolving Patterns of African Society,” Apter 
and Rosberg set forth their theories of nationalism, 
and models of political change (see other works by 
these two writers), and Marcus outlines succinctly ob¬ 
stacles to economic growth. 

126. Rothchild, Donald S. Toward unity in Africa; 

a study of federalism in British Africa. Fore¬ 
word by Gwendolen Carter. Washington, 
Public Affairs Press, 1960. 224 p. DT32.R6 

Includes bibliography. 

Expanded from a doctoral dissertation, this is a 
study of efforts to solve racial and regional differences 
in nation-building by means of a federal constitution 
in Nigeria and Central Africa, and the economic and 
social steps toward that end in East Africa. 

127. Segal, Ronald. Political Africa; a who’s who 

of personalities and parties [by] Ronald Segal 
in collaboration with Catherine Hoskyns [and] 
Rosalynde Ainslie. New York, Praeger, 1961. 
475 p. (Books that matter) DT18.S4 

This is by far the most useful and comprehensive 
biographical directory as yet available. The author 
was editor of the now defunct Africa South in Exile; 
he admits in the preface that his information is more 


complete for South Africa, Kenya, and Nigeria than 
for former French Africa and other territories where 
contacts were scanty. The first 288 pages contain 
biographical sketches in alphabetical order, varying 
in length from a short paragraph to two or three pages. 
The subjects are all political figures; scholars and 
literary men are included only if, like Professor Z. K. 
Matthews of Fort Hare University, or the Malagasy 
poet Jacques Rabemananjara, they are also concerned 
in political life. The second part of the book, pages 
291-475, is a country-by-country report on political 
parties, their actions and status. In some cases infor¬ 
mation is given into 1961. A condensed version, Af¬ 
rican Profiles, has been published in the paperback 
Penguin African Library (Baltimore, Penguin Books, 
1962. 352 p.). 

Two other recent books are collections of biographical 
sketches of African leaders, limited, however, to the most 
prominent—Haile Selassie, Nkrumah, Mboya, Nyerere, Seng- 
hor, Sekou Toure, Tubman, Houphouet-Boigny, etc.—Rolf 
Italiaander’s The New Leaders of Africa (Englewood Cliffs, 
N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1961. 306 p. Translated from the 

German), and Thomas P. Melady’s Profiles of African Lead¬ 
ers (New York, Macmillan, 1961. 186 p.). A bimonthly 

Dossier on Tropical Africa in looseleaf form, published by 
Raymond Lefevre in Paris, is so largely focused on French- 
speaking Africa that it is noticed in the regional section 
(no. 867). 

128. Shepherd, George W. The politics of African 

nationalism; challenge to American policy. 
New York, Praeger, 1962. 244 p. illus. 

(Books that matter) DT30.S5 

Includes bibliography. 

Reviewed by St. Clair Drake in Africa Report of 
January 1963, together with Legum’s Pan-Africanism 
(no. 120) and Pannikar (no. 124). 

129. Spiro, Herbert J. Politics in Africa: prospects 

south of the Sahara. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 
Prentice-Hall, 1962. 183 p. (A Spectrum 

book) JQ1872.S65 

Paperbound volume by a political scientist at Am¬ 
herst, analyzing the present political scene first on the 
international level, then by region. The book is re¬ 
viewed together with half-a-dozen others of the same 
general description by Harvey Glickman in Africa 
Report , April 1962, p. 21-22. 

130. Symposium on Africa, Wellesley College, 1960. 

Symposium on Africa. Wellesley, Mass., Wel¬ 
lesley College, 1960. 163 p. DT23.S9 1960 

A set of papers on a high level of authoritativeness, 
delivered at five sessions. The first group, “Does ‘Af- 


692 - 756 — 63 - 


27 


rica’ Exist,” with Ralph J. Bunche as moderator, had 
as participants the Ambassador of Morocco, El-Mahdi 
Ben Aboud, Professors Herskovits, Hance, and Carter. 
Julia J. Henderson of United Nations Economic and 
Social Council was moderator of the second, “Chang¬ 
ing Political Status,” with addresses by Professor Harry 
Rudin of Yale and Mr. Rodrigues, charge d’affaires 
of the French Community. Dr. William O. Brown 
was moderator of the third panel, on “Colonial In¬ 
heritance,” with speeches by Mr. Duncan of the British 
Information Service and Mr. Essafi of Tunisia. The 
fourth, “After Independence What?” was moderated 
by Professor Rupert Emerson, with talks by the Hon. 
Garfield Todd of Southern Rhodesia, Professor An¬ 
drew Kamarck, and Mr. C. Vaughan Ferguson of 
the Department of State. The final address, “Africa’s 
Place in the World,” was by Julius Nyerere of 
Tanganyika. 

131. Wallerstein, Immanuel M. Africa: the pol¬ 

itics of independence; an interpretation of 
modem African history. New York, Vintage 
Books. 1961. 173 p. (A Vintage original, 

V-206) DT30.W33 

Dr. Wallerstein of the Department of Sociology at 
Columbia University has specialized in studies of 
French-speaking Africa. In this book for the general 
reader—which he speaks of as an “essay” rather than 
a full-scale study—he examines first ways by which 
colonial governments brought about social change 
and conflict, then the ways in which the social struc¬ 
tures of the new states are evolving toward viable 
forms of political and economic cohesion. He gen¬ 
eralizes about the continent as a whole rather than 
describing individual states. The work is reviewed by 
Harvey Glickman in Africa Report, April 1962, p. 
20 - 21 . 

THE RACE QUESTION 

132. Akademila Nauk SSSR. Institut vostokove- 

deniia. Rasovaia diskriminatsim v. stranakh 
Afriki [Sbornik statei] Moskva, Izd-vo vost. 
lit., 1960. 255 p. DT15.A46 

Includes bibliography. 

“Racial discrimination in the African countries; a 
collection of articles.” This publication of the In¬ 
stitute for Eastern Studies brings together a group of 
statements of the Soviet “anti-imperialist” argument 
for propaganda purposes in Africa. 


133. Broomfield, Gerald W. The chosen people; 

or, the Bible, Christianity and race. London, 
New York, Longmans, Green, 1954. 91 p. 

HT1561.B7 

The Secretary of the Universities’ Mission to Cen¬ 
tral Africa had compared the South African racial 
situation to the Hitlerian doctrine of the Herrenvolk 
in a book of 1944, Colour Conflict. In this later work 
he approached the race issue from the standpoint of 
what the Bible and Christian teaching imply regard¬ 
ing racial relationships: “. . . not only aggressive ac¬ 
tion, but even the desire of any nation or race to 
dominate others ... is an offense against God.” He 
talked simply of the application in multiracial coun¬ 
tries of Christian unity, understanding, and trust, go¬ 
ing deeply into the question of social relationships. 

134. Burns, Sir Alan C. Colour prejudice, with 

particular reference to the relationship between 
whites and Negroes. London, G. Allen & 
Unwin, 1948. 164 p. HT1521.B85 

The writer was a permanent British representative 
on the Trusteeship Council of U.N. from 1947-56, his 
previous job as governor of Nigeria being terminated 
in 1947 with the adoption of the greatly liberalized 
Constitution of that year, known as the “Bums Con¬ 
stitution.” In this book he examined carefully the 
relationships between whites and Negroes in Africa, 
America and elsewhere, quoting largely from the ex¬ 
tensive literature on the subject published in the 
United States and South Africa. He commented in 
the introduction on “the curious failure of the edu¬ 
cated Negro to appreciate fully the advantage of 
British rule.” He refuted any argument of African 
racial inferiority; “The lack of achievement by Negroes 
in the past is atttributable to conditions over which 
they had no control [climate, disease, isolation, etc.] 
and their present low position in the scale of civiliza¬ 
tion is due to the short period during which they have 
had contact with the outside world and the advantages 
of education.” 

135. Campbell, Alexander. The heart of Africa. 

New York, Knopf, 1954. 487 p. illus. 

DT31.C3 

By a Scottish newspaperman who had gone out to 
South Africa in the late thirties and worked successively 
for a small local British newspaper, for the Johannes¬ 
burg Star, and as correspondent for Time and Life, 
this narrative is vivid reporting on postwar Africa. In 
1952-53 Mr. Campbell had covered stirring events— 


28 






Mau Mau in Kenya, federation in Central Africa, 
struggles toward self-government in Nigeria and the 
Gold Coast. His book takes in also earlier travels and 
wide experience of South Africa and the Rhodesias. 
He writes largely of what he saw and what important 
and unimportant people told him—his underlying 
interpretations stressing the inevitability as well as the 
ironies and tragedies of change. His story begins and 
ends with “the root of the evil, for white and black 
alike . . . the color bar.” A reviewer in the London 
Times Literary Supplement (Mar. 4, 1955, p. 127) 
contrasts it with Van der Post (no. 143) as being the 
extrovert as opposed to the introvert expression of the 
racial issue. 

136. Gann, Lewis H., and Peter Duignan. White 

settlers in tropical Africa. Baltimore, Penguin 

Books, 1962. 169 p. (Penguin Africa series, 
WA 13) DT365.G3 

An argument for the subordination of the racial to 
the economic factor in future development of a multi¬ 
racial society. The writers begin with historical back¬ 
ground and a reasoned evaluation of patterns of race 
relations, then analyze motivations of Black national¬ 
ism, and in a long chapter state the white man’s case. 
They claim that the job is “to contain conflict [between 
the races] within a peaceful framework which will per¬ 
mit of continued economic progress.” The book is re¬ 
viewed in Africa Report, May 1962. Its scope is gen¬ 
eral for Southern and Eastern Africa, though much of 
the detail relates to the Federation of Rhodesia and 
Nyasaland. 

137. The Institute of Rage Relations, London. 

Newsletter, no. 1+ Jan. 1961+ London. 

monthly. DLC 

A monthly booklet summarizing events in race rela¬ 
tions throughout the world, and particularly in Africa, 
and Britain. The Institute publishes also a semiannual 
journal, Race (v. 1, no. 1+ Nov. 1959+, printed by 
Oxford University Press), and occasional pamphlets 
on race questions. 

138. Kondapi, C. Indians overseas, 1838-1949. New 

Delhi, Indian Council of World Affairs, 1951. 

558 p. DS432.5.K65 

Bibliography: p. 535-542. 

Among practical works on specific race questions 
is this scholarly research study by the Assistant Secre¬ 
tary of the Indian Council of World Affairs, covering 
the entire field of Indian emigration which is of par¬ 
ticular importance in East and Southern Africa. 


139. Lomax, Louis E. The reluctant African. New 

York, Harper, 1960. 117 p. illus. 

DT15.L65 

By an American Negro journalist who visited Africa 
in 1960, going by way of Cairo to the Second Confer¬ 
ence of Independent African States in Addis Ababa 
in June 1960, then visiting African leaders above¬ 
ground in Nairobi, underground in Salisbury, and for 
a tense 24 hours in Johannesburg. His pithy report 
conveys his own sense of horror at racism, both black 
and white. American foreign service officers he found 
helpless, “laced to their swivel chairs watching the 
greatest freedom explosion in human history occur in 
an anti-American, anti white, anticapitalist, anti-West¬ 
ern context.” 

140. Mason, Philip. Common sense about race. 

London, Gollancz, 1961. 173 p. (The Com¬ 
mon sense series) GN320. M35 

Mr. Mason, formerly a high official in the Indian 
Civil Service, is Director of the Institute of Race Re¬ 
lations. Since 1952, when studies of race relations 
were begun under his direction at Chatham House, 
he has been a foremost spokesman on the subject. In 
1954 his Essay on Racial Tension (London, New York, 
Royal Institute of International Affairs. 149 p.), 
aired provocatively the main lines of recent theory on 
the race question in general, then examined the par¬ 
ticular aspect in South Africa. In 1956 his talk on 
Christianity and Race (at Leeds University; New York, 
St. Martin’s Press, 1957. 174 p.) was published in the 

Burroughs memorial lectures, and his Burge memorial 
lecture, on Race Relations in Africa, Considered 
against the Background of History and World Opinion 
was printed by the SCM Press (London, 1960. 24 p.). 
The book of 1961, in a notable series on important 
questions for the general reader, is largely in theoreti¬ 
cal terms. Mr. Mason considers and refutes arguments 
of racial differentiation and/or inferiority on physical 
and mental grounds, using authoritative evidence of 
biology, genetics, intelligence testing, and other socio- 
psychological methods. In his examination of race 
relations rising from “Conquest and Fusion,” he uses 
specific instances of African societies, notably the “clas¬ 
sical example” of an insoluble dilemma in South 
Africa. He finds that the ultimate cause of racialism is 
“the simple fact that a group who have special sources 
of wealth or power are reluctant to share them.” A 
selected bibliography cites the most valuable literature 
of past and present on racism. 


29 


141. Richmond, Anthony H. The colour problem, 

a study of racial relations. Rev. ed. Balti¬ 
more, Penguin Books, 1961. 374 p. (A Pelican 

book, A328) JV1037.R5 1961 

Discussion of the social aspects of race conflicts, 
beginning with a general analysis of race prejudice, 
discrimination, and segregration, then considering the 
political background in British Africa and the British 
West Indies, and the situation in separate places— 
the Union of South Africa, the crisis areas in Kenya 
and other British dependencies, the West Indies, 
among Negro groups in England. The writer suggests 
a program to solve race tensions through the universal 
application of the principles of human rights. 

142. Sithole, Ndabaningi. African nationalism. 

With a foreword by R. S. Garfield Todd. Cape 
Town, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1959. 174 p. DT31.S55 

By a Matabele who became a Methodist preacher, 
this discursive, oversimplified, and intensely personal 
view of the racial situation in general and in Southern 
Africa in particular is characterized by a reviewer (in 
African Affairs, April 1960) as “acute, innocent and 
maddening.” The book was written in America, 
where Mr. Sithole took a degree. He is concerned to 
explain to Americans the reasons for African national¬ 
ism—“white supremacy is a stubborn rejection of the 
African by the white man, and . . . African na¬ 
tionalism is a reaction to that rejection.” He talks of 
the part played by the Church, of European miscon¬ 
ceptions about Africans (he selects Cloete’s African 
Giant as typical of misleading writing), why Africans 
will not be Communists, and why to Africans of today 
the “myth of white superiority” has been exploded. 

143. Van der Post, Laurens. The dark eye in 

Africa. New York, Morrow, 1955. 224 p. 

DT15.V3 

Colonel Van der Post is known as an inspirational 
writer with deep insight into the African mind. This 
is a lecture given before a combined meeting of the 
C. J. Jung Institute and the Psychological Club of 
Zurich in March 1954, with the title, “Mata Kelap, or, 
the Appearance of the Dark Eye in Africa: a Talk on 
the Invisible Origins of African Unrest.” The argu¬ 
ment, in somewhat metaphysical language, is in part 
that Western man is “neglecting all manner of in¬ 
visible and imponderable values in his own life, and 
therefore ignoring them in the lives of those . . . with 
whom he is thrown in contact. These factors sooner 
or later combine in rebellion against him.” Following 


the speech there was discussion, much of it turning on 
Mau Mau and other critical racial issues. Colonel 
Van der Post emphasized that the European, while 
bringing economic well-being to the African, has not 
brought “the light that is in the eye ... of a human 
being when he looks at another human being he loves 
and respects as an equal.” 

144. Weulersse, Jacques. Noirs et blancs; a travers 

PAfrique nouvelle: de Dakar au Cap. Paris, 

Libr. A. Colin, 1931. 238 p. DT12.W45 
A striking study by a young French university pro¬ 
fessor whose observations during his trip through West 
Africa, the Congo, Angola, and South Africa had been 
centered on race aspects of relations between Africans 
and European colonists. This and a later book by 
M. Weulersse, L’Afrique noire (Paris, Fayard, 1934. 
484 p.), a synthesis of history and economic geography, 
are considered among the most significant works of 
that era. 

145. Wright, Richard. White man, listen! Garden 

City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957. 190 p. 

HT1581.W7 

The American Negro novelist’s passionate book on 
the wrongs of the white race against the black is dedi¬ 
cated to “the Westernized and tragic elite of Asia, 
Africa, and the West Indies.” The “explosive,” 
“blatantly unacademic” text reproduces four lectures: 
“The Psychological Reactions of Oppressed People,” 
“Tradition and Industrialization,” “The Literature of 
the Negro in the United States,” and “The Miracle of 
Nationalism in the African Gold Coast.” In all ex¬ 
cept the third there is emphasis on the horrors that 
transpire “in those geographical prisons known as 
colonies.” 

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 
General 

146. Africa and international organization, edited by 

Norman J. Padelford and Rupert Emerson. 

International organization, v. 15, Spring 1962: 
275^64. JX1901.I55. v. 15 

Bibliography (classified by subject): p. 449-464. 

This special issue of the quarterly of the World 
Peace Foundation is a useful guide to the political 
groupings of Africa in the present-day world (data to 
mid-1961). It contains articles by Professor Emerson 
on Pan-Africanism, by John Holmes on the Common¬ 
wealth and Africa, by Stanley Hoffmann on the U.N. 


30 


in the Congo, by Paul-Marc Henry on the U.N. and 
African development problems, on Africa at the U.N. 
by John H. Spencer, and a review of African unifica¬ 
tion movements, by E. H. Kloman. The last named 
explains succinctly groupings of Casablanca and Mon¬ 
rovia powers, the All-African Conferences and Confer¬ 
ences of Independent African States, the All-African 
Trade Union Federation and the rival African Trade 
Union Federation, the Afro-Malagasy Organization, 
etc. It includes a table of participation of African 
groupings in major organizations and conferences. 
This article is supplemented by a helpful summary of 
the political and regional groupings prepared by Carol 
A. Johnson, who is also responsible for the selected 
bibliography which includes sections of references on 
these groupings. The collection of articles has been 
brought out in book form by Praeger with the title, 
Africa and World Order (New York, 1963. 152 p.). 

Individual conferences are noticed in many of the African 
news journals. A useful chronological record of all meetings 
is included in Chronologie politique africaine, bimonthly 
publication issued by the Centre d’Etude des Relations In¬ 
ternationales of the Fondation Nationale des Sciences Poli- 
tiques in Paris. A comprehensive listing of scheduled meet¬ 
ings is given each month in the Library of Congress publi¬ 
cation, World List of Future International Meetings. 

147. Kahin, George MgT. The Asian-African con¬ 
ference, Bandung, Indonesia, April 1955. 
Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1956. 88 p. 

DS35.A8 1955c 

The final communique of the Bandung Conference, 
a conspicuous clause of which condemned racialism 
and colonialism “in whatever form it may be,” is in¬ 
cluded in one of the appendixes to this objective re¬ 
view of the meeting. The writer summarized back¬ 
ground, key issues, proceedings and political achieve¬ 
ments of the Conference, including partial texts of 
several speeches. African nations represented at 
Bandung were Egypt, Ethiopia, the Gold Coast, Li¬ 
beria, Libya; the Central African Federation, though 
invited, did not attend. The issue of racialism and 
colonialism was raised particularly in connection with 
North Africa and the Union of South Africa. 

A less objective picture of the Bandung Conference was 
given by the American Negro author, Richard Wright, in 
Color Curtain (New York, World Pub., 1956. 221 p.). It 
may be balanced by two lectures delivered at the University 
of North Carolina by the Philippine delegate to the Con¬ 
ference, Carlos P. Romulo, The Meaning of Bandung (Chapel 
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1956. 102 p.). Mr. 
Romulo emphasized the expression of opposition to com¬ 
munism at Bandung. 


148. Legum, Colin. Bandung, Cairo and Accra; a 

report on the First Conference of Independent 

African States. London, Africa Bureau, 1958. 
32 p. illus. DT1.C58 1958c 

Report of the first Conference of Independent Afri¬ 
can States, Accra, April 1958, by the London Observer 
expert on Africa. For a full register and bibliography 
of this and other political inter-African conferences 
see Africa and International Organizations (no. 146). 

149. McKay, Vernon. Africa in world politics. 

New York, Harper, 1963. 468 p. DT30.M24 
“List of sources”: p. 429^454. 

By the Director of the Program of African Studies 
at the Johns Hopkins School of Advanced Interna¬ 
tional Studies. Professor McKay speaks of his study 
of African relations with the outside world as “essen¬ 
tially a narrative of contemporary history since 1945.” 
Its four parts deal with the impact of the United Na¬ 
tions on Africa, Pan-African, Afro-Asian, and Eurafri- 
can movements, African relations with India and the 
Soviet Union, and American policy in Africa. The 
book is scheduled for review in Africa Report in 1963. 

150. Oakes, John B. The edge of freedom. New 

York, Harper, 1961. 129 p. illus. DT353.02 
A journalist’s appraisal of the attitudes in inter¬ 
national politics in the evolving states of Africa 
(Guinea, Mali and Senegal, Ghana, Nigeria, 
Cameroon, French Africa, Congo, Rhodesia, East 
Africa) and Asia, with particular stress on neutralism 
and authoritarianism. With these trends, he argues, 
America must be sympathetic, rather than to press for 
Western-style democracy. Mr. Oakes is an editor of 
the New York Times. 

151. Rivkin, Arnold. Africa and the West; elements 

of free world policy. New York, F. A. Praeger, 
1962. 241 p. DT30.R5 

Dr. Rivkin of the Center for International Studies 
at Massachusetts Institute of Technology, now Special 
Advisor on Africa to the World Bank, brings together 
in this book the results of four years’ research and 
many published articles on problems of African eco¬ 
nomic and political development. After examination 
of the African and Western perspectives, including the 
uncertain ties with the European Economic Com¬ 
munity, the United States policy, and the new factor 
of connections with Israel, he turns to the question of 
national security. Here he urges limitation of arms 
for Africa and urges a guaranteed neutrality through 
the United Nations, as in the Congo and the former 
trust territories. In the third part of his book, on 


31 


economic development, he stresses as a major weak¬ 
ness of many new states the dependence on one-crop 
economies, and urges diversification, with technical 
assistance from abroad for development of transporta¬ 
tion systems and training of African technicians. He 
formulates his proposals for a new multilateral or¬ 
ganization—an organization for Economic Coopera¬ 
tion and Development, to succeed the OEEC, and to 
have close ties with CCTA/CSA, the United Nations 
Economic Commission for Africa, and other group¬ 
ings. His documentation, largely from official papers 
and newspapers and given in chapter notes, includes 
citations into April 1961. 

United. Nations and Africa 

152. Cohen, Sir Andrew. “The new Africa and the 

United Nations; with discussion.” African af¬ 
fairs, v. 60, October 1961: 508-517. 

DT1.R62, v. 60 

By the former Governor of Uganda, who from 1957— 
1961 was Permanent British Representative on the 
Trusteeship Council of U.N. from which he came 
away, he says, a wiser but not a sadder man. He re¬ 
sumes and evaluates favorably U.N. policy toward 
Africa and its recent implementation. 

153. Sady, Emil J. The United Nations and depend¬ 

ent peoples. Washington, D.C., The Brook¬ 
ings Institution, 1956. 205 p. JX4021.S25 
An overall study of the history of non-self-governing 
territories in relation to the United Nations, devoting a 
long chapter to the international trusteeship system, 
particularly in the African trust territories. 

154. United Nations. Office of Public Information. 

The United Nations and Africa; a collection 
of basic information on the economic and social 
activities of the United Nations and related 
agencies in Africa. New York, United Nations, 
distributed by the United Nations Office of 
Public Information, External Relations Divi¬ 
sion, 1962. 262 p. tables. DLC 

Issued in February 1962. 

The introduction by Mekki Abbas, Executive Secre¬ 
tary of the U.N. Economic Commission for Africa 
[UNECA] is followed by an explanation of the func¬ 
tions and organizations of the Commission. Then 
come detailed and statistically supported reports of 
U.N. programs for technical cooperation, and of pro¬ 
grams carried out by the 11 related agencies. A sec¬ 
tion is given to U.N. civilian operations in the Congo, 
and another to international economic assistance to 


Africa. The Appendixes give various tabulated coun- 
try-by-country surveys, a list of addresses of U.N. and 
related agency officers and representatives, and a glos¬ 
sary interpreting initials used to designate organiza¬ 
tions and programs. 

For publications of UNECA, see in the section on Econom¬ 
ics (no. 225). 

155. Wilcox, Francis O. U.N. and the nonaligned 

nations. New York, Foreign Policy Associa¬ 
tion, 1962. 55 p. (Headline series, no. 155, 
September-October 1962) 

E744.H43, no. 155 

Of the 51 Afro-Asian nations now members (pre- 
Algeria and Uganda membership), 43 describe them¬ 
selves as “nonaligned.” In this guide booklet for 
students of international affairs the former Assistant 
Secretary of State for International Organization Af¬ 
fairs explains the meanings of nonalinement and 
implications for United States foreign policy. He in¬ 
cludes tables of participation of African groupings in 
major organizations and conferences and voting pat¬ 
terns in the General Assembly. 

United States and Africa 

156. Africa League. A new American policy toward 

Africa. Editorial Committee: David Apter 
[and others] New York, 1960. 29 p. 

DT38.A45 

This pamphlet for which five American political 
scientists collaborated (David Apter, Rupert Emerson, 
Elliot Berg, Ruth Schachter, and Immanuel Waller- 
stein), begins with a glance at background of Western 
influences, nationalist movements, and problems facing 
the new nations—training of personnel, breakdown of 
tribal differences, economic development, foreign re¬ 
lations. Then past American policy toward Africa is 
analyzed and a set of policy suggestions offered. It is 
significant that these policies—to establish the priority 
of African interests, to welcome independence based 
on racial equality, to support African moves toward 
unity, to help train personnel, and to expand aid and 
technical assistance—have become integral components 
of current United States relations with Africa. 

157. American Assembly. The United States and 

Africa; background papers prepared for the 
use of participants and the Final report of the 
Thirteenth American Assembly, Arden House, 
Harriman Campus of Columbia University, 
Harriman, New York, May 1-4, 1958. Final 
ed. New York, 1958. xiv, 252 p. illus., maps. 

DT38.A65 1958 


32 


The papers in this volume were prepared as back¬ 
ground for three days of high-level discussions by 
American Africanists of political, social, economic, and 
cultural relations of the United States and Africa. The 
discussions and formal lectures are not included, but 
there is a four-page final report of findings and con¬ 
clusions, strongly enunciating support for the principle 
of self-determination for African peoples. The papers, 
all stressing American interest, are: Rupert Emerson, 
“The Character of American Interests in Africa”; 
James S. Coleman, “The Character and Viability of 
African Political Systems”; Vernon McKay, “External 
Political Pressures on Africa Today”; S. Daniel Neu- 
mark, “The Character and Potential of African Econ¬ 
omies” ; Andrew M. Kamarck, “The African Economy 
and International Trade”; William O. Brown and 
Hylan Lewis, “Racial Situations and Issues in Africa”; 
Walter Goldschmidt, “Culture and Changing Values 
in Africa.” 

158. Bowles, Chester. Africa’s challenge to Amer¬ 

ica. Berkeley, University of California Press, 
1956. 134 p. illus. DT31.B75 

Mr. Bowles, in 1962 Special Assistant to the Presi¬ 
dent on African, Asian, and Latin American Affairs, 
who as U.S. Ambassador in India had watched the 
Communist approach to indigenous movements of 
nationalist revolt, in this series of lectures of March 
1956 extended his thesis of the need of American polit¬ 
ical and economic efforts in underdeveloped areas 
from Asia to Africa. In a rapid glance over the con¬ 
tinent he quoted views of African leaders and examined 
the elements of the “Revolution of Rising Expecta¬ 
tions” in Africa, the Soviet tactics, the response of the 
colonial powers. Last he outlined “American ap¬ 
proach,” criticizing what he considered the lack of a 
positive African policy—particularly noticeable in the 
Trusteeship Council of U.N.—and citing Cordell 
Hull’s five points for colonial powers as a basis—pro¬ 
gressive self-government with tentative dates for full 
freedom, and world policies of development. He 
called for a carefully planned schedule, declaring that 
Africa will become a military problem only if we fail 
to meet the challenge of its economic, political, and 
ideological needs. 

159. Coleman, James S., and Carl Rosberg. New 

perspectives on sub-Saharan Africa. Wash¬ 
ington, Americans for Democratic Action, Ed¬ 
ucational Fund, 1961. 29 p. (Elmer Davis 
memorial pamphlet) DLC-AFR 

A leaflet prepared for distribution by Americans for 
Democratic Action as an expression of liberal attitudes 


toward Africa. The writers are California professors 
of political science, both well known as Africanists. 
After a succinct analysis of the diverse problems con¬ 
fronting America in formulation of articulate policy 
for the new Africa and a rapid review of past policy, 
they suggested specifically: Acceptance of African neu¬ 
tralism; acceptance of diversified dependency on East 
as well as West: tolerance of various forms of govern¬ 
ment and economy; support for full African participa¬ 
tion in the United Nations. 

160. Committee on Africa, the War, and Peace 

Aims. The Atlantic Charter and Africa from 

an American standpoint. New York, 1942. 

164 p. Supplement, 68 p. D754.A34C6 

This Committee was organized at the suggestion 
of the officers of the Phelps-Stokes Fund, which for 
many years has been concerned with educational and 
interracial movements in Africa. It included mis¬ 
sionaries, anthropologists, and other specialists in 
African and international problems. The aim of the 
report was to formulate peace aims for Africa, with 
application of the eight points of the Atlantic Charter 
to African welfare. The major findings and recom¬ 
mendations of the Committee were summarized in 
chapter V, calling for international and American 
efforts to aid African self-development. The appen¬ 
dixes included a brief general description of Africa, 
the terms of the mandate system under the League of 
Nations, a list of American organizations interested in 
Africa, a selected bibliography. A supplement was 
contributed by Dr. Edwin W. Smith, former mission¬ 
ary, anthropologist, formerly President of the Royal 
Anthropological Institute of Great Britain: “Events 
in African History,” a chronology beginning with the 
Egyptian calendar in 4241 B.C. and ending with the 
British occupation of Madagascar, May 4, 1942. 

161. Hoopes, Roy H. The complete Peace Corps 

guide. New York, Dial Press, 1961. 180 p. 

HC60.5.H6 

This book, written under official auspices to cor¬ 
rect erroneous ideas about the Peace Corps, has sec¬ 
tions on: Background, origins and creation; objectives, 
form of operation, specific projects; the volunteer, his 
motivation, training, life, etc. The conclusion is 
headed “Challenge and response.” The specific proj¬ 
ects described include, for Africa, Tanganyika, Nigeria, 
Ghana, and Sierra Leone. 

Another book of 1961, The Peace Corps — Who, How, and 
Where, by Charles Wingenbach (New York, John Day, 154 
p.), covers much the same ground, and includes a number 
of letters from the field. A new edition in 1963. 


33 


162. Isaacs, Harold R. Emergent Americans; a re¬ 

port on “Crossroads Africa.” With a foreword 
by James H. Robinson. New York, J. Day 
Co., 1961. 158 p. DT500.I8 

The author is with the Center for International 
Studies at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 
Here he analyzes the 1960 experience of the project 
launched in 1958 under which young Americans—in 
this year a group of almost 200—spend their summer 
vacations working in Africa. His interest was less in 
the effect on the African nations and their sense of 
American friendship than in that on the American 
boys and girls selected to participate in this program. 
The Foreword is by the originator and director of 
Crossroads Africa. 

163. Millikan, Max F., ed. The emerging nations: 

their growth and United States policy, edited 
by Max F. Millikan and Donald L. M. Black- 
mer. A study from the Center for Interna¬ 
tional Studies, Massachusetts Institute of 
Technology. Boston, Little, Brown, 1961. 
171 p. HC59.M542 

Includes bibliography. 

An extensive revision of a document submitted by 
the Center for International Studies of M.I.T. to the 
Senate Committee on Foreign Relations ( United 
States Foreign Policy: Economic, Social and Political 
Change in the Underdeveloped Countries and Its Im¬ 
plications for United States Policy. Washington, U.S. 
Govt. Print. Off., 1960. 98 p. Committee print, 86th 
Cong., 2d sess.). This is an “interdisciplinary” analy¬ 
sis in which experts in several branches of the social 
sciences—economists, political scientists, sociologists, 
psychologists—shared. An appendix gives summary 
tables of suggested levels of international aid for in¬ 
dividual countries. These are derived from a study 
by Professor P. N. Rosenstein-Rodan, “International 
Aid for Underdeveloped Countries” ( Review of Eco¬ 
nomics and Statistics, May 1961). The book ends 
with a long selected bibliography on underdeveloped 
areas and international assistance. 

164. Montgomery, John D. Aid to Africa; new 

test for U.S. policy. New York, Foreign Pol¬ 
icy Association—World Affairs Center, 1961. 
62 p. (Headline series, no. 149). 

E744.H43, no. 149 
A clear and concise review of American aid policies, 
techniques, and investments in Africa, with special 
case studies of operations in Liberia, Ethiopia, Ghana, 
and Guinea. The writer explains that the greatest 
difficulty comes in the aid triangle—contradictions 


and stresses between the receiving country, American 
policy, and the individual American implementing the 
programs in the field. Like other pamphlets of the 
series, the text is addressed to adult study groups. 

165. National Conference on UNESCO. 8th, 

Boston, 1961. Africa and the United States, 
images and realities; background book, 8th Na¬ 
tional Conference, U.S. National Commission 
for UNESCO, Boston, Oct. 22-26, 1961. 
Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1961. 
212 p. (Department of State publication 
7332. African series, 26) DT30.N3 1961 

“An introductory list of recommended bibliographies for 
Africa South of the Sahara,” p. 205-212. 

This Conference brought together over two thousand 
delegates, among them more than 60 African leaders, 
experts from the United Nations and UNESCO, and 
many of the leading Africanists of America under the 
chairmanship of Dr. Vernon McKay. The purpose 
was to promote mutual understanding between Afri¬ 
cans and Americans. Panels were on relations be¬ 
tween Africa, the United States, and world organiza¬ 
tions in general, on education, on science, technology 
and economic development, culture, communication. 
The Conference has been followed up by local branches 
of the Commission with many programs on Africa. 
The preliminary Background Book given to delegates 
(now available from U.S. Government Printing Of¬ 
fice, price $1) contains papers on various aspects of 
the Conference themes, edited by Helen Kitchen, who 
wrote the first essay, “The Politics of Africa in 1961: 
Some Guidelines.” A Final Report on the Conference 
was published by the U.S. National Commission for 
UNESCO Office in 1962 (97 p.). Prepared by Simon 
and Phoebe Ottenberg, it includes an account of the 
Conference proceedings, with summarization of the 
more important papers and discussions. 

166. Northwestern University, Evanston, Ill. 

Interdisciplinary Committee on African 
Studies. United States foreign policy: Africa. 
Prepared at the request of the Committee on 
Foreign Relations, United States Senate by 
Program of African Studies, Northwestern Uni¬ 
versity. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 
1959. 84 p. map. (U.S. Congress. Sen¬ 

ate. Committee on Foreign Relations. A 
study, no. 4) DT38.N6 

At head of title: Committee print. 86th Cong., 1st sess. 
Bibliographical footnotes. 

This report on Africa, prepared as one of an in¬ 
fluential series of studies authorized by the Senate 


34 


Committee on Foreign Relations in 1958 reviewing 
conditions and trends in the world and policies and 
programs of the United States with respect thereto, 
was presented by Dr. Melville J. Herskovits of North¬ 
western University. It begins with a summary of 
the position of the United States, of African dynamics 
and African-American relations, African nationalism 
and multiracism, economic factors, and the position 
of Africa in the East-West struggle. There follows a 
succinct statement of conclusions and recommenda¬ 
tions—for a flexible policy, favoring African develop¬ 
ment free from outside interference, recognizing non- 
alinementj promotion of peaceful transition to self- 
rule and resolution of interracial conflict, greatly in¬ 
creased appropriations for educational exchanges and 
programs, aid programs, grants or loans, and encour¬ 
agement of American capital investment in Africa. 
The body of the text expands these points. 

167. Plimpton, Ruth T. Operation Crossroads Af¬ 

rica. New York, Viking Press, 1962. 142 p. 

DT15.P5 

A well-written popular account of the operation 
which Mr. Adlai Stevenson, writing the preface, char¬ 
acterizes as “a shining example of a people-to-people 
relationship that works.” A more analytical study 
of Crossroads Africa is that of Isaacs (no. 162). 

168. Ritner, Peter. The death of Africa. New 

York, Macmillan, 1960. 312 p. DT32.R5 
A bold attack on U.S. foreign policy, to which the 
report of a quick survey tour of Africa made by the 
journalist author is almost incidental as providing a 
medium. 

169. U.S. Congress. House. Committee on Foreign 

Affairs. Activities of private U.S. organiza¬ 
tions in Africa. Hearings . . . 87th Congress, 

1st sess. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off. 

1961. 280 p. HD69.F6U5 

Statements of industrial firms investing in Africa, 
directors of missionary work, and organizations for 
African-American relations. 

170. - Briefing on Africa. Hearings before the 

Subcommittee on Africa. 86th Cong., 2d sess. 

. . . Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1960. 
142 p. HC502.U56 

Statements of ICA officials and others regarding 
aid programs for Sub-Saharan Africa. 


171. - United States Information Agency op¬ 

erations in Africa. Hearing before the Sub¬ 
committee on Africa. 87th Cong., 2d sess., 
Feb. 7, 1962. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. 
Off., 1962. 22 p. DT38.U485 

172. U.S. Congress. Senate. Committee on Foreign 

Relations. Study mission to Africa, November- 
December 1960. Report of Frank Church, 
Gale W. McGee, and Frank E. Moss to the 
Committee on Foreign Relations, Committee 
on Appropriations, and Committee on Interior 
and Insular Affairs, U.S. Senate. Washing¬ 
ton, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1961. 55 p. 

DT38.C5 

At head of title: 87th Cong., 1st sess. Committee print. 

Report on current conditions and trends in 16 coun¬ 
tries of Africa. The Senators warned America 
against disappointment over extremist tendencies 
emerging from the African independence movement, 
and urged that “all of us in the United States must 
make a determined effort to see Africa through Af¬ 
rican eyes.” They emphasized the need for new 
approaches in American policy. 

Earlier study missions by Members of Congress were con¬ 
ducted by the Hon. Frances P. Bolton (Report of the Special 
Study Mission to Africa, South and East of the Sahara, printed 
for the House Committee on Foreign Affairs, 84th Cong., 2d 
sess., 1956. 151 p.); Senator Theodore F. Green (Economic 
Aid and Technical Assistance in Africa, printed for the Sen¬ 
ate Committee on Foreign Relations, 85th Cong., 1st sess., 

1957. 34 p.); and Congressmen Wayne L. Hayes, Barratt 
O’Hara, and Marguerite S. Church (Report of the Special 
Study Mission to the Near East and Africa, printed for the 
House Committee on Foreign Affairs, 85th Cong., 2d sess., 

1958. 38 p. House Report no. 1834.) A later report was 
that of Senators Albert Gore, Philip A. Hart, and Maurine 
B. Neuberger, Study Mission to Africa, September-October, 
1961 (Washington, 1962. 17 p.). 

Policy statements and addresses by officials of the Admin¬ 
istration relating to Africa are published regularly in the U.S. 
Department of State Bulletin. 

173. U.S. Dept, of State. Bureau of Educational and 

Cultural Affairs. International educational, 
cultural and related activities for African 
countries south of the Sahara. Washington, 
August 1961. 321 p. E744.5.U484 1960a 

A large pamphlet in offset print serving as a guide¬ 
book to the activities of agencies of the U.S. Govern¬ 
ment, private organizations, the respective African 
countries, and United Nations. Each is described 
succinctly in the first 46 pages. Then 25 pages ex¬ 
plain the contributions, benefits, and results of these 
activities. A hundred pages more describe the pro- 


692 - 756 — 63 - 


4 


35 







grams for each country of Africa. A number of tables, 
of exchange programs, students, etc., are scattered 
throughout; appendixes are directories of officers, 
agencies, business organizations, and examples of pub¬ 
lications and research by Americans in Africa and Af¬ 
ricans in America. There is no> index, but a detailed 
table of contents is designed to lead the searcher to 
helpful data. 

174. U.S. Dept, of State. External Research Division. 

African programs of U.S. organizations; a se¬ 
lective directory. Washington, Dept, of State, 
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, 1961. 
90 p. H35.U423, no. 53 

Earlier editions of this directory were published in 
1958 and 1960. The 1961 edition lists 580 colleges 
and universities, foundations, religious groups, busi¬ 
ness firms, social welfare and cultural agencies, and 
other associations substantially concerned with African 
affairs. For each the program is explained in neces¬ 
sary detail. 

Communism, and Africa 

175. Ajao, Aderogba. On the tiger’s hack. Cleve¬ 

land, World Pub. Co., 1962. 149 p. illus. 

HX450.N5A7 

The personal testimony of a Nigerian who had 
been in East Germany undergoing Communist in¬ 
doctrination together with his studies, and who had 
become thoroughly disillusioned during a stay in Rus¬ 
sia which included the 1957 Youth Festival. He sug¬ 
gests that many Africans in Russia share his views. 

Another book also expressing African disillusionment with 
Russia is by a Togolese student, Michel Ayih-Dosseh; his 
Ein Afrikaner in Moskau was published in Cologne in 1961 
(Verlag Wissenschaft und Politik. 196 p.). 

176. Akademiia nauk SSSR. Afrika Institut. Af- 

rika 1956-1961 [edited by I. I. Potekhin] 
Moskva, Izdat. vost. lit., 1961. 252 p. illus., 
maps. DT30.A45 

A survey of political, economic, and cultural devel¬ 
opments over the past 5 years as seen from Moscow. 
Emphasis is on relations with the U.S.S.R. and sta¬ 
tistics are included of African trade with the Soviet 
Union. One chapter gives figures of African students 
in Russian universities, except the Patrice Lumumba 
University which had its first term only in 1960-61; 
the largest number, 350, were from Egypt, and about 
70 each from Ghana, Sudan, and Guinea. The editor 
is the leading voice in Soviet political studies of Africa. 


177. Asian Peoples’ Anti-Communist League, Re¬ 

public of China. Communist China in Africa. 

Taipei, Taiwan, 1961. 50 p. DT38.9.C5A8 
Booklet on Communist attempts at infiltration of 
Africa by an anti-Communist Chinese pressure group. 
Sections are on the Afro-Asian People’s Solidarity 
Council, the exchange of visiting delegations between 
Communist China and African states, Communist 
Chinese economic aid to Guinea, aid to the Algerian 
rebels, and ultimate aim to convert the new nations 
into Communist satellites. 

178. Botzaris, Alejandro. Communist penetration 

in Africa. Lisbon, 1961. 71 p. 

DT38.9.R8B6 

Record and analysis of organizations under Soviet 
auspices which serve as vehicles for Communist pene¬ 
tration into Africa. The first-named is the Council of 
Solidarity of the Afro-Asian Peoples with its Cairo 
headquarters, then the author concentrates on the 
Communist world organizations, such as the World 
Syndicalist Federation (FSM). The last section sur¬ 
veys studies carried out in the Institute of Ethnography 
of the U.S.S.R. Academy of Sciences in Moscow. A 
Spanish edition has been issued in Madrid by the In¬ 
stitute de Estudios Africanos. A shorter pamphlet by 
the same author, also published in 1961, was similarly 
a factual examination of Communist Dogma and the 
African Nationalisms (Lisbon. 38 p). 

The same theme is pursued by Pieter Lessing in his Africa’s 
Red Harvest (New York, John Day Go., 1962. 207 p.). 

The South African author had traveled over Africa in 1959- 
60 investigating Russian and Chinese efforts to win friends 
and influence governments. Angola is used as a case study 
in the first chapter. 

179. Filesi, Teobaldo. Comunismo e nazionalismo 

in Africa. Roma, Istituto Italiano per 
1’Africa, 1958. 368 p. DT31.F5 

Academic study including an historical review of the 
rise of nationalist feeling from the days of Marcus 
Garvey through the first independence day for West 
Africa (Ghana) in 1957. The writer’s special inter¬ 
est is in detecting Communist influences. His bibli¬ 
ography includes many Soviet publications, as well 
as United Nations and English-language sources. This 
work was published in Spanish translation in 1960 by 
the Instituto de Estudios Africanos in Madrid. 

In 1958 a bulletin warning of Communist dangers in 
Africa was brought out by the Spanish Government (Spain. 
Direction General de Plazas y Provincias Africanas. La 
actividad comunista en Africa. Madrid, 1958. 134 p. 

illus., ports, maps). At the head of the title were the words: 
“Atencidn! Peligro rojo!” A rubric, “Actividades cornu- 


36 


nistas en el mundo afroasiatico,” appears each month in 
Africa, journal of the official Instituto de Estudios 
Africanos. 

180. Lazio, Branko M. L’Afrique et les legons de 

Vexperience communiste. Introd. de Michel 

Ayih-Dosseh. Paris, Ldimpra editeur, 1961. 
189 p. HC502.L39 

By an East European expatriate who explains Marx¬ 
ist theory and its application to Africa, the faults of 
Communist planning and mistakes in application of 
Communist techniques to African conditions, the at¬ 
traction of communism to Africa, and reasons why 
Africans had better resist them. The introduction is 
by an African (Togolese) student who had spent two 
unhappy years in Russia. 

181. Slawecki, Leon M. S. “The two Chinas in 

Africa.” Foreign affairs, v. 41, January 1963: 
398-409. D410.F6, v. 41 

Analysis of the activities of Communist China and 
Nationalist China in Africa, where there is rivalry for 
diplomatic recognition and other political, economic, 
and cultural ties with the new states. The question 
of African votes for the seating of Communist China 
in the United Nations is perhaps the largest factor in 
the competition, from which Africa is benefiting in 
matters of trade, aid, and technical cooperation. 

182. Woddis, Jack. Africa; the lion awakes. Lon¬ 

don, Lawrence & Wishart, 1961. 301 p. 

DT31.W59 

This Marxist work is dedicated to Lumumba, 
Moumie, and other “martyrs of Africa’s struggle 
against imperialism.” A book of the previous year by 
the same author ( Africa—The Roots of Revolt, 
London, Lawrence & Wishart. 285 p.) had told why, 
the present semi-historical study of African politics 
tells how. The three major themes are the struggle 
of the African working class (“disintegration of tradi¬ 
tional African agriculture under the impacts of im¬ 
perialist depredations”), the struggles for trade unions, 
and “imperialism’s new tactics” of “going in order 
to stay” as economic rulers, with the United States 
leading and supplanting the former sinners. The 
models for the new states, Mr. Woddis pronounces, 
should be Soviet Central Asia and China. 

An earlier enunciation of the same Communist line of 
thought was in a pamphlet of 1954 by a foreign corre¬ 
spondent for the London Daily Worker, Derek Kartun: 
Africa, Africa! A Continent Rises to Its Feet (London, 
Lawrence & Wishart; New York, International Publishers, 
1954. 99 p.). In this the emphasis had been on stories of 
British “atrocities” in Kenya. Mr. Henry Swanzy, then 


editor of African Affairs, commented in his review: “The 
impact of such a book on the African student must be 
great.” 

The East German view of current African issues is sum¬ 
marized in a special issue of Deutsche Aussenpolitik, 
“Afrikanische Gegenwartsfragen” (Berlin, Sonderheft 1/ 
1960), which contains the papers presented at a conference 
on Africa in June 1960. 

183. Zartman, I. William. “Communist China and 

the Arab-African areas.” U.S. Naval Institute 
Proceedings, v. 86, no. 9, September 1961: 
23-30. 

A warning of a growing problem. See also Fritz 
Schatten, “Peking’s Growing Influence in Africa,” 
Swiss Review of World Affairs (v. 10, August 1960: 

p. 8-11). 

The Library of Congress has received a copy of a propa¬ 
ganda pamphlet put out by the Chinese-African People’s 
Friendship Association: The Chinese People Resolutely Sup¬ 
port the Just Struggle of the African People (Peking, Foreign 
Languages Press, 1961. 139 p.). 

LAW 

184. African Conference on the Rule of Law, 

Lagos, 1961. A report on the proceedings. 
Geneva, International Commission of Jurists, 
1961. 181 p. DLC-LL 

The Conference here reported on took place in 
Lagos from Jan. 3-7, 1961. An 8-page leaflet, “Con¬ 
sensus of Lagos,” issued immediately following the 
meeting, contained the declaration of principles and 
resolutions. The assembled body of lawyers urged es¬ 
tablishment of permanent organizations of African and 
Middle Eastern states for the promotion of law and 
peaceful settlement of disputes, to include African and 
Arab Courts of Justice. 

185. Afrika-Instituut, Netherlands. The future of 

customary law in Africa. L’avenir du droit 
coutumier en Afrique. Symposium-colloque, 
Amsterdam, 1955. Organized by the Afrika- 
Instituut, Studiecentrum, Leiden, in collabora¬ 
tion with the Royal Tropical Institute, Amster¬ 
dam. Leiden, Universitaire Pers Leiden, 1956. 
305 p. - DLC-LL 

Bibliography: p. 273-305. 

Papers on the law of indigenous societies in Africa 
as exercised through the Native courts and local juris¬ 
dictions in the former Belgian, British, and French ter¬ 
ritories. Past development, present conditions, and 
future possibilities under spreading detribalization were 
discussed. Among contributors were: for the Belgian 
Congo, A. Sohier and J. P. Paulus; for Nigeria, F. A. 


37 


Ajayi; for customary and Islamic law in British Africa, 
J. N. D. Anderson, Arthur Phillips, and I. Schapera; 
for French Africa, D. Boisdon, G. H. Bousquet, J. 
Poirier, Andre P. Robert, and G. Mangin. An essay 
on Indonesian tribal law is included, followed by a 
short paper on customary law in the Portuguese over¬ 
seas territories by Adriano Moreira, and a longer con¬ 
sideration of Bantu customary law in South Africa 
by F. D. Holleman. The volume concludes with reso¬ 
lutions, in which it is emphasized that in future cus¬ 
tomary law should be increasingly supplementary to 
general law, and limited to family relations, succession, 
and other local matters. 

186. Allott, Antony N. Essays in African law, 

with special reference to the law of Ghana. 

London, Butterworth, 1960. xxviii, 323 p. 

(Butterworth’s African law series, no. 1) 

DLG-LL 

This volume begins a new series which will pre¬ 
sumably reappraise the law of all Africa, certainly of 
all English-speaking Africa. Dr. Allott, Reader in 
African Law in the University of London School of 
Oriental & African Studies, is editor of the Journal 
of African Law. The three parts of his study deal in 
historical and analytical terms with: 1, the general 
common law of British Africa, received from the metro- 
pole ; 2, customary law, its fundamental characteristics 
and possible unity between laws of the innumerable 
tribes, native administration; 3, a special case study 
of Ghana, particularly in relation to conflicts of cus¬ 
tomary law. Dr. Allott had also edited the record of 
proceedings of a Conference held in London from 
December 28, 1959-January 8, 1960, under the chair¬ 
manship of Lord Denning, formerly Lord Chief Jus¬ 
tice. The volume was published with the title, The 
Future of Law in Africa (London, Butterworth, 1960. 
58 p.). 

187. -, ed. Judicial and legal systems in Africa. 

London, Butterworth, 1962. 226 p. diagrs. 

(Butterworth’s African law series, no. 4) 

DLG-LL 

Dr. Allott is also Director of the Restatement of 
African Law Project undertaken by the School of 
Oriental and African Studies, which as its first step 
is engaged in a Bibliography of African Law to cover 
published and unpublished material on the customary 
laws of Commonwealth African territories. Part 1, 
East Africa, was issued in draft form (83 p. 33 cm., 
mimeographed ) in 1961. It includes many references 
to documents in East African archives. 


188. Anderson, James N. D. Islamic law in Africa. 

With a foreword by Lord Hailey. London, 
H.M. Stationery Off., 1954. 409 p. (Colo¬ 
nial research publication, no. 16) 

JV33.G7A52, no. 16 
Survey prepared for the Colonial Office by the Pro¬ 
fessor of Oriental Laws in the University of London. 
His interest was in the interaction of Islamic law— 
the Shari’a—on the customary law of the various 
Muslim societies of British Africa and of the native 
law on Islamic law and institutions. He analyzed 
practices in Aden, British East Africa, and [then] 
British West Africa, colony by colony, assessing the 
position occupied by Islamic law in judicial procedure, 
both civil and criminal law. In British East Africa he 
showed that Islamic law is applied largely in matters 
of the family, whereas in Northern Nigeria the Islamic 
law is more exclusively followed as “native law and 
custom” than anywhere else in the world outside Ara¬ 
bia. Appendixes include a survey of the Sudan, of the 
law as affecting immigrant Muslims, tables of ordi¬ 
nances and cases, glossary. There is a full index. 

189. Egyptian Society of International Law. 

Constitutions of the new African states; a criti¬ 
cal survey. [Cairo?] 1962. 107 p. 

JQ1873.E45 1962 
Analytical compilation of essential features of the 
constitutions of the new states of Africa south of the 
Sahara, prepared with the aid of a Ford Foundation 
grant. There are included the states of the Afro- 
Malagasy Union and other French and English-speak¬ 
ing states of Africa, the Congo-Leopoldville Republic, 
and the East African colonies and territories. The 
Appendix contains texts of the Casablanca Charter, the 
Charter for the Union of African States, the conclu¬ 
sions of the 1961 African Conference on the Rule 
of Law, and other documents. This is the most con¬ 
cise reference work of its kind available in English 
as of mid-1962. 

190. Elias, Taslim Ola wale. British colonial law; 

a comparative study of the interaction between 
English and local laws in British dependencies. 
London, Stevens, 1962. 323 p. DLG-LL 

191. - The nature of African customary law. 

Manchester, University Press, 1956. 318 p. 

DLC-LL 

Dr. Elias is a Nigerian jurist who gained his reputa¬ 
tion as an interpreter of legal institutions in English- 
speaking Africa with his Nigerian Land Law and 
Custom in 1951 (see no. 724). In 1962 he is Attorney- 


38 




General of the Federation of Nigeria. His 1962 study 
is a profound interpretation of the relationships be¬ 
tween the British common law and the customary laws 
of the peoples under British rule. The latter had been 
the subject of Dr. Elias’ important study in 1956, in 
which he examined indigenous laws, exclusive of Mus¬ 
lim institutions, in British Africa. This work was re¬ 
viewed at length by John Matson in Africa, January 
1958 (p. 78-80). 

192. Journal of African law. v. 1, no. 1+ Spring 

1957+ London, Butterworth. 3 times a year. 

DLC-LL 

Designed as an organ for the discussion of general 
principles that might emerge from objective study, 
criticism, and comparison of the diverse legal systems 
operative in Africa—the heterogeneous tribal laws, the 
variant forms of Islamic law, the British common law, 
the codes imported from France, Belgium and the 
other colonial powers. The journal was founded in 
1957, following the Leiden Conference (see Afrika- 
Instituut, above) at which extensive airing had been 
given to the confusion of law in Africa. 

ECONOMICS 

Bibliography 

193. Commission for Technical Co-operation in Africa 

South of the Sahara [C.C.T.A./C.S.A.] In¬ 
ventory of economic studies concerning Africa 
south of the Sahara; an annotated reading list 
of books, articles, and official publications. 
Repertoire des etudes economiques interessant 
l’Afrique au sud du Sahara; liste annotee de 
livres, d’articles, et de publications officielles. 
Contendo uma relagao de titulos em portugues. 
London, 1960. 301 p. (Its Publication 
no. 30) Z7165.A46J6 

This useful bibliography, a joint project of CCTA 
and its advisory Scientific Council for Africa (CSA), 
was edited by Miss Peter Ady of St. Anne’s College, 
Oxford with the aid of national correspondents in 
each country. The period covered is largely from 
1945 through 1956, though there are a few references 
of 1957 and 1958. The annotated entries of books, 
pamphlets, and periodical articles are arranged by 
region with subject subclassification. Regarding the 
latter, the editor comments that “it has proved more 
than usually difficult in Africa to draw the line between 
economics and anthropology on the one hand, and 
between political economy and politics on the other.” 


Another significant bibliography on African economics is 
No. 5 in the GIDESA series of Enquetes bibliographiques, 
Guy Smet’s Contribution & I’itude de la progression econo- 
mique de VAfrique (Bruxelles, 1960. 217 p.). The 1532 
numbered entries of books, pamphlets, official documents, and 
articles chosen from a four-page list of periodicals consulted 
are very slightly annotated and are arranged alphabetically 
by author (a heavy preponderance French or Belgian), with 
a complicated “Plan analytique et geographique” at the be¬ 
ginning, referring to the entry numbers. Material analyzed 
runs through the first half of 1959. 

Two others of the Enquetes bibliographiques primarily con¬ 
cerned with economic questions are by T. Heyse, Problemes 
fonciers et regime des terres; aspects economiques, juridiques 
et sociaux (Bruxelles, 1960. 163 p. no. 4) and J. Nuyens, 
Le Probleme des routes en regions intertropicales, speciale- 
ment VAfrique (Bruxelles, 1961. 133 p. no. 6). 

194. Hazlewood, Arthur, comp. The economics 

of “under-developed” areas; an annotated 
reading list of books, articles, and official pub¬ 
lications. 2d enlarged ed. London, Published 
for the Institute of Commonwealth Studies by 
Oxford University Press, 1959. 156 p. 

Z716.H3 1959 

The first edition of this highly regarded list was pub¬ 
lished in 1954, and is here reprinted, (p. 1-89), with 
an additional section of 65 pages, including separate 
indexes. Mr. Hazlewood’s classifications are by sub¬ 
ject, national income, consumption and investment, 
population and labor, etc., and for reference to parts 
of Africa the Indexes of Places must be consulted, 
where under each place name there is subject break¬ 
down. 

195. Landskron, William A. Official serial publi¬ 

cations relating to economic development in 
Africa south of the Sahara; a preliminary list 
of English-language publications. Cambridge, 
Center for International Studies, Massachu¬ 
setts Institute of Technology, 1961. 441. 

Z7165.A45L3 

This list is announced as preliminary to a larger 
bibliography on economic development south of the 
Sahara, which had not yet appeared as of April 1963. 
It covers a broad range of subjects relating to economic 
development, citing the latest issues of official and a 
few unofficial serial reports known to have been re¬ 
ceived in the United States by December 1960. Most 
items are dated from 1958-1960. Before the listing, 
a preliminary page names 25 African states and terri¬ 
tories for which no English-language periodicals are 
known to exist; this includes the states of former 
French Africa, reports from which would normally be 
in French. 


39 


196. United Nations. Economic Commission for 
Africa. Bibliography of African statistical pub¬ 
lications. [Addis Ababa?] 1962. xiii, 206 p. 
(United Nations. [Document] E/CN.14/ 
112) JX1977.A2 E/CN.14/112 

Issued by the Fourth session of EC A, Addis Ababa, Febru- 
ary-March 1962. 

A valuable listing of official documents, serials, and 
reports from African countries, including a few sig¬ 
nificant unofficial publications on African statistics. 
Arranged by country with subject subclasses and sym¬ 
bols for cross reference. 

The Library of UNECA in Addis Ababa is publishing a 
bibliographical series relating to works received there (U.N. 
Document Series E/CN/14/Lib/Ser.A). As of late 1962 
there have been issued Periodicals Received in the UNECA 
Library (October 1961, 113 p. Suppl. 1, October 1962), 
Annuals Received in the UNECA Library (1962, 194 p.), 
and Books on Africa in the UNECA Library (September 
1962, 318 p.) The first two carry items of worldwide cover¬ 
age, though in large part emanating from Africa, grouped 
as: (1) Nongovernmental publications; (2) Governmental 
publications; (3) United Nations publications. 


197. Afrika-Verein, Hamburg. Afrika Bericht: die 

Afrika-Wirtschaft. Hamburg, annual. 

HC501.A12 

A yearly review of the economic situation in Africa. 
The edition for 1960/61, issued in the summer of 1961, 
has 175 pages and includes: “Retrospective View of 
the African Year;” “The Year of Conferences;” “Prob¬ 
lems of the Development Policy and the Financial 
Economy”; “Association of the African Countries to 
the European Economic Community,” etc. 

198. Afro-Asian Organisation for Economic Co¬ 

operation. Economic understanding & for¬ 
eign investment; a survey and some suggestions. 
Cairo, Afro-Asian Organisation for Economic 
Co-operation, Economic Documentation and 
Research Division, 1960. 25 1. (Its Occa¬ 
sional paper. MA1.2/IBC/1) DLC 

This organization was established at a Conference 
in Cairo, Dec. 8-11, 1958, which was described by the 
United Arab Republic Minister in the Introduction 
to its Proceedings (Cairo, 1959+) as “another embodi¬ 
ment of the Bandung spirit.” The invitations for the 
Conference had been sent by the Federation of Cham¬ 
bers of Commerce in the U.A.R. to all countries of 
Asia and Africa; the inaugural meeting was attended 
by 38 countries, including Algeria, Cameroons, Liberia, 
Libya, Ethiopia, Ghana, Somalia, Sudan, Togoland. 
At a second Conference in Cairo, April 30-May 3, 
1960, Morocco and Tunisia were also full members 


and Nigeria had associate membership. A third Con¬ 
ference was held in New Delhi in December 1961; a 
fourth is scheduled to meet in Karachi in December 
1963. The Organization publishes a processed bulle¬ 
tin of business information, Afro-Asian Economic Re¬ 
view (Cairo, 1959+ monthly). 

199. Batten, Thomas R. Problems of African de¬ 

velopment. 3d ed. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1961. 292 p. maps. DT32.B28 
Addressed particularly to educated Africans, this 
concise survey of the economic, social, and political 
problems confronting the developing countries was 
published first in 1947-48 and represented the main 
trend of enlightened British thought in the immediate 
post-war era regarding peaceful evolution from colo¬ 
nial status to self-government. The author was the 
former Vice-Principal of Makerere College in Uganda, 
one of the most advanced institutions for African 
higher learning. Revised, but only slightly, for the 
third edition. 

A third edition is being published in 1962 of another work 
by Dr. Batten for African readers, Tropical Africa in World 
History (London, Oxford University Press, 4 v. 1st ed. 1951, 
2d ed. 1956). 

200. Benveniste, Guy, and William E. Moran. 

Handbook of African economic development. 
New York, Published for the Stanford Re¬ 
search Institute by Praeger, 1962. 178 p. 

(Books that matter). HC502.B37 

By two members of the staff of the Stanford Re¬ 
search Institute, this meaningful study, finished and 
published by the Institute in 1960, suggests ways in 
which Western aid to African countries can best be 
used in coordination with efforts of the countries 
themselves. If African economic growth fails in the 
coming years, the authors warn, African leaders will 
turn to China as a model. Factors of expanded multi¬ 
lateral action and of governmental assistance in men, 
money, foreign investments, and trade are examined in 
general aspects and in specific cases, including analysis 
of proposals made bilaterally and in international 
councils of European and African powers. The writers 
stress the need for long-term aid geared to careful and 
coordinated planning on the part of the recipient 
countries, and strongly advocate the creation of new 
international organisms. Tables include statistics of 
trade with and aid to Africa in the postwar period. 

201. Bohannan, Paul J., and George Dalton, eds. 

Markets in Africa. Evanston, Ill., Northwest¬ 
ern University Press, 1963. 735 p. maps, 

diagrs. (African studies, no. 6) DLC 


40 



Papers written by professional anthropologists, 
economists, and geographers on the role of markets, 
money uses, and external trade in the non-industrial 
economies of 28 societies south of the Sahara. 

202. CoLLOQUE SUR LE PrOJET d’uN MaRCHE 

Commun Afro-Asiatique, Brussels, 1959. 
Actes, 27-29 mai 1959. Bruxelles, Centre 
pour 1’etude des problemes du monde musul- 
man contemporain, 1960. 272 p. (Corre- 
spondance d’Orient, no. 1) 

HF1612.5.A7C6, no. 1 

“Bibliographic preliminaire a l’etude d’un marche commun 
afro-asiatique”: p. 241-268. 

Not available for examination. 

203. Commission for Technical Co-operation in 

Africa South of the Sahara [CCTA]. 
Systems of national accounts in Africa, by P. 
Ady and M. Courcier for the Commission for 
Technical Co-operation in Africa South of the 
Sahara in co-operation with O.E.E.C. Paris, 
Organisation for European Economic Co-op- 
operation, 1960. 232 p. DLC 

204. Council of Europe. Consultative Assembly. 

Europe and Africa. Strasbourg, 1960. 37 p. 

HC502.C67 

Booklet explaining the Assembly’s proposals for eco¬ 
nomic relations between Europe and Africa. The 
“Strasbourg Plan” adopted by the Assembly on Sep¬ 
tember 25, 1952, had suggested the establishment of 
a European Bank for the Development of Overseas 
Territories, directed toward countries having constitu¬ 
tional links with the countries of the Council. Po¬ 
litical changes and other considerations forced modi¬ 
fication of the proposal, and in 1958 a Study Group 
of Experts drew up new proposals, which were before 
the Assembly in 1960. The proposals were for: An 
investment fund; a guarantee fund for private in¬ 
vestors against political risks: expansion of technical 
assistance through FAMA/CCTA, and a Europe/ 
Africa Conference to provide for cooperation of the 
European and African participating countries “on a 
footing of equality.” In this connection see also cur¬ 
rent issues of the Bulletin of the European Economic 
Community, Brussels. 

205. Couste, Pierre-Bernard. UAssociation des 

pays d’outre-mer a la Communaute economique 
europeenne. Paris, Librairies techniques, 
1959. 286 p. HC59.C74 


A treatise urging economic relations between Europe 
and Africa as a third force between American and 
Soviet power. 

206. Dia, Mamadou. The African nations and world 

solidarity. Translated from the French by 
Mercer Cook. New York, Praeger, 1961. 
145 p. (Books that matter) HC502.D417 
At the time of writing the author was President of 
the Council of Ministers of Senegal. In 1956 he had 
been sent as a Deputy to the French National As¬ 
sembly, and is known as a foremost African expert in 
economics. An advocate of union, he was a leader in 
the formation of the shortlived Federation of Mali, and 
it was in part a clash between him and President Keita 
(of Soudan) that caused the breakup of the Federa¬ 
tion. He has written much on African economics, his 
best known earlier book being Reflexions sur I’econ- 
omie de I’Afrique noire (see no. 876). The present 
book was published in Paris in 1960. Like his col¬ 
league, President Senghor, at that time he believed in 
socialism, but not in the Soviet style—the Soviet version 
of “imperialism” he thought at least as dangerous as 
that of the former colonial powers. For Africa, he 
argued, the first essential is a “truly neutral and really 
positive” neutralism. Next in importance is a co¬ 
ordination of economic planning and “mutual de¬ 
velopment,” which he believed will lead by stages to a 
united Africa. He considered it the “vocation” of the 
new French-speaking nations to set the model for both 
political and economic independence. 

207. Drachoussoff, V. L’Afrique decolonisee; es- 

sai sur le developpement de l’Afrique noire. 
Bruxelles, 1960. 150 p. plates. (Academie 

royale des sciences d’outre-mer. Classe des 
sciences morales et politiques. Memoires in-8° 
n.s., t. 23, fasc. 1). DLC 

Bibliography: p. 143-146. 

Study in development of underdeveloped areas with 
much attention to Eurafrica. The author’s profes¬ 
sional interest is in agriculture and agricultural in¬ 
dustries. 

208. Du Jonchay, Ivan. Uindustrialisation de UAfri¬ 

que: historique, energie, matieres premieres, 
industries, transports, main-d’oeuvre et infras¬ 
tructure, finances. Paris, Payot, 1953. 344 p. 
illus. (Bibliotheque geographique) 

HC502.D8 

Overall study by an engineer who has contributed 
economic and statistical portions to the Atlas interna¬ 
tional Larousse. His encyclopedic treatment, heavily 


41 


reinforced by tables of statistics and maps, is by subject, 
as indicated in the subtitle. Thus in his chapter on 
energy he begins with general remarks, then looks at 
the entire African picture of coal production and re¬ 
sources, oil, electricity, and other forms of energy. 
Statistical tables interpreting the chapters are at the 
end of the volume. The lack of an index is somewhat 
obviated by a full Table of Contents. 

Another French survey of economic development of all 
Africa is by Rene Laure, Le Continent africain au milieu du 
siecle; perspectives et problemes de la mise en valeur econo- 
mique (Paris, Charles-Lavauzelle, 1952. 433 p.). It is 

written in the form of sections on general factors, followed 
by paragraph resumes of the situation in individual territories. 

The same theme, with emphasis on “Eurafrica” and the 
implications of the global fight against communism, was 
treated by a German economist, Anton Zischka, in his Afrika, 
Europas Gemeinschaftsaufgabe. Nr. 1 (Oldenburg, G. Stal¬ 
ling, 1951. 339 p. illus.). His broad picture of the West¬ 

ern economic investment in and development of Africa and 
its potential as a source of raw material for Europe and an 
outlet for European industrial production was presented 
challengingly for a general audience, in less systematic ar¬ 
rangement than the two French works. The book, published 
simultaneously in Austria, appeared in Italian translation in 
1953. 

209. The Economist, London. Three monthly eco¬ 

nomic reviews, compiled by the Economist In¬ 
telligence Unit. London, 1952-53+ DLC 
Originally published as Quarterly Economic Re¬ 
views, these are series of statistical surveys of individual 
countries, summarizing latest data in large processed 
pamphlets. Among seventy-odd areas covered, a num¬ 
ber are useful for keeping abreast of the latest economic 
information on Africa: e.g., British East Africa, Ethi¬ 
opia and Somalia (no. 39, September 1962), Federa¬ 
tion of Rhodesia and Nyasaland (no. 38, August 1962), 
Former French Tropical Africa and Liberia (no. 10, 
July 1962), Ghana, Nigeria, Sierra Leone, Gambia 
(no. 38, June 1962), Republic of South Africa, South¬ 
west Africa (no. 43, August 1962). 

210. Frankel, S. Herbert. The economic impact on 

under-developed societies; essays on interna¬ 
tional investment and social change. Oxford, 
Blackwell, 1953. 179 p. HC55.F7 

The author, for many years head of the Depart¬ 
ment of Economics and Economic History at Wit- 
watersrand, has been Professor of Colonial Economic 
Affairs at Oxford since 1946. This volume is a group 
of previously published papers dealing with the clash of 
functional forces of modern industrialism and the dis¬ 
integrating indigenous economies. One lecture On 


the South African course (“Whither South Africa?”) 
dates from 1947, but most of the others are articles or 
lectures of 1952. The last is “Some Reflections on 
Civilization in Africa,” a lecture before the South 
African Institute of Race Relations in 1952, which 
is also published separately by the Institute (1952, 
27 p.). In it Professor Frankel reminds that there 
is only one way of building a system of effective co¬ 
operation in society, which is to build it—“daily, 
wholly, unselfishly; until to each one in his daily task 
the unaccustomed becomes the accustomed, and the 
way which was no way becomes a way: a path—a 
road—across the valleys and over the mountain tops.” 

An earlier study by Professor Frankel, Capital Investment 
in Africa (London, Oxford University Press, 1938. 487 p.) 

showed that before the Second World War investments in 
development of African resources, especially minerals, had 
not been high when compared with the rest of the world. 

211. Gache, Paul, and Robert Mercier. L’Alle- 

magne et VAfrique; analyse d’une penetration 
economique contemporaine. Paris, Editions 
des relations internationales, 1960. 177 p. 

HF3568.A34G13 

The writers probe the German interests in African 
trade and markets since the Second World War with 
particular reference to the European Common Market, 
of which they feel Germany is making use as a stepping- 
stone to a great Eurafrican policy in which she may 
play a major role. They are suspicious of Afrika- 
Verein as a leader in this maneuver. 

212. Gorst, Sheila. Co-operative organization in 

tropical countries; a study of co-operative de¬ 
velopment in non-self-goveming territories 
under United Kingdom administration, 1945- 
55. Oxford, Blackwell, 1959. 343 p. 

HD3488.A3A22 

The cooperative movement had had only faint be¬ 
ginnings in the British colonial territories before the 
Second World War. In the years from 1945 to 1955 it 
made great advances, taking firm root in many coun¬ 
tries and providing a valuable training for self-govern¬ 
ment. In this study the author first surveys the course 
of cooperatives throughout the British colonial world, 
chapters 5-7 being on West, East, and Central Africa. 
In the second part she analyzes the principles and 
practices of cooperative enterprise and the role of 
government cooperative departments. The last 10 
pages summarize conclusions. 


42 


213. Gourou, Pierre. The tropical world; its social 

and economic conditions and its future status. 
Translated by E. D. Laborde. 3ded. London, 
Longmans, 1961. 159 p. (Geographies for 

advanced study) G515.G63 1961 

By a professor of the College de France and the Uni¬ 
versity Libre de Bruxelles, this often-quoted study in 
economic and social geography of the hot wet lands 
was originally published in 1947. The third edition 
of the English translation has some revision by the 
author to reflect recent development. Of the 12 chap¬ 
ters, only 2 do not relate to Africa; in the other 10, 
emphasis is heavy on tropical Africa. 

214. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. An economic survey 

of the colonial territories. 1932, 1933, 1935— 
37, 1951. London, H. M. Stationery Off. 
maps (partfold.) (/faColonial) HC259.A19 
Begun as an annual review, this overall statistical 
report on British colonial possessions was published in 
one volume until 1938, when the war caused its sus¬ 
pension. The only postwar edition, 1951, appeared 
in 1952 in 7 volumes of 100 to 200 legal-size pages each. 
Those relating to Africa are: 1. The Central African 
and High Commission Territories; 2. The East African 
Territories ... 3. The West African Territories . . . 
with St. Helena. The country sections give systematic 
coverage of economic life and conditions, with sum¬ 
marization of general background of geography and 
population, political structure, principal economic 
legislation, communications and transport, then sur¬ 
veys of productive activities, finance and trade, devel¬ 
opment. Many statistical tables and folded maps show¬ 
ing production areas are included. Volume 7, evenly 
divided into 100 pages of text and 100 pages of tables 
of exports, analyzed principal products throughout the 
colonial territories. 

A coordinated report on the economics of the English- 
speaking countries of Africa, as well as the rest of the former 
Empire, is now issued by the British Central Office of Infor¬ 
mation, Reference Division as a reference pamphlet, Eco¬ 
nomic Development in the Commonwealth (3d ed. London, 
H. M. Stationery Off., 1961. 133 p.). 

215. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office [and others] Tech¬ 

nical assistance from the United Kingdom for 
overseas developments, Dept, of Technical Co¬ 
operation. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
July 1961. 43 p. (Misc. no. 1, 1961. Cmnd. 
1308) DLC 

The new British Government Department of Tech¬ 
nical Co-operation was set up in mid-1961 to admin¬ 


ister economic and technical aid to underdeveloped 
countries. It took over functions of this nature relat¬ 
ing to the former colonial possessions previously han¬ 
dled by the Colonial Office, as well as certain 
functions of the Commonwealth Relations Office and 
the Foreign Office. The Command Paper here cited 
explains these functions. A statute of June 1961 
(Dept, of Technical Co-operation Act, 1961: 9-10 
Eliz. 2, Ch. 30) established the Department. Its first 
Progress Report was issued in April 1962 (18 p. 
Cmnd. 1698). The Department was reported to have 
spent £180 million in all forms of aid during 1961. 

216. Hance, William A. African economic develop¬ 

ment. New York, Published for the Council 
on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1958. 307 p. 
maps, tables. HC502.H33 

Bibliography: p. 291-296. 

Resulting from research papers presented to a dis¬ 
cussion group of the Council on Foreign Relations, 
this book examines African economic development 
not by general analysis but through case studies. 
Chapters are on: Agricultural development as ex¬ 
emplified in the Sudan Gezira Scheme; industrial de¬ 
velopment, the proposed Volta River project; the 
question of transport in tropical Africa; the economic 
development and potentialities of the Central African 
Federation (the most dynamic and hopeful of the 
continent “if continued progress is made ... [in at¬ 
titude] toward African advancement”); the report of 
the East Africa Royal Commission, focused on changes 
in land tenure and use; American investment and the 
development of Liberia; the economy of Madagascar 
compared with that of tropical Africa. The last chap¬ 
ter reassesses potentialities and needs, the former very 
great but darkened by “somber” factors of economic, 
cultural, and political, as well as physical, diversity. 
The needs are recited—physical, economic, human. 
“The paramount need is for education, always and 
everywhere.” Professor Hance, who was responsible 
for the final form, is an economic geographer at Co¬ 
lumbia University. 

217. Hazlewood, Arthur. The economy of Africa. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1961. 90 p. 
(The New Africa library) HC502.H38 

One of a series of succinct texts by recognized au¬ 
thorities, specially addressed to the new African 
readers. 


43 


218. Jackson, Barbara Ward. “Free Africa and the 

Common Market.” Foreign affairs, v. 40, Apr. 
1962: 419-430. D410.F6, v. 40 

“Nowhere,” writes Lady Jackson, “do the prob¬ 
lems of Britain’s entry into the Common Market seem 
more daunting than in independent Africa where by 
a chance of history, the confrontation of Common¬ 
wealth and Common Market is physically most direct 
and potentially most disruptive.” She follows with 
a lucid examination of these problems, ending with 
a question as to whether the “partially preferential so¬ 
lution” of association of Africa with the Common 
Market is likely to contribute to stability in either 
continent, or will seem to African nationalists irritat¬ 
ing neo-colonialism. In a volume of lectures published 
by the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation, The Rich 
Nations and the Poor Nations (Toronto, 1961. 97 p. 
The Massey Lectures, inaugural series) Lady Jackson 
again stressed the need of African nations in the light 
of world economy. 

219. Leubuscher, Charlotte. Bulk buying from 

the colonies; a study of the bulk purchase of 
colonial commodities by the United Kingdom 
Government. Issued under the auspices of 
the Royal Institute of International Affairs. 
London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1956. 206 p. tables. HF3506.L65 

During the Second World War the United Kingdom 
introduced a system of wartime economy called bulk 
purchase. Under this system various government de¬ 
partments became the sole importers of certain food¬ 
stuffs and raw materials. By 1946-47 the character 
of the system was beginning to change in adaptation 
to the revival of world trade. This study by an Eng¬ 
lish economist, done at the invitation of Chatham 
House under a Fellowship at Manchester University, 
attempts to show the significance of bulk purchase of 
colonial products from both the colonies’ and the 
United Kingdom’s point of view. The summary and 
conclusions suggest that in peace time the price risks 
involved to both buyer and seller are greater than 
normal commercial risks, and that government agen¬ 
cies are given power without adequate control. 

220. Marcus, Edward, and Mildred R. Marcus. 

Investment and development possibilities in 
tropical Africa. New York, Bookman Associ¬ 
ates, 1960. 286 p. HC502.M25 

In this survey of the potentialities and problems of 
exploitation of the tremendous natural resources of 
tropical Africa north of the Republic of South Africa 


and south of the Sahara, the main theme is attraction 
of capital from Western Europe and the United States. 
Much of the information is based on the investigations 
made at first hand by the two economist writers dur¬ 
ing a study tour in 1958-59. They discuss general 
and regional aspects of the role of private investments, 
the possibilities for development of power, mining and 
petroleum, agriculture and industry, and the accom¬ 
panying factors of labor, transport, finance, trade, and 
political situations, all presenting difficulties which 
militate against overoptimism for the investor. 

221. Newlyn, Walter T., and D. C. Rowan. 

Money and banking in British colonial Africa; 
a study of the monetary and banking systems 
of eight British African territories. Oxford, 
Clarendon Press, 1954. 301 p. diagrs., 

tables. (Oxford studies in African affairs) 

HG3394.N4 

By two economists who had done field work in East 
and Central Africa (Newlyn) and in West Africa 
(Rowan). They reviewed social and economic back¬ 
ground in the former British colonies, then the opera¬ 
tions of the West African Currency Board, the East 
African Currency Board, and the Southern Rhodesia 
Currency Board. They analyzed all other forms of 
banking in the colonies—foreign and indigenous banks, 
such financial institutions as postal savings banks and 
cooperative societies, moneylenders and finance cor¬ 
porations, the monetary system and government policy 
in relation to finance. In conclusion they offered pro¬ 
posals for monetary and financial reform, involving 
a plea for central banking. 

222. “The proposed African Development Bank.” 

Africa report, v. 7, Apr. 1962: 16. 

DT1.A217, v. 7 

Short but highly informative resume of plans and 
progress toward the Bank proposed at meeting of U.N. 
Economic Commission for Africa, Addis Ababa, Feb. 
1962. 

223. United Nations. Dept, of Economic and Social 

Affairs. Economic survey of Africa since 1950. 
New York, 1959. 248 p. maps, tables. (Its 
[Document] E/CN.14/28) 

JX1977.A2 E/CN.14/28 

This report reviews and supplements the statistical 
material covered in earlier economic analyses of Africa 
published by this Department from 1951-1958 (see 
list on p. iii of the survey). It was requested by the 
Economic Commission for Africa at its first session, 


44 


December 1958/January 1959, and prepared for sub¬ 
mission to the second session. The sections, fortified 
with tabulated statistics, are on structural aspects, 
growth trends, development of external trade, and 
capital formation, each covering available data for 
all the countries of Africa. 

224. United Nations. Economic Commission for 

Africa. Economic bulletin for Africa, v. 1, 
no. 1+ Jan. 1961+ Addis Ababa, Ethiopia, 
Published by the Secretariat of the Economic 
Commission for Africa. Semi-annual. DLC 

The first issue of the official journal of ECA is in 
two parts, A, Current economic trends, and B, Special 
articles. In the first, there are general surveys of 
world economic trends and their impact on the coun¬ 
tries exporting primary raw materials, and of recent 
trends in African trade, and notes on the chief export 
commodities of the African region as a whole. Part B 
contains articles on institutional changes in the field 
of foreign trade and payments, money and banking 
for the franc zone, the sterling area, the Congo, and 
Somalia, also a survey of development programs in se¬ 
lected countries, and a review of economic develop¬ 
ments in the Congo, 1957-60. 

225. - Report. 1st + sess.; Dec. 29, 1958— 

Jan. 6, 1959+ New York. ([U.N. Docu¬ 
ment] E/CN/14/) DLC 

Issued as supplements to the Official Records of the 
Economic and Social Council. 

UNECA has headquarters in Addis Ababa where 
most of its many reports and other documents are 
prepared, though usually issued in New York. The 
Fourth Session was held from February 19-March 3, 
1962, and a two-page list of its documents and reso¬ 
lutions appears in the United Nations Review of May 
1962 (p. 49-50). These include the semi-annual Eco¬ 
nomic Bulletin for Africa and many special studies 
and reports. 

An article by the Observer correspondent, Colin Legum, 
“Economic Commission for Africa: Progress Report,” in 
World Today of July 1961 (v. 17, p. 299-307), summarized 
proceedings at the third session of UNECA in March 1961, 
and described the kinds of information being assembled at 
the headquarters, “where Mr. Mekki Abbas, the Secretary- 
General, is building up an impressive staff of Africans and 
non-Africans.” 

In the Ethiopa Observer of Autumn 1961 (v. 5, no. 3, p. 
254-284) there are two useful articles prepared by UNECA. 
The first is “Analysis—Recent Trends in African Trade,” 
including tables of imports, exports, etc., in general and by 
country and region. The second, “Development Programmes 
and Policies in Africa,” similarly summarizes in general and 


by country, ending with a useful list of documents relating 
to development plans. 

Among the more substantial mimeographed reports pre¬ 
pared by the Economic Commission for Africa and published 
as United Nations Documents are the following: 

Report of the facilities available for the training of 
Africans in economics, statistics and related fields of 
study, prepared by UNESCO ... 7 Dec. 1959. 35, 
11, 36, 2, 8, 5 p. (includes appendixes) (E/CN.14/ 
35) 

Transport problems in relation to economic develop¬ 
ment in West Africa. 6 Dec. 1960. 125 p., tables. 

(E/CN. 14/63) 

The impact of Western European integration on African 
trade and development. 7 Dec. 1960. 101 p. 

(E/CN. 14/72) 

International economic assistance to Africa. 16 Nov. 
1960. 35 p. (E/CN.14/88) 

Economic and social consequences of racial discrimina¬ 
tory practices. 1962. 216 p. diagrs. (E/CN.14/132) 

The Co-operative movement in Africa. 15 Jan. 1962. 
208 p. (E/CN.14/133) 

Note: For the help of Western business interests in Africa 
there is a wide variety of slight but useful material. In the 
list of Serials for African Studies prepared by the Library of 
Congress in 1961, almost 200 periodicals are indexed under 
Commerce and Economics; many of these are weekly news¬ 
papers or bulletins. The Bureau of International Commerce 
of the U.S. Department of Commerce issues constant reports 
in its World Trade Information Service. A checklist of 
available titles in December 1962 includes well over a hundred 
on Africa and the separate countries. This listing is repro¬ 
duced in an article in African Studies Bulletin, vol. 5, no. 3, 
Oct. 1962, by the Department’s Director of the Africa Divi¬ 
sion of the Bureau of International Programs, Bernard Blank- 
enheimer. Among the series for each country are: Estab¬ 
lishing a Business in [. . .], Economic Developments in [. . .], 
Preparing Shipments to [. . .], Living Conditions in [. . .]. 
A comparable British series is issued by the Board of Trade 
in London, Hints to Business Men Visiting [. . .]—little 
pamphlets of elementary information regarding travel, trade, 
credits, etc. The Austrian Bundeskammer der Gewerblichen 
Wirtschaft has a series of booklets of Oesterreichs Aussen- 
handel which relate to individual countries of Africa, giving 
the same sort of data. An Italian series, Guida per VEsporta- 
tore Italiano in [Ghana, etc.] are leaflets with colorful covers, 
containing the same practical notes. 

SOCIAL STUDIES 

Bibliography 

226. Centre International de Documentation 
ficONOMIQUE ET SOCIALE AfRICAINE. En- 
quetes bibliographiques [series] Bruxelles, 
1959 + 

This association, which began as CEDESA and in 
1961 added the adjective International to its name, 
thus becoming CIDESA, is concerned with bibliog¬ 
raphies, both as card service and in the series of printed 


45 



bibliographies on special subjects of social or economic 
significance. Among the contributions to date are: 
Fasc. 1. Le probleme de la delinquance juvenile, by M. 
L. Kerremans-Ramioulle. 1959. 63 p. 

Z5118.C9K4 1959 

Fasc. 2. Venseignement superieur et la recherche sci- 
entifique en Afrique inter tropic ale, by Jean Leyder. 
1960. 219 p. Z3501.L4 

Fasc. 3. Le probleme de Vhabitat rural en Afrique noire, 
by Paul Verhaegen. 1960. 73 p. Z7164.H8V4 

Fasc. 4. Problemes fonciers et regime des terres, by T. 

Heyse. 1960. 163 p. Z7164.L3H4 

Fasc. 5. Contribution a I’itude de la progression econo- 
mique de l’Afrique, by Guy Smet. 1960. 217 p. 

Z7165.A4S6 

Fasc. 6. Le probleme des routes en regions intertropi- 
cales, by J. Nuyens. 1961. 133 p. Z7^5.N8 

Fasc. 7. Bibliographie de la condition de VAfricaine en 
Afrique noire, by F. Plisnier-Ladame. 1961. 241 p. 

Z7964.A3P5 

Fasc. 8. Aspects iconomiques et sociaux de Vindustriali¬ 
zation en Afrique, by P. Dethine. 1961. 136 p. 

Fasc. 9. L’Urbanisation de VAfrique noire: son cadre, 
ses causes et ses consequences economiques, sociales et 
culturelles, by P. Verhaegen. 1962. 388 p. 

227. Comhaire, J. L. L., comp. Urban conditions in 
Africa; select reading list on urban problems in 
Africa. [New and rev. ed.] London, Published 
for the Institute of Colonial Studies by Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1952. 48 p. 

Z3501.C65 1952 
The first edition of this list, edited by Dr. Margery 
Perham, was issued in 1947. It was revised to reflect 
the great increase of literature on the subject in 5 years, 
and as one of the distinguished series of reading lists 
upon colonial questions prepared for the Institute of 
Colonial Studies. Like the others of the series, it 
might be cited as a model for a subject bibliography 
relating to Africa. 

Urbanization is one of the themes stressed in several 
UNESCO publications, notably Current Sociology, the In¬ 
ternational Social Science Bulletin, and the International 
Bibliography of Social and Cultural Anthropology. In all 
these, however, the approach is worldwide, without geo¬ 
graphical subdivision. 


228. African-American Institute. Women’s 
Africa Committee. The role of women in 
Africa. Edited by Mary Craig Schuller and 
Elizabeth Hunting Wheeler. New York, 1960. 
36 p. HQ1788.A55 

Report of a conference held in New York in No¬ 
vember 1959, at which this committee, an affiliate of 
the African-American Institute, discussed the chang¬ 
ing role of African women in home and community, 


and attempted to outline exchange programs in which 
American women may cooperate with them. 

An African Congress of the World Movement of Mothers 
was held at Abidjan, Ivory Coast, April 4-10, 1961. The 
Congress with 500 in attendance considered values and detri¬ 
ments to women in the traditional family life, health, hous¬ 
ing, education, economic and social roles, progress due to the 
new ways of life and tensions created by them. The Report 
is to be published according to a note in a special issue of 
Movement mondial des meres, (Paris, no. 16, avr.-juin 1961). 
As of early 1963 it has not reached the Library of Congress. 

229. Batten, Thomas R. Communities and their 

development; an introductory study with spe¬ 
cial reference to the Tropics. London, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1957. 248 p. illus. 

HN15.B35 

Basic work by the Supervisor of Studies on Com¬ 
munity Development of the University of London In¬ 
stitute of Education. His own previous field experi¬ 
ence had been in West and East Africa from 1927 to 
1949, and though his study is general for under¬ 
developed regions of tropical countries, many of his 
examples are drawn from Africa. He discusses trends 
in community development, agencies and their work 
of directing, of aiding community projects, and of 
building communities, the school and literacy cam¬ 
paigns, methods of “introducing new ideas,” and of 
working with groups and training workers. The biblio¬ 
graphical chapter notes include many specific refer¬ 
ences on community work in Africa. 

Mr. Batten’s book of 1959, School and Community in the 
Tropics (London, Oxford University Press, 177 p.) is con¬ 
cerned with the connections of community development with 
the schools and the role of teachers. It relates more to other 
parts of the world than to Africa. 

230. Binet, Jacques. Le manage en Afrique noire. 

Paris, Editions du Cerf, 1959. 176 p. illus. 

(Foi vivante. Serie “Vie des missions”) 

HQ691.B5 

By an administrator and sociologist particularly 
familiar with Cameroun and Equatorial Africa. This 
is a study of the causes and extent of polygamy, of 
dowries, and of traditional and changing marriage 
customs. 

231. UEnfant africain; l’education de l’enfant africain 

en fonction de son milieu de base et de son 
orientation d’avenir. Paris, Editions Fleurus, 
1960. 484 p. (Bureau international catho- 
lique de l’enfance. Collection Etudes et 
documents) HQ792.A4C6 1957a 

The report of a Conference held under auspices of 
the Bureau at Yaounde, Cameroun, in 1957, and at- 


46 



tended by 400 European and African missionaries, 
priests, nuns, doctors, and teachers. Twelve chapters 
summarize the material gathered from responses to a 
preliminary questionnaire, and the papers and dis¬ 
cussions of the Conference on various aspects of the 
life, education, and well-being of the African child. 
The text of the questionnaire, a synthesis of the 800 
pages of documentation received in replies, and a 
bibliography of about 1,500 references (p. 464-484) 
are given as appendixes. 

232. Gardiner, Robert Kweku, and Helen O. Judd. 

The development of social administration. 2d 
ed. London, Oxford University Press, 1959. 
208 p. HN18.G29 1959 

This book sketched the history and principles of 
social welfare in Britain as a guide to the social prog¬ 
ress that is demanded in the present rapidly changing 
society of West Africa. As the old village system in 
which the family looked out for its own members 
breaks down under urban economic development, the 
writers stress that the new African society must accept 
responsibility for “the needs of the social ‘casualties’ of 
industrialization.” The social aspects of administra¬ 
tion, community development, mutual aid and social 
insurance, philanthropy, education, health, rehabili¬ 
tation of delinquents, education and training for social 
work, are some of the themes illustrated for the coming 
leaders of Africa. Mr. Gardiner, in 1962 head of the 
U.N. Mission to the Congo, was at the time an official 
in the Gold Coast administration, and Mrs. Judd a 
social scientist at the London School of Economics. 

233. Hunter, Guy. The new societies of tropical 

Africa; a selective study. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1962. xviii, 376 p. 
illus., fold, maps, tables. HN777.H8 

Issued under the auspices of the Institute of Race Rela¬ 
tions, London. Bibliography: p. 348-360. 

The result of a project undertaken in 1959 and 
placed under the direction of Mr. Hunter, who traveled 
widely in Africa, interviewing over a thousand people. 
Although he is responsible alone for the final text, 
it was based on the work of many writers and on papers 
done especially for this purpose by local study groups 
in Africa. The chapters cover the historical growth of 
modern economies and changing culture, present rural 
and urban society, growth of industry, labor problems, 
education and manpower, evolving political systems, 
and last, “The Quality of African Society.” 


234. Inter-African Conference on Social Sci¬ 

ences. 1st, Bukavu, Belgian Congo, 1955. 
[Memoranda and documents prepared for the 
C.C.T.A. Conference on Social Sciences to be 
held at Bukavu in the Belgian Congo in August 
and September 1955. n.p., 1955] 20 pieces. 

HN792.I53 1955 
Working papers prepared for the Conference by 
committees from the various countries attending the 
meeting. The first eight papers, each of some length, 
are by East African specialists, commenting on research 
accomplished and in prospect in sociology, social 
anthropology and psychology, economics, human geog¬ 
raphy, demography, social history, education, and 
linguistics. Comparable papers or short resumes were 
submitted also by committees from the Federation of 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, the Gold Coast, Sierra 
Leone, from the French Government with relation to 
tropical Africa and Madagascar, and from the Union 
of South Africa. A number of the papers include or 
consist of bibliographies. Last is the annual report of 
the West African Institute of Social and Economic 
Research at Ibadan. 

235. International African Institute. Social im¬ 

plications of industrialization and urbanization 
in Africa south of the Sahara. Paris, 
UNESCO, 1956. 743 p. illus., maps, diagrs., 
tables. (Tensions and technology series) 

HN773.I5 

Under the auspices of UNESCO an International 
Conference on the Social Impact of Industrialization 
and Urban Conditions in Africa south of the Sahara 
was organized by the International African Institute 
at Abidjan in September-October 1954. This volume 
represents the results. The first two parts comprise 
an introduction by the Director of the Institute, Pro¬ 
fessor Daryll Forde, explaining the Conference and its 
field of study, then a survey by Miss Meran McCulloch 
of about thirty recent and current field studies on the 
social effects of economic developments in tropical 
Africa, ending with a chapter of comparisons and con¬ 
clusions. Part 3 is the report of a sample study made 
by a field research team on social effects of urbanization 
in Stanleyville, Belgian Congo (preliminary report by 
V. G. Pons, N. Xydias, and P. Clement). Part 4 con¬ 
tains papers presented at the Conference, five on West 
Africa, five on East Africa, three on the Belgian Congo, 
three on Southern Africa. 


47 


236. International Children's Centre, Paris. 

Etude des conditions de vie de Venfant afri- 
cain en milieu urbain et de leur influence sur la 
delinquance juvenile. Enquete entreprise a 
Madagascar, au Cameroun et en Cote d’Ivoire 
de 1954 a 1957. Paris, 1959. 175 p. (Tra- 
vaux et documents, xii) HV9217.A516 

Thorough sociological study presented statistically 
with many tables, graphic charts, maps, and case his¬ 
tories. Includes bibliography on juvenile delinquency 
in Africa and other underdeveloped areas (p. 165— 
173). 

Two conferences on the problems of African childhood have 
been organized by the International Children’s Centre, the 
first in Brazzaville in December 1952, the second at Lagos 
in March 1959, in collaboration with the Commission for 
Technical Co-operation in Africa South of the Sahara. The 
report of the latter, Conference on the Welfare of the Afri¬ 
can Child, Lagos, 1959, was published with the title, Le bien- 
itre de Venfant en Afrique au sud du Sahara . . . Child wel¬ 
fare in Africa South of the Sahara (Paris, I. Paul Pont et 
F. Flis, for the Centre international de l’enfance, 1959. 185 
p.) The volume contains lists of delegates, opening and 
closing addresses, program, and summaries of reports and 
conclusions. 

237. International Institute of Differing Civili¬ 

zations. Women’s role in the development of 
tropical and sub-tropical countries. Report of 
the 31st meeting, Brussels, 17-20 Sept. 1958. 
Brussels, 1959. 543 p. HQ1154.16 

At this session of the influential organization known 
as INCIDI, representatives from 18 countries were 
present, and papers were on a high level of authori¬ 
tativeness. The first 254 pages are given, after open¬ 
ing speeches, to reports from Africa, beginning with 
an address by Sister Marie Andre du Sacre Coeur on 
French West Africa. There follow reports by spokes¬ 
men for the Ivory Coast, Liberia, Nigeria, Somalia, 
Portuguese provinces in Africa, the Belgian Congo, 
Ruanda, Rhodesia and Nyasaland, Uganda, Madagas¬ 
car, the Union of South Africa (by Muriel Horrell of 
the S.A. Institute of Race Relations), Egypt and the 
Sudan. The remainder of the volume is taken up with 
reports from Asia and Latin America. 

238. Marie Andre du Sacre Coeur, Sister. La 

femme noire en Afrique occidentale. Paris, 
Payot, 1939. 278 p. illus. (Bibliotheque 

scientifique) HQ1802.M3 

Bibliography: p. 275-278. 

239. - La condition humaine en Afrique noire. 

Paris, Grasset, 1953. 262 p. illus. HN776.M3 


The writer, a White Sister, is also a Doctor in Law 
of the Catholic University of Lille and a member of 
the French Conseil Superieur des Affaires Sociales 
d’Outre-Mer. Her first book, resulting from her ob¬ 
servations of the life of the women among who she 
worked in the remote “bush,” won an Academy prize. 
The second work, for the preparation of which she 
spent fifteen months in former French West Africa 
and Cameroun, is a socio-legal study of the African 
family, with special reference to marriage law and the 
place of the woman in the as yet almost unchanged 
polygamous rural society. She traces resemblances be¬ 
tween African customary law and the laws of Rome 
and the Germanic tribes of antiquity. Most of her 
information, she claims, comes from the African elites, 
and she urges that the West trust the Africans in their 
will toward evolution and their receptivity to a spirit¬ 
ual message. 

240. Maunier, Rene. The sociology of colonies; an 

introduction to the study of race contact. 
Edited and translated by E. O. Lorimer. Lon¬ 
don, Routledge & K. Paul, 1949. 2 v. (In¬ 
ternational Library of Sociology and Social 
Reconstruction) JV305.M314 

The first edition of this well-known French study 
in colonial theory was published in 1932. Professor 
Maunier (Colonial Sciences, University of Paris) wrote 
it in three parts, the first two of which are combined 
in Volume 1 of the English edition; these two are 
concerned with general issues, doctrine, forms and ef¬ 
fects of race contact, and mental and spiritual reac¬ 
tions of blacks and whites. The third part, written 
later and published separately, examines the solutions, 
which are in essence for the white man to pass from 
domination to partnership, in cooperation with the 
black. 

241. Miner, Horace, ed. Social science in action in 

sub-Saharan Africa. New York, Society for 
Applied Anthropology, 1960. p. 97-167. 
(Human organization , v. 19, Fall 1960) 

GN1.H83, v. 19 

This special issue of the journal of the Society for 
Applied Anthropology “was planned as a contribution 
to the American discovery of Africa,” its purpose to 
acquaint American scholars recently entering this field 
with some of the European tradition of African studies 
and resultant activities. The first four papers examine 
British, French, Belgian, and Soviet research in the 
social sciences in Africa; the writers are Lucy Mair, 
Georges Balandier, Joseph Nicaise, and Christopher 


48 



Bird. The following articles are by English and 
American scholars on particular subjects—slums and 
family life, labor migration, etc., etc. 

242. Ojike, Mbonu. My Africa. New York, John 

Day, 1946. 350 p. DTI4.04 

Interpretive account of African life, much of it in 
terms of comparison with the West, which is now 
looked on as a classic. The writer, a young Nigerian 
educated partly in African mission schools, partly in an 
American university, extended his generalizations to 
the whole continent, though his examples are drawn 
largely from his own nation. He begins with the 
personal story of his background, childhood, and edu¬ 
cation in a Nigerian village. In the second part he 
describes various phases of life in Africa, economic, so¬ 
cial, religious, aesthetic, and political. His final sec¬ 
tion, “Practicing Brotherhood,” is a plea for Africa’s 
place in the sun. He protests against the misrepre¬ 
sentation of Africans by publicists who have “treated 
Africans just as a museum specimen. We are likened 
to a zoo where you go to see lower forms of animal 
lives.” The emphasis throughout is nationalistic. The 
writer had formerly been an editor of the leading 
Nationalist paper of Nigeria, the West African Pilot 
of Lagos, and at the time was managing director of an 
African enterprise, the African Development Corpo¬ 
ration. 

243. Paulme, Denise, ed. Femmes d’Afrique noire. 

Paris, Mouton, 1960. 280 p. (Le Monde 

d’outre-mer passe et present. 1. ser. fitudes 
9) HQ1287.P3 

Six exceptionally interesting essays by women eth¬ 
nologists, based on field experience of the last 10 years. 
The introduction, generalizing on the theme of the 
work, the status, and ways of life of women in Africa, 
is by a well-known anthropologist now with the Divi¬ 
sion des Aires Culturelles in the ficole Pratique des 
Hautes fitudes. A long analytical bibliography (p. 
219-278) is classified by subject. 

244. Phillips, Arthur, ed. Survey of African mar¬ 

riage and family life. London, New York, 
Published for the International African Insti¬ 
tute by Oxford University Press, 1953. 462 p. 

HQ691.P45 

Inspired by the International Missionary Council 
at the suggestion of Lord Hailey in 1946. The editor, 
reader in administration of colonial law at the Uni¬ 
versity of London, writes an introductory essay. Part 
1, “African Marriage and Social Change,” is by Dr. 
Lucy P. Mair. Part 2, “Marriage Laws in Africa,” is 


by Dr. Phillips. Part 3, “Christian Marriage in Afri¬ 
can Society,” is by the Rev. Lyndon Harris of the 
School of Oriental and African Studies, formerly of the 
Universities’ Mission to Central Africa. Each part has 
its own scholarly footnotes, bibliography and indexes, 
including separate indexes of the tribes studied. 

A short summarization of the Survey of African Marriage 
and Family Life was published by the International Mission¬ 
ary Council as No. 1 of their series of Research Pamphlets, 
African Marriage, by Thomas Price (London, SCM Press, 
1954. 56 p.). The conflicts of Christian practices and prin¬ 
ciples with the tribal marriage customs—particularly with 
polygamy and bride price—are the main points of discussion. 

245. United Nations. Secretariat. Progress of the 

non-self-governing territories under the Char¬ 
ter. v. 3. Social conditions. New York, 
1961. 251 p. (ST/TRI/Ser. A/15/v. 3) 

JX1977.A2 

This review of general development in social condi¬ 
tions of independent territories throughout the world 
covers race relations, social welfare, social security 
legislation, community development, freedom of asso¬ 
ciation and industrial relations, cooperative societies, 
demographic conditions and population trends, health 
services and activities, nutrition. It is one of five vol¬ 
umes, the first a general review, Volume 2 on economic 
conditions. Volume 4 on educational developments. 
Volume 5 summaries for individual territories. A 
cumulative index will be published separately. The 
period covered in the progress report is 1946 to 1957, 
consequently most of Africa south of the Sahara 
(former British colonies except Ghana, former French 
territories, Belgian Congo) are included. Official 
sources are given for most data. 

246. World Union of Catholic Women’s Organi¬ 

zations. Regional seminar, Lome, Togo, 
1958. African women speak. Edited by the 
National Catholic Welfare Conference, Office 
for U.N. Affairs. Maryknoll, N.Y., World 
horizon reports, 1960. 117 p. illus., ports. 

(World horizon reports. Report no. 26) 

HQ1788.W65 1958 

A summary of abridgment of the French and Eng¬ 
lish talks and a summary of the discussions in the eight 
workshops which followed each session. Over 300 
African Catholic women were present at this meeting, 
from 10 countries of West and Central Africa. “In a 
continent where they have traditionally occupied an 
inferior position women spoke up for themselves— 
about themselves.” Themes were education and vo¬ 
cational training for girls, marriage, bride price, polyg- 


49 


amy, legal status of the widow or deserted wife, family 
and social life, civic responsibilities, Catholic educa¬ 
tion and action. 

LABOR 

Bibliography 

247. Panofsky, Hans E. A bibliography of labor 
migration in Africa south of the Sahara. 
Evanston, University Library, Northwestern 
University, 1961. 28 1. DLC-AFR 

Compiled by the Curator of Africana of North¬ 
western University Library, who has specialized in the 
study of African labor migration. Although his focus 
is a limited phase of the labor question, a number 
of general works on labor in Africa are included. The 
arrangement is regional, with author index. Mr. 
Panofsky has made extensive coverage of books and 
periodical materials in English and European languages 
up to mid-1961, and includes slight annotations and 
indication of reviews or precis in African Abstracts. 


248. Inter-African Labour Institute. Bulletin. 

London, Commission for Technical Co-opera¬ 
tion in Africa South of the Sahara. 19544- 
bimonthly. English and French. 

HD4811.156 

The Institute was set up in 1948 as the permanent 
organ of the Inter-African Labour Conference operat¬ 
ing under the aegis of CCTA. The quarterly journal 
provides broad coverage of important aspects of Af¬ 
rican labor in its articles, also bibliographical notes 
that include texts of labor legislation. Two typical 
issues, v. 8, no. 2-3, May and August 1961, contain 
articles on the problems of executive staff in Nigeria, 
Uganda, Nyasaland, Ivory Coast, Guinea, and Mo¬ 
rocco, a report of the 6th Inter-African Labour Con¬ 
ference, Abidjan, April 1961, and specialist articles 
on labor migration in Madagascar, the functions of 
management, and unemployment in Leopoldville. 

The Institute also prepares monographic studies: e.g., 
The Human Factors of Productivity in Africa; A Preliminary 
Survey (2d ed. Brazzaville, 1960. 156 p. diagr.). 

249. International Labor Office. African labour 

survey. Geneva, 1958. xiv, 712 p. map, ta¬ 
bles. (Its Studies and reports, new ser., 
no. 48) HD7801.167, no. 48 

Bibliography: p. 695-707. 

The drafts of this survey, which had been authorized 
by ILO in 1956, were examined by its Committee of 


Experts on Social Policy in Non-Metropolitan Ter¬ 
ritories in late 1957, and the final text prepared under 
supervision of the Director General. The primary 
purpose of the big study was to provide a point of de¬ 
parture for future work in Africa south of the Sahara. 
All possible aspects bearing on labor are covered— 
economic and social conditions, land and labor, com¬ 
munity development, all phases of employment, work 
performance, wages, recruitment, social provisions, 
labor administration, and application of international 
labor standards. Each chapter ends with a summary 
of conclusions, and a final chapter gives the general 
conclusions of the Committee of Experts, which in 
1958 was to be replaced by a separate ILO African 
Field Office and an African Advisory Committee. Ap¬ 
pendixes are texts of ILO documents of standards and 
recommendations, citation of principal labor legisla¬ 
tion of the countries of Africa, miscellaneous tables 
of statistics, and a bibliography. 

250. Istituto Italiano per uAfrica. Premesse al 

lavoro italiano in Africa. Roma, 1960. 271 p. 

DT35.I82 

By Teobaldo Filesi, chairman of the Studies Board 
of the Institute, and other specialists, this book is de¬ 
signed to promote Italian emigration and aid in de¬ 
velopment of the new countries of Africa. Filesi and 
S. Bono write the first essay on Italian communities 
already existing, G. Ziliotto on laws, requirements, and 
methods of emigration. L. Magnino describes educa¬ 
tion in the African countries, A. Napoletano discusses 
climate, and A. Bettola tropical diseases. 

251. Lux, Andre. Le marche du travail en Afrique 

noire. Louvain, Nauwelaerts, 1962. 328 p. 

General study of labor market in South, Central 
and East Africa, with detailed analysis for Kasai 
Province in the Congo. Includes many statistical 
tables. 

252. Morgaut, Marc-Edmond. Un dialogue nou¬ 

veau; VAfrique et VIndustrie. Paris, Fayard, 
1959. 200 p. HD8776.M6 

By a “psychotechnician” who had worked with large 
industrial enterprises in Equatorial Africa, Cameroun, 
Senegal, and Guinea. The writer analyzed the char¬ 
acter of the African worker, finding that similarities 
with the European worker are greater than the differ¬ 
ences. He made suggestions for employment of Af¬ 
rican labor, for training the various cadres of 
technicians, and for constant improvement in rela¬ 
tions between Africans and Europeans in industry. 


50 



253. Noon, John A. Labor problems of Africa. 

Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 
the University Museum, 1944. 144 p. (Af¬ 

rican handbooks, ed. by H. A. Wieschhoff. 6) 

HD8776.N6 

Bibliography: p. 140-144. 

One of a series of wartime introductions to African 
problems, written for the lay reader. The rapid change 
in much of Africa from a subsistence village economy 
to wage earning is the main subject of analysis. 

254. Orde-Brown, G. St. J. The African labourer. 

London, Published for the International In¬ 
stitute of African Languages and Cultures by 
Oxford University Press, H. Milford, 1933. 
240 p. map. HD8774.07 

The writer of this pioneer study of the problems of 
African labor had been Labour Commissioner in Tan¬ 
ganyika from 1926 to 1931 and was subsequently a 
representative in the International Labour Organiza¬ 
tion and an Advisor on Colonial Labour to the British 
Colonial Office. In the first part of this book he 
treated the background of primitive African society 
and the first impact of foreign influences, the incen¬ 
tives offered the African for wage earning, forced 
labor, methods and conditions of recruiting and labor 
contracts, living and social conditions of laborers, etc. 
Part 2 contains a country-by-country summary of labor 
legislation, and Part 3 cites international draft conven¬ 
tions relative to African labor. Major Orde-Brown 
made regional surveys, which were published by H.M. 
Stationery Office for the Colonial Office: Labour in 
the Tanganyika Territory (1926. 105 p. Its Colonial 
no. 19); Labour Conditions in Northern Rhodesia 
(1938. 99 p. Its Colonial no. 150); Labour Condi¬ 
tions in West Africa (1941. 149 p. Cmd. 6277); 

Labour Conditions in East Africa (1946. 94 p. Co¬ 
lonial no. 193). 

255. Le Travail en Afrique noire. Paris, Editions du 

Seuil, 1952. 427 p. illus. (Presence afri- 

caine, 13) GN645.P74, no. 13 

Group of papers, mostly by French economists and 
sociologists, on labor questions in Africa. Some of 
the views expressed were far to the left, reflecting ex¬ 
treme anticolonialism. 

256. U.S. Bureau of International Labor Af¬ 

fairs. Directory of labor organizations, 
Africa. Rev. ed. Washington, 1962. 1 v. 

(looseleaf) HD6856.U6 

Large processed pamphlet containing the most ac¬ 
curate available information on the structure, composi¬ 


tion, membership, and international affiliations of labor 
organizations in Africa as of May 1, 1962. Narratives 
accompanying each chapter provide some indication 
of the significance of the labor movement within the 
social structure of the country. There are 49 chapters 
in all, one for each country of Africa. Two appendixes 
give a list of abbreviations and a list of names of labor 
officials. 

POPULATION 

257. Barbour, Kenneth M., and R. M. Prothero. 

Essays on African population. New York, 
Praeger, 1962. 336 p. (Books that matter) 

HB3661.B3 

Besides the two editors’ contributions, this volume in¬ 
cludes essays by several other British geographers, so¬ 
ciologists, and population experts. Subjects are 
censuses, population mapping, wages, labor and pop¬ 
ulation movements, towns, etc. Most parts of Africa 
south of the Sahara come under consideration. 

258. Blanc, Robert. Handbook of demographic re¬ 

search in under-developed countries, [n.p., 
n.d.] 115 p. (Scientific Council for Africa 

South of the Sahara. Publication no. 36) 

DLC 

This work, not yet available for examination in the 
Library of Congress in March 1963, is an edition in 
English of a paper in French, issued in a limited mim¬ 
eographed edition as Publication No. 36 of CSA in 
1958 or 1959. The English handbook was circulated 
to participants at the Seminar on Population Problems 
in Cairo (see below). 

259. Kuczynski, Robert Rene. Demographic sur¬ 

vey of the British colonial empire. London, 
New York, Oxford University Press, 1948. 4 v. 
tables. HB3584.A1K8 

Includes bibliographies. 

A comprehensive survey of demographic statistics 
prior to World War II, prepared under the auspices 
of the Royal Institute of International Affairs by a 
population analyst who during the course of the work 
was appointed adviser to the British Colonial Office. 
Mr. Kuczynski died in 1947, while the first two volumes 
were still in process of publication, and proofreading 
and indexing were completed by his daughter, Dr. 
Brigitte Long. The first volume deals with West 
Africa, with full account from the beginnings through 
1946 and statistics for each country of census taking, 
total population, composition of African and non-Afri¬ 
can population, birth and death registration, fertility, 
mortality, and population growth. The second volume 


51 


covers the same material for the High Commission 
territories, Central and East Africa, Mauritius, and 
Seychelles. 

260. Lorimer, Frank. Demographic information on 

tropical Africa. Boston, Boston University 
Press, 1961. 207 p. map. HB3661.L6 
Professor Lorimer’s book results from a study car¬ 
ried out under the auspices of the African Studies 
Program at Boston University and the Population 
Council of New York, and his own investigations in 
statistical offices and research centers in Africa. It 
is a review and analysis of the whole course of popu¬ 
lation studies for Africa, beginning with general con¬ 
sideration of methodology, then examining by regions 
the development of demographic information. Tables 
and bibliographies of census reports and other popu¬ 
lation studies are interspersed. In the introductory 
chapter there are listings and explanation of the chief 
bibliographies and manuals of African demographic 
statistics, and of the conferences on population held 
by CCTA and other international bodies. 

261. Seminar on Population Problems, Cairo, Oct. 

29-Nov. 10, 1962. Report. Cairo, United 
Nations. Economic Commission for Africa, 
1962. 58 p. and annexes. (U.N. Document 
E/CN.14/186. E/CN.9/Conf. 3/1) DLC 
This Seminar held under UNECA auspices is de¬ 
scribed by Dr. Lorimer as “important,” its report of 
proceedings as “excellent.” The document begins with 
summary of conclusions and recommendations, then 
gives summary of discussions. The annexes contain 
texts of the most important addresses and statements, 
lists of participants and observers, program, and last 
a long list of documents (E/CN.14/ASPP/L.1-17; 
E/CN. 14/ASPP/INF. 1; E/CN. 14/ASPP/G. 1-7) 

which had been prepared as preliminary papers for the 
Conference. Among these was the Handbook by 
Blanc, noted above. 

ANTHROPOLOGY AND 
SOCIOLOGY 

Bibliography 

262. International African Institute. Africa 

bibliography series: ethnography, sociology, 
linguistics, and related subjects. London, 
1958 + 

A series based on the bibliographical card index of 
the International African Institute, compiled by Ruth 
Jones, librarian, with the assistance of a panel of con¬ 


sultants. Many of the entries have appeared in the 
quarterly bibliographies published in the journal of 
the Institute, Africa, since 1929, and the more notable 
periodical contributions have been summarized in 
African Abstracts, issued by the Institute in coopera¬ 
tion with UNESCO since 1950. There have been, to 
Spring 1963, four volumes folio size, in offset print: 
West Africa (1958. 116 1. Z3516.515); North-East 
Africa (1959. 51 1. Z3516.I5); East Africa (1960. 
62 1. Z3516.I47); South-East Central Africa and 

Madagascar (1961. 531. Z3516.I53). They include 
books, periodical articles, and documents arranged by 
country, subject, and under the main subjects, eth¬ 
nography and linguistics, by tribal groupings. Each 
part has an index of names of ethnic sections and 
languages. 

Besides these comprehensive bibliographies and the above- 
mentioned current lists in Africa and African Abstracts, there 
are notable chapter bibliographies in the Institute’s series 
of the Ethnographic Survey of Africa (no. 270). Useful 
reading lists will also be found in a number of the studies 
described in this section. 

For even more extensive reference to European writings 
on cultural anthropology of Africa south of the Sahara, see 
the Belgian Bibliographic ethnographique . . . published 
annually by the Musee Royal de l’Afrique Centrale (no. 
1953) which since its first volume analyzing writings “du 
Congo beige et des regions avoisinantes” for 1925—30 has 
steadily increased its coverage of literature relating to terri¬ 
tories beyond the borders of the former Belgian territories. 

263. Wieschhoff, Heinrich A. Anthropological 
bibliography of Africa. New Haven, Ameri¬ 
can Oriental Society, 1948. 461 p. (Ameri¬ 
can Oriental series, 23) Z5113.W5 

The late author, a well-known American Africanist, 
had been editor of the University of Pennsylvania 
series of handbooks during the Second World War, 
and subsequently an official at the United Nations. 
He was with Dag Hammerskjold as a technical advisor 
on the mission in the Congo in which both lost their 
lives in September 1961. This big subject bibliography 
was prepared under a grant from the American Coun¬ 
cil of Learned Societies, and was developed from a 
working card catalog. Entries are under the names 
of tribes and geographic areas, listed in alphabetical 
order with many cross-references of tribal names and 
their synonyms. They include articles from over 200 
scholarly periodicals and journals of learned societies. 


264. Bascom, William R., and Melville J. Her- 
skovits, eds. Continuity and change in Afri¬ 
can cultures. Chicago, University of Chicago 
Press, 1958. 309 p. illus., maps. GN651.B3 


52 



These essays by social anthropologists who had be¬ 
gun their work under Professor Herskovits at North¬ 
western University are based on a set of papers de¬ 
livered at an “interdisciplinary conference” at Prince¬ 
ton University in 1953. The first five relate to cultur¬ 
al change in Africa as a whole, the others to particu¬ 
lar areas or peoples, mostly in West Africa, where a 
number of the writers have done field work. The 
opening essay examines challengingly “The Problem 
of Stability and Change in African Culture,” arguing 
for analysis of change through an historical and cul¬ 
tural approach rather than through sociology. The 
other papers of the general section study cultural 
changes in linguistics, art, music, and the status of 
women under plural marriage. The papers on specific 
cultures treat social, political, economic, and religious 
changes. A feature of the Princeton conference had 
been the attendance of Muslim students. 

265. Baumann, Hermann, and Diedrich Wester- 

mann. Les peuples et les civilisations de 
VAfrique, suivi de Les langues et l’education. 
Traduction frangaise par L. Homburger. Paris, 
Payot, 1948. 605 p. (Bibliotheque scien- 
tifique) illus. DT14.B38 

The German original of this basic work in which 
the anthropologist Professor Baumann collaborated 
with the philologist Professor Westermann was pub¬ 
lished in 1939, with a second edition in 1943. In the 
latter there was a third part on the European impact 
on African society by Dr. Richard Thurnwald, which 
is omitted in the French translation by the director of 
African linguistic studies at the ficole Pratique des 
Hautes fitudes. Dr. Baumann’s part (p. 11-437), 
which is considered authoritative by many European 
ethnologists, is a broad analysis of cultural cycles and 
regional ethnography in sub-Saharan Africa. 

266. Beart, Charles. Jeux et jouets de I’Ouest 

africain. Dakar, IFAN, 1955. 2 v. (888 p.) 
illus. GN456.88.W4B4 

267. - Recherche des elements d’une sociologie 

des peuples africains a partir de leur jeux. 
Paris, Presence africaine, 1960. 147 p. 

GN456.82B4 

M. Beart’s first book is an ethnological study of the 
games and playthings of both children and adults in 
West Africa, particularly former French West Africa. 
The two big volumes, involving a detailed analysis of 
each game or toy, are lavishly illustrated. In the 
second book, which goes on from the earlier work, 
the author urges that the meanings of the traditional 


games and dances in the social development of the 
peoples be probed and evaluated before they die out 
under cultural change. As before, his examples are 
drawn largely from French-speaking West Africa, in¬ 
cluding games and ritual dances, which now, he says, 
are undergoing “desacralisation.” 

268. Biasutti, Renato. Le razze e i popoli della 

terra. Con la collaborazione die professori 
Matteo Bartoli [et al.] 3. ed. riv. e aggiornata. 
Torino, Unione tipografico-editrice torinese, 
1959. 4 v. (ca. 2,500 p.) illus., col. plates, 
maps, diagrs. GN315.B46 1959 

Includes bibliographies. 

Volume 3 of this encyclopedic Italian work on 
worldwide ethnology is devoted to Africa. Prepared 
with the collaboration of Professors Ernesta Cerulli, 
Lidio Gypriani, and other leading Italian Africanists, it 
is a handsomely illustrated compilation of data regard¬ 
ing the findings of anthropological study. A general 
survey of African prehistory and of present-day races 
and cultures is followed by chapters analyzing the 
physical anthropology of African peoples by region, 
each chapter ending with bibliography. A compre¬ 
hensive index of tribal names is, unfortunately, in vol¬ 
ume 4 along with that of peoples of the rest of the 
world. 

269. Bohannan, Paul, ed. African homicide and 

suicide. Princeton, N.J., Princeton University 
Press, 1960. xviii, 270 p. map, tables. 

HV6513.B5 

Dr. Bohannan, a professor of social anthropology 
at Northwestern University, is an authority on the 
Tiv tribe of Central Nigeria. In the course of field 
research some years ago, he encountered a file on a 
murder case, and realized that it contained invaluable 
ethnographic information. This led to the present 
study, in which he and a group of associates have col¬ 
lected statistical data and case histories of homicide 
and suicide among various African peoples. The in¬ 
troductory and closing chapters by the editor theorize 
on the subject, and analyze its patterns. Women, it is 
found, indulge in murder and suicide almost entirely 
for domestic reasons; for men, the patterns also include 
status in society. 

270. Ethnographic survey of Africa [series] Edited by 

Daryll Forde. London, International African 
Institute, 1950 + 

French series, Monographies ethnologiques africaines, pub¬ 
lished for the Institute by Presses universitaires de France, 
Paris. 


53 



Subseries are: Western Africa (English and French series); 
East Central Africa; West Central Africa; Belgian Congo 
(prepared with the cooperation of the Musee Royal du Congo 
Beige and published also in its series, Monographies ethno- 
graphiques ); Southern Africa; Madagascar (a related French 
series). 

The volumes in this series are generally considered 
the most comprehensive sources for information on the 
peoples of Africa, based on extensive research in pub¬ 
lished material as well as on original field studies. Each 
volume presents a concise summary of an African peo¬ 
ple or group of peoples, covering location, natural en¬ 
vironment, economy, crafts, social structure, political 
organization, religious beliefs and cults. Each con¬ 
tains a bibliography and a specially drawn map. A 
number of the individual volumes are now out of print, 
and plans are afoot to make revisions in some of them 
before reprinting. The full list of surveys published 
in English or French in the various subseries is given 
in a list of its publications issued each year by the 
International African Institute. The individual vol¬ 
umes are cited in regional sections of the present bibli¬ 
ography. 

271. Fortes, Meyer, and E. E. Evans-Pritghard. 
African political systems. London, Published 
for the International Institute of African Lan¬ 
guages & Cultures by the Oxford University 
Press, H. Milford, 1940. xxiii, 301 p. maps, 
geneal. tables, diagrs. GN490.F6 

A group of short surveys by prominent anthropolo¬ 
gists, a number of the essays being taken from longer 
works by the same writers. Thus Max Gluckman, 
then director of the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, ana¬ 
lyzed the kingdom of the Zulu of South Africa, Dr. 
Isaac Schapera explained the political organization of 
the Ngwato of Bechuanaland, Dr. Audrey I. Richards 
the political system of the Bemba tribe of Northern 
Rhodesia, K. Oberg the kingdom of the Onkole in 
Uganda, S. F. Nadel the Kede, an emirate in Northern 
Nigeria, Gunter Wagner the political organization of 
the Bantu of Kavirondo, Dr. Fortes the Tallensi of 
the Gold Coast, Dr. Evans-Pritchard the Nuer of the 
southern Sudan. The writers vary in treatment, some 
concentrating on traditional patterns, others on the 
changes made under European rule. The editors in 
the introduction explained that the peoples studied 
are representative of the major political groupings of 
Africa. The first group, the Zulu, Ngwato, Bemba, 
Banyankole and Kede, have centralized authority, ad¬ 
ministrative machinery and judicial institutions as 
primitive states. The second group are stateless socie¬ 
ties, without centralized authority. All the peoples 


treated except the Nilotic Nuer are predominantly 
Bantu or Negro. 

272. Gluckman, Max. Custom and conflict in Africa. 

Glencoe, Ill., Free Press, 1956. 173 p. 

GN645.G55 

Six speeches delivered on the Third Programme of 
BBC in 1955 by the former director of the Rhodes- 
Livingstone Institute in Lusaka, now professor of social 
anthropology in the Victoria University of Manchester. 
His theme, illustrated by discussion of feuds, rebellions 
against authority, kinship systems, witchcraft, rituals 
that consist of lifting taboos, is that “Social life breeds 
conflict, and societies by their customary arrangements 
. . . accentuate conflicts. The conflicts in wider ranges 
compensate one another to produce social cohesion.” 
He relates his arguments interestingly to English social 
life. His last speech, “The Bonds in the Colour-Bar,” 
speculates on whether the tensions in South Africa will 
bring greater unity among Africans. 

273. Holas, Bohumil. L’homme noir d’Afrique. 

Dakar, Institut francais d’Afrique noire, 1951. 
105 p. illus., 48 plates, map. (Initiations afri- 
caines, 8) GN645.H6 

Bibliography: p. 89-101. 

Treatise by a French Africanist which is in the nature 
of a general handbook of African anthropology. Dr. 
Holas began with a brief outline of human paleontol¬ 
ogy, physical anthropology, and anthropometry, and 
devoted the bulk of his text to systematic description 
of the principal ethnic groups of Africa south of the 
Sahara, specifying over 150 tribes. Many other sci¬ 
entific studies by this scholar, formerly an associate of 
IF AN and now Director of the Centre des Sciences 
Humaines in Abidjan, relate to French-speaking 
West Africa. 

274. International African Seminar. 1st, Mak- 

erere College, 1959. Social change in modern 
Africa; studies presented and discussed. Ed¬ 
ited by Aidan Southall. London, New York, 
Published for the International African Insti¬ 
tute by the Oxford University Press, 1961. 
337 p. HN777.I6 1959 

Includes bibliographies. 

The great increase in research on African contem¬ 
porary social and cultural life has been accompanied by 
the establishment of a number of research centers and 
frequent assemblages held under the auspices of vari¬ 
ous organizations seeking to pool their insights. In 
the notable seminar of which the present volume is the 
report, leading scholars from most countries of Black 


54 


Africa took part. The introductory survey by the Di¬ 
rector of the host Institute reviewed social change 
and demography norms and status symbols, small 
groups and social networks, kinship, tribalism and 
family anthropology, the position of women, and the 
stability of marriage. The special studies were on 
general themes: e.g., Professor M. Gluckman, “An¬ 
thropological Problems Arising from the African In¬ 
dustrial Revolution,” and J. E. Goldthorp, “Educated 
Africans: Some Conceptual and Terminological Prob¬ 
lems”; and papers relating to specific issues or areas: 
e.g., E. W. Ardener, “Social and Demographic Prob¬ 
lems of the Southern Cameroons Plantation Area,” 
and J. Rouch, “Second Generation Migrants in Ghana 
and the Ivory Coast.” 

275. Johannesburg. Public Library. African na¬ 

tive tribes; rules for the classification of works 
on African ethnology in the Strange Collection 
of Africana with an index of tribal names and 
their variants. Johannesburg, 1956. 142 1. 

Z697.E8J6 

Handbook giving classification numbers (Dewey) 
used in the collection. Prefatory leaves d, e, and f 
give sources, and leaves ii-xxvii the geographic class 
numbers. Then on 142 leaves are listed the African 
tribes, in alphabetical arrangement, followed by geo¬ 
graphic numbers—e.g., aBulu (6755), which refers 
back to p. xiii, and locates the tribe in the Belgian 
Congo, Eastern Province. There are about 13,000 
names of tribes, including variant names. 

276. Malinowski, Bronislaw. The dynamics of 

culture change; an inquiry into race relations 
in Africa. Edited, with a new introd., by 
Phyllis M. Kaberry. New Haven, Yale Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1961. 171 p. (A Yale paper- 

bound, Y-47) GN645.M3 1961 

Originally published in 1945. 

This posthumous work by one of the most famous 
of modern anthropologists, edited by a former student, 
embodies the central core of Malinowski’s doctrine of 
practical anthropology. His functional approach to 
the study of native cultures as they undergo change 
in contact with Western civilization is explained in 
the first chapter, “New Tasks of Anthropology.” Part 
1 further examines the theoretical and historical 
aspects of cultural change and the scientific principles 
and instruments for its analysis. Examples are drawn 
largely from the culture of Bantu Africa (South and 
East Africa). Part 2 considers specific problems of 
the Bantu, warfare, native diet, land problems, indi¬ 


rect rule. The new edition was reviewed by E. P. 
Skinner in Africa Report, February 1962. 

277. Meek, Charles Kingsley. Land law and cus¬ 

tom in the colonies. With an introd. by Lord 
Hailey. 2d ed. London, New York, Oxford 
University Press, 1949. xxvi, 337 p. DLC-LL 

A comprehensive and scholarly study by a former 
administrative officer in Nigeria, later with the Insti¬ 
tute of Colonial Studies at Oxford. In this survey of 
land policies of the (former) British empire as a whole, 
he explores thoroughly in terms of ethnology and legis¬ 
lation native concepts of communal ownership as they 
affect and are affected by contact with the West. 
About a third of the book is devoted to tenure of agri¬ 
cultural lands and tribal customs in the then British 
African colonies. Opposite the title-page Dr. Meek 
quotes the saying of a Nigerian chief: “I conceive that 
the land belongs to a vast family of whom many are 
dead, few are living, and countless numbers are still 
unborn.” 

278. Middleton, John, and David Tait, eds. Tribes 

without rulers; studies in African segmentary 
systems. London, Routledge & Paul, 1958. 
234 p. illus. GN490.M5 

Includes bibliographies. 

A set of papers on the social structures of six repre¬ 
sentative African societies, by young anthropologists. 
Planned as a successor to the 1940 volume edited by 
Fortes and Evans-Pritchard (no. 271), the new studies 
take into account basic assumptions on the classifica¬ 
tion of African political systems made through research 
done since that time. The introduction by the two 
editors explains these new classificatory concepts. The 
societies studied are the Tiv, by Laura Bohannan, the 
Mandari of the Southern Sudan, by Jean Buxton, the 
Western Dinka, by Godfrey Lienhardt, the Bwamba, 
by Edward Winter, the Konkomba, by David Tait 
(who died before publication of the work, so that it is 
in a sense a memorial to him), and the last, on the 
Lugbara of the Nile-Congo divide, by John Middleton. 

279. Murdock, George P. Africa: its peoples and 

their culture history. New York, McGraw- 
Hill, 1959. xiii, 456 p. illus., maps. 

DT14.M8 

Includes bibliographies. 

A compendium of African ethnological data. In 
the first few chapters Professor Murdock summarizes 
the general topics of geography, race, language, econ¬ 
omy, society, government, and history for the whole 


55 


continent, then follows with systematic surveys by cul¬ 
tural areas. Each regional section begins with a num¬ 
bered list of the tribes in groups of essentially identical 
language and culture, and each chapter ends with a 
selective reading list. The author explains in his 
introduction that his process of selection necessitated 
“a limited range of subject matter,” excluding such 
fields as religion, art, law, etc., and limiting the history 
to exclude prehistory and the present age. “In gen¬ 
eral, the book aims to present a cultural-historical base 
line to aid in the understanding of more recent events 
and ongoing trends.” The work ends with an index 
of about 5,000 tribal names, and, in a pocket inside 
the back cover, a large folded map of the chief culture 
areas. 

280. Ottenberg, Simon, and Phoebe Ottenberg, eds. 

Cultures and societies of Africa. With a gen¬ 
eral introd., commentaries, and notes. New 
York, Random House. 1960. 614 p. plates. 

GN645.075 

Bibliography: p. 565-598. 

Selections chosen to fill a need for a collection of 
readings on Africa suitable for use in courses in anthro¬ 
pology in American universities. The articles, all by 
well-known specialists, and dating from 1940 to the 
present, follow an introductory survey of Africa and its 
peoples by the editors, who teach at the University of 
Washington. There are six groups of papers, some 
general, some relating to individual areas or tribes: 
“People and Environment,” “Social Groupings,” 
“Authority and Government,” “Values, Religion and 
Aesthetics,” “Culture Contact and Change.” Most of 
the essays are followed by references for further read¬ 
ing, and there is a long classified bibliography. 

281. Pedrals, Denis-Pierre de. Manuel scienti- 

fique de VAfrique noire. Paris, Payot, 1949. 
202 p. illus. (Bibliotheque scientifique) 

GN645.P25 

A survey of African anthropology, prehistory, ar¬ 
chaeology, cultures and arts, political and social insti¬ 
tutions, and pre-European history, by a leading French 
specialist who has combined ethnological research with 
practical experience as a colonial administrator. 
Among M. de Pedrals’ other notable studies are two 
more in this same series, Archeologie de VAfrique noire 
(Paris, 1950. 233 p.) and La Vie sexuelle en Afrique 
noire (Paris, 1950. 188 p.) The term VAfrique 

noire is for this writer essentially synonymous with sub- 
Saharan Africa. 


282. Radcliffe-Brown, Alfred R., and Daryll 

Forde, eds. African systems of kinship and 
marriage. London, New York, Published for 
the International African Institute by the Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1950. 399 p. illus., 

maps. GN480.R3 

Reprint in paperback edition, 1960. 

Symposium by nine eminent anthropologists who il¬ 
lustrate through study of a representative selection of 
native tribes in Africa south of the Sahara the main 
varieties of kinship organization. The long introduc¬ 
tion by Professor Radcliffe-Brown is a definitive essay 
on existing knowledge and theory regarding kinship 
systems. 

283. Seligman, Charles G. Races of Africa. 3d 

ed. London, New York, Oxford University 
Press, 1957. 236 p. illus. (The Home uni¬ 
versity library of modern knowledge, 144) 

DT15.S45 1957 
The late Dr. Seligman, Professor of Ethnology at the 
University of London, first prepared this work in 1930 
as a basic primer for a wide public audience. In the 
little volume he brought together the main findings of 
ethnologists and physical anthropologists, analyzing 
them for the general reader. His chief criteria of race 
are physical—color of skin, quality of hair, stature, 
head shape, character of face, and shape of nose. Into 
his racial divisions he fitted an interesting account of 
the characteristics, customs, beliefs, and institutions of 
many tribes. His racial groupings have been contested 
by various experts and, in view of current theories, it 
is remarkable that the groupings were retained in the 
new edition. This contains many revisions of data, 
showing advances in knowledge “due largely to the 
work of Professor Seligman’s own students. [It is] an 
index of his scholarship and expertise in all fields of 
authorship that what he could do almost single-handed 
has now required the collaboration of many” (Preface, 
September 1956). A new reading list with references 
by chapters includes writings into 1956. 

284. Smith, Edwin W. The golden stool; some as¬ 

pects of the conflict of cultures in Africa. 2d ed. 
London, Holbom, 1927. 328p.DT31.S6 1927 
This book by a noted missionary and anthropologist 
is referred to by later writers as a classic study of the 
African position in relation to the white man. The 
title is taken from the first story in the book, that of 
the Golden Stool of Ashanti, which was considered to 
contain the soul of the nation. The British, at that 
time lacking understanding of its psychological signifi- 


56 


cance, claimed the Stool as a symbol of their power, 
and brought about wars which were ended only when 
the Anthropological Officer, Captain Rattray, studied 
and found out what it meant to the Ashanti; his study 
marked a turning point in the European policy of deal¬ 
ing with the African. 

285. Westermann, Diedrigh. The African to-day 
and to-morrow. 3d ed. London, New York, 
Published for the International African Insti¬ 
tute by the Oxford University Press, 1949. 174 
p. map. (Colonial bookshelf) 

GN645.W4 1949 

Written originally in German, but first published in Eng¬ 
lish. Bibliography: p. 167-168. 

Of this short anthropological study of the African by 
the professor of African linguistics (see no. 310-312) 
and former co-Director of the International Institute 
of African Languages and Cultures, the editor of 
Africa wrote in an obituary editorial (October 1956): 
“He [Westermann] had a deep and informed concern 
for the social and moral problems arising from the im¬ 
pact of Western influences on African peoples and on 
these he wrote with wide knowledge and remarkable 
sympathy.” The book, first published in 1934, is con¬ 
sidered a landmark in the introduction of presentday 
Africa. Westermann’s conclusion stresses the responsi¬ 
bility of the native African leaders: “in the last re¬ 
sort, the fate of the African depends not on the will of 
the white man but upon what the African himself 
makes of himself.” 

Professor Westermann’s co-Director when the Institute 
(now the International African Institute) was founded in 
1926 was the French ethnologist Maurice Delafosse. Dela- 
fosse died in the same year, and was suceeded in this post by 
Henri Labouret. Both of these scholars have contributed 
works comparable to the above as clear syntheses of the vari¬ 
ous branches of anthropology—linguistics, history, ethnology: 
Delafosse’s Les Noirs de VAfrique (1921) and Civilisations 
nigro-africaines (1925), which were published together in 
English translation under the title, Negroes of Africa (Wash¬ 
ington, The Associated Publishers, 1931. 313 p.); and 

Labouret’s Histoire des noirs d’Afrique (Paris, Presses uni- 
versitaires de France, 1946. 127 p. “Que sais-je”?). 

THE SUPERNATURAL 

286. Ellenberger, Victor. Afrique avec cette peur 
venue du fond des ages: sorcellerie, initiation, 
exorcisme. Paris, Livre contemporain, 1958. 
255 p. illus. (Collection L’Aventure du passe) 

GN475.8.E5 

By a Protestant missionary with over thirty years’ 
experience in Africa. This sociological study of magic 


practices, witch doctors, sorcerers, etc., whose influence 
outweighs the “mission civilisatrice” of European ad¬ 
ministrators, clergy, and doctors, is written in the form 
of case histories. It includes a plea for more tolerant 
attempts at understanding the African mind. 

287. International African Institute. African 

worlds; studies in the cosmological ideas and so¬ 
cial values of African peoples. London, New 
York, Oxford University Press, 1954. xvii, 
243 p. Reprint, 1960. DT15.I5 

This volume, one of the best known works on Afri¬ 
can religion, brings together a set of concise studies 
of the relationship of religious myth and social prac¬ 
tice as exemplified by typical African peoples. The 
introduction by Professor Forde, Director of the Insti¬ 
tute, explains the general frame of reference—analysis 
of the world outlook of each people as expressed in 
beliefs, ritual, and secular practice. The nine sepa¬ 
rate essays are by distinguished ethnologists and social 
anthropologists who have studied the societies of which 
they write at firsthand. All are written to interest the 
lay reader and are provided with scholarly footnotes 
and reading lists. 

288. Joset, Paul E. Les societes secretes des 

hommes-leopards en Afrique noire. Paris, 
Payot, 1955. 276 p. illus. (Bibliotheque 
historique) GN495.2.J6 

In a style which because of its subject matter can 
hardly fail to seem sensational, the author of this 
study of the notorious “leopard-men” societies exam¬ 
ined records of trials and other evidence, analyzing the 
basis of the secret society in religion and magic, its 
political implications, ritual practices, and significances 
of cannibalism. A long bibliography of source ma¬ 
terials is given on pages 260-276. M. Joset is a for¬ 
mer colonial adminstrator from the Belgian Congo. 

289. Parrinder, Edward G. African traditional re¬ 

ligion. [2d rev. ed.] London, S.P.C.K., 1962. 
156 p. (Seraph) BL2400.P37 1962 

First published in Hutchinson’s University Library; World 
Religions in 1954. 

Dr. Parrinder here offers a general account of the 
old beliefs of the “incurably religious” people of Africa 
which are still held by the majority of Africans and 
underlie the veneer of new faiths accepted by the edu¬ 
cated. He treats his subject on a comparative basis, 
sketching broad lines of religion that are similar in 
many parts of the continent. As in all other great 
religions, he says, the African world is “a spiritual 
arena, in which is seen the interplay of psychic forces.” 


57 


An interesting study, Witchcraft, by Dr. Parrinder, was 
brought out by Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, in 
1950 (208 p. Pelican Books, A409; new ed., 1963). 
In it he compares African witchcraft to the witch lore 
of Europe, finding deep similarities. 

In Neues Afrika of July 1961 there is an account of a Col¬ 
loquium held by the Societe Africaine de Culture (Presence 
Africaine group) at Abidjan, April 5—12, 1961, the subject 
of which was the relation of religion to the cultural expres¬ 
sion of the African personality. 

290. Smith, Edwin W., ed. African ideas of God, a 

symposium. London, Edinburgh House Press, 
1961. 208 p. map. (2d ed. revised, reedited 
by E. G. Parrinder.) BL2400.S58 

The introductory essay by the late Dr. Smith, a sur¬ 
vey of the general subject, is followed by a group of 
analyses of the religious beliefs of the tribes with which 
the writers have worked. The contributors are well- 
known missionary anthropologists of South-West Af¬ 
rica, the Belgian Congo, East and West Africa. The 
essay on the Luo peoples of Uganda is by H. B. 
Thomas, formerly of the Civil Service, the only lay¬ 
man of the group. The peoples studied are Bantu 
and Negro tribes (except Bushmen) and the writing 
is non-academic. 1st edition published in 1950. 

Dr. Smith has himself written extensively on this subject. 
There might be noted his lecture series, The Secret of the 
African (London, Student Christian Movement Press, 1929. 
142 p.), an analysis of the basis of African religion, its rela¬ 
tion to magic, spiritism, the awareness of God of the African 
as it varies in South, Central, and West Africa, and the 
strength and weakness of African religion. In 1936 his 
African Beliefs and Christian Faith (London, United So¬ 
ciety for Christian Literature. 192 p.), an introduction to 
theology for African students of the ministry, had as its first 
part a simply-phrased analysis of “Belief in God among the 
Africans.” 

291. Tempels, Placide. Bantu philosophy. Trans¬ 

lated into English from La philosophic bantoe, 
the French version by A. Rubbens of Fr. Tern- 
pels’ original work. Colin King, translator. 
Paris, Presence africaine, 1959. 123 p. illus. 

(Collection Presence africaine) 

GN657.B2T414 

First French ed., 1949. 

This celebrated monograph by a Catholic mission¬ 
ary priest in the Belgian Congo is described as a “revo¬ 
lutionary” study of the soul of the Bantu, trying to 
prove that his religious creed is not sheer incoherent 
animism, but based on a solidly built set of abstract 
ideas which constitutes a complete philosophical sys¬ 
tem. Father Tempels argued that a new approach 
is needed for the European missionaries and ethnolo¬ 
gists if their “mission civilisatrice” is to produce evolues 


“in the noble sense of the word”—something which 
the civilization of money values has failed to do. The 
brochure is well presented, with dramatic full-page 
plates of Bantu carving. The first edition, in Dutch, 
was published in Antwerp in 1946. 

292. Young,T. Cullen. African ways and wisdom; 
a contribution towards understanding. Lon¬ 
don, United Society for Christian Literature, 
1937. 144 p. BV3530.Y6 

The writer was known in missionary fields as an an¬ 
thropologist and leader in work for education of the 
African. In this book he analyzed interestingly Bantu 
psychology and religious thought, specially for the 
benefit of missionaries who are to work with the na¬ 
tives and may be puzzled by how to approach animism 
and black magic, differing concepts of marriage, the 
place of the medicine man, the African idea of justice, 
African etiquette and behavior patterns. 

Dr. Young was a vigorous opponent of the “color line” in 
relations between African and European. In 1945 he pub¬ 
lished an ardent denouncement of British race discrimination 
in Africa and India, Herrenvolk and Sahib-log (London, 
Lutterworth Press). 

LINGUISTICS 

Bibliography 

Note: Bibliographical sources for the study of African lan¬ 
guages and linguistics are numerous and extensive, particu¬ 
larly for the early period, when missionaries and colonial 
officers making contacts for the first time with unstudied 
tribes, were prolific in their written attempts at grammar and 
vocabularies, and in their translations of Scripture. Long 
bibliographies are included in such important linguistic studies 
as Cust’s in 1883, or Sir H. H. Johnston’s in 1919. The 
Catalogue of Bantu, Khoisan and Malagasy in the Strange 
Collection of Africana in the Johannesburg Public Library 
(edited by Anna H. Smith, Johannesburg, 1942. 232 p.) 

contains 1671 numbered entries. One regional section alone 
of the bibliography compiled in 1937 by Russian linguists runs 
to over 30 pages. 

Among the most useful sources are the various publications 
of the International African Institute, which was founded in 
1926 under the name of International Institute of African 
Languages and Cultures. (Use of the shorter name was 
authorized by the Executive Council in 1939, but it did not 
appear on the title-page of Africa until 1947.) The quarter¬ 
lies, Africa and African Abstracts, are in part or whole bibli¬ 
ographical, with language a major concern. The Africa 
Bibliography Series based on the bibliographical card index 
of the Institute has Linguistics as one of its three subject 
classifications. The volumes of the Handbook of African 
Languages series contain long bibliographies of the languages 
covered, and the references in a good many of the volumes of 
the Ethnographic Survey of Africa include linguistics. 

Other scholarly journals which, both in articles and in 
bibliographical sections, count linguistics among their pri- 


58 


mary interests are: African Studies (formerly Bantu Studies, 
published at the University of the Witwatersrand); Afrika 
und Vbersee: Sprachen, Kulturen; the Journal of the Societe 
des Africanistes (Paris, 1931 + ); Zaire, (formerly Congo, 
Bruxelles, 1920-60). 

A notable regional institution devoted to language studies 
is the East African Swahili Committee, Makerere College, 
Kampala, Uganda. One of its publications is A Linguistic 
Bibliography of East Africa, by W. H. Whiteley and A. E. 
Gutkind (Kampala, 1954. 62 1., 2 supplements; revised 

edition, 1958). Such regional bodies as the East African 
Literature Bureau and the Bureau of Ghana Languages, which 
are publishing texts in the vernacular in increasing numbers, 
issue occasional lists of their stock. Lists from government 
information services include their publications in the vernacu¬ 
lar. The current bibliography, Nigerian Publications, has a 
separate listing of works in African languages, as does also the 
South African bibliography, Africana Nova. 

293. African language studies. No. 1+ Edited by 

Malcolm Guthrie. London, School of Orien¬ 
tal and African Studies, University of London, 
1960+ annual. DLG 

The first number of this significant new series con¬ 
tains thirteen articles on the structure of African lan¬ 
guages by leading scholars. Second and third numbers 
have come out in 1961 and 1962. 

294. Akademiia nauk SSSR. Institut iazykai mysh- 

lenifa. Trudy . . . t.x. Africana. Moskwa, 
1937. 198 p. PL 8005. A5 

Transactions of the Section of African languages of the 
Marr Institute of Language and Mentality, t. 9. 

Pt. III. Section 1. The South-Eastern Bantu. 

Includes papers, some by Western authors; book re¬ 
views, long “Bibliography of African languages,” ed. 
by I. L. Sneguireff and N. V. Yushmanov (p. 163— 
196), of books received by Marr Institute. 

295. Cole, Desmond T. “African linguistic studies, 

1943-1960.” African studies (Johannesburg), 
v. 19, no. 4, 1960: 219-229. DT751.A4, v. 19 

A valuable bibliographical essay, offering compara¬ 
tive analysis of the most important modem works on 
classification of African languages and area studies, 
particularly of the Bantu area. 

296. Oust, Robert Needham. A sketch of the 

modern languages of Africa. Accompanied by 
a language map. London, Triibner, 1883. 2 
v. 30 ports, maps. (Triibner’s oriental series) 

PL8005.C8 

The first, and for many years the only, overall study 
in English of African languages. The writer followed 
the classification of African languages made by the 


Viennese philologist and ethnologist, Friedrich Wil¬ 
helm Muller ( Ethnographic generale, 1873) into six 
divisions: the Semitic family, the Hamitic group, 
Nuba-Fula group, Negro group, Bantu family, Hotten- 
tot-Bushman group. Cust’s two-volume work de¬ 
scribes the great variety of source material already 
available and locates the most reliably identifiable 
languages on a map which forms the first appendix. 
Other appendixes include a 50-page “Bibliographical 
Table of Languages, Dialects, Localities, and Authori¬ 
ties” (covering 438 languages and 151 dialects), a list 
of translations of the Bible, and various indexes of 
languages and dialects, authors quoted, etc. 

297. Doke, Clement M. Bantu; modern grammati¬ 

cal, phonetical, and lexicographical studies 

since 1860. London, Published for the Inter¬ 
national African Institute by P. Lund, Hum¬ 
phries, 1945. 119 p. Z7106.D6 

298. - Bantu linguistic terminology. London, 

New York, Longmans, Green, 1935. 237 p. 

PL8025.D6 

Professor Doke, foremost authority on Bantu lan¬ 
guages, came to South Africa as a missionary in 1903, 
and in 1923 was appointed to the University of the 
Witwatersrand, where he held the chair of Bantu 
Philology until his retirement. From 1931-53 he was 
joint editor of the journal African Studies (until 1941, 
Bantu Studies) . The two works listed above are con¬ 
cerned with Bantu linguistics; his classification of 
Bantu languages into seven zones, four subzones and 
subsidiary groups and dialect clusters is presented tenta¬ 
tively and piecemeal in the firstnamed, which is essen¬ 
tially a bibliographical study. It is described by Cole 
in his article on “African Linguistic Studies” (no. 295). 
Professor Doke’s other works include grammars, vocab¬ 
ularies, and studies of Lamba, Zulu, Shona, Sesuto, 
and other southern Bantu languages. He is author 
of the volume on The Southern Bantu Languages in 
the International African Institute series, Handbook 
of African Languages (1954, 262 p.) for which his 
1945 bibliography, Bantu, is a preliminary. His intro¬ 
ductory chapter in the lastnamed survey, “The History 
and Growth of Knowledge concerning the Southern 
Bantu Languages,” records the great names in this 
field. It is expanded in a long article, “The Growth 
of Comparative Bantu Philology,” in African Studies 
(v. 19, no. 4, 1960: p. 193-218; reprint with additions 
from an earlier article, African Studies; v. 2, no. 1, 
1943). 


692 - 756 — 6 : 


5 


59 






299. Greenberg, Joseph H. Studies in African lin¬ 
guistic classification. Reprinted from the 
Southwestern Journal of Anthropology for the 
Language and Communication Research Cen¬ 
ter, Columbia University and the Program of 
African Studies, Northwestern University. 
New Haven, Compass Pub. Co., 1955. 116 p. 

maps. PL8005.G7 1955 

In the original seven papers published in the South¬ 
western Journal of Anthropology in 1949-50 Professor 
Greenberg offered an entirely new classification of 
African languages, based not on typological criteria 
but on rigorous lexical and morphological comparison. 
His terms were made more explicit in an eighth paper 
published in 1954 (SJA, v. 10, no. 4). The first tabu¬ 
lation offered six major genetic language families and 
ten lesser ones. In 1954 the author revised the list, 
reducing the number of independent families to twelve. 
These eight papers make up the reprint of 1955. A 
summarization by Professor William E. Welmers 
(“Note on the Classification of African Languages,” 
The Linguistic Reporter, v. 1, no. 2, May 1959; supple¬ 
ment no. 1) indicates that Greenberg is now inclined to 
reduce his families to four which Welmers labels Afro- 
Asiatic, Sahara-Savannah, Niger-Congo, Macro- 
Khoisan. According to Cole (no. 295) “there can be 
no denying the fact that [Greenberg’s] is the first at¬ 
tempt at a pan-African classification on genetic prin¬ 
ciples and that as a genetic classification it will prevail 
in its essentials, if not in all minute detail.” A new 
work by Professor Greenberg (not yet available for 
examination) is The Languages of Africa, published as 
Part 2 of the International Journal of American Lin¬ 
guistic.s,v. 29, no. 1 (Bloomington, Indiana University, 
1963. 171 p. Indiana University. Research Center 
in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics. Publica¬ 
tion, 25). 

300. Guthrie, Malcolm. The classification of the 
Bantu languages. London, New York, Pub¬ 
lished for the International African Institute 
by the Oxford University Press, 1948. 91 p. 
map. PL8025.G8 

Inventory and classification of Bantu languages and 
dialects, much of it based on data gathered by Dr. 
Guthrie himself in little-known areas. This was ex¬ 
panded in his volume on The Bantu Languages of 
Western Equatorial Africa in the Handbook of African 
Languages series (below). For comment on both see 
article by Cole, cited above. 


301. Handbook of African languages [series] London, 

New York, Published for the International 

African Institute by Oxford University Press, 
1948 + 

This series was planned “to provide a systematic and 
critical study of the incidence, distribution and inter¬ 
relations of the different African languages and dia¬ 
lects, as well as of the numbers speaking the several 
languages and dialects, and the extent of literacy 
among these different groups.” It includes bibliogra¬ 
phies of publications relating to the various language 
groups—linguistic studies, grammars, dictionaries, and 
textbooks. The following handbooks have been pub¬ 
lished : 

La Langue berb£re, by Andre Basset. 1962. 71 p. map, 

diagrams. PJ2343.B35 

Languages of West Africa, by D. Westermann and M. A. 

Bryan. 1952. 201 p. map. PL8017.W43 

The Non-Bantu languages of North-Eastern Africa, by A. N. 

Tucker and M. A. Bryan. 1956. 228 p. PL8016.T8 
The Bantu languages of Africa, comp, by M. A. Bryan. 1959. 

170 p. map. PL8025.B7 

The Classification of the Bantu languages, by Malcolm 

Guthrie. 1948. 91 p. map. PL8025.G8 

The Bantu languages of Western Equatorial Africa, by Mal¬ 
colm Guthrie. 1953. 100 p. map. PL8025.G79 

The Southern Bantu languages, by Clement M. Doke. 1954. 

302 p. map. PL8025.D62 

Linguistic survey of the Northern Bantu borderland, vol. 1, 
by A. Jacquot, I. Richardson, G. van Bulck, Peter Hackett, 
A. N. Tucker, and M. A. Bryan. 1956. 146 p. maps. 

PL8025.I5, v. 1 

-, v. 2, by Irvine Richardson. 1956. 95 p. 

PL8025.I5, v. 2 

-, v- 3, by G. van Bulck. PL8025.I5, v. 3 

-, v. 4, by A. N. Tucker and M. A. Bryan. 1957. 

89 p. maps. PL8025.I5, v. 4 

302. Homburger, Lilias. The Negro-African lan¬ 

guages. London, Routledge & K. Paul, 1949. 
275 p. PL8005.H613 

The author, Director of African Linguistic Studies 
at the ficole Pratique des Hautes Ltudes (Sorbonne, 
Paris), has here revised a book originally published in 
1941. It is a study of various aspects of African lan¬ 
guage structure, with an historical sketch of African 
linguistic studies. Her conclusion, not shared by most 
African language specialists, is that Negro-African lan¬ 
guages “represent the evolution of dialectal forms of 
Egyptian or of Coptic.” 

A new revised edition with an added chapter on the “Sindo- 
African,” was published by Payot in Paris in 1957 (Les 
Langues nigro-africaines et les peuples qui les parlent. 343 
p. Bibliotheque scientifique). 


60 






303. Johnston, Sir Harry H. A comparative study 

of the Bantu and semi-Bantu languages. Ox¬ 
ford, Clarendon Press, 1919-22. 2 v. 

PL8025.J6 

In this impressive work, still one of the landmarks of 
African linguistic studies, the famous explorer and 
writer gave illustrative vocabularies of over 200 lan¬ 
guages and dialects. The first volume includes an 
annotated bibliography of his sources (p. 784-815). 

304. Journal of African languages, v. 1, pt. 1 + 

1962+ London, Macmillan. DLC 

A scholarly linguistic journal sponsored jointly by 
Michigan State University and the School of Oriental 
and African Studies of the University of London. The 
editor is Professor Jack Berry of the latter institution, 
and the roll of assistant editors and editorial consul¬ 
tants includes leading philologists of Europe, the 
United States, and Africa. Three numbers appeared 
in 1962, each carrying from five to eight papers of 
high professional level. 

305. Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm. Polyglotta Afri- 

cana, or A comparative vocabulary of nearly 
300 words and phrases in more than 100 Afri¬ 
can languages. London, Church Missionary 
House, 1854. 24,188 p., map. NN 

The first major effort to transcribe evidence from 
a maximum variety of African languages. In Sierra 
Leone, Koelle transcribed a list of 283 words and 
phrases in 156 languages spoken by freed slaves who 
had settled there. He performed this task at the age 
of 30 in a period of six months. His map, made up 
from information laboriously elicited from illiterate 
informants, is astonishingly accurate. He grouped 
most of the languages into small groups of rather 
obviously related languages, but did not attempt an 
overall classification. 

306. Meinhof, Carl. An introduction to the study 

of African languages, trans. by Alice Werner. 
London, Dent; New York, Dutton, 1915. 
169 p. PL8005.M4 

Professor Meinhof, of the Kolonial-Institut in Ham¬ 
burg, was one of Europe’s foremost authorities on Afri¬ 
can languages. J. Lukas in an obituary article in the 
journal founded and edited by Meinhof, Zeitschrift 
fiir Eingeborenen-Sprachen (now Afrika und Uber- 
see ), gave a forty-page list of his writings—including 
book reviews—on African languages, religion, etc. 
The book named above is largely concerned with 
phonetics. It had been preceded by, among many 


other writings, two major studies of Bantu languages, 
Grundriss einer Lautlehre der Bantusprachen . . . 
(1899; 2d ed., Berlin, D. Reimer, 1910. 340 p.; Eng¬ 
lish translation by N. J. v. Warmelo, Introduction to 
the Phonology of the Bantu Languages, with revision 
by the author and Dr. Alice Werner, Berlin, 1922), 
and Grundzuge einer vergleichenden Grammatik der 
Bantusprachen (Berlin, D. Reimer, 1906). Other 
notable books were Die Sprachen der Hamiten (Ham¬ 
burg, Friederichsen, 1912. 256 p.), and three vol¬ 
umes in the series Deutsche Kolonialsprachen, pub¬ 
lished by Reimer in Berlin, Die Sprache der Herero in 
Deutsch-Sudwest-Afrika (Bd. 1, 1909, 1928. 114 p.; 
new ed., 1937, 118 p.), Die Sprache der Suaheli in 
Deutsch-Ostrafrika (Bd. 2 1910, 1928, 109 p. 3d and 
4th ed., 1940-41. 116 p.), and Die Sprache der Duala 
in Kamerun (Bd. 4, 1912. 119 p.). 

307. Welmers, William E., and Ruth C. Sloan. A 
preliminary survey of existing resources for 
training in African languages and linguistics, 
prepared for Georgetown University’s Institute 
of Languages and Linguistics. Washington, 
Georgetown University Press, 1957. 145 p. 

PL8004.W4 

This study, published as a mimeographed pamphlet, 
was based on a questionnaire sent out to missionaries 
by Professor Welmers, who at that time was teaching 
linguistics at the Kennedy School of Missions, Hartford 
Seminary Foundation (in 1962 at UCLA). A brief 
summary is followed by tabular presentation of the 
data obtained, then by annexes which survey the major 
languages of Africa, and programs for training in these 
languages in Europe, Africa, the U.S.S.R., and the 
United States, notes on linguistics and orthographies, 
a bibliography of materials used by mission stations, 
and a directory of individual missionaries engaged in 
linguistic work. Another pamphlet issued by Dr. 
Welmers on African Language Programs: Problems 
and Proposals (Los Angeles, March 1961. 42 p.), ap¬ 
peared as part of a Report of the Conference on Ne¬ 
glected Languages, Modern Language Association. 
Here he names and discusses linguistic problems re¬ 
lating to 61 African languages and includes a useful 
selected bibliography of pedagogical materials for these 
languages. 

A National Conference on the Teaching of African Lan¬ 
guages and Area Studies was held at Georgetown University, 
Washington, D.C., in March 1960, under the chairmanship 
of Leon E. Dostert. The papers on language teaching and 
research in America and elsewhere, by William E. Welmers, 
Joseph H. Greenberg, K. L. Pike, Wolf Leslau, and Mark 
Hanna Watkins among American scholars, and a number of 


61 






visiting experts, were published in a brochure edited by John 
G. Brodie (Washington, D.G., 63 p.). 

A program of African language studies is being carried on 
by the Foreign Service Institute in Washington. It is 
planned to comprise 11 languages of sub-Saharan Africa, plus 
Amharic. Textbooks for general use in a Basic Course Series 
are being prepared for publication by the U.S. Government 
Printing Office. Up to spring 1963 there have been pub¬ 
lished volumes for Igbo (1962. 498 p.), Swahili (1963. 
560 p.), and Twi (1963. 224 p.). Other volumes to ap¬ 

pear during the next year or two will be for Yoruba, Hausa, 
Lingala, Kituba, Rundi, Bambara, Fula, and More. 

308. Werner, Alice. The language-families of 

Africa. 2d ed. London, K. Paul, Trench, 
Triibner, 1925. 151 p. map, tables. 

PL8005.W4 1925 

309. - Structure and relationship of African 

languages. London, New York, Longmans, 
Green, 1930. 61 p. PL8005.W45 

Simple popularizations of Westermann’s five-way division 
of African languages (Semitic, Hamitic, Negro, Bantu, Hot- 
ten tot-Bushman) . 

310. Westermann, Diedrich. Die Sudansprachen, 

eine sprachvergleichende Studie. Hamburg, 
L. Friederichsen, 1911. 222 p. map. (Ab- 
handlungen des Hamburgischen Kolonialin- 
stituts. Bd. 3) PL8027.W4 

311. - Die westlichen Sudansprachen und ihre 

Bezeihungen zum Bantu. Berlin, de Gruyter, 
1927. 313 p. (Beiheft zu den Mitteilungen 
des Seminars fur orientalische Sprachen, Jahrg. 
29) PL8021.S8W4 

312. - “Les langues et 1’education.” In Bau¬ 

mann, Hermann, and D. Westermann. Les 
peuples et les civilisations de I’Afrique, suivi de 
Les langues et l’education; traduction fran- 
gaise par L. Homburger. Paris, Payot, 1948. 
605 p. (Bibliotheque scientifique) 

DT14.B38 

These three books are mentioned as major contribu¬ 
tions to the general field of African linguistics by the 
famous German scholar who was “the outstanding fig¬ 
ure in the development of African linguistic studies in 
this century” \Africa, obituary note, Oct. 1956). 
Westermann’s first of many studies of individual lan¬ 
guages was a Dictionary of the Ewe Language, pub¬ 
lished in 1905 while he was a missionary in Togoland 
(2d ed., Berlin, de Gruyter, 1961). From 1909 he was 
Director of the Seminar for Oriental Languages at the 
University of Berlin; from 1926 he was co-Director of 
the International Institute of African Languages and 


Cultures (now the International African Institute), 
with which he was associated until his death. It was 
he who proposed the Institute’s Ethnographic Survey 
and the Handbook of African Language series. In 
his early years Westermann followed a classification of 
African languages into five families: Semitic, Hamitic, 
Sudanic, Bantu, Hottentot-Bushman. In 1927 he dis¬ 
carded his earlier (1911) effort to establish a single 
Sudanic family from the Atlantic to the Nile, and iso¬ 
lated a West Sudanic group with possible relations to 
Bantu. In 1952 he accepted the basic premises of 
Greenberg’s reclassification, though with some reserva¬ 
tions in manner of statement (“African Linguistic 
Classification,” Africa, v. 22, July 1952, p. 250-256). 

313. Westermann, Diedrich, and Ida C. Ward. 

Practical phonetics for students of African 
languages. London, Published for the Inter¬ 
national Institute of African Languages and 
Cultures by Oxford University Press, H. Mil¬ 
ford, 1935. 227 p. illus. PL8007.W4 

This book has been for many years a basic text of 
students of African languages. The authors begin with 
a consideration of the difficulties of learning a new 
language and explain phonetic alphabets and orthog¬ 
raphy, the organs of speech, classification of vowel and 
consonant sounds, and phonemes. Then they turn to 
the specifically African sounds, classifying the various 
types of vowels and consonants and explaining syllables, 
stresses, etc. Over 50 pages are given to phonetic sum¬ 
maries of 10 languages. There is a subject index, 
and an index of about 70 languages, broken down by 
subject. 

A pamphlet guide, A Practical Orthography of African 
Languages, issued by the International Institute of African 
Languages and Cultures (now International African Insti¬ 
tute) as its Memorandum 1 in 1927 (16 p.), and revised in 
1930, set down the standard phonetic system advocated by the 
Institute. Another of the Memoranda Series (no. 14, 1937), 
Practical Suggestions for Learning an African Language in 
the Field, by Ida G. Ward, which was issued as a supplement 
to Africa, vol. 10, no. 2, has been reprinted by the Institute 
(1960. 39 p.). 

ARTS AND CULTURE 

Bibliography 

314. African Studies Bulletin. Arts, human be¬ 

havior, and Africa. New York, African 
Studies Association, 1962. 70 p. ( Its v. 5, 
no. 2, May 1962) DLG 

Special issue of the bulletin of the African Studies 
Association, devoted to essays on various aspects of the 


62 








arts in Africa, followed by helpful selected bibliogra¬ 
phies. The latter relate to music (by Alan P. Mer- 
riam: p. 35-40), art (by Roy Sieber: p. 40-42); oral 
literature, (by Daniel J. Crowley: p. 43-44); dance 
(by Nadia Chilkovsky: p. 45-47); architecture (by 
Douglas Fraser: p. 47-49); theater and drama (by 
Herbert L. Shore: p. 49-53); “Fiction by African 
authors: a preliminary checklist” (by Dorothy B. 
Porter: p.54-66). 


315. African folktales & sculpture. Folktales selected 

and edited by Paul Radin, with the collabora¬ 
tion of Elinore Marvel. Introd. to the tales 
by Paul Radin. Sculpture selected with an 
introd. by James Johnson Sweeney. New 
York, Pantheon Books, 1952. xxi, 355 p. 
plates, map. (Bollingen series, 32) 

GR350.A35 

A luxurious publication, in which a fine selection of 
folktales from many parts of Africa (p. 25-320) is 
followed by an album of reproductions of African 
sculpture. The tales, with an introduction by the an¬ 
thropologist Paul Radin, are in four groups: “The 
Universe and Its Beginnings”; “The Animal and His 
World”; “The Realm of Man”; and “Man and His 
Fate.” They are followed by an epilogue, list of 
sources, and glossary. The striking full-page plates are 
preceded by an introductory essay by James Johnson 
Sweeney, who had directed the exhibition of African 
Negro Art at the Museum of Modern Art in New York 
in 1935. 

A Russian collection of African folklore is edited by the 
leading ethnologist, D. A. Ol’derogge: Skazki narodov Afriki 
[Tales of the African Peoples] (Moscow, State Publishing 
House for Artistic Literature, 1959. 319 p. illus). It is in 
regional arrangement, with subdivision by tribes, and sparsely 
illustrated with line drawings. 

316. L’Art negre. Paris, Editions du Seuil, 1951. 

254 p. illus. (Presence africaine, 10-11) 

GN645.P74, no. 10-11 

This combined special number of the journal of 
French-speaking African intellectuals contains a group 
of articles by European specialists in African anthro¬ 
pology, sociology, and art. Alioune Diop, editor of 
Presence africaine , who writes the introduction, is 
touched by “so much European generosity,” but does 
not admit that the White man can understand the 
Black man’s soul. The essays, by the sociologists 
Georges Balandier and Jacques Howlett, the anthro¬ 
pologists Marcel Griaule, Henri Labachery, Denise 
Paulme, the art historian William Fagg, and others, 


attempt to define “Points of View,” “Ancient Art,” 
and certain particular aspects—fetish gold, Ashanti 
gold weights, Oguwe masks, etc. As an appendix 
there is printed an English translation (by S. W. Allen) 
of a celebrated essay on negritude by Jean-Paul Sartre, 
“Black Orpheus,” which had been written in 1948 as 
preface to L. Sedar Senghor’s Anthologie de la nouvelle 
poesie negre et malgache de langue franqaise (Paris, 
Presses universitaires de France). The book contains 
about 150 photographs and drawings exemplifying 
African art. 

317. Elisofon, Eliot. The sculpture of Africa; 405 

photographs. Text by William Fagg. Pref. 
by Ralph Linton. Design by Bernard Quint. 
New York, Praeger, 1958. 256 p. illus. 
(Books that matter) NB1080.E57 

Bibliographical notes: p. 252-254. 

The distinguished folio is among the notable art 
albums of recent years. Mr. Elisofon, who made the 
plates, is a Research Fellow in Primitive Art at Har¬ 
vard University. His 405 photographs, a large pro¬ 
portion of them full-page reproductions, are arranged 
in 3 groups according to the regions from which they 
come: Western Sudan, Guinea Coast, and the Congo. 
Each group is preceded by a short interpretive essay— 
stated not to be “encyclopaedic”— by Mr. William 
Fagg, Assistant Keeper of the Department of Eth¬ 
nography of the British Museum. The introduction, 
a significant discussion of primitive art, is by the late 
Professor Ralph Linton of the Department of Anthro¬ 
pology of Harvard University. 

318. Griaule, Marcel. Folk art of black Africa. 

Photos, by Emmanuel Sougez. Translated 
from the French by Michael Heron. Paris, 
Editions du Chene; New York, Tudor Pub. 
Co., 1950. 126 p. illus. (part col.) (The 

World’s art) N7380.G714 1950 

Published also under title: Arts of the African native. 

This penetrating essay by a prominent French Afri¬ 
canist, accompanying a selection of 10 plates of African 
art from the Musee de l’Homme in Paris, was pub¬ 
lished in French in 1947. The English translation is 
a significant addition to the studies of African anthro¬ 
pology through art forms. 

319. Guernier, Eugene L. Uapport de VAfrique a 

la pensee humaine. Paris, Payot, 1952. 245 p. 
(Bibliotheque historique) CB197.G8 

Study of the African contribution to world culture, 
including a long chapter on the arts and music of 
Negro Africa, though most of the text is concerned 


63 



with ancient Egypt and classical and medieval Bar¬ 
bary, on which the writer is an authority. 

320. Himmelheber, Hans. Negerkunst und Neger- 

kunstler. Mit Ergebnissen von sechs Afrika- 
Expeditionen des Verfassers. Braunschweig, 
Klinckhardt & Biermann, 1960. 436 p. illus. 
(Bibliothek fur Kunst- und Antiquitaten- 
freunde, Bd. 40) N7380.H5 

Dr. Himmelheber, an ethnologist and physician, has 
made six expeditions in Africa, his particular interest 
being to examine for himself works of art and the 
identity of artists. The 386 illustrations are in large 
part his own photographs in situ. He looks first at the 
forms of art and the character, techniques, and style of 
the artists, then turns to a detailed survey of sculpture 
by regions and tribes. His bibliography, pages 415- 
527, is arranged in the same way. 

A new German work, Afrikanische Kunst, by Boris de 
Rachewiltz (Stuttgart, Artemis-Verlag, 1961. 245 p. illus.) 
is not yet available for examination. A review in the London 
Times Literary Supplement, June 23, 1961, speaks of it as 
having some interesting photographs, but making little new 
contribution to knowledge of African art. 

321. International Congress of African Culture 

(south of the Sahara) Salisbury, Southern 
Rhodesia, August 1962. [Announcement] 
Salisbury, Rhodes National Gallery, 1962. 

DLC-AFR 

Handsomely illustrated and unpaged brochure with 
cover title: “first biennial international congress of 
African culture; festival of African and neo-African 
art and music.” The main theme was the influence of 
African art and music on the Western world. 
The Conference was scheduled to last for 2 weeks, 
with many exhibitions, music and film sessions, 
to continue for 2 months. Papers were invited from 
about 70 delegates from Africa, the Americas, Europe, 
and the West Indies. 

Other publications resulting from the International 
Congress of African Culture have not reached the 
Library of Congress as of January 1963. There have 
been a number of press reports. A particularly full 
discussion, “Conversation Piece,” by the Director of 
the Rhodes National Gallery, Frank McEwen, the 
organizer of the Congress, appeared in the Central 
African Examiner, September 1962, p. 15-20. 

322. Jahn, Janheinz. Muntu; an outline of the new 

African culture. Translated by Marjorie 
Grene. New York, Grove Press, 1961. 267 p. 
illus. DT352.J313 


A rather mystical examination of African religion, 
art, dance, philosophy, and literature, particularly 
modem writing, on a questionable assumption of 
similarity of all African cultures. The British edition 
has as subtitle, “An outline of neo-African culture.” 
There has been considerable controversy over this work, 
the author of which, in spite of exhaustive reading of 
African creative writings, had carried on his studies 
entirely in Europe (since remedied by a trip in West 
Africa, traveling, living, and eating with Africans, 
which he has chronicled in his Through African Doors, 
New York, Grove Press, 1962. 235 p.). Mr. Colin 
Legum says of Muntu in his Pan-Africanism: “No 
better attempt has been made to understand and ex¬ 
plain these arguments and themes [of African cultural 
values]... Whatever its failings, it offers a comprehen¬ 
sive and comprehensible analysis of the effects of the 
culture conflict between Europe and the black world.” 

323. Krieger, Kurt, and Gerdt Kutscher. We st¬ 

aff ikanisc he Masken. Berlin, Museum fur 
Volkerkunde, 1960. 93 p. 80 plates. 

Essay on the masks in a notable exhibit at the Mu¬ 
seum of Folklore in Berlin, with many illustrations and 
a complete catalog of the 172 masks shown. 

324. Leuzinger, Elsy. Africa; the art of the Negro 

peoples. [Translated by Ann E. Keep] New 
York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 247 p. illus. 
(part mounted col.) 4 maps. (Art of the 
world; the historical, sociological and religious 
backgrounds. Non-European cultures). 

N7380.L363 

Bibliography: p. 228-232. 

A broad study of African art in relation to historical, 
sociological, and religious backgrounds, illustrated with 
63 color plates and 144 figures, with sources named. 
Chapters are on country and people, religion, sociology, 
material and technique, form, then on eight style 
regions. The appendixes include maps, tables of cul¬ 
ture, bibliography, and glossary. A list of plates and 
figures, with sources, precedes the text. 

325. New York. Museum of Primitive Art. Tradi¬ 

tional art of the African nations. With an in¬ 
troduction by Robert Goldwater and photo¬ 
graphs by Charles Uht. New York, Distributed 
by University Publishers, Inc., 1961. 72 p. 

(chiefly illus.) N7380.N45 

An album of objects in the Museum’s permanent 
collection, largely made up of full-page plates, includ¬ 
ing a number in color, arranged by country. An earlier 
album, the catalog of the Museum’s first loan exhibi- 


64 


tion was issued in 1958: African Sculpture Lent by 
New York Collectors (28 plates). 

326. Paulme, Denise. African sculpture. Trans¬ 

lated by Michael Ross. New York, Viking 
Press, 1962. 160 p. (A Studio book) 

NB1080.P313 

327. - Parures africaines; texte de Denise 

Paulme et Jacques Brosse, photos de M. Huet 
[et al.] Hachette [cl956] illus., part col. 
91 p. GT1580.P34 

The author, director of the Departement d’Afrique 
Noire of the Musee de l’Homme, had begun her studies 
of Africa under Marcel Griaule. Her African Sculp¬ 
ture is more valuable as a contribution to social anthro¬ 
pology than for its illustrations. The original French 
edition appeared in 1956 ( Les Sculptures de VAfrique 
noire. Paris, Presses universitaires de France. 130 
p., 32 plates). A companion volume of striking 
photographs, many in color, depicts ceremonial cos¬ 
tumes, masks, and cicatrizations of many African 
tribes. Most of the pictures are from West and Equa¬ 
torial Africa, with a few from Southwest Africa, Mo¬ 
zambique, and the Sudan. 

328. Schmalenbach, Werner. African art. New 

York, Macmillan, 1954. 175 p. illus. (part 

col.) map. N7380.S375 

Translated from the German language by Glyn T. Hughes. 

This translation is identical in impressive make-up 
and illustration with the German original. The au¬ 
thor considers the art of all Negro Africa, analyzing 
in general chapters the various cultures—hunting, 
farming, pastoral, and so-called “high” cultures—re¬ 
ligious and social groups, role of the artist, the function 
of art. Then he examines in some detail materials, 
techniques, and particular forms of art. The text is 
interspersed with about 150 full-page and small plates, 
some in color. At the end are a map of tribes, a brief 
bibliography, and names of collections from which 
photographs were secured. 

329. Segy, Ladislas. African sculpture speaks. 

New York, A. A. Wyn, 1952. 254 p. 

NB1080.S4 

A collector’s essay on the Negro sculpture of West 
Africa, its magico-religious basic concepts, cults of an¬ 
cestor worship, totemism, secret societies, its historical 
background, characteristic forms and stylistic features, 
etc. The last chapters discuss the influences of Afri¬ 
can art on modern European art, and the interests of 


collectors. A long appendix lists and describes style 
regions for about 200 of the best known tribes of 
French, Portuguese, British, and Belgian West and 
Equatorial Africa. The bibliography (p. 231-236) 
begins with an extensive list of Mr. Segy’s own articles, 
and includes references in English and Western Euro¬ 
pean languages. There is a list of the 276 illustrations, 
which are photographs of objects in many collections, 
and a full index. 

A smaller selection with a brief introductory essay was pub¬ 
lished by this author in 1958: African Sculpture (New York, 
Dover Publications, 1958. 34 p. 163 plates). 

Another volume by Mr. Segy appeared in 1956, African Art 
Studies (New York, Wittenborn & Co. 240 p.). It is in two 
parts, 1, “Analysis of Art Appreciation,” and 2, “The African 
Background.” Illustrations are 130 plates. 

330. Sydow, Eckart von. Afrikanische Plastik; aus 

dem Nachlass herausg. von Gerdt Kutscher. 
Berlin, Verlag Gebr. Mann, 1954. 177 p. 

144 plates. NB1080.S88 1954 

Professor von Sydow of Berlin University, who died 
in 1942, was an expert in the culture and art of prim¬ 
itive peoples. His Handbuch der afrikanischen Plas¬ 
tik (Berlin, 1930) was considered a pioneer work on 
the sculpture of West Africa. This volume, edited 
from his manuscripts after his death, had been planned 
as a second volume of the Handbuch. It begins with 
an anthropological and historical discussion of styles 
and psychology of African art, then surveys the style- 
regions of African sculpture. Chapters are followed 
by bibliographies, and the volume is provided with a 
number of registers and indexes, to maps of the style- 
regions, to the provenance of the plates, etc. 

331. Symposium on the Artist in Tribal Society. 

London, 1957. The artist in tribal society; 
proceedings of a symposium held at the Royal 
Anthropological Institute. Edited by Marian 
W. Smith. London, Routledge & K. Paul, 
1961. 150 p. illus. (Royal Anthropologi¬ 

cal Institute. Occasional publications, no. 15) 
N5310.S96 1957 
The papers and discussions of an international cross- 
section of anthropologists and art historians, including 
such prominent spokesmen as Sir Herbert Read, E. R. 
Leach, and William Fagg. An American edition of 
this work was published by the Free Press of Glencoe. 

332. Trowell, Kathleen Margaret. African de¬ 

sign. New York, Praeger, 1960. 78 p. 77 
plates. (Books that matter) NK1487.T7 


65 



333 . 


Classical African sculpture. London, 
Faber and Faber, 1954. 103 p. 48 plates. 

NB1080.T7 1954 
By the Art Director in the Uganda Museum in Kam¬ 
pala, these two works are descriptive of art of sub- 
Saharan Africa in general. The first named covers 
in text and plates a variety of media: textile design, 
basketwork, beadwork, hides and leather work, body 
painting, carving of calabashes, wood, metal, and pot¬ 
tery. The second earlier work is a more extended essay 
on the history and culture of Africa, particularly West 
Africa, as interpreted in figures and masks of wood 
and bronze. 

334. Washington, Forrester B. Contemporary 

artists of Africa. New York, Division of Social 
Research and Experimentation, Harmon 
Foundation, 1960. 32 1. N7380.W3 

Useful mimeographed pamphlet made up for an 
informal committee interested in data on contemporary 
African art. It includes tabulated listings of where 
in Africa artists and art schools were found and where 
no artists or schools were found, as well as names of 
artists and sculptors. Those located are heavily con¬ 
centrated in Ghana, Nigeria, and the Congo. 

335. Wingert, Paul S. The sculpture of Negro 

Africa. New York, Columbia University Press, 
1950. vii, 96 p. illus., plates, map. 

NB1080.W5 

This book, by an Assistant Professor of Art and 
Archaeology at Columbia University, was described 
at the time of writing as “the most comprehensive study 
of its subject in the English language.” The essay 
treats African sculpture under the four major regions, 
West Africa, Cameroon, Central Africa, and East Afri¬ 
ca. It is accompanied and illustrated by 118 excellent 
plates, and includes a long bibliography (p. 83-96). 

MUSIC 

Bibliography 

336. Merriam, Alan P. “An annotated bibliography 

of African and African-derived music since 
1936.” In Africa, Journal of the International 
African Institute, v. 21, no. 4, Oct. 1951: 319— 
329. PL8000.I6, v. 21 

An extension of the Varley bibliography, including 
references to books and periodical sources published 
up to and including 1950. Entries are listed alpha¬ 
betically by author in two sections. Section I lists 
references the compiler checked personally; section II 


lists references obtained from various other sources. 
See also this author’s contribution in African Studies 
Bulletin, no. 314. 

337. Varley, Douglas H., comp. African native 

music, an annotated bibliography. London, 
The Royal Empire Society, 1936. 116 p. {On 
cover: Royal Empire Society bibliographies, 
no. 8) ML120.A35V31 

The literature on music among the native tribes of 
Africa is widely scattered in general studies of ethno¬ 
logical, geographical and anthropological nature. This 
comprehensive bibliography brings together the titles 
of many books and articles from journals in these fields. 
Its arrangement is geographical, by territory, with 
large general sections; the subject matter covers native 
music and musical instruments. It is restricted to 
music of the Bantu and Negro races, roughly to peoples 
south of the Sahara. 

Note: The selection and annotations of items for this sec¬ 
tion were made by Mr. Darius Thieme of the Music Division 
of the Library of Congress, a specialist in African music. An 
extensive annotated bibliography by Mr. Thieme, African 
Music, is now in preparation and will be published by the 
Library, probably in late 1963. It will contain about 750 
entries, comprising a full survey of 12 journals of special 
importance in the field, also presenting a comprehensive list 
of references from an international roster of general, anthro¬ 
pological, linguistic, and other periodicals for the years since 
1950. 

338. African music: journal of the African Music So¬ 

ciety. v. 1, no. 1+ 1954+ Roodepoort, 

Transvaal, annual. ML5.A26 

Superseding the earlier Newsletter, this journal has 
an annual issue usually running to about a hundred 
pages, including musical scores, illustrations, bibli¬ 
ographic references, book and record reviews, etc. Al¬ 
though the preponderance is Bantu music, coverage is 
general for Africa south of the Sahara. Volume 1, 
no. 4 (1957) and Volume 2, no. 1 (1958) include a 
list of the 100 longplaying records of African native 
music issued by the International Library of African 
Music. 

Records of African music are steadily increasing in popu¬ 
larity and will be found listed in catalogs of commercial firms. 

339. Brandel, Rose. The music of Central Africa; 

an ethnomusicological study: former French 
Equatorial Africa, the former Belgian Congo, 
Ruanda-Urundi, Uganda, Tanganyika. The 
Hague, M. Nijhoff, 1961. xii, 272 p. illus., 
music. ML3740.B7 


66 



A careful, introspective study of the traditional 
music of the region generally known as Central Africa. 
The 135 pages of musical examples include 52 tran¬ 
scriptions of recorded music of several central African 
tribes. A preliminary ethnography of the area, a dis¬ 
cussion of various religious rites, and some coverage of 
linguistics are also presented. The transcriptions are 
partly taken from records made available following the 
Denis-Roosevelt expedition (now currently reissued on 
longplaying records). 

340. Carrington, John F. Talking drums of Af¬ 

rica. London, Carey Kingsgate Press, 1949. 

96 p. illus., map. ML1035.C3 

Bibliography: p. 91-93. 

A monumental work, the only book-length study at 
present available of African drum languages. 

341. Giorgetti, Filberto. Musica africana, sua tec- 

nica e acustica. [Bologna], Nigrizia, 1957. 

128 p. illus., music. (Museum Comboni- 

anum, n. 10) ML3760.G56 

An intensive study of harmonic and melodic prac¬ 
tice among the Zande. A chart is laid in which of¬ 
fers a basis for comparison between Western and local 
African tonal systems. Many musical scores include 
transcriptions of Zande songs. Includes photographs 
and illustrations. 

342. Jones, A. M. Studies in African music. Lon¬ 

don, New York, Oxford University Press, 1959. 

2 v. xviii plates, charts, music. 22, 23 x 32 cm. 

ML3760.J63 

On the basis of a thorough study of native music in 
the Rhodesias and nearby regions, Father Jones takes 
data from Ghana, particularly Ewe, and other areas, 
correlates and compares. The result is the first large- 
scale work on the subject which is to some degree com¬ 
prehensive. An attempt is made to point out regional 
variations in melodic and harmonic style and in instru¬ 
mental techniques. Volume 2 consists of musical ex¬ 
amples in full score of pieces discussed in Volume 1. 
Included also in Volume 1 are a map showing regional 
variations in musical practice, photographs, illustra¬ 
tions, and charts. 

343. King, Anthony. Yoruba sacred music from 

Ekiti. Ibadan, Ibadan University Press, 1961. 

xlix, 45 p. illus., music. ML3760.K47 

An intensive study of Yoruba religious music, and 
particularly of drumming techniques and types of 
drums. Includes a chapter on “The Relationship be¬ 
tween Speech Tone and Song.” 


344. Kyagambiddwa, Joseph. African music from 

the source of the Nile. New York, Praeger, 
1955. 225 p. illus., music, map. 

ML3760.K9 

Following an encapsulated history of some African 
regions, a thorough discussion of musical styles and 
practices in Uganda and some adjoining regions is pre¬ 
sented. The many musical examples include vocal 
and instrumental music. Song texts are in the original 
language, with English translations and comments. 

345. Nketia, Kwabena. African music in Ghana. 

Accra, London, Longmans, Green, 1962. 

A monograph by a professor at the University of 
Ghana, offering a general introduction to African tra¬ 
ditional music as practiced in that country. 

346. Tracey, Hugh. Chopi musicians, their music, 

poetry, and instruments. London, Oxford 
University Press, 1948. 180 p. illus., maps, 

music. ML3760.T7 

Includes analysis of the poetry and music of a peo¬ 
ple particularly noted for their xylophone playing. 
Musical examples, descriptive charts, illustrations, dia¬ 
grams, and English translations of the poetry are given. 

347. Weman, Henry. African music and the church 

in Africa. [Translated by Eric J. Sharpe] Upp¬ 
sala, Lundeqvistska bokhandeln, 1960. 296 p. 

illus. (Uppsala universitets arsskrift 1960: 3. 
Acta universitatis Upsaliensis) 

ML2951.A4W4 

“Also published as Studia missionalia Upsaliensia, 3.” 
Following a discussion of the structure and form of 
music in several African societies, the author examines 
extensively the role of native music in Christian church 
services. His data and musical examples come for the 
most part from south and south-central Africa. In¬ 
cludes transcriptions of vocal and instrumental songs 
and dances. 

LETTERS 

348. CoNGRES INTERNATIONAL DES ECRIVAINS ET AR¬ 

TISTES noirs, 1st, Paris, Sept. 1956. Contri¬ 
butions . . . Paris, 1957. 362 p. 

GN645.P74, no. 14-15 

Special issue of Presence africaine, nouv. ser. bimestrielle, 
no. 14-15, juin-sept. 1957. 

349. - 2d, Rome, mars-avr. 1959. T. 2. 

Responsabilites des hommes de culture. Paris, 
1959. 368 p. GN645.P74, no. 27-28 

Special issue of Presence africaine , nouv. ser. bimestrielle, 
no. 27-28, aout-nov. 1959. 


692 - 756 — 63 - 


6 


67 



The first International Congress of Negro Writers 
and Artists was called by Alioune Diop, founder and 
editor of the journal Presence africaine, which is the 
chief organ of French-speaking African intellectuals. 
It was well attended by Negro writers from many parts 
of Africa and from the United States. The second 
Congress, 3 years later, was given still more attention. 
Papers contributed at both sessions were concerned 
with the manifestations of African culture in 1956, 
with literature, art, theater, dance, etc., but also with 
political expression, particularly with race and culture 
conflicts; in 1959, with the concept of negritude, with 
the re-creation of African history, African philosophy, 
and in general, the assertion of the African personality 
in the arts and social sciences. 

350. Dei-Anang, Michael. Africa speaks; a collec¬ 

tion of original verse with an introd. on “poetry 
in Africa.” Accra, Guinea Press, 1960. 
104 p. PR6007.E296A7 1960 

A book of verse by one of the better known West 
African poets. 

351. Diogenes: an International Review of Phi¬ 

losophy and Humanistic Studies. Diog¬ 
enes looks at Africa. Montreal, International 
Council for Philosophy and Humanistic 
Studies, 1962. 136 p. (Its no. 37, Spring 

1962: p. 1-136) AS4.D5, no. 37 

Special issue of a quarterly review published in 
French and English editions (the latter by Mario 
Casalini Ltd., Montreal). The lead article is by 
Leopold Sedar Senghor, foremost exponent of the 
concept of negritude: “On Negrohood: Psychology of 
the African Negro,” which is an essay in Negro esthet¬ 
ics. Three other articles are directly concerned with 
letters: “The Concept of an African Prose Literature,” 
by Wilfred H. Whiteley; “The Social and Economic 
Background of Portuguese Negro Poetry,” by Alfredo 
Margarido; and “Humanism and Negritude: Notes on 
the Contemporary Afro-American Novel,” by Albert 
Gerard. The other articles are by Claude Tardits, 
“Religion, Epic, History. Notes on the Underlying 
Function of Cults in Benin Civilizations”; Genevieve 
Calame-Griaule, “The Spiritual and Social Role of 
Women in Traditional Sudanese Society”; P. C. W. 
Gutkind, “Some Problems of African Urban Family 
Life (Kampala)”; and Hubert Deschamps, “Toward 
a History of Africa.” 

352. Doob, Leonard W. Communication in Africa; 

a search for boundaries. New Haven, Yale 
University Press, 1961. 406 p. P92.A4D6 


Professor Doob, a social psychologist who has been 
deeply concerned with techniques of psychological 
warfare, here uses Africa as a case study for variables 
that may affect communication and the media of com¬ 
munication. The author’s style makes intriguing 
reading, but the argument is for the initiate. 

353. Hughes, Langston, ed. An African treasury: 

articles, essays, stories, poems, by black Afri¬ 
cans. New York, Crown Publishers, 1960. 
207 p. PR9799.H8 

Selection from African writings in newspapers, 
magazines, and submitted in manuscript, chosen by 
this American Negro author following his having 
judged a short story contest for the Johannesburg 
magazine of African circulation, Drum. The contri¬ 
butions are grouped according to their form—articles, 
miscellaneous (including newspaper columns, folk 
tales, and proverbs), essays, stories, and poetry. Bio¬ 
graphical notes on authors. 

354. Huth, Arno. Communications media in tropical 

Africa; report. Prepared for the International 
Cooperation Administration. Washington, 
1961. 171 p. HE282.H8 

Study of the operations of radio, press, and cinema 
in fifteen countries of Africa, with recommendations 
for improvement of programs. A review by K. A. B. 
Jones-Quartey in Africa Report of November 1962 
speaks of it as “the most comprehensive reference work 
on all the media examined. 

A UNESCO-sponsored conference on this theme was held 
in Paris in 1962. The report was published as Meeting of 
Experts on Development of Information Media in Africa: 
Developing Information Media in Africa; Press, Radio, Film, 
Television (UNESCO. Mass Communication Techniques 
Division. Reports and Papers on Mass Communication, no. 
37. 57 p.). 

355. Leslau, Charlotte, and Wolf Leslau, comps. 

African proverbs. With decorations by Jeff 
Hill. Mount Vernon, N.Y., Peter Pauper 
Press, 1962. 61 p. PN6519.A6L4 

356. Mphalele, Ezekiel. The African image. 

London, Faber & Faber, 1962. 240 p. 

GN645.M7 

Essays by one of Africa’s most noted literary men, 
surrounding four main themes: the African personal¬ 
ity, which he maintains is both political slogan and 
reality; the French African concept of negritude of 
which he disapproves; nationalism as seen by African 
and European; and the literary image of the African 
as seen by white man and black. In the two chap- 


68 


ters of the latter theme he quotes from and comments 
on many novels and other literary works by European 
and African writers. Mr. Mphalele, a South African 
and former schoolteacher who achieved fame with his 
autobiography of the frustrated African intellectual, 
Down Second Avenue, has taught at Ibadan and in 
1962 is with the Congress of Cultural Freedom In 
Paris. 

Mr. Mphalele served as chairman of the conference called 
by the Mbari Writers’ and Artists’ Club of Ibadan at Makerere 
College, June 8—17, 1962. An article regarding the ques¬ 
tions of writing discussed by the 40-odd participants was con¬ 
tributed by him to Africa Report of July 1962 (p. 7-8). 

357. Oxford Library of African Literature [series] 

London, Oxford University Press. 1961 (?) 4- 
A projected series has been announced of the in¬ 
digenous prose and poetry of Africa to be edited by 
E. E. Evans-Pritchard, W. H. Whiteley, and Godfrey 
Lienhardt. The volumes are to have English transla¬ 
tion of text or texts, introductory essay and notes, with 
either full vernacular text or specimens. Titles of in¬ 
dividual volumes will presumably be listed under the 
series in the index of the British National Bibliogra¬ 
phy; possibly also in the quarterly section of Notes 
carried in Africa , the journal of the International Afri¬ 
can Institute. 

358. “La Presse en Afrique au sud du Sahara.” Afri- 

que (Paris) no. 19, dec. 1962: 35-53; no. 26, 

juil. 1963: 32-49. DLC 

A roundup of newspapers and journals published in 
both English and French-speaking countries of Africa, 
with analytical description of each cited. The first 
article, in the section called “Le Dossier d’Afrique” of 
this useful monthly, takes in the first two parts: West 
Africa and Madagascar. The second issue carries 
parts on the press in East Africa and South Africa, 
and a final part of general reflections on the African 
press and its future development. Naturally, in an 
evaluative listing of this sort, the very ephemeral 
and inconsequential periodicals are excluded. For 
West Africa the vernacular press is not noticed, but 
the section on Madagascar includes dailies in Mala¬ 
gasy. 

359. Ruth Sloan Associates, Washington, D.C. 

The press in Africa. Edited by Helen Kitchen. 

Washington, 1956. 96 p. PN5450.R8 

Although outdated, this survey, which gives special 
emphasis to the native press in each country of Africa, 
is still a unique and valuable contribution. The tabu¬ 
lated indexes of principal newspapers of each country 


are preceded by a page or two of explanatory com¬ 
ment on the state of the press in that country, includ¬ 
ing newspapers in vernacular languages as well as 
English, French, etc. 

The most comprehensive available directory of the African 
press is the annual volume published for the advertising trade, 
Advertising and Press Annual of All Africa, founded by Chas. 
R. Pask (Cape Town, Johannesburg, National Publishing 
Co.). It includes, however, only a small number of papers 
in the vernacular, and few of the scholarly publications. 
Many African newspapers and periodicals are listed in the 
Serials for African Studies published by the Library of Con¬ 
gress in 1961. 

360. Rutherfoord, Peggy, ed. African voices; an 

anthology of native African writing. New 

York, Vanguard Press, 1960. 208 p. 

PN6014.R79 1960 

First published in 1958 under title: Darkness and Light. 

An excellently varied anthology of stories, poems, 
tales, essays, grouped by the regions from which they 
come. Some are the products of well-known new 
writers, some are translations by Europeans or Africans 
from traditional song or legend, some are as told by 
informants. At the end there are biographical notes 
about the writers, whose styles vary from traditional 
parables to imagist poetry and prose in the Joycean 
fashion. 

Another anthology in 1963 is edited by Jacob Drachler, 
African Heritage (New York, Crowell-Collier Press. 286 p.) 
The subtitle reads “Intimate Views of the Black Africans from 
Life, Lore, and Literature.” The editor provides an intro¬ 
duction and interpretive notes, including biographical data 
on writers. The selections are in three main parts: 1, ex¬ 
amples of many kinds of African writing; 2, “Afro-American 
Responses”—essays and poems by New World Negroes; 3, 
excerpts from European literature regarding Africans. 

A pamphlet edited by Gerald Moore, Seven African Writers 
(London, Oxford University Press, 1962. 108 p. Three 

Crowns Book), is not yet available for examination. 

361. Schone Schriften aus Afrika; ein Verzeichnis von 

Werken zeitgenossischer afrikanischer Autoren. 

Bonn, Deutsche Afrika-Gesellschaft, 1962. 
83 p. DLC-AFR 

A listing of present-day African writers and their 
literary works. Pages 9-54 cover in one alphabet 
writers of the continent and their books in English, 
French, and African languages. Then there are sep¬ 
arate alphabetical listings of writers in Arabic, with 
translation of titles in German, of writers from Mada¬ 
gascar and Reunion, and from the Caribbean. The 
last list is of anthologies and collections of tales. A 
“Landesregister” groups the writers by country. 


69 


362. Senghor, Leopold Sedar. Anthologie de la 

nouvelle poesie negre et malgache de langue 
frangaise, precede de Orphee noir par Jean- 
Paul Sartre. Paris, Presses universitaires de 
France, 1948. 227 p. (Colonies et empires: 
5. serie: Art et litterature) PQ3899.S4 

By the celebrated French African poet and apostle 
of negritude—also political leader to independence for 
Senegal and currently President of that country—this 
anthology includes the most famous poems by Negroes 
and Malagasy brought up in the French culture. The 
first selections are by West Indians, among them Aime 
Gesaire, whose poem, “Cahier d’un retour au pays 
natal,” here included, first brought the term “negri¬ 
tude” to prominence. Then three poets of West 
Africa, Birago Diop, Senghor himself, and David Diop, 
and the Malagasy nationalist poets Rabearivelo, Rabe- 
mananjara, and Ranaivo. The volume has as intro¬ 
duction the essay by Jean-Paul Sartre, “Orphee noir” 
(Black Orpheus) which introduced the concept of 
negritude to the French literary world. 

363. Traore, Bakary. Le theatre negro-africain et 

ses fonctions sociales. Paris, Presence afri- 
caine, 1958. 159 p. (Enquetes et etudes) 

PN2979.T7 

Developed from a dissertation at the ficole Pratigue 
des Hautes fitudes by a former teacher from Senegal. 
The author considers in sociological terms the origins 
of African dramatic forms in dance, miming, song, 
traditional drama, and the forms and tendencies of 
modern theater. A part of the book was presented as 
a paper at the first International Congress of Negro 
Writers and Artists (see no. 321). 

EDUCATION 

Bibliography 

364. Couch, Margaret, comp. Education in Africa: 

a select bibliography. Pt. 1, British and for¬ 
mer British territories in Africa. London, In¬ 
stitute of Education, University of London, 
1962. 121 p. 

365. Dolan, Eleanor F., comp. Higher education in 

Africa south of the Sahara; selected bibliogra¬ 
phy 1945-1961. Washington, American As¬ 
sociation of University Women, Educational 
Foundation. 80 p. DLC-AFR 

Prepared for the use of women’s study groups, this 
bibliography goes well beyond basic material on higher 
education in Africa in its coverage, including many 


works in the social sciences in which some attention is 
given to African education. The arrangement is by 
form of material—annuals, bibliographies, newspapers, 
periodicals, books and pamphlets, articles, and publica¬ 
tions of United Nations and African and other govern¬ 
ments. 

366. Drake, Howard. A bibliography of African edu¬ 
cation south of the Sahara. Aberdeen, the 
University Press, 1942. 97 p. (University of 
Aberdeen Anthropological Museum. Publica¬ 
tion, no. 2) Z5815.A3D7 

This bibliography provides extensive coverage of 
prewar material on the subject. 


367. African Education Commission. Education in 

Africa; a study of West, South and Equatorial 
Africa, conducted by the African Education 
Commission under the auspices of the Phelps- 
Stokes Fund and foreign mission societies of 
North America and Europe; report prepared 
by Thomas Jesse Jones, chairman. New York, 
Phelps-Stokes Fund, 1922. 323 p. illus. 

LA1501.A4 

368. - Education in East Africa . . . Thomas 

Jesse Jones, chairman. New York, Phelps- 
Stokes Fund, 1925. 416 p. illus. 

LA1501.A4 1925 
The Phelps-Stokes Commission on African Educa¬ 
tion sent representatives in the early twenties to study 
the entire field of education in Africa south of the 
Sahara. The reports marked an important step in 
American interest in African development. As a direct 
result, the Jeanes schools were begun in East and Cen¬ 
tral Africa in 1925. Named for a Philadelphia philan¬ 
thropist who had left a fund for training teachers for 
Negro schools, these institutions train native teachers 
and their wives to take charge of village schools and 
community improvement. An abridged edition of the 
Phelps-Stokes Reports, with introduction by Leonard 
J. Lewis, was published by the Oxford University Press 
in London, September 1962 (5, 213 p.). 

369. Azevedo, Avila de. Politica de ensino em Africa. 

Lisboa, Ministerio do Ultramar, Junta de 
Investigates do Ultramar, Centro de Estudos 
Politicos e Sociais, 1958. 198 p. map, tables. 

(Estudos de ciencias politicas e sociais) 

LA1501.A9 

A scholarly comparative study, assessing the educa¬ 
tional activities of United Nations, CCTA, UNESCO, 


70 




then describing the general character of education of 
Africans, and the particular systems of South Africa, 
the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, the British, 
Belgian, French, and other systems. The last four 
chapters review the history of education in Portuguese 
Africa, its present state, and future plans, including the 
question of a university. 

370. Carr-Saunders, Sir Alexander M. New uni¬ 

versities overseas. London, Allen & Unwin, 
1961. 260 p. LA669.5.G3 

The distinguished author, who has served on many 
social science commissions and special commissions on 
higher education in the British colonial possessions, in 
this book describes the universities in territories which 
had been under the British crown in 1945, most of them 
now independent countries. He begins with an ac¬ 
count of the situation before the appointment of the 
Asquith Commission on Higher Education in the 
Colonies (1943-45), of which he was a member. He 
continues with a detailed account of recent develop¬ 
ments and present status. African universities in¬ 
cluded are Fourah Bay College (University College of 
Sierra Leone), Kumasi College of Technology, 
Makerere College (University College of East Africa), 
Royal College, Nairobi, University College of Khar¬ 
toum, University of Nigeria, University College, 
Ibadan, University College of Ghana, University Col¬ 
lege of Rhodesia and Nyasaland. 

371. Conference of African States on the De¬ 

velopment of Education in Africa, Addis 
Ababa, 15-25 May, 1961. Final report. Paris, 
United Nations Educational, Scientific and 
Cultural Organization, 1961. 64, 27, 127 p. 

L106. A3 1961 

Organized and convened by the United Nations Eco¬ 
nomic Commission for Africa and the United Nations 
Educational Scientific and Cultural Organization, 
this conference brought together representatives of 
63 governments, 39 participating, 24 as observers (in¬ 
cluding the United States), and delegates from United 
Nations and international nongovernmental agencies. 
The chairman was the Minister of Education and 
Welfare of Ghana, Mr. A. J. Dowuona-Hammond. 
The final report contains summarizations of the plenary 
sessions—an inventory of educational needs, education 
as a basic factor in economic and social development, 
patterns of international cooperation for developing 
African education—and the reports of several com¬ 
missions, concerned with financing, educational plan¬ 
ning, technical and vocational training, and adult edu¬ 


cation. These occupy 64 pages. Then 27 separately 
numbered pages give the “Outline of a Plan for Afri¬ 
can Educational Development” (also issued as a 
separate), very largely concerned with financing and 
ending with 80 recommendations for long-term (1961— 
80) and short-term (1961-66) plans. The long-term 
plan aims at universal primary education by 1970, with 
23 percent secondary and 2 percent higher education. 
The short-term plan envisages an annual increase of 
5 percent in primary school enrollment; the staggering 
total cost for the 6-year plan set at $4,150 million, of 
which $1,310 million will have to come from outside 
Africa. Low or no-interest long-term loans payable 
in local currencies are urged, and it is considered ur¬ 
gent that one or more institutions be established in 
Africa for development and research in education. 

A followup Meeting of Ministers of Education of African 
Countries Participating in the Implementation of the Addis 
Ababa Plan was held in Paris from March 26-30, 1962, under 
the auspices of UNESCO. Its Final Report was issued as a 
UNESCO Document (Paris, 1962. 223 p., tables. UNESCO/ 
ED/191). 

A second Conference on the Development of Higher Edu¬ 
cation in Africa was held under UNESCO auspices in Tan¬ 
anarive, Madagascar in September 1962. The Report will 
be published by UNESCO. A summary of proceedings is 
given by the American representative of the Phelps-Stokes 
Fund, Karl W. Bigelow, in Africa Report of November 1962. 
The summary of a report by Sir Alexander Carr-Saunders, 
Staffing African Universities, is available from the American 
Council on Education, Publications Division, Washington, 
D.C. 

372. Conference on African Education, Cam¬ 
bridge, Eng., 1952. African education; a study 
of educational policy and practice in British 
tropical Africa. Oxford, University Press; to 
be obtained from the Crown Agents for the 
Colonies, London, 1953. 187 p. Edited by 

W. E. F. Ward. LA1530.C6 1952 

Significant publication resulting from the work of 
two Study Groups sponsored by the Nuffield Founda¬ 
tion and the Colonial Office, 1951-52, and the ensuing 
Conference at Cambridge in September 1952. The 
three main parts are the Report of the West Africa 
Study Group, chairman, D. G. B. Jeffrey of London 
University Institute of Education, the Report of the 
East and Central Africa Study Group, chairman, Mr. 
A. L. Binns, and the record of the Conference proceed¬ 
ings, with summarization of discussions. The two Re¬ 
ports were based on 6 months’ visits by teams of three 
or four educational specialists, who examined thor¬ 
oughly the entire educational systems of the two 
regions, their special problems and needs. The East 


71 




and Central Africa group made much the fuller state¬ 
ment, facing the problems of a plural society in which 
the place of the African must be stabilized in relation 
to other races as well as to his own changing culture, 
which is seen as a primary need in West Africa. Mr. 
Binns and his associates spelled out recommendations 
at the end of each of their chapters, declaring that they 
“erred on the side of dogmatism and simplification” 
as a basis for action by workers in the field. Among 
interesting points were their discussion of the “wast¬ 
age”—the loss of children from school during even the 
minimum four-year period—and their conviction that 
the lingua franca of the coast, Swahili, should be elim¬ 
inated from the elementary school curriculum as over¬ 
burdening the children with a need of literacy in three 
languages. 

A summarization in popular style of the work of the 1952 
Conference was written by John McLeod Campbell, African 
History in the Making (London, Edinburgh House Press, 
1955. 120 p.). Also official summaries of the Conference 

report and other British official reports were issued in pam¬ 
phlets of the British Central Office of Information, Reference 
Division, Education in the United Kingdom. Dependencies 
(London, 1954. 92 p.; 1959. 46 p.). These review the 
current position in education in the non-self-goveming terri¬ 
tories of Africa and other parts of the British Commonwealth, 
including tables of statistics. 

373. Greenough, Richard. Africa calls . . . Devel¬ 

opment of education, the needs and problems. 
Paris, UNESCO, 1961. 50 p. Ulus. 

LA1501.G7 

Short pamphlet surveying education in Africa south 
of the Sahara. The author, a UNESCO staff member, 
explains problems, needs, remedies, the Addis Ababa 
Plan, and work of UNESCO. Of 25 million children, 
13 million do not have schools. Illiteracy rate among 
adults is almost 80 percent. UNESCO is currently 
supporting about 130 projects in 28 countries. 

A United Nations survey of Progress of the Non-Self-Gov¬ 
erning Territories under the Charter, v. 4, Educational Condi¬ 
tions (New York, 1961. 126 p.) has tabulated statistics on 

all phases of education in Africa together with those for 
Asia and the Pacific and Caribbean areas. The figures, how¬ 
ever, are for 1946 to 1956 or, in a few cases, 1957. 

374. Hodgkin, Robin A. Education and change; a 

book mainly for those who work in countries 
where education is part of a process of rapid 
social change. London, Oxford University 
Press, 1957. 150 p. illus. LC191.H6 

Thoughtful essay based on the author’s experience 
of teaching in the Sudan, though his illustrations are 
drawn from the underdeveloped countries in general. 
His argument, largely in theoretical terms, is that in 


the stresses and strains of social change, education 
must be to develop citizens who are “active, social and 
creative. Education for creative action means, ex¬ 
ternally, the getting of skill and experience and, inter¬ 
nally, the development of reflective, imaginative and 
questioning powers.” 

Beside Mr. Hodgkin’s abstract study there may be set a 
little book by Reginald J. Mason, British Education in Africa 
(London, Oxford University Press, 1959. 141 p.), which 

sets down in concrete terms the facts of the English system 
and policy in African schools and universities. 

375. Institute of International Education. 

Survey of the African student: his achieve¬ 
ments and his problems, by James M. Davis, 
Russell G. Hanson and Duane R. Bumor. New 
York, 1961. 71 p. LA230.I5 

Survey of 1,600 Africans from south of the Sahara 
in U.S. colleges, based on an extensive analytical ques¬ 
tionnaire and personal interviews regarding back¬ 
grounds, major problems, educational and social ex¬ 
periences (discrimination, jobs, advisers, financial sup¬ 
port, etc.), images of America, and other pertinent 
questions. Includes tabulated data and text of the 
questionnaire. In estimating factors of success or fail¬ 
ure, only 6 percent reported academic difficulties as 
a major problem. The economic factor loomed large, 
particularly as to the difficulty of getting through vaca¬ 
tion periods. 

The racial discrimination factor and relations of African 
students with American Negroes, as revealed in the survey, 
are discussed in an article by John F. Melby and D. R. Bumor, 
“Future Leaders of Africa,” Saturday Review, Aug. 18, 1962, 
p. 49-51. 

In this connection it is interesting to compare the statement 
of the USSR in the UNESCO report, Fellowships for Afri¬ 
cans. The financial lures held out include free trips to vaca¬ 
tion resorts, a large allowance for warm clothing, etc., and 
a suggestion that expenses for lodging represent less than 2 
percent of the monthly allowance. 

376. Journal of Negro Education. African educa¬ 

tion south of the Sahara. Washington, 1961. 
p. 173-364. LC2701 .J6, v. 30 

The yearbook number, v. 30, Summer 1961. 

Comprehensive survey of the topic, comprising 19 
authoritative articles. The first section is “Common 
Problems Involved in the Task of Nation-Building.” 
Section 2 is on “Some Special Educational Problems 
in Africa South of the Sahara.” Section 3 is “African 
Education South of the Sahara—Some Problems of 
Implementation,” including role of U.N., stake of the 
United States, future of missionary enterprise, teacher 
supply and demand. The last section has two papers 
of “Critical Summary” by Professor Karl Bigelow of 


72 


Teachers College, Columbia University, and Dean 
Horace Mann Bond, School of Education of Atlanta 
University. 

377. Maistriaux, Robert. Les methodes actives en 

terre d’Afrique; une experience pedagogique 
pilote au Congo. Bruxelles, Editest, 1960. 
142 p. LB1027.M316 

Experiments in education of African children in 
primary grades. The writer, who is author also of a 
valuable study of African mentality, L’Intelligence 
noire et son destin (Bruxelles, Editions de problemes 
d’Afrique centrale, 1957. 256 p. illus.) has estab¬ 
lished from a series of tests that the fact that “the 
Bantu pupil of 6-7 years is about two years behind his 
European comrades of the same age [is] the inevitable 
consequence of a depressed socio-economic milieu and 
not at all due to congenital intellectual inferiority of 
the black child.” 

378. Mumford, William Bryant, and G. St. J. Orde- 

Brown. Africans learn to be French. Lon¬ 
don, Evans Bros., 1937. 174 p. LA161.M8 
This volume, covering a review of educational activ¬ 
ities in the seven federated colonies of French West 
Africa, was based on a tour undertaken in 1935 by the 
head of the Colonial Department of the University of 
London Institute of Education, and Major Orde- 
Brown, the specialist on African labor. The two 
writers gave the most complete account then available 
in English of the system by which the present leaders 
of French-speaking Africa were taught. The frontis¬ 
piece is a comment on the French concept of assimi¬ 
lation; it shows French and African primary school 
children leaving school together, with the caption: 
“Association of mental capacity with colour of skin 
would be placed by France in the same category as 
character-judging by cranial bumps.” 

379. Pifer, Alan J. Forecasts of the Fulbright pro¬ 

gram in British Africa; a report to the United 
States Educational Commission in the United 
Kingdom. London, U.S. Educational Com¬ 
mission in the United Kingdom, 1953. 119 p. 

LB2285.A35P5 

The writer had visited West Africa, East and Central 
Africa, also the Sudan, South Africa, and Malta, to 
report on educational administration and institutions 
and to examine lines for educational exchanges be¬ 
tween America and African colonies. The aim of his 
survey was improvement of caliber both of African 
students coming to America (“should be largely post¬ 
graduate”) and of American teachers going to Africa. 
In his last final chapter on travel grants, Mr. Pifer sup¬ 


ported strongly the suggestion of a Colonial Office 
official for a survey “of what has actually happened to 
African students with American qualifications after 
they return to Africa,” and urged a comparison with 
Africans holding British degrees. The bulk of the text 
described existing universities, colleges, schools, and 
research institutes. 

380. Political and Economic Planning. Colonial 

students in Britain; a report. London, 1955. 
257 p. LA637.7.P6 

Bibliography: p. 240-251. 

Survey carried out over 4 years with case studies 
and questionnaires investigating statistics and char¬ 
acteristic educational, social, and welfare problems of 
the over 10,000 young people from the colonial terri¬ 
tories studying in Britain. This figure, as of January 1, 
1955, contrasted with between 500 and 600 in 1939. 
About 40 percent were from West Africa. Included 
were students in teaching hospitals, technical colleges, 
and those enrolled in special courses, as well as universi¬ 
ties. The color bar was a main issue, also British apa¬ 
thy. Recommendations of the investigating group in¬ 
cluded more education and more advisory arrange¬ 
ments in the colonies before the students come abroad, 
more planning of all sorts, through a Central Placing 
Service in Britain, and emphatically more attention on 
the part of the British public. 

381. Read, Margaret. Education and social change 

in tropical areas. London, New York, Nelson, 
1955. 130 p. LC2605.R4 

Set of papers by the Head of the Department of 
Education in Tropical Areas of the University of Lon¬ 
don Institute of Education. Dr. Read is a social an¬ 
thropologist, and most of these speeches and articles 
reflect her special interest in the relationship of an¬ 
thropological studies to methods of education in Africa 
and other countries where community development 
projects are being carried on. She stressed in her 
last lecture, “African Education and World Opinion,” 
how little is known in the outside world of British 
progress in this field in Africa. 

Although its emphasis is naturally on British territories, 
the Department of Education in Tropical Areas gives atten¬ 
tion to education and social development on a worldwide 
scale in its two valuable serial publications, Community De¬ 
velopment Bulletin (1949+ quarterly) and Oversea Quar¬ 
terly (1958+; formerly Colonial Review).' The Bulletin 
reports on progress in all phases of village improvement and 
adult education. The Oversea Quarterly is “a readers’ digest 
of important articles on colonial affairs, including special arti¬ 
cles on education, selected from leading British, foreign, and 
colonial periodicals.” Another serial publication of this De¬ 
partment, African Women (v. 1, no. 1+ Dec. 1954+ 2 a 


73 


year), is a bulletin of 25 to 30 pages devoted to conditions 
and interests of women in the continent as a whole, though 
the preponderance of material is on British Africa. 

382. Ruth Sloan Associates, Washington, D.C. 

The educated African; a country-by-country 
survey of educational development in Africa. 
Edited by Helen Kitchen. New York, Praeger, 
1962. xvii, 542 p. illus., maps. (Books that 
matter) LA1501.R79 

This volume, which Dr. Ruth Sloan designates a 
“functional reference survey,” will be an invaluable 
source book for years to come. It represents a tre¬ 
mendous accomplishment of collecting and synthesiz¬ 
ing factual and statistical information on all phases of 
education in almost 50 countries of Africa, presented 
to the editors in working papers by about thirty area 
specialists. The arrangement is systematic by region 
and country; for each country, first thumbnail statis¬ 
tics, the briefest possible bit of historical background, 
an outline of the history of education, statement with 
statistics of present situation, plans and prospects for 
the future. Reviewed in Africa Report, February 
1962. 

383. - Resources and needs for training facili¬ 

ties for Africans in British Africa, Ethiopia and 
Liberia. Washington, 1955. 250 1. diagrs. 

LA1501.R8 

Basic compilation of data and statistics regarding 
facilities and programs for African education and train¬ 
ing in the rapidly advancing countries south of the 
Sahara. Areas covered are the countries of British 
West Africa, British Central Africa, British East 
Africa, Liberia, and Ethiopia. For each there are 
brief statements of background information on geogra¬ 
phy and economic resources, population, government 
and political parties, outline of general education and 
development plans, then detailed examination of train¬ 
ing facilities. This involves accounts—with names and 
statistics—of the structure of the educational system, 
of lower schools, technical training, teacher training, 
training for government service, higher education, 
scholarships, programs for training in other countries, 
notably in the United States. 

384. Scientific Council for Africa South of the 

Sahara (CSA). Directory of scientific and 
technical libraries in Africa south of the Sa¬ 
hara. London, Published under the spon¬ 
sorship of the Commission for Technical Co¬ 
operation in Africa South of the Sahara, 1954. 
71 p. ( Its Publication no. 10) 

AZ800.S35. no. 10 


Title also in French. 

Provisional edition with title first in French issued in 1953 
(Its Publication no. 3). 

The second revised edition of the list contains data 
concerning 239 libraries outside the Union of South 
Africa, and 68 within the Union. For the countries 
outside the Union, the large general libraries of univer¬ 
sities and municipalities are included. “The reason is 
that in countries which have a paucity of purely scien¬ 
tific and technical libraries, general libraries may con¬ 
tain material which is not otherwise available.” This 
list has been supplemented by Miss Hazel Mews in 
“Scientific Documentation in Africa South of the Sa¬ 
hara,” Revue de la Documentation, v. 26, Nov. 1959, 
p. 87-93. 

385. United Nations. Secretariat. Educational 

facilities and training programmes in the non¬ 
self-governing territories. Report. 6 Mar. 
1962. New York, 1962. 71 p. (A/AC.35/ 
L.353) DLG 

This general report for non-self-governing territories 
around the world includes resumes of civil service prep¬ 
aration and training, and education in Kenya, 
Uganda, Nyasaland, and Northern Rhodesia. 

386. United Nations Educational, Scientific and. 

Cultural Organization. Fellowships for 
Africans; Bourses destinees aux Africains. 
Paris, 1961. 51 p. (IES/5) DLC-AFR 
A supplement to the 13th edition of the handbook, 
Study Abroad, this is a round-the-world listing of or¬ 
ganizations, universities, and governments that offer 
scholarships to African students. There are indexes 
of donor countries and recipient countries. The in¬ 
troduction advises that the full handbook gives more 
complete information about opportunities in specified 
fields of study. 

387. - Education Clearing House. African 

languages and English in education; a report 
of a meeting of experts on the use in education 
of African languages in relation to English, 
where English is the accepted second language, 
held at Jos, Nigeria, November 1952. Paris, 
1953. 91 p. ( Its Educational studies and 
documents, no. 2) LB5.U37, no. 2 

Discussion by a group of experts, with recommen¬ 
dations for UNESCO action along the lines of in¬ 
creased research. Papers by educators from institu¬ 
tions in South Africa, Nigeria, the Gold Coast, etc. 
Appendixes include a survey of the use of vernacular 
languages as vehicles of instruction in British territories 


74 




in Africa, with listing of chief languages. The ideal 
is stated as pre-primary and primary instruction in the 
vernacular, thereafter greater emphasis on English. 

A Commonwealth Conference on the Teaching of English 
as a Second Language was held in Uganda in 1961. The 
Report, which in March 1963 is not yet available in the 
Library of Congress, was reviewed in the Central African 
Examiner of August 1961, and was the point of departure 
for a feature section in the Times Literary Supplement (Lon¬ 
don) of Aug. 10, 1962 (p. 567-572), which includes a lead 
article on English as a second language, a number of poems 
from Africa and Asia, and a long discussion of “Writing in 
West Africa.” 

388. UNESCO Bulletin for Libraries. Library 

development in Africa. Paris, 1961. p. 225— 
287. Z681.U5, v. 15 

Special issue, v. 15, no. 5, Sept.-Oct. 1961. 

Contains details of library projects to be undertaken 
by UNESCO in Africa in 1961-62, surveys of library 
resources in the region, and special articles. The sur¬ 
veys of resources are, for English-speaking West Africa 
by Evelyn J. A. Evans, for English-speaking East 
Africa by S. W. Hockey, for French-speaking countries 
by K. E. W. Dadzie. Special articles are on the East 
African Literature Bureau, university libraries, public 
and school libraries, library construction in tropical 
countries, and furniture and equipment. The last 12 
pages describe collections of Africana in libraries and 
other institutions of Europe, Africa, and the United 
States, ending with the Library of Congress. 

Literature concerning libraries in Africa is covered through 
1961 in a Library of Congress bibliography, African Libraries, 
Book Production, and Archives: A List of References (1962. 
64 p.). 

389. Williams, Chancellor. The rebirth of African 

civilization. Washington, Public Affairs Press, 
1961. 328 p. DT532.W5 

By a social scientist at Howard University. This 
work was planned in the early fifties as a study of the 
African school system, particularly the mission schools, 
and changed into an analysis of African life and cul¬ 
ture, with the emphasis on education as the primary 
need. Much of it results from a questionnaire, “Sur¬ 
vey of African Opinion,” taken in the Gold Coast in 
1954-57. The dedication is to Nkrumah and Azikiwe. 

390. World Confederation of Organizations of 

the Teaching Profession. Survey of the 
status of the teaching profession in Africa. 
Washington, 1962. 150 p. DLC 

Resulting from a field survey made by a Commission 
on Educational Policy for Africa of the WCOTP. It 
contains fairly full sections for each country, reviewing 


such problem areas as low salaries, lack of new candi¬ 
dates, and uneven standards, as well as many evidences 
of progress in educational methods. The report was 
prepared by a Gambian Education officer, Mr. S. H. 
M. Jones. The WCOTP publishes a quarterly, Pano¬ 
rama: a reprint is available of an issue devoted to “Ed¬ 
ucation in Africa” (v. 1, no. 4, Winter, 1959). 

A Conference on Education in Africa, sponsored by the 
World Council of Churches, was held in Salisbury, Southern 
Rhodesia, in late December 1962 and January 1963. The 
purpose was to reassess the role of churches and missions 
and “to formulate afresh in African terms the Christian con¬ 
cept of education.” 

CHRISTIANITY AND ISLAM 

391. All-Africa Church Conference, Ibadan, 
Nigeria, 1958. The church in changing Af¬ 
rica; report of the All-Africa Church confer¬ 
ence, held at Ibadan, Nigeria, January 10-19, 
1958. New York, International Missionary 
Council, 1958. 106 p. BX6.A46A3 1958c 
This significant conference brought together Protes¬ 
tant clergy from all over Africa as well as Europe and 
America. Of the over 200 representatives, more than 
half were African. The major themes were: The 
church, youth, and the family; the church and eco¬ 
nomic life; the church and citizenship; the church and 
culture; the growing church. Information sessions 
worked on these subjects, and rather particularly on 
the question of Christian literature, its preparation and 
distribution. 

This assembly immediately followed an Assembly of the 
International Missionary Council which was held at Accra 
from Dec. 28, 1957, to Jan. 8, 1958. Its papers, edited by 
Ronald K. Orchard, with the title, The Ghana Assembly of 
the International Missionary Council, were published by the 
Edinburgh House Press in London and distributed in the 
United States by Friendship Press (New York, 1958. 240 
p.). Its theme was the broad question of missionary policy 
in today’s world, and its four parts, preparatory papers, 
papers delivered at the sessions, speeches, and papers resulting 
from the Assembly, are more concerned with the world picture 
and with Asia than with Africa. 

392. Andersson, Efraim. Messianic popular move¬ 
ments in the Lower Congo. Uppsala, Alm- 
qvist & Wiksells boktr., 1958. 287 p. illus., 
col. plate (Studia ethnographica Upsaliensia, 
14) GN654.A7 

Among the most notorious of the “prophets” who 
have led dissident movements arising from Christianity 
was the Congolese preacher and faith healer Simon 
Kimbangu. His active part in his “Ngunzist” move¬ 
ment lasted only for a few months in 1921; as its na- 


75 


tionalistic and anti-European aspects came to the at¬ 
tention of the authorities he was arrested and spent 
the rest of his life, till 1950, in prison in Elisabethville. 
This martyrdom of the “messiah” led to a long series 
of prophet movements in the Congo and neighboring 
regions, which are here studied in detail by a Swedish 
missionary anthropologist. 

393. Bouchaud, Joseph. L’ttglise en Afrique noire. 

Paris, La Palatine, 1958. 189 p. 

BV3500.B63 

The preface by Cardinal Lefebvre, Apostolic Dele¬ 
gate in Dakar, speaks of the author as one of the most 
competent men in the African Catholic mission field. 
His book describes the past and present position of 
missions, and problems concerned with education, 
African family relations, political evolution, traditional 
paganism, Islam, and communism. In the conclusion 
Father Bouchaud states forthrightly that no solutions 
will be valid until the Church becomes a truly African 
church, with its own bishops, priests, and lay workers. 
To this end, he says, all mission work must be directed. 

A book of the year before by Bernard de Vaulx. Les figlises 
de couleur, (Paris, A. Fayard, 1957. 157 p.), is a survey of 
the native churches in Arica and Asia. A later work by a 
Catholic journalist, five Dessarre, L’Afrique noire chretienne 
(Paris, SPES, 1960. 191 p.) is useful for its statistical round¬ 
up, including graphic charts, of Catholics and Protestants in 
all countries of Africa. 

394. Bryan, G. McLeod. Whither Africa. Rich¬ 

mond, John Knox Press, 1961. 157 p. 

DT30.B73 

Dr. Bryan is a professor of Christian ethics who has 
studied the place of religion in African colleges and 
served as supervisor of Operation Crossroads Africa. 
In this well-informed and persuasive study addressed 
particularly to the “Universal Church,” he surveys in 
turn the ideologies competing for the mind of new 
Black Africa: tribalism, Islam (winning out on the 
religious side), Christianity, nationalism, racism, com¬ 
munism (tabulating factors for and against), and 
“Educationalism” (higher education). The new re¬ 
ligion is nationalism, in respect of which the missions 
have been delinquent, though most nationalist leaders 
“write from a Christian perspective.” The author 
warns the Christian world that only through immediate 
reform can it maintain its foothold as “a decidedly 
minority religion.” 

In 1962 another “Christian Perspective” on Africa, written 
by the founder and Director of Crossroads Africa, James H. 
Robinson, was published with the title, Africa at the Cross¬ 
roads (Philadelphia, Westminster Press. 83 p.). In a series 
entitled Christian Perspectives on Social Problems, it is de¬ 


scribed in the foreword as “a summons and a strategy for 
emergent Americans”, (see Isaacs, no. 162). 

395. Cardaire, Marcel. L’lslam et le terroir africain; 

etudes soudaniennes. Koulouba, Impr. du 
Gouvemement, 1954. 168 p. BP64.A1C3 

“The study of the development of Black Islam and 
the problem of the spiritual void that follows the dis¬ 
appearance of the old terror beliefs seem to us . . . 
indissolubly linked” writes the author in his introduc¬ 
tion to this analysis of the present-day religious thought 
of the Sudanic belt of Africa. In Mauritania, Senegal, 
Mali (then Sudan) Guinea, northern Ghana and 
Nigeria, the dominant faith of Islam has largely re¬ 
placed the dying pagan belief in magic, fetishism, and 
witchcraft which M. Cardaire calls “religions of 
terror.” But their partial survival has led to variations 
in traditional Islam, and in the Reform movement that 
began with Wahabism and has spread through Muslim 
Africa. The writer describes the counterreform move¬ 
ments in former French West Africa. 

396. Carpenter, George W. The way in Africa. 

New York, Friendship Press, 1959. 165 p. 

illus. HN663.C3 

By the Acting General Secretary of the International 
Missionary Council, this little paperback is penetrat¬ 
ing analysis of the changing cultural, social, and politi¬ 
cal patterns of Africa, with particular reference to the 
place of Christianity as “catalyst and conscience.” Dr. 
Carpenter emphasizes the need for ministerial training 
in Africa, and the point now made by most competent 
observers of the mission field, that as the African 
church “comes to maturity the missionaries must resign 
posts of authority and leadership to Africans.” 

397. Catholic Church. Pope, 1939-1958 (Pius 

XII) Fidei donum (21 Apr. 1957) The future 
of Africa; the encyclical, Fidei donum of Pope 
Pius XII. London, Sword of the Spirit, 1957. 
24 p. BV3500.C35 

This message, addressed particularly to those work¬ 
ing in the mission field, called for “particular heed to 
the accession of new peoples to the responsibilities of 
political freedom.” The Pope pointed out obstacles— 
the increase of atheistic materialism in Africa, the 
spread of Islam—and urged more missionary endeavor 
and interracial sense of brotherhood. 

398. Changing Africa and the Christian dynamic: A 

seminar for mission board executives. Chi¬ 
cago: Center for the Study of the Christian 
World Mission, Federated Theological Faculty, 
University of Chicago. 1960. 560 p. DLC 


76 


Processed pamphlet containing eleven ably written 
papers presented at a seminar that brought together 
over 50 specialists on Christianity in Africa. A timely 
survey. 

399. Delavignette, Robert L. Christianisme et 

colonialisme. Paris, Fayard, 1960. 127 p. 

Je sais—je crois. Encyclopedic du Catholique 
au XX i(me siecle) JV321.D4 

A searching essay by one of France’s leading colo¬ 
nial thinkers. Honorary Governor of France Overseas. 
There are three parts; first the writer assesses the im¬ 
portance of European colonialism at its height in the 
19th century. Then he examines the position of 
Christianity in colonization, his concern mostly with 
Catholicism. The last part, on prospective meanings 
of decolonization for Christianity, takes its point of 
departure from the Papal encyclical Fidei Donum, 
and concludes on the note of fellowship between men 
of different races. 

400. De Mestral, Claude. Christian literature in 

Africa. London, Distributed by the Christian 
Literature Council, 1959. 84 p. 

BV2369.D4 

The director of an important body prepared this use¬ 
ful survey of principles (the readers, the literature), 
administrative matters (church leaders and mission¬ 
ary boards), and technical problems (literature com¬ 
mittees, Christian bookshops, Christian presses). The 
last three sections contain lists of addresses; the book¬ 
shops and presses are of Protestant sects only. 

401. Duncan, Sylvia, and Peter Duncan. Bon- 

ganga ; experiences of a missionary doctor. 
New York, W. Morrow, 1960. 240 p. illus. 

BV3625.C63B7 

Spirited and inspirational account of the work of a 
Baptist mission doctor in the Congo for over 20 years— 
a progressive story of dealing with primitive tribesmen 
subject to malaria, yaws, yellow fever, leprosy, and a 
host of other tropical diseases. Although in a specific 
location, the conditions are typical for “the bush” in 
much of Black Africa. 

402. Groves, Charles Pelham. The planting of 

Christianity in Africa. London, Lutterworth 
Press, 1948-1958. 4 v. maps. (Lutterworth li¬ 
brary, v. 26, Missionary research series, no. 12) 

BR1360.G7 

Published under the auspices of the Department of Mis¬ 
sions, Selly Oak Colleges. 

Contents. —v. 1 to 1840.— v. 2. 1840—1878. — v. 3. 
1878-1914.— v. 4. 1914-1954. 


The definitive history in English of Christian mis¬ 
sionary work in Africa, Protestant and Catholic, 
written by a professor of missions in the Selly Oak Col¬ 
leges, Birmingham. The first volume opens with a 
glance at the peoples of Africa, then the writer begins 
his full historical account with the apostolic age in 
Egypt and North Africa, on through early Christianity 
to the Islamic invasion which eclipsed all else save in 
lost Abyssinia until missionary enterprise was begun 
by the Portuguese in the 15th and 16th centuries. 
The “period of pause” of the 17th and 18th centuries 
ended with the antislavery movement, and the first 
work of missionary societies in Southern Africa, Sierra 
Leone, the Gambia, Liberia, and the Gold Coast. 
Volume 2 opens in 1840, the year before the arrival 
of Livingstone in Africa. It falls into two parts, “Rec- 
onnoitering for Advance, 1840-1858,” in West, East, 
and Livingstone’s “Thrust from the South,” then 
“Pressing the Advantage, 1858-1878,” which ends with 
“Livingstone’s Legacy.” Volume 3 depicts the contin¬ 
uing development from 1878 to 1914, and the final 
volume carries the story through the decade following 
the Second World War. 

403. Kittler, Glenn D. The White Fathers. New 

York, Harper, 1957. 299 p. illus. 

BV2300.W5K5 

A Catholic layman tells here in dramatic presenta¬ 
tion the stirring history of the White Fathers. 
Founded in North Africa by the great Bishop Lavi- 
gerie in 1856, the path of the order in Arab and Black 
Africa is marked over and over with martyrdom. It 
is now the largest Catholic missionary order operating 
in Africa. The present aim of the White Fathers, as 
of other forward-looking mission groups, is to prepare 
the African staffs to take over. Recent evidence of 
this policy occurred, the writer tells us, in 1956, when 
in Ruanda a French bishop was consecrated by an 
African bishop, “the product of White Fathers’ mis¬ 
sions, schools, and seminaries.” 

404. Livingstone, David, 1813-1873. Missionary 

correspondence, 1841-1856. Edited with an 
introd. by I. Schapera. Berkeley, University 
of California Press, 1961. 342 p. 

DT731.L736 1961 
“A basic source of information about what was, or 
should have been, Livingstone’s main activity during 
the period of his first residence in Africa: his work 
as a missionary to the heathen,” reporting to the Board 
of Directors of the London Missionary Society “reg¬ 
ularly, at least twice a year.” The introduction is by 


77 


an authority on Southern Africa. Dr. Schapera edited 
also Livingstone’s Private Journals, 1851-1853, pub¬ 
lished by the University of California Press in 1960 
(Berkeley, xxiv, 341 p., maps). 

A recent biography by George Seaver, David Livingstone: 
His Life and Letters (London, Lutterworth Press, 1957. 
650 p.) aims, says the author, “as far as possible to allow 
the subject of it to tell his own story in his own way,” hardly 
a page failing to include an extract from Livingstone’s cor¬ 
respondence with family, friends, and civil authorities as well 
as the missionary correspondence. 

Other works by and about Dr. Livingstone are mentioned 
in the sections on history of the colonial era and on Central 
Africa. 

405. Mendelsohn, Jack. God, Allah, and Ju Ju, 

religion in Africa today. New York, T. Nelson, 
1962. 245 p. BR1430.M4 

A popular and informative analysis of the influence 
of Christianity and Islam and the changing but reviv¬ 
ing force of animistic rituals and beliefs (the latter 
strong among the intellectual elites) of present-day 
Africa. The writer draws less on personal experience 
than on his study of writings on religion and magic 
in Africa. Himself a Unitarian, he is not optimistic 
about the future of African Christianity. The book is 
favorably reviewed by Dr. Gwendolen Carter in the 
New York Times Book Review of April 29, 1962. 

406. Mosmans, Guy. L’Eglise a I’heure de I’Afrique. 

Tournai, Editions Casterman, 1961. 254 p. 

BX1675.M6 

By a White Father who had worked for 16 years in 
the Kivu Province of the Congo, this is a collection of 
articles written between 1954 and 1960 for La Revue 
nouvelle, with an additional concluding chapter. Like 
other recent studies of Christianity in Africa, the theme 
is that the Church, in order to be an influence in the 
new order, must be nationalized, with foreign mission¬ 
aries withdrawn from positions of power, and secular 
activities, politics in particular, made the province not 
of the priests but of the laity. A number of his ob¬ 
servations in the preindependence period have been 
borne out by subsequent events. 

407. New York, Missionary Research Library. 

Directory of North American Protestant for¬ 
eign missionary agencies. 4th ed. New York, 
1960. 78 p. (MRL directory series no. 11) 
BV2050.N4 1960 

408. Oldham, Joseph H., and B. D. Gibson. The 

remaking of man in Africa. London, Oxford 
University Press, H. Milford, 1931. 185 p. 

LC627.A205 1931a 


By the Secretary and the Assistant Secretary of the 
International Missionary Council, this book is a 
thoughtful examination of the questions of missionary 
work in Africa particularly with regard to education. 
At the time, state-run schools had not been widely de¬ 
veloped, except in a few French colonies, and educa¬ 
tion was largely in the hands of the missions. Appendix 
B, p. 151-182, gives country-by-country summaries of 
educational systems. 

409. Oliver, Roland. How Christian is Africa? 

London, The Highway Press, 1956. 24 p. 

DS 

A powerful statement in nutshell form of the past, 
statistics, present state, and future of the Christian 
missionary movement in Africa. The text is consoli¬ 
dated from three broadcasts by this historian in 1956, 
under the general title, “Christian Responsibility in 
Africa.” A pioneering study by Dr. Oliver is The 
Missionary Factor in East Africa (London, Long¬ 
mans, Green. 1952. 302 p.). 

410. Ross, Emory, and Myrta Ross. Africa dis¬ 

turbed. New York, Friendship Press, 1959. 

183 p. DT14.R59 

The noted leader in American missionary work 
wrote this book with his wife following a trip in 1958 
to Africa, which they had known, he tells us, since 
1912. Their purpose was to “present Africans’ reac¬ 
tions to the impact of the West on their lives,” and 
their investigations went far beyond church matters, 
though their primary attention was to the work of 
missions and clergy. The book is written for the use 
of study groups. The Rosses summarize the discus¬ 
sions in about 800 hours of talk with about 2,000 Afri¬ 
cans in 21 areas. Although the contribution made by 
the Christian gospel has been more fundamental than 
any other power from the west, the diverse policies 
and practices of Christians, sectarian and race divi¬ 
sions, are puzzling and unacceptable to Africans, and 
“Africans desire wider participation in the planning 
and action of the Christian churches.” In an earlier 
book, African Heritage (Friendship Press, 1952. 145 

p.), Mr. Ross had stressed North America’s responsi¬ 
bility in the Christian effort in Africa. 

Another recent publication of the Friendship Press, also 
for study groups, is by a Sierra Leone minister, doctor, and 
political leader, and his American wife, John and Rena 
Karefa-Smart: The Halting Kingdom; Christianity and the 
African Revolution (New York, 1959. 86 p.). Written 

for the Student Christian Movement, the little book traces 
the African background, particularly in regard to religious 
aspects, and the political evolution through colonialism to 
responsible African leadership, then describes contemporary 


78 


Christian activity in Africa, the strengths and weaknesses of 
the Christian community, and the challenge of the revolution 
that calls for reconciliation in the church. 

411. Schlosser, Katesa. Propheten in Afrika. 

Braunschweig, A. Limbach Verlag, 1949. 
426 p. (Kulturgeschichtliche Forschungen. 
3. Bd.) BL2421.S35 

An ambitious work, identifying leaders of the dissi¬ 
dent sects which have arisen widely both among Chris¬ 
tian converts and in Islamic Africa. The list of 
prophets recorded, each through citation of published 
sources of information, begins in the 8th century when 
the first wave of Islam brought forth opposing prophets 
of the old indigenous religions of Africa. These are 
followed through Northwest Africa, the Sahara, Gam¬ 
bia, South and East Africa, and the Upper Nile. Then 
came Islamic prophets, also dating from the 8th cen¬ 
tury and on through the time of the Mad Mullah in 
Somaliland. Last are discussed the prophets leading 
splinter movements from the Christian missions, who 
often represented nationalistic as well as religious dis¬ 
sension, like Harris in Guinea and Kimbangu in the 
Congo. 

Studies on individual prophets and sects are noticed in the 
regional sections of the present work. Dr. Schlosser has 
herself a recent book on indigenous churches in South Africa, 
Eingeborenenkirchen in Siid- und Siidwest-Afrika (Kiel, 
Miihlau, 1958. 355 p.). 

412. Smith, Edwin W. Aggrey of Africa , a study in 

black and white. New York, Doubleday, 
Doran, 1929. 292 p. illus. E185.97.A26 
One of the great names of African history in the 
twenties is that of the American-educated African 
religious and educational leader, James Emman 
Kwegyir Aggrey. As a member of the Phelps-Stokes 
Education Commission to Africa (see no. 367-368) he 
traveled widely through all English-speaking countries 
of the continent; later he served as vice-principal of the 
new University of Achimota. His fame is as an inter¬ 
preter of European civilization to his own people, 
strikingly illustrated in his famous parable of the piano 
keys—“for harmony you must use both the black and 
the white.” Dr. Smith, author of this full-length biog¬ 
raphy, was a close friend of Aggrey. 

413. Sundkler, B. G. M. Bantu prophets in South 

Africa. 2d ed. London, New York, Pub¬ 
lished for International African Institute by 
Oxford University Press, 1961. 281 p. 

BR1367.Z8S8 1961 
An exhaustive study of the separatist churches in 
South Africa and of their leaders, first published in 


1948. A list of about 800 independent churches is 
printed as an appendix in 1961. The separatist 
churches rose in great numbers from 1890 to 1910 and 
have increased in proportion to the political color bar. 
Chief among them are the sects of the Zionist and the 
Ethiopian types; the most famous prophet is perhaps 
the Nazarite Shembe. Dr. Sundkler explains the re¬ 
ligious and social background of the Zulus, the rise of 
the independent church movement, and its relation to 
missions. He gives the history of government policy 
and the place of the churches in the community, then 
turns to a detailed account of leaders and leadership, 
and of forms of worship and healing, with their min¬ 
gling of Christian and pagan practice. The book is 
mentioned here as being of broad application in Bantu 
Africa. 

414. - The Christian ministry in Africa. 

Uppsala, Swedish Institute of Missionary Re¬ 
search, 1960. 346 p. illus. (Studia mis- 
sionalia Upsaliensia, 2) BR1360.S84 

Includes bibliography. 

“Whether in the bush or in the city, it is in the local 
church that the message of Christianity becomes real 
and relevant, or fails to prove itself as the message of 
salvation. It is well to keep in mind [the] little groups 
of pastors and local helpers . . . Their errand is the 
most important in Africa.” This book, the first ex¬ 
tensive general study of the native African ministry, is 
written at the request of the International Missionary 
Council by a Swedish scholar and missionary who after 
experience in Zululand and Tanganyika was named 
Research Secretary of the Council and has traveled 
widely in Africa gathering the material for his survey. 
He begins “where the pastor himself begins: with his 
calling to the ministry;” often the result of a vocation 
dream. The writer examines the development, mostly 
recent, of African leadership in both Protestant and 
Catholic churches rather than dependence on Euro¬ 
pean missionaries, and the role of the pastor in the new 
Africa and in his relations with his coworkers. Then 
almost half the text describes the problems of training 
ministers, and patterns and trends of African theolog¬ 
ical thought. In an appendix a list is given of the¬ 
ological schools, other than Roman Catholic, in the 
whole of Africa. Dr. Sundkler says that in his travels 
of investigation he counted a day lost in which he did 
not talk with an African pastor, and much of his argu¬ 
ment stems from individual instances. 


79 



415. Taylor, John Vernon. Christianity and poli¬ 

tics in Africa. London, Penguin Books, 1957. 
127 p. (Penguin African series, WA 9) 

Dr. Taylor of the International Missionary Council 
had had missionary experience in Uganda. This 
forceful little book, written at the height of race feel¬ 
ing in East and Central Africa—the time of Mau Mau 
and the efforts of the Capricorn Society—urges the 
missionary’s responsibility to the State, and the neces¬ 
sity of the missions influencing the State toward a 
Christian approach to nationalism and race. The 
writer avoids, however, advocacy of such outright de¬ 
fiance of the State as that expressed for South Africa 
by Father Huddleston (see no. 1826). 

From his mission station in Uganda, Dr. Taylor wrote an 
inspirational preface for the handsome and moving pictorial 
work, The Passion in Africa (London, Mowbray, 1957. un¬ 
paged). The volume is made up of 24 fine full-page plates 
from the Passion Play performed in the mission chapel, inter¬ 
spersed with the Gospel verse interpreted in each picture 
and “spirituals” sung during the performance. 

416. Trimingham, John Spencer. Islam in the 

Sudan. London, New York, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1949. 80 p. BP65.E5T7 

417. - Islam in Ethiopia. London, New York, 

Oxford University Press, 1952. 299 p. 

BP65.E8T7 

418. - Islam in West Africa. Oxford, Clar¬ 

endon Press, 1959. 262 p. BP64.A4W4 

419. - A history of Islam in West Africa. 

London, Glasgow, New York, Published for the 
University of Glasgow by the Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1962. 262 p. BP64.A4W38 

420. - Islam in East Africa; the report of a 

survey undertaken in 1961. London, Published 
for the World Council of Churches Commis¬ 
sion on World Mission and Evangelism by 
Edinburgh House, 1962. 47 p., maps. (In¬ 
ternational Missionary Council. Research 
pamphlets, no. 9) 

Dr. Trimingham, a sociologist and Arabic scholar as 
well as a clergyman, was in the Sudan as Secretary 
of the Church Missionary Society in the late forties, 
and published his first booklet, The Christian Approach 
to Islam in the Sudan, in 1948 (Oxford University 
Press. 73 p.). The following year came his full- 
length study of Islam in the Sudan, analyzing the con¬ 
flict between the dogmatic conception of religion, the 
shari’a, and the mystic Sufistic interpretation which 
had inspired the Mahdist movement, and examining 


the present day impact of the West upon the Islamic 
way of life. Dr. Trimingham then turned to Ethiopia. 
A short pamphlet, The Christian Church and Mission 
in Ethiopia, was published in a Survey series by the 
World Dominion Press (London, 1951. 73 p.). 
Islam in Ethiopia continues the author’s main work, 
a definitive study of Islam in Africa south of the so- 
called Middle East. This was carried farther in his 
Islam in West Africa, which deals similarly with the 
present age and the effects of cultural change. The 
second volume on West Africa is an historical study of 
Islam, going back to the medieval states of the Sudan 
before, during, and after the Mohammedan invasion. 
The chronological tables in the Appendix run from the 
Soninke state of Wagadu in A.D. 750-800 to the 
French conquest of Guinea in 1902. The author is 
now lecturer in Arabic at the University of Glasgow. 

421. Welbourn, Frederick B. East African rebels; 

a study of some independent churches. Lon¬ 
don, SCM Press, 1961. 258 p. (World 

mission studies) BR1440.W4 

By a clergyman who is Warden of a Hall at Makerere 
College, this book “falls on the boundary between 
Church History and Social Psychology.” It is a schol¬ 
arly study of four movements of separatist churches, 
three in Uganda, and an allied Kikuyu group in Kenya. 
All, Dr. Welbourn explains, are of the type that, 
though nationalistic and insistent on independence, 
“were genuinely trying to be orthodox in doctrine and 
catholic in outlook.” The Uganda groups—the 
Society of the One Almighty God, led by Joswa Kate 
Mugema against medicine, the Mengo Gospel Church, 
led by the Irishwoman Mabel Ensor “against conven¬ 
tion,” and the African Greek Orthodox Church, led by 
Reuben Spartas against paternalism—were not of the 
type that produces revolt. As to the Kikuyu groups, 
the Kikuyu Independent Schools Association and 
others, the writer declares that “it is important not to 
exaggerate” the part they played in the growth of the 
Mau Mau. There are chapter notes and a bibliog¬ 
raphy, much of it unpublished source materials. 

422. Westermann, Diedrich. Africa and Christian¬ 

ity. London, Oxford University Press, 1937. 

221 p. (Duff lectures, 1935) BV3500.W4 

A set of missionary lectures by the great Professor of 
African Languages who had begun his career in the 
West African mission field. In these talks he examined 
the old ideals of the African and their changes, espe¬ 
cially under political control, the religious heritage of 
the pagan, “anima naturaliter Christiana,” the compe¬ 
tition of Christianity both with paganism and Islam, 


80 






the connection of missionaries with the African 
churches, and last, Christian literature—“the more 
than 250 languages belonging to practically all im¬ 
portant linguistic groups in which translations of the 
Bible or of single Biblical books and other works of a 
Christian character have been published.” 

AGRICULTURE 

Bibliography 

423. U.S. Library of Congress. General Reference 
and Bibliography Division. Agricultural de¬ 
velopment schemes in sub-Saharan Africa; a 
bibliography, compiled by Ruth S. Freitag. 
Washington, 1963. 189 p. 

This bibliography, prepared for the African Section 
with the assistance of a panel of consultants, is for sale 
by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Govern¬ 
ment Printing Office. 


424. Agricultural economics bulletin for Africa, no. 

1 + Sept. 1962 + Addis Ababa, ECA-FAO 
Joint Agriculture Division, irregular. DLC 
Joint publication of the United Nations Economic 
Commission for Africa and the Food and Agriculture 
Organization of the United Nations, to appear “at 
intervals during the year” in English and French edi¬ 
tions. The object of the Bulletin is “to spread the 
experiences of African countries in the field of agricul¬ 
tural development, as widely as possible, throughout 
the continent.” The first number carries two long 
articles (20-35 p.) by specialists, and seven notes of one 
to four pages on individual agricultural experiments. 
The last page carries a listing of future meetings. 

425. Association Pour l’£tude Taxonomique de la 

Flore d’Afrique Tropicale. Vegetation 
map of Africa south of the Tropic of Cancer. 
Explanatory notes by R. W. J. Keay. Carte 
de la vegetation de l’Afrique au sud du Tropi- 
que du Cancer. Notes explicatives par R. W. 
J. Keay. Traduction d’A. Aubreville. Lon¬ 
don, Oxford University Press, 1959. 24 p. 
fold. col. map (in pocket) QK965.A78 
Bibliography: p. 20-24. 

This large map, colored to show the plant communi¬ 
ties of the various regions of Africa, is accompanied by 
notes explaining in technical terms the types of vegeta¬ 
tion in Africa south of the Sahara. The author and 
translator are both noted botanists. 


426. Aubreville, Andre. Climats, forets et desertifi¬ 

cation de VAfrique tropicale. Paris, Societe 
d’editions geographiques, maritimes et colo- 
niales, 1949. 351 p. illus., maps. 

QK938.F6A8 

“Bibliographic”: p. 345-351. 

An ecological study by the inspector-general of 
French colonial forests and waterways, covering tropi¬ 
cal forests in general and those of Africa in particular. 
He treats the causes of climates of the great natural re¬ 
gions, then gives systematic classification of climates 
and forest formations of tropical and subtropical areas 
of Africa. The last part examines the problem of the 
advancing desert. A “climatological and phytogeo- 
graphical” bibliography is arranged by region. Other 
works by M. Aubreville deal with specific colonial areas 
(see no. 1097-98). 

427. Food and Agriculture Organization of the 

United Nations. FAO Africa survey: report 
on the possibilities of African rural develop¬ 
ment in relation to economic and social growth. 
Rome, 1962. 168 p., tables, fold. map. DLC 

A survey by an international team of experts, who 
examined 33 countries (omitting 22 others), as well as 
studying available reports. Special reports were pre¬ 
pared for seven countries, and Ghana supplied a report 
on agricultural development plans. The final report 
here presented, utilizing these materials, has 3 parts: 
1, “The Setting”; 2, “Technical Change and the Bal¬ 
anced Use of Resources”; 3, “Some Problems of Rural 
Development.” The last chapter draws conclusions 
regarding administrative, financial, and technical 
phases of rural development. 

428. - Plant Production and Protection Divi¬ 

sion. The grass cover of Africa , by J. M. Rat¬ 
tray, Crop Production and Improvement 
Branch. Rome, Food and Agriculture Organi¬ 
zation of the United Nations, 1960. 168 p. 

fold. col. map. (FAO agricultural studies, no 
49). QK495.G74F6 

Bibliography, p. 136-144. 

A technical study in phytogeography, including a 
large map with colors to indicate the types of grasses 
indigenous to regions of Africa. The appendices in¬ 
clude index of types, geographical distribution, bibli¬ 
ography (p. 136-144), and index of botanical names. 

This and the work by Joshi (no. 438) are mentioned as 
among the more general of the numerous FAO publications 
having to do with Africa. For any complete listing of FAO 
documents, the United Nations Documents Index should be 
consulted. 


81 




429. Gaudy, M. Manuel d’agriculture tropicale 

(Afrique tropicale et equatoriale). Paris, Mai- 
son Rustique, 1959. 443 p. illus., map, diagrs. 

DA 

Handbook for students in African agricultural 
schools and for officials of the agricultural services. The 
work covers systems and possible improvements in Afri¬ 
can agriculture, problems of soil conservation, irriga¬ 
tion and drainage, mechanization, and rural economy. 

430. Githens, Thomas S., and Carroll E. Wood, 

Jr. The food resources of Africa. Philadel¬ 
phia, University of Pennsylvania Press, the Uni¬ 
versity Museum, 1943. 105 p. illus. (maps) 

diagrs. (African handbooks, edited by H. A. 
Wieschhoff. 3) HD2117.G5 

Bibliography: p. 100-105. 

A wartime handbook in elementary terms for an un¬ 
informed public by two American agronomists, based 
on a careful study of economic and statistical sources 
then available concerning the whole continent of 
Africa. The authors explained distinctions in terms 
of rainfall, elevation, and chief products (the West 
Mediterranean littoral for grain, desert and semiarid 
for animal husbandry, the rain forest and park savan¬ 
nah for palm oil seeds, the high grass savannah for 
peanuts, the mountain and high plateau for coffee, tea, 
etc.), as well as by geographical regions. Stress was 
laid on the primitive methods of farming, the commu¬ 
nal ownership of arable land in tribal society, the lack 
of incentive to grow larger crops, the influence of for¬ 
eign settlement. The statistics of production for spe¬ 
cific crops are interesting in comparison with those in 
current statistical studies (e.g., those of U.S. Foreign 
Agriculture). 

431. Gt. Brit. Colonial Advisory Council of Agricul¬ 

ture, Animal Health and Forestry. The im¬ 
provement of cattle in British colonial terri¬ 
tories in Africa. London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1953. 144 p. (Publication no. 3) 

SF196.G7A52 

432. - The indigenous cattle of the British de¬ 

pendent territories in Africa; with material on 
certain other African countries. London, 
H.M. Stationery Off., 1957. 186 p. 119 

plates. (Publication no. 5) SF196.A35G7 

The first paper is a survey with recommendations 
for the solution of problems that might lead to im¬ 
provement of the African livestock—a phase of the 
general British program of helping the development of 


the native economy of the territories progressing to¬ 
ward independence. The second paper is a compre¬ 
hensive and semitechnical description of the types of 
cattle indigenous to various regions of Africa. Sketch 
maps show migratory routes of origin and similar data. 
The material had been compiled in 1955 and 1956; by 
the time of its publication Ghana had already become 
an independent country. 

433. Harroy, Jean Paul. Afrique , terre qui meurt, 

la degradation des sols africains sous l’influence 
de la colonisation. Bruxelles, M. Hayez, 1944. 
x, 557 p. fold. map. S623.H37 

“Principaux ouvrages cites”: p. 549-557. 

Among important older studies of soil exhaustion 
and erosion in Africa is this brilliant work by the Bel¬ 
gian director of a foundation promoting scientific study 
of the national parks of the Belgian Congo. Of his 
seven lucidly presented sections, two are devoted to the 
transformation of native life and of African agriculture 
under colonization and exploitation, and two to pos¬ 
sible remedial measures and their application through 
science, education, and government direction. M. 
Harroy has since been director of the Institut de 
Recherches Scientifiques en Afrique Centrale 
(IRSAC) and governor of Ruanda-Urundi. 

434. Heseltine, Nigel. Remaking Africa. London, 

Museum Press, 1961. 159 p. DT30.H4 

Thomas Balogh of Oxford, writing the foreword to 
this diagnosis of African problems by an FAO official, 
formerly an agricultural officer in East Africa, calls it 
“a signpost which points towards effective solutions” 
of the great difficulties confronting the new states in 
developing viable economies. Mr. Heseltine looks 
back at the historical picture and at the need for a 
revolution in agriculture to maintain and increase 
fertility of the land. He discusses the problem of 
nomadism and transhumancy of the cattle people, the 
failing vegetation of the savannah belt, the need for 
conservation in the river valleys, then outlines require¬ 
ments for the “big push” in agriculture, town building, 
communications, and industrialization and the fields 
for foreign aid. 

A valuable general book is by Richard G. Haw, The Con¬ 
servation of Natural Resources (London, Faber & Faber, 1959. 
256 p.). The writer has been an agricultural officer in 
Southern Rhodesia, and has had extensive experience with 
combatting soil erosion in South, East, and Central Africa. 
One of his illustrations is a sketch map showing land classifica¬ 
tion with controlled intensive cultivation as practiced on the 
University Farm in Salisbury. 


82 



435. Irvine, Frederick R. A text-book of West Afri¬ 

can agriculture, soils and crops. 2d ed. Lon¬ 
don, New York, Oxford University Press, 1953. 
367 p. illus. S517.A45I7 1953 

This little book by an agronomist at Achimota was 
written for his African students and though specifying 
West African condition's, is largely applicable to most 
of Africa south of the Sahara. The first edition was 
published in 1934. The text covers soils and manures, 
crops, propagation, storage, insect pests, plant diseases, 
and other elementary facts of agricultural science. 

436. Johnston, Bruce F. The staple food economies 

of western tropical Africa. Stanford, Calif., 
Stanford University Press, 1958. 305 p. illus. 
(Stanford University. Food Research Insti¬ 
tute. Studies in tropical development). 

HD2119.W4J6 

Authoritative work by an economist of this Institute, 
which leads in the study of food economics. The broad 
region covered by Dr. Johnston in his examination of 
the most important food crops includes Angola and 
the Belgian Congo together with the territories of 
former French and British West Africa. The physical 
environment is considered, and the geographical dis¬ 
tribution of the major crops—millets and sorghums, 
rice, maize, plantains, manioc, yams, cocoyams, sweet 
potatoes—economic factors and social, cultural and 
historical influences, the place of the foods in African 
diets, and prospects for changes and increasing pro¬ 
duction. 

437. Jones, William O. Manioc in Africa. Stan¬ 

ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1959. 
315 p. illus., maps. (Stanford University. 
Food Research Institute. Studies in tropical 
development) SB211.C3J6 

Manioc, or as it is perhaps more usually known, cas¬ 
sava, is one of the chief starchy staples of African diet. 
Dr. Jones explains that when he began collecting mate¬ 
rial on this plant as a major supplier of food and feed 
calories to the tropical world, he had thought he could 
devote one of fourteen chapters to Africa and Mada¬ 
gascar; his research soon led to this complete book on 
African uses of manioc alone. His study is written 
with so much interesting nontechnical detail that the 
layman can get pleasure from turning pages. He goes 
into background of land, climate and people, then into 
the history of the introduction and spread of manioc, 
methods of cultivation and preparation, and produc¬ 
tion in the Congo, Guinea, and East Africa. Citations 
are given at ends of chapters and there is a section of 


notes and separate name and subject indexes. The 
text is illustrated with many sketch maps. 

438. Joshi, N. R. Types and breeds of African cat¬ 

tle, prepared by N. R. Joshi, E. A. McLaughlin, 
and Ralph W. Phillips. Rome, Food and 
Agriculture Organization of the United Na¬ 
tions, 1957. 297 p., tables. (FAO agricul¬ 
tural studies, no. 37) SF196.A3J6 

Issued also in French. 

Information on indigenous types and breeds of Afri¬ 
can cattle of importance as to numbers and differenti¬ 
ation. It is explained that tribal migrations and 
nomadic movements have tended to produce many 
intermediate types. There are five main types, which 
are described in detail, with regard to characteristics, 
measurements, numbers, milk production, etc. 

439. Monod, Theodore. Les grandes divisions cho- 

rologiques de V Afrique; rapport presente a la 
Reunion de specialistes sur la phytogeographie, 
Yangambi, 29 juillet-8 aout 1956. Londres 
[Commission de cooperation technique en 
Afrique au sud du Sahara] 1957. 146 p. illus., 

fold. map. (Scientific Council for Africa South 
of the Sahara. Publication, no. 24) 

AZ800.C35, no. 24 

Bibliography: p. 127-137. 

A very learned paper by the Director of the Institut 
Frangais d’Afrique Noire, constituting “a descriptive 
explanation and definition of the phytogeographie ter¬ 
ritories of the continent on the upper levels of the 
floristic hierarchy (Regions and Domains),” and 
comparing the patterns thus established with the find¬ 
ings of zoologists. Professor Monod discusses the 
conclusions of many scientists and includes a long bibli¬ 
ography (p. 127-137). His first paragraphs define 
“chorological” in a number of uses, stating his meaning 
as “the study of the dispersion and distribution of living 
beings,” interpreted in this paper in botanical terms. 

440. Phillips, John F. V. Agriculture and ecology 

in Africa, a study of actual and potential devel¬ 
opment south of the Sahara. New York, 
Praeger, 1960. 423 p. map, tables. (Books 
that matter) S471.A35P45 1960 

Bibliography: p. 397-412. 

The writer, “forester, conservationist, agricultural¬ 
ist and ecologist,” was formerly at the University Col¬ 
lege of Ghana, and the foreword to this important 
book, by Nkrumah, comments on the highly technical 
nature of the subject. Its scope is set forth simply in 


83 


the first chapter as “no more than a preliminary 
recording of some salient points” regarding hazards 
and potentialities in agricultural and related develop¬ 
ment, classification of ecological units, and suggestions 
as to ways and means of such development. The con¬ 
tents are in five books, the first the ecological basis and 
background of problems inherent in African climate, 
vegetation and soils, wild life, and domesticated ani¬ 
mals. Then two books discuss the bioclimatic regions 
of the forest and the great wooded savannah. Book 
four is on human and animal health and economics 
and planning. The last book offers conclusions and 
suggestions for “saving Africa unnecessary disappoint¬ 
ment” in her development schemes for agriculture. 

Professor Phillips, who is now adviser on agricultural de¬ 
velopment to the Government of Southern Rhodesia, has 
been on several World Bank and other international missions. 
His experience in Africa and other parts of the tropical world 
has led to a second book, The Development of Agriculture 
and Forestry in the Tropics (London, Faber & Faber, 1961. 
212 p.), in which the problems of Africa are discussed in 
comparison with those of the rest of the tropical world. 

441. Pim, Sir Alan W. Colonial agricultural produc¬ 

tion; the contribution made by native peas¬ 
ants and by foreign enterprise. Issued under 
the auspices of the Royal Institute of Interna¬ 
tional Affairs. London, New York, Oxford 
University Press, 1946. 190 p. HD1930.A3P5 

Bibliographical footnotes. 

By an expert who had directed many of the pre-war 
financial and economic surveys of the colonies, and 
in 1940 published an important Financial and Eco¬ 
nomic History of the African Tropical Territories (Ox¬ 
ford University Press). In this overall study he was 
particularly concerned with the “plantation-peasant 
issue,” that is, whether colonial agriculture should be 
encouraged to develop in the direction of large-scale 
plantation enterprises, usually of one crop, or toward 
the peasant production, which should be diversified 
in connection with the export crops. Almost half the 
book is devoted to the discussion of agriculture in the 
African colonies. (The large-scale enterprise, advo¬ 
cated by many influential British leaders, was unfor¬ 
tunately exemplified in the Groundnuts Scheme in 
Tanganyika (see no. 1369). 

442. Shantz, Homer L. Agricultural regions of 

Africa. Published in Economic geography, 
Clark University, Worcester, Massachusetts. 
With 297 photographs by the author unless 
otherwise cited. Santa Barbara, Calif., H. L. 
Shantz [1944?] cover-title, 327 p. illus. (inch 
maps) S471.A35S48 


Nine articles from Economic Geography, v. 16—19, 1940— 
1943. 

Dr. Shantz, a distinguished American plant phys¬ 
iologist, began his studies of African agriculture in 
connection with the American Commission to Nego¬ 
tiate Peace in 1918-19, and went on special details to 
Africa to study crops in 1919-20 and 1924. In 1923 
he published, with C. F. Marbut as collaborator, an 
authoritative study, Vegetation and Soils of Africa 
(American Geographical Society, 1923. 263 p.). His 
nine articles in Economic Geography form a valuable 
introductory survey for the layman. The first two 
papers (January, April 1940), are on “Basic Factors,” 
the figures not later than 1931; tables showing all sta¬ 
tistical aspects are scattered through the text. The 
succeeding articles describe vegetation and potential 
productivity of the land (October 1940, July, October 
1941), present and potential productivity (July, Oc¬ 
tober 1942), and finally “Regional Distribution and 
Character of Land Use” (January, July 1943). Much 
is of sufficiently general character to have remained 
valid in spite of the changes of the intervening period. 
In his chapter of potentials Dr. Shantz reckoned that 
Africa has 11 percent of the world’s forest land, a 
third of the world’s grazing land, and 28 percent of 
the total potential crop land area of the world. 

443. Shantz, Homer L. and B. L. Turner. Photo¬ 

graphic documentation of vegetational changes 
in Africa over a third of a century. Tucson, 
1958. 158 p. illus., map, diagrs. (University 
of Arizona, College of Agriculture. Report 
169). QK965.S5 

In Dr. Shantz’s three trips to Africa in 1919, 1920, 
and 1924, some 5,000 photographs had been taken to 
illustrate natural plant coverage. In 1956-57 an at¬ 
tempt was made to reduplicate the photographic rec¬ 
ord. Only 241, or 18.4 percent of the former shots 
could be secured, as urban development or agricul¬ 
tural extension had changed the original sites. These 
photographs are reproduced in the volume undertaken 
as a joint project between the College of Agriculture at 
the University of Arizona and the Office of Naval Re¬ 
search. The text explains changes in terms of ani¬ 
mals and men rather than climate. Dr. Shantz, who 
had formerly been president of the University of Ari¬ 
zona, died in 1958 shortly before publication of this 
unusually valuable document. 

444. Tempany, Harold A., and D. H. Grist. An in¬ 

troduction to tropical agriculture. London, 
New York, Longmans, Green, 1958. 347 p. 

SB111.T4 


84 


The late Sir Harold Tempany was agricultural ad¬ 
viser to the Secretary of State for the Colonies. This 
book, written in collaboration with a former agricul¬ 
tural economist of Malaya, is general for tropical re¬ 
gions. It is in three parts, the first on the tropical 
background of climate, soils, types of vegetation, etc., 
the second on agricultural practices, and the third on 
economic conditions of marketing and transport, land 
tenure and use, finance and credit. 

Longmans, Green has followed this work with a Tropical 
Agriculture series in which the volumes cover Africa and the 
rest of the tropical world in their analysis of all aspects re¬ 
lating to specific agricultural products. There have been 
published to date. Rice, by D. H. Grist (1959), Bananas, by 
N. W. Simmonds (1959), Beekeeping in the Tropics, by 

F. G. Smith (1960), Introduction to Animal Husbandry, by 

G. Williamson and W. J. A. Payne (1960), and Cocoa, by 
Duncan H. Urquhart (1961). The last named is the second 
edition of a work first published in 1955 by the Director of 
Agriculture for Ghana. The other books are of equal au¬ 
thority as to authorship and coverage. They are prepared 
“with the active encouragement” of the Colonial Advisory 
Council of Agriculture, Animal Health and Forestry. 

445. U.S. Dept, of Agriculture. Economic Re¬ 
search Service. [Publications of the African 
and Middle East Analysis Branch, Regional 
Analysis Division] Washington. 

The Africa and Middle East Analysis Branch was a 
part of the Foreign Agricultural Service until April 
1961, when it was transferred to the newly formed 
Economic Research Service (ERS). Its publications 
on Africa formerly issued in the FAS-M series, and 
occasionally in the more substantial Foreign Agricul¬ 
tural Report series, now appear in the ERS-Foreign 
series. The majority of these publications apply to a 
single country or region, and they vary in extent from 
processed “Notes” to full-scale surveys of the agricul¬ 
tural economies of specific countries. Thus there have 
been studies of the agricultural economy of the Belgian 
Congo and Ruanda-Urundi, and of the Sudan, as well 
as of several states of North Africa. Notes on the 
agricultural economy have been issued for various 
countries, including the Central African Republic, 
Dahomey, Niger, and Upper Volta. The following 
publications are cited as of general or regional interest 
rather than being limited to one country: 

Agricultural developments in Angola, British East Africa, 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, and Zanzibar —their effects 
on U.S. farm exports, by Robert C. Moncure. 1958. 
81 p. illus. (Foreign agriculture report no. Ill) 

Citrus industry of Southern Africa, by Joseph H. Burke. 
1957. 89 p. illus., fold, map, tables. (Foreign agri¬ 
culture report no. 103) 

Cotton production in Africa, trends and prospects, by 
Horace G. Porter and Thomas R. Richmond. Feb. 


1960. 40 p. illus. (Foreign agriculture report no. 
117) 

The Outlook for wheat and flour imports in tropical 
Africa, by Bruce F. Johnston. 1959. 34 p. (FAS- 
M-8) 

Planting and harvesting seasons for Africa and West 
Asia, by lone L. Bauman. 1960. 60 p., tables. 

(FAS-M-90) 

446. Uvarov, Boris P. Locust research and control, 

1929-1950. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1951. 67 p. (Colonial research publication, 
no. 10) JV33.G7A52, no. 10 

Record of the work done by Great Britain in coop¬ 
eration with other Governments in research on the 
locust problem and in campaigns against locust 
plagues, which have caused periodical devastations 
and famines in Africa and Asia. The author was 
director of the Anti-Locust Research Centre of the 
Colonial Office. 

A convention was signed in Paris on May 15, 1952 by the 
Governments of the United Kingdom, Belgium, and France 
regarding the supervision and effective control of the African 
migratory locust (London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1953. 
Cmd. no. 8820). Locust control has now come under the 
auspices of the Food and Agriculture Organization, in addi¬ 
tion to work carried out in East Africa under the Desert 
Locust Survey and the Desert Locust Control Organisation, 
both organs of the East African Common Services 
Organisation. 

NATURAL SCIENCES 

447. Bannerman, David Armitage. The birds of 

West and Equatorial Africa. Edinburgh, 
Oliver & Boyd, 1953. 2 v. (1,526 p.) 

QL692.B16 

Handbook with full descriptions in clear, simple 
language, and with technical data, illustrated with 
drawings and color plates of all species. The two- 
volume edition is condensed from an eight-volume 
work by this leading British ornithologist, Birds of 
Tropical West Africa (London, Crown Agents for the 
Colonies, 1930-51). A portion of the handbook has 
been further condensed for a popular audience in a 
volume of the Penguin Books series, Larger Birds of 
West Africa (Harmondsworth, Baltimore, 1958. 
195 p.). 

448. Carrington, Richard. Elephants: a short ac¬ 

count of their natural history, evolution and 
influence on mankind. London, Chatto & 
Windus, 1959. 272 p. illus. QL737.U8C3 
A fascinating account of elephants, from the pre¬ 
historic prototypes to the surviving African and Asian 
species. Mr. Carrington gives special attention to pro- 


85 


visions for their preservation in the national parks 
of Africa. 

449. Copley, Hugh. The game fishes of Africa. 

London, H. F. & G. Witherby, 1952. 276 p. 
illus. QL635.A1C6 

Designed to be a standard reference book, a com¬ 
panion volume to the time-honored work of Rich¬ 
ard Lydekker, The Game Animals of Africa, 2d ed., 
rev. by J. G. Dollman (London, Ward, 1926. 483 p.). 

Mr. Copley has also prepared illustrated booklets on the 
fauna of East Africa, among them one published by Witherby, 
Common Freshwater Fishes of East Africa (1958. 172 p.), 

and several in a series of Highway Nature Guides, published 
by the Highway Press in Nairobi; these include Lakes and 
Rivers of Kenya (1948. 80 p.), Small Mammals of Kenya 

(1950. 96 p.), and Wonders of the Kenya Seashore [birds, 
fishes, shells, etc.] (1946. 78 p.). 

450. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. The wild resources 

of East and Central Africa: a report follow¬ 
ing a visit to Kenya, Uganda, Tanganyika, 
Northern and Southern Rhodesia and Nyasa- 
land in February and March, 1960; by Dr. 
E. B. Worthington. London, H.M. Station¬ 
ery Office, 1961. 26 p. (Colonial no. 352) 
JV33.G7A5, no. 352 
This report by Dr. Worthington as Deputy Director 
General (Scientific) of Nature Conservancy, a British 
Government office established in 1949, relates spe¬ 
cifically only to those parts of Africa south of the 
Sahara still at the time under British authority, but 
is widely applicable to the rest of the subcontinent. 
His thesis is that the extremely varied and rich wild 
flora and fauna of Africa is “a cultural and scientific 
asset of priceless value” and that increasing efforts 
must be made by international bureaus and govern¬ 
ments, particularly the new independent governments, 
to conserve their wild resources. The hardest prob¬ 
lem, he warns, is that of influencing African public 
opinion to regard wild life as an asset rather than a 
nuisance. 

A comparable report of a mission accomplished for 
UNESCO in July-September 1960 was made by Sir Julian 
Huxley, The Conservation of Wild Life and Natural Habitats 
in Central and East Africa (Paris, UNESCO, 1961. 113 

p.; bibliography, p. 110-113). The writer’s conclusions 
are more specific than those expressed by Dr. Worthington, 
ending with 46 points on which he recommends urgent 
study. 

451. Grzimek, Bernard, and Michael Grzimek. 

Serengeti shall not die. [Translated from the 
German by E. L. and D. Rewald] London, 
H. Hamilton, 1960. 344 p. illus. 

QH77.T3G713 


Dr. Grzimek, one of whose books had in the Eng¬ 
lish edition the title, Dr. Jimek, I Presume, is Director 
of the Frankfurt Zoo. In this latest of several accounts 
of his collecting trips to Africa he was accompanied 
by his son, the joint author, who met a tragic death 
at the end of the expedition. As in his previous No 
Room for Wild Animals (London, Thames & Hudson, 
1956. 250 p.), a large part of his attention is devoted 
to the protest against destruction of wild life in Africa. 
Serengeti, the national park .for the protection of 
wild life in Tanganyika, is one of the best known 
haunts of big game. A note in East Africa and Rho¬ 
desia of December 20, 1962, reports that Dr. Grzimek 
had arrived in Nairobi with £200,000 he had collected 
for expenditure on game preservation in East Africa, 
mainly in Tanganyika. 

An English book that stresses the same theme of preserva¬ 
tion of wild life is Animal Africa, by Earl Denman (London, 
R. Hale, 1957. 208 p.). It includes an appendix listing the 
national parks and game reserves of the entire continent. 

452. Guggisberg, Charles A. W. Simba; the life 

of the lion. Cape Town, Timmins; London, 

Bailey Bros., and Swinfen, 1961. 304 p. illus. 

QL737.C2G92 

American ed. Chilton Books, New York, 1963. 

A serious and valuable monograph on the African 
lion, including description of lion behavior, history, 
and folklore. Although in style suited to a lay au¬ 
dience, the work shows the writer’s scholarship. 

Two books on lion behavior have risen high on the best¬ 
seller lists of the last 3 years. Joy Adamson’s Born Free; A 
Lioness of Two Worlds (New York, Pantheon Books, 1960. 
160 p.), and its sequel, Living Free ; The Story of Elsa and 
Her Cubs (New York, Harcourt, 1961. 161 p.), have en¬ 

deared to American hearts the lioness whom the gamekeeper 
and his wife brought up as a pet kitten before reintroducing 
her to her natural way of life. 

453. Koffler, Camilla. Animals in Africa , photo¬ 

graphed by Ylla [pseud.] Text by L. S. B. 

Leakey. New York, Harper, 1953. 144 p. 

QL336.K6 

The fine plates, some in the form of color inserts, 
in this album of animal pictures by a noted photog¬ 
rapher are reinforced by nontechnical comment on the 
wild denizens of East Africa written by Kenya’s lead¬ 
ing natural scientist, the Director of the Coryndon 
Museum in Nairobi. The book ends with Ylla’s ac¬ 
count of her picture taking, “The Photographer’s 
Story” (p. 127-144). 


86 


454. Mackworth-Praed, Cyril W., and Claude H. 

B. Grant. Birds of Eastern and North East¬ 
ern Africa. 2d ed. London, New York, 
Longmans, Green, 1957-60. 2 v. (African 

handbook of birds, ser. 1, v. 1-2) 

QL692.M312 

Reprint, with additions, of the first edition of this 
authoritative ornithological handbook which had been 
published in 1952-55. The various species of birds 
are cataloged with brief descriptions and diagrams, 
illustrated in black and white drawings and color 
plates. The two big volumes have, respectively, 806 
and 1,113 pages, with full unpaged indexes of 
scientific and popular names. 

In its 1961 catalog Longmans, Green announced the first 
volume of the African Handbook of Birds, series 2, Birds of 
Southern Africa, by the same two ornithologists. 

455. Moorehead, Alan. No room in the ark. New 

York, Harper, 1960. 227 p. illus. QL336.M6 

The noted war correspondent in this delightful and 
sophisticated book turns his attention to wild life and 
incidentally to tribal life in eastern and southern 
Africa. 

The personal narratives of the travelers who hunt big 
game, sometimes with gun but nowadays more frequently with 
camera, continue as numerous as in the days before the 
“wind of change” blew over the “bush” of which they write. 
Some are nostalgic reminiscences of long experience, others 
reports of individual safaris. Among recent titles, the fol¬ 
lowing represent no more than a haphazard selection of 
always readable and often informative works: 

Gatti, Attilio. Africa is adventure. New York, J. 
Messner, 1959. 249 p. QL336.G3 

By a veteran safari writer, who has 16 other African 
books to his credit on the flyleaf. 

Foran, W. Robert. A breath of the wilds. London, 
R. Hale, 1958. 206 p. QL336.F6 1958 

A white hunter’s reminiscences regarding pursuit of 
big game, mostly in East Africa. 

Brom, John L. Twenty thousand miles in the African 
jungle. London, Gollancz, 1958. 224 p. illus. 

DT352.B713 

The author of Kon-tiki was given a contract to make a 
film on the private lives of the animals of Africa, which 
took him to the big game country of Central and East¬ 
ern Africa. He observed and photographed the wilds, 
people, both African and European, and a lavish variety 
of beasts. 

Bell, Walter D. Bell of Africa; with appendix on 
rifles and shooting. Boston, C. T. Branford, 1961. 
236 p. illus. SK305.E3B39 1961 

The most recent of a number of books by elephant 
hunters, in English, French, German, and other lan¬ 
guages. A notable French study is by Georges Blond, 
La grande aventure des Elephants (Paris, Fayard, 1959. 
252 p.). 


Muldoon, Guy D. Leopards in the night. New York, 
British Book Service, 1960. 234 p. First English 
ed., 1955. SK33.M78 1960 

By an official of the Department of Agriculture in 
Nyasaland, part of whose duty consisted in protecting 
the villagers from their wild neighbors. He specialized 
in leopards, though on occasion he took on lions, baboons, 
or what have you. 

Potous, Paul L. My enemy, the crocodile; the 
strange story of Africa’s deadliest business. New 
York, W. Funk, 1957. 214 p. illus. 

QL666.C9P6 1957 

This hunter’s narrative, also specialized as to quarry, 
is by another oldtimer of Nyasaland. 

456. Skaife, Sydney H. African insect life. Lon¬ 

don, New York, Longmans, Green, 1953. 
387 p. QL485.S54 

By a South African entomologist, this book is 
written “in language as simple as is consistent with 
scientific accuracy,” primarily intended for farmers, 
gardeners, and householders who cope with African 
insect friends and foes. Arrangement is systematic by 
orders, from lowest to highest—primitive insects, cock¬ 
roaches, to bees and wasps, ants. Illustrated with 
drawings and photographs. The few color plates 
are mostly of the more amiable insects, moths and 
butterflies. 

GEOLOGY AND MINERAL 
RESOURCES 

457. Europe France outremer. Exploitations et 

perspectives minieres de VAfrique. Paris, 
1961. 59 p. ( Its no. 382, 39. annee, sept. 
1961) JV1801.E65, no. 382 

A special issue of this magazine devoted to the 
mineral resources of Africa. Articles are by Fernand 
Blondel, Raymond Furon, and other specialists. They 
cover general aspects, perspectives and markets for 
the principal minerals, iron, bauxite, uranium, man¬ 
ganese, phosphates, etc., then report on special proj¬ 
ects, mostly in French-speaking Africa. 

458. Furon, Raymond. Geologie de VAfrique. 2. 

ed. Paris, Payot, 1960. 400 p. illus., maps 
Bibliotheque scientifique) NN 

Translation by A. Hallam and L. A. Stevens: Geology of 
Africa. New York, Hafner Pub. Go., 1963. 377 p. 

459. - Les ressources minerales de VAfrique , 

leur decouverte, leur exploitation, les nouveaux 
problemes. 2. ed. Paris, Payot, 1961. 
284 p. maps, diagrs. (Bibliotheque econo- 
mique) TN115.F8 1961 


87 



Professor Furon of the Academic des Sciences 
d’Outre-Mer is a leading geologist who has specialized 
on the study of Africa. The first edition of his Res- 
sources mintrales de VAfrique came out in 1944; that 
of his Geologic de VAfrique in 1950. The new re¬ 
vised editions account for the advances in knowledge 
and development of recent years. The Glologie be¬ 
gins with a general survey of stratigraphy of the con¬ 
tinent, then 25 chapters on individual regions, 
exclusive of North Africa. There are new and 
abundant footnote references. The even more ex¬ 
tensively revised and modernized Resources minirales 
has a general and historical introduction, a classifica¬ 
tion and allocation of individual mineral products, 
and discussion of their regional importance, conclud¬ 
ing with prospects and problems for the future. As 
the respective series in which the two works are issued 
indicate, the first is couched in more scientific terms, 
the second is concerned with practical and economic 
aspects. 

460. Postel, Albert W. The mineral resources of 

Africa . Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl¬ 
vania Press, tire University Museum, 1943, 
105 p. maps. TN115.P6 

Useful and simple statement of the chief mineral 
deposits and industries of Africa, with tables of avail¬ 
able statistics, now of course much outdated. The 
writer’s survey is not by regions but by substances, base 
metals, nonferrous metals, minor metals, precious 
metals, nonmetallics. with separate sections on water¬ 
power and on the minerals of Madagascar. 

461. Rozrx, M. S. Geografiia poleznykh iskopaemykh 

Afriku Moskwa, Gos. izd-vo geogr. lit.-ry, 
1957. 278 p. maps. TN115.R6 

Bibliography: p. 258-263. 

This work, whose title means “Geography of Useful 
and Mineral Resources,” is a general survey of mines 
and mineral resources throughout Africa. Its many 
statistics are carried through 1955. 

462. Woodtli. Robert. Le potentiel min eral africain . 

Lausanne, Centre de recherches euro pee nnes, 
Lcole des H.E.C., [Hautes etudes cornmer- 
ciales] Universite de Lausanne, 1961. 302 p. 
(L’Europe et 1’Afrique, v. 1) HD9506 A2W6 

Bibliography: p. 295-S02. 

Compendium of detailed information on mineral re¬ 
sources of Africa by an eminent Swiss geologist. The 
book is in two parts, with brief general introduction 
and conclusions. Part 1, of about 170 pages, classifies 
individual minerals, and names the chief African de¬ 


posits; the arrangement is alphabetical from “Abrasifs” 
to “Zirconium et Halmium.” The second part (p. 
197-274) specifies resources of the African states, simi¬ 
larly in alphabetical order. In his conclusion Dr. 
Woodtli examines die place of Africa in world mineral 
production, as a whole and by region, and speculates 
on the future role of the European in mineral develop¬ 
ment. He considers diat as “counselor,” die white 
man will be needed for many years to come. 

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 

463. Commission for Technical Co-operation in 
Africa South of the Sahara. Inter- 
African scientific and technical co-operation, 
1948-1955. London, Commission for Tech¬ 
nical Co-operarion in Africa South of the 
Sahara [and] Scientific Council for Africa 
South of the Sahara, Bukavu, 1956. xv, 
294 p. maps. HC501.C6 

The Commission for Technical Co-operarion in Af¬ 
rica South of the Sahara (CCTA') and its scientific 
advisory body, the Scientific Council for Africa (CSA) 
were established in 1950 by six governments then re¬ 
sponsible for African development and welfare, Bel¬ 
gium, France, Portugal, the United Kingdom, South¬ 
ern Rhodesia, and the Union of South Africa. The 
purpose was to provide a long-term program of tech¬ 
nical and scientific conferences and exchanges of tech¬ 
nicians and research workers. The Secretariats of the 
two bodies were merged in a Joint Secretariat in 1954, 
with two seats, one in London, the other in Bukavu. 
The comprehensive report in 1956 tells in detail of con¬ 
ferences held, projects, and recommendations by 
CCTA and its affiliates from 1948, when the idea was 
first proposed, to 1955. The first chapters describe the 
organization and the scope and accomplishment of the 
bureaus set up under it, which “represent a network of 
technical co-operation covering practically ever}’ field 
of technical activity in Africa south of the Sahara.” 
The list of bureaus and committees is given on p. 137— 
138, followed by an index of technical conferences 
held; these are in five groups: natural resources, 
health, organization of production, social welfare, and 
statistics. The list of CSA publications is given on a 
final page. 

At inter-African governmental conferences in the 
sixties, the CCTA/CSA has been much discussed as 
an important nucleus for African unification. 
Changes have come over the organization. Southern 
Rhodesia was replaced as a member by the Federa¬ 
tion of Rhodesia and Xyasaland by 1954. In 1957 


88 


Ghana was admitted to membership on the Commis¬ 
sion, and by 1960 was objecting that the colonial pow¬ 
ers were full members. In 1958, as the new African 
states began taking membership, there was begun 
transfer of the Secretariat from London to Lagos; 
as of 1962 this was not completed, the publications 
office still being in London. In 1960 the office at 
Bukavu in the former Belgian Congo was liquidated. 
The 17th session of CCTA (also sessions of GSA and 
of the financial affiliate, FAMA—Foundation for 
Mutual Assistance in Africa) was held at Abidjan 
in February 1962. The membership now includes 
all the new African governments, the phrase “south 
of the Sahara” has been dropped as North African 
governments are taken in, the South African Repub¬ 
lic has been thrown out, and the position of Portugal 
is not determined (“untouchable,” according to an 
article in West Africa , Mar. 17, 1962). Britain, 
France, and Belgium will be voteless observers. There 
were in 1962 29 member nations, and the former 
French Secretary-General Claude Cheysson has been 
succeeded by the Mauritanian Toure. 

A bimonthly information bulletin, Science-Afrique, issued 
by CGTA/CSA since 1956 has been the most useful source 
for data regarding the conferences and operations of the 
organization and its affiliates. On its back pages were 
listed the various bureaus and committees, and all publica¬ 
tions. The bulletin was suspended after the issue of Feb¬ 
ruary 1961; it is to be hoped that the Secretariat will again 
bring it to life. 

464. Foundation for Mutual Assistance in Africa 

South of the Sahara [FAMA] London, 
CCTA/CSA, Joint Secretariat, 1959. 4 p. 

HC501.F6 

Leaflet explaining the Foundation which was 
formed in February 1958 to promote technical aid 
in Africa. Modeled on the Colombo Plan, its func¬ 
tions are to find out about offers of and requests for 
assistance and to arrange bilateral agreements over 
and above existing programs. Its periodic reports 
are available from CCTA/CSA. A press release from 
Lagos headquarters reviews the program adopted at 
the 4th meeting in Abidjan in February 1962. 

465. National Academy of Sciences, Washington, 

D.C. Recommendations for strengthening 
science and technology in selected areas of Af¬ 
rica South of the Sahara. Prepared for the 
International Cooperation Administration. 
Washington, National Academy of Sciences, 
National Research Council, 1959. 108, 12 p. 
map. T28.A5N3 

Bibliography: 12 p. at end. 


This study, known as the Harrar Report (Execu¬ 
tive Director, Dr. J. George Harrar of the Rocke¬ 
feller Foundation) was an attempt to draw up guide¬ 
lines for long-range patterns of technical assistance 
to Africa. The collaboration and advice of a long 
list of specialists in African studies and of scientific 
consultants were enlisted. The stress is on educa¬ 
tional needs; the most important contribution foreign 
countries can make is stated to be “support to educa¬ 
tional programs whose object is to train an ever- 
increasing number of Africans for a wide variety of 
national responsibilities.” In section after section, 
dealing with aspects of education per se, with medical 
and public health services, agriculture, national re¬ 
sources, engineering, technology and industry, the 
primary recommendations are for the establishment of 
training centers for African personnel. Although the 
study is limited to countries where English is generally 
spoken, including Ethiopia, Somalia, and the Sudan 
(but excluding South Africa), the recommendations 
are applicable throughout tropical and subtropical 
Africa. 

466. Scientific Council for Africa South of the 

Sahara (CSA) Report of the Secretary- 
General to the 13th meeting of the Scientific 
Council, Muguga, 1962. CCTA. 1962. 
148 p. [n.p.] DLC 

Distributed by the Publications Bureau, Watergate House, 
York Buildings, London, W.C. 2. 

The most recent report of CSA as the present bib¬ 
liography goes to press. In three parts: 1, “General 
Questions” (the Council, the Commission, FAMA, 
training of personnel); 2, “Natural Resources” (ac¬ 
tivities in conservation, climatology, pedology, etc.); 
3, “Social, Economic and Technical” (activities in 
public health, linguistics, and other social sciences, 
education, etc.). There are five useful appendixes: 
1, “Meetings Held under CCTA/CSA/FAMA Aus¬ 
pices from June 1961 to June 1962”; 2, “Meetings 
. . . [Prospective] 1962-64”; 3, “Other Meetings at 
which CCTA was Represented, June 1961-June 
1962”; 4, “Publications”; 5, “List of Joint Projects.” 

467. Worthington, Edgar B. Science in the de¬ 

velopment of Africa ; a review of the contribu¬ 
tion of physical and biological knowledge 
south of the Sahara. London, Commission 
for Technical Co-operation in Africa South 
of the Sahara, 1958. xix, 462 p. illus., maps. 

^ Q127.A2W62 

In 1938 Dr. Worthington, who had been connected 
with Lord Hailey’s African Survey Committee, pub- 


89 


lished a volume called Science in Africa (London, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 746 p.; bibliography, p. 626- 
691), in which he reviewed scientific research carried 
out in all parts of tropical and southern Africa. When 
the Scientific Council for Africa was formed, Dr. 
Worthington was appointed its first Secretary-General 
1950-55). The new version of his study, prepared 
for CCTA/CSA, covers, besides the previously re¬ 
corded research, the work accomplished or projected 
under the aegis of the new international organiza¬ 
tions. He divides the book in four parts: “Principles 
and Generalities” (the changing scene, principles of 
development and of science, the agencies devoted to 
research); “Physical Background” (research in geog¬ 
raphy and mapping, geology, meteorology, hydrology, 
soils) ; “Biological Subjects” (botany, forestry, wild 
life, fish, insects and their control, plant and animal 
industry and diseases); “Human Subjects” (health 
and medicine, archaeology, and the social sciences). 
The appendixes give a much-needed list of abbrevia¬ 
tions, the principal inter-African meetings from 1948- 
56, a list of scientific bodies and services, and a bib¬ 
liography (p. 421-435). The work is reviewed at 
length by R. W. Steel in African Affairs of April 1959. 

MEDICINE 

468. Carothers, John C. The African mind in 

health and disease; a study in ethnopsychiatry. 

Geneva, World Health Organization, 1953. 

177 p. diagr. (World Health Organization. 

Monograph series, no. 17) GN651.C28 

Bibliography: p. 173-177. 

Dr. Carothers has been a medical officer in a Kenya 
mental hospital and Consultant in Mental Health to 
WHO. In this technical study, full of statistics, he 
drew on his own experience and that of many other 
authorities to examine African psychology against 
the background of the environment, physical anthro¬ 
pology, and other factors. He included comparative 
consideration of the psychology and psychiatry of the 
Negro in the United States. 

469. Clemes, Gene Phillips. Drum call of hope. 

New York, Published for American Leprosy 

Missions, Inc. by Friendship Press, 1959. 
96 p. BV2637.C55 

Inspirational little book, addressed to a general or 
juvenile audience, with pictures and text telling the 
story of the great modem advance in controlling 
leprosy in Africa. 


470. Dick-Read, Grantley. No time for fear. Lon¬ 

don, Heinemann, 1955. 235 p. illus. 

GN482.1.D5 

Dr. Dick-Read is an advocate of natural births, on 
which he has written a number of studies. In this 
book he examined practices of natural childbirth 
among tribes of Central Africa, particularly in Rho¬ 
desia and the Belgian Congo. 

471. Gelfand, Michael. The sick African; a clini¬ 

cal study. 3d ed. Cape Town, Juta, 1957. 

866 p. DNLM 

A handbook on diseases most common to the native 
of Africa—“destined,” said a reviewer in African 
Affairs, at the time of its first publication (1944) “to 
lie upon the table of doctors, nuns, priests, medical 
missionaries, colonial administrators, in fact, every 
white man and woman working in Equatorial Africa 
who has to treat the sick African.” The preliminary 
chapters discuss popular fallacies regarding tropical 
diseases and native psychology—the native fear of 
hospitals, which anger the dark forces of the spirit 
world in which they unswervingly believe, their cling¬ 
ing to witch doctors, their conviction that illness is 
caused by witchcraft. Following chapters describe and 
analyze individual diseases and give directions for 
their treatment, in a style as little technical as pos¬ 
sible. Other studies by Dr. Gelfand relate specifically 
to Southern Africa. 

472. International Children’s Center. Journees 

africaines de pediatrie. Dakar, du 12 au 16 

avril 1960. Rapports. Paris, 1961. 256 p. 

illus. DLC 

This one of a number of recent conferences relating 
to African children (see also no. 236) was concerned 
with questions of health and childhood diseases. 

473. Rodger, Frederick C. Blindness in West Afri¬ 

ca. London, Published for the Royal Com¬ 
monwealth Society for the Blind by H. K. 

Lewis, 1959. xiv, 262 p. illus., maps, diagrs. 

RE30.A35R6 

Although based on a survey in West Africa, this 
highly technical monograph is applicable to the entire 
continent of Africa. 

474. Sachs, Wulf. Black anger. Boston, Little, 

Brown & Co., 1947. 324 p. 

GN273.S25 1947 
By a physician and psychoanalyst, this unique book, 
which reads like fiction, was first published as Black 
Hamlet: The Mind of an African Negro Revealed by 


90 


Psychoanalysis (London, Bles, 1937. 280 p.). The 
author had come across a Rhodesian tribesman who 
was practicing native medicine—a nganga—in Johan¬ 
nesburg, and persuaded him to go through the regular 
technique of long sessions, on a couch, of free associa¬ 
tion and dream interpretation. During the process 
Dr. Sachs developed a deep friendship for his subject, 
whose intense emotions regarding his dead and living 
relations invoked the parallel with Hamlet. In the 
later version the author continued the story of the 
young man’s mental development. 

475. Trowell, Hubert C. Non-infective disease in 

Africa; the peculiarities of medical non-infec- 
tive diseases in the indigenous inhabitants of 
Africa south of the Sahara. London, E. 
Arnold, 1960, [on cover: Baltimore, Williams 
& Wilkins] 481 p. illus. RA545.T7 

Includes bibliography. 

By a clinician with 29 years’ experience in East 
Africa as well as work in other parts of Africa south 
of the Sahara, this study is of diseases common among 
Africans but seldom seen elsewhere. “Examples are 
I endomyocardial fibrosis, idiopathic cardiomyopathy, 
siderosis, porphyria, primary carcinoma of the liver, 
I kwashiorkor and some of the haemoglobinopathies.” 
; As the foregoing sentence indicates, the work is techni- 
i cal in nature. 

476. Vane, Michael. Black magic and white med¬ 

icine ?; a mine medical officer’s experiences in 
South Africa, the Belgian Congo, Sierra Leone, 
and the Gold Coast. London, W. & R. Cham¬ 
bers, 1957. 254 p. illus. DT14.V3 


Popularly written personal narrative of a surgeon 
who practiced medicine in various parts of Africa, 
beginning as a mine medical officer in the Transvaal. 
He took advantage of his profession to learn much 
about the universal African belief in witchcraft and 
the methods of native witchdoctors. 

477. Wilcocks, Charles. Aspects of medical in¬ 

vestigation in Africa. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1962. 120 p. (Uni¬ 

versity of London Heath Clark lectures 1960) 

R854.A3W5 

Not examined. 

478. World Health Organization. Catalogue of 

World Health Organization publications , 
1947-1958. Geneva, 1959. 78 p. 

Z6660.W56 

Listing of titles and prices of all WHO publications 
up to the end of 1958. In three parts, the first group¬ 
ing by subject certain nonperiodical publications and 
some important numbers of technical periodicals, with 
descriptive annotations. The second part describes 
periodical publications and gives titles of works in 
series, cross-referenced to the annotated entries in 
Part I. Part III is official (i.e., administrative) pub¬ 
lications of WHO. An earlier Bibliography of WHO 
Publications (1958. 128 p.) listed all technical 

articles and works in alphabetical order by subject, 
and included author and country. Many are con¬ 
cerned with Africa; e.g.: 

Brock, J. F., and M. Autret. Kwashiorkor in Africa. 
Geneva, 1952. 78 p. illus. (WHO. Monograph ser. 

no. 8) RJ399.K9B7 




WEST AFRICA 


BIBLIOGRAPHIES 

479. International African Institute. West 

Africa: general, ethnography, sociology, lin¬ 
guistics, compiled by Ruth Jones, librarian, 
with the assistance of a panel of consultants. 
London, 1958. 116 1. 33 cm. (Africa bibli¬ 
ography series: ethnography, sociology, linguis¬ 
tics and related subjects) Z3516.5.15 

Based on the bibliographical card index of the 
International African Institute. For note on series, 
see no. 262. 

480. Rydings, H. A. The bibliographies of West 

Africa. Ibadan, Published on behalf of the 
West African Library Association by the 
Ibadan University Press, 1961. 36 p. 

Z3516.5.R9 

Critically annotated bibliographical essay. The 
author, formerly Deputy Librarian of the University 
College of Ghana, is now Librarian of the University 
of Hong Kong. He comments comparatively here on 
the chief general African bibliographies, serial 
bibliographies and selective lists, then on bibliographi¬ 
cal sources for the individual countries of West Africa 
in English, French, and Portuguese. Besides biblio¬ 
graphical publications, he includes the valuable read¬ 
ing lists in the leading country studies. He ends with 
a tabulated survey of the 50 items covered. 

GENERAL 

481. Biggers, John. Ananse; the web of life in 

Africa. Austin, University of Texas Press, 
1962. 110 p. 89 illus. NC1075.B54A42 
By an American Negro artist who went to West 
Africa on a UNESCO art fellowship, and here in¬ 
terprets the individual people of Ghana, Togo, 
Dahomey, and Nigeria in drawings with slight text. 
Ananse the spider is taken as a symbol of universal 
order and interdependence. 

Another book of drawings by an American Negro artist, 
Elton G. Fax, West African Vignettes, was published by the 
American Society of African Culture (New York, 1960. 


62 p. 2d ed., 1963. 92 p.). The subjects, with few 
exceptions, were “the ordinary citizens of the cities, towns 
and villages.” 

482. Braithwaite, Edward R. A kind of homecom¬ 

ing. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 
1962. 243 p. DT471.B7 

Travel narrative of a West Indian, a native of 
British Guiana, who visited Guinea, Sierra Leone, 
Liberia, and Ghana in 1961, looking for copy and talk¬ 
ing at great length with everyone he could meet. His 
own experience of race discrimination in England, 
where he had taught school, had armed him for the 
anti-American feeling he constantly encountered. His 
impressions are interesting, though the style of his re¬ 
porting of conversations is stilted and unconvincing. 

483. Church, Ronald J. H. West Africa; a study 

of the environment and of man’s use of it. 
3d ed. New York, John Wiley & Sons, 1961. 
547 p. illus. maps. (Geographies, for ad¬ 
vanced study) GF721.W4C5 

Updated edition of a standard work first issued in 
1957, by a well known British geographer at the Lon¬ 
don School of Economics. The three parts are de¬ 
voted, respectively, to 1, the physical basis of geology, 
topography, climate, vegetation and soils; 2, man’s 
development of resources in agriculture, livestock and 
fisheries, minerals and power, transport, and popula¬ 
tion factors; 3, examination of the individual countries, 
in terms of political and economic geography. Re¬ 
viewed in Africa Report of August 1962. 

484. Crowder, Michael. Pagans and politicians. 

Illus. by the author. London, Hutchinson, 
1959. 224 p. illus. DT471.C7 

The author, a British journalist who has been much 
in West Africa—especially in Nigeria, where he acted 

as editor of Nigeria Magazine (see no. 697n)- 

made a trip across West Africa from Portuguese 
Guinea to Gambia, through Senegal, Soudan and 
Niger to Nigeria and Ghana. His companion was a 
Sierra Leonean, also a journalist, later in the Informa¬ 
tion Services at Freetown. Both young men had many 


92 



connections and saw people in all walks of life, but 
rather particularly in the upper nationalist circles. 

485. Green, Lawrence G. White man’s grave; the 

story of the West African coast—the cities, sea¬ 
ports and castles, white exiles and black magic. 
London, S. Paul, 1954. 249 p. illus. 

DT471.G74 

By a prolific South African travel writer and jour¬ 
nalist, this is a spirited and somewhat sensational ac¬ 
count of West Africa from Angola to Dakar. Mr. 
Green’s technique is anecdotal, and his recital is rich 
in lore of eccentricities. The resulting volume is more 
to amuse than to instruct. 

486. Howe, Russell W. Black star rising; a journey 

through West Africa in transition. London, 
H. Jenkins, 1958. 254 p. illus. DT471.H73 
Mr. Howe, who since the Congo crisis has been re¬ 
porting on African affairs for the Washington Post 
and other American newspapers, wrote this travel nar¬ 
rative after his second trip in Africa—the first in 
French Equatorial Africa in 1954 (see no. 1195). As 
a reporter who had been studying and working in 
France, his main attention was focused on French- 
speaking Africa. His acquaintance with the Guinean 
writer Camara Laye and other French intellectuals 
may have helped to shape his impressions, which as 
the title indicates are in favor of the new Africa. He 
was enthusiastically in Ghana for Independence Day. 

A much-noticed earlier book in which the emphasis is on 
former French West Africa is Geoffrey Gorer’s Africa Dances: 
A Book about West African Negroes (1st ed., New York, 
Knopf, 1935; paperback ed., Cambridge, Eng., Heffer, 1962). 
In his trip to interpret West African character and arts, 
the English writer was guided by members of the French Afri¬ 
can elite with whom he had been associated in Paris. 

487. Huxley, Elspeth. Four Guineas; a journey 

through West Africa. London, Chatto & 
Windus, 1954. 303 p. illus. DT497.H8 
A noted East African writer describes a long trip 
through the four British colonies of West Africa, Gam¬ 
bia, Sierra Leone, the Gold Coast, ending with Nigeria. 
In each territory she visited far and wide, towns, in¬ 
stitutions of all kinds, bush villages, and met, talked 
with, and observed people of all classes and degrees 
of civilization and barbarism. Her vivid, realistic, and 
humorous writing points up the tremendous contrasts 
she observed between the revolutionary development 
of economies and welfare, the political advancement 
and opportunism, and the primitive society close be¬ 
low the surface education and westernization. 


488. Kingsley, Mary H. Travels in West Africa, 

Congo frangais, Corisco and Cameroons. 
London, Macmillan, 1897. 743 p. 

DK471.K55 

489. - West African studies. London, Mac¬ 

millan, 1899. 639 p. DT471.K56 

This famous lady, in whose honor the Royal African 
Society was founded in 1901, is among the most con¬ 
spicuous figures of the late 19th century in West Africa, 
where her long skirts trailed through jungles, over 
mountains, in and out of perilous rivers. Her travels 
along the coast in pursuit of her etymological interests 
led her from bugs and beetles to a career as interpreter 
of West Africa to the English public through her books 
and lectures. The two books named are delightful 
reading today. Miss Kingsley’s observations were rec¬ 
ognized as factually and scientifically important and 
her humor is in the best style of her highly literate 
period. 

There are many biographies of Mary Kingsley, including a 
book by Rudyard Kipling and a standard life by the popular 
English-Irish writer Stephen Gwynn (1932). Three biog- 
graphies were published in London almost simultaneously: 
Kathleen Wallace, This Is Your Home; A Portrait of Mary 
Kingsley (Heinemann, 1956. 168 p.), Olwen W. Campbell, 

Mary Kingsley, A Victorian in the Jungle (Methuen, 1957. 
196 p.) and Cecil Howard, Mary Kingsley (Hutchinson, 
1957. 231 p.). 

490. Reade, Winwood. Savage Africa: being the 

narrative of a tour in euatorial, southwestern, 
and northwestern Africa; with notes on the 
habits of the gorilla; on the existence of uni¬ 
corns and tailed men; on the slave-trade; on 
the origin, character, and capabilities of the 
Negro, and on the future civilization of west¬ 
ern Africa. New York, Harper, 1864. 
452 p. illus. DT471.R27 1864 

The author of this curious travel narrative, almost 
more revealing of Victorian beliefs than of African 
mores, was a Fellow of the Geographical and Anthro¬ 
pological Societies of London. He claims the merit, 
not of an explorer, but “of having been the first young 
man about town to make a bona fide tour in Western 
Africa, . . . with no special object, and at his own 
expense . . .” His work is still much quoted. 

491. Theobald, Robert, ed. The new nations of 

West Africa. New York, Wilson, 1960. 179 p. 
map. (The Reference shelf, v. 32, no. 2) 

DT471.T43 

Bibliography: p. 173-179. 

In a series for the uninitiate, addressed specifically to 
college and study groups, this is a selection of short 


93 





articles from New York Times, The Listener, Current 
History, and comparable magazines. Most contribu¬ 
tions, which in scope cover general and economico- 
political aspects, present popularization by well known 
writers. A slight bibliography of books and articles is 
appended. 

492. West Africa; a weekly newspaper, v. 1+ Feb. 

3, 1917+ London, illus. DT491.W4 
West Africa, published by the West African Graphic 
Co., 9 New Fetter Lane, London E.C. 4, is the es¬ 
sential source for continuing information about eco¬ 
nomic, political, and social affairs in both British and 
French-speaking West Africa. The magazine has a 
useful annual index (for 1961, in no 2339, 31st March 
1962). A regular feature is a Profile of an African 
notable. Each issue also carries several signed book 
reviews, in which most new works on the region are 
surveyed. 

493. West African Directory. London, T. Skinner & 

Co. 1962+ annual DT471.W395 

Produced jointly with Overseas Newspapers, Ltd. 

Sections for each country with encyclopedic infor¬ 
mation. Special air and shipping sections, a list of ex¬ 
porters including names of thousands of firms trading 
with West Africa. 

HISTORY 

494. Blake, John W. European beginnings in West 

Africa, 1454-1578; a survey of the first century 
of white enterprise in West Africa, with special 
emphasis upon the rivalry of the great powers. 
London, New York, Pub. for the Royal Em¬ 
pire Society by Longmans, Green & Co., 1937. 
212 p. fold. map. ( Half-title : Imperial 
studies, no. 14) DT471.B45 

Selected bibliography: p.193-203. 

Standard work, based on examination of many pri¬ 
mary sources. The author laments the loss in the 
Lisbon earthquake of 1765 of a mass of documents, 
but has found rich returns in the British High Court 
of the Admiralty records. He speaks of much mate¬ 
rial to be unearthed in Portuguese local archives. 

495. Bovill, E. W. The golden trade of the Moors. 

London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1958. 281 p. DT356.B6 1958 

In his Caravans of the Old Sahara, published in 
1933, the author had followed the history of trade con¬ 


nections between the Arabs of North Africa and the 
kingdoms of the Western Sudan in their great days of 
the 13th to 18th centuries, in a narrative highly praised 
as at once scholarly and fascinating. The work of 
1958 is a rewriting, making use of the many researches 
into Arabic and other early sources which have 
abounded during the 25'-year interval. 

496. Conton, William. West Africa in history. 

London, G. Allen & Unwin, 1961 + 

DT471.C64 

Vol. 1. Before the Europeans. 93 p. 

Concise little sketch of the past of English-speaking 
West Africa by a Ghanaian writer who is now principal 
of a secondary school in Sierra Leone. The book, out¬ 
lining the “shared memory of the greatness of ancient 
Ghana, Mali, Songhai, Bomu, Ashanti and Benin,” 
is addressed to pupils and suggests a year’s outside 
reading. A second volume will treat modem history. 
Mr. Conton has written also a novel, The African 
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1960. 244 p.), which reached 

best seller lists in America and England. 

497. Fage, J. D. An introduction to the history of 

West Africa. 3d ed. Cambridge [Eng.] Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1962. 232 p. illus. 

DT471.F15 1959 
The first edition of this authoritative story of West 
Africa from the earliest days of the trans-Saharan 
trade contacts to the present, now in its second updat¬ 
ing revision, was published in 1955, when the author, 
now coeditor of the Journal of African History, was 
teaching history in the University College of the Gold 
Coast. He pleads the lack of African sources as his 
reason for concentrating upon the “colonial” side of 
the story. 

498. Guide to materials for West African history in 

European archives. London, University of 
London, Athlone Press, 1962 + 

CD1000.G8, no. 1 
The first volume of this new series of guides for 
scholarly research is by Patricia Carson: Materials for 
West African History in the Archives of Belgium and 
Holland, 1962. 86 p. 

499. Gwynn, Stephen L. Mungo Park and the 

quest of the Niger. London, John Lane, 1934. 
269 p. plates, maps. ( Half-title: The Golden 
hind series) DT356.G8 

Biographical study of the Scottish surgeon whose 
own chronicle of his adventurous exploration of the 
River Niger in 1795—97, Travels in the Interior of 


94 


Africa, is an English classic of the Dark Continent. 
The English-Irish author directs primary attention to 
the quest which was carried on over many years for 
the great river of Western Africa, known long only by 
rumor. Subsequent explorations of the Niger are out¬ 
lined in the last chapters. 

500. Howard, Cecil, ed. West African explorers. 

London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1952. 598 p. (The World’s classics, 523) 

DT471.H7 

The editor in his selections has tried to cover each 
explorer’s journey and achievement, and to avoid rep¬ 
etition of routes traveled. Extracts are, among oth¬ 
ers, from the works of the famous 17th- and 
18th-century travelers Richard Jobson and William 
Bosman; the 19th-century Mungo Park, Major Den¬ 
ham, Captain Clapperton, Richard Lander, Sir Rich¬ 
ard Burton, William Balfour Baikie, Dr. Henry Barth, 
Mary Kingsley. The volume, printed on India paper, 
is pocket size, but with such clear print that it is not 
hard to read. 

501. Martin, Eveline C. The British West African 

settlements, 1750-1821; a study in local ad¬ 
ministration. London, New York, Pub. for 
the Royal Colonial Institute by Longmans, 
Green, 1927. 186 p. maps. (Imperial 

studies, no. 2) DT502.M3 

Note on sources: p. 167-177. 

By a lecturer in history at the University of London, 
this historical study, prepared as a doctoral disserta¬ 
tion and sponsored for publication by the Imperial 
Studies Committee of the Royal Colonial Institute, 
describes the administration of the slave trade posts 
in Senegambia, Sierra Leone, and the Gold Coast in 
the time of the Company of Merchants trading to 
Africa. 

502. Mauny, Raymond. Gravures, peintures et in¬ 

scriptions rupestres de VOuest africain. Dakar, 
Institut francais d’Afrique noire, 1954. 
91 p. illus. (Initiations africaines, XI) 

N5310.M3 

Inventory of prehistoric art of West Africa by an 
archaeologist and historian of IF AN. The sites cov¬ 
ered are in the Southern and Western Sahara and 
generally in the former A.O.F. and Nigeria. Profes¬ 
sor Mauny has contributed many other monographs 
and papers to the various series and serial publica¬ 
tions of IF AN. Among his most recent is a study in 
pre-European history, Les Navigations medievales sur 


les cotes sahariennes anterieures a la decouverte 
portugaise {1434) (Lisboa, Centro de Estudos His- 
toricos Ultramarinos, 1960. 151 p. maps). 

503. Newbury, Colin W. The western slave coast 

and its rulers; European trade and admin¬ 
istration among the Yoruba and Adja-speak- 
ing peoples of South-Western Nigeria, South¬ 
ern Dahomey and Togo. Oxford, Clarendon 
Press, 1961. 234 p. (Oxford studies in Af¬ 
rican affairs) DT471.N38 

The historian warns that in the study of West Af¬ 
rica’s past “there is perhaps a danger that academic 
partition may faithfully follow international parti¬ 
tion,” and he emphasizes the lack of clear boundaries 
in tribal society and the international nature of Eu¬ 
ropean contacts. The period under intensive study 
is from the late 18th to early 20th century. The 
sources include unpublished material in European 
and African archives. 

POLITICS AND ECONOMICS 

504. Bauer, Peter Tamas. West African trade; a 

study of competition, oligopoly and monopoly 
in a changing economy. Cambridge [Eng.] 
University Press, 1954. 450 p. map, diagrs., 
tables. HF3896.B3 

Study for specialists, often quoted as authoritative. 
The author, a Cambridge Fellow and lecturer in ec¬ 
onomics, outlined special interests and monopolistic 
practices, analysing general aspects of the economic 
life of West Africa, and the various organs of trade, 
with special attention to the policies of the statutory 
marketing boards. He was concerned chiefly with 
Nigeria and the Gold Coast. He concluded that 
government regulation through such organs as the 
marketing boards had failed to accomplish its avowed 
ends, had stultified the usual forces operating in the 
market, and had delayed economic development. 

505. Cameron, Ian D., and T. B. K. Cooper. The 

West African councillor. 2d ed. London, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1961. 224 p. illus. 

JS7525.C3 1961 
Written in 1955 specially for new members of Af¬ 
rican local councils, this little handbook is couched 
in clear and simple terms. The writers discuss first 
the development of local government and the British 
model on which the West African institutions are 
patterned and which continue in much the same form 
in the newly independent countries. The structure, 


95 


purpose, and functions of the Village Council, the 
Urban or Rural District Council, and the County or 
Divisional Council are described. Chapters are given 
to finance, elections, and development plans. 

A comparable text by Ronald E. Wraith, Local Govern¬ 
ment, was published in 1953 by Penguin Books, especially 
for West African readers (London. 123 p. Penguin West 
African series, WAI). 

506. Carney, David E. Government and economy 

in British West Africa; a study of the role of 
public agencies in the economic development 
of British West Africa in the period 1947-55. 
New York, Bookman Associates, 1961. 207 p. 

HC517.W5C3 1961 

Bibliography: p. 197-201. 

A well-documented study prepared as a dissertation. 
The author had served as an economist on the United 
Nations staff. 

507. Cowan, Laing Gray. Local government in 

West Africa. New York, Columbia Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1958. 292 p. JQ1879.W4C6 

By the Professor of Government at Columbia Uni¬ 
versity, who is recognized as an American expert on 
African political questions. In this study of the repre¬ 
sentative institutions coming into operation, especially 
those in French territories under the loi-cadre, he 
focuses attention on the problems of getting the new 
local authorities accepted by the unprepared com¬ 
munities where the traditional authority of the para¬ 
mount chief still exists and is frequently in conflict 
with that of the government official. His data are 
of 1954-55. 

508. Davidson, Basil, and Adenekan Ademola, eds. 

The new West Africa; problems of inde¬ 
pendence. London, Allen & Unwin, 1953. 
184 p. DT503.D3 

Group of essays sponsored by the Union for Dem¬ 
ocratic Control, with aid from the Foundation of 
World Government at the University of Virginia. The 
viewpoint is that of the British Labour Party, the 
book dedicated to E. D. Morel, the early-20th-century 
crusader for anticolonialism. These papers, by F. Le 
Gros Clark, Henry Collins, Thomas Hodgkin, Amanke 
Okafor, and Basil Davidson, give an historical out¬ 
line of the British West African colonies and discuss 
modem political institutions and economic position, 
focusing on the transition from a backward economy 
to independent nation status. Emphasis is on the 
British responsibility for leading and helping the West 


Africans, notably as to trade-union rights and capital 
loans without imperialist purposes. 

509. DeGraft-Johnson, John C. African experi¬ 

ment; cooperative agriculture and banking in 

British West Africa. London, Watts, 1958. 

198 p. illus. HD1491.A55D4 

Valuable record and estimate of the agricultural 
cooperative movement in English-speaking West Af¬ 
rica. Professor DeGraft-Johnson, a prominent Ghana¬ 
ian scholar, is senior Resident Tutor of Extra-Mural 
Studies at the University of Ghana. A new edition 
has been issued in June 1962 of his series of historical 
lectures, An Introduction to the African Economy 
(New York, Asia Pub. House. 116 p.), delivered at 
the Delhi School of Economics where he spent a term 
as visiting professor. 

510. Egyptian Society of International Law. 

Constitutions of the new African states: a 

critical survey. Alexandria, 1962. 107 p. 

(Its Brochure no. 17, Mar. 1962) 

JQ1873.E45 1962 
This valuable brochure was published with the aid 
of a grant from the Ford Foundation. The cover 
title reads “. . . the new African States,” but with 
the exception of the Malagasy Republic, the states 
whose constitutions are explained are in West Africa. 
Following a section on sources and references there 
is an overall statement regarding the French African 
States (L’Afrique d’expression frangaise) and the 
French Community, then factual resumes of constitu¬ 
tional changes for each country of former French 
and British Africa, and the Congo and Katanga), with 
notes on the [then] still dependent countries, Ruanda- 
Urundi, Gambia, and the Portuguese and Spanish 
possessions. Appendixes are important inter-African 
documents, including the Conclusions of the African 
Conference on the Rule of Law, Lagos, 1961. 

511. International West African Conference. 

Comptes rendus. 1+ 1954+ illus., maps. 

DT471.158 

This international gathering of economists, sociol¬ 
ogists, scientists, and other specialists from the coun¬ 
tries of West Africa was begun at the instigation of the 
Institut Frangais d’Afrique Noire, and the first meet¬ 
ing held in Dakar in 1945. The second session, 1947, 
was in Bissau, Portuguese Guinea; the fourth session, 
1951, in Santa Isabel, Spanish Guinea; fifth, Abidjan, 
Ivory Coast, 1953; sixth in Sao Tome, Portuguese 


96 




West Africa, in August 1956; seventh in Accra, Ghana, 
in April 1959. The papers are published by the hosts 
of the respective sessions, those of 1947 having ap¬ 
peared in five volumes, from 1950-52, issued by the 
Ministerio das Colonias in Lisbon. Contributions are 
in the languages in which the papers were delivered, 
titles and editorial matter in the language of the 
hosts— Comptes rendus, 1945, Conferencia, 1947, etc. 
Volumes of the 1951 meeting appeared in 1953-54. 

For complete information, inquiries may be addressed to 
Dr. Theodore Monod, Director of the Institut Frangais 
d’Afrique Noire in Dakar, who is chairman of the Perma¬ 
nent Commission of the Conference. 

512. Lawson, Rowena M. Elements of commerce 

in West Africa. London, New York, Long¬ 
mans, Green, 1957. 136 p. illus. 

HF3876.L3 

One of a series for African students by the former 
acting head of the Department of Commerce at 
Kumasi College of Technology. 

513. McPhee, Allan. The economic revolution in 

British West Africa. London, G. Routledge, 
1926. 322 p. (Studies in economics and 
political science . . . no. 89 in the series of 
monographs by writers connected with the 
London School of Economics and Political 
Science). HC517.W5M3 

The “revolution” studied in this substantial histori¬ 
cal monograph is explained by the writer as having 
begun in the nineties with the advent of modem 
means of transportation which linked West Africa 
with the outside world. The changes of 40 years as 
to trade, transport, land, finance, currency, status of 
the native, and health are discussed. An interesting 
table in an appendix shows that in the “white man’s 
grave” in 1903 deaths and invalidism disposed of 85.7 
percent of nonnative officials within 2 years and 4 
months, whereas in 1920 total casualties were only 39 
percent and average length of service 6 years and 4 
months. 

514. Pedler, F. J. Economic geography of West Af¬ 

rica. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 
1955. 232 p. illus. HC515.P4 

The writer announced as his purpose to establish, 
through facts, analysis, and reasoning, “the relation¬ 
ship of cause and effect in the work-a-day world of 
West Africa.” His coverage included questions of 
land and its users, domestic production and export 


crops, mining, manufacturers, transport, commerce, 
and the economic aspects of government. Statistical 
data were closely current at the time of writing. 

515. Petch, G. A. Economic development and mod¬ 

ern West Africa. London; University of Lon¬ 
don Press, 1961. 224 p. HC515.P45 

This introductory study for English-speaking stu¬ 
dents in West Africa is written by an economics profes¬ 
sor at Fourah Bay College, who is a specialist on the 
oil palm industry. Reviewed in West Africa , Feb. 17, 
1962. 

516. Roper, Joseph I. Labour problems in West 

Africa. London, Penguin Books, 1958. Ill p. 
(Penguin African series, WA8) HD8796.R82 
A little survey for the general reader in this excellent 
paperback series covers the territories then still Brit¬ 
ish and French in West Africa, with special atten¬ 
tion to the newly independent Ghana. For other 
studies of labor, see under individual countries. 

517. Spilsbury, Calvin C. West Africa 3 s fats and oils 

industry. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 
1959. 42 p. illus., map. (U.S. Foreign Agri¬ 
cultural Service. FSA-M-62) 

S21.Z2383, no. 62 
This survey is typical of an increasing number of 
special studies on individual aspects of African econ¬ 
omy being carried out by agencies of the U.S. Govern¬ 
ment. The oilseed trade is the chief economic factor 
in much of West Africa, where the cash crop is 
peanuts. 

518. United Africa Company, Ltd. Statistical & 

economic review, v. 1, no. 1+ Mar. 1948 + 
London. illus. (part col.) maps, diagrs. semi¬ 
annual. HG517.W5U5 

The journal of this subsidiary of Unilever, which 
is active in the palm-oil and other industries of West 
Africa, is a useful source for articles of economic sig¬ 
nificance as well as statistics and other data of West 
African trade. 

519. United Nations. Economic Commission for 

Africa. Transport problems in relation to eco¬ 
nomic development in West Africa. Addis 
Ababa, 1960. 125 p. tables. (E/CN. 14/63) 
Typical of ECA studies is this survey of transport 
development, industries, costs, and policies in West 
Africa. The last chapter evaluates the probable im¬ 
pact of road improvement. 


97 


ANTHROPOLOGY, SOCIOLOGY, 
AND RELIGION 

520. Bowen, Elenore S., pseud. Return to laughter. 

New York, Harper, 1954. 276 p. 

DT500.B6 1954a 
By a social anthropologist who had spent a season 
doing field work in a West African bush village, this 
is written under a pseudonym to differentiate it from 
the author’s scholarly studies. It is a fictionized nar¬ 
rative, depicting the life of the community in human 
terms and telling a story full of dramatic interest. 

521. Goody, John R. Death, property and the an¬ 

cestors; a study of the mortuary customs of the 
LoDagaa of West Africa. Stanford, Calif., 
Stanford University Press, 1962. x, 452 p. 
illus., geneal. tables. GN486.G65 

Bibliography: p.436-444. 

522. - The social organisation of the LoWiili. 

London, H. M. Stationery Office, 1956. 119 p. 
illus., maps. (Colonial Office. Colonial re¬ 
search studies, no. 19) JV33.G7A48, no. 19 

By a Cambridge social anthropologist, these two 
monographs, based on fieldwork in West Africa, are 
studies of Voltaic tribes which spread over the borders 
on both banks of the Volta River in Ghana, the Ivory 
Coast, and Mali. The work on the LoDagaa (called 
by the Library of Congress the Dagari) is reviewed in 
Africa Report of August 1962. 

523. Jablow, Alta. Yes and no; the intimate folk 

lore of Africa. New York, Horizon Press, 
1961. 223 p. GR350.J3 

A collection of stories and proverbs from the folk¬ 
lore of West Africa, the storytellers, and the proverbs 
which, “sprinkled through normal conversation, de¬ 
bate and storytelling . . . are the backbone of African 
law and education.” The material is grouped in four 
parts, dilemma tales, proverbs, stories of love, riddles, 
the solution. Each is identified by tribe, from Liberia 
along the coast and inland from the Gulf of Guinea 
to Angola. 

524. Migeod, Frederick W. H. The languages of 

West Africa. London, K. Paul, Trench, Trub- 
ner, 1911-13. 2 v. PL8017.M5 

The writer, an official in the Gold Coast, was an 
authority on the languages of the region, in particular 
Mende. His well-known work is a study of linguistic 
classification, grammar, syntax, and parts of speech in¬ 
cluding 50-odd language specimens. 


525. Parrinder, Geoffrey. West African psychol¬ 

ogy; a comparative study of psychological and 
religious thought. London, Lutterworth Press, 
1951. 229 p. (Lutterworth library, v. 37. 

Missionary research series, no. 17) 

BL2465.P297 

526. - West African religion, illustrated from 

the beliefs and practices of the Yoruba, Ewe, 
Akan, and kindred peoples. London, Epworth 
Press, 1949. 223 p. map. BL2465.P3 

The writer, a former missionary and recognized au¬ 
thority on West African religious beliefs, had spent 
10 years as lecturer in the Department of Religious 
Studies at Ibadan. His West African Religion, in the 
first (1949) edition, had been used as a doctoral thesis, 
with the subtitle: “illustrated from the beliefs and 
practices of the Yoruba, Ewe, Akan, and kindred peo¬ 
ples.” The second edition is rewritten and brought 
up to date, including coverage of religion of the Ibo 
peoples, and a final chapter on religious change. West 
African Psychology is a comparative study of the con¬ 
cepts of the soul among West African tribes. For part 
of this material Dr. Parrinder has depended on other 
authorities. Review in Africa, Oct. 1951, p. 342-344. 

527. Sociological Review. Urbanism in West 

Africa, edited by Kenneth Little. Keele, Uni¬ 
versity College of North Staffordshire, 1959. 
122 p. HM1.S7, n.s. v. 7 

Special issue, n.s. v. 7, July 1959. 

Analysis of city life and society, with articles by: 
R. J. Harrison Church, “West African Urbanisation, 
a Geographical View”; William Bascom, “Urbanism 
as a Traditional African Pattern”; P. G. Lloyd, “The 
Yoruba Town Today”; Kenneth Little, “Some Urban 
Patterns of Marriage and Domesticity in West Africa”; 
D. K. Fiawoo, “Urbanisation and Religion in Eastern 
Ghana”; Tanya Baker and Mary Bird, “Urbanisation 
and the Position of Women.” The several essays are 
followed by bibliographies. 

528. Trimingham, John Spencer. The Christian 

church and Islam in West Africa. London, 
S.C.M. Press, 1955. 56 p. (International 

Missionary Council. Research pamphlets 
no. 3) BV3540.T7 

529. - Islam in West Africa. Oxford, Clar¬ 

endon Press, 1959. 262 p. fold, map, diagr. 

BP64.A4W4 

See no. 420 for general comment on Dr. Triming- 
ham’s studies of Islam. 


98 





530. Verger, Pierre. Dieux d’Afrique ; culte des 

Orishas et Vodouns a l’ancienne Cote des 
esclaves en Afrique a Bahia, la baie de tous 
les saints au Bresil. 160 photographies de 
l’auteur. Paris, P. Hartmann, 1954. 191 p. 

BL2490.V4 

This is an album of interesting ethnological pic¬ 
tures, showing the religious rites of voodoo and Orisha 
in West Africa, chiefly Dahomey and Nigeria, and as 
they have been transplanted to Bahia in Brazil. 
Captions are in French and English, an explanatory 
comment on the plates, at the end of the book, is in 
French. The work is well documented, with footnote 
references. It is incorporated at the end of the long 
text by this scholar, Notes sur le culte des Orisha et 
Vodouns a Bahia, la baie de tous les saints, au Bresil 
et a Vancienne Cote des esclaves en Afrique (Dakar, 
IFAN, 1957. 609 p. plates Memoires de l’lnstitut 
fran$ais d’Afrique noire, no. 51). 

EDUCATION AND CULTURE 

531. Bassir, Olumbe, comp. An anthology of West 

African verse. Ibadan, Ibadan University 
Press, 1957. 68 p. PN6109.2.B3 

A pamphlet containing almost 40 poems by West 
Africans, in original English or in translation from 
the French. There are three groupings, “Natural,” 
“Supernatural,” and “Philosophical,” the latter the 
largest, containing a number of the more famous 
poems of Senghor, Diop, Osadebay, and other spokes¬ 
men of African nationalism. 

532. Conference on Educational and Occupa¬ 

tional Selection in West Africa. Uni¬ 
versity College of Ghana, 1960. Educational 
and occupational selection in West Africa, 
edited by A. Taylor. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1962. 219 p. 

LB1620.5.C57 1960c 

Set of papers delivered at this conference, held 
under Carnegie Corporation grant in March-April 
1960. The speakers, American, British, and Ghana¬ 
ian, and Dr. S. Biesheuvel, director of the National 
Institute of Personnel Research in Johannesburg, dis¬ 
cussed methods of student selection, aptitude testing, 
personnel selection, and vocational guidance, with 
particular reference to Ghana and Nigeria. 

533. Hilliard, Frederick H. A short history of edu¬ 

cation in British West Africa. London, New 
York, T. Nelson, 1957. 186 p. illus. (Nel¬ 

son’s education handbooks) LA 1611.A2H5 


A useful survey of a subject increasing in importance 
during the years before independence. Another book 
covering the same field had been published the year 
before, Colin Wise’s History of Education in British 
West Africa (London, New York, Longmans, Green, 
1956. 134 p.). 

534. Sadler, Sir Michael Ernest, ed. Arts of West 

Africa (excluding music). London, Pub. for 
the International Institute of African Lan¬ 
guages and Cultures, by the Oxford University 
Press, H. Milford, 1935. 101 p., xxxii plates 

on 16 1. NT397.W4S3 

“Bibliography relating to indigenous art in tropical 
Africa”: p. 97-101. 

The authoritative essays in this compilation are by 
way of introduction to the 32 plates, each of which 
is described in a long note. The editor wrote the first 
essay on the general significance and vitality of African 
art; the second, by G. A. Stevens, a teacher at 
Achimota College on the Gold Coast (now the Uni¬ 
versity of Ghana), is on the educational significance 
of native African art; the third, by Gabriel Pippet, is 
“Teaching Wood Carving at Achimota.” The ex¬ 
amples were selected mainly from collections in 
British museums. 

535. Smith, Anthony. Sea never dry. London, 

Allen & Unwin, 1958. 204 p. PN5499.W4S4 
A fictionized story of the career of a small-town 
newspaper and its staff is here told with verve, the 
experiences being based on those of a former editor of 
the West African edition of the Johannesburg Drum. 
It is revealing regarding the insouciant West African 
character. 

536. Underwood, Leon. Figures in wood of West 

Africa. London, J. Tiranti, 1947. xlx p., 
48 plates. NB1080.U5 

537. - Masks of West Africa. 1948. 49 p., 

plates. NB1310.U5 

538. - Bronzes of West Africa. 1949. 32 p., 

64 plates. NK7987.U55 

Three little monographs on the typical forms of 
West African traditional art, accompanying sections of 
handsome photographs. The first and second volume 
in which the writer—himself an English artist and 
sculptor—speculates on the abstractions and symbol¬ 
ism of Negro carving, have text in French as well as 
English. 


692 - 756—63 - 8 


99 




NATURAL SCIENCES 

539. Cansdale, George S. Animals of West Africa. 

3d ed. London, Longmans, 1960. 124 p. 

illus. QL337.W4C3 1960 

540. - Reptiles of West Africa. London, 

Penguin Books, 1955. 104 p. (Penguin West 

African series no. 5) DLG 

Handbooks for African readers. A still more con¬ 
densed manual of the same sort is by Gwenlilian G. 
Webb, A Guide to West African Mammals (Ibadan, 
Ibadan University Press, 1957. 40 p. illus.). 

541. Jones, George Howard. The earth goddess; 

a study of native farming on the West African 
coast. London, New York, Pub. for the Royal 
Empire Society by Longmans, Green, 1936. 
205 p. plates. ( Half-title: Royal Empire 
Society Imperial studies, no. 12. General 
editor: A. P. Newton) HD2130.W5J6 

“Notes on the bibliography”: p. 197-202. 

Study of the agricultural methods, practices and 
beliefs of the tribes of the West African coast. The 
botanist writer had formerly been connected with the 
Department of Agriculture in Nigeria. Much of his 
text is devoted to a careful analysis of the efforts at 
education made by the colonial administrators. 

542. Organization for European Economic Co¬ 

operation. The cultivation of groundnuts in 
West Africa. Paris, 1953. 54 p. illus., 
maps. SB351.P307 

Result of a study by a mission of experts from the 
United States, the Netherlands, Italy, Senegal, and 


the Belgian Congo. The team examined the industry 
country by country, with chief attention to Nigeria, 
Portuguese Guinea, and the Gambia, assessing factors 
of transport, production disposal, possible expansion, 
and offering general recommendations. 

A comparable study published in 1956 by OEEG is The 
Main Products of the Overseas Territories: Cocoa (Paris, 
164 p. HD9200.A207) 

543. Stebbing, Edward P. The forests of West Af¬ 
rica and the Sahara; a study of modern condi¬ 
tions. London and Edinburgh, W. & R. 
Chambers, 1937. 245 p. diagrs. plates, 

maps. SD105.W457 

Professor Stebbing of the University of Edinburgh, 
now Emeritus, has been for many years a leading 
British authority on forestry. In 1934 he visited West 
Africa and the Sahara, and studied exhaustively the 
situation, which he considers of the utmost gravity, of 
deforestation and desiccation. He attributes this 
largely to the waste caused by shifting cultivation and 
by reckless “hacking” and unnecessary exploitation. 
In this book, much of which is technical and statistical, 
he recommended an Anglo-French commission of offi¬ 
cials with local knowledge who should work for estab¬ 
lishment of protective belts in the forest and desert 
regions. 

In at least three other books, The Threat of the Sahara, 
1937; The Man-Made Desert in Africa, 1938; and Africa, 
Its Intermittent Rainfall and Role of the Savannah Forest, 
1938, Professor Stebbing emphasized the same themes. In 
1947 he again visited Africa on a mission to the Sudan. A 
paper of 1954, The Creeping Desert in the Sudan and Else¬ 
where in Africa 15° to 13° Latitude is mentioned in the 
biographical note in Who’s Who, 1960. 


Gambia 


Bibliography 

544. Gamble, David P. Bibliography of the Gambia. 

London, 1958. 34 p. Z3735.G3 

A mimeographed, legal-size brochure prepared for 
the Colonial Office by this scholar who has done re¬ 
search on problems of the Gambia. He stated in his 
introductory note that he had listed everything he 
could find except annual reports. There are between 
400 and 500 items, classified and arranged in chron¬ 
ological order under subheadings. Entries are for 
books, documents, and periodical material. 


545. Archer, Francis B. Gambia colony and pro¬ 
tectorate; an official handbook. London, St. 
Bride’s Press [1905?] 364 p. DT509.A6 
This early reference work, which is still considered 
useful, contains, besides the condensed history of the 
colony, “particulars of the districts under the travelling 
commissioners,” “particulars of the direct marches 
throughout the Gambia Protectorate and a return of 
chiefs receiving stipends,” an English-Mandingo 
vocabulary, and other details of colonial administra¬ 
tion. 


100 



546. Gambia. Laws, Statutes, etc. The laws of the 

Gambia in force on the 1st day of January 
1955; rev. ed., prepared under the authority of 
the Revised edition of the laws ordinance 
1955, by Donald Kingdom. London, Printed 
by Waterlow, 1955. 6 v. DLC-LL 

The first edition of the collected laws of the Gambia 
was published in 1900. The present edition has five 
volumes of laws and an index volume. It is sup¬ 
plemented in the annual Ordinances, Rules, Regula¬ 
tions, Orders, etc. (Bathurst, Govt. Printer). 

547. “Gambia, Africa’s test case.” West African 

review, v. 33, August 1962: 4-8. 

DT491.W47, v. 33 
Specially contributed feature article on the possibility 
of union of Gambia with Senegal. The Gambians do 
not favor it, but economically it seems inevitable. The 
writer suggests that a successful union might set the 
pattern of Pan-Africanism. 

A earlier article on the same subject, “Gambia and Senegal 
Get Together” (New Commonwealth, v. 39, June 1961, p. 
393), gave a short account of the visit of Premier Mamadou 
Dia, of Senegal, to the Gambia in April 1961, where after 
friendly discussions with the Chief Minister, Mr. N’Jie, ar¬ 
rangements were made for an interministerial committee 
to meet and work out steps for closer relations between the 
two countries. The committee met in June and decided on 
economic and cultural rapprochement, but no immediate 
steps toward political association. Comment on this topic 
appears from time to time in West Africa: e.g., “The 
‘Senegambian’ Idea,” no. 2377, Dec. 22, 1962, p. 1417. 

548. Gambia Constitutional Conference, London, 

1961. Report. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1961. 7 p. (Cmnd 1469) DLC-LL 

The terms of the agreement for general elections 
and internal self-government in 1962 (elections held in 
May) and full independence probably in 1963. 

549. Gambia Oilseeds Marketing Board. Report. 

1st 4- 1949/50+ Bathurst, annual. 

HD9490.G24G32 
Almost 90 percent of exports from the Gambia con¬ 
sist of peanuts, the sales for which are handled by this 
Board. 

550. Gamble, David P. The Wolof of Senegambia, 

together with notes on the Lebu and the Serer. 
London, International African Institute, 1957. 
110 p. illus., maps. (Ethnographic survey of 
Africa: Western Africa, pt. 14) DT549.G3 

For a general description of the systematic ethnolog¬ 
ical surveys in this series, see no. 270. Mr. Gamble’s 


study is notable for its extensive list of references on 
the Wolof (who in the Colonial Office Report are 
spelled “Wollof”). This list is in three sections, lin¬ 
guistic material, religious literature, and general bib¬ 
liography. In 1949 Mr. Gamble had prepared for the 
Colonial Office a paper, Contributions to a Socio- 
Economic Survey of the Gambia, an account of Wolof 
agriculture and money economy. A linguistic work 
by this author, Gambian-Fula Verb List, was issued by 
the Research Department of the Colonial Office in 
1958 (London. 43 p., processed). 

551. Gray, Sir John Milner. A history of the Gam¬ 

bia. Cambridge, The University Press, 1940. 
508 p. fold. map. DT509.G7 

The standard scholarly history of the Gambia. The 
author, at that time Justice of the Supreme Court of 
the Gambia, had made use not only of the many early 
travel narratives that included references to the 
Gambia, but also of the unpublished material in the 
Public Record Office and other university and mission 
archives. The book is documented with footnote 
references. 

552. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Gambia; report for 

the year . . . London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1948+ biennial. Report for the years 1958 
and 1959, London, 1961. 97 p., fold. map. 

DT509.A33 

For general note on the report series of the Colonial 
Office, see no. 94. 

553. Gt. Brit. Treaties, etc., 1910- (George V). 

Agreement between H.M.’s Government in the 
United Kingdom and the Government of 
France respecting the delimitation of certain 
portions of boundary between Senegal and the 
Gambia. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1929. 
19 p. 4 fold. maps. (Treaty series, 1929, 
no. 3) JX636 1892 1929, no. 13 

Published as Cmd. 3340. 

554. Haswell, Margaret R. Economics of agricul¬ 

ture in a savannah village; report on three 
years’ study in Genieri village and its lands, 
the Gambia. London, Published by H.M. Sta¬ 
tionery Off. for the Colonial Office, 1953. 
142 p. maps, diagrs., tables. Processed. 
(Colonial research studies, no. 8) 

JV33.G7A48, no. 8 
This study is described by the editor of African Af¬ 
fairs as “a model of what surveys can be when intelli¬ 
gently planned and carried out at sufficient leisure.” 


101 


It includes statistics of cultivation and production in 
the open grassland region, analysis of work methods, 
and social background. Beyond its immediate content 
it is valuable as charting the types of data to be de¬ 
sired in future research projects. 

555. International African Institute. Report on 

need for ethnographic and sociological research 
in the Gambia, by director, International Afri¬ 
can Institute. Bathurst, Gambia, Govt. Print¬ 
er, 1955. 19 p. DT509.I5 

This 8-page report on studies obviously needed re¬ 
garding the various ethnic groups of the Gambia is 
signed by Dr. Daryll Forde, who had spent a month 
or so surveying the situation. It is followed by an ap¬ 
pendix of notes on the several groups, the Mandingka 
[sic], the Wolof, the Serahuli, several groups of the 
Fulbe (commonly known in the Gambia as the Fula), 
and the Jola. 

556. Jobson, Richard. The golden trade: or, A dis- 

couery of the riuer Gambra, and the golden 
trade of the Aethiopians. Also, the commerce 
with a great blacke merchant called Buckor 
Sano, and his report of the houses couered with 
gold, and other strange obseruations for the 
good of our owne countrey; set downe as they 
were collected in trauelling, part of the yeares, 
1620 and 1621. London, Printed by Nicholas 
Oakes . . . 1623. Facsimile reprint. Lon¬ 
don, The Penguin Press, 1932. 218 p. 

DT509.J63 1932 

One of the first and most famous British travel nar¬ 
ratives of West Africa. The reprint has an historical 
introduction by D. B. Thomas. 

557. Moore, Francis. Travels into the inland parts 

of Africa: containing a description of the sev¬ 
eral nations for the space of six hundred miles 
up the River Gambia ... To which is added 
Capt. Stibb’s voyage up the Gambia in the year 
1723. London, Printed by E. Cave for the 
author, 1738. 305, 86, 23 p. plates, map. 

DT509.M82 

This, next to Jobson, is probably the most quoted of 
the early British references to the Gambia. 

558. Reeve, Henry Fenwick. The Gambia. Lon¬ 

don, Smith, Elder & Go., 1912. 288 p. illus. 

DT509.R4 

The subtitle of this time-honored work is “its history, 
ancient, mediaeval, and modem, together with its 


geographical, geological, and ethnographical condi¬ 
tions and a description of the birds, beasts, and fishes 
found therein.” The author’s name is followed by a 
collection of letters, C.M.G., M.I.C.E., F.R.G.S., 
F.A.S., etc.; his portrait facing page 276 suggests that 
he will tell a good story agreeably. 

559. Rowlands, Evan C. A Grammar of Gambian 

Mandinka. London, School of Oriental and 
African Studies, University of London, 1959. 
159 p. PL8491.R6 

The second of a series of monographs on African 
languages by staff members of the school, carried out 
with the assistance of Gambian students in London. 
The Mandinka or Mandingos are the dominant tribe 
in the Gambia, their number being given as 100,800 
in the annual count of population for 1957 (Fula, 
59,900; Wollof, 32,400, according to the Colonial Of¬ 
fice Report). 

560. South orn, Bella S., Lady. The Gambia; the 

story of the Groundnut Colony. London, 
Allen & Unwin, 1952. 283 p. illus. 

DT509.S68 

Lady Sou thorn spent 5^2 years as Governor’s lady 
with her husband in the Gambia. Her book, the only 
recent history of the British colony, is a pleasant retell¬ 
ing of the European narratives from the first Portu¬ 
guese voyages of the mid-15th century on, mixed with 
affectionate description of the country and its people 
as she had known them. 

561. Teague, Michael. “The Gambia.” Geograph¬ 

ical magazine, v. 34, Nov. 1961: 380-392. 

G1.G343, v. 34 

Feature article in the British journal that serves as 
the popular organ of the Royal Geographical So¬ 
ciety. This is one of the fullest of recent surveys of the 
Gambia. Other special surveys, in which Sierra Leone 
and Gambia are discussed together, appeared in the 
New Commonwealth of September and November 
1960 (v. 38: 568-570; v. 39: 105-112). 

562. Van der Plas, Charles D. A report of a sur¬ 

vey of the rice areas in the Central Division 
of the Gambia. Bathurst. [n.d.J Obtainable 
from the Information Office, Bathurst. 

An intensive effort has been made in recent years 
to increase production of subsistence crops, particu¬ 
larly swamp rice, and experimental programs for im¬ 
proved techniques of production are underway at the 
Jenoi Rice Station and the Gambia Rice Farm. This 


102 


report, which presumably treats of the program, is 
announced in the Colonial Office Report of 1958-59. 
There is announced also a document by this writer, 
Report of Socio-Economic Survey of Bathurst and 
Kombo St. Mary in the Gambia, issued by the United 
Nations in New York in 1956. The work has not 
been located in the United Nations Documents Index. 


563. “Who’s who in the Gambia? Personalities on 
the political scene.” West African review, v. 
32, Sept. 1961: 63-67. DT491.W47, v. 32 

A useful article for biographical data on leaders of 
the day. 

A biographical sketch of Mr. Pierre N’jie, Chief Minister 
and head of the United Party, appeared in West Africa, July 
29, 1961, p. 823. 


Ghana 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

564. Cardinall, Allan W. A bibliography of the 

Gold Coast. Issued as a companion volume 
to the Census report of 1931. Accra, Gold 
Coast Colony, Printed by the Government 
Printer, 1932. 384 p. Z3553.G6C2 1932 

Classified, with author index. Blank pages for “Addenda” 
at end of each section. 

This justly celebrated bibliography, covering all 
writing up to its time on the Gold Coast and much 
on West Africa in general, is noticed at length by 
Rydings in his West African Bibliographies (no. 480). 
The compiler, a British colonial official of long ex¬ 
perience in British West Africa, was author of several 
other books (see no. 569). 

Plans have been discussed but not yet worked out for an 
updating or supplement to Cardinally bibliography. The 
only extensive recent bibliographical study is that compiled 
by G. M. Pitcher, Bibliography of Ghana, 1957—1959 (Ku- 
masi, College of Technology Library, 1960. 177 1. Mimeo¬ 

graphed). It is strictly limited, however, to writings of 
the first years of independence, with a preponderance of ref¬ 
erences to articles in British magazines. 

565. Johnson, Albert F. Books about Ghana; a 

select reading list. Accra, Ghana Library 
Board, 1961. 32 p. Z3785.J6 

Selection of the most significant and easily accessi¬ 
ble works on the Gold Coast and Ghana. About 300 
titles are classified by subject, with author index. A 
separate section names the chief official publications— 
commissions and special reports, documents on the 
Constitution. 

GENERAL 

566. Amamoo, J. Godson. The new Ghana; the 

birth of a nation. London, Pan Books, 1958. 
145 p. illus. (A Pan original, G110) 

DT510.A75 


Available from Acme News, New York. 

A straightforward and dignified account of the 
transition from colony to independent nation, by an 
African writer, addressed to an elite audience in 
Ghana. 

Ghana Is Born, 6th March 1957, was published by Neame 
in London for the Ghana Information Services Department 
(text by Lionel Birch. 1958. 106 p. illus.). The text, 

make-up, and color plates are suggestive of the National 
Geographic; in many of the numerous photographs, Dr. 
Nkrumah shares the spotlight view with the Duchess of Kent. 

A more prosaic, but concentratedly factual, pamphlet was 
issued by the British Central Office of Information, Reference 
Division, The Making of Ghana (London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1957. 45 p.). 

567. American University, Washington, D.C. Spe¬ 

cial Operations Research Office. Area hand¬ 
book for Ghana, prepared by Foreign Areas 
Studies Division. Washington, 1962. 533 p. 

DT512.A75 

One of a series of country background studies be¬ 
ing prepared under contract with the Department of 
the Army. The extensive coverage is of sociological, 
political, economic, and military background. Each 
section is followed by bibliography of the main sources 
used. 

568. Boateng, E. A. A geography of Ghana. 

Cambridge [Eng.] University Press, 1959. 
204 p. illus., maps. DT510.B6 

Physical and human geography by a Ghanaian 
geographer who is professor of this subject at the 
University of Ghana. The book is intended as an 
introductory text for students in West Africa. The 
first two parts treat in general of the land and “human 
response,” the third part examines regional patterns. 

Another text for African students is by an English author, 
David Thickens Adams, A Ghana Geography (2d ed., Lon¬ 
don, University of London Press, 1960. 192 p. illus.). 


103 


This was first published in 1951 as A Gold Coast Geography, 
Book I, for use in secondary schools. The high standard 
of its contents removes any wonder that the Ghanaian school¬ 
boys turn out well educated. 

569. Cardinall, Allan W. In Ashanti and beyond. 

London, Seeley, Service, 1927. 288 p. 

DT507.G3 

This work had as subtitle: “The record of a resident 
magistrate’s many years in tropical Africa, his arduous 
& dangerous treks both in the course of his duty and 
in pursuit of big game, with descriptions of the people, 
their manner of living and the wonderful ways of 
beasts and insects.” More directly anthropological, 
though not technical in style, was Cardinally Natives 
of the Northern Territories of the Gold Coast; their 
Customs, Religion and Folklore (American edition, 
New York, Dutton, 1920. 158 p.). He is author 

also of a collection of folklore, Tales told in Togoland 
(Oxford University Press, 1931, 290 p.). These are 
stories told him by peasants and hunters of Togoland 
and the Gold Coast, not given as separate anecdotes 
but enclosed in a running commentary which coordi¬ 
nates them as to types—origin of things, the Sons of 
God, the Pixie-folk and their ways, etc. There is 
included a long historical legend, “Mythical and 
Traditional History of Dagomba,” contributed by a 
native assistant, E. F. Tamakloe of the Gold Coast 
Civil Service. 

570. The Diplomatic Press directory of Ghana, in¬ 

cluding trade index and biographical section. 
London, Diplomatic Press & Pub. Co., 1961- 
62. 224 p. illus., ports. Cover title 

1959+: Directory of Ghana including trade 
index and biographical section. DT512.D5 

The series of country directories now being pub¬ 
lished regularly by the Diplomatic Press are compiled 
with the cooperation of Public Relations services in the 
countries concerned. This Directory of the Republic 
of Ghana for 1961-62 is the 3d edition (previous 
editions, 1959, 1960/61). It includes almanac-type 
information on the country and government, trade 
index, and a biographical section; a restrained number 
of pages of advertising. 

The Ghana Year Book, an annual publication of the 
Accra Daily Graphic, carries much the same type of informa¬ 
tion, in some cases even more extensively: e.g., important 
dates, learned societies, though less luxurious in format. 
1960 edition has 228 p. and folded map. 

571. Ghana today, no. 1+ Mar. 1957+ London, 

Information Section of the Ghana Office, bi¬ 
weekly. DLC 


This information bulletin, which was begun m 1956 
as The Gold Coast Today, is a useful official source 
for following current developments in Ghana. 

572. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Annual report on 

the Gold Coast. 1946-54. London, H.M. 

Stationery Off. illus. {Its Colonial annual 

reports) DT511.A323 

The last Colonial Office Report on the Gold Coast 
in the latest series of annual reports on British colonial 
possessions which after the Second World War super¬ 
seded earlier series going back to the mid-19th 
century, was for the year 1954 and was published in 
1956 (184 p.). The general review of events of the 
year was followed by summary statements on economic, 
administrative, and social organization and conditions. 
Appendixes gave names of Cabinet and legislators, 
tables of statistics, and a Reading List that included 
the chief official documents. The Colonial Reports 
form an important source for any study of Ghana’s 
past. 

573. Mitchison, Naomi H. Other people’s worlds. 

London, Seeker & Warburg, 1958. 160 p. 

illus. DT512.M5 1958 

Travel narrative of a British literary woman, 
“written after only six weeks of observation and 
thought in the place itself” in late 1957. Her fresh 
and interesting impressions are of classes, language and 
words, history, religion, morals, education, politics, 
clothes, art and music of “other people’s worlds” in 
Ghana and Nigeria. 

574. Potekhin, Ivan I. Gana segodnia; dnevnik, 

1957 g. Moskva, Gos. izd-vo geogr. lit-ry, 

1959. DT512.P6 

The Director of the Afrika Institut of the Soviet 
Academy of Sciences reported with enthusiasm on his 
visit to the new country in its first year of national 
existence. His book is reviewed by M. H. [Mary 
Holdsworth] in Africa, July 1960, p. 281-282. 

575. Ryan, Isobel. Black man’s town. London, 

Cape, 1953. 249 p. illus. DT511.R9 

By the wife of a Colonial officer, who had written in 
1950 her experiences in the Nigerian “bush” (no. 699). 
Her second book is the account of a year in a port city 
of the Gold Coast just as self-government was being 
established in the colony. The highly personal and 
amusing narrative combines description of the experi¬ 
ence of the European housewife in the, to her, often 
fantastic West African setting with insight into the 


104 


changing relations of black and white in the evolving 
society. 

576. Warner, Douglas. Ghana and the new Africa. 

London, F. Muller, 1960. 181 p. illus. 

DT510.W3 

Personal impressions of a journalist who had fled 
from the Drum office in Johannesburg to what he con¬ 
sidered the more enlightened regions of West Africa. 
He found Accra a congenial atmosphere and is en¬ 
thusiastic about Ghana and Nkrumah’s program of 
pan-Africanism. He draws a rather depressing pic¬ 
ture of Nigerian cities, which he also visited. He is 
criticized for inaccuracies in a review in West Africa , 
Aug. 13, 1960. 

A fresh and entertaining travel narrative of a few years 
earlier is translated from the Danish, Karl Eskelund’s Black 
Man’s Country; A Journey through Ghana (London, A. 
Redman, 1958. 164 p. illus.). 

577. Wright, Richard. Black power ; a record of 

reactions in a land of pathos. New York, 

Harper, 1954. 358 p. illus. DT511.W7 
The noted American Negro novelist and ex-Com- 
munist visited the Gold Coast in the late years of its 
status as a British colony, and wrote a powerful, highly 
subjective account of his trip and his impressions. He 
was constantly thrilled, at times with joy, almost more 
often with horror, both at what Europe had done to 
Africa and at African superstition. He concludes with 
a lettef to Nkrumah, for whom he had ardent admira¬ 
tion, urging that Africa must follow an African path, 
free of domination by West or East. 

HISTORY 

578. Claridge, William W. A history of the Gold 

Coast and Ashanti from the earliest times to 

the commencement of the twentieth century. 

London, J. Murray, 1915. 2 v. DT511.C6 
This famous work is particularly valuable in its full 
treatment of the Ashanti wars. According to the later 
historian, W. W. Ward, “Every one who writes on Gold 
Coast history should begin, after the fashion of the 
country, by pouring a libation and sacrificing a sheep 
in honour of Dr. Claridge, whose monumental His¬ 
tory ... is not likely to be superseded.” 

579. Davies, Oliver. Archaeology in Ghana. Lon¬ 

don, Published by Nelson for University of 

Ghana, 1961. 45 p. illus. DT510.3.D3 
Five papers by a scholar at the university (until 
1961/62 University College) of Ghana, who has done 


extensive archeological research in that country. A 
review signed by Thurston Shaw appeared in West 
Africa of April 7, 1962. 

580. Fage, J. D. Ghana: a historical interpretation. 

Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1959. 
122 p. illus. DT511.F3 

Based on a series of lectures while the former Uni¬ 
versity College of Ghana professor was temporarily at 
the University of Wisconsin. His emphasis is on 
adaptations of the people of Ghana to the social and 
economic changes of the modern world rather than 
on constitutional developments. 

581. Kimble, David. A political history of Ghana 

1850-1929. London, Oxford University 
Press, 1962. 516 p. maps. DT511.K42 
The announcement from the publishers speaks of 
this as “the first full-scale history of the origins of 
nationalism in an African country.” The author was 
Director of the Institute of Extra-Mural Studies at 
the University College of Ghana. 

582. Metcalfe, G. E. Maclean of the Gold Coast. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1962. 
344 p. (West African history series) 

DT510.6.M28M4 
Political biography of the almost legendary George 
Maclean, who in the 1830’s and 1840’s established 
peaceful relations with the Ashanti and Fanti, lead¬ 
ing to the establishment of the British protectorate. 

583. Reindorf, Carl C. The history of the Gold 

Coast and Asante , based on traditions and his¬ 
torical facts comprising a period of more than 
three centuries from about 1500 to 1860. 
With a biographical sketch by C. E. Reindorf. 
2d ed. Basel, Basel Mission Book Depot, 
1951. 349 p. illus. DT511.R4 1951 
Reprint of a book published in 1889, which was a 
pioneer work by a native pastor of the Basel Mission 
in Christiansborg. His history, based very largely on 
the traditions he had heard in his youth, “covers the 
kingdoms of Akra (Accra) and Ashantee—my 
ancestors on the father’s and mother’s side belonged 
to the families of national officiating high priests in 
Akra and Christiansborg. And I should have become 
a priest ... if I had not been born a mulatto and 
become a Christian.” The introductory biography of 
the author is by his son. Important as a source work, 
the narrative abounds in translations of Ga anecdotes, 
sayings, and songs. 


105 


584. Ward, William Ernest. A history of Ghana. 

2d ed. rev. London, Allen & Unwin, 1958. 

434 p. illus., ports., maps. 

585. - A short history of Ghana. 7th ed. 

London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1957. 
275 p. illus. DT511.W3 1957 

Professor Ward’s Short History was published first 
while he was teaching at Achimota in 1935, and was 
addressed particularly to African students. It has gone 
through many editions and has become the standard 
modern text for political history, “of tribal movements, 
wars and treaties, and the rise and fall of states.” The 
latest revision brings the story up to independence. 
The longer work, for a European audience, was first 
published in 1948 as A History of the Gold Coast. 

586. Wilks, Ivor. The northern factor in Ashanti 

history. [Legon, Ghana? 196-] 

This monograph is mentioned in “Matchet’s Diary” 
in West Africa, June 23, 1962, as one of the first pub¬ 
lications of the Institute of African Studies at the 
University of Ghana. The work had not been received 
by the Library of Congress as of January 1963. 

587. Wolfson, Freda. Pageant of Ghana. Lon¬ 

don, Oxford University Press, 1958. 266 p. 

(West African history series) DT510.W6 
A compilation of well-chosen extracts from written 
records about the Gold Coast, dating back to the 
first narrative of discovery by the Portuguese Joao de 
Barros in 1471, and ending with Nkrumah’s inde¬ 
pendence motion speech in July 1953. 

POLITICS 

588. Apter, David E. The Gold Coast in transition. 

Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1955. 

355 p. illus. DT511.A7 1955 

Rev. ed., New York, Atheneum, 1963. 432 p. 

Bibliography: p. 335-346. 

Case study of political institutional transfer, the 
first of two field studies carried out by Dr. Apter under 
a Social Science Research Council grant (see also 
Uganda, no. 1372). Much of the text, after a sketch 
of background, traditional system of politics, and the 
British policy of indirect rule, is devoted to the evolu¬ 
tionary changes between the Constitution of 1950 
and the Nkrumah Constitution of 1954, which brought 
representative and responsible self-government, fore¬ 
shadowing complete independence. In a chapter on 
“Prospects of Gold Coast Democracy” the writer dis¬ 
cusses the functions of the charisma arising from the 


mass support of Nkrumah, which has given to this 
authority an ideological character that represents di¬ 
vine sanction. 

589. Bennion, Francis A. R. The constitutional law 

of Ghana. London, Butterworths, 1962. 
xxxvi, 527 p. (African law series, no. 5) 

DLC-LL 

590. Bourret, F. M. Ghana, the road to inde¬ 

pendence, 1919-1957. rev. ed. Stanford, 
Calif., Stanford University Press, 1960. 
246 p. illus. DT511.B68 1960 

The third edition of an informative study by an 
American professor, first published in 1949 with the 
title: The Gold Coast; A Survey of the Gold Coast 
and British Togoland, 1919-1946 (Stanford, 1949. 
231 p.). Dr. Bourret planned her political, economic, 
and social history of the colony in the 20th century 
as a case study of the “day-by-day working out” of 
British policy in bringing dependent territories into the 
modern world. An updated edition, 1919-51, was 
published in 1952, and the present volume completes 
the survey with a chapter detailing the political and 
constitutional changes of 1945-57, and Independence 
Day. The work has footnote references and a useful 
bibliography, including documents. 

591. Busia, Kofi A. The position of the chief in 

the modern political system of Ashanti; a study 
of the influence of contemporary social changes 
on Ashanti political institutions. London, 
New York, Published for the International Af¬ 
rican Institute by the Oxford University Press, 
1951. 233 p. JS7649.G62B8 

This study of Ashanti political institutions of the 
past and of their changes under the 50 years of British 
administration was presented as a thesis at the Uni¬ 
versity of London. The fieldwork was done in 1941— 
42, and the contemporary scene studied through 1946, 
thus already outdated by postwar changes at the time 
of its publication. In 1947-48 Dr. Busia was in charge 
of a government-sponsored case study of a war boom 
town where traditional African ways of life were un¬ 
dergoing rapid changes; his Report on a Social Sur¬ 
vey of Sekondi-Takoradi (London, Crown Agents for 
the Colonies on behalf of the Government of the Gold 
Coast, 1950. 164 p. maps) is a careful analysis ac¬ 
cording to the methods of applied social anthropol¬ 
ogy. Dr. Busia has been active in political affairs 
as a spokesman for the United Party, the group which 
represents the chief opposition to Nkrumah, and is 
now in voluntary exile. He has held the chair of 


106 



Sociology at the Institute of Social Studies at the 
Hague and the Chair of Social Culture of Africa in 
Leyden since 1959. In 1962 he has been a guest 
professor at the University of Mexico. 

592. Elias, Taslim Olawale. Ghana and Sierra 

Leone; the development of their laws and con¬ 
stitutions. London, Stevens, 1962. 334 p. 

(The British Commonwealth, the develop¬ 
ment of its laws and constitution, v. 10) 

DLC-LL 

See note on Dr. Elias, no. 191. 

593. Ghana. Statement of the Government on the 

recent conspiracy. Accra, 1961. 50 p. 

DLC 

This White Paper on the so-called Amponsah- 
Awhaitey conspiracy in 1961 alleged that opponents 
of Nkrumah’s taxation proposals had conspired to as¬ 
sassinate him, and that a general plot had been de¬ 
vised to overthrow the government, with aid from 
Togo. It is discussed at length in West Africa, Dec. 
16, 1961, p. 1377-1378. 

594. Nkrumah, Kwame. Ghana; the autobiography 

of Kwame Nkrumah. New York, T. Nelson, 
1957. 302 p. illus. DT511.N55 

595. - Hands off Africa!!! Some famous 

speeches by Dr. the Rt. Hon. Kwame Nkru¬ 
mah P.C., M.P. (first President of the Re¬ 
public of Ghana); with a tribute to George 
Padmore, written by Twia Adamafio, General 
Secretary of C. P. P. Accra, Kwabena 
Owusu-Akyem, 1960. 62 p. 

DT510.6.N5A45 1960 

596. - I speak of freedom; a statement of Af¬ 

rican ideology. New York, Praeger, 1961. 
291 p. (Books that matter) 

DT512.N55 1961 

The autobiography of the charismatic leader of 
Ghana was timed for release to coincide with the birth 
of the new nation whose successful fight for inde¬ 
pendence was due in large part to his dynamic direc¬ 
tion. The second-named volume is a pamphlet 
collection of some of Nkrumah’s most famous speeches, 
dating from the farewell tribute to the departing Co¬ 
lonial Governor of the Gold Coast, the late Sir Charles 
Arden-Clarke, on May 11, 1957, to the speech on his 
return from the Commonwealth Prime Ministers’ 
Conference in London, June 1960. The speeches are 
preceded by a paragraph of tribute to the late George 
Padmore, and a “profile” of Nkrumah, “Man of 


Destiny,” reprinted from the West African Review. I 
Speak of Freedom is again autobiographical, recount¬ 
ing developments from Nkrumah’s return to his coun¬ 
try in December 1947—the achievement of independ¬ 
ence of the first Black African territory to emerge from 
colonial rule, the impetus given other African states 
to follow the example, the progress toward building 
a welfare state, and the stand taken by Ghana, un¬ 
der his leadership, in international affairs. His ideol¬ 
ogy is summed up in his final paragraph: “But the 
whole of Africa must be free and united. Only then 
will we be able to exercise our full strength in the 
cause of peace and the welfare of mankind.” Dr. 
Gwendolen Carter in a review ( New York Times, Aug. 
29, 1961) speaks of this book as “surprisingly 
readable.” 

597. Padmore, George. The Gold Coast revolution; 

the struggle of an African people from slavery 

to freedom. London, D. Dobson, 1953. 
272 p. illus. DT511.P3 

Political account of the Gold Coast from the founda¬ 
tion of the Ashanti Confederation to the accession of 
Nkrumah as Prime Minister. The author was criti¬ 
cized by the Manchester Guardian as being “less than 
fair to Nkrumah’s predecessors or opponents.” Some 
of the same ground is covered in Mr. Padmore’s later 
book (no. 123). 

598. Phillips, John F. V. Kwame Nkrumah and 

the future of Africa. New York, Praeger, 1961. 

272 p. illus. (Books that matter) 

DT31.P5 1961 

As Professor of Agriculture at the University Col¬ 
lege of Ghana, the writer had had opportunity to ob¬ 
serve at firsthand the political progress of Ghana, and 
the dominant role of Dr. Nkrumah. Professor Phillips 
is sympathetic with emergent Africanism, and, while 
not without criticism, is admiring of Nkrumah, whom 
he compares as a political philosopher and nation 
builder to Field Marshal Smuts. 

Sketches of Nkrumah are included in many recent works 
on African politics, notably in such books as those on African 
leaders by Melady and Italiaander (no. 127n). There 
might be mentioned here the brief but incisive picture by 
Vera Micheles Dean in her Builders of Emergent Nations 
(New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1961; see p. 154- 
161). It follows a general sketch of African political evolu¬ 
tion and is accompanied by biographical comment on Houp- 
houet-Boigny, Tom Mboya, and Julius Nyerere. 

An enthusiastic biography of Dr. Nkrumah was written 
before the winning of independence by a newspaperman 
from Accra, by birth a Sierra Leonean, Bankele Timothy: 
Kwame Nkrumah: His Rise to Power (London, Allen & 


107 




Unwin, 1955. 198 p.). The present Ghanaian style of writ¬ 

ing about the President of the Republic is exemplified in a 
highly illustrated pamphlet of 1961 put together by an In¬ 
formation Service officer, John Arthur: “Mile 51” (In 
Honour of Osagyefo’s 51st Birthday), with at head of title, 
“On behalf of the nation.” Printed by the Guinea Press in 
Accra, its 83 pages include portraits of the “Deliverer” and 
his chief associates, pages offering birthday greetings of com¬ 
mercial companies, tributes in prose and verse. 

On the opposite side of the ledger is a thoughtful article in 
The New Leader of Nov. 26, 1962 by a sociologist from Stan¬ 
ford University, William McCord: “Long Night in Ghana.” 
Professor McCord went to Ghana recently from Nigeria and 
has accumulated evidence of the terrorist nature of Nkrumah’s 
authoritarian state. He feels that the slight economic advan¬ 
tages of absolute rule are not sufficient gains to compensate 
for “the death of political freedom.” 

599. Rubin, Leslie and Pauli Murray. The Con¬ 

stitution and government of Ghana. London, 
Sweet & Maxwell, 1961. 310 p. tables. 
(Law in Africa series, no. 1) DLG-LL 

Much of this study is speculative, as the Ghana 
courts have not yet given decisions on various sig¬ 
nificant questions. The book is reviewed at length 
in West Africa, Mar. 10, 1962. 

600. Wight, Martin. The Gold Coast Legislative 

Council. London, Pub. under the auspices of 
Nuffield College by Faber & Faber, 1947. 
285 p. fold. map. (Studies in colonial 
legislatures, v. 2) JQ3033.W5 

Second volume of the significant series, now chiefly 
of historical value, edited by Margery Perham. Mr. 
Wight, an authority on colonial constitutions, had writ¬ 
ten also the first general volume, Development of the 
Legislative Council, 1606-1945. His specialist study of 
the Gold Coast function of self-government began with 
a review of historical and political development, then 
analyzed the Constitution of 1925, the Council set up 
by it, and its working. He examined the postwar 
political situation of the colony, and concluded with a 
brief glance at the new Constitution of 1946. 

ECONOMICS 

601. Akwawuah, Kwadwo Asojo. Prelude to 

Ghana’s industrialisation. London, Mitre 
Press [195 ] 96 p. HC517.G6A65 

A pamphlet for African readers by the first Presi¬ 
dent of the West African Management Association. 
Chapters explain industrial finance, location of in¬ 
dustry, unemployment, the place of management, lan¬ 
guage in industry, and planning. 


602. Collins, W. B. They went to hush. London, 

MacGibbon & Kee, 1961. 231 p. 

Personal narrative of problems encountered in 
managing forest reserves in Ghana. 

603. Ghana. 1960 population census of Ghana. 

Accra, 196- DLC 

Obtainable from the Census Office. 

The 1960 census was the first complete census held 
in Ghana and the first to use modem census techniques. 
Its results are being published in six volumes. As of 
January 1963 there have appeared: Vol. 1, The 
Gazetteer (Alphabetical List of Localities); Vol. 2, 
Statistics of Localities and Enumeration Areas (Sex, 
Age, Birthplace, School Attendance and Economic 
Activity); Advance Report of Vols. 3 and 4. A first 
article on the census appears in West Africa of Jan. 5, 
1963, with the announcement that fuller details will 
be published as available. 

604. - Second Development Plan, 1959-64. 

Accra, Govt. Printer, 1959. 124 p. DLC 

For analysis of the Plan, see a series of five articles 
by a correspondent from Ghana in West Africa, Apr. 
18-May 23, 1959 (p. 367, 397, 425, 473, 496). 

605. - [White Paper on the Volta River 

Project ] Accra, 1961. ca. 100 p. DLC 
This important paper, which was explained to the 
National Assembly by Dr. Nkrumah in February 1961, 
included the draft “Master Agreement” between the 
Ghana Government and Valeo, the group of aluminum 
companies which have undertaken to build a smelter 
at Tema, utilizing power from the proposed Akosombo 
dam. The dam is described in some detail. A sum¬ 
marization of the paper and of Dr. Nkrumah’s talk 
is given in West Africa of March 4, 1961 (p. 227). 

606. - Government Statistician. Survey of 

cocoa producing families in Ashanti, 1956-57. 
Accra, Govt. Printer. 1960. 112 p. (Sta¬ 

tistical and economic papers, 7) 

607. - Information Services. Roadmakers; a 

picture book of Ghana. Accra, Printed for 
Ghana Information Services by Newman 
Neame (London) 1962. DLC 

Album of photographs of present-day Ghana life, 
with text by Efua Sutherland and photographs by 
Willis E. Bell. “Our fathers found the paths. We 
are the roadmakers.” 


108 






608. - Tema; Ghana’s new town and harbour. 

[Written by Keith Jopp] Accra, Published 
for the Development Secretariat by the Min¬ 
istry of Information, 1961. 51 p. ill us. 

DT512.9.T4A5 

A well-presented booklet signed by the Hon. E. 
Ayeh-Kumi, Executive Director of the Development 
Secretariat, gives a factual account of the develop¬ 
ment of the new harbor and town, proposed in 1951 
and built up from a fishing village into a port in¬ 
dispensable for marketing the aluminum resulting from 
the Volta Project. Cost to date is given as 
£G6,508,264. 

A special survey section on “Tema Harbour” was pub¬ 
lished in the Guardian (Manchester) of Feb. 10, 1962 (p. 
7-10). 

609. Ghana. Town and Country Planning Divi¬ 

sion. Accra, a plan for the town; the report 
for the Minister of Housing. With a fore¬ 
word by Kwame Nkrumah, and an introd. by 
A. E. Inkumsan. Accra, 1958. 137 p. illus. 
(part col.) maps, plans. NA9278.A2A53 

610. Gould, Peter R. The development of the trans¬ 

portation pattern in Ghana. Evanston, Ill., 
Dept, of Geography, Northwestern Univer¬ 
sity, 1960. 163 p. (Northwestern University. 

Studies in geography, no. 5) HE284.G5G6 

611. Hill, Polly. The Gold Coast cocoa farmer; a 

preliminary survey. London, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1956. 139 p. HD9200.G62H5 

This study is a collection of separate social and eco¬ 
nomic reports on the employment of laborers in the 
cocoa farms of the Gold Coast, the pledging of cocoa 
farms, and the income and expenditures of the cocoa 
farmers. The surveys on which the work is based were 
carried out in 1954-55, largely with the help of the 
cooperative societies. Although the findings are of 
some years ago, the book is still constantly cited as 
authoritative. The author, now Mrs. Humphreys, is 
on the staff of the University College of Ghana and in 
1962 will be a member of the new Institute of African 
Studies. According to “Matchet’s Diary” in West 
Africa of June 23, 1962, she has “a massive new book 
on the rise of the cocoa industry [which] will for 
the first time give the Ghana farmer the credit he 
deserves.” 

For any study of the cocoa industry, reference should be 
made to the annual reports of the Ghana Cocoa Marketing 
Board and to its quarterly magazine The C.M.B. Newsletter 
(Accra, 1957+). 


612. Hilton, T. E. Ghana population atlas; the dis¬ 

tribution and density of population in the Gold 
Coast and Togoland under United Kingdom 
trusteeship. Edinburgh, T. Nelson, 1960. 
40 p. G2701.E2H5 1960 

Published on behalf of the University College of 
Ghana, where this geographer was a staff member. 
The study is on population censuses of 1931 and 1948, 
and includes an analysis of internal migration from 
north to Ashanti and south. Maps show distribution, 
density rates of population increase, and occupational 
structure. 

613. Irvine, Frederick R. The fishes and fisheries 

of the Gold Coast. With illus. and an account 
of the fishing industry by A. P. Brown and clas¬ 
sification and keys for the identification of the 
fishes by J. R. Norman and E. Trewavas. Lon¬ 
don, Published on behalf of the Government of 
the Gold Coast by the Crown Agents for the 
Colonies, 1947. 352 p. illus. SH315.G617 

Includes bibliography. 

614. - Woody plants of Ghana, with special 

reference to their uses. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1961. xcv, 868 p. illus., 35 
plates (part col.) QK490.G5I7 1961 

First published in 1930 under title: Plants of the Gold 
Coast. 

Bibliography: p. 790-793. 

Another full-scale study of forestry in Ghana is by Charles 

J. Taylor: Synecology and silviculture in Ghana (Edinburgh, 
Published on behalf of the University College of Ghana by 
Nelson, 1960. 418 p. illus. maps). 

615. Pfeffer, Karl H. Ghana; menschlich-soziale 

Grundlagen fur die wirtschaftliche Entwick- 
lung eines jungen Staatswesens. Hamburg, 
Verlag Weltarchiv, 1961. 81 p. (Schriften 
des Hamburgischen Welt-Wirtschafts-Archivs, 
Nr. 12. Sonderreihe Entwicklungsgebiete) 

HC517.G5P4 

Somewhat involved socio-economic study, much of 
it in technical language. The writer is author of sev¬ 
eral of the African country surveys in the series Die 
Lander Afrikas (see no. 10) including Ghana (Bonn, 

K. Schroeder, 1958. 104p.). 

616. Poleman, Thomas T. The food economies of 

urban middle Africa: the case of Ghana. Stan¬ 
ford, Calif., Food Research Institute, Stanford 
University, 1961. 175 p. illus. DLC-AFR 

Reprint from Food Research Institute Studies, vol. 2, no. 2, 
May 1961. 


109 





617. Skinner, Snider W. Ghana’s agriculture and 

trade in farm products. Washington, U.S. 
Dept, of Agriculture, 1958. 34 p. illus., map 
(FAS-M-34) 

For general note on this series, see no. 445. 

618. Volta River Preparatory Commission. The 

Volta River project. London, Published for 
the Governments of the United Kingdom and 
of the Gold Coast by H.M. Stationery Office, 
1956. 3 v., illus., maps, diagrs., tables. 

HD1699.V6V6 

This scheme for the development of large-scale 
aluminum production had been outlined in a British 
Colonial Office White Paper of 1952 (Cmd. 8702), 
with an estimate for total general expenditure of £144 
million. The Preparatory Commission was set up in 
1953. Its report is given in the first of the three vol¬ 
umes (135 p., and large folded map); Vol. 2, with 
many tables, maps, and charts, contains appendixes 
on various effects and special problems (475 p.). Vol. 
3, Engineering Report, by Sir William Halcrow and 
Partners, contains 88 pages of text and many large 
folded sheets of plans. 

A monograph on The Geology of the Volta River Project, 
by W. B. Tevendale (Accra, 1957. 119 p. illus.), was pub¬ 
lished as Bulletin No. 20 of the Ghana Geological Survey. 

619. Wills, J. Brian, ed. Agriculture and land use 

in Ghana. London, New York, published for 
the Ghana Ministry of Food and Agriculture 
by the Oxford University Press, 1962. 503 p. 
illus. tables, charts. S338.G6W5 

Compendium of information available on back¬ 
ground, state, and problems of agriculture and land 
use in Ghana. In three parts, the first on general con¬ 
ditions and patterns of rural land use; the second on 
special aspects, with particular emphasis on cocoa 
crops; the third on forestry and plant and animal hus¬ 
bandry. The work, intended as a textbook for officials, 
teachers, and research workers, was begun in 1954, 
and finished by an official of the Ghana Soil and Land- 
Use Survey. 

620. Wittman (G. H.) Inc., New York. The Ghana 

report; economic development and investment 
opportunities, legal problems relative to invest¬ 
ment, sociological factors relative to general 
economic development. New York, 1959. 
236 1., map, forms, tables. HC517.G6W5 
This report of a firm of business consultants is de¬ 
signed as a guide for foreign investment and busi¬ 
ness capital. It involved 12 months of study and re¬ 


search, including two field trips. The aim was for 
complete objectivity in reporting. 

ANTHROPOLOGY AND SOCIAL 
STUDIES 

621. Acquah, Ione. Accra survey: a social survey 

of the capital of Ghana, formerly called the 
Gold Coast, undertaken for the West African 
Institute of Social and Economic Research, 
1953-6. London, University of London Press, 
1958. 176 p. illus. DS 

Reviewed by Kenneth Little as “one of the most 
useful surveys that have so far been carried out in an 
African town” ( Africa , April 1960, p. 190-191). The 
interesting information includes data on the extent to 
which the town’s social life is affected by migration. 

622. Christensen, James B. Double descent among 

the Fanti. New Haven, Human Relations 
Area Files, 1954. 145 p. (Behavior science 

monographs) Edited by Genevieve A. High¬ 
land. GN655.F32G4 

Anthropological monograph resulting from field¬ 
work among the Fanti tribe of the Akan peoples of the 
Gold Coast. The writer endeavors to make the point 
that the role of the patrilinear line, with worship of 
the father’s deity, has been neglected in studies of this 
society in which descent has been considered matri- 
linear. The book is critically reviewed in Africa, Jan¬ 
uary 1955, p. 102-104. Its format, made up from 
facsimiles of sheets of the Human Relations Area files, 
involves notations of file numbers at page headings and 
in margins which, though serving as an index, make 
for difficulty in reading the text to other than trained 
anthropologists. 

623. Danquah, Joseph B. Gold Coast: Akan laws 

and customs of the Akim Abuakwa constitu¬ 
tion. London, Routledge, 1928. 272 p. 

DLC-LL 

The founder of the prewar movement for autonomy, 
who lost his mantle of leadership and his Ghana Con¬ 
gress Party to the younger Nkrumah and the Congress 
Peoples’ Party in the elections of 1954 and 1956 and 
is now in retirement, prepared this book in the course 
of his law training in the Inner Temple in London 
(1922-27). He is the author of a number of books, 
other pamphlets, and articles. A recent biographical 
pamphlet is Liberty, A Page from the Life of J. B. 
(Accra, H. K. Akyeampong, 1960. 34 p. illus.). 

One of his longer works, a philosophic ethnological 


110 


study, is The Akan Doctrine of God: A Fragment of 
Gold Coast Ethics (London, Lutterworth Press, 1944. 
206 p.). 

624. Debrunner, H. Witchcraft in Ghana; a study 

on the belief in destructive witches and its ef¬ 
fects on the Akan tribes. Kumasi, Presbyte¬ 
rian Book Depot, 1959. 209 p. illus. 

BF1584.G5D4 

By a missionary who wrote avowedly to help the 
Church form a policy without waiting “until all aspects 
of the problem are studied by Anthropologists, Sociolo¬ 
gists, Psychologists, etc.” The work is based on the 
author’s own long personal experience as well as the 
more scholarly sources which he has studied. Several 
chapters relate to the new pagan cults or separatist 
“Christian healing churches,” whose prophets engage 
in witchhunting. It was enthusiastically reviewed by 
Geoffrey Parrinder in West Africa (May 21, 1960, p. 
576). 

625. Du Sautoy, Peter. Community development 

in Ghana. London, Oxford University Press, 
1958. 209 p. illus. HN398.G5D8 

The author had been appointed Deputy Director of 
the Department of Social Welfare and Community De¬ 
velopment in the Gold Coast in 1952. This book tells 
the story of its achievement. Under the Ghana Re¬ 
public the Department of Community Development 
has become a general extension agency for other gov¬ 
ernment departments, organizing training for many 
cadres of new officialdom. 

626. Field, Margaret J. Religion and medicine of 

the Ga people. London, New York, Oxford 
University Press, 1937. 214 p. 

BL2480.G3.F5 1937 

627. - Social organization of the Ga people. 

Accra, Gold Coast, Published by the Crown 
Agents for the Colonies, 1940. 231 p. 

DT511.F5 

628. - Akim-Kotoku; an oman of the Gold 

Coast. Accra, Published by the Crown Agents 
for the Colonies, 1948. 211 p. DT511.F498 
Three anthropological studies by a scholar who 
acted as social anthropologist to the Gold Coast Gov¬ 
ernment. The first, prepared as a doctoral thesis at 
the University of London, is interesting reading, much 
of it dealing with witches and their magic. The sec¬ 
ond describes family and kinship customs and life in 
the Ga towns, Temma, Nungwa, Accra, Osu, Labdi 


and Teshi, and the future problems of the administra¬ 
tion. The last is a study of the government of the 
chief in one of the native tribes, the adaptation of “in¬ 
direct rule” which the British had hoped to make 
really efficient and satisfactory to the people, as an 
answer to the nationalist demand for self-government. 

629. - Search for security; an ethno-psy- 

chiatric study of rural Ghana. Evanston, Ill., 
Northwestern University Press, 1960. 478 p. 
(Northwestern University. African studies, 
no. 5) RC451.G45F5 

Returning to the locale of her earlier studies, in this 
work Dr. Field focused attention on the Ashanti shrines 
in Ghana to which the rural inhabitants come in their 
“search for security,” which accompanies mental ills. 
The first part is a general analysis, the second and 
larger part devoted to case histories. The book is re¬ 
viewed in Africa , Jan. 1961, by Gustav Jahoda, who 
says: “In the relatively unexplored territory between 
anthropology and psychiatry this study constitutes a 
landmark of permanent value.” 

630. Fortes, Meyer. The dynamics of clanship 

among the Tallensi , being the first part of an 
analysis of the social structure of a Trans-Volta 
tribe. London, New York, Published for the 
International African Institute by the Oxford 
University Press, 1945. 270 p. DT511.F59 

631. - The web of kinship among the Tallensi; 

the second part of an analysis of the social 
structure of a Trans-Volta tribe. London, 
New York, Published for the International Af¬ 
rican Institute by the Oxford University Press, 
1949. 358 p. illus. DT511.F6 

Professor Fortes, who has held the William Wyse 
Chair of Social Anthropology in Cambridge University 
since 1950, did his first fieldwork as a Fellow of the 
International African Institute in the Gold Coast in the 
thirties. These two notable works of scholarship, 
studying a tribe in the Northern Territories, are consid¬ 
ered classics in social anthropological analysis. 

632. - Oedipus and Job in West African reli¬ 

gion. Cambridge, University Press, 1959. 
81 p. BL2480.T3F6 

Essay expanded from the Frazer Lecture for 1956, 
which was entitled “The Idea of Destiny in West Af¬ 
rican Religions,” exploring the beliefs in Fate and 
the Ancestors of the Tallensi (in L.C. catalog, the 
Talansi), and their common elements with the Fate 
of early Greek religion and the God of Job. 


Ill 







633. Jahoda, Gustav. White man; a study of the 

attitudes of Africans to Europeans in Ghana 
before independence. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1961. 144 p. 

DT510.42. J3 

Sociopsychological analysis based on two attitude 
surveys. Reviewed by Michael Banton in Africa, Oct. 
1961, p. 390-391. 

634. Kaye, Barrington. Bringing up children in 

Ghana, an impressionistic survey. London, G. 
Allen & Unwin, 1962. 244 p. HQ771.G43K3 
Study of what happens in the many different so¬ 
cieties of Ghana, prepared as a preliminary to the set¬ 
ting up of a Ford Foundation-financed Child Develop¬ 
ment Research Unit. Reviewed in West Africa, June 
2, 1962. 

635. Lystad, Robert A. The Ashanti; a proud peo¬ 

ple. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University 
Press, 1958. 212 p. illus. DT507.L9 

Sociological study by a former pupil of Dr. Hers- 
kovits, written in narrative style that avoids technical 
language. It was warmly reviewed by Meyer Fortes 
in Africa of April 1959. 

636. Manoukian, Madeline. Akan and Ga- 

Adangme peoples of the Gold Coast. London, 
New York, Published for the International 
African Institute by Oxford University Press, 
1950. 112 p. map. (Ethnographic survey 

of Africa: Western Africa, pt. 1) DT511.M27 

637. - The Ewe-speaking people of Togoland 

and the Gold Coast. London, International 
African Institute, 1952. 63 p. (Ethno¬ 
graphic survey of Africa: Western Africa, 
pt. 6) DT500.M35 

Bibliography: p. 55-61. 

638. - Tribes of the northern territories of the 

Gold Coast. London, International African 
Institute, 1951. 102 p. (Ethnographic sur¬ 

vey of Africa: Western Africa, pt. 5) 

DT511.M28 

Bibliography: p. 99-101. 

See general description of the series in which these 
three volumes occur (no. 270). The author is con¬ 
nected with the International African Institute. 

639. Meyerowitz, Eva L. R. The sacred state of 

the Akan. London, Faber & Faber, 1951. 
222 p. illus., plates. GN493.4.A6M4 


640. - Akan traditions of origin. London, 

Faber & Faber, 1952. 149 p. maps. 

GN493.4.A6M38 1952 

641. - The Akan of Ghana, their ancient be - 

liefs. London, Faber & Faber, 1958. 14 p. 

illus. BL2480.A4M4 

642. - The divine kingship in Ghana and ancient 

Egypt. London, Faber & Faber, 1960. 260 p. 
illus. BL325.K5M4 

In 1943 the author, then art supervisor at Achimota 
College, became interested in the gold work of the 
Ashanti. This led to a series of anthropological 
studies of the Akan people, for which she visited many 
towns and villages, listening to tales of traditions. The 
first study is of the concept of the sacred state, its 
basis in matrilineal clans within a territorial and 
military confederation, the role of Queenmother, 
divine king, religious beliefs and symbolism, cults and 
ceremonies, ending with an account of the sacred art 
of gold work. In the second book the author relates 
the traditional tales she had heard. Her third and 
fourth studies are in support of her controversial thesis 
that there is obvious derivation from ancient Egypt 
in Akan beliefs and customs. 

643. Nketia, J. H. Funeral dirges of the Akan peo¬ 

ple. Achimota, 1955. 296 p. DLG 

Study by a prominent Akan scholar, at what was 
then the University College of the Gold Coast. It 
contains a background essay, the texts of over a hun¬ 
dred examples of dirges for various groups or in¬ 
dividuals, and appendixes which include musical 
terms. 

644. Ollennu, N. A. Principles of customary land 

law in Ghana. London, Sweet & Maxwell, 
1962. xxvi, 272 p. plates, maps, tables, 
diagrs. (Law in Africa series, no. 2) 

DLC-LL 

645. Rattray, Robert Sutherland. Ashanti. Ox¬ 

ford, Clarendon Press, 1923. 348 p. 

DT507.R3 

646. - Religion and art in Ashanti. Oxford, 

Clarendon Press, 1927. 414 p. DT507.R34 

647. - Ashanti law and constitution. Ox¬ 

ford, Clarendon Press, 1929. 420 p. 

GN493.4.A9R3 


112 









648. - Tribes of the Ashanti hinterland. Ox¬ 

ford, Clarendon Press, 1932. 2 v. DT11.R3 
This anthropologist, whose career in Africa began 
with the South African War and who was in the Civil 
Service from 1907 on, was well known as an authority 
on native languages and customs. Following the First 
World War he was named head of a new Anthropol¬ 
ogy Department in Ashanti, and it was his detailed 
investigation of the beliefs and customs of that war¬ 
like people, submitted in 1921 as a confidential “In¬ 
telligence Report” to the Administration, that made 
the British realize the true cause of the Ashanti Wars, 
another of which was then threatening—the disposi¬ 
tion of the Golden Stool, in which the Ashanti believed 
the soul of the nation resided. That paper is in¬ 
cluded as the final chapter of Captain Rattray’s 
Ashanti. Of the three first-named books, which were 
published as a uniform series, the second, Religion 
and Art in Ashanti, comes closest to popular style; 
all are definitely scholarly works. The first two vol¬ 
umes, Ashanti, and Religion and Art in Ashanti, were 
brought out in reprint editions by the Basel Mission 
Book Depot in Kumasi, Ghana, in 1954-55. Another 
book by Captain Rattray was Akan-Ashanti Folk- 
Tales (Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1930. 275 p.). 

This is a group of stories collected in the remoter vil¬ 
lages, and given as closely as possible in the words of 
the informants, with text on one side in the Akan 


language, on the other in English. Illustrations are 
by African artists. 

649. Tait, David. The Konkomba of Northern 

Ghana [by] David Tait. Edited from his pub¬ 
lished and unpublished writings by Jack 
Goody. London, Published for the Interna¬ 
tional African Institute and the University of 
Ghana by the Oxford University Press, 1961. 
255 p. DT582.42.T3 

The author, an anthropologist working on a full- 
scale study of the Konkomba, was killed in an auto¬ 
mobile accident in Ghana in 1956. This volume in¬ 
cludes all his published work plus posthumously edited 
and unpublished manuscripts. The political system, 
domestic organization, and some rituals of the tribe, 
a small group in northern Ghana, are described. 

650. Voices of Ghana, edited by H. M. Swanzy. Ac¬ 

cra, Ghana Government Press, for the Ministry 
of Information and Broadcasting, 1958. 

The editor of this volume of literary contributions 
to the Ghana Broadcasting System was formerly editor 
of the Royal African Society journal, African Af¬ 
fairs. The compilation is reviewed in the April 1959 
issue of this magazine by a Ghanaian writer, Yaw 
Atta Warren. 

An organ for literary work in Ghana is the journal Uni- 
versitas, which has been published irregularly at the Uni¬ 
versity College since 1953. 


Liberia 


Bibliography 

651. Solomon, Marvin D., and Warren L. d’Aze- 
vedo, comps. A general bibliography of the 
Republic of Liberia. Evanston, Ill., 1962. 
68 p. (Northwestern University. Working 
papers in social science, no. 1) DLG 

The most up-to-date and comprehensive bibliog¬ 
raphy available for Liberia. Entries are in four sec¬ 
tions, the first by individual author; second, title or 
corporate author entries; third, official documents; 
and 4, miscellaneous materials such as maps and sur¬ 
veys. There are well over 2,000 entries, including 
periodical references. 

See also works by Holas (no. 662) and Huberich (no. 
663). 


652. Anderson, Robert E. Liberia, America’s Af¬ 
rican friend. Chapel Hill, University of 
North Carolina Press, 1952. 305 p. illus., 

maps. DT624.A64 

Bibliographical references included in “Notes” (p. 287- 
294). 

Informative account of Liberia by a consulting en¬ 
gineer whose previous writings had been on naval 
architecture. This book, based on a wide variety 
of written source materials and personal contacts 
made during a long stay in Liberia, gave a full pic¬ 
ture surveying country, tribal people and their life, 
early and recent history, the American concessions 
and engineering improvements, Monrovia and the 
Liberian government, missions and education, forestry, 


113 



agriculture, and economic prospects. In his final 
chapter, “Looking Ahead,” the writer addressed him¬ 
self particularly to American investors, being en¬ 
thusiastic over the “mutually advantageous relation¬ 
ship” of Liberia and Firestone, etc. The book is 
dedicated to Dr. and Mrs. George Way Harley, whose 
pioneer medical mission at Ganta he has described 
as representing a contribution “beyond measure” to 
Liberia’s welfare. 

653. Azikiwe, Nnamdi. Liberia in world politics. 

London, A. H. Stockwell, 1934. 406 p. 

DT632.A85 

The first major work of the Nigerian leader, ex¬ 
pressing the African nationalist viewpoint on Liberian 
politics and defending the administration against the 
misunderstanding shown by the outside world. “Zik” 
admitted the need for political and social reforms, 
but urged special emphasis on the spiritual values 
which Liberia should assert as “the nucleus of black 
hegemony.” 

654. Brown, George W. The economic history of 

Liberia. Washington, D.G., The Associated 
Publishers, 1941. 366 p. HC591.L6B74 

History by an American Negro scholar, published 
with help from the Phelps-Stokes Fund (American 
foundation for aid to Negro education), the Republic 
of Liberia, and the London School of Economics. The 
first part is a rapid historical and geographical survey, 
the second part a careful study of the economy of a 
native communal society, and the “loans and conces¬ 
sions” imposed on it by the Republic and foreign in¬ 
fluences. The Appendix quotes historical and eco¬ 
nomic documents. 

655. Buell, Raymond Leslie. Liberia: a century 

of survival, 1847-1947. Philadelphia, Uni¬ 
versity of Pennsylvania Press, the University 
Museum, 1947. 140 p. (African handbooks, 

ed. by H. A. Weischhoff. 7) DT632.B8 

In his Native Problem in Africa of 1928 (see no. 7), 
Dr. Buell had given special attention to the situation 
in Liberia. This later pamphlet, prepared as a 
centennial study, expressed clearly his criticism of the 
Liberian experiment in independent government. He 
began with a statement of the American wartime 
interest in Liberia, then reviewed political and 
economic history, with special consideration of the 
interwar period under the dictatorial True Whig 
regimes of Presidents King and Barclay, the establish¬ 


ment of the Firestone concessions, and the League of 
Nations investigations. He stressed the need for a 
fresh approach, both in Liberian government and in 
American attempts at rehabilitation. Appendixes give 
documents of Liberian agreement with the United 
States and with Firestone up to 1939. 

656. Eastman, Ernest. A history of the State of 

Maryland in Liberia. Monrovia, Bureau of 
Information, Department of State [1957?] 
108 p. DT637.M3E18 

The first settlement in Liberia of the freed Negroes 
from America was in 1821 at Cape Mesurado (now 
Monrovia), but other independent settlements were 
made, and in 1833 the American Colonization Society 
established an independent state of Maryland in 
Liberia at Cape Palmas. This was formally annexed 
to the Republic of Liberia in 1857. In this brochure, 
prepared for the centennial celebration, the author 
presents a well-documented history of Maryland in 
Liberia. 

The country around Cape Palmas was the home of the 
Glebo (or Grebo) with whom the state of Maryland was at 
war in 1857. A volume of Traditional History and Folk¬ 
lore of the Glebo Tribe was published by the Liberia Bureau 
of Folklore in 1957 in honor of the centennial. The work, 
prepared by the research officer, S. J. M. Johnson, is a large 
processed pamphlet, the copy received by the Library of 
Congress unfortunately so pale as to be hardly legible. It 
tells the story of the tribe from traditions going back to the 
17 th century, with account of tribal government, social life, 
and customs. A comparable volume (L.C. copy in clearer 
type) Traditional History, Customary Laws, Mores, Folkways 
and Legends of the Vai Tribe, was also published by the 
Bureau of Folkways (Monrovia, 1954? 119 1.). This tribe, 

descendants of the Mandingo peoples of the Sudan, are in 
northwestern Liberia, Sierra Leone and the Ivory Coast ; they 
are one of the two African tribes to have developed their own 
script. (The other is the Mun of Cameroon—see no. 
1144.) 

657. Genevray, J. Elements d’une monographic 

d’une division administrative liberienne 
(Grand Bassa County). Dakar, IFAN, 1952. 
135 p. illus., map. (Memoires de l’lnstitut 
frangais d’Afrique noire, no. 21) 

DT637.G7G4 

Treatise on a region of 9,000 square kilometers 
along the central coast and reaching back into the 
interior of Liberia. Subjects covered include physical 
setting and climate, origins and history of the land¬ 
ings and settlements of colonists from America still 
limited to the towns of the coastal strip, anthropometry 
and habitat of the indigenous tribes, Bassa, Kru and 


114 


Vai, the Liberian administrative system, religious 
practices of Liberians and of the partially Christian¬ 
ized—Protestant—Africans, and the language of the 
Bassa. An appendix is analysis of observations of a 
thousand cases of yaws among the bare-footed 
natives—a disease, says the writer, that never attacks 
those who wear shoes. 

658. Harley, George Way. Native African medi¬ 

cine; with special reference to its practice in the 
Mano tribe of Liberia. Cambridge, Harvard 
University Press, 1941. 294 p. R651.H3 

Ethnological study by a famous medical missionary 
who in his long experience in West Africa has pene¬ 
trated deeply into the native consciousness. In his 
cultural analysis Dr. Harley drew on his own rich 
knowledge and on the findings of other leading Afri¬ 
can scholars. After chapters on the Mano tribe, their 
medicine in general, their conception of treatment of 
disease, which is partly rational and partly magical, 
the medicine of their secret societies, poison, divination, 
etc., he gives in his summary and conclusions a clear 
exposition and definition of fetishism. A supplemen¬ 
tary section, which reflects the writer’s wide study, 
is on “Native medical practice in Africa as a whole.” 
A long bibliography of sources is included. 

Two other ethnological studies by Dr. Harley have been 
published by the Peabody Museum of American Archaeology 
and Ethnology of Harvard University in their monograph 
series, “Notes on the Poro in Liberia” ( Papers, v. 19, no. 
1941), and “Masks as Agents of Social Control in Northeast 
Liberia” ( Papers, v. 32, no. 2, 1950). He also contributed 
additional material to George Schwab’s anthropological sur¬ 
vey (below). Dr. Harley, among his many other activities, 
has been medical consultant to the Firestone Liberia Con¬ 
struction Company as well as to the U.S. Public Health 
Mission in Liberia. 

659. Harvard African Expedition, 1926-1927. The 

African Republic of Liberia and the Belgian 
Congo; based on the observations made and 
material collected . . . Edited by Richard P. 
Strong. Cambridge, Harvard University 
Press, 1930. 2 v. illus. (Contributions from 
the Dept, of Tropical Medicine and the Insti¬ 
tute for Tropical Biology and Medicine, no. 5) 

DT626.H3 

This expedition, which included Dr. Strong, pro¬ 
fessor of tropical medicine at Harvard, and other 
physicians and zoologists, was for the purpose of mak¬ 
ing a biological and medical survey of Liberia, with 
comparative study of other regions including the Bel¬ 
gian Congo. The first part is a resume of the little 


knowledge then available regarding the inhabitants 
of tribal Liberia and the conditions under which they 
live (ca. 200 p). The longer parts in Volume I are 
medical and pathological investigations of various dis¬ 
eases. Volume II is data on zoological investigations. 
The two volumes constitute over a thousand quarto 
pages. 

660. Himmelheber, Hans, and Ulrike Himmel- 

heber. Die Dan , ein Bauernvolk im west - 
afrikanischen Urwald; Ergebnis dreier volker- 
kundlicher Expeditionen im Hinterlande Li- 
berias, 1949/50, 1952/53, 1955/56. Stuttgart, 
W. Kohlhammer, 1958. 256 p. illus. 

GN655.L5H5 

661. Himmelheber, Ulrike. Schwarze Schwester; 

von Mensch zu Mensch in Afrika. Mit 45 
Aufnahmen der Verfasserin. Bremen, C. 
Schunemann, 1957. 213 p. illus., maps (on 
lining papers) DT626.H5 

The first named is the record of three of the six ex¬ 
peditions made by this ethnologist, physician, and art 
expert (see his Negerkunst und Negerkiinstler) , all to 
the country of the Dan tribe in the Liberian hinterland. 
His wife, who accompanied him, was particularly con¬ 
cerned with women’s affairs. In both books the text is 
possibly of secondary interest to the fine photographs. 

662. Holas, Bohumil. Mission dans VEst liberien 

(P. L. Dekeyser, B. Holas, 1948) Resultats 
demographiques, ethnologiques et anthropo- 
metriques. Dakar, IFAN, 1952. 566 p. illus., 
40 plates. (Memoires de PInstitut fran^ais 
d’Afrique noire, no. 14) DT630.H6 

Report of an expedition undertaken by two IFAN 
scientists, the first time this learned institution had 
treated a territory outside the French possessions. Of 
eight parts, the first and longest is “Itineraire,” con¬ 
taining systematic descriptions, in demographic detail 
village by village, of the tribal regions of Eastern Li¬ 
beria through which the authors traveled. Part 2 is 
physical anthropology, with tabled anthropometric 
observations; Part 3, linguistics; Part 4, religion and 
magic; Part 5, “intellectual manifestations,” chiefly in 
arts and crafts. Part 6 is a comprehensive bibliography 
of Liberia (p. 481-530), covering books, pamphlets, 
documents, periodical literature, and maps, in Eng¬ 
lish, French and other languages. Part 7 is given to 
indexes, general (subject and place name), vernacular 
terms, and personal names, and Part 8 is a separate sec¬ 
tion of 39 plates, mostly of ethnological interest. 


115 



663. Huberich, Charles H. The political and 

legislative history of Liberia. New York, Cen¬ 
tral Book Co., 1947. 2 v. (1734 p.) 

DT632.H8 

Subtitle: “A documentary history of the constitutions, 
laws and treaties of Liberia from the earliest settlements to 
the establishment of the Republic, a sketch of the activities 
of the American colonization societies, a commentary on the 
constitution of the Republic and a survey of the political 
and social legislation from 1847 to 1944; with appendices 
containing the laws of the colony of Liberia, 1820-1839, 
and Acts of the Government and Council, 1839-1847.” Fore¬ 
word by Roscoe Pound. 

This exhaustive and heavily documented work, 
which places chief emphasis on legislative history, is 
more useful for reference than for reading. Its ex¬ 
tensive bibliography (p. 1668-1703) covers printed 
material and manuscript collections in the United 
States. 

664. Johnston, Sir Harry H. Liberia. New York, 

Dodd, Mead, 1906. 2 v. DT624.J7 

The classic work on Liberia is by this distinguished 
19th century British colonial administrator and Afri¬ 
canist (see no. 80). The first volume deals compre¬ 
hensively with the period of settlement, the slave trade, 
the establishment of the colony and the first half-cen¬ 
tury of the Republic, the second volume with natural 
history (including an appendix on the flora of Liberia 
by Dr. Otto Stapf of the Kew Herbarium), anthro¬ 
pology and linguistics. 

Two other of the older well-written and highly informed 
British books are Henry Fenwick Reeve’s The Black Republic 
(London, Witherby, 1923), and R. G. F. Maugham’s Re¬ 
public of Liberia (London, Allen & Unwin, New York, Scrib¬ 
ner, 1920), which analyze politics and social conditions. 

665. Reiser, Robert L. Liberia; a report on the 

relations between the United States and Li¬ 
beria. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 
1928. 371 p. (U.S. Dept, of State. Second 
series B, no 1. Liberia no. 1) E183.8.L5K4 

The agreement in 1926 of the Firestone Rubber Co. 
with the Liberian Government for a concession of a 
million acres of land was followed in the same year by 
arrangement of a loan of $5 million through the Fi¬ 
nance Corporation of America, to provide for the re¬ 
habilitation of the deeply embarrassed finance of Li¬ 
beria—a loan which had been arranged in 1922 
through the U.S. Treasury but had failed of ratifica¬ 
tion in the Senate. This study by a Foreign Service 
officer covers the official record of both transactions. 
Mr. Reiser restricted his work to material dealing spe¬ 
cifically with American-Liberian relations, from the 


foundation of the Liberian colonies to 1926, using for 
most of the record the actual text of documents. 
There are five chapters: “Background of Liberian His¬ 
tory”; “Financial and Economic History Prior to 
1923”; “Firestone Projects”; “Concessions”; “United 
States Interests in Liberia Subsequent to 1923.” The 
appendixes are index-digests of documents and lists 
of papers and memoranda. 

666. Liberia. Laws, statutes, etc. Liberian code of 

laws of 1956 , adopted by the Legislature of the 
Republic of Liberia, March 22, 1956. Pub¬ 
lished under authority of the Legislature of 
Liberia and President William V. S. Tubman. 
Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press, 1957. 
3 v. DLC-LL 

667. “Liberia; a Guardian survey.” The Guardian , 

Manchester, Nov. 23, 1961. 5 p. DLC 

Special feature section on Liberia. The first, page 
14, is “The Long Example of Diplomatic Cordiality,” 
beginning with a message from the Liberian ambas¬ 
sador in London. Then on history and nationalism, 
“Bombard and be Damned”; then “The Independent 
Heritage,” by John Hatch (economic and social life), 
“Rising Standards of Education,” by James Johnson, 
“The Anglo-Liberian Society,” by Pamela Collyer, and 
by Hella Pick two articles, “An Economy Built on 
Rubber and Iron,” and a sketch of President Tubman. 
Advertisements of Bank of Liberia, Liberian American- 
Swedish Metals Co., Liberia Mining Co., etc. This 
survey was in honor of the visit of the Queen and Duke 
of Edinburgh to Liberia, Nov. 23, 1961. 

668. The Liberian yearbook for 1962; compiled and 

edited by Henry B. Cole. Monrovia, Liberian 
Review, 1962. 272 p. illus., ports., maps. 

DLC 

Second edition of a comprehensive handbook (1st, 
1956). The 21 chapters cover in factual presentation 
all matters relating to Liberia—land and people, gov¬ 
ernment and administration, economic, social, political, 
and cultural life. Lists of names and addresses of of¬ 
ficials, business firms, and institutions of various kinds 
are included. 

669. Padmore, George. American imperialism en¬ 

slaves Liberia. Moscow, Centrizdat, 1931. 
45 p. DLC 

The African nationalist viewpoint regarding the Fire¬ 
stone concession and the American loan to Liberia was 
expressed in this fiery propaganda booklet. 


116 


670. Price, Frederick A. Liberian odyssey “by ham¬ 

mock and surf boat 33 ; the autobiography of F. 
A. Price. New York, Pageant Press, 1954. 
260 p. illus. BV3625.L6P7 

Account of mission work in Liberia during most of 
the first half of the 20th century. The author, now a 
Liberian citizen and government servant (in 1956 Dr. 
Price was Consul General in New York), went to Li¬ 
beria for the Board of Missions of the Protestant Epis¬ 
copal Church in 1904. His story ranges widely over 
experience in the bush and the cities of the coast, relat¬ 
ing progress in many aspects of Liberian life. 

Among a number of missionary narratives testifying to the 
importance of the American Protestant missions in develop¬ 
ment of hinterland Liberia, there might be noted Adventures 
with the Krus in West Africa, by Walter B. Williams and 
Maude W. Williams (New York, Vantage Press, 1955. 146 

p. illus.), which tells a spirited story, detailed as to local his¬ 
tory, of Methodist missionary stations on the southern coast— 
the “Kru Coast”—from 1909 to 1933. There is also a re¬ 
cent historical study prepared as a thesis (M.A.) at the Ken¬ 
nedy School of Missions of the Hartford Seminary Foundation 
by Harold V. Whetstone, The Lutheran Mission in Liberia 
(New York, Board of Foreign Missions of the United Lu¬ 
theran Church in America, 1955. 255 p. illus.). 

671. Richardson, Nathaniel R. Liberia’s past and 

present. London, Diplomatic Press & Pub. 
Co., 1959. 348 p. illus. DT631.R5 

The author, a high-ranking Americo-Liberian of¬ 
ficer, at time of writing a member of the Army and In¬ 
telligence staff, had formerly been Superintendent of 
Government printing. This large volume, somewhat 
promotional in character, includes biographical 
sketches, a resume of history, short paragraphs on con¬ 
ditions, sketches of presidents, 5-year plan, and texts 
of many documents and addresses. It ends with a 
calendar of events from 1816 to 1952. 

672. Schwab, George. Tribes of the Liberian hin¬ 

terland. Cambridge, Mass., Peabody Muse¬ 
um, 1947. 527 p. Ill plates. (Its Papers, 
v. 31) E51.H337, v. 31 

A big work on the little-studied tribes of Liberia by 
an amateur anthropologist, for 50 years a missionary 
in the Cameroons, who with his wife had undertaken 
an expedition financed by the Peabody Museum in 
1928. It has been edited, with contributions of addi¬ 
tional material, by Dr. G. Way Harley. Twenty-three 
tribes or remnants of tribes are covered, with full tech¬ 
nical data on nine of these regarding their economy, 
village life, social organization, religious beliefs and 
material culture. There are two appendixes, one on 
languages, one a glossary, and a long section of plates 


showing artifacts and physical anthropology. The 
book was reviewed in the American Anthropologist of 
April-June 1949 (v. 51, p. 305-307) by George 
Herzog, author with Charles G. Blooah of Jabo Prov¬ 
erbs from Liberia (London, Oxford University Press, 
1936. 272 p.). The reviewer finds Schwab’s work 
excellent where factual information is concerned, but 
weak on anthropological interpretations, and with “a 
strong ethnocentric bias, partly that of the missionary, 
partly reflected in a patronizing or impatient attitude.” 
There is to date in English no equally detailed eth¬ 
nographic survey of the tribes of the Liberian 
hinterland. 

673. Sibley, James L. Liberia—old and new; a 

study of its social and economic background 
with possibilities of development. Garden 
City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928. 317 p. 

DT624.S5 

The writer had gone to Liberia as educational ad¬ 
viser on behalf of the American Advisory Committee 
on Education, and had much influence on educational 
developments in the country. His book is a good pres¬ 
entation of history and economic and social conditions, 
with particular attention to the native cultures and the 
work of education and missions among the many back¬ 
ward tribes. Part of the book is based on contributions 
by the prominent German anthropologist, Dr. Dietrich 
Westermann, who had made an exhaustive study of 
the Kpelle tribe of central Liberia. 

674. Simpson, C. L. The memoirs of former Liberian 

Ambassador to Washington and to the Court 
of St. James’s; the symbol of Liberia. London, 
Diplomatic Press & Pub. Co., 1961. 293 p. 

DT636.S5A3 

A rambling narrative in which the personal recol¬ 
lections of a Liberian statesman are closely intertwined 
with political life over “more than 40 years of con¬ 
tinuous service to the State . . .” 

675. Staudenraus, P. J. The African colonization 

movement, 1816-1865. New York, Columbia 
University Press, 1961. 323 p. E448.S78 

This thorough study, based largely on the archives 
of the American Colonization Society, a collection of 
several hundred volumes held by the Manuscript Di¬ 
vision of the Library of Congress, is an historical ex¬ 
amination of American social thought regarding 
slavery and colonization rather than of the actual set¬ 
tlement in Liberia. It includes detailed bibliography 
in the “Notes,” p. 252-304, and a “Bibliographical Es¬ 
say,” p. 305-310. 


117 



676. Taylor, Wayne G. The Firestone operations 

in Liberia. Washington, National Planning 
Association, [ c 1956] 115 p. illus. 

HD2709.N322, no. 5 

Cover title: United States business performance abroad; 
the case study of the Firestone operations in Liberia. 

The fifth in an NPA series on U.S. business per¬ 
formance abroad, this is a study of one of the first 
American experiments in investment and large-scale 
plantation operations in tropical Africa. The author 
devoted a beginning third of his text to “Liberia— 
Past and Present,” telling briefly significant facts of 
Liberian geography, history, economic, social, and po¬ 
litical development. Then he recited the steps lead¬ 
ing to the Firestone concession of 1926, with its three 
agreements for harbor, planting, and loan, and ex¬ 
plained the development, operation, and organization 
of the plantations, the care of Liberian workers, the 
arrangements for American and European staff, and 
subsidiary activities of Firestone. The last section 
evaluated Firestone’s impact on the country and the 
future outlook, both for the company and for the 
progress of Liberia. 

677. Tubman, William V. S. President Tubman of 

Liberia speaks, edited by E. Reginald Town¬ 
send. London, Consolidated Publications Co., 
1959. 301 p. illus. DT624.T8 

In the elections of 1943, William V. S. Tubman 
was chosen President of Liberia, then in heavy ec¬ 
onomic difficulties. According to Mr. Townsend, who 
edited this volume of speeches, “A New Day was 
dawning. A New Nation was being born.” In 1963 
President Tubman is nearing the end of his fourth 
term, and has become one of the most powerful lead¬ 
ers of Africa. (See, e.g., sketches in Melady, no. 127n; 
Dean, no. 598n.) This handsomely printed and il¬ 
lustrated volume begins with his first inaugural ad¬ 
dress on January 5, 1944, and continues with his more 
important speeches through 1958. The arrangement 
by subject grouping—educational, health of the na¬ 
tion, political speeches, etc.—covers the interests and 
affairs of the country during the years of his admin¬ 
istration. 

678. U.S. Operations Mission to Liberia. [ Re¬ 

ports] Washington, 195— 

Issued by International Cooperation Administra¬ 
tion, etc. 

American cooperation in economic aid to Liberia 
has been intensified since the Second World War, and 


many missions have made reports. Among the more 
substantial are the following: 

From strength to strength; completion of tour report by 
Griffith J. Davis, audiovisual advisor. [Monrovia, 
Authority Govt. Print. Off., 1953] 79 1. illus. 

HG591.L6U5 

Government building activities in Liberia, 1954-1956, 
completion report by Fred V. Annis, architectural 
advisor. [Washington?] 1956. 76 p. illus., maps. 

HD4366.L5U5 

The marine fisheries program in Liberia. Annual re¬ 
port. 1955- [n.p.] illus. SH315.L5U5 

Third report on forestry progress in Liberia, 1951-1959. 
Washington, 1961. 1 v. [various pagings] illus., 

maps. SD242.L5U57 

12 years of mutual cooperation; terminal report by 
Frank E. Pinder, chief agriculturist U.S.A. Opera¬ 
tions Mission to Liberia, 1944-1957. [Washington, 
195 ] 35 1. 

679. Warner, Esther S. New song in a strange 

land. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. 302 
p. illus. DT629.W3 

680. - Seven days to Lomaland. Boston, 

Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 269 p. illus. 

DT629.W33 

These two books, based on the personal experiences 
of the author, wife of a Firestone research botanist 
living in the rubber plantation, provide a sympathetic 
and vivid interpretation of life, manners, and art of 
the tribesmen, chiefly Mandingo, in western Liberia. 
Mrs. Warner, herself an artist, was much interested 
in arts and crafts. In the first she includes the account 
of a visit to the Ganta Mission and Dr. Harley. The 
second is the narrative of a trek to a faraway village 
with a group of Africans, the purpose being character 
rehabilitation of two of them in accord with local 
custom and rites of the Poro Society. A novel by 
Mrs. Warner, The Silk-Cotton Tree (Doubleday, 
1958. 236 p.), is in the same setting, with a bit of 
life in Monrovia thrown in. In all her books she uses 
much dialog in poetic pidgin English. 

Mrs. Warner’s books are among the more recent of a long 
list of personal narratives of residence and travel in Liberia. 
Probably the best known is Graham Greene’s Journey with¬ 
out Maps (Doubleday, 1936. 310 p.; paperback reprint. 

New York, Viking, 1961, Compass Books), which is in the 
literary tradition of Gide’s Voyage au Congo. The British 
novelist and a woman cousin made an arduous trip in the 
hinterland of Liberia and into Guinea and the Ivory Coast. 
Mr. Greene’s Heart of the Matter, set in an unnamed British 
colony identifiable as Sierra Leone, is a notable English novel 
relating to Africa. 

There is a literary flavor also to the travel narrative of 
an Englishwoman, Lady Dorothy Mills, Through Liberia 
(London, Duckworth, 1926. 240 p.). Another readable 


118 



older book which combines a sketch of history and economy 
with description of life both in Monrovia and among the 
tribes is by an American who had been financial adviser to 
the Liberian Government, Sidney De La Rue, The Land of 
the Pepper Bird: Liberia (New York, London, Putnam, 
1930. 330 p.). Top Hats and Tom-Toms by Elizabeth J. 
Furbay (Chicago, Ziff-Davis, 1943. 307 p.) is focused on 

Americo-Liberian society, “the African equivalent of the 
D.A.R.’s.” Journalistic accounts include Unknown Liberia, 
by Harry J. Greenwall and Roland Wild (London, Hutchin¬ 
son, 1936. 283 p.), a rather sensational expose of Liberian 
politics and of Firestone exploitation, as well as of Leopard 
Men and strange tribal mores. A more optimistic picture 
was given a decade later by an American writer, Charles 
Morrow Wilson, Liberia (New York, William Sloane Associ¬ 
ates, 1947. 226 p.). A French travel writer, Christine 

Gamier, in Les Heros sont fatigues; visages du Liberia 
(Paris, Grasset, 1953. 222 p.), depicts amusingly Monrovia 
society, including, besides Americo-Liberians and tribesmen, 
the many European exiles—adventurers, refugees, the “ex¬ 
hausted heroes” of her title. 

681. Welch, Galbraith. The jet lighthouse; an ac¬ 

count of Liberia. London, Museum Press, 
1960. 270 p. illus. DT624.W4 

By an American woman journalist who had been 
invited to visit Liberia and wrote a travel narrative 
which is a collection of impressions and information, 
sympathetic but not over well organized. Interviews 
with President Tubman are recorded, enforcing Mrs. 
Welch’s idea that recent advances in the country are 
largely due to his strong personality. 

682. Yancy, Ernest J. The Republic of Liberia. 

London, Allen & Unwin, 1959. 156 p. illus., 

maps. DS 

The author, now in the Liberian Diplomatic Serv¬ 


ice, is a historian who had served as Secretary of the 
Department of Public Instruction. He prepared this 
short book as a straightforward, simple account of the 
country, for the use of upper schools and the general 
reader. His viewpoint is that of the Americo- 
Liberians, interested primarily in the history of 
the settlers and their struggles with the tribes. He 
sketches modern political and economic development, 
for which he gives generous credit to President Tub- 
man. An earlier work by Mr. Yancy, also slanted 
toward the settlers, was Historical Lights of Liberia’s 
Yesterday and Today (New York, H. Jaffe, 1934. 
323 p.). 

683. Young, James C. Liberia rediscovered. New 
York, Doubleday, Doran, 1934. 212 p. 

DT635.Y6 

Primarily a history of the establishment and de¬ 
velopment of the Firestone rubber plantations in 
Liberia. The writer set his enthusiastic account of 
the jungle against the background of Liberia’s eco¬ 
nomic and political difficulties—the loans and in¬ 
ternational receivership before the First World War, 
the financial collapse after the war, and the American 
private loan that accompanied the Firestone conces¬ 
sion in 1926, the charges of slavery and forced labor 
that led to investigation before the League of Nations, 
and the resignation of President King and Vice Presi¬ 
dent Yancy. The appendix includes the League of 
Nations’ documents of the plan for assistance to 
Liberia, which was abandoned in 1934, leaving the 
country’s financial rehabilitation for the time being in 
the hands of Firestone. 


Nigeria 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

684. Harris, John. Books about Nigeria ; a select 
reading list. 3d ed. Ibadan, Nigeria, 
Ibadan University Press, 1962. 46 p. 

Z3553.N5H3 1962 
A useful classified and annotated reading list of 
some 350 titles, including periodicals and official re¬ 
ports, compiled by the Librarian of the University of 
Ibadan. In his prefatory note he comments that 50 
new titles have been added since the second edition 
in 1960—an impressive amount of writing on a single 
country. 


685. Ibadan, Nigeria. University College. Li¬ 

brary. Nigerian periodicals and newspapers , 
1950-1955; a list of those received from 
April 1950 to June 1955 under the Publica¬ 
tions ordinance, 1950. Ibadan, 1956. 23 p. 

Z6960.N5I2 

Supplemented regularly in Nigerian Publications. 

686. Nigerian publications, v. 1+ 19534- Ibadan. 

annual, with quarterly supplements. 

Z3353.N5N5 

Published by the Library of the University College 
of Ibadan. Serial list of works received under the 


119 




Publications ordinance by the University College 
Library, following a monograph, Nigerian Publica¬ 
tions, 1950-1952 (43 p.). Included are books in 
English published in Nigeria during the period, works 
in the vernacular, periodicals and newspapers, recent 
works about Nigeria published outside the country. 
This is the only substantial national bibliography pub¬ 
lished in Black Africa. 

687. Perry, Ruth. A preliminary bibliography of 

the literature of nationalism in Nigeria, [n.p., 
1955-56?] 38 p. Transcript. DLC-AFR 
By a librarian from the Hoover Library at Stanford 
University who had studied under a Fulbright grant 
in Nigeria. Nine pages of her posthumously issued 
manuscript are devoted to a review of the educational 
and literary aspects of Nigerian nationalism from its 
mid-19th-century beginnings through its great upsurge 
during the past decade. Her bibliography is limited 
to titles of works—mainly pamphlets—on politics, his¬ 
tory, tribal laws and customs, biographies, and trade 
union publications printed by the private presses of 
Nigeria. Sixty-five per cent of the almost 300 items 
listed are preserved in the Library of the University 
College at Ibadan, the rest were located in local and 
private collections. 

688. U.S. Library of Congress. General Reference 

and Bibliography Division. Nigerian official 
publications , 1869-1959; a guide compiled by 
Helen F. Conover. Washington, 1959. 
153 p. Z3553.N5U5 

GENERAL 

689. Buchanan, Keith M., and John C. Pugh. 

Land and people in Nigeria : the human 
geography of Nigeria and its environmental 
background. London, University of London 
Press, 1955. 252 p. illus. DT515.B75 
Standard geographical survey of Nigeria, consider¬ 
ing environment, people, agricultural economy, natural 
resources, transport and communications, public and 
social services. Professor Buchanan was at one time 
Head of the Department of Geography at Ibadan, and 
Mr. Pugh formerly of the Nigerian Survey Depart¬ 
ment. A section on health problems (p. 41-57) is by 
Professor A. Brown. The last chapter is devoted to 
problems to be stressed in development plans, 
emphasizing the primary importance of education for 
the Nigerians. A number of chapters are followed 


by bibliography. The 6th edition, 1958, was re¬ 
printed in 1961. 

A nicely planned booklet, Human Geography of Nigeria, 
written for secondary school and training college use, is by 
George D. Watson (London, Longmans, 1960. 180 p.). 

The author is at Government College in Zaria. 

690. Collis, William R. F. African encounter; a 

doctor in Nigeria. New York, Scribner, 1961. 
211 p. illus. R489.C65A28 

First published in England as A Doctor’s Nigeria. 

Account of personal experience in a Lagos hospital 
and trips far and wide about the country. The author 
is an Irish pediatrician who was instrumental in ar¬ 
ranging conferences on child health. 

691. Dickson, Mora. New Nigerians. With illus. 

by the author. London, Dobson, 1960. 
254 p. illus. LG481.V5D5 

American ed. Rand McNally, Chicago. 

A personal but revealing account of the Man-O-War 
Bay Training Centre in the former British Cameroons 
to which potential young Nigerian leaders were 

brought for intensive courses. 

692. The Diplomatic Press directory of the Federation 

of Nigeria, including trade index and biograph¬ 
ical section. 1960+ London, Diplomatic 

Press & Pub. Co. illus., ports. 

DT515.A5613 

It is hoped that this useful reference work will ap¬ 
pear regularly. The 2d edition, 1962, has 248 p. 

693. Grant, James. + geography of Western Nige¬ 

ria. Cambridge [Eng.] University Press, 
1960. 95 p. illus. DT515.G69 

Large pamphlet, well printed and illustrated, for 
secondary school use in Nigeria. 

694. Mitchison, Lois. Nigeria; newest nation. 

New York, Praeger, 1960. 122 p. illus. 

(Books that matter) DT515.M58 

Perceptive picture of the country at the moment of 
independence, by a young British journalist. 

695. Nigeria. The Nigeria handbook. London, 

Published by the Crown Agent on behalf of the 
Government of Nigeria. 12th ed. 1953. 
339 p. illus., tables, maps. DT515.A44 
This formerly indispensable work, containing essays, 
statistics, and tabular data on all aspects of the coun¬ 
try and its life, is now so outdated as to be of use for his¬ 
torical research only. 


120 


696. Nigeria in costume; pictures by John Danford. 

Lagos, The Shell Co. of Nigeria Ltd., 1960. 
illus., col. plates. 

A handsome album of plates, mostly in color, show¬ 
ing typical costumes of various regions, tribes and pro¬ 
fessions of Nigeria. The book was printed by L. Van 
Leer & Co. of London and Amsterdam. 

697. Nigeria, 1960. Edited by Michael Crowder, with 

assistance of L. O. Ukeje and Onuora Nzekwu. 
Lagos, Federal Govt. Printing Dept., 1960. 
232, vii p. illus. DT515.4.N5 

Special independence issue of Nigeria Magazine, October 
1960. Includes advertising section. 

A .group of feature articles on Nigerian history, econ¬ 
omy, arts, life, and on individual cities, regions, and 
tribes. Brief biographical notes on the contributors 
are given on page 232. 

The quarterly Nigeria Magazine has been published since 
1934 by the Nigeria Education Department. Its issues are 
often devoted to a single theme, or even a special publication: 
e.g., Robin Horton, The Gods as Guests; An Aspect of 
Kalabar Religious Life (1960). In 1962 Michael Crowder 
has been succeeded as editor by the Nigerian writer, Onuora 
Nzekwu. 

698. Nigeria year book. Appa, Times Press, 19514- 

annual. DT515.N48 

Directory and guide of the almanac type, including a 
“Commercial who’s who in Lagos.” 1962 edition, 
272 p. 

699. Ryan, Isobel. Black man’s country. Illus. by 

“Bill.” London, Cape, 1950. 276 p. illus. 

DT515.R95 

Narrative by the wife of a Development officer con¬ 
cerned with erosion prevention in Agulu, bush village 
of Southern Nigeria, among the Ibo. Mrs. Ryan 
writes understanding^, although she admits that “for 
the White Man (or Woman) to see life through the 
eyes of the bush Africans is a feat rarely accomplished 
and then only by those of remarkably selfless, brilliantly 
sympathetic disposition. We could only be observers 
of, not true participants in Agulu’s way of life.” 

700. Who’s who in Nigeria; a biographical dictionary. 

Lagos, Nigerian Print. & Pub. Co., 1956. 
278 p. ports. DT515.6.A1W51 

Edited by the Nigerian newspaper, the Daily Times. 
This was announced as a first edition. No later revi¬ 
sions have reached the Library of Congress in 1962. 


HISTORY 

701. Barth, Heinrich. Barth’s travels in Nigeria. 

Selected and edited, with an introduction, by 
A. H. M. Kirk-Greene. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, for Overseas Newspapers Group, 
1962. 300 p. (West African history series) 

DT515.2.B313 

An admirable selection from the five volumes of 
Barth’s report of his 6 years’ travel from Tripoli 
through the Sahara to West Africa which was pub¬ 
lished in London and Germany in 1857. (A reprint 
in 5 volumes of the original German edition of 1857- 
58 is being issued by Bonner, London, in 1963.) Mr. 
Kirk-Greene’s introduction serves as an excellent 
biography of the traveler. The book is reviewed by 
Basil Davidson in West Africa, Mar. 3, 1962, and by 
Conrad Reining in the American Historical Review of 
Oct. 1962. 

702. Biobaku, Saburi Ola1>eni. The Egba and 

their neighbours, 1842-1872. Oxford, Clar¬ 
endon Press, 1957. vi, 128 p. maps, tables. 
(Oxford studies in African affairs) 

DT515.B5 

Bibliography: p. 108-118. 

A historical study of the State of the Egba, a Yoruba 
tribe, during the first penetration by the British. The 
chief Egba city, Abeokuta, between Lagos and Ibadan, 
was reached by British missionaries in 1842, but the 
Egba “came to be regarded by the Lagos authorities as 
the chief obstacle to peace in the neighborhood.” 

703. Blood, Sir Hilary, comp. Eminent Nigerians 

of the nineteenth century. Cambridge [Eng.] 
University Press, 1960. 97 p. DT515.N49 
A collection of addresses by noted African and 
British historians, given for the Nigerian Broadcasting 
Corporation. The introduction is by Professor Dike. 
The eminent Nigerians include rulers who resisted the 
British, religious and educational leaders, and the 
first of the successful West African women traders. 

704. Burns, Sir Alan C. History of Nigeria. 5th 

ed. London, Allen & Unwin, 1955. 349 p. 
maps. DT515.B8 1955 

This standard history of Nigeria, first published in 
1929, is largely confined to the period of European 
control. In the latest (1955) edition, the account of 
political and social change is brought up through the 


121 



postwar changes and federal and regional govern¬ 
ments established by the 1951 Constitution. The 
author served in Nigeria in the early days of his dis¬ 
tinguished civil service career (1912-24), then was 
acting Governor in 1942, while at the same time war¬ 
time Governor of the Gold Coast. From 1947-56 Sir 
Alan was the U.K. Representative on the Trusteeship 
Council of the United Nations. 

705. Crowder, Michael. A short history of Nigeria. 

New York, Praeger, 1962. 307 p. (Books 
that matter) DT515.5.C7 

This is a straightforward and interesting narrative 
of Nigerian history, based largely on modern research 
recorded in a six-page bibliography and written with¬ 
out show of scholarship as a clear account for the 
general reader. 

706. Dike, Kenneth Onwuka. 100 years of British 

rule in Nigeria, 1851-1951; a reprint of the 
1956 Lugard lectures. Lagos, Federal Infor¬ 
mation Service, 1958. 49 p. illus. 

DT515.D5 

707. - Origins of the Niger Mission, 1841- 

1891; a paper read at the centenary of the 
mission at Christ Church, Onitsha, on 13 No¬ 
vember 1957. Ibadan, Published for the 
C.M.S. Niger Mission by the Ibadan Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1957. 21 p. BV3625.N5D5 

Includes bibliography. A new edition has been issued 
in 1962. 

708. - Trade and politics in the Niger Delta, 

1830-1885, an introduction to the economic 
and political history of Nigeria. Oxford, 
Clarendon Press, 1956. 250 p. (Oxford 

studies in African affairs) HG517.N48D5 
Dr. Dike is a distinguished African historian, for¬ 
merly professor, now Principal at University College, 
Ibadan, which in 1962 became the University of 
Ibadan. He is also on the editorial board of the 
Journal of African History. The last of the above- 
mentioned published volumes, a notable example of 
African scholarship based on his doctoral thesis at 
the University of London, is a thoroughly documented 
study of the gradual supplanting of the Native gov¬ 
ernments of Nigeria by British administration. The 
same theme is treated in condensed form in his 1956 
Lugard Lectures, and a particular aspect of British 
penetration is the subject of his paper on the Niger 
Mission. 


709. Egharevba, Jacob U. A short history of Benin. 

3d ed. Ibadan, Ibadan University Press, 1960. 
101 p. illus. DT515.9.B4E35 1960 

Another work by a Nigerian scholar, examining rec¬ 
ords of the past. 

710. Flint, John E. Sir George Goldie and the 

making of Nigeria. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1960. 340 p. illus. (West Af¬ 
rican history series) DT515.6.G6F55 

Historical study of the chartered Royal Niger Com¬ 
pany; reviewed by A. Kirk-Greene in Africa, October 
1961. 

711. Hodgkin, Thomas L. Nigerian perspectives; 

a historical anthology. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1960. 340 p. illus. (West Af¬ 
rican history series) DT515.A3H6 

This work, called by reviewers “indispensable,” is 
a selection of documents concerned with the pre¬ 
colonial history of Nigerian peoples. The extracts 
are from European and Arabic sources, recorded oral 
tradition, local chronicles, etc., chosen to illustrate 
the past of five major regions—Kanem-Bornu, the 
Hausa States, the Oyo Empire and Yoruba successor 
States of the 19th century, the Kingdoms of Benin 
and Warri, the Delta States and Iboland. In 1962-63 
Professor Hodgkin accepted the post of director of the 
new Department of African Studies at the University 
of Ghana. 

712. Kirk-Greene, Anthony H. M. Adamawa, 

past and present; a historical approach to the 
development of a northern Cameroons prov¬ 
ince. London, New York, Published for the 
International African Institute by Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1958. 230 p. maps. 

DT515.K57 

Dr. Kirk-Greene here describes the province in 
which he had spent several years as a district officer 
in all aspects, geographical, social, and economic, of 
the present, and relates its history during the last two 
centuries, particularly as to Fulani kingdoms which 
rose and fell in this region. The appendixes include 
historical and ethnographic material. The author 
had made extensive use of source materials in Arabic 
and Western languages, among them the narrative 
of the early traveler, Barth (see above). Since inde¬ 
pendence Dr. Kirk-Greene has been director of the 
Institute of Administration in Zaria. A booklet by 
him, This Is Northern Nigeria; Background to an In¬ 
vitation, was issued by the Government Printer of 


122 




Northern Nigeria, Kaduna, in 1956, with text in Eng¬ 
lish and Hausa. He is a frequent contributor to Af¬ 
ricanist journals. 

713. Niven, Cecil R. A short history of the Yoruba 

peoples. London, New York, Longmans, 
Green, 1958. 135 p. illus. DT513.N73 
The writer was for many years in the Colonial Serv¬ 
ice in Nigeria; he now lives in Kaduna, where he is 
Commissioner for Special Duties in Northern Nigeria, 
having been President of the Northern House of As¬ 
sembly from 1947 to 1958 and Speaker from 1958 to 
1959. His first book, A Short History of Nigeria 
(1937), has been followed by several others addressed 
to the general public, especially the African reader; 
among these are Nigeria: The Outline of a Colony 
(London, T. Nelson, 1946, 162 p.); How Nigeria Is 
Governed (Longmans, Green, 1950; 3d ed., 1958. 
184 p.) : You and Your Government (London, Evans 
Bros., 1958. 94 p.; a booklet in civics); and the book¬ 
let cited above. The latter, adapted to schools of 
Western Nigeria, is almost entirely African [i.e. non- 
European] history. 

714. Pedraza, Howard J. Borrioboola-Gha; the story 

of Lokoja, the first British settlement in Ni¬ 
geria. London, Oxford University Press, 1960. 
118 p. illus. DT515.9L6P4 

A detailed account of the first expeditions on the left 
bank of the Niger, particularly that of Baikie in 1832, 
and the establishment of the settlement at Lokoja un¬ 
der Sir George Goldie’s Royal Niger Company. The 
title is taken from Mrs. Jellyby in Dickens’ Bleak 
House, who neglected home duties for an imaginary 
missionary settlement. The book is reviewed by An¬ 
thony Kirk-Greene in Africa, April 1961, p. 193-194. 

POLITICS 

715. Ajuluchuku, M. C. K. Profiles of the minis¬ 

ters of Eastern Nigeria. Enugu, Eastern Ni¬ 
geria Ministry of Internal Affairs, 1960. 
122 p. illus. DT515.9.E3A6 

A brochure in deluxe format, with full-page photo¬ 
graphs and biographical sketches of 5 to 10 pages, on 
the Premier, Dr. Okpara, and the Cabinet Ministers 
of the Eastern Region in 1960. The account of educa¬ 
tion and careers of the 14 subjects makes impressive 
reading. 

There have been several editions of a brochure published 
by the Information Services in Kaduna, Northern Nigeria 
Legislature Who’s Who. The latest is commented on in 
West Africa, April 28, 1962, as being up to date. 


716. Awolowo, Obafemi. Awo; the autobiography 

of Chief Obafemi Awolowo. Cambridge 
[Eng.] University Press, 1960. 315 p. illus. 

DT515.6.A9A3 

717. - Path to Nigerian freedom; with a fore¬ 

word by Margery Perham. London, Faber & 
Faber, 1947. 137 p. JQ3082.A85 

The spirited autobiography of the Yoruba leader 
of the Action Group, former Premier of the Western 
Region, takes the author from childhood through his 
career in the nationalist movement from its early years 
to almost the moment of its triumph, with full inde¬ 
pendence scheduled. It is reviewed in African Affairs 
of October 1961, p. 542-543. Chief Awolowo’s book 
of 1947 was written just as he attained to the Bar of 
Nigeria (November 1946), at the time when he was 
leader of the Youth Movement in Ibadan. Much of 
the text is criticism of the Richards Constitution of 
1945; while supporting (contrary to Azikiwe) the divi¬ 
sion of the country into regions, Awolowo demanded 
faster progress toward self-government. Miss Perham, 
asked to write a foreword, contributed a thoughtful 
short essay on the aspirations and methods of the 
young nationalists, characterizing Awolowo as a “rela¬ 
tively moderate and certainly a rational and construc¬ 
tive critic of British rule.” 

718. Azikiwe, Nnamdi. Zik, a selection from the 

speeches of Nnamdi Azikiwe. Cambridge, 
University Press, 1961. 344 p. 

DT515.6.A9A5 

This selection of the speeches of the dynamic leader 
of Nigerian nationalism, former Premier of Eastern 
Nigeria, and Governor-General of the Federation of 
Nigeria from October 1960, begins with lectures as a 
graduate student in America in 1927, and offers the 
most celebrated examples of Zik’s oratory through 
1959. Among topics are education, democracy, the 
color bar, finance and banking, the press and broad¬ 
casting, Moral Rearmament, local government, the 
Church Missionary Society, and many aspects of anti¬ 
colonial politics. Dr. Azikiwe’s first major work was 
Liberia in World Politics, published in 1934 (see no. 
653), his second, voicing the now realized hopes for 
his country, Renascent Africa (Accra, 1937). As 
leader of the nationalist movement his organ was the 
West African Pilot (1938+) of which he was editor 
for many years. His Development of Political Parties 
in Nigeria, summarizing Nigerian nationalist history, 
was delivered as a lecture at Oxford in 1957 (published 
by Eastern Region of Nigeria Office, London, 24 p.). 


692 - 756—63 


9 


123 




Biographical sketches of Dr. Azikiwe have been included 
in several works on African leaders. A full-length biography 
by a Nigerian colleague appeared in 1961: Zik of New 
Africa, by Vincent G. Ikeotuonye (London, Geneva, P. R. 
Macmillan. 262 p.). 

719. Bello, Sir Ahmadu. My life. Cambridge 

[Eng.] University Press, 1962. 225 p. 

DT515.6.B4A3 

The autobiography of the Sardauna of Sokoto, 
political and spiritual leader of Northern Nigeria. A 
portion of the last chapter of this work was reprinted 
in West Africa, Nov. 17, 1962. 

720. Bretton, Henry L. Power and stability in 

Nigeria; the politics of decolonization. New 
York, F. A. Praeger, 1962. 208 p. (Books 

that matter) DT515.8.B7 

Not yet examined. 

721. Coker, G. B. A. Family property among the 

Yorubas. London, Sweet & Maxwell, 1958. 
314 p. DLC-LL 

By a Yoruba lawyer, this is a study based on cases 
disputing land and other family property in the fusion 
of British and customary law. It is reviewed in Africa, 
January 1961, p. 291-292. 

722. Coleman, James S. Nigeria: background to 

nationalism. Berkeley, University of Cali¬ 
fornia Press, 1958. 510 p. illus., ports, maps. 

DT515.C685 

Bibliography: p. 481-496. 

Dr. Coleman’s history of the emergence of the 
Nigerian nation from colony to full self-government 
(his survey ends three years short of independence) 
is a notable contribution to American scholarship 
regarding African affairs. The first part is physical, 
cultural, and historical background, the second an 
analysis of the factors in the Western impact which 
led to social and political change. With Part 3, page 
169, he turns to a detailed account of the beginnings 
and progress of the nationalist movement in the inter¬ 
war years, carrying it in the last part to the postwar 
achievement of the new era of self-government. 
Among many reviews, there might be mentioned that 
by Dr. Lucy Mair in Africa, April 1960, p. 189-191. 

723. Davies, H. O. Nigeria; the prospects for de¬ 

mocracy. London, Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 
1961. 135 p. DT515.8.D3 

Chief Davies, a Lagos barrister, was one of the 
organizers, in the midthirties, of the Lagos Youth 
Movement which spearheaded Nigerian nationalism. 


Now an elder statesman, he writes here an objective 
analysis of Nigerian politics. After an outline of 
economy, constitution, and political parties he dis¬ 
cusses the distinctions between democracy and military 
regimes, turning specifically to the drift in Ghana to 
one-party rule, then analyzing Nigeria’s problems. 

724. Elias, Taslim Olawale. Nigerian land law 

and custom. 3d ed. rev. London, Rout- 
ledge &K. Paul, 1962. 386 p. DLC-LL 
This work was published first as Dr. Elias’ LL.D. 
thesis at the University of London. (He is in 1962 
Attorney-General of Nigeria). A second edition came 
in 1953, since when it has been recognized as a stand¬ 
ard study of the principles of Nigerian land tenure in 
the light of “the growing body of case law.” The text 
is preceded by a Table of Cases and a Table of Ordi¬ 
nances, and concluded with bibliography and index. 
A second book, Groundwork of Nigerian Law (Lon¬ 
don, Routledge & Paul, 1954. 374 p.), was intended 
as a textbook for fellow countrymen who, like the 
author, take their law degree abroad and return to 
practice in Nigeria. The volume is in four parts, first 
an examination of the sources of Nigerian law in indig¬ 
enous local and customary law, the British common 
law, ordinances, etc. Part 2 is a detailed history of 
Nigerian courts from the mid-19th century to 1954, 
including the latest changes under the new constitu¬ 
tion. Part 3 analyzes Nigerian law according to the 
branches of the common law—criminal law, law of 
contract, law of torts, etc. Finally, Part 4 examines 
the role of the lawyer in Nigeria, offering suggestions 
for future development, the most strongly urged of 
which is establishment of a Nigerian Law College 
where teaching will focus on legal aspects special to 
Nigeria. A paper by Dr. Elias, Makers of Nigerian 
Law (London, 1956. 55 p.), was reprinted from a 
series of articles in West Africa in 1955-56. 

725. Ezera, Kalu. Constitutional developments in 

Nigeria; an analytical study of Nigeria’s con¬ 
stitution-making developments and the his¬ 
torical and political factors that affected con¬ 
stitutional change. Cambridge, University 
Press, 1960. xv, 274 p. maps. JQ3082.E95 
Bibliography: p.262-270. 

Clear, factual analysis of the constitutional history 
of Nigeria. Dr. Ezera, now in the Department of 
Government at Ibadan University, had been a re¬ 
search student at Nuffield College and received his 
doctorate at Oxford, after earlier study in America 
(Lincoln University and Harvard). The book is re- 


124 


viewed, together with other works on Nigeria (includ¬ 
ing Awolowo’s autobiography), by Harvey Glickman 
in Africa Report, January 1961. 

726. Harris, Philip J. Local government in south¬ 

ern Nigeria; a manual of law and procedure 
under the Eastern Region local government 
law, 1955, and the Western Region local gov¬ 
ernment law, 1952. Cambridge, University 
Press, 1957. 348 p. DLG-LL 

Includes legislation. 

727. Nigeria. Laws, statutes, etc. The laws of the 

Federation of Nigeria and Lagos; in force on 
the 1st day of June, 1958. Rev. ed. ... by 
Donald Kingdon. London, Printed by Eyre & 
Spottiswoode, 1959. 12 v. DLC-LL 

For Nigeria, as for the English colonies in general, 
under the colonial administration annual volumes of 
legislation were published and periodic compilations 
made. They include provisions of customary law as 
well as English law. Full details regarding them are 
being given in the series of official publications of Af¬ 
rican governments now being issued by the Library 
of Congress (see no. 688). 

728. - Nigerianisation Office. Guide to ca¬ 

reers in the Federal Public Service of Nigeria. 
Lagos, Federal Govt. Printer, 1961. 322 p. 

DLC 

The very size of this official pamphlet shows the 
urgency of its subject. 

729. Olugboji, Dayo. The United States of West 

Africa and Realpolitik. Lagos, Nigeria, 1959. 
44 p. DT471.04 

Typical of the thoughtful political writings being 
produced by the West African elite is this criticism by 
a Nigerian of “the Pan idea and all that.” The 
writer suggests that an alternative for West Africa 
consists “not in flabby appeal to the emotions of race 
or in fanning the sentiments of nationalism, but in 
the practical and realistic arrangement for a Union of 
the states.” 

730. Orizu, Akweke A. Nwafor. Without bitter¬ 

ness: Western nations in post-war Africa. 
New York, Creative Age Press, 1944. 395 p. 

DT14.07 

The writer, a Nigerian prince, had studied in 
American colleges and was founder of the American 
Council on African Education, which brings advanced 
Africans to a number of American institutions. A 
follower in the early years of Nnamdi Azikiwe, much 


of his book is his interpretation of what he calls 
“Zikism,” an aspect of the philosophy of the “New 
Africa” enunciated by the leader, demanding eco¬ 
nomic, social, and political freedom. 

731. Perham, Margery F. Native administration 

in Nigeria. London, New York, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1937. 404 p. fold. maps. 

DT515.P45 

Reprint, 1961. 

Miss Perham spent 9 months in Nigeria making the 
studies which led to this comprehensive analysis, 
region by region, of the methods of indirect rule among 
many and varied native tribes. The author is con¬ 
cerned over British policy, not only as to the lag of 
research—she speaks sadly of the priority given to 
taxation over anthropology—but as to the delicate 
balance needed between control and freedom: “a 
mean between over-regulation, which even under a 
system of indirect rule can drain the remaining sense 
of responsibility from tribal communities, and upon 
the other hand, a laisser-faire attitude which allows 
them to drift into unforeseen maladjustments or even 
dangers. I believe that almost everywhere in Africa, 
even in Nigeria, we err upon the side of over-regula¬ 
tion.” 

732. Royal Institute of International Affairs. 

Nigeria; the political and economic back¬ 
ground. London, New York, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1960. 141 p. DT515.7.R65 

The contents of this concise and factual survey fall 
into two almost equal parts. The first is political and 
social, including a general geographical picture, an 
outline of recorded history, and summary of political 
developments, with a section devoted to the Cam- 
eroons. The second part, fortified with charts and 
statistics, is an economic survey, ending with develop¬ 
ment plans up to 1960. For the new 7-year develop¬ 
ment plan promulgated in the spring of 1962, see no. 
745. 

733. Tilman, Robert O., and Taylor Cole, eds. 

The Nigerian political scene. Durham, N.C., 
Published for the Duke University Common¬ 
wealth-Studies Center by Duke University 
Press, 1962. 340 p. (Duke University Com¬ 
monwealth-Studies Center. Publication no. 
17) DT515.8.T5 

In 1962 the most recent African addition to the 
Commonwealth nations, as also to this university 
series, is a volume of essays by American and British 
social and political scientists. Their analyses embrace 


125 




traditional socio-political background and evolution of 
British policy, the federal state now being construct¬ 
ed, its administration and foreign policy, the press¬ 
ing problems of economic development, prospects for 
democracy in Nigeria and for authoritarian tenden¬ 
cies of the new African nations. As appendix, a bibli¬ 
ographical essay by Father James O’Connel of Uni¬ 
versity College, Ibadan surveys social science research 
on Nigeria since the end of 1957. 

An extended analysis by Richard L. Sklar, Politics of Ni¬ 
geria, is scheduled for publication in 1963 by the Pittsburgh 
University Press. 

734. Uwanaka, Charles U. Zik and Awolowo in 

political storm. Independence ed. Onitsha, 
Ezeagwu Bookshop, 1960. 89 p. 

DT515.8.U89 1960 

A typical Nigerian political pamphlet. 

735. Wheare, Joan. The Nigerian Legislative 

Council. With an introd. by Margery Per- 
ham. London, Published under the auspices 
of Nuffield College by Faber & Faber, 1950. 
xxiii, 265 p. fold. map. (Studies in colonial 
legislatures, v. 4) JQ3093.W48 1950 

Mrs. Wheare’s authoritative study shows how for 
many years the effective institutions of Nigeria were 
the native administrations—a policy of “differentia¬ 
tion,” as opposed to the unity of legislation vested in 
the Legislative Council. She described the back¬ 
ground and evolution of the Council, its nature and 
composition (including the personalities of the “Zik” 
nationalist group), its working from 1922 to 1926, and 
constitutional prospects under the then new 1946 Con¬ 
stitution (Richards Constitution). Miss Perham, edi¬ 
tor of the series, in her introduction characterized the 
Constitution with its majority of native members as 
“an ingenious attempt to bring together the two 
parallel principles of Nigerian government [unity and 
differentiation] not only into harmony but into com¬ 
plete articulation ... a central legislature which, 
for the first time, represented the whole country.” 

ECONOMICS AND SOCIAL 
STUDIES 

736. Ardener, Edwin. Divorce and fertility; an 

African study. London, Published for the 
Nigerian Institute of Social and Economic Re¬ 
search by Oxford University Press, 1962. 
171 p. (Nigerian social and economic studies, 
no. 3) GN480.A7 

Not yet examined. 


737. Baldwin, Kenneth D. S. The marketing of 

cocoa in western Nigeria , with special refer¬ 
ence to the position of middlemen. London, 
Oxford University Press, 1954. 52 p. 

HD9200.N5B3 

738. - The Niger agricultural project; an ex¬ 

periment in African development. Cam¬ 
bridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1957. 
221 p. illus. S471.N7B3 

The author of the factual account of workings of 
the system under the Nigerian Cocoa Marketing 
Board, an officer in the Agricultural Service, had been 
Senior Research Officer for a committee surveying the 
cocoa economy in 1951—52. Attention is given to the 
role of middlemen and attitudes of the farmers. Mr. 
Baldwin’s later study is of the Mokwa experiment in 
mechanized farming. 

739. Hogg, V. W., and C. M. Roelandts. Nigerian 

motor vehicle traffic, an economic forecast. 
London, published for the Nigerian Institute 
of Social and Economic Research by Oxford 
University Press, 1962. 72 p. (Nigerian 

social and economic studies, no. 2) 

HE373.N5H6 

The Institute which sponsors the series of Nigerian 
Social and Economic Studies was established at Ibadan 
in 1952 under the name of West African Institute of 
Social and Economic Research. It has published an¬ 
nual reports and papers of its annual conferences. 

740. International Bank for Reconstruction 

and Development. The economic develop¬ 
ment of Nigeria; report of a mission organized 
by the International Bank for Reconstruction 
and Development at the request of the Gov¬ 
ernments of Nigeria and the United Kingdom. 
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1955. 686 p. 

maps, diagrs., tables. HC517.N48I5 1955 

Study prepared in connection with technical aid by 
a mission of experts on agriculture, money and bank¬ 
ing, transportation, mineral resources, roads, water 
resources and power, who had made a full survey in 
late 1953. The first part of the report embodies rec¬ 
ommendations for organization and financing of a 
5-year development program. Part 2 consists of tech¬ 
nical reports on specific phases, and Part 3 of ap¬ 
pendixes giving mainly statistical data. Many maps, 
charts, and tables occur throughout the volume. 


126 



741. Jackson, I. C. Advance in Africa, a study of 

community development in Eastern Nigeria. 
London, Oxford University Press, 1956. 
110 p. HD990.N5N66 

By the former principal of the Awgu Training 
Centre in Eastern Nigeria, this is an account of work 
done in local villages, where the villagers themselves 
had built roads, schools, and hospitals under African 
leaders who had followed the short courses in com¬ 
munity development given at the Centre. 

742. Marris, Peter. Family and social change in an 

African city; a study of rehousing in Lagos. 
Evanston, Ill., Northwestern University Press, 
1962. 180 p. illus. (Northwestern Univer¬ 

sity African studies, no. 8) 

HN800.L3M3 1962 

Includes bibliography. 

By a staff member of the Institute of Community 
Studies in London, who had surveyed a slum-clear¬ 
ance area and the new housing development 6 miles 
out of town, and analyzes sympathetically the shatter¬ 
ing effects on some of the families moved to the new 
location. 

743. Nederlands Adviesbureau voor Ingenieurs- 

werken in het Buitenland. River studies 
and recommendations on improvement of 
Niger and Benue. Amsterdam, North-Hol- 
land Pub. Co., 1959. 1,000 p. illus., maps. 

TC519.N5N4 

Bibliography: p. 981-989. 

744. - River charts of the Niger from Burutu 

to Jebba and the Benue from Lokoja to Garua. 
Niger and Benue investigation, final report 
1959. The Hague, NEDECO, 1959, 64 p. of 
maps. 36 x 67 cm. TC519.N5N4 

A huge engineering study prepared by a group of 
experts during 3 years of investigation in Nigeria, and 
providing for submission to the Nigerian Government 
what the Bureau considered “a justified and workable 
programme of successive improvements to the ship¬ 
ping conditions” of the two rivers. 

745. Nigeria. Federal Government development 

programme 1962-1968. Lagos, F ederal Print¬ 
ing Division, 1962. DLC 

Summaries of the federal and regional seven-year 
plans for economic development were published in a 
series of five articles in West Africa, April 7 to May 5, 
1962. 


746. Nigeria. Cocoa Marketing Board. Nigerian 

cocoa farmers, an economic survey of Yoruba 
cocoa farming families, by R. Galletti, K. D. S. 
Baldwin, and I. O. Dina. London, Oxford 
University Press, 1956. 744 p. maps, tables, 
diagrs. SB267.N5 

Survey of the social and economic organizations, re¬ 
sources, and way of life of the Yoruba cocoa-farming 
communities in Nigeria. The first half of the study is 
in general terms, the second half a statistical analysis 
of the economic records of 187 families, following their 
work through a full year. 

747. Nigeria. Federal Ministry of Commerce and 

Industries. Handbook of commerce and in¬ 
dustry in Nigeria. 4th ed., Lagos, 1960. 
338 p. HC517.N48A35 

The first edition of this booklet of useful informa¬ 
tion for businessmen was issued in 1952. It includes 
surveys and statistics of economic and governmental 
life, useful addresses, tables, maps, and miscellaneous 
commercial facts. This office has issued also an In¬ 
dustrial Directory of Nigeria (1963?) which lists some 
700 major manufacturing plants in the country. 

748. Nigeria. National Economic Council. Joint 

Planning Committee. Economic survey of 
Nigeria 1959. Lagos, Federal Govt. Printer, 
1959. 132 p. plate, col. maps, tables. 

HC517.N48A55 1959 

Valuable assemblage of statistics and summary arti¬ 
cles regarding the position and outlook of the economy 
of Nigeria as of mid-1958, with a review of economic 
development since 1945. 

An earlier survey of somewhat the same nature, made by 
the Near Eastern and African Division of the U.S. Bureau of 
Foreign Commerce was published in 1957: Investment in 
Nigeria; Basic Information for United States Businessmen 
(prepared by Bernard Blankenheimer and others). (Wash¬ 
ington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 182 p.). 

749. Nigerian journal of economic and social studies. 

no. 1+ May 1959+ Ibadan, 3 times a 
year. DLC 

Publication of the Nigerian Economic Society, 
edited at University College, Ibadan. 

750. Okigbo, Pius Nwabafo. Nigerian national ac¬ 

counts, 1950-57. Enugu, Eastern Nigeria, 
Federal Ministry of Economic Development, 
1962. 206 p. DLC 

Basic official document on the Nigerian economy of 
the fifties by a Nigerian economist who has studied in 


127 




America and England. The review of national 
finances was begun under the auspices of the Colonial 
Office, and authorized after independence by the Fed¬ 
eral Ministry of Economic Development. 

751. Orewa, G. O. Taxation in Western Nigeria; 

the problems of an emergent state. London, 
Published for the Nigerian Institute of Social 
and Economic Research by Oxford University 
Press, 1962. xvii, 169 p. fold, map, tables. 
(Nigerian social and economic studies, no. 4) 

HJ3069.W407 

Not available for examination. 

752. Perham, Margery F., ed. The economics of a 

tropical dependency. London, Published un¬ 
der the auspices of Nuffield College by Faber 
& Faber, 1946-48. 2 v. maps, tables. 

HC517.N5P4 

This significant study of the economic develop¬ 
ment of Nigeria was prepared at the end of the war 
and foresaw but did not take into account the estab¬ 
lishment of the new Legislative Council in 1947 and 
the 10-year plan under the Colonial Development and 
Welfare Act. The first volume is concerned with 
anthropological research, now accepted as the foun¬ 
dation of modern colonial thought: Native Economies 
of Nigeria, by Daryll Forde and Richenda Scott. Pro¬ 
fessor Forde contributed the larger portion, examining 
in sociological and geographic terms the rural econ¬ 
omies of Nigerian villages. Dr. Scott, a research econ¬ 
omist, analyzed reports and statistics of export crops. 
The second volume, Mining, Commerce, and Finance 
in Nigeria, is by a number of specialists. Miss Penel¬ 
ope Bower surveyed the mining industry; J. Mars 
studied extraterritorial enterprises; Dr. Charlotte Leu- 
buscher examined the policy governing external trade; 
Mr. Mars, the monetary and banking system and 
loan market, Sir Alan Pirn the workings of public 
finance, Miss Bower the balance of payments. The 
conclusion, by A. J. Brown, stressed the main prob¬ 
lems—poverty, insecurity of primary production, ex¬ 
ternal control, social adjustment. 

753. Prest, Alan R., and I. G. Stewart. The na¬ 

tional income of Nigeria, 1950-51. London, 
H.M. Stationery Off., 1953. 124 p. maps. 

(Colonial Office. Colonial research studies, 
no. 11) JV33.G7A48, no. 11 

From this study, prepared under the direction of 
the Department of Applied Economics of Cambridge 
University by highly qualified economists, the Colonial 


Office was enabled to gauge the capacity of Nigeria 
to contribute toward her own economic development. 
Dr. Prest and Mr. Stewart estimated income per head 
in West Africa at about £20—more than twice prewar 
estimates. 

754. Smith, Michael G. The economy of Hausa 

communities of Zaria; a report to the Colonial 
Social Science Research Council. London, 
Published by H.M. Stationery Off. for the 
Colonial Office, 1955. 264 p. illus., maps, 

diagrs., tables. (Colonial research studies, 
no. 16) JV33.G7A48, no. 16 

Socio-economic survey for the Colonial Social Sci¬ 
ence Research Council, based on field work under a 
grant from Colonial Development and Welfare funds. 
Contains many tables in text and appendixes, a few 
photographs, a sketch map, and a brief bibliography 
(p. 258-260). 

755. Smythe, Hugh H., and Mabel M. Smythe. 

The new Nigerian elite. Stanford, Calif., 
Stanford University Press, 1960. 196 p. map. 

HN800.N5S56 

Bibliographical references included in notes (p. 175—191). 
Dr. Smythe is a professor of sociology at Brooklyn 
College. In this thorough study, prepared in collab¬ 
oration with his wife who is also a sociologist, the 
first three chapters are background of history and 
political development, the rest an analysis of social 
classes and cadres in general rather than personal 
terms. 

756. Stapleton, G. Brian. The wealth of Nigeria. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1958. 
228 p. illus. HC517.N48S8 

Evaluation of the country’s economic condition and 
wealth of natural resources by an economist who has 
taught in Nigeria. 

757. Walker, Gilbert J. Traffic and transport in 

Nigeria; the example of an underdeveloped 
tropical territory. London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1957. xiv, 318 p. maps, tables. 
(Colonial research studies, no. 27) 

JV33.G7A48, no. 27 
One of the last full-scale research studies of Nigeria 
as a British colony. One aspect of the subject had 
been studied the year before in a monograph by Ed¬ 
ward K. Hawkins, Road Transport in Nigeria; A 
Study of African Enterprise (London, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1958. 99 p.). 


128 


758. Wells, F. A., and W. A. Warmington. Studies 

in industrialization: Nigeria and the Cam- 
eroons. London, Published for the Nigerian 
Institute of Social and Economic Research by 
Oxford University Press, 1962. 266 p. 

HG517.N48W4 

Joint publication based on separate research into 
conditions and efficiency of industrial projects. Dr. 
Wells had made his studies in Eastern and Northern 
Nigeria in 1959, and Dr. Warmington had done re¬ 
search in the Southern Cameroons in 1953-56 (see 
his 1151). The writers explain that, although polit¬ 
ical changes have now separated the latter territory 
from Nigeria, to become West Cameroon in the 
Cameroon Republic, they feel that “the conditions 
and problems with which the studies are concerned 
will be affected only slowly by the passage of time.” 
Dr. Wells’ examination is of the Sapele timber indus¬ 
try, operated by a subsidiary of the United Africa Com¬ 
pany and in 1959 employing over 3,000 people, and of 
the Kano groundnut crushing industry. Warmington 
is concerned here as before with the Cameroons De¬ 
velopment Corporation. 

Typical of a number of industrial studies now being 
issued under official sponsorship is a paper published by the 
U.S. AID Mission in Lagos and to be printed by the Minis¬ 
try of Information of Eastern Nigeria: Development of 
Small Industry in Eastern Nigeria, by Peter Kilby (1962. 
57 p.) 

759. Yesifu, Tijani M. Industrial relations in Ni¬ 

geria. London, Published for the Nigerian In¬ 
stitute of Social and Economic Research by 
Oxford University Press, 1962. 190 p. tables. 

HD8791.N5Y4 

Not yet available for examination. 

ANTHROPOLOGY AND 
SOCIOLOGY 

760. Akiga. Akiga’s story: the Tiv tribe as seen by 

one of its members. Tr. and annotated by 
Rupert East. London, New York, Published 
for International Institute of African Lan¬ 
guages and Cultures by Oxford University 
Press. 1939. 436 p. DT515.A7 

The book is translated from the Tiv language in 
which it had been written, representing a work of 
20 years. The translator, then a senior education offi¬ 
cer in Nigeria, declared that Akiga’s story gives a true 
and impressive picture of native life and customs. 


761. Baba, of Karo. Baba of Karo: a woman of the 

Muslim Hausa. [Autobiography recorded] by 
M. F. Smith. London, Faber & Faber, 1954. 
New York, Philosophical Library, 1955. 
299 p. DT515.B115 1954 

Unusual presentation of ethnological data in the 
form of an interesting biography, told by an elderly 
woman in Zaria Province, Nigeria, to Mrs. M. F. 
Smith, who was working with her husband, M. G. 
Smith, in field research. Baba’s memory went back 
to the days of tribal wars and slave raiding before the 
British came, and she described the life of the big 
slave estates in her youth. Her reminiscences for the 
most part have little concern with public issues, but 
illustrate vividly domestic life and the sphere of women 
in African Muslim society. A condensed outline of 
this society forms the introduction, and careful 
ethnographic data appear in footnotes. 

762. Bohannan, Paul. Justice and judgment among 

the Tiv. London, New York, Published for 
the International African Institute by the Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1957. 221 p. 

GN493.B6 

763. - Tiv farm settlement. London, H.M. 

Stationery Off., 1954. 87 p. (Gt. Brit. Colo¬ 
nial Office. Colonial research studies, 
no. 15) JV33.G7A48 

This American social anthropologist had done ex¬ 
tensive field work among the Tiv tribe who live on 
both banks of the Benue River in central Nigeria. The 
first published result was the summary account, done 
with his wife, in the Ethnological Survey series (see 
no. 771). The brochure issued by the Colonial Office 
contains a technical analysis of land owned by family 
and lineage groups, crops and crop rotation, agricul¬ 
tural labor, land tenure, and other aspects of the agri¬ 
cultural economy of the Tiv. The later significant 
work explores the concepts of law and the legal systems 
of the tribe. 

764. Forde, Cyril Daryll, ed. Efik traders of Old 

Calabar , containing The diary of Antera 
Duke, an Efik slave-trading chief of the 18th 
century, together with An ethnographic sketch 
and notes, by D. Simmons, and an essay on 
“The political organization of Old Calabar,” 
by G. I. Jones. London, New York, Published 
for the International African Institute by 
Oxford University Press, 1956. 166 p. maps, 

tables. HT1394.N5F6 

The Director of the International African Institute 


129 


and editor of Africa, Professor of Anthropology at the 
University of London since 1945, and author of several 
numbers of the West African series of the Ethno¬ 
graphical Survey, had begun his anthropological 
studies among the American Indians but by the forties 
had become a specialist on southeastern Nigeria. His 
Marriage and the Family among the Yako was pub¬ 
lished for the London School of Economics (by P. 
Lund, Humphries, London, 1941. 121 p. Proc¬ 

essed), as No. 5 of its Monographs on Social Anthro¬ 
pology, and reprinted by the Institute in 1951. (See 
also his contributions to African Worlds, no. 287). 
In Efik Traders of Old Calabar he has combined 
ethnographical analyses with early historical source 
materials. 

765. Green, Margaret Mackesen. Ibo village af¬ 

fairs, chiefly with reference to the village of 
Umueke Agbaja. London, Sidgwick & Jack- 
son, 1947. 262 p. illus., maps. NN 

766. - Land tenure in an Ibo village in south¬ 

eastern Nigeria. London, Published for the 
London School of Economics and Political 
Science by P. Lund, Humphries, 1941. 44 p. 
maps. (Monographs on social anthropology, 
no. 6) GN489.1.G7 

Dr. Green did field work among the Ibo from 1934- 
37, spending a year in the village of Agbaja, the daily 
life of which she described in her full-scale study of 
1947. The earlier paper was devoted to a single aspect 
of Ibo village affairs. 

767. Greenberg, Joseph H. The influence of Islam 

on a Sudanese religion. New York, J. J. Au¬ 
gustin. 1947. 73 p. maps, diagrs. (Mon¬ 
ographs of the American Ethnological Society, 
10) E51.A556, no. 10 

Dr. Greenberg submitted this monograph for his 
doctoral thesis in ethnology at Northwestern University 
following fieldwork as a Fellow of the Social Science 
Research Council. In later studies, he has specialized 
in linguistics (see no. 299). In this interesting book 
on the Hausa he includes a long table of the spirits or 
jinn, and their characteristics. 

768. Hopen, C. Edward. The pastoral Fulbe family 

in Gwandu. London, Published for the In¬ 
ternational African Institute by the Oxford 
University Press, 1958. 165 p. illus., maps. 

GN652.F9H66 

One of a group of studies of the Fulani, a cattle peo¬ 
ple widely dispersed in the Western Sudan, from 


Senegal to Lake Chad and in Northern Nigeria. 
Other volumes are by D. J. Stenning (no. 785) and 
Mile. Dupire (no. 968). Dr. Hopen’s book is re¬ 
viewed by A. Kirk-Greene in Africa, January 1959. 

769. Hubbard, John. The Sobo of the Niger Delta; 

a work dealing with the history and languages 
of the people inhabiting the Sobo (Urhobo) 
Division, Warri Province, southern Nigeria, 
and the geography of their land. Zaria, 
Gaskiya Corp., 1948. xxvi, 369 p. illus., 
maps. DT515.H8 

A full anthropological study of an individual tribe. 

770. Idowu, E. Bolaji. Olodumare; God in Yoruba 

belief. London, Longmans, Green, 1962. 
222 p. BL2480.Y6I3 

A Yoruba Anglican clergyman enlarged this book 
from a thesis presented to the Faculty of Theology at 
the University of London, analyzing his people’s idea 
of the Deity—the Supreme Being alone, not the many 
lesser divinities—through the medium of their myths, 
songs, sayings, and liturgies. Dr. Idowu’s effort is to 
prove the religion of the Yorubas to be a “Primitive 
Monotheism.” He intends the work as a text for 
teachers and students. 

771. International African Institute. Ethno¬ 

graphic survey of Africa: Western Africa. 
London. 

See general note on this series, no. 270. The follow¬ 
ing surveys, which summarize ethnological findings to 
the time of their publications, with full bibliographical 
data and tribal maps, relate to Nigeria: 

3. Forde, Daryll, and G. I. Jones. The Ibo and 

Ibibio-speaking peoples of south-eastern Nigeria. 
1950. 80 p. DT515.F6 

4. Forde, Daryll. The Yoruba-speaking peoples of 

south-western Nigeria. 1951. 102 p. 

DT513.F6 

7. Gunn, Harold D. The peoples of the plateau area 

of Northern Nigeria. 1953. Ill p. DT515.G8 

8. Bohannan, Laura, and Paul Bohannan. The 

Tiv of central Nigeria. 1953. 100 p. 

DT515.B66 

10. Peoples of the Niger-Benue confluence: Nupe, by 
Daryll Forde; Igbira, by Paul Brown; Igala and 
Idoma-speaking peoples, by Robert G. Arm¬ 
strong. 1955. 160 p. DT515.I5 

12. Gunn, Harold D. Pagan peoples of the central 

area of northern Nigeria. 1956. 146 p. 

DT515.G78 

13. Bradbury, R. E. The Benin kingdom and the 

Edo-speaking peoples of south-western Nigeria. 
1957. 212 p. DT515.B7 


130 



15. Gunn, Harold D., and F. P. Conant. Peoples of 
the middle Niger region of northern Nigeria. 
1960. 136 p. DT515.42.G8 

772. Lebeuf, Jean Paul. Vhabitation des Fali, 

montagnards du Cameroun septentrional; tech¬ 
nology, sociology, mythology, symbolisme. 
Paris, Librairie Hachette, 1961. 607 p. illus. 
(drawings) (Bibliotheque des guides bleus) 

GN655.F25L4 

Published under the auspices of the Centre National de la 
Recherche Scientifique. 

This French anthropologist carried out three expe¬ 
ditions in the Sahara, Chad, and Northern Cameroons 
before and since the Second World War. In a com¬ 
prehensive study of a tribe in the northern tip of 
Adamawa Province, he concentrates on Fali archi¬ 
tecture as expressing in symbolic form their myth, be¬ 
liefs, and concepts. His examination is detailed 
regarding all aspects of habitation. 

773. Leith-Ross, Sylvia. African women; a study 

of the Ibo of Nigeria. London, Faber & 
Faber, 1939. 367 p. plates, maps. 

DT515.L4 1939 

774. - African conversation piece. London, 

New York, Hutchinson, 1944. 133 p. 

plates. DT515.L39 

The writer, wife of a former colonial officer in Ni¬ 
geria, is a trained ethnologist and student of native 
languages. Her study of the Ibo women, prepared 
tinder a Leverhulme research fellowship, was the 
result of 30 years’ experience and study in southeastern 
Nigeria. The 1944 book, for a popular audience, de¬ 
scribes the daily life of women in the Ibo city of 
Onitsha. A bibliographical “portrait” of Mrs. Leith- 
Ross appeared in West Africa of Nov. 24, 1962. She 
is now an expert on Nigerian pottery. 

775. Lloyd, Peter C. Yoruba land law. London, 

New York, Published for the Nigerian Insti¬ 
tute of Social and Economic Research, Ibadan, 
by the Oxford University Press, 1962. 378 p. 

DLC-LL 

Reviewed at length by Basil Davidson in West Africa 
of Sept. 22, 1962, no. 2364, p. 1043. 

776. Meek, Charles Kingsley. The northern 

tribes of Nigeria; an ethnographic account of 
the Northern Province of Nigeria, together 
with a report on the 1921 decennial census. 
London, Oxford University Press, 1925. 2 v. 

DT515.M4 


777. - A Sudanese kingdom; an ethnographi¬ 

cal study of the Jukun-speaking peoples of 
Nigeria. London, K. Paul, Trench, Trubner, 
1931. 548 p. illus. DT515.M43 

778. - Tribal studies in northern Nigeria. 

London, K. Paul, Trench, Trubner, 1931. 
2 v. illus. DT515.M45 

779. - Law and authority in a Nigerian tribe: 

a study of indirect rule. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1937. 372 p. 

DTM5.M38 

780. - Land tenure and land administration 

in Nigeria and the Cameroons. London, 

H.M. Stationery Off., 1957. 420 p. (Colo¬ 

nial research studies, no. 22) 

JV33.G7A48, no. 22 
Dr. Meek, who went to Nigeria as a civil service 
officer in 1912 and retired as Resident of the [then] 
Northern Provinces in 1933, had anthropological in¬ 
terests and training. He was appointed to the North¬ 
ern Provinces as Anthropological Officer in 1924, after 
having been the Commissioner for the decennial census 
in 1921. His first book, resulting in part from the 
census, of which it is the only published report, was 
The Northern Tribes of Nigeria. (The census for the 
Southern Province was directed by Talbot [see no. 
787].) He followed it 6 years later with the collected 
series of official ethnographic reports, Tribal Studies, 
and the long study of the Jukun-speaking peoples. 
The book in 1937, written after he had retired and 
gone to lecture at Oxford, is an exhaustive account of 
the social institutions of a selection of village groups 
among the Ibos of Southeastern Nigeria. In 1946 
Dr. Meek’s Land Law and Custom in the Colonies 
(see no. 277) was published under sponsorship of the 
Institute of Colonial Studies. His last work, prepared 
for the Colonial Office, returns to Nigeria as locale for 
a treatise on African land tenure and administration. 

781. Nadel, Siegfried F. A black Byzantium; the 

kingdom of Nupe in Nigeria with a foreword 
by the Right Hon. Lord Lugard . . . London, 
New York, Published for the International In¬ 
stitute of African Languages & Cultures by the 
Oxford University Press, 1942. 420 p. illus., 
tables, diagrs. maps. [Reprinted 1961.] 

DT515.N27 


692 - 756—63 - 10 


131 







782. - Nupe religion. London, Routledge 

& K. Paul, 1954. 288 p. illus. 

BL2480.N8N3 

Published for the International African Institute. 
The late Dr. Nadel, Professor of Anthropology at 
the Australian National University, had done extensive 
fieldwork among the Nupe people in Northern Nigeria. 
In 1942 he served as government anthropologist in the 
Southern Sudan embodying his findings in a book of 
1947, The Nuba: An Anthropological Study of the 
Hill Tribes in Kordofan (London, New York, Oxford 
University Press. 527 p.). The first book named 
above, of which a reprint has been issued after twenty 
years, is on economic and political organization, kin¬ 
ship, and rites of adolescence, the second a thorough 
treatment of beliefs, rituals, medicine, and other as¬ 
pects of Nupe culture. The latter is considered a 
classic study of a nonmystic and largely rational pagan 
religion. 

783. Parrinder, E. Geoffrey. Religion in an Afri¬ 

can city. London, New York, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1953. 211 p. illus. BL2465.P29 
In this work Dr. Parrinder of Ibadan University 
writes of Ibadan, the largest city in tropical Africa, 
with a population at the time of between 300,000 and 
400,000, as typical of the large Yoruba towns. He de¬ 
scribes first the pagan animist religion and shrines, 
then the “rising crescent” of Islam, which he admits 
is the most considerable factor in the religious life of 
southern as well as northern Nigeria. Chapters are 
devoted to mission churches, the various Christian 
sects, the effects of Christian worship and secret so¬ 
cieties, part Christian and part pagan in character. 
In his final chapter the writer explains the modem 
religious situation, deploring the division into separat¬ 
ist sects. Appendixes give statistics of temples and 
shrines, mosques and churches. A historical mono¬ 
graph by Dr. Parrinder, The Story of Ketu, an Ancient 
Yoruba Kingdom (Ibadan, Ibadan University Press, 
1956. 92 p.) takes as locale the town of Ketou in 
Dahomey. 

784. Smith, Michael G. Government in Zazzau, 

1800-1950. London, New York, Published 
for the International African Institute by the 
Oxford University Press, 1960. 371 p. maps, 
diagrs. JQ3099.Z3S5 

By an authority on Hausa society who has done long 
field work in Northern Nigeria, this book, subtitled “A 
Study of Government in the Hausa Chiefdom of Zaria 
in Northern Nigeria,” analyzes the historico-political 


structure of the emirate from the viewpoint of the 
anthropologist. It is reviewed at length by A. Kirk- 
Greene in the International Review of Misisons, v. 
50 July, 1961, p. 363-367. 

785. Stenning, Derrick J. Savannah nomads; a 

study of the Wodaabe pastoral Fulani of West¬ 
ern Bornu Province, Northern Region, Nigeria. 
London, Published for the International Afri¬ 
can Institute by Oxford University Press, 1959. 
xiv, 266 p. illus., maps. GN652.F9S8 1959 

Bibliography: p. 249-253. 

Companion study to the work by Hopen (no. 768). 

786. Talbot, P. Amaury. Life in Southern Ni¬ 

geria; the magic, beliefs and customs of the 
Ibibio tribe. London, Macmillan, 1923. 
356 p. illus. DT515.T35 

787. - The people of Southern Nigeria, a 

sketch of their history, ethnology and lan¬ 
guages. With an abstract of the 1921 census. 
London, Oxford University Press, 1926. 4 v. 

illus. DT515.T355 

788. - Some Nigerian fertility cults. London, 

Oxford University Press, H. Milford, 1927. 
140 p. illus. BL2470.N5T3 

789. - Tribes of the Niger delta, their reli¬ 

gions and customs. London, The Sheldon 
Press; New York, Macmillan, 1932. 350 p. 

DT515.T357 

790. -, and Harry Mulhall. Physical an¬ 

thropology of Southern Nigeria; a biometric 
study in statistical analysis. Cambridge, Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1962. 127 p. (Cambridge 

University. Museum of Archaeology and 
Ethnology. Occasional papers) 

GN653.T32 1962 
Dr. Talbot, like Dr. Meek, was for long an admin¬ 
istrator in Nigeria, and was seconded to conduct the 
1921 census for the Southern Provinces, the only pub¬ 
lished report of which is in his four-volume People of 
Southern Nigeria. Also like Dr. Meek, he was one 
of the first generation of colonial servants who com¬ 
bined anthropological proficiency with administrative 
ability, and his several volumes are highly regarded. 
He died in 1945 and the last-named paper was edited 
from the results of his large-scale anthropometric sur¬ 
vey in the 1920’s. 

Among other older writers who might be mentioned as 
typical is the missionary George T. Basden, whose Niger 
Ibos (London, Seeley, Service, 1938. 447 p.), describes 


132 







the primitive life, customs, and animistic beliefs of the people 
among whom he had lived for 35 years. Still another work 
of this character of wonder at strange ways was by James 
R. Wilson-Haffenden: The Red Men of Nigeria, an Account 
of a Lengthy Residence among the Fulani, or “Red Men” 
& Other Pagan Tribes of Central Nigeria, with a Description 
of their Headhunting, Pastoral & Other Customs, Habits 
& Religion (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1930. 318 p.); this 

rated a foreword by the famous anthropologist Malinowski. 

ARTS, LETTERS, AND 
EDUCATION 

791. Achebe, Chinua. Things fall apart. Lon¬ 

don, Heinemann, 1958. 185 p.; New York, 

McDowell, Obolensky, 1959. 215 p. 

PZ4.A17Th 

792. - No longer at ease. London, Heine¬ 

mann, 1960; New York, I. Obolensky, 1961. 

170 p. PZ4.A17Noz 

The first of these two novels by an Ibo writer who 
is being hailed as one of the emerging leaders of an 
African awakening in letters, is the reconstruction 
of an Ibo village in the late 19th century, under the 
first impact of the West. The second has as theme 
the difficulties of the present-day educated African, 
the “been-to” torn between Western standards and 
tribal tradition. Both are excellent reading according 
to Western standards. 

793. Adetoro, J. E., ed. The handbook of education, 

Nigeria, 1960; an independence year souvenir. 

[n.p.] Schools and General Publications Serv¬ 
ices, 1960. 280 p. LA1611.N5A63 

Booklet printed at the Tanimehin-Ola Press, 
Oshogbo. The editor is at Kirji Memorial College, 
Igbajo. The handbook gives an outline of the history 
of educational development in southern and northern 
Nigeria, an explanation of educational systems, and a 
directory, with catalog information regarding institu¬ 
tions of learning. 

794. Arts Council of Great Britain. Nigerian 

tribal art. London, 1960. unpaged, illus. 

N7397.N5A7 

The catalog of an impressive exhibition of Nigerian 
sculpture brought together in honor of the independ¬ 
ence celebrations. The selection and arrangements 
were made by William Fagg, who was in part re¬ 
sponsible for the accompanying text. A note in Africa 
of January 1961 by G. I. Jones is enthusiastic about the 
exhibition, critical of the catalog, especially of the 
plates, finding only a few of the over 170 reproduc¬ 


tions to “convey the beauty or the structure of the 
masks and statuettes.” 

795. Beier, Ulli. Art in Nigeria, 1960. Cambridge 

[Eng.] University Press, 1960. 24 p. illus. 

N7397.N5B4 1960 
Essay by an Austrian scholar on the staff of Ibadan 
University, who is a specialist in Nigerian arts and 
letters. In a booklet prepared to coincide with the 
independence celebrations Mr. Beier discussed first 
traditional art, then the contemporary artists, in par¬ 
ticular Mr. Ben Enwonwu. He has chapters on com¬ 
mercial art, modern architecture, sculpture and wood¬ 
carving, and art teaching. The bulk of the book is 
taken up by almost 200 excellent plates. 

796. Black Orpheus; a journal of African and Afro- 

American literature, no. 1+ Sept. 1957 + 
Ibadan, irregular (two or three times a year) 

DLG 

This impressive literary magazine is published by 
the Ministry of Education in Ibadan; editors in 1961 
(no. 9) were Ezekiel Mphahlele, Wole Soyinka, and 
Ulli Beier. The contributions are by no means 
limited to Nigerian writings, but these represent the 
preponderance. 

Another literary journal published in Ibadan, Odu (Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1955-f- usually two a year), is issued by the 
Western Nigeria Literature Committee, and is “a journal of 
Yoruba and related studies,” with its contents in part in 
Yoruba. 

Like Black Orpheus, the magazine begun as a quarterly in 
1961 by the Ghana Society of Writers, Okyeame (Accra; 
first letter of title is the backward G character of African 
orthography), is intended as a literary interpretation of the 
new Africa, with contributions going beyond national borders. 

797. Ekwensi, Cyprian. People of the city. Lon¬ 

don, Dakers, 1954. 237 p. PZ4.E349Pe 
Novel depicting the life of the elite in contemporary 
Lagos. Mr. Ekwensi is one of the prominent literary 
figures in West Africa. 

798. Gbadamosi, Bakare. Yoruba poetry. Tradi¬ 

tional Yoruba poems collected and trans¬ 
lated by Bakare Gbadamosi and Ulli Beier. 
Ibadan, Nigeria, General Publications Sec¬ 
tion, Ministry of Education, 1959. 68 p. 

PL8824.Z95E5 1959 
An interesting collection, with an interpretative in¬ 
troduction by Mr. Beier, who had assisted the Yoruba 
editor in the translation of these praise names, oracle 
poems, songs of the hunters, of marriages and funerals, 
poetry for children, proverbs, and other traditional 


133 




Yoruba poetry. The pamphlet, a special publication 
of Black Orpheus, is illustrated with full-page color 
plates of traditional designs by Susan Beier, who with 
her husband had lived for some years among the 
Yoruba. 

799. Idewu, Olawale, and Omotayo Adu. Ni¬ 

gerian folk tales . . . Told to and edited by 
Barbara K. and Warren S. Walker. New 
Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press, 
1961. 113 p. illus. GR360.N5I3 

Text decorations by Margaret Barbour. The two 
Nigerian informants who told these tales were studying 
in America, Mr. Idewu, from Western Nigeria, a 
Christian convert studying medicine, Mr. Adu, a Mos¬ 
lem from Lagos—both Yoruba. The stories are by 
classes, tales of demon lovers, “pourquoi” stories, moral 
fables, trickster tales, fertility tales. The collection 
was edited at the Blackburn College Language Labora¬ 
tory. 

800. M’bari Writers Club. Literary summit con¬ 

ference for African writers of English expres¬ 
sion. Makerere College, June 11-16, 1962. 
Brief summary by Bloke Modisane in West Africa, 
no. 2352, June 30, 1962: p. 716. 

801. Mellanby, Kenneth. The birth of Nigeria’s 

university. London, Methuen, 1958. 263 p. 

illus. LG481.I3522M4 

Account of the beginning of University College, 
Ibadan, the largest university of English-speaking 
West Africa. Dr. Mellanby writes from firsthand 
experience as Ibadan’s first principal, 1947-53. 

802. Nigeria. Commission on Post-School Certificate 

and Higher Education. Investment in educa¬ 
tion; report. Nigeria, Federal Ministry of 
Education, 1960. 140 p. L675.N5A48 

The so-called Ashby Report; chairman of the Com¬ 
mission, Sir Eric Ashby of Cambridge University. In 
two parts, the first general and containing recom¬ 
mendations which aim at meeting Nigeria’s needs for 
educated manpower up to 1980, with university de¬ 
velopment planned to ensure an enrollment of at least 
7,500 students by 1970, and substantial growth dur¬ 
ing the next decade. The second part consists of spe¬ 
cial reports on high-level manpower needs, sixth form 
and examinations, teacher training, technical and 
commercial education, agricultural education, univer¬ 
sities, and new educational techniques. 


803. Nzekwu, Onuora. Wand of noble wood. 

London, Hutchinson, 1961. 207 p. 

PZ4.N998Wan 

Novel of Ibo life and conflict between tradition and 
modernism, with much detail of anthropological inter¬ 
est. The author has in 1962 replaced Mr. Michael 
Crowder as editor of Nigeria Magazine, of which he 
had formerly been assistant editor. A second novel, 
Blade among the Boys, was published by Hutchinson 
in 1962 (192 p.). 

804. Olubummo, Adegoke, and John Ferguson. 

The emergent university, with special reference 
to Nigeria. London, Longmans, Green, 1960. 
122 p. LB2321.048 

Attempting to explain to a general public, pri¬ 
marily of educated Africans, the aims of higher edu¬ 
cation, the two writers, both at Ibadan University, 
sketch the history of university development from 
Plato’s Academy onward, and discuss the nature, func¬ 
tions, and methods of university education in general 
and with special reference to Nigeria. They particu¬ 
larly “deplore any attempt to make the higher educa¬ 
tion of the country the plaything of party or tribal poli¬ 
tics,” and look with some suspicion at the project of the 
University of Eastern Nigeria. 

805. Saunders, John T. University College, 

Ibadan. Cambridge, University Press, 1960. 
223 p. illus. LG481.I3522S3 

The author of this history and description of the 
University College, now University of Ibadan, was 
Principal of the College from 1953 to 1956. He goes 
into less detail regarding the beginnings of the College 
than did Kenneth Mellanby (see no. 801). Dr. 
Saunders, however, includes appendixes of statistics 
and a complete register of undergraduates from Jan¬ 
uary 1948 through the academic year 1958/59. 

806. Sieber, Roy. Sculpture of Northern Nigeria. 

New York, Museum of Primitive Art; dis¬ 
tributed by University Publishers, 1961. 
32 p. plates. NB1097.N5S5 

Collection assembled by the author in a field study. 
The 12-page introduction, discussing the varying art 
forms of different tribes, is followed by 45 plates with 
accompanying notes. 

807. Tutuola, Amos. The palm-wine drinkard and 

his dead palm-wine tapster in the Deads’ 
Town. London, Faber and Faber, 1952. 
125 p. PZ4.T968Pal 


134 


808 . 


My life in the Bush of Ghosts. Lon¬ 
don, Faber & Faber, 1954. 174 p. 

PZ4.T968My 

These two stories by a Nigerian Yoruba have been 
widely praised as representing a new departure in 


African letters. The author uses traditional mythology 
in his own pattern of a partly westernized culture. 
The result is a curious and fascinating combination of 
ancient and primitive beliefs with modem ideas—e.g., 
“television palm witchess.” In his later work Mr. 
Tutuola has received more critical reviews. 


Sierra Leone 


Bibliographies 

809. Hair, P. E. H. A bibliographical guide to Sierra 

Leone, 1460-1650; 1650-1800. Sierra Leone 
studies, n.s. no. 10, June 1958: 62-72; no. 13, 
June 1960: 41-49. DT516.A155, no. 10, 13 

This new comprehensive guide to sources for studies 
of Sierra Leone is being published in parts. The ar¬ 
rangement is chronological in the first two sections. 
The third section (not yet in L.G., Feb. 1963) will 
treat Christian missions in Sierra Leone. 

810. Luke, Harry C. A bibliography of Sierra 

Leone, preceded by an essay on the origin, 
character and peoples of the colony and pro¬ 
tectorate. 2d ed. London, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1925. 230 p. Z3553.S5L8 1925 

An authoritative bibliography, with wide coverage 
almost to date of publication, is prefaced by an interest¬ 
ing essay which is one of the best introductions to 
Sierra Leone. The author was Colonial Secretary. 


811. Banton, Michael P. West African city; a 

study of tribal life in Freetown. London, Pub¬ 
lished for the International African Institute 
by the Oxford University Press, 1957. xvii, 
228 p. illus., 2 maps. DT516.B25 

A comprehensive analysis of social life and cus¬ 
toms of various tribal groups in Freetown. Reviewed 
at length in African Affairs, October 1958, p. 324-326. 
A reprint has been issued in 1961. 

812. Barclays Bank (Dominion, Colonial and 

Overseas) Sierra Leone; an economic sur¬ 
vey. London, 1960. 23 p. illus. 

HC517.S5B3 

On the popular level, for the businessman, but use¬ 
ful in its summarization of various aspects of the 
economy; e.g., legislation regarding the Diamond 
Mining Ordinances. 


813. Cole, Robert W. Kossoh Town boy. With 

illus. by Felix Cobbson. Cambridge [Eng.] 
University Press, 1960. 190 p. illus. 

R654.C6A3 

Autobiographical narrative of a boyhood in Sierra 
Leone and experiences in school, torn between British 
values and traditional customs. The writer is a dis¬ 
tinguished surgeon, but this book—which was reviewed 
in the London Times Literary Supplement (Sept. 30, 
1960) as “a minor classic in the autobiography of 
youth”—has little to do with medical matters, as it 
leaves the boy at 15 years of age. 

814. Cox-George, N. A. Finance and development 

in West Africa; the Sierra Leone experience. 
New York, Humanities Press, 1962. 333 p. 

HC517.S5C6 

London edition by DobsQn, 1961. 

815. - Report on African participation in the 

commerce of Sierra Leone, by N. A. Cox- 
George and the Government statement there¬ 
on. Sierra Leone, Govt. Print. Dept., 1958. 
64 p. diagr., tables. HF3899.S5C6 

The author of these two studies is a Sierra Leonean 
economist whose thesis for his doctorate at the Uni¬ 
versity of London in 1956, The Financial System of 
a West African Colony in Relation to Economic De¬ 
velopment (466 p., microfilm) formed the basis for 
the complete analysis of the economics and financial 
history of the former British dependency published in 
1961. The new book is reviewed at length by K. J. 
Rothwell in Africa Report of January 1963. The 1958 
Report which is related to the drive for Africanization 
of the Civil Service, was prepared at the request of 
the Government of Sierra Leone while Mr. Cox- 
George was in the Department of Economics at 
Fourah Bay College. In 1962 he was Professor of 
Economics at the University of Nigeria at Nsukka. 


135 





816. Crooks, John J. A history of the colony of 

Sierra Leone, Western Africa (with maps and 
appendices). Dublin, Browne & Nolan, 1903. 
375 p. DT516.C9 

A standard older work by a British officer who had 
been in the administrative service in Sierra Leone. It 
is still considered useful, not least for its appendixes 
containing text of territorial treaties, lists of native 
chiefs, etc. 

817. Foster, Raymond Samuel. The Sierra Leone 

Church, an independent Anglican Church; a 
contemporary study. With a foreword by 
Stephen Neill. London, S.P.C.K., 1961. 76 p. 

BX5700.7.A44S53 

Not yet aVailable for examination. 

818. Fyfe, Christopher. A history of Sierra Leone. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1962. 773 p. 

DT516.5.F85 

This impressive history has a brief introduction on 
the period from the 15th century Portuguese discovery 
of Sierra Leone to the founding of the Colony in 1787 
(which is treated in the complementary work by Kup, 
no. 827) then covers chronologically and in great de¬ 
tail all affairs of the Colony and Protectorate to about 
1900. The author had been temporary Government 
Archivist in Sierra Leone, and his sources (itemized 
on pages 621-639, with “References” on p. 640-723) 
include a vast array of documents and newspapers. 
The book was reviewed at some length in West Africa, 
April 28, 1962. A greatly simplified version, A Short 
History of Sierra Leone, adapted to school use, has 
been issued in a paperback by Longmans, Green 
(1962. 194 p.). 

819. Gervis, Pearce. Sierra Leone story; with 65 

pages of photos, by the author. London, 
Cassell, 1952. 240 p. illus. DT516.G4 
Narrative of an English visitor who lived for some 
time in a fishing village and made trips into the in¬ 
terior. His story is full of informal accounts of the 
“bush” life—dances and ceremonies, initiation rites, 
talk in Pidgin English-giving a picture of the semi¬ 

pagan tribesmen. The photographs are notable. 

820. Gt. Brit. Central Office of Information. Ref¬ 

erence Division. Sierra Leone; the making 
of a nation. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1961. 38 p. illus. (Reference pamphlet 
45) DT516.8.G7 

One of a series prepared for the Overseas Informa¬ 
tion Services, this pamphlet was the final British sur¬ 


vey of her former territorial possession. It gives a 
brief, factual account of the land and its people, their 
economic and social development, the evolution 
toward self-government, and the final transition to 
independence. 

821. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Annual report on 

Sierra Leone. 1946+ London, H.M. Sta¬ 
tionery Off. illus., fold. map. (Its Colonial 
annual reports) DT516.A15 

The report for 1958, published in 1960, is the latest 
of which record is found in H.M. Stationery Office 
Catalogue, and thus the final one of the series for this 
country, which became independent in April 1961. 
The 1958 report has 135 pages and large folded map; 
all aspects of economic, political, and social life are 
summarized in its succinct paragraphs, which include 
also a general review of the past year, and an outline 
of geography and history. The Reading List, p. 114- 
120, names official and unofficial books, pamphlets, 
and serial publications, the official documents of Sierra 
Leone being classed by subject. 

822. Hargreaves, J. D. A life of Sir Samuel Lewis. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1958. 
Ill p. illus. (West African history series) 

DT516.H28 

In a series for African schools, this is the biography 
of one of the great Creole leaders of Sierra Leone in 
the late 19th century. Sir Samuel Lewis, the son of 
a Freetown trader, educated at the Middle Temple, 
the most prominent lawyer of the colony and for many 
years a member of the Legislative Council, was 
knighted in 1896, the first West African to receive that 
honor from the Government which he supported and 
opposed equally in accordance with his principles. 

823. Hornell, James. Report on the fishery re¬ 

sources of Sierra Leone. Freetown, Govt. 
Printing Off., 1928. 51 p. SH315.S5H6 
Mr. Hornell, a marine biologist and former Direc¬ 
tor of Fisheries to the Government of Madras, was 
deputed by the Colonial Secretary, at the instance of 
the Governor of Sierra Leone, to carry out a survey 
of the fishery resources of the Colony and Protectorate. 
He spent 2 months in 1928 examining in detail the sea 
coast and fisheries. His conclusion was that the re¬ 
sources were very great, but that the fishermen were 
prone to limiting production and overpricing; that 
if the industry were to prosper, a change in psychology 
was needed. The report, in which all aspects of 
fisheries were covered, is cited as an authority in the 
1957 study by Richardson and Collins (no. 833). 


136 



824. Jack, Daniel T. Economic survey of Sierra 

Leone. Sierra Leone, Govt. Print. Dept., 
1958. 75 p. HG517.S5J3 

Dr. Jack, professor of economics at King’s College 
of Durham University, Newcastle upon Tyne and an 
expert on international trade, was commissioned by 
the Government of Sierra Leone to make this survey of 
the economy of the country. 

825. Jarrett, Harold R. A geography of Sierra 

Leone and Gambia. London, New York, 
Longmans, Green, 1954. 136 p. illus. 

DT516.J3 

Designed for West African secondary school use. 
The author was a lecturer in geography at Fourah Bay 
College. 

826. Johnson, Thomas S. The story of a mis¬ 

sion; the Sierra Leone Church, first daughter 
of C. M. S. London, S.P.G.K., 1953. 148 p. 

illus. BX5682.S568 

By an African bishop, this historical sketch is de¬ 
voted almost exclusively to the record of the Anglican 
Church in Sierra Leone, through the Church Mission¬ 
ary Society which began its work in the colony, then 
still under the Sierra Leone Company, in 1804. The 
author calls the roll of churches, giving names of many 
individual clergymen. 

827. Kup, A. P. A history of Sierra Leone, MOO- 

1787. Cambridge [Eng.] University Press, 
1961. 211 p. illus. DT516.K8 

By a historian at Fourah Bay College, this study of 
the earliest history of Sierra Leone in its connections 
with Europe is based on Portuguese and other pre¬ 
colonial source materials. It is critically reviewed by 
Dr. Fyfe, whose history (no. 818) begins where this 
account left off, in the Journal of African History, v. 
2, no. 2,1961, p.327-328. 

828. Lewis, Roy. Sierra Leone; a modem portrait. 

London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1954. 263 p. 
illus., maps (The Corona library, 2) 

DT516.L4 

Bibliography: p. 249-251. 

The series of popularly written illustrative accounts 
of the dependent territories in which this is the second 
number, is designed to fill the place between the cold 
facts of the official Blue Books and the “personalized” 
records of travel writers. This attractive book is based 
on thorough study of sources and on a visit which was 
in the nature of a field trip to talk with the people 
and the Government. 


829. Little, Kenneth L. The Mende of Sierra 

Leone; a West African people in transition. 
London, Routledge & K. Paul, 1951. 307 p. 
illus., maps (International library of sociology 
and social reconstruction) DT516.L5 

Bibliography: p. 292-294. 

Dr. Little, Head of the Department of Anthropology 
at the University of Edinburgh, is an authority on 
West African cultures. This book brings together a 
number of articles previously published in scholarly 
journals, all based on his fieldwork among the tribes¬ 
men in the Sierra Leone Protectorate in 1945 and 
1946. The fullest portion of the study relates to social 
organization and the role of the secret societies, the 
men’s Poro and the women’s Sande. The last chap¬ 
ter studies social changes of the postwar period. 

830. McCulloch, Merran. The peoples of Sierra 

Leone Protectorate. London, International 
African Institute, 1950. 102 p. (Ethno¬ 

graphic survey of Africa: Western Africa. 
Pt. 2) DT516.M3 

Like the other parts of the Ethnographic Survey 
(see no. 270), the study is intended as a quick refer¬ 
ence source, bringing together scattered information 
regarding the tribes of the area in question and out¬ 
lining their ethnic and cultural position. 

831. Migeod, Frederick W. H. A review of Sierra 

Leone. London, K. Paul, Trench, Trubner, 
1926. 351 p. illus., map. DT516.M5 

By a retired colonial officer, an expert on West Afri¬ 
can languages. His account ends with ethnological 
chapters on the Mende people. 

832. Pfeffer, Karl H. Sierra Leone und Gambia. 

Bonn, K. Schroeder, 1958. 85 p. illus. 
(Deutsche Afrika-Gesellschaft e.V. Bonn. Die 
Lander Afrikas, Bd. 11). 

See general note on this series, no. 10. DLG 

833. Richardson, E. M., and G. R. Collins. Eco¬ 

nomic and social survey of the rural areas of 
the Colony of Sierra Leone; a report to the 
Colonial Social Science Research Council. 
London, Research Dept., Colonial Office, 
[1952?] 490 p. HN800.S5R5 

Report by two British investigators who in 1949-51 
made a study of the Sierra Leone Colony with special 
attention to conditions in the coastal fishing villages, 
which have declined in Creole population due to the 
exodus of young people to the city of Freetown. On 
the other hand, there has been increasing immigra- 


137 



tion of tribal people from the Protectorate, so that the 
society has become more mixed. This report takes 
the form of a general account of environment in nat¬ 
ural and human terms, discussion of overall problems, 
then detailed studies of four individual villages. Em¬ 
phasis is on economic factors, though the social struc¬ 
ture and cult practices also come in for attention. 
The large processed volume includes figure charts and 
many tables of statistical data. 

834. Sierra Leone. White paper on education. 

Freetown, Govt. Printer, 1958. (Sessional 
paper no. 4 of 1958) 

Full statement of the program envisaged for educa¬ 
tional development. The primary emphasis is on 
elementary education, proposing 63,000 more primary 
schools in the next 5 years, which would still leave 
70 percent of the population without a school system. 

835. Sierra Leone. Commission of Inquiry into the 

Issue of Alluvial Diamond Mining Licences in 
the Gbambaiadu Area, Kono District. Re¬ 
port. Freetown, Govt. Printer, 1957. 14 p. 

HD9677.S52A53 

The Alluvial Diamond Mining Ordinance (no. 2 
of 1956 )was passed in an effort to reduce illicit dia¬ 
mond mining by allowing the issuance of certain li¬ 
cences. This Commission had studied what were 
charged to be infringements of the Ordinance. In 
1956 there had also been set up a Diamond Area De¬ 
velopment Authority. In 1959 two further bills were 
passed in the effort to stop smuggling, and subsequent 
legislation is often recorded in the Sierra Leone 
Gazette. For instance, a new set of Diamond Mar¬ 
keting Rules , 1962, has been published by the Govern¬ 


ment Diamond Office. According to an article in 
West Africa (no. 2359, Aug. 18, 1962, p. 965), the 
Selection Trust Company must deposit all stones at 
GDO, under whose supervision they will be examined 
and valued; the Selection Trust must sell 50 percent 
to the British Diacorp, and must pay a service fee to 
GDO of 5 percent. 

836. Sierra Leone. Produce Marketing Board. 

The Sierra Leone Produce Marketing Board: 

what it is, what it does and what it hopes to do. 

Freetown [1961?] 32 p. illus. 

HD9017.S52A56 

A list of published documents of the Sierra Leone Govern¬ 
ment is now in preparation by the African Section, Library 
of Congress, in our series of official publications of African 
countries. It will be as complete as possible without ex¬ 
tended research in archival sources. 

837. Sierra Leone year hook. 1961. Independence 

year. Freetown, Daily Mail, 1961. 126 p. 

illus., advertisements. DT516.A2S5 1961 

The triumphant 1961 edition of this handbook in¬ 
cludes summarization of the Report of the Constitu¬ 
tional Conference of 1960, with annexes of its provi¬ 
sions for fundamental rights, retirement benefits for 
the public service, and speeches of Sir Milton Margai 
and other leaders. In addition there is a list of former 
governors, a trade directory, a who’s who, and other 
miscellaneous information. The 1962 edition has 
been announced in mid-year, 128 p. 

A Handbook of Sierra Leone, by Thomas N. Goddard 
(London, G. Richards, 1925. 335 p., illus., map), was pre¬ 

pared under auspices of the Sierra Leone Government. It 
covers at considerably greater length earlier aspects of the 
subjects treated in the current year book. The author was 
Colonial Secretary in Freetown. 


138 


FRENCH-SPEAKING AFRICA 
(GENERAL) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

838. Robinson, Kenneth E. “Survey of the back¬ 

ground material for the study of government 
in French tropical Africa.” American politi¬ 
cal science review , v. 50, Mar. 1956: 170-198. 

JA1.A6, v. 50 

Bibliographical article of lasting value for any serious 
research on former French Africa. Professor Robin¬ 
son, now Director of the Institute of Commonwealth 
Studies at the University of London, made his selec¬ 
tions from the authoritative literature, largely in 
French, over the preceding quarter-century, with spe¬ 
cial emphasis on French legislative sources. His 
evaluative analyses covered the chief bibliographical 
works, French official publications, specialized periodi¬ 
cals, books and articles on French Africa in general, 
then in separate sections, French West Africa, French 
Equatorial Africa, and Madagascar. Because of the 
availability of this highly informed, masterly bibliog¬ 
raphy, the compiler of the present list has omitted 
titles of many older works there cited. 

A Bibliography on the Former French Territories in West 
and Equatorial Africa is in preparation by Jacques Louis 
Hymans at Stanford University in 1962-63, to be issued in 
the Hoover Institution’s Bibliographical Series. 

GENERAL 

(History, Description, etc.) 

839. Aujoulat, Louis. Aujourd’hui, VAfrique. 

Tournai, Casterman, 1958. 400 p. (figlise 

vivante) DT352.A8 

A discussion of African cultural, economic, and 
political ambitions in the waning era of colonial rule. 
The author, a doctor of long experience in the Camer- 
oons, wrote with intimate understanding of the Afri¬ 
can soul. His conclusions relate to the position of the 
Catholic Church in Africa. 


840. Balandier, Georges. Afrique ambigue. Paris, 

Plon, 1957. 291 p. (Terre humaine; civil¬ 
isations et societes. Collection d’etudes et de 
temoignages) DT352.B3 

By one of the leading French Africanists, a social 
anthropologist presently connected with the £cole 
Pratique des Hautes fitudes, and author of social 
studies in French Equatorial Africa. This profound 
consideration of the fast developing states of French- 
speaking Africa is based on over ten years’ travel and 
experience, first in French West Africa, later in the 
service of the Gouvernement General de l’A.E.F. in 
Brazzaville. The writer ranges over many scenes and 
subjects—traditions, lost arts, cities. The impasses of 
contradictions between the new Africa and the old 
form his main themes. The “ambiguity” of his title, 
he says, is “that we carry in ourselves . . . the image 
of our uncertainties” before “the march of a progress 
which must lay waste before establishing a superior 
order.” 

In 1961 Profesor Balandier edited a significant work on 
developing areas published by the Institut National d’Ftudes 
Demographiques, Le “Tiers-Monde ” sous-developpement et 
developpement (Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 393 p., 
illus. Travaux et documents, cahier no. 39). 

841. Brunschwig, Henri. Mythes et realites de 

Vimperialisme colonial frangais, 1871-1914. 
Paris, A. Colin, 1960. 204 p. JV1817.B74 
By an Alsatian scholar whose historical studies have 
included La colonisation frangaise (Paris, Calmann- 
Levy, 1949) and Uexpansion allemande outre-mer du 
XV e siecle a nos jours (Presses universitaires de France, 
1957), this is an acute and highly documented analysis 
of French relations with the other European powers 
in the scramble for Africa. 

842. Dekeyser, P. L., and A. Villiers. Les ani- 

maux proteges de l’Afrique noire. Dakar, In¬ 
stitut frangais d’Afrique noire, 1951. 128 p. 

illus. (Initiations africaines, 5) SK571.D4 


139 


Handbook of birds and beasts which were protected 
in French West Africa and French Equatorial Africa. 
The descriptions are faced by inserted pages of draw¬ 
ings in sepia and color wash by the author, picturing 
each species. An appendix quotes the regulations for 
hunting. This appeared in a series which, unlike 
IFAN’s other highly scientific contributions, is 
addressed to a general public. 

Now that French regulations are no longer in effect, inter¬ 
national opinion is being brought to bear on influencing the 
African nations to take measures to preserve their valuable 
assets of wild life (see, e.g., Huxley, no. 452n). 

843. Deschamps, Hubert J. Les methodes et les 

doctrines coloniales de la France, du XVI e 
siecle a nos jours. Paris, A. Colin, 1953. 222 
p. illus. (Collection Armand Colin, no. 281. 
Section d’histoire et sciences economiques) 

JV1815.D4 

Professor Deschamps, formerly a colonial governor, 
now in charge of studies of overseas France at the In- 
stitut d’fitudes Politiques of the University of Paris, 
has written many books enunciating the enlightened 
views of liberal French thought. This short account 
includes in its chapters on the period from 1880-1940 
comment on the great spokesmen of French colonial 
theory: Albert Sarraut, La raise en valeur des colonies 
franqaises (1923), and Grandeur et servitude colo¬ 
niales (1931); Georges Hardy, “grand universitaire 
colonial” (see no. 848); Rene Maunier, Sociologie 
coloniale (1932); Henri Labouret, A la recherche 
d’une politique indigene dans VOuest africaine; and 
others who foresaw an end to empire. It concludes 
with a selected bibliography by period, the last cover¬ 
ing the years 1940-50. 

Among other general books by Professor Deschamps are 
Peuples et nations d’outre-mer (Paris, Dalloz, 1954. 475 p.), 
and L’Union frangaise; histoire, institutions, rSalitSs (Paris, 
Berger-Levrault, 1952. 214 p. illus.). An English trans¬ 
lation of the latter, The French Union, was issued by Berger- 
Levrault in 1956 (256 p.). 

844. Deveze, Michel. La France d’outre-mer, de 

l’empire colonial a l’Union frangaise, 1938— 
1947. Paris, Hachette, 1948. 321 p. 

JV1818.D44 

General study of the background and development 
of French colonial policy. The writer analyzed chang¬ 
ing trends under wartime conditions and after 1944, 
when at the Brazzaville Conference of Colonial Gov¬ 
ernors there was formulatd the aim of development of 
native peoples within terms of their own cultures. 
This changing concept led to the reorganization of the 


French colonial empire as a Union of Nations repre¬ 
sented like the departements of the French Republic 
and theoretically evolving toward autonomy, “France 
Overseas.” 

An essay on the concept, structure, and current position of 
the French Union, from which Morocco and Tunisia were 
already separated, and the future of the French plan for 
“an orderly evolution of a nation of many peoples, traditions 
and cultures” was presented to an American public in No. 
495 of the International Conciliation pamphlets, The French 
Union, by the liberal colonial administrator General Georges 
Catroux (New York, Carnegie Endowment for Interna¬ 
tional Peace, 1953. 256 p.). General Catroux was a dis¬ 

ciple of the great Marshal Lyautey, under whom he had 
served in the pacification of Morocco, and of whom he wrote 
a biography, Lyautey-le-Marocain. 

845. Ency elope die coloniale et maritime, edited by 

Eugene Guernier and G. Froment-Guieysse. 

Paris, Encyclopedic coloniale et maritime, 
1944-1951. JV1086.E5 

This basic reference work, with separate folio vol¬ 
umes devoted to each of the French overseas terri¬ 
tories, was published in 15 parts during the between- 
war years. A revised postwar edition was begun in 
1944 with Vol. 2, Tunisie (4 e ed.). Parts relating to 
French sub-Saharan Africa were Vol. 4, Afrique 
occidentale frangaise (1947. 2 v.); Vol. 5, Afrique 
equatoriale frangaise et Cote frangaise des Somalis 
(1950); Vol. 6, Togo et Cameroun (1951); and Vol. 
7, Madagascar et Reunion (1947. 2 v.). Edited by 
two distinguished geographers and written by com¬ 
petent specialists, among them high-ranking colonial 
administrators, each volume presents a comprehensive 
set of essays on physical, economic, and human geog¬ 
raphy, history, administrative organization, arts and 
culture of the territory in question, including statistics 
and extensive bibliographies. 

M. Froment-Guieysse is now editor of a periodical begun in 
1950 with the title, EncyclopSdie coloniale et maritime 
mensuelle, later Encyclopedia mensuelle d’outre-mer, changed 
in 1958 to EncyclopSdie mensuelle de l’Afrique —a large 
illustrated review designed to cover “toutes questions con- 
cernant nos territoires d’outre-mer.” In Jan. 1960 a new 
magazine with the same format and cover design was launched 
by M. Froment-Guieysse, published in Abidjan, Revue 
encyclopSdique de I’Afrique. Occasional supplements are 
devoted to a single country or topic; some again bear the 
title, EncyclopSdie mensuelle de I’Afrique. 

846. Etudes sociales nord-africaines. Africains noirs 

en France. Paris, 1961. 64 p. map. 

(Cahiers nord-africains, 86, oct.-nov. 1961) 

DC41.A4E8, no. 86 
In a series of sociological papers usually devoted to 
conditions of North Africans at home and working in 


140 


France, this pamphlet examines life in the metropole 
for Africans from south of the Sahara. 

847. France. Direction de la documentation. [Les 

nouvelles Republiques d’Afrique] Paris, 1960- 
61. (Notes et etudes documentaires) 

D411.F67 

A set of surveys of most of the new states of former 
French Africa were issued in this official documentary 
series in 1960 and 1961. The coverage is systematic: 
first a general glance at geography, history, ethnogra¬ 
phy, and demography, then outline of political and 
administrative institutions, economic and financial, 
cultural and social evolution, ending with a conclusion 
of prospects, and in appendixes, text of the new Con¬ 
stitution. For series numbers, see under individual 
countries. 

A more popular set of statements for American readers 
regarding the former French African countries is in a series 
of illustrated booklets: The Republic of . . . Hour of Inde¬ 
pendence, issued by the Service de Presse et d’Information of 
the French Embassy in New York. 

848. Hardy, Georges. Nos grands problemes colo- 

niaux. 3. ed. Paris, A. Colin, 1942. 216 p. 

JV412.H35 1942 

Professor Hardy, former Director of the £cole 
Coloniale and author of many historical and geo¬ 
graphical works on French colonial possessions, was one 
of the group of able liberal colonial specialists who 
attempted to influence French policy toward the 
Union of autonomous governments. His best known 
histories ( Histoire de la colonisation frangaise, 1947; 
Histoire sociale de la colonisation frangaise, 1953; La 
politique coloniale et le partage de la terre au XIX e 
et XX e siecles , 1937) are broadly conceived, encom¬ 
passing the entire empire. Among his more par¬ 
ticularized studies are L’Art negre; Vart animiste des 
noirs d’Afrique (Paris, H. Laurens, 1927. 168 p. 

Art et religion); Le Probleme religieux dans Vempire 
frangais (Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1940. 
153 p.), La Mise en valeur du Senegal (see no. 1052). 

849. Paraf, Pierre. L’ascension des peuples noirs; 

le reveil politique, social et culturel de 1’Afrique 
au XX® siecle. Paris, Payot, 1958. 236 p. 

DT14.P3 

A sympathetic study of the rapidly advancing 
French African territories following the loi-cadre of 
1956, including a country-by-country summary. The 
author, a radio commentator and writer, hopefully 
foresaw African autonomy within the Community. 


850. Pedrals, Denis Pierre de. Voyage aux pro- 

fondeurs de VAfrique. Paris, Librairie au- 
tonome, 1960. 204 p. DT352.P4 

By a literary man who is also an ethnologist and 
former administrator, a return visit to the scenes of 
his earlier work produced this book of charming rem¬ 
iniscences and acute comment on changes. 

851. Priestly, Herbert I. France overseas: a study 

of modem imperialism. New York, London, 
Appleton-Century, 1938. 463 p. 

JV1811.P7 

Solid and concentrated work by a historian at the Uni¬ 
versity of California. His fact-laden study covers the 
French acquisition of her overseas empire during the 
19th century and the first two decades of the 20th 
century, and forms a useful reference work. 

A British publication by an Australian historian, Stephen 
H. Roberts ( History of French Colonial Policy, 1870-1925, 
London, P. S. King, 1929, 2 v.) dealt in more detail (and 
more readably) with the French administrative theory and 
practice in her dependent territories. 

852. Suret-Canale, Jean. Afrique noire, occiden¬ 

tal et centrale. [2d rev. ed.] Paris, Editions 
sociales, 1961. 322 p. illus., maps. (La 
Culture et les hommes) DT524.S8 

Includes bibliography. 

The writer, a geographer who had taught in Senegal, 
studied African history and problems from an anti¬ 
imperialist viewpoint. This work, the first edition of 
which came out in 1958, is an introductory volume 
outlining physical and human geography and history 
up to 1900. It is impressively documented with foot¬ 
notes and a 32-page bibliography. M. Suret-Canale 
is in the 1960’s Director of the Institut National de 
Recherches et de Documentation of Guinea in 
Conakry. The Recherches africaines of which he is 
editor is printed in East Berlin. 

M. Suret-Canale’s account of the French “pacification” of 
West Africa gives a very different picture from that presented 
by historians of the colonial era. Typical is Jacques 
Meniaud, Les pionniers du Soudan avant, avec et apris 
Archinard, 1879-1894 (Paris, Societe des publications 
modernes, 1931. 2 v.), and Sikasso, ou histoire dramatique 

d’un royaume noir au XIX* siecle (Paris, Bouchy, 1935. 

208 p.). 

POLITICS 

853. Administration et diplomatie d’Afrique noire et 

de Madagascar. Paris, Europe-outremer. 
[annual?] JQ1874.A2 

Directory of the governments of “FAfrique de 
l’expression frangaise.” The first volume for 1962 has 
391 pages, including a few advertising pages. 


141 



854. Ansprenger, Franz. Politik im schwarzen Af- 

rika; die modernen politischen Bewegungcn im 
Afrika franzosischer Pragung. Koln, West- 
deutscher Verlag, 1961. 516 p. (Deutsche 
Afrika-Gesellschaft. Schriften des Heinrich- 
Barth-Instituts) DT353.A8 

Under a research grant from the Deutsche Afrika- 
Gesellschaft this scholar visited French Africa in late 
1959 and used sources available in Paris. His com¬ 
prehensive, highly informed, and well-documented 
study of the recent political history of the states of 
former French Africa carries events through 1960. He 
furnishes indexes of African political and other figures 
and of subjects, with explanation of abbreviations, a 
chronology, and a bibliography. 

855. Arboussier, Gabriel d\ L 3 Afrique vers l 3 unite. 

Paris, Editions parisiennes de Saint-Paul, 1961. 
124 p. (Collection “ Af rique monde”) DLC 

Essay on efforts toward Pan-African unity, partic¬ 
ularly those of the Union Africaine et Malgache, by 
the Minister of Justice of Senegal. His argument is 
for a federation of states, not a state federation. 

856. Blanchet, Andre. L’itineraire des partis afri- 

cains depuis Bamako. Paris, Plon, 1958. 
209 p. (Tribune libre, 31) JQ3193 1958 B6 

This account of the preindependence parties in 
French Africa was rapidly outdated by events, but re¬ 
mains a source for background study. It includes a 
“Petit bottin politique de l’Afrique noire,” with names 
and brief biographical notes on 30-odd leaders in 
early 1958. 

Another reliable study, Introduction h VStude des partis 
politiques de I’Afrique frangaise by Leo Hamon (Paris, 1959, 
196 p.), was reprinted from the authoritative journal, Revue 
juridique et politique de VUnion frangaise. What is possibly 
an updated edition was published in 1961 (Hamon, L. 
Les partis politiques africains (II) Paris, Librairie generate de 
droit et de jurisprudence, 1961. 51 p.). 

857. Blardone, Gilbert, and others. Initiation aux 

problemes d’outre-mer, colonisation, decoloni¬ 
sation, sous-developpement. Lyon, Editions 
de la Chronique sociale de France, 1959. 
366 p. (Collection “Savoir pour agir,” v. 5) 

JV1827.B55 

Volume in an outstanding Catholic series of thought¬ 
ful analyses of current problems. The authors are the 
economist Gilbert Blardone, an international lawyer, 
Raoul Padirac, Abbe Paul Catrice, a former councilor 
of the Union Frangaise, and the sociologist Joseph 
Folliet. The appendixes include data on the political 
status as of late 1959. 


858. Cesaire, Aime. Discours sur le colonialisme. 

2 6d., rev. et angm. Paris, Presence africaine, 
1955. 71 p. (Collection “Le Colonialisme,” 
1) JV51.C4 1955 

Eloquent essay on the African desire for human 
dignity by the West Indian poet and nationalist. Run¬ 
ning contemptuously through famous statements of 
some of the great French Africanists, he points out in 
them all the hated assumption of European superiority. 
This is one of the classic texts of the nationalist move¬ 
ment. 

859. Diop, Majhemout. Contribution a Vetude des 

problemes politiques en Afrique noire. Paris, 
Presence africaine [ c 1958] 267 p. illus. 
(Enquetes et etudes) DT353.D5 

Includes bibliography. 

By one of the Senegalese nationalist writers con¬ 
nected with Presence Africaine, this work is a Marxist 
review of conditions and causes for African backward¬ 
ness, with constant quotations from Lenin and other 
Communist writers. The work has been commented 
on as more pro-Communist than pro-African. 

860. Dugue, Gil. Vers les Etats-unis d 3 Afrique. 

Dakar, Editions “Lettres africaines,” 1960. 
314 p. DT33.5.D8 

Journalistic resume of postwar political history of 
French Africa. The preface is by Modibo Keita, at 
that moment President of the short-lived Federation 
of Mali. 

861. Dumon, Frederic. La Communaute franco- 

afro-malgache; ses origines, ses institutions, son 
evolution, octobre 1958-juin 1960. Bruxelles, 
Universite fibre de Bruxelles, Institut de 
sociologie Solvay, 1960. 294 p. (Etudes 

d’histoire et d’ethnologie juridiques, 2) 

DLC 

862. Etats africains d 3 expression frangaise et Repu- 

blique malgache. Paris, R. Julfiard, 1962. 
342 p. DLC 

A handbook offering “as precise as possible a sum¬ 
mary of political and administrative organization of 
the young States,” and describing their common 
organisms and those which furnish aid. There are 
three parts. The first, systematic by country, describes 
14 States, including Mali and Togo, but not Guinea. 
Part 2 explains the Union Africaine et Malgache, its 
economic branch, OAMCE, the Societe Air-Afrique, 
ASNECA (Navigation Aerienne pour 1’Afrique et 
Madagascar), and the Office Inter-Etats du Tourisme 


142 


Africain. Part 3 covers French and international 
organisms for technical and financial aid. In the 
foreword it is stated that there will be annual revisions. 

863. Europe France outremer. L’Afrique d’ex¬ 

pression frangaise. 3. ed. Paris, 1963. Spe¬ 
cial issue of Europe France outrenier. 

JV1801.E65 

The first special issue with this title in a journal em¬ 
phasizing African affairs came out in December 1960; 
the 2d edition appeared in the spring of 1962; and the 
3d edition has been announced for publication in 
March 1963. It comprises a country-by-country guide 
to the political and economic status of French-speak¬ 
ing Africa, to groups and organizations (with index of 
initials), and to links with the Common Market. The 
Republics of Algeria, Tunisia, the Congo (Leopold¬ 
ville), Guinea, Mali, and the Kingdom of Morocco 
are included with the States of the Union Africaine et 
Malgache. 

864. Gonidec, P. F. Constitutions des etats de la 

Communaute; textes recueillis. Paris, Sirey, 
1959. 185 p. DLC-LL 

Texts of the Constitutions of the new States which 
had opted for the French Community in the refer¬ 
endum of September 1958. This specialist in the law 
of France overseas had been responsible for two au¬ 
thoritative earlier works, both published by the 
Librairie Generate de Droit et de Jurisprudence: 
Droit de travail des territoires d’outre-mer (in col¬ 
laboration with M. Kirsch. 1958. 743 p.—Biblio- 

theque de droit des territoires d’outre-mer, v. 1); 
devolution des territoires d’outre-mer depuis 1946 
(1958. 126 p.). 

865. Gueye, Lamine. fitapes et perspectives de 

I’Union frangaise. Paris, Editions de l’Union 
frangaise, 1955. 136 p. JN2609.5.G8 

This study of the road of evolution from the com¬ 
plete dependence of the colonial empire to the French 
Union is by an African elder statesman and political 
leader, formerly deputy to the French Parliament from 
Senegal and Socialist mayor of Dakar, currently Pres¬ 
ident of the Senegal Assembly. 

866. Lavroff, D. G., and G. Peiser. Les constitu¬ 

tions africaines, l’Afrique noire francophone 
et Madagascar. Paris, Pedone, 1961. 279 p. 

(Collection du Centre de recherche, d’etudes 
et de documentation sur les institutions et la 
legislation africaines, 1) 


Announcement seen in International Organization 
of Summer 1962. This work may include Guinea, 
Mali, and Togo as French-speaking states, as well as 
those of the Union Africaine et Malgache. 

867. Lefevre, Raymond. Dossier on French trop¬ 

ical Africa. Asinieres (Seine) 1960+(loose- 
leaf) DLC-AFR 

A serial consisting of groups of “cards” (slips, 
6/2 X 8), usually about thirty a month, giving 
biographical data regarding statesmen in the coun¬ 
tries of French-speaking Africa, occasionally a few in 
English-speaking countries. The pink sheets, each 
with name of an individual at the top, are interspersed 
with white cards showing government organizations. 

868. Luchaire, FRANgois. Les institutions politiques 

et administratives des territoires d’outre-mer 
apres la loi-cadre. Paris, Librairie generale 
de droit et de jurisprudence, R. Pichon et R. 
Durand-Auzias, 1958. p. 221-294. 

DCL-LL 

An authoritative analysis of the changes in adminis¬ 
tration of the French overseas territories established 
by the law passed by the French National Assembly 
on June 23, 1956 (Journal officiel de la Republique 
frangaise. Lois et decrets, 24 juin 1956. 88 annee, 

no. 146, p. 5782-5784). The so-called loi-cadre in¬ 
creased autonomous government in the territories, 
established executive councils for internal affairs, made 
provision for officials “of local origin,” and granted 
universal suffrage with a common electoral role. 

A document containing full texts of legislation relating 
to the reforms of the loi-cadre was published as follows: 

France. Laws, statutes, etc. Reorganisation muni- 
cipale en Afrique occidentale frangaise, en Afrique 
equatoriale frangaise, au Togo, au Gameroun et d 
Madagascar; communes de plein exercice et com¬ 
munes de moyen exercice. Ed- a jour au l er sep- 
tembre 1956. Paris, Impr. des journaux officiels, 
1956. 167 p. 

On cover: Journal officiel de la Republique fran- 
gaiseno. 1073. 

869. Nations nouvelles. no. 1+ 1962+ Cotonou, 

Dahomey, illus. DLC 

English edition has title: New Nations; Mouthpiece 
Binding the African and Madagascan Union ( A.M.U .) 

Journal of the Union Africaine et Malgache, pre¬ 
pared by the Secretariat of UAM (better known by 
the French initials than as AMU), and printed by 
Diloutremer, Paris. Editions are issued in French, 
English, and Arabic. The first number followed and 
was devoted to the Conference of the Heads of States 


143 



and Governments of UAM, Bangui, Mar. 19-22, 
1962; it includes outstanding speeches, political and 
economic resolutions, etc. A second number issued 
in late 1962 concentrated on diplomatic activities of 
the Union. A branch of UAM publishes an economic 
review (see no. 888). 

870. Pierson-Mathy, Mme. P. “devolution politi¬ 

que de 1’Afrique.” Chronique de politique 
etrangire (Bruxelles) v. 14, no. 1-3, janv.- 
mai 1961. 485 p. DT839.C82, v. 14 

By a specialist in international law of the University 
of Brussels, in charge of research at the Institut des 
Relations Internationales, in three issues of whose 
journal this comprehensive study is published. It is 
in four parts: 1, “La Communaute frangaise: a) 
L’organisation; b) Les regroupements interstatiques et 
revolution politique des republiques africaines”; 2, 
“Union Sahel-Benin, Mauritanie, Conseil de 1’En- 
tente, ancienne AEF”; 3, “Gurnee”; 4, “Somalie.” 
The documentation, official and unofficial, is very 
completely cited in footnotes. All phases of constitu¬ 
tional and foreign affairs are covered, with back¬ 
ground. Events are carried through September 1960, 
including complete account of the Federation of Mali 
breakup. 

871. Senghor, Leopold Sedar. Nation et voie 

africaine du socialisme. Paris, Presence 
africaine, 1961. 138 p. (Collection “Lead¬ 
ers politiques africains”) DLG 

Reprint of speeches of the poet and statesman, Presi¬ 
dent of Senegal, and foremost exponent of negritude. 
Senghor’s socialism is a combination of Marxism and 
Christianity with strongly spiritual and African na¬ 
tionalist overtones. A speech to the party which he 
helped form in 1958 has been given to American 
readers in a translation by Mercer Cook, African So¬ 
cialism; A Report to the Constitutive Congress of the 
Party of African Federation (New York, American 
Society of African Culture, 1959. 49 p.) More re¬ 
cently his theories have been expounded in a series 
of articles contributed by M. Senghor to West Africa, 
“Senghor’s Philosophy” (“What is Negritude?” No. 
2318, Nov. 4, 1961, p. 1211; “African Style Social¬ 
ism,” No. 2319, Nov. 11, 1961, p. 1245). 

872. Tevoedjre, Albert. UAfrique revoltie. 

Paris, Presence africaine 1958. 157 p. illus., 

ports. (Tribune de la jeunesse, 1) DT33.T4 

A strong indictment of the French colonial system 
by a young African intellectual, who as editor of the 
Paris journal L’fitudiant d’Afrique noire had served a 


prison term and after his release had toured French 
West Africa assembling documents in proof of repres¬ 
sive actions. M. Tevoedjre, a Dahomean, was the 
Secretary General of the Union Africaine et Malgache 
from its founding in 1961 to March 1963. 

ECONOMICS 

873. Cahiers d’etudes africaines. no. 1+ Jan. 

1960+ Paris, Mouton. quarterly. DLC 

An important journal edited by the Ecole Pratique 
des Hautes Etudes at the University of Paris (6® Sec¬ 
tion, Sciences Economiques et Sociales). The essays 
and notes are on a high level of scholarship and au¬ 
thoritativeness, concerned largely with socioeconomic 
aspects of modem Africa, and in particular with the 
French-speaking countries. 

874. Caisse Centrale de Cooperation Economi¬ 

que. Les operations de FAC, du FI DES, du 
FIDOM et de la Caisse centrale de coopera¬ 
tion economique en 1961. Paris, 1962. 

The Caisse Centrale administers financial aid to 
the independent African republics (centralized un¬ 
der FAC) as well as those of FIDES, which is con¬ 
cerned with the remaining overseas territories of 
France. The agencies in question are the Fonds 
d’Aide et de Cooperation, the Fonds d’lnvestissement 
pour le Developpement Economique et Sociale, and 
the Fonds d’lnvestissement d’Outre-Mer. 

875. Charbonneau, Jean, and Rene Charbonneau. 

Marches et marchands d’Afrique noire. 

Paris, La Colombe, 1961. 150 p. 

HF3876.C45 

Informal study of trade and traders of former 
French Africa, including comment on the European 
merchant firms and white traders, as well as on 
African merchants. General Jean Charbonneau is 
author of many other books on Africa, including 
Blancs et noirs au rendezvous (Paris, La Colombe, 
1956. 151 p.), an understanding analysis of rela¬ 

tions between Africans and French, from a standpoint 
of Catholic responsibility. 

The annual special issue of the Paris weekly, Marches 
tropicaux et mediterraneens, December 1962, comprises a 
statistical survey, “Le Marche africain et malgache” (2. ed., 
1962). It is announced as containing 240 pages, 40 studies, 
and 280 statistical tables, graphs, and charts. The studies 
are in three groups, the first on basic facts of marketing in 
Africa, in which the lead article is by Rene Charbonneau. 
The second and third set analyze respectively the markets 
for capital equipment and for consumer goods. 


144 


876. Dia, Mamadou. Reflexions sur l’economie de 

1’Afrique noire. 2. ed. Paris, Editions Pre¬ 
sence africaine, 1961. 210 p. (Enquetes et 
Etudes) HG502.D42 1961 

The former President of the Council of Ministers 
of Senegal, who had served as a Deputy to the National 
Assembly in Paris, had studied deeply in economics 
and has been regarded as an expert theoretician. 
This thoughtful essay, advocating a coordinated so¬ 
cialist organization of African economy free from 
European pressures, was published first in 1952. It 
is reprinted in this second edition together with sev¬ 
eral later addresses, including a speech before the 
General Assembly of the United Nations in 1960. In 
1957 Dia published a second influential work on gen¬ 
eral economic theory, L’£conomie africaine; etudes et 
problemes nouveaux (Paris, Presses universitaires de 
France. 119 p.), and in the next year a particularized 
study, Contribution a l 3 etude du mouvement cooperatif 
en Afrique noire (Paris, Presence africaine, 1958. 

62 p.). 

877. Dumont, Rene. Afrique noire, developpement 

agricole; reconversion de l’economie agricole: 
Guinee, Cote d’Ivoire, Mali. Paris, Presses 
universitaires de France, 1961. 212 p. 

(Cahiers “Tiers monde.” Problemes des 
pays sous-developpes) HD2117.D8 

878. - UAfrique noire est mal partie. Paris, 

Coll. Esprit “Frontiere ouverte,” 1962. 286 p. 

DLC 

The author, a distinguished agronomist and political 
scientist, is a member of the Fonds d’Aide et de Co¬ 
operation (FAC) that has replaced FIDES. In the 
first-named work, published in a scholarly economic 
series, he spells out in detail the plans that with out¬ 
side financial help might revolutionize agricultural 
production in the three countries studied. In the 
1962 book, which has attracted attention at home and 
abroad, he attacks the waste and prestige expenditures 
of the new cadres of African bureauracy, urges vig¬ 
orous development for the paysannats, and calls on 
Europe to make 20-year plans of economic rather 
than military aid. 

879. Europe France Outremer. Exploitation et 

perspectives minieres de VAfrique. Paris, 
1961. 64 p. JV1801.E65, no. 382 

Special issue of Europe France outremer, no. 382, Septem¬ 
ber 1961: 1-64. 

A survey containing articles by G. R. Manue, F. 
Blondel, and other experts. The articles are on min¬ 


eral resources and prospects in general, then on prin¬ 
cipal minerals and individual enterprises. 

This review updates a compendium of information about 
mines and mining industry in all French Africa, Les Mines 
en Afrique franqaise (Paris, Encyclopedic d’outre-mer 

[1955?] 140 p. illus., maps, diagrs.-Cahiers encyclop6- 

diques d’outre-mer, no. 1). 

The issue of Europe France outremer for December 1962 
is devoted to “Les Transports en Afrique noire francophone 
et h Madagascar.” 

880. - Trois ans de Fonds d 3 aide et de coopera¬ 

tion ( F.A.C .) Paris, 1962. p. 14-59. Special 
issue of Europe France outremer, 39 annee, 
no. 390, aout 1962:14-59. 

JV1801.E65, no. 390 

The number devoted to FAC carries a dozen or more 
articles on the French program of overseas aid in 
general and specific aspects. Two in particular in¬ 
clude tabulated statistics: “Le F.A.C. et les credits 
ouverts au budget de 1962 pour l’aide aux pays 
d’Afrique noire et a Madagascar,” and “Les credits 
ouverts par le F.A.C. en 1959, 1960 et 1961, par 
grandes categories d’operations.” There is also a list¬ 
ing of French enterprises and operations financed in 
part or whole under FAC funds. 

881. France. Ambassade, U.S. Service de presse et 

d’information. French Africa: a decade of 
progress, 1948-1958; achievements of FIDES, 
Investment Fund for Economic and Social De¬ 
velopment in French West and Equatorial 
Africa. New York, 1958. 40 p. col. maps, 
col. diagrs. HC545.F7 

On cover: French economic assistance in West and Equa¬ 
torial Africa; a decade of progress, 1948-58. 

Bibliography: p. 40. 

882. France. Institut national de la statistique 

et des etudes economiques. Publications. 
Paris, [annual?] 1961 ed., 32 p. DLC 

The list of publications of the Institut has a section 
for “Outre-Mer” (in the 1960 edition, Sect. C, p. 20- 
22), which includes the many statistical annuals, 
bulletins, and special reports prepared in past years and 
in some cases still being published. For instance, the 
sociodemographic studies begun in the midfifties were 
still appearing in 1961. 

Other sources for French official publications regarding the 
Community are the Bibliographie selective des publications 
officielles franqaises, issued fortnightly by La Documentation 
Frangaise, and Supplement F. Publications officielles, of the 
Bibliographie de la France, published several times a year by 
the Bibliothcque Nationale. 


145 






883. France. Service des statistiques d’outre-mer. 

Outre-mer 1958; tableau economique et social 
des etats et territoires d’outre-mer a la veille 
de la mise en place des nouvelles institutions. 
Paris, 1959. 862 p. tables, diagrs., charts. 

HC279.A54 

Complete statistical handbook. Many of the tables 
include figures for the year 1957/58. Part 1: Over¬ 
seas territories in world setting. Part 2: Territories, 
plus Togo and Cameroun, 1947-1958. Part 3, analysis 
by subject as of about 1958, with tabular breakdown 
for individual countries. 

Earlier works of the same character from this office were 
L’ficonomie de l’Union frangaise d’outre-mer, a reprint from 
the professional journal Revue d’economie politique (Paris, 
Sirey, 1952-54. 2 v.); and Inventaire social et Economique 

des territoires d’outre-mer, 1950 a 1955 (Paris, Impr. Natio- 
nale, 1957. 467 p. tables). 

884. Hoffherr, Rene. Cooperation economique 

franco-africaine. Paris, Sirey, 1958. 173 p. 

HC545.H6 

By a former High Commissioner in the Cameroun, 
this is a discussion of the French plan of the midfifties 
for the overseas territories, with its large scheme for 
modernization and repartition. The argument is al¬ 
most entirely economic, with emphasis on the possible 
development of the Sahara as an integrating factor for 
the different regions as well as for the French economy. 
The writer calls the Sahara the Ruhr of Africa. 

885. Lattre, Jean Michel de. La mise en valeur de 

Vensemble eurafricain frangais et la participa¬ 
tion des capitaux Strangers, societes a partici¬ 
pation etrangere, compagnies a charte. Paris, 
Librairie generate de droit et de jurisprudence, 
1954. 166 p. HC545.L3 

Argument for coordination of economic develop¬ 
ment of resources of France and her African posses¬ 
sions and spheres of influence, with special reference to 
possibilities for foreign—i.e., American—investment, 
by a lawyer of the Paris Court of Appeals. M. de 
Lattre discussed the international funds—Interna¬ 
tional Bank, TCA, etc.—but preferred a system of 
chartered companies, to the analysis of which he de¬ 
voted most of his text. 

A later book on the idea of coordinated economic develop¬ 
ment of the resources of Europe and Africa, as well as of 
political and cultural integration, was by Pierre Nord, 
L’Eurafrique, notre derniEre chance (Paris, Fayard, 1955. 
124 p. illus.). 

The standard economic directory for French-speaking 
Africa is the annual Bottin d’outre-mer (Paris, Didot-Bottin). 


The main section is of addresses in geographical classification 
by continents, countries, communes, or localities, with notes 
on administrative organization, economic conditions, and 
statistical data. 

886. Morgaut, Marc-Edmond. Un dialogue nou¬ 

veau: VAfrique et VIndustrie. Paris, Fayard, 
1959. 200 p. HD8776.M6 

By a French industrial manager who had employed 
African labor in Cameroun, Senegal, Guinea, and 
other parts of West Africa. His book analyzes under¬ 
standing^ relations between the races, assuming con¬ 
tinuous Franco-African cooperation. 

887. Moussa, Pierre. Les chances economiques de 

la communaute franco-africaine. Paris, A. 
Colin, 1957. 271 p. illus. (Cahiers de la 
Fondation nationale des sciences politiques, 83) 

H31.F6, no. 83 

By the director of the Affaires Economiques et du 
Plan of the Ministere de la France d’Outre-Mer, who 
analyzed the failure and discrepancies of the economic 
equilibrium of the former colonial empire, and prin¬ 
ciples and stages of the development plan. He in¬ 
cluded statistics of French economic aid to Africa. In 
1960 Moussa explained L’Economie de la zone franc in 
a succinct text for the general public (Paris, Presses 
universitaires de France. 128 p. “Que sais-je?” 
868 ). 

888. Organisation africaine et malgache de co¬ 

operation economique. Revue trimestrielle. 
no. 1+ dec. 1962+ Yaounde, Cameroun. 
Organ launched by the economics branch of the 
regional grouping, Union Africaine et Malgache 
(OAMCE). 

889. Poquin, Jean J. Les relations economiques ex- 

terieures des pays d’Afrique noire de VUnion 
frangaise, 1925-1955. Paris, Librairie A. 
Colin, 1957. 297 p. (Centre d’etudes eco¬ 
nomiques. Etudes et memoires, 37) 

HF1617.P6 

Scholarly economic history by a professor at the Uni¬ 
versity of Poitiers. The preface is by M. Houphouet- 
Boigny of the Ivory Coast, who in 1957 was a Minister 
of State of France. 

890. Robequain, Charles. Les richesses de la France 

d’outre-mer; structure economique et pro- 
blemes humains. Paris, Payot, 1949. 221 p. 
(Bibliotheque geographique) HC279.K6 


146 


A professor of geography at the Sorbonne surveyed 
here on a broad scale the economic structure and status 
of the overseas territories, evaluating products and 
their development always in terms of their relation to 
the well-being of the native populations. In his con¬ 
clusion he exclaimed “Riches! This book has had to 
show also poverties!” and pled for more scientific and 
ethnological research in colonial planning. 

CULTURAL 

(including Anthropology and Education) 

891. Boulnois, Jean, and Boubou Hama. L’empire 

de Gao; histoire, coutumes et magie des Sonra’i. 

Paris, Librairie d’Amerique et d’Orient, 1954. 

182 p. illus. DT551.B6 

Historical and ethnological study of the Sonra'i 
(Songhai), descendants of the powerful empire whose 
capital of Gao flourished in the middle Niger region in 
the 15th and 16th centuries. They are a typical 
Nigritic people, their dominant tribe the Sorko, fisher¬ 
men of the great river, from whom come their “pic¬ 
turesque” religious traditions and beliefs. About a 
third of the volume is devoted to the origins and history 
of the Sonra'i, the rest to their religion, mythology, and 
magic. Written in nontechnical style, this book is the 
result of collaboration by a French physician and an 
African teacher and government adviser. 

892. Froelich, J. C. Les Musulmans d 3 Afrique noire. 

Paris, Editions de l’Orante, 1962. 408 p. 
The author is connected with the Conseil Superieur 
des Recherches Sociologiques d’Outre-Mer of the 
Centre des Hautes Etudes d’Administration Musul- 
mane. In 1955 he prepared for the French Direction 
de la Documentation a Carte des populations de 
I’Afrique noire which showed ethnographic distribu¬ 
tion in western Africa south of the Sahara to the 
Congo Basin. The same territory is covered in this 
study of Islam in the French-speaking states of Black 
Africa. 


893. Leroi-Gourhan, Andre, and Jean Poirier. 

Ethnologie de VUnion franqaise (territoires 
exterieurs). Paris, Presses universitaires de 
France, 1953. 2 v. (1083 p.) plates, maps. 
(Pays d’outre-mer; colonies, empires, pays 
autonomes. 6. ser. Peuples et civilisations 
d’outre-mer, 1-2) DC34.L58 

An encyclopedic study, written by scholars for the 
lay reader. The first volume is on Africa, the second 
on Asia, Oceania, and America. Tome 1, Afrique, 
begins with a general section, then treats by regions, 
ending with an essay on “Les societes negro-africaines,” 
a long bibliography (p. 441-468) and statistical ap¬ 
pendixes. 

894. N’Diaye, Jean-Pierre. Enquete sur les etudi- 

ants noirs en France. Paris, Editions Realites 
africaines, 1952. 315 p. DLG 

By a Senegalese who has finished his sociological 
studies in Paris with a survey of experiences and at¬ 
titudes of the new French-speaking African elite as 
they prepare themselves in Paris and other French 
universities. He has analyzed the many significances 
resulting from a questionnaire submitted to 310 stu¬ 
dents. There is a long review of his book in Afrique 
(Paris), November 1962, p. 72-74. 

895. Presence africaine; revue culturelle du monde 

noir. no. 1+ nov.-dec. 1947+ n.s. trimes- 
trielle, 1953+ Paris. GN645.P74 

The review Presence africaine and the several series 
of books and pamphlets published under the auspices 
of Presence Africaine form the chief organs for the 
elites of French-speaking Africa. Edited by M. Alioune 
Diop, the contributions are largely by African writers, 
and the contributors during the decade of the fifties 
included the foremost nationalist intellectuals. Typ¬ 
ical books are Cesaire’s Discours sur le colonialisme 
(see no. 858), Tevoedjre’s L’Afrique revoltee (see 
no. 872). Numbers of the review were often on a 
single theme; e.g., Les £tudiants noirs parlent (Paris, 
1963. Presence africaine, 14). Catalogs of all pub¬ 
lications are available from the Librairie Presence 
Africaine, 42, rue Descartes, Paris V e . 


147 


FORMER FRENCH WEST AFRICA 


Bibliography 

896. Joucla, Edmond A. Bibliographie de VAfrique 

occidentale frangaise, par E. Joucla, avec la 
collaboration des services du Gouvernement 
general de 1’Afrique occidentale frangaise et 
pour le Dahomey de m. Maupoil, administra- 
teur des colonies. Paris, Societe d’editions 
geographiques, maritimes et coloniales, 1937. 
704 p. (Bibliographie generale des colonies 
frangaises, par G. Grandidier . . . E. Joucla) 

Z3711.J68 1937 
Basic for any study of French West Africa that in¬ 
volves background material, this huge bibliography 
appeared in an officially sponsored series begun shortly 
before the Second World War. Joucla cites almost 
1700 maps and charts of A.O.F. His references include 
books, papers, official documents (without distinction 
from unofficial material), and select periodical articles. 
The arrangement is alphabetical, with several subject 
indexes. 

For a more recent list, see bibliography included in the 
book by Thompson and Adloff (no. 925). 

897. U.S. Library of Congress. General Reference 

and Bibliography Division. Official publica¬ 
tions of French West Africa, 1946-1958: a 
guide; compiled by Helen F. Conover. Wash¬ 
ington, 1960. 88 p. Z3672.U5 

Listing of official publications of the A.O.F., the 
individual states, and the French Government relating 
to the region up to the moment of independence. The 
coverage is of documents available in the United States, 
also of those identified through French bibliographical 
sources and material available from French West 
Africa; no claim to completeness can be made. 


898. Afrique occidentale frangaise. Togo. Paris, 
Hachette, 1958. ccxliv, 542 p. maps (part 
fold, col.) (Les Guides bleus) DT523.A7 

Bibliography: p. ccxxiv-ccxxxi. 

Still useful for most matters aside from politics is 
this complete baedeker guide to the countries of A.O.F. 


and Togo, with a preliminary section on airlines, ship¬ 
ping, railroads and roads, and detailed descriptions of 
localities. The introductory essays on West Africa, its 
geography, economy, history and prehistory, missions, 
peoples, arts and crafts, languages, flora and fauna, 
are by prominent scholars, headed by Professor 
Thedore S. Monod of IF AN. 

899. Annuaire des Republiques de VOuest africain: 

Cote d’Ivoire — Dahomey — Haute-Volta — 
Mauritanie — Niger — Senegal—S oudan. 1960. 
Paris, Diloutremer; Dakar, Havas Afrique, 
1960. 450 p. illus. DT521.A75 1960 

Useful yearbook, the first part carrying essays on 
notable aspects of West African affairs, the second 
part giving systematic data about political, economic, 
and social life country by country, the third explaining 
organization of the community. The section on Dakar 
includes a business directory. Advertising is inter¬ 
spersed throughout. The Library of Congress has not 
received information as to whether this annual is 
being issued for later years. 

A pamphlet guide of a more commercial nature, though 
covering much the same data in slighter outline, is the Guid’ 
Ouest africain, issued by the Agence de Distribution de 
Presse in Dakar and Diloutremer in Paris. The 1962-63 
edition, with 540 p. and 30 maps and plans, is the 16th 
annual volume (1948-58/59, Guid’A.O.F.). 

900. Capet, Marcel F. Traite d’economie tropicale: 

les economies d 3 A.O.F. Paris, Librairie gene- 
rale de droit et de jurisprudence, 1958. 348 p. 
illus., fold. map. HC545.C35 

A survey of the economic situation on the eve of 
independence. 

901. Chailley, Marcel. Les grandes missions fran- 

gaises en Afrique occidentale. Dakar, Institut 
frangais d’Afrique noire, 1953. 145 p. illus. 

(Initiations africaines, 10) DT532.C47 

Bibliography: p. 135-137. 

Recital of French exploration in West Africa, from 
the first establishment in Senegal in 1639 (Saint-Louis 
in 1659, Goree in 1677) to the 28,000-kilometer in¬ 
spection of the African sky, from the Sahara to Dakar, 


148 



to Zinder and the A.E.F., by a 28-plane air squadron 
under General Vuillemin in 1933. There are indexes 
of geographical and personal names, illustrations, and 
maps. 

902. Coutumiers juridiques de VAfrique occidentale 

frangaise. Paris, Larose, 1939. 3 v. (Pu¬ 

blications du Comite d’etudes historiques et 
scientifiques de l’A.O.F., ser. A, no. 8-10). 

DLC-LL 

Comprehensive study on customary law of the 
French colonies of West Africa, the first volume de¬ 
voted to Senegal, the second to the Sudan, the third to 
Niger, the Ivory Coast, Dahomey and French Guinea. 
The Committee preceded IFAN as a center for 
scholarly research regarding the A.O.F. 

903. Dakar. Chambre de commerce. Synthese de 

la situation economique de I’ex-Afrique occi¬ 
dentale frangaise durant la periode de 1948 a 
1958. Dakar, 1959. 7 v. (1455 1.) 

HC547.W5D3 

Contents.—t. 1. Problemes de structure.—t. 2. Problemes 
de structure (suite) Productions.—t. 3. Productions (suite) — 
t. 4. Productions (suite) Transports et communications.—t. 5. 
ficonomie generate.—t. 6. ficonomie generate (suite)—t. 7. 
Investissements et mise en valeur. Balance des comptes. 

904. Delavignette, Robert. Freedom and author¬ 

ity in French West Africa. London, New 
York, Published for the International African 
Institute by the Oxford University Press, 1950. 
152 p. JQ3195.A1D43 

The writer, former Governor-General of France 
Overseas and from 1947-1951 Director of Political 
Affairs of the Ministry of France Overseas, had many 
years’ experience as administrator in French West 
Africa. This book is a translation of his 1948 Service 
africain, which was a reworking of his Les Vrais chefs 
de Vempire, published in late 1939, when he was teach¬ 
ing young administrators. His emphasis in this gen¬ 
eral study of African society in the French colonies is 
on the new Africa and the task, for which the admin¬ 
istrator is the chief agent, of introducing her into the 
modem world. Professor Delavignette is known for 
many other books on the West African colonies, of 
which perhaps the most famous was Paysans noirs (see 
no. 984). 

905. Gautier Emile F. L’Afrique noire occiden¬ 

tale; esquisse des cadres geographiques. Paris, 
Larose, 1935. 188 p. (Publications du 

Comite d’etudes historiques et scientifiques de 
l’Afrique occidentale frangaise) DT471.G33 


Professor Gautier of the University of Algiers was 
one of the great geographers of the French colonies. 
This short essay is on the geographic and geological 
factors that have shaped the history of West Africa. 

906. Gouilly, Alphonse. Ulslam dans VAfrique 

occidentale frangaise. Paris, Larose, 1952. 

318 p. illus. BP65.A4G6 

Study by a French authority on Islam. The intro¬ 
duction describes country and people of the semi-arid 
Sahelian zone where the Muslim nomads of the 
“white” north have met, clashed, and mingled with 
the sedentary animist blacks. The first part relates the 
history of the Islam conquests, from the invasion of 
the Berber Almoravides in the 11th century on to the 
last forced conversions before the French took over 
control; Part 2 is on the religious brotherhoods; Part 3 
examines the effects of Islamization—corruption of 
the Muslim creed through animist accretions, influence 
of Islam on Negro ways of life; and Part 4 contains a 
discussion of the French policy toward Islam. A con¬ 
cluding balance sheet weighs positive and negative 
aspects. 

907. Goyat, Michel. Guide pratique de Vemployeur 

et du travailleur en Afrique occidentale. 

Dakar, Senegal, Editions Clairafrique, 1960. 
798 p. DLC-LL 

A treatise on labor legislation and practice. 

908. Hodgkin, Thomas L., and Ruth Schachter. 

French-speaking West Africa in transition. 

New York, Carnegie Endowment for Interna¬ 
tional Peace, 1960. p. 375-436. (Interna¬ 
tional conciliation, no. 528, May 1960) 

DT532.H6 

Two specialists in French West African affairs re¬ 
view the socio-political background in French West 
Africa, the constitutional framework under French 
assimilative policy, postwar reforms, loi-cadre, Com¬ 
munity of 1959, the political parties, and the groupings 
of the new states. Originally prepared for the May 
1960 issue of International Conciliation, the study did 
not receive publication till the spring of 1961. A few 
changes were made to update certain already invali¬ 
dated points; the penetrating analysis is of continuing 
significance. 

909. Institut FRANgAis d’Afrique Noire, Dakar. 
Bulletin, t. 1-15, jan. 1939-oct. 1953. quarterly. 

Q89.I5 


149 


910. - Ser. A., Sciences naturelles. t. 16 + 

jan. 1954+ quarterly. QH3.I6 

911. - Ser. B, Sciences humaines. t. 16 + 

jan./avr. 1954+ semiannual. DTI.15123 

912. - Memoires. 1940+ irregular (mono¬ 

graphic series) 

913. - Notes africaines. 1939+ quarterly. 

DTI.1513 

The renowned research institute of French West 
Africa was created in 1936 and activated in 1938 with 
the appointment of Dr. Theodore Monod as director. 
In 1960 it was incorporated as an Institute in the Uni¬ 
versity of Dakar. A sketch of IFAN’s history for its 
25th birthday was published in Notes africaines, no. 90, 
April 1961. During these years IF AN has undertaken 
learned studies in practically all disciplines relating to 
the region—botany, zoology, oceanography, ethnol¬ 
ogy, archeology, anthropology, sociology, linguistics, 
geography; only geology is excluded, as coming within 
the province of the Direction des Mines. The mono¬ 
graphic series of Memoires, which was begun in 1939 
with R. Trautman’s La divination a la Cote des es- 
claves et a Madagascar, has included distinguished 
contributions in all these fields. A few recent volumes 
in the human sciences are separately analyzed in the 
present bibliography. Besides the Memoires, there is 
the monographic series of Initiations africaines, shorter 
papers usually in more popular vein than the Memoi¬ 
res; also catalogs of the various collections of natural 
and ethnological materials gathered by IFAN and 
preserved in its museums in Dakar and local branches. 
The Bulletin of IFAN, a journal of scholarly contribu¬ 
tions in the various disciplines, often of monograph 
length, is now published in two sections, Serie A, Scien¬ 
ces naturelles, and Serie B, Sciences humaines. The 
full list of IFAN publications is given on inside of front 
and back covers of each issue. The bulletin of infor¬ 
mation and correspondence, Notes africaines, is also 
published quarterly, and this too carries on its back 
cover pages the full list of the Institute’s publications. 

In the A.O.F., regional studies were issued by the various 
Centres IFAN; Etudes earnerounaises, Douala, Cameroun; 
Etudes dahomiennes, Porto-Novo, Dahomey; Etudes ebur- 
neennes, Abidjan, Ivory Coast; Etudes guineennes, Conakry, 
French Guinea: Etudes mauritaniennes, Saint-Louis-du- 
Senegal; Etudes nigeriennes, Niamey, Niger; Etudes senega- 
laises, Saint-Louis-du-Senegal; Etudes soudanaises, Bamako, 
French Sudan; Etudes voltaiques, Ouagadougou, Upper 
Volta. Some of these plan to continue publication under the 
independent governments. 


914. International African Institute. Mono- 

graphies ethnologiques africaines. Paris, Pub¬ 
lished for the Institute by Presses universitaires 
de France, 1954+ 

The French series of the Ethnological Survey of 
Africa (see no. 270). Volumes published are; Les 
Bamhara, by Viviana Paques (1954. 100 p.); Les 

Songhay, by Jean Rouch (1954. 100 p.); Les Conia- 

gui et les Bassari, by Monique de Lestrange (1955. 86 

p.); Les Dogon, by Montserrat Palau Marti (1957. 
122 p.); Les Senoufo, by B. Holas (1957. 183 p.); 

Le Groupe dit Pahouin: Fang, Bulu, Beti, by P. 
Alexandre (1958. 152 p.); Les Kongo Nord-occiden- 

taux, by Marcel Soret (1959. 144 p); Les Popula¬ 

tions du Tchad, by Annie M.-D. Lebeuf (1959. 
130 p.); Les Populations paiennes du Nord Cameroun 
et de I’Adamaoua, by B. Lembezat (in press in 1962). 

915. Labouret, Henri. Paysans d’Afrique occiden¬ 

tal. Paris, Gallimard, 1941. 307 p. 

GN655.F7L3 

One of a distinguished series on worldwide agricul¬ 
tural societies, “Le Paysan et la terre.” The writer 
in his foreword quoted the French colonial theorist, 
Jules Harmand, who in 1910 gave his formula for 
tropical colonies: “The true colonist is the native and 
the great colonizer is the State.” In his text Labouret 
explained the French implementation of this phil¬ 
osophy in the West African colonies, where the chief 
effort had been directed to forming a viable economy 
based on rural communities. His lucid study covered 
the physical and human milieu, the territorial divi¬ 
sions, systems of land tenure, the ways of village society, 
and the actual workings of agricultural economy. A 
section is devoted to African thought and literary ex¬ 
pression. 

916. Lavergne de Tressan, Michel de. Inventaire 

linguistique de VAfrique occidentale frangaise 
et du Togo. Dakar, IFAN, 1953. 240 p. 9 
fold. maps. (Memoires, no. 30) PL8017.L3 

Bibliography: p. 25-45. 

By a French commander of colonial troops who calls 
himself an “amateur” linguist, this comprehensive ref¬ 
erence work gives detailed information as to localities 
where the various languages of French West Africa 
are spoken, with estimates of number of speakers from 
the French census of 1950. The bibliography for each 
language or group of languages includes texts as well 
as ethnological books and articles. Many other lin¬ 
guistic studies published by IFAN will be found in the 
list of publications above-mentioned. 


150 






917. Mauny, Raymond. Tableau geographique de 

VOuest africain au Moyen Age d’apres les 
sources ecrites, la tradition et Varcheologie. 
Dakar, IF AN, 1961. 587 p. illus., maps (part 
fold.) plans. (Memoires de l’lnstitut frangais 
d’Afrique noire, no. 61) DT471.M35 

Bibliography: p. 547-575. 

A study of West African history between the Arab 
invasions and the era of Portuguese discoveries. The 
author, then director of archaeological research for 
IFAN, presented this work as his thesis for the doctorat 
d’etat-es-lettres at the Sorbonne in 1959. His sec¬ 
ondary thesis was Les Navigations medievales sur les 
cotes sahariennes anterieures a la decouverte portu- 
gaise (1434) (Lisboa, Centro de Estudos Historicos 
Ultramarinos, 1960. 151 p. illus., maps). 

918. Milcent, Ernest. L’A.O.F. entre en scene. 

Paris, Editions Temoignage chretien, 1958. 
190 p. illus. (Bibliotheque de l’homme d’ac¬ 
tion) DT534.M5 

By a well-informed journalist in Dakar, correspond¬ 
ent for Le Monde (Paris), and editor of Afrique 
nouvelle from October 1959 to April 1963, this is a 
lucid history of political developments from the Con¬ 
ference of Brazzaville in 1944 to mid-1957, with par¬ 
ticular reference to the reactions of the various parties 
to provisions of the loi-cadre. The preface is by Seng- 
hor, then leader of the Convention Africaine; he 
speaks with approval of M. Milcent’s forward-looking 
analysis of future ties between an autonomous West 
Africa and France. 

919. Mission Anthropologique de l’Afrique Oc- 

cidentale FRANgAisE, 1946+ L’alimentation 
en A.O.F.; milieux, enquetes, techniques, ra¬ 
tions, par Leon Pales. Avec la collaboration 
de Marie Tassin de Saint Pereuse. Dakar, 
O.R.A.N.A., 1954. 434 p. DLC 

Dr. Pales was chief of this study mission which car¬ 
ried out many research projects relating to anthro¬ 
pometry, alimentation, nutrition, etc., in French West 
Africa in the late forties and early fifties. A partial 
listing will be found in the Library of Congress bib¬ 
liography, Official Publications of French West Africa 
1946-1958 (on p. 14-16). 

920. Neres, Philip. French-speaking West Africa — 

from colonial status to independence. London, 
New York, Oxford University Press, 1962. 
101 p. illus. DT532.N4 1962 


A succinct account in pamphlet form, issued under 
the auspices of the Institute of Race Relations. 

921. Richard-Molard, Jacques. Afrique occiden¬ 

tal frangaise. 3. ed., rev. et mise a jour. 
Paris, Editions Berger-Levrault, 1956. 252 p. 
illus. (L’ Union frangaise) 

DT524.R5 1956 
A highly praised introductory survey by the late 
chief of the Geographical Section of the Institut 
Frangais d’Afrique Noire at Dakar. Original edition, 
1949. The preface by Professor Monod, director of 
IFAN, speaks of it as the most fully satisfactory up-to- 
date synthesis for the layman of the many special 
studies on French West Africa, interpreted through 
the understanding eye of the geographer. 

922. - Problemes humains en Afrique occiden¬ 

tal. 2. ed. rev. et completee de l’Hommage 
a Jacques Richard-Molard. Paris, Presence 
africaine, 1958. 467 p. illus. 

DT530.R5 1958 
Collection of papers in physical and human geogra¬ 
phy relating to West Africa, prepared as a tribute to 
their author, the brilliant young geographer Jacques 
Richard-Molard, who was killed by a fall while on a 
mountain expedition in 1951. The essays are in three 
groups: “Civilisations et societe ouest africaines,” “La 
terre et l’homme en Afrique noire,” and “L’Afrique 
nouvelle: bilan, transformations, perspectives.” 

923. Robert, Andre P. Uevolution des coutumes 

de VOuest africain et la legislation frangaise. 
Paris, Editions de l’Encyclopedie d’outre-mer, 
1955. 255 p. (Bibliotheque juridique de 

l’Union frangaise) DLC-LL 

Analysis of the customary law of French West Africa 
and its relationship to and conflicts with French legis¬ 
lation. The writer, who deals with many varied tribes 
and their customs, urged that the role of the chief and 
the “chefferie” be maintained, in protection of the 
traditional elites of African society. 

924. Spitz, Georges. L’Ouest africain frangais: 

A.O.F et Togo. Paris, Societe d’editions geo- 
graphiques, maritimes et coloniales, 1947. 
508 p. (Terres lointaines). DT524.S65 
A comprehensive survey in a semipopular series of 
well-balanced country studies. The author, an hon¬ 
orary governor of the colonies, was formerly an ad¬ 
ministrator in A.O.F. 


151 





925. Thompson, Virginia McLean, and Richard 

Adloff. French West Africa. Stanford, 
Calif, Stanford University Press, 1957. 626 p. 
illus., maps, tables. DT524.T5 

Bibliography: p.599-614. 

Clear, detailed, analytical survey by two experts, 
examining with keen insight the political scene in 
French West Africa as it had developed from 1944, 
the economy in all phases, and present-day social and 
cultural aspects. The only modern study of this scope 
in English, it is indispensable for any research on the 
French-speaking countries of West Africa. Its full 
bibliography includes books, pamphlets, documents, 
and significant periodical material. 

926. U.S. Bureau of Foreign Commerce. Trade Mis¬ 

sion Division. Business opportunities in Ivory 
Coast, Dahomey, Togo, Niger, Upper Volta, 
Senegal, Mauritania, Mali; a businessmen’s 
on-the-spot report to businessmen: exports, 
imports, investments, potentials. Washington, 
U.S. Dept, of Commerce, Bureau of Foreign 
Commerce, 1961. 19 p. DLC 

927. Urvoy, Yves. Petit atlas ethno-demographique 

du Soudan entre Senegal et Tchad. Paris, 


Larose, 1942. 46 p., 3 1. illus., iv pi. on 2 1., 
fold. maps. (Memoires de 1’IFAN, n° 5) 

GN651.U7 1942a 

The region covered in this map and summary anal¬ 
ysis of Western Sudanic peoples includes Senegal, the 
former French Sudan (Mali), Upper Volta, Niger, 
Northern Nigeria, and Chad. 

928. Viguier, Pierre. UAfrique de Vouest vue par 

un agriculteur; problemes de base en Afrique 
tropicale. Paris, La Maison rustique, 1961. 
133 p. S471.A395V5 

Brief commentary by an experienced agricultural 
officer, suggesting technical procedures that might 
maintain fertility of the fields for cultivation by im¬ 
proved, but still traditional, non-mechanized methods. 

929. Wallerstein, Immanuel. “How seven states 

were born in former French West Africa.” 
Africa report, v. 6, Mar. 1961: 3-4, 7, 12, 15. 

DTI.A217, v. 6 

By an American political scientist who has special¬ 
ized in French-speaking Africa, this article provides a 
useful survey in English of the political groupings and 
actions that brought about independence in the former 
A.O.F. 


Dahomey 


930. Akindele, Adolphe, and Cyrille Aguessy. 
Contribution a Vetude de Vhistoire de Vancien 
royaume de Porto-Novo. Dakar, Institut 
frangais d’Afrique noire, 1953. 168 p. 

(Memoires, n° 25) DT553.P6A7 

Based on a work written in Yoruba by Akindele Akinsowon, 
father of one of the authors, and published in 1914 under the 
title: Iwi itan Ajasi. 

“Bibliographic sommaire”: p. 163-168. 

Monograph by two African scholars, relating to the 
general and particular history of the former kingdom 
of Porto-Novo, now the capital of Dahomey, including 
details of the selection and coronation of the king and 
other aspects of court and governmental life, the list 
of kings and chiefs from 1688 to- 1941, with notes on 
their reigns. The long section on family and religious 
customs contains poetic translations of funeral chants. 
Appendixes give a list of native words and a select 
bibliography. In the Preface, Professor Monod, Di¬ 
rector of IF AN, commented on the satisfaction of the 
study of African history written by Africans. 


Another in this series of monographs published the same 
year relates to the modern city and its chief resource, Porto- 
Novo et i a palmeraie, by Paule Brasseur-Marion and G. 
Brasseur (Dakar, 1953. 131 p. illus. Memoires de 

1’IFAN, no. 32). 

931. - Le Dahomey. Pref. du gouverneur G. 

H. Bonfils. Paris, Editions maritimes et 
coloniales, 1955. 126 p. plates, maps, 

tables. (Pays africains, 6) DT541.A6 

In the preface of this introductory survey the former 
governor of the small country which gives French West 
Africa its outlet on the Gulf of Guinea speaks of ad¬ 
vances under the equipment plan—roads to the 
farthest-off points, “hospitals, schools, dispensaries, 
literally springing from the earth.” The two African 
writers outline succinctly history and ethnology, re¬ 
ligions, and administrative organization of Dahomey, 
and devote their chief attention to social and economic 
developments under the French rule and particularly 
under FIDES. 


152 



932. Burton, Sir Richard F. A mission to Gelele, 

king of Dahome y with notices of the so-called 
“Amazons,” the Grand Customs, the yearly 
Customs, the human sacrifices, the present 
state of the slave trade, and the Negro’s place 
in nature. London, Tinsley Bros., 1864. 2 v. 
Memorial ed., edited by his wife, Lady Isabel 
Burton. London, Tylston and Edwards, 1893. 
2 v. DT541.B97 1893 

One of the most famous of the travel narratives of 
Dahomey, though by no means the earliest. Other 
journeys and histories in English and French from the 
late 17th century voyages of William Bosman to the 
late 19th century are discussed by Dr. Herskovits in 
the first chapter of his Dahomey (below). 

933. Clerc, Joseph, Pierre Adam, and Claude Tar- 

dits. Societe paysanne et problemes fonciers 
de la palmeraie dahomeenne, etude socio- 
logique et cadastrale. Paris, Office de la 
recherche scientifique et technique outre-mer 
(ORSTOM) 1956. 147 p. illus. (L’Homme 
d’outre-mer, no. 2) HD999.D3C6 

Report of an officially sponsored study of Dahomean 
palm-oil plantations and land problems. 

934. Cornevin, Robert. Histoire du Dahomey. 

Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1962. 568 p. illus., 

maps. (Mondes d’outre-mer. Histoire) 

DLC 

Not yet available for examination in the Library of Con¬ 
gress. Announced in the Bibliographic de la France, 1 fev, 
1963. 

935. Desanti, Hyacinthe. Du Danhome au Benin- 

Niger. Paris, Larose, 1945. 262 p. 

DT541.D4 

By a colonial governor with long experience in 
Dahomey, this full survey is in four parts; the first 
sketches history, geography, and ethnology, the second, 
French political and social administration, the third, 
economic development, and last, the place of Dahomey 
in French West Africa. The author foresaw a revolt 
against French assimilative policy. 

936. Diamond, Stanley. Dahomey: a proto-State 

in West Africa. Ann Arbor, University Micro¬ 
films, 1951. (Publication No. 2808) Micro¬ 
film AC-1, no. 2808. AS30.M5 

Microfilm copy of typescript. Positive. 

Abstracted in Microfilm Abstracts, v. 11 (1951), no. 4, 
p. 812-814. 

Doctoral study in the ethnological field, analyzing 
the organization of the pre-French Dahomean state. 


The writer depicts it as a society in transition from 
the kinship system of family-controlled peasant agri¬ 
culture to a civil state based on tribute in the form 
of human labor, with power divided between the 
royal Fon clan, the war chief, and an emerging civil 
organization of bureaucracy. 

937. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique du Dahomey. Paris, 1959. 38 p. 
Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2620, 31 
dec. 1959) D411.F67, no. 2620 

See general note on series (no. 846). There is 
available also an illustrated booklet in English, 
Dahomey, Hour of Independence (New York, 1960. 
32 p.). 

938. French West Africa. Gouvernement general. 

Le Dahomey. Corbeil, £d. Crete, 1906. 351 p. 
(Notices publiees ... a l’occasion de l’Ex- 
position coloniale de Marseille). DT541.F84 

Authoritative survey of the French colony at the be¬ 
ginning of the present century. History, physical and 
human geography, material and social advances under 
French rule, industrial development, administrative 
organization, and all aspects of economic life are 
succinctly covered. 

939. Grivot, Rene. Reactions dahomeennes. Paris, 

Berger-Levrault, 1954. 180 p. illus. 

DT541.G75 

By the chief administrator of the “cercles” of 
Dahomey. The writer’s great experience in the ad¬ 
ministration and tribal life of the territory is here 
reflected. 

940. Herskovits, Melville J. Dahomey, an ancient 

West African kingdom. New York, J. J. Au¬ 
gustin, 1938. 2 v. illus. DT541.H4 

941. - and Frances Herskovits. Dahomean 

narrative; a cross-cultural analysis. Evanston, 
Northwestern University Press, 1958. 490 p. 
(Northwestern University, Evanston, Ill. 
African studies, no. 1) GR360.D3H4 

942. - An outline of Dahomean religious be¬ 

lief. Menasha, Wis., 1933. 77 p. (Memoirs 
of the American Anthropological Association, 
no. 41). GN2.A22, no. 41 

The late Professor Herskovits of Northwestern 
University, who was the first President of the African 
Studies Association in 1957-58, was perhaps the best 
known anthropologist among American Africanists. 
After writing several books on the American Negro 


153 







(though his doctoral thesis in 1926 was on East Africa), 
he did fieldwork in West Africa in 1931. The first pub¬ 
lished result was the paper in which he collaborated 
with Mrs. Herskovits. The full-scale work in 1938 
has an established place among the studies of African 
anthropology. The Dahomean Narrative is a collec¬ 
tion of tales gathered by Professor and Mrs. Herskovits 
in 1931, as a French-speaking informant translated 
them from the lips of the narrators in Dahomey. They 
are of nine general types, with variant versions for 
some. The long introduction (p. 3-122) combines 
analysis of the narrative forms with a general “cross- 
cultural” discussion of myth. 

943. Revue Encyclopedique de l’Afrique. Re- 
publique du Dahomey. Abidjan, 1960. 32 p. 
illus. (Encyclopedic mensuelle de l’Afrique) 

DLC-AFR 


This Supplement to no. 2 of the above periodical is 
a special issue devoted in full to Dahomey. In the 
other French feature magazines Dahomey is usually 
included in general coverage of the states of the En¬ 
tente. 

944. Tardits, Claude. Porto-Novo; les nouvelles 
generations africaines entre leurs traditions et 
l’Occident. Paris, Mouton, 1958. 128 p. 

(Ecole pratique des hautes etudes, Paris, 6. sec¬ 
tion: Le Monde d’outre-mer, passe et present. 
1. ser.: Etudes, 7) 

DT553.P6T3 

Sociological study including an inquiry by ques¬ 
tionnaire which covered urbanized and traditional 
mores. Reviewed at length in Africa, January 1960 
(v. 30, p. 87-88). 


Guinea 


945. France. Institut national de la statistique et des 

etudes economiques. Service de cooperation. 
Enquete demographique de la region du Kon- 
koure (Guinee, 1957) Resultats definitifs. 
Paris, 1962. 71 p. DLC 

One of a series of regional studies of population and 
living standards begun before independence. 

946. Frohlich, Gerd. Guinea nach der Regenzeit. 

Leipzig, F. A. Brockhaus, 1961. 134 p. illus., 
part. col. DT543.2.F7 

Based on a trip made through Guinea by five East 
Germans with African interpreter and driver. En¬ 
thusiastic description with political overtones, and 
many excellent photographs. 

947. Gaisseau, Pierre D. The sacred forest; magic 

and secret rites in French Guinea. Translated 
from the French by Stephen Becker. New 
York, Knopf, 1954. 247 p. illus. 

GN475.8.G313 

Witch doctors and initiation rites of the Toma, a 
forest tribe of French Guinea, were the focus of interest 
of the four young Frenchmen whose expedition to 
make documentary films is reported in this narrative. 
They themselves underwent the ritual initiation of 
tattooing in order to be admitted to the secrets of the 
tribe. The story is full of primitive magic, its effects 
reaching white men as well as black. 


948. Gigon, Fernand. Guinee, etat-pilote. Paris, 

Plon, 1959. 109 p. (Tribune fibre, 51) 

DT543.8.G5 

A spirited and sympathetic study of the new Re¬ 
public in its first year of existence, by a liberal journal¬ 
ist. From his reported interview with President Toure 
he concluded that “before thinking as a Marxist, he 
[Toure] thinks as an African. Before acting as a 
Communist, he considers the realities of his country.” 

An enthusiastic account of the establishment and present 
course of the Republic of Guinea is given by Pannikar in his 
general study of the new Africa (see no. 124). 

949. Guinee; prelude a l’independance. Paris, Pre¬ 

sence africaine, 1959. 175 p. DT543.G8 

Contents.—Conference des commandants de cercle.—An- j 
nexes: Discours d’ouverture de la Conference des comman- j 
dants de cercle prononce par le gouvemeur Ramadier. j 
Allocution du president Sekou Toure. Rapport de M. le 
ministre des finances. Rapport de M. le commandant de 
cercle de Labe.— Naissance de la Republique de Guinee. I, 

The Conference here reported, held in Conakry in 
1957, preceded Toure’s repression of the chefferies I 
and led to his personal control of the country which I 
brought about the vote of “Non” in 1958. 

950. Guinee independante. Presence africaine 

(Paris) no. 29, dec. 1959-jan. 1960: p. 3-115. 

GN645.P74, no. 29 

The combined issue for these two months of Pre¬ 
sence africaine is devoted to Guinea, then at her most 


154 




defiant regarding France. Articles include “Impres¬ 
sions de voyage,” by Alioune Diop; “La Guinee dans 
le systeme colonial,” by Jean Suret-Canale; “Con- 
naissance historique de la Guinee,” by Diallo 
Ousmane; “La pensee politique de Sekou Toure,” 
by Aime Cesaire; “Variations sur le theme guineen,” 
by Jacques Rabemananjara. There is a group of 
poems, “Chants revolutionnaires guineens,” collected 
by Djibril Tamsir Niane, with text in the African 
language and in French. 

951. Holas, Bohumil. Le culte de Zie, elements de 

la religion kono (Haute Guinee frangaise) 
Dakar, IF AN, 1954. 275 p. illus. 

(Memoires de l’lnstitut frangais d’Afrique 
noire, no. 39) BL2480.K6H6 

Important contribution to anthropological studies 
of Guinea. 

Three volumes relating to Guinean tribes are in the French 
series of the International African Institute, Monographies 
ethnologiques africaines (see no. 270): Monique de Lestrange, 
Les Coniagui et les Bassari, GuinSe franqaise (1955. 86 p. 

illus.); Viviana Paques, Les Bambara (1954. 123 p.); Jean 

Rouch, Les Songhay (1954. 100 p.). 

952. Houis, Maurice. La Guinee franqaise. Paris, 

Editions maritimes et coloniales, 1953. 94 p. 
illus. (Pays africains, 3) DT543.H66 

Succinct exposition of geography, ethnic groups, 
their religion (mostly an eclectic animism underlying 
recently acquired Mohammedanism), history, politi¬ 
cal and administrative structure, social services of 
French and missionary groups, agriculture (rice, oil 
palms, and bananas being introduced as cash crops), 
industries (mining iron, bauxite, gold, etc.), commerce, 
ports, and communications. The author had formerly 
been Director of IF AN in Guinea. His most general 
conclusion was that the economic and industrial treas¬ 
ure of French Guinea had hardly been touched, but 
the “sleeping beauty” was now waking, and great 
possibilities lie ahead, as new enterprises and centers 
are developed. 

953. Laye, Camara. The dark child. New York, 

Noonday Press, 1954. 188 p. DT543.L313 

Translated from the French. 

By a young evolue from French Guinea, this is the 
story of his childhood in a village and his school days 
in Conakry. The author is an aristocrat of the tribe 
of Malinke, descendants of the Muslim empire of 
Mali which ruled upper Guinea from the 13th to the 
18th century. His sensitive, poetic narrative includes 
a revealing account of the boyhood circumcision rites. 


M. Laye has become known as one of the most dis¬ 
tinguished of French-speaking African literary men. 

954. Niane, Djibril Tamsir. Soundjata; ou, 

l’epopee mandingue. Presence africaine, 
1960. 154 p. illus. DT532.2.N5 

By a Guinean scholar who is doing research into 
the sources of early history of West Africa and the 
’ medieval kingdoms. The title is the name of the 
Mandingo conqueror of the 13th century. M. Niane 
has collaborated also with Jean Suret-Canale in a 
recent text prepared for Guinean schools. Histoire 
de I’Afrique occidentale (Conakry, Ministere de 
l’Education nationale, 1960). Of Soundjata a re¬ 
viewer for West Africa (May 26, 1962, p. 576) said, 
“genuine imaginative scholarship draws unostenta¬ 
tiously in its train what can only be described as 
engines of the cold war.” 

955. Paulme, Denise. Les gens du riz, Kissi de 

Haute-Guinee franqaise. Paris, Plon, 1954. 
232 p. illus. (Recherches en sciences hu- 
maines, 4) DT543.P3 

Monograph examining in great detail the Kissi tribe 
whose peasant rice culture is centered in southern 
Guinea, and spreads over into Sierra Leone and even 
into Liberia. Mme. Paulme analyzed many factors of 
physical and economic setting, social life, religion, and 
institutions. 

956. Pre, Roland. L’avenir de la Guinee franqaise. 

Conakry, Les Editions guineennes, 1951. 
280 p. diagrs. DT543.P7 

Study by a governor of the former French territory. 
It starts with a general background sketch, then is 
concentrated on problems of agriculture, industry, 
transport, social welfare. The writer concluded with 
an optimistic evaluation of the importance of Guinea 
in the evolution of French Africa. 

957. Rayautra, Mamadou Traore. Connaissance de 

la Republique de Guinee. Conakry, Ministere 
de l’information et du tourisme de la Re¬ 
publique de Guinee [ 196—] 56 p. DT543.R3 
A booklet of general information for visitors to the 
country. 

958. Recherches africaines: Etudes guineennes [nou- 

velle serie] no. 1+ j‘an. 1959+ Conakry, 
Institut national de recherches et de documen¬ 
tation, Republique de Guinee. quarterly. 

DLG 


692 - 756—63 


11 


155 





This new series, under the direction of M. Jean 
Suret-Canale, head of the new Institute, has super¬ 
seded the former Etudes guineennes of the Centre 
I FAN du Guinee, which were published irregularly 
from 1947-55. 

959. Toure, Sekou, President of Guinea. Experience 
guineenne et unite africaine. Paris, Presence 
africaine, 1961. 566 p. DT543.T616 1961 


960. - Toward full re-Africanisation; policy 

and principles of the Guinea Democratic Party. 
Paris, Presence africaine, 1959. 108 p. 

JQ3381.A98D48 

In the preface of the 1961 collection of speeches of 
the leader of the Parti Democratique de Guinee, first 
President of the only state to answer “Non” in the 
referendum of 1958, Aime Cesaire speaks of Toure as 
“Fhomme africain decisif” of this era. 


Ivory Coast 


961. Amon d’Aby, F. J. La Cote dTvoire dans la 

cite africaine. Paris, Larose, 1951. 206 p. 

illus. DT545.A65 

The writer, Government Archivist of the Ivory 
Coast, and a playwright, is a notable representative 
of the French African elite. His book, which begins 
with background history and has as appendixes the 
texts of treaties with tribal chiefs, is an analysis of 
progress in the country under the French, particularly 
of the changes following the Conference of Brazzaville 
(1944) and formation of the French Union. He an¬ 
alyzed administrative organization, politics of the im¬ 
mediate postwar years (the foreword is dated 1949, 
though the book did not appear for 2 years), the press 
(p. 61-66), agriculture, industry, and other economic 
factors, education, work of Christian missions in con¬ 
version of the fetish-worshiping animists, and last, 
the African native theatre movement, in which he 
himself has played a conspicuous part. His general 
conclusion is a triumphant summary of his country’s 
evolution toward political, cultural, and economic 
power, confident that the future will see blended in 
the Ivory Coast the best elements of Africa and of 
Europe. 

962. Atger, Paul. La France en Cote-dTvoire de 

1843-1893, cinquante ans d’hesitations poli- 
tiques et commerciales. Dakar, Faculte des 
lettres et sciences humaines [Magon, Impr. 
Protat-freres] 1962. 204 p. maps. (Publi¬ 
cations de la Section d’histoire, 2) DLC 

963. Avice, Emmanuel. La Cote dTvoire. Paris, 

Societe d’editions geographiques, maritimes et 
coloniales, 1951. 94 p. illus., maps. (Pays 
africains, 1) DT545.A8 

This is the first of a collection of booklets published 
as popular introductions to the African colonies for 


the French public. Edited under the direction of a 
former colonial governor, Georges Spitz, and written 
by former colonial officials, they follow a regular pat¬ 
tern, with chapters on country, people, history, po¬ 
litical and administrative structure, social develop¬ 
ment, economic production, equipment harbors, rail¬ 
ways, roads, water power, etc.), and organization, 
tourism and hunting, selective bibliography. A short 
conclusion summarizes salient points and offers spec¬ 
ulation on the future course of the territory. 

964. Boutillier, Jean Louis. Bongouanou, Cote 

dTvoire; etude socio-economique d’une sub¬ 
division. Avec la collaboration de Jean Causse. 
Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1960. 224 p. illus. 

(L’Homme d’outre-mer, nouv. ser., no. 2) 

HN810.B6B6 

Includes bibliography. 

Detailed examination of problems rising from the 
rapid transformation of a country society into a money 
economy. The people are the Agni, a matrilinear 
tribe. There is heavy immigration to work in the cof¬ 
fee, cocoa, and kola plantations and a notable rise in 
living standards. The author, a sociologist and econo¬ 
mist, is director of research for ORSTOM (France. 
Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique 
d’Outre-Mer). He considers the Ivory Coast a 
pioneer state in African promotion. 

965. Davis, Hassoldt. Sorcerers’ village. With 

photos by Ruth and Hassoldt Davis. New 
York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1955. 334 p. 
illus. ' DT545.D39 

The explorer author of this travel narrative has 
adventured widely in ethnologically interesting parts 
of Africa, the Pacific, and South America. His wife, 
who accompanied him in their penetration of the Ivory 
Coast interior, is a skilled “craftsman of jungle film.” 


156 



Their particular attention was to fetish magic, which 
they found in sensational abundance. 

966. Desanti, Dominique. Cote d’Ivoire. Lau¬ 

sanne, Editions Rencontre, 1962. 491 p. 

illus. (L 5 Atlas des voyages) DLG 

Not yet examined. The writer is author of a num¬ 
ber of travel books. 

967. Development and Resources Corporation. 

A program for geological exploration and min¬ 
erals development, January 1961-December 
1963; a report to the Minister of Finance, Eco¬ 
nomic Affairs and Planning, Republic of the 
Ivory Coast. New York. 1961. 1 v. (vari¬ 
ous pagings) fold. maps. QE327.I9D4 

968. Dupire, Marguerite. Planteurs autochtones et 

etrangers en Basse Cote-d’Ivoire orientale; 
Edmond Bemus. Kong et sa region. Abid¬ 
jan, IFAN, Centre de Cote-d’Ivoire, 1960. 
324 p. illus. (Etudes eburneennes, no. 8) 

DT545.E8, no. 8 

969. -, and Jean-Louis Boutillier. Le pays 

Adioukrou et sa palmeraie, Basse-Cote-d’- 
Ivoire: etude socio-economique. Paris, Re¬ 
cherche scientifique et technique outre-mer, 
1958. 100 p. (Publications du Conseil su- 

perieur des recherches sociologiques. I. L’- 
Homme d’outre-mer, no. 4) DLC 

970. Europe France outremer. La nouvelle Cote 

d’Ivoire et les autres etats de I’Entente. Paris, 
1960. 64 p. JN1801.E65, no. 373 

Special issue of Europe France outremer, no. 373, dec. 
1960: 1-64. 

Chiefly concerned with political and economic af¬ 
fairs of the Ivory Coast, but including also a short 
review of Dahomey, Niger, and Haute-Volta. 

The large illustrated monthly Revue encyclopidique de 
VAfrique (see no. 845n) focuses rather special attention on 
the Ivory Coast in its articles on economic, social, and cul¬ 
tural developments. 

971. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique de Cote d’Ivoire. Paris, La docu¬ 
mentation frangaise, 1959. 59 p. (Notes et 
etudes documentaires, no. 2588, 7 nov. 1959) 
D411.F67, no. 2588 
A summary survey providing background informa¬ 
tion. Another pamphlet with the same title and con¬ 
sisting mainly of photographs was published in the 
series Documentation frangaise illustree (no. 164, fev. 
1961. 30 p.) There is also a booklet in English, The 


Republic of the Ivory Coast, Hour of Independence 
(New York, 1960. 32 p. illus. (see no. 846n). 

972. Grivot, Rene. Dynamique, Cote d’Ivoire. 

Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1960. 280 p. illus. 

(Coll. “Mondes d’outre-mer”) 

Description and appreciation of the newly formed 
state. The author was formerly an administrator in 
French West Africa. 

973. Holas, Bohumil. Changements sociaux en 

Cote d’Ivoire. Paris, Presses universitaires de 
France, 1961. 117 p. illus. HN810.I9H6 

974. - Cultures materielles de la Cote d’Ivoire. 

Preface par Felix Houphouet-Boigny. Paris, 
Presses universitaires de France, 1960. 96 p. 
illus. GN655.I9H6 

Professor Holas, formerly with IFAN, is now Direc¬ 
tor of the Centre des Sciences Humaines, under the 
Ministere de F Education Nationale of the Ivory Coast. 
These two socio-anthropological studies examine the 
changing customs and rites in the rural society of the 
country, and the artifacts and objects of material cul¬ 
ture in trades and professions, household equipment, 
clothing, etc. A new study by this author appeared in 
1962: Les Toura, esquisse d’une civilisation mon- 
tagnarde de Cote-dTvoire (Paris, Presses universi¬ 
taires de France. 237 p. illus.). 

Another study of changing society is by Mme. Denise 
Paulme of the Musee de 1’Homme, Une SociSte de Cote 
d’Ivoire, hier et aujourd’hui: les Bete (Paris, Mouton, 1962. 
200 p. Le Monde d’outre-mer pass6 et present. 2. s6rie: 
Documents 8) 

975. Ivory Coast. Direction de la statistique et des 

etudes economiques et demographiques. In 
ventaire economique et social de la Cote- 
d’l voire, 1958. Abidjan, Ministere des 
finances, des affaires economiques et du plan, 
Service de la statistique, 1960. 283 p. maps 
(part col.) col. diagrs., tables. HC547.I8A53 

Previous edition issued by the Service de la statistique 
g£nerale et de la mdcanographie under title: Inventaire 
economique de la C6te-d’Ivoire (1947 d 1956) 

An impressive publication in handsome makeup, 
with tables exhibiting all economic and social factors. 

976. Joseph, Gaston. Cote d’Ivoire. Paris, Fayard, 

1944. 254 p. DT545.J6 

The Ivory Coast became a French colony by a de¬ 
cree of March 10, 1893. This survey, which combines 
history, ethnology, administration, and economic and 
social aspects, was written as a 50-year balance sheet. 


157 




The author, at this time Director of Political Affairs 
in the Ministere des Colonies, had begun his career as 
a colonial officer in the Ivory Coast in 1907, and had 
written a book on the country in 1917 which won the 
prize of the Societe de Geographic. 

977. Mouezy, Henri. Histoire et coutumes du pays 

d’Assinie et du royaume de Krinjabo (fonda- 

tion de la Cote d’Ivoire). Paris, Larose, 1942. 

225 p. DT545.M6 

This book by a Catholic mission priest combines 
history from the beginnings of the French penetration 
in the 17 th century with what General Gouraud, writ¬ 
ing the preface, calls a “curious” study of manners and 
customs. The work is not couched in the usual 
anthropological terms. 

978. Perspectives d’Outre-Mer. La Republique de 

Cote d’Ivoire. Monaco, 1958-61. DLC 
Special issues, no. 27, nov.-dec. 1958; no. 32, d£c. 1959; 
no. 37, nov.-dec. 1960; no. 43, d6c. 1961; no. 50, d6c. 1962. 

Perspectives d’outre-mer is a large illustrated maga¬ 
zine carrying feature articles on economics and indus¬ 
trial development. The separate issues, of about 100 
pages each, are often devoted to a single country, no 
less than five in the years since independence to the 
Ivory Coast. The text is heavily interspersed with 
advertising matter. 

979. Rougerie, Gabriel. Le pays agni du sud-est de 

la Cote d’Ivoire forestiere. Paris, Toumier, 

1957. 242 p. illus. 

Combination of human and physical geography by 
an IF AN geographer. A later book by M. Rougerie is 


a technical study of hydrology and soils: Le Faqonne- 
ment actuel des modeles en Cote d’Ivoire forestiere 
(Dakar, IF AN, 1960. 542 p. illus., maps. Memoi- 
res de 1’IFAN, no 58). 

980. Roussier, Paul, ed. L’etablissement d’Issiny, 

1687-1702. Voyages de Ducasse, Tibierge et 
d’Amon a la cote de Guinee, publies pour la 
premiere fois et suivis de la Relation du voyage 
du royaume d’lssiny du p. Godefroy Loyer. 
Paris, Larose, 1935. xxxix, 241 p., 1 1. XIII 
pi. (incl. port., plans) fold. map. (Publica¬ 
tions du Comite d’etudes historiques et scien- 
tifiques de 1’Afrique occidentale frangaise. 
Ser. A, n° 3) DT553.A8R6 

With reproduction of original t.-p. of Relation du voyage 
du royaume d’Issyny . . . par le r. pere Godefroy Loyer . . . 
Paris, 1714. 

981. Wallerstein, Immanuel M. The emergence 

of two West African nations: Ghana and the 
Ivory Coast. Ann Arbor, Mich., University 
Microfilms, 1959. Mic 59-3139 

Microfilm copy (positive) of typescript. Collation of the 
original: SV, 341 1. tables. 

Thesis—Columbia University. Abstracted in Dissertation 
Abstracts, v. 20 (1959), no. 3, p. 1091-1092. 

Bibliography: leaves 300-341. 

Although this doctoral dissertation has not been is¬ 
sued in printed form, its availability in microfilm 
makes it seem worth inclusion here. The extensive 
field research carried out by Dr. Wallerstein has estab¬ 
lished him as an American authority on French- 
speaking West Africa. 


Mali (former Soudan) 


982. Boyer, Gaston. Un peuple de I’Ouest souda- 
nais, les Diawara; par G. Boyer. Contribution 
a l’histoire des Songhay, par Jean Rouch. 
Dakar, IFAN, 1953. 259 p. illus., plates, 

maps, tables. (Memoires, n° 29) DT356.B76 

Ethnological studies by French specialists are in 
general notably clear and concise as to writing, the 
necessary technical and native words used sparingly 
and with explanation. The first of these two mono¬ 
graphs combines history and anthropological analysis 
of the Diawara, a Mohammedan tribe of the Sudan 
who are a cross between Moorish white and Sudanese 


black. Illustrations are the author’s own line draw¬ 
ings. The second paper is a relation, based on 
chronicles, of the history of the Songhay [Songhai] 
from the earliest legends of origins before the empire, 
through the later invasions, to the present position 
within the French Union. 

Jean Rouch, an anthropologist and photographer who has 
written several books of travel in Africa, contributed a volume 
on Les Songhay to the International African Institute French 
series, Monographies ethnologiques africaines (see no. 270, 
914). He has also a recent study, La Religion et la magie 
songhay (Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1960. 
325 p.). 


158 



983. Clozel, Marie Franqois Joseph. Haut- 

Senegal-Niger (Soudan frangais); series 
d’etudes, pub. sous la direction de M. le 
gouverneur Clozel. 1-2 ser. Paris, Larose, 
1912. 5 v. illus., maps, plans. DT551.C6 

1. Ser. Le pays, les peuples, les langues, l’histoire, les 
civilisations, par M. Delafosse. 3 v. 2. ser- Geographic 
dconomique, par J. Meniaud. 2 v. 

A monument in French colonial studies of the early 
20th century. 

984. Delavignette, Robert. Les paysans noirs. 

fid. nouvelle. Paris, fiditions Stock, 1946. 
263 p. DT551.D4 1946 

Fine study of village life in the French Sudan, set 
in semi-fictional form, and first published in 1931; 
a film was made from it in 1948. In his preface the 
author says that the question of the moment is to 
find out whether “the Blacks, instead of being treated 
as the imperfectible labor force of a primitive Africa, 
deserve instead to be considered the true farmers and 
legitimate owners of their soil, capable of founding 
with other men, notably with us, the French of Europe, 
a national community. The book, Paysans noirs, 
answers yes.” 

985. Dieterlen, Germaine. Essai sur la religion 

bambara. Paris, Presses universitaires de 
France, 1951. 240 p. illus. (Bibliotheque 
de sociologie contemporaine) GN655.B3D5 
Detailed anthropological treatise on the religious 
myths, beliefs, and practices of a Sudanese tribe, the 
Bambara. The writer, a student of Professor Marcel 
Griaule of the Sorbonne, had done fieldwork on three 
separate expeditions in the late forties in the region 
around Bamako. 

986. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique du Mali. Paris, 1961. 65 p. 
(Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2739, 13 
jan. 1961) D411.F67 no. 2739 

Summary background survey. See general note on 
series, no. 846. 

987. Gallieni, Joseph S. Mission d 1 exploration du 

Haut-Niger: voyage au Soudan frangaise 
(Haut-Niger et pays de Segou) 1879-1881. 
Paris, Hachette, 1885. 632 p. DT551.G16 

988. - Gallieni pacificateur, ecrits coloniaux de 

Gallieni. Choix de textes et notes par Hubert 
Deschamps et Paul Chauvet. Paris, Presses 
universitaires de France, 1949. 382 p. (Les 

classiques de la colonisation, 13) 

DC342.8.G2A3 


Classics of history of the Soudan from the French 
viewpoint. 

989. Hampate Ba, Amadou, and Jacques Daget. 

L’Empire peul du Macina. I (1818-1853) 
Koulouba, IF AN, Centre du Soudan, 1955. 
306 p. map. (fitudes soudanaises, no. 3) 
Published by Mouton, Paris, 1962. DLG 
M. Hampate Ba, now Director of the Institut 
Scientifique du Mali in Bamako, is one of the well- 
known African scholars working in the field of history 
and carrying on research in sources other than the 
European records of the colonial period. 

990. Keita, Modibo. “The foreign policy of Mali.” 

International affairs, v. 37, no. 4, Oct. 1961: 
432-439. JXI.I53, v. 37 

Translation of an address by the President of Mali at 
Chatham House, 7 June 1961. M. Keita stressed his 
country’s policy as “positive neutralism.” 

991. Lem, F. H. Sudanese sculpture. Paris, Arts et 

metiers graphiques, 1949. 110 p. 64 illus., 

map. NB1097.S8L414 

Album with 64 plates representing carvings from 
the French Sudan, Dogon, Mossi, Bobo, Bambara, and 
Senufo regions. The preliminary sketch in English is 
on Sudanese society and art, and includes a classified 
bibliography and a descriptive catalog of the illustra¬ 
tions. The objects are from a collection assembled by 
the writer in the Sudan in 1934 and 1935. 

992. Maugham, Robin. The slaves of Timbuktu. 

New York, Harper, 1961. 237 p. illus. 

DT553.T6M3 1961a 

In the form of a travel diary Lord Maugham re¬ 
corded his investigations of present-day survivals of 
slavery during a journey from Dakar to Timbuktu. 
He incorporates much past history connected with the 
old slave routes over which he was journeying, quoting 
liberally from the records of the slave trade. 

993. Meniaud, Jacques. Les pionniers du Soudan 

avant, avec et apres Archinard, 1879-1894. 
Paris, Societe des publications modernes, 1931. 
2 v. illus. DT551.M4 

994. - Sikasso; ou, L’histoire dramatique d’un 

royaume noir a XIX e siecle. Paris, F. Bonchy, 
1935. 208 p. illus. DT553.S5M4 

Two works on the French conquest of the Sudan. 
The picture differs in many details from that given in 
new works on African history. Among the latter there 
might be mentioned Samory sanglant et magnifique, by 


159 





G. Ingold, a booklet published in 1961 by Editions du 
Scorpion, Paris. 

995. Miner, Horace M. The primitive city of Tim- 

buctoo. Princeton, Published for the Ameri¬ 
can Philosophical Society by Princeton Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1953. 297 p. illus. (Memoirs 
of the American Philosophical Society, v. 32) 

DT553.T6M53 

The writer spent seven months in 1940 studying “the 
life-ways of a primitive city with all of the problems of 
acculturation and accommodation which the cultural 
diversity presents.” His method and conclusions are 
those of the trained sociologist, his style an informal 
narrative. The town’s under-10,000 inhabitants are 
Tuareg with their Negro slave castes, Arab, and Song- 
hoi, in varying mixtures of Berber, Arab, and Negroid 
stocks; Dr. Miner had avoided the handful of French, 
and lived in as close contact as possible with the 
Africans. He described all aspects of their social struc¬ 
ture, economy, Muslim belief and practise, supersti¬ 
tions, family and communal life, finding that to an 
ever-increasing degree the old folkways are being lost 
under “the urban culture of the market.” 

996. Mission Socio-Economique du Soudan. En- 

quete budgetaire dans le delta central nigerien 
(zone inondee, Office du Niger). Paris, Ser¬ 
vice de cooperation de l’lnstitut national de 
statistique et des etudes economiques, 1961. 
130 p. DLG 

This report on living standards results from a survey 
begun under the French administration. It is con¬ 
cerned with the region being developed under the 
Office du Niger, formerly a French government agency, 
now transferred to Mali administration. 

997. Spitz, Georges. Le Soudan frangais. Paris, 

Editions maritimes et coloniales, 1955. Ill p. 
illus., mays. (Pays africans, 5) DT551.S65 

The French Sudan, site of the black empires of the 
past, Ghana, Mali, Songhai, was “pacified” by the 
French over a 20-year period, 1883 to 1903, with a 
recurrence of revolt among the nomadic tribes of the 
demi-desert around the fabled city of Timbuktu in 
1915-16. Since then, according to this former 
colonial governor, who had himself been in the Sudan 
as a young official during the early years, the old 
country followed a peaceful path of gradual develop¬ 
ment, its 3y 2 million Africans, 80 percent of them 
Negro peasant villagers, and its less than 6,000 Euro¬ 
peans “scorning idle discussion or controversy, working 
in perfect accord, with no other preoccupation than 


the public good.” This book follows the pattern of the 
“Pays africains” survey series. 

998. - Sansanding; les irrigations du Niger. 

Paris, Societe d’editions geographiques, mari¬ 
times et coloniales, 1949. 237 p. illus., fold, 
maps. HD1741.A35S6 

Comprehensive account of the irrigation works 
undertaken by the Office of the Niger, written just after 
the completion in 1947 of the great dam near San¬ 
sanding in the Segou region. Governor Spitz foresaw 
progress toward self-government in the Sudan, warn¬ 
ing French readers of “the growing pains of national¬ 
ism” in French West Africa. 

For listing of the archives and other publications of the 
Office du Niger, see the Library of Congress bibliography, 
Official Publications of French West Africa (no. 897). 

999. Tauxier, Louis. Histoire des Bambara. Paris, 

Librairie orientaliste Paul Geuthner, 1942. 
226 p. GN652.B2T3 

1000. - Moeurs et histoire des Peuls. I. Ori- 

gines.—II. Les Peuls de l’lssa-ber et du 
Macina.—III. Les Peuls du Fouta-Djallon. 
Paris, Payot, 1937. illus. (map) XVI pi. 
on 8 1. (Bibliotheque scientifique) 

GN652.F9T3 

1001. - La religion bambara. Paris, Geuth¬ 

ner, 1927 p. (His Etudes soudanaises) 

4BL/839 

Solid anthropological studies, based on extensive re¬ 
search in sources from the 16th century on, as well as 
on personal investigation during the writer’s long 
career as colonial administrator in A.O.F. General 
Tauxier’s other ethnological studies of tribes of former 
French West Africa included books, papers, and 
articles in professional journals on the Agni, Krumen, 
and other tribes of the Ivory Coast. 

1002. Zahan, Dominique. Societes d 3 initiation bam¬ 

bara: le n’domo, le kore. Paris, Mouton, 
1960. 438 p. illus., fold. map. (Le Monde 
d’outre-mer passe et present. 1* ser. 
Etudes, 8) GN652.B2Z3 

Detailed study of initiation rites in the Cercle of 
Segou in the French Sudan [now Mali]. The author, 
a student and friend of Marcel Griaule, has done long 
research in West Africa, and this is the first of six 
projected volumes on initiation societies of the Bam¬ 
bara. Appendixes include geographical names of 
Bambara and Malinke regions, an index of animals and 
plants, and a subject index. There is a three-page 
bibliography. 


160 





Mauritania 


Bibliography 

1003. Toupet, Charles. “Orientation bibliogra- 
phique sur la Mauritanie.” In Institut fran- 
gais d’Afrique noire. Bulletin, ser. B, t. 31, 
no. 1-2, 1959: 201-239. DT1.I5123, v. 31 

An extensive, though categorically not exhaustive, 
bibliography, with 14 subject classifications—maps, 
bibliography, general works, six rubriques of natural 
sciences, archaeology and history, Islam, linguistics, 
way of life, techniques and art, economics, regional and 
tribal studies, general literature. A large proportion 
of the references are to articles in IFAN bulletins. 
The titles are almost without exception in French; a 
few have brief annotations. 

See also under Sahara, no. 1025. 


1004. Dekeyser, P. L., and A. Villiers. Notations 

ecologiques et biogeographiques sur la faune 
de I’Adrar; contribution a l’etude du peuple- 
ment de la Mauritanie. Dakar, IFAN, 1956. 
222 p. (Memoires de l’lnstitut frangais 
d’Afrique noire, no. 44) QL337.A3D4 

This is typical of the longer studies of the neighbor 
state carried out by staff members of IFAN in Senegal. 

1005. Du Puigaudeau, Odette. Barefoot through 

Mauretania. London, G. Routledge, 1937. 
286 p. DT553.M2D82 

1006. - La route de VOuest, Maroc-Maurita- 

nie. Paris, J. Susse, 1945. 206 p. illus. 

DT553.M2D84 

The writer, a French woman journalist, is known 
for a number of other travel reports on Africa. These 
books are informative recording her long tours by 
camel in the Sahara. She gave unstinted praise to 
the French officials and their efforts for the nomadic 
tribes whom they controlled, aided, and guided from 
their isolated desert posts. The French edition of 
the firstnamed won a literary prize in 1936. 

1007. Europe France Outremer. Mauritanie; un 

an d’independance. Paris, 1962. 60 p. 
illus. (Its no. 384, fev. 1962: 1-60). 

JV1801.E65, no. 384 
Special issue of this journal concentrated on Africa, 
examining the political situation, the new cities, and the 
economics of production in Mauritania at the end of 
her first year as a sovereign state. 


1008. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique islamique de Mauritanie. Paris, 
1960. 50 p. (Notes et etudes documen- 
taires, no 2.687, 29 juillet 1960.) 

D411.F67, no. 2.687 

See no. 846 for general note on this introductory 
survey series. An illustrated booklet, The Islamic Re¬ 
public of Mauritania; Hour of Independence (New 
York, 1960. 28 p.) is available for American readers. 

1009. Garnier, Christine, and Philippe Ermont. 

Desert fertile, un nouvel etat, la Mauritanie. 
Paris, Hachette, 1960. 230 p. illus. 

DT553.M2G3 

Mme. Garnier is a French journalist who has writ¬ 
ten a number of distinctive studies of African countries. 
This hopeful picture of the new Islamic desert state 
is for the intelligent lay public. 

1010. Gouraud, Henri J. E. Mauritanie, Adrar; 

souvenirs d’un Africain. Paris, Plon, 1945. 
349 p. illus., ports., fold. map. 

DT553.M2G6 

History of French penetration and pacification of 
the desert tribes by an officer who commanded much 
of the effort. 

1011. Husson, Philippe. La question des fron¬ 

tier es terrestres du Maroc. Paris, 1960. 
128 p. DT305.H85 

Thorough airing of the legal and political aspects 
of the boundaries of Morocco with the Western 
Sahara, both Spanish and former French (Mauri¬ 
tania) . The writer is a French Doctor of Law. His 
study covers through 1958. 

1012. Le Mauritanien; magazine illustre. no. 1 + 

Oct. 1962 + Nouakchott, monthly. DLG 
Under the direction of the Senegalese writer S. 
N’Diaye, an illustrated monthly has been launched 
with an issue carrying a long article on the economy 
of Mauritania as well as other prose, verse, and pic¬ 
torial features relating to Mauritanian life and 
thought. 

1013. Meyer, Jean D. Desert doctor. Translated 

by Mervyn Savill. London, Souvenir Press, 
1960. 255 p. R507.M4A33 

Account of a French military doctor’s experiences 
in isolated desert posts in Mauritania and Tchad in the 


161 






thirties. The interesting narrative is less concerned 
with medicine than with the country and the ad¬ 
ventures of army medical life among nomadic tribes¬ 
men. Published first in Munich and translated from 
the German. 

1014. Mokhtar ould Hamidoun. Precis sur la 

Mauritanie. Saint-Louis, Senegal, Centre 
IFAN-Mauritanie, 1952. 69 p. (Etudes 
mauritaniennes, no. 4) DT553.M2M6 

Introduction to the country by one of its most 
learned historians. About half describes geography, 
climate, mineral resources, vegetation wild life; the 
rest is ethnological and historical, specifying many 
tribes. 

1015. Morocco. Wizarat al-Anba’ wa-al-Siyahah 

(Ministry of Information and Tourism) La 
liberation de la Province mauritanienne et 
Vopinion internationale. Rabat, 1961. 
144 p. DT553.M28M6 

A collection of speeches at the United Nations in 
November 1960 by delegates supporting the Moroccan 
claim to Mauritania. In general, the Arab world 
and the Communists were on Morocco’s side. A ref¬ 
erence has been seen to a Livre blanc sur la Mauri¬ 
tanie published by the Moroccan Government in 1961; 
it may be this document. 

1016. Munier, Pierre M. UAssaba; essai mono- 

graphique. Saint-Louis, Senegal, Centre 
IFAN (Mauritanie) 1952. 71 p. fold, 
maps, profiles. (Etudes mauritaniennes, 
no. 3) DT553.A75M8 

Monograph by a member of a study mission in 
southern Mauritania in 1951, concerned particularly 


with the experiment in date-palm growing which has 
been taking place in the “cercle” (administrative dis¬ 
trict) of Assaba during the past thirty years. The 
author analyzes the region in all particulars—historical 
background, physical character with particular stress 
on water supply, population (70,736, of whom 11 are 
Europeans), economy, labor force. About two-thirds 
of the inhabitants are nomad Moors, raising sheep, 
cattle, and camels; the sedentary Negro tribes tradi¬ 
tionally grow millet, and there is a shortage of labor 
for extension of the palm plantations. Writing from 
Kiffa, the largest town of the cercle , the author urged 
encouragement of the date growing. 

1017. Nikiprowetzky, Tolia. La musique de la 

Mauritanie; communication presentee au 
XlVe Congres du Conseil international de la 
musique populaire, Quebec 1961. Paris, 
SORAFOM, 1961. unpaged. ML3760.N54 

1018. La Republique islamique de Mauritanie et le 

royaume du Maroc. Paris, Diloutremer, 
1961. 60 p. maps. 

Not available for examination. 

1019. al-ShinqitI, Ahmad ibn al-AmIn, d. 1912 or 

13. El Wasit; litterature, histoire, geogra- 
phie, moeurs et coutumes des habitants de la 
Mauritanie , par Ahmed Lamine Ech Chen- 
guiti. Extraits traduits de l’arabe par 
Mourad Teffahi. Saint-Louis, Senegal, 
Centre IFAN-Mauritanie, 1953. 150 p. 

fold. map. (Etudes mauritaniennes, no. 5) 

DT553.M2S4 

Translation of the historical and geographical parts 
of this 19th-century work in Arabic. 


Niger 


1020. Bonardi, Pierre. La Republique du Niger: 

naissance d’un etat. Paris, A.P.D., 1960. 
99 p. DLC 

Not yet available for examination. 

1021. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique du Niger. Paris, 1960. 50 p. 
(Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2638, 26 
fev. 1960) D411.F67, no. 2638 

Summary background survey. See no. 846 for gen¬ 
eral note on this series, also for note on English-lan¬ 


guage brochure, The Republic of Niger: Hour of Inde¬ 
pendence (New York, 1960). 

1022. Revue Encyclopedique de l’Afrique. Re¬ 
publique du Niger. Abidjan, 1960. 39 p. 

illus. DLC-AFR 

Special supplement to issue no. 3 of this periodical, 
Sept.-Oct. 1960, containing a general glance at the 
country, analysis of the economy—agriculture, fishing, 
forestries, stockraising, general features—and “equipe- 
ment” (roads, waterpower), towns and tourism. 


162 


1023. Sere de Rivieres, Edmond. Le Niger. Paris, 
Societe d’editions geographiques, maritimes et 
coloniales, 1952. 94 p. illus. (Pays af- 

ricains, 2) DT547.S4 

One of a series of booklets surveying the French 
African possessions. Contents cover physical and 
human geography, historical background, administra¬ 
tion and government, economic and social develop¬ 
ment, etc. The author had had long experience as 
administrator in various “cercles” of French West 
Africa. He described Niger as a huge area sparsely 
inhabited by barely 2 million people, 1.68 to the square 
kilometer: in the north and east they are Tuaregs and 
other Arabic or Berber nomads, in the west and south 
primitive cultivators, Djerma, Hausa and others. The 


religion is mainly Islam and the Muslim chieftaincies 
maintain their traditional character, though particu¬ 
larly among the sedentary tribes animism persists. 
Economic development is slight, the only cash crop 
peanuts. The author emphasized the strategic im¬ 
portance of the region in the heart of Africa. 

1024. Urvoy, Y. F. Histoire des populations du Sou¬ 
dan central (colonie du Niger). Paris, La- 
rose, 1936. 350 p. DT547.U7 

A publication of the Comite d’Etudes Historiques et 
Scientifiques de l’Afrique Occidentale Frangaise, pre¬ 
cursor of IFAN, this book by a French officer and eth¬ 
nologist is an historical narrative of the tribes to the 
northeast of the Niger River. Captain Urvoy traced 
events from the 15th century to the present. 


Sahara 


Bibliography 

1025. France. Service des affaires sahariennes. 
Essai de bibliographic du Sahara franqais, et 
des regions avoisinantes, par Bernard Blaudin 
deThe. [Algiers?] 1959. 277 p. 

Z3709.B55 

By an officer in the Service des Affaires Sahariennes, 
this comprehensive bibliographical work combines a 
reprint of an earlier bibliography of the Territoires 
du Sud d’Algerie, prepared by Lieut. Moulias in 1923 
and expanded by Lieut. Thinieres in 1930 (p. 1-69, 
2,372 numbered entries and index) with his own 
compilation, parts of which had been published before. 
Captain Blaudin de The’s scope is wider than that of 
the first compilers which was limited to Algeria, and 
he has brought together almost 6,000 references to 
books, pamphlets, and periodical articles on the en¬ 
tire Saharan region. They are classified by discipline, 
the last 800 or 900 being “Varia,” which includes 
means of communication, organization, economic ex¬ 
ploitation, and miscellaneous (travel narratives, gen¬ 
eral and regional studies, tourism, etc.). There is an 
index of authors. 


1026. Berthelot, Andre. L’Afrique saharienne et 
soudanaise, ce qu’en ont connu les anciens. 
Paris, Les Arts et le livre, 1927. 431 p. 
maps, diagrs. (Bibliotheque documentaire) 

DT24.B4 

Bibliography: p. 428-431. 


By a noted geographer who was one of the savants 
in charge of the Grande Encyclopedic, this impressive 
work is a complete survey of the recorded knowledge 
of the Greco-Roman world regarding the geography 
of Africa, from Homer to Ptolemy. The first section 
is on present-day geography, the second on changes 
within historic times. 

1027. Briggs, Lloyd C. The living races of the 

Sahara Desert. Cambridge, Peabody Mu¬ 
seum, 1958. 217 p. illus., 69 plates, maps. 
(Papers of the Peabody Museum of Archae¬ 
ology and Ethnology, Harvard University, 
v. 28, no. 2) E51.H337, v. 28, no. 2 

References: p. 203-212. 

1028. - Tribes of the Sahara. Cambridge, 

Harvard University Press, 1960. xx, 295 p. 
illus., maps. DT337.B7 

Bibliography: p. 277-285. 

Two systematic anthropological studies of the 
peoples of the Sahara, Tuareg, Teda, Chaamba, and 
other tribes, by a Research Fellow at Harvard. Dr. 
Briggs in the second work traces the history of the 
tribes from the dawn of the Christian era to the present, 
analyzing the traditional ways of life now undergoing 
change under the pressure of modem contacts. 

1029. Capot-Rey, Robert. L’Afrique blanche 

frangaise. T. II. Le Sahara franqais. 
Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1953. 


692 - 756 — 6 : 


-12 


163 




564 p. illus. maps. (Pays d’outre-mer. 4. 
serie: Geographic de PUnion frangaise, 1.) 

DT33.D38, v. 2 

Extensive study of the Sahara, in a series published 
under the highest French academic auspices and cited 
as authoritative in later French works on the develop¬ 
ment of the desert. The writer, a professor of the 
University of Algiers, has been engaged for many 
years in Saharan research. His ideal was to attach 
the Saharan populations to France without uprooting 
them and wiping out their cultures by too sudden 
contacts with the West. The first part is a thorough 
presentation of physical geography, climatology, and 
geology, the second part human geography—the 
various races and tribes, ways of life, cultures of pas¬ 
toral nomads, semi-nomads, and settled oasis dwellers. 
The third part reviews the work of France as to capital 
equipment and production, draws up a balance sheet 
of accomplishments, and discusses in detail programs 
for future development. Much attention is given to 
the success of new methods of transport by automobile 
and airplane and to prospects for exploitation of min¬ 
eral resources. There is a long classified bibliography 
(p. 495-541) containing 818 numbered items in ad¬ 
dition to maps, periodicals, and collections; also an 
index of proper names. 

1030. Cornet, Pierre. Sahara , terre de demain. 
Paris, Nouvelles editions latines, 1956. 270 p. 
illus., maps. DT333.G715 

A Councillor of the French Union here set forth in 
explicit terms the plans for development of the Sahara 
through the “prodigious modem techniques” already 
being applied with success in certain regions. He ex¬ 
amined physical and human geography of the desert, 
and its actual and possible resources. Then he dis¬ 
cussed projects for agriculture, through such under¬ 
takings as the irrigation works of the Office du Niger, 
or such means as artificially induced rain and refores¬ 
tation. He explained the organizations, public and 
private, which were launching industrial development 
projects, the means of communication envisaged, in¬ 
cluding the railway from the Mediterranean to the 
Niger, and the hopeful picture of energy resources— 
the wealth in coal of Colomb-Bechar, oil, solar energy, 
electricity, atomic energy. He ended with considera¬ 
tion of the projected French Saharan Region and its 
strategic connection with the Fezzan. Two ap¬ 
pendixes cite parliamentary and other official texts 
from 1952 to October 1956, the last being the law pro¬ 
posed by M. Houphouet-Boigny, then Minister from 
the Ivory Coast, for the “Organization Commune des 


Regions Sahariennes,” to take in Mauritania, the 
French Sudan, Niger, and Tchad, together with Al¬ 
geria. A third appendix described activities of the 
Compagnie des Petroles d’Algerie. 

1031. Etudes Sociales Nord-Africaines. L’ave- 

nir humain du Sahara. Paris, 1954. 51 p. 
illus. (Cahiers nord-africains, 41) 

HC547.S3E8 

1032. - Le petrole saharien et les prohlemes 

humains. Paris, 1960. 61 p. (Cahiers nord- 
africains, 76) HD9577.A42E7 

The first brochure contains two essays on the eco¬ 
nomic future of the Sahara, “Rehabilitation du Sa¬ 
hara,” by Jean Celerier, a noted geographer of the 
Centre des Hautes Etudes Marocaines, evaluating 
possibilities for mining and petroleum production; and 
“Reflexions sur le desert,” by Georges Mercier, con¬ 
cerned with the human problems that result from the 
“presence frangaise” and the breakdown of the tradi¬ 
tional nomad and semi-nomad life. The last page 
gives a brief selective bibliography of important 
French studies, mostly in learned journals. The sec¬ 
ond work is an analysis of exploration, development, 
and future of petroleum in the entire Saharan region. 
Its last section, “Chronique bibliographique,” gives a 
resume of a series of articles on Organisation Com¬ 
mune des Regions Sahariennes and the obstacles in its 
path. 

1033. Forbes, Robert H. The expanding Sahara. 

Tucson, University of Arizona Press, 1958. 
31 p. illus., maps. (Arizona. University. 
Physical science bulletin, no. 3) GB361.S3F6 
University of Arizona bulletin, v. 29, no. 5. 

A pamphlet consisting chiefly of photographs dated 
from 1922 to 1958, which show the changing condi¬ 
tions in “shifting areas of forest, savannah and desert.” 
The area described is mainly around the loop of the 
Niger, in the Sudan (Mali and Mauritania.). 

1034. France. Direction de la documentation. Le 

cadre institutionnel du developpement sa¬ 
harien. Paris, 1961. 19 p. (Notes et etudes 
documentaires, no. 2801, 31 juil. 1961) 

D411.F67, no. 2801 
Explanation of the Organisation Commune des Re¬ 
gions Sahariennes, etc. 

1035. Furon, Raymond. Le Sahara; geologie: re¬ 

sources minerales mise en valeur. Paris, 
Payot, 1958. 300 p. (Bibliotheque scien- 

tifique) QE339.S2F8 


164 



Comprehensive survey by a French authority on 
overseas geology. The first part is a succinct review 
of physical and human geography and history, then 
follow a long and detailed account of geological struc¬ 
ture, analysis of resources by region and by commodity, 
and discussion of conditions of development. 


1036. Gabus, Jean. Au Sahara. I. Les hommes et 
leurs outils. II. Arts et symboles. Neuchatel, 
La Baconniere, 1954-58. 2 v. (106, 408 p.) 
illus., maps. DT337.G3 

Resulting from expeditions in 1942-54 of the Musee 
d’Ethnographie de Neuchatel, Switzerland, to photo¬ 
graph the life of the nomad peoples of the Sahara and 
collect art objects. The volumes are chiefly pictorial, 
text being subordinated to plates of the tribesmen and 
their tools, their arts and crafts in leatherwork, pot¬ 
tery, weaving, etc., and the symbolic designs used. A 
third volume (not yet published in 1962) will be Bi¬ 
joux et techniques. The missions took the research¬ 
ers from the southern slopes of the Atlas mountains in 
Morocco and Algeria to the farthest reaches of the 
western Sahara desert in Mauritania, Niger, Senegal, 
and Sudan. 


1037. Gerster, Georg. Sahara. Translated by 
Stewart Thomson. New York, Coward- 
McCann, 1961. 302 p. illus. DT548.G413 
By a Swiss newspaperman; comprehensive, highly 
informative, and very popular—almost gossipy—in 
style; for instance, the chapter giving a sensational ac¬ 
count of Lhote and his expeditions to Tassili, or the 
last chapter called “Taming of the Shrew,” which ex¬ 
amines the Trans-Saharan railway project, the plan 
for a Saharan inland sea, the plan to divert water 
north from the Niger near Timbuktu, and other scien¬ 
tific dreams for making the desert blossom. 


A more sober account, factual and documented, was writ¬ 
ten in the following year by an English author, Major Nico¬ 
las Bodington, The Awakening Sahara (London, A Deutsch, 
1961. 175 p. illus.). 


1038. Lhote, Henri. The search for the Tassili fres¬ 
coes; the story of the prehistoric rock-paint¬ 
ings of the Sahara. Translated from the 
French by Alan Broughton Brodrick. New 
York, Dutton, 1959. 236 p. illus., part col. 

GN799.P4L513 


This bestselling book tells of Professor Lhote’s expe¬ 
dition with a few companions to the Tassili mountains 
where the rock-paintings reveal prehistoric patterns of 
migration across northern and western Africa. The 
superb illustrations reproduce the copies of the paint¬ 


ings prepared upon the site. The author is an author¬ 
ity on the Tuareg, his scholarly anthropological trea¬ 
tise, Les Touaregs du Hoggar (2d ed., Paris, Payot, 
1955. 467 p. Bibliotheque scientific), being one of 
the best known studies of this nomad Berber people 
who spread across the desert from the Sudan in the 
east to Timbuktu in the west and Zinder in the south. 

1039. Monod, Theodore. Majabat al-Kouhra; con¬ 

tribution a 1’etude de 1’ “Empty Quarter” 
ouest-saharien. Dakar, IFAN, 1958. 406 p. 
illus., 81 plates, maps (part fold.) profiles, 4 
transparencies (in pocket) (Memoires de 
l’lnstitut frangais d’Afrique noire, no. 52) 

DT548.M614 

Bibliography: p. 389-392. 

1040. - Meharees: explorations au vrai Sa¬ 

hara. 2. ed. Paris, Editions “Je sers,” 1947. 
300 p. (Bibliotheque des voyages) 

DT548.M615 1947 

Two works by French West Africa’s most famous 
natural scientist, an authority on the desert and a 
writer of distinction. The Meharees, a charmingly 
informal and entertaining account of expeditions on 
camel-back in the Western Sahara, combining natural 
observation, human history, and ethnology, and illus¬ 
trated with his own sketches, was published first in 
1938, before Professor Monod had assumed the direc¬ 
torship of IFAN (see no. 913). The more technical 
results of the expeditions had been edited by Monod in 
Contributions a Vetude du Sahara occidental (Paris, 
Larose, 1938-39. 2 v.) which was issued as Publica¬ 
tions du Comite d’Etudes Historiques et Scientifiques 
de l’A.O.F., Ser. A, no. 7, and Ser. B, no. 5. They 
were concerned with archaeological and geological 
finds, including rock paintings. The first-named book 
is a profound technical study of a barren region in the 
north of Mauritania. 

1041. Nomades et nomadisme au Sahara. Paris, 

UNESCO, 1962. (Arid zone research, 19.) 

A compilation of articles on specific problems, re¬ 
gions, and populations of the Sahara, based on first¬ 
hand research. The regional studies include analyses 
of nomadism in the Mauritanian Sahel, Mali, and 
other parts of the Western Sahara. Announced for 
publication in late 1962, with approximately 196 
pages. 

1042. Panis, J. C. Le chemin de fer de la Mediter- 

ranee au Niger. Bruxelles, Editions de Vis- 
scher, 1956. 138 p. HE 3429.W5P3 


165 



Dissertation by a Belgian colonial administrator re¬ 
viewing and analyzing the question of the trans- 
Saharan railway, at that time projected as the Mer- 
Niger, to run from Morocco into Algeria, south 
through Mauritania and the Sudan to meet the West 
African transportation system now operating under the 
Office du Niger, from the dam at Sansanding to the 
railway line at Bamako. A bibliography lists papers, 
articles, speeches, etc.; there are few books on the sub¬ 
ject, though the proposal goes back many years, well 
before the Chemin de Fer Transsaharien study group 
was set up under the French Ministry of Public Works 
in 1928. In 1962, with independent states concerned, 
as well as the great increase in transport by motor 
truck and by air, plans seem to be in abeyance. 

1043. Strasser, Daniel. Realties et promesses saha- 
riennes; aspects juridiques et economiques de 
la mise en valeur industrielle du Sahara fran- 
gais. Paris, Encyclopedic d’outre-mer, 1956. 
236 p. Ulus. HG547.S3S7 

Published in late 1956, this study of legal and eco¬ 
nomic organization of industrial development in the 
French Sahara is in two main parts. The first 90 
pages explain the current status—the administrative 
setup of government and of private industrial projects, 


and an inventory of the subsoil wealth (coal, iron, 
manganese, copper, lead, phosphates, oil and gas) and 
obstacles to their exploitation (lack of water, labor 
force, transport). The longer second part explains 
plans and policies for concerted undertakings through 
creation of Z.O.I.A. (Zones d’Organisation Indus¬ 
trielle Africaine) in which French West Africa and 
French Equatorial Africa were united in the common 
development effort with French North Africa, enlist¬ 
ment of private and public capital, and finally for cre¬ 
ation of a specialized Organisation Commune des 
Regions Sahariennes Frangaises. Appendixes of docu¬ 
ments and tables. 

A simple explanation in English was issued by the French 
Embassy, Service de Presse et d’Information in its series of 
releases, African Affairs, “Basic Facts on the Sahara: the 
Impact of French Technical Assistance” (no. 17, April 
1957. 8 p.). 

1044. Thomas, Marc R. Sahara et communaute. 

Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1960. 
298 p. illus. JX1588.S2T5 

Based on the author’s dissertation, this is a treatise 
for a professional audience, including the legislation 
relating to the Organisation Commune des Regions 
Sahariennes, and an up-to-date bibliography. 


Senegal 


1045. Chabas, Jean. Le manage et le divorce dans 

les coutumes des Ouolofs habitant les grands 
centres du Senegal. Paris, Librairie generate 
de droit et de jurisprudence, 1952. 59 p. 
(Institut des hautes etudes de Dakar, Ecole 
superieure de droit.) GN480.C5 

Study of customary law with regard to marriage and 
divorce among the Ouolofs (Wolofs) of Senegal, a 
partially Islamized Sudanese tribe which is dominant 
in Dakar, Rufisque, and the heavily settled coastal 
areas of Senegal. The paper is a reprint from no. 4, 
1952 of the Revue juridique et politique de VUnion 
frangaise. 

1046. Crowder, Michael. Senegal; a study in 

French assimilation policy. London, New 
York, Oxford University Press, 1962. 104 p. 

illus. DT549.5.C7 

An acute journalist’s account of Senegal and its 
history, with as central theme the results of the long- 
continued French policy of assimUation. Mr. Crow¬ 


der attempts to show that the French culture in reality 
reached only a small elite, the very ones who have now 
adopted the concept of negritude in reaction against 
both political and cultural association. He was opti¬ 
mistic over the future of Senegal under the able leaders 
Senghor and Mamadou Dia. 

1047. Delcourt, Andre. La France et les fitablisse- 

ments frangais au Senegal entre 1713 et 1763. 
La Compagnie des Indes et le Senegal. La 
guerre de la gomme. Dakar, Institut fran- 
gais d’Afrique noire, 1952. 432 p. fold, 
maps (Memoires, no. 17) DT549.D4 

Large scholarly study of the first French settlements 
in Africa. A long bibliography of published and 
manuscript sources precedes the first chapter (p. 
27-37). 

1048. The Diplomatist. Spotlight on Senegal on 

the occasion of the visit to London of H. E. 
President Leopold Sedar Senghor. London, 
1961. 34 p. illus. DLC 


166 



A public relations pamphlet, giving an optimistic 
sketch of the country. 

1049. Europe France Outremer. Une decolonisa¬ 

tion reussie: Le Senegal. Paris, 1961. 64 p. 

illus. JV1801.E65, no. 376 

Useful special issue (no. 376, Mar. 1961), carry¬ 
ing feature articles on economic and political condi¬ 
tions in Senegal after independence. 

1050. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique de Senegal. Paris, 1961. 48 p. 
(Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2754, 22 
fev. 1961) D411.F67, no. 2754 

Besides this serious background study France issued 
an illustrated brochure for popular consumption to 
celebrate the new state, with an edition in English for 
American readers: The Republic of Senegal: Hour of 
Independence (New York, Ambassade de France, 
Service de Presse et d’Information, 1960. 32 p.). On 
the back cover it carries a poem by Senghor, in the 
original and in English translation. 

1051. Garnier, Christine, and Philippe Ermont. 

Senegal: porte de VAfrique. Paris, Hachette, 
1962. 223 p. DT549.G32 

Mme. Garnier is a French journalist who has studied 
the African scene for some years. This book gives an 
objective and lucid picture of Senegal—the capital city 
Dakar, the country behind, its history under colonial 
rule, the abortive federation with Mali, the Republic 
and its leaders, economy, religions, and culture. 

1052. Hardy, Georges. La raise en valeur du 

Senegal de 1817 a 1854. Paris, Larose, 1921. 
xxxiii, 376 p. plates 4DT/1010 

Study of the history of the oldest French colony of 
Africa south of the Sahara. Professor Hardy pre¬ 
sented this as his thesis at the University of Paris; it is 
based on almost 20 pages of source materials (“Biblio¬ 
graphic,” p. xv-xxxiii). 

1053. Institut Franqais d’Afrique noire. L’ag¬ 

glomeration dakaroise; quelques aspects soci- 
ologiques et demographiques. Saint-Louis 
du Senegal, Centre IFAN-Senegal, 1954. 83 

p. maps, diagrs., tables. (Etudes senega- 
laises, no. 5) HN810.S4D33 

Prepared by the Section de sociologie. 

Contents.—Aspects de la societe africaine dans l’agglome- 
ration dakaroise: groupes familiaux et unites de voisinage, 
par P. Merrier.—Contribution a 1’etude de la nuptialite et de 


la fertilite dans 1’agglomeration dakaroise, par L. Masse.— 
Les industries de transformation de la region de Dakar, par 
A. Hauser. 

The Sociological Section of IFAN was established 
only in 1953, and these papers on urbanization in the 
chief city of French West Africa result from its first sur¬ 
vey. No. 6 and No. 7 of the Etudes senegalaises series 
were also sociological analyses of highly urbanized re¬ 
gions: La Ville de Thies, etude de geographie urbaine, 
by G. Savonnet (Saint-Louis, 1955. 179 p.); Budgets 
familiaux africains; etude chez 136 families de salaries 
dans trois centres urbains du Senegal, by Y. Mersadier, 
(1957. 102 p.). 

1054. Institut Franqais d’Afrique Noire. Centre 

Senegal-Mauritanie, Saint Louis, Senegal. 
Connaissance du Senegal. Saint-Louis du 
Senegal, 1960. 1 v. (Etudes senegalaises, 

no. 9) 

This scholarly series, several numbers of which are 
here analyzed, is being continued after independence. 

1055. Ly, Abdoulaye. L’fitat et la production pay- 

sanne; ou, L’Etat et la revolution au Senegal, 
1957-1958. Paris, Presence africaine, 1958. 
79 p. DLG 

1056. - La Compagnie du Senegal. Paris, 

Presence africaine, 1958. 310 p. (Enquetes 
et etudes) HF489.S5L9 

1057. - Les masses africaines et Vactuelle con¬ 

dition humaine. Paris, Editions Presence 
africaine, 1956. 254 p. illus. (Enquetes et 
etudes) JC359.L9 1 

1058. - Mercenaires noirs; notes sur une forme 

de l’exploitation des Africains. Paris, Pre¬ 
sence africaine, 1957. 67 p. (Collection “Le 
Colonialisme,” 3) GN645.L9 

M. Ly, a Senegalese intellectual, nationalist, and 
political leader, is a historian of anticolonialism. Of 
the four of his many works listed above, the earliest, 
Les Masses africaines ... is a fiery political attack 
on the French administration; an appendix on “Com¬ 
merce exterieur de l’A.O.F.” is inserted as proof of 
exploitation of the colony by the metropole. The 
same theme runs through L 3 Etat et la production pay- 
sanne, and, in terms of early history, through the 
Compagnie du Senegal. In Mercenaires noirs he is 
exposing another form of exploitation; the black 
soldiers who have provided a great part of the force 


167 







of French armies during the last century are generally 
known as “les Senegalais.” M. Ly is now an associate 
director of IF AN in Dakar. 

1059. Mercier, Paul, and Georges Balandier. Les 

pecheurs Lebou du Senegal, particularisme 
et evolution. Saint-Louis, Senegal, Centre 
lFAN-Senegal, 1952. 216 p. illus. (fitudes 
senegalaises, no. 3) DT549.M53 

Anthropological study of a small tribe of fisher 
folk living on the Senegal coast around Dakar and 
Rufisque. The two authors had done their research 
during their first year in Africa, 1946, and the text 
was finished in 1948. Many translated examples of 
sayings and chants are included. Line sketches and 
the section of 26 plates are mostly of tools and equip¬ 
ment. Besides the account of background and tradi¬ 
tion and analysis of personal, family, and group life, 
beliefs and magic practices (the tribe is Muslim), much 
attention is given to the tools and implements of Lebou 
economy, especially of the fishing craft. 

1060. Milcent, Ernest, and Stanley Meisler. 

“Two views of Senegal.” Africa report, v. 
7, Aug. 1962: 13-19. DT1.A217, v. 7 

Two brief articles. The first, a summarization of 
the current affairs of Senegal by the editor of Afrique 
nouvelle in Dakar is frankly enthusiastic over Senghor 
and his leadership. In the second article an American 
journalist who has a Ford Foundation area training 
fellowship sees the same picture from the viewpoint 
of the young elite, who consider Senghor “too French 
and too white.” The coming candidate for power, 
Mr. Meisler suggests, is V. N’Diaye, the Minister of the 
Interior, one of the few university men in the Cabinet. 

1061. Nicolas, Jean Paul. Bioclimatologie hu- 

maine de Saint-Louis du Senegal; essai de 
methodologie bioclimatologique. Dakar. 
IF AN, 1959. 340 p. (Memoires de l’lnsti- 
tut frangais d’Afrique noire, no. 57) 

QH543.N5 

1062. Perspectives d’Outre-Mer. Senegal (pro- 

blemes d’aujourd’hui—avant premiere—en- 
quetes et documents) Monaco, 1960. 
132 p. illus. DLC 

Special issue (mars-avr. 1960) on business and in¬ 
dustrial development in Senegal. A portion of the 
text is in Arabic. The issue of January 1959 had 
also been devoted in large part to Senegal. 


1063. Problemes agricoles au Senegal: La vallee du 

Senegal, agriculture traditionnelle et rizicul- 
ture mecanisee, par Louis Papy. L’arachide 
au Senegal, rationalisation et modernisation 
de sa culture, par Paul Pelissier. Saint- 
Louis du Senegal, Centre I.F.A.N. Senegal, 
1952. 80 p. plates, maps (fitudes senega¬ 
laises, no. 2) S471.S4P7 

The first of these two papers, reprinted from the 
journal Cahiers d’outre-mer (no. 16, Oct.-Dec. 1951), 
was by the Professor of Geography of the University 
of Bordeaux. He gave an ethnological account of 
traditional agriculture in the valley of the Senegal 
river—the Negro tribes, Wolof (Ouolof), Toucouleur, 
Sarakole, among whom are mixed the pastoral Peuls. 
His particular attention was to the rice culture, which 
was started by a certain M. Richard in 1821, with 
irrigation systems in a region known as Richard-Toll. 
Under the development plan (see no. 458) new 
mechanized systems are being introduced in the delta 
of the Senegal. The second paper, by a geographer 
of IF AN in Dakar, is on the modernization of the 
peanut culture (from Cahiers d 3 outre-mer, no. 15, 
July-Sept. 1951). 

1064. Le Senegal en marche: d l 3 an 1 de l 3 indipen- 

dance, 4 avril 1961; sur la voie africaine du 
socialisme. Casablanca, Imprimeries reunies, 
1961. 210 p. illus. DLC 

Handsome brochure sponsored by the Ministere de 
F Information, de la Radiodiffusion et de la Presse of 
Senegal. Contents are articles presenting political, 
economic, social, and cultural aspects of the new 
Senegal. The preface is by President Senghor, the 
lead article, “Reflexions sur l’independance du Senegal 
et le socialisme africaine,” by Mamadou Dia. 

1065. Senghor, Leopold Sedar. Report on the 

principles and programme of the Party. Paris, 
Presence africaine, 1959. 88 p. 

JQ3352.S413 

The President of the Republic of Senegal, formerly 
a member of the French Socialist Party, has been in 
politics since 1945, and steadily resisted the mass inter¬ 
territorial party of the A.O.F., R.D.A. (Rassemble- 
ment Democratique Africain), leading in the formation 
of other parties. In 1958 all French West African 
leaders outside R.D.A. combined to form the P.R.A. 
(Parti du Regroupement Africain), whose Senegalese 
branch, U.P.S. (Union Progressiste Senegalaise) 
pressed for the vote of oui in the 1958 Referendum. In 
1959, after success in the elections for the legislative as- 


168 


sembly, it was transformed into the P.F.A. (Parti Fede- 
raliste Africain), accomplishing the formation of the 
Mali Federation. This address by Senghor at the 
Constituent Congress of this Party voices his concept 
of socialisme africain. 

1066. Sere de Rivieres, Edmond. Le Senegal, Dakar. 

Paris, Editions maritimes et coloniales, 1953 

127 p. illus. (Paysafricains,4) DT549.S4 
Introductory survey, giving condensed information 
regarding country and peoples, the long history of the 
oldest French colony, its government and administra¬ 
tion, social and economic development, and education. 
A separate chapter is devoted to Dakar, the big city 
at the point of Cap Vert which during the war became 
one of the strategic points of the world. The writer 
warned that Senegal has an important development 
of its own and must not be considered only the back- 
woods of a metropolis. 


1067. Thomas, Louis V. Les Diola; essai d’analyse 

fonctionnelle sur une population de Basse- 
Casamance. Dakar, IFAN, 1959. 2 v. 

plates, music. (Memoires de l’lnstitut 
fran^ais d’Afrique noire, no. 55) 

DT549.T48 

Bibliography: v. 2, p. 797-809. 

Complete anthropological study in interesting and 
leisurely style. 

1068. Villard, Andre. Histoire du Senegal. Dakar, 

Ars Africae, 1943. 264 p. illus., fold. maps. 

DT549.V5 

A straightforward history dedicated to “the young 
Frenchmen of A.O.F., European or African.” If they 
are bored by the text, the author suggests modestly 
that they may enjoy the illustrations, which are plates 
taken from contemporary works. The volume ends 
with an annotated bibliography. 


Togo 


1069. Banque Centrale des Etats de l’Afrique de 

l’Ouest. Togo 1960; faits et chiffres. Paris, 
1960. 218 p. DT582.B25 

Statistical survey of the newly independent repub¬ 
lic. The Banque Centrale, which is a French gov¬ 
ernment institution, was known until April 1959 as 
Institut d’Emission de l’A.O.F. et du Togo. Its bul¬ 
letin, Notes d’information et statistique, is among the 
most useful organs for economic study of the former 
French West African states. The Banque issues also 
a monographic series of Etudes economiques ouest- 
africaines, no. 3 of which was Comptes economiques 
Togo 1956-57-58 (Paris, 1961. 268 p.). Nos. 5 
and 6 were, respectively, Donnees actuelles de Veco- 
nomie voltaique (dec. 1962. 32 p.), prepared by the 
Service du Plan of Upper Volta, and Comptes econo¬ 
miques de la Mauritanie 1960 et 1961 (fev. 1963. 
15 p.), prepared by the Ministere de la Planification of 
Mauritania. 

1070. Coleman, James S. Togoland. New York, 

Carnegie Endowment for International 
Peace, 1956. 91 p. (International concili¬ 
ation, Sept. 1956, no. 509) 

JX1907.A8, no. 509 
A political review and analysis, written between the 
plebiscite in British Togoland of May 1956 and the 


referendum in French Togoland of October when the 
question of terminating a trusteeship agreement was 
to come up for the first time before the U.N. Professor 
Coleman examined historical background and the 
United Nations experiment in preparing a country of 
disparate tribes for self-government. 

1071. Cornevin, Robert. Histoire du Togo. 2. ed. 

Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1962. 427 p. illus., 
maps. DT582.5.C6 

The author of Histoire des peuples de VAfrique 
noire (see no. 54) had been commandant de cercle in 
Togo for 8 years. His profound scholarship and in¬ 
timate knowledge of the country is shown in this bril¬ 
liant history, a third of which goes back to pre-Euro¬ 
pean times. The book, which was published first in 
1959, was given the Grand Prix of the Academie des 
Sciences d’Outre-Mer in 1960. A more specialized 
study in his Les Bassari du nord Togo (Paris, Berger- 
Levrault, 1961). In it he makes use of much Ger¬ 
man source material. 

1072. France. Rapport du Gouvernement fran- 

qais a VAssemblee generate des Nations Unies 
sur Vadministration du Togo place sous la 
tutelle de France. Paris, illus. annual. 
1947-1957. J809.N317 


169 


A lavish publication with many maps, charts, and 
tables of statistics. The last presented, for the year 
1957, has 374 pages. Emphasis is on economic and 
social advances, with special attention to French aid. 

1073. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique du Togo. Paris, 1960. 48 p. 
(Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2705, 3 
oct. 1960) D411.F67, no. 2705 

Summary background survey. See note on series, 
no. 846. 

1074. Froelich, J. G. La tribu Konkomba du nord 

Togo. Dakar, IFAN, 1954. 253 p. illus. 
(Memoires, n° 37) DT582.F76 

Ethnological study of the Konkomba people, a tribe 
which the author explained as “a good example of 
population in migration, or, better, in swarm,” who are 
pushing toward the east in northern Togoland, both 
British and French regions. Like many of the young 
French colonial officers, the writer was a trained an¬ 
thropologist as well as administrator. 

1075. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Report to the 

General Assembly of the United Nations on 
Togoland under United Kingdom adminis¬ 
tration. 1920/21-1955. London, annual. 

J809.N15 

Begun as report to the League of Nations on the Co¬ 
mandate. None issued 1939-^16. The report of 1955 
was the last presented, since in the referendum of 
March 1956 British Togoland decided on union with 
Ghana. 

1076. Kitchen, Helen. “Filling the Togo vac¬ 

uum.” Africa report, v. 8, Feb. 1963: 7-10. 

DT1.A217, v. 8 

President Sylvanus Olympio of Togo was assassi¬ 
nated on January 13, 1963, in a takeover of power 
by a military junta. He has been succeeded by a 
former Prime Minister under the French regime, Nico¬ 
las Grunitzky, who had been in exile in Dahomey. 
The reactions of the neighboring African states were 
expressed in an emergency session of the Council of 
Ministers of the Inter-African and Malagasy States 
Organization (the Monrovia Powers), which was 
hastily convened in Lagos from January 24-26. In 
this timely article the editor of Africa Report reviewed 
and evaluated the situation. 

1077. Metzger, O. F. Unsere alte Kolonie Togo. 

Neudamm, Verlag J. Neumann, 1941. 
295 p. illus., maps. HC557.T6M4 


Compendium of information on the former German 
colony, two-thirds of it concerned with forestry, palm- 
oil industry, and agriculture. The writer had been 
governor of Togo during the First World War. 

1078. Pechoux, Laurent. Le mandat franqais sur 

le Togo. Paris, Editions A. Pedone, 1939. 
405 p. JQ3535.P4 1939a 

Politico-economic study, detailed and heavily 
documented. 

1079. Puig, Fran§ois. Etudes sur les coutumes des 

Cabrais [Togo] Toulouse, Impr. toulousaine, 
Lion et fils, 1934. 204 p. fold. map. 

DLC-LL 

This work, prepared by a “juge destruction” in 
Lome as a doctoral thesis, is specially focused on cus¬ 
tomary law, but covers also mores, religion, and other 
anthropological aspects relating to the Kabre tribe, 
one of the dominant peoples of Togo. 

1080. Schramm, Josef. Togo. Bonn, K. Schroeder, 

1959. 86 p. fold. map. (Deutsche Afrika- 
Gesellschaft. Die Lander Afrikas, Band 19) 

DT582.8.S3 

Dr. Schramm, the author of this useful survey in 
the Lander Afrikas series (see no. 10), is a geographer 
who spent almost 10 years in Central Africa, the last 
of them as director of the Institut Franqais d’Afrique 
Noire, Centre Cameroun. His synthesis of geography, 
history, economics and politics is notably lucid. 

1081. Togo. Etude demographique du pays Kabre, 

1957. Lome, Institut de recherche du Togo, 

1960. 87 p. illus., map. 

One of the demographic surveys initiated under 
French official auspices. Reviewed in Africa, v. 32, 
January 1962, p. 80-82. 

1082. Togo. Service d’information. Togo: une 

annee d’independance, 27 avril 1960/61. 
Lome, 1961. [unpaged] illus. DLC-AFR 
Brochure celebrating the first year of the Republic 
of Togo, with handsome and well-chosen photographs 
accompanied by explanatory text. The red, yellow, 
and green cover is an adaptation of the new national 
flag. 

1083. United Nations. Trusteeship Council. Vis¬ 

iting Mission to the Trust Territories in West 
Africa. Report on Togoland under French 
administration 1949, 1952, 1955. New York. 
3v. maps. (U.N. [Document] T) 

DT582.U45 


170 



1084. - Report on Togoland under United 

Kingdom administration. 1949, 1952, 1955. 
New York. 3v. maps. (U.N. [Document] 
T) DT582.U453 

1085. - Special report on the Ewe and Togo¬ 

land unification problem. Lake Success, 
1950. 46 p. (U.N. [Document] T/463) 

DT582.U46 

Same issued from 1952+ as Supplements to the 
Official Records of the Trusteeship Council. The 
Visiting Mission to Togoland, as to the Cameroons, 
made three inspection trips, 1949, 1952, 1955. Their 
examination included also the special consideration 
of the Ewe people of Togoland and the Gold Coast, 
who were pressing for unification. The last Visit¬ 
ing Mission recommended prompt self-determination. 
A plebiscite held in British Togoland on May 9, 1956, 
resulted in a decision for union with Ghana (Mar. 
1957). In a referendum of October 1956 (boycotted 
by the U.N.) French Togoland voted to end the 


Upper 

1087. Dim Delobsom, A. A. L’Empire du mogho- 

naba; coutumes des Mossi de la Haute-Volta. 
Paris, Editions Domat-Montchrestien, 1932. 
303 p. (Institut de droit compare. Etudes 
de sociologie et d’ethnologie juridiques, II). 

DLC-LL 

1088. - Les secrets des sorciers noirs. Paris, 

Librairie Emile Nourry, 1934. 298 p. illus. 
(Collections science et magie, no. 5). NN 
The first work by this West African scholar is a pro¬ 
found and much-noticed study of customary law and 
other aspects of Mossi ethnology. The second more 
popular book won the Grand Prix de l’A.O.F. in 1934. 

1089. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique de Haute-Volta. Paris, 1960. 
64 p. (Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 
2693, 19 aout 1960) D411.F67, no. 2693 

Summary background survey. For general note 
on this series, also for that including the English-lan¬ 
guage brochure, The Republic of Upper Volta, Hour 
of Independence (New York, 1960. 31 p.), see no. 

846. 


trusteeship status and, under provisions of the loi- 
cadre, to become an autonomous state of the Com- 
munaute. The independent Republic of Togo came 
into being in April 1960. 

For official documentation on Togo as a trust territory of 
the United Nations, see the United Nations Documents Index, 
1950-58; and for brief resumes, the Year Book of the United 
Nations. 

1086. Westermann, Diedrich. Die Glidyi-Ewe in 
Togo: Ziige aus ihrem Gesellschaftsleben. 
Berlin, Walter de Gruyter, 1935. 332 p. 
(Mitteilungen des Seminars fur Orientalische 
Sprachen an der Universitat Berlin. Beiband 
zum Jahrgang XXXVIII) DT582.W4 
Professor Westermann had begun his studies of 
the Ewe with a dictionary of the Ewe language pub¬ 
lished in 1905 while he was a missionary in Togoland, 
then a German colony. This work is a full-scale an¬ 
thropological treatise on a particular tribe of the Ewe 
group living in the southeast corner of the territory 
north of Anecho. 


Volta 

1090. Izard-Heritier, Fran^oise, and Michel 

Izard. Les Mossi du Yatenga [Upper Volta] 
etude de la vie economique et sociale. Bor¬ 
deaux, XX Institut des Sciences humaines 
appliquees de l’Universite de Bordeaux, 196—. 
114p. 

Not yet seen in Library of Congress. Review no¬ 
ticed in July 1961. 

1091. Kerharo, Joseph, and A. Bouquet. Sorciers, 

feticheurs et guerisseurs de la Cote dTvoire, 
Haute-Volta: les hommes, les croyances, les 
pratiques pharmacopee et therapeutique. 
Paris, Vigot freres, 1950. 144 p. 

GN477.3.K4 

1092. - Plantes medicinales et toxiques de 

la Cote dTvoire—Haute Volta. Mission 
d’etude de la pharmacopee indigene en 
A.O.F. Paris, Vigot freres, 1950. 295 p. 

QK99.K4 

Two studies of magic and medicine among the 
tribes of the Ivory Coast and Upper Volta, resulting 
from an expedition made to study the pharmacopoeia 
of the region. 


171 






1093. Labourer Henri. Nouvelles notes sur les 
tribus du rameau Lobi: leurs migrations, leur 
evolution, leurs parlers et ceux de leurs voi- 
sins. Dakar, IFAN, 1958. 295 p. illus. 
(Memoires de l’lnstitut frangais d’Afrique 
noire, no. 54) PL8222.L3 

Includes bibliography. 

Largely a linguistic study, including vocabularies 
and a long section of translated folk tales of the Lobi 
and other groups of tribes widespread in the Voltaic 
watershed (Haute Volta, Ivory Coast, Ghana). The 
author, a distinguished ethnologist, was for many years 
associated with the International African Institute. 


1094. Prost, Andre. La langue bisa, grammaire et 
dictionnaire. Ouagadougou, Haute-Volta, 
Centre IFAN, 1950. 198 p. maps. (Etudes 
voltaiques, no. 1) PL8099.P7 

A scholarly study on the language of the tribe offi¬ 
cially known as the Boussanse (English Busansi) who 
live in the cercle of Tenkodogo, Upper Volta. The 
author was a missionary priest of the White Fathers. 
This monograph is the only one of the IFAN series, 
Etudes voltaiques, which the Library of Congress has 
been able to acquire and we have no information as 
to whether others were published. 


172 


FORMER FRENCH EQUATORIAL 

AFRICA 


Bibliography 

1095. Bruel, Georges. Bibliographie de VAfrique 
iquatoriale frangaise. Paris, Larose, 1914. 
326 p. (Gouvemement general de l’A.E.F.) 

Z3691.B89 

By the Chief Administrator for the Colonies, who 
had formerly been chief of the Geographic Service of 
the A.E.F., this is considered the authoritative bibliog¬ 
raphy of early material on French Central Africa. It 
contains over 7,000 references, 4,260 of which are for 
books, pamphlets, and signed periodical articles; the 
rest are content analysis of periodicals by year. 

In 1949 the Service de la Statistique General of French 
Equatorial Africa published a supplementary Bibliographie 
ethnographique de I’A.E.F. 1914-1948 (Paris, Impr. na¬ 
tional. 107 p.). It covers the field of social or “human” 
sciences with 549 entries in regional and subject classifica¬ 
tion with author index. 


1096. Afrique centrale; les republiques d’expression 
frangaise. [Guide etabli par Gilbert Houlet] 
Paris, Hachette, 1962. clxxxviii, 533 p. (Les 
Guides bleus) DT546.A68 

A handbook in baedeker style, with introductory 
essays by specialists: Introduction by Robert Delavi- 
gnette; geography by Gilles Sauter; prehistory and 
archaeology by General P. Huard; precolonial history 
by Hubert Deschamps; colonial history to present by 
Robert Comevin; also on Catholic and Protestant 
missions, arts and crafts, population, flora and fauna, 
languages. These occupy clxxxviii (188) p. Then 
come the travel guide sections; a general guide to 
transport and communications, and sections on the 
Republics of the Congo, Gabon, Chad, Central African 
Republic, and Cameroun. A large folded roadmap 
is inserted at back cover. 


1097. Aubreville, Andre. Etude sur les forets de 

VAfrique equatoriale frangaise et du Cam¬ 
eroun. Paris, 1948. 131 p. (Ministere de 
la France d’outre-mer. Direction de l’agri- 
culture, de l’elevage et des forets. Bulletin 
scientifique no. 2) QK938.F6A83 

1098. - Flore forestiere soudano-guineenne, 

A.O.F. Cameroun-A.E.F. Paris, Societe 
d’editions geographiques maritimes et co- 
loniales, 1950. 523 p. iUus. QK491.F7A8 
Two technical studies by the inspector-general of 
French colonial forests and waterways. The first is a 
treatise on the forests and forest industries which form 
a main resource of the region, the second a botanical 
guide. In 1948 a more general and inclusive study 
of his was issued by Impr. Jouve, Paris, Richesses et 
miseres des forets de VAfrique noire frangaise; mission 
forestiere: A.E.F., Cameroun, A.O.F., 1945-46 

(250 p. illus.). 

1099. Balandier, Georges. Sociologie actuelle de 

VAfrique noire; dynamique des changements 
sociaux en Afrique centrale. Paris, Presses 
universitaires de France, 1955. 510 p. illus., 
maps, tables. (Bibliotheque de sociologie 
contemporaine) DT530.B3 

Rev. ed., 1963. 532 p. 

Professor Balandier has carried out extensive so¬ 
ciological research in French Africa, at first from the 
Institut Frangais d’Afrique Noire in Dakar, then in 
the A.E.F. This work was presented as a thesis with 
the subtitle: Dynamique des changements sociaux au 
Gabon et au Congo. It had been preceded by the 
study, with J. C. Pauvert as associate, Les Villages 
gabonais (see no. 1186). The larger volume estab¬ 
lished the author as a foremost authority on sociology 
of developing areas. (See also under Congo, no. 
1179). 


173 




1100. Bruel, Georges. UAfrique equatoriale fran- 

gaise: le pays—les habitants—la colonisa¬ 
tion—les pouvoirs publics. Nouvelle ed. 
Paris, Larose, 1935. 558 p. illus., 6 fold, 
col. maps. DT546.B7 1935 

An exhaustive geographic survey of A.E.F. by this 
geographer and bibliographer, epitomizing knowledge 
of the territory to the time of its first publication in 
1918. The 1935 edition which has slight changes to 
update it, mainly regarding colonial administration, 
was subsidized by the Gouvernement General de 
l’A.E.F. et du Cameroun. 

1101. Chavannes, Charles de. Avec Brazza; sou¬ 

venirs de la mission de l’Ouest-africain (mars 
1883-janvier 1886) Paris, Plon, 1936. 
380 p. illus. fold. map. DT546.C5 

At head of title: Les origines de l’Afrique equatoriale 
frangaise. 

By an officer who had participated in the early ex¬ 
peditions in equatorial Africa. 

1102. Chemery, J. Histoire de la mise en valeur 

miniere des territoires d’Afrique centrale. 
Paris, 1960. 175 p. map. (Bureau d’etudes 

geologiques et minieres, Paris, Publications, 
21) NNUN 

Includes bibliography. 

1103. Du Chaillu, Paul B. Exploration and ad¬ 

ventures in equatorial Africa, with accounts 
of the manners and customs of the people, 
and of the chace [sic] of the gorilla, crocodile, 
leopard, elephant, hippopotamus, and other 
animals. London, T. W. Laurie, 1945. 
479 p. illus., map. DT356.D823 1945 

Reprint of one of the most famous of the early travel 
books on Africa, first published in 1861. The writer, 
a French anthropologist, in 1855 was commissioned by 
the Academy of Natural Sciences at Philadelphia to 
explore in equatorial Africa, where he was the first 
scientist to observe the anthropoid apes in their native 
habitat. On a later expedition, 1863-65, he discov¬ 
ered the pygmies living in the deep forests. 

Books on hunting by European adventurers in French 
Equatorial Africa from Du Chaillu’s time on are numerous. 
Most are focused on big game. Among modem works avail¬ 
able in English there might be noted: Heinrich Oberjohann, 
Komoon! Capturing the Chad Elephant; translated from 
the German by Rhoda de Terra (New York, Pantheon, 1953. 
219 p. illus.); Henry Geddes, Gorilla (London, A. Mel¬ 
rose, 1955. 206 p.); Ernst A. Swilling, Jungle Fever; trans¬ 
lated from the German (London, Souvenir Press, 1956. 216 

p. illus.), also the bestselling novel, later made into a film, 


opposing the destruction of elephants, Roman Gary’s The 
Roots of Heaven (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1958. 
372 p.). 

1104. £boue, Felix Adolphe. Native policy in 

French Equatorial Africa; translation of a 
memorandum by M. £boue, Governor-Gen¬ 
eral, French Equatorial Africa, Nov. 1941. 
Lagos, 1942. 25 p. DT546.E23 

English rendering of Eboue’s influential statement 
of the changes needed in French colonial policy, later 
enunciated at the Brazzaville Conference. He de¬ 
manded an end to the “neglect and contempt in which 
the native political and social system has been held,” 
and that the colonial peoples be enriched and devel¬ 
oped “within the framework of their own institutions.” 
(Felix Adolphe fiboue, a native of French Guiana, 
had served with distinction in the French colonial ad¬ 
ministration. As Governor of Chad in August 1940 
he proclaimed the adherence of the colony to the Free 
French. In November 1940 General de Gaulle 
named him Governor-General of French Equatorial 
Africa. He died in 1944, shortly after the Brazza¬ 
ville Conference in February of that year, at which the 
“new policy,” emphasizing the evolution of the Afri¬ 
can along the lines of his own culture, was approved 
for French colonial administration). 

Two biographies of Eboue deserve mention. The first, 
by the French African writer Rene Maran, author of the 
1921 prize novel Batouala (set in Ubangi-Shari, now the 
Central African Republic), inclines toward racism in its ac¬ 
count of Eboue’s career, triumphing over the checks imposed 
in the colonial service by his color: Felix Fboue, grand comis 
et loyal serviteur, 1885-1944 (Paris, Les Editions parisiennes, 
1957. 128 p. fold. map). The other, in the same year, is 

by a French political writer known for competent country 
studies and biographies, Jean de la Roche: Le Gouverneur- 
general Felix Eboui, 1884-1944 (Paris, Hachette, 1957. 
189 p. illus.). 

1105. French Equatorial Africa. Haut commis¬ 

sariat. L 3 A.E.F. economique et sociale, 
1947-1958. Paris. Editions Alain, 1959. 
112 p. DLG 

An official balance sheet stressing French contribu¬ 
tions to the development of the territory on the eve of 
independence. 

1106. Gide, Andre. Travels in the Congo. Trans¬ 

lated from the French by Dorothy Bussy. 
Berkeley, University of California Press, 
1962. 375 p. DT546.G483 1962 

Reprint of 1929 edition (New York, Knopf). 

The American edition comprises the two books 
by this distinguished French literary man, Voyage au 
Congo and Retour du Tchad, published in Paris in 


174 


1927 and 1928. The dedication is to Joseph Conrad, 
whose short novel of the Congo, Heart of Darkness , re¬ 
mains a classic of Central Africa. Gide’s long trip 
in the French tropical colony, made by boat, car, ti- 
poye (carrying chair), on horse and foot, and by any 
other feasible means of transportation, was semiofficial 
in character, and he visited many government and 
commercial company posts and institutions, as well 
as native villages. His account is made up from his 
diary, with his comments on all that he saw and 
thought in this primitive part of the world, interspersed 
with notes on his reading of French and English 
classics. Gide was horrified by his findings, and pre¬ 
sented a challenging indictment of the callous exploita¬ 
tion of the Africans—“Excellent people!”—by the 
French traders, and of the inefficiency of the long¬ 
distance administrative control and the handicaps 
under which the local officers had to work. The book 
exerted a strong influence on French opinion regard¬ 
ing colonial policy. In the June 10, 1950, issue of 
France-lllustration devoted to A.E.F., Gide shortly 
before his death expressed the belief that most of the 
abuses which he had criticized in 1927 had been cor¬ 
rected, and that present-day French policy, both public 
administration and private business, was sincerely 
and intelligently directed to the welfare of the natives. 

1107. Guid 3 Afrique equatoriale. 1960/61- Paris, 

Diloutremer. illus., maps. DT546.98 

The first edition, the only One of what is hoped to 
be an annual yearbook received by the Library of 
Congress, is a pamphlet of 161 pages, including ad¬ 
vertising. It gives almanac-style information regard¬ 
ing regions and localities, administrative setup, chief 
industries, etc., with lists of business addresses for the 
chief cities, Brazzaville, Pointe Noire, Bangui, and 
Libreville. 

1108. Institut d’£tudes Centrafricaines, Braz¬ 

zaville. Bulletin, v. 1+ 1945. Brazza¬ 
ville. DT351.157 

1109. - Memoires. no. 1+ 1948+ Braz¬ 

zaville. 

Separately cataloged in DLG. 

This Institute is the leading center for scientific 
study of French-speaking Central Africa. Its Bulletin 
(irregular; no. 19-20, 1960) is largely devoted to 
monograph-length studies in natural sciences. The 
Memoires series include history, social sciences, and 
linguistics. Several are noted under individual authors 
in the present list. 


1110. Maran, Rene. Savorgnan de Brazza, fid. 

definitive. Paris, fiditions du Dauphin, 1951. 
246 p. illus. DG342.8.S27M37 

Biography of the most sympathetic figure among 
the explorers and founders of French Equatorial 
Africa. This well-documented account covers broadly 
the French penetration of Central Africa from 1875, 
the time of Brazza’s first expedition to explore the 
Ogooue, to his death in 1905, after conclusion of his 
mission to investigate charges of French cruelty to 
Africans in the Congo. The definitive edition super¬ 
sedes a publication of 1941, with title, Brazza et la 
fondation de VA.E.F. (Gallimard). 

1111. Perspectives d’Outre-Mer. Realites et pro¬ 

jets en Afrique equatoriale; Republique du 
Tchad, Republique du Gabon, Republique 
Centrafricaine, Republique du Congo. Mon¬ 
aco, P. Bory, 1961. 252 p. illus. (Its no. 
42,nov. 1961) DLC 

In a magazine that features articles on the econom¬ 
ics of French-speaking Africa, this large special issue 
explained at length present situation and plans for de¬ 
velopment of the large natural resources of the four 
new republics. 

1112. Realites Africaines. La mise en valeur de 

VA.E.F. Casablanca, Editions Fontana- 
Maroc, 1956. 358 p. illus., maps, plans. 

HC547.E62R5 

Broad study of economic development of the region. 

1113. Reste, Joseph F. A Vombre de la grande 

foret. Paris, fiditions Stock, 1943. 202 p. 
(Les Livres de nature) DT546.R44 

Poetic and evocative description of the forests of 
Equatorial Africa and the tribesmen living in the re¬ 
mote villages, by a former Governor-General of the 
A.E.F. Published in Paris during the Nazi occupa¬ 
tion, it is distinctly nostalgic. M. Reste believed 
firmly in the possibilities of advance for the Africans. 

1114. Soret, Marcel. Demographie et problemes 

urbains en A.E.F.: Poto-Poto, Bacongo , Do- 
lisie. Montpellier, Impr. Charite, 1954. 
134 p. tables. (Memoires de l’lnstitut 
d’etudes centrafricaines, no. 7) 

HB3668.E7S6 

An early study of a kind that has been made with 
increasing frequency during the last decade. The 
statistics are based on censuses, samplings, registers of 
hospitals, etc., in three rapidly growing centers of 
African urban population serving the Brazzaville area. 


175 



These villages are of much interest in regard to the 
pressing question of African urbanization—the ma¬ 
jority of men over women, increase in dowries and 
prostitution, fall in birth rate, infant mortality, hous¬ 
ing, unemployment, and other aspects of overpopu¬ 
lation. The author’s research had been carried out 
in 1950-52. 

1115. Thompson, Virginia McLean, and Richard 

Adloff. The emerging states of French 
Equatorial Africa. Stanford, Calif., Stan¬ 
ford University Press, 1960. 595 p. illus. 

DT546.T48 

The indispensable modern work in English, provid¬ 
ing a broad background for study of the former French 
Equatorial Africa and its four States, now independ¬ 
ent Republics—Central African Republic, Chad, 
Congo-Brazzaville, and Gabon. The authors glance 
hastily at history and largely bypass any anthropolog¬ 
ical considerations, but no phase of political, eco¬ 
nomic, and present-day social life has escaped their 
careful and exhaustively documented analysis (with 
chapter notes, bibliography and index). At the time 
of its writing the four States were members of the 
Community; since 1960 they are loosely affiliated with 
France and members of the Afro-Malagasy Union. 

1116. Trezenem, Edouard. L’Afrique equatoriale 

franqaise. 3. ed. entierement refondue et 
mise a jour. Paris, Editions maritimes et co- 
loniales, 1955. 208 p. illus. (Collection 
Terres lointaines, 1) DT546.T7 1955 


Includes bibliography. 

Third edition of a general survey of the A.E.F., pre¬ 
viously published together with Bertrand Lembezat’s 
Cameroun. The 1955 version is revised to meet cur¬ 
rent conditions. 

A comparable survey in another series of well-planned in¬ 
troductions to France Overseas is by Henri Ziegl6, Afrique 
Equatoriale franqaise (Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1952. 199 p. 

Collection Union franqaise). A predecessor of these books 
was a lavish and lucid quarto volume prepared for the Inter¬ 
national Colonial Exposition at Paris in 1931 by Julien 
Maigret: Afrique Equatoriale franqaise (Paris, Societe d’edi- 
tions geographiques et maritimes, 1931. 220 p. plates). 

Finally, a book of handsome photographs illustrating the 
territory and its country and life for English-speaking readers 
was published by Hachette, French Equatorial Africa (Paris, 
1957. 127 p., 63 plates). An inspirational introduction is 

by Robert Delavignette, and geographical, ethnological, and 
economic notes at the end by Jacques Vulaines. 

1117. U.S. Trade and Industrial Development Mis¬ 
sion to Middle Africa. Business in Middle 
Africa: report . . . Chad, Cameroon, Congo 
(Brazzaville), Central African Republic, Ga¬ 
bon, May 6 through June 20, 1962. Wash¬ 
ington, 1962. 28 p. illus. HC547.W5A54 

General introduction on the market for U.S. goods 
and capital, then systematically by country an account 
of general characteristics, special import interests, 
conditions of trade, and in some cases special consid¬ 
erations. The pamphlet ends with listings of trade 
and investment opportunities. 


Cameroon (Federal Republic) 


1118. Albert, Andre. Cameroun franqaise. Au 

pays bamileke. Bandjoun: croyances, cou- 
tumes, folklore. Edition corrigee et aug- 
mentee. Montreal, Editions de l’Arbre, 1943. 
282 p. (France forever) 

GN655.C3A5 1943 
Ethnological study of a tribe in the French Cam- 
eroons by a Catholic missionary priest. Originally 
printed in Paris in 1937, this edition was brought out 
under the Free French, to whom the Governor of 
the Cameroons had declared allegiance. 

1119. Ardener, Edwin. Plantation and village in 

the Cameroons; some economic and social 
studies, by Edwin Ardener, Shirley Ardener, 


and W. A. Warmington. With a contribution 
by M. J. Ruel. London, Published for the 
Nigerian Institute of Social and Economic 
Research by the Oxford University Press, 
1960. 435 p. illus. HD1538.C15A75 

The rich plantations of the Southern Cameroons, 
established under German ownership, came under the 
administration of the Government of Nigeria after the 
Second World War, and in January 1947 the Cam¬ 
eroons Development Corporation was set up for their 
management. This survey, by a socio-anthropological 
couple from Leeds University and an economist, 
sketches briefly the organization of the CDC, then 
studies in detail conditions of work, productivity, and 
life of the plantation laborers. In October 1960 the 


176 








Southern Cameroons plebiscite resulted in the decision 
to separate from the Nigerian Federation, of which 
it had been a Region, and to unite with the new Re¬ 
public of Cameroun. 

1120. Binet, Jacques. Budgets familiaux des plan- 
teurs de cacao au Cameroun. Paris, Office 
de la recherche scientifique et technique 
outre-mer [ORSTOM] 1956. 154 p. illus. 
(L’Homme d’outre-mer, no. 3) 

HN814.C3B5 


An analysis of living costs, published in a series of 
authoritative socio-economic surveys. 


1121. Cameroons, French. Laws, statutes, etc. 

Code et lois du Cameroun, par Gaston-Jean 
Bouvenet et Rene Bourdin. Yaounde, Haut 
Commissariat de la Republique frangaise au 
Cameroun, 1956-58. 5 v. DLC-LL 

To be kept up to date by supplements. 

1122. Cameroun. Service de la statistique generate. 

Etude de Veconomic camerounaise en 1957. 
Yaounde [I960?] 2 v. tables. DLC 

Two large mimeographed volumes of statistical 
information, the first relating to “Activites des entre- 
prises” (311 p.), the second to “Secteur public” (263 
p.). The introduction is signed by A. Vesse, who had 
been chief of the Service de la Statistique of Cam¬ 
eroun from 1952-59. 

1123. Le Cameroun; aspect geographique, historique, 

touristique, economique et administratif du 
territoire. Paris, Alepee, 1953. 225 p. illus., 
maps. (Les Documents de France) 

DT564.C33 

An overall survey of economics, history, and culture, 
including charts and tables of statistics. Published 
under the auspices of the Minister of Public Works, 
this volume features excellent illustrations, those on 
the art of Cameroun being particularly noteworthy. 


1124. Chazelas, Victor. Territoires africains sous 
mandat de la France, Cameroun et Togo. 
Paris, Societe d’editions geographiques, mari- 
times et coloniales, 1931. 240 p. plates. 

DT564.C4 

Prepared by the Administrator-in-Chief of the 
Colonies for the International Colonial Exposition at 
Paris in 1931. The quarto volume presented a signif¬ 
icant survey of physical and human geography, his¬ 
tory, and administration by France under the League 


of Nations mandate of the two Central African 
colonies. 

1125. Diziain, Roland, and A. Cambon. Etude sur 

la population du quartier New-Bell a Douala. 
Yaounde, Institut de recherches scientifiques 
du Cameroun, 1957. 268 p. 

This monograph resulting from a sociological in¬ 
vestigation of an urbanized group in Cameroun was 
reviewed in Zaire, v. 12, no. 7, 1958. 

1126. Dugast, I. Inventaire ethnique du Sud-Cam- 

eroun. Douala, 1949. 159 p. (Memoires 

de 1’Institut frangais d’Afrique noire. 
Centre Cameroun. Serie: Populations, no. 1) 

DT570.D8 

Ethnological analysis in systematic outline form, 
published as the first volume of a series of studies on 
population in the Cameroons. The writer identifies 
divisions and subdivisions of many tribes: pygmies, 
Duala, Bakundu, Bakoko and Basa, Bantu, Beti and 
Pahouins, Maka and Kozune, Soudano-Bantu, etc. 

1127. Durrell, Gerald M. The overloaded ark. 

New York, Viking Press, 1953. 238 p. 
illus. QL62.D85 1953a 

There are many fascinating books of travel in the 
Cameroons, both French and English, ranging from 
Mary Kingsley’s paper on Ascent of Cameroons Peak, 
read to the Liverpool Geographical Society on March 
19, 1896, and chapters in Andre Gide’s famous Voyage 
au Congo (see no. 1106), to this amusing account 
by a young British zoologist of his collecting trips. The 
success of his first book, with its spirited descriptions 
of adventures with small animals and with the Fon of 
Bafut and his pidgin-speaking subjects in the Camer¬ 
oons grasslands, has led to two others both brought 
out simultaneously in British and American editions, 
The Bafut Beagles (1954) and Zoo in My Luggage 
(1960). 

1128. Egerton, F. Clement C. African majesty: 

a record of Bangangte in the French Camer¬ 
oons. New York, Scribner, 1939. 348 p. 

DT584.B3E3 

Detailed account of travel in the French Camer¬ 
oons, including a stay of several months in the village 
of a petty native king. The writer’s interests were 
anthropological, reflecting his study under Mali¬ 
nowski. He spoke highly of the French administra¬ 
tion, praising its realism and sympathetic attitude to¬ 
ward native affairs. 


177 



1129. Ethnographic survey of Africa. London, In¬ 

ternational African Institute. 

For general note on the series, see no. 270. The 
following two volumes in the Western Africa series are 
on the Cameroons: 

Peoples of the Central Cameroons: Tikar, by Merram 
McCulloch; Bamum and Bamileke, by Margaret Lit- 
tlewood; Banem, Bafia and Balom, by I. Dugast. 
1954. 174 p. DT570.M35 

Coastal Bantu of the Cameroons, by Edwin Ardener. 
1956. 116 p. DT570.A7 

1130. Europe France Outremer. Le Cameroun; 

dix-huit mois apres l’independance. Paris, 
1961. 56 p. Ulus. JV1801.E65, no. 379 
Special issue, no. 379, juin 1961. 

Devoted to political and economic situation of Cam¬ 
eroun after her first steps in independence. No. 398 
of this magazine, March 1963, is also devoted to Le 
Cameroun federal (53 p.). 

1131. France. Rapport du Gouvernement franqaise 

d. VAssemblee generate des Nations Unies sur 
Vadministration du Cameroun place sous la 
tutelle de la France. Paris, annual, illus., 
maps. J805.R43 

Title varies slightly. 

Annual publication presented to the United Na¬ 
tions by France as Administering Power, offering a 
survey of economic, political, social, and educational 
status and progress in the trust territory of the French 
Cameroons. The “Annexe statistique,” containing 
tables and graphic charts, and the second appendix, 
“Repertoire des principaux textes de lois et reglements 
generaux,” fill almost half the large, well-illustrated 
volumes. Begun in the 1920’s under the League of 
Nations, the last submitted covered the year 1957. 

1132. France. Direction de la documentation. Le 

Cameroun sous tutelle britannique a Vheure 
de plebiscite. Paris, 1961. 13 p. (Notes 

et etudes documentaires, no. 2.756, 1. mars 
1961) D411.F67, no. 2756 

1133. - La Republique du Cameroun. Paris, 

1961. 56 p. (Notes et etudes documen¬ 
taires, no. 2.746, 19 jan. 1961) 

D411.F67, no. 2746 

1134. Froelich, Jean C. Cameroun, Togo: terri- 

toires sous tutelle. Avec 18 cartes et 24 
photos, hors texte. Paris, Berger-Levrault, 
1956. ix, 217 p. illus., maps (L’Union 
franqaise) DT564.F75 

Bibliography: p. 209-212. 


Clear, scientific, well-balanced survey. The cov¬ 
erage is of country, people, administration, economy, 
history, and culture. 

1135. Garnier, Christine, and Jean Fralon. Le 

fetichisme en Afrique noire ( Togo-Camer - 
oun). Paris, Payot, 1951. 213 p. illus., 
maps. (Bibliotheque scientifique) 

GN472.G3 

In this anthropological study the two writers re¬ 
viewed general aspects of fetichism, public cults, tribal 
cults, private beliefs, social classifications, magic prac¬ 
tices. The illustrations are not photographs but 
drawings, which include maps, designs and artifacts, 
and tribesmen in ritual poses. 

1136. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. The Cameroons 

under United Kingdom administration; re¬ 
port to the General Assembly of the United 
Nations on the administration of the Camer¬ 
oons under United Kingdom trusteeship. 
1920-21+ London, H.M. Stationery Of¬ 
fice. illus. annual. J805.N15 

The strips of territory bordering on Nigeria known 
as Northern Cameroons and Southern Cameroons 
were placed under British administration after the 
First World War as a Co-mandate of the League of 
Nations. Reports were issued annually to the League 
of Nations until the Second World War; after 1946 
to the United Nations. The final report was that cov¬ 
ering the year 1959 (London, 1961. 209 p. fold, 
maps). 

1137. Institut de Recherches Scientifiques du 

Cameroun. Recherches et etudes came- 
rounaises. annee 1960+ Yaounde, illus., 
plates, maps, diagrs. semiannual. DLC 
Journal of the institute succeeding the Centre IFAN 
du Cameroun. 

1138. Kaberry, Phyllis M. Women of the grass- 

fields; a study of the economic position of 
women in Bamenda, British Cameroons. 
London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1952. 220 p. 
illus., fold. map. (Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. 
Colonial research publications no. 14) 

JV33.G7A52, no. 14 
Comprehensive account of the social and economic 
life of the peoples of one division of the British Cam¬ 
eroons. The author, reader in anthropology in the 
University of London, prepared the survey at the re¬ 
quest of the Nigerian Government under the direction 
of the International African Institute, spending sev- 


178 



eral years in field work among the Bamenda. Her 
study is focused on the position of women who, as 
producers of the crops, exercise the real control of land 
rights. She discounts the complaints frequently 
voiced by Europeans that under the system of polyg¬ 
amy the status of women is very low, and considers 
that in the half-pagan, half-Christian society, the posi¬ 
tion of women “cannot, without distortion, be ab¬ 
stracted from the context of tribal life and placed in 
a cultural vacuum.” 

1139. Kuczynski, Robert R. Cameroons and To- 

goland; a demographic study. London, New 
York, Oxford University Press, 1939. 579 p. 

HB3669.K8 

This comprehensive technical work by a demog¬ 
rapher connected with the British Foreign Office was 
undertaken under the auspices of the Royal Institute 
of International Affairs at the request of Lord Hailey, 
Director of the African Research Survey. Kuczynski 
had planned to survey all Africa south of the Sahara; 
his work was interrupted by the war. He treated here 
with the utmost thoroughness all phases of population 
studies of the former German territories of Togoland 
and the Cameroons, and their continuation under 
French and British mandates. 

1140. Lecoq, Raymond. Les Bamileke. Une civi¬ 

lisation africaine. Paris, Editions africaines, 
1953. 213 p. (chiefly illus.) (Presence 
africaine) DT570.L36 

The Bamileke live where the savannah merges 
into the forest in the French Cameroun, and are 
known traditionally for their sculpture. The author 
had worked among the Bamileke, developing craft 
centers and encouraging the revival of the tribal arts, 
of which this largely pictorial monograph is a study. 

1141. Lembezat, Bertrand. Le Cameroun. 3. ed., 

entierement refondue et mise a jour. Paris, 
Editions maritimes et coloniales, 1954. 
208 p. illus., maps. (Terres lointaines) 

DT564.L4 1954 

Bibliography: p. 202-206. 

1142. - Mukulehe; un clan montagnard du 

Nord-Cameroun; coutumes, rites, croyances. 
Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1952. 228 p. illus. 

DT570.L4 

By an official of France Overseas, who at the outset 
of his career had served in North Cameroun. The 
first-named work is a general survey. The 1952 


study is of one very small pagan tribe, numbering 
hardly over 2,000, whose individual way of life is car¬ 
ried out in the high mountain country. In three parts, 
the first section of this book describes material culture; 
the second, social organization; the third, “The Super¬ 
natural World,” religious beliefs and cult practices. 
In 1950 M. Lembezat had published a comparable 
study of a larger tribe of the same area, Kirdi: les po¬ 
pulations painnes du Nord-Cameroun ([Cahors, A. 
Couesland] 1950. 101 p. Memoires de l’lnstitut 

frangais d’Afrique noire, Centre Cameroun. Serie: 
Populations, no. 2). 

1143. Migeod, Frederick W. Through British Cam¬ 

eroons. London, Health, Cranton, 1925. 
285 p. illus. DT567.M5 

The writer, formerly with the British Colonial Civil 
Service, was a specialist in the languages of West 
Africa. His book is an impersonal travel narrative, 
stressing ethnological observations. This is an excel¬ 
lent example of the older informative pictures of Africa 
written by British Colonial Officers. 

1144. Njoya, Sultan of the Bamun. Histoire et 

coutumes des Bamun , redigees sous la direc¬ 
tion du Sultan Njoya. Traduction du 
pasteur Henri Martin. Dakar, 1952. 271 p. 
5 facsims. (Memoires de l’lnstitut frangais 
d’Afrique noire, Centre du Cameroun. 
Serie: Populations, no. 5) DT570.N574 

Reproduction in French translation of a manuscript 
text preserved in the palace of the Sultan of Bamun— 
“a handsome volume, in a leather case, made up of 
separate leaves, most of which are ornamented with 
drawings in many colors. The writing is in the special 
characters of the Mun language, known today to only 
a few dozen individuals.” The text was transcribed 
into Latin script and translated literally. It tells the 
history and traditions of the Bamun people in the 
words of their elders, passing from kings to customs and 
back again to kings and wars. “Les Blancs” are men¬ 
tioned more or less incidentally, only a few of the later 
chapters of history referring to French administrators. 
The last pages tell of the palace built by the king, a 
building of 41 rooms, which surpasses all other houses 
of Cameroun. “When White men look at this palace, 
they admire it greatly and say no other king has con¬ 
structed such a building. They say, these White men 
who come to the land of the Blacks, that they have 
never seen a palace like this one Njoya has built in the 
land of the Bamun.” 


179 



1145. Rudin, Harry R. Germans in the Cameroons, 

1884-1914; a case study in modern im¬ 
perialism. New Haven, Yale University 
Press, 1938. 456 p. (Yale historical publica¬ 
tions. Studies, xii) DT572.R8 

Prepared originally as a doctoral dissertation, this 
work combines thorough documented research in pub¬ 
lished sources with on-the-spot investigations in the 
Cameroons. The author defended the German ad¬ 
ministration of the territory. The publication of this 
book, at the height of the German claims for restora¬ 
tion of the colonies, called forth critical reviews in 
the British press. Dr. Rudin, for many years a pro¬ 
fessor of history at Yale, has continued his interest 
in African studies in which he is an acknowledged 
authority. 

1146. Stoecker, Helmuth, ed. Kamerun unter 

deutscher Kolonialherrschaft; Studien. Ber¬ 
lin, Riitten & Loening, 1960+ v. 1 + 

(Schriftenreiche des Instituts fur allgemeine 
Geschichte an der Humboldt-Universitat 
Berlin, Bd. 5+) DLG 

1147. Tardits, Claude. Contribution a Vetude des 

populations bamilekS de Vouest Cameroun. 
Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1960. 135 p. illus. 
(L’Homme d’outre-mer. Nouv. ser., no. 4) 

GN655.C3T3 

Includes bibliography. 

A work resulting from a survey of the chefferies in 
the prosperous agricultural regions of Southern 
Cameroons, sponsored by the Office de la Recherche 
Scientifique et Technique Outre-Mer (ORSTOM). 

1148. Union des Peuples Camerounais. L’U.P.C. 

denonce Verection des tortures en systeme au 
Kamerun. Le Caire, Impr. “Des Auteurs,” 
1958. 72 p. DT574.U45 

Published by the Direction de l’U.P.C., the leftist 
opposition group in the Cameroons headed by the late 
Felix-R. Moumie (sometimes called Union des Popu¬ 
lations du Cameroun). From their headquarters in 
Cairo this group issued a fire of propaganda material. 
Another example is The U.N. and the Kamerunian 
Problem (1959? 71 p.). 

1149. United Nations. Trusteeship Council. Visit¬ 

ing Mission to the Trust Territories in 
West Africa. Report on the Cameroons 
under French administration. 1949-58. 
New York. 4 v. maps. DT564.U5 


1150. - Report on the Cameroons under 

United Kingdom administration. 1949-58. 
New York. 4 v. maps. DT561.U498 
The Visiting Missions examined political, social, 
and economic conditions in the Cameroons on four 
visits, 1949, 1952, 1955, and 1958, reporting to the 
Trusteeship Council, which passed the reports on to 
the General Assembly. For discussion of reports, and 
for the many other U.N. documents relating to the 
Cameroons, including innumerable petitions, see the 
annual United Nations Documents Index under 
“Cameroons.” In the last visit in 1958 the Mission 
recommended steps to immediate independence, and 
on January 1, 1960, the French trusteeship became 
the Republic of Cameroun. The British trusteeship 
was terminated on October 1, 1961; in a plebiscite 
held under U.N. supervision on February 11, 1961, 
the Southern Cameroons voted to join the new Re¬ 
public of Cameroun, and the Northern Cameroons 
voted for union with Northern Nigeria. 

1151. Warmington, W. A. A West African trade 

union: a case study of the Cameroons De¬ 
velopment Corporation Workers’ Union and 
its relations with the employers. London, 
Published for the Nigerian Institute of Social 
and Economic Research by the Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1960. 150 p. 

HD6869.A29W3 

“The history of industrial relations in the Cameroons 
plantations since 1947 gives evidence of a generally 
responsible attitude on the part of the C.D.C. 
Workers Union.” The writer felt it impossible to 
generalize about attitudes of workers to the Union, 
but felt that in the main it had helped them. 

1152. Wilbois, Joseph. Le Cameroun: les in¬ 

digenes. — les colons, —les Missions. — 
l’administration franchise. Paris, Payot, 
1934. 256 p. (Collection d’etudes, de docu¬ 
ments et de temoignages pour servir a This- 
toire de notre temps). DT564.W5 

By the Director of the School of Administration, a 
former administrator in Cameroun, this work typifies 
colonial thought of its time. The first and longest 
section, while not in scholarly anthropological lan¬ 
guage, is a clear ethnological analysis of the tribes of 
the region. It ends with an interesting “Esquisse d’un 
portrait d’un Noir,” finding the African’s logic to be 
quite the opposite of that of the white man. 


180 



Central African Republic 


1153. Daigre, Father. Oubangui-Chari: temoignage 

sur son evolution, 1900-1940. Issoudun, 
Indre, Dillen, 1947. 163 p. illus., maps. 

DT546.3.D3 

Personal story of the development of the territory, 
particularly in the light of the Catholic missions. 

1154. Eboue, Felix Adolphe. Les peuples de I’Ou- 

bangui-Chari; essai d’ethnographie, de lin- 
guistique et d’economie sociale. Paris, Pu¬ 
blications du Comite de l’Afrique frangaise, 
1933. 104 p. illus., music, maps, tables. 

IEN 

Governor Eboue served in his earlier career as an 
administrator in Ubangi-Shari. This book and a 
dictionary of one of the tribal languages resulted from 
his earnest study of the people under his care. Andre 
Gide met him during his famous voyage (see no. 1106) 
and commented on his competence and pleasant 
personality. 

1155. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique Centrafricaine. Paris, 1960. 
49 p. (Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 
2733, 19 dec. 1960) D411.F67, no. 2733 

Background survey of general conditions, political 
and administrative institutions, economics and fi¬ 
nancial position, cultural and social evolution. The 
text of the Constitution is given in an appendix. 
(See note on this series, no. 846.) 

A much shorter and more popularized survey is presented 
to the American public in a booklet from the French Em¬ 
bassy in New York, The Central African Republic, Hour of 
Independence (1960. 28 p. illus.). 

1156. Gauze, Rene. Guide touristique et cyne - 

getique de VOubangui-Chari. Caen, Impr. 
Ozanne, 1958. 377 p. illus. (part col.) 
maps. DT546.32.G3 

The cover title of this book reads “Oubangui-Chari, 
paradis du tourisme cynegetique”—that is, paradise 
for huntsmen. As this suggests, the work is a guide¬ 
book addressed specifically to the big game hunters 
who frequent the sparsely habited forest “bush” of 
Central Africa. It includes itineraries and detailed 
sketch maps. Notes on history, geography, ethnology, 
and other general subjects are scattered through the 
text. 


1157. Jean, Suzanne. Les Langbas (population 

d’Oubangui-Chari). Paris, Bureau pour le 
developpement de la production agricole, 
1960. 83 p. maps. (Republique Centra¬ 
fricaine: Bureau d’etudes et de recherches 
du plan) DLC 

Analysis focused on the economic life of a small 
tribe in the Kembe district of the Central African 
Republic where an attempted palm-oil plantation had 
failed. The anthropologist author had lived for 9 
months with the Langbas, studying the whole pano¬ 
rama of their culture and their lackadaisical economy. 
The book is reviewed by Hubert Deschamps in Africa, 
v. 31, April 1961, p. 191-192. 

1158. Kalck, Pierre. Realites oubanguiennes. 

Pref. de Barthelemy Boganda. Paris, Edi¬ 
tions Berger-Levrault, 1959. 356 p. illus. 
(Mondes d’outre-mer. Serie: Nations) 

DT546.3.K3 

Well-balanced study of the country now known as 
the Central African Republic. Writing in 1958, the 
author uses the name of the former colony then still 
in use, Ubangi-Shari (French, Oubangui-Chari). 
The work is in three parts, first on “Precolonialism,” 
a combination of history and anthropology. The sec¬ 
ond part treats the French colonial territory, including 
a table of population as of 1958, with concentration 
on the socio-economic balance sheet. The last part, 
“L’Oubangui decolonise,” is analysis of economic and 
social problems facing the new government of the 
landlocked country. The book ends with a good clas¬ 
sified bibliography (p. 329-343). The preface was 
written by the late President of the Grand Conseil de 
l’A.E.F., the Ubangi priest who was undisputed politi¬ 
cal leader of the territory from 1942, an ardent pro¬ 
ponent of a “United States of Latin Africa.” A 
frontispiece shows him on the rostrum of the Council, 
and the following flyleaf, added while the book was 
in press, announced “the most tragic of Ubangi reali¬ 
ties,” the death of Boganda in an airplane accident at 
Easter 1959. 

1159. Lebeuf, Jean Paul. Bangui ( Oubangui- 

Chari, A.E.F.) Paris, Editions de l’Union 
frangaise, 1954. 63 p. illus. (His Rapport 
d’une enquete preliminaire dans les milieux 
urbains de la fed6ration, 2) DT546.342.L4 

At head of title: Haut-Commissariat de la Republique en 
Afrique equatoriale fran$aise. 


181 



Monograph on demography and social conditions of 
the capital city of what is now the Central African 
Republic. The author has also studied conditions 
in Fort Lamy (see no. 1174) 

1160. Republique Centrafricaine. Formation et 

caracteres des centres secondaires dans le 
Centre Oubangui. Paris Bureau d’etudes 
et recherches du plan, 1960. 66 p. map. 

One of the series of demographic studies undertaken 
under French official auspices in the midfifties. This 
work is reviewed in Africa, v. 32, January 1962, 

p. 80-81. 

1161. Tisserant, Charles. Ce que j’ai connu de 

Vesclavage en Oubangui-Chari. Paris, So- 
ciete antiesclavagiste de France, 1955. 112 p. 

HT1399.U2T5 

Distributed by Plon. 

Father Tisserant of the Congregation du Saint- 
Esprit, a missionary priest in French Equatorial Africa 
since 1911, is an authority on the Banda language. In 
this account of slavery as he had seen it in operation 


in the Islamized villages of Oubangui-Chari, much 
of the data related to his early years; however he 
claimed that slavery still existed under cover, despite 
the official abolition. He considers that it can be 
stopped only through the church. 

1162. Vergiat, Antonin M. Moeurs et coutumes 

des Man]as. Paris, Payot, 1937. 323 p. 

illus. (Bibliotheque scientifique) 

GN652.M3V4 

1163. - Les rites secrets des primitifs de VOu¬ 

bangui. Paris, Payot, 1936. 210 p. illus. 
(Bibliotheque scientifique) 

GN652.U2V4 

Two scholarly, detailed, and interesting ethnologi¬ 
cal studies of pagan tribes of Equatorial Africa. The 
illustrations include drawings and plates. 

A study of a particular tribe in the north of the Central 
African Republic, Les Gbaya, by John Hilbert, has been pub¬ 
lished in Sweden in the lavishly presented series from the 
University of Uppsala (Stockholm, 1962. 141 p. Studia 

ethnographica upsaliensa, 19). 


Chad 


1164. Annuaire du Tchad. 1958. Casablanca, Ma- 

roc, Editions Fontana [1958?] 161 p. illus., 

part col. DT546.4.A75 

This presentation of Chad, “constituting a practi¬ 
cal guide to its economy, organization and structure,” 
was prepared by the Chambre de Commerce, d’Agri¬ 
culture et d’lndustrie du Tchad in Fort-Lamy. It is 
an updating of a similar work brought out with the 
same title (the Annuaire is misleading) in 1950-51, to 
celebrate the 50th anniversary of the French installa¬ 
tion in Chad. The book is handsomely made up and 
illustrated, with both pictures and advertising partly 
in color. Coverage is general, including geography, 
history and archaeology, territorial organization, and 
economy, and with chapters on the six largest cities. 

1165. Cabot, Jean, and Roland Diziain. Popula¬ 

tion du Moyen Logone (Tchad et Came- 
roun) Paris, Office de la recherche 
scientifique et technique outre-mer, 1955. 
76 p. illus., plates, maps, diagrs., tables. 
(L’Homme d’outre-mer, no. 1) 

DT546.4.C3 

Socio-demographic analysis in the ORSTOM series. 


1166. Capot-Rey, Robert. Borkou et Ounianga; 

etude de geographie regionale. Alger, 
Institut d’etudes sahariennes, 1961. 

New study by the Director of the Institute, leading 
authority on the Sahara. This monograph examines 
the present evolution and economic and human geog¬ 
raphy of the northern desert region of Chad. 

1167. Coblentz, Alex. Goranes et Toubous des 

confins nord du Tchad; etude anthropolo- 
gique et biologique. Paris, 1961. 113 1. 

DLC 

1168. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique du Tchad. Paris, 1960. 67 p. 
(Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2696, 
31 aout, 1960) D411.F67, no. 2696 

Background study. See note on series, no. 846. 

1169. Gouraud, Henri. Zinder-Tchad; souvenirs 

d’un Africain. Paris, Plon, 1944. 305 p. 

DT546.G65 

Recollections by a French officer who had taken 
part in the conquest, exploration, and extension of 


182 



the French equatorial empire in Africa in the early 
years of the present century. In 1900 three French 
forces, from Algeria, the Sudan, and the Congo, met 
at Lake Chad to take occupation of the country. 
General Gouraud saw action for 6 years, from Zinder 
in the demi-desert of southern Niger to the rain forests 
of the Congo. 

1170. Griaule, Marcel. Les Sao legendaires. 

Paris, Gallimard, 1943. 168 p. DT546.4.G7 
The late professor at the Sorbonne, director of the 
Musee de l’Homme, one of France’s most noted 
writers on African archaeology of the bet ween-wars 
period, had a delightful literary style to combine with 
his broad knowledge of African peoples and art. This 
book recounts an expedition below Lake Chad and 
along the Chari and Logone rivers, looking for archaeo¬ 
logical remains of a pre-Islamic civilization (10th to 
16th centuries) among whose monuments are the mas¬ 
sive walls of the city of Goulfeil, as well as bronzes, 
pottery, carvings, etc. The Sao were predecessors of 
the Kotoko. Among his companions was the young 
ethnologist J. P. Lebeuf (q.v.) 

1171. Kronenberg, Andreas. Die Teda von Tibesti. 

Horn-Wien, Verlag F. Berger, 1958. 160 p., 

29 plates. (Wiener Beitrage zur Kulturge- 
schichte und Linguistik. Veroffentlichungen 
des Instituts fiir Volkerkunde der Universitat 
Wien. Bd. GN4.W5 

Anthropological study of the Teda, or Tibbu, an 
Islamized Negroid people of the Central Sahara, dis¬ 
seminated from Lake Chad into the Fezzan. The 
Austrian author had studied the tribes at first hand 
in the winter of 1953-54. He looks first at their econ¬ 
omy, which is part nomadic with herds of camels, 
sheep, goats, and cattle, and partly sedentary culti¬ 
vation. Then he examines rites, mores, clan structure, 
cultus, and culture history. His documentation in¬ 
cludes an extensive bibliography (p. 148-154). 

A notable work on the language of the Teda is Grammaire 
et textes Teda-Daza by Charles and Marguerite LeCoeur, 
published by the Institut Frangais d’Afrique Noire in 1956 
(Dakar. 394 p. Memoires, no. 46). Charles LeCoeur 
had also prepared a Dictionnaire ethnographique Teda 
(Dakar, IFAN. 1950, 213 p. Memoires, no. 9). 

1172. Lapie, Pierre O. My travels through Chad; 

tr. by Leslie Bull. London, J. Murray, 1943. 
198 p. DT546.4.L32 

The writer, an adherent of General de Gaulle after 
the fall of France, followed fiboue as governor of the 


colony of Chad in French Equatorial Africa, which 
had declared its allegiance to Free France. This book 
describes Lapie’s trips of inspection from the capital. 
Fort Lamy, through the “bush,” including much that 
he had learned of the history, manners, economy, and 
racial problems of the native tribes. It is concerned 
in part with wartime activities in Free French Africa 
and the formation of Leclerc’s army. 

The campaigns of General Leclerc, who led the French 
forces to North Africa from their base in Chad, are chronicled 
in a number of postwar books. One detailed account is by 
General F. J. J. Ingold, VEpopee Leclerc au Sahara, 1940- 
1943 (Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1945, 264 p.). 

1173. Lebeuf, Annie M. D. Les populations du 

Tchad (nord du 10 e parallele) Paris, Presses 
universitaires de France, 1959. 130 p. illus. 
(International African Institute. Monogra- 
phies ethnologiques africaines) 

DT546.4.L38 

Includes bibliography. 

In the Ethnographic Survey of Africa series (see no. 
270), this study covers the Saharan populations of 
northern Chad (Teda and Daza), those of the ancient 
kingdoms of Kanem, Kotoko, Boulala, Baguirmi, 
Wadai (Ouada'i) and regrouped peoples, whom the 
author classifies collectively as the Yedina, Kinga, and 
Dadjo. 

1174. Lebeuf, Jean Paul, and A. Masson Detour- 

bet. La civilisation du Tchad; suivi d’une 
etude sur les bronzes sao, par Raymond 
Lantier. Paris, Payot, 1950. 198 p. 

DT546.4.L4 

Account for the layman of the finds of an archae¬ 
ological expedition in Chad colony. The first-named 
writer had published several years before a spirited 
travel narrative describing the same country, Quand 
Vor etait vivant; aventures au Tchad (Paris, J. Susse, 
1945. 216 p.). 

In 1954 a sociodemographic study by Lebeuf analyzed 
conditions in the capital city: Fort-Lamy, Tchad, A.E.F.: 
rapport d’une enquete preliminaire dans les milieux urbains 
de la Federation (Paris, Editions de I’Union frangaise. 64 p. 
illus.). This scholar is in 1962 director of research at the 
Centre Nationale de Recherches Scientifiques, specializing in 
research in Chad. He has recently published a study of the 
remains of ancient civilizations in that region, Archeologie 
tchadienne, les Sao du Cameroun et du Tchad (Paris, Her¬ 
mann, 1962. 146 p. plates), dated to coincide with ex¬ 

hibits arranged in honor of the visit of the President of Chad 
to Paris. 


183 


1175. Le Rouvreur, Albert. Saheliens et sahariens 

du Tchad. Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1962. 
468 p. illus., maps. (L’Homme d’outre- 
mer) DLG 

A broad study of the peoples of northern Tchad 
and the neighboring semiarid regions of Niger, their 
country, history, ways of life, economic resources and 
needs, and development under French rule. The 
writer, a marine officer, had served for 12 years as 
administrator in the Chad. The book is issued in a 
series sponsored by the Office de la Recherche Scien- 
tifique et Technique Outre-Mer and the Conseil 
Superieur des Recherches Sociologiques d’Outre-Mer. 

1176. “Le Livre d’or d’Afrique: Le Tchad.” Afrique, 

revue mensuelle, no. 10, mar. 1962: 15-65. 

DLC 

In this feature section there are offered 10 articles 
on the country “in the very heart of Africa,” its past, 
its leadership and evolution, beginnings of moderniza¬ 
tion, economy, and prospects for the future. An¬ 


nounced as Chapter 1 of “Le Livre d’or,” this is pre¬ 
sumably the first of a series of country studies. 

1177. Tilho, A. J. M. Le Tchad et la capture du 

Logone par le Niger. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 
1947. 202 p. illus., maps. GB1668.C5T5 
Scientific group of geography and geology of the 
Chad in the Logone and Shari river basins. 

1178. Urvoy, Yves F. Histoire de Vempire du 

Bornou. Paris, Larose, 1949. 166 p. 

(Memoires de l’lnstitut frangais d’Afrique 
noire, no. 7) DT515.U7 

Posthumously published monograph by a pro¬ 
found student of the past civilizations of the western 
Sudanic region. His many sources are named in 
footnote references, and he includes a 12-page index 
of peoples and tribes mentioned, many of them in the 
present boundaries of Chad. An earlier work by 
this scholar, Les Bassins du Niger, etude de geo - 
graphie physique et de paleogeographie (Paris, 
Larose, 1942, 139 p. illus.) is also an authoritative 
study of the past of Sudanic Africa. 


Congo (Brazzaville) 


1179. Balandier, Georges. Sociologie des Braz- 

zavilles noires. Paris, A. Colin, 1955. 
274 p. (Cahiers de la Fondation nationale 
des sciences politiques, 67) H31.F6, no. 67 

Analysis of central African urbanization in the two 
centers which have grown up around the small Eu¬ 
ropean capital city of the former A.E.F. (In this 
connection, see also Professor Balandier’s general 
work, no. 1099, and Soret, no. 1114.) 

A study of the capital itself, less technical in style but 
authoritatively informative was by Roger Frey, Brazza¬ 
ville, capitale de l’A.E.F. (Paris Encyclopedic mensuelle 
d’Outre-Mer, 1954. 155 p. illus., maps). 

1180. Ballif, Noel. Dancers of God. Translated 

from the French by James Cameron. Lon¬ 
don, Sidgwick & Jackson, 1955. 213 p. 

DT570.B33 

Account of an expedition of French ethnologists 
and archaeologists who went into the deep forest of 
the Central Congo, their purpose being to film and 
record the life and particularly the dances of the shy 
pygmy people. M. Ballif writes of these primitive 
nomad hunters who live in encampments of leaf 
shelters, and of other tribes encountered along the 


way. The “Ogowe-Congo Mission” brought back 
many articles of scientific value to the Musee de 
l’Homme as well as a large collection of recordings, 
and completed three documentary films. 

Another French expedition to look for and photograph 
the pygmies in the Congo and Central African Republic 
was recorded by Lucien Demesse: Quest for the Babingas; 
the World's Most Primitive Tribe (translated by E. Noel 
Bowman. London, Souvenir Press, 1958. 187 p. illus.). 

1181. Congo (Brazzaville) Un lustre d’action mu- 

nicipale; prefecture du Djoue, commune de 
Brazzaville de novembre 1956 a novembre 
1961. Brazzaville, 1961. 80 p. 

DT546.29.A54 

Typical of promotional publications now being is¬ 
sued by the new government. Another is La Repu- 
blique du Congo a trois ans (1961. 60 p. illus.). 

1182. Devauges, Roland. Le chomage a Brazzaville 

en 1957; etude sociologique. Paris, Office de 
la recherche scientifique et technique outre- 
mer [ORSTOM] 1958. 258 p. (Documents 
du Conseil superieur des recherches sociolo¬ 
giques outre-mer) DLC 


184 


Report on neighborhoods of Poto-Poto. Part 1, 
manpower, living conditions of unemployed, and sum¬ 
mary of their reactions; Part 2, “internal” description 
analyzing groups of unemployed, their means of sur¬ 
vival, their education; Part 3, possibilities of reclassing 
the unemployed. Based on questionnaires and inter¬ 
views. A conclusion summarizes results. 

1183. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Republique du Congo. Paris, 1960. 38 p. 
(Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 2732, 17 
dec. 1960). D411.F67, no. 2732 

Background study, See series note, no. 846. 

1184. Saintoyant, Jules F. L } affaire du Congo 

1905. Paris, Editions de l’Epi, 1960. 162 p. 

DT546.S3 

Reminiscences based on the writer’s manuscript 
report when as a young officer he accompanied Gen¬ 
eral Savorgnan de Brazza in a mission of inquiry into 
conditions in the French Congo. The mission had 


been prompted by a furore in Paris over stories of 
French atrocities. 

1185. Soret, Marcel. Les Kongo nord-occidentaux , 
avec la collaboration d’Andre Jacquot pour 
les questions de linguistique. Paris, Presses 
universitaires de France, 1959. 144 p. illus. 
(Monographies ethnologiques africaines) 

DT639.S6 

Includes bibliography. 

One of the French series of the International African 
Institute’s Ethnographical Survey of Africa, this study 
is by a specialist on demography and ethnology of 
equatorial Africa. The peoples surveyed in the mono¬ 
graph (following the pattern of the series, for which 
see no. 270) are on both banks of the Congo, chiefly in 
the former A.E.F. While the sources in the long 
bibliography (p. 117-139) include Belgian studies, 
those of the French regions predominate. M. Soret 
has published also several ethnic maps of A.E.F. 
(Brazzaville, Secretariat general de l’A.E.F., 1957). 


Gabon 


1186. Balandier, Georges, and J.-Cl. Pauvert. Les 

villages gabonais, aspects demographies, 
economiques, sociologiques, projects de mo¬ 
dernisation. Brazzaville, 1952. 86 p. 2 
plates, maps, diagrs. (Memoires de l’lnstitut 
d’etudes centrafricaines, no. 5) 

HN810.G3B3 

Socio-demographic analysis of the B:apounou and 
Fang villages of Gabon. The Institut d’Etudes Cen¬ 
trafricaines was established under the auspices of the 
Office de la Recherche Scientifique Outre-Mer (later 
ORSTOM) to undertake scientific studies of the hu¬ 
man and material resources of the territories of A.E.F. 

1187. Briault, Maurice. Sur les pistes de VA.E.F. 

Paris, Editions Alsatia, 1945. 285 p. 

DT546.1.B7 

H88. - Dans la foret du Gabon; etudes et 

scenes africaines. Paris, B. Grasset, 1930. 
195 p. DT546.B65 

By an anthropologist priest of long experience in 
Central Africa, these two charmingly written books 
give revealing pictures of the country and its inhabit¬ 
ants. 


1189. Charbonnier, Franqois, ed. Gabon , terre 

d 3 avenir. Paris, Encyclopedic d’outremer, 
1957. 151 p. illus. DT546.1.C5 

Includes bibliographies. 

An informative popular survey. Following each 
descriptive chapter (history, surface and vegetation, 
wild life, depopulation, etc.) there is given a well- 
chosen excerpt from one of the important source 
works. 

1190. Deschamps, Hubert J. Traditions or ales et 

archives au Gabon; contribution a l’ethno- 
histoire. Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1962. 
172 p. illus. (L’Homme d’outre-mer. 
Nouv. ser. no. 6) DT546.142.D4 

Systematic review of the ethno-history of the various 
peoples and groups of Gabon according to the oral 
traditions given the author by informants of each tribe. 
Insofar as possible the factors explained are name and 
linguistic relationships, origins, slavery and commerce, 
crafts, social institutions (a very sketchy outline), re¬ 
ligion and magic. Other features are mentioned where 
and as available. This survey fills 140 pages; then a 
second part (p. 143-155) contains a listing of archives. 
An appendix (p. 161-167) is a biobibliography of the 


185 




grand old man of Gabonese literature, the Abbe 
Raponda-Walker (his books, papers in the vernacular, 
articles). 

1191. France. Direction de la documentation. 

La Republique gabonaise. Paris, 1961. 
56 p. (Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 
2795, 10 juillet 1961) D411.F67, no. 2795 

Background survey in this official documentation 
series. A popular presentation for American readers 
is offered in an illustrated brochure put out by the 
French Embassy in New York: The Gabonese Re¬ 
public: Hour of Independence (1961. 31 p. illus.). 

1192. Gabon. Chambre de commerce, d’agriculture, 

de l’industrie et des mines. Flash on Gabon. 
Libreville, 1962. 50 p. illus. DLC-AFR 
Informative booklet picturing Gabon’s policy and 
economy, issued in an English edition. 

1193. Gabon. Direction de Pinformation. Realites 

gabonaises. Paris, Diloutremer, 1960. 
188 p. fig. DLC 

Brochure explaining present economic and social 
aspects and administrative organization. 

1194. “Le Gabon devient Pun des grands producteurs 

mondiaux de manganese.” Europe France 
outremer, v. 40, oct. 1962: 17-59. 

JV1801.E65, v.40 
This issue of the Paris review is devoted in major 
part to articles describing the economic advance of 
Gabon, which, in addition to its great wealth in forest 
products, is now developing important mineral re¬ 
sources. 

1195. Howe, Russell W. Theirs the darkness. 

London, H. Jenkins, 1956. 190 p. illus. 

DT546.1.H6 

Narrative of a journalist who traveled into the in¬ 
terior of Gabon, the “forest of eternal twilight,” in 
which he found an old-style French colony, the Af¬ 
ricans “pleasantly lazy and untouched by ambition.” 
He varied his accounts of native fetishist villages and 
ways with admiring comment on the French colonials, 
officials, priests, traders, prospectors, etc., who coped 
effectively with difficult circumstances. He went to 
Dr. Schweitzer’s hospital at Lambarene, of which he 
gave a critical account as “deliberately old-fashioned,” 
even dirty. An interesting feature is a description of 
the “Christ M’Bouti,” an African sect which parodies 
the Catholic faith. For Mr. Howe’s later work, see 
no. 486. 


1196. Lasserre, Guy. Libreville , la ville et sa region 

{Gabon, A.E.F.); etude de geographic hu- 
maine. Paris, A. Colin, 1958. 346 p. illus., 
maps, diagr., tables. (Cahiers de la Fonda- 
tion nationale des sciences politiques, 98) 

H31.F6, no. 98 

Includes bibliography. 

This valuable study is in three parts. First, “Pre¬ 
sentation de Libreville,” with geographical description 
of the area, the European city, and African villages, 
and an historical account of the city’s growth. The 
second part is on economic activities—communications 
and links with the surrounding regions and their rural 
societies, Libreville as the capital and port, and the 
exploitation of the forests and wood industries. Last 
are chapters on the European and African populations 
and life of Libreville and culture contacts therein. 

1197. “Le Livre d’or d’Afrique: Le Gabon.” Afri- 

que, revue mensuelle , no. 15, aout 1962: 
10-55. DLC 

Feature section on Gabon, which the editors call a 
“modem Eldorado” because of its great potential 
wealth in tropical woods, the newly discovered oil, 
and mineral deposits. Articles cover these aspects, 
also sketch ethnology, history, vital statistics, com¬ 
munications, and industrialization. 

1198. Schweitzer, Albert. On the edge of the 

primeval forest, and More from the primeval 
forest; experiences and observations of a 
doctor in equatorial Africa. New York, Mac¬ 
millan, 1948. 222 p. BV3625.G3S363 

1199. - African notebook; tr. by Mrs. C. E. B. 

Russell. New York, Holt, 1939. 144 p. 

DT546.1.S42 

1200. - The animal world of Albert Schwei¬ 

tzer; jungle insights into reverence for life, tr. 
and ed. with an introduction by Charles R. 
Joy. Boston, Beacon Press, 1950. 207 p. 

QL50.S367 

One of the acknowledged great thinkers of the 
modern world, Dr. Schweitzer left his post as professor 
of theology in the University of Strasbourg to go in 
1913 as a missionary doctor to the forests of Gabon, 
where he founded a hospital with the proceeds of his 
celebrated organ recitals and his authoritative book on 
Johann Sebastian Bach. His first narrative of his 
hospital and the primitive people to whom he gave his 
dedicated work was published in 1921 (English edi¬ 
tion, London, 1922). The second, of which the first 


186 




English edition was called Forest Hospital at Lam- 
barene, came in 1931; these two are published in the 
1948 single edition. Like the third, African Notebook , 
they are classics of tropical Africa: deeply understand¬ 
ing and tender interpretation through the eyes of a 
scientist, philosopher, and lover of mankind. Also a 
lover of animals, as is shown in the third title, a 
compilation of extracts from Dr. Schweitzer’s books 
in which animals are mentioned. 

It is worth noting that Dr. Schweitzer does not subscribe 
to the view that the white man by exploitation has brought 
about disaster to the native. When the Africans commented 
to him on European misrule, his answer was that without 
the help of the white man, they would all be dead, from 
their senseless intertribal wars, their superstition and diseases. 

Of the many books on Dr. Schweitzer that have appeared 
of recent years, we mention one only, a matter-of-fact story by 
Frederick Franck, Days with Albert Schweitzer: A Lam- 
barene Landscape (New York, Holt, 1959. 178 p.). The 

writer, a dentist and artist (see his general picture of Africa, 
no. 33), had gone under MEDICO sponsorship to spend 
some months working at the Lambarene Hospital, and his 
straightforward account is illustrated with his own line 
drawings. 

1201. Trilles, H. Les pygmees de la foret equa- 
toriale. Paris, Bloud & Gay, 1932. 530 p. 
(Anthropos; collection internationale de 
monographic ethnologiques . . . t. 3, fasc. 4) 

GN1.A72, t.3 

The text of a course given at the Institut Catholique 
de Paris by the missionary anthropologist, Father 
Trilles. This is one of the largest and most renowned 


studies of the Negrillos among whom the author had 
worked in Gabon. 

1202. Walker, Andre Raponda. Notes d’histoire 

du Gabon; avec une introduction, des cartes 
et des notes de Marcel Soret. Montpellier, 
Impr. Charite, 1960. 158 p. illus. (Me- 

moires de Institut d’fitudes Centrafricaines, 
Brazzaville, no. 9) DT546.15.W3 

The author, “the venerable abbe Walker, descendant 
of the Mpongwe kings of Gabon,” has made valuable 
contributions to the collection of oral tradition in 
Gabon. This book is reviewed in Africa , v. 31, April 
1961, p. 192-193. 

1203. - and Roger Sillans. Les plantes utiles 

du Gabon. Paris, Lechevalier, 1961. 614 p. 
illus., plates, map. (Collection “Encyclo¬ 
pedic biologique,” 56) DLG 

Monumental inventory comprising all plants of the 
rich forests of Gabon, over 8,000 species, with vernac¬ 
ular names as well as full scientific descriptions, bibliog¬ 
raphy, tables, and indexes. 

The first Memoire published by the Institut d’fitudes 
Centrafricaines was on this subject, Les Legumineuses du 
Gabon, by Fr. Pellegrin (Brazzaville, 1948. 284 p.). 

1204. - Rites et croyances des peuples du 

Gabon , essai sur les pratiques religieuses 
d’autrefois et d’aujourd’hui. Paris, Presence 
africaine, 1962. 379 p. illus. (Enqueteset 
etudes.) DLG 


692 - 756—63 - 13 


187 





MALAGASY REPUBLIC 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1205. Duignan, Peter. Madagascar (the Mala¬ 

gasy Republic), a list of materials in the Af¬ 
rican collections of Stanford University and 
the Hoover Institution on War, Revolution, 
and Peace. Stanford, Calif., Hoover Institu¬ 
tion on War, Revolution and Peace, Stanford 
University, 1962. 25 p. (Its Bibliographic 
series, 9) Z3701.D8 

Despite its limitation to works in the Stanford 
University libraries, this provides a helpful guide to 
the significant literature on Madagascar, including 
French and Malagasy government documents and 
serials. 

1206. Grandidier, Guillaume. Bibliographie de 

Madagascar. Paris, Comite de Madagascar, 
etc. 1906-57. 3 v. Z3701.G85 

The first comprehensive listing in Volume 1 of 
this bibliography by a French specialist on Madagas¬ 
car covered the literature from the earliest Portuguese 
records in 1500 to 1904. It is in two parts, the first 
alphabetical by author, the second of anonymous works 
and periodicals. Volume 2, issued as a volume of 
the Bibliographie generate des colonies frangaises by 
G. Grandidier and E. Joucla, was published in 1935 
by the Societe d’Editions Geographiques, Maritimes 
et Coloniales and covered writings from 1904-33. A 
third volume, published in 1957 by the Institut de 
Recherche Scientifique de Madagascar and covering 
writings from 1934-55, opens with a tribute to the 
author, who died in 1956. Volume 2 is arranged like 
Volume 1, but in Volume 3 anonyms and authors’ 
names are together in alphabetical arrangement. All 
have author and subject indexes, referring to the con¬ 
secutively numbered references, which amount in the 3 
volumes to 23,003 items. 


GENERAL 

(including Anthropology, History, and Political 
Development) 

1207. Academie Malgache, Tananarive. MSmoires. 

fasc. 1+ 1926+ Tananarive, G. Pitot de 

la Beaujardiere. irregular. DT469.M21A4 
The monographic Memoires series of the Academie 
deal variously with history, sociology, anthropology, 
archeology, natural sciences, and other disciplines re¬ 
lating to Madagascar. The inside cover pages of each 
number carry the full list of titles in the series. A 
typical contribution is Fasc. no. 40, by Louis Michel, 
Moeurs et coutumes des Bara (1957. 192 p.). 

Another series being published by the Academie since 
1939 is Collection de documents concernant Madagascar et 
les pays voisins, the first volume of which was edited by 
M. Raymond Decary. 

1208. Andriamanjato, Richard. Le tsiny et le tody 

dans la pensee malgache. Paris, Presence 
africaine, 1957. 100 p. (Collection Pre¬ 
sence africaine) GN490.A5 

Ethnological monograph about two concepts of 
Malagasy thought which are related to inherited cus¬ 
toms and responsibility. “Tsiny” the author defines 
as something like a sense of blame, exterieur and more 
particularly interior, resulting from violation of one 
of the innumerable rules of traditional society. 
“Tody” he explains as a word used with the adjective 
“good,” to signify arrival, presumably through dangers, 
and with divine aid. 

1209. Annuaire national de la Republique malgache 

1961-62. Tananarive, Paris, Inf-Europe, 
1962. 260 p. illus., maps. 

Yearbook including official organization, political 
history, economic and touristic registers. 

Perhaps better known is the time-honored commercial di¬ 
rectory, Annuaire Noria Ocean Indien: Madagascar, la 
Reunion, Maurice, guide economique (Paris, Maisonneuve et 
Larose. 1962 ed., 364 p. illus., maps, plans). 


188 


1210. Boiteau, Pierre. Contribution a I’histoire de 

la Nation malgache. Paris, Editions sociales, 
1958. 431 p. maps. (La Culture et les 
hommes) DT469.M27B6 

A history in which the focus, in the precolonial 
period, under French rule, and in the struggle for in¬ 
dependence, is on the Malagasy rather than the Euro¬ 
pean, from a Marxist viewpoint. The author, a 
scientist and former director of the Botanical and 
Zoological Park of Tananarive, expressed the hope 
that his book might be read by the people of the 
Malagasy Republic themselves. 

1211. Boudry, Robert. Jean Joseph Rabearivelo 

et la mort. Paris, Presence africaine, 1958. 
84 p. PQ3989.R23Z6 

Pamphlet biography of a Malagasy poet and na¬ 
tionalist leader of the thirties who committed suicide 
in 1937. 

1212. Condominas, Georges. Fokon’olona et col- 

lectivites rurales en Imerina. Paris, Berger- 
Levrault, 1961. 234 p. (L’Homme d’outre- 
mer. Nouv. ser. no. 4) DT469.M37T34 

Prepared under the auspices of ORSTOM (Office 
de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre- 
Mer). The ancient system of the clan community 
in the Malagasy villages had been largely broken up 
by the Merina despotism of the late 18th and 19th 
centuries, and was being revived by the French au¬ 
thorities as cooperatives (CAR, Collectivites autoch- 
tones rurales, and CRAM, Communautes rurales 
autochtones modemisees), following the Constitution 
of 1946 and the loi-cadre of 1957. M. Condominas 
had been commissioned by Governor Deschamps to 
make this intensive sociological study in 1955. Ap¬ 
proximately half the text is devoted to background 
history, the second half to present-day Merina society. 
The work is basic for the renovation of local life now 
being undertaken by the Republic. 

1213. Decary, Raymond. Moeurs et coutumes des 

Malgaches. Paris, Payot, 1951. 280 p. illus. 
(Collection de documents et de temoignages 
pour servir a l’histoire de notre temps) 

DT469.M26D33 

M. Decary, former chief colonial administrator in 
Madagascar, is an authority on history, geography, 
and anthropology of the country. In this book he 
explained many aspects of Malagasy ways and man¬ 
ners, illustrating them with his own drawings. His 
first chapter recited names and estimated numbers 


and possible origins of the many clans—he uses this 
term rather than tribes. Several chapters follow de¬ 
scribing family and social life of the Malagasy, their 
material culture, methods of work, industry and trade, 
games and amusements, customary law. Then come 
accounts of the omnipresent sorcery and witch doctor 
medicine, of religious ideas, and the prominent cult 
of the dead. The last chapter touched on social “evo¬ 
lution” in the half-century of European influence. 
Among other works by M. Decary are: 

L’Androy (Extreme sud de Madagascar) Essai de 
monographie regionale. Paris, Societe d’editions 
geographiques, maritimes et coloniales, 1930-1933. 
2 v. 

A comprehensive study of the physical and human 
geography, history, and civilization of the extreme 
south of the island, where live the most primitive 
of the cattle-raising tribes, the last to come under 
French control. 

La Faune malgache: son rdle dans les croyances et les 
usages indigenes. Paris, Payot, 1950. 236 p. illus. 

(Bibliotheque scientifique). 

An interesting combination of natural history and 
folklore. 

L’habitat a Madagascar. Pau, Impr. Marrimpouey 
jeune, 1958. 80 p. illus. 

A study of Malagasy house structure. 

L’tle Nosy Be de Madagascar; histoire d’une colonisa¬ 
tion. Paris, Editions maritimes et d’outre-mer, 1960. 
225 p. 

A chapter in the early history of French occupation, 
written largely from study of unpublished documents 
in the archives of Madagascar and Paris. 

1214. Deschamps, Hubert J. Les Antaisaka. Ta¬ 

nanarive, Pilot de la Beaujardiere, 1936. 
220 p. illus., maps. GN661.M2D4 

Technical ethnological study of the Antaisaka, the 
most numerous people of the southeast coast of Mada¬ 
gascar, analyzing human geography, rites and customs, 
and history of this tribe of primitive fishers, hunters, 
and rice farmers. The writer, who had already been 
a colonial administrator in Madagascar for ten years 
(later governor), presented this book as a thesis for the 
degree of docteur es lettres at the Ecole Nationale de 
la France d’Outre-Mer (since 1959 Institut des Hautes 
Etudes d’Outre-Mer), where he now teaches the his¬ 
tory and sociology of Madagascar. 

1215. - Histoire de Madagascar. Paris, Berger- 

Levrault, 1960. 348 p. illus. (Mondes 

d’outre-mer) DT469.M27D4 

Up-to-date and authoritative history from the ob¬ 
scure origins of the island to the immediate present of 
the Malagasy Republic. 


189 



1216. - Les pirates & Madagascar au XVII e et 

XVIIl e siecles. Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1949. 
244 p. (Histoires d’outre-mer, 1) 

DT469.M31D48 

Interesting account of one of the picturesque epi¬ 
sodes in the history of Madagascar, the pirate settle¬ 
ments of the 17th and 18th centuries. M. Deschamps 
included some account of the activities and fates of the 
pirates beyond the island; a startling illustration, taken 
like the other plates from old engravings, appears as 
one opens the book in the middle, “le capitaine Kid” 
hanging in chains on the shore of the Thames. 

Among the more recent of Professor Deschamps’ many 
writings on Madagascar is Les Migrations intirieures passees 
et prisentes a Madagascar (Paris, Berger-Levrault, 1959. 
278 p.). 

1217. Faublee, Jacques. La cohesion des societes 

bar a. Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 
1954. 158 p. DT469.M264F3 

1218. - Les esprits de la vie a Madagascar. 

Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1954. 
139 p. 4BL/466 

These two monographs were presented as socio- 
anthropological papers at the Institut d’Ethnologie in 
Paris. This author’s earlier resume of Ethnographic de 
Madagascar (Paris, La Nouvelle Edition, 1946,169 p.) 
was published in the Catholic series of introductory 
books, La France d’outre-mer. The writer had done 
fieldwork among the Bara of Madagascar, and offered 
a collection of Recits bara with text in the Bara lan¬ 
guage and French translation as his thesis at the 
Institut d’Ethnologie in Paris in 1947. 

1219. France. Ambassade. New York. Service de 

la presse et d’information. The Comoro 
islands. New York, 1962. 15 p. illus. 

(part col.) DLC-AFR 

Pictures and basic description of these islands which 
are governed as a dependency of Madagascar. 

1220. France. Direction de la documentation. Les 

investissements et les problemes de developpe- 
ment dans Veconomie de la Republique mal- 
gache. Paris, 1960. 66 p. (Notes et etudes 
documentaires, no. 2707, 13 oct. 1960) 

D411.F67, no. 2707 

1221. - La Republique malgache. Paris, 1960. 

61 p. (Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 
2737, 23 dec. 1960). D411 .F67, no. 2737 

Background surveys. See general note on series, no. 
846. 


1222. Frere, Suzanne. Madagascar, panorama de 

VAndroy. Paris, Editions Aframpe, 1958. 
200 p. illus. DT469.M37A55 

In spite of its handsome appearance, with large, 
clear type, fine plates including several in color, easy 
untechnical style, this work is a serious socio-economic 
study of the farthest south region of Madagascar and 
its peoples. It includes many tabulated vital statistics. 

1223. Gallieni, Joseph S. Gallieni pacificateur; 

ecrits coloniaux de Gallieni, choix de textes 
et notes, par Hubert Deschamps et Paul Chau- 
vet. Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 
1949. 379 p. DC342.8.G2A3 

Reports, papers, and speeches of the great general 
whose career in subduing, reconciling, and adminis¬ 
tering France’s colonial empire included Senegal and 
Sudan (1876-88), Tonkin (1892-96), and most 
notably, Madagascar (1896-1905). The material on 
Madagascar takes up more than half the text (p. 169— 
373). 

A good account of Gallieni’s work in Madagascar is that 
of General Jean Charbonneau, Gallieni a Madagascar (Paris, 
Nouvelles Editions latines, 1950. 189 p. Biblioth&que de 

l’Union frangaise), based on documents and unpublished 
material gathered by Gallieni’s daughter-in-law. 

1224. Grandidier, Alfred, ed. Collection des ou- 

vrages anciens concernant Madagascar, edite 
par Alfred et Guillaume Grandidier. Paris, 
Comite de Madagascar, 1903-20. 9 v. 

DT469.M22G7 

1225. - Histoire physique, naturelle et poli¬ 

tique de Madagascar, par Alfred Grandidier 
[and others] Paris, Impr. nationale, 1875 
[v. 39, 1955] QH195.M2G7 

Great names connected with the study of Madagas¬ 
car are those of the Grandidiers, pere et fils. Alfred 
Grandidier, geographer and traveler, pioneered in 
explorations and mapping in the center and south of 
the Grand Island in 1865-70, read its ancient history, 
and studied its people. The monumental series of 
the Histoire physique, carried on for many years after 
his death in 1921 with the cooperation of the leading 
natural scientists, was edited with the aid of his son, 
Guillaume. The first volume, Histoire de la geo¬ 
graphic (1875-1892, 1 v. of text, 2 v. of maps) was 
by Alfred; Volume 4, Ethnographie, was by Alfred 
and Guillaume (2 v. in 1908, v. 3 in 1917, v. 4, by 
Guillaume, in 1928). Volume 5, Histoire politique et 
coloniale, was by Guillaume. The Collection des 
ouvrages anciens, in the editing of which father and 


190 






son collaborated, brought together texts of European 
travelers relative to Madagascar from 1500 to 1800. 

1226. Grandidier, Guillaume. Le Myre de Vilers, 

Duchesne, Gallieni; quarante annees de l’his- 
toire de Madagascar, 1880-1920. Paris, 
Societe d’editions geographiques, maritimes 
et coloniales, 1923. 252 p. DG342.8.L4G7 
Authoritative account of the French conquest, paci¬ 
fication, and organization of Madagascar. 

This same subject was treated in more popular style by 
two prominent travel writers and interpreters of the French 
colonial empire, the brothers Marius and Ary Leblond: 
Madagascar, creation franqaise (Paris, Plon, 1934). Their 
literary essay in ethnography, La Grande lie de Madagascar: 
les regions et les races, les moeurs, les fetes, la poesie, l’art 
du boeuf et du riz, les ressources naturelles, was published first 
in 1907; a new edition was brought out in 1946 (Paris, Edi¬ 
tions de Flore. 270 p. Collection “Ici, l’empire.”). An¬ 
other notable work on Madagascar of the interwar period 
was by the French literary man Maurice Martin du Gard: 
Voyage de Madagascar, suivi de Une escale h la Reunion 
et Visite volante a. Maurice (Paris, Flammarion, 1934. 

281 p.). 

1227. Hardyman, J. T. Madagascar on the move. 

London, Livingstone Press, 1950. 224 p. 

BV3625.M2H26 

Mr. Hardyman, who was born in Madagascar and 
had worked there as a Protestant missionary for many 
years, was among the few who wrote in English about 
the revolt of 1947-48. This book is primarily con¬ 
cerned with the work of the church in the Madagas¬ 
car mission field, but includes background description 
of Malagasy life and social structure and some account 
of the rebellion and its effects, as well as a plea for 
economic and spiritual aid. 

1228. Howe, Sonia E. The drama of Madagascar. 

London, Methuen, 1938. 359 p. 

DT469.M2H6 1938 
The Russian-born writer was a student of French 
colonial history and biographer of Lyautey. Her 
scholarly account of Madagascar from the 18th cen¬ 
tury to the conclusion of its pacification by Gallieni is 
less a historical narrative than a study of the interrela¬ 
tions between Europe and the Great Island. She gave 
much attention to Anglo-French diplomacy in the sec¬ 
ond half of the 19th century when rivalry was intense 
between the British missionaries and the French for 
influence at the Hova court; her admiration for the 
work and policy of Gallieni was intense—the right 
man in the right place. The book was published first 
in French and honored by the Academie Frangaise. 


1229. Kent, Raymond K. From Madagascar to the 

Malagasy Republic. New York, Praeger, 
1962. 182 p. (Books that matter) 

DT469.M34K4 

This is the only comprehensive modem study of 
Madagascar in the English language, and a work for 
which students must be profoundly grateful. Mr. 
Kent considers Madagascar “an Africa in miniature, 
with a similar history and similar problems.” He 
outlines geography and demography, then gives in 
short “profiles” the history, of the various racial 
groups and their kingdoms, culminating in the 19th 
century with the highly organized Merina state, whose 
sway over much of the island extended from its abso¬ 
lute monarchy down to its characterising village com¬ 
munal organization, the fokon’olona. Following the 
French conquest in the 1880’s, the colonial period 
is examined from the notable administration of the 
great General Gallieni through the two world wars, 
the rise of nationalism, and the revolt of 1947. The 
third section, “Madagascar and France: The New 
Phase—1948-60,” records the progress of the country 
to independent status, with economic problems not 
completely solved by the ten-year plan subsidized by 
FIDES in 1949. In his general conclusions the author 
comments on the virtues of the decentralized system 
which differentiates the Malagasy Republic from most 
of the other new African states, and on the beneficial 
influence the country has come to exert on the other 
French-speaking states. In Mr. Kent’s notes on 
sources (p. 160-180), much of the useful literature 
on Madagascar is cited. 

1230. Linton, Ralph. The Tanala, a hill tribe of 

Madagascar. Chicago, Field Museum of 
Natural History, 1933. 334 p. (Publication 
317. Anthropological series, v. 22) 

GN661.M2L5 

Ethnological survey by a prominent American an¬ 
thropologist, a specialist in Malayan cultures, who 
had been a member of a Marshall Field Expedition 
to Madagascar in 1926. His monograph is a study 
of an Eastern Madagascar mountain tribe whose name 
means “People of the Forest,” and whose archaic cul¬ 
ture offers interesting evidences of the interaction of 
Malayan and African influences. 

1231. Malagasy Republic. Service de l’informa- 

tion. Madagascar. [Tananarive?] unpaged, 
illus. 32 cm. DLG 

The first public relations offering of the new Gov¬ 
ernment to reach the Library of Congress, this is a 


191 


handsome brochure with articles by leading authori¬ 
ties, Decary, Faublee, etc. 

The Service de l’lnformation publishes also the lavishly 
illustrated quarterly magazine of general coverage. Revue de 
Madagascar, begun in 1933 by the Service de l’lnformation 
Generate of the French Administration. 

1232. Mannoni, Dominique O. Prospero and Cali¬ 

ban; the psychology of colonization. Trans¬ 
lated by Pamela Powesland. New York, 

Praeger, 1956. 218 p. (Books that matter) 

DT469.M264M313 

Bibliography: p. 210-214. 

In this book, the French original of which appeared 
in 1950 under the title Psychologie de la colonisation, 
the writer studied the Malagasy from the viewpoint 
of the psychoanalyst. Using the Prospero-Caliban 
and Crusoe-Man Friday relationships as symbols, M. 
Mannoni argued that the primitive emerging from 
the security of the old static, ancestor-worshipping 
society, attaches himself as a dependent to the Euro¬ 
pean; the latter, like Prospero, finds his own “inferi¬ 
ority complex” reassured by the colonial situation. 
The phases of this dependence as exemplified in Mala¬ 
gasy society are interestingly explored, as well as the 
effect of paternal authority on the French colonists. 
The writer explained the revolution of 1947-48 as 
ultimately due to the threat of abandonment which the 
Malagasy felt in the postwar gestures toward fuller 
self-government initiated in the French Union. M. 
Mannoni’s study has been widely commented on in 
subsequent French works regarding colonialism in gen¬ 
eral and Madagascar in particular. 

1233. Le Peuple malgache; monographies ethnolo- 

giques, dirigees par Hubert Deschamps. 

Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1959 + 

DLG 

No. 1 Les Malgaches du sud-est; Antemoro, Antesaika, 
Antambajoaka, peuples de Farafangana (Antefasi, Zafisoro, 
Sahavoai, Sahafatra), par Hubert Deschamps et Suzanne 
Vianes. 118 p. 

The first volume of a new series complementary 
to the Monographies ethnologiques africaines of the 
International African Institute. It is written more 
in essay style than the Ethnographic Survey volumes, 
but covers the same ground. Sketch maps show the 
distribution and migrations of peoples in southeastern 
Madagascar. 

1234. Pidoux, Edmond. Madagascar, maitre d. son 

bord. Lausanne, Editions du Soc, 1962. 
243 p. illus. 


Not available for examination. Announced in 
Schweitzer Buck, Nov. 1962. 

1235. Prosperi, Franco. Vanished continent; an 

Italian expedition to the Comoro Islands. 
Translated by David Moore. London, 
Hutchinson, 1957. 232 p. illus. QL5.S653 

Translation of Gran Comoro. 

Until 1946 the Comoro Archipelago was attached 
to the Government General of Madagascar. Since 
that time it has been an overseas department of 
France. This account of an Italian zoological expedi¬ 
tion is the only full-length work available in English 
regarding the Comoro islands. In most French studies 
it is treated conjointly with Madagascar and Reunion. 

1236. Rabemananjara, Jacques. Nationalisme et 

problemes malgaches. Paris, Presence afri- 
caine, 1959. 219 p. DT469.M26R3 

The author, a distinguished French-educated poet 
and writer, was one of the three Malagasy elected as 
Deputies to the French Assembly after promulgation 
of the 1946 Constitution, and a founder of the 
Mouvement Democratique de la Renovation Mal¬ 
gache which sparked the rebellion of 1947. Exiled 
to France, M. Rabemananjara worked with Alioune 
Diop on Presence africaine. In 1960, after inde¬ 
pendence, he returned to Madagascar and was named 
Minister of State for the National Economy. In this 
volume he discusses his country and its aims, political, 
cultural, and religious—he is a devout Catholic. A 
long final section, “Rythmes malgaches: chants et 
danses folkloriques,” contains his poems used in radio 
programs. M. Rabemananjara’s short poems appear 
in most anthologies of African literature. Of his 
longer works, the poetic drama, Boutriers de Vaurore, 
(Boatmen of the Dawn), a tragedy of Malagasy his¬ 
tory, is perhaps the best known (published by Presence 
africaine, Paris, 1957. 231 p.). 

1237. Rabemananjara, Raymond W. Madagascar 

sous la Renovation malgache. Paris, Tana¬ 
narive, 1953. 211 p. DT469.M34R3 

Account of the MDRM and its platform, which is 
set forth as an expression of the ideals of the French 
Union, by the brother of Jacques Rabemananjara. It 
is propaganda writing, as is also an earlier book by 
this author, Madagascar: histoire de la nation mal¬ 
gache (Paris, P. Lachaud, 1952. 237 p. illus.). 

The Malagasy leaders of the rebellion of 1947-48 were 
represented in their trial by the lawyer Pierre Stibbe. His 
brochure, Justice pour les Malgaches (Paris, Editions du 
Seuil, 1954. 142 p. Coll. Esprit), is sympathetic with 

nationalist aims. 


192 





1238. Robequain, Charles. Madagascar et les 

bases disperses de VUnion frangaise; Co¬ 
mores, Reunion, Antilles et Guyane, Terres 
Oceaniennes, Cote des Somalis, Saint-Pierre 
et Miquelon, lies Australes, Terre Adelie. 
Paris, Presses universitaires de France, 1958. 
586 p. illus. (Pays d’outre-mer; colonies, 
empires, pays autonomes, 4. ser.; Geographie 
de l’Union frangaise, 3) DT469.M28R6 

Comprehensive work in an authoritative series of 
physical and economic geographies. 

1239. Ruud, Jorgen. Taboo; a study of the Mala¬ 

gasy fady. Oslo, Oslo University Press, 1959. 
313 p. illus., map. GN494.R85 

London edition, G. Allen & Unwin, 1960, has subtitle: 
“A Study of Malagasy Customs and Beliefs.” 

Reviewed in Africa, April 1961. 

1240. Sibree, James. Fifty years in Madagascar; 

personal experiences of mission life and 
work. London, G. Allen & Unwin, 1924. 
359 p. BV3625.M2S5 

Writing in English on Madagascar was for long 
almost the exclusive province of the Protestant mis¬ 
sionaries. British interest in the island began with 
the missions of the London Missionary Society in 
1820, which had remarkable success in the early years 
and a spectacular period of martyrdom during the per¬ 
secutions of Queen Ranavalona from 1835 to 1861. 
Mr. Sibree himself went out to Madagascar in 1863, 
after the country had been opened again to Christians, 
with the assignment of building four “Martyr Memorial 
Churches,” for which the money had been raised in 
England through the efforts of the pioneer missionary, 
the Rev. William Ellis, whose History of Madagascar 
(1838) and Three Visits to Madagascar (1859) intro¬ 
duced the country to the English public. Mr. Sibree 
devoted his life to the Madagascar mission field, and 
wrote a number of books on the history and natural 
history of the island in the 1890’s. This narrative, 
originally planned to be called “Lights and Shadows 
on Church Life in Madagascar,” pictures the country 
from a churchman’s viewpoint over fifty years. 

One of the few exceptions in English writing to the virtual 
monopoly of the missionaries regarding Madagascar during 
its first century of contact with the West was the thorough 
two-volume work of Captain Samuel Pasfield Oliver, Mada¬ 
gascar: An Historical and Descriptive Account of the Island 
and Its Former Dependencies (London, Macmillan, 1886. 
569, 562 p.). It included history, topography, natural his¬ 
tory, economy, administration, a long bibliography of writings 
in French and English from the earliest travels to con¬ 


temporary documents (v. 2, p. 223-259), and a full account 
of the Franco-Malagasy war of 1885 by which the French took 
over the island in 1886. 

A French missionary history explaining the Catholic side of 
Christian effort in Madagascar is by R. P. Pierre Lhande: 
Madagascar (Paris, Plon, 1932, 265 p.). 

1241. Tananarive, Malagasy Republic. Institut 

de recherche scientifique de la Republique 
malgache. Memoires. Serie C. Sciences 
humaines. t. 1+ 1952+ [Paris] 

AS657.T3 

This series of Memoires of the prominent Institute 
(formerly Institut Scientifique de Madagascar) whose 
other series are concerned with natural sciences, began 
with a careful statistical study of the capital city, Tana¬ 
narive, etude d’economie urbaine, by H. Fournier (t. 
1, fasc. 1, 1952, p. 29-157. illus.). 

1242. Thiout, Michel. Madagascar et Fame mal¬ 

gache. Paris, Horizons de France, 1961. 
157 p. illus. (Visages du monde) 

DT469.M26T5 

A popular study of Madagascar, published after 
independence and prefaced by the President Philibert 
Tsiranana. Handsomely illustrated, sympathetic, and 
charmingly written, the work presents the island in 
the favorable light of public relations. 

Another attractive new account is a little book in the Col¬ 
lections Microcosme, Madagascar, by Solange Thierry (Paris, 
Editions du Seuil, 1961. 189 p. illus. Petit plan&te, 28). 

ECONOMICS 

1243. Behier, Jean. Contribution a la mineralogie de 

Madagascar. Tananarive, Impr. officielle, 

1960. 78 p. (Annales geologiques de Mada¬ 
gascar, fasc., no. 29) QE330.A3, fasc. 29 

1244. Besairie, Henri. Les ressources miner ales de 

Madagascar. Tananarive, Impr. nationale, 

1961. 116 p. (Annales geologiques de 
Madagascar, fasc., no. 30) 

QE330.A3, fasc. 30 

1245. Chevalier, Louis. Madagascar; populations 

et ressources. Paris, Presses universitaires de 
France, 1952. 212 p. maps, tables (Institut 
national d’etudes demographiques. Travaux 
et documents, cahier n° 15) HB3668.M3G45 
Bibliography: p. 208-212. 

Much-quoted study by a population expert who had 
gone to Madagascar with a mission sent to consider 
the island as a possible place for settlement of European 
refugees. Use was made of local records of adminis- 


193 


trative districts and other unpublished sources in a 
careful and comprehensive assessment of demographic 
factors, resources, and agricultural techniques and 
limitations. Although still underpopulated, Madagas¬ 
car had started a vigorous upswing in vital statistics, 
due to scientific medical advances—particularly spray¬ 
ing with DDT for malarial mosquito control and con¬ 
sequent reduction of mortality figures. Native agri¬ 
culture had been notoriously wasteful of soil, and 
large-scale provision of capital equipment and basic 
public services were essential if an equilibrium was to 
be maintained between population and resources. Mr. 
Chevalier advised against immigration of European 
peasant settlers, but recommended intensified efforts 
in the modernization and development plan and con¬ 
trolled immigration of technical agriculturalists. This 
study is abstracted in the Geographical Review, v. 43, 
October 1953, p. 566-567. 

1246. Gasse, Victor. Le regime fonder a Madagas¬ 

car et en Afrique. Paris, Librairie autonome, 
1959. 351 p. DLC 

Study of land usage. Not yet available for exami¬ 
nation. 

1247. Gendarme, Rene. L’economic de Madagascar; 

diagnostic et perspectives de developpement. 
Paris, Editions Cujas, 1960. 209 p. (Etudes 
malgaches, 1) HG547.M2G4 

Survey by a professor of the Institut des Hautes 
Etudes de Tananarive, providing a scientific basis for 
the work of the Centre d’Etudes Economiques which 
is planning for the economic development of the new 
Republic. The work, fortified with many statistical 


tables and charts, presents first the Malagasy position 
in world economy, features of underdevelopment, and 
fundamental handicaps, including those of sociocul¬ 
tural and political nature. The second part analyzes 
plans for development along all lines. 

1248. Madagascar a travers ses provinces: aspect geo- 

graphique, historique, touristique, economi- 
que et administratif du territoire. Paris, 
Alepee, 1954. 402 p. illus. (Les Docu¬ 
ments de France) DT469.M28M2 

Systematic survey from official sources of geography, 
history, economy, and administration of the five prov¬ 
inces, Tananarive, Fianarantsoa, Tamatave, Majunga, 
and Tulear. 

A more technical study in physical, human, and economic 
geography was written as a text for advanced study by a 
professor at the University of Marseilles, Hildebert Isnard: 
Madagascar (Paris, Colin, 1955. 215 p. illus. Collection 

Armand Colin, no. 301. Section de geographie). The last 
part of the text considered Madagascar as a colony for French 
settlement and economic development. 

1249. Minelle, Jean. U agriculture a Madagascar; 

geographie, climatologie, geologie, conditions 
d’exploitation des sols, botanique malgache, 
productions agricoles, colonisation et paysan- 
nat autochtone, possibility agricoles, . con- 
joncture et economie agricole, statistiques 
agricoles. Paris, Librairie M. Riviere, 1959. 
233 p. tables. S471.M23M5 

Bibliography: p.371-375. 

Basic study by a specialist in tropical agriculture 
who had worked in Madagascar for 25 years as an 
agronomist, and had firsthand knowledge of all regions. 


Reunion 


1250. Annuaire statistique de la Reunion, 1955-58. 

Paris, 1959. 

This yearbook, which does not seem to have reached 
American libraries or French bibliographies, is noted 
as a reference for Reunion in the Statesman’s Year 
Book of 1962-63. It is presumably published by or for 
the Service de la Statistique of Reunion. 

1251. Brunet, Auguste. Trois cents ans de coloni¬ 

sation franqaise a Vile Bourbon, La Reunion. 
Paris, Editions de PEmpire frangais, 1948. 
178 p. illus., maps. (Bibliotheque des con- 
naissances coloniales, 1) DT469.R43B7 


By a former colonial governor, this concise little 
book is concerned entirely with French colonial his¬ 
tory, from the taking possession of the uninhabited 
island in the mid-17th century to the adherence of 
Reunion to the Free French cause in 1940. 

1252. Bussiere, Pierre. Etude geologique de Vile 
de la Reunion, campagne 1957. Travaux du 
Plan d’equipement, operations nouvelles. 
Tananarive, Service geologique, 1958. 64 p. 
(Territoire de Madagascar. Travaux du 
Bureau geologique, no. 84) 

QE330.A25, no. 84 


194 


1253. Deschamps, Hubert J. Cote des Somalis, 

Reunion, Inde, par Hubert Deschamps, Ray¬ 
mond Decary, et Andre Menard. Paris, 
Berger-Levrault, 1948. 209 p. plates, maps. 
(L’Union frangaise) DT411 .D48 

Bibliographies at end of each section. 

This general study of outlying French possessions 
is considered among the most authoritative of recent 
works. Professor Deschamps was for some years gov¬ 
ernor of French Somaliland, and is thoroughly inti¬ 
mate with the country. M. Decary, an authority 
on Madagascar, is also an expert on Reunion. 

1254. Leblond, Marius. L’lle enchantee, la Reunion, 

par Marius et Ary Leblond. Paris, Librairie 
de la Revue frangaise, A. Redier, 1931. 156 
p. illus. (Toutes nos colonies, no. 7) 

DT469.R4L4 

1255. - Les lies soeurs; ou, he paradis retrouve. 

La Reunion-Maurice, “Eden de la Mer des 
Indes.” Paris, Editions Alsatia, 1946. 251 p. 
illus. DT469.R4L43 

The brothers Ary and Marius Leblond were promi¬ 
nent interpreters of the colonial empire in the between- 
war years. The first of these two books, written jointly, 
combines description with history and general survey 
in a charming narrative. The second, by Marius Le¬ 
blond alone, goes at some length into the history of 
the two islands, both settled and held by the French 
and their followers until England took over Mauritius 
by the Treaty of Paris in 1814. 

1256. Lougnon, Albert. L’lle Bourbon pendant la 

Regence; Desforges-Boucher, les debuts du 
cafe. Paris, Larose, 1957. 371 p. maps, 


plans. (Bibliotheque d’histoire des Mas- 
careignes) DT469.R45L6 1957 

Bibliography: p. 29-55. 

Study of the 18th century history of Reunion, based 
on exhaustive research in manuscript archives. After 
a short introduction on his general theme the author 
gives a chapter to a long classified bibliography of 
writings on Reunion, to which, however, he says his 
work owes little. 

1257. Monfreid, Henri de. Mon aventure a Vile 

des forbans. Paris, B. Grasset, 1958. 158 p. 
illus. DT469.R4M6 

The adventurer of the Red Sea, who has his home 
at Obock near Djibuti (see under Cote des Somalis) 
visited his son in Reunion, and in this account gave 
some attention to description of the island and its 
past (he naturally took delight in its having been a 
haunt of pirates as well as in his own adventures). 
The work is not scholarly. 

1258. Perspectives d'Outre Mer. Ocean Indien: 

Madagascar, tie de la Reunion, tie Maurice, 
Cote frangaise des Somalis. Monaco, 1959- 
1962. DLG 

Special issues no. 30, aout-sept. 1959, no. 36, oct. 1960, 
no. 46-47, juill.-aout 1962. 

Three special numbers of this illustrated review 
have been devoted since independence to the former 
and present French possessions in the Indian Ocean. 
Fully half of each issue consists of feature articles on 
Madagascar, but both carry also useful economic and 
descriptive surveys of Reunion, since 1946 an oversea 
departement of France, and the territory of the Somali 
Coast. For the latter, the 1959 issue ends with a 
hopeful article on “Tourisme en Cote frangaise des 
Somalis.” 


French Somaliland 


1259. Aubert de la Rue, Edgar. La Somalie 
frangaise. Paris, Gallimard, 1939. illus. 
162 p. (Geographic humaine . . . t. 14) 

DT411.A8 

The author, a literary man and expert photographer 
as well as a geographer, was interested in meteorology, 
natural history, and other physical sciences connected 
with country studies as well as with description. This 
is one of the few books of general coverage dealing 
exclusively with French Somaliland. 


1260. France. Direction de la documentation. La 

Cote frangaise des Somalis. Paris, 1961. 
52 p. (Notes et etudes documentaires, no. 
2774, 29 avr. 1961) D411.F67, no. 2774 

Basic background survey. For note on this series, 
see no. 846. 

1261. - Djibouti et le chemin de fer franco - 

ethiopien. Paris, 1945. (Notes et etudes 
documentaires, no. 112) D411.F67, no. 112 


692 - 756—63 - 14 


195 





Official background on the Italo-French contest 
for control of the railroad from Djibouti to Addis 
Ababa. In the less restrained account by Henri de 
Monfreid (see below), the first paragraph explains 
that the Coast of the Somalis, so called because no 
Somalis live there [the tribes he says, are Danakil and 
Issa], “is reduced in actuality to Djibouti. This terri¬ 
tory has in fact no other resources than those which 
it draws from its port, designed solely for the commerce 
of a landlocked country which does not belong to 
it.” 

1262. La France de VOcean Indien: Madagascar, les 

Comores, la Reunion, la Cote frangaise des 
Somalis, l’lnde frangaise [par Raymond 
Decary et ah] Paris, Societe d’editions 
geographiques, maritimes et coloniales, 1952. 
314 p. illus., maps. (Collection Terres 
lointaines, 8) DT469.M26F7 

In this volume of a popular series describing French 
overseas possessions, 21 pages (277-297) are given to 
an account of French Somaliland by a colonial official, 
Robert Lemoyne. The 23,000 square km. area of 
desert and rock that constitutes the territory, he says, 
“in spite of the proverbial severity of its climate and 
the hostility of its nature—or perhaps even because of 
these traits—presents the striking epitome of French 
colonial experience.” The 50,000-odd nomadic 
tribesmen, Danakil and Somali, who are the native 
inhabitants, were until the French arrival almost en¬ 
tirely pastoral; now a few have become sedentary. 
The only industry of the country is salt production, 
though interest is shown in possible oil. The strategic 
port of Djibouti, on the Gulf of Aden commanding 
the approaches to the Red Sea, is of importance also 
as terminus of the railway to the center of Ethiopia. 
Established in 1888 and made the seat of government 
of the new colony in 1892, it was credited by this 
writer with a settled population in 1950 of 2,500 
Europeans, 10,000 Somali, 1,200 Danakil, 3,000 Arab 
citizens, and a floating population of Somalis and 
Arabs of 6,000 or more. 

1263. Guide-annuaire de la Cote des Somalis. 

Djibouti, Djibouti-Publicite, 1959. 

This work, probably a business directory, is listed as 
a reference source on French Somaliland in the 


Statesmen’s Year Book of 1962-63. It does not appear 
in the Bibliographie de la France for 1959-61, and 
does not seem to be available in American libraries. 

1264. Lippmann, Alphonse. Guerriers et sorciers 

en Somalie. Paris, Hachette, 1953. 256 p. 
(Choses vues, aventures vecues) DT411.L5 
Personal adventures of a young colonial officer in 
the tribal wars of Issa and Danakil in French Somali¬ 
land during the twenties, Mr. Lippmann arrived in 
1921 in “le Djibouti de Monfreid” (see below). His 
narrative is concerned with the interior and the border 
strife between tribes in Somaliland, Ethiopia, and 
Eritrea. 

1265. Mer Rouge, Afrique orient ale: etudes sociolo- 

giques et linguistiques—prehistoire—explora¬ 
tions—perspectives d’avenir. Paris, Peyron- 
net, 1959. 342 p. illus. (Cahiersdel’Afri¬ 
que et l’Asie, 5) DT365.M42 

This scholarly work, the preface of which is 
written by Professor Hubert J. Deschamps, contains 
three chapters on French Somaliland: “Les Popula¬ 
tions de la Cote frangaise des Somalis,” by R. Muller 
(p. 45-102); “Les Danakil du Cercle de Tadjoura,” 
by M. Albospeyre (p. 103-162); “Le Destin des So¬ 
malis,” by R. Lamy (p. 163-212). A bibliography of 
some length includes Somalia and the former British 
Somaliland as well as French Somaliland (p. 336-339). 

A short section of official documents relating to French 
Somaliland is included in the Library of Congress list (see 
under Somalia, no. 1423). 

1266. Monfreid, Henri de. Le radeau de la Me- 

duse: ou, Comment fut sauve Djibouti. 
Paris, B. Grasset, 1958. 187 p. DT411.M6 

M. de Monfreid began his adventures of sailing and 
exploration along the coasts of the Red Sea in 1910, 
and in 1931 started publication of the long series 
of his sensational adventures, many of which took 
place in and around Djibouti. The first two of his 
gory books are available in English translation: 
Secrets of the Red Sea (London, Faber & Faber, 1934. 
317 p.), and Hashish (Harmondsworth, Penguin 
Books, 1946. 285 p.). The present work is an ac¬ 

count, only partially in the first person, of strife be¬ 
tween Italy and France over Djibouti before, during, 
and after the Italo-Ethiopian War. 


196 


EAST AFRICA 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1267. International African Institute. East 

Africa: general, ethnography, sociology, lin¬ 
guistics, compiled by Ruth Jones, librarian, 
with the assistance of a panel of consultants. 
London, 1960. 62 1. (Africa bibliography 
series: ethnography, sociology, linguistics, and 
related subjects). Z3516.147 

See note on series, no. 262. 

1268. U.S. Library of Congress. African Section. 

Official publications of British East Africa. 
Washington, General Reference and Bibli¬ 
ography Division, Reference Dept., Library 
of Congress, 1960+ 4 v. Z3582.U5 

Pt. 1. The East Africa High Commission and other 
regional documents, compiled by Helen F. 
Conover. 1960. 67 p. 

Pt. 2. Tanganyika, compiled by Audrey A. Walker. 
1962. 134 p. 

Pt. 3. Kenya and Zanzibar, compiled by Audrey A. 
Walker. 1963. 162 p. 

Pt. 4. Uganda, compiled by Audrey A. Walker. 1963. 

100 p. 

This group of lists in the Library of Congress series 
of official publications of African governments covers 
as extensively as possible from printed reference sources 
the publications of the national governments and 
British documents directly relating to these countries; 
also, in the case of Tanganyika, documents of the 
United Nations. In view of the availability of these 
lists, official publications for East Africa are in general 
omitted from the present bibliography. 


GENERAL 

(including History, etc.) 

1269. Cole, Sonia M. The prehistory of East Africa. 

Harmondsworth, Middlesex, Penguin Books, 
1954. 301 p. illus., maps. (Pelican books, 

A 316) GN776.A15C6 

Bibliography: p. 286-294. 


Summarization of archeological knowledge regard¬ 
ing early man and prehistoric cultures of Kenya, 
Uganda, Tanganyika, Somaliland, and Ethiopia. 
One chapter describes the East African rock paintings. 
Some brief account is given of climatic conditions and 
of modern inhabitants. An abbreviated and simpli¬ 
fied version was published by Macmillan for the East 
African Literature Bureau in their pamphlet series 
for African readers: Early Man in East Africa (Lon¬ 
don, 1958. 104 p.). 

1270. Coupland, Sir Reginald. East Africa and its 

invaders, from the earliest times to the death 
of Seyyid Said in 1856. Oxford, Clarendon 
Press, 1938. 584 p. DT365.C58 

1271. —- The exploitation of East Africa, 1856— 

1890; the slave trade and the scramble. 
London, Faber & Faber, 1939. 507 p. 

DT365.C6 

Two standard histories of the Arab and Portuguese 
empires in East Africa, the final suppression of the 
Arab slave traffic in the late 19th century following 
the great discoveries, the rivalry between France and 
Britain, and the partition of East Africa between the 
European powers. Coupland’s other works on the 
history of Southern and Eastern Africa are mentioned 
in the section on history of Rhodesia and Nyasaland. 

1272. Dundas, Sir Charles. African crossroads. 

London, Macmillan; New York, St. Martin’s 
Press, 1955. 242 p. illus. DT431.D8 
The writer, who retired from his post as wartime 
governor of Uganda in 1945, had gone out to Kenya 
in 1908 and had spent 37 years in the Colonial Serv¬ 
ice, in East Africa and in the Bahamas. His great 
interest was in development of the African tribes, 
notably in Tanganyika, where he helped lay the foun¬ 
dations of native administration after the British 
acquired the trusteeship of the former German terri¬ 
tory. This book of reminiscences expresses the typi¬ 
cal colonial officer’s deep sense of responsibility for 
the primitive peoples emerging into the modern world 
under British guardianship. 


197 




1273. Hickman, Gladys M., and W. H. G. Dickins. 

The lands and peoples of East Africa; a 
school certificate geography. London, Long¬ 
mans, Green, 1960. 232 p. illus. 

DT365.H5 

This textbook ends with questions from the Cam¬ 
bridge Oversea School Certificate Examination papers 
for East Africa. It is designed for teachers and stu¬ 
dents, and commented on as “indispensable.” 

1274. Hollingsworth, Lawrence W. The Asians 

of East Africa. London, Macmillan, 1960. 
174 p. illus. DT429.H68 

Concise historical survey of the Indian population 
of East Africa, in a small book designed for African 
schools. 

A paper on the same subject, Asians in East Africa, by 
George Delf, is published in 1963 by the Oxford University 
Press (London, New York. 73 p.). 

1275. Huxley, Elspeth. The sorcerer’s apprentice; 

a journey through East Africa. London, 
Chatto & Windus, 1948. 366 p. illus. 

DT365.H89 

Mrs. Huxley, who was born and brought up in 
Kenya and is one of East Africa’s leading European 
writers, recorded in this book a long trip made in 1947 
to observe changes since the war. The title, taken 
from the fable of the apprentice unable to con¬ 
trol the magic he had partially learned, expresses her 
anxiety over whether the Africans may not be over¬ 
whelmed by too sudden contact with modern 
civilization. 

The impressions of a sympathetic and observant traveler 
over a decade later are set down in Father Paul Foster’s White 
to Move? A Portrait of East Africa Today (London, Eyre & 
Spottiswoode, 1961. 199 p. illus.). The author, a Roman 

Catholic priest, has taught history at Makerere College since 
1955, traveling through the territories in vacation time. He 
ends with a warning that the main object of the new African 
culture is power, whereas the aim of education should be 
perception, in which he finds Africans lacking. 

1276. Ingham, Kenneth. A history of East Africa. 

New York, Praeger, 1963. 470 p. illus., 
maps. London edition, Longmans, Green, 
1962. DT365.I5 

By the author of a notable study of Uganda, this is 
the most comprehensive modem history of the entire 
region of East Africa. It was reviewed in Africa 
Report of October 1962. 

In 1963 the first volume of a new History of East Africa, 
edited by Roland Oliver and Gervase Mathew, has been 
published by the Clarendon Press, Oxford. 


1277. Jackson, Sir Frederick J. Early days in East 

Africa. London, E. Arnold, 1930. 399 p. 
plates, map. DT12.J3 

Published the year after the death of the author, 
who had been in East Africa from 1884 to 1917, going 
out first with Rider Haggard for hunting, exploration, 
and naturalist studies, and becoming an official and 
administrator, in a career that ended as Governor of 
Uganda from 1911-17. His reminiscences are full of 
first contacts of black men with white. 

1278. Lugard, Frederick J. D., baron. The diaries 

of Lord Lugard. Edited by Margery Per- 
ham; assistant editor: Mary Bull. Evanston, 
Ill., Northwestern University Press, 1959. 
3 v. ports., maps, facsim. (Northwestern 
University [Evanston, Ill.] African studies, 
no. 3) DT433.L8A3 1959 

Contents.—v. 1. East Africa, November, 1889 to Decem¬ 
ber 1890.—v. 2. East Africa, December 1890 to December 
1891.—v. 3. East Africa, January 1892 to August 1892. 

See also Miss Perham’s biography, Lugard (no. 81). 
Lord Lugard’s own narrative of his campaigns as rep¬ 
resentative of the Imperial East African Company in 
suppression of the slave trade is a primary source for 
the history of this period: The Rise of Our East Afri¬ 
can Empire; Early Efforts in Nyasaland and Uganda 
(Edinburgh, London, Blackwood, 1893. 2 v. illus.) 

1279. Macmillan, Mona. Introducing East Africa. 

2d rev. ed. London, Faber & Faber, 1955. 
314 p. illus. DT365.M15 1955 

Mrs. Macmillan, the wife of the former Director 
of Colonial Studies at the University of St. Andrews, 
had accompanied him on trips to East Africa in 1949 
and 1950. The first edition of her travel narrative— 
on the first trip Uganda and Kenya, the second Tan¬ 
ganyika—appeared in 1952. It gives a fluent descrip¬ 
tion of the country and people, interwoven with facts 
of geography and history, “setting the stage,” as she 
said in her introduction to the new edition, for the 
drama to come. She attempted little political or eco¬ 
nomic analysis or speculation. 

1280. Marsh, Zoe, and G. W. Kingsnorth. An 

introduction to the history of East Africa. 2d 
ed. Cambridge, University Press, 1961. 
273 p. illus. DT365.M35 1961 

A history by specialists, couched in simple style 
for use by African students preparing for school cer¬ 
tificate examinations. The first edition was in 1957. 


198 


Another historical text also published by the Cambridge 
University Press is a selection by Miss Marsh of extracts 
from primary sources, East Africa, through Contemporary 
Records (1961. 214 p.). A prelude is Dr. Leakey’s an¬ 

nouncement in 1959 of the finding of the skull of Zinjan- 
thropus, considered the oldest human skull yet found. Then 
comes the first written reference, in Herodotus, and so on 
through Arabic sources, Portuguese voyages of the 16th cen¬ 
tury, etc., etc., up to the Kenya Land Commission in 1932. 

1281. Mitchell, Sir Philip E. African after¬ 

thoughts. London, Hutchinson, 1954. 
287 p. illus. DT432.M55 

Sir Philip Mitchell retired from the governorship 
of Kenya in June 1952, after 40 years in the Colonial 
Service, almost entirely spent in East Africa. His 
reminiscences of his career in Nyasaland, Tanganyika, 
Uganda, and Kenya cover much of the development 
of colonial government in East Africa. 

1282. Moorehead, Alan. The White Nile. New 

York, Harper, 1960. 385 p. illus., maps. 

DT117.M6 

Retelling of the history of exploration in East and 
Central Africa in a vivid narrative that is concen¬ 
trated on, but goes well beyond, the quest for the 
sources of the Nile from the expedition of Burton 
and Speke in 1856 until the end of the century. Mr. 
Moorehead, who won his reputation with his report¬ 
ing of the war in the Mediterranean and North Afri¬ 
can theaters, has turned to Africa in the latest of his 
many well-regarded books: No Room in the Ark (see 
no. 455), the present work, and in 1962 a complemen¬ 
tary history, The Blue Nile (see under Ethiopia, 
no. 1528). 

1283. Muller, Fritz F. Deutschland, Zanzibar, 

Ostafrika; Geschichte einer deutschen Kolo- 

nialeroberung, 1884-1890. Berlin, Rutten & 

Loening, 1959. 581 p. illus. DT445.M8 
Bibliography, p. 555-567. 

History of the German conquest in East Africa, 
chiefly through the instrumentation of Carl Peters 
and the Deutsche Ost-Afrikanische Gesellschaft, under 
whose charter he carried out expeditions and opera¬ 
tions on the coast and in the interior. The well-docu¬ 
mented study covers diplomatic moves in Berlin and 
London as well as the detailed account of actions in 
East Africa. Of Peters the writer says forthrightly, 
he “was a psychopath.” Events are carried up to the 
establishment in 1891 of the crown colony of German 
East Africa (Tanganyika). 


1284. Richards, Charles G., ed. East African ex¬ 

plorers. Selected and introduced by Charles 
Richards and James Place. London, Oxford 
University Press, 1960. 356 p. illus. (The 
World’s classics, 572) DT365.R5 

Compilation in a pocket-size volume of outstanding 
passages from the books and journals of the 19th 
century explorers of East Africa: Krapf and Rebmann, 
Charles New, Livingstone and Stanley, Burton, Speke, 
and Grant, Samuel W. Baker, Joseph Thomson, 
Gaetano Casati, Count Teleki and L. von Hohnel, J. 
W. Gregory, Lord Lugard, J. R. L. Macdonald, Her¬ 
bert Austin. The works from which the extracts are 
taken are noted, but there is no combined listing of 
the well-known sources, most of which are available 
in large American libraries in the original editions or as 
reprints: e.g., Sir Samuel W. Baker, The Albert 
N’Yanza, Great Basin of the Nile and Explorations 
of the Nile Sources , and Sir Richard F. Burton, The 
Lake Regions of Central Africa, A Picture of Explora¬ 
tion, both reprinted in two-volume editions by Hori¬ 
zon Press, New York, in 1962. 

The East African Literature Bureau has been active in pub¬ 
lishing or in associating with other publishers in the produc¬ 
tion of books on the explorers and other important figures 
in East African history. Several are in a series. Early Travel¬ 
lers in East Africa; this includes Dr. Richards’ Krapf: Mis¬ 
sionary and Explorer, Burton and Lake Tanganyika, Count 
Teleki and the Discovery of Lakes Rudolf and Stefani, and 
by E. A. Loftus, Speke and the Nile Source, Baker and Lake 
Albert, Thomson through Masailand, Gregory and the Great 
Rift Valley. These and other works on East African history, 
customs, and languages are listed in the Catalogue of the 
Bureau (Box 30022, Nairobi). 

1285. Vere-Hodge, Edward R. Imperial British 

East Africa Company. London, Published 
in association with the East African Litera¬ 
ture Bureau by Macmillan, 1960. 95 p. 

map. HF3508.A3V4 

When the Imperial British East Africa Company 
was established and given a concession by the Sultan 
of Zanzibar, Barghash, in 1887, the chartered com¬ 
panies were still considered “a useful instrument of 
colonial expansion.” The taking over of Uganda for 
the Company by Lugard forms the central theme of 
this brief historical account. The writer explains that 
he has used mainly published sources which include, 
besides Volume I of Miss Perham’s Lugard and Sir 
Reginald Coupland’s The Exploitation of East Africa, 
the history by a company official—apologist—P. L. 
McDermott, British East Africa, or I BE A: A History 
of the Formation and Work of the Imperial British 


199 




East Africa Company (London, Chapman & Hall, 
1893. 382 p.). 

1286. The Year book and guide to East Africa. 

1950+ London, S. Low, Marston. annual. 
Edited by A. Gordon-Brown and issued by 
the Union-Castle Mail Steamship Co. 1962 
ed. 340 p., 16 maps, 80 p. advertising. 

DT365.A1Y4 

Handy volume of general information for travelers, 
with historical sections, handbook analysis by terri¬ 
tories, chapters on safari and mountaineering, travel 
sections in baedeker style, and various chapters of mis¬ 
cellaneous information. Separately indexed notes on 
fauna were discontinued after 1957. There are in¬ 
dexes of geographical names and subjects at the be¬ 
ginning of the book. 

The leading conservative organ of news and political and 
economic content is East Africa and Rhodesia, a weekly 
published in London. The editor, F. S. Joelson, is known 
for a number of books on East Africa. The chief daily of 
Nairobi, which often represents the white settlers’ viewpoint, 
is the well-known East African Standard. 

POLITICS AND ECONOMICS 

1287. The Economist, London. The economy of 

East Africa: a study of trends, prepared by 
the Economist Intelligence Unit for the East 
African Railways and Harbours Administra¬ 
tion. Nairobi, East African Railways and 
Harbours Administration, 1955. 237 p. 

HC517.E2E34 

Requested as an independent opinion from skilled 
investigators to aid future planning with regard to 
prospects for large capital investments. The Gen¬ 
eral Manager of the Railways and Harbours Adminis¬ 
tration spoke in his foreword of a program entailing 
loan expenditures of between 40 and 50 million 
pounds sterling over the next 5 years. The report 
reviewed the activities of the Railways and Harbours 
Administration during over a half century, then studied 
likely trends in trade, agriculture, and industry, ana¬ 
lyzing them by specific products and aspects of de¬ 
velopment. The editors summarized the main conclu¬ 
sions as to changes to be expected in exports, im¬ 
ports, international and interterritorial traffic, em¬ 
phasizing that the economy is chiefly agricultural; they 
ended with a concise restatement of the principal argu¬ 
ment, that the big opportunities for industrial invest¬ 
ment would probably occur between 1955 and 1960, 
with investment thereafter geared to the advance of 
agricultural production. 


An interesting paper in this connection was by Irene S. 
Van Dongen, The British East African Transport Complex 
(Chicago, 1954. 172 p.) (University of Chicago. Dept, of 

Geography. Research paper no. 38). 

1288. Ford, Victor C. R. The trade of Lake Vic¬ 

toria: a geographical study. Kampala, East 
African Institute of Social Research, 1955. 
65 p. maps, tables. (East African studies, 
no. 3) HF3899.V5F6 

Based on a 1950 thesis, this economic study used as 
source material the records of the railways and har¬ 
bors and other documentary files of Lake Victoria as 
well as its author’s firsthand investigations. Mr. Ford 
gave an account of the geographical setting and the 
geographical history of the trade, including the dhow 
trade which is now in eclipse, and analyzed present 
trade by specific commodities. He was concerned to 
show that there is little local interchange, but that 
traffic is with the world outside, and no common cul¬ 
ture has developed in the various regions around the 
shores of the big lake. 

1289. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Future of East 

Africa High Commission services. Report 
of the London discussions, June, 1961. Lon¬ 
don, H.M. Stationery Off., 1961. 18 p. 

(Cmnd 1433) JQ2945.A55 1961 

Known also as the White Paper on the East African 
Common Services Organization, this report outlined 
the change in name and functions decided on for 
the former intraterritorial body as Tanganyika and 
Uganda neared independence. 

1290. Gt. Brit. East Africa Royal Commission. 

Report [1953-1955] London, H.M. Sta¬ 
tionery Off., 1955. 482 p. (Cmd. 9475) 
Sir Hugh Dow, chairman. HN792.5.A55 
This report was presented by a Commission ap¬ 
pointed at the request of the Governors of East Africa 
to inquire into measures to increase national income 
and to raise the standards of living of the populations 
of the East African territories, Africans, Europeans, 
and Indians alike. Criticized in some quarters as being 
so strongly against collective action and for individual 
enterprise that it was called by commentators “Adam 
Smith in East Africa,” its central thesis was that re¬ 
strictions to free competition of the races as to goods, 
services, and land must be done away with, notably as 
regards rights of African landholders outside tribal 
areas. The Commissioners recommended that barriers 
to the free exchange of land be progressively removed, 
and called for establishment of Development Boards 


200 


to plan the use of land and the rehabilitation of over¬ 
crowded areas. 

A summarization of the main points made by the Royal 
Commission and an explanation of their implications were 
given in a brochure by Philip Mason, A New Deal in East 
Africa, published by the Royal Institute of International 
Affairs (London, 1955. 37 p.). Mr. Mason declared that 
the Report marked a revolution in colonial history, offering 
to “a people who have so far felt themselves rejected a real 
share in that form of property-owning democracy now current 
in Western Europe.” 

Among official papers published in connection with the 
report, the following demand special note: 

Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Despatches from the Gov¬ 
ernors of Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika and from 
the Administrator, East Africa High Commission, 
commenting on the East Africa Royal Commission, 
1953—1955, report. London, H. M. Stationery Off., 
1956. 196 p. tables. (Cmd. 9801) 

HN792.5.A553 

- Commentary on the despatches from the Gover¬ 
nors of Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika and the 
Administrator, East Africa High Commission, on the 
East Africa Royal Commission, 1953-1955, report. 
London, 1956. 6 p. (Cmd. 9804) 

HN792.5.A552 

A Conference on African Land Tenure in East and Central 
Africa which stemmed from the Royal Commission Report 
was held at Arusha, Tanganyika, in February 1956; its report 
was published for the Colonial Office by H. M. Stationery 
Office, African Land Tenure: Report . . . (London, 1956. 
44 p.). 

1291. Gt. Brit. East African Economic and Fiscal 

Commission. East Africa; report. London, 
H.M. Stationery Off., 1961. 83 p. J. Rais- 
man, chairman. DLG 

Prepared in connection with the discussions of the 
future of the East African Common Services Organi¬ 
sation, this document is concerned chiefly with ar¬ 
rangements for a common market area in East Africa. 

1292. Hill, Mervyn F. Permanent way; the story of 

the Kenya and Uganda Railway, being the 
official history of the development of the 
transport system in Kenya and Uganda. 
Nairobi, East African Railways and Harbours, 
1950. xii, 582 p. plates, maps. 

HE3420.K45H5 

1293. - The story of the Tanganyika railways. 

Nairobi, East African Railways and Harbours, 
1960. 295 p. (Permanent way, vol. 2) 

The author is editor of the Kenya Weekly News. 
His comprehensive history was commissioned by the 
East African Railways and Harbours and prepared 
largely from their official records. The building of 
the railways opened up East Africa to commerce and 


to the influence of British civilization, and, incidentally, 
first brought an Indian population to East Africa. 

A famous book connected with the building of the Kenya 
and Uganda Railway is The Man-Eaters of Tsavo and Other 
East African Adventures, by John H. Patterson (London, 
Macmillan, 1947. 351 p.). The book was first published in 
1907; its author was the engineer who in 1898 succeeded in 
killing the two lions that had so terrorized the Indian gangs 
working on the railroad that work stopped for 3 weeks. 

1294. Matheson, J. K., and E. W. Bovill, eds. East 

African agriculture: a short survey of the ag¬ 
riculture of Kenya, Uganda, Tanganyika, and 
Zanzibar, and of its principal products. 
London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1950. 332 p. S517.A44M3 

Lucid and still useful description by a number of 
specialists. The first 60 pages, by Mr. Matheson, 
give a general geographical introduction explaining 
land, population, land tenure, white settlement, native 
labor, native welfare, soil conservation problems, ag¬ 
ricultural research institutes. The second part de¬ 
scribes in detail the agriculture of the European set¬ 
tlers, explaining practices and conditions regarding the 
chief crops—cereals, coffee, essendal oils, fruit, ground¬ 
nuts (there is a chapter explaining the groundnut 
scheme, which had not yet been abandoned at the 
time, and giving the reasons for its inevitable failure), 
livestock, pyrethrum, sisal, sugar, tea, etc. The third 
part is on African agriculture, considered by territorial 
division. Appendixes tabulate statistics. 

1295. Moyse-Bartlett, Hubert. The King's Af¬ 

rican Rifles: a study in the military history of 
East and Central Africa, 1890-1945. Aider- 
shot, Gale & Polden, 1956. 727 p. illus., 
maps. DT351.M6 

By a former officer of the regiment, who at the 
time of writing was Secretary of the School of Oriental 
and African Studies at the University of London. The 
King’s African Rifles began as local guard forces en¬ 
listed by the chartered companies in East and Central 
Africa, then were taken over by the governments of 
the colonies, and in 1902 combined in the single force 
whose function was to protect the frontiers and main¬ 
tain order. The chapters relate stirring jevents, start¬ 
ing with the Slavers’ War of 1888-96, and including 
campaigns against the Mad Mullah of Somalia, many 
punitive expeditions against turbulent tribes, the East 
African campaign of 1914-18, and in the Second 
World War the defense of Kenya and British Somali¬ 
land, the Abyssinian campaign, and fighting overseas 
in Madagascar and Burma. 


201 




According to Coleman and Brice, in their Role of the Mili¬ 
tary in Sub-Saharan Africa (no. Ill), the future of the 
KAR is dependent upon relations between the new African 
governments and the United Kingdom, but as of 1961 the 
regiment had only a handful of African officers. 

1296. Orde-Brown, G. St. J. Labour conditions in 

East Africa. London, H.M. Stationery 
Office, 1946. 94 p. (Colonial no. 193) 

HD8799.E407 

Report of the Labor Advisor to the Colonial Office, 
who in 1933 had prepared for the International In¬ 
stitute of African Languages and Cultures the authori¬ 
tative survey, The African Labourer (Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press. 240 p.) Major Orde-Brown in this paper 
considered first the general situation, then separately 
the four territories, Tanganyika, Kenya, Uganda, Zan¬ 
zibar (the last very briefly). He was concerned with 
labor shortages, wartime labor questions, low efficiency 
and possibilities for its improvement, industrialization 
and training, the question of migrant labor from 
Ruanda-Urundi, prospects for trade unions, labor de¬ 
partments, etc. 

1297. Worthington, Stella, and E. B. Worthing¬ 

ton. Inland waters of Africa: the result of 
two expeditions to the great lakes of Kenya 
and Uganda, with accounts of their biology, 
native tribes and development. London, 
New York, Macmillan, 1933. 253 p. 

DT361.W6 

Dr. Worthington, who was Scientific Secretary of 
CSA from 1951-55, had been Scientific Adviser for 
Lord Hailey’s African Survey and in 1946 was De¬ 
velopment Adviser for Uganda. This book records 
expeditions made with his wife to the African lakes 
in 1927 to 1931, with much geographical and biological 
information and data on fisheries. 

1298. Wraith, Ronald E. East African citizen. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1959. 
238 p. JQ2945.A5W7 

Prepared as a text for Makerere College students, 
members of local councils, etc., this informative work 
on the political and social structure of British East 
Africa is an. excellent example of British efforts to 
help Africanization of cadres. 

ANTHROPOLOGY, LINGUISTICS, 
SOCIOLOGY, ETC. 

1299. Ashton, Ethel O. Swahili grammar, includ¬ 

ing intonation. London, New York, Long¬ 
mans, Green, 1944. 398 p. PL8072.A7 


The Swahili language, spoken by the mixed Arab- 
Negro Swahilis of Zanzibar, has become the lingua 
franca of the East African coast, and some knowledge 
of it is helpful to anyone having to do with Africans. 
Miss Ashton’s grammar is the authoritative work. The 
standard dictionaries are those of the Inter-Territorial 
Language (Swahili) Committee, Standard Swahili- 
English Dictionary, and Standard English-Swahili 
Dictionary (London, Oxford University Press, 1939, 
2 v., 538,635 p.). 

The East African Inter-Territorial Language Committee 
had issued its first Report in 1930, its headquarters then in 
Arusha, Tanganyika. In 1948 it came under the East Africa 
High Commission, and in 1952 was transferred to Makerere 
College, the name being changed to East African Swahili 
Committee. In 1962 it was transferred again to the new 
University College in Dar es Salaam. The Committee spon¬ 
sors a number of publications in Swahili, including its journal, 
Swahili, and A Linguistic Bibliography of East Africa, com¬ 
piled by W. H. Whiteley and A. E. Gutkind (Kampala, 1958). 
A useful little volume in the English Universities Press series 
of Teach Yourself Language Books is by an associate of the 
Committee, Daisy V. Perrott: Teach Yourself Swahili (2d 
ed., London, English Universities Press, 1957. 194, 30 p.). 
See also note on the volume for Swahili in the Basic Course 
Series published by the U.S. Foreign Service Institute (no. 
307n). 

1300. East African Institute of Social Research, 

Makerere College, Kampala, Uganda. East 
African studies. 1953 + 

The East African Institute of Social Research was 
established in 1950 under the auspices of Colonial 
Development and Welfare as one of the research insti¬ 
tutes of Makerere College. A leaflet published in 
1956, The East African Institute of Social Research, 
1950-1955 (19 p., illus.), explains its organization and 
functions, and-its program of publication. The East 
African Studies series, published in Kampala by the 
Institute (or for the Institute by the Eagle Press) are 
pamphlets of varying length resulting from field re¬ 
search carried out by the Fellows. Most of them are 
noted individually by author in this and the following 
sections. The first, by A. B. Mukwaya (see no. 1396) 
was published in 1953; no. 12, Crops and Wealth in 
Uganda, by C. C. Wrigley, appeared in 1959. A 
number of full-length books by scholars working under 
sponsorship of the Institute has been brought out by 
English publishers: e.g., Low & Pratt (no. 1393). 

1301. Ethnographic Survey of Africa. East Cen¬ 

tral Africa. London, International African 
Institute, [series] 

For general note on this series, see no. 270. The 
following volumes relate to the peoples of Kenya, 
Tanganyika, and Uganda: 


202 


3. The Coastal tribes of the North-eastern Bantu: 

Pokomo, Nykia and Teita, by A. H. J. Prins. 1952. 
138 p. DT429.P7 

4. The Nilotes of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and 

Uganda, by Audrey J. Butt. 1952. 198 p. 

DT132.B8 

5. The Kikuyu and Kamba of Kenya, by John Middle- 

ton. 1953. 107 p. DT434.E2M5 

6. The Northern Nilo-Hamites, by G. W. B. Hunting- 

ford. 1953. 106 p. [Mainly in the Sudan] 

GN659.N5H78 

7. The Central Nilo-Hamites, by Pamela and P. H. 

Gulliver. 1953. 106 p. GN659.N5G8 

8. The Southern Nilo-Hamites, by G. W. B. Huntingford. 

1953. 152 p. GN659.N5H8 

10. The Gisu of Uganda, by J. S. La Fontaine. 1959. 

68 p. DT434.U2L2 

11. The Eastern Lacustrine Bantu (Ganda, Soga, etc.) 

by Margaret Ghave Fallers. 1960. 86 p. 

DT361.F3 

12. The Swahili-speaking peoples, by A. H. J. Prins. 

1961. 143 p. GN659.Z3P7 

13. The Western Lacustrine Bantu (Nyoro, Toro, etc.) 

by Brian Taylor. 1962. 159 p. DT361.T3 

1302. Gulliver, P. H. The family herds; a study of 

two pastoral tribes in East Africa, the Jie and 
Turkana. London, Routledge & K. Paul, 
1955. 271 p. (International library of so¬ 
ciology and social reconstruction) GN426.G8 
The author, a Government sociologist in Tangan¬ 
yika, did his fieldwork in Kenya and Uganda between 
1948 and 1951. This book and a previous study, 
Preliminary Survey of the Turkana: a Report Com¬ 
piled for the Government of Kenya (Cape Town, 
University of Cape Town, 1951, 281 p.), embody his 
findings as to social behavior and institutions of the 
two tribes. The Jie of Uganda, with a mixed economy 
of animal husbandry and millet farming, and the 
Turkana, nomadic herds-people of Kenya, are closely 
related in history and culture. 

1303. Harries, Lyndon. Islam in East Africa. 

London, Universities’ Mission to Central Af¬ 
rica, 1954. 92 p. BP64.E3H3 

Includes bibliography. 

Brief explanation of Islam in relation to the work 
of the Mission in East Africa. The author comments 
on the ease with which the African can become a 
Muslim, but points out that Islam is the enemy of 
progress for him. 

1304. - Swahili poetry. Oxford, Clarendon 

Press, 1962. 326 p. PL8704.A2H3 

Swahili poetry, which is still written in the tradi¬ 
tional prosodic forms, is meaningful in the culture of 
East Africa. Obviously of close connection with 


Arabic poetry (it was written in the Swahili-Arabic 
script), its chief purpose up to the end of the 19th 
century was to express the spirit and practice of Islam. 
This volume is a broad selection of texts from the man¬ 
uscripts in the Library of the School of Oriental and 
African Studies, where Dr. Harries is a lecturer in 
Swahili. The representative poems are given in 
parallel transliteration from the script and English 
translation on facing pages, each explained in full 
scholarly commentary. 

1305. Richards, Audrey I., ed. East African chiefs: 

a study of political development in some 
Uganda and Tanganyika tribes. New York, 
Praeger, 1960, 419 p. illus. (Books that 
matter) JQ2951.A34R5 

Includes bibliography. 

A comparative study of political development begun 
in 1952 under the auspices of the East African In¬ 
stitute of Social Research and carried out by anthro¬ 
pologists on its staff and other researchers. A collec¬ 
tion was made of career histories of over 1,100 chiefs 
of varying types, kings, paramount chiefs, clan elders, 
and so on, with data about their age, education, reli¬ 
gion, service, outside training, descent, genealogy, and 
economic position within the community. 

1306. Thurnwald, Richard. Black and white in 

East Africa: the fabric of a new civilization; a 
study in social contact and adaptation of life 
in East Africa; with a chapter on women by 
H i 1 d e Thurnwald. London, Routledge, 
1935. 419 p. DT429.T5 

The result of a trip in 1930-31 by two anthro¬ 
pologists, made under the auspices of the International 
African Institute. Dr. Thurnwald and his wife 
studied political, social, and educational changes of 
the native Africans of Kenya, Nyasaland, and Tangan¬ 
yika under European influences. 

1307. Welbourn, Frederick B. East African rebels; 

a study of some independent churches. Lon¬ 
don, SCM Press, 1961. 258 p. BR1440.W4 
By a Warden at Makerere College, this study, ac¬ 
cording to the author, “falls on the boundary be¬ 
tween Church History and Social Psychology.” His 
theme explaining three separatist church movements 
in Buganda is “From Religion to Politics.” The con¬ 
troversial question of the Kikuyu independent church 
movement as a precursor of Mau Mau is discussed as 
“From Politics to Religion.” The last section is a 
thought-provoking analysis of the African response to 
Christian missions. 


203 







Kenya 


1308. Altrincham, Edward W. M. G., baron. 

Kenya’s opportunity; memories, hopes, and 
ideas. London, F aber & Faber, 1955. 
308 p. DT434.E2A66 1955 

The late Lord Altrincham had been Governor of 
Kenya from 1925 to 1931. In this book, which com¬ 
bined his reminiscences of the country he loved with 
his views on what British policy should be for Kenya 
and East Africa, he contended that it is unrealistic 
to try to mold tribal Africans into a form of British 
parliamentary, government. He offered as solution 
a multiracial society on the model of the Swiss Con¬ 
federacy, with the races separately managing their 
own concerns, the Africans in autonomous tribal com¬ 
munities—“with even stronger emphasis than before 
on African self-government on traditional African 
foundations.” 

1309. Bennett, George, and Carl G. Rosberg. 

The Kenyatta election; Kenya 1960-1961. 
London, New York, Published on behalf of 
the Institute of Commonwealth Studies by 
Oxford University Press, 1961. 230 p. 
illus. JQ2947.A95B4 

Timely study by a British Commonwealth historian 
and an American political scientist, who examine the 
background of Kenya’s constitutional and electoral 
history and analyze the campaigns. Although the 
election was general, the writers observe that the sepa¬ 
rateness of the different races and communities made 
it appear “sometimes as at least five different elec¬ 
tions.” The aftermath and post-election maneuvers 
by which the first Government was formed with 
KADU in control and Mboya and KANU in opposi¬ 
tion are also described. 

1310. Bernardi, Bernardo. The Mugwe, a failing 

prophet; a study of a religious and public 
dignitary of the Meru of Kenya. With a 
foreword by Daryll Forde. London, New 
York, Published for the International Afri¬ 
can Institute by the Oxford University Press, 
1959. 211 p. illus., map. GN495.5.B46 
Ethnological study of the Meru tribe and their 
religious leader. The author is a Catholic priest. 

1311. Blixen, Karen. Out of Africa, by Isak Dine- 

sen. New York, Modem Library, 1952. 
389 p. (Modem library of the world’s best 
books, 23). DT434.E2B6 


This sensitive personal narrative of the White High¬ 
lands of Kenya before the European settlement be¬ 
came a cause for conflict was first published in 1938, 
and has joined Olive Schreiner’s Story of an African 
Farm as a classic of a way of life now gone. The 
late Danish writer Baroness Blixen, who used the pen 
name Isak Dinesen, had gone to Kenya before the 
First World War, where she had a coffee farm near 
Nairobi. In an autobiographical note in Twentieth 
Century Authors (1942), she said: “To my mind the 
life of a farmer in the East African highlands is near 
to an ideal existence.” 

1312. Bolton, Kenneth. The lion and the lily; 

a guide to Kenya. With specialist contribu¬ 
tors. London, G. Bles, 1962. 241 p. 

DT434.E22R6 

Although entitled “a guide,” this is rather a gen¬ 
eral description for the prospective visitor, with chap¬ 
ters on land, peoples, economy, life in country and 
town, transport, “Internal and External Defence,” 
etc. The specialist contributions are on the attractions 
of nature and wild life. 

1313. Carothers, John C. The psychology of Mau 

Mau. Nairobi, Govt. Printer, 1954. 35 p. 

DT434.E2C35 

At head of title: Colony and Protectorate of Kenya. 

Semitechnical study prepared at the request of the 
Government of Kenya by a psychiatrist of note, author 
of The African Mind in Health and Disease (no. 468). 
He emphasized the point that there is a close paral¬ 
lel between Mau Mau oaths and rituals and those 
of European witchcraft, and was convinced that the 
Mau Mau rites were devised by “sophisticated per¬ 
sons.” He considered the old Kikuyu culture largely 
defunct, and saw the answer to their chief psycholog¬ 
ical problems in “villagization,” which might counter¬ 
act their personal insecurity and give them a chance 
to develop new allegiances. He was insistent that 
urban workers must have their families live with 
them. 

1314. Corfield, F. D. Historical survey of the ori¬ 

gins and growth of Mau Mau. London, 

H.M. Stationery Off., 1960. 321 p. (Cmnd. 

1030) DT434.E2C64 

The official study resulting from the trial of Ken¬ 
yatta and presenting what appeared to be complete 


204 


proof of his responsibility for the Mau Mau “emer¬ 
gency.” According to most critics, by the time of 
publication the work was outdated, much of the evi¬ 
dence had been disproved, and Delf (below) speaks 
of it as “history composed by the patient himself,” 
though he admits that it was a reliable chronicle of 
government information at the time it was being 
written. 

The Kenyatta trial, resulting in the conviction of his guilt 
as leader of Mau Mau, was held in 1952-53 at Kapenguria 
in the Northern Province of Kenya, the defense being di¬ 
rected by the English lawyer D. N. Pritt, and comprising 
an international team. A book by an English literary man, 
Montagu Slater, The Trial of Jomo Kenyatta (London, 
Seeker & Warburg, 1955. 225 p.), does not conceal the 

writer’s sympathies with the African leaders, but claims to 
be a fair and true account. 

1315. Delf, George. Jomo Kenyatta; towards 

truth about “The Light of Kenya.” London, 
V. Gollancz, 1961. 223 p. illus. 

DT434.E26K43 

An attempt to trace Kenyatta’s career as the future 
and logical leader of Kenya. The writer alludes to 
the widespread belief among Africans that the trial 
of Kenyatta for association with Mau Mau was 
“rigged.” His argument is that Mau Mau was “the 
inexorable product of a seriously distorted social sys¬ 
tem,” and could have been prevented by less weak 
British government. 

1316. Economic Survey Mission to Kenya. The 

economic development of Kenya. Batimore, 
Published for The International Bank for Re¬ 
construction and Development by the Johns 
Hopkins Press, 1963. 380 p. HC517.K415 

This study, published in the spring of 1963, is com¬ 
parable to those prepared by other Economic Survey 
Missions for the World Bank (see, e.g., under Nigeria, 
no. 740, and under Tanganyika no. 1348). It has not 
been available for examination. 

1317. Fearn, Hugh. An African economy; a study 

of the economic development of the Nyanza 
Province of Kenya, 1903-1953. London, 
New York, Published on behalf of East Afri¬ 
can Institute of Social Research by Oxford 
University Press, 1961. xviii, 284 p. illus., 
maps, tables. HC517.K4F4 

Bibliography: p. 267-277. 

Detailed case studies of the modem commercial 
economy of a region bordering on Lake Victoria. 


1318. Forrester, Marion W. Kenya today: social 

prerequisites for economic development. 
The Hague, Mouton, 1962. 179 p. diagrs., 
tables. American ed. New York, Humani¬ 
ties Press. DLG 

A doctoral thesis based on field research into living 
conditions of Africans in Nairobi, carried out under 
the auspices of the World Council of Churches. The 
scope of the monograph takes in many aspects of 
financing, economic development, labor, income, and 
social welfare. 

1319. Gicaru, Muga. Land of sunshine; scenes of 

life in Kenya before Mau Mau. London, 
Lawrence & Wishart, 1958. 175 p. illus. 

DT434.E2G5 

Bitter expression of African resentment of European 
settler policy and the color bar in Kenya, told in semi- 
autobiographical form by a young Kikuyu. The fore¬ 
word by Father Trevor Huddleston describes the book 
as “the authentic African voice.” 

1320. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Report on the col¬ 

ony and protectorate of Kenya. 1948 + 
London, H.M. Stationery Off. annual. 
1960 ed. issued in 1963. DT434.E2A36 

For note on general series, see no. 95. 

1321. Henderson, Ian. Man hunt in Kenya, by 

Ian Henderson with Philip Goodhart. Gar¬ 
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 240 p. 
illus. DT434.E2H39 1958a 

London ed. (Hamilton) has title: The Hunt for Kimathi. 
Personal account of the expedition during the emer¬ 
gency that succeeded in capturing the Mau Mau mili¬ 
tant leader, Dedan Kimathi. The writer, a Kenya- 
born police officer, has intimate knowledge of the 
Kikuyu. 

1322. Hobley, Charles W. Kenya, from char¬ 

tered colony to crown colony: thirty years of 
exploration and administration in British East 
Africa. London, Witherby, 1929. 256 p. 

DT434.E2H6 

The author of this historical, descriptive, and an¬ 
thropological narrative of the early years of the colony 
had gone out to Kenya in the nineties and worked as 
surveyor and geologist. He was fairly little concerned 
with political questions, believing the Indian problem 
to be overstressed and that the white settlers would 
in time come to feel responsibility for African interests. 


205 


1323. Hollis, Sir Alfred Claud. The Masai, their 

language and folklore. London, Oxford 

University Press, 1905. 2d ed., 1911. 359 p. 

PL8501.H6 

The writer was Chief Secretary to the Administra¬ 
tion of the East African Protectorate. This study, 
which includes grammar of the Masai language, with 
text in the vernacular, translation of traditional litera¬ 
ture, notes on customs, and other ethnological material, 
still stands as the main published anthropological work 
in English on this much talked-of tribe. The famous 
travel narrative of Joseph Thomson, Through Masai - 
land (London, 1885; new ed., abridged by Roland 
Young, Evanston, Ill., Northwestern University Press, 
1962. 218 p.) had been the first European account. 
A German ethnographical monograph by M. Merker, 
Die Masai, appeared in 1904 (Berlin, D. Reimer. 421 
p.). There have been several popular books, and it is 
understood that intensive study of the Masai is cur¬ 
rently in progress, but as of late 1962 there has been no 
full-scale anthropological treatise. 

1324. --- The Nandi, their language and folk¬ 

lore. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1909. 328 p. 

plates. PL8545.H6 

The old standard study, supplemented in recent 
years by Huntingford (below). 

1325. Huntingford, George W. B. The Nandi of 

Kenya: tribal control in a pastoral society. 

London, Routledge & K. Paul, 1953. 169 p. 

GN659.N3H8 

Monograph on the tribal political life of the Nandi 
by a social anthropologist who had spent 20 years in 
close contact with the tribe (1921 to the end of the 
Second World War). It was prepared for the Gov¬ 
ernment of Kenya under the auspices of the Colonial 
Social Science Research Council, as the first part of 
a full ethnological report on the Nandi. The last 
two parts were published in 1951 by the Colonial 
Office, Nandi Work and Culture (London, H.M. 
Stationery Off. 126 p. Colonial research studies, no. 
4). Mr. Huntingford is also author of the volumes on 
Northern Nilo-Hamites and Southern Nilo-Hamites 
in the Ethnographic Survey series (no. 270). 

Another anthropological study of this tribe from the legal 
angle by an administrative officer in Kenya, Geoffrey S. Snell, 
Nandi Customary Law (London, Macmillan, 1954. 154 p. 

Custom and tradition in East Africa), is one of a series spon¬ 
sored by the East African Literature Bureau. In the simplest 
language possible the author explained the background of 
Nandi religious and ethical thought, the institutions of the 
tribe, then the traditional laws, and penalties for infringement. 


The third part commented on recent changes under the 
influence of contact with Europeans. 

1326. Huxley, Elspeth. White man’s country: Lord 

Delamere and the making of Kenya. Lon¬ 
don, New York, Macmillan, 1935. 2 v. 

DT434.E2H8 

Lord Delamere, who came to Kenya for big game 
hunting in the late 1890’s and took up his home there 
in 1903, was largely responsible for attracting Euro¬ 
peans to the colony for permanent residence as farmers 
in the Highlands, and was their leader and representa¬ 
tive until his death in 1933. This biography, which is 
also a history of white settlement in Kenya, established 
Mrs. Huxley as an authority on the European in East 
Africa. She herself had been born and raised in 
Kenya; her loving personal interpretation of the 
country in earlier years is being recorded in a series of 
autobiographical books: The Flame Trees of Thika, 
Memories of an African Childhood, and The Mottled 
Lizard (London, Chatto & Windus, 1959, 1962. 288, 
335 p.), and On the Edge of the Rift; Memories of 
Kenya (New York, Morrow, 1962. 409 p.). A strik¬ 
ing debate between Mrs. Huxley, representing the 
European settlers, and Miss Margery Perham, speak¬ 
ing for the primary interests of the Africans, was pub¬ 
lished in 1944 as a series of letters: Race and Politics 
in Kenya: A Correspondence (London, Faber & 
Faber. 247 p.). A new edition was brought out after 
the Mau Mau emergency (1956. 302 p.), with two 

postscripts, “1955 Assessments,” written by the two 
authors stating each her view of the situation in a 
country “buzzing with reforms as well as conflict.” 

There might be mentioned among other books by 
Mrs. Huxley, the novel Red Strangers (New York and 
London, Harper, 1939. 405 p.), which is an attempt 

to describe the coming of the white men through the 
eyes of two generations of a Kikuyu family. A New 
Earth; An Experiment in Colonialism (London, 
Chatto & Windus, 1960. 279 p.) is a study of agrarian 
reform in African farming, and No Easy Way 
(Nairobi, 1960. 225 p.) is a history of the Kenya 

Farmers’ Association and Unga Ltd., Lord Delamere’s 
firm for wheatgrowing. 

1327. Kenya Colony and Protectorate. Survey 

of Kenya. Atlas of Kenya; a comprehensive 
series of new and authentic maps prepared 
from the national survey and other govern¬ 
mental sources, with gazetteer and notes on 
pronunciation and spelling. Nairobi, 
Printed by the Survey of Kenya, 1959. ix 1., 
44 1. of maps (part col.) G2530.K4 1959 

Text on verso of a few maps. 


206 



1328. Kenyatta, Jomo. Facing Mount Kenya: the 

tribal life of the Gikuyu. London, Seeker & 
Warburg, 1938. xxv, 339 p. DT434.E2K45 

Reprint, New York, Vintage Books, 1962. 326 p. 

Professor Malinowski, under whom Kenyatta had 
studied at the London School of Economics during his 
15-year stay in England (1931-46, including travel 
in Europe and study at Moscow University), wrote 
the introduction of this detailed study of the writer’s 
people. As General Secretary of the Kikuyu Central 
Association in the twenties, Kenyatta had led the agita¬ 
tion against European settlement in the Kenya High¬ 
lands, which the Kikuyu claimed as their land. In 
this book he attempted to show the evil effects of cul¬ 
ture contact for the Kikuyu. A pamphlet by Ken¬ 
yatta, Kenya, the Land of Conflict (Manchester, Eng., 
Panaf Service, 1945. 23 p. International African 
Service Bureau), an outspokenly leftist demand for 
land and rights for Africans, was edited by George 
Padmore and distributed at the Socialist Book Center. 
It came out at about the time that Kenyatta was in¬ 
strumental, with Padmore, Nkrumah, and others, in 
organizing the Fifth Pan-African Congress in Man¬ 
chester (1945). A reprint was issued in 1953 by T. K. 
Menon of the Indian Council for Africa in New Delhi. 

1329. Lambert, H. E. Kikuyu social and political 

institutions. London, New York, Published 
for the International African Institute by the 
Oxford University Press, 1956. 149 p. 

DT429.L3 

Part of a much longer anthropological study of the 
tribes of the Kikuyu Land Unit, by a former Admin¬ 
istrative Officer in Kenya, which was issued in advance 
because of current interest in Kikuyu affairs. The 
four closely related tribal groups of Kikuyu, Meru, 
Chuka, and Embu in this Unit have in common the 
political organization of grouping according to age— 
age-sets for the boys at the time of initiation, regiments 
of the young men, generations of the elders. The 
writer explains in great detail these systems and their 
social and political functions, giving terms in the 
tribal languages. His account is of traditional society, 
though at the end he includes some orders issued 
during the thirties. The entire study is pre-Mau Mau. 

1330. Leakey, Louis S. B. Kenya, contrasts and 

problems. London, Methuen, 1936. 189 p. 

DT434.E2L32 


1331. - Mau Mau and the Kikuyu. London, 

Methuen, 1952. 114 p. illus. American 

edition, New York, John Day, 1954. 

DT429.L4 

1332. - Defeating Mau Mau. London, Me¬ 

thuen, 1954. 151 p. DT429.L39 

Dr. Leakey, the archeologist and Director of the 
Coryndon Museum of Nairobi, is the son of mission¬ 
aries, born and bred among the Kikuyu people, and 
one of the few Europeans who speak the Kikuyu 
language with full understanding. His prewar book 
was a simply presented analysis of the country and the 
dangers of the culture contacts for the African tribes¬ 
men. With the outbreak of Mau Mau, his Mau Mau 
and the Kikuyu was hailed as giving the best interpre¬ 
tation available of Kikuyu custom, ceremonies, and 
mentality, and the dissatisfactions—economic, reli¬ 
gious, social, and political—which led to the out¬ 
break. The later book, written at the height of the 
Emergency, is largely an analysis of the Mau Mau 
doctrines, the “hymns” parodying Christian hymns 
and using the name of Kenyatta instead of Christ, the 
oath ceremonies, and the religious character of the 
movement. His last chapters discuss the handicaps of 
the security forces, and the hoped-for reforms. Among 
the needs to which he gives special emphasis are a 
change in mission teaching from the doctrinal ap¬ 
proach to a simple faith based on the teachings of 
Christ, and a common language. 

Of the spate of books that appeared from 1953 to 1956 
in connection with Mau Mau, there might be mentioned, in 
addition to Garothers and the Corfield Report (nos. 1313, 
1314) J. F. Lipscomb’s White Africans and We Built a Coun¬ 
try (London, Faber & Faber, 1955. 172 p., 214 p.), which 

voice the white settler position, and four which stress African 
interests: Mbiyu Koinange, The People of Kenya Speak for 
Themselves (Detroit, Kenya Publication Fund, 1955. 115 

p.) ; Peter Evans, Law and Disorder; or, Scenes of Life in 
Kenya (London, Seeker & Warburg, 1956. 296 p.), by an 

Irish lawyer who had attended the trial of Kenyatta and had 
been evicted from the country following his investigations 
of European “atrocities”; and a journalistic analysis by 
Donovan H. Rawcliffe, The Struggle for Kenya (London, 
Gollancz, 1954. 189 p.). 

1333. Leys, Norman. The colour bar in East Africa. 

London, Hogarth Press, 1941. 160 p. 

DT429.L45 

Dr. Leys, a physician who had spent many years in 
East Africa, wrote several controversial books express¬ 
ing his opposition to white settlement and development 


207 





of Kenya. His first, Kenya (London, L. & V. Woolf, 
1924. 409 p.), was semihistorical; A Last Chance in 
Kenya (Hogarth Press, 1931. 173 p.) developed 

further his conviction that the contact of European 
with native cultures is detrimental to the African; the 
1941 work, which had considerable influence on Fa¬ 
bian opinion in England, argued that the racial in¬ 
justice being wrought by the small white minority 
was akin to Nazi doctrine. 

1334. Mboya, Tom. The Kenya question: an African 

answer. Foreword by Margery Perham. 

London, Fabian Colonial Bureau, 1956. 

48 p. (Fabian tract 302) 

HX11.F25, no. 302 
A pamphlet written by Mboya when for 3 years he 
had been General Secretary of the Kenya Federation 
of Labour, traveling abroad as a trade union repre¬ 
sentative, and in 1956 holding a labor scholarship for 
study at Oxford. He here examined the Emergency 
and the political situation from the viewpoint of the 
educated and responsible African. The foreword by 
Margery Perham stated forcefully requirements for a 
new British approach to the problems of Kenya. 

1335. Orde-Brown, G. St. J. The vanishing tribes 

of Kenya. London, Seeley, Service, 1925. 

284 p. DT429.08 

Major Orde-Brown based this book on his adminis¬ 
trative experiences in Kenya from 1909-16, often 
among Africans who had never before seen a white 
man. The subtitle reads “A description of the manners 
and customs of some of the primitive and interesting 
tribes dwelling on the vast southern slopes of Mount 
Kenya, and their fast disappearing native methods of 
life.” His study is impersonal, comprehensive, and 
interesting, covering among other tribes the aboriginal 
Chuka, the Embu, Mwimbe, Kikuyu, and Akamba. 

1336. Rake, Alan. Tom Mboya: young man of new 

Africa. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 
1962. 264 p. illus. DT434.E26M36 
Laudatory biography of the Kenya labor leader, 
constituting a history of recent Kenya politics. The 
presentation by the East African correspondent for 
Drum is journalistic. Chronological appendix and 
glossary of political parties, trade unions, and other 
organizations. 


1337. Ross, William MacGregor. Kenya from 

within; a short political history. London, 
G. Allen & Unwin, 1927. 486 p. 

DT434.E2R6 

One of the most interesting of the older books on 
the history of Kenya and its development into a “white 
man’s country.” The writer, an engineer for over 20 
years in East Africa, had for most of this time been 
Director of Public Works in the East Africa Pro¬ 
tectorate, later Kenya Colony. His narrative is from 
a diary, newspaper files, and other firsthand informa¬ 
tion. His sympathies were with the Africans rather 
than the colonists, in accordance with his understand¬ 
ing of his role: “It should not be beyond the wit of 
Britain, with centuries of colonizing effort behind her, 
to ensure the emergence of happy families of Africans 
in Kenya. It is with that end in view that Britain’s 
servants are there.” This and Dr. Norman Leys’ book 
(see 1333) are often cited by African nationalist 
writers. 

1338. Wagner, Gunter. The Bantu of North Kavi- 

rondo. London, New York, Published for 
the International African Institute by the 
Oxford University Press, 1949-56. 2 v. 
plates, maps. DT434.E2W3 

Broadly conceived ethnological survey of the Bantu 
tribes living among Nilotes and Nilo-Hamitic tribes 
in the North Kavirondo District of Nyanza Province 
of southwestern Kenya, northeast of Lake Victoria 
between the Gulf of Kavirondo and Mount Elgon. 
The first volume (1949. 511 p.) examines general 

aspects, then analyzes in detail kinship structures, 
magico-religious rites, “The Rites of Passage” (birth, 
childhood, initiation, courtship and marriage, death). 
The second volume, published posthumously, was 
edited by Lucy P. Mair (1956. 184 p.). It concludes 

the cultural analysis of these tribes, Logoli, Vugusu, 
and others, who are considered the most northerly 
representatives of the Bantu. 

1339. Wood, Susan Buxton. Kenya: the tensions 

of progress. 2d ed. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1962. 135 p. 

illus. DT434.E2W58 1962 

A survey of modem history and analysis of present 
political forces, prepared for the Institute of Race 
Relations. The first edition came out in 1960; the 
second edition has added material bringing the pic¬ 
ture up through 1961. 


208 


Tanganyika 


1340. Brown, G. Gordon, and A. McD. Bruce 

Hutt. Anthropology in action: an experi¬ 
ment in the Iringa District of the Iringa 
Province, Tanganyika Territory. London, 
Published for the International Institute of 
African Languages & Cultures by the Oxford 
University Press, H. Milford, 1935. 272 p. 
map. DT449.I7B8 

Joint study by an anthropologist and an adminis¬ 
trator, attempting to find how far anthropological 
knowledge could be used in settling administrative 
problems among the Hehe tribe. 

1341. Cameron, Sir Donald. My Tanganyika serv¬ 

ice and some Nigeria. London, G. Allen & 
Unwin. 1939. 293 p. DT444.G3 

The author was Governor of the Mandated Terri¬ 
tory of Tanganyika from 1925 to 1931, then returned 
to Nigeria, where he had previously served for seven¬ 
teen years, as Governor for 4 years. This book, writ¬ 
ten as a personal experience narrative, is essentially a 
study of the British practice of Native Administration. 

1342. Chidzero, Bernard T. G. Tanganyika and 

international trusteeship. London, New 
York, Oxford University Press, 1961. 286 p. 

maps. JQ3513.1961.C47 

Bibliography: p. 277-282. 

History and analysis of the part played by the United 
Nations trusteeship in the progress of Tanganyika to 
independence. This scholarly and comprehensive 
study had been prepared by the Rhodesian author for 
his doctoral thesis at McGill University in 1958, and 
was subsequently worked on at Nuffield College, Ox¬ 
ford, for 2 years, being published just before the Tan¬ 
ganyika Constitutional Conference of March 1961. 
Dr. Chidzero is now a member of the United Nations 
Economic Commission for Africa. 

1343. Cory, Hans. The Ntemi; traditional rites in 

connection with the burial, election, en¬ 
thronement and magic powers of a Sukuma 
chief. London, Macmillan, 1951. 83 p. 
(Custom and tradition in East Africa) 

GN495.5.C6 

1344. - Sukuma law and custom. London, 

New York, Published for the International 
African Institute by the Oxford University 
Press, 1953. 194 p. DLC-LL 


By the Government Sociologist of Tanganyika Ter¬ 
ritory, these two studies attempt to record the rites and 
customary law of the Sukuma, a Bantu tribe of north¬ 
western Tanganyika, in the traditional form and 
changes under British administration. They are based 
on extensive researches and conferences with Sukuma 
chieftains. Another analysis of this tribe included 
suggestions for measures that might bring more democ¬ 
racy into the Native Authority system: The Indigenous 
Political System of the Sukuma and Proposals for Po¬ 
litical Reform (Nairobi, Published for the East African 
Institute of Social Research by the Eagle Press, 1954. 
130 p. East African studies no. 2). An earlier work 
by Mr. Cory in collaboration with M. M. Hartnoll had 
been of the same character, Customary Law of the 
Haya Tribe (Tanganyika Territory) (London, Pub¬ 
lished for the International African Institute by P. 
Lund, Humphries, 1945. 299 p., 45 fold, tables). 

Other intensive studies by Mr. Cory have been on the art 
of the Sukuma and other tribes- An album of photographs 
and watercolor drawings, Wall-Paintings by Snake Charmers 
in Tanganyika (New York, Grove Press, 1953. 99 p.), has 

a short introductory text explaining a secret society of the 
Sukuma with comments on the plates. In 1956 a work was 
brought out in handsome format, African Figurines , Their 
Ceremonial Use in Puberty Rites in Tanganyika (London, 
Faber & Faber, 176 p.). The author explained that he had 
concentrated rather on the little clay figures than on the 
initiation ceremonies of the four tribes from which he had 
collected these models, and that the work is consequently “an 
illustrated catalogue rather than a treatise.” 

1345. Culwick, Arthur T., and G. M. Culwick. 

Ubena of the Rivers, with a chapter by 
Mtema Towegale Kiwanga. London, Allen 
& Unwin, 1935. 444 p. DT443.C8 

A study of the Bena tribe (the people are the 
Wabena) in the land of Ubena in Tanganyika, written 
not as academic anthropology but as a picture of the 
life and outlook of a typical Bantu people. The 
authors were English anthropologists who did long 
fieldwork for their interesting book. It includes a 
historical chapter written by a chief, “The Kingdom 
of the Wakinimanga.” 

1346. Dundas, Anne. Beneath African glaciers. 

London, H. F. & G. Witherby, 1924. 238 p. 

DT440.D8 

“The humours, tragedies and demands of an East 
African government station as experienced by an offi¬ 
cial’s wife; with some personal views on native life 
and customs.” This book, now almost 40 years old, 


209 



is still among the most informative and interesting 
descriptions of life in the interior of Tanganyika. The 
writer was wife of the Chief Commissioner of Tangan¬ 
yika whose anthropological study was published in the 
same year. 

1347. Dundas, Charles. Kilimanjaro and its people. 

London, Witherby, 1924. 349 p. 

DT449.K4D8 

The late Sir Charles Dundas, who retired after a 
distinguished career in the Colonial Service in 1945, 
had gone out as an assistant District Commissioner to 
the East African Protectorate in 1908. In 1920 he 
became Chief Commissioner in Tanganyika. He was 
also a Fellow of the Royal Anthropological Institute. 
This book has as subtitle, “A history of the Wachagga, 
their laws, customs and legends, together with some 
account of the highest mountain in Africa.” It is writ¬ 
ten in informal style, including history of the Chagga 
people, their religion, magic, mores, legends, and 
proverbs. 

The Wachaga tribe were studied in several early German 
works, also in one presented as a doctoral thesis in English: 
Otto F. Raum, Chaga Childhood: A Description of Indige¬ 
nous Education in an East African Tribe (London, New York, 
Published for the International Institute of African Languages 
and Cultures by the Oxford University Press, 1940. 422 p.) 

1348. Economic Survey Mission to Tanganyika. 

The economic development of Tanganyika; 
report. Baltimore, Published for the Inter¬ 
national Bank for Reconstruction and De¬ 
velopment by the Johns Hopkins Press, Bal¬ 
timore, 1961. xxviii, 548 p. fold, maps, 
diagrs., tables. HC557.T3E25 

This volume results from a Mission organized at 
the request of the Tanganyika and British Govern¬ 
ments, charged to assess resources and make recom¬ 
mendations regarding the development of Tanganyika 
and to indicate the financial implications thereof. The 
field survey was carried out in the summer of 1959 
and the study prepared during that winter, with ad¬ 
ditional data gathered in Tanganyika in the summer 
of 1960. The extended report begins with general and 
budgetary examination of the Tanganyika economy. 
Eight chapters, the bulk of the text, deal with agricul¬ 
tural and livestock development; three chapters con¬ 
sider manufacturing, power, mining, transport and 
communications, and the expanding tourist trade, and 
a long section is devoted to educational policy. Final 
chapters on the monetary system and the techniques 
(mechanics) of planning are followed by several an¬ 
nexes of background information, supplementary 


statistical tables, and last a summary of the recom¬ 
mendations made by the Mission. There is a full sub¬ 
ject index. 

1349. Freeman-Grenville, G. S. P. The medieval 

history of the coast of Tanganyika. London, 
Oxford University Press, 1962. 238 p. illus. 

DT444.F7 

Includes bibliography. 

1350. -, ed. The East African coast: select doc¬ 

uments from the first to the earlier 19th cen¬ 
tury. London, Oxford University Press, 1962. 
314 p. DT365.F7 

“The arrival of two good books about the ancient 
and exciting history of the East African seaboard will 
be a welcome event to everyone who is interested in 
Africa ...” (Review by Basil Davidson in West Africa, 
no. 2387, Mar. 2, 1963, p. 243). 

1351. George, Betty. Education for Africans in 

Tanganyika: a preliminary survey. Wash¬ 
ington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1961. 97 p. 
(U.S. Office of Education. Bulletin 1960, no. 
19). L111.A6 1960, no. 19 

A monograph by the specialist on Africa in the Di¬ 
vision of International Education of the U.S. Office 
of Education. The scope of her survey includes back¬ 
ground and full details of organization of education, 
its administration and finance, the current systems of 
primary, middle and secondary, vocational and techni¬ 
cal training, teacher training, and higher education. 

1352. George, John B. “How stable is Tangan¬ 

yika?” Africa report, v. 8, Mar. 1963: 3-9, 
12. DT1.A217, v. 8 

A meaningful analysis of the organization and effec¬ 
tiveness of TANU in the administration of independ¬ 
ent Tanganyika. The author writes from recent first¬ 
hand observation. 

1353. Gray, Robert F. The Sonjo of Tanganyika; 

an anthropological study of an irrigation- 
based society. London, New York, Published 
for the International African Institute by the 
Oxford University Press, 1963. 181 p. 

GN659.S6G7 

Not yet available for examination. 

1354. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Report ... to the 

General Assembly of the United Nations on 
the administration of Tanganyika. 1920- 
60. London, H.M. Stationery off. illus., 
fold, maps, annual J801.N15 


210 



The Report published each year by the Colonial 
Office as Administering Authority for the Trust Terri¬ 
tory of Tanganyika ended with the 1960 edition (Lon¬ 
don, 1961). It was in two volumes, the first the 
General Report , the second Statistics (170, 142 p.). 
For other British and United Nations documents re¬ 
garding Tanganyika, see the Library of Congress bibli¬ 
ography, Official Publications of East Africa. II. 
Tanganyika (no. 1268). 

1355. Gulliver, P. H. Labour migration in a rural 

economy. Kampala, East African Institute 
of Social Research, 1955. 48 p. (East Af¬ 
rican studies, no. 6) HD8799.T3G8 

1356. -- Land tenure and social change among 

the Nyakyusa: an essay in applied anthro- 
pology in South-west Tanganyika. Kampala, 
East African Institute of Social Research, 
1958. 47 p. illus. (East African studies, 
no. 11) GN489.1.G8 

As Government Sociologist of Tanganyika the au¬ 
thor was concerned with administrative application of 
sociological findings regarding the tribes he studied. 
The first of these two papers is on the Ngoni and 
Ndendeuli of Southern Tanganyika, whose men work 
within the territory, living at or near home, but whose 
absences, if only for a few months at a time, seriously 
affect tribal life and rural economy. The second 
paper analyzes changing conditions with special ref¬ 
erence to land shortages among the Nyakyusa of the 
Lake Plains. The last chapter draws conclusions and 
offers suggestions for future agricultural policy. A 
full-scale work by Dr. Gulliver, Social Control in an 
African Society: A Study of the Arusha, Agricultural 
Masai of Northern Tanganyika, is published in 1963 
(London, Routledge & Kegan Paul. 306 p.). 

1357. Handbook of Tanganyika (second edition) 

Edited by J. P. Moffett. Dar es Salaam, 
Govt. Printer, 1958. 703 p. illus., maps. 

DT438.H3 1958 
Completely superseding a first edition of the Hand¬ 
book of Tanganyika published in 1930, this work com¬ 
plements the 1955 Tanganyika: A Review of Its 
Resources and Their Developments (no. 1362) and 
like it is edited by the Government Printer, but is 
not an official publication. The first 150 pages are 
devoted to an outline of history from paleolithic times 
to the midfifties. There follow detailed description 
of the country province by province, and chapters on 


peoples, government, economic and social services, 
natural history, sport, and miscellaneous information 
for visitors. 

1358. Leubuscher, Charlotte. Tanganyika; a 

study of economic policy under mandate. 
London, New York, Printed for the Royal 
Institute of International Affairs by Oxford 
University Press, 1944. 217 p. 

HC557.G5L45 

Study of the League of Nations mandatory system 
and its application in Tanganyika, then a B-mandate 
(i.e., a country not yet close to political independence, 
to be developed for the welfare primarily of the native, 
with equal opportunity given to all nations insofar as 
trade and settlement were concerned). In Part 1, 
Dr. Leubuscher, a British political economist, gave 
background and framework of the League of Nations 
mandates in Africa; in Part 2, she analyzed in detail 
the working of British administration and economic 
development of Tanganyika, formerly German East 
Africa. The final part examined and evaluated re¬ 
sults and future prospects for effective operation of 
the mandates system (changed under the United 
Nations to trusteeship). 

1359. Malcolm, Donald W. Sukumaland: an 

African people and their country; a study of 
land use in Tanganyika. London, New York, 
Published for the International African In¬ 
stitute by the Oxford University Press, 1953. 
224 p. illus., fold. maps. HD1004.T3M3 
Survey of the Sukuma region of Tanganyika by a 
Colonial Officer whose intensive study of land utiliza¬ 
tion in one of the four districts of Sukumaland had led 
to a first edition of this work in 1938, embodying rec¬ 
ommendations that were followed by the Sukuma De¬ 
velopment Organization. In the present edition Mr. 
Malcolm examined the geographical and ethnological 
background of the Sukuma, land ownership and use, 
cattle rights, local government, and the chief problems 
connected with land. There are extensive appendixes, 
including data regarding ground-water, soils, and vege¬ 
tation. 

1360. Mustafa, Sophia. The Tanganyika way. 

London, Oxford University Press, 1962. 
139 p. illus. DT447.M8 1962 

Firsthand account of the achievement of independ¬ 
ence. The author is in 1963 M.P. for Arusha, and the 
first non-African to become a full member of TANU. 


211 





1361. Stahl, Kathleen M. Tanganyika: sail in the 

wilderness. S’Gravenhage,Netherlands, 
Mouton & Co., 1962. 160 p. illus., map. DLG 
A picture of Tanganyika on the eve of independence 
by an economist known for several studies of British 
colonial policy. 

1362. Tanganyika. Tanganyika, a review of its re¬ 

sources and their development. Prepared un¬ 
der the direction of J. F. R. Hill; edited by 
J. P. Moffett. Dar es Salaam, Govt. Printer, 
1955. 924 p. HC517.T3A47 

Bibliography: p. 861-868. 

Edited by the Commissioner for Social Develop¬ 
ment of Tanganyika, this big volume surveyed resources 
and requirements of the territory in close detail. The 
Development Plan, drafted in 1946, had been revised 
in 1950 (dropping the unfortunate groundnuts scheme) 
and was kept under constant review to determine 
priorities. Sections of this reference work, which 
covers widely the land, people, political structure, social 
services, communications, and all phases of production 
and economic life, were prepared largely by the heads 
of departments concerned. There are maps and tables 
throughout, a select bibliography, listing mainly docu¬ 
mentary sources, and an extensive index. 

1363. Tanganyika. Ministry of Commerce and In¬ 

dustry. Commerce and industry in Tan¬ 
ganyika. Dar es Salaam, 1961. 127 p. 

illus. DLC 

Prepared to coincide with independence, this well- 
illustrated pamphlet is addressed to prospective in¬ 
vestors and others interested in the economic future 
of the new nation. 

1364. Taylor, J. Clagett. The political development 

of Tanganyika. Stanford, Calif., Stanford 
University Press, 1963. 254 p. DT444.T3 
Coverage of political history before and under the 
British mandate and trusteeship and the achievement 
of independence. The author is a sincere admirer of 
Nyerere and his “moderate and peaceful method of 
leadership.” 

1365. Wilson, Monica Hunter. Communal rituals 

of the Nyakyusa. London, New York, Pub¬ 
lished for the International African Institute 
by the Oxford University Press, 1959. 228 p. 
illus., maps, geneal. tables, plan. DT443.W5 


1366. - Good company: a study of Nyakyusa 

age-villages. London, New York, Published 
for the International African Institute by the 
Oxford University Press, 1951. 278 p. illus. 

GN490.W5 

Mrs. Wilson and her husband, the late Godfrey Wil¬ 
son, collected ethnological data on the Nyakyusa and 
the Ngonde of the region north of Lake Nyasa in the 
Nyasaland-Tanganyika border between 1934 and 1938. 
These two thorough anthropological studies result from 
that research. 

1367. - The peoples of the Nyasa-Tanganyika 

corridor. Cape Town, University of Cape 
Town, 1958. 75 p. (Communications from 
the School of African Studies, n.s. no. 29) 

DT856.W5 

1368. Winans, Edgar V. Shamhala: the constitution 

of a traditional state. Berkeley and Los An¬ 
geles, University of California Press, 1962. 
180 p. DT443.W53 1962 

By an American anthropologist, this is a specialized 
study of the traditional political organization of a state 
in northwestern Tanganyika. The author cites other 
analyses of African states, giving the work value as a 
text. He outlines the general setting in an introduc¬ 
tory chapter. Professor Goldschmidt reviews the state 
of political theory in anthropological literature in a 
long foreword, characterizing this book as an important 
U.S. contribution to the series of studies of African 
politics begun by British and South African anthro¬ 
pologists. 

1369. Wood, Alan. The groundnut affair. London, 

Bodley Head, 1950. 264 p. 

HD9235.P32G78 

In this book, which went to press in the early sum¬ 
mer of 1950, when the bold experiment in Tanganyika 
was on its last legs under savage attack in Parliament 
and press, a British journalist told in detail the story 
of how the Government adopted a scheme proposed 
by the United Africa Company for a huge enterprise 
of clearing and planting unused land and by mecha¬ 
nized production reaping vast crops of peanuts as a 
substantial contribution to world shortages of essential 
oils and fats, at the same time raising African standards 
of living by giving thousands of natives opportunity 
for well-paid labor, good living conditions, education, 
health, and other social services. The difficulties 
proved insurmountable for a short-term project, nearly 
all the funds allocated for a 6-year program having 


212 




been used up in the first 2 years, and bitter criticism 
was aroused. About the time of publication of Mr. 
Wood’s book it was announced by the Minister of 
Food that the attempt would be abandoned. 

The scheme was officially announced in A Plan for the 
Mechanized Production of Groundnuts in East and Central 
Africa (Gt. Brit. Ministry of Food, Feb. 1947, 48 p. Cmd. 
7030), the so-called Wakefield Report. Progress reports were 
issued. The British Information Services in New York ex¬ 
plained it to the American public in a brochure, Not Just 
Peanuts (1948. 28 p.). In 1948 a government-sponsored 

public corporation, the Overseas Food Corporation, was cre¬ 
ated to administer the job; its Report and Accounts were pub¬ 
lished by H. M. Stationery Office from 1949 to 1955. The 
final disposition of the groundnut plan, later converted to a 
much smaller-scale program of experiment in land clearance 
and mechanized agriculture, was explained in 1951 and 1954 
by the Ministry of Food in two Command Papers, Future 
of the Overseas Food Corporation (19, 10 p. Cmd. 8125, 
9185). The scheme was taken over in 1955 by the Tangan¬ 
yika Agricultural Corporation. For further details see 
Freitag, no. 423). 

1370. Wright, Fergus C. African consumers in 
Nyasaland and Tanganyika; an inquiry into 
the distribution and consumption of commodi¬ 
ties among Africans carried out in 1952-53. 
London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1955. 116 p. 
tables, maps. (Colonial Office. Colonial 
research studies, no. 17) JV33.G7A48, no. 17 
This investigation covered consumers’ cash expendi¬ 
tures and cash resources (seldom enough to afford a 
bicycle, often “hoarded”), the commodities the Afri¬ 


cans are offered, the control of trade, and the traders, 
Arab, Indian, and African. Among conclusions it is 
observed that the peasant Africans are more tempted 
by “consumer services,” transportation, medical and 
educational services, etc., than by trade goods. Ap¬ 
pendixes give various types of consumer statistics. 

1371. Young, Roland A., and Henry Fosbrooke. 
Smoke in the hills; political tension in the 
Morogoro District of Tanganyika. Evanston, 
Northwestern University Press, 1960. 212 p. 

illus. (Northwestern University [Evanston, 
Ill.] African studies, no. 4) DT449.M6Y6 

Study of the Luguru, a mountain people of the 
Morogoro District of east central Tanganyika, with 
special reference to political change. The title refers 
to the trouble that developed in connection with at¬ 
tempted government improvements in land use; riots 
resulted from a program of soil conservation which 
called for the construction of bench terraces, and a 
struggle arose between rival groups around the Na¬ 
tive Authority and the old hereditary rainmaker leader. 
Although this episode forms the central theme, it is 
treated in a single chapter, the rest of the book being 
analysis of evolving social and political patterns of 
Luguru life. The authors are respectively a political 
scientist and a sociologist formerly connected with the 
Tanganyika Government. The English edition was 
published with the title, Land and Politics among the 
Luguru of Tanganyika. 


Uganda 


1372. Apter, David E. The political kingdom in 
Uganda; a study in bureaucratic nationalism. 
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 
1961. 498 p. illus., maps. DT434.U25A6 
A case study in political theory. Dr. Apter in a 
book of 1955 had examined the development of na¬ 
tional government in Ghana (see no. 588) through a 
system based on charisma though mobilized in terms 
of British parliamentary democracy. Here he ana¬ 
lyzes in depth the very different pattern of the course 
toward self-government in Uganda, where the stub¬ 
born traditionalism of the kingdom of Buganda is the 
chief political factor. This traditionalism, he shows, 
has made modernization and change its characteristic, 
but clings to the autocratic authority. Dr. Apter 
traces the rise and development of the conflicts which 


culminated in the deportation of the Kabaka and are 
now impeding progress toward unified independent 
state. The book is reviewed at some length in Africa 
Report of October 1961. 

The opposition in Britain to the banishment of Mutesa II 
was voiced in the first half of a book by the Observer Afri¬ 
canist, Colin Legum: Must We Lose Africa? (London, W. 
H. Allen, 1954. 264 p.). In the second half the author 

stressed his fears regarding the newly established Central 
African Federation. 

1373. Beattie, John. Bunyoro, an African kingdom. 
New York, Holt, 1960. 86 p. illus. (Case 

studies in cultural anthropology) 

DT434.U2B4 

Concise and comprehensive summary of the life of 
this tribe of Western Uganda. The author, a British 


213 


anthropologist who had at one time been an adminis¬ 
trative officer in Tanganyika, designed his clear presen¬ 
tation as background reading for courses in African 
ethnology. 

1374. Cook, Sir Albert R. Uganda memories (1897- 

1940) . Kampala, The Uganda Society, 1945. 
415 p. 

Reminiscences of a doctor who had given his life 
to missionary work in Uganda, where in 1897 he 
opened a pioneer mission hospital from which has 
grown the Mengo Hospital, a world center for the 
study of tropical medicine. Much of the narrative is 
concerned with the exciting and terrible events of the 
early days, including the Sudanese Mutiny of 1897-98, 
and the first appearance of the tsetse-fly in Uganda, 
where between 1901 and 1906, 200,000 natives died of 
sleeping sickness. 

1375. Cott, Hugh Bamford. Uganda in black and 

white. With a foreword by Sir Andrew 
Cohen. London, Macmillan, 1959. 231 p. 
109 illus. DT434.U2C6 

Full-page pen-and-ink drawings of people, scenes, 
carvings, etc., with interpretative captions on facing 
pages. The whole forms a vividly descriptive journey 
through the country, revealing typical features of cul¬ 
ture of chief tribal groups. 

1376. The Economist, London. Power in Uganda, 

1957-1970; a study of economic growth pros¬ 
pects for Uganda with special reference to the 
potential demand for electricity. Prepared 
by the Economist Intelligence Unit. London, 
1957. 197 p. illus. HD9685.U3E3 

1377. - Uganda: the background to invest¬ 

ment. Prepared for the Uganda Government, 
by the Economist Intelligence Unit. London, 
1962. 63 p. 

1378. Elkan, Walter. An African labour force; two 

case studies in East African factory employ¬ 
ment. Kampala, East African Institute of 
Social Research, 1956. 60 p. tables. (East 
African studies, no. 7) HD8039.T62U353 

Social survey of employees of two factories of the 
East African Tobacco Company in Kampala and Jinja, 
Uganda. Labor turnover, absenteeism, working con¬ 
ditions, wages, employment of women, consultations 
of workers and management in the absence of trade 


unions are among aspects treated. A number of the 24 
statistical tables include breakdown by tribal com¬ 
position. The writer, a social scientist, had done his 
research as a Fellow of the Institute. In the same series 
Dr. Elkan edited the posthumously published mono¬ 
graph of a colleague, Philip G. Powesland, who had 
taught economics at Makerere College: Economic 
Policy and Labour: A Study in Uganda’s Economic 
History (Kampala, 1957. 81 p. East African studies, 
no. 10). A later monograph by Dr. Elkan is also an 
analysis of labor trends and problems in Uganda: 
Migrants and Proletarians: Urban Labour in the Eco¬ 
nomic Development of Uganda (London, New York, 
Nairobi, Published on behalf of the East African In¬ 
stitute of Social Research by Oxford University Press, 
1960. 149 p.). 

1379. Fallers, Lloyd A. Bantu bureaucracy; a study 

of integration and conflict in the political in¬ 
stitutions of an East African people. Cam¬ 
bridge [Eng.] Published for the East African 
Institute of Social Research by W. Heffer, 
1956. 283 p. JS7533.A6N3 

Study in the field of social anthropology by an 
American scholar who had worked at the East African 
Institute of Social Research under a Fulbright grant. 
The people he discussed are the Soga, in the Busoga 
District of the Eastern Province of Uganda, a society 
of small peasant farmers whose political system has 
changed in the past half-century to “an amalgam of 
traditional indigenous structures and modem Western 
ones.” The book was reviewed by Lucy P. Mair in 
Africa of April 1959 as a brilliant contribution to polit¬ 
ico-social analysis, although she considered his con¬ 
clusions veiled in “a smoke screen of terminology,” 
typical of “the new scholasticism.” 

1380. Girling, F. K. The Acholi of Uganda. 

London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1960. 238 p. 
([Gt. Brit.] Colonial Office. Colonial re¬ 
search studies, no. 30) JV33.G7A48 

Based on a doctoral thesis in social anthropology, 
this is a study in semitechnical style of a Nilotic tribe, 
over 200,000 of whom live in Uganda, in separate 
development from the much smaller group over the 
border in the Sudan. Appendixes include explanation 
of “The Map of Acholiland” from Emin Pasha in 
1882 to the present, samples of villages, lineages, and 
genealogies. 


214 



1381. Gt. Brit. Uganda; report of the Uganda Con¬ 

stitutional Conference, 1961, and text of the 
agreed draft of a new Buganda agreement 
initialed in London on 9th October, 1961. 
London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1961. 73 p. 
(Cmnd. 1523) DLG 

1382. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Report on Uganda. 

1946-60. London, H.M. Stationery Off. 
illus., map. annual. ( Its Colonial annual 
reports) DT434.U2G57 

The last issue of the annual report prepared by the 
Information Department of Uganda for the Colonial 
Office was that for 1960, published in 1961, the year 
before Britain turned over the reins of government to 
the newly independent country. Like earlier reports, 
this volume includes an extensive classified reading 
list, with a separate section for official documents. For 
other reports and papers of Uganda, many of which 
will presumably continue to appear in much the same 
form, see the Library of Congress list of official publi¬ 
cations of Uganda (no. 1268). 

1383. Hawkins, Edward K. Roads and road trans¬ 

port in an underdeveloped country: a case 
study of Uganda. London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1962. 263 p. (Colonial research 

studies, no. 32) fold, map, diagrs. 

JV33.G7A48, no. 32 

A thorough technical study. 

1384. Haydon, E. S. Law and justice in Buganda. 

London, Butterworth, 1960. 342 p. (Butter- 
worth’s African law series, no. 2) DLC-LL 

1385. Ingham, Kenneth. The making of modern 

Uganda. London, G. Allen & Unwin 1958. 
303 p. illus. DT434.U2I5 

Straightforward history of Uganda from the first 
European penetration in the 1860’s to the present. 
The author is a history professor at Makerere. 

1386. Ingrams, William Harold. Uganda; a crisis 

of nationhood. London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1960. 365 p. illus. (The Corona 
library) DT434.U2I52 

Includes bibliography. 

One of a series prepared under Colonial Office 
auspices as authoritative popular presentations of spe¬ 
cific countries. Mr. Ingrams had gathered the ma¬ 
terial during long visits to what he speaks of as “the 


Uganda of Cohen,” during the years (1952-57) when 
Governor Sir Andrew Cohen, the former head of the 
African Division of the Colonial Office, was directing 
vigorous advances in educational, economic, and polit¬ 
ical development of the colony. The first part, 
“Learning about Uganda,” is descriptive and historical, 
in the nature of a regional guide. Part 2, “Thinking 
about Uganda,” discusses the progress of the country 
toward nationhood. Much of the problem is shown 
as centering around Buganda’s political obduracy; the 
Cohen period had included the exile and return of the 
Kabaka. 

1387. International Bank for Reconstruction 

and Development. The economic develop¬ 
ment of Uganda. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins 
Press, 1962. 475 p. maps, charts, tables. 

HC517.U2I5 

The report of a mission which was requested by the 
Uganda and British Governments and organized by 
the World Bank, and which surveyed and analyzed the 
economy of Uganda, making recommendations for a 
5-year development program, 1961/62-1965/66, with 
particular attention to priorities for expenditure. The 
nine-man team was headed by Professor Edward S. 
Mason of Harvard University and included expert ad¬ 
visers from five nations on economics, health, industry, 
transport, agriculture, and education. Except for a 10- 
page introduction, the entire focus is on present 
economic conditions, priorities, and approaches for 
development. In three parts, the first a general re¬ 
port; the second a program for agriculture aimed at 
diversifying the two-crop production of cotton and cof¬ 
fee by improvement of livestock, fisheries, and forestry. 
Part 3 sets forth programs in other sectors—mining, 
manufacture, and the tourist trade, transport, com¬ 
munications and electric power, education and man¬ 
power, health, housing and community development. 
There are statistical annexes. 

1388. Jabavu, Noni. Drawn in colour; African con¬ 

trasts. London, J. Murray, 1960. 208 p. 

DT761.J25 

A personal narrative by a South African writer of a 
distinguished Xhosa family, now living in England, 
who after a sad return to her home in the Transkei, 
visited a sister married to a Ugandan. Her distressed 
impressions of life in Uganda show differences of out¬ 
look between Africans. The book has been on best¬ 
seller lists. 


215 





1389. Johnston, Sir Harry H. The Uganda pro¬ 

tectorate; an attempt to give some descrip¬ 
tion of the physical geography, botany, 
zoology, anthropology, languages, and history 
of the territories under British protection in 
East Central Africa, between the Congo Free 
State and the Rift Valley and between the 
first degree of south latitude and the fifth 
degree of north latitude. 2d ed., with pref¬ 
atory chapter giving additional matter. With 
510 illustrations from drawings and photo¬ 
graphs by the author and others, 48 full-page 
colored plates by the author, and 9 maps by 
J. G. Bartholomew and the author. New 
York, Dodd, Mead, 1904. 2 v. col. front., 

illus., col. plates, ports., fold. maps. (Paged 
continuously) DT434.U2J72 

Appendix to Chapter XIII, “Anthropology,” and to chap¬ 
ter XIV, “Pygmies and Forest Negroes,” by Dr. F. Shrubsall. 

Old standard work on Uganda by the explorer, 
naturalist, and empire-building administrator who 
served as Special Commissioner to the Uganda Protec¬ 
torate from 1899 to 1902. Sir Harry Johnston nego¬ 
tiated the Agreement of 1900 with Buganda which 
provided for the kingdom’s administrative autonomy. 

1390. Kendall, Henry. Town planning in Uganda; 

a brief description of the efforts made by gov¬ 
ernment to control development of urban 
areas from 1915 to 1955. London, Published 
by the Crown Agents for Overseas Govern¬ 
ments and Administrations, 1955. 90 p. 

NA9277.U35H4 

Explanation of town planning schemes for the new 
urban areas into which African workers are crowding, 
by the Director of Town Planning for the Protectorate. 
The quarto volume is handsomely printed, with draw¬ 
ings, maps, plans, and diagrams reproduced in color, 
and a section of photographs. A related survey by an 
official of the Economic Commission for Africa, V. L. 
Griffith, was brought out as a United Nations docu¬ 
ment: Enquiry into Community Development in 
Uganda (NewYork, 1960. 86p. E/CN.14/81). 

1391. Kyagambiddwa, Joseph. African music from 

the source of the Nile. New York, Praeger, 
1955. 255 p. illus. (Books that matter) 

ML3760.K9 

Includes music. 

By an African Catholic scholar from Uganda who 
had been studying and working in the United States. 
He begins with short notes on African history and an 


explanation of Ganda music (the music of the Ba- 
ganda). Then about 200 pages of the big photoprinted 
volume give examples of Ganda songs, with music, the 
shorter ones with words in the vernacular, poetic 
translations in English, and explanation. 

The language of the Baganda, spoken in Buganda, is ex¬ 
plained for English students in a textbook, A Luganda Gram¬ 
mar, by Ethel O. Ashton and others (London, New York, 
Longmans, Green, 1954. 516 p. PL8201 .A8). 

1392. Lawrence, J. C. D. The Iteso; fifty years of 

change in a Nilo-Hamitic tribe of Uganda. 
London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1957. xx, 280 p. illus., maps. DT434.U2L35 

Includes melodies with words in the Teso language and 
English translation. 

Bibliography: p.272-275. 

Study of the Iteso, the second largest tribe of Uganda, 
who live in Teso District of the Eastern Province and 
across the border in Nyanza Province of Kenya. The 
writer, who disclaims any knowledge of anthropology, 
had been District Commissioner of Teso for 5 years 
and began the book as a record of customary law, based 
on the cases that had come before him. It was gradu¬ 
ally expanded to include a history of the district, and 
an attempt at a comparative survey of present-day and 
pre-British Teso life and culture. Although the semi- 
nomadic life of pastoralists typical of the Nilo-Hamitic 
family has largely changed to a semiagricultural society, 
the author found that “The rapid assimilation of 
European learning, techniques and living fashions have 
had virtually no effect on the culture of the tribe.” 

1393. Low, Donald Anthony, and R. Cranford 

Pratt. Buganda and British overrule, 1900- 
1955; two studies. London, New York, Pub¬ 
lished on behalf of East African Institute of 
Social Research by Oxford University Press, 
1960. 373 p. JQ2951.B8L6 

In this two-part work an Australian historian (Low) 
and a Canadian professor of political science joined 
forces under a Carnegie Corporation grant to the East 
African Institute of Social Research. The first part 
by Dr. Low is the history of the Uganda Agreement 
of 1900 (text in App. II) made by Sir Harry H. John¬ 
ston with the Regent and leading chiefs of Buganda. 
The second part, by Professor Pratt, studies analytically 
the evolution of the policy of indirect rule in Uganda. 
Appendix I reviews the “major drama” of the deporta¬ 
tion and return of the Kabaka in 1953-55. Docu¬ 
mentation largely from official papers is shown in 
footnotes. A paper by Dr. Low, Political Parties in 
Uganda, 1949-62, is published by the Institute of 


216 


Commonwealth Studies of the University of London 
(London, Athlone Press, 1962. 58 p. Commonwealth 
Papers, 8). The author had spent most of the fifties 
lecturing at Makerere College and simultaneously 
writing as correspondent for The Times. Thus much 
of his information had been collected at firsthand. 

1394. Mair, Lucy P. An African people in the 

twentieth century. London, G. Routledge. 
1934. xvi, 300 p. illus. 

DT434.U2M3 1934 

Ethnological study of the Baganda, prepared by Dr. 
Mair as her thesis at the University of London. She 
had carried out her studies as a pupil of Malinowski. 

1395. Middleton, John. Lugbara religion: ritual 

and authority among an East African people. 
London, New York, Published for the Inter¬ 
national African Institute by the Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1960. 276 p. illus. GN470.M5 
A “sociological analysis of the place of ritual and 
belief in Lugbara social life.” The Lugbara, a Su- 
danic-speaking people, live in the West Nile District 
of Uganda and across the Nile-Congo divide in the 
Belgian Congo. They worship the dead; ancestors, 
ghosts, oracles, and witches form the stuff of Dr. 
Middleton’s analysis of a representative family cluster, 
which, though the subject of a scholarly review by I. 
M. Lewis in Africa of July 1961 (p. 290), makes inter¬ 
esting reading understandable to the layman. 

1396. Mukwaya, A. B. Land tenure in Buganda; 

present-day tendencies. Nairobi, Published 
for the East African Institute of Social Re¬ 
search by the Eagle Press, 1953. 79 p. (East 
African studies, no. 1) HD990.U43B87 

This paper is based on a study of 98 estates in Bu¬ 
ganda, illustrating the special system of land tenure 
through the history of their subdivision by inheritance, 
gift, and sale. 

1397. Munger, Edwin S. Relational patterns of 

Kampala, Uganda. Chicago, University of 
Chicago Press, 1951. 165 p. (Dept, of 

Geography. Research paper no. 21) 

H31.C514, no. 21 

Monograph for which fieldwork was done on a Ful- 
bright Research grant, the first given for study in a 
British colony. Dr. Munger’s headquarters in Uganda 
were at Makerere College, the leading educational 
institution in East Africa, located on the outskirts of the 
capital of Buganda, Kampala, the most important 


town of Uganda, which forms the subject of this de¬ 
tailed analysis. Dr. Munger examined physical, 
politico-economic, and social background of the city, 
and its relationships with the rest of Uganda, with 
Kenya and Tanganyika, and with the other neighbor¬ 
ing countries of Africa. 

1398. Richards, Audrey I., ed. Economic develop¬ 
ment and tribal change; a study of immigrant 
labour in Buganda. Cambridge, Published 
for the East African Institute of Social Re¬ 
search by W. Heffer. [1952?] 301 p. illus., 
maps. HD8799.U4R5 

Bibliography: p. 292-294. 

Dr. Richards, Director of the East African Institute 
of Social Research, edited this volume resulting from 
research carried out in 1950 and 1951 and utilizing 
material from earlier surveys as well as new field in¬ 
vestigations. It covers the history and extent of im¬ 
migration from the neighboring countries—chiefly 
Ruanda-Urundi, where the poorer tribes are attracted 
by the prospects of working for the comparatively 
wealthy cotton and coffee-producing Ganda farmers. 
In particular, the study was focused on the sociological 
aspects of absorption of these immigrants into different 
tribal areas of Uganda. The contributors are sociolo¬ 
gists and economists, J. M. Fortt, A. B. Mukwaya, P. 
Powesland, Dr. Richards, and A. W. Southall. 

1399. Sofer, Cyril, and Rhona Sofer. Jinja trans¬ 
formed; a social survey of a multiracial town¬ 
ship. Kampala, East African Institute of 
Social Research, 1955. 120 p. (East African 
studies no. 4) HN800.J5S6 

Jinja, at the source of the Nile in the Eastern Prov¬ 
ince of Uganda, mushroomed after the Second World 
War because of the great hydroelectric power scheme 
of the Owens Falls Dam, and was in 1952 a modem 
manufacturing town of over 20,000—Africans, Asians, 
and Europeans. The focus of attention in this study 
by two sociologists trained in Cape Town is the con¬ 
flict of interests of the three races. In their analysis 
they have used standard sampling statistical methods. 
They emphasize that a satisfactory municipal adminis¬ 
tration cannot be worked out until the society “has 
achieved a workable level of social solidarity.” 

A more generalized study of the problems of urbanism in 
Uganda is by an American geographer, Ann E. Larimore: 
The Alien Town: Patterns of Settlement in Busoga, Uganda; 
An Essay in Cultural Geography (Chicago, 1959. 208 p. 
illus., maps. Photolith. University of Chicago. Depart¬ 
ment of Geography. Research paper no. 55). 


217 



1400. Southall, Aidan W. Alur society; a study in 

processes and types of domination. Cam¬ 
bridge [Eng.] W. Heffer, 1956. xviii, 397 p. 
illus., maps, geneal. tables. GN659.A4S6 
Bibliography: p.383-390. Bibliographical footnotes. 

This study resulting from fieldwork among the Alur 
people and their neighbors, the Lendu and Okebo in 
Uganda and the Belgian Congo, is focused on the 
position of the chief in the traditional and evolving 
society. The author, while analyzing fully kinship and 
lineage patterns and other ethnographical considera¬ 
tions, has managed to avoid or explain technical lan¬ 
guage in a readable presentation. He has been a mem¬ 
ber of the staff of the East African Institute of Social 
Research since 1951. Another monograph in which 
Dr. Southall collaborated with the sociologist Peter 
C. W. Gutkind, Townsmen in the Making; Kampala 
and Its Suburbs { Kampala, 1956. 272 p. Processed), 
was published by the Institute as its East African Stud¬ 
ies No. 9. Like the first-named work, this volume, 
consisting largely of individual case histories, makes 
interesting reading for layman and specialist alike. 

1401. Taylor, John Vernon. The growth of the 

church in Buganda; an attempt at under¬ 
standing. London, SCM Press, 1958. 
288 p. illus. (World mission studies) 

BR1443.B8T3 

The first of a series being launched by the Interna¬ 
tional Missionary Society to study “in depth” the new 
churches in Asia, Africa, and Latin America. Mr. 
Taylor of the Church Missionary Society has divided 
his work in three parts; history, descriptive, and “The 
Future.” In the first he relates the stirring story of the 
early missionary successes, the period of persecution, 
the notable growth under Bishop A. R. Tucker from 
1890 to 1910. (Bishop Tucker’s own Eighteen Years 
in Uganda and East Africa , London, Arnold, 1908. 
2 v. 60 plates, is one of the important sources.) Next 
he discusses moves of more recent years toward es¬ 
tablishing an indigenous clergy. In the descriptive 
part he concentrates on churches in the rural areas. 
The last section is on pastoral matters and theological 
concepts. An appendix is “A Partial Who’s Who of 
the Early Christians of Buganda.” 

1402. Thomas, Harold B., and Robert Scott. 

Uganda. London, Oxford University Press, 
1935. 559 p. DT434.U2J5 

Comprehensive reference work on Uganda by two 
administrative officers, published by authority of the 
Government of the Protectorate. The frontispiece re¬ 


produces the famous cartoon from Punch, 1894, of the 
prim and dismayed butler, John Bull, looking at the 
black foundling in a basket on his doorstep—in Mrs. 
Huxley’s phrase, Britain’s “reluctant imperialism.” 
The historical chapter which opens the handbook is 
prefaced by a chronology of 50 guiding dates, from 
Speke’s discovery of Lake Victoria to the first regular 
airmail from London in 1931. There follow in the 
usual order well-written expositions of all aspects of 
Uganda’s country, life, administration, economy. A 
short final chapter on 19th-century writing about 
Uganda precedes a select list of references and sta¬ 
tistical appendixes. 

1403. Tothill, J. D., ed. Agriculture in Uganda, 

by the Staff of the Department of Agriculture 
of Uganda. London, Oxford University 
Press, 1940. 551 p. DA 

Officially sponsored specialist work beginning with 
an account of Uganda agriculture in general aspects, 
then covering climate, native agriculture and land 
tenure, crop rotation, ploughing, soils and soil erosion 
problems, manures, experiment stations, native food 
crops, and long analysis of the export crops, cotton, 
coffee, sugar, etc. 

1404. Trowell, Margaret, and K. P. Wachsmann. 

Tribal crafts of Uganda. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1953. 422 p. illus. 

DT434.U2T75 

Ethnological survey of the material culture of the 
tribes of Uganda, including drawings and appendix 
with tabulation of objects described. The book is 
based on studies at the Uganda Museum, of which 
Mrs. Trowell was Curator from 1941 to 1946, and 
during her work in her post as Head of the School of 
Art of Makerere College. She contributed two-thirds 
of the text, covering domestic and cultural arts and 
crafts—implements of all sorts, household objects, 
clothing and adornment, weapons, and visual arts. 
Her collaborator, Dr. Wachsmann, then Curator of 
the Uganda Museum, wrote the section on sound in¬ 
struments, including percussion idiophones, rattles, 
bells, sticks, rubbing boards, as well as such more 
strictly musical devices as drums, bows, and zithers. 
The volume ends with a section of plates—drawings 
of the instruments and photographs of the musicians in 
action. There are separate indexes for the two parts. 
Mrs. Trowell has written also an interesting personal 
story of social life and customs of Uganda, African 
Tapestry (London, Faber & Faber, 1957. 164 p. 

illus.). 


218 


1405. Uganda becomes independent. London, East 

Africa and Rhodesia, October 1962. 72 p. 
illus. DLG 

A special feature supplement, carrying contributions 
from present and past leaders, career sketches of 
Uganda ministers, and articles on various aspects of 
interest with regard to the new nation. 

1406. The Uganda journal; the journal of the Uganda 

Society. Speke centenary number. Kampala, 
The Uganda Society, March 1962. 117 p. 
fold. maps. DT434.U2U3 

An issue devoted to articles on the exploration 
of the Nile, including pieces on Sir John Speke, Emin 
Pasha, Grant, and other early travelers; one contribu¬ 
tion includes a chronological list of travelers in Uganda 
from 1860 to 1913. The semiannual Uganda Journal 
is an organ for historical, literary, and scientific ma¬ 
terial of local interest. 

1407. Winter, Edward H. Bwamba; a structural- 

functional analysis of a patrilineal society. 
Cambridge, Published for the East African 
Institute of Social Research by W. Heffer, 
1956. 264 p. DT434.U2W72 

Detailed sociological study of a traditional lineage- 
structured village society, that of the Amba of Bwamba, 
an 80-mile square area in western Uganda on the Bel¬ 
gian Congo border beyond the Ruwenzori range. The 
30,000-odd tribesmen in their small scattered villages 
have had little contact with European culture, and the 
writer, who did fieldwork among them as a Research 
Fellow of the East African Institute of Social Research, 
was able to get a comparatively clear picture of the 
social system. In the last chapter he considers changes 
now taking place as the villages are being opened to 
administrative councils, missions, and development of 
a money economy of coffee and cotton crops. 


An earlier paper on this tribe had been published by Mr. 
Winter as No. 5 of the East African Studies, Bwamba Econ¬ 
omy; the Development of a Primitive Subsistence Economy 
in Uganda (Kampala, East African Institute of Social Re¬ 
search, 1955. 43 p.). A later book written as an effort at 
popular anthropology is a collection of life histories of two 
men and two women of the Amba: Beyond the Mountains of 
the Moon: The Lives of Four Africans (Urbana, University 
of Illinois Press, 1959. 276 p.). 

1408. Worthington, Edgar B. A development plan 

for Uganda. With a foreword by the Gov¬ 
ernor of Uganda, and the 1948 revision of the 
plan by Sir Douglas Harris. Entebbe, Govt. 
Printer, 1949. 112, 146 p. col. maps, 

diagrs., tables. HC517.U2W6 

Dr. Worthington in 1928 and 1932 had published 
reports on the fisheries of Uganda (cited in Official 
Publications of Uganda , no. 1268). He drew up this 
comprehensive plan, which was published first in 1947. 
It covers “Productive Services” (including geology 
and mining, hydrology water supplies, and swamp de¬ 
velopment, agriculture and animal industry, tsetse 
control, forestry, fisheries, etc.); “Social Services” 
(most importantly education); and “Common Serv¬ 
ices” (administrative, etc.); then certain pilot devel¬ 
opment schemes. With the revisions by Sir Douglas 
Harris, it has formed the basis for the extensive devel¬ 
opment of Uganda during the past decade. 

1409. Wrigley, G. C. Crops and wealth in Uganda. 

Kampala, East African Institute of Social Re¬ 
search, 1959. (East African studies, no. 12) 

HD2130.U5W7 

A useful monograph on agriculture in Uganda. 
Another valuable paper, “Agricultural Change in 
Uganda, 1945-1960,” by Geoffrey B. Masefield, was 
issued as a separate by Stanford University Press in 
1962. 


Zanzibar 


1410. Brady, Cyrus Townsend, Jr. Commerce and 
conquest in East Africa , with particular ref¬ 
erence to the Salem trade with Zanzibar. 
Salem, Essex Institute, 1950. 245 p. 

DT365.B785 

The American writer, who spent some time on busi¬ 
ness in Southern and Eastern Africa, approached the 
history of the East African coast, its native peoples 
i and its invaders, Arabs, Portuguese and the other 
I European powers, from a usually neglected angle, that 


of American contacts. As noted in the subtitle, em¬ 
phasis is placed on the connections of the clipper 
ship trade out of the New England ports with Zanzi¬ 
bar. One chapter is entitled “Amerikani”; in 1838 
American cotton manufacturers were supplying 
“Massachusetts sheeting” to East Africa, and the word 
still used in Swahili for the calico that makes many 
African garments is “amerikani.” Mr. Brady’s narra¬ 
tive is not confined to the 19th century, but begins 
with commercial relations between East Africa and 


692 - 756—63 - 15 


219 


the Asiatic countries in ancient times and carries 
through to the present era. 

1411. Campbell, Jane. “Multiracialism and politics 

in Zanzibar.” Political science quarterly, 
v. 77, March 1962: 72-87. H1.P8, v. 77 

The author, a member of the staff of the African- 
American Institute, has firsthand knowledge of the 
situation in Zanzibar. This timely article examines 
Zanzibar politics “as the forces of nationalism propel 
it toward self-government and independence.” She 
explains the racial communities—Arabs, Indians, 
Shirazi who are part Arab, part African, and African 
ex-slaves and recent immigrants—the political parties 
and leaders which follow racial lines, the Arab ZNP 
(Zanzibar National Party), the ASP (Afro-Shirazi 
Party), and the smaller ZPPP (Zanzibar and Pemba 
People’s Party), which in December 1959 split from 
the ASP. She recounts the results of the election and 
accompanying riots in January 1961 and the later 
election of June 1961 which led to the situation of 
early 1962—a “tenuous” truce between ASP and the 
alliance of ZNP and APPP which formed the current 
government. She ends with a consideration of the 
overriding problem of racialism. 

1412. Gray, Sir John Milner. History of Zanzibar, 

from the Middle Ages to 1856. London, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1962. 314 p. 

DT435.G7 

“Authorities” (chapter notes): p. 281-299; bibliography, 
p. 300-309. 

The writer, late Master of Jesus College, is a bar¬ 
rister who closed his long career in the Colonial Serv¬ 
ice as Chief Justice of Zanzibar from 1943 to 1952. 
He is also a historian (see his History of the Gambia, 
no. 551) and in East Africa has specialized in studies 
making heavy use of Portuguese sources. In this inter¬ 
esting narrative history he gives a full account of Zan¬ 
zibar and Pemba from the earliest archeological evi¬ 
dences through the death of Seyyid Said. Another 
study by Sir John Gray based in part on Portuguese 
sources is The British in Mombasa, 1824-1826; Being 
the History of Captain Owen’s Protectorate (London, 
Macmillan; New York, St. Martin’s Press, 1957. 
216 p. illus. Kenya History Society. Transactions, 
v. 1). 

1413. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Report on Zanzi¬ 

bar. 1948+ London, H.M. Stationery 
Off. biennial. DT434.Z3G7 

The Zanzibar report, which is printed for the 
Colonial Office by the Government Printer in Zanzi¬ 
bar, has been issued every 2 years; the number for 


1959-60 was released in January 1963 (86 p. maps). 
For description, see general note on the Colonial Of¬ 
fice reports, no. 94. Its short reading list includes a 
number of official documents; for others, see Library 
of Congress list (no. 1268). 

1414. Gt. Brit. Commission on the Financial and 

Economic Position of Zanzibar. Report on 
the financial and economic position of the 
Zanzibar Government in relation to its eco¬ 
nomic reserves, by Alan W. Pirn, commis¬ 
sioner. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1932, 

108 p. 

This report is one of the basic documents relating to 
the economy of Zanzibar. 

1415. Hollingsworth, Lawrence W. Zanzibar un¬ 

der the Foreign Office, 1890-1913. London, 
Macmillan, 1953. 232 p. illus. 

DT434.Z3H6 

In February 1890 the Sultan Seyyid Ali, last of the 
sons of the creator of the modern state of Zanzibar, 
Seyyid Said, came to the throne, and in July of the 
same year signed the agreement by which the Sultanate 
became a British Protectorate. This work covers the 
23 years of Foreign Office control, before the dif¬ 
ficulties of administration brought about transfer of 
the jurisdiction to the Colonial Office. The introduc¬ 
tory chapters outline the 19th-century background 
(the standard account of which was written by Coup¬ 
land; see no. 1271). Mr. Hollingsworth, who had been 
for over 20 years a member of the Education Depart¬ 
ment in Zanzibar, presented his well-documented study 
as a doctoral thesis at the School of Oriental and 
African Studies of the University of London. 

The period following the transfer of the Protectorate from 
the Foreign Office control to that of the Colonial Office is 
the subject of a book by another British official long resident 
in Zanzibar, Richard H. Crofton: Zanzibar Affairs, 1914- 
1933 (London, F. Edwards, 1953. 164 p. illus.). This is 

not a historical narrative, but a picture of the country seen 
through various sketches—“A Naval Engagement,” “The 
Maternity Association,” “The Museum,” “Currency,” etc., 
including biographical and descriptive chapters. Mr. Crofton 
is author also of a brief historical monograph, The Old Con¬ 
sulate at Zanzibar [1841—73 ] (London, Oxford University 
Press, H. Milford, 1935. 60 p.) and a book on cloves, which 
includes a chapter on the Zanzibar clove industry: A Pageant 
of the Spice Islands (London, J. Bale & Sons, Danielsson, 
1936. 131 p.). 

1416. Ingrams, William Harold. Zanzibar, its 

history and people. London, Witherby, 
1931. 527 p. DT435.I5 

The most complete, authoritative history of Zanzi¬ 
bar. The writer, a British expert on the Arab World, 


220 




had been an official at Zanzibar from 1919 to 1927. 
His interesting book begins with geography and people, 
covers the history from early times, and devotes its 
major part to ethnology, surveying the Arabs, the 
detribalized and mixed blood Swahilis, and the natives, 
in a well-rounded anthropological study. A long bibli¬ 
ography of sources is given, p. 515-519. Mr. Ingrams’ 
career from 1934 to 1945 was in Southern Arabia, 
Aden, and the Hadramaut. His Arabia and the Isles 
(see no. 1566), includes a chapter of his experiences 
in Zanzibar (p. 47-62). 

Of the older general accounts of Zanzibar, there might be 
mentioned the description by the explorer Sir Richard F. 
Burton, Zanzibar; City, Island and Coast (London, Tinsley, 
1872. 2 v.), which includes some history and ethnological 

speculation with description and personal narrative, and 
Zanzibar, the Island Metropolis of Eastern Africa, by Major 
F. B. Pearce, who for some years was British Resident in 
Zanzibar (London, T. F. Unwin, 1920. 431 p.). 

1417. Lyne, Robert N. An apostle of empire; being 

the life of Sir Lloyd William Mathews, 
D.C.M.G., lieutenant Royal Navy, first minis¬ 
ter of the Zanzibar government. London, G. 
Allen & Unwin, 1936. 247 p. illus. fold, 
map. DT435.L9 

The subject of this biography is the British officer 
who in 1874 was sent out to Zanzibar to take part in 
the patrol established to stop the slave trade, and 
subsequently entered the Sultan’s service as Com¬ 
mander of the forces. General Sir Lloyd Mathews 
until his death in 1901 was one of the most powerful 
influences in the suppression of the slave trade and the 
establishment of British government in Zanzibar. Ex¬ 
cept for a short chapter of introduction, the whole of 
Mr. Lyne’s work is concerned with Mathews’ career in 
Zanzibar. 

Another biographical work dealing with a British officer 
instrumental in suppression of the slave trade is a life story 
with only a portion concerned with Zanzibar, where Chris¬ 
topher P. Rigby was political agent from 1858-61: General 
Rigby, Zanzibar and the Slave Trade; With Journals, Dis¬ 
patches, etc., edited by his daughter, Mrs. Charles E. B. 
Russell (London, Allen & Unwin, 1935. 404 p.). 

1418. Middleton, John. Land tenure in Zanzibar. 

London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1961. 88 p. 
(Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Colonial research 
studies, no. 33) JV33.G7A48 No. 33 

This report attempts to present “an overall picture 
of various systems of land tenure [in Zanzibar and 
Pemba] which are all variants of a traditional tenure 
based upon subsistence farming and which has been 
adapted to changes in a social and economic situation 
brought about by Arab colonization and clove grow¬ 


ing.” The author includes an outline of Shirazi kin¬ 
ship and local organization. 

1419. Ommanney, Francis D. Isle of cloves; a view 

of Zanzibar. London, New York, Longmans, 
Green, 1955. 230 p. illus. American ed. 

Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1956. 

DT434.Z305 1955 
Personal narrative by a British Colonial official who 
was stationed in East Africa for fisheries research. Dr. 
Ommanney described and interpreted Zanzibar, its his¬ 
tory, scenery, ways and manners of life in an evocative 
picture. 

1420. Prins, Adriaan H. J. The Swahili-speaking 

peoples of Zanzibar and the East African 
Coast (Arabs, Shirazi and Swahili) London, 
International African Institute, 1961. 143 p. 
(Ethnographic Survey of Africa. East Cen¬ 
tral Africa, pt. 12) GN659.Z3P7 

See general note on the series (no. 270). The 
author includes an exceptionally comprehensive bibli¬ 
ography, noting many historical and descriptive works 
and official documents in addition to ethnographical 
studies. 

1421. Shelswell-White, Geoffrey H. Guide to 

Zanzibar. New ed. Zanzibar, Government 
Printer, 1949. 109 p. and maps. 

DT435.S67 

A handbook for tourists that had been prepared by 
an administrative officer and “private secretary to His 
Highness the Sultan” in 1932, with additions by other 
hands. It contains general articles and practical infor¬ 
mation on miscellaneous topics, a baedeker of tours of 
the town and surrounding country, and appendixes on 
such special features of Zanzibar as fishing, bullfighting, 
the carved Arab doorways, Arab chests. There have 
been several revisions. The Colonial Office report on 
Zanzibar for 1955 and 1956 cites an edition of 1952. 

1422. Whiteley, W. H. The dialects and verse of 

Pemba; an introduction. Kampala, East Afri¬ 
can Swahili Committee, Makerere College, 
1958. 61 p. map. (Studies in Swahili dia¬ 
lect, 4) PL8704.Z9P4 

The author had visited the island of Pemba in be¬ 
half of the East African Swahili Committee (see no. 
1299n), and collected linguistic materials, which are 
exemplified in this brochure. The introduction dis¬ 
cusses the main features of dialectic differences; the 
selections of verse are in the dialect, without transla¬ 
tion but with notes and a word list. 


221 


Somalia 


Bibliography 

1423. U.S. Library of Congress. General Reference 

and Bibliography Division. Official publica¬ 
tions of Somaliland, 1941-1959; a guide, com¬ 
piled by Helen F. Conover. Washington, 
1960. 41 p. Z3516.U5 

This bibliography is out of print, but a positive 
microfilm can be obtained for $2.25 from the Photo¬ 
duplication Service of the Library of Congress. It 
will be useful for anyone doing serious research on 
Somalia and on the former British and French Somali- 
lands. The first seven items, descriptively annotated, 
name published bibliographies in which unofficial lit¬ 
erature regarding the Horn of Africa is exhaustively 
covered. Most of this literature is in Italian, but the 
older writings in English and French are usually in¬ 
cluded in the Italian bibliographies. 

Because of the extent of the bibliographical leads provided 
through this list, the present selection on Somalia is limited 
to notable recent books and articles, and to a selection of 
the entries analyzed at greater length in the section on Somali¬ 
land of the Library’s 1958 publication, North and Northeast 
Africa. 

1424. Bayne, E. A. Somalia on the Horn: a counter¬ 

point of problems confronting one of Africa’s 
new nations. New York, American Univer¬ 
sities Field Staff, 1960. 7 pts. (Reports 
service. Northeast Africa series, v. 7, no. 
5-6, 8-12, Mar. 1-22, 1960). DLC-AFR 

1425. - Birthday for Somalia: continuing prob¬ 

lems but progress also mark an adventurous 
first year of independence. August 1961. 
18 p. (Reports Service. Northeast Africa 
series, v. 8, no. 1) DLC-AFR 

The author of this series of well-informed confiden¬ 
tial reports was formerly an economic adviser to the 
governments of Nationalist China and Iran, and writes 
for the AUFS on Italy and the Near East. His seven 
papers of 1960 offered keen analysis of the situation in 
the trust territory of Somalia as it approached its in¬ 
dependence date of July 1960. The separate parts 
were: 1. “The Policeman”; 2. “The Economy”; 3. 
“Politics”; 4. “The Ethiopians”; 5. “The Italians”; 
6. “The Americans”; 7. “Theme and Variations.” 
The 1961 paper was an evaluation of the first year’s 
progress for both the former Italian colony and former 
British Somaliland, which had joined in forming the 
new nation. The series has been continued in 1963 


with Mr. Bayne’s reports, Brinkmanship on the Horn 
(v. 10, no. 1), and From Clan to Nation (v. 10, no. 2). 

Another assessment of coming difficulties was made by 
A. S. Reyner, “Somalia: The Problems of Underdevelop¬ 
ment,” in the Middle East Journal of Summer 1960 (v. 14, 
p. 247-255). 

A thesis on Somali nationalism presented at Harvard Uni¬ 
versity by Saadia Touval is due for publication in early 1963. 

1426. Bell, Christopher R. V. The Somali lan¬ 

guage. London, New York, Longmans, 
Green, 1953. 185 p. PJ2531.B4 

By the former Director of Education of the Somali¬ 
land Protectorate, now in Uganda, this is a useful 
little book, with Somali grammar presented in the 
simplest possible style. Includes exercises, key to 
answers, and vocabularies. One of the difficulties of 
Somali is that it has had no written alphabet, and no 
traditionally accepted form among its many dialects. 

See also A. N. Tucker and M. A. Bryan, The Non-Bantu 
Languages of North-Eastern Africa (no. 301). 

1427. Castagno, Alphonso A. Somalia. New York, 

Carnegie Endowment for International 
Peace, 1959. 339-400 p. (International 
conciliation, no. 522) JX1907.A8, no. 522 

Concentrated review of the stages of political, edu¬ 
cational, and economic development of the Trust 
Territory of Somalia during the decade after the 
United Nations decision in 1949 to give the country 
its independence in 1960. “For the first time in the 
history of the United Nations a target date was im¬ 
posed on a Trusteeship Power.” Emphasis is on rela¬ 
tions of the Amministrazione Fiduciaria Italiana della 
Somalia [AFIS] with the United Nations, the author 
giving Italy credit for substantial contributions. A 
chapter on “International Problems” discusses the 
boundary dispute with Ethiopia and the “Greater 
Somalia” issue. It is understood that Dr. Castagno 
has in preparation (1963) a full-scale study of Somali 
politics. 

An earlier monograph on the same theme, Somaliland 
under Italian Administration: A Case Study in United Na¬ 
tions Trusteeship, by Lawrence S. Finkelstein, was published 
by the Woodrow Wilson Foundation in 1955 (New York. 
48 p.). 

1428. Cerulli, Enrico. Somalia: scritti vari editi ed 

inediti. Roma, Published for the Amministra¬ 
zione Fiduciaria Italiana della Somalia by 
Istituto Poligrafico dello Stato, 1957-59. 2 v. 

DT401.C4 


222 




The author, whose long civil service career in Italian 
Africa included a term as Director of Political Affairs 
in Somaliland in the twenties, and who has represented 
Italy with regard to Africa in the United Nations since 
1948, is also a scholar noted for his studies of North¬ 
eastern African peoples and letters. These two volumes 
bring together writings on many aspects of Somalia. In 
the first volume are essays on history and legend, Islam, 
religious literature and astronomy, and the Arab text 
and translation in Italian of a Somali chronicle, “The 
Book of Zengi.” The second volume is on customary 
law, ethnography, linguistics, and the tribal way of 
life. 

1429. Corni, Guido, ed. Somalia italiana. Milano, 

Editoriale Arte e Storia, 1937. 2 v. illus. 
(part col.) maps. DT416.C6 

A large general survey of Italian Somaliland under 
the Fascist government, lavishly produced in two vol¬ 
umes of articles by Italian specialists. The first volume 
has a general sketch and papers on history, geology, 
flora and fauna, peoples, primitive agriculture, stock- 
raising and diseases, fishing. The second volume is on 
the Fascist administration and its measures of physical 
and economic development. 

1430. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Report on the 

Somaliland Protectorate. 1948-59. London, 
H.M. Stationery Off. biennial, plates, map. 
(Its Colonial reports) DT406.A14 

The last biennial report of the British Government 
on its administration of the Somali Protectorate, cover¬ 
ing the years 1958 and 1959, was published in 1960 as 
the small territory on the Gulf of Aden joined its 
larger neighbor, Somalia, in an independent state. 
The nomadic tribesmen still engage in feudal fighting 
over grazing and watering rights, have such “a strong 
aversion” to close Government supervision that no 
census can be taken, and feel “a traditional antipathy 
toward agriculture.” 

A novel by an English writer familiar with conditions in 
Somaliland gave a vivid presentation of the feuding tribes and 
the difficulties encountered by British Colonial Officers in 
dealing with them: Gerald Hanley, The Consul at Sunset 
(New York, Macmillan, 1951. 254 p.). The scene is laid 
in the country taken over from the Italians during the war 
and administered by the British. 

1431. Hall, Sir Douglas. “Somaliland’s last year 

as a Protectorate.” African affairs , v. 59, Jan¬ 
uary 1961: 26-37. DT1.R62, v. 59 

A lecture before the Royal African Society in De¬ 
cember 1960, followed by discussion. The speaker, 


who had been in the Civil Service in Northern 
Rhodesia, was transferred as Governor to the British 
Protectorate of Somaliland in 1959, to preside over its 
last few months before union with Somalia on July 1, 
1960. In his talk he gave a resume of immediate steps 
leading to independence. 

1432. Holm, Henrietta M. The agricultural re¬ 

sources of Somalia. Washington, U.S. Govt. 
Print. Off. 1956. 20 p. map. (U.S. For¬ 
eign Agricultural Service. FAS-M-13) 

DLC 

Brief outline of the topography and climate of 
Somalia and methods and products of its nomadic 
stock-grazing and limited settled farming. In the dry, 
hot country the herds are the chief wealth, and 45 
percent of the Somalis are pastoral tribesmen who 
migrate with the rains. Native crops are almost en¬ 
tirely cereals; chief export crops come from a few 
Italian farms on irrigated concession lands producing 
cotton and bananas. 

1433. Hunt, John A. A general survey of the 

Somaliland Protectorate 1944-1950; final re¬ 
port on “An economic survey and recon¬ 
naissance of the British Somaliland Protector¬ 
ate 1944-1950,” Colonial Development and 
Welfare Scheme D. 484. Hargeisa, To be 
purchased from the Chief Secretary, 1951. 
203 p. maps, tables. DT406.H8 

Publication recording the results of the 7-year geo¬ 
graphical survey carried out under a Colonial Develop¬ 
ment and Welfare scheme costing about £56,000, un¬ 
der the direction of the writer, a geologist and “keen 
scientist.” Special attention is given to topography, 
meteorology, geology, and the ecology of the nomadic 
stock-herding tribesmen. Recommendations are made 
for various lines of development, including exploration 
of oil possibilities (considered the chief hope, as yet 
unfulfilled, for establishing a viable economy), 
attempts at coffee and tobacco cultivation, efforts at 
controlled grazing, new roads. The text, printed on 
folio pages and illustrated with sketch maps, is divided 
between expository paragraphs and tables of many 
varieties, among which are a gazetteer of place names, 
tables of road mileages, rainfall records, temperatures, 
genealogies, and summaries of the tribes. A long bibli¬ 
ography compiled by N. M. Viney in 1947 was revised 
by the author in 1950 (p. 180-201). 


223 


1434. International Bank for Reconstruction 

and Development. The economy of the 
Trust Territory of Somaliland; report of a 
mission organized at the request of the Gov¬ 
ernment of Italy. Washington, 1957. 99 1. 
maps, diagrs., tables. HC567.S7I5 

A report issued as “a working paper ... for those 
who will have to determine what has to be done” in 
economic development to prepare Somalia for inde¬ 
pendence. The character of the economy, recent 
plans, prospects, and problems are analyzed, and con¬ 
clusions presented stressing the need for continuing 
financial aid in the foreseeable future. 

1435. Italy. Ministero degli Affari Esteri. Rapport 

du gouvernement italien a VAssemblee ge¬ 
nerate des Nations Unies sur l’administration 
de tutelle de la Somalie. 1950+ Roma, 
illus., maps, annual. JQ3858.A3 

Title varies slightly. 

The annual reports of AFIS (Amministrazione 
Fiduciaria Italiana della Somalia) to the U.N. Gen¬ 
eral Assembly were published for the years 1950-58 
in French and in very limited editions—large, well- 
illustrated volumes of from 300 to 500 pages. Sum¬ 
mary articles usually appeared in the United Nations 
Review. 

The official gazette of Somalia was published as follows: 

Somaliland, Italian. Bollettino ufficiale dell 3 Ammi¬ 
nistrazione fiduciaria italiana della Somalia, anno 
1+ apr. 1950+ Mogadiscio, monthly. 

DLG-LL 

Supplements accompany most numbers. 
Administrative news appeared also in the Italian 
language daily newspaper of Mogadiscio, Corriere 
della Somalia. 

1436. Jardine, Douglas. The Mad Mullah of 

Somaliland. London, H. Jenkins, 1923. 
336 p. DT406.J3 

Standard account of the long-drawn-out struggle 
with the fanatic religious leader known as the “Mad 
Mullah,” who led his dervishes in a 21-year revolt 
against British rule, a “holy war” which required five 
expeditions before he was put down and the wholesale 
banditry and looting of his ruthless followers checked. 
The Mullah died in 1921 in Ethiopia where he had 
fled after his final defeat. Mr. Jardine, who was 
Secretary of the Protectorate during the last cam¬ 
paigns, began his book with a slight general account 
of British Somaliland. 


1437. Karp, Mark. The economics of trusteeship 

in Somalia. Boston, Boston University Press, 
1960. x, 185 p. illus., map. (Boston Uni¬ 
versity. African research studies, no. 2) 

HC567.S7K3 

Analysis of the economic situation and unfavorable 
prospects of the Italian trust territory, which under 
the United Nations dictate of 1949 had been given 
just over a decade to evolve to independence. Based 
on a doctoral dissertation, the book is “a case study 
of economic problems to which anticolonialism in its 
present form can and often does give rise in Africa.” 

1438. Laurence, Margaret, ed. A tree for poverty; 

Somali poetry and prose. Nairobi, Published 
for the Somaliland Protectorate by the Eagle 
Press, 1954. 146 p. PJ2534.Z95E5 1954 

In her introductory essay the writer who has col¬ 
lected these translations and adaptations of Somali 
poems and folk stories explains the various styles of 
the very rich unwritten folk literature of this nomad 
people. She characterizes the Somali, “an extremely 
excitable people who express emotions readily,” as 
natural poets and storytellers; having almost no crafts, 
their only creative outlets is in words—“a tree for 
poverty to shelter under.” A few young Somalis who 
have gone to government schools are now beginning, 
she says, to write down the traditional poetry and tales, 
which under the rapid evolution of all African society 
may well be lost before the century is over. Each of 
the selections is followed by an explanatory note. 

1439. Lewis, I. M. A pastoral democracy; a study of 

pastoralism and politics among the northern 
Somali of the Horn of Africa. London, New 
York, Published for the International African 
Institute by the Oxford University Press, 1961. 
320 p. illus., maps. DT403.L38 

Bibliography: p. 307-312. 

The writer is today one of the few English-speaking 
authorities on Somaliland. This study in “pastoral 
habits and political institutions” is mostly confined to 
the northern Somali, the tribes of the former British 
Protectorate, nomads with herds of camel, sheep and 
goats, whose political system “lacks to a remarkable de¬ 
gree all the machinery of centralized government.” 
Mr. Lewis focuses his work on the political organiza¬ 
tion, which lies in kinship and lineage, but includes 
enough material on economy, ecology, and residence 
patterns to give a basis. In his last chapter he reviews 
the modern political scene in Somalia and its repercus¬ 
sions in the Protectorate. His long bibliography cov¬ 
ers material on the entire Horn. 


224 


1440. - Peoples of the Horn of Africa: Somali, 

Afar, and Saho. London, International Afri¬ 
can Institute, 1955. 200 p. maps, tables. 
(Ethnographic survey of Africa: North East¬ 
ern Africa, pt. 1) DT403.L4 

Bibliography: p. 177-194. 

In this volume of the Ethnographic Survey of Africa, 
the summary of available information, which follows 
the pattern set for the entire series, is given at some¬ 
what greater length than in the numbers dealing with 
more studied peoples. The Somali, Afar (Danakil), 
and Saho, closely related nomadic peoples of camel 
culture and Mohammedan faith, are spread through 
the three countries (former) of the Horn of Africa, 
Somalia (Italian Somaliland), the British Somaliland 
Protectorate, and French Somaliland. The Afar and 
Saho are distributed also across the borders in Eritrea 
and Ethiopia, and the Somali in Ethiopia and Northern 
Kenya. The Somali are much the largest grouping, 
numbering in the three territories approximately 2/t 
million, whereas the total Afar population is estimated 
at not over 250,000, and the Saho under 50,000. For 
his survey made from library sources the writer used 
many Italian and French works as well as English, 
which are listed in the bibliography. 

1441. Pankhurst, Estelle Sylvia. Ex-Italian 

Somaliland. London, Walls & Co., 1951. 
460 p. (New York, Philosophical Library, 
1951). DT416.P27 1951a 

The late author, of a famous suffragette family, was 
a propagandist for Ethiopia. In this turgid work, 
which is definitely partisan, she told at great length 
the history of the Italian acquisition and control of 
the colony, their use of it as a base in the Ethiopian 
war, and the details of the trusteeship decision by the 
United Nations regarding the territory. Miss Pank¬ 
hurst stated a case against Italy and indicted the U.N. 
action; she promoted as alternatives for Somaliland 
Ethiopian or joint Ethiopian-British trusteeship. 

1442. Somalia. Information Services. The Somali 

Peninsula; a new light on imperial motives. 
Mogadishu, 1962. 137 p. DT401.A53 

Printed by Staples, St. Albans, Herts. 

An official publication summarizing Somali history 
to justify the claim to the Ogaden District of Ethiopia 
and the Somali pocket in the Northern Frontier of 
Kenya as “Greater Somalia.” Many government doc¬ 
uments are cited in the text; these and books consulted 
are listed in a bibliography, p. 131-134. The book 


was reviewed by I. M. Lewis in International Affairs, 
October 1962 (p. 516). 

In early 1963 the issue of secession of the Somali group 
in the Northern Frontier District of Kenya is currently in the 
news, with agitation and riots following publication of the Re¬ 
ports of the Kenya Regional Boundaries Commission and the 
Northern Frontier District Commission on Dec. 20, 1962. A 
resume of the Commissions’ Reports appears in Africa Digest 
of February 1963, p. 129-130. 

1443. Technical Assistance Mission to the 

Trust Territory of Somaliland Under 
Italian Administration. The Trust Ter¬ 
ritory of Somaliland under Italian adminis¬ 
tration; report prepared jointly for the Gov¬ 
ernment of Italy by an expert appointed by 
the United Nations Technical Assistance Ad¬ 
ministration and by experts appointed re¬ 
spectively by the Food and Agriculture Or¬ 
ganization of the United Nations, the United 
Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural 
Organization, and the World Health Orga¬ 
nization. New York, 1952. 343 p. illus., 
maps, tables. (United Nations. [Document] 
ST/TAA/K Somaliland/1) HG567.S7T4 

Processed publication of the United Nations. Six 
experts had spent 3 months making an extended survey 
of the economic needs of the territory, touring the 
country widely, talking with local officials and repre¬ 
sentatives on all levels, visiting all institutions. They 
reported in great detail, offering advice on many 
points. Their impressions were not optimistic: “The 
economy has not been viable, even at a low level, since 
the advent of European administration; and though 
directions and specific measures needed for progress 
may be indicated, the Mission does not pretend to 
foresee rapid improvement in the fundamentally defi¬ 
citary character of the economy.” 

1444. United Nations. Advisory Council for the 

Trust Territory of Somaliland under Italian 
Administration. Report. 1950/51-1958/59. 
annual. (United Nations. [Document] T 

DT416.U48 

This Council was set up by the same United Nations 
Resolution (No. 289 (IV), Nov. 21, 1949) that de¬ 
cided on the Italian trusteeship for Somalia pending 
independence. It consisted of three members, rep¬ 
resentatives of Colombia, Egypt, and the Philippines, 
its functions to aid and advise the Administering Au¬ 
thority. They sat in Mogadishu, and, according to 
Mr. I. M. Lewis (World Today, July 1960), were “not 
always well-informed but always concerned.” 


225 



1445. United Nations. Trusteeship Council. Visit¬ 

ing Mission to Trust Territories in East Africa, 
1954. Report on Somaliland under Italian 
administration, together with related docu¬ 
ments. New York, 1952-58. 3 v. maps. 
(United Nations. Trusteeship Council. Of¬ 
ficial records, Supplement no. 2) 

JX4021.U385 
Suppl., no. 2 

The Visiting Missions made three inspection trips 
to Somalia in 1951, 1954, and 1957, and submitted 
reports; these were characterized by Dr. Castagno as 
“especially perceptive.” For details, see Official Pub¬ 
lications of Somalia (no. 1423). 

1446. U.S. Economic Cooperation Administration. 

Special Mission to Italy. A reconnaissance 
ground-water survey of Somalia, East Africa; 
report of an E. R. P. Technical Assistance 
Mission under the auspices of the Italian 
Government (Comitato Interministeriale per 
la Ricostruzione) [by] Thomas P. Ahrens. 
Rome, 1951. 270 p. illus., maps, tables. 

GB1173.S6U52 

A geologist of the U.S. Department of the Interior, 
Bureau of Reclamation, was sent with three Italian 
geologists to survey the possibility of providing ade¬ 
quate wells for the nomadic population of Somaliland. 
The survey, drawn up by the American, outlines 
ground-water resources, but offers only general state¬ 
ments regarding development possibilities, as the ex¬ 
perts felt that each project would present a different 
problem. The report begins with conclusions and 
recommendations—a formidable list of debits regard¬ 
ing character of the country and its inhabitants. 

The Italian Government went ahead with the plans out¬ 
lined, to dig 220 mechanical wells and 440 ordinary wells 
between 1954 and 1960, at a cost of $4 million, the United 
States paying half, and in 1954 150 wells were dug at a cost 
of $560,000. According to one observer: “The idea is to 
draw the tribes together, decrease tribal warfare, and 
encourage the nomads to become settled farmers. However, 
some wells need to be enclosed behind barbed wire with a 
24-hour guard; for experience has taught that the nomads, 
despite their need for water, may destroy the source rather 
than let another tribe gain control of it. Such is the type of 
sociological problem with which the Italians are faced.” 

1447. U.S. Operations Mission to Italy. Reports. 

Rome, 1950 + 

This Mission, later under International Cooperation 
Administration, began operations in 1950 as the EGA 
Special Mission to Italy. In that year the United 


States suggested to the Italian Foreign Office that 
Somaliland be included in the Dependent Overseas 
Territory Program, and visits of inspection to Somali¬ 
land by American technicians were undertaken at 
once. The first EGA preliminary report on Somalia 
Agricultural Projects was presented in September 1950. 
By early 1954, according to the historical account in 
the U.N. Advisory Council Report (no. 340), “14 
basic studies had been completed by technical teams 
of the United States, Italy, the United Nations and 
AFIS, and 4 more were in progress. In the agricul¬ 
tural field, studies were made of grains, grain storage, 
agricultural mechanization and seed improvement. In 
water resources and animal husbandry, a ground-water 
survey was carried out and modern well drilling equip¬ 
ment purchased; a well master driller had been sent 
to the Territory to instruct Somalis in the use of the 
drilling equipment. Furthermore, two other studies 
had been completed regarding respectively the excava¬ 
tion of shallow wells and livestock genetics. Finally, 
in the general economic field, surveys had been made 
of the Somali ports and roads, and an interim report 
had been published on an economic development pro¬ 
gram.” These reports were brought out as mimeo¬ 
graphed pamphlets, in limited editions. Among them 
are the following: 

U.S. Economic Cooperation Administration. Special 
Mission to Italy. Somalia agricultural projects, by 
W. E. Corfitzen and Grover Kinsey. Rome, Septem¬ 
ber 1950. 36 1. 

- A reconnaissance ground-water survey of So¬ 
malia, East Africa, by Thomas P. Ahrens. Rome, 
1951. 270 p. illus. See no. 1446 above. 

U.S. Operations Mission to Italy. [International Co¬ 
operation Administration] Road study in Somalia, 
East Africa, by H. A. Van Dyke. Rome, Dec. 31, 
1953. 105 1. 

- Port survey in Somalia, East Africa, by Fred¬ 
erick G. Reinicke. Rome, Jan. 10, 1954. 40 1. 

-- Plans and schedules for Somalia economic de¬ 
velopment, by W. E. Corfitzen. Rome, June 28, 1954. 
34 p. 

- The mineral deposits of Somalia, by Ralph J. 

Holmes. Rome, March 1954. 56 1. illus. 

- Proposed program for agricultural technical 

assistance for Somalia, by W. W. Worzella and A. L. 
Musson. Rome, Aug. 9, 1954. 171. 

- A fisheries reconnaissance, Somalia, East Africa, 

by Ralph L. Johnson. Rome, June 18, 1956. 29 1. 

- Livestock survey, Somalia, East Africa, by C. L. 

McColloch. Rome, Feb. 1, 1957. 15 1. 

- Forestry and range management survey, So¬ 
malia, East Africa, by Marvin Klemme. Rome, Feb. 
28, 1957. 23 1. map. SD242.S55U5 


226 










1448. U.S. Operations Mission to the Somali Repub¬ 
lic. The Somali Republic; inter-river eco¬ 
nomic exploration. Washington, 1961. 
347 p. HC567.S7U55 

The Mission has continued under the new name 
after the independence date of Somalia, through 1961 
under the International Cooperation Administration, 
from 1962 under AID (Agency for International De¬ 
velopment) . This big report contains economic data 
and estimates for development by irrigation and other 
measures of the land between the Giuba and Uebi 
Scebeli Rivers (these names have varied spellings) in 


southern Somalia. There are somewhat optimistic 
forecasts of what might be accomplished in a 20-year 
program with large investment. Other reports are 
submitted, often in working paper form. One more 
paper of 1961 available for distribution is Twenty 
Questions and Answers Regarding the Somali Repub¬ 
lic (18 p.). 

1449. Zohrer, Ludwig G. A. Somalilander. Bonn, 
K. Schroeder, 1959. 194 p. illus. (Die 

Lander Afrikas, Bd. 17) DT401.Z6 

For general note on this series, see no. 10. 


Sudan 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1450. Hill, Richard Leslie. A bibliography of the 

Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, from the earliest times 
to 1937. London, Oxford University Press, 
H. Milford, 1939. 213 p. Z3711.H64 
A justly celebrated area bibliography by an officer 
of the Sudan Civil Service. The list, covering books, 
periodical articles, and documents in Western lan¬ 
guages and Arabic from Herodotus, ca. 457 B.C., to 
the year of its completion, is classified under disciplines 
and subdisciplines according to a five-page table of 
contents. Within the subsections the entries, set down 
in the briefest identifiable form, are arranged in chron¬ 
ological order. There are indexes of persons and 
subjects. 

A comprehensive “Sudan Bibliography” was carried regu¬ 
larly in the semiannual journal, Sudan Notes and Records 
(1921-56), publication of the Sudan Philosophical Society 
and organ for many professional articles by members of the 
highly trained members of the Sudan Civil Service. 

1451. el-Nasri, Abdel Rahman. A bibliography of 

the Sudan, 1938-1958. London, Published 
on behalf of the University of Khartoum by 
Oxford University Press, November 1962. 
171 p. Z3711.N3 

Compiled by the Librarian of the University of 
Khartoum, this updates Hill’s work. 

GENERAL AND MISCELLANEOUS 

1452. Barbour, Kenneth M. The Republic of the 

Sudan; a regional geography. London, Uni¬ 
versity of London Press, 1961. 292 p. illus., 
maps. DT124.B28 


Physical and economic geography, emphasizing re¬ 
gional variation in agriculture and animal husbandry 
and the spread of cash economy. The valuable study 
is by a geographer who had taught for a time at the 
University of Khartoum. 

1453. Davies, Reginald. The cameVs back; service 

in the rural Sudan. London, J. Murray, 
1957. 209 p. illus. JS819.S8D3 

Personal reminiscences of the British Sudan Service 
in the early years, from 1911 through the twenties in 
both Southern and Northern Sudan. Revealing as to 
manners of the tribes, the narrative is pleasant reading. 

1454. Directory of the Republic of the Sudan. Lon¬ 

don, The Diplomatic Press and Publishing 

Co. annual. DT118.5.D5 

Like the other directories issued for African coun¬ 
tries (Nigeria, Ghana) by the Diplomatic Press, this 
volume, in its 4th edition in 1961/62 (216 p.), is 
prepared with cooperation from the Information Serv¬ 
ices of the Sudan Government. Besides encyclopedic 
information on all phases of the Government and the 
economic and cultural life of the country, it includes 
a trade index, a biographical section, and indexes of 
subjects and advertisers. The Diplomatic Press & 
Publishing Co. has issued also a smaller Sudan Trade 
and Investment Guide (1960. 84 p.). 

1455. Fawzi, Saad Ed Din. The labour movement 

in the Sudan, 1946-1955. London, New York, 

Oxford University Press, 1957. 175 p. 

(Middle Eastern monographs, v. 1). 

HD8831.S8F3 

An objective technical study of the problems of the 
new labor movement which arose, “virtually out of 


692 - 756 — 6 ; 


16 


227 



nothing,” as the industrialization of the Sudan began 
after the war. An appendix lists registered trade unions 
and employers’ organizations. The book is based on 
a doctoral thesis at the University of London. 

1456. Hamilton, J. A. de C., ed. The Anglo-Egyptian 

Sudan from within. London, Faber & Faber, 
1935. 367 p. DT121.H3 

Intended to complement the standard history by 
MacMichael (below), this handbook for officials of 
the Sudan services or others seriously involved in the 
work of the country consisted of a set of still useful 
articles by different specialists, many of them, like the 
compiler, in the Sudan Political Service. The subjects 
covered include archaeology, history, ethnology (by 
Dr. Evans-Pritchard), the nomad Arab camel-breed¬ 
ing tribes of the South, the Baggara tribes, the Beja 
tribes of the Red Sea hinterland, the Northern Prov¬ 
inces, the workings of “devolutionary principles” in 
native administration (i.e., indirect rule), religion, 
folklore, and fables, “Karama,” the ritual slaughter 
of animals, then economics, trade and commerce, social 
welfare. The writing is nonacademic. 

1457. Jackson, Henry C. Behind the modern Sudan. 

London, Macmillan; New York, St. Martin’s 

Press, 1955. 226 p. illus. DT121.J3 

1458. - The fighting Sudanese. London, Mac¬ 

millan; New York, St. Martin’s Press, 1954. 
84 p. illus. D766.99.S8J3 

1459. - Sudan days and ways. London, Mac¬ 

millan; New York, St. Martin’s Press, 1954. 

261 p. illus. DTI08.6.J3 

Mr. Jackson had gone out to the Sudan in 1907 and 
retired after a long career as a British administrator 
in 1931. His writing is in anecdotal style. Of these 
three books, the first to appear was Sudan Days and 
Ways , largely the account of his personal experiences 
and those of his colleagues in many parts of the huge 
country, north and south, and in contact with many 
tribes. He had known Slatin and other survivors of 
the Mahdist wars, and gives interesting bits of history 
from those turbulent times. (Earlier books of his are 
on Gordon and the leader of the Dervish “Fuzzy-Wuz- 
zies,” Osman Digna.) In the second book Mr. Jack- 
son recounts with many fascinating human interest 
stories the prowess of the Sudanese as warriors, includ¬ 
ing their notable service during the Second World 
War. The third book is particularly an interpreta¬ 
tion of the problems that had faced the British ad¬ 


ministrators in the Sudan of the Condominium, also 
told largely through what Sir Harold MacMichael, 
writing the foreword, calls “personal reminiscences 
and incidental sidelights.” 

1460. Squires, H. C. The Sudan medical service , 

an experiment in social medicine. London, 

W. Heinemann, Medical Books, 1958. 138 p. 

RA552.S62S8 

Record of one of the more notable of the many 
British contributions to development of the Sudan. 
Dr. Squires begins by saying that the average term of 
a British technical official in the Sudan was between 
20 and 25 years, but that his service, including that of 
medical representative and consulting physician for the 
Sudan Government in London, had covered 43 years. 
The style varies between technical report and personal 
reminiscence. 

1461. Sudan. Commission of Inquiry into the Dis¬ 

turbances in the Southern Sudan. Southern 

Sudan disturbances , August 1955; report. 

[Khartoum] 1956. 127 p. fold. maps. 

DT108.6.A52 1962a 
The mistrust of the tribes in the Southern Sudan for 
policies of the Northern Sudan leaders and parties 
came to a head a few months before the independence 
date with “incidents of mutiny and disorder,” partic¬ 
ularly in Equatoria Province and among the Southern 
Police Corps. This is the detailed report of the Com¬ 
mission of Inquiry, which was submitted to the new 
Minister of the Interior of the Sudan Republic. 

1462. Trimingham, J. Spencer. Islam in the Sudan. 

London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1949. 280 p. BP65.E5T7 

Useful background study of the entire country, its 
history and culture, by the former Secretary of the 
Church Mission Society in the Sudan. The writer’s 
aim was to give a composite picture of the people 
both as Moslems and as Sudanese, with emphasis on 
the role of Islam in shaping present-day society. In 
the same year Mr. Trimingham published The Chris¬ 
tian Church in the Post-War Sudan (London, World 
Dominion Press, 1949. 44 p.), a survey of the educa¬ 
tional work of the Christian missions in this country 
of fanatical Moslems, a large section of whom are ani¬ 
mated by Pan-Arabism. Another of his works is a 
useful grammar and phrase book, Sudan Colloquial 
Arabic (London, Oxford University Press, 1946. 
176 p.). 


228 




HISTORY 

1463. Abbas, Mekki. The Sudan question; the dis¬ 

pute over the Anglo-Egyptian condominium, 
1884-1951. London, Faber & Faber, 1952. 
xix, 201 p., maps. (Colonial, and compara¬ 
tive studies) DT108.A48 1952 

According to Miss Margery Perham in her preface, 
this is the first scholarly work by a Sudanese author to 
be published in English, also the first full-scale study 
of the “major international issue” of the Sudan in 
relations between Egypt and Great Britain. The au¬ 
thor, formerly an official of the Education Department 
and later a member of the Advisory Council for the 
Northern Sudan set up by Sir Douglas Newbold in 
1944, and of the Sudan Administration Conference in 
1946, himself played a vigorous part in the first polit¬ 
ical movements of the Sudan toward self-government. 
This work was the result of a Rhodes scholarship at 
Oxford between 1948 and 1951; at the time of its 
publication Mr. Abbas had returned to the Sudan as 
Director of the new Sudan Gezira Board. 

A book by a Nigerian student of international relations, 
L.A. Fabumni, The Sudan in Anglo-Egyptian Relations; A 
Case Study in Power Politics, 1800-1956 (London, Longmans, 
1960. 466 p. maps), covers both background and the 

dispute that culminated with the British withdrawal from the 
Sudan and Suez, with abundant citation of documents. The 
author takes a nationalist view of British policy, and feels that 
a weak Sudan will inevitably fall under Egyptian domination. 
The book was prepared as a thesis at the University of 
London. 

1464. Allen, Bernard M. Gordon and the Sudan. 

London, Macmillan, 1931. 485 p. 

DT108.3.A4 

An authoritative modern history of General Gor¬ 
don’s 7 years in the Sudan, his fight against slavery, 
and the rise of the Mahdi, climaxed by the long siege 
of Khartoum, its fall, and Gordon’s death. Prepared 
from public records and private papers. 

Hill’s bibliography of the Sudan (no. 1450) lists at least 
300 entries on Gordon. Among recent biographies of the 
renowned hero is Lord Elton’s Gordon of Khartoum: The 
Life of General Charles George Gordon (New York, Knopf, 

I I 1955. 376 p.). Kitchener’s expedition of 1896-98, which 

finally shattered the Dervish power in the battle of Ondur- 
man, was chronicled by a young subaltern participant, Win¬ 
ston S. Churchill, The River War, an Account of the 
Reconquest of the Sudan, 1899. There is a modern edition, 
Eyre & Spottiswoode (1940. 381 p.). 

A particular but crucial episode of Kitchener’s expedition, 
when Anglo-French rivalry in the interior of Africa reached a 
danger point, is described in a well-documented study of 
diplomatic history by an American scholar, M. B. Giffen: 


Fashoda; the Incident and its Diplomatic Setting (Chicago, 
University of Chicago Press, 1930. 230 p.). 

1465. Arkell, Anthony J. A history of the Sudan: 

from the earliest times to 1821. 2d ed., rev. 
London, University of London, Athlone Press, 
1961. 252 p. illus. DT108.1.A7 1961 
This work, first published in 1954, is by an archeol¬ 
ogist who after being Commissioner for Archaeology 
and Anthropology in the Sudan went as lecturer in 
Egyptology to University College, London. The sec¬ 
ond edition incorporates results of later research in 
archeology, ancient and medieval history. The book 
is concerned largely with Nubia and the early Christian 
and later Moslem kingdoms, Dongola and Sennar. It 
ends with the conquest by the Turkish rulers of Egypt 
under Mohammed Ali in 1820. 

1466. Collins, Robert C. The Southern Sudan, 

1883-1898, a struggle for control. New 
Haven, Yale University Press, 1962. 212 p. 
(Yale historical publications. Miscellany 76) 

DT108.3.C6 

By an American scholar who has done exhaustive 
work in the Sudanese archives at Khartoum among the 
documents of the Mahdist State. He examines in de¬ 
tail all actions of the Mahdiya in the Southern Sudan 
from the first appearance of the agents in the Bahr el 
Ghazal in 1882 to raise the tribes for the “holy war,” to 
Kitchener’s defeat of the Khalifa and the end of the 
era. 

1467. Crawford, Osbert G. S. The Fung kingdom 

of Sennar; with a geographical account of the 
middle Nile region. Gloucester [Eng.] J. 
Bellows, 1951. 359 p. illus. DT135.S4C7 
The Fung empire of Sennar, founded in 1504, a fed¬ 
eration of petty kingdoms extending from the third 
cataract above Dongola in the north to the Red Sea 
on the east and the Abyssinian frontier, endured till the 
Turkish invasion in 1821. This scholarly study by a 
noted archeologist, editor of the journal Antiquity, 
is basic to future work on the history of the Northern 
Sudan. 

1468. Duncan, J. S. R. The Sudan; a record of 

achievement. Edinburgh, Blackwood, 1952. 
283 p. DT108.D8 

1469. - The Sudan’s path to independence. 

Edinburgh, Blackwood, 1957. 231 p. 

DT108.6.D8 

The writer went to the Sudan in 1943 and ended 


229 



his career in the British Sudan Service as Deputy Ad¬ 
viser to the Governor-General on constitutional and 
external affairs, staying to see the lowering of the Con¬ 
dominium flags and hoisting of the Sudanese tricolor 
on January 1, 1956. The first of these books is a 
history of the country under the British administra¬ 
tion, including account of nationalist political parties 
and politics in the rapid postwar evolution toward self- 
government against the background of troubled 
diplomatic exchanges between Britain and Egypt. In 
the second book Mr. Duncan combined personal ex¬ 
perience of administration in the Southern Sudan with 
a lucid explanation of the steps toward achievement 
of independence. 

1470. Gray, Richard. A history of the Southern 

Sudan, 1839-1889. London, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1961. 219 p. maps. 

DT108.G7 1961 

Bibliography: p. 204-211. 

According to the reviewer in Africa Report (April 
1962), “Professor Gray has filled a much lamented 
gap in the published history of the Republic of the 
Sudan with this excellent work.” The chapters are 
“The Discovery” (background and first Egyptian ex¬ 
peditions, 1839-41); “Missionaries and Merchants” 
(the contest and deadlock between European ivory 
traders, slave traders, and the first Christian mission¬ 
aries) ; “Egypt and Equatoria” (administration for the 
Khedive Isma’il by Baker and Gordon); “Ordeal and 
Survival” (the fight against the slave trade); “The 
Destruction” (The Mahdiya); and “British Interests 
and the Southern Sudan.” 

1471. Hill, Richard L. Egypt in the Sudan, 1820- 

1881. London, New York, Oxford University 
Press, 1959. 188 p. fold. map. (Middle 

Eastern monographs, 2) DT108.2.H5 

Issued under the auspices of the Royal Institute of Inter¬ 
national Affairs. 

Bibliography: p. 171-177. 

Mr. Hill’s concentrated history, beginning where 
Arkell left off, covers the period of Turko-Egyptian 
conquest and rule (or misrule) of the Sudan, up to 
the beginning of the Mahdist rebellion. Another book 
by Mr. Hill, which, like his bibliography (no. 1450), 
shows his profound acquaintance with the Sudan and 
its history, is A Biographical Dictionary of the Anglo- 
Egyptian Sudan (Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1951. 392 
p.). A large proportion of the names are Sudanese. 


1472. Holt, Peter M. The Mahdist state in the Su¬ 

dan, 1881-1898; a study of its origins, develop¬ 
ment, and overthrow. Oxford, Clarendon 
Press, 1958. 264 p. illus. 

DT108.3.H6 

1473. - 9 A modern history of the Sudan, from 

Funj Sultanate to the present day. New 
York, Grove Press, 1961. 241 p. illus. 

DT108.H72 

The first of these two books by a specialist in Su¬ 
danese studies who was formerly Archivist of the Su¬ 
danese Government, then a professor at the University 
of Khartoum, examines the history of the Mahdiya 
less from the “romantic” reporting on the European 
side than from the archives of the Mahdist State, to 
which he had access. I. Cunnison, reviewing it in 
Africa of July 1959 (p. 319-320), calls it “an excellent 
start to a cool appraisal of the period.” Dr. Holt’s 
second history, covering as it does the Turco-Egyptian 
period, the Mahdist Revolution, the Condominium, 
and first years of the Republic, is necessarily highly 
compressed. The theme is the interplay in the Sudan 
of Arab-African indigenous tradition, Egyptian, and 
British influence. Sketch maps, notes, a select bibli¬ 
ography (p. 221-227) and an index add to the useful¬ 
ness of the work. 

1474. MacMichael, Sir Harold A. The Anglo- 

Egyptian Sudan. London, Faber & Faber, 
1934. 288 p. DT108.M3 

The author served with distinction in the Sudan 
from 1905-1933, then went as Governor to Tanganyika 
Territory, later as commander in chief of Palestine. 
In this comprehensive standard work he told the story 
of the Sudan from Gordon’s death—the Kitchener 
campaign, the final British conquest, the establishment 
of the Condominium which gave Britain charge of gov¬ 
ernment, and the development of the savage and war- 
tom country into what he considered a near model of 
peaceful administration and agricultural experimenta¬ 
tion. 

1475. - History of the Arabs in the Sudan 

and some account of the people who preceded 
them and of the tribes inhabiting Darfur. 
Cambridge, University Press, 1922. 2 v. 

GN652.A7M3 

A scholarly study, going deeply into classical authori¬ 
ties and technical anthropology. The entire second 
volume is devoted to native manuscripts, which are 
for the most part genealogies. 


230 




1476. Newbold, Sir Douglas. The making of the 

modern Sudan; the life and letters of Sir 
Douglas Newbold, K. B. E., of the Sudan Po¬ 
litical Service, Governor of Kordofan, 1932— 
1938, Civil Secretary, 1939-1945. By K. D. D. 
Henderson, with an introd. by Margery Per- 
ham. London, Faber & Faber, 1953. xlii, 
601 p. illus. (Colonial and comparative 
studies) DT108.6.N4 1953 

Newbold, who joined the Sudan Political Service in 
1920 and served in it until his death from overwork 
in 1945, had been Chief Executive Officer of the Sudan 
during the Second World War and when the Advisory 
Councils for the Northern Sudan were set up in 1944, 
giving the Sudanese direct participation in govern¬ 
ment. Miss Margery Perham of Oxford wrote the 
preface of what she called a “biographical study of 
colonial administration”; she characterized Newbold, 
her friend and correspondent, as an outstanding ex¬ 
ample of the colonial District Commissioner, who by 
winning the full confidence of his charges has been “the 
ultimate point of civilizing contact between Britain and 
the people.” The volume is in two parts, the first 
mostly letters (from and to Newbold), the second part 
lectures and articles, interspersed with narrative by 
the editor. Emphasis is on Newbold’s unceasing effort 
for education of the Sudanese and their preparation for 
self -government. 

1477. Paul, Andrew. A history of the Beja tribes of 

the Sudan. Cambridge [Eng.] University 
Press, 1954. 163 p. illus. DT132.P3 

The Beja tribes, who have been described since dy¬ 
nastic Egyptian times and by the present writer as 
“primitive and bloodthirsty desert toughs,” are the 
peoples of the eastern Sudan, back from the Red Sea 
coast. The most aggressive of them, the Hadendowa, 
were made famous as “Fuzzy-Wuzzies” in Kipling’s 
ballad during the Dervish campaigns of the Mahdia. 
Their great service to the Allied cause during the late 
war was, this former administrator claims, no evi¬ 
dence of British popularity but a continuation of their 
ancient feud with the Italian-led Beni Amer of Eritrea. 
“When it was all over they were extremely annoyed to 
find themselves deprived of the fruits of victory which 
for them meant unlimited loot of Beni Amer cattle, and 
a general and enjoyable harrying of the tribe as a 
whole.” Mr. Paul’s spirited narrative of the warlike 
history of the Beja from Egyptian antiquity to the 
present is affectionate in tone. Unattractive as he may 
make the Beja fighting men appear, “there are few 


who have served among them who have left them 
without regret.” 

1478. Shibeika, Mekki. British policy in the Sudan , 

1882-1902. London, New York, Oxford 
University Press, 1952. 439 p. maps. 

DT108.3.S4 

A thorough study of documentary sources underlay 
this account of the British role in the suppression of 
the Mahdi and steps leading to establishment of the 
Condominium. The writer, a Sudanese scholar and 
professor of history at the University of Khartoum, had 
presented a preliminary version as a doctoral thesis at 
the University of London. Dr. Shibeika published in 
1959 another history, The Independent Sudan (New 
York, R. Speller. 506 p.), which carries events up to 
the dawn of independence. 

A more popular account of the period, Alan B. Theobald’s 
The Mahdiya: A History of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, 1881- 
1889 (London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1951. 273 

p.), was written by another professor at what was then Gordon 
Memorial College, now the University of Khartoum. 

1479. The Unity of the Nile Valley, its geographical 

bases and its manifestations in history. Con¬ 
tributions by Abbas Ammar and others. 
Cairo, Government Press, 1947. 98 p. 

DT115.U5 

Written as the Anglo-Egyptian dispute was rising to 
its climax, this group of articles presented the Egyptian 
argument for control of the Sudan. Issued under the 
auspices of the Presidency of the Egyptian Council of 
Ministers. 

1480. Wingate, Sir Ronald, bart. Wingate of the 

Sudan; the life and times of General Sir Regi¬ 
nald Wingate, maker of the Anglo-Egyptian 
Sudan. London, Murray, 1955. 274 p. 

illus. DTI08.05. W5W5 

Biography by the son of the British officer whose di¬ 
rection of military intelligence in Egypt led to the over¬ 
throw of the Khalifa and reconquest of the Sudan in 
1898, and who within a year suceeded Lord Kitchener 
as Sirdar of the Egyptian Army and Governor-General 
of the Sudan. General Wingate remained in this post 
until December 1916, through the period of pacifica¬ 
tion and the formative years of the British adminis¬ 
trative system under the Condominium. He was trans¬ 
ferred to Egypt as High Commissioner during the First 
World War, and came in for criticism as having en¬ 
couraged Egyptian nationalism which led to an anti- 
British uprising in 1919. Sir Ronald’s book is in part a 
vindication of his father’s policy. 


231 


ECONOMICS 

(including Nile Waters Question) 

1481. Gaitskell, Arthur. Gezira; a story of devel¬ 

opment in the Sudan. London, Faber and 
Faber, 1959. 372 p. illus., ports., maps. 

(Colonial and comparative studies) 

HD1741.S85G54 

References: p. 358-368. 

By the first Chairman and Managing Director of 
the Sudan Gezira Board, this is the account of the 
great irrigation scheme in the area called the Gezira, 
below the confluence of the Blue and White Nile at 
Khartoum, by which there have been brought into 
production a million acres of the long staple cotton 
that is the Sudan’s chief export crop. The book is 
reviewed by Harvey Glickman in Africa Report of 
February 1961. 

1482. Hurst, Harold E. The Nile; a general ac¬ 

count of the river and the utilization of its 
waters. London, Constable, 1952. 326 p. 

illus. TC119.N5H8 

This book, by a leading scientist concerned with con¬ 
trol of the Nile, is a basic work for layman and special¬ 
ist alike. Dr. Hurst’s account of the river, its history 
and irrigation systems follows the Nile from Egypt 
through its entire course—the main Nile in the North¬ 
ern Sudan, the Blue Nile in the Central Sudan and 
Ethiopia, the White Nile in Central and Southern 
Sudan, and to its sources in the Great Lakes, Lakes 
Albert, Edward, and Victoria. Climate, health and 
vegetation, history of the peoples of the Nile Basin 
and their origin, exploration in modern times, are 
given attention before he turns to more specific hy¬ 
drology, outlining the major Nile projects undertaken 
and proposed. 

For technical studies of the Nile, essential sources are the 
Papers of the Egyptian Physical Department published by 
the Ministry of Public Works (1920+). These include the 
important series entitled The Nile Basin by Dr. Hurst and P. 
Phillips and others (Cairo, Govt. Press, 1931+ ), which con¬ 
tain all the measurements of the discharge of the river and 
its tributaries, its levels, and the rainfall in its basin. 

1483. Italy. Istituto Nazionale per il Commercio 

Estero. Sudan. Roma, 1960. 175 p. illus., 
maps. HC591.S8I8 

Detailed study of production and trade of the Sudan 
Republic, resulting from a survey mission carried out 
for the Institute by Dr. Ricardo Galli in early 1960. 


1484. McLoughlin, Peter F. “Economic develop¬ 

ment and the heritage of slavery in the Sudan 
Republic.” Africa, v. 32, October 1962: 355- 
391. PL8000.I6, v. 32 

A monograph-length article by an industrial rela¬ 
tions expert who had taught economics at the Uni¬ 
versity of Khartoum in 1959-60. He reviews the 
history of the slave trade in the Sudan and the present- 
day vestiges of slavery (it is contended that there are 
still some 200,000 domestic slaves in the Northern Su¬ 
dan) . He then analyzes the effects on the modem 
economy. His heavy documentation is given in foot¬ 
notes. 

1485. Schlippe, Pierre de. Shifting cultivation in 

Africa ; the Zande system of agriculture. 
London, Routledge & Paul, 1956. 304 p. 

illus., map. S471.A365S4 

Bibliography included in “Notes,” p. 245-291. 

The Zande Scheme, outlined in 1943 by Dr. John D. 
Tothill, Director of the Sudan Department of Agricul¬ 
ture and Forests, and launched by the Sudan Govern¬ 
ment in Equatoria Province, was a pilot project for the 
social and economic development of a seminomadic 
primitive tribe through economic self-sufficiency. The 
core of the project is a home cotton industry, the 
Azande being taught to grow, spin, weave, and wear 
their own cotton, with enough over for export; this is 
bringing them into settled communities, including one 
industrial township, introducing a money economy, 
and evolving new forms of democratic local govern¬ 
ment. In his. analysis this author, a Senior Research 
Officer of an experimental station in the Southern 
Sudan, is concerned with ways and means of adapting 
modern agricultural practice to the environment of the 
wet tropics and the traditional agriculture of the Afri¬ 
can. The work contains anthropological background, 
agronomy, and details of the system, with much of 
the technical matter in chapter notes, also indexes 
of terms in the vernacular, geographical and proper 
names, a general index, and a section of diagrams and 
photographs. 

1486. Sudan. The Nile Waters question: the case for 

the Sudan; the case for Egypt and the Sudan’s 
reply. Khartoum, 1955. 54 p. map. 

The question of the Nile Waters in international re¬ 
lations involves not only Egypt and the Sudan, but also 
Ethiopia and Uganda. No decisions have been reached 
as of early 1963. 


232 


1487. Sudan. Jonglei Investigation Team. The 

equatorial Nile project and its effect in the 
Anglo-Egyptian Sudan; being the report of 
the Jonglei Investigation Team. [Khar¬ 
toum? 1954] 5 v. (v. 1-3, p. 1-1077; v. 
4, 8 maps, ca. 240 fig.; v. 5, lxix p.) 

TC518.N6S8 

Includes bibliographies. 

Report on effects to be expected from the project 
for drainage of the sudd —the great swamp areas of the 
Southern Sudan. This had been outlined by Dr. 
Harold E. Hurst and his colleagues of the Egyptian 
Physical Department in one volume of their series of 
papers on The Nile Basin (Cairo, Govt. Press, 1931+: 
vol. 7, The Future Conservation of the Nile) . Modi¬ 
fications were made in 1948. The Jonglei Investiga¬ 
tion Team of engineers, agricultural specialists, and 
other officials of the Sudan Political Service was ap¬ 
pointed in 1946 to study the White Nile system in 
detail, ignoring political concerns, in order to deter¬ 
mine the best form of river control for the benefit of 
all inhabitants of the Nile Valley. The Report, issued 
following interim reports in 1946, 1947, and 1948, 
was prepared under the chairmanship of P. P. Howell. 
It is in five volumes: 1. A Survey of the Area Affected; 
2. The Equatorial Nile Project: Its Effects and Rem¬ 
edies; 3. Special Investigations and Experimental 
Data; 4. Maps and Diagrams; 5. Introduction and 
Summary. The recommendations in the final volume 
call for a revised operation of the Egyptian-sponsored 
project to reduce the losses in riverain pasture and 
fisheries which would seriously affect the way of life of 
the 660,000 pastoral tribesmen of the area. 

1488. Sudan. Southern Development Investigation 

Team. Natural resources and development 
potential in the southern provinces of the 
Sudan; a preliminary report, 1954. London, 
Sudan Govt., 1955. 262 p. tables. 

HC591.S8A5 

Includes bibliographies. 

This group, under the chairmanship of Dr. P. P. 
Howell of the Sudan Political Service and comprising 
officials of various branches of the Service in the 
Southern Sudan, functioned in the spring of 1954. 
Their report is far wider in scope than that of the 
Jonglei Investigation Team, on which a number of the 
same specialists, including the chairman, had served; 
it covers the entire physical and economic picture, 
present and possible future, of the three provinces of 
the Southern Sudan (Upper Nile, Bahr el Ghazal, 
Equatoria). The 32-page introduction is a summari¬ 


zation of the development problems, under the same 
headings as the following technical appendixes (p. 
35-262), which are in two groups, “The Present Posi¬ 
tion” and “Potential Development.” Aspects covered 
in factual text and tables are physical environment, 
ecology, inhabitants, crop husbandry, animal hus¬ 
bandry, fisheries, water resources, communications and 
trade, and other services. In the second group there 
are examined also the potential development of forest¬ 
ry, big game hunting and tourist trade, and possible 
exploitation of the estimated (exaggeratedly, they say) 
5,000 square miles of papyrus. 

1489. Tothill, John D. Agriculture in the Sudan; 

being a handbook of agriculture as practised 
in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan; by numerous 
authors. London, Oxford University Press, 
1948. 973 p. S338.S8T6 

This volume, edited by a scientist who from 1939 to 
1944 was director of the Sudan Department of Agri¬ 
culture and Forests, was addressed to readers “from 
the Intelligent Tourist to the Professional Agricultur¬ 
ist.” The articles are by a group of high-ranking spe¬ 
cialists. The general chapters cover historical back¬ 
ground, Egyptian connections, vegetation, climate, 
geology, soils, transport, land tenure, revenue from 
lands and crops, the problem of “land fractionization,” 
education, nutrition. More particularized chapters are 
concerned with all phases of agriculture, stock raising, 
locust control, irrigation, research and experimental 
work. The experimental farms centering around the 
Gezira scheme and the large-scale cotton raising made 
possible by the building of the Sennar Dam, 1919-25, 
which provides irrigation for the country between the 
Blue and White Niles, are described in a specially 
interesting section. 

Evidence of the impressive British contribution to the de¬ 
velopment of the Sudan is given in a long bibliographical 
work by R. L. Knight and B. M. Boyns, Agricultural Science 
in the Sudan: A Bibliography with Abstracts (Arbroath, 
Scotland, T. Bunch, 1950. 251 p.). It represents a survey 
of all publications in the field of agricultural science having 
direct relation to the Sudan, bringing together the research 
carried out in the country over 50 years, much of which had 
been published in obscure journals. Abstracts are included 
of the less readily accessible papers. The emphasis is largely 
on cotton growing, particularly the Gezira Scheme. 

1490. Warren, Cline. The agricultural economy of 

the Sudan. Washington, U.S. Dept, of Agri¬ 
culture, April 1962. 28 p. (ERS-Foreign 

26) DLG 

For general note on this series, see no. 445. 


233 


1491. YveDyak, ed. Sudan today: the economic sur¬ 

vey of the Sudan. Alexandria, Egypt, The 
Middle East Observer, 1958. various paging. 

HG591.S8Y9 

A special issue of an Egyptian magazine of business 
opportunities, containing separately paged sections of 
from 5 to 56 pages, with advertising interspersed. A 
general picture of the country and people is followed 
by a long analysis of agriculture and shorter articles 
on irrigation, finance, industry, communications, and 
commerce. 

ANTHROPOLOGY, ETC. 

1492. Crazzolara, J. Pasquale. The Lwoo. Verona, 

Istituto Missioni Africane, 1950-54. 3 v. 
illus. (Museum Combonianum; collana di 
studi africani, n. 3, 6, 8) GN650.C7 

Contents.—pt. 1. Lwoo migrations.—pt. 2. Lwoo tradi¬ 
tions.—pt. 3. Clans. 

1493. - Zur Gesellschaft und Religion der 

Nueer. Modling-Wien, Verlag der Druckerei 
Mission St. Gabriel, 1953. 221 p. Studia 
Instituti Missionsdruckerei Anthropos, v. 5) 

4DT SUDAN 

Father Crazzolara, a missionary priest in the South¬ 
ern Sudan, is an authority on the Nilotic tribes. The 
comprehensive study of the Luo (the author’s spelling 
is determinedly un-English) is the standard account of 
this tribe, and the book on the Nuer supplements the 
earlier study by Evans-Pritchard (below). Among 
Father Crazzolara’s other books, the most important 
are his linguistic studies. The first of these, all in 
English, was Outlines of a Nuer Grammar published 
in 1932 as T. 13 of the Anthropos Linguistische Bibli- 
othek (Modling-Wien, Mission St. Gabriel. 218 p.). 
His Study of the Acooli Language; Grammar and 
Vocabulary was published for the International Afri¬ 
can Institute by Oxford University Press (London, 
1938. 426 p.), as was also his most recent Study of 
the Logbara (Ma’di) Language; Grammar and Vo¬ 
cabulary (London, 1959. 384 p.). 

1494. Evans-Pritchard, Edward E. Witchcraft, 

oracles and magic among the Azande. Ox¬ 
ford, Clarendon Press, 1937. 558 p. 

GN475.8.E9 

Professor Evans-Pritchard studied anthropology 
under Dr. Seligman and began his research into the 
ethnology of Northeast Africa with the encouragement 
of that pioneer scholar. His early career included six 


major and several minor expeditions to Central, East, 
and North Africa, 1926-39, and three years as pro¬ 
fessor of sociology in Cairo. Since 1935, with the ex¬ 
ception of the war years, when he was on active service 
in Africa, he has been teaching at Oxford, having been 
Professor of Social Anthropology since 1946. From 
1949-51 he was President of the Royal Anthropological 
Institute. His first full-length book was this celebrated 
study of the Azande. 

1495. - The Nuer: a description of the modes 

of livelihood and political institutions of a 
Nilotic people. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 
1940. 271 p. DT132.E8 

1496. -- Kinship and marriage among the Nuer. 

Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1951. 83 p. illus. 

GN480.E78 

1497. - Nuer religion. Oxford, Clarendon 

Press, 1956. 336 p. BL2480.N7E9 

These three extended studies of the Nilotic tribe 

among whom Dr. Evans-Pritchard had done long field¬ 
work are among the most substantial of his many con¬ 
tributions to African anthropology. 

1498. Howell, P. P. A manual of Nuer law, being an 

account of customary law, its evolution and 
development in the courts established by the 
Sudan Government. London, New York, 
Published for the International African In¬ 
stitute by the Oxford University Press, 1954. 
256 p. illus. DLC-LL 

By an anthropologist who had followed the regular 
pattern of the Sudan Political Service in devoting his 
leisure time to study of the peoples in his charge. Pro¬ 
fessor Evans-Pritchard in the preface points out that 
during the 20 years since his own observations of Nuer 
society were made, the European administration had 
taken effect in Nuerland; consequently Mr. Howell’s 
study reflects the beginnings of the codification of 
primitive law. The book is reviewed at some length 
by Godfrey Lienhardt in African Affairs, v. 54, July 
1955, p. 235-236. 

1499. International African Institute. Ethno¬ 

graphic survey of Africa [East Central Africa 
series] London. 

For general note on this series, see no. 270. The 
following volumes relate to tribes of the Sudan: 

4. The Nilotes of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Uganda, 
by Audrey J. Butt. 1952. 198 p. DT132.B8 


234 






6. The Northern Nilo-Hamites, by G. W. B. Hunting- 
ford. 1953. 106 p. GN659.N5H78 

Includes Bari, Lotuko, Lokoya. 

9. The Azande and related peoples of the Anglo-Egyptian 
Sudan and Belgian Congo, by P. T. W. Baxter and 
Audrey Butt. 1953. 152 p. DT132.B3 

1500. Lienhardt, Godfrey. Divinity and experi¬ 

ence; the religion of the Dinka. New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1961. 319 p. illus. 

BL2480.D5L5 

The author based this thorough anthropological 
analysis on 2 years of firsthand experience among the 
Western Dinka of the Bahr el Ghazal Province of the 
Southern Sudan. The Dinka are a typical Nilotic 
Negro tribe whose culture centers around their cattle, 
and whose religious leaders are called “masters of the 
fishing-spear.” 

1501. Seligman, Charles G., and Brenda Z. Selig- 

man. Pagan tribes of the Nilotic Sudan. 
London, Routledge, 1932. xxiv, 565 p. illus. 
lx pi., maps, fold, geneal. tab. (The Eth¬ 
nology of Africa) DT132.S4 

This pioneering work resulted from surveys con¬ 
ducted between 1910 and 1921 and laid the founda¬ 


tion for much further anthropological research in the 
southern portion of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. 

1502. Tescaroli, Livio. Poesia Sudanese. Bologna, 

Editrice Nigrizia, 1961. 117 p. (Museum 

Combonianum, no. 12) 

An anthology of 101 poems from the Nilotic tribes 
of the Southern Sudan, Shilluk, Dinka, Zande and 
others. Introduction, text in vernacular with trans¬ 
lations and notes; for some, music, transcriptions. Re¬ 
viewed in Africa, January 1962. 

1503. Westermann, Diedrich. The Shilluk people, 

their language and folklore. Philadelphia, 
Pa., The Board of Foreign Missions of the 
United Presbyterian Church of N.A.; Berlin, 
D. Reimer (Ernst Vohsen) 1912. Ixiii, 
312 p. illus., maps. PL8671.W4 

The 40-odd page introduction of Dr. Westermann’s 
primarily linguistic study is a general description of 
the country and its people. Then 94 pages are straight 
grammar and linguistics, followed by over 140 pages 
of folklore and traditions, in Shilluk text with trans¬ 
lation. The work ends with Shilluk English and Eng- 
lish-Shilluk vocabularies. 


Ethiopia 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1504. Leslau, Wolf. Bibliography of the Semitic 
languages of Ethiopia. New York, New York 
Public Library, 1946. 94 p. Z7049.S5L4 
The author is well known as a philologist specializing 
in Ethiopian and Middle Eastern languages. In this 
bibliography he lists linguistic studies and texts of 
the various Semitic languages of Ethiopia, Ge’ez, Tigre, 
Tigrina, Amharic, Argobba, Gafat, Gurague, ancient 
and modem Harari. He omits texts of religious char¬ 
acter. In his introduction he mentions the more im¬ 
portant published bibliographies of Ethiopia, most of 
which are by Italian scholars. Typical of his own 
contributions is a monograph, The Verb in Harari 
(,South Ethiopia), published in the series of University 
of California Publications in Semitic Philology (Berke¬ 
ley. 1958. 86 p.). 

A bibliography by a scholar at the University College of 
Addis Ababa was published in 1961: Pierre Comba, Inven- 
taire des livres amhariques figurant dans la collection Sthio- 
pienne & la Bibliothique de VUniversity College d’Addis 


Ababa, avril 1959. List of books in Amharic . . . (Addis 
Ababa, 1961. 133 p. 33 cm). It is an annotated list of 

529 works, original and translated. The title is printed first 
in Amharic characters. Beginning with an index of authors, 
section 1 lists publications by authors; section 2 by titles of 
anonymous works; section 3, Bible texts. 

GENERAL 

1505. Abdul-Haggag, Y. A contribution to the 

physiography of northern Ethiopia. London, 
University of London, Athlone Press, 1961. 
xiv, 153 p. illus., maps. GB343.A6 1961 
Bibliography: p. 144-148. 

A technical monograph in geomorphology. The 
writer is a lecturer in geography in Cairo. 

1506. Addis Ababa. Chamber of Commerce. Guide 

book of Ethiopia. Addis Ababa, 1954. 
443 p. illus., ports, maps. DT378.A52 

Text in English and Amharic. 

A volume of useful factual information about Ethi¬ 
opia. The contents are divided into parts on govern* 


235 


ment, people, culture; physiography, climate and 
geology; agriculture; commerce, industry and finance, 
tourist interest and general information. A short final 
section lists Amharic literature published in Ethiopia, 
followed by a 17-page bibliography of literature on 
Ethiopia in Western languages. Except for statistical 
data and the section on economic life, the material is 
largely valid almost a decade later. 

1507. Buchholzer, John. The land of burnt faces; 

translated from the Danish by Maurice 
Michael. London, A. Barker, 1955. 159 p. 

illus. DT378.B782 1955 

The author of this account of modem Ethiopia had 
lived in Addis Ababa and traveled extensively about 
the country. His story brings warmly to life the many 
individuals and groups of Ethiopian society with whom 
he came into friendly contact—dignitaries of the Gov¬ 
ernment, neighbors in the town, villagers and tribes¬ 
men, Galla, Danakil, Shakalla. Glimpses of history 
are woven into his narrative, and revealing descriptions 
of festivals, ceremonies, and everyday life. 

Notable among a number of European travel accounts of 
Ethiopia is a broad picture of the awakening land drawn by 
a German writer, Dr. Hans Jenny: Land im Aufbruch (Stutt¬ 
gart, Deutsche Verlags-Anstalt, 1957. 268 p. illus.). 

1508. Buxton, David. Travels in Ethiopia. 2d ed. 

London, Ernest Benn, 1957. 176 p. illus. 

DT378.B8 1957 
The writer, an official concerned with locust control 
and interested in architecture, traveled through much 
of Ethiopia in 1942 to 1945, covering the country by 
lorry or on muleback, noticing thatched roofs in pref¬ 
erence to the corrugated iron favored by progressive 
Ethiopians. In his text of impressions accompanying 
interesting photographs, he summarized geography and 
history, then concentrated on description of “the more 
attractive aspects of the Ethiopian scene” as he saw 
them on the Shoan plateau, among the Galla and other 
Hamitic tribes of South and West, in the old Eastern 
capital of Aksum, on the Eritrean desert border, and 
finally, the famous rock churches of Lalibela. The 
book was published first in 1949 (New York, M. Mc¬ 
Bride), and reprinted with slight alterations for the 
second edition. 

1509. Cheesman, Robert E. Lake Tana and the 

Blue Nile: an Abyssinian quest. London, 
Macmillan, 1936. 400 p. 

DT390.B5C5 1936 
Major Cheesman had been Consul in Northwest 
Ethiopia from 1925 to 1934. His book recorded a 
journey made to map the upper waters of the river, 


where at Lake Tana the large-scale dam projects were 
under consideration. In a careful and well-informed 
narrative, free of the sensationalism of most accounts 
of travel in this wild country, he explained much of 
the natural conditions and the customs and culture of 
the natives, whom he found courteous and under fairly 
good administrative control. Completed in 1934, the 
manuscript was stolen and had to be rewritten; its 
publication date does not imply concern with the 
Italian war. 

1510. The Diplomatist. Spotlight on Ethiopia on 

the occasion of the 30th anniversary of the 

coronation of H.I.M. Haile Selassie I. 
London, 1960. 38 p. illus. DT387.9.D57 

A public relations brochure in magazine form, carry¬ 
ing feature articles on the Emperor and his family, 
Ethiopian history, political affairs, economy, language, 
etc. 

1511. Ethiopia. Press and Information Department. 

Ethiopia: general background information. 
Addis Ababa, 1958. 85 p. DT373.E8 1958 

Second edition (1st in 1957) of a booklet presenting 
salient facts of Ethiopian history and life. It begins 
with biographical sections on Haile Selassie and the 
Imperial Family. 

1512. Ethiopia observer; journal of independent opin¬ 

ion, economics, history and the arts. v. 1, no. 

1+ Dec. 1956+ Addis Ababa, quarterly. 

Edited by Richard and Rita Pankhurst. 

DLG 

The New Times and Ethiopia News , which had been 
edited by Miss E. Sylvia Pankhurst since May 5, 1936, 
was terminated on May 5, 1956, and succeeded by this 
larger illustrated magazine published monthly during 
the editor’s life, and revived as a quarterly after her 
death in 1960 under the editorship of her son. Articles 
on a wide range of topics concerned with Ethiopia 
are sometimes of monograph length. A chronology, 
“Ethiopian Record,” occupies the last pages. 

Among the most important organs for study of Ethiopian 
culture and Ethiopica in the journal founded by the late 
Italian Ethiopicist, Carlo Conti Rossini, Rassegna di studi 
etiopici, 1941 -j- (published by Centro di Studi Etiopici e Cris- 
tiano-Orientali, Universita di Roma, Istituto Studi Orientali). 

1513. Hotten, John Camden, ed. Abyssinia and its 

people; or, Life in the land of Prester John. 

London, John Camden Hotten, 1868. 384 p. 

DT377.H33 

In 1864 the Emperor of Abyssinia, Theodore, an¬ 
gered because the British Foreign Office had not re- 


236 


plied promptly to a letter he had written Queen Vic¬ 
toria, imprisoned the British Consul and other Euro¬ 
peans. A punitive expedition was clearly indicated 
and duly dispatched in 1867 under Sir Robert Napier, 
to win a quick victory, bring about the suicide of Theo¬ 
dore, and come home, leaving the country to its next 
emperor, John. In October 1867, the Times com¬ 
mented that even a dull book on Abyssinia, if it re¬ 
ported correctly, would be eagerly received. The well- 
known publisher and rare book dealer, John Camden 
Hotten, who was a Fellow of the Ethnological Society, 
instantly took up the challenge and put together this 
famous and fascinating work, based on the accounts 
of earlier travelers. The book is not so much extracts 
as resumes, arranged to give an exciting picture of a 
barbaric country. Hotten closed with chapters on the 
British captives and various suggestions for the rescue 
expedition. 

1514. Lipsky, George A. Ethiopia; its people, its 

society, its culture, by George A. Lipsky, in 
collaboration with Wendall Blanchard, Abra¬ 
ham M. Hirsch, and Bela C. Maday. New 
Haven, HRAF Press, 1962. 376 p. (Survey 
of world cultures, 9) DT373.L56 

Intended to meet the need for a “comprehensive re¬ 
liable volume” synthesizing the most authoritative ma¬ 
terials on Ethiopia in all aspects of behavioral sciences. 
The presentation is encyclopedic, with chapters divided 
into sections with subheadings, the writing in easy 
narrative style. The book is concluded with tabulated 
statistical data, a 14-page selected bibliography, and a 
full index. 

1515. Luther, Ernest W. Ethiopia today. Stan¬ 

ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1958. 
158 p. illus. DT373.L8 

By an American economist who had spent over 6 
years (1950-56) working in Ethiopia, this is a useful 
appraisal of a backward country whose ruler is trying 
to bring her into the modem world within the some¬ 
what hampering limits of his own absolute authority. 
Mr. Luther’s emphasis is on economic aspects, includ¬ 
ing many details of the foreign aid, FAO, point 4, etc., 
which has been given generously in the past decade. 

1516. Rey, Charles F. The real Abyssinia. Phila¬ 

delphia, Lippincott, 1935. 281 p. DT373.R44 
The writer, a British colonial officer and specialist on 
economic questions (knighted in 1938), went to Abys¬ 
sinia first in 1919 on an expedition connected with 
geological reconnaissance, and by 1927 had made four 
expeditions to the little-known country, on which he 


became a recognized authority. His writings on Abys¬ 
sinia began with Unconquered Abyssinia as It Is To¬ 
day , 1923; in 1927 he published In the Country of the 
Blue Nile; and in 1929, The Romance of the Portu¬ 
guese in Africa. He wrote the article on Abyssinia for 
the Encyclopaedia Britannica in 1929. His 1935 book 
was a general description and survey including a long 
chapter on slavery and serfdom (“the situation cannot 
be regarded as satisfactory”). 

1517. Talbot, David A. Contemporary Ethiopia. 

New York, Philosophical Library, 1952. 
267 p. DT373.T3 

1518. - Haile Selassie I; silver jubilee. The 

Hague, W. P. van Stockum, 1955. 489 p. 

DT387.7.T3 

The author, an American Negro journalist, was edi¬ 
tor of the English-language weekly published by the 
Ethiopian Press and Information Department, The 
Ethiopian Herald. His 1952 book was an unfailingly 
laudatory survey of the country and of the career of 
the Emperor, with much stress laid on Ethiopian prog¬ 
ress toward western standards. In the last chapter 
Mr. Talbot spoke warmly of bonds between Negro- 
Americans and Ethiopians. His second book, celebrat¬ 
ing the Emperor’s “twenty-five years of reign, twenty- 
five years of building,” omitted the background of 
geography and history with which he had begun Con¬ 
temporary Ethiopia, and concentrated enthusiastically 
on the accomplishments of “the Haile Selassie I era.” 

HISTORY AND ARCHEOLOGY 

1519. Beckingham, Charles F., and G. W. B. 

Huntingford, eds. and trs. Some records 
of Ethiopia, 1593-1646; being extracts from 
the History of High Ethiopia or Abassia, by 
Manoel de Almeida, together with Bahrey’s 
History of the Galla. London, Printed for 
the Hakluyt Society, 1954. xcviii, 267 p. 
illus., maps (Works issued by the Hakluyt 
Society, 2d ser., no. 107) 

G161.H2 2d ser., no. 107 

Translations from two source works for the medieval 
history of Abyssinia—that is, the central highlands 
which formed the ancient Semitic and Christian coun¬ 
try, in contrast to the present extended empire of 
Ethiopia. The editors have contributed useful notes. 
This supplements the monumental work of Budge 
(below). 


237 




1520. Berkeley, G. F. H. The campaign of Adowa 

and the rise of Menelik. New ed. London, 
Constable, 1935. 403 p. DT387.3.B5 
The first edition of this account of the campaign in 
which the Italians suffered a severe reverse at the 
hands of Menelik in 1896 was published in 1902. The 
writer, a British expert on modern Italy, in his new 
introduction explained that it “may be considered to 
favor the Italians,” as it was prepared largely from 
Italian sources, the only books on the Abyssinian side 
then available to him being a few works by travelers 
and the study by A. B. Wylde, Modern Abyssinia 
(London, Methuen, 1901, 506 p.), at that time con¬ 
sidered the authoritative account of Abyssinia. “To¬ 
day,” he commented in 1935, “it is no longer possible 
to sympathize with the Italians. They are initiating 
a war, and one which is unnecessary, about to enslave 
a whole people and wreck the League of Nations.” 
The new introduction contained a brief sketch of 
Abyssinian history up to the Italian campaign of 1895- 
96, which is studied in military detail in the text. 

1521. Bidder, Irmgard. Lalibela; the monolithic 

churches of Ethiopia. Translated from the 
German by Rita Grabham-Hortmann. 
Drawings by Elfriede Fulda. New York, 
Praeger, 1960. 137 p. illus. (part col., 

part mounted) maps. (Books that matter) 

NA6097.E8B53 

A monograph with succinct text and excellent 
pictures. 

St. George for Ethiopia, by Beatrice Playne (London, Con¬ 
stable, 1954. 200 p. illus.), the personal narrative of a 

mural painter who toured the northern Ethiopian highlands 
in search of early Christian art, also is focused on the rock 
churches of Lalibela. 

1522. Bruce, James, 1730-1794. Travels to discover 

the sources of the Nile in the years 1768, 1769, 
1770, 1771, 1772, and 1773. By James Bruce 
of Kinnaird. Edinburgh, G. G. J. & J. Robin¬ 
son, 1790. 5 v., plates, maps. DT377.B88 
The most famous of early accounts in English of 
Abyssinia, used as a source by all later writers (see, 
e.g., Moorehead, below). The last volume is devoted 
to “selected specimens of natural history.” The Laird 
of Kinnaird is reported to have dictated his travel 
reminiscences some years after the events, when his 
memory was not as precise as that of a younger man. 
It might be noted that in 1792 there was published in 
London an anonymous Sequel to the Adventures of 
Baron Munchausen . . .“humbly dedicated to Mr. 
Bruce, the Abyssinian Traveller.” However, for many 


years Bruce was the English world’s authority on 
Abyssinia. 

The comparable French authority was Arnauld d’Abbadie, 
whose Douze ans de sejour dans la haute Ethiopie (Tome I. 
Paris, Hachette, 1868. 621 p.) is an understanding descrip¬ 

tion. This writer is not to be confused with a slightly later 
French Ethiopicist, Antoine Thompson d’Abbadie, who pub¬ 
lished several linguistic studies. The work that opened the 
medieval Abyssinia to European acquaintance was that of the 
Portuguese priest, Canon Francisco Alvares, V erdadeir a in- 
formagao das terras do preste Joao, published in 1560. A 
modem translation in English, Narrative of the Portuguese 
Embassy to Abyssinia during the Years 1520-1527 , with notes 
and introduction by Lord Stanley of Alderley, was published 
for the Hakluyt Society in 1881 (London, xxvii, 416 p., 
map. Hakluyt Society. Works, no. LXIV). A reprint in 
Portuguese was issued by the Agenda Geral das Colonias in 
Lisbon in 1943. Of this book, Jean Doresse comments that 
it is “so devoid of fabrication that it remains a classic.” 

1523. Budge, Sir E. A. Wallis. A history of Ethiopia, 
Nubia and Abyssinia (according to the hiero¬ 
glyphic inscriptions of Egypt and Nubia, and 
the Ethiopian chronicles). London, Me¬ 
thuen, 1928. 2 v. DT381.B8 

In this monumental work the Keeper of Egyptian 
and Assyrian Antiquities of the British Museum 
brought together the results of scholarship in transla¬ 
tions of classical inscriptions and medieval and modern 
Ethiopie chronicles regarding the legends and facts of 
history of Ethiopia from the time of the Pharaohs to 
the 20th century. The first section is on Nubia which 
by the ancients was described vaguely, along with the 
rest of the land from Egypt to India, as “Ethiopia.” 
(The Nubian desert, through which the Nile flows into 
Egypt, is a loose geographical term, like Sahara. Nu¬ 
bia proper lies in the northeastern Sudan, the desert 
stretching into Egypt.) Works extant in Ethiopie, 
dating from the beginning of the Christian era, have 
been much studied by philologists and Orientalists, and 
copies of over 1200 MSS are to be found in the great 
European libraries, the largest collection being that of 
the British Museum. The Royal Chronicles, of which 
the earliest part is the Axum chronicle recording the 
wars of Amda Sion (1314-44) against the Muslims, 
form the basis of Abyssinian history. 

A later portion, the Royal Chronicle of Abyssinia, 1769- 
1840, was published with translation and notes by H. Weld 
Blundell (Cambridge, University Press, 1922. 548 p.). This 
is an impressive work of scholarship, giving the text in Ge’ez 
(or Ethiopie, the literary language of Ethiopia) and following 
it with a complete translation and appendixes containing ex¬ 
planatory notes on chronology, church ritual, geographical in¬ 
dex, etc. The chronicle by court historians is in the epic 
style, to the glory of the Negus. 


238 


An Italian work on the early period is Conti Rossini’s 
Storia d’Etiopia (see no. 1548). 

1524. Doresse, Jean. Ethiopia. Translated from 

the French by Elsa Coult. London, Elek 
Books; New York, Putnam, 1959. 239 p. 

illus. DT379.5.D613 

1525. - Uempire du Pretre-Jean. Paris, Plon, 

1957. 2 v. illus. (D’un monde a l’autre; la 
collection des decouvertes) DT383.D65 

Bibliographies: v. 1, p. 283-296; v. 2, p. 333-351. 

The archeological treasures of Ethiopia have been 
the subject of intensive study by this French specialist 
in Coptic literature, who has been in the country as 
director of archeological research. His Ethiopia was 
published in Paris in 1956, with the title Au pays de la 
reine de Saba: L’Ethiopie , antique et moderne (A. 
Guillot. 171 p. illus. Les Hauts lieux de l’histoire, 
7). It is a descriptive, historical, and interpretive 
sketch of the country, containing many photographs 
and other illustrations in which interest is divided be¬ 
tween Ethiopian scenes and types and monuments of 
art and literature. M. Doresse’s Empire du Pretre 
Jean is a history of ancient and medieval Ethiopia, 
based on study of the many existent manuscripts of 
Ethiopic literature. He includes long bibliographies 
at the end of each volume. 

1526. Jesman, Czeslaw. The Russians in Ethiopia; 

an essay in futility. London, Chatto and 
Windus, 1958. 159 p. illus. DT387.J4 

Includes bibliography. 

An historical study of Russian attempts to gain a 
position of influence in Ethiopia, beginning with the 
so-called Ashimov expedition of 1888-89, which tried 
and failed to establish a colony and a port on the 
Somali coast. This had been followed for a decade by 
Russian efforts at penetration. The author had had 
access to Western sources only, being unable to use 
archives in Russia, and those in Ethiopia having been 
largely destroyed. 

The continued Russian interest in Ethiopia and sympathy 
following the Italian conquest was evidenced in a big volume 
edited by the leading Soviet Africanist D. A. Ol’derogge, 
Abissiniia ( Efiopita), published by the Institut Etnografii of 
the Academy of Sciences in Moscow (1936. 582 p.). It is 

a symposium following an Abyssinian exhibition in Lenin¬ 
grad, and contains a variety of essays, illustrations, and maps. 

An article by Dr. Sergius Yakobson, “The Soviet Union 
and Ethiopia: A Case of Traditional Behavior,” is scheduled 
for publication in the July 1963 issue of The Review of 
Politics. 


1527. Jones, A. H. M., and Elizabeth Monroe. A 

history of Ethiopia. Oxford, Clarendon 
Press, 1955. 196 p. DT381.J6 1955 
Standard history of Ethiopia, first published as His¬ 
tory of Abyssinia in 1935. In the revised edition there 
is an added chapter summarizing the period of the 
Italian Occupation, the Second World War, and the 
Restoration. 

1528. Moorehead, Alan. The Blue Nile. New 

York, Harper & Row, 1962. 308 p. 

DT115.M6 

Following the popular success of his White Nile 
(no. 1282), Mr. Moorehead, whom a reviewer in the 
London Times Literary Supplement (July 13, 1962, 
p. 503) calls “the most readable of living historians,” 
has chronicled in somewhat the same manner the Blue 
Nile. He goes beyond and above the source of the 
river in the Abyssinian highlands and its early ex¬ 
plorers, from James Bruce on, to Egyptian history— 
the Napoleonic invasion, the Mameluke conquest, 
Napier, the Samuel Bakers, and many others whose 
stories are somewhat indirectly connected with his 
main theme. 

1529. Pankhurst, Estelle Sylvia. Ethiopia, a 

cultural history. Essex [Eng.] Lalibela 
House, 1955. 747 p. illus. (part col.) 

DT381.P35 

Ponderous tome presenting a “comprehensive” 
survey of Ethiopian history and culture. Based on 
careful study and including much good archeological 
and artistic material, as exemplified in the plates, it 
is overweighted by the mass of detail, especially of long 
quotations from Ethiopian records, papers, and docu¬ 
ments testifying to the glories of the past and the 
virtuous accomplishments of the present. Miss Pank- 
hurst’s villains throughout are the Italians. 

POLITICS AND ECONOMICS 

1530. Dubois, Hubert P. Cheminot de Djibouti & 

Addis-Abeba, le chemin de fer franco-ethio- 
pien. Paris, Librairie academique Perrin, 
1959. 252 p. DLG 

This work on the railway from Djibouti in French 
Somaliland, which is the only approach by rail to Addis 
Ababa, has not been available for examination. 

1531. Ethiopia. Code civil de VEmpire d’fithiopie. 

Paris, Librairie generate de droit et de juris¬ 
prudence, 1962. 534 p. DLG-LL 


239 



1532. Ethiopian economic review, no. 1+ Dec. 

1959+ Addis Ababa, tables, irregular. 
Issued by the Imperial Ethiopian Govern¬ 
ment Ministry of Commerce and Industry. 

DLG 

Official journal reviewing the economic life of Ethi¬ 
opia. A large, well-printed magazine, its text is equal¬ 
ly divided between articles on general and specific as¬ 
pects of economic life and statistical tables of external 
trade, industry, finances, etc. In No. 5, February 1962, 
an inserted green paper section lists businesses in the 
Empire of Ethiopia. The periodical follows and su¬ 
persedes an Economic Handbook, Dec. 1958 (93, 119 
p.), published by the Ministry of Commerce and In¬ 
dustry, which in turn superseded an illustrated volume, 
Economic Progress of Ethiopia (Addis Ababa, 1955. 
171 p.). 

1533. Food and Agriculture Organization of the 

United Nations. Agriculture in Ethiopia. 
Compiled by H. P. Huffnagel, consultant to 
FAO. Rome, 1961, xv, 484 p. illus., maps 
(part fold.) tables. S325.F6 

An exhaustive survey of Ethiopian agriculture. 
Coverage includes physical characteristics, economic 
conditions, agricultural practices, production of spe¬ 
cific crops, animal husbandry, marketing and process¬ 
ing, forestry, fisheries, agricultural administration, re¬ 
search and education, and agricultural credit. 

1534. Haile Selassie I, Emperor of Ethiopia. 

Speeches delivered on various occasions. May 
1957-December 1959. Addis Ababa, Minis¬ 
try of Information, 1960. 183 p. 

DT387.9.H3 

Of the 50-odd addresses by the Emperor brought to¬ 
gether in this collection, over a third are concerned 
with education, and almost as many with the economic 
progress of his country. Several others involve inter¬ 
national relations. 

1535. Holm, Henrietta M. The agricultural econ¬ 

omy of Ethiopia. Washington, U.S. Govt. 
Print. Off., 1956. 44 p. maps, tables. 
(U.S. Foreign Agricultural Service. FAS-M- 
13) S21.Z2383, no. 13 

One of a series of brochures on agricultural ques¬ 
tions abroad, based on official statistics and reports of 
U.S. Foreign Service officers. The areas in which 
technical aid is being given by the United States, the 
Food and Agriculture Organization, and other inter¬ 
national agencies come in for attention in regard to 
plans for development. 


1536. Marein, Nathan. The Ethiopian Empire; 

federation and laws. Rotterdam, Royal 
Netherlands Print. & Lithographing Co., 
1955. 456 p. DLC-LL 

A compendium for the use of Ethiopian lawyers and 
judges and for foreigners concerned with laws relating 
to Ethiopian commerce and finance, by the Advocate 
General and General Adviser to the Imperial Ethio¬ 
pian Government. This 1955 volume superseded two 
earlier guides, Handbook to the Laws of Ethiopia 
(Addis Ababa, 1949. 207 p.) and The Judicial Sys¬ 
tem and the Laws of Ethiopia (Rotterdam, Royal 
Netherlands Print. & Lithographing Co., 1951. 

288 p.). 

1537. Pankhurst, Estelle Sylvia. Eritrea on the 

eve; the past and future of Italy’s “firstborn” 
colony, Ethiopia’s ancient sea province. 
Woodford Green, Essex, “New Times and 
Ethiopia News” Books, 1952. 72 p. illus. 

DT395.P2S 

1538. - and Richard K. P. Pankhurst. Ethio¬ 

pia and Eritrea; the last phase of the reunion 
struggle, 1941-1952. Woodford Green, 
Essex, Lalibela House, 1953. 360 p. illus. 

D821.E7P3 

The late Miss Pankhurst, of the famous suffragette 
family, was devoted spokesman for Ethiopian interests, 
to further which she worked for a quarter century; her 
journal, New Times and Ethiopia News, was begun 
during the Italian campaign in 1936 (see Ethiopia Ob¬ 
server, above). - Eritrea on the Eve is largely in terms 
of indictment, both of the 60 years of Italian rule of her 
“first-born” colony, and of the 10 years of British 
caretaker government. The author did not understate 
her case against the “oppressors” of Eritrea. In the 
second book, written in collaboration with her son, she 
rehearsed at great length the stages of the British war¬ 
time and postwar administration and the United Na¬ 
tions actions by which the seacoast country was at last 
to be reunited with “the Ethiopian Motherland.” She 
quoted copiously from official and unofficial docu¬ 
ments, of greater or lesser pertinence. 

1539. Pankhurst, Richard. An introduction to the 

economic history of Ethiopia from early times 
to 1800. London, Sidgwick & Jackson, 1961. 
454 p. " DLC 

This book by “an impassioned defender of values 
and institutions Amharan” is reviewed in the Middle 


240 



East Journal, Spring 1962, by William H. Lewis. The 
reviewer speaks of it as one of a series, and states that 
Mr. Pankhurst is now preparing a companion volume 
to cover the contemporary scene. There are frequent 
articles on economic themes of past and present in 
Ethiopia Observer, edited by this writer. 

1540. Perham, Margery. The government of Ethio¬ 
pia. London, Faber & Faber, 1948. 481 p. 

JQ3754.P4 

Standard work on Ethiopian government and politi¬ 
cal history up to the postwar Restoration. In her in¬ 
troduction Miss Perham commented that the book was 
designed to offset the distortions of propaganda regard¬ 
ing Ethiopia, which since the Italian aggression had 
become the subject for an emotional approach little 
backed by “serious information.” Her skillful, far- 
ranging study was reviewed at digest length in African 
Affairs, v. 47, July 1948, p. 169-173. 

1541. Quaranta Di San Severino, Ferdinando, ba- 
rone. Ethiopia, an empire in the making. 
London, P. S. King, 1939. 120 p. 

DG571.A2I8, ser.4,no.7 
Recital of economic and social developments begun 
and achieved in Ethiopia during the first 3 years of 
Italian civil administration, by an official of the Minis¬ 
try of Italian Africa. 

A technical analysis of the administrative organization set 
up by the Italian conquerors in Ethiopia was presented in 
an article by an American political scientist, Arthur H. 
Steiner, “The Government of Italian East Africa” (American 
Political Science Review, v. 30, Oct. 1936, p. 884-902). 
Despite his dislike of the aggression, the writer believed that 
the Italians were planning a good government which would be 
to the advantage of the country and its inhabitants. 

1542. Schaefer, Ludwig F. The Ethiopian crisis, 

touchstone of appeasement? Edited with an 
introd. by Ludwig F. Schaefer. Boston, 
Heath, 1961. 101 p. (Problems in European 
civilization) DT387.8.S36 

A selection of extracts from authoritative writers re¬ 
garding the Italo-Ethiopian conflict as a prelude to the 
Second World War. Among those represented are 
G. M. Gathorne-Hardy, from his Short History of In¬ 
ternational Affairs 1920-1939 (1950); Arnold J. Toyn¬ 
bee, Survey of International Affairs, 1935 (1948); Sir 
Winston Churchill, The Gathering Storm (1948); the 
anti-Fascist Gaetano Salvemini, Prelude to World War 
II (1954); the Fascist spokesman Luigi Villari, Italian 
Foreign Policy under Mussolini (1956). Other readily 


available works in English are listed in “Suggestions 
for Further Reading,” p. 99-101. 

1543. Trevaskis, G. K. N. Eritrea; a colony in tran¬ 

sition: 1941-1952. London, New York, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1960. viii, 137 p. 
maps. DT395.T7 

Issued under the auspices of the Royal Institute of Inter¬ 
national Affairs. 

A study of the wartime and postwar history and 
political development of Eritrea up to the federation 
with Ethiopia in 1952. The writer had been in the 
British administrative service during most of the Oc¬ 
cupation, and observed at first hand this “period of 
rapid transition from the narrow colonialism of Fascist 
Italian rule to quasi-independence within the Ethio¬ 
pian Federation.” 

On Nov. 14, 1962, the Legislative Assembly of the feder¬ 
ated state of Eritrea voted unanimously to give up its semi- 
autonomous status with separate legislature and judiciary and 
unite with Ethiopia. “The Eritrean Assembly, meeting in 
Asmara, declared that the federation system caused misunder¬ 
standing between Eritrean and Ethiopian brothers.” 
{African Diary , Nov. 24-30,1962). 

1544. United Nations. Department of Public Infor¬ 

mation. Shaping a people’s destiny’, the story 
of Eritrea and the United Nations. New 
York, 1953. 32 p. illus. maps. (United 

Nations publications: 1953.1.18.) 

DT395.U5 

Booklet explaining the 1950 resolution of the Gen¬ 
eral Assembly that Eritrea should be federated with 
Ethiopia, the transition period under the United King¬ 
dom as Administering Authority, the preparation of a 
draft Eritrean Constitution under the direction of the 
United Nations Commissioner Dr. Eduardo Anze Ma- 
tienzo, and the ceremony of federation in Addis Ababa 
on August 11,1952. 

1545. Usoni, Luigi. Risorse minerarie dell’Africa 

Orientale; Eritrea, Etiopia, Somalia. Roma, 
Jandi Sapi, 1952. 553 p. illus. (part col.) 
maps. TN119.E2U8 

Bibliography: p. 521-532. 

Comprehensive and heavily statistical study, ar¬ 
ranged by types of minerals—metals, nonmetallic sub¬ 
stances (including oil), materials for construction and 
cement, mineral waters and hot mineral springs. 
Many references and authorities, mainly Italian, are 
cited. Good plates and a full index are included. 


241 


ANTHROPOLOGY, ETC. 

1546. Cerulli, Ernesta. Peoples of south-west Ethi¬ 

opia and its borderland. London, Interna¬ 
tional African Institute, 1956. 148 p. (Eth¬ 
nographic survey of Africa. North Eastern 
Africa, pt. 3) DT380.C4 

Handbook on the odd groups of hill peoples, mainly 
negroid, of the country where Ethiopia borders on the 
Sudan. According to E. E. Hurst ( The Nile , no. 
1482), 70 languages are spoken in Ethiopia; a good 
many of them are accounted for by these tribes, Insas- 
sna-Mao, Suri-Surma-Mekan, Burji-Konso, Sidama, 
etc., etc. A long bibliography ends this volume, which 
follows the pattern of the series (see no. 270). Many 
of the references are to Italian sources. 

1547. Conti Rossini, Carlo. Etiopia e genti di Etio- 

pia. Firenze, R. Bemporad, 1937. 402 p. 
plates, maps. DT380.C6 

1548. - Storia d’Etiopia. Milano, A. Lucini, 

1928. (Africa italiana, 3) DT373.C63 

Vol. 1. Delle origini all’awento della dinastia salomonide. 
The late Professor Conti Rossini of the Academia dei 
Lincei at the University of Rome had begun his publi¬ 
cations on languages and literature of Northeast Africa 
before the turn of the century, and was considered the 
leading Italian exponent of Ethiopian studies. The 
first of the two books here mentioned is a broad eth¬ 
nological survey. The first volume only of the history 
is available; it covers the Ethiopian past from Biblical 
times to the reestablishment of the Solomonic dynasty 
in 1270. Many of the writer’s other articles on Ethio¬ 
pian linguistics and texts are cited by Jean Doresse in 
the bibliographies of his two-volume history (no. 
1525). A large compilation by Conti Rossini is Pro- 
verbi, tradizioni e canzoni tigrine (Verbania, A. 
Airoldi, 1942. 322 p. Collezione scientifica e docu- 
mentaria dell’ Africa italiana, 5). The texts of the 
proverbs and songs in Tigrina are accompanied by 
translation and notes in Italian. 

1549. Davis, Russell, and Brent Ashabranner, 

comps. The lion’s whiskers; tales of high 
Africa. With illus. by James G. Teason. 
Boston, Little, Brown, 1959. 191 p. illus. 

GR360.E8D37 

An unusual book of stories from the Ethiopian high¬ 
lands. The two authors had been working in the 
Ethiopian Ministry of Education, preparing reading 
materials for the schools, and these legends and tales 


for young readers from all over the country are placed 
in a framework describing the special place, tribe, and 
individual where and by whom the story had been 
told. 

1550. Huntingford, George W. B. The Galla of 

Ethiopia; the Kingdoms of Kafa and Janjero. 
London, International African Institute, 
1955. 156 p. (Ethnographic survey of 

Africa. North-Eastern Africa, pt. 2) 

DT390.G2H8 

The Galla, a pastoral Hamitic people whose orig¬ 
inal home was in British Somaliland, invaded and have 
spread widely over southern and eastern Ethiopia dur¬ 
ing the past 400 years, and now form one of the more 
important racial stocks of that country. For this hand¬ 
book the main sources were the important older works 
of French, German, and Italian authorities. The 
author readily admitted that because of the difficult 
nature of the Galla country and the lack of recent 
studies, it was impossible to say whether the mores he 
described were still prevalent. 

1551. Leslau, Wolf. Coutumes et croyances des 

Falachas; Juifs d’Abyssinie, publie avec le 
concours du Centre national de la recherche 
scientifique. Paris, Institut d’ethnologie, 
1957. 98 p. (Universite de Paris. Travaux 
et memoires de 1’Institut d’ethnologie, 61) 

DS135.E75L4 

1552. --, ed. Falasha anthology; translated from 

Ethiopic sources, with an introduction. New 
Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. 222 p. 
(Yale Judaica series, v. 6) BM40.L37 

Professor Leslau has specialied in studies of the so- 
called “Black Jews” of Ethiopia. These two works 
are among a number of his writings on this interesting 
group. 

1553. Simoons, Frederick J. Northwest Ethiopia; 

peoples and economy. Madison, University 
of Wisconsin Press, 1960. xvii, 250 p. illus., 
maps. DT380.S5 

Bibliography: p. 221-230. 

A study expanded from a thesis for which the writer 
had done eight months’ fieldwork in Northwest Ethi¬ 
opia, much of it around Gondar. After background 
and definition of the eight ethnic groups, the dominant 
Amhara, the Jewish Falasha and lesser peoples, he 
turns to examination of the ways and means of life— 
the types of settlement and houses, the characteristics 


242 




and methods of agriculture, plants cultivated, animal 
husbandry, arts and crafts, industries and other human 
activities. His emphasis, he says, is that of “the his¬ 
torically oriented cultural geographer,” concerned with 
“culture as an intermediary between man and the 
earth.” 

1554. Trimingham, John S. The Christian Church 

and missions in Ethiopia (including Eritrea 
and the Somalilands). London, New York, 
World Dominion Press, 1950 [i.e., 1951] 
73 p. fold. maps. (Survey series) 

BV3560.T7 

This booklet in a Church Missionary Society series 
contains a short statement of the general religious 
background and of the National Church of Ethiopia, 
which since 1951 has been distinct from the Coptic 
Church in Egypt, with an Ethiopian Copt archbishop. 
Then comes a systematic examination of missions and 
their work in the Horn of Africa before, during, and 
since the Italian occupation, their connection with the 
Ethiopian National Church, and their proselytizing ef¬ 
forts among pagans and Muslims. 

1555. - Islam in Ethiopia. London, New 

York, Oxford University Press, 1952. 299 p. 
maps. BP65.E8T7 

A major contribution to Islamic studies surveying 
Mohammedanism, its history and extent in the entire 
region of the Horn of Africa, including Eritrea and the 
Somalilands as well as the highland kingdom, which 
is designated as Abyssinia. Canon Trimingham began 
with account of the region, its peoples, and distribution 
of religions, then considers in historic terms the cen¬ 
turies-old conflict of Islam with the Christian religion 
that had been brought to Abyssinia in the days of the 
Early Church. His third part is detailed analysis of 
the tribal distribution of Islam in Ethiopia—Beni 
Amir, Danakil, Galla, Somali, and many minor groups, 
including Negroid tribes. Last, the special character¬ 


istics of Islam in Ethiopia were examined, and the 
interplay of influence with paganism and westernism. 

1556. Ullendorff, Edward. The Ethiopians; an 

introduction to country and people. London, 

New York, Oxford University Press, 1960. 
232 p. illus. DT379.5.U4 

Professor Ullendorff of St. Andrews University is 
an Ethiopicist who has spent twenty years in the study 
of Ethiopian languages and civilizations. He wrote 
this work as a short introduction “to summarize . . . 
between two covers . . . the present state of our 
knowledge of historical and modem Ethiopia.” His 
survey begins with a review of explorations and stud¬ 
ies, then background of country and people, followed 
by an outline of history. His focus is on cultural fac¬ 
tors, explained in chapters on religion, languages, 
literature, art and music, daily life and customs. Only 
the last chapter, “Ethiopia Today,” touches on mod¬ 
ern politico-economic matters. The work is dedicated 
to Haile Selassie, by whose “high example ... no 
one living in Ethiopia can fail to be inspired . . 

1557. -. The Semitic languages of Ethiopia; 

a comparative phonology. London, Taylor’s 

(Foreign) Press, 1955. 273 p. map. 

PJ8999.U4 

Bibliographical notes: p. 233-239. 

Study of the modem languages of Ethiopia: 
Tigrina, Amharic, and Tigre, with which the author 
had familiarized himself during the war years. He 
had collected and brought back extensive materials 
for a doctoral study on the relations of these languages 
to classical Ethiopic (Ge’ez) and other Semitic lan¬ 
guages. He began with an introduction on histori¬ 
cal background, the languages now spoken, and the 
traditional pronunciation of Ge’ez, then examined 
consonants, vowels, accents, and combinatory effects 
of sounds. There are bibliographical notes and several 
indexes. 


Mauritius 


Bibliography 

1558. Toussaint, Auguste. Bibliographie de Mau¬ 
rice, 1502-1954. Port Louis, Esclapon, 
1956. 884 p. Z3703.M3A5 


1559. -. Select bibliography of Mauritius. 

Port Louis, Mauritius, Printed by Henry, 
1951. 60 p. (Societe de l’histoire de l’ile 
Maurice. Publication.) 

DT469.M4S6, v. 4 


243 





The French history of Mauritius, the former lie de 
France, goes back to 1715. Bernardin de Saint- 
Pierre’s Voyage a Vile de France (1773, 2 v.), and 
still more his famous Rousseauian novel, Paul et Vir- 
ginie (1789), established its reputation as an earthly 
paradise, and there is a large body of literature, 
mostly in French. This has been recorded exhaus¬ 
tively by the Chief Archivist of Mauritius, M. Tous- 
saint. His huge bibliography of 1956 covers printed 
works, manuscripts, archivalia, and cartographic 
materials. 


1560. Austen, H. C. M. Sea fights and corsairs of 

the Indian Ocean; being the naval history of 
Mauritius from 1715 to 1810. Port Louis, 
M. R. W. Brooks, Govt. Printer, 1935. 231 p. 
illus. DT469.M4A8 1935 

1561. Barnwell, Patrick J., and Auguste Tous- 

saint. A short history of Mauritius. Lon¬ 
don, New York, Published for the Govern¬ 
ment of Mauritius by Longmans, Green, 
1949. 268 p. illus. DT469.M4B27 

1562. Benedict, Burton. Indians in the plural so¬ 

ciety; a report on Mauritius. London, H.M. 
Stationery Off., 1961. 168 p. plates. (Colo¬ 
nial research studies, no. 34) 

JV33.G7A48, no. 34 
Full socioanthropological study of the Muslim and 
Hindu groups who form two-thirds of the population 
of Mauritius, to which they immigrated from 1835 to 
1907. The author outlines their history, their social 
groupings, way of life, customs and rites, religious 
organization, and political structure. 

1563. D’Unienville, J. R. M. Last years of the Isle 

of France ( 1800-1814 ) through texts. Port 
Louis, Printed by Claude M. d’Unienville, 
The Mauritius Printing Co., 1959. 244 p. 
illus. DT469.M4D8 

A history assembled from primary texts and docu¬ 
ments in the British Public Record Office and else¬ 
where. The author, a Mauritian who had studied law 
in London, bears the family name of the Colonial 
Archivist of Mauritius, the baron d’Unienville, who 
in 1838 wrote Statistique de Vile Maurice et ses de¬ 
pendences, suivie d’une notice historique sur cette colo- 
nie et d’un essai sur Vile de Madagascar (Paris, G. 
Barba, 3 v., 74 tables). The extracts are given indif¬ 
ferently in English or French, the writer commenting 
that both himself and his readers are bilingual. 


1564. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Annual report on 

Mauritius. 1946+ London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., illus., maps. ( Its Colonial annual re¬ 
ports) DT469.M4A14 

1959 ed. published in 1961, 160 p. Includes bibliography. 
See general note on this series, no. 94. 

1565. Hazareesingh, K. The story of the 1945 cy¬ 

clones. Port Louis, J. E. Felix, Govt. Printer, 
1948. 51 p. illus. DT469.M4H3 

The island is susceptible to storms. A cyclone in 
1960 was discussed in the London Economist (v. 194, 
Mar. 5, 1960, p. 887) and photographed for the Illus¬ 
trated London News: “Mauritius after the Worst Cy¬ 
clones ever Recorded” (v. 236, Mar. 12, 1960, p. 443). 

1566. Ingrams, William Harold. Arabia and the 

isles. 2d ed. London, J. Murray, 1954. 
399 p. illus. DS207.I65 

Includes accounts of Mauritius and Zanzibar. 
Other descriptive books that include Mauritius with other 
islands are by Marius Leblond, Les lies Soeurs (no. 1255), 
and Maurice Martin du Gard, Le Voyage de Madagascar 
(no. 1226n). 

1567. Malim, Michael. Island of the Swan; Mauri¬ 

tius. London, New York, Longmans, Green, 

1952. 232 p. illus. DT469.M4M3 

One of the few travel books in English. 

1568. Mauritius. Dept, of Education. The histor¬ 

ical monuments of Mauritius. Port Louis, 
J. E. Felix, Govt. Printer, 1958. 12 p. 

DT460.M4A53 

1569. Mauritius Chamber of Agriculture. The 

Mauritius Chamber of Agriculture, 1853- 

1953. Port Louis, General Printing & Sta¬ 
tionery Co., 1953. 377 p. illus. 

S471.M37M4 

1570. Mauritius Sugar Industry Research Insti¬ 

tute, Reduit. Report. 1st + 1953+ Re- 

duit, Mauritius, annual. SB215.M35 

The primary place of the sugar industry in Mauritius 
is witnessed in the handsomely presented centenary 
volume of the Chamber of Agriculture and in the an¬ 
nual report of the research institute. The difficulties 
attending the industry were discussed in a long article 
by H. C. Brookfield, “Problems of Monoculture and 
Diversification in a Sugar Island—Mauritius” {Eco¬ 
nomic Geography, v. 35, January 1959, p. 25^10). 


244 



1571. Meade, James, ed. The economic and social 

structure of Mauritius; a report to the Gover¬ 
nor of Mauritius. London, Methuen, 1961. 
264 p. tables, maps, diagrs. (Mauritius. 
Legislative Council. Sessional papers no. 7, 
1961) DLG 

By several writers, these papers uniformly warn of 
critical conditions in the economy due to the rate of 
population increase. Papers are included on education 
and governmental structure. A short summary 
stresses that the only answer to the problems of Mauri¬ 
tius is birth control. The views of the editor were 
summed up in an article that followed shortly after 
publication of the report, “Mauritius; A Case Study in 
Malthusian Economics” ( Economic Journal, v. 71, 
September 1961: 521-534). 

1572. Scott, Sir Robert. Limuria; the lesser depend¬ 

encies of Mauritius. London, New York, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1961. 308 p. 

DT468.S25 

The author was Governor of Mauritius from 1954 to 
1959. He gives a full account here of the islands in 
the Indian Ocean to the north and northeast of Mauri¬ 
tius, from 245 to almost 1,200 miles away, which are 
known as the Lesser Dependencies: St. Brandon (a 
fishing fleet island, where women are not allowed), 
Agalega, the Chagos Archipelago. “Their total land 
area including both inhabited and uninhabited islands 
and islets, is about forty-seven square miles.” The 
book is in two parts, first geography and history, then 
island-by-island description. The inhabitants are 


mostly descendants of slaves brought from the East 
African coast or the larger islands. 

1573. Sornay, Pierre de. lie de France, lie Mau¬ 

rice; sa geographie, son histoire, son agricul¬ 
ture, ses industries, ses institutions. Port 
Louis, General Printing & Stationery Co., 
1950. 550 p. illus. maps. DT469.M4S65 
Bibliography: p. 547-550. 

1574. Titmuss, Richard Morris, Brian Abel- 

Smith, and Tony Lynes. Social policies and 
population growth in Mauritius; a report 
to the Governor of Mauritius. London, Me¬ 
thuen, 1961. 308 p., tables, diagrs. DLG 
The authors are British population experts. They 
warn that under present policies the island faces dis¬ 
aster from overpopulation, and that the Government 
must back a campaign for family planning, as well as 
economic plans for higher employment. See also re¬ 
port by Meade (above). 

1575. Toussaint, Auguste, ed. Early American 

trade in Mauritius. Port Louis, Esclapon, 
1954. 86 p. (Mauritius Archives publication 
No. 2) HF3134.M3T6 

1576. Wheeler, J. F. G. Report on the Mauritius- 

Seychelles fisheries survey, 1948-1949. Lon¬ 
don, H.M. Stationery Off., 1953. 145 p. illus., 
maps. (Colonial Office. Fishery publica¬ 
tions, v. 1, no. 3) SH69.A32, v. 1, no. 3 

Technical contributions by Dr. Wheeler and Dr. F. 
D. Ommanney. 


245 





RHODESIA AND NYASALAND 
(FEDERATION) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1577. Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Central African 
Archives. A select bibliography of recent 
publications concerning the Federation of 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Salisbury, Fed¬ 
eral Information Dept., 1960. 13 p. 

DLC-AFR 

Useful classified listing of 300 to 400 titles of books, 
pamphlets, documents, and periodicals, most of thetji 
published during the fifties. The categories are: Gen¬ 
eral and descriptive; history and biography; politics 
and economic farming; geology, flora and fauna; an¬ 
thropology and ethnography (including papers of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute); some newspapers, peri¬ 
odicals and journals; official periodical publications; 
government publications on special topics. A more 
complete list of the two last-named categories is given 
in the Catalogue of Official Publications issued by the 
Federal Information Department (1959. 40 p.). 

Later editions will presumably be available from the 
Department. 

Note : For the Who’s Who of the Federation of Rhodesia 
and Nyasaland and the Union-Castle Year Book & Guide, 
see in section on South Africa, nos. 1779, 1780. 

GENERAL 

(including History, Anthropology, etc.) 

1578. Central African Council. Commission on 
Higher Education for Africans in Central 
Africa. Report. Salisbury, 1953. 93 p. 

LC2808.C4C44 

This Commission, Chairman Sir Alexander Carr- 
Saunders, was appointed in September 1952, succeed¬ 
ing other commissions. The members made a thor¬ 
ough field survey of the educational system, studying 
all statistics and approving the emphasis on technical 
and industrial training. In accordance with the Brit¬ 
ish colonial policy of creating universities to serve each 


area, they recommended the immediate foundation of 
a university college as a first step toward a full univer¬ 
sity. They advised on its constitution, curriculum, site 
(Salisbury), buildings, finance, etc. (The University 
College of Rhodesia and Nyasaland was incorporated 
in 1955 as an affiliate of the University of London, 
and began classes in March 1957 with 71 full-time 
students, 8 of whom were African. Both number of 
students and the African proportion are steadily in¬ 
creasing. The first graduating class in January, 1960 
included 3 Africans.) 

1579. Clements, Frank. Kariba , the struggle with 

the river god. London, Methuen, 1959. 
222 p. TC558.R45K3 

History of the building of the Kariba Dam, the 
great enterprise of the Federation, for which in 1958 
a huge area on both sides of the Zambezi was flooded, 
creating perhaps the largest manmade lake of the 
world—“to the Batonka and a hundred other tribes 
... a clear manifestation of divine displeasure.” 

The anthropological studies of the Tonga tribes displaced 
by the creation of Kariba Lake are discussed under Northern 
Rhodesia (see Colson). Two well illustrated popular books 
describe the much-featured rescue of the animals caught by 
the floods: Eric Robins and Ronald Legge, Animal Dunkirk 
(New York, Taplinger Pub. Co., 1961. 188 p.), and Charles 
Lagus, Operation Noah (New York, Coward McCann, 1960. 
176 p.). 

1580. Colson, Elizabeth, and Max Gluckman, eds. 

Seven tribes of British Central Africa. Re¬ 
printed with minor corrections. Manchester, 
Eng. Published on behalf of the Rhodes- 
Livingstone Institute, Northern Rhodesia 
by Manchester University Press, 1959. xix, 
409 p. illus., maps, geneal. table. 

DT429.C6 1959 

Includes bibliographies. 

This symposium, an early result of the expanded 
research program of the Institute, was published first 
in 1951 by the Oxford University Press. Dr. Colson, 


246 


an American social anthropologist, edited it in con¬ 
junction with Dr. Gluckman, whom she had succeeded 
as Director of the Institute in 1947 when the latter left 
to accept a lectureship at Oxford. The volume con¬ 
tains seven studies: “The Lozi of Barotseland,” by 
Dr. Gluckman; “The Plateau Tonga,” by Dr. Colson; 
“The Bamha of North-Eastern Rhodesia,” by Audrey 
I. Richards; “The Fort Jameson Ngoni,” by J. A. 
Barnes; “The Nyakyusa of South-Western Tangan¬ 
yika,” by the late Godfrey Wilson, first Director of the 
Institute; “The Yao of Southern Nyasaland,” by J. G. 
Mitchell; “Some Shona Tribes of Southern Rhodesia,” 
by J. F. Holleman. 

1581. Coupland, Sir Reginald. Kirk on the 

Zambesi; a chapter of African history. Ox¬ 
ford, Clarendon Press, 1928. 286 p. 

DT776.K5C6 

The writer from 1920 to 1948 held the Beit Chair 
of Colonial History at Oxford, being knighted for his 
contributions in 1944. Kirk on the Zambesi tells the 
exciting story of Livingstone’s second expedition of 
1858-63 into Central Africa, on which he was ac¬ 
companied by the Scottish surgeon John Kirk, later 
British representative in Zanzibar and a leading figure 
in the campaign against the Arab slave trade. The 
climax of this expedition, which discovered Lake 
Nyasa, was the attempt to establish a mission and the 
death of its pioneer leader, Bishop Mackenzie. Pro¬ 
fessor Coupland supplemented this with Livingstone’s 
Last Journey (American edition, Macmillan, 1947. 
271 p.). For his other works, see under East Africa. 

1582. Fortune, G. A preliminary survey of the 

Bantu languages of the Federation. Lusaka, 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, 1959. 59 p. 
map. (Its Communications, no. 14) 

DT15.R52, no. 14 
Father Fortune, S.J., here attempts to name all 
language groups and dialect clusters of the Rho- 
desias and Nyasaland, giving data regarding distribu¬ 
tion, number of speakers, etc. The monograph is re¬ 
viewed in Africa , Apr. 1960, v. 30, p. 208. 

1583. Fraenkel, P. J. Wayaleshi (radio in Central 

Africa) London, Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 
1959. 224 p. illus. PN1991.3.R5F7 

Out of his experience as a broadcaster for the 
Central African Broadcasting Station in Lusaka the 
author gives a spirited account of radio news and its 
effects upon the African audiences. He includes many 
human interest narratives and political sidelights. 


1584. Goodall, Elizabeth. Prehistoric rock art of 

the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland; 
paintings and descriptions by Elizabeth 
Goodall, C. K. Cooke, J. Desmond Clark. 
Edited by Roger Summers. Salisbury, 
Southern Rhodesia, National Publications 
Trust Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1959. 
267 p. illus., maps N5310.G6 

Folio volume describing and illustrating in color re¬ 
production the Stone Age rock art found in about 1,100 
painted sites and 30 engravings in the Federation. 
Mrs. Goodall wrote the first and longest part, on the 
rock paintings of Mashonaland, Mr. Cooke on 
Matabeleland, Mr. Clark on Northern Rhodesia and 
Nyasaland, where only within the last two decades 
have rock paintings been coming to light. In the 
chapter on rock engravings the editor collaborated 
with the authors on their individual regions. The 
conclusion contains maps showing locations of the 
rock paintings in the Federation and in general south 
of the Equator. 

1585. Green, John E. S. Rhodes goes north. Lon¬ 

don, G. Bell, 1936. xv, 391 p. maps. 

DT776.R4G7 

Authorities: p. 377-380. 

History of the Concessions, the Chartered Company, 
the Matabele Rebellion, the railways, the raid, the 
Mashonaland gold bubble, and the many colorful 
episodes in the creation of Great Britain’s Central Afri¬ 
can colonies. Appendixes give text of various agree¬ 
ments and treaties. 

1586. Hanna, A. J. The beginnings of Nyasaland and 

Northeastern Rhodesia , 1859-95. Oxford, 
Clarendon Press, 1956. 281 p. 

DT858.H3 1956 

Bibliography: p. 270-273. 

1587. - The story of the Rhodesias and Nyasa¬ 

land. London, Faber & Faber, 1960. 288 p. 

DT853.5.H35 

Dr. Hanna is a historian at Southampton Univer¬ 
sity who has specialized on Central and East Africa. 
The first of the above-mentioned works, a carefully 
documented and scholarly study of British interests 
and activities, missionary, chartered company and of¬ 
ficial, instate-building, was expanded from the au¬ 
thor’s doctoral thesis at the University of London. 
The second book is a spirited recital of Central African 
history in a series for the general public. 


247 






1588. Harding, Colin. Frontier patrols: a history 

of the British South African police and other 

Rhodesian forces. London, G. Bell, 1938. 
372 p. DT948.H26 

Historical sketch of this celebrated force which par¬ 
ticipated in the events of early days, the Jameson Raid, 
the Matabele Rebellion, the Mashonaland Rebellion, 
the Boer War, and later in the First World War cam¬ 
paigns in South-West Africa and German East Africa. 
The author was a former administrator in Barotseland. 

1589. Hole, Hugh Marshall. The making of Rho¬ 

desia. London, Macmillan, 1926. 414 p. 

DT948.H6 

1590. - Old Rhodesian days. London, Mac¬ 

millan, 1928. 140 p. DT958.H6 

1591. - Lobengula. London, P. Allan, 1929. 

211 p. 

1592. - The Jameson raid. London, P. Allan, 

1930. 306 p. DT929.H7 

1593. - The passing of the black kings. Lon¬ 

don, P. Allan, 1932. 322 p. DT763.H6 
Colonel Marshall Hole went out as a youth to South 
Africa in 1888 and joined Cecil Rhodes’ office staff just 
as the great empire builder was given the Royal Char¬ 
ter to carry his pioneering expeditions into Mashona¬ 
land; he was involved in the historic events which he 
has chronicled in these five narratives of Southern and 
Central African history. He declared at the beginning 
of his first narrative, which treats the history of the 
South Africa Company up to the turning point of 1905, 
when the railroad reached Victoria Falls: “It is per¬ 
haps impossible for one who has served the Company 
from its inception to escape altogether the imputation 
of partiality”; but his effort was toward impartiality, 
from the viewpoint of a confirmed “colonial.” The 
second volume is a set of reminiscences taken from the 
days when he was Civil Commissioner of Bulawayo in 
Southern Rhodesia. Lobengula is a fictionized biog¬ 
raphy. With the two later books, Colonel Hole re¬ 
turned to straight historical narrative; The Passing of 
the Black Kings begins with a brief description of the 
Great Trek and the native migrations as background 
to the struggles of the warrior kings, Mziligazi, Loben¬ 
gula, Khama, and Lewanika, set against the missionary 
trail of Moffat, Livingstone and John Mackenzie, and 
the inexorable advance of the dominant figure of 
Rhodes. 


1594. Johnston, Sir Harry H. British Central 

Africa; an attempt to give some account of a 
portion of the territories under British in¬ 
fluence north of the Zambesi. With 6 maps 
and 223 illustrations reproduced from the 
author’s drawings or from photographs. 2d 
ed. London, Methuen, 1898. xix, 544 p. 
illus., plates, maps. DT858.J73 

This famous scholar-administrator who led the ex¬ 
peditions of the eighties into Central Africa and laid 
the foundations for British control in Nyasaland, 
Uganda, and elsewhere, served as Commissioner in 
British Central Africa (Nyasaland and Northern Rho¬ 
desia) from 1891 to 1896. His book, the old standard 
work on the region, takes in geography, history, botany, 
zoology, anthropology, and languages. Incidentally, 
Johnston originated the “Cape-to-Cairo” phrase, be¬ 
fore the British abandoned Tanganyika to Germany. 

1595. Loveday, Arthur F. Three stages of history 

in Rhodesia. Cape Town, A. A. Balkema 
[I960?] 109 p. DT948.L6 

Three historical papers. The first is on the contro¬ 
versial theories regarding Bantu origins, ancient gold 
mining, and the Great Zimbabwe ruins. The second, 
from Portuguese sources, is on the martyred “Father 
Gongalo da Silveira and the Monomotapas,” and the 
third on “Frederick Courtney Selous, The Greatest of 
Hunters.” Selous himself wrote many books, begin¬ 
ning with A Hunter’s Wanderings in Africa (London, 
1881) and Travel and Adventure in South-East Africa 
(1881) as well as articles and lectures. 

1596. Millin, Sarah Gertrude. Rhodes. New and 

rev. ed. London, Chatto & Windus, 1952. 
406 p. DT776.R4M72 1952 

Bibliography: p. 375-389. 

By a leading South African writer, this authoritative 
biography of Cecil Rhodes was published first in 1933 
(American edition, Harper). 

The longest of more recent biographies is by Felix Gross, 
Rhodes of Africa (New York, Praeger, 1957. 433 p. illus.). 

1597. Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, Lusaka, 
Northern Rhodesia. Communications, v. 
1+ Lusaka, 1943+ irregular. 

DT15.R52 

1598. - Rhodes-Livingstone papers, no. 1 + 

Livingstone, Lusaka, 1938 + 

Monographs given separate cataloging in Library of Con¬ 
gress collections. 

The Rhodes-Livingstone Institute is among the ma¬ 
jor centers of Africa for research in the social sciences. 


248 







Its original site was at Livingstone in Northern Rho¬ 
desia, from whence it moved in 1953 to Lusaka. Be¬ 
sides the two series cited above, the Institute issues the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Journal , called also Human Prob¬ 
lems in British Central Africa (Manchester, Manches¬ 
ter University Press). It also publishes the proceed¬ 
ings of its annual conferences, e.g.: 

11th Conference, Lusaka, 14-17 Jan. 1958. Present 
interrelations in central African rural and urban life. 
Edited by R. J. Apthorpe. Lusaka, 1958. 175 p. 

12th Conference, Bulawayo, 1958. Social relations in 
Central African industry; proceedings. Edited by 
David Matthews and Raymond Apthorpe. Lusaka, 
1958. 135 p. HD8792.A4R5 1958 

13th Conference, Lusaka, 1959. From tribal rule to 
modern government. Edited by Raymond Apthorpe. 
Lusaka, 1959. 216 p. JQ1872.R53 1959 

14th Conference, 1960. Myth in modern Africa. Edited 
by Allie Dubb. Lusaka, 1960. 156 p. 

16th Conference. 1962. The multitribal society. 
Edited by Allie Dubb. Lusaka, 1962. 147 p. tables. 

The titles of papers and other publications are usually listed 
on inserted leaves and inside cover pages of the monographs. 
For instance, Paper No. 31, by Turner (see no. 1653), has a 
front fly-leaf describing the journal, Human Problems in 
British Central Africa, and giving contents of recent issues, 
and several fly-leaves at the back listing the papers and books 
published for the Institute. On the back cover pages are 
given titles of the Communications and the Occasional Papers 
of the Rhodes-Livingstone Museum. 

1599. Smith, Edwin W. The way of the white fields 

in Rhodesia; a survey of Christian enter¬ 
prise in Northern and Southern Rhodesia. 
London, World Dominion Press, 1928. 
172, 20 p. tables, fold. maps. 

BV3625.R5S5 

This volume in the World Dominion Survey series 
is of special interest because of the significant part 
played by missionary enterprise in the Rhodesias since 
the pioneer missionary of Bechuanaland, Robert Mof¬ 
fat, father-in-law of Livingstone, went in 1854 to 
visit the Matabele chieftains in what is now Southern 
Rhodesia, where in 1859 he led the first party of white 
missionary settlers. Dr. Smith devoted the first pages 
to a general account of the country and a brief his¬ 
torical sketch, then described each mission station and 
the work done by them, ending with twenty pages of 
tabular statistics. 

1600. Wilson, Godfrey, and Monica Hunter Wil¬ 

son. The analysis of social change , based 
on observations in central Africa. Cambridge 
[Eng.] The University Press, 1945. 177 p. 

GN651.W5 


Statement of the ideas which the writers say are 
current in sociological theory regarding the native 
society in its change from primitive to civilized, with 
inevitable maladjustments and oppositions. This in¬ 
volves the change in scale of relationships from the 
intense interdependence of the small primitive tribe 
or village group to the wider circle of the civilized 
world. The Wilsons examined lucidly the social ele¬ 
ments of this new civilization, its culture, structure, 
mobility, “control of the material environment and 
non-magicality,” and other aspects evident in Central 
Africa, evaluating the resulting disequilibrium and 
choices possible to restore stability. They laid emphasis 
on the fact that much of the imbalance is due to the 
outrunning in scale of the religious by the material 
elements of society, and stated in unvarnished terms 
the ultimate implications of racialism and nonracial¬ 
ism, the “inescapable choice” before white and black 
society in Central and South Africa. The “brilliant” 
essay was reviewed at length by Daryll Forde in Africa 
of July 1946 (v. 16, p. 196-198). At the time of 
writing Dr. Godfrey Wilson was Director of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute to the papers of which 
he contributed several numbers. Other works by 
Monica Hunter Wilson are noted in the section on 
Tanganyika. 

POLITICS AND ECONOMICS 

1601. Barber, William J. The economy of British 

Central Africa; a case study of economic de¬ 
velopment in a dualistic society. Stanford, 
Stanford University Press, 1961. 271 p. 

HC517.R4B28 1961 
Study of the dichotomy of Rhodesian and Nyasa- 
land economy, where the cash and money crop system 
of the settlers exists beside rather than in fusion with 
the subsistence agricultural economy of African tribes¬ 
men. The chief point of interaction in the labor mar¬ 
ket has meant, the author shows, below-subsistence 
wages for African workers. 

The progress of transition from subsistence to money econ¬ 
omy in the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland has been 
studied also by Phyllis Deane (below) and in a document 
prepared by the United Nations Department of Economic 
and Social Affairs, Structure and Growth of Selected African 
Economies (New York, 1958. 201 p. tables). Besides the 

Federation, economies of Morocco and the Sudan are 
examined. 

1602. Capricorn Africa Society. The Capricorn 

declarations; a statement of principles and 
aims for East and Central Africa. Salisbury, 
Southern Rhodesia, 1952. 10 p. DT431.C3 


249 




The Capricorn Africa Society was founded in 1949 
by Col. David Stirling of Salisbury, Southern Rho¬ 
desia, and is understood to have gained a considerable 
membership among moderates of all races in Central 
and East Africa. Begun as a plan for federation of 
East and Central Africa, its aim changed to that of 
creation of an integrated multiracial society, without 
discrimination and with equal opportunity for all. It 
calls for a multiple vote system to insure responsible 
control, with a common roll for all races, having 15 
categories of specific qualifications, under which people 
with additional qualifications are given extra votes. It 
advocates progressive establishment of interracial edu¬ 
cation, and other forms of interracial cooperation. 

An enthusiastic analysis of the multiracial proposals of the 
Capricorn African Society was written by a former Secre¬ 
tary of the International Missionary Council who for many 
years had been closely concerned with colonial policy in 
Africa: Joseph H. Oldham, New Hope in Africa (London, 
Longmans, Green, 1955. 102 p.). 

In June 1956 a convention held by the Society at Salima, 
Nyasaland, was attended by almost 200 people, and the 
Capricorn Contract, based on the Declarations, was signed 
by African, European, Indian, and Arab delegates. Attempts 
to form political parties to campaign for the Contract in 
Kenya and Northern Rhodesia were not fruitful. Mr. Colin 
Leys in his European Politics in Southern Rhodesia (no. 
1679) comments that in spite of its claims of large member¬ 
ship, the Society seems to have no permanent base as an 
independent political organization. 

1603. Clegg, Edward M. Race and politics; part¬ 

nership in the Federation of Rhodesia and 
Nyasaland. London, New York, Oxford 
University Press, 1960. 280 p. maps. 

DT856.C58 

Study carried out under the auspices of the In¬ 
stitute of Race Relations by a soil scientist formerly 
in the Colonial Research Service in Northern Rho¬ 
desia. His account of the European impact on the 
African way of life includes penetrating analysis of 
the problems of the projected “partnership.” The 
appendixes include documents showing the stages of 
African political advance under federation from 1953 
to 1959. 

1604. Creighton, Thomas R. M. The anatomy of 

partnership; Southern Rhodesia and the Cen¬ 
tral African Federation. London, Faber & 
Faber, 1960. 257 p. illus. DT962.C7 

The writer states forthrightly in his preface his hope 
that the present Government “will have the clear¬ 
sightedness and courage to recognize the impossibility 
of continuing Federation in anything like its present 
form.” His book, an argument for this impossibility, is 


reviewed by C. B. Richardson in Africa Report, Janu¬ 
ary 1962. 

1605. Deane, Phyllis. Colonial social accounting. 

Cambridge, University Press, 1953. xv, 
360 p. plates. (National Institute of Eco¬ 
nomic and Social Research. Economic and 
social studies, 11) HC517.R4D4 

Bibliography: p. 338-342. 

Study by a specialist in surveys of colonial econ¬ 
omies, analyzing the standards of living of Northern 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, particularly as to rural com¬ 
munities. Miss Deane emphasized that village econ¬ 
omy in which the living standards cannot be inter¬ 
preted in terms of European exchange is the 
background against which the urban activities of 
African communities should be set. Tables of income, 
output, expenditures, and many other statistics are 
included and appendixes appraising sources of sta¬ 
tistics. 

1606. Dunn, Cyril. Central African witness. Lon¬ 

don, V. Gollancz, 1959. 254 p. illus. 

DT856.D8 

By a former correspondent for the Observer. “Af¬ 
ter living for some time in the Federation and listening 
carefully to what all sorts of people say, one may set 
out a synopsis of basic white aims which is not likely 
to provoke much denial. In outline it is much the 
same as the concept of a great experiment. But the 
emphasis is not where oversea liberals seem anxious 
to locate it.” Mr. Dunn concludes, after analysis of a 
series of events through Garfield Todd’s defeat, that 
“Federation cannot be held together peaceably and 
profitably on the present terms.” Harvey Glickman 
in a review ( African Report, March 1960), speaks of 
this, together with Colin Leys (below) as “required 
reading.” 

1607. Gray, Richard. The two nations: aspects of 

the development of race relations in the 
Rhodesias and Nyasaland. Issued under 
the auspices of the Institute of Race Relations. 
London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1960. xvii, 373 p. maps. DT856.G72 

Bibliography: p. 356-361. 

Study covering the history of Central Africa with 
regard to contacts of the British settlers and Govern¬ 
ment with the African tribes and political development 
from the end of the First World War to the beginning 
of the Federation in 1953. This book is reviewed, to¬ 
gether with the two works by Philip Mason with which 


250 


it forms a trilogy, in Africa of October 1961 (v. 31, 
p. 383). 

1608. Gt. Brit. Advisory Commission on the Review 

of the Constitution of the Federation of Rho¬ 
desia and Nyasaland. Report. London, 
H.M. Stationery Off., 1960. 4 v. tables, map. 
(Cmnd. 1148-1151) Chairman, Lord 
Monckton. DLC-LL 

Contents: v. 1. (175 p. Cmnd. 1148) Introduction and 
survey. Summary of conclusions and recommendations. 
Reservations. Minority report by Mr. Chirwa and Mr. 
Habanyama. Appendixes: 1. Itinerary; 2. Staff and liaison 
officers; 3. Communal primary elections and the single trans¬ 
ferable vote; 4. List of functions; 5. Probable redistribution 
of expenditure, v. 2. (513 p. Cmnd. 1149) Appendix 6. 
Survey of developments since 1953 (Report of Committee 
officials) v. 3. (87 p. Cmnd. 1150) Appendix 7. Pos¬ 
sible constitutional changes, v. 4. Appendix 8. Evidence. 

Analyzed in several articles in Central African 
Examiner, v. 4, Oct. 22, 1960. 

1609. Gt. Brit. Central Office of Information. Ref¬ 

erence Division. The Federation of Rhodesia 
and Nyasaland. London, November 1959. 
33 p. DLC-AFR 

Booklet of basic information, with sections on politi¬ 
cal evolution of the Territories before federation, po¬ 
litical development since federation, economic and 
social development, and appendix of factual data. 
Short reading list. 

1610. Irvine, Alexander G. The balance of pay¬ 

ments of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1945- 
1954. London, Oxford University Press, 
1959. xiii, 643 p. fold, map, tables. 

HG3883.R5I7 

Bibliography: p. 631-634. 

Detailed technical study, classifying and analyzing 
the statistics of trade of the three separate territories 
and of the Federation. A final chapter discusses the 
significance of the balance of payments for the econ¬ 
omy of the Federation. The author, an officer in the 
Federal Treasury of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, pre¬ 
sented 9 of the 10 chapters as a doctoral dissertation 
at the University of London. 

1611. Jones, Arthur Creech. African challenge; 

the fallacy of federation. London, Africa 
Bureau, 1952. 36 p. JQ2815 1952.J6 
Argument against the federation of the Rhodesias 
and Nyasaland, which was put through the following 
year in spite of the opposition from Labor and African 
groups of which this is typical. The author, former 

692 - 756—63 - 17 


Secretary of State for the Colonies under the Labor 
Government, was also former Chairman of the Fabian 
Colonial Bureau, and one of the Executive Committee 
of the Africa Bureau, which was founded in March 
1952 “to be a well-informed and impartial mediary 
between Britain and Africa,” providing a channel for 
African views to be given to Britain and the United 
Nations. The Africa Bureau does not present the 
opinion of Labor or Conservative, but is sponsored by 
“eminent figures in the Churches and Universities and 
by members of the three political parties.” 

The Africa Bureau published in 1953 a document pre¬ 
sented to Her Majesty by a delegation of eight African lead¬ 
ers whose trip to London had been financed by a fund 
raised by over 400,000 Africans, under the inspiration of 
the African National Congress: Nyasaland, Delegation of 
Chiefs and Citizens, A Petition to Her Majesty Queen Eliza¬ 
beth II against Federation (London, 1953. 20 p.). In 

another pamphlet 7 years later, Britain’s Dilemma in Central 
Africa: The Africa Bureau’s Evidence to the Monckton Com¬ 
mission (London, 1960. 23 p.), there were included many 

statements of Northern Rhodesia and Nyasaland leaders. 
The Bureau stressed the “fundamental incompatibility” 
between Britain’s obligations to the Protectorates and the 
powers of the Federation Government. 

1612. Leys, Colin, and Cranford Pratt, eds. A 

new deal in Central Africa. New York, 
Praeger, 1960. 226 p. illus. (Books that 

matter) DT856.L4 

Includes bibliography. 

This volume resulted from an Oxford conference in 
April 1959 following issuance of the Devlin Report 
(no. 1660). The papers by the editors, William J. 
Barber, Guy Clutton-Brock, Bernard Chidzero, T. S. L. 
Pitt, and William Watson, argue that “partnership” 
will not work and that the present form of the Fed¬ 
eration must be changed. Mr. Leys had published 
in the previous year his study of European Politics in 
Southern Rhodesia (no. 1679). 

1613. Mason, Philip. The birth of a dilemma; the 

conquest and settlement of Rhodesia. Issued 
under the auspices of the Institute of Race 
Relations. London, New York, Oxford 
University Press, 1958. 366 p. illus. 

DT948.M28 

1614. - Year of decision; Rhodesia and Nyasa¬ 

land in 1960. Issued under the auspices of 
the Institute of Race Relations. London, 
New York, Oxford University Press, 1960. 
282 p. illus. DT856.M3 

In the first of these two books the Director of the 
Institute of Race Relations presents the bloodthirsty 


251 



history of Rhodesia from the earliest European con¬ 
tacts to the 20th century—“an attempt to describe the 
impact on each other of peoples profoundly different 
and the results of that impact.” This is the first part 
of a trilogy completed by Richard Gray’s The Two 
Nations (no. 1607) and Mr. Mason’s second work, 
which is a history of the Federation, 1953-60, and 
an examination of the current position. A review of 
the three works in Africa (v. 31, October 1961, 
p. 383) comments that these books will give all the 
information anyone requires, “but that is not to say 
that the answers will be made any easier.” 

1615. Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Federal Informa¬ 

tion Dept. Handbook to the Federation of 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Edited by W. V. 
Brelsford, Director of Information. London, 
Cassell, 1960. 803 p. plates (part col.) 
maps, charts, coat of arms, diagrs., tables. 

DT856.A47 

Includes bibliographies. 

The 45 chapters of this fat volume, many of them 
contributed by recognized experts, cover all phases of 
land, life, and affairs of the 3 countries comprising the 
Federation. The longest essays, those on prehistory, 
history, and anthropology, occupy 150 pages. Chap¬ 
ters on agriculture, industries, and other economic 
aspects include extensive tabulated data. Lists of in¬ 
stitutions and organizations appear in the chapters on 
education, social welfare, culture, etc., and similarly 
full and useful data in those on administrative or¬ 
ganization. Appendixes include a chronology from 
1498-1959, tables of statistics of population and in¬ 
come, lists of newspapers and periodicals, learned so¬ 
cieties, and other miscellaneous information. 

1616. Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Office for Rhode¬ 

sia and Nyasaland Affairs. The Federation 
of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, basic informa¬ 
tion for the potential investor. [American ed.] 
Washington, 1959. 123 p. 

HC517.R44A54 1959a 

In two parts, first a general survey in terms of eco¬ 
nomic geography, then detailed information on specific 
subjects. The pamphlet ends with a list of United 
States companies operating in the Federation. 

1617. Sanger, Clyde. Central African emergency. 

London, Heinemann, 1960. 342 p. 

DT856.S3 

A correspondent’s analysis of the last few years of 
racial and political developments in the Federation. 
In his chapter on “The Future” the writer pleads for 


“flexibility.” The book was reviewed by Harvey Glick- 
man in Africa Report of March 1961, together with the 
books by Mason and Gray. 

A picture of present-day Rhodesia and Nyasaland ex¬ 
pressing the hope of the Capricorn Society for an eventual 
multiracial society is by a resident of 25 years, Peter Gibbs: 
Avalanche in Central Africa (London, Barker, 1961. 
169 p.). 

A British army officer who had spent several months tour¬ 
ing the Federation specially to form his own evaluation of the 
problem, expressed the general viewpoint of the white set¬ 
tlers. Brigadier C. E. Lucas Phillips’ The Vision Splendid 
(London, Heinemann, 1960. 384 p.) was reviewed in the 

Times Literary Supplement of Feb. 17, 1961, p. 99. 

The Book by Gann and Duignan, White Settlers in the 
Tropics, which is analyzed in the General section on the Race 
Question (no. 136), relates in large part to the place of the 
European in Rhodesia and Nyasaland. 

1618. Thompson, Cecil H., and Harry W. Wood¬ 

ruff. Economic development in Rhodesia 
and Nyasaland. London, D. Dobson, 1954. 
205 p. illus. HC517.R4T5 

The writers, Government economists in Salisbury, 
datelined their book to coincide with the establishment 
of the Federation of the Rhodesias and Nyasaland. It 
is a study of the past economic history of the three 
territories and an assessment of the present position, 
with three themes constantly recurring—“the need 
for capital, the need for immigrant skill and experi¬ 
ence, and the need to raise the low productivity of the 
African.” The text includes many statistics, and an 
appendix contains tables. The authors considered 
that Federation would not bring short-run improve¬ 
ments, but would aid in long-term development 
through Government finance. 

1619. U.S. Bureau of Foreign Commerce. Near 

Eastern and African Division. Investment in 
Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland; basic 
information for United States businessmen. 
Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1956. 
158 p. illus., maps, charts. HC517.R4U5 

One of a series of handbooks bringing together basic 
data for investors and traders which the Bureau plans 
to keep up to date through its World Trade Informa¬ 
tion Service reports and Foreign Commerce Weekly. 
Much of the text was prepared by Dr. George H. T. 
Kimble of the Twentieth Century Fund. The first 
chapter appraised the Federation as a field for invest¬ 
ment, and succeeding chapters constituted a general 
survey of land, people, government, and especially 
of all economic activities and socioeconomic conditions. 
A number of appendixes contain business data, texts 
of business legislation, etc. 


252 


Northern 

GENERAL 

(including History) 

1620. Bradley, Kenneth. Copper venture; the dis¬ 

covery and development of Roan Antelope 
and Mufulira. London, Mufulira Copper 
Mines, Roan Antelope Copper Mines, 1952. 
112 p. TN447.R45 

At the time of writing, Mr. Bradley was editor of 
the Colonial Service journal, Corona. His career had 
begun with 14 years as District Officer in Northern 
Rhodesia, so that his personal memory goes back to 
parts of this interesting story of the prehistory, birth, 
and growth of the industry which is the chief source 
of the territory’s wealth. The book is illustrated with 
photographs and eight full-page drawings by Margaret 
Ross. 

An earlier book by Mr. Bradley told of the country and 
entertainingly of his own experiences: The Diary of a District 
Officer (London, T. Nelson, 1947. 205 p.). 

1621. Clifford, W. Crime in Northern Rhodesia. 

Lusaka, Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, 1960. 
130 p. (Rhodes-Livingstone Institute Com¬ 
munications, 18) DT15.R52 no. 18 

1622. Darling, Frank F. Wild life in an African ter¬ 

ritory; a study made for the Game and Tsetse 
Control Dept, of Northern Rhodesia. Lon¬ 
don, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1960. viii, 160 p. col. illus., 3 fold. maps. 

SK575.R4D3 

By a prominent British naturalist, now Director of 
Research of the Conservation Foundation, this is a 
specialist study which includes ecological descriptions 
of habitats and ecology of communities of game, as well 
as analysis of measures for conservation. 

1623. Gann, L. H. The birth of a plural society; the 

development of Northern Rhodesia under the 
British South Africa Company, 1894-1914. 
Manchester, Published on behalf of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, Northern 
Rhodesia, by Manchester University Press, 
1958. xxi, 230 p. illus., map. DT963.G3 

Bibliography: p. 192-210. 

The writer was appointed by the Rhodes-Livingstone 
Institute to provide a historical background to its major 
research program. According to Professor Gluckman 
who wrote the foreword, Mr. Gann went far beyond 


Rhodesia 

their design, using not only the European and political 
source materials but also the works of the anthropolo¬ 
gists to show “the African political systems and cul¬ 
tures ... as contributing in varying detail to the 
building of Northern Rhodesia, in the same way as 
varied types of European.” The work covers back¬ 
ground as of 1894, the coming of the missionaries fol¬ 
lowing Livingstone, the beginnings of government and 
establishment of administration, the arrival of the set¬ 
tlers and their part in determining the political pat¬ 
terns. The Northern Rhodesian plural society of 1914 
which he analyzes in his last chapter reveals the com¬ 
plex interaction between the differing types of both 
European and African societies. 

Mr. Gann is now Director of the National Archives of 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland. The Cape Town bookdealer Struik 
has announced (May 1962) that he now has in preparation 
a detailed History of Northern Rhodesia: 1891-1953. 

1624. Gelfand, Michael. Northern Rhodesia in the 

days of the Charter. Oxford, Blackwell, 1961. 

291 p. illus. DT963.G4 

Medical and social study of the life and health of 
the early missionaries and pioneers. Dr. Gelfand’s other 
works include Livingstone the Doctor, His Life and 
Travels: A Study in Medical History (Oxford, Black- 
well, 1957. 333 p.), and books on Southern Rhodesia. 

1625. Howarth, David. Shadow of the dam. Lon¬ 

don, Collins, 1961. 191 p. DT948.H65 

Popular account of the forced migration of the 35,- 
000 Tonga tribesmen displaced to make room for the 
Kariba Dam, including the unhappy “battle” when 
the Tonga resisted. For the isolated and “unspoiled” 
tribe, to whom the dam showed no prospects of being 
of any use, “Nobody could right the wrong; all that 
anyone could do was patch the damage.” 

1626. Lawman, Tony. The long grass. London, 

R. Hale, 1958. 185 p. illus. DT963.L37 

Personal narrative of a District Officer, including 
bits on local history and conditions among many anec¬ 
dotes of wild life and African ways. 

1627. Watson, Sir Malcolm. African highway; the 

battle for health in Central Africa. London, 

Murray, 1953. 294 p. illus., maps. 

RA552.C4W3 

The Director of the Ross Institute and the London 
School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine tells the 
story of work against malaria and other tropical dis- 


253 




eases in the Copper Belt of Northern Rhodesia. Chap¬ 
ters are contributed by drainage specialists who ex¬ 
plain techniques used. The second part, “African 
Village,” describes the advances in hygiene being made 
through drainage systems, “dambos” (dams at head 
of swamps) and water development. The Ross In¬ 
stitute, which was founded by Sir Ronald Ross in 
1928, had been asked to help by Mr. A. C. Beatty 
and his colleagues of the Northern Rhodesia Copper 
Mines. 

POLITICS AND ECONOMICS 

1628. Bancroft, Joseph A. Mining in Northern 

Rhodesia: a chronicle of mineral exploration 
and mining development; arranged and pre¬ 
pared by T. D. Guernsey. London, British 
South Africa Co., 1961. 174 p. illus. DLC 
Available for free distribution from the company. 
The author is a geologist who has carried out surveys 
for the Canadian government. 

1629. Davidson, James W. The Northern Rhode¬ 

sian Legislative Council. London, Faber & 
Faber, 1948. 150 p. map. (Studies in 

colonial legislatures, v. 3) JQ2854.D3 

A study in the Nuffield College series edited by Mar¬ 
gery Perham, examining in detail the constitutional 
evolution of Northern Rhodesia after 1924 when the 
British South Africa Company turned its administra¬ 
tion over to the Colonial Office. The writer’s particu¬ 
lar attention was to the comparative degree of repre¬ 
sentation of African interests, white settlers, and of¬ 
ficials in the Legislative Council. 

1630. Gt. Brit. Commission on Financial and Eco¬ 

nomic Position of Northern Rhodesia. Re¬ 
port of the Commission appointed to enquire 
into the financial and economic position of 
Northern Rhodesia. A. Pirn and S. Milligan, 
commissioners. London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1938. 394 p. maps, tables. (Colo¬ 
nial no. 145) HC517.R42A5 

During the thirties extensive economic surveys of 
colonial territories were carried out by special Com¬ 
missions for the Colonial Office. Sir Alan W. Pirn, 
who had retired from the Indian Civil Service in 1930, 
headed a number of these, including the surveys of 
Zanzibar and the High Commission Territories, Kenya, 
and last, in 1937, Northern Rhodesia. The detailed 
report is basic to later British surveys, including the 
so-called Bledisloe Report (Gt. Brit. Rhodesia-Nyasa- 


land Royal Commission. Report, London, 1939. 
283 p. Comd. 5949), which examined the proposals 
for uniting the three territories. Its recommendations, 
like those of an earlier Commission in 1927, were 
against political union but for a larger measure of 
economic federation, with creation of an Inter-Ter¬ 
ritorial Council (which was set up in March 1945). 

In 1938 Sir Alan Pirn summarized The Financial 
and Economic History of the African Tropical Ter¬ 
ritories in the Beit lecture series at Oxford, published 
by the Clarendon Press (1940. 234 p.). 

1631. Kaunda, Kenneth. Zambia shall he free; an 

autobiography. New York, Praeger, 1963. 
202 p. (Books that matter) DT963.K3 

The leader of the United National Independence 
Party (UNIP) of Northern Rhodesia, who in early 
1963 is Minister of Local Government, has followed 
the example of other African statesmen and written his 
autobiography. It is concomitantly the history of 
Northern Rhodesia’s political and constitutional de¬ 
velopment. 

1632. Morris, Colin M. The hour after midnight; a 

missionary’s experiences of the racial and 
political struggle in Northern Rhodesia. Lon¬ 
don, Longmans, Green, 1961. 168 p. 

By a Methodist minister of the Free Church in Chin- 
gola, Northern Rhodesia, a strong advocate of African 
rights. In his earlier Out of Africa’s Crucible; Ser¬ 
mons from Central Africa (London, Lutterworth Press, 
1960. 128 p.), he spoke out forthrightly in several 

sermons against any doctrine of white supremacy. 
The Hour after Midnight was reviewed in the Times 
Literary Supplement, Nov. 24, 1961, p. 848. 

1633. Rhodesia, Northern. Dept, of Agriculture. 

Report of a soil and land-use survey. Copper- 
belt, Northern Rhodesia. Lusaka, 1956. xii, 
190 p. illus., maps, tables. S471.R48A54 

An extensive study of European agriculture in the 
area which, with its commercial center at Ndola, con¬ 
tains four of the largest copper mines in the world. 
The work begins with geographical background, re¬ 
ports on soil, and vegetation surveys. Then comes an 
economic survey of European farming with notes on 
market prospects. Section 5 analyzes in detail pos¬ 
sibilities for agricultural development, and the last sec¬ 
tion summarizes conclusions and recommendations. 
There are appendixes of statistical and other tabulated 
data, and several folded maps. The introduction is 
signed by A. T. Wilson, Agricultural Officer-in-Charge. 


254 




1634. Wood, Anthony St. John. Northern Rho¬ 

desia; the human background. London, Pall 
Mall Press, 1961. 164 p. DT963.W6 

By a colonial officer with long experience in India 
and other parts of Africa, who found his 3 years in 
Northern Rhodesia tiring because of the “atmosphere 
of partly concealed strife, with occasional open con¬ 
flict.” He is sympathetic with the African nationalist 
cause in his analysis of the “crisis”—the deadlock be¬ 
tween Welensky and the UNIP (United National In¬ 
dependence Party). 

ANTHROPOLOGY AND 
SOCIOLOGY 

1635. Barnes, James A. Politics in a changing so¬ 

ciety; a political history of the Fort Jameson 
Ngoni. Cape Town, New York, Published 
for the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute by Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1954. 220 p. illus., 
maps, geneal. table. DT864.B3 

By a Cambridge-trained anthropologist, this book 
tells the story over 130 years of one group in North¬ 
ern Rhodesia of the Ngoni (Angoni), a migrant 
branch of the Nguni people of Southeastern Africa, 
which includes also Zulu and Swazi. In the early 
19th century the Ngoni fled from the Zulu conqueror 
Shaka and migrated north across the Zambezi, form¬ 
ing a state which from 1821 to 1898 was “an armed 
nation on the march.” The writer studied its organi¬ 
zation and political evolution under colonial adminis¬ 
tration. Though written from the anthropologist’s 
angle, the work reads as an interesting history. It 
ends with a long annotated bibliography, p. 173-209. 

An earlier monograph by Mr. Barnes was on the modifica¬ 
tions of family institutions of the tribe under the impact of 
the new age. Marriage in a Changing Society; a Study in 
Structural Change among the Fort Jameson Ngoni (Cape 
Town, New York, Published for the Rhodes-Livingstone 
Institute by Oxford University Press, 1951. 136 p. illus. 

The Rhodes-Livingstone Papers, no. 20). 

1636. Brelsford, William V. The tribes of North¬ 

ern Rhodesia. Lusaka, Govt. Printer, 1957. 
128 p. map. DT963.B74 

The writer, at the time Director of the National 
Archives of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, had formerly 
been a District Commissioner in Northern Rhodesia. 
This guide was prepared to replace the long out-of- 
print Memorandum on the Native Tribes and Tribal 
Areas of Northern Rhodesia written in 1934 by J. 
Moffat Thomson, then Secretary of Native Affairs. 


Mr. Brelsford has made use of the extensive research 
and writing on many tribes since that time. His 22 
chapters cover a great variety of tribes and tribal 
groups, going summarily into their history, ethnic 
composition, and tribal origins. A large folded map 
in brilliant colors shows tribes and language groups. 
Mr. Brelsford has written also a number of studies of 
individual tribes, some of them published as Papers 
of the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute. The most sub¬ 
stantial is Fishermen of the Bangweulu Swamps; A 
Study of the Fishing Activities of the Unga Tribe 
(Livingstone, 1946. 169 p. illus. R.-L. Papers no. 
12 ). 

1637. Carter, Hazel. Notes on the tonal system of 

Northern Rhodesian plateau Tonga. Lon¬ 
don, H.M. Stationery Off., 1962. 109 p. 

(Colonial research study no. 35) DLC 
One of the series of studies of the tribes displaced 
by the Kariba Dam project. 

1638. Clark, John Desmond. The stone age cul¬ 

tures of Northern Rhodesia, with particular 
reference to the cultural and climatic succes¬ 
sion in the upper Zambezi Valley and its 
tributaries. With a chapter on the geology 
by F. Dixey and appendixes by H. B. S. 
Cooke, L. H. Wells, and Geoffrey Bond. 
Claremont, Cape, South African Archaeo¬ 
logical Society, 1950. 157 p. illus., maps. 

GN776.R5C47 

See also Mr. Clark’s contribution to Prehistoric 
Rock Art of the Federation (no. 1584). 

1639. Colson, Elizabeth. Life among the cattle¬ 

owning plateau Tonga; the material culture 
of a Northern Rhodesian native tribe. Liv¬ 
ingstone, Rhodes-Livingstone Museum, 1949. 
40 p. illus. (Occasional papers of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Museum, n.s. no. 6) 

GN657.T5C6 

1640. - Marriage and family among the pla¬ 

teau Tonga of Northern Rhodesia. Man¬ 
chester, Eng., Published on behalf of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute by Manchester 
University Press, 1958. 379 p. illus. 

GN657.T5C63 

1641. - The plateau Tonga of Northern 

Rhodesia: social and religious studies. Man¬ 
chester, Published on behalf of the Rhodes- 
Livingstone Institute by Manchester Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1962. 237 p. GN657.T5C64 


255 




1642. - Social organization of the Gwemhe 

Tonga. Manchester, Published on behalf of 
the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute by Man¬ 
chester University Press, 1960. 243 p. 
(Human problems of Kariba, v. 1.) 

GN657.T5C64 

Dr. Colson is recognized as an authority on the 
Tonga of Northern Rhodesia. (The Tonga of the 
Thonga group of Central Africa Bantu are also in 
Mozambique and neighboring regions.) She is cur¬ 
rently engaged in studies of the Tonga trbes displaced 
by the Kariba project. 

A second volume of Human Problems of Kariba is pub¬ 
lished by Manchester University Press, Ecology of the 
Gwemhe Tonga, by Thayer Scudder (Manchester, 1962. 
274 p. illus., maps.) 

1643. Cunnison, Ian G. The Luapula peoples of 

Northern Rhodesia, custom and history in 
tribal politics. Manchester, Eng., Published 
on behalf of the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, 
Northern Rhodesia, by Manchester University 
Press, 1959. xiii, 258 p. illus., maps, geneal. 
tables, tables. DT963.C83 

Bibliography: p. 244-247. 

Study in informal style, with much attention to 
particular histories and politics as well as to strictly 
anthropological aspects. Based on fieldwork done by 
the author as a research officer of the Rhodes-Living¬ 
stone Institute in 1948-51. The Luapula peoples, a 
part of the large Bemba-speaking group of Bantu of 
Central Africa, are in Northeastern Rhodesia, extend¬ 
ing over into Southeastern Katanga. The dominant 
tribe is the Lunda of the Kazembe kingdom. 

1644. Epstein, Arnold L. The administration of jus¬ 

tice and the urban African, a study of urban 
native courts in Northern Rhodesia. London, 
H. M. Stationery Off., 1953. 124 p. forms. 
(Colonial research studies, no. 7) 

JV33.G7A48, no. 7 

1645. - Politics in an urban African commu¬ 

nity. Manchester, Published on behalf of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute by Manchester 
University Press, 1958. 254 p. illus. 

HN800.R6E6 

Two analyses of urbanization in the Luanshya area, 
the region of the Roan Antelope Copper Mine. The 
author, a sociologist from Manchester University, was 
doing field research with the Rhodes-Livingstone In¬ 
stitute. 


1646. Gluckman, Max. The judicial process among 

the Barotse of Northern Rhodesia. Man¬ 
chester, Published on behalf of the Rhodes- 
Livingstone Institute, Northern Rhodesia, by 
Manchester University Press, 1955. 386 p. 
illus. DLC-LL 

In contrast to the study by Epstein (above), this 
book by the former Director of the Rhodes-Livingstone 
Institute, now Professor of Social Anthropology at the 
University of Manchester, is on the Lozi courts “at work 
in the still uncomplicated polity and economy of their 
homeland.” Primarily a study for specialists in the 
field, there is a story quality in his reports of cases, 
which have such distinctive titles as “The Case of the 
Biassed Father,” “The Case of the Violent Councillor,” 
“The Case of the Prudish Wife,” “The Case of the Un¬ 
derpaid Prostitute,” “The Case of the Prince’s Gar¬ 
dens.” Where possible he draws comparisons with 
Roman and South African law. 

Among Professor Gluckman’s other contributions to study 
of the Barotse was the Rhodes-Livingstone Paper No. 7, 
The Economy of the Central Barotse Plain (1941. 130 p.). 

1647. International African Institute. Ethno¬ 

graphic survey of Africa [series]. London. 

No. 2 of the series on East Central Africa, Bemba and 
Related Peoples of Northern Rhodesia, by W. White- 
head and J. Slaski (1951. 100 p.), and nos. 3 and 4 
of the West Central Africa series, The Lozi Peoples of 
North-Western Rhodesia, by V. W. Turner (1952. 60 
p.), and The lla-Tonga Peoples of North-Western 
Rhodesia, by M. A. Jaspan (1953. 72 p.), relate to 
tribes of Northern Rhodesia. For description, see 
general entry-on the series, no. 270. Because of the 
comparatively early date of these monographs, and 
particularly because of the important contributions to 
anthropological study of the territory made in the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute Papers, later material is 
available. 

1648. Jones, A. M., and L. Kombe. The Icila dance, 

old style; a study in African music and dance 
of the Lala tribe of Northern Rhodesia. Roo- 
depoort, Longmans, Green for African Music 
Society, 1952. 49 p. illus. ML3760.J6 

A pioneer study. “. . . Anyone who has attempted 
to transcribe African music will realise the importance 
of Mr. Jones’ analysis. Here for the first time is ex¬ 
posed with great clarity the structure of the fascinating 
counterpoint of rhythms which is indeed the heart of 
African music” (Raymond Clausen in Man, v. 53, 
Sept. 1953, p. 139). 


256 




1649. Po wdermaker, Hortense. Copper town: 

changing Africa; the human situation on the 
Rhodesian Copperbelt. New York, Harper 
& Row, 1962. 391 p. illus. HN800.R6P6 

This American anthropologist spent most of 1953- 
54 in the newly formed Federation, studying the proc¬ 
esses of social change. She was mostly at Luanshya, 
site of the Roan Antelope Copper Mine, where with 
student assistants she carried out a survey of daily life 
and leisure activities. Through the students she was 
provided with records of conversations around such 
affairs as a strike, a case of true love, a women’s fight. 
Several chapters analyze leisure time—listening to 
radio, going to movies, and reading. The book is re¬ 
viewed in the November 1962 issue of Africa Report, 
also by Gwendolen Carter in New York Times Book 
Review of Nov. 18,1962. 

1650. Richards, Audrey I. Chisungu; a girls’ initia¬ 

tion ceremony among the Bemba of Northern 
Rhodesia. New York, Grove Press, 1956. 
224 p. illus. GN483.R46 1956a 

The author, a former pupil of Malinowski to whom 
she dedicated this book, had done anthropological re¬ 
search among the Bemba, the dominant tribe in North¬ 
eastern Rhodesia, in 1931 and 1933-34. Her essay on 
Bemba Marriage and Present Economic Conditions 
was published as the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute 
Paper No. 4 (Livingstone, 1940. 123 p.). After 

holding lectureships at the London School of Eco¬ 
nomics and the University of the Witwatersrand, Dr. 
Richards has more recently been Director of the 
East African Institute of Social Research. This study 
of the girls’ puberty rites which she had witnessed a 
quarter century before is written to interest specialist 
and layman alike. 

1651. - Land, labour and diet in Northern 

Rhodesia. London, New York, Published 
for the International Institute of African 
Languages and Cultures by Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1939. 415 p. tables, maps. Re¬ 
print 1961. GN652.B4R5 

This study and Dr. Richards’ paper on Bemba Mar¬ 
riage served, according to the late Godfrey Wilson, 
at that time Director of the Rhodes-Livingstone In¬ 
stitute, “to make the present social organization of the 
Bemba better understood than that of any other tribe 
of Central Africa.” Like the later Chisunga, they are 
written in a style both comprehensible and interesting 
to the layman. Land, Labour and Diet in Northern 


Rhodesia was reprinted with an additional introduc¬ 
tion in 1961. 

1652. Smith, Edwin W., and Andrew Murray 

Dale. The Ila-speaking people of Northern 
Rhodesia. London, Macmillan, 1920. 2 v. 

GN657.I4S56 

The Rev. Dr. Smith went in 1902 from missionary 
work in South Africa to Northern Rhodesia, where he 
pioneered at the Kasenga Mission among the tribes 
whom he describes in this anthropological study. His 
collaborator was a magistrate in the South Africa 
Company, which controlled the territory till 1924, 
when it was taken over by the British Crown. During 
the course of his missionary work, Dr. Smith had re¬ 
duced the Ila language to writing. 

1653. Turner, V.W. Schism and continuity in an 

African society; a study of Ndembu village 
life. Manchester, Published on behalf of the 
Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, Northern Rho¬ 
desia, by Manchester University Press, 1957. 
xxiii, 348 p. plates, maps, geneal. tables, 
tables. 

Bibliography: p. 332-335. 

Reviewed by A. I. Richards in Africa, January 1960 
(p. 88-90), as “of considerable interest to the pro¬ 
fessional anthropologist, both as an expression of 
some current trends in anthropological thinking and 
as a new experiment in the handling of ethnographic 
data.” Two earlier studies by this scholar were of 
monograph length: Lunda Rites and Ceremonies 
(Livingstone, Rhodes-Livingstone Museum, 1953. 
56 p. Occasional papers, n.s. no. 10 ); and Ndembu 
Divination; Its Symbolism and Techniques (Man¬ 
chester, Manchester University Press, 1961. 85 p. 

Rhodes-Livingstone Papers, no. 31). 

1654. Watson, William. Tribal cohesion in a 

money economy; a study of the Mambwe peo¬ 
ple of Northern Rhodesia. Manchester, Pub¬ 
lished on behalf of the Rhodes-Livingstone 
Institute, Northern Rhodesia by Manchester 
University Press, 1958. xxiii, 246 p. plates, 
diagrs., tables. GN657.M16W3 

Bibliography: p. 229-233. 

1655. White, Charles M. N. An outline of Luvale 

social and political organization. Manches¬ 
ter, Published on behalf of Rhodes-Living¬ 
stone Institute by Manchester University 
Press, 1960. 51 p. illus. (The Rhodes- 
Livingstone papers, no. 30) 

GN657.R4W48 1960 


257 



Nyasaland 


1656. Chadwick, Owen. Mackenzie’s grave. Lon¬ 

don, Hodder & Stoughton, 1959. 254 p. 

BV3625.N82C5 

Study of the great bishop of Nyasaland who pio¬ 
neered with Livingstone. Heavily based on archival 
records. 

1657. Clutton-Brock, Guy. Dawn in Nyasaland. 

London, Hodder & Stoughton, 1959. 192 p. 

map. DT862.C55 

Mr. Clutton-Brock, an agricultural missionary and 
a vigorous fighter for African rights in a multiracial 
society, established and was until its suppression in 
1959 director of the experimental interracial farm, 
St. Faith’s Mission, in Southern Rhodesia. This book 
is an account of awakening African nationalism. 

1658. Debenham, Frank. Nyasaland, the Land of 

the Lake. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1955. 239 p. illus. (The Corona library 
3) DT858.D4 

One of a series sponsored by the Colonial Office, “to 
be authoritative and readable, and to give a vivid 
yet accurate picture.” This descriptive survey of 
Nyasaland is by a noted Cambridge geographer. For 
many years an authority on polar research, Professor 
Debenham in 1948 turned to the tropics and pre¬ 
pared a report on the water resources of East and 
Central Africa. His book has as background four 
trips to Nyasaland. The writer envisioned the future 
of the territory, with its tremendous water resources, 
as another TVA. 

A more technical publication by Professor Debenham cover¬ 
ing the results of one of his trips was his Study of an African 
Swamp; Report of the Cambridge University Expedition to 
the Bangweulu Swamps, Northern Rhodesia, 1949 (London, 
Pub. for the Govt, of Northern Rhodesia by H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1952. 88 p. illus.). 

1659. Gt. Brit. Colonial Office. Nyasaland: report 

for the year . . . London, H.M. Stationery 
Office, annual. DT862.A55 

The 1960 Report on Nyasaland, published in mid- 
1961, has 199 pages. It begins with a chronology and 
general review of the year’s events, then carries sys¬ 
tematic surveys of political and economic aspects, 
geography, history, and administrative organization. 
A long reading list, classified by discipline, fills almost 
20 pages, 4 of which are devoted to official publications 
of Nyasaland, the Federation, and the British Govern¬ 
ment. 


1660. Gt. Brit. Nyasaland Commission of Inquiry. 

Report. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1959. 146 p. maps. (Cmnd814). 

DT862.G75 

The “Devlin Report,” by the Commission appointed 
to inquire into causes of the riots of January and Feb¬ 
ruary 1959. 

1661. Hazlewood, Arthur, and P. D. Henderson. 

Nyasaland: the economics of federation. 
Oxford, Blackwell, 1960. 91 p. 

Reprinted from the Bulletin of the Oxford University of 
Statistics, v. 22, no. 1. HC 10.085, V. 22 

A short statistical survey by two Oxford economists. 
The conclusion they reach is the opposite of that of 
the Monckton Report (no. 1608); they find that 
federation has not accomplished the economic advan¬ 
tages claimed. 

1662. Kambalame, John, C. P. Chidzalo, and J. W. 

M. Chadangalara. Our African way of life. 
Tr. and edited with preface by Cullen Young 
and Hastings Banda. London, United So¬ 
ciety for Christian Literature, 1946. 152 p. 

DT864.K3 

The International African Institute for some years 
offered prizes for native writing, and this set of essays 
won the awards for 1943-44. The writers are from 
Nyasaland, their language Nyanja (the language of 
the people of' the Lake). The first, who sent his 
manuscript from Ceylon where he was in a Nyasaland 
regiment, gave a general description of life of the 
Chewa people, who, with the Ngoni, live about the 
Great Lake. The second, a clerk in a District Com¬ 
missioner’s Office, described “Getting Married,” the 
third, a villager, told stories of native life in anecdotal 
form. The preface described in general terms the 
country and its culture. Dr. Banda, the President of 
the Malawi Congress Party and leader of the Nyasa¬ 
land independence movement, was at that time prac¬ 
ticing medicine in England and had become an Elder 
of the Church of Scotland. 

An earlier prize award for biography was given to Samuel 
Ntara for his life-story of an African villager, Man of Africa, 
which was translated and arranged from the original Nyanja 
by Cullen Young and published by the Religious Tract 
Society (London, 1934, 181 p.). The writer, a Nyasaland 
teacher, set his tale in Southern Rhodesia. 


258 


1663. Mackenzie, Duncan R. The spirit-ridden 

Konde: a record of the interesting but steadi¬ 
ly vanishing customs and ideas gathered 
during 24 years’ residence amongst these shy 
inhabitants of the Lake Nyasa region, from 
witch-doctors, diviners, hunters, fishers and 
every native source. London, Seeley, Serv¬ 
ice, 1925. 318 p. illus., map. DT864.M3 
A famous study by a missionary anthropologist. 

1664. Mair, Lucy P. The Nyasaland elections of 

1961. London, University of London, Ath- 
lone Press, published for the Institute of Com¬ 
monwealth Studies, 1962. 86 p. (Univer¬ 
sity of London, Institute of Commonwealth 
Studies. Commonwealth papers, 7) 

JQ2941.A956M2 

Reviewed in West Africa (May 26, 1962, p. 575) as 
“fascinating reading.” 

1665. Mitchell, J. Clyde. The Yao village; a 

study in the social structure of a Nyasaland 
tribe. Manchester, Published on behalf of 
the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, by Man¬ 
chester University Press, 1956. xviii, 235 p. 
illus., maps, diagrs., tables. DT429.M5 
Bibliography: p. 224-227. 

Based on field work by this sociologist as a research 
officer of the Rhodes-Livingstone Institute in 1946- 
49 among this tribe of southern Nyasaland. 

1666. Nyasaland. The Southworth Commission re¬ 

port, 1960. Zomba, Govt. Printer, 1960. 
126 p. DT865.B5A55 

Frederick Southworth was Commissioner for this 
inquiry into the “incident” in Blantyre on Jan. 26, 
1960, when a demonstration by the African National 
Congress for the visiting British Prime Minister, Mr. 
Macmillan, was broken up by police and reported in 
London newspapers as a riot. 

1667. Nyasaland. Committee of Inquiry into Afri¬ 

can Education. Report. Zomba, Govt. 
Printer, 1962. 362 p. LC2808.N9A49 
Not yet available for examination. 

1668. Read, Margaret. Children of their fathers; 

growing up among the Ngoni of Nyasaland. 
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1960. 
176 p. GN482.R4 1960 

1669. - The Ngoni of Nyasaland. London, 

New York, Published for the International 
African Institute by Oxford University Press, 
1956. 212 p. DT864.R4 

692 — 756—63 - 18 


Before heading the Department of Education in 
Tropical Areas in the London University Institute of 
Education (1940-55), Dr. Read had done field work 
as a Research Fellow of the International African In¬ 
stitute in Northern Rhodesia and Nyasaland. These 
two interpretations of Ngoni life are written with a 
minimum of technical language. 

1670. Rhodesia and Nyasaland. The issue of Nyas- 

aland’s secession. Salisbury, Federal Govt. 
Printer, 1962. 67 p. (C. Fed. 231) 

Federal Government White Paper containing a 
summary of the documents given by the Federal Min¬ 
isters to the advisers sent by the British Secretary of 
State to help in determining the issue. It is sum¬ 
marized in East Africa and Rhodesia of Jan. 3, 1963. 

1671. Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Ministry of Eco¬ 

nomic Affairs. Report on an economic sur¬ 
vey of Nyasaland, 1958-1959. Salisbury, 
[1959?] 300 p. maps, charts, diagrs, tables, 
(Rhodesia and Nyasaland. C. Fed. 132) 

J725.R82, no. 132 
Survey by a joint Federation and Nyasaland team 
under the British economist Daniel T. Jack with Mr. 
R. J. Randall acting as his deputy. The writers of 
the solid study found evidence conclusive that Nyasa¬ 
land economic development was being aided by 
federation. Political considerations do not enter the 
report. A summary of its conclusions and recom¬ 
mendations was issued by the Nyasaland Government 
(Zomba, 1960. 49 p.). 

1672. Shepperson, George, and Thomas Price. In¬ 

dependent African; John Chilembwe and the 
origins, setting, and significance of the Nyasa¬ 
land native rising of 1915. Edinburgh, Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1958. x, 564 p. illus., maps. 
(Edinburgh University Publications; history, 
philosophy and economics, no. 8) DT862.S4 
Notes and references: p. 439-504. Sources: p. 505-526. 
History of the clash of an African church separatist 
movement with the missions. Reviewed as “magni¬ 
ficent history” by Ian Cunnison in Africa, Jan. 1960, v. 
30, p. 88-90. 

1673. Tew, Mary. Peoples of the Lake Nyasa region. 

London, New York, Published for the In¬ 
ternational African Institute by Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1950. x, 131 p. maps (Ethno¬ 
graphic survey of Africa: East central Africa, 
pt. 1) DT864.T4 

Bibliography: p. 118-131. 

For general note on the series, see no. 270. 


259 



1674. Van der Post, Laurens. Venture to the in¬ 
terior. New York, Morrow, 1951. 253 p. 

DT862.V3 

This book, which recounts the author’s own trip of 
exploration into the almost unknown mountains and 
high plateau of Nyasaland, has been highly praised as 
an inspirational interpretation of Africa. 


Southern 

GENERAL 

(including Politics and Economics) 

1676. Brown, Ken. Land in Southern Rhodesia. 

London, Africa Bureau, 1959. 32 p. 

HD990.R7B7 

By a former officer of the Native Agriculture De¬ 
partment of Southern Rhodesia, this analysis condemns 
the Land Apportionment Act of 1930 as “unjust and 
indiscriminate ... in need of urgent change and re¬ 
form.” The Native Land Husbandry Act of 1951 is 
also discussed as “denying to the African population 
certain basic human rights.” 

The Land Apportionment Act was amended in 1960, 
transferring over a fourth of the land in the European areas 
to the various areas available for African use ( Statesman’s 
Year Book, 1962-63). See no. 1684. 

1677. Chater, Patricia. Grass roots: the story of 

Saint Faith’s farm in Southern Rhodesia. 

London, Hodder & Stoughton, 1962. 192 p. 

illus. HD1491.S6C45 

Account of the nonracial settlement established by 
Guy Clutton-Brock, where Europeans and Africans 
worked together under an African farm manager. Mr. 
Clutton-Brock was arrested in 1959 at the time of the 
Emergency, and the farm raided under the accusation 
of inciting revolt. The venture has since been aban¬ 
doned. 

1678. Kane, Nora S. The world’s view; the story of 

Southern Rhodesia. London, Cassell, 1954. 

294 p. illus. DT962.K3 1954 

Picturesque retelling of history, full of anecdotes and 
personal stories quoted from memoirs. After the nar¬ 
rative of the Matabele wars and the beginnings of 
British rule, chapters are given to biographical sketches 
of Rhodes and other founders. A short final chapter 
outlines political developments of recent years, end- 


1675. Wilson, Godfrey. The constitution of Ngonde. 
Livingstone, The Rhodes-Livingstone Insti¬ 
tute, 1939. 86 p. (The Rhodes-Livingstone 
papers, no. 3) GN659.N45W5 

Analysis of the traditional and changing political 
system of this Bantu tribe of the extreme north of 
Nyasaland. 


Rhodesia 

ing with the formation of the Central African Federa¬ 
tion. 

1679. Leys, Colin. European politics in Southern 

Rhodesia. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959. 

323 p. maps, diagrs., tables. DT962.L48 

Bibliography: p. 313-316. Bibliographical footnotes. 

Study by a Fellow of Balliol College who has since 
been teaching in East African universities. He exam¬ 
ined the foundations of European politics, structure 
of government, composition and living standards of 
the European population, interests and pressure 
groups, and the part played by political parties. The 
work was completed before the election of June 1958, 
which eliminated the liberal Prime Minister Garfield 
Todd and assured European control of the franchise, 
leading directly to the Emergencies of 1959. The 
results of the election are summarized in a short appen¬ 
dix. The bibliography includes a listing of the more 
notable constitutional and political documents. A 
review by Harvey Glickman in Africa Report of 
March 1960 speaks of this book as “a first-rate piece 
of political scholarship.” 

The British Socialist viewpoint of the riots and the repres¬ 
sive measures taken by the Governments of the Federa¬ 
tion and the states was expressed in a Fabian Society pam¬ 
phlet by Terence Ranger: Crisis in Southern Rhodesia (Lon¬ 
don, Fabian Commonwealth Bureau, 1960. 39 p. Research 

series, 217). 

1680. NAD A; Southern Rhodesia Native Affairs De¬ 

partment annual. Salisbury, 193- 

DT962.A25 

Annual magazine carrying a wide variety of arti¬ 
cles relating to the work and experiences of the Native 
Affairs Department and its charges. 

1681. Parker, Franklin. African development and 

education in Southern Rhodesia. Columbus, 

Ohio State University Press, 1960. 165 p. 

(International education monographs, no. 2) 

DT962.P28 


260 


By an American educationalist who had studied at 
first hand conditions in Southern Rhodesia. He begins 
with a sketch of history focused on African develop¬ 
ment, then gives an historical review of African educa¬ 
tion and a discussion of its problems. Appendixes 
analyze the present educational structure. Each sec¬ 
tion is followed by bibliographical notes. 

1682. Rayner, William. The tribe and its succes¬ 

sors; an account of African traditional life and 
European settlement in Southern Rhodesia. 
New York, Praeger, 1962. 239 p. illus. 
(Books that matter) DT962.R3 

A combined historical and anthropological study, 
the first and longest part picturing the former life and 
culture of the Mashona tribes, the second part a rapid 
account of European conquest and settlement. The 
short chapter entitled “Since 1923” is concerned with 
legislation affecting the Africans (Land Apportion¬ 
ment Act, Land Husbandry Act, Plewman Commis¬ 
sion Report), and comes up to 1958. The writer 
ends with a “Personal View,” in which he foresees the 
passing of power to African hands, to whom the 
settlers will have brought a new industrialized and 
eventually prosperous world. 

1683. Rhodesia, Southern. Advisory Committee 

on the Development of Economic Resources. 
The development of the economic resources 
of Southern Rhodesia with particular ref¬ 
erence to the role of African agriculture. 
Salisbury, Govt. Printer, 1962. 480 p., maps, 
diagrs. DLC 

The so-called Phillips Report, by a Committee under 
the chairmanship of Dr. John Phillips, is announced 
in the Oct. 25, 1962 issue of East Africa and Rhodesia. 
Extracts from the report appear in this and succeeding 
issues. The Committee proposed a £34 million plan 
“for the saving of the natural resources, their amelio¬ 
ration and their steady development.” 

1684. Rhodesia, Southern. Select Committee on 

the Resettlement of Natives. Second report. 
Salisbury, Govt. Printer, 1960. 

This report, which recommended amendment of the 
Land Apportionment Act of 1930 to give a far larger 
share to the Africans, was analyzed by L. Branney in 
the Journal of African Administration (v. 13, no. 3, 
July 1961, p. 184-187). 

1685. Rhodesia, Southern. Urban African Affairs 

Commission. Report. Salisbury, Govt. 
Printer, 1958. 200 p. tables. 

HD7374.R5A55 


This body, under the chairmanship of Robert P. 
Plewman, studied the housing, wages, finance, and 
future land tenure of Africans in Southern Rhodesia. 
There was one African member of the Commission, 
Mr. Herbert W. Chitepo. 

1686. Rogaly, Joe. Rhodesia: Britain’s Deep South. 

London, Economist and Economist Intelli¬ 
gence Unit, 1962. 25 p. maps, tables, diagrs. 
(Brief booklets, no. 1). DLC 

Not available for examination. 

1687. Rogers, Cyril A., and C. Frantz. Racial 

themes in Southern Rhodesia: the attitudes 
and behavior of the white population. With 
a foreword by Sir Robert C. Tredgold. New 
Haven, Yale University Press, 1962. 427 p. 

DT962.R6 

The authors of this study in applied sociology 
measured and analyzed by advanced techniques the 
attitudes of Europeans in the multiracial society of 
Southern Rhodesia. Their findings were that the 
European population is conservative and would prefer 
a “bicultural to a uniracial or unicultural society”— 
according to a reviewer in the London Times Literary 
Supplement , “exactly what you would expect.” 

The traditional attitude of Europeans in Southern Rho¬ 
desia toward the African was given forceful expression in a 
novel by a well-known writer, Doris Lessing: The Grass is 
Singing (New York, Crowell, 1950. 245 p.). In this con¬ 
nection see also Gann & Duignan, White Settlers in Tropical 
Africa (no. 136). 

1688. Tow, Leonard. The manufacturing economy 

of Southern Rhodesia: problems and pros¬ 
pects. Washington, National Academy of 
Sciences—National Research Council, 1960. 
141 p. tables (Foreign field research pro¬ 
gram, sponsored by Office of Naval Research. 
Report no. 10) HD9737.R5T6 

Bibliography: p. 135-141. 

HISTORY AND ARCHEOLOGY 

1689. Caton-Thompson, Gertrude. The Zim¬ 

babwe culture; ruins and reactions. Oxford, 
The Clarendon Press, 1931. xxiv, 299 p. 
illus., LXIII pi. on 48 1. (part fold.; incl. 
map, plans) DT965.Z5C3 

Bibliography: p. xix-xxii. 

A celebrated study which has set the standard for 
recent scholarship regarding Zimbabwe. In this con¬ 
nection, see comparative comment by Paver (below). 


261 


1690. Northcott, William G. Robert Moffat: 

pioneer in Africa 1817-1880. London, Lut¬ 
terworth Press, 1961. 357 p. 

BV3557.M7N6 1961 
Biography of the great missionary of Southern Af¬ 
rica, whom the writer characterizes as “the representa¬ 
tive man of the movement of missions which developed 
out of the religious life and swelling industrial pros¬ 
perity of nineteenth-century Britain.” Less known 
than his famous son-in-law, David Livingstone, Moffat 
from his pioneer mission at Kuruman in Bechuanaland 
launched the missions of Matabeleland which were 
the first white settlements in Rhodesia. 

1691. Paver, B. G. Zimbabwe cavalcade; Rhodesia’s 

romance. With a foreword by Sir Roy 
Welensky. Completely rev. London, Cas¬ 
sell, 1957. 217 p. DT952.P3 1957 

Full account of the famous Zimbabwe ruins, in¬ 
cluding description, history of their discovery, and 
review of the theories advanced to date the still mys¬ 
terious culture. The bibliography (p. 199-205) dis¬ 
tinguishes the books and papers supporting the theory 
of ancient builders and miners from those believing in 
a medieval Bantu origin. The first theory was ad¬ 
vanced by early missionaries and other pioneers from 
the 1870’s on, and most scientifically enunciated by 
R. N. Hall at the turn of the century. The medieval 
theory was first stated by David Randall-Maclver in 
1906, and adjusted by Miss G. Caton-Thompson. 
Radiocarbon tests carried out in the fifties suggest con¬ 
firmation of Miss Caton-Thompson’s conclusions, but 
investigation is still continuing. According to Basil 
Davidson ( Ruined Cities of Africa, p. 213), fresh 
excavations were being carried on by Summers and 
Robinson (below) in 1958. 

Mr. Paver, a longtime resident of Southern Africa who 
over a 25-year period had founded and directed companies 
publishing 15 or more African newspapers in South Africa 
and the Federation, has written recently a study of African 
and European society and the hoped-for multiracial partner¬ 
ship in the Federation: His Own Oppressor (London, Peter 
Davies, 1958. 235 p.). 

1692. Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Central African 

Archives. A guide to the public records of 
Southern Rhodesia under the regime of the 
British South Africa Company, 1890-1923. 
Salisbury, 1956. xxxviii, 282 p. illus. (part 
col.) CD2355.R5A55 


1693. - Oppenheimer series. Edited by J. P. R. 

Wallis [and others] London, Chatto & Windus, 
1945+ illus., maps, plans, etc. 

A series of reprints of the manuscript journals and 
other primary source materials relating to the early 
missionaries and other pioneers in Southern Rhodesia. 
Unless otherwise specified, they are edited by Mr. 
Wallis. 

1. Matabele journals of Robert Moffat, 1829-1860. 

1945. DT964.M4M6 

2. The Matabele mission, a selection from the corre¬ 

spondence of John and Emily Moffat, David Living¬ 
stone, and others, 1858—1878. 1945. 268 p. 

BV3625.M32M3 

3. The Northern goldfields diaries of Thomas Baines. 

1946. 3 v. DT964.M4B3 

4. Gold and the gospel in Mashonaland, 1888, being 

the journals of: 1. The Mashonaland mission of 
Bishop Knight-Bruce; 2. The concession journey of 
Charles Dunnell Rudd. Edited respectively by 
Constance E. Fripp and V. W. Hiller. 1949. 246 
p. DT964.M3K5 

5. Apprenticeship at Kuruman, being the journals and 

letters of Robert and Mary Moffat, 1820-1828. Ed. 
by I. Schapera. 1951. 308 p. BV3557.M7A33 

6. The Zambesi journal of James Stewart, 1862—1863, 

with a selection from his correspondence. 1952. 
276 p. DT861.S8 

7. The Barotseland journal of James Stevenson-Hamil- 

ton, 1898-1899. 1953. 246 p. DT964.B3S68 

8. Southern African diaries of Thomas Leask, 1865—1880. 

1954. 253 p. DT756.L4 

9. The Zambezi expedition of David Livingstone, 1858- 

1863. 1956. 2 v. (lvi, 462 p.). 

DT731.L773 1956 

1694. Summers, Roger. Inyanga; prehistoric settle¬ 

ments in Southern Rhodesia. With contri¬ 
butions by H. B. S. Cooke [and others] Cam¬ 
bridge [Eng.] Published for the Inyanga Re¬ 
search Fund at the University Press, 1958. 
xviii, 335 p. illus., maps, plans. DT964.I5S8 

Includes bibliographies. 

Technical report of archaeological investigations 
of the stone age ruins and terraces in the Inyanga Dis¬ 
trict on the eastern border of Southern Rhodesia. The 
Research Fund was inspired by the late Dr. Neville 
Jones, one of the pioneers of Rhodesian archaeology, 
and financed by subscription. The work was under 
direction of the author, Curator of the National Muse¬ 
um, and Keith Robinson, Inspector for the Monuments 
Commission. Sections were contributed by several 
scholars. 


262 



1695. Tabler, Edward C. The far interior; chronicles 

of pioneering in the Matabele and Mashona 
countries, 1847-1879. Capetown, A. A. 
Balkema, 1955. 443 p. illus.,maps. 

DT958.T3 

Bibliography: p. 429-439. 

Story of the pioneers who “unwittingly prepared 
the way for white dominion in Southern Rhodesia” 
before 1880—the missionaries, explorers, gold hunters, 
etc. The chronological account is paraphrased from 
a great variety of sources, which the author details in 
an eleven-page bibliography as well as in chapter notes 
and references. In this connection see also Oppen- 
heimerseries (above). 

1696. -, ed. Zambezia and Matabeleland in 

the seventies. The narrative of Frederick 
Hugh Barber, 1875 and 1877-78, and the 
journal of Richard Frewen, 1877-1878. 
London, Chatto & Windus, 1960. 212 p., 

plates, maps. (Robins series, no. 1) 

DT958.T32 

First volume of another series based on the archives 
of the Rhodesian pioneers. 

ANTHROPOLOGY AND 
SOCIOLOGY 

1697. Gelfand, Michael. Medicine and magic of 

the Mashona. Cape Town, Juta, 1956. 
266 p. illus. GN477.3.G4 

1698. - Shona ritual, with special reference to 

the Chaminuka cult. Cape Town, Juta, 
1959. 217 p. BL2480.M3G4 

The author of these two accounts of the rapidly 
disappearing traditional culture of the Shona is a 
medical doctor who studied the people of Mashonaland 
and their Nganga, or medicine men, at widely scat¬ 
tered points within a radius of 80 miles from Salis¬ 
bury. He recorded his facts using, he says, “the same 
technique that is used in the investigation of a sick 
patient,” first consulting all around, then making thor¬ 
ough examination of the subject himself, with inter¬ 
preters who had enough medical training to be 
interested and appreciative of his approach. 

1699. Holleman, J. F. Accommodating the spirit 

amongst some north-eastern Shona tribes. 
Cape Town, New York, Published for the 


Rhodes-Livingstone Institute by Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1953. 40 p. illus. (The 
Rhodes-Livingstone papers, no. 22) 

GN486.H6 

1700. - Shona customary law, with reference 

to kinship, marriage, the family and the es¬ 
tate. Cape Town, New York, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1952. 401 p. DLC-LL 

Bibliography: p. 378-379. 

Two treatises in the field of comparative anthropo¬ 
logical theory. The writer is concerned with the do¬ 
mestic life and ritual of the tribes in the Mtoko district 
of Mashonaland, Southern Rhodesia. 

1701. Hughes, A. J. B. Kin, caste and nation among 

the Rhodesia Ndebele. Manchester, Pub¬ 
lished on behalf of the Rhodes-Livingstone 
Institute by the Manchester University 
Press, 1956. 86 p. (The Rhodes-Living¬ 
stone papers, no. 25) DT955.H8 

Anthropological study of the people better known as 
the Matabele, including a glance at past history and 
analysis of groupings, rules, and customs of the nation 
which still maintains its distinct character. 

1702. Kuper, Hilda. The Shona and Ndebele of 

Southern Rhodesia: The Shona, by Hilda 
Kuper; the Ndebele, by A. J. B. Hughes and 
J. van Velsen. London, International Afri¬ 
can Institute, 1954. 131 p. fold, map, 

tables. (Ethnographic survey of Africa. 
Southern Africa, pt. 4) DT955.K8 

For general note on this series, see no. 270. 

1703. Mitchell, James Clyde. An outline of the 

sociological background to African labour. 
Salisbury, Southern Rhodesia, Ensign Pub¬ 
lishers, 1961. 95 p. map. DT764.B2M5 

Series of articles on Bantu life and work, first pub¬ 
lished in the Chamber of Mines Journal (Salisbury), 
Dec. 1960-Sept. 1961. The accompanying map 
shows tribal distribution in the Federation. The au¬ 
thor, a social anthropologist, is Director of African 
Studies at the University College of Rhodesia and 
Nyasaland. His inaugural lecture as Vice-Chancellor 
in 1959 was on Tribalism and the Plural Society (Lon¬ 
don, Oxford University Press, 1960. 36 p.). 


263 





High Commission Territories 


1704. Barclays Bank (Dominion, Colonial and 

Overseas) Basutoland, Bechuanaland and 
Swaziland. London, 1962. 43 p. DLC 
Slight but useful economic background survey. 

1705. Dundas, Sir Charles C. F., and Hugh Ash¬ 

ton. Problem territories of southern Africa: 
Basutoland, Bechuanaland Protectorate, 
Swaziland. Cape Town, South African In¬ 
stitute of International Affairs, 1952. 79 p. 
(South Africa and the world series) 

DT782.D75 

Two colonial officers, Sir Charles Dundas, the former 
governor of Uganda, and Dr. Ashton, former District 
Commissioner in Bechuanaland and in 1952 a mem¬ 
ber of the Native Affairs Department of Southern Rho¬ 
desia, here presented succinctly the case for maintain¬ 
ing the High Commission territories under the Colonial 
Office rather than transferring their jurisdiction to 
South Africa. Sir Charles examined the history and 
politics of the three territories, Dr. Ashton factors of 
population, administration, native authorities and na¬ 
tive representation. 

1706. Gt. Brit. High Commissioner for Basutoland, 

the Bechuanaland Protectorate and Swazi¬ 
land. Basutoland, Bechuanaland Protectorate 
and Swaziland; report of an economic survey 
mission. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1960. 
555 p. fold, maps, tables. HC511.A4 1960 

Includes bibliographies. 

By a mission appointed by the High Commissioner in 
consultation with the International Bank for Recon¬ 
struction and Development, this is a significant docu¬ 
ment. The three countries are treated systematically, 
with chapters for each on political, administrative, and 
fiscal background, analysis of the economic situation 
in regard to its chief factors, then a set of technical 
papers and statistical appendixes. The conclusions and 
recommendations are given in a short summary that 
precedes each country section. 

1707. Gt. Brit. Office of Commonwealth Relations. 

Annual report on Basutoland. 1946+ Lon¬ 
don, H.M. Stationery Off. illus. map. (Co¬ 
lonial annual reports) 1959 ed. in 1961. 
113 p. DT781.A35 

1708. - Annual report on the Bechuanaland 

Protectorate. 1946+ London, H.M. Sta¬ 
tionery Off. map. (Colonial annual re¬ 
ports) 1959 ed., in 1961. 122 p. DT791.A55 


1709. - Annual report on Swaziland. 1946 + 

London, H.M. Stationery Off. map. (Co¬ 
lonial annual reports). 1960 ed. in 1961. 
107 p. DT971.A33 

Until December 1961 the annual reports of the 
three High Commission Territories were submitted to 
the Office of Commonwealth Relations by the High 
Commissioner, who was also High Commissioner of 
the Union of South Africa. After the Republic of 
South Africa withdrew from the Commonwealth, the 
office in South Africa was changed to that of Ambas¬ 
sador, responsible as High Commissioner of the Ter¬ 
ritories to the Colonial Office. The annual reports 
will henceforth be published by the Colonial Office. 
They are in systematic style, containing short sum¬ 
maries of the chief events of the past year, and hand¬ 
book and statistical information on the territories. 
They include reading lists citing official publications 
as well as unofficial writings. 

1710. - Basutoland, the Bechuanaland Pro¬ 

tectorate and Swaziland; history of discus¬ 
sions with the Union of South Africa, 1909- 
1939. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 1952. 
135 p. map. (Cmd. 8707) DT786.G72 

Historical review of the consistent and oft-repeated 
refusal of the United Kingdom to consider yielding its 
charge of the High Commission Territories for incor¬ 
poration in South Africa, “except with the full consent 
of the peoples concerned.” 

In March 1954 Dr. Malan introduced a motion in the South 
African House of Assembly that negotiations, dropped since 
1939, be resumed with Great Britain regarding transfer of the 
High Commission Territories. In April 1954 Sir Winston 
Churchill, then Prime Minister, expressed the British position 
to the House of Commons—that Britain was pledged not to 
transfer the Protectorates to South Africa until the inhabit¬ 
ants of the territories had been consulted and until the Par¬ 
liament of the United Kingdom had expressed its views. 
In 1956, at the Commonwealth Conference, the South Afri¬ 
can Ministers broached the subject again and received the 
same answer. Among papers on the question, the following 
deserve note: 

Greaves, Lionel B. The High Commission territories: 
Basutoland, the Bechuanaland Protectorate, and 
Swaziland. London, Edinburgh House Press, 1954. 
23 p. DT786.G75 

Missionary review of the 40-year debate between 
the U.K. and South Africa. 

Perham, Margery F., and Lionel Curtis. The Pro¬ 
tectorates of South Africa; the question of their trans¬ 
fer to the Union. London, Oxford University Press, 
1935. 119 p. DT770.P4 


264 






The U.K. case presented by Miss Perham, that of 
the Union by a colonial historian from the Transvaal. 

Tshekedi Khama. Bechuanaland and South Africa; 
with an introduction by Margery Perham. London, 
Africa Bureau, 1955. 20 p. illus. JQ2760.A3T8 
Brochure by the African leader, approving the Brit¬ 
ish refusal, but wanting more rights for his people. 

Royal Institute of International Affairs. In¬ 
formation Dept. The High Commission Territories 
and the Union of South Africa, rev. London, 1956. 
36 p. (Its memoranda) JQ1915.R6 1956 


1711. Hailey, William M. H., baron. Native ad¬ 
ministration in the British African territories. 
Pt. 5. The High Commission Territories: 
Basutoland, the Bechuanaland Protectorate 
and Swaziland. London, H.M. Stationery 
Off., 1953. 447 p. tables. JQ1890.H28, v. 5 
For comment, see no. 96. 

BASUTOLAND 


1712. Ashton, Edmund H. The Basuto. London, 

New York, Published for the International 
African Institute by the Oxford University 
Press, 1952. 355 p. plates, map. 

DT782.A8 

Originally presented as a doctoral thesis at the Uni¬ 
versity of Cape Town in 1939, this book was delayed 
by the war, and subsequently modified and extended 
to include results of additional field work—notably 
material gathered in 1949 having to do with the “rit¬ 
ual murders,” which is incorporated in the last chapter 
on magic and medicine. Dr. Ashton wrote for a gen¬ 
eral reading public, attempting “an all-round picture 
of the Basuto as they are to-day.” In studying the cul¬ 
ture he had the advantage of having been born and 
brought up in Basutoland and of speaking the lan¬ 
guage (Sesuto). He synthesized previous studies, 
of which he gives a full bibliography (p. 346-349), 
combining the conclusions of other writers with his 
own observations during considerable periods of life 
among the tribesmen. 

1713. Basutoland. Government Geologist. Report 

on the geology of Basutoland, by G. M. Stock- 
ley. Maseru, Published by the authority of 
the Basutoland Government, 1947. 114 p. 

illus., fold. map. QE327.B3A5 1947 

Reference to mineral deposits had been omitted in 
the Pirn report (below), and this reconnaissance 
geological survey was undertaken to repair the omis¬ 
sion in 1938-40, although the report, by a geol¬ 
ogist seconded from the Tanganyika Geological Serv¬ 
ice, was not published until after the war. General 


conclusions were that possibilities for economic devel¬ 
opment were strictly limited, the rumors of coal and 
diamonds inaccurate. 

1714. Douglas, A. J. A., and R. K. Tennant. Basu¬ 

toland agricultural survey, 1949-50. Maseru, 
1952. 115 p. illus., fold. maps. S471.B35D6 
This investigation, undertaken at the request of the 
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Na¬ 
tions as the Territorial contribution to the World 
Census of Agriculture, and welcomed by the Basuto¬ 
land Administration as a basis for agriculture develop¬ 
ment plans, was a sampling survey, carefully worked 
out with expert advice. Part 1 of the report (p. 1-71), 
is an analysis of design and execution, and has a set 
of appendixes, photographs emphasizing anti-erosion 
measures, methodological tables, etc. Part 2, p. 73- 
115, presents results, largely in statistical tables. 

1715. Duncan, Patrick. Sot ho laws and customs; a 

handbook based on decided cases in Basuto¬ 
land together with the laws of Lerotholi. 
Cape Town, Oxford University Press, 1960. 
169 p. DLC-LL 

Mr. Duncan, a South African who is known as a 
Liberal Party leader in the struggle against apartheid, 
had served as Judicial Commissioner in Basutoland 
from 1950-52. This study of customary law reflects 
his experience. Lerotholi was Paramount Chief of the 
Basuto from 1891-1905, and largely responsible for 
the establishment of a National Council for the Basuto. 

1716. Gt. Brit. Commission on Financial and Eco¬ 

nomic Position of Basutoland. Report. Jan¬ 
uary 1935. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1935. 225 p. tables, map. (Cmd. 4907) 
HC517.B3A5 1935 
The so-called Pirn Reports (see also under Bechu¬ 
analand and Swaziland) were caried out under a Com¬ 
mission appointed by the Secretary of State for Domin¬ 
ion Affairs, with Sir Alan W. Pirn as Commissioner. 
Their far from favorable findings and conclusions were 
briefly stated in a five-page aide-memoire, High Com¬ 
mission Territories in South Africa (Cmd. 4948), given 
to the Prime Minister of the Union, General Hertzog, 
in May 1935, in connection with the latter’s proposals 
for transfer of the territories to South African juris¬ 
diction. 

1717. Gt. Brit. Office of Commonwealth Relations. 

Basuto medicine murder; a report on the re¬ 
cent outbreak of “diretlo” murders in Basuto¬ 
land, by G. I. Jones. London, H.M. Sta¬ 
tionery Off., 1951. 104 p. 


265 






An anthropologist’s study of the case, much cited 
by the European advocates of “gradualism” in the 
advancement of Africans, of murders in which various 
Basuto leaders were implicated. A number of them 
were “educated,” a number were Christian. The pur¬ 
pose of the ritual murders was to obtain human in¬ 
gredients for witch doctor medicine. 

A moving novel, Blanket Boy, by Peter Lanham, pseudonym 
of G. J. L. Parker (New York, Crowell, 1953. 309 p.), is 
based on an orginal story by A. S. Mopeli-Paulus; the co¬ 
author is a Basuto chieftain, and the story is told in an ap¬ 
proximation of his language. It concerns a tribesman who 
passes through many adventures after he leaves his home 
for the city, and is finally involved in the ritual murders. 
Despite its melodramatic character, the tale is convincing. 

1718. Lagden, Sir Godfrey. The Basutos: the moun¬ 

taineers and their country; being a narrative 
of events relating to the tribe from its forma¬ 
tion early in the 19th century to the present 
day. London, Hutchinson, 1909. 2 v. illus., 
map. DT782.L2 

Long and informative political history from British 
sources by a former Resident Commissioner, which 
was for many years a standard work. 

Outlines of Basuto history are included with sketches of 
present-day conditions in a popular book by the South African 
journalist Eric Rosenthal, African Switzerland: Basutoland 
of Today (London, Gape Town, Hutchinson, 1949. 255 p. 
illus.). 

1719. Sheddick, Vernon G. J. Land tenure in 

Basutoland. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1954. 196 p. illus., fold. maps. (Colonial 
research studies, no. 13) JV33.G7A48, no. 13 
Under Colonial Social Science Research Council 
auspices, Dr. Sheddick conducted a full field survey 
of the historical and current position of land tenure 
in Basutoland, the Paramount Chief having assented 
on the understanding that no immediate changes 
would be made. The technical paper covered social 
aspects, practices in settlement, agriculture, and ani¬ 
mal husbandry, administrative and legal considera¬ 
tions. The conclusion analyzed land shortage in 
Basutoland, with suggestions as to remedies. The 
High Commission Administration cooperated with 
Dr. Sheddick in his investigations, but inserted at the 
end of the report their disapproval of certain of the 
conclusions which they felt to be adverse reflections 
on their work. 

1720. -- The Southern Sotho. London, Inter¬ 

national African Institute, 1953. 87 p. map. 

(Ethnographic survey of Africa. Southern 
Africa, pt. 2) DT786.S515 

See general note on the series, no. 270. 


1721. Tylden, G. The rise of the Basuto. Cape 

Town, Tuta, 1950. 270 p. illus., maps. 

DT782.T9 

Bibliography: p. 241-246. 

The most extensive modern history available of the 
Basuto nation and its welding together by the great 
chief Moshoeshoe (or Moshesh). The author has 
made use of many 19th-century journals and other 
sources, including the three volumes of Basutoland 
Records collected and published by George McC. 
Theal (Cape Town, 1883). 

Interest in the older records is being shown recently in 
the issuance of several items by the Library of the University 
of Gape Town in the Willem Hiddingh Reprint Series: e.g., 
no. 8, History of the Basutos of South Africa, by the Special 
Commissioner of the Cape Argus (Cape Town, Cape Argus 
Office, 1857. 143 p.), and no. 12, James C. Macgregor, 

Basuto Traditions; Being a Record of the Traditional His¬ 
tory of the more Important of the Tribes which Form the 
Basuto Nation of To-Day up to the Time of Their being 
Absorbed (Cape Town, 1905. 67 p.). 

BECHUANALAND 

1722. Benson, Mary. Tshekedi Khama. London, 

Faber & Faber, 1960. 318 p. illus. 

DT795.T75B4 

Full and admiring biography of the distinguished 
African statesman of the Bamangwato royal family, 
who acted as regent during the minority of his nephew 
Seretse and for the term of the latter’s exile after his 
marriage to an English girl. The book was reviewed 
by Colin Legum as “the finest biography of an African 
leader that has yet been written” ( International 
Affairs, v. 38, January 1962, p. 89). 

A biographical sketch relying heavily on quotations from 
Tshekedi’s own speeches was written shortly after his death 
by one of his countrymen, S. M. Gabatshwana: Tshekedi 
Khama of Bechuanaland; Great Statesman and Politician 
(Cape Town, Oxford University Press, 1961. 69 p.). A 

biography in more popular style about the father of Tshekedi, 
who became a Christian, resisted attacks of the Matabele 
and incursions of the Boers, and brought his kingdom under 
the protection of the British Empire, was written by the 
South African journalist Julian Mockford: Khama, King 
of the Bamangwato (London, J. Cape, 1931. 322 p.). In 
1950, after the exile of Chief Seretse, Mr. Mockford in¬ 
corporated this in another book, with additional chapters to 
give the later story of the dynasty: Seretse Khama and the 
Bamangwato (London, New York, Staples Press, 1950. 231 
p.). A more sensational account of the Seretse case was 
written in 1955, before the chief’s return to his country: John 
Redfern, Ruth and Seretse: A Very Disreputable Transac¬ 
tion (London, Gollancz, 1955. 224 p.). 


266 



1723. Bent, R. Alan R. Ten thousand men of Af¬ 

rica; the story of the Bechuanaland pioneers 
and gunners, 1941—46. London, Published 
for the Bechuanaland Govt, by H.M. Station¬ 
ery Off., 1952. 128 p. illus. 

DT766.99.B4B4 

The tribesmen of Bechuanaland and Basutoland 
volunteered on a proportionately large scale during 
the Second World War, and did notable service in 
many theatres. This official publication is the rela¬ 
tion for the Bechuanaland forces. 

A comparable pamphlet by Brian Gray, Basuto Soldiers 
in Hitler’s War, was published by the Basutoland Govern¬ 
ment (Maseru, 1953. 98 p.). 

1724. Brown, John Tom. Among the Bantu no¬ 

mads: a record of 40 years spent among the 
Bechuana, a numerous and famous branch of 
the central South African Bantu, with the 
first full description of their ancient customs, 
manners and beliefs. London, Seeley, Serv¬ 
ice, 1926. 272 p. illus., map. DT791.B7 

The writer was a missionary among the Bechuana 
from 1885 until 1924, dying the year before his book 
was published. The anthropologist A. R. Radcliffe- 
Brown, writing the preface, paid him tribute as one of 
those missionaries who have collected “by far the 
greatest part of the information about native life that 
we now possess.” 

1725. Debenham, Frank. Kalahari sand. London, 

Bell, 1953. 189 p. illus. DT995.K2D4 

Narrative of journeying in the Kalahari Desert of 
Bechuanaland and Southwest Africa, the home of the 
remaining tribes of Bushmen and Berg Damara. Pro¬ 
fessor Debenham described the strange natural scene 
and the ways and manners of the shy peoples, bringing 
in notes of past and present history together with his 
personal record of incidents. In the last chapter he 
made observations regarding water resources, the 
( study of which had occasioned his expedition. 

1726. Gt. Brit. Commission on Financial and Eco¬ 

nomic Position of Bechuanaland Protectorate. 
Report. March 1933. London, H.M. Sta¬ 
tionery Off., 1933. 194 p. tables, map. 

(Cmd. 4368) HG517.B4A5 1933 

Sir Alan W. Pirn, chairman. 

For note on the so-called Pirn Reports, see under 
Basutoland, no. 1716. 


1727. Mackenzie, Leonard A. Report on the Kala¬ 

hari expedition 1945. Being a further in¬ 
vestigation into the water resources of the 
Kalahari and their relationship to the cli¬ 
mate of South Africa. Pretoria, Govt. 
Printer, 1946. 35 p. fold. maps. 

GB1365.M3 

This expedition conducted under the Ministry of 
Lands and with participation of South African Mem¬ 
bers of Parliament was an attempt by hydrographic 
engineers to prove or disprove the much-discussed the¬ 
ory of Professor E. H. L. Schwarz, who in 1919 pub¬ 
lished a treatise, The Kalahari, or Thirstland Re¬ 
demption (Oxford University Press, 1920), in which 
he suggested that restoration of the Kalahari lakes 
would check erosion and bring back fertility to the 
desiccated region. An earlier reconnaissance made 
in 1925 had reached the same conclusions, that the 
“Schwarz Scheme” was incapable of fulfillment, and 
that development of the Kalahari water resources 
would have little or no effect on the climate. The only 
solutions the investigators saw would be in extensive 
and very costly irrigation and afforestation projects, 
possibilities for which they analyzed. The report is 
accompanied by technical photographs and sketch 
maps in folded page spreads. 

1728. Schapera, Isaac. The ethnic composition of 

the Tswana tribes. London, London School 
of Economics and Political Science, 1952. 
133 p. (Monographs on social anthropology, 
11) DT797.S33 

1729. - Handbook of Tswana law and custom. 

2d ed. London, Published for the Interna¬ 
tional African Institute by Oxford University 
Press, 1955. 328 p. map. geneal. tables. 

DLG-LL 

1730. - Married life in an African tribe [the 

Bakgatla] London, Faber & Faber, 1940. 
364 p. GN478.S35 1940 

1731. - Migrant labour and tribal life, a study 

of conditions in the Bechuanaland Protector¬ 
ate. London, New York, Oxford University 
Press, 1947. 248 p. map. HD5856.B4S3 

1732. - Native land tenure in the Bechuana¬ 

land Protectorate. Lovedale, South Africa, 
Lovedale Press, 1943. 283 p. illus., maps. 

HD988.B4S35 


267 









1733. - The Tswana. London, International 

African Institute, 1953. 80 p. map. 

(Ethnographic survey of Africa. Southern 
Africa, pt. 3) DT797.S37 

Of the many reports and papers on the Tswana, the 
Bakgatla, and other tribes, and ethnographical studies 
of the Bechuanaland Protectorate by Professor 
Schapera, the books cited above are among the most 
substantial. Longer lists of his writings will be found 
in his Select Bibliography of Native Life and Problems 
(no. 1766) and in the reading list in the British Annual 
Report (no. 1708). 

1734. Sillery, A. The Bechuanaland Protectorate. 

Cape Town, New York, Oxford University 
Press, 1952. 236 p. maps, tables. 

DT791.S5 

Bibliography: p. 219-222. 

1735. - Sechele; the story of an African chief. 

Oxford, G. Ronald, 1954. 224 p. illus. 

DT795.S35S5 

The author, who retired in 1950 after 4 years as 
Resident Commissioner in Bechuanaland, says he 
wrote his first book because he had been unable to 
find a full account of the history of the Protectorate in 
a single work. He had made a careful study of many 
sources. His somewhat pedestrian text is in three 
parts, first an overall historical sketch from the begin¬ 
ning of the 19th century through the Second World 
War, then the history, “part traditional and part 
factual,” of the separate tribes. Part 3 describes the 
present state of the Protectorate. The second work, 
Sechele , is the life story of the Kwena chief whose 80 
years spanned the chief events of this history, in which 
he had played a not inconspicuous part. (In the 
earlier volume, Mr. Sillery gave the chiefs name as 
Setshele.) 

1736. Smith, Edwin W. Great lion of Bechuana¬ 

land; the life and times of Roger Price, mis¬ 
sionary. London, Published for the London 
Missionary Society by Independent Press, 
1957. 444 p. illus., maps. BV3625.B5536 

Life of the Welsh missionary who pioneered in 
Bechuanaland, arriving at Moffat’s Kuruman station 
in 1858. The title is from the name given Price by the 
Africans, “first for his shaggy beard but chiefly for 
his courage and strength of character.” Dr. Smith 
has made liberal use of extracts from the primary 
sources—narratives, journals, and diaries of John 


Campbell, Andrew Smith, Livingstone, Mackenzie, 
Moffat, and others. The book is essentially a history 
of the opening of the country to European influence. 

1737. Thomas, Elizabeth Marshall. The harm¬ 

less people. New York, Knopf, 1959. 266 p. 

illus. DT764.B8T4 

Narrative of an expedition to study the Bushmen in 
the Kalahari desert in Bechuanaland and the Nyae 
Nyae desert in South West Africa. The writer was 
accompanying her mother, an anthropologist, and her 
brother, who was making documentary films of the 
few groups of Bushmen whom they were able to find 
and to spend time with. Although Mrs. Thomas was 
not herself trained in ethnography, her detailed ac¬ 
count of Bushman life is a valued addition to the litera¬ 
ture on these elusive primitive hunters, as well as hav¬ 
ing been on American bestseller lists. 

Much of available knowledge regarding the Bushmen is 
brought together by Dr. Schapera in his Khoisan Peoples 
(no. 1843). Of the older studies, classic works were by 
Dr. Wilhelm Bleek, a German philologist who came to Cape 
Town in the 1850’s and began the study of Bushmen lan¬ 
guages, and compiled a dictionary, which was completed 
by his daughter, Dorothea, and Miss L. C. Lloyd. His 
Specimens of Bushman Folklore, edited by Miss Lloyd, was 
published with original Bushman text and accompanying 
English translation (London, G. Allen, 1911. 468 p.). The 

Bushman Dictionary, by Dorothea F. Bleek, was brought out 
after her death by the American Oriental Society (New 
Haven, 1956. 773 p. American Oriental Series, v. 41). 

1738. Van der Post, Laurens. The lost world of 

the Kalahari. New York, Morrow, 1958. 
279 p. illus. DT995.K2V3 

1739. —- The heart of the hunter. New York, 

Morrow, 1961. 268 p. 

DT764.B8V3 1961 

The high literary quality of Colonel Van der Post’s 
writing, signally recognized in his book on Nyasaland, 
Venture to the Interior (no. 1674), is maintained in 
these two books concerning an expedition into the 
Kalahari Desert, mostly in Bechuanaland, to look for, 
film, and study the few remaining Bushmen. The 
first is an account of the trip; the second concludes 
the journey and contains the author’s somewhat mys¬ 
tic interpretation of the Bushman’s soul (Van der 
Post was a friend and follower of C. G. Jung, to whom 
the book is dedicated), through Bushman stories, for 
the telling of which he draws on what he had heard 
in the desert, on childhood memories, and on the col¬ 
lection of Bushman folklore by Bleek. 


268 





SWAZILAND 

1740. Cowen, Denis V. Swaziland; report on con¬ 

stitutional reform. Made on behalf of the 
Swaziland Progressive Party and the Euraf- 
rican [Colored] Welfare Association. [ ? ] 
Swaziland Progressive Party, 1961. 34 p. 

DLC 

Not available for examination. The author, an 
eminent South African constitutional lawyer, had been 
asked to help frame a constitution for Swaziland. His 
suggestions were rejected by the Paramount Chief and 
the Swazi National Council. 

1741. Gt. Brit. Commission on Financial and Eco¬ 

nomic Situation of Swaziland. Report, Jan¬ 
uary 1932. London, H.M. Stationery Off., 
1932. 148 p. tables, map. (Cmd. 4114) 

HC517.S9A5 1932 

Sir Alan W. Pim, chairman. 

For note on the so-called Pim Reports, see under 
Basutoland, no. 1716. 

1742. Kuper, Hilda. An African aristocracy; rank 

among the Swazi. London, New York, Pub¬ 
lished for the International African Institute 
by Oxford University Press, 1947. 251 p. 

plates, map. GN495.5.K8 

1743. - The uniform of colour; a study of 

white-black relationships in Swaziland. 
Johannesburg, Witwatersrand University 
Press, 1947. 160 p. 32 p. of plates. 

DT971.K8 

1744 . - The Swazi. London, International 

African Institute, 1952. 89 p. map. (Eth¬ 
nographic survey of Africa. Southern Africa, 
pt. 1) DT971.K79 

At the time of publication of the first two studies of 
the people with whom Dr. Kuper had spent 2 years of 
ethnographical fieldwork, she had been lecturer in 
social anthropology at the University of the Witwaters¬ 
rand. (She has since been on the staff of the Uni¬ 
versity of Natal.) African Aristocracy is an account 
of a well-organized society with hierarchy of rank based 
on birth, evolved by military clans who had taken over 
and settled a country isolated by mountains. The 
Uniform of Colour is a study of the social evolution 
of the Swazi under European contact. In the volume 
for the Ethnographic Survey (see general note on 
series, no. 270), she has brought together available 
anthropological data, and includes appendixes of 
genealogy of Swazi kings and list of chiefs. 


1745. Marwick, Brian A. The Swazi; an ethnologi¬ 

cal account of the natives of the Swaziland 
Protectorate. Cambridge, University Press, 
1940. 320 p. DT971.M3 

The writer of this study of Swazi culture was not an 
anthropologist by profession, but an administrator in 
the Protectorate. His interest was focused on the vio¬ 
lence of the changes resulting from the culture con¬ 
tact and the breakup in tribal life and economy that 
follows when practically all healthy men leave 
Swaziland to work in the mines. 

1746. Pott, Douglas. Swaziland: a general survey. 

Johannesburg, South African Institute of 
Race Relations, 1955. 44 p. map. 

DT971.P6 

This pamphlet was the revision of an article that 
had appeared in the Race Relations Journal of 1951 
(v. 18, no. 2). It was issued as the first of a series of 
analyses of the High Commission Territories in the 
light of South African racial policy. A second pam¬ 
phlet in 1957 was by Tshekedi Khama: Bechuanaland, 
a General Survey (Johannesburg. 36 p.). 

SOUTH WEST AFRICA 
Bibliography 

1747. Roukens de Lange, E. J., comp. South West 

Africa, 1946-1960; a selective bibliography. 
Cape Town, University of Cape Town, 
School of Librarianship, 1961. 51 p. 

Z3771.R6 

This compilation of 332 references to books, pam¬ 
phlets, and substantial periodical articles relating in 
whole or major part to South West Africa comple¬ 
ments an earlier publication of the University of Cape 
Town School of Librarianship, Floretta J. Welch’s 
South-West Africa; A Bibliography (Cape Town, 
1946. 33 1.), which covered comparable literature 

from 1919 to 1946. 


1748. Ballinger, Ronald B. South-West Africa; 

the case against the Union. Johannesburg, 
South African Institute of Race Relations, 
1961. 58 p. DLC 

1749. Dundas, Sir Charles. South-West Africa, 

the factual background. Cape Town, South 
African Institute of International Affairs, 
1946. 52 p. (South Africa and the world 
series) 

Writing on the issue of transfer of the South West 
Africa mandate to the United Nations, which was to 


269 







come up at the first General Assembly of U.N. (and 
was not accepted by the administering power, South 
Africa), the former Governor of Uganda presented a 
brief survey of the history, politics, and economic con¬ 
ditions and prospects of the territory, with analysis 
of the alternatives of the mandate question. Much of 
his paper is based on reports, especially the so-called 
van Zyl Commission Report of 1936. 

1750. Goldblatt, Isidor. The mandated territory 

of South West Africa in relation to the United 

Nations. Cape Town, C. Struik, 1961. 67 p. 

JX1977.2.A45G6 

Essay by a Windhoek lawyer, examining objectively 
the question of South West Africa from 1919, when 
it was made a C-Mandate under the League of Na¬ 
tions under the trusteeship of South Africa. He re¬ 
views South Africa’s de facto annexation of the terri¬ 
tory and refusal to submit reports to the Trusteeship 
Council, as well as United Nations action through the 
October-November session of 1949. 

1751. Green, Lawrence G. Lords of the last fron¬ 

tier; the story of South West Africa and its 

people of all races. London, New York, S. 

Paul, 1953. 237 p. DT703.G734 

By a popular and prolific South African travel 
writer, this anecdotal book tells about many aspects of 
South West Africa, its German and post-German ex¬ 
plorers and rulers, its strange tribes, its coastal desert, 
plains, mountains with their Bushman rock engrav¬ 
ings, its wild life, its tradition of wars, hunters, heroes, 
and villains. 

Scenes of country and life in South West Africa have 
been photographed in an album from the Atlantis-Verlag 
of Zurich, Erna and Helmut Blenck’s Siidwest Afrika (1958. 
52 p. 124 plates). Some of the full-page pictures are in 
color. There are brief introductory notes in English and 
Afrikaans, and a travel sketch in German. 

1752. Hintrager, Oscar. Sudwestafrika in der 

deutschen Zeit. M fine hen, R. Oldenbourg, 
1955. 261 p. DT711.H5 

Popular narrative account of the German period in 
South West Africa, told largely in chapters on individ¬ 
ual leaders. Includes chronology, 1841-1915, a long 
bibliography (p. 240-255), an index of personal and 
place names. 

1753. Legendre, Sidney J. Okovango, desert river. 

New York, J. Messner, 1939. 300 p. 

DT703.L4 

This is the account of an expedition into the deserts 
of South West Africa (the Kalahari region) made by 
the author for the Academy of Natural Sciences of 


Philadelphia. His narrative is on a personal tone, 
including glimpses of history and of the ways of life 
of the sparse remaining tribes, interspersed with ad¬ 
ventures with lions, and other interesting fauna and 
flora. 

1754. Lowenstein, Allard K. Brutal mandate; a 

journey to South West Africa. Foreword by 

Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt. New York, 
Macmillan, 1962. 257 p. DT714.L6 

The personal report of an American who with two 
companions managed to go into the “closed” area of 
South West Africa and obtain evidence of conditions 
and tape recordings of appeals from leaders of the 
Herero, Nama, and other tribes to the United Nations. 
In October 1959 they presented the testimony before 
the Fourth Committee of U.N., together with two 
Africans from the territory, and the Rev. Michael 
Scott, who made the formal presentation for the peti¬ 
tioners. The book is addressed to the lay reader. 

1755. The Native tribes of South West Africa. Cape 

Town, Cape Times, 1928. 211 p. Plates. 

GN656.N3 

Foreword signed: H. P. Smit, Secretary for South West 
Africa. Contains bibliographies. 

Volume prepared for submission to the League of 
Nations as a sketch of the tribes in the territory ad¬ 
ministered by South Africa as a C-mandate. The five 
main tribal divisions are briefly sketched as to history, 
customs, beliefs, and manners. Mr. C. H. L. Hahn, 
representative of the Administration in Ovamboland, 
wrote the first essay on the Ovambo. The Bushmen 
were analyzed by Dr. L. Fourie, Medical Officer for 
South West Africa, and the Berg Damara, the Nama, 
a branch of the Hottentots, and the Herero by Dr. 
Heinrich Vedder, a missionary who had lived among 
and was known as an authority on this tribe. Each 
section is followed by bibliography. 

The standard anthropological work on Bushmen and Hot¬ 
tentots of Cape Province and Bechuanaland as well as South 
West Africa, is Dr. Isaac Schapera’s The Khoisan Peoples of 
South Africa (see no. 1843). 

See also studies of the Bushmen of the Kalahari Desert 
in section on Bechuanaland. 

1756. Scott, Michael. The orphans’ heritage; the 

story of the South West African mandate. 

London, Africa Bureau, 1958. 24 p. 

JQ3543 1958 S3 

1757. - A time to speak. Garden City, N.Y. 

Doubleday, 1958. 358 p. DT779.8.S35A3 

The Rev. Michael Scott became known interna¬ 
tionally as spokesman before the United Nations for 


270 



the native peoples of South West Africa, but he has 
championed the African cause also in South Africa, 
the High Commission territories, and the Federation 
of Rhodesia and Nyasaland. His pamphlet explains 
the case for bringing South West Africa under the 
trusteeship system of U.N. His book is autobiograph¬ 
ical, and concerned with experiences in all of South¬ 
ern Africa. 

A vigorous account of Mr. Scott’s appeal to U.N. for the 
Herero and Nama in 1947 and his hearing before the Fourth 
(Trusteeship) Committee in 1949 was written by Freda 
Troup: In Face of Fear: Michael Scott’s Challenge to South 
Africa (London, Faber & Faber, 1950. 227 p.) Mr. Scott’s 

most recent appearance before the Fourth Committee as a 
petitioner for Southern Rhodesia’s leading African party, 
ZAPU (Zimbabwe African People’s Union) on Oct. 3-4, 
1962, is recorded in an article on “Southern Rhodesia at 
the United Nations,” by William A. Payne in Africa Report , 
Nov. 1962. 

1758. Tindall, Joseph. The Journal of Joseph Tin¬ 

dall, missionary in South West Africa, 1839— 
55. Edited with introd., footnotes and sketch- 
map by B. A. Tindall. Cape Town, Van 
Riebeeck Society, 1959. 221 p. illus., 
ports., map. (V.R.S. 40) DT821.V3, no. 40 

1759. United Nations. General Assembly. Com¬ 

mittee on South West Africa. Report. lst + 
New York, 1954+ Issued as Supplements to 
the Official Records of the General Assembly 
(GAOR). DT701.V52 

After fruitless discussions of the question of South 
West Africa, both in the Trusteeship Council and 


before the General Assembly from 1946 on, this seven- 
member Committee was established in 1953 to study 
the question of the area considered by U.N. a trustee¬ 
ship, but by South Africa a territory under its sole 
administration, “until such time as an agreement is 
reached . . .” Year after year the reports present 
petitions and recommendations including the request 
that the case be referred to the International Court. 
For extended summaries of discussions and resolu¬ 
tions relating to South West Africa in the Fourth 
(Trusteeship) Committee and the General Assembly 
of U.N., see the annual volumes of the United Nations 
Year Book. 

1760. Vedder, Heinrich. South-West Africa in early 
times; being the story of South-West Africa 
up to the date of Maharero’s death in 1890; 
translated and edited by Cyril G. Hall. Lon¬ 
don, Oxford University Press, 1938. 525 p. 

DT711.V42 1938 
A standard work on history and ethnology of South 
West Africa. Maharero was the chief whose death 
closes the narrative of the resistance of the warlike and 
almost exterminated Herero tribe against the German 
colonists who in 1884 had taken possession of the 
country which the Hereros in their turn had won from 
the primitive Bushmen and Hottentots. 

A two-volume ethnological study. Die Bergdama, by Dr. 
Vedder, was published in German in 1923 (Hamburg, L. 
Friederichsen. Hamburgische Universitat. Abhandlungen 
aus dem Gebiet der Auslands-Kunde. Bd. 11. Reihe B. 
Volkerkunde, Kulturgeschichte und Sprachen, Bd. 7). 


271 


SOUTH AFRICA 


Note: The Republic of South Africa, with its three cen¬ 
turies of white settlement and nearly 20 percent European 
population, is, regarding its literature, more akin to Western 
nations than to the rest of Africa. The body of writing in 
English and Afrikaans is very large, and for many years there 
have been available bibliographical tools and library guides 
on the pattern of those of other industrialized countries. Con¬ 
sequently our treatment of South Africa is unlike that for 
other African countries. The titles here chosen to illustrate 
certain fields of study with particular reference to the African 
population are ones that stand out as landmarks in the long 
lists of writing on South Africa. The bibliographies first 
described will lead the student to a wealth of sources that we 
feel make further references here unnecessary. In the same 
sense, we limit our annotations to the most needed explana¬ 
tion, chiefly with regard to bibliography. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1761. Africana nova; a quarterly bibliography of books 

currently published in and about the Union 
of South Africa, v. 1, no. 1+ Mar. 1958 + 
Cape Town, South African Public Library, 
quarterly. Z3603.A65 

“Based on the accessions in the Africana Department, South 
African Public Library (including material received by legal 
deposit). 9 ’ 

A national bibliographical serial which supersedes 
a classified bibliography carried from 1946-57 in the 
Quarterly Bulletin of the South African Public Library. 
It includes official publications separately listed. 

Another national bibliography, SANB. Suid-Ajrikaanse 
Nazionale Bibliografie. South African National Bibliography , 
was initiated by the State Library in Pretoria with a volume 
covering the year 1959, published in 1960, as an outgrowth 
of monthly lists of material received by the Library on legal 
deposit. It is somewhat more comprehensive in coverage 
than Africana Nova. 

1762. Cape Town. University of Cape Town. 

School of Librarianship. Bibliographical 
series. 1945 + . 

Bibliographies prepared as theses by the students on 
special subjects relating to South Africa, issued in 
stenciled form and containing a minimum of 150 en¬ 
tries. On many subjects they are the only bibliog¬ 
raphies available. A complete list of titles is availa¬ 


ble from the School. The following are typical 
examples: 

Kiersen, S. English and Afrikaans novels on South 
African history; a bibliography. 1958. 47 p. 

Saul, G. D. South African periodical publications, 
1800-1875. 1949. 210 entries. 

Towert, A. M. F. Constitutional development in 
South Africa, 1946-1959; a bibliography. 1959. 
36 p. 

Ushpol, Rowse. A select bibliography of South Afri¬ 
can autobiographies. 1958. 48 p. 

Among other publications of the School of Librarianship 
is a Booklist Series which includes the useful annotated 
Guide to South African Reference Books by Reuben Musiker 
(2d ed., 1958. 43 p.). A Varia Series has also been begun 
with a Preliminary Finding-List of Southern African Pam¬ 
phlets in the University of Cape Town Library, compiled 
byE.S. Roberts (1959. 203 p.). 

1763. Index to South African periodicals, v. 1 + 

1940+ Johannesburg. 1941+ annual. 

AI3.I65 

Issued by the South African Library Association 
from 1940-42, since then by the Johannesburg Public 
Library. Format is a fat mimeographed folio volume. 
Vol. 20, 1960 was published in mid-1961 (413 p.). 

1764. Mendelssohn, Sidney. Mendelssohn’s South 

African bibliography; being the catalogue 
raisonne of the Mendelssohn Library of 
works relating to South Africa . . . Together 
with notices of a large number of important 
works not as yet included in the collection 
... a bibliography of South African periodi¬ 
cal literature, and of articles on South Afri¬ 
can subjects in periodical literature. . . . 
Also a complete list of the British parlia¬ 
mentary blue-books on South Africa, a car¬ 
tography of South Africa, etc. London, K. 
Paul, Trench, Trubner, 1910. 2 v. 

Z3518.M4 

Reprint. Boston, Canner, 1957. 2 v. 

1765. - Annual list of Africana received (in 

the Mendelssohn Library) no. 1-9; 1938— 
1946. Cape Town, Published by the Union 
of South Africa, Library of Parliament, 
1938-48. 


272 



1766. Schapera, Isaac, ed. Select bibliography of 

South African native life and problems. 
Compiled for the Inter-University Commit¬ 
tee for African Studies under the direction of 
I. Schapera. London, Oxford University 
Press, 1941. xii, 249 p. Z5113.S3. 

Supplements 1—2. Cape Town, University of Cape 
Town. School of Librarianship, 1950-58. 4 pts. in 
2 v. 

1767. South African Public Library. Quarterly 

bulletin. Kwartaalblad. v. 1 + Sept. 
1946+ Cape Town, illus. Z965.S767 

Journal carrying news notes and articles of library 
interest, and a long bibliographical section. This 
comprised a national bibliography until 1958, when 
it was replaced by the separate serial, Africana Nova. 
The section now carries lists of government publica¬ 
tions and supplements to three bibliographies previ¬ 
ously published in the Library’s series of Grey Bibli¬ 
ographies: Handlist of South African Periodicals 
(1951; edited by C. D. Saul. 54 p.), Classified List 
of South African Annual Publications (1951), as well 
as the general list for Africa South of the Sahara, 
Bibliography of African Bibliographies. 

1768. Suid-Afrikaanse katalogus van boeke. South 

African catalogue of books. 4th complete 
edition; books published 1900-1950. Editor, 
N. S. Coetzee. Johannesburg, 195- 2 v. 
Mimeographed. Z3601.S8 

Supplemented by monthly issues and annual cumu¬ 
lation. 

GENERAL 

1769. Africa south in exile (formerly Africa south). 

Cape Town, London, Oct./Dec. 1956-Apr./ 
June 1961. quarterly. DT751.A28 

A magazine of broad general coverage regarding 
life in South Africa, edited by Ronald Segal. The 
first three volumes, 1956-59, were published in Cape 
Town with the title, Africa South. It was then 
banned, but started again by Mr. Segal in London, 
with the new title. After the third issue of Vol. 5 it 
was discontinued. 

1770. Cole, Monica M. South Africa. New York , 

Dutton, 1961. xxx, 696 p. illus., maps, 
diagrs. DT733.C6 1961a 

Includes bibliographies. 

Contents.—Physical Backgrounds.—The Occupation of 
Southern Africa.—Water Supply and Irrigation—Agriculture, 
Forestry, and Fishing.—Mineral Resources and Exploita¬ 


tion.—Power Resources and Manufacturing Industries.— 
Communications and Trade.—The Bantu Economy and the 
Bantu Territories.—The Major Regions.—The Population 
and the Future. 

1771. Colvin, Ian Duncan. Cape of adventure: 

being strange and notable discoveries, perils, 
shipwrecks, battles upon sea and land, with 
pleasant and interesting observations upon 
the country and the natives of the Cape of 
Good Hope; extracted from the writings of 
early travellers. London, Jack, 1921. 459 p. 
illus. DT823.C7 

1772. Millin, Sarah Gertrude. The people of 

South Africa. New York, Knopf, 1954. 
337 p. DT766.M48 1954 

Based on the author’s The South Africans 3 which 
first appeared in 1926. 

1773. Rosenthal, Eric, comp. Encyclopaedia of 

Southern Africa. London and New York, F. 
Warne, 1961. 600 p. illus., part col. 

DT752.R59. 

Compendium of information, with almost 5,000 
items in alphabetical arrangement. 

1774. South Africa. Bureau of Census and Sta¬ 

tistics. Official yearbook of the Republic of 
South Africa and of Basutoland , Bechuana- 
land Protectorate and Swaziland. Pretoria, 
Govt. Printer. DT752.A3 

Latest ed. in 1962 is that of 1960, with title. Official Year¬ 
book of the Union of South Africa (713 p. maps, tables). 

1775. Stevenson-Hamilton, James. Wild life in 

South Africa. London, Cassell, 1947. 364 p. 
maps. QL337.S65S8 

1776. Talbot, A.M., and W. J. Talbot. Atlas of the 

Union of South Africa; prepared in collabo¬ 
ration with the Trigonometrical Survey 
Office, and under the aegis of the National 
Council for Social Research. Pretoria, Govt. 
Printer, 1960. lxiv, 178 p. maps (part 
col.) diagrs., tables. G2561.G1T3 1960 

English and Afrikaans; added t.p. in Afrikaans. 

1777. Wellington, John H. Southern Africa; a 

geographical study. Cambridge, University 
Press, 1955. 2 v. illus., maps, tables. 

DT732.W4 

Contents.—v. 1. Physical geography (528 p.)—v. 2. 
Economic and human geography (283 p.). 


273 


1778. Who’s who of southern Africa (incorporating 

South Africa who’s who and the Who’s who 
of the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasa¬ 
land, Central and East Africa). 1st ed. 
1907+ Johannesburg, Wootton & Gibson, 
irreg. illus., ports. DT752.S5 

Formerly published by Kenneth Donaldson, with 
title. South African Who’s Who; title changed with 
43d edition, 1959. 1962 edition, 1084 p. (the last 

220 pages also separately numbered for Rhodesia and 
Nyasaland). 

1779. Year book & guide to Southern Africa: Re¬ 

public of South Africa, Federation of Rho¬ 
desia and Nyasaland, South West Africa, etc. 
With many colored route maps, town plans 
and two large folding maps. 1st ed. + 
1893+ London, R. Hale, annual. 

DT752.Y4 

Edited by A. Gordon-Brown for the Union-Castle 
Mail Steamship Co. 1962 ed. has lii, 736 pages of 
text, 118 pages of advertising. The introductory pages 
include indexes of geographical names, subjects, and 
advertisements. 

HISTORY 

(including Archaeology) 

1780. Agar-Hamilton, James A. I. The native 

policy of the voortrekkers, an essay in the 
history of the interior of South Africa, 1836- 
1858. Cape Town, M. Miller, 1928. 228 p. 

DT731.A35 

1781. -. The road to the north: South Africa, 

1852-1886. London, New York, Longmans, 
Green, 1937. 458 p. DT775.A35 

1782. Axelson, Eric V., ed. South African explor¬ 

ers; selected and introduced by Eric Axelson. 
London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1954. xxv, 346 p. fold. map. (The 
World’s classics, 538) DT731.A79 

Dr. Axelson’s other works, concerned chiefly with 
Portuguese East Africa, are noted under Mozambique. 

1783. Breuil, Henri. The rock paintings of south¬ 

ern Africa. [With the collaboration of Mary 
Boyle and R. E. Scherz.] London, Pub¬ 
lished by the Trianon Press for the Abbe 
Breuil Trust, 1955-1959. [3] v. illus., col. 
plates, map. GN799.P4B65 


Contents.—v. 1. The white lady of the Brandberg .—v. 2. 
Philipp Cave. —v. 3. The Tsiasab Ravine and other Brand¬ 
berg sites. 

1784. Clark, John Desmond. The prehistory of 

southern Africa. Harmondsworth, Middle¬ 
sex, Penguin Books, 1959. 341 p. (Pelican 

books, A458) GN865.S5C5 

1785. De Kiewiet, Cornelius W. A history of 

South Africa, social & economic. Oxford, 
The Clarendon Press, 1941. xii, 292 p. 
diagr. HC517.S7D4 

1786. -. The imperial factor in South Africa; 

a study in politics and economics. Cam¬ 
bridge [Eng.] The University Press, 1937. 
341 p. DT775.D4 

1787. Hancock, Sir W. Keith. Smuts: the sanguine 

years, 1870-1919. Cambridge [Eng.] The 
University Press, 1962. 619 p. 

DT779.8.S6H28 

The first volume of a “massive” biography of the 
great South African statesman who, “the hero of his 
people in the Anglo-Boer War . . . is now looked 
upon by many of their descendants as little better than 
a traitor.” The lead review article in the London 
Times Literary Supplement of Nov. 2, 1962, is devoted 
to this work. 

1788. Hofmeyr, Jan Hendrick. South Africa. 2d 

rev. [and reset] ed. by J. P. Cope. London, 
Benn, 1952. 253 p. illus. (Nations of the 
modern world) DT732.H6 1952 

1789. Keppel-Jones, Arthur. South Africa; a short 

history. New York, Hillary House. 3d rev. 
ed. London, Hutchinson University Library, 
1962. 232 p. (Commonwealth history) 

DT766.K4 1962 

Includes bibliography. 

1790. - When Smuts goes; a history of South 

Africa from 1952 to 2010, first published in 
2015. London, V. Gollancz, 1947. 232 p. 

DT779.7.K46 1947 

1791. Kruger, Rayne. Goodbye Dolly Gray, the 

story of the Boer war. London, Cassell, 1960. 
507 p. illus. American edition, Philadelphia, 
J. B. Lippincott. DT930.K8 

1792. Marais, Johannes S. The fall of Kruger’s 

Republic. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1961. 
345 p. DT929.M3 

Includes bibliography. 


274 





1793. Millin, Sarah Gertrude. General Smuts. 

Boston, Little, Brown, 1936. 2 v. 

DT779.8.S6M5 

Includes bibliographies and reference notes. 

1794. Reitz, Deneys. Commando; a Boer journal 

of the Boer war, with a preface by General 
J. C. Smuts. New York, C. Boni, 1930. 
313 p. (Paper books) DT932.R4 1930 

1795. Riebeeck, Jan van, 1619-1677. Journal; 

edited and with an introd. and footnotes by 
H. B. Thom. [Translated from the original 
Dutch by W. P. L. van Zyl; translation rev. 
by the editor with the assistance of Victor de 
Kock and others] Cape Town, Published by 
A. A. Balkema for the Van Riebeeck Society, 
1952+ illus., maps, facsims. DT843.R513 
Contents.—v. 1. 1651-1655. 

The Van Riebeeck Society, named for the first Dutch 
commander on the Cape, has issued its Publications 
since 1918. The series of substantial volumes repro¬ 
duce manuscript records. No. 1,1918, was Nederland- 
sche Oost-Indische Compagnie. The reports of Cha- 
vannes and his council, and of Van Imhoff, on the 
Cape. No. 40, 1959, was The Journal of Joseph Tin¬ 
dall (see under South West Africa, no. 1758). 

1796. Theal, George McCall. Ethnography and 

condition of South Africa before A.D. 1505; 
being a description of the inhabitants of the 
country south of the Zambesi and Kunene 
rivers in A.D. 1505, together with all that can 
be learned from ancient books and modem re¬ 
search of the condition of South Africa from 
the earliest time until its discovery by Euro¬ 
peans. 2d ed. in the present form (illus¬ 
trated), enl. and improved. London, G. 
Allen & Unwin, 1919. xx, 466 p. illus. 

DT763.T5 1919 

1797. - History of Africa south of the Zambesi 

from the settlement of the Portuguese at So- 
fala in September 1505 to the conquest of the 
Cape Colony by the British in September 
1795. 3d ed., carefully rev. and enl. London, 
G. Allen & Unwin [1916-22] 3 v. plates, 
maps (part fold.) DT766.T384 

Volumes 2 and 3 have title: History and Ethnography of 
Africa South of the Zambesi . . . 

Manuscript records of the colony: v. 3, p. 411-418. 

1798. - History of South Africa, from 1795 to 

1872 . . . with 15 maps and charts . . . Lon¬ 
don, G. Allen & Unwin, 1915-16. 3 v. maps 
(part fold.) DT766.T375 


1799. - History of South Africa from 1873 to 

1884; 12 eventful years. London, G. Allen & 
Unwin, 1919. 2 v. DT766.T377 

1800. Thompson, Leonard M. The unification of 

South Africa, 1902-1910. Oxford, Claren¬ 
don Press, 1960. 549 p. map. DT779.T5 
Bibliography: p.513-527. 

1801. V ulliamy, Colwyn E. Outlanders, a study of 

imperial expansion in South Africa, 1877— 
1902. London, J. Cape, 1938. 380 p. maps. 

DT775.V8 

Bibliography: p. 365-372. 

1802. Walker, Eric Anderson. The great trek. 

London, A. & C. Black, 1934. 388 p. 3 maps 
(2 fold.) (The pioneer histories, edited by 
V. T. Harlow and J. A. Williamson) 

DT773.W3 

1803. - A history of southern Africa. 3d ed. 

London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1957. 
xxiv, 973 p. maps. DT732.W3 1957 
Previous editions published under title: A History 
of South Africa. 

Bibliography: p. 925-945. 

politics and race relations 

1804. Brookes, Edgar H., and J. B. Macaulay. 

Civil liberty in South Africa. Cape Town, 
New York, Oxford University Press, 1958. 
175 p. JC599.A4B7 

1805. Calpin, George H. There are no South Afri¬ 

cans. London, New York, T. Nelson, 1941. 
412 p. DT779.6.C34 

1806. Carter, Gwendolen M. The politics of in¬ 

equality; South Africa since 1948. New York, 
F. A. Praeger, 1958. 535 p. maps, diagrs. 
(Books that matter) DT779.7.C3 

Bibliography: p.491-518. 

1807. De Kiewiet, Cornelius W. The anatomy of 

South African misery. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1956. 88 p. (The 
Whidden lectures, 1956) DT763.D4 

1808. Gandhi, Mohandas K. Satyagraha in South 

Africa; translated from the Gujarati by Valji 
Govindji Desai. Madras, S. Ganesan, 1928. 
511, vii p. DT764.E3G3 


275 









1809. Hahlo, H. R. The Union of South Africa; 

the development of its laws and constitution, 
by H. R. Hahlo and Ellison Kahn with spe¬ 
cialist contributors. London, Stevens, 1960. 
900 p. (The British Commonwealth, v. 5) 

DLC-LL 

1810. - The new constitution; with compara¬ 

tive tables of the Republic of South Africa 
Constitution Act, 1961 and the South Africa 
Act and earlier provisions and the text of the 
Republic of South Africa Constitution Act, 
no. 32 of 1932; being a supplement to “South 
Africa; the development of its laws and con¬ 
stitution,” by H. R. Hahlo and Ellison Kahn. 
London, Stevens: Cape Town, Juta, 1962. 
69 p. DLC-LL 

1811. Hellmann, Ellen, ed. Handbook on race 

relations in South Africa. Edited by Ellen 
Heilman, assisted by Leah Abrahams. Pub. 
for the South African Institute of Race Rela¬ 
tions. Cape Town, New York, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1949. 778 p. fold, map, diagrs., 
tables. DT763.H4 

1812. Hoernle, Reinhold F. Race and reason; 

being mainly a selection of contributions to 
the race problem in South Africa, by the late 
Professor R. F. Alfred Hoernle. Edited with 
a memoir by Professor I. D. MacCrone. 
Johannesburg, Witwatersrand University 
Press, 1945. xxxvi, 182 p. DT763.H56 

Should be regarded as a companion volume to Professor 
Hoemle’s South African Policy and the Liberal Spirit pub¬ 
lished in 1939.—Pref. 

1813. Keet, B. B. Whither , South Africa? Trans¬ 

lated by N. J. Marquard. Stellenbosch, Uni¬ 
versity Publishers and Booksellers, 1956. 
96 p. 

Translation of Suid-Afrika-waarheen? 

Dr. Keet is a leader of a group in the Netherlands 
Reformed Church who oppose apartheid as un¬ 
christian. , 

1814. Kuper, Leo. Passive resistance in South Africa. 

New Haven, Yale University Press, 1957. 
256 p. illus. DT763.K8 1957 

1815. Luthuli, Albert J. Let my people go; an au¬ 

tobiography. (Prepared for publication by 
Charles and Sheila Hooper). New York, 
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1962. 255 p. illus. 

DT779.8.L8H3 


1816. MacCrone, Ian D. Race attitudes in South 

Africa; historical, experimental, and psycho¬ 
logical studies. Johannesburg, Witwaters¬ 
rand University Press, 1957. 328 p. illus. 

DT763.M26 1957 

1817. Marquard, Leopold. The peoples and policies 

of South Africa. 3d ed. London, New York, 
Oxford University Press, 1962. 284 p. (Ox¬ 
ford paperbacks, no. 56) DT753.M37 1962 

“I have borrowed some of my historical material 
from The Black Man’s Burden , which I wrote under 
the pseudonym of ‘John Burger’ and which was pub¬ 
lished by Victor Gollancz in 1943.” (Preface) 

1818. Pienaar, S., and Anthony Sampson. South 

Africa; two views of separate development: 
Safeguarding the nations of South Africa, by 
S. Pienaar. Old fallacies with a new look; 
ignoring the Africans, by Anthony Sampson. 
London, New York, Oxford University Press, 
1960. 81 p. illus. DT779.7.P5 

The first writer states the Nationalist case for the 
Bantustans; the second, the opposition. 

1819. Reeves, Richard Ambrose, Bp. Shooting at 

Sharpeville; the agony of South Africa. With 
a foreword by Chief Luthuli. London, V. 
Gollancz, 1960. 159 p. illus. 

DT944.S5R4 1960 

1820. Roux, Edward. Time longer than rope; a.h\s- 

tory of the black man’s struggle for freedom in 
South Africa. London, V. Gollancz, 1949. 
398 p. front, maps. DT763.R6 1948 

Includes bibliographical references. 

1821. Smuts, Jan Christiaan. Toward a better 

world. New York, World Book Co., distrib¬ 
uted by Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1944. xxxvi, 
308 p. D829.A33S6 1944 

Speeches. London edition, 1942 (Hodder & 
Stoughton, Ltd.) has title: Plans for a Better World. 

1822. South African Institute of Race Rela¬ 

tions. Survey of race relations in South 
Africa, 1951-1952+ Compiled by Muriel 
Horrell. Johannesburg. 1955+ DT763.S67 
Summary review of developments and trends in leg¬ 
islation, Government action, and opposition. Survey 
for 1961, published in 1962, 311 p., tables. 

The many publications of the South African Institute of 
Race Relations include the monthly Race Relations News and 
the quarterly Race Relations Journal , as well as printed and 
mimeographed pamphlet series. The pamphlets vary widely 


276 



in size; except for the 1959-60 Survey of Race Relations 
($2), the price range is from 10 cents to $1.00, according to 
a 1962 Publications Price List. The following are typical 
pamphlets: 

Gruchy, Joy de. The cost of living for urban Africans, 
Johannesburg, 1959. 1960. 68 p. 

Horrell, Muriel. African taxation—its relation to 
African social services. 1958. (Institute fact papers, 
no. 4. Mimeographed) 

-- Race classification in South Africa: its effect 

on human beings. 1959. 79 p. 

Houghton, D. Hobart. Life in the Ciskei. 1955. 
72 p. 

Digest of a four-volume research study of a Native 
reserve, The Keiskammahoek Rural Survey, directed 
by R. Lindsay Robb (Pietermaritzburg, Shuter & 
Shooter, 1952). 

ECONOMICS AND URBAN 
SOCIOLOGY 

1823. Carnegie Commission of Investigation on 

the Poor White Question in South 
Africa. The poor white problem in South 
Africa. Report of the Carnegie Commission. 
Stellenbosch, Pro Ecclesia-Drukkery, 1932. 
5 v. plates, fold, maps, diagrs. HN800.C3 
Includes bibliographies. 

Contents.—1. Economic report: Rural impoverishment 
and rural exodus, by J. F. W. Grosskopf.—2. Psychological 
report: The poor white, by R. W. Wilcocks.—3. Educational 
report: Education and the poor white, by E. G. Malherbe.— 

4. Health report: Health factors in the poor white problem, 
by W. A. Murray.—5. Sociological report: The poor white 
and society, by J. R. Albertyn. The mother and daughter 
of the poor family, by M. E. Rothmann. 

1824. Franklin, Norton N. Economics in South 

Africa. Cape Town, Oxford University 
Press, 1948. 253 p. diagrs. HC517.S7F74 

1825. Houghton, D. Hobart, ed. Economic devel¬ 

opment in a plural society; studies in the 
border region of the Cape Province. Cape 
Town, Oxford University Press, 1960. xv, 
401 p. illus., maps. HC517.S72C34 

Published on behalf of the Institute of Social and Economic 
Research, Rhodes University. Includes bibliographical 
references. 

1826. Huddleston, Trevor. Naught for your com¬ 

fort. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 
253 p. DT763.H8 1956a 

1827. Longmore, Laura. The dispossessed; a study 

of the sex-life of Bantu women in urban areas 
in and around Johannesburg. London, J. 


Cape, 1959. 334 p. illus. Paperback ed. 
New English Library, Mar. 1962. 364 p. 
(Ace books) HQ18.S6L6 

Includes bibliography. 

1828. Marais, Johannes S. The Cape coloured 

people, 1652-1937. Johannesburg, Witwa- 
tersrand University Press, 1957. xxi, 296 p. 
fold. map. DT834.M35 1957 

Notes on sources: p. 287-290. Bibliographical footnotes. 

1829. Natal regional survey. Cape Town, New York, 

Published for the University of Natal by Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1951+ illus., maps, 
diagrs., tables. HN800.N3N34 

General series edited by H. R. Burrows. The follow¬ 
ing volumes are in print in 1962: 

1. Archaeology and natural resources of Natal. 1951. 

140 p. 

2. Alsop, M. H. The population of Natal. 1953. 

144 p. 

3. Fair, J. D. The distribution of population in Natal. 

1955. 99 p. 

5. Electricity undertakings in Natal. 1954. 100 p. 

6. Baumannville: a study of an urban African com¬ 

munity, edited by the Institute for Social Re¬ 
search. 1959. 79 p. 

7. Brookes, Edgar H., and Nathaniel Hurwitz. 

The Native reserves of Natal. 1957. 195 p. 

9. Woods, G. A. The Indian community of Natal. 
1954. 102 p. 

10. Palmer, Mabel. The history of the Indians in 

Natal. 1958. 197 p. 

11. Studies of Indian employment in Natal. 1961. 

167 p. 

12. Hurwitz, Nathaniel. Agriculture in Natal, 

1860-1950. 1957. 123 p. 

13. Agriculture in Natal: recent developments. 1957. 

205 p. 

The Oxford University Press publishes also a series 
of numbered reports for various departments of the 
University of Natal, e.g.: 

Pietermaritzburg. University of Natal. Dept, of 
Economics. The African factory worker; a sample 
study of the life and labour of the urban African 
worker. 1950. 221 p. illus., maps, tables. (Dur¬ 

ham Economic Research Committee. Report no. 2) 

HC517.N3D8, no. 2 

A comparable series is now being undertaken by the Insti¬ 
tute of Social and Economic Research of Rhodes University, 
Grahamstown, with the title, Xhosa in Town. The first two 
volumes are now in print as follows: 

1. Reader, D. H. The black man’s portion; history, 
demography and living conditions in the native lo¬ 
cations of East London, Cape Province. Cape 
Town, Oxford University Press, 1961. 180 p. 

HN800.E15R4 


277 







2. Mayer, Philip. —Townsmen or tribesmen; conserva¬ 
tion and the process of urbanization in a South 
African city. Cape Town, Oxford University 
Press, 1961. 306 p. GN657.X6M3 

1830. Patterson Sheila. Colour and culture in 

South Africa; a study of the status of the 
Cape colored people within the social struc¬ 
ture of the Union of South Africa. London, 
Routledge & Paul, 1953. 402 p. (Inter¬ 

national library of sociology and social re¬ 
construction) DT763.P35 1953 

Bibliography: p. 341-347. 

1831. Phillips, Ray E. The Bantu in the city; a 

study of cultural adjustment on the Wit- 
watersrand. Lovedale, South Africa, The 
Lovedale Press, 1938. xxix, 452 p. 2 fold, 
tables. DT764.B2P5 1937 

Bibliography: p. 394—406. 

1832. South Africa. Commission for the Socio- 

Economic Development of the Bantu Areas. 
Summary of the Report. Pretoria, Govt. 
Printer, 1955. xviii, 213 p. maps, diagrs. 
(U.G. 61/1955.) DT990.A52 

The original was not printed but presented in type¬ 
script on Oct. 1, 1954. Some chapters are in English, 
some in Afrikaans; the work consisted of 51 chapters 
comprising 3,755 pages, 598 tables, and an atlas of 66 
large-scale maps. A photostatic reproduction is held 
by the Library of Congress. 

1833. South Africa. Geological Survey. The min¬ 

eral resources of the Union of South Africa. 
4th ed. Pretoria, Govt. Printer, 1959. 
622 p. illus., fold, maps, tables, diagrs. 

TN119.S7A426 

The standard source for geological and statistical 
information about minerals and mining in South 
Africa. A narrative account of the discoveries and 
pioneers of the country’s most famous industry is The 
Gold Miners, by Alan P. Cartwright (Cape Town, 
Purnell, 1962. 340 p. illus.). 

1834. Van der Horst, Sheila T. Native labour in 

South Africa. . . . London, Oxford Univer¬ 
sity Press, H. Milford, 1942. 340 p. diagr. 

HD8799.S7V3 1942 

Bibliography: p. 327-331. 


ANTHROPOLOGY, ETC. 

1835. African studies. 1+ Mar. 1942+ Jo¬ 

hannesburg, Witwatersrand University Press, 
1942+ maps, diagrs. quarterly. 

DT751.A4 

Issued by the Dept, of Bantu Studies, University of 
the Witwatersrand. Supersedes Bantu Studies. 

1836. Bryant, Alfred T. The Zulu people, as they 

were before the white men came. Pieter¬ 
maritzburg, Shuter & Shooter, 1949. 769 p. 

illus. DT878.Z9B72 

1837. Duggan-Cronin, Alfred M. [and others] 

The Bantu tribes of South Africa; reproduc¬ 
tion of photographic studies. Cambridge 
[Eng.] Deighton, Bell, 1928+ 4 v. 

GN657.B2D8 

Contents.—v. 1. section 1. The Vavenda, by G. P. 
Lestrade. 1928.—v. 2. section 1-3. The Suto-Chuana 
tribes: subgroup 1. The Bechuana, by G. P. Lestrade. 
1929.—Subgroup 2. The Bapedi (Transvaal Basotho) by 
W. Eiselen. 1931.—Subgroup 3. The southern Basotho, 
by G. P. Lestrade. 1933.—v. 3. The Nguni: section 1. In¬ 
troductory article on the Nguni, by N. J. Van Warmelo. 
The Ciskei and southern Transkei tribes (Xhosa and 
Thembu) by W. G. Bennie. 1939.—section 2. The 
Mpondo and Mpondomise, by M. Wilson. 1949.—sec¬ 
tion 3. The Zulu, by D. McK. Malcolm. 1938.—sec¬ 
tion 4. The Swazi, by H. Beemer. 1941.—section 5. Baza, 
Hlubi Xesibe, by W. D. Hammond-Tooke. 1954.—v. 4. 
The Vathonga-Shangaan people): section 1. An introduc¬ 
tory article on the Vathonga, by H. P. Junod. 1935. 

1838. Du Plessis, Izak D. The Cape Malays. . . . 

With twenty illustrations in color and mono¬ 
chrome after paintings and photographs. 
Cape Town, M. Miller, 1944. 94 p. col. 
front., plates (part col.) DT848.C5D8 

1839. Junod, Henri A. Life of a South African 

tribe. Second revised ed. London, 1927. 
Reprint with foreword by Keith Irvine. New 
York, Hyde Park, New York University 
Books, 1962. 2 v. illus. GN567.T5J82 

1840. Krige, Eileen (Jensen). The social system 

of the Zulus. London, New York, Long¬ 
mans, Green; Johannesburg, University of 
the Witwatersrand, 1936. xix, 420 p. illus., 
plates, maps. DT878.Z9K7 

Bibliography: p. xvii-xix. 


278 


1841. -. and J. D. Krige. The realm of a 

rain queen: a study of the pattern of Lovedu 
society. London, New York. Printed for the 
International African Institute by Oxford 
University Press, 1943. 335 p. illus. Re¬ 
print 1947. GN657.L6K7 

1842. Schapera, Isaac. Government and politics in 

tribal societies. London, Watts, 1956. 
238 p. illus. (Josiah Mason lectures) 

JC29.A32S35 

1843. -. The Khoisan peoples of South Africa; 

Bushmen and Hottentots. London, G. 
Routledge, 1930. 450 p. xv pi., fold. maps. 
(The Ethnology of Africa) DT15.8.S3 
Bibliography: p. 439-445. 

1844. -, ed. The Bantu-speaking tribes of 

South Africa; an ethnographical survey, 
edited for the (South African) Inter-Uni¬ 
versity Committee for African Studies by I. 
Schapera. Contributors: Raymond A. Dart, 
Clement M. Doke and others. London, G. 
Routledge, 1937. xv, 453 p. illus. (music) 
xxiv plates, double map. DT764.B2S39 
Bibliography: p. 435-444. 

Contents.—Racial origins, by R. A. Dart.—Habitat, by 
A. J. H. Goodwin.—Grouping and ethnic history, by N. J. 
van Warmelo.—Social organization, by A. Winifred 
Hoemle.—Individual development, by Eileen J. Krige.— 
Domestic and communal life, by G. P. Lestrade.—Work and 
wealth, by I. Schapera and A. J. H. Goodwin.— Political 
institutions, by I. Schapera.—Law and justice, by I. Schap¬ 
era.—Magic and medicine, by A. Winifred Hoemle.—Re¬ 
ligious beliefs and practices, by W. M. Eiselen and I. 
Schapera.—The musical practices of the native races of 
South Africa, by P. R. Kirby.—Traditional literature, by 
G. P. Lestrade.—Language, by G. M. Doke.—The imposition 
and nature of European control, by J. S. Marais.—Cultural 
changes in tribal life, by I. Schapera.—The Bantu on Euro¬ 
pean-owned farms, by Monica Hunter.—The native in the 
towns, by Ellen P. Hellmann.—Index of tribal names. 

1845. Soga, John Henderson. The Ama-Xosa , life 

and customs. Lovedale, Cape Province, 
Lovedale Press; London, K. Paul, Trench, 
Trubner, 1932. 431 p. illus. 

DT764.K2S6 

1846. -. The South-Eastern Bantu (Abe- 

Nguni, Aba-Mbo, Ama-Lala). Johannes¬ 
burg, Witwatersrand University Press, 1930. 
490 p. port., geneal. tables. 

DT764.B2S6 

Special number of Bantu Studies. Prefatory pages 
include a “Biographical Note on the Author,” a de¬ 


scendant of Gaika chiefs, educated at Edinburgh, and 
a missionary in Griqualand. This work is translated 
from the Isi-Xhosa in which it was written—“the first 
considerable attempt made by an educated man of 
Bantu descent and in touch with Bantu tradition, to 
present the history of his people in one of the most 
widely spoken Native languages” (Editor’s Intro¬ 
duction) . 

1847. Sundkler, Bengt G. M. Bantu prophets in 

South Africa. 2d ed. London, New York, 
Published for the International African Insti¬ 
tute by the Oxford University Press, 1961. 
381 p. illus. BR1367.Z8S8 

Includes bibliography. 

1848. Wilson, Monica Hunter. Reaction to con¬ 

quest; effects of contact with Europeans on 
the Pondo of South Africa. With an introd. 
by J. G. Smuts. 2d ed. London, New York, 
Published for the International African Insti¬ 
tute by Oxford University Press, 1961. xxiii, 
582 p. illus., maps. DT764.P6W5 

Reprint of original edition, 1936. 

1849. Ziervogel, D. The Eastern Sotho: a tribal, 

historical, and linguistic survey (with ethno¬ 
graphic notes) of the Pai, Kutswe, and Pu- 
lana Bantu tribes in the Pilgrim’s Rest District 
of the Transvaal Province, Union of South 
Africa. Pretoria, J. L. van Schaik, 1954. 
215 p. fold map. DT920.Z5 

ARTS AND LETTERS 

1850. Abrahams, Peter. Mine boy. London, Faber 

& Faber, 1946. 1st American ed., New York, 
Knopf, 1955. 252 p. PZ3.A1576Mi3 

One of the most noted of this African writer’s novels. 
Among the others widely read abroad are Wild Con¬ 
quest (1951); the autobiographical story, Tell 

Freedom (1954); and A Wreath for Udomo (1956). 

1851. Biesheuvel, Simon. African intelligence. 

Johannesburg, South African Institute of 
Race Relations, 1943. 225 p. BF432.N5B5 

References at ends of most chapters. 

Study of intelligence levels of the native races as 
shown in education of Africans. 

1852. Kirby, Percival R. The musical instruments 

of the native races of South Africa. Johannes¬ 
burg, Witwatersrand University Press, 1953. 
285 p. 75 plates, map, music. 

ML544.K5 1953 

Bibliographical footnotes. 


279 












1853. Mphahlele, Ezekiel. Down Second Avenue. 

London, Faber & Faber, 1959. 222 p. 

Autobiographical. 

Reprinted by Seven Seas Books, Glinkastrasse 13-15 Berlin 
W. 8, German Democratic Republic. Distributor in United 
States, Jefferson Book Store, 100 East 16th St., New York. 

1854. Nyembezi, C. L. Zulu proverbs. Johannes¬ 

burg, Witwatersrand University Press, 1954. 
238 p. PN6519.Z8N9 1954 

1855. Paton, Alan. Cry, the beloved country. New 

York, Scribner 1960 [ c 1950] 283 p. (Mod¬ 
em standard authors) PZ3.P2738Cr5 

1856. Sampson, Anthony. Drum; a venture into 

the new Africa. London, Collins, 1956. 
256 p. illus. PN5480.D7S3 1956 

Drum is the magazine for African readers published 
in Johannesburg, of which Mr. Sampson was editor in 
its beginnings in the early fifties. This book recounts 
the experience. Another book in late 1962, In the 
Fiery Continent, by Tom Hopkinson (London, Gol- 


lancz, 376 p.), is the story of a later editor who had 
begun his work in the Drum branch offices in Ghana 
and Nigeria, then went on to South Africa. 

1857. Schreiner, Olive. The story of an African 

farm. New York, The Modem Library, 
1927. 375 p. (The Modem Library of the 
world’s best books) PZ3.S378Stl7 

1858. Tracey, Hugh. African dances of the Wit¬ 

watersrand gold mines. Photos, by Marlyn 
Severn. Johannesburg, African Music So¬ 
ciety, 1952. 156 p. illus. GV1707.T7 

1859. -, comp, and tr. Lalela Zulu; 100 Zulu 

lyrics. With illus. by Eric Byrd. Foreword 
by A. W. Hoemle. Johannesburg, African 
Music Society [pref. 1948] xi, 121 p. illus. 
(African Music Society. Publications Book 
no. 1.) PL8844.A2T7 

English and Zulu. Without music. 

Index of gramophone records: p. 114-118. 


280 



CONGO (LEOPOLDVILLE) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

I860. Academie Royale des Sciences d’Outre-Mer. 
Catalogue. 1. oct. 1961. Bruxelles, Li- 
brairie africaine Hubaut. 36 p. DLG-AFR 
Title also in Dutch. 

The Institut Royal Colonial Beige was established 
in 1929; in 1954 its name was changed by royal decree 
to Academie Royale des Sciences Coloniales, and in 
December 1959 to the present form. Its many publi¬ 
cations, new series of which are dated from 1954, are 
listed in this periodically revised catalog which in¬ 
cludes items out of print as well as those in stock. 
They begin with the Bulletin des seances, the annual 
volumes of which, published in varying numbers of 
fascicles, range from under 500 to over 1,700 pages. 
Ten-year indexes have been issued, 1930-39, 1940-49, 

1 1950-59. The Memoires, the titles of which fill 26 
pages, are in 3 classes, Classe des sciences morales et 
politiques, Classe des sciences naturelles et medicales, 
and Classe des sciences techniques. For each class 
there are two forms of publication, Collection in-4° 
and Collection in-8°. The so-called “sciences hu- 
maines”—anthropology, linguistics, political, economic, 
and cultural history—are in the Sciences morales et 
politiques. The broad sciences of geology and meteor¬ 
ology, as well as botany, zoology, and medicine, are in 
the second class; and the third includes mines and 
mining, hydrography, and anything else involving ap¬ 
plied sciences. A set of Publications hors-serie includes 
five volumes of Biographie de VA.R.S.O.M. and the 
various subject maps of the Atlas general du Congo. 
The writings are uniformly of high scholarship. These 
publications are included also in the official Belgian 
government list, below. 

1861. Belgium. Ministere des affaires africaines. 
(Until 1960 Ministere du Congo beige et du 
Ruanda-Urundi) Liste des publications; lijst 
der uitgaven. Bruxelles. Latest received, 
juin 1959. 135 p. DLC-AFR 

This periodically revised list covers official publica¬ 
tions on the former Belgian colonies, including the 
many distinguished contributions in the fields of natu¬ 


ral and human sciences appearing in the journals and 
monographic series of the government-sponsored orga¬ 
nizations concerned with the Congo and Ruanda- 
Urundi. They are listed by agency or institution: the 
Direction de 1’Agriculture of the Ministry with expla¬ 
nation of its serials, the outstanding Bulletin agricole 
du Congo beige et du Ruanda-Urundi and the 
related Bulletin d’information de VINEAC, then 
almost 30 pages of separate monograph titles; publi¬ 
cations of other branches of the Ministry, including 
Bulletin offlciel and Bulletin administratif, annual 
reports on administration, mapping services, etc.; 
publications of the Institut National pour 1’Etude 
Agronomique du Congo Beige (INEAC), of the 
Institut des Parcs Nationaux du Congo Beige; 
the more general works issued by the Office de 1’In¬ 
formation et des Relations Publiques pour le Congo 
Beige et le Ruanda-Urundi (INFORCONGO); the 
vast list of scientific publications of the Musee Royal 
du Congo Beige (now Musee Royal de l’Afrique Cen- 
trale); and the above-mentioned list of the Academie 
Royale des Sciences d’Outre-Mer. 

1862. Heyse, Theodore. Bibliographie du Congo 

beige et du Ruanda-Urundi [Series] 1939 + 
Bruxelles, G. van Campenhout, 1946-53. 
Cahiers beiges et congolais, no. 4-7, 9-12, 
16-22) 

Separately cataloged in DLG. 

Pamphlets of from 40 to 70 pages (except no. 7, 
Agriculture, which has 160 p.) listing by subject 
field writings on the Congo from 1939 to the date of 
publication. An article by Professor Heyse in Zaire of 
June 1948, “Le Travail bibliographique colonial beige 
de 1876 jusqu’en 1933” (reprint, Bruxelles, Editions 
universitaires, 1948. 20 p.), explains sources for ear¬ 

lier writings. 

1863. - Documentation generate sur le Congo 

et le Ruanda Urundi, 1950-53. Bruxelles, 
Commission beige de bibliographie, 1954. 
31 p. (Bibliographia belgica, 4) 

Z2407.B5, no. 4 


281 







1864. - 1953-1955. Bruxelles, G. van 

Campenhout, 1956. 56 p. (Cahiers beiges 
et congolais, no. 26) Z3631.H43 

1865. - - 1955-1958; avec la coopera¬ 

tion de Jean Berlage. Bruxelles, Commission 
beige de bibliographic, 1959. 84 p. (Biblio- 
graphia belgica, 39) DLC 

1866. - 1958-1960. Bruxelles, G. van 

Campenhout, 1961. 96 p. (Cahiers beiges 

et congolais, no. 34) DLC 

These general listings of literature on the Belgian 
oversea possessions supplemented the earlier series of 
subject lists. The last two were compiled by Professor 
Heyse with the assistance of M. Jean Berlage, whose 
own big compilation, Repertoire de la presse du Congo 
beige ( 1884-1958) et du Ruanda-Urundi ( 1920-1958) 
was issued as Bibliographia Belgica, 43 (Bruxelles, 
Van Campenhout, 1959. 193 p.). 

1867. Lemarchand, Rene. “Selective bibliographi¬ 

cal survey for the study of politics in the for¬ 
mer Belgian Congo.” American political 
science review, v. 54, September 1960: 715— 
728. JA1.A6, v. 54 

A bibliographical essay by a political scientist of the 
University of Lovanium in Leopoldville. Professor 
Lemarchand includes in his survey important titles for 
geographical and historical background, the main of¬ 
ficial publications, works on traditional political sys¬ 
tems and customary law, transitional political develop¬ 
ments, and the modern political scene, ending with 
comment on the press. Many of his references are to 
articles in leading periodicals and in the Encyclopedie 
du Congo beige (see no. 1875). 

1868. Zaire; revue congolaise; congoleesch tijdschrift. 

1947-1960. Bruxelles, Editions universitaires 
illus. monthly (except August and Septem¬ 
ber) DT641.Z3 

This journal superseded Congo; revue generate de 
la colonie beige, which had been published from 1920 
to the outbreak of the Second World War. In addition 
to notable articles, both reviews contained a regular 
bibliographical section, carrying extensive classified 
listings of books and periodical material relating to 
the Congo. The section was also issued as a separate 
“Bibliographic courante” by the Ministere du Congo 
Beige. Zaire was terminated in 1960. 

A List of Materials on the Belgian Congo and Ruanda- 
Urundi is in preparation by Dr. Philippe Leurquin of the 
Food Research Institute, Stanford University in 1962-63, 


to be issued in the Hoover Institution’s Bibliographical 
Series. 

Note: The bibliographical guides listed above give indi¬ 
cation of the almost inexhaustible wealth of material avail¬ 
able for research on the former Belgian Congo and Ruanda- 
Urundi. In the following sections the references in French 
represent not so much a studied choice as a sampling of this 
rich literature, especially as to that which is available in the 
Library of Congress. 

GENERAL 

T869. American University. Foreign areas Studies 
Division. U.S. Army area handbook for the 
Republic of the Congo (Leopoldville ) Pre¬ 
pared by Foreign Areas Studies Division, 
Special Operations Research Office, the 
American University. Washington, 1962. 
657 p. maps, tables. DT658.A78 

One of a series of country studies being prepared 
to provide basic factual background for American 
officers and others having to do with the area. The 
comprehensive information is presented objectively 
and concisely, in short paragraphs. The first and 
longest section, “Sociological Background,” covers 
historical setting, geography, population, ethnological 
and social aspects, religion, arts, and education. The 
section on “Political Background” recites events 
through 1961. “Economic Background” includes 
labor questions, agriculture, industry, trade, and fi¬ 
nancial matters. The last section, “National Secu¬ 
rity,” describes the institutions of public order before 
and since independence and analyzes the character 
of the armed forces. Each section is followed by a 
long bibliography. 

1870. Belgium. Office de l’information et des re¬ 
lations publiques pour le Congo beige et le 
Ruanda-Urundi [INFORCONGO] Belgian 
Congo. [Translated from the French by 
F. H. and C. Heldt] Brussels, 1959-60. 
2 v. (547, 187 p.) illus., maps. 

DT644.A4853 

This publication of tNFORCONGO came out in 
the original French edition in 1958. The English 
edition is a faithful translation. Volume 1 is a digest 
of information on country and people, history, politi¬ 
cal institutions, judiciary, military, special services, 
economic life, industry, social development and wel¬ 
fare, etc. Volume 2 contains statistics of every sort; 
it was forecast that this part would be revised period¬ 
ically. 


282 







1871. - Guide du voyageur. 4 e edition, 1958. 

Bruxelles, 1958. 798 p. illus., maps. 

DT646.A53 1958 
An impressive formal guidebook in which itiner¬ 
aries and detailed regional descriptions are preceded 
by a valuable set of general articles on history, tribal 
groups, economic development, administrative setup, 
and many other phases of life and enterprise in the 
Belgian colonies. The first edition in 1949 and sub¬ 
sequent editions until 1956 were issued by the Belgian 
Office du Tourisme du Congo Beige et du Ruanda- 
Urundi. There have been two editions in English: 
Traveller’s Guide for the Belgian Congo and Ruanda- 
Urundi, 1951 and 1956. 

1872. Cahen, Lucien. Geologie du Congo beige. 

Liege, Impr. H. Vaillant-Carmanne, 1954. 

577 p. illus., maps, diagrs., profiles. 

QE335.C3 

Scientific study by a geologist connected with the 
Musee Royal du Congo Beige. In the introduction 
it is spoken of as synthesizing the data published in 
over 2,000 papers, books, and articles by the first 
generations of geologists of the Congo. It has no 
formal bibliography, but each chapter is followed by 
references to sources. 

1873. Le Congo. Paris, La Revue fran^aise, 1960. 

unpaged, illus. DLC 

Large illustrated pamphlet prepared by this dis¬ 
tinguished review, presenting the Belgian accomplish¬ 
ment in the Congo. Published to coincide with inde¬ 
pendence, much of the material was supplied by 
INFORCONGO. 

1874. Davidson, Basil. The African awakening. 

London, Cape, 1955. 262 p. illus. 

DT639.D35 

Mr. Davidson’s many writings on Africa have been 
consistently from an anticolonial viewpoint. This 
work was based on impressions of a visit to the Bel¬ 
gian Congo and Angola. The author dwelt on the 
background of exploitation of the inhabitants of cen¬ 
tral Africa from the time of the first Portuguese set¬ 
tlements in the 16th and 17th centuries, through the 
years of the slave trade and of Leopold’s Congo Free 
State, to the modem Belgian system which he branded 
as repressive paternalism. He was enthusiastic over 
the progress in urbanization and industrialization, pre¬ 
dicting a social and political revolution to end 
colonialism. 

1875. Encyclopedie du Congo beige. Bruxelles, Biele- 

veld [1950?]—1952. 3 v. illus. DT643.E5 


The Administrator General of the Colonies in his 
preface spoke of this monumental work as the sum of 
colonial scientific documentation for a general public. 
About 50 specialists collaborated to offer a synthesis 
of all available knowledge about the Congo. The 
format is handsome, with many photographs and in¬ 
set color plates. Volume 1 takes in history, ethnology, 
geology, climate and soils, botany, colonial agricultural 
industries. Volume 2 covers forestry, fauna, animal 
husbandry (including domestication of the elephant), 
mines and mining, in general and by specific mineral 
products. In Volume 3 the first part is on colonial 
hygiene, diseases of animals, phytopathology, applied 
entomology. Then economic life is reviewed in all 
aspects, and finally political institutions and education. 
The alphabetical index at the end of Volume 3 abounds 
in technical names and terms. There is also an index 
of the 60-odd maps scattered through the work. 

1876. Flavin, Martin. Black and white , from the 

Cape to the Congo. New York, Harper, 1950. 
332 p. DT732.F6 

An American novelist and playwright who traveled 
from Johannesburg north through Bechuanaland and 
widely in the Congo and Ruanda-Urundi put down 
here his observations in striking vignettes, interspersed 
with historical and speculative comment. Most of the 
book (p. 82-332) was on his impressions of the Con¬ 
go, which “physically, historically, politically and spirit¬ 
ually” he found different from the British regions—a 
unique colonial undertaking, the “thrilling spectacle” 
of a nation being born under enlightened trusteeship. 
Mr. Flavin’s narrative has been considered a conspicu¬ 
ous contribution to African travel literature. 

1877. Folia scientifica Africae centralis, v. 1, no. 14- 

Mar. 19554- Bakavu, Congo, IRSAC. 

quarterly. DLC 

French and Flemish, summaries in English. 

Bulletin of information on current activities of the 
Institut pour la Recherche Scientifique en Afrique 
Centrale (IRSAC) with sections on biological, human, 
and physical sciences, giving brief accounts of work 
done and titles of new publications. 

1878. Institut national pour Vetude agronomique du 

Congo beige [INEAC ]—son but—son pro¬ 
gramme—ses realisations. 4. ed. Oct. 1957. 

Bruxelles, 1957. 156 p. illus., maps. 

S5.I47 1957 

Other editions, 1954 and 1956. 

INEAC is still issuing bulletins from Brussels in late 
1962. 


692 - 756—63 - 19 


283 








1879. Marvel, Tom. The new Congo . New York, 

Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1948. 395 p. 

DT652.M314 

One of the few traveler’s accounts of the Congo in 
English published in the postwar decade, this is by a 
writer whose war service had taken him to the terri¬ 
tory. The picture he gives is the typical one of English- 
speaking observers whose views were not inclined to 
the left—unstinting in praise of the emergent economy 
and development of the African population, their 
health, education and social adjustment, and of the 
“farsighted” Belgian colonial policy. 

1880. Michiels, Albert. Congo beige et Ruanda- 

Urundi; geographic et notice historique [par] 
A. Michiels et N. Laude. 18. ed. rev. et 
augm. de “Notre colonie.” Bruxelles, Edition 
universelle, 1957. 370 p. illus., maps. 

DT644.M5 1957 

This handbook was originally published in the early 
twenties, and has been revised to include later statistics. 
It is a comprehensive survey, clearly written and inter¬ 
esting, profusely illustrated. The arrangement follows 
the usual order: physical geography, anthropology, 
economics, and politics and administration. Ruanda- 
Urundi is treated in a separate section following the 
same order, and the very brief outline of chief historical 
events takes up the last 30 pages. There are chapter 
bibliographies with references mostly in French. 

1881. Robert, Maurice. Le Congo physique. 3. 

ed., rev. et complete. Liege, H. Vaillant- 
Carmanne, 1946. 449 p. illus., maps. 

QE335.R6 1946 

Bibliography: p. 417-427. 

Compliments. 1948. 83 p.; 1954. 15 p. 

By a professor of geology at the Universite Libre of 
Brussels, author of many studies of Central Africa, this 
work was first published in 1919 and brought up to date 
with synthesis of existing information in two later edi¬ 
tions and two supplements. Its coverage includes ge¬ 
ology, mineralogy, climatology, hydrology, soils, 
biogeography. 

1882. Rouck, Rene de. Atlas geographique et his¬ 

torique du Congo beige et des territoires sous 
mandat du Ruanda-Urundi. 4. ed. 195- 
11 p. 13 col. maps. 36 cm. DLC 

Forty-five maps and plans on 12 plates, with an 
alphabetic index of 5,972 names. The maps include 
physical geography, political and administrative divi¬ 
sions, history, economy, and plans of the 7 chief cities. 


1883. Ydewalle, Charles d\ Le Congo du fetiche 

a l’uranium. Bruxelles, L. Cuypers, 1953. 
277 p. DT652.Y3 

Travel impressions and historical interpretation by a 
Belgian literary man. 

HISTORY 

1884. Anstey, Roger. Britain and the Congo in the 

nineteenth century. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 
1962. 260 p. DT655.A7 

Not yet available for examination. 

1885. Ceulemans, P. La question arabe et le Congo, 

1883-1892. Bruxelles, 1959. 396 p. maps. 
(Academie royale des sciences coloniales. 
Classe des sciences morales et politiques. 
Memoires in-8°. n.s., t. 22, fasc. 1.) 

DT641.A27 n.s., t. 22, fasc. 1 
Bibliography: p. 368-380. 

By a Catholic historian, the director of a missionary 
college in Kasai, this is a study of relations between 
Leopold’s Congo Free State and Tippo Tib and the 
other merchant princes of the Arab slave trade which 
ended in an armed clash in 1892. It was reviewed in 
Africa, October 1960. 

1886. Conrad, Joseph. Heart of darkness; back¬ 

grounds and criticisms, edited by Leonard F. 
Dean. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice- 
Hall, 1960. 184 p. PZ3.C764He6 

This famous story set in the deep forest of the Upper 
Congo in the early years of the Free State is presented 
here with a collection of interpretive material reflect¬ 
ing, on the one hand, literary criticism, on the other, 
Conrad’s own experience in the Congo and contempo¬ 
rary writing. There is included, for instance, a long 
extract from Stanley’s Through the Dark Continent. 

1887. Cornet, Rene J. La bataille du rail. 4. ed. 

rev. et aug. Bruxelles, L. Cuypers, 1958. 
413 p. TF119.C6C6 

This work, which was awarded the Prix Inter¬ 
national Chatrian in 1953 by the Societe des Gens de 
Lettres du Paris, recounts the history of building the 
railroad from Matadi to Stanley Pool which opened 
up commerce and navigation on the upper Congo. 
The line, conceived by Stanley in 1878, and built under 
the direction of Lieutenant Albert Thys, was opened 
in 1898. 


284 


1888. Crowe, Sybil E. The Berlin West Africa 
Conference , 1884-1885. London, New 
York, Published for the Royal Empire So¬ 
ciety by Longmans, Green, 1942. 249 p. 
(Imperial studies, no. 19) DT652.C87 

Note on sources: p. 224-231; bibliography: p. 232-237. 

Monograph on the first big colonial conference of 
modern times, in which Leopold II’s diplomacy, car¬ 
ried on through his International Association of the 
Congo, led to the relinquishment of claims by the 
other Powers, and the establishment of his Congo 
Free State. The work is in two parts, the first cover¬ 
ing events leading up to the Conference; the second, 
the Conference itself. 

An older authoritative study by the British historian Ar¬ 
thur Berriedale Keith appeared in 1919: The Belgian Congo 
and the Berlin Act (Oxford, Clarendon Press. 344 p.). 
Like Miss Crowe’s work, it is concerned more with diplo¬ 
matic moves in Europe than with the territory in Africa. 

J 1889. Cuvelier, Jean, Bp. Uancien royaume de 
Congo: fondation, decouverte, premiere 
evangelisation de l’ancien royaume de Congo. 
Regne du Grand Roi Affonso Mvemba 
Nzinga (d. 1541) Bruges, Paris, Desclee de 
Brouwer, 1946. 361 p. illus., maps. 

DT655.C85 

Bishop Cuvelier was the Apostolic Vicar in Matadi. 
This historical study related to the first period of 
Portuguese discovery and establishment in the Lower 
Congo Basin in what is now the Congo Province of 
Angola and the southwestern part of Leopoldville 
Province in the Congo. 

1890. Hennessy, Maurice N. Congo; a brief his¬ 
tory and appraisal. London, Pall Mall 
Press, 1961. 148 p. illus. DT652.H4 1961a 
In under 150 pages the author, a British journalist, 
has compressed the entire course of Congolese his¬ 
tory to a useful resume. More than half the text 
deals with events since the Second World War, “The 
Congo in Transition,” “The Death of Paternalism,” 
and then independence and its consequences through 
1960. Appendixes are a chart of U.N. organization 
in the Congo, a chronology of events in 1960, and 
selected correspondence, mostly to and from Lu¬ 
mumba. A postscript noting the death of Lumumba 
is dated 13 February 1961. 

1891. Johnston, Sir Harry H. George Grenfell 
and the Congo; a history and description of 
the Congo Independent State and adjoining 
districts . . . diaries and researches of the 


late Rev. George Grenfell and records of the 
British Baptist Missionary Society. London, 
Hutchinson, 1908. 2v. illus., maps. 

DT644.J7 

A classic of Congolese history in English writing. 
For a more recent study of this material, see Ruth 
Slade’s English-Speaking Missions . . . (below). 

1892. Lichtervelde, Louis de, comte. Leopold of 

the Belgians; tr. by Thomas H. Reed. New 
York, Century Co., 1929. 366 p. 

DH671.L52 

Biography by a Royalist Belgian historian, who es¬ 
says to clear the character and establish the greatness of 
the bitterly criticized king of the Belgians who laid 
the chief foundations of his country’s wealth in his 
creation of the rich Congo colony. 

Among the more important contemporary writings con¬ 
cerning the history of the Congo from Leopold’s formation 
of the Association International Africaine at the Brussels 
Conference of 1876 to the annexation of the Congo Free 
State by Belgium in 1908, there might be mentioned: Henry 
Morton Stanley’s Congo and the Foundation of its Free 
State: A Story of Work and Exploration (New York, Harper, 
1885. 2 v.); the British Foreign Office publication of the 

Correspondence and Report respecting the Administration 
of the Independent State of the Congo by Roger Casement, 
consul at Boma (London, 1904-05. 3 v. Cd. 1933, 2097, 
2333); and the even more savage indictments of autocratic 
control voiced by Edmund D. Morel in King Leopold’s 
Rule in Africa (London, Heinemann, 1904) and Red Rub¬ 
ber: the Story of the Rubber Slave Trade Flourishing on 
the Congo in the Year of Grace 1906 (London, Unwin, 1906; 
reprint, Manchester, National Labor Press, 1919). 

1893. Martelli, George. Leopold to Lumumba: 

a history of the Belgian Congo, 1877-1960. 
London, Chapman & Hall, 1962. 259 p. 
illus., maps. 

This new recounting of history of Belgian govern¬ 
ment in the Congo was reviewed in the London Times 
Literary Supplement of Nov. 16, 1962, as “a well- 
informed and deeply partisan defence of European 
colonialism in general and of Leopold II of Belgium 
in particular—an honest lament for the good old 
days.” 

A French account of Congolese history which also ap¬ 
peared in mid-1962 has not been available for examination: 
Michel Merlier, Le Congo , de la colonisation beige d Vindi- 
pendance (Paris, F. Maspero. 352 p. Cahiers fibres, nos. 
32-33). 

1894. Mendiaux, Edouard. Histoire du Congo. 

Bruxelles, C. Dessart, 1961. 245 p. 

DT652.M38 

Includes bibliography. 


285 



Popular synthesis of history of the Congo in pre¬ 
colonial times, taken from all known sources and lean¬ 
ing heavily on the account of early explorers of Cen¬ 
tral Africa. It begins with prehistory and classical 
antiquity and ends with the creation of the Congo 
Free State. Appendixes are on religion and magic, 
arts and crafts. 

1895. Roeykens, A. Leopold II et VAfrique, 1855- 

1880; essai de synthese et de mise au point. 
Bruxelles, 1958. 411 p. (Academie royale 
des sciences coloniales. Classes des sciences 
morales et politiques. Memoires in-8°, n.s. 
t. 14, fasc. 2) DT641.A27, n.s., t. 14, fasc. 2 

One of the more recent works of historic scholar¬ 
ship, this study of the beginnings of Leopold’s inter¬ 
ests in the Congo is by a Catholic Father at a mission in 
Ubangi. 

1896. Slade, Ruth N. English-speaking missions in 

the Congo Independent State ( 1878-1908) 
Bruxelles, 1959. 432 p. maps. (Academie 

royale des sciences coloniales. Classe des 
sciences morales et politiques. Memoires in 
8°, nouv. ser., t. 16, fasc. 2) 

DT641.A27 n.s., t. 16, fasc. 2 

1897. - King Leopold’s Congo; aspects of the 

development of race relations in the Congo 
Independent State. London, New York, Ox¬ 
ford University Press, 1962. xi, 230 p. illus. 
maps. DT655.S55 

Bibliography: p. 215-219. 

By an English scholar who had done extensive re¬ 
search in archival material, particularly that relating 
to the missionary activities which she examined in de¬ 
tail in the first-mentioned work. This monograph, 
accepted by the Academie Royale des Sciences d’Outre- 
Mer in its authoritative Memoires series, was sub¬ 
mitted as a thesis at the University of London. In 
her 1962 book, which was issued under the auspices 
of the Institute of Race Relations, Dr. Slade examined 
the first European contacts with the Congo, the ac¬ 
quisition and rule of the Congo by Leopold II—which 
she says “has long been obscured by polemic”—and 
the founding of the Congo Free State. Her account 
is carried through the annexation by Belgium in 1908 
and up to the First World War. (In an introductory 
note it is stated that a work in progress by Dr. Roger 
Anstey will bring the story up to 1960.) This work 
lays the historic background for the analysis of more 
recent developments, which this writer offered in her 
booklet of 1960 (no. 1927). 


1898. Stenmans, Alain. La reprise du Congo par 

la Belgique; essai d’histoire parlementaire et 
diplomatique. Bruxelles, Editions techniques 
et scientifiques R. Louis, 1949. 492 p. 

DT652.S8 

A Belgian historian’s study of the end of Leopold 
II’s one-man rule of the Independent State of the 
Congo and the taking over of the territory by Belgium 
in 1908. The last chapters quote and comment on 
the “Charte coloniale,” the Pro jet de loi sur le Congo 
beige, which remained in force as the constitution of 
the colony until independence in 1960. 

A longer history of the Congo Free State in more popular 
style is by Baron Pierre van Zuylen, L’lichiquier congolais, 
ou, Le secret du roi (Bruxelles, C. Dessart, 1959. 515 p.). 

POLITICS 

1899. Artigue, Pierre. Quisont les leaders congolais? 

2. ed. Bruxelles, Editions Europe-Afrique, 
1961. 377 p. (Collection “Carrefours afri- 
cains”) DT663.A2A7 

Biographical sketches of Congolese personalities. A 
preliminary edition came out in 1960 (139 p. “Carre¬ 
fours africains,” 3). The greatly enlarged revision 
contains more than 800 biographies. They vary in 
length from 20 to several hundred words including 
for many individuals account of education and pre¬ 
independence activities, all carefully dated. 

1900. Biebuyck, Daniel, and Mary Douglas. Con¬ 

go: tribes & parties. London, Royal Anthro¬ 
pological Institute, 1961. 49 p. (Royal An¬ 
thropological Institute. Pamphlets no. 1). 

GN2.R65, no.l 

A pamphlet setting forth clearly and concisely the 
political situation of the tribal groups in the Congo. 
Mrs. Douglas of the University of London first analyzed 
results of the 1960 elections, sketching the background 
of tribal history, conflicts and loyalties (three domi¬ 
nant groups, Ba-Kongo, Ba-Luba, Ba-Lunda, among 
200 distinct tribes) and linguistic groupings and in¬ 
fluences (of the four “commercial” languages, Lingala, 
Lumumba’s medium, is dominant in centre and north). 
Then Professor Biebuyck of Lovanium University 
analyzed and tabulated the parties, their tribal affili¬ 
ations, and political objectives. A brief conclusion 
pointed toward hope for a future federal state. Re¬ 
viewed in Africa Report of May 1962. 

1901. Bilsen, A. A. J. van. L’independance du Con¬ 

go. Toumai, Casterman, 1962. 236 p. 

DT657.B48 


286 



Dr. van Bilsen, Professor at the Institut Universi- 
taire des Territoires d’Outre-Mer, is considered one of 
the most impartial of Belgian specialists on problems 
of the Congo. In 1960 he acted as adviser to Kasa- 
vubu at the Brussels Round Table Conference and 
afterward in Leopoldville. This is a compilation of 
articles and documents during the last period of hurried 
preparation for independence, including writings to 
the spring of 1961, after Lumumba’s downfall and 
death. It supplements an earlier work, Vers I’inde- 
pendance du Congo Beige et du Ruanda-Urundi: re¬ 
flexions sur les devoirs et Vavenir de la Belgique en 
Afrique centrale (Kraainem? 1958. 295 p.). In July 
1961 Dr. van Bilsen addressed an audience at Chatham 
House on “Some Aspects of the Congo Problem.” The 
speech, published in the January 1962 issue of Inter¬ 
national Affairs (v. 38, p. 41-51), is a notably clear 
and calm review. The speaker ended with the hope 
that the Congo, once decolonization (i.e., separation 
from Belgian administrative aid) is completely over, 
will quickly establish sufficient government responsibil¬ 
ity to progress with international assistance. 

1902. Brausch, Georges. Belgian administration 

in the Congo. London, New York, Oxford 

University Press, 1961. 92 p. DT657.B7 

Analysis of the preindependence government by a 
former Belgian administrator. It was reviewed in 
Africa Report of May 1962. 

1903. Calder, Ritchie. Agony of the Congo. Lon¬ 

don, Gollancz, 1961. 160 p. maps. 

DT658.C3 

The writer had been in the Congo on a factfinding 
mission for the World Health Organization, and wit¬ 
nessed the events of the postindependence crisis in the 
summer of 1960. 

A longer and even more sensational account, much of it 
in dialogue and personal interviews, is by a Danish journalist 
and African traveler, John L. Brom, who was in the Congo 
in 1960. His spirited narrative was translated by his wife 
into German: Mit schwarzem Blut geschrieben; die Kongo- 
Tragodie. (Miinchen, Doremersche Verlagsanstalt T. 
Knaur Nachf., 1961. 312 p.) 

1904. Centre de Recherche et d’Information 

Socio-Politiques. Congo, 1959; documents 

beiges et africains. Bruxelles, 1960. 319 p. 

(Les Dossiers du C.R.I.S.P.) DT652.C43 

Bibliographic politique sur le Congo en 1959: p. 303-309. 

1905. - Congo 1960, par J. Gerard-Libois et 

Benoit Verhaegen. Bruxelles, [1961?] 2 v. 

map. ( Its Dossiers) DT658.C4 

Bibliographical footnotes. 


1906. - - Annexes et biographies. 

Bruxelles, 1961. 132 p. (Its Dossiers) 

DT658.C4 Suppl. 

1907. - Congo 1961 [par] Benoit Verhaegen. 

Bruxelles, 1962. 691 p. tables (Its Dossiers) 

DLC 

C.R.I.S.P., a group of Belgian scholars, journalists 
and economists, has undertaken this valuable series 
of documents relating to the Congo, which are printed 
with slight connecting text. In Congo 1959 the ar¬ 
rangement was chronological. Congo 1960 provides a 
minutely detailed chronological account of events, with 
interpretative comment and text of documents, through 
the first weeks of July. The second volume contains 
600 biographical sketches and additional documents, 
to complete the picture of the year. The volume for 
1961 concerns mainly the regime in Stanleyville; the 
material regarding the United Nations and the 
Katanga is less full. 

1908. Chome, Jules. La crise congolaise; de Vindi- 

pendance a Vintervention militaire beige (30 
juin-9 juillet) Bruxelles, Editions de Re¬ 
marques congolaises, 1960. 174 p. (Collec¬ 
tion “Etudes congolaises,” no. 4) 

DT657.C45 

1909. - Le gouvernement congolais et I’O.N.U.; 

un paradoxe tragique. Bruxelles, Editions de 
Remarques congolaises [cl961]. 207 p. Col¬ 
lection “Etudes congolaises,” no. 6) 

JX1977.2.C57C5 

1910. - Independance congolaise, paciflque 

conquete; texte de la conference prononcee 
a la tribune du Cercle d’education populaire 
de Bruxelles, le 22 fevrier 1960. Bruxelles, 
Editions de Remarques congolaises, 1960. 
52 p. (Collection “Etudes congolaises,” 
no. 3) DT658.C45 

1911. - La passion de Simon Kimbangu, 1921- 

1951. Bruxelles, Les Amis de Presence afri- 
caine, 1959. 131 p. DT663.K5C5 

Four pamphlets by a spokesman for the Belgian sup¬ 
porters of Congolese independence. See also M. 
Chome’s pamphlet regarding Lumumba (no. 192In). 

1912. Chronique de Politique Etrangere. La 

crise congolaise: janvier 1959-aout 1960. 
Bruxelles, Institut royal des relations intema- 
tionales, 1960. (ca. 500 p.) (Its v. 13,1960, 
no. 4-6) D839.C82, v. 13, no. 4-6 


287 












Three combined issues of this leading Belgian journal 
of international affairs, with documentation on the 
background and beginning of the Congo’s plunge into 
independence. Besides the texts of documents the vol¬ 
ume includes an essay by Fernand van Langenhove, 
former Belgian delegate to the United Nations: “Le 
Congo et les problemes de la decolonisation” (avail¬ 
able also in English translation as a separate). 

1913. - devolution de la crise congolaise de 

septembre 1960 d avril 1961. Bruxelles, In- 
stitut royal des relations intemationales, 1961. 
(Its v. 14, 1961, no. 5-6) 

D839.C82, v. 14, no. 5-6 
A second set of combined issues containing docu¬ 
ments of the course of events in the Congo. 

1914. Congo, Belgian. Force publique. Force pu- 

blique, Congo Beige, 1886-1956. [Leopold¬ 
ville, 1957] unpaged, illus. UA869.C6A54 
Pictorial pamphlet of about 50 pages on the Con¬ 
golese troops who were considered “an eminent factor 
of domestic order and peace ... a magnificent tool 
of civil formation and social progress.” A brief his¬ 
torical note is followed by photographs with captions, 
showing daily life, training, etc. “At the present time 
the officer cadre, from sergeant major up, is still en¬ 
tirely European, drawn from the metropolitan army.” 

1915. Durieux, Andre. Institutions politiques, ad- 

ministratives et judiciaires du Congo beige et 
du Ruanda-Urundi. 2. ed. Bruxelles, Edi¬ 
tions Bieleveld, 1955. 108 p. DLC-LL 

This is a second edition of the “Expose descriptif 
des institutions . . .” included in the Encyclopedic du 
Congo beige which had been published in 1952 as a 
separate offprint and quickly exhausted. The author, 
a professor at the Catholic University of Louvain and 
specialist in colonial legislation, made a number of 
additions to bring up to date the texts of laws and 
decrees regarding the constitutional and administra¬ 
tive setup and judicial system of the Congo. 

1916. Good, Robert C. “Congo crisis: the role of 

the new States.” In Neutralism. Washing¬ 
ton, Washington Center of Foreign Policy 
Research, 1961; p. 1-46. D842.W34 

A review of the Congo crisis from July 1960 through 
April 1961, with emphasis on the attitudes of the new 
African and Asian States in the United Nations. The 
author, who is director of the African branch in the 
Department of State Division of Intelligence Research, 


gave his public sources, largely newspapers and U.N. 
documentation. 

1917. Gordon, King. The United Nations in the 

Congo; a quest for peace. New York, Car¬ 
negie Endowment for International Peace, 
1962. 184 p. illus. DT658.G6 

Not available for examination. 

1918. Kanza, Thomas. Congo 196-? ( tot ou tard — 

At a n’dele). Bruxelles, 1962. 79 p. (Col¬ 
lection “Etudes congolaises”) DLC 

Mr. Kanza was the first Congolese other than those 
training for the clergy to receive a university degree 
in Europe. He has been the representative of the 
Congo Republic at the United Nations, and in 1963 
has gone as Ambassador to London. In 1959 three 
pamphlets of his were published in Brussels: Propos 
d’un Congolais naif; discours sur la vocation coloniale 
dans VAfrique de demain (Les Amis de “Presence 
africaine,” 43 p.); Le Congo a la veille de son inde- 
pendance; ou, Propos d’un Congolais desillusionnS 
(81 p.); and Tot ou tard—(Ata n’dele) (Le Livre 
africain. 87 p). The present work, of which the 
announcement appears in the organ of Amis de Pre¬ 
sence Africaine, Le Livre africain, of November-De- 
cember 1962, is presumably an updating of the earlier 
paper, which had been his comment following the 
riots of January 1959. 

1919. Langenhove, Fernand van. Consciences 

tribales et nationales en Afrique noire. 
Bruxelles, Institut royal des relations inter- 
nationales, 1960. 465 p. illus. DT353.L3 
By the Director of the influential Institute, a political 
scientist who was a former representative of Belgium 
to the United Nations. In this study of nationalism 
and the politics of the emerging states of Black Africa 
he analyzes the interplay of surviving traditional values 
with new cultural standards as background to the situa¬ 
tion in the Congo and Ruanda-Urundi. 

1920. Legum, Colin. Congo disaster. Baltimore, 

Penguin Books, 1961. 174 p. (A Penguin 

special, S191) DT657.L1 

Written in the late summer of 1960 as a background 
to the Congo crisis, and updated to the beginning of 
fighting between the United Nations and the Congo 
National Army in November. 

1921. Lumumba, Patrice. Congo, my country. With 

a foreword by Colin Legum. New York, 
Praeger, 1962. 195 p. illus. (Books that 

matter) DT657.L813 1962 


288 



Lumumba’s book was written in 1956-57, and pub¬ 
lished posthumously in Belgium in 1961 with the title, 
Le Congo, terre d’avenir, est-il menace? Mr. Legum’s 
long preface is an interesting effort to separate truth 
from propaganda in the controversy over Lumumba 
and Lumumbaism. The book, “a historical docu¬ 
ment,” is characteristic of the attitude of the Congo¬ 
lese “moderate” nationalist elite before the climax. 
According to Mr. Legum, Lumumba’s “detailed plans 
for social and political reforms” here stated are valid 
today, a blueprint for the builders of the new Congo. 

Among the profusion of books and pamphlets on the Congo 
crisis, the following journalistic works are directly focused 
on Lumumba, all except those of M. Houart being in part at 
least sympathetic: 

Chome, Jules. M. Lumumba et le communisme; 
variations d partir du livre de M. P. Houart. Bruxel¬ 
les, Editions de Remarques congolaises, 1961. 79 p. 

(Etudes congolaises, no. 5) 

Written in reply to Pierre Houart’s La pinStration 
communiste au Congo; commentaires et documents 
sur les SvSnements de juin-novembre, 1960 (Bruxelles, 
Centre de documentation interna tionale, 1960. 
117 p.). 

Houart, Pierre. Les Svenements du Congo; precisions 
et documents nouveaux sur Vattitude politique des 
leaders congolais et sur les tentatives neo-colonialistes. 
Reponse k la brochure “M. Lumumba et le com- 
munisme.” Bruxelles, Centre de documentation inter¬ 
national, 1961. 41 1. DT658.H6 

Michel, Serge. Uhuru Lumumba. Paris, H. Julliard, 
1962. 269 p. DT663.L8M5 

Rouch, Jane. En cage avec Lumumba. Paris, Les 
Editions du temps, 1961. 189 p. illus. DT658.R6 
Soiuz Zhurnalistov SSSR. Patris Lumumba; pravda 
o chudovitsnom prestudlenii kolonizatorov. Moskva, 
1961. 205 p. illus. DT663.L8S6 

Vos, Pierre de. Vie et mort de Lumumba. Paris, 
Calmann-Levy, 1961. 259 p. illus. (Questions 

d’actualit6). DT663.L8V63 

A study by Robert E. Bartlett, Communist Penetration and 
Subversion of the Belgian Congo, 1946-1960 (Berkeley, Calif., 
Acarn Press, 1962. 42 p.), has not been available for 

examination. 

1922. Merriam, Alan P. Congo, background of con¬ 
flict. Evanston, Ill., Northwestern University 
Press, 1961. 368 p. illus. (Northwestern 

University African studies, no. 6) 

DT657.M4 

Includes bibliography. 

An informative and detailed study of the develop¬ 
ment of the national movement in the Congo, the 
parties and their leaders, and the Belgian background 
for relinquishing authority. This book is reviewed, 
together with those of Legum, Hennessey, and the Bel¬ 


gian Royal Institute of International Relations in 
Africa Report of June 1961. 

1923. Paulus, Jean P. Droit public du Congo beige. 

Bruxelles, Universite libre, Institut de socio- 
logie Solvay, 1959. 519 p. (Etudes coloni- 
ales, 6) DLC-LL 

“Annexes” (p. 439-485) consist of documents and 
legislation. Includes bibliographies. This writer has 
published also a review of legislative and political 
affairs in the last years of the Belgian administration, 
Congo, 1959-1960 (Bruxelles, Editions “Terre 
d’Europe” [1961?] 279 p.). 

1924. Perin, FRANgois. Les institutions politiques du 

Congo independant au 30 juin 1960. Leo¬ 
poldville, Institut politique congolais, 1960. 
151 p. JQ3603.1960.P4 

Annexes (p. 85-151) consist of documents. 

1925. Petillon, Leon. Belgium’s policy in the Bel¬ 

gian Congo; address to the Council of the 
Government of the Belgian Congo, in Leo¬ 
poldville on July 18, 1955. New York, Bel¬ 
gian Govt. Information Center, 1956. 43 p. 
(Art, life and science in Belgium, 2d ser., 
no. 5) DT652.P4 

Address by the Governor-General of the Congo to 
the Council of Government in Leopoldville on July 18, 
1955. The theme was the future Belgo-Congolese 
community—the Belgian solution of the problem of 
race relations, through association implying recipro¬ 
cal rights and privileges. The Governor outlined in 
simple and forthright terms attitudes to be expected 
of Europeans and Congolese and the new institutions 
planned for communal organization, native partici¬ 
pation in public life, higher education for the African 
elite, peasant farm communities and cooperatives, 
land policy, individual credit, and social legislation. 

Governor Petillon in his 1956 speech again stressed re¬ 
lations of “association” between Europeans and Congolese, 
but without defining positive action. A few days later a 
Leopoldville periodical, Conscience africaine, brought out 
a special issue voicing publicly for the first time the political 
aspirations of the evolues in a blueprint for self-government 
in thirty years. This “Manifesto” was promptly followed 
by the more demanding manifesto of ABAKO. For de¬ 
tails, see work by Slade, below). 

1926. Ryckmans, Pierre. “Belgian colonialism.” 

Foreign affairs, v. 34, Oct. 1955: 89-101. 

D410.F6, v. 34 

A defense of the Belgian system of government in¬ 
dependent territories, which the writer, former Gov¬ 
ernor-General of the Belgian Congo and in 1955 Bel- 


289 


gian representative on the Trusteeship Council, had 
formulated earlier in a classic statement, Dominer 
pour servir (1931; nouvelle edition rev. et augmentee, 
Bruxelles, Edition universelle, 1948. 189 p.). 

1927. Slade, Ruth M. The Belgian Congo: some 

recent changes. Issued under the auspices 
of the Institute of Race Relations. London, 
New York, Oxford University Press, 1960. 
55 p. illus. DT652.S5 

Dr. Slade’s booklet, which appeared in early 1960 
before the granting of the promised independence, 
was the first, and for several months the only, analyt¬ 
ical review in English of the background of Belgium’s 
sudden relinquishment of her three decades of be¬ 
nevolent paternalism. 

ECONOMICS 

(including Population) 

1928. Belgium. Ministere des affaires africaines. 

Direction de l’agriculture, des forets et de 
l’elevage. Volume jubilaire du Bulletin 
agricole du Congo beige et du Ruanda- 
Urundi, 1910-1960. Bruxelles, 1960. 
226 p. illus. S471.C75A48 

Published by the Ministry under its earlier name, Minis¬ 
tere du Congo beige et du Ruanda-Urundi. 

Fiftieth anniversary volume of the official journal 
which has been the main source of current informa¬ 
tion on Congolese agriculture. The work, setting 
forth the history and accomplishments of Belgian agri¬ 
cultural endeavor in the Congo, appeared almost 
simultaneously with the independence proclamation. 
“Beyond the inquietude and disorder of today, Bel¬ 
gium leaves to the Congo all the elements of a pro¬ 
digious agricultural treasure—a universally admired 
research institution [INEAC], agronomic doctrine and 
agricultural experiments ripened and brought to per¬ 
fection in efficient plantations, model stockraising, 
well-equipped forest or industrial enterprises, pay- 
sannats which prefigure the modem agriculture of 
tomorrow.” 

1929. Belgium. Ministere des affaires africaines. 

Direction des etudes economiques. La sit¬ 
uation economique au Congo beige et Ru¬ 
anda-Urundi, 1950-1959. Bruxelles, 1951— 
60. tables, charts, annual. 1959 ed., 272 p. 
84 tables. HC591.C6A32 

Yearly survey of the economy, relating to the Congo 
only from 1950-54, then including Ruanda-Urundi. 


All features of economic life are thoroughly covered 
in tabulated data from official and private sources. 
For some years editions were issued also in English. 

1930. Bezy, F. Problemes structured de Veconomie 

congolaise. Louvain, Institut de recherches 
economiques et sociales, 1957. 285 p., tables, 

charts. HC591.C6B49 

In this review of the economic structure of the 
Belgian Congo and Ruanda-Urundi (the latter in an 
appendix) a professor at Lovanium University found 
the keyword to be stability under the “mission civilisa- 
trice,” pursued in serenity. His analysis, however, 
pointed out problem areas in the promising picture. 

1931. Brussels. Universite libre. Institut de 

sociologie Solvay. Vers le promotion de Veco¬ 
nomie indigene; compte rendu du Colloque 
colonial sur l’economie indigene; 9-13 jan. 
1956. Bruxelles, 1956. 600 p. (Its Etudes 
coloniales, fasc. 3) HC591.C6B7 

Text in French or English. 

Papers at an international conference organized in 
collaboration with the Centre Scientifique et Medicale 
de l’Universite Libre de Bruxelles en Afrique Centrale. 
The contributions by eminent spokesmen were mostly 
concerned with the Congo, though a few were on 
British or French territories. Among topics aired were 
socioeconomic aspects of development, traditional 
economies, the role of rice in nutrition in the Congo, 
modernization of agricultural methods, allotments to 
paysannats, agricultural products, cooperative move¬ 
ments, handicrafts, electrification, social welfare funds, 
African land rights, etc. 

1932. Fabri, Marcel, and Jean Mayer. La popula¬ 

tion future du Congo, perspectives demo- 
graphiques. Bruxelles, Centre d’etude des 
problemes sociaux et professionnels de la 
technique, 1959. 55 p. diagrs., tables. 

HB3670.5.F3 

Basic technical monograph on demographic prob¬ 
lems. 

1933. Federation des Entreprises Congolaises. 

The Congolese economy on the eve of inde¬ 
pendence. Brussels, Federation of Con¬ 
golese Enterprises, 1960. 84 p. tables. DLC 
A large processed brochure issued in English trans¬ 
lation by this organization, which groups most of the 
major companies in the Congo. It comprises an opti- 


290 


mistic review of the expansion of the Congolese econ¬ 
omy during the fifties, frankly stressing successes. The 
last chapter cites statistical sources. 

1934. Gourou, Pierre. La densite de la population 

rurale au Congo beige. Bruxelles, 1955. 
168 p. map. (Academie royale des sciences 
coloniales. Classe des sciences nature lies et 
medicales. Memoires in-8°, n.s. t. 1, fasc. 2) 
Q111.B78, n.s. 1.1, fasc. 2 
Monograph by an economist known for many stud¬ 
ies of Africa, professor at the College de France and 
the Universite Libre of Brussels. 

1935. Journees d’Etudes Coloniales, Institut uni- 

versitaire de territoires d’outre-mer, Antwerp, 
1957. Promotion de la societe rurale du 
Congo beige et du Ruanda-Urundi; rapport 
general . . . Bruxelles, Direction de 1’agri¬ 
culture, des forets et de l’elevage, 1958. 
282 p. tables. HN819.J6 

The report of this conference includes papers and 
syntheses of communications on many aspects of agri¬ 
cultural society and development—the paysannats, 
social action, handicrafts, cooperatives, stockraising, 
fisheries, industrialization, purchasing power, educa¬ 
tion, etc. In the conclusions the first “indisputable” 
principle is named as the stability of the functionaries, 
the Belgian administrators. 

1936. Lefebvre, Jacques. Structures economiques 

du Congo beige et du Ruanda-Urundi. 
Bruxelles, Editions du Treurenberg, 1955. 
142 p. maps. HC591.C6L4 

By a professor at the Institut Catholique des Hautes 
fitudes Commerciales in Brussels, this is a concise sur¬ 
vey of population, production, transport, energy, social 
services, finances, foreign trade, and other aspects of 
economic development. 

1937. Pinxten, Karel. De inlandse landbouwbedrij- 

ven in Belgisch-Kongo en Ruanda-Urundi. 
Brussel, Ministerie van Kolonien, Landbouw- 
directie, 1954. 2 v. illus. maps. 

HD2140.P5 

Authoritative scholarly study of agronomic and eco¬ 
nomic aspects of the systems of intensified agriculture 
being adopted after the Second World War in rural 
areas of the Congo—the so-called paysannats indi¬ 
genes. 

1938. Skinner, Snider W. The agricultural econ¬ 

omy of the Belgian Congo and Ruanda- 


Urundi. Reissue. Washington, U.S. Dept, 
of Agriculture, Mar. 1962. 52 p. (ERS- 
Foreign-22) DLG 

Previously issued in Foreign Agricultural Service, FAS-M- 
88, 1960. 

For general note on this series, see no. 445. 

1939. Trewartha, Glenn T., and Wilbur Zelin¬ 

sky. “Population geography of Belgian Afri¬ 
ca.” In Association of American Geographers, 
Annals, v. 44, June 1954: 163-193. 

G3.A7, v. 44 

Technical paper by two geographers at the Uni¬ 
versity of Wisconsin, analyzing general patterns of 
population and numbers distribution. The authors 
treated the Belgian dependencies as a test case of such 
a study for an area in which sources of data and field 
experience are deficient compared with those available 
for more advanced nations. This article immediately 
succeeds a comparable paper of broader regional ap¬ 
plication by the same scholars, “Population Patterns in 
Tropical Africa” {ibid., p. 135-162). Both papers 
have footnote references, and the first is followed by 
bibliographical appendixes listing maps and statistical 
sources. 

1940. Wigny, Pierre. A ten year plan for the eco¬ 

nomic and social development of the Belgian 
Congo. New York, Belgian Government In¬ 
formation Center, 1950. 72 p. (Art, life 

and science in Belgium, no. 10) 

HC591.C6W5 

A summarization of the ideals and purposes of the 
Belgian plan for development of the Congo economy, 
which was designed to raise the standard of living of 
the Congolese. The writer, who was Minister for the 
Colonies, emphasized throughout that the future de¬ 
pended on the Congolese, that the primary considera¬ 
tion must be their welfare and education: “Improve¬ 
ment in the natives’ living conditions is the justification 
of our presence and the moral reward of our efforts. 
But . . . this policy is imperative for economic reasons 
as well,” that is, for an internal market of consumers. 
The program allocated to public services—agricultural 
development, native housing, drinking water, educa¬ 
tion and training for the natives—a large portion of its 
budget. 

The official publication here summarized by the Minister 
was issued in 1949, Plan decennal pour le developpement 
economique et social du Congo beige (Printed for the Mi- 
nistere des Colonies by De Visscher, Brussels, 1949. 2 v., 

xxxxiii, 601 p.). 


692 - 756 — 63 - 


-20 


291 


SOCIAL SCIENCES 

1941. Annaert, Jean. Contribution a Vetude geo- 

graphique de Vhabitat et de Vhabitation in¬ 
digenes en milieu rural dans les provinces 
Orient ale et du Kivu. Bruxelles, 1960. 
162 p. (Academie royale des sciences 
d’outremer. Classe des sciences naturelles 
et medicales. Memoires in-8°, n.s., t. 10, 
fasc. 3) DLC 

1942. Baumer, Guy. Centres indigenes extra-coutu- 

miers au Congo beige. Paris, Domat-Mont- 
chrestien, 1939. 239 p. (Paris. Universite. 
Institut de droit compare. Etudes de socio- 
logie et d’ethnologie juridiques, 30). 

DLG-LL 

Presented as a thesis for a degree in law, this study 
is often cited as an authoritative examination of rela¬ 
tions between the hereditary chiefs and those appointed 
by the European administration. 

1943. Caprasse, Pierre. Leaders africains en milieu 

urbain, Elisabethville. Bruxelles, Impr. Ami- 
bel, 1959. 171 p. illus. (L’Universite catho- 
lique de Louvain. Collection de l’Ecole des 
sciences politiques et sociales, no. 162) 

HN819.C25 

Based on a study carried out in the Centre extra- 
coutumier d’Elisabethville in 1956-57, this is a theo¬ 
retical analysis of types of leaders. No names are used, 
the typical leaders being designated as A, B, C, etc. 

1944. Centre d’Information et de Documentation 

du Congo Belge et du Ruanda-Urundi. 
Social action in the Belgian Congo and 
Ruanda-Urundi. New York, Belgian Gov¬ 
ernment Information Center, 1954. 128 p. 
illus. HV460.C42 

Orientation booklet reviewing in simple terms the 
principles, objectives, and instruments of Belgian social 
policy in the Congo. Among aspects treated are the 
missions, social centers, conditions of labor, medical 
and health services, social services, teaching and educa¬ 
tion. Statistics are of 1952. 

Publications in French and Flemish of the former Centre 
d’Information et de Documentation (later INFORCONGO) 
were for orientation purposes, including general reports, com¬ 
mercial statistics, maps, customs, requirements, directories, 
etc. A useful directory was the Liste des societ&s et institutions 
coloniales ayant un siege en Belgique et au Congo beige ou au 
Ruanda-Urundi (Bruxelles, 1954. 74 p.). A series of in¬ 

formative brochures was “Pour connaitre le Congo”; its first 
two parts were UEconomie du Congo beige et du Ruanda- 
Urundi (2. ed. Bruxelles, 1955. 67 p.) and U.Exploitation 


des richesses minieres du Congo beige et du Ruanda-Urundi 
(1955, 163 p.). 

1945. Denis, Jacques. Le phenomene urbain en 

Afrique centrale. Bruxelles, 1958. 407 p. 
(Academie royale des sciences coloniales. 
Classe des sciences morales et politiques. 
Memoires in-8°. n.s., t. 19, fasc. 1) 

DT641.A27, n.s., 1.19, fasc. 1 

Bibliography: p. 371-394. 

Study of the cities and city life that have sprung 
into being with rapid industrialization. The writer, 
a Jesuit priest and geographer, is concerned partic¬ 
ularly with the Congolese centers, although he in¬ 
cludes in his analysis the cities of Equatorial Africa, 
Angola and Mozambique, Rhodesia, and Uganda. 
He has used material from over 400 sources listed in 
his bibliography. The work is critically reviewed in 
Africa , April 1961. 

In this connection, the bibliography by P. Verhaegen, 
L’Urbanisation de VAfrique noire, in the CIDESA series 
(no. 226) will be useful. 

1946. Doucy, Arthur, and Pierre Feldheim. Pro¬ 

blems du travail et politique sociale au Congo 
beige. Bruxelles, Librairie encyclopedique, 
1952. 156 p. HD8819.D68 

The authors spent several months in the Katanga 
mining communities under the auspices of the Insti¬ 
tut pour la Recherche Scientifique en Afrique Centrale 
and an institute of the University of Brussels, study¬ 
ing the social economy of the Congolese peoples and 
evaluating methods and results of official policy of 
social and cultural development. They reviewed 
social legislation, discussed African participation in the 
European industrial enterprises demographically and 
as to reasons for the stability—or rather, the extreme 
instability—of the labor force and its low level of 
productivity, and considered African labor unions, 
housing, and the problem of assimilation. They 
ended by examining changes in the forms of paternal¬ 
ism, suggesting that it should begin to give way to 
a new social policy. 

1947. - Travailleurs indigenes et productivity 

du travail au Congo beige. Bruxelles, Uni¬ 
versite libre de Bruxelles, Institut de sociolo¬ 
gy Solvay, 1958. 234 p. (Etudes colo¬ 
niales, 5) DLC 

Not available for examination. 

1948. Lambert, Pierre. Traite elementale de 

legislation sociale du Congo beige. Bruxel¬ 
les, F. Larcier, 1956. 143 p. DLC-LL 


292 



A legal treatise explaining provisions of social legis¬ 
lation affecting both Europeans and Congolese under 
the Belgian administration. 

1949. Perin-Hockers, Maryse. L’absenteisme des 

travailleurs africains et Vinstabilite dans les 
entreprises de la region d’Elisabethville, 1957- 
1958; enquete preliminaire realisee pour le 
Centre d’etude des problemes sociaux in¬ 
digenes. Bruxelles, Universite libre de Bruxel¬ 
les, Institut de sociologie Solvay, 1959. 
256 p. (Etudes coloniales, 7) DLC 

1950. Poupart, Robert. Premiere esquisse de revo¬ 

lution du syndicalisme au Congo. Bruxel¬ 
les, Editions de l’lnstitut de sociologie Sol¬ 
vay, Universite libre, 1960. 234 p. (Centre 
d’etude des problemes sociaux de l’indus- 
trialisation en Afrique noire. Etudes.) 

DLC 

Not examined. 

1951. Turnbull, Colin M. The lonely African. 

New York, Simon & Schuster, 1962. 251 p. 
illus. DT647.T8 

The author of The Forest People (no. 1968) in this 
book presents the dilemma of Africans in the transi¬ 
tion from tribal society to the modern world through 
the interesting device of personal testimonies of se¬ 
lected individuals in rural regions of the Congo. 

1952. U.S. Public Health Service. Republic of the 

Congo (formerly the Belgian Congo) a study 
of health problems and resources, by Jane H. 
Priest. Washington, U.S. Dept, of Health, 
Education, and Welfare, Public Health 
Service, Division of International Health, 
1960. 115 p. tables. (Publication 

no. 806) RA407.5.C75U6 

Thorough survey in great detail regarding dis¬ 
eases, health resources, medical supplies, etc. Ap¬ 
pendix A is a full list of hospitals in operation Jan. 1, 
1956. 

ETHNOLOGY AND LINGUISTICS 

Bibliography 

1953. Bibliographie ethnographique de VAfrique sud- 

saharienne [formerly . . . du Congo beige et 
des regions avoisinantes]. Tervuren, Musee 
royal de 1’Afrique centrale, 1932+ annual. 

Z5113.T33 


This extensive annotated bibliography of books and 
periodical articles in ethnological fields relating not 
only to the Congo but to most of sub-Saharan Africa 
has appeared annually since 1932. The first volume 
covered literature from 1925-30. Until 1960 it ap¬ 
peared under authorship of the Musee Royal du Congo 
Beige; with the volume in 1961, covering literature of 
1959, the adjective Beige was dropped from both 
author and title, and now the volume for 1960, pub¬ 
lished in 1962, appears under the new style. For some 
years the bibliography has been edited by Olga Boone. 
In the 1960 volume there are 355 pages, with about 
5 annotated entries to the page. The arrangement is 
alphabetical by author, with indexes of subjects, names 
of peoples, and countries. Increasingly over the years 
attention has been given to writings on the “neighbor¬ 
ing regions” as well as to the very thoroughly covered 
literature on the former Belgian territories. 


1954. Bulck, G. van. Les recherches linguistiques 

au Congo beige; resultats acquis, nouvelles 
enquetes a entreprendre. Bruxelles, Van 
Campenhout, 1948. 767 p. (Institut royale 
colonial beige. Section des sciences morales 
et politiques. Memoires in-8°, t. 16). 

DT641.A25, v. 16 
The author is a foremost authority on Congolese 
linguistics, and this big volume brings together the 
results of studies to the date of its publication. The 
following year Father van Bulck’s Manuel de linguis- 
tique bantoue was published as No. 3 of Tome 17 of 
this series. He and other Belgian scholars have pub¬ 
lished in this series several papers on language maps of 
the Congo (G. Hulstaert, Carte linguistique du Congo 
beige, t. 19, no. 5, 1950. 67 p., map; G. van Bulck, 
Les deux cartes linguistiques du Congo beige, 
t. 25, no. 2, 1952. 68 p.; L. de Boeck, Contribu¬ 
tion a Vatlas linguistique du Congo beige, t. 29, no. 3, 
1953. 82 p., 6 maps; G. van Bulck, Mission linguis¬ 
tique 1949-1951. t. 31, no. 5, 1954. 77 p.; G. Hul¬ 
staert, Au sujet de deux cartes linguistiques du Congo 
beige, t. 37, pt. 1,1954. 55 p.). 

1955. BurssenSj H. Les peuplades de Ventre Congo- 

Ubangi (Ngbandi, Ngbaka, Mbandja, 
Ngombe, et Gens d’Eau) London, Interna¬ 
tional African Institute, 1958. 219 p. fold, 
map. (Ethnographic survey of Africa: Cen¬ 
tral Africa, Belgian Congo, pt. 4) 

GN654.B85 


293 




Published also in the series of Annales du Musee Royal 
du Congo beige. Sciences de. 1’homme. Monographies 
ethnographiques, 4. 

Reviewed in Africa , January 1960. 

1956. Burton, W. F. P. Luba religion and magic in 

custom and belief. Tervuren, Musee royal 
d’Afrique centrale, 1961. 193 p. illus., map. 
(Annales, Ser. no.-8°, Sciences humaines, 35) 
GN654.T4, no. 35 

1957. Caeneghem, R. La notion de Dieu chez les 

baLuba du Kasai. Bruxelles, 1956. 204 p. 

(Academie royale des sciences coloniales, 
Classe des sciences morales et politiques. 
Memoires. Collection in-8°. n.s.: Ethno¬ 
graphic, t. 9, fasc. 2) 

DT641.A25, n.s. t. 9, fasc. 2 
This and the preceding monograph, both on the 
religion of the dominant tribe of Kasai Province, 
typify a theme often studied in the Memoires 
ethnological series. It was given notable expression 
in the fundamental work on the soil of the Bantu by 
Father Tempels (see no. 291). 

1958. Cleene, N. de. Introduction a Vethnographic 

du Congo beige et du Rwanda-Burundi. 2. 
ed. completee. Anvers, Editions de Sikkel, 
1957. 159 p. illus. (Kongo-Overzee 

bibliotheek, 9) DT650.C55 1957 

Includes bibliographies. 

Concentrated basic work by a professor at the In- 
stitut Universitaire des Terri toires d’Outre-Mer. 
After a general discussion of ethnology and its aims 
he examines the populations of the Belgian territories 
in three classes: pygmies, agricultural peoples, and 
pastoral peoples. For each he summarizes informa¬ 
tion on their material, social, spiritual, and political 
life. For the agricultural peoples there are separate 
chapters on such aspects as intellectual life and 
esthetics. Bibliographies follow each chapter. Many 
of the references are to the Memoires of the Academie 
Royale des Sciences d’Outre-Mer. 

A companion volume in this orientation series is by Amaat 
F. S. Burssens, Introduction d Vetude des langues bantoues 
du Congo beige (Anvers, Editions de Sikkel, 1954. 152 p. 

Kongo-Overzee bibliotheek, 8) 

1959. Geluwe, H. van. Les Bali et les peuplades 

apparentees (Ndaka, Mbo, Beke, Lika, Budu, 
Nyari) Tervuren, 1960. ix, 130 p. fold, 
map. (Annales du Musee royal du Congo 
beige, Tervuren (Belgique) Serie in-8°. 


Sciences de l’homme. Monographies ethno¬ 
graphiques, v. 5) DT650.G38 1960a 

Issued also as: Ethnographic Survey of Africa: Central 
Africa, Belgian Congo, pt. 5. Bibliography: p. 115-122. 

1960. - Les Bira et les peuplades limitrophes. 

Tervuren, 1956. ix, 165 p. fold. map. 
(Annales du Musee royal du Congo beige. 
Serie in-8°. Sciences de 1’homme. Mono¬ 
graphies ethnographiques, v. 2) DLC 

Issued also as Ethnographic Survey of Africa: Central 
Africa, Belgian Congo, pt. 2. Bibliography: p. 155-161. 

1961. - Mamvu-Mangutu et Balese-Mvuba. 

London, International African Institute, 
1957. xv, 195 p. fold. map. (Ethnographic 
survey of Africa. Central Africa: Belgian 
Congo, pt. 3) GN655.M25G4 1957 

Issued also as Annales du Musee royal du Congo Beige. 
Sciences de l’homme: monographies ethnographiques, 3. 
Bibliography: p. 175-182. 

1962. Maes, Joseph, and Olga Boone. Les peu¬ 

plades du Congo beige: nom et situation geo- 
graphique. Bruxelles, Impr. Veuve Mon- 
nom, 1935. 379 p. (Musee royal du Congo 
beige. Publications du Bureau de documen¬ 
tation ethnographique. Serie 2— Mono¬ 
graphies ideologiques, v. 1) DT650.M3 

Inventory of tribes and groupings, with geographic 
locations, variant names, etc. Index of place and 
tribal names. 

1963. Panetta, Ester. I pigmei e i pigmoidi 

africani; etnologia, poesia e canti. Parma, 
Guanda, 1959. 169 p. illus. (Collana di 

ethnologia, n. 1) GN660.P9P3 

Includes music. 

1964. Schebesta, Paul. Among Congo pygmies; tr. 

from the German by Gerald Griffin. Lon¬ 
don, Hutchinson, 1932. 287 p. 

DT650.S32 

1965. - My pygmy and Negro hosts. London, 

Hutchinson, 1936. 287 p. DT650.S35 

1966. - Revisiting my pygmy hosts. London, 

Hutchinson, 1936. 288 p. DT650.S332 
The German anthropologist Father Schebesta was 
an authority on Negritos, his work on the pygmies of 
Africa constituting a part only of his Pygmaenvolker 
der Erde. The studies of the Ituri Forest pygmies, 
first issued in German editions and brought out by 
Hutchinson in English, were given definitive publica¬ 
tion in the Memoires of the Academie Royale du 


294 






Congo Beige ( Die Bambuti-Pygmaen von Ituri: 
Ergebnisse zweier Forschungsreisen zu den zentral- 
afrikanischen Pygmaen. Bruxelles, Hayez, 1938-50. 
2 v. in 4. illus. Memoires. Classe des sciences 
morales et politiques. Coll. in-4°. t. 1,2, 4, 5). The 
first volume covered history, geography, environment, 
demography, and anthropology. The second volume, 
published in three parts, was a detailed ethnological 
study of two groups of the pygmies. 

1967. Sohier, Antoine. Traite elementaire de droit 

coutumier du Congo beige. 2. ed. rev. et 
augm. Bruxelles, F. Larcier, 1954. 206 p. 

DLC-LL 

Customary law is treated also in the general compi¬ 
lation by Jean Sohier, Repertoire general de la juris¬ 
prudence et de la doctrine coutumieres du Congo et du 
Ruanda-Urundi jusqu’au 31 decembre 1953. (Bruxel¬ 
les, Maison F. Larcier, 1957. 975 p.) 

1968. Turnbull, Colin M. The forest people. 

New York, Simon & Schuster, 1961. 288 p. 
illus. DT650.T8 

Personal experience with the pygmies of the Congo 
forest, setting scholarly ethnological data on the social 
life of this people, uniquely adjusted to their environ¬ 
ment, in the frame of a readable narrative which has 
reached bestseller lists. The author, an Oxford- 
trained anthropologist, had begun his interest in the 
pygmies while working in the Ituri forest establishment 
of Patrick Putnam, longtime friend of the pygmies. 
Camp Putnam was described after Putnam’s death by 
his wife, Anne E. Putnam, in her Madami; My Eight 
Years of Adventure with the Congo Pigmies (New 
York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 303 p.). 

1969. Vandewoude, Emiel J. L. M. Documents 

pour servir a la connaissance des populations 
du Congo beige. Apergu historique (1886- 
1933) de l’etude des populations autochtones, 
par les fonctionnaires et agents du Service ter¬ 
ritorial, suivi de l’inventaire des etudes his- 
toriques, ethnographiques et linguistiques 
conservees aux Archives du Congo beige. 
Leopoldville, Section Documentation des 
Archives du Congo beige, 1958. 245 p. 

(Archives du Congo beige, no. 2) Z3631. V3 

Beginning with an essay on the studies carried out by 
the agents of the Administration in the Congo during 
the years from the creation of the Free State to 1933, 
this large processed volume lists 563 papers preserved 
in the Archives. Many of them are notes of two or 
three pages, others reports of considerable size. There 


are indexes of personal names, places, ethnic and lin¬ 
guistic terms, and appendixes explaining official in¬ 
structions for collecting and preserving the material. 

1970. Vansina, Jan. Les tribus Ba-Kuba et les 

peuplades apparentees. London, Interna¬ 
tional African Institute, 1954. 64 p. fold, 
map. (Ethnographic survey of Africa: 
Central Africa, Belgian Congo, pt. 1) 

DT650.V3 

Published also as: Annales du Musee royal du Congo beige. 
Sciences de rhomme. Monographies ethnographiques, 1. 
Bibliography: p.57-62. 

1971. Wing, Joseph van. Etudes Bakongo; sociolo- 

gie, religion et magie. 2. ed. Bruges, 
Desclee, De Brouwer, 1959. 512 p. illus. 
(Museum Lessianum. Section missiologique, 
no. 39) GN654.W5 1959 

Includes bibliography. 

A celebrated study by a Jesuit priest who had been 
a missionary in Kisantu; published first in 1930-37. 
The revision has a number of changes and additions. 
Other studies by Father van Wing appear in the list 
of publishers of the Academie Royale des Sciences 
d’Outre-Mer. 

1972. Wolfe, Alvin W. In the Ngombe tradition; 

continuity and change in the Congo. Evans¬ 
ton, Ill., Northwestern University Press, 1961. 
167 p. illus., map, table. (Northwestern 
University, Evanston, Ill., African studies, no. 
7). DT650.W6 

Based on field research in the early fifties, this is a 
careful study, in part technical, of two branches of the 
Ngombe people: The Gonji Ngombe of the Congo 
forest in the northwest part of Equatorial Province, 
and the Moswea Ngombe of the grassland region near 
the Ubangi river. The author gives ethnographic data 
analyzing the cultural traditions and changes between 
the two systems. Reviewed in Africa Report, October 
1962. 

MISSIONS, EDUCATION, AND 
ARTS 

1973. Andersson, Efraim. Messianic popular 

movements in the Lower Congo. Uppsala, 
Almqvist & Wiksells boktr. 1958. xiii, 
287 p. illus., plates (part col.) (Studiaethno- 
graphica Upsaliensia, 14) GN654.A7 

Distributed by W. S. Heineman, New York. Bibliography: 
p. xi—xiii. 


295 




The most comprehensive account in English of 
Simon Kimbangu and his cult of Ngunzism, with 
background and examination of other “prophet 
movements” in French Equatorial Africa. The 
writer, a former missionary, whose experience in the 
Congo ranged over 20 years, during his last term 
(1945-49) had collected all possible material on 
Kimbangu. He was unable to gain access to official 
archives in Leopoldville and Brazzaville, but in addi¬ 
tion to printed sources he was able to make use of 
firsthand information from other missionaries and 
many African collaborators. 

1974. Annuaire des missions catholiques au Congo 

beige et au Ruanda-Urundi. Bruxelles, 
L’Edition universelle, 1949. 671 p. maps. 

BV3625.C6A5 

Edited by the Rev. J. van Wing, S. J., and V. Goeme, 
S.J. Includes history, current organization, locations, 
number of converts, directory of priests, etc. The 1949 
volume is the 3d edition, the 2d edition having been 
in 1935. 

1975. Bol, Jean M. van. La presse quotidienne au 

Congo beige. Bruxelles, Pensee catholique, 
1959. 112 p. (Etudes sociales, 3. ser. 23- 
24) PN5499.C6B6 

Academic study of the African press in the Congo, 
based on analysis of the dailies. The author sketches 
the history of early missionary presses and examines 
present-day conditions, liberty of press, etc. Part 2, 
page 59-105, is a systematic study of nine individual 
dailies, beginning with Courrier d’Afrique. 

A comprehensive listing, Repertoire de la presse du Congo 
beige ( 1884-1958) et du Ruanda-Urundi (1920-1958) , by 
Jean Berlage (Bruxelles, Commission beige de bibliographie, 
1959. 193 p. Bibliographia belgica 43) names 662 peri¬ 

odicals and newspapers, with beginning, and where appro¬ 
priate, closing dates for practically all. 

1976. Braekman, E. M. Histoire du protestantisme 

au Congo. Bruxelles, Librairie des eclai- 
reurs unionistes, 1961. 391 p. 4BX1788 

(Collection “Histoire du protestantisme en Belgique et 
au Congo beige,” t. 5) 

Not available for examination. See also work by 
Ruth Slade in section on History (no. 1896). 

1977. Gorissen, Pierre. “Public libraries and read¬ 

ing in the Congo”; tr. by Evelyn Gelber. 
Wilson library bulletin, v. 37, September 
1962: 49-56. Z1217.W75, v. 32 

A somewhat discouraging review of the situation of 
public libraries in the Congo, which were begun for 


African readers only in 1946, and after an initial spurt 
have stagnated or declined. This article appeared 
too late to be included in the Library of Congress 
bibliography, African Libraries, Book Production, and 
Archives, in which there were no recent entries for 
the section on the Congo. 

1978. Jadot, Joseph M. Les ecrivains africains du 

Congo beige et du Ruanda-Urundi', une 
histoire, un bilan, des problemes. Bruxelles, 

1959. 166 p. (Academie royale des sciences 

coloniales. Classe des sciences morales et 
politiques. Memoires in-8°, n.s., t. 17, fasc. 
2) DT641.A27 n.s., t. 17, fasc. 2 

Includes bibliography. 

By the President of the Belgian Association of 
Colonial Writers and Artists, a staff member of the 
Academie Royale des Sciences d’Outre-Mer. His his¬ 
tory of African writing in the Congo goes back to the 
foundation of the Free State and includes names of 
periodicals and books, poems, etc., by Africans. The 
“bilan” gives more exact data on the authors. Among 
the problems M. Jadot discusses is that which 
prompted his study, the need for some professional 
organization and promotion of education. There is 
a five-page bibliography. 

1979. Kochnitzky, Leon. Negro art in Belgian 

Congo. 3d rev. ed. New York, Belgian Gov¬ 
ernment Information Center, 1952. 83 p. 

illus. (Art, life and science of Belgium, 
no. 10) N7397.C6K6 1952 

Descriptive essay and 40 pages of plates. This 
booklet is one of a conspicuous series issued to inform 
the American reading public about Belgian affairs. 
The Belgian Congo is one of the important art regions 
of Africa, and many specimens of carving from the 
Congo will be found in the general books on art in 
Africa. 

Another official booklet, by G. D. Perier, Les arts popu¬ 
lates du Congo beige, published by the Office de Publicity 
in Brussels (Collection nationale, 1948. 77 p.), analyzed 

native rhythm, music and dance, weaving, architecture, as 
well as pottery, painting, and sculpture. 

1980. Maistriaux, Robert. Les methodes actives en 

terre d’Afrique; une experience pedagogique 
pilote au Congo. Bruxelles, EDITEST, 

1960. 142 p. illus. LB1027.M316 

By the author of UIntelligence noire et son destin, 

this monograph explains and draws conclusions from 
the data resulting from an experiment in an “activity 
program” carried out in teaching Bantu children. The 
writer repeats his thesis that African children need 3 or 


296 


4 years of special teaching to catch up to their Euro¬ 
pean counterparts. 

1981. Meeus, Franciscus de, and R. Steenberg- 

hen. Les missions religieuses au Congo 
beige. Anvers, Editions Zaire, 1947. 209 p. 

BV3625.C6M4 

Useful sketch of the history, work, and status of mis¬ 
sions—mainly Catholic but also touching on Protes¬ 
tant—in the Congo. There are included several 
tables of congregations, missionary societies, etc. A 
long bibliography (p. 199-207) cites an extensive lit¬ 
erature studied. The authors are two Benedictine 
monks. 

1982. Olbrechts, Frans M. Les arts plastiques du 

Congo beige. [Illus. de J. Van Noten] 

Bruxelles, Editions Erasme, 1959. 161 p. 

plates. NB1097.C7504 

Scholarly treatise on the sculpture, ceramics, and 
other works of plastic art of the Ba-Congo, Ba-Kuba, 

Ba-Luba, northeast and northwest Congo. Fine 
plates. This French version, posthumously published, 
is translated from the Dutch original of 1946. Sources 

Katanga 

Deluxe volume published for the 50th anniversary of 
the Special Committee of Katanga, which was estab¬ 
lished in 1900. The writer, whose father, a geologist, 
had been one of the pioneers in the exploration of 
this district famous for its mineral wealth, had pub¬ 
lished an earlier history on the same subject, Katanga 
(3d ed., Brussels, Cuypers, 1946). In the present 
work he described graphically the early expeditions, 
the formation of the country, and the development of 
its great mining industries and other economic 
progress. The book is handsomely illustrated with 
photographs and drawings. Mr. Comet was at the 
time editor of the leading popular journal devoted to 
the Belgian Congo, the Revue coloniale beige. 

1988. Davister, Pierre. Katanga enjeu du monde; 

recits et documents. Bruxelles, Editions 
Europe-Afrique [c1960] 315 p. (Collection 
“Carrefours africains,” 5) DT665.K3D3 

A journalist’s eyewitness account of events in and 
involving Katanga immediately before and after in¬ 
dependence, to the end of 1960. The attempt is at 
strict objectivity. 

1989. Elisabethville, 1911-1961. Bruxelles, L. Cuy¬ 
pers, 1961. 265 p. DT665.E4E4 


Bibliography 

1985. Walraet, Marcel. Bibliographie du Katanga. 
Bruxelles, 1954-60. 3 v. maps. (Publica¬ 
tions du Comite special du Katanga. Ser. 
C. Bibliographie, t. 14, fasc. 1-2) 

Z3693.K3W3 

In addition to this comprehensive coverage of 
literature on the Katanga for recent years, a third 
fascicle, covering the years 1925-49, was published 
by the Academie Royale des Sciences d’Outre-Mer 
(Memoires, Classe des sciences morales et politiques. 
Serie in-8°, n.s., t. 23, fasc. 4). 


1986. Congo Republic (Leopoldville) Ministry of 

Foreign Affairs. Document Division. The 
province of Katanga and Congolese inde¬ 
pendence. Leopoldville, 1962. 62 p. (Its 
Publication no. 1). MBU 

1987. Cornet, Rene J. Terre katangaise; cinquan- 

tieme anniversaire du Comite special du 
Katanga, 1900-1950. [Bruxelles?] 1950. 
317 p. illus., maps. DT665.K3C63 


are indicated in “Bibliography and Notes,” p. 131-140. 

1983. Pevee, Albert. Place aux noirs. Bruxelles, 

Editions Europe-Afrique, 1960. 105 p. 

(Collection “Carrefours africains,” 4) 

LC2808.C6P4 

Written before independence by an author who had 
had experience in the Congo in 1957-59. He is dis¬ 
cussing education, with special reference to training 
for government services and the coming Africanization 
of the administrative cadres. 

1984. Teaching and education in Belgian Congo and 

in Ruanda-Urundi. [New York, Belgian 
Government Information Center] 1958. 
48 p. illus. LA1911.T4 

A message from the Minister of Colonies opens this 
pamphlet prepared for International World’s Exhibi¬ 
tion, Brussels, 1958. In it he says, “I think that it is 
not useless to stress again how important [the Belgian] 
effort is on the level of primary and basic education. 
We have drawn the largest part of the population 
from its age-long ignorance, and we have started it on 
the way towards a better life.” 


297 




A luxury volume prepared for an International 
Fair in Elisabethville in July 1961. The frontispiece 
is a portrait of President Tshombe. Contents are 
mostly a historical account from missionary records 
and documents of the Comite Special du Katanga, 
INFORCONGO, Musee Royal de l’Afrique Centrale, 
Union Miniere, etc. Appendixes are by chiefs of 
provinces and Belgian officials. There is a short 
bibliography. 

1990. Hempstone, Smith. Rebels, mercenaries, 

and dividends; the Katanga story. New 
York, Praeger, 1962. 250 p. illus. (Books 
that matter) DT665.K3H4 

A spirited and full account of the secession of 
Katanga from the Congo Republic after independ¬ 
ence, with sufficient background to give an interpreta¬ 
tion of the region and particularly of the Union 
Miniere (which is not, says the journalist author, “a 
particular friend of mine”). Mr. Hempstone deplored 
the U.S. involvement in complete support of the 
United Nations in the Congo and Katanga as carried 
out until the end of his story in December 1961. The 
book is critically reviewed by L. Gray Cowan in Africa 
Report, December 1962. 

1991. Kalanda, Mabika. Baluba et Lulua, une 

ethnie a la recherche d’un nouvel equilibre. 
Bruxelles, Editions de Remarques congolaises, 
1959. 106 p. (Coll. “Etudes congolaises,” 
no. 2). DT640.K3 

Historical account of the traditional antagonism 
between these two tribes of the Kasai and Katanga. 

1992. Katanga, Congo (Province). Livre blanc du 

Gouvernement katangais sur les evenements 
de septembre et decembre 1961. The 
Katangese Government’s White Paper on the 
events of September and December 1961. 
Elisabethville, 1962. Ill p. plates. 

DT665.K3A52 

1993. - Livre blanc du Gouvernement ka¬ 

tangais sur les activites des hors-la-loi dans 
certains territoires baluba. White book of 
the Katanga Government about the outlaw 
activities in some Baluba areas. [Elisabeth¬ 
ville, 1962] 67 p. plates. DT665.K3A5 
Two documents carrying atrocity stories and pic¬ 
tures, the first anti-U.N., the second anti-Balubakat 


(party of Jason Send we). Text in French and 
English. 

1994. Leblanc, Maria. Personnalite de la femme 

katangaise; contribution a l’etude de son 
acculturation. Louvain, Publications uni- 
versitaires, 1960. 403 p. (Studia phycho- 

logica) GN654.L37 

Bibliography: p. 369—397. 

Technical study based on intensive research carried 
out in the Centre de Psychologie et de Pedagogie de 
l’Union Miniere at Elisabethville. Published post¬ 
humously; the foreword is a tribute to the brilliant 
young scholar who was its author. Much of the con¬ 
tent is concerned with results of intelligence testing. 

1995. O’Brien, Conor Cruise. To Katanga and 

back, U.N. case history. New York, Simon 
& Schuster, 1963. 370 p. DLC 

By the controversial Irish officer who was United 
Nations representative in Katanga from June to 
November 1961, and resigned in protest at U.N. policy. 
The book is reviewed as “sensationalist” in the London 
Times Literary Supplement of Nov. 16, 1962. 

1996. Robert, Maurice. Geologie et geographie du 

Katanga , y compris l’etude des ressources et 
de la mise en valeur. Bruxelles, 1956. 
620 p. fold. maps. Published under aus¬ 
pices of the Union Miniere du Haut-Katanga. 

QE335.R62 

Bibliography: p. 589-601. 

Folio volume prepared in honor of the 50th an¬ 
niversary of the founding of the Union Miniere. The 
author, an authority on development of Central 
Africa, describes it as a synthesis of available knowl¬ 
edge about this territory which was perhaps the 
largest single contributor to Belgian prosperity. (He 
is himself responsible for about 30 of the studies re¬ 
corded in the bibliography.) The first part is on 
physical and biological geography of the area; Part 2 
tells briefly the history of European penetration; and 
Part 3 (p. 359-588) covers in detail the development 
of resources of the Katanga, mineral, vegetable and 
animal, and “sources of energy,” including hydro¬ 
electric power and communications. 

1997. Union Miniere du Haut Katanga, Elisabeth¬ 

ville, Belgian Congo. Union Miniere du 
Haut Katanga, 1906-1956. Evolution des 


298 



techniques et des activites sociales. Bruxelles, 
L. Cuypers, 1957. 355 p. plates, col. 
maps, col. diagrs., tables. DLG 

An anniversary volume, containing papers by mem¬ 
bers of the Union, some of them presented at 
scientific congresses. The Rapports du Conseil 
d’administration of Union Miniere are issued annually 
in Brussels. L.G. has been receiving them since 1940. 


1998. Ydewalle, Charles d\ L’Union Miniere du 
Haut Katanga; de 1’age colonial a l’indepen- 
dance. Paris, Plon, 1960. 174 p. illus. 

(Histoire des grandes entreprises, 3) 

HD9539.C7U43 

An enthusiastic account of the great mining enter¬ 
prise by a Belgian journalist who has written ex¬ 
tensively on the Congo. 


Rwanda and Burundi 


Note : The Republic of Rwanda and the Kingdom of 
Burundi on July 1, 1962, replaced the former combined 
Trust Territory of Ruanda-Urundi under Belgian adminis¬ 
tration. Publications of the two countries will presumably 
henceforth be separate. The existent literature, however, 
relates so largely to the two countries together that they are 
here treated under a single heading. 

1999. Baeck, L. £tude socio-economique du centre 

extra-coutumier d’Usumbura. Bruxelles, 
1957. 156 p. tables. (Academie royale 

des sciences coloniales. Classe des sciences 
morales et politiques. Memoires in-8°, n.s., 
t. 6, fasc. 5) DT641.A27, n.s., t. 6, fasc. 5 

This study, carried out through research for IRSAC, 
received a prize in an annual competition in 1956. 
The author, who had taken an M.A. in economics 
at Berkeley, studied in great detail the conditions of 
life in the urbanized society of Usumbura. He in¬ 
cludes tabulated statistics of population and employ¬ 
ment, income, cost of living, etc., and lists of 
household possessions. 

2000. Belgium. Ministere des affaires africaines. 

Rapport de l 3 administration beige du 
Ruanda-Urundi. Bruxelles, 1921-[60] an¬ 
nual. J814.R8N13 

The report submitted each year to the General 
Assembly of the United Nations by Belgium as trustee 
for Ruanda-Urundi (before 1939 to League of 
Nations), was issued by this Ministry as Ministere des 
Colonies from 1921-57, in 1958 and 1959 as Ministere 
du Congo Beige et du Ruanda-Urundi. 

2001. Belgium. Ministere des colonies (now 

Ministere des affaires africaines). The 
handbook of the Ruanda-Urundi ten year 
plan. Brussels, Les Editions de Visscher, 
1952. 91 p. illus. HC557.R8A54 1952a 
Translation of a brief summary of the plan for 
economic and social development of Ruanda-Urundi 


promulgated by the Ministry of Colonies in 1951. 
(Full text in English, De Visscher, 1951. 600 p. 21 
inset maps.) 

2002. Belgium. Office de l’information et des re¬ 

lations publiques pour le Congo beige et 
le Ruanda-Urundi. Le Ruanda-Urundi. 
Bruxelles, 1959. 377 p. 18 col. maps (6 
in pocket) diagrs., tables. DT449.R8A55 

An attempted synthesis, a “descriptive essay of the 
past and of the present-day evolution of the Territory 
placed under the trusteeship of Belgium, an inventory 
of its institutions and daily life. ... at once a work 
of popularization and a document to consult” for all 
concerned with Ruanda-Urundi. Prepared by spe¬ 
cialists, a number of them connected with IRSAC. 
The five parts treat geography, history, governmental 
organization, economic life, social life. A translation 
into English by Goldie Blankoff-Scarr was issued in 
parts by this office in 1960: Rwanda-Urundi: Econ¬ 
omy (2 v.); Ruanda-Urunda: Social Achievements 
(79 p.); Ruanda-Urundi: Geography and History 
(79 p.). 

2003. Bourgeois, R. Banyarwanda et Barundi. 

Bruxelles, 1954+ illus., maps. (Academie 
royale des sciences coloniales. Classe des 
sciences morales et politiques. Memoires 
in-8°) DT641.A27 

Bibliographies included. 

The Banyarwanda are the peoples of Rwanda, the 
Barundi those of Burundi. Four volumes have been 
published of this exhaustive anthropological study in 
the Memoires series. The first volume, Ethnographies 
was issued last, in 1957 (790 p. n.s., t. 15). The 
earlier volumes were: Vol. 2, La Coutume (1954. 
472 p. t. 35); Vol. 3, Religion et magie (1956. 376 
p. n.s., t. 4) ; Vol. 4, L’Evolution du contrat de bail 
a cheptel au Ruanda-Urundi (1958. 60 p. n.s., t. 

9, fasc. 4). 


299 




2004. Burundi. Office national de presse du Bu¬ 

rundi. Inf or Burundi. Usumbura, 19624- 
weekly. DLG 

A weekly information bulletin published by the new 
government and begun some months before the in¬ 
dependence date. It is a primary source for current 
data on the Kingdom of Burundi. 

A bimonthly journal, Burundi chrStien, of which the 
Library of Congress has received a few issues, is published 
under the auspices of the Archbishopric of Kitega in Burundi. 
The only monographic work cataloged in the Library of 
Congress collections giving separate treatment to this coun¬ 
try is an account of the White Fathers missions, Urundi 
(Namur, Editions “Grands lacs,” 1949. 144 p. illus.). 

2005. Centre de Recherche et d’Information So- 

cio-Politiques. Rwanda politique (1956- 
1961). Bruxelles, 1961. 420 p. (Les Dos¬ 
siers du C.R.I.S.P.) DT449.R9C4 

The first complete assemblage of facts and docu¬ 
ments (many unpublished) relating to the political 
changes as the Batutsi-dominated feudal society broke 
down under the voting weight of the formerly sup¬ 
pressed Bahutu majority. 

2006. Jentgen, Pierre. Les frontieres du Ruanda - 

Urundi et le regime international de tutelle. 
Bruxelles, 1957. 155 p. maps. (Academie 

royale des sciences coloniales. Classe des 
sciences morales et politiques. Memoires in¬ 
s'*, n.s., t. 13. fasc. 2) 

DT641.A27 n.s., 1.13, fasc. 2 

2007. Kagame, Alexis. La divine pastorale. Tra¬ 

duction frangaise, par 1’auteur, de la pre¬ 
miere veillee d’une epopee ecrite en langue 
ruandaise. Dix linos d’Ant. de Vinck. 
Commentes par Jean-Marie Habig. Bruxel¬ 
les, Editions du Marais, 1952. 109 p. illus. 

PL8608.Z77K3 

Abbe Kagame, himself a Tutsi, is the best known 
interpreter of Ruanda traditional history and linguis¬ 
tics. This volume is a poetic translation of the epic 
of his people. A number of other studies by his hand 
are listed in the catalog of the Academie Royale des 
Sciences d’Outre-Mer (no. 1860). They include ex¬ 
tracts from the work presented as his thesis at the 
Universite Pontificale Gregorienne in Rome, La 
Philosophie bantu-rwandaise de I’Etre (Bruxelles, 
1955. 64 p. maps. ARSC. Memoires. Classe 

des sciences morales et politiques. Coll. in-8°, n.s., t. 
6, fasc. 1). The most recent is a military history: 
Uhistoire des armSes-bovines dans I’ancien Rwanda. 


1961. 147 p. (ARSOM. Classe des sciences mo¬ 

rales et politiques. Memoires in-8°, n.s., t. 25, fasc. 4). 

2008. Leurquin, Philippe. Le niveau de vie des 

populations rurales du Ruanda-Urundi. 
Louvain, Institut de recherches economiques 
et sociales, 1960. 420 p. (Publications de 
l’Universite Lovanium de Leopoldville, 6) 

DLC 

2009. Liege. Universite. Fondation pour les 

recherches scientifiques au Congo beige et au 
Ruanda-Urundi. Le probleme de I’ensei- 
gnement dans le Ruanda-Urandi. Elisabeth- 
ville, C.E.P.S.I., 1958. 125 p. (Centre 

d’etude des problemes sociaux indigenes. 
Collection de memoires) LA2090.R8L5 
Report of a study mission on educational problems 
conducted by Mme Dubuisson-Brouha, E. Natalis, 
and J. Paulus. 

2010. Maquet, Jacques J. The premise of inequal¬ 

ity in Ruanda; a study of political relations 
in a central African kingdom. London, 
Published for the International African In¬ 
stitute by the Oxford University Press, 1961. 
vii, 199 p. illus. maps. GN654.M3 

Bibliography: p. 186-194. 

Professor Maquet, a highly trained social anthro¬ 
pologist, was Director of IRS AC (Institute de Recher¬ 
ches Scientifiques en Afrique Centrale) in Elisabeth- 
ville. This book is a synthesis of research carried out 
over some years; it was published in part at Tervueren 
(Musee du Congo Beige) in 1954 as Le Systeme des 
relations sociales dans le Ruanda ancien. It is re¬ 
viewed in Africa Report of July 1962 with the com¬ 
ment that it will stand as an authoritative analysis of 
the respective roles of the ruling Batutsi and the sub¬ 
ject Bahutu in the former society of Ruanda-Urundi. 

A photograph album, Ruanda; essai photographique sur 
une sociSte africaine en transition (Bruxelles, Elsevier, 1957. 
192 p.), was prepared by Professor Maquet in collaboration 
with Denyse Hiemaux-l’Hoest. The pictures of the 
photogenic Batutsi, their servants the Bahutu, their country, 
cattle, arts, and culture, are accompanied by annotations of 
anthropological significance. In 1962 Professor Maquet has 
extended his socioanthropological analysis to much of sub- 
Saharan Africa in Afrique, les civilisations noires, prepared 
in collaboration with Jean-Claude Schalchli (Paris, Horizons 
de France. 288 p. illus.). 

2011. - and Marcel d’Hertefelt. Elections 

en societe feodale; une etude sur l’introduc- 
tion du vote populaire au Ruanda-Urundi. 
Bruxelles, 1959. 231 p. (Academie royale 


300 



des sciences coloniales; Classe des sciences 
morales et politiques. Memoires in-8°. n.s., 
t. 21, fasc. 2) DT641.A27, n.s., t. 21, fasc. 2 

Reflecting the changes in the society of Ruanda- 
Urundi as shown in the elections even several years 
before the voters of Ruanda, some 84 percent of the 
population, abolished the already overthrown Batutsi 
monarchy in the U.N.-supervised elections of Septem¬ 
ber 1961, the year before independence of the now 
separated countries. 

2012. Munyangaju, Aloys. Uactualite politique 

au Ruanda. 1959. 52 p. HN814.R8M8 
A political booklet by a member of the “groupe 
democrate progressiste,” which includes elements of 
both Hutu and Tutsi. 

2013. Pauwels, M. Imana et le culte des manes au 

Rwanda. Bruxelles, 1958. 263 p. illus., 
maps. (Academie royale des sciences 
coloniales. Classe des sciences morales et 
politiques. Memoires in-8°, n.s., t. 17, fasc. 
1) DT641.A27, n.s., t. 17, fasc. 1 

Bibliography: p. 255-259. 

A study of ancestor-worship among the Batutsi and 
Bahutu. 

2014. Ruanda Urundi. Pref. by Jean-Paul Harroy. 

Illus. by Claude Lyr. Map by Yves Dupuis. 
Designed by Robert Geerts. Brussels, 
INFORCONGO, 1958. 147 p. illus. 

DT449.R8L9 

Picture album prepared for the Brussels World Fair 
in 1958. 147 plates, mostly full page, with separate 
section of captions. The preface is by the Governor 
of Ruanda-Urundi. 

2015. Le Ruanda-Urundi; ses ressources naturelles, 

ses populations. Par J. P. Harroy [et al.] 
Bruxelles, Les Naturalistes beiges, 1956. 
153 p. illus., maps, tables. HC557.R8R8 

Includes bibliographies. 


Contents.—La lutte contre la dissipation des ressources 
naturelles au Ruanda-Urundi, par J. P. Harroy.—La 
vegetation et les territoires botaniques du Ruanda-Urundi, 
par J. Lebrun.—Les cultures d’altitude du Ruanda-Urundi, 
par V. G. Philemotte.—Probleme de P61evage du betail au 
Ruanda-Urundi, par Y. Biche.—Esquisse d’une faune 
herpetologique du Ruanda-Urundi, par R. F. Laurent.—Le 
lac Tanganyika, par J. J. Symoens.—Les populations du 
Ruanda et de l’Urundi, par H. Guillaume. 

The first contribution was by the Governor of 
Ruanda-Urundi, former Director of IRS AC. His col¬ 
laborators were specialists in their fields. Professor 
Lebrun, Secretary General of INEAC, the others of¬ 
ficials in the Ruanda-Urundi administration. 

2016. United Nations. Secretariat. Study of pop¬ 

ulation , land utilization , and land system in 
Ruanda-Urundi. New York, 1957. 130 p. 

(United Nations. [Document] T/AC.36/ 
L.60) HB3669.R8U5 

This study is one of the more substantial documents 
relating to Ruanda-Urundi as they are listed in the 
United Nations Documents Index. Other papers of 
significance, besides the annual report (no. 2000), are 
the reports of the Trusteeship Council Visiting Mis¬ 
sion to East Africa. The Mission inspected Ruanda- 
Urundi in 1948, 1951, 1954, and 1957, their reports 
being published by the United Nations in New York in 
1949, 1952, 1955, and 1958, as Supplements to the 
Official Records. 

2017. Vansina, Jan. Uevolution du royaume 

Rwanda des origines a 1900. Bruxelles, 1962. 
100 p. (Academie royale des sciences 
d’outre-mer. Classe des sciences morales et 
politiques. Memoires in-8°, n.s., t. 26 
(histoire), fasc. 2 et dernier) 

DT641.A27, n.s., t. 26, fasc. 2 
The author has been teaching in 1961-62 at the 
University of Wisconsin. 


301 


PORTUGUESE AFRICA 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

2018. “Bibliografia sobre economia ultramarina 

Portuguese.” Estudos ultramarinos, no. 4, 
1959: 255-281. JV4201.E8 1959 

This issue of the quarterly review published by the 
Instituto Superior de Estudos Ultramarinos in Lisbon 
has not been available for examination. The period¬ 
ical, begun in 1948 as Estudos colonials, is a valuable 
source for material on Portuguese Africa. 

2019. GoNgALVES, Jose Julio. “Bibliografia antro- 

pologica do Ultramar Portugues.” In 
Portugal. Agenda Geral do Ultramar. 
Boletim geral do Ultramar, ano 37, margo- 
abril-out.-dez. 1961, passim. 

JV4201.A33 1961 

A set of references printed in the form of cards that 
might be clipped for use in a file, though not on one 
side of the page only. The bibliography started in the 
combined issues of March-April and was concluded 
in the combined volume for issues of October- 
December. 

2020. Portugal. Centro de Documentagao Cienti- 

fica Ultramarina, Instituiqoes portuguesas 
de interesse ultramarino. Ed. provisoria. 
Lisboa, 1960. 109 p. AS298.A53 

2021. - Periddicos portugueses de interesse 

ultramarino actualmente em publicaqao. 
Lisboa, 1959. 89 p. DLG 

These two comprehensive listings of Portuguese in¬ 
stitutions and periodicals concerned with overseas de¬ 
velopment were published also in nos. 2-5 of the 
international journal Informations EURAFDOC 
(Paris, Union Eurafricaine de Documentation, Febru- 
ary-May 1960). The list of periodicals includes 
official and unofficial serials published in Portugal and 
overseas. Many items from this list are included in 
the Library of Congress list of Serials for African 
Studies. 


2022. Portugal. Junta das Missoes Geograficas e 

de Investigagoes do Ultramar. Centro de 
Documentagao Cientifica Ultramarina. Bi- 
bliografica cientifica da Junta de Investigaqoes 
do Ultramar. Lisboa, 1960. 371 p. 

Z2731.C7P63 1960 

As complete as possible a list of studies and papers, 
including articles, prepared under the auspices of 
the Junta. Entries are classed by Universal Decimal 
Classification, mainly in the social sciences, pure and 
applied sciences, and geography. Auxiliary number 
at the right of each entry indicates place. Entries are 
on one side of page only, ready to be clipped for files. 
There is an author index. The material dates from 
the twenties to 1959. This bibliography is to be 
revised periodically. The Library of Congress has 
also the first edition, 1958. 

A price list of official publications in print is available 
from the Agenda Geral do Ultramar in Lisbon. 

GENERAL 

(including History) 

2023. Boxer, Charles R. Four centuries of Portu¬ 

guese expansion, 1415-1825; a succinct sur¬ 
vey. Johannesburg, Witwatersrand Univer¬ 
sity Press, 1961. 102 p. illus. JV4211.B68 

(Publications of the Ernest Oppenheimer Institute of 
Portuguese Studies of the University of the Witwatersrand, 3) 
Professor Boxer holds the Camoens chair for Por¬ 
tuguese studies at King’s College of the University of 
London, and has written extensively on the history of 
the Portuguese in Africa, the Far East, and Brazil. 
This booklet is a popular thumbnail sketch, delight¬ 
fully illustrated with contemporary pictures. The fo¬ 
cus of interest is Portugal rather than Africa. 

2024. Brasio, Antonio D. Monumenta missionaria 

africana; Africa Ocidental. Coligida e ano- 
tada pelo padre Antonio Brasio. 2. ser. Lis¬ 
boa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar, Divisao de 
Publicagoes e Biblioteca, 1958+ v. 1 
(746 p.) BV3500.B671 


302 



A collection of source accounts for Portuguese mis¬ 
sions, in Latin and Portuguese. The first series was 
published in four volumes, 1952-54. The first volume 
of the second series covers the earliest years, 1342— 
1499. 

2025. Duffy, James. Portugal in Africa. Cam¬ 

bridge, Harvard University Press, 1962. 
240 p. DT36.D79 

Bibliography: p. 230-232. 

Published also in paperback edition by Penguin Books, 
Harmondsworth, Middlesex (Penguin African library, AP3). 

2026. - Portugal’s African territories: present 

realities. New York, Carnegie Endowment 
for International Peace, 1962. 39 p. (Oc¬ 
casional papers for limited distribution, 1) 

DLC-AFR 

2027. - Portuguese Africa. Cambridge, Har¬ 

vard University Press, 1959. 389 p. illus. 

DT36.D8 

Professor Duffy of Brandeis University is America’s 
foremost expert on Portuguese Africa, and his 1959 
book of that title is the most comprehensive and 
balanced work in English on the subject. Covering 
politico-economic history from the earliest times to 
the late fifties, it is an indispensable source for English- 
speaking students. His short book in 1962 outlines the 
past and analyzes more fully the “theory and reality” 
of contemporary Portuguese Africa under the Salazar 
Government, ending with consideration of the changes 
of the last decade and the beginning of the nationalist 
revolt. The Portuguese proposals of 1961, he says, 
“reveal an apparently sublime faith in the policy of 
integration for the African territories.” He foresees 
no easy answer. His paper published by the Carnegie 
Endowment for International Peace is an examination 
of the “very fluid” situation in 1960-61, with analysis 
of the opposition groups, the National Liberation 
Movement, the Union of Angolan Peoples, etc. A 
concluding short bibliography of available works 
on Portuguese Africa lists less than 20 books and 
papers in English. 

2028. Garcia de Orta; revista da Junta das Missoes 

Geograficas e de Investigates do Ultramar, 
v. 1+ Lisboa, 1953+ illus. quarterly. 

JV4201.G3 

The journal of this scholarly official body, carrying 
monograph-length articles on natural and human 
sciences. The last pages give the impressive list of 
publications of the Junta, including contents of earlier 
volumes of Garcia de Orta. 


2029. Gersdorff, Ralph von. Angola, Portugie- 

sisch-Guinea, Sao Tome und Principe, Kap 
V erde-lnseln, Spanish-Guinea. Bonn, K. 
Schroeder, 1960. 165 p. illus. (Die 

Lander Afrikas, Bd. 23) DT611.G4 

See general note on this series, no. 10. An an¬ 
nouncement has been received in Jan. 1963 of a new 
work by this consulting economist, Wirtschaftspro- 
bleme Portugiesisch Afrikas (Bielefeld, West Germany, 
1962. 372 p.). It is reviewed as giving a full presen¬ 
tation of the Portuguese case for their administration 
in Africa. 

2030. Pattee, Richard. Portugal na Africa con - 

temporanea. Coimbra, 1959. 793 p. tables. 

DT36.P3 

Bibliography: p. 765-781. 

By an American Catholic history professor, who pre¬ 
sented the big, impressively documented study as a dis¬ 
sertation at the University of Coimbra. He begins 
with a general picture of Africa, mainly since the 
Second World War, then a chapter of sections on other 
countries, “Panorama da Africa contemporanea” (p. 
113-220), before his 450-page analysis of the 
Portuguese colonies and their place in the new Africa. 
He defends the official Portuguese policy as legally 
and historically justified and considers attacks on it are 
by the “professional anticolonial bloc,” presenting a 
danger to all Europe. In a final added chapter he 
examines the African world with special attention to 
Communist infiltration. 

Professor Pattee has specialized in the study of Spanish, 
Latin American, and Portuguese contemporary history. His 
Portugal and the Portuguese World (Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. 
Co., 1958. 350 p.) won the Camoes prize as the best book 

on Portugal published abroad. In 1959 a travel report from 
his pen, Portugal em Africa: impressoes de viagem pela 
Africa Portuguesa (Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar. 
163 p. illus., part col.) gave an optimistic picture of the 
territories, in which he felt Portugal had the right to be 
proud of her work. 

2031. Portugal. Agenda Geral do Ultramar. 

Boletim geral do Ultramar, ano 1, no. 1 + 
Julho 1925+ illus., fold. col. maps, 
monthly. JV4201.A33 

This official journal is of first importance for study 
of administrative matters relating to the overseas ter¬ 
ritories. It contains also specialist articles of general 
coverage, a regular review of missionary activity, a 
section of news and notes, a review of the press, and 
other features, including summary sections in English 
and French. Many issues include bibliographies which 
in some cases are complete listings of publications of 


303 




the Agency and records of books received, in other 
cases specialized bibliographical entries, “Fichas 
bibliograficas,” printed in form to be cut for files. 

2032. Portugal. Junta das Missoes Geograficas e 

de Investigates do Ultramar. Atlas mis- 
sionario portugues. Lisboa, 1962. 175 p. 

maps. DLC-Map 

2033. Rego, Antonio da Silva. Portuguese coloni¬ 

zation in the sixteenth century; a study of the 
Royal ordinances, Regimentos. Johannes¬ 
burg, Witwatersrand University Press, 1959. 
116 p. (University of the Witwatersrand, 
Johannesburg. Publications of the Ernest 
Oppenheimer Institute of Portuguese Studies, 
1) JV4214.R4 

POLITICS AND ECONOMICS 

2034. Andrade, Antonio Alberto de. Many 

races—one nation; racial nondiscrimination 
always the cornerstone of Portugal’s oversea 
policy. Lisbon, 1961. 48 p. illus. 

JV4237.A6 1961 
A short essay followed by a selection of citations 
from documents of Portuguese colonial policy, 1755, 
1761, 1763, 1928, all to prove that racial discrimina¬ 
tion does not exist. This pamphlet had been issued 
in slightly different form in 1954. 

2035. Anuario estatistico do Ultramar; annuaire sta- 

tistique d’outre-mer. [1945? + ] Lisboa, 
Tipografia Portuguesa. Prepared by the Por¬ 
tuguese Instituto Nacional de Estatistica. 

HA1577.A2A55 

Annual volume covering in detailed tables all as¬ 
pects of population and economic life in the Portuguese 
overseas territories. There is a full index with subject 
breakdown under each country. 

2036. Azevedo, Avila de. Politico de ensino em 

Africa. Lisboa, Junta de Investigates do 
Ultramar, Centro de Estudos Politicos e So- 
ciais, 1958. 198 p. illus. (Estudos de 

ciencias politicas e sociais, 13) LA1501.A9 

A treatise on the Portuguese educational policy in 
overseas territories. 

2037. Belchior, Manuel Dias. A missao de Por¬ 

tugal em Africa, v. 1. As autoridades ad- 
ministrativas ao servigo da amizade inter¬ 
racial. Lisboa, 1960+ DT36.B4 


First volume of a study by an official of the Over¬ 
seas administration who expresses the idealistic Por¬ 
tuguese concept of her mission to her African subjects, 
for whom he expresses sympathetic understanding. 
An earlier work, which had received a prize award 
from the Academia de Ciencias of Lisbon, was Com- 
preendamos os negros! (Lisboa, Divisao de Publicagoes 
e Biblioteca, Agenda Geral das Colonias, 1951. 185 

p.). In both works the author stresses that the Por¬ 
tuguese rule rests on friendship between Black and 
White. He does not admit nationalism as a force 
for more than a tiny scattering of elites. 

Two earlier books expressing forcefully the Portuguese 
policy of assimilation of the overseas possessions with the 
mother country and describing the administrative setup and 
opportunities for African development were by a former 
Governor General of Angola, Jose M. R. Norton de Matos: 
Africa nossa; o que queremos e o que nao queremos nas nos- 
sas terra de Africa (Porto, Edigoes Maranus, 1953. 
199 p.), and A Nagao una; organizagao politico e adminis- 
trativa dos territdrios do Ultramar portugues (Lisboa, P. 
Ferreira, 1953. 335 p.). 

2038. Caetano, Marcello. Os nativos na economia 

africana. Coimbra, Coimbra Editora, 1954. 
144 p. HC577.C3 

Study of the question of African labor in Angola and 
Mozambique by a distinguished professor of law and 
late Minister of the Colonies. Professor Caetano 
discussed first demographic aspects, disapproving of 
large-scale colonization from Portugal, and migration 
of African workers from the Portuguese territories to 
South Africa and Rhodesia. Then he examined the 
relative productivity of African farmers and of those 
who work under European supervision on the big 
plantations, concluding that efforts must be made to 
improve both the quantity and quality of African 
labor, but that it should not be displaced by peasant 
immigrants. He advocated development of coopera¬ 
tives. 

An official statement of Portuguese colonial policy by Pro¬ 
fessor Caetano was published in English translation: Colo¬ 
nizing Traditions, Principles and Methods of the Portuguese 
(Lisbon, Divisao de Publicagoes e Biblioteca, Agenda Geral 
das Colonias, 1951. 54 p. illus.) 

2039. CUNHA, JOAQUIM MOREIRA DA SlLVA. O 

trahalho indigena , estudo de actualizada. 

Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar, Divisao 
de Publicagoes e Biblioteca, 1960. 305 p. 

DLC-LL 

The first edition of this comprehensive study of 
labor law was published in 1949. The second edition 
is updated through 1959. 


304 


2040. Durieux, Andre. Essai sur le statut des 

indigenes portugais de la Guinee, de l’Angola 
et du Mozambique. Bruxelles, 1955. 70 p. 

(Academie royale des sciences coloniales. 
Classe des sciences morales et politiques. 
Memoires in-4°, n.s., t. 5, fasc. 3) 

DT641.A25, n.s., t. 5, fasc. 3 
In this short essay a Belgian professor of administra¬ 
tive law examined recent legislation on the legal status 
of natives in the three Portuguese African territories, 
especially an act of May 1954, drawing comparisons 
with practice in the then Belgian Congo. He outlined 
the application of customary law and of general law 
to African affairs, the laws applicable to transactions 
between Europeans and Africans, and the procedure 
whereby the outstanding African may obtain the grant 
of Portuguese citizenship. 

2041. Evangelista, Julio. Portugal vis-a-vis the 

United Nations; the report by the Six and 
Convention 107. Lisbon, 1961. 78 p. 

JX4023.P638 

By a Portuguese representative to the United 
Nations, this brochure voices his country’s protest 
against the 1960 Report of the Special Committee of 
Six on the Transmission of Information regarding 
non-self-governing territories (U.N. Doc. A/4526, 3 
Oct. 1960). Portugal claims that her territories are 
provinces, hence do not come under the provisions of 
the U.N. Convention. 

2042. Figueiredo, Antonio de. Portugal and its 

empire: the truth. London, Gollancz, 1961. 
159 p. illus. DP680.F5 

An outspoken indictment of the Salazar regime in 
its administration of the overseas territories. The 
author advocates a Pan-Portuguese Conference with 
African leaders represented. The book was reviewed 
in West Africa, August 19,1961. 

In the January 1963 issue of Africa Report, Ronald H. 
Chilcote reviews a “controversial paperback” by Manuel J. 
Homen de Mello, Portugal, o Ultramar e o futuro (Lisboa, 
Grafica Imperial, 1962. 133 p.), which has been dis¬ 

tributed without interference from the Portuguese security 
police. The writer criticizes the Salazar dictatorship and 
advocates self-government for Angola and Mozambique. 

2043. Hammond, Richard J. Portugal’s African 

problem: some economic facets. New York, 
Carnegie Endowment for International 
Peace, 1962. 39 p. (Occasional paper 
no. 2) DLC 


This, like Professor Duffy’s paper published by the 
Carnegie Endowment, is a processed pamphlet issued 
in a limited edition. The writer, an economic his¬ 
torian, is with the Food Research Institute at Stanford 
University. He writes here of historic Portuguese 
economic interests, the hindrances to development, 
the pre- and post-World War II development policies, 
and the possible consequences of separation. Four 
added leaves cite 41 references, mainly to works in 
Portuguese. 

It is announced by the Hoover Institution Library at 
Stanford that a bibliography on Portuguese Africa by Pro¬ 
fessor Hammond will be issued in their Bibliographical 
Series in 1963. 

2044. Lupi, Luis C. Quern incendiou o Congo? 

[Cronicas y entrevistas] Um depoimento an- 
tecipado para o julgamento da historia, no 
qual o “depoente” defende a causa de Portu¬ 
gal, apontandolhe alguns perigos, intemos e 
externos, que urge combater. Lisboa, 1960. 
174 p. DT36.L8 

The writer is a longtime Portuguese journalist and 
director of information services. This volume is a 
collection of his papers and speeches, voicing the 
official policy of Portugal in Africa. The last address 
is of April 2, 1960, “Angola and Mozambique— 
how and why the Portuguese settled . . . why and 
how they will remain there.” According to Senhor 
Lupi, the Portuguese have a mission to save Africa 
from the Eastern menace; their slow advance is “in¬ 
spired by humanitarian motives and a true sense of 
reality.” Another speech by this officer, Portugal in 
Africa; The Significance of the Visit of the President 
of the Republic to the Overseas Provinces (published 
by the Agenda Geral do Ultramar, Lisboa, 1957. 40 
p.), had been delivered before the British Institute 
in Lisbon. He repeated his statement of official policy 
in a pamphlet in English, Portugal and Her Overseas 
Provinces (Lisbon, 1961. 45 p.). 

2045. Moreira, Adriano. Portugal’s stand in Africa. 

New York, University Publishers, 1962. 
265 p. DT36.M63 

Addresses by the Portuguese Overseas Minister de¬ 
livered from 1958 to 1961, with texts of major colonial 
decrees of 1961 that were supposed to ameliorate con¬ 
ditions. They include repeal of the Natives Statute, 
Provincial Settlement Boards for white emigrants, and 
establishment of municipal units of local government 
in “civilized” areas. The Portuguese defense of her 
policy is based on the multiracial concept. Senhor 
Moreira’s enunciation and analysis of government 


305 




policy, Politico ultramarina , was in its 4th edition in 
1961 (Lisboa. Junta de Investigates do Ultramar. 
Centro de Estudos Politicos e Sociais. Estudos de 
ciencias politicas e sociais, no. 1). 

2046. Oliveira, Jorge E. da Costa. Aplicagao de 

capitais nas provincias ultramarinas. Lisboa, 
Junta de Investigates do Ultramar, Centro 
de Estudos Politicos e Sociais, 1961. 374 p. 

([Portugal] Junta de Investigates do Ul¬ 
tramar. Centro de Estudos Politicos e So¬ 
ciais. Estudos de ciencias politicas e sociais, 
n.° 50) DLC 

2047. Portugal. Commissao para o Estudo da Pro- 

dutividade em Africa. Estudo sobre o ab- 
sentismo e a instabilidade da mdo-de-obra 
africana. Lisboa. 1959-60. 3 v. illus. 

(Estudos de ciencias politicas e sociais, 20) 

HD5837.A6P6 

The first report of a study commission set up in 
accordance with a recommendation of CCTA for a 
broad study of productivity in Africa. This document 
is an extensive statistical survey of absenteeism and in¬ 
stability of the African labor force. Parts of it are 
general for all Africa south of the Sahara, but the 
bulk of the questionnaires analyzed were directed to 
Angola and Mozambique. The Commission was 
headed by Dr. Antonio Jorge Motta Veiga. 

2048. United Nations. General Assembly. Special 

Committee on Territories under Portuguese 
Administration. Report. 15 Aug. 1962. 
New York, 1962. 144 p. annexes. (Docu¬ 
ment A/5160) JV4227.U55 

The Committee, consisting of representatives from 
Bulgaria, Ceylon, Colombia, Cyprus, Guatemala, 
Guinea, and Nigeria, had received no cooperation from 
the Portuguese Government, which had supplied no 
reports as directed for Administering Power in the 
Charter. After obtaining all possible information from 
sources outside the territories, they concluded that 
the situation “warrants the serious concern of the 
international community in every respect,” and called 
for United Nations action against Portugal. 

2049. U.S. Mutual Security Agency. Special Mis¬ 

sion to Portugal for Economic Cooperation. 
Preliminary report on reclamation projects 
in Angola and Mozambique, by W. E. Cor- 
fitzen, reclamation specialist. Lisbon, 1952. 
50 1. maps, tables. HD2142.U5 


By a reclamation specialist invited to examine and 
comment on intended agricultural development 
schemes, particularly irrigation and drainage projects, 
and to make suggestions as to the appropriate type of 
technical assistance. 

ANTHROPOLOGY, sociology, 
and culture 

2050. Dias, Jorge. Portuguese contribution to cul¬ 

tural anthropology. Johannesburg, Wit- 
watersrand University Press, 1961. 112 p. 

(Publications of the Ernest Oppenheimer In¬ 
stitute of Portuguese Studies of the University 
of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, 2) 

DP532.7.D5 

Lectures at the Witwatersrand University on the 
general subject of Portuguese cultural anthropology, 
and specifically on the Makonde, a Central Bantu 
people of Mozambique. 

2051. Estudos sobre antropologia ftsica do Ultramar 

Portugues [por] A. A. Mendes Correia [et al.] 
Lisboa, 1959. 153 p. (Memorias da Junta 

de Investigates do Ultramar, 2. ser., 13) 

DLC 

2052. Fagg, William B. Afro-Portuguese ivories. 

London, Batchworth Press, 1959. xxiii p., 47 
illus. NK5987.F295 

Plates of a collection of small art objects in ivory 
carved by craftsmen from Portuguese Africa. The 
short introduction is by the Deputy Keeper of the De¬ 
partment of Ethnography of the British Museum. 
Many of the plates picture salt cellars with lids. They 
are accompanied by one-sentence notes on facing 
pages. 

2053. Macedo, Diogo de. Arte indtgena portuguesa. 

Lisboa, Editorial Atica, 1934. 46 p. 70 pi. 
(1 double) on 39 1. (Republica Portuguesa. 
Ministerio das Colonias. [Publicagoes] da 
Divisao de Publicagoes e Biblioteca. Agenda 
Geral das Colonias. n.° 1) N7380.M23 

List of plates in Portuguese, French and Italian. 
Catalog of an exhibit of art and sculpture from 
Portuguese Africa. 

2054. Oliveira, Antonio de. Mahamba; tentativa 

de interpretagao artistica e psicologica de 
documentos de arte dos negros africanos. 
Lisboa, 1959. 150 p. 76 plates, maps. 

(Junta de Investigagoes do Ultramar. Estu¬ 
dos, ensaios e documentos, 57) N7380.064 


306 



In this theoretical study of the Negro art of Guinea, 
Angola, and Mozambique, the author, “when 
analyzing their artless statuettes, penetrating the soul 
of their idols which speak of a distant past, has . . . 
felt the laments of a people enslaved to its deities . . . 
moanings, changed in inert matter into true temples 
of mystic anxiety” (Summary in English, p. 143). 

2055. Portugal. Junta das Missoes Geograficas e 
de Investigates do Ultramar. Estudos 
sobre a etnologia do Ultramar Portugues. 
v. 1. Lisboa, 1960. 188 p. plates. (Its 

Estudos, ensaios e documentos, no. 81) 

GN590.P6, v. 1 

A collection of scholarly papers on ethnology in 
Portuguese Africa. This first volume contains essays 
on the Angolares of Sao Tome, the Quioca of Angola, 
Angolan concepts of death, medicine of tribes of Por¬ 


tuguese Guinea. Each paper is followed by a resume 
in French and English. 

2056. - Estudos sobre antropologia fisica do 

Ultramar Portugues, by A. A. Mendes Cor¬ 
reia, L. Ferreira Paulo [and others]. Lisboa, 
1959. 153 p. (Its Memorias, 2 ser. 13) 

GN62.P6 

Physical anthropology, with anthropometric data 
on natives of Sao Tome, Portuguese Guinea, and An¬ 
gola, also of Macao. The writers are well-known 
Portuguese anthropologists and Africanists. 

2057. Rego, Antonio da Silva. Alguns problemas 

sociologico-missionarios da Africa negra. 
Lisboa, Junta de Investigates do Ultramar, 
Centro de Estudos Politicos e Sociais, 1960. 
137 p. (Estudos de ciencias pollticas e so¬ 
ciais, no. 32) BV2063.R43 


Angola 


GENERAL 

(including History and Economics) 

2058. Amaral, Ilidio do. Aspectos do povoamento 

branco de Angola. Lisboa, Junta de Inves¬ 
tigates do Ultramar, 1960. 83 p. (Es¬ 
tudos, ensaios e documentos, no. 74) DLG 
Not available for examination. 

2059. Angola. Direct© dos Servigos de Economia. 

Angola, provincia de Portugal em Africa. 
Realizagao grafica de Publicagoes Unidade. 
Luanda, 1953. 209 p. illus., part col. 

DT611.A3A53 

An attractive volume setting forth in a favorable 
light the Portuguese accomplishments in economic and 
social development of Angola. 

2060. Associaqao Industrial de Angola. Guia in¬ 

dustrial de Angola; edigao unica commemora- 
tiva do 30.° anniversario da Associagao In¬ 
dustrial de Angola. Luanda, Angola, I960* 
740 p. HF3929.A6A8 

A big volume of business addresses. 

2061. Azevedo, Joao Maria Cerqueira de. Angola, 

exemplo de trabalho. Luanda, Angola, 1958. 
529 p. HC578.A5A89 

Study of the development of the economy of Angola, 
its waterways, communications, towns, etc. The fac¬ 


tual survey, including many statistical tables, covers 
economic history up to the turn of the 20th century. 

2062. Barns, T. Alexander. Angolan sketches. 

London, Methuen, 1928. 206 p. 

DT611.B3 

By an explorer of the Congo, this informative book 
included simple statements of historical background 
and systematic description by regions—the Cabinda 
enclave to the north between the French Congo and 
Belgian Congo, the Ba-Congo, the three main regions 
of Luanda, Benguela and Mossamedes, each with 
coastal lowlands, increasingly dry as they run south 
toward the Kalahari desert of Southwest Africa, and 
pleasant, well-watered highlands in the interior. There 
is also a description of a trip up the Benguela railway 
line, then in process of construction (opened in 1929). 

In February 1928 Mr. Bams read a paper before the Royal 
Geographical Society, “In Portuguese West Africa: Angola 
and the Isles of the Guinea Gulf,” which was published in 
the Geographical Journal (v. 72, July 1928, p. 18-37). In 
this he gives some geographical description of Angola, in¬ 
cluding comment on the new railway and its course, and 
speaks at greater length about the islands of Sao Tome and 
Principe, where he had collected natural history specimens 
and visited the cacao plantations. He was much impressed 
with management of native labor on the plantations which 20 
years before had been the subject of the slavery controversy; 
regarding labor conditions, he declared that “I can say with 
certainty that the comfort and welfare of the natives are 
studied to a degree that could scarcely be equalled in any 
other part of the world.” 


307 



2063. Boxer, Charles R. Salvador de Sa and the 

struggle for Brazil and Angola, 1602-1686. 

London, University of London, 1952. 444 p. 

illus. F2528.C67B6 

Historical biography of a colonial governor of 
Brazil and General of the Brazil fleets. Salvador de 
Sa was described in a 17th-century letter quoted by 
Dr. Boxer in the dedication as “a notable old Stickler 
that formerly had recovered Angola from the Hol¬ 
landers.” In the early 17th century, slaves were being 
exported at the rate of 15,000 a year from the Congo 
and Angola to Spanish and Portuguese America; they 
were baptized by boatloads before embarkation. Pro¬ 
fessor Boxer called his chapter on the slave trade and 
the war with the Dutch for Luanda and 
Benguela “Angola, ‘the Black Mother.’ ” He com¬ 
mented that to a Marxist historian this struggle for 
Angola would seem merely a fight for the most 
lucrative slave market of West Africa, but that the 
Portuguese, despite their cruelty to the natives, 
“sincerely believed that they were fighting God’s bat¬ 
tles and saving Negro souls from the fatal infection of 
heresy.” 

2064. Companhia do Caminho de Ferro de 

Benguela. Benguela railway. [Benguela, 

Angola?] 1960. 34 p. DLC 

A short statement for English readers regarding the 
railway which runs from Lobito Bay in the central 
province of Angola, Benguela, to the border of the 
Katanga and connects the Atlantic coast with the rail 
lines through Northern Rhodesia and Nyasaland into 
Mozambique. It was built largely through British 
private enterprise. 

2065. Davidson, Basil. The African awakening. 

New York, Macmillan, 1955. 262 p. 
illus. DT639.D35 1955a 

In this British Labor writer’s book inveighing 
against colonialism in central Africa (see under Congo, 
no. 1874), the four chapters on Angola were done 
at the commission of Harper's Magazine, which in 
1904 had sent another reporter, Henry Nevinson, to 
bring back evidences of genuine slavery in that 
Portuguese colony. Mr. Davidson reports conditions 
which he considers hardly changed in practice, though 
in theory the contract labor system of the Portuguese 
administration is well furnished with safeguards for 
native workers. Two of the chapter titles suggest his 
theme—“A Modem Slavery” and “Coast of Sorrow.” 
Another chapter is on Sao Tome, the island to the 
north which he claims is still a penal settlement for 


African political troublemakers (“average of five a 
month”), its cocoa plantations still receiving 5,000 
contract laborers a year. He is scornful of the “sop” 
given the “civilized” African assimilados, and declares 
that the current exportation of poor whites from 
Portugal to Angola will inevitably lead to the racial 
discrimination of which the Portuguese have vaunted 
themselves as free. A part of this section of The Afri¬ 
can Awakening was published in Harper’s Magazine in 
July 1954, with the title, “A Modern Slavery” (v. 
209:56-63). 

2066. Egerton, F. Clement C. Angola in perspec¬ 

tive; endeavour and achievement in Portu¬ 
guese West Africa. London, Routledge & 
K. Paul, 1957. 272 p. illus. DT611.E3 
The writer, an enthusiastic student of Portuguese 
colonial history, is also an apologist for the Portuguese 
system of colonization. In an earlier work, Angola 
without Prejudice (Lisbon, Agency General for the 
Overseas Territories, 1955. 30 p.), he had offered a 
rejoinder to “the misrepresentation of a remarkably 
hasty investigator,” which sought to disprove the 
criticisms leveled by Basil Davidson in his African 
Awakening (above). The present full-length country 
study has as prologue an introductory sketch, then 
a section on Angolan history, and a long section 
describing the country and administration as he had 
seen them in 1951. 

2067. Graham, R. H. Carson. Under seven Congo 

kings. London, Carey Press, 1931. 293 p. 

illus., maps. BV3625.K6G7 

Missionary work including a little general history, 
but concentrated mainly on the pioneer work of the 
Protestant missions in the Portuguese Congo (Ba- 
Congo), northern province of Angola, centering 
around the San Salvador station, which was founded 
at the ancient capital of the region in 1887 by the 
Baptist Missionary Societies. The writer, whose own 
experience covered many years, gave some account of 
native life and customs and discussed the strained 
relations between the Portuguese administration and 
the missionaries, particularly the great deterrent to mis¬ 
sion educational work presented by the Portuguese 
language. A long annotated bibliography of the 
Congo compiled by Mercier Gamble (p. 256-293) 
cites French and Belgian studies as well as Portuguese. 

2068. Laszlo, Andreas E. Doctors, drums, and 

dances. Garden City, N.Y., Hanover House, 
1955. 284 p. illus. DT611.L3 


308 


Interest in this physician’s narrative of an expedition 
into the remote interior of Angola is focused on primi¬ 
tive tribal life, rites, and ceremonies, particularly as to 
medical aspects. In his foreword the author com¬ 
ments that the natives are little touched by white 
man’s culture; the slow and patient teaching of the 
missions is given the primitive, “improving his health 
and living standard only as he is able to‘ absorb it,” 
and without much friction. Except for admiring ac¬ 
counts of a few missions and occasional references to 
the language and individual officials, Dr. Laszlo had 
little concern with Portuguese influences in Angola. 

2069. Martins, Manuel Alfredo de Morais. Con- 

tacto de culturas no Congo Portugues; ache- 
gas para o seu estudo. [Lisboa, Junta de In¬ 
vestigates do Ultramar] 1958. 166 p. 

(Ministerio do Ultramar. Junta de Investi¬ 
gates do Ultramar. Estudos de ciencias 
politicas e sociais, 11) DT650.M32 

A study of the Portuguese influence on the peoples 
of the lower Congo, from the 16th-century kingdoms 
on to the present. The author considers the effects 
in economy, material life, techniques, religion, lan¬ 
guage, etc. 

2070. Mendes, Afonso. A Hutla e Mogamedes; 

consideragoes sobre o trabalho indigena. 
[Lisboa] Junta de Investigagoes do Ultramar, 
1958. 208 p. (Ministerio do Ultramar. 

Junta de Investigagoes do Ultramar. Estu¬ 
dos de ciencias politicas e sociais, 12) 

HD8829.A52M4 

Not examined. 

2071. Rebelo, Horacio de Sa Viana. Angola na 

Africa deste tempo; pensamento e acgao no 
govemo da provincia. Lisboa, 1961. 296 p. 

illus. DT611.7.R4 

Reminiscences of a former Governor of Angola, 
quoting lavishly from official documents. He was 
much concerned with questions of urbanization, edu¬ 
cation of Africans and Europeans, roads, poor whites, 
relations with neighboring states, etc. His term of 
office had been from 1955-59. 

2072. Santos, Augusto L. Ferreira do, and V. M. 

Raba£A Gaspar. Estrutura do comercio ex- 
terno de Angola; alguns aspectos. Lisboa, 
Junta de Investigagoes do Ultramar, Centro 
de Estudos Politicos e Sociais, 1959. 114 p. 

44 tables, part fold. HF3929.A6S24 

Extensive statistical analysis of many aspects of An¬ 
golan commerce. 


2073. Sousa Dias, Gastao. Os Portugueses em An¬ 

gola. Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar, 
1959. 329 p. illus. DT602.S6 

Posthumously edited and published history of Por¬ 
tuguese discovery, exploration, and settlement of An¬ 
gola, covering from 1482 to 1815. The author, a 
former officer in the Angolan service, had died in 
1942. The long list of his other books and papers 
regarding Angolan history is given on flyleaves. 

politics 

(Nationalist Revolt) 

2074. Abranches, Esther. Afrique, dernier pro - 

bleme. Luanda, 1960. 133 p. DT600.A2 
An expression of the viewpoint of Europeans in 
Angola regarding relations between Angolans and 
Portuguese. It is the author’s contention that there is 
friendship and trust when the Angolans are not cor¬ 
rupted by Western—especially American—civilization. 

2075. Addicott, Len E. Cry Angola! London, 

SCM Press, 1962. 144 p. map. (Living 

church books) DLG 

Presenting the revolt as seen by Protestant mis¬ 
sionaries, with sympathy for the nationalists. 

2076. Angola : a symposium. London, Published for 

the Institute of Race Relations by Oxford 
University Press, 1962. 160 p. DT611.8.A6 
A collection of views regarding the revolt in Angola 
in the spring of 1961, including the official Portuguese 
statement, the impressions of Protestant missionaries, 
reports from the Catholic press, etc. A review in the 
London Times Literary Supplement of May 18, 1962, 
says . . this publication goes a fair way towards 
filling the gaps in public knowledge of what has hap¬ 
pened and is happening.” 

2077. Felgas, Helio A. Esteves. Guerra em 

Angola. Lisboa, Livraria Classica Editora 
A. M. Teixeira, 1961. 227 p. DT611.7.F4 
By a former Governor of the Portuguese Congo and 
prolific writer on the affairs of Portuguese Africa, this 
is a survey of antecedents as well as events of the revolt 
of 1961 and their international implications. The 
“barbarities which were thought impossible in this 
century” of the first terrorist actions are discussed in 
detail, as well as Portuguese measures of repression. 
The United Nations role is shown as villainous, and 
Holden Roberto is “a ferocious assassin of hundreds 
of women and children.” 


309 


The views of Senhor Felgas are typical of those generally 
expressed in the Portuguese press. Among other publica¬ 
tions of the same character reaching the Library of Congress 
are: Gonsalves Cotta, Grito de Angola; carta aos senhores 
Kennedy e Khruschtchev (Lisboa, 1961. 123 p.); Alfredo 

Diogo, Angola perante uma conspiragao internacional 
(Luanda, Instituto de Angola, 1961. 75 p.); Almeida 

Santos, Angola martir; reportagens dos jornais de Luanda de 
20 de mar go a 19 de julho de 1961 (Lisboa, Agenda Geral do 
Ultramar, 1961. 85 p.). 

The extreme opposite viewpoint of militant African nation¬ 
alism is represented in a special issue on Angola of Presence 
africaine (no. 42/43, 3d quarter 1962). Among contrib¬ 
utors are Mario de Andrade, head of the MPLA (Popular 
Movement for the Liberation of Angola) and Nkrumah. 
Extracts are included from speeches of African delegates 
during the United Nations debate on Angola in January 1962. 

2078. Galvao, Henrique. Santa Maria: my crusade 

for Portugal. Cleveland, New York, World 
Pub. Co., 1961. 246 p. DP680.G35 

The Portuguese writer and former colonial officer 
whose spectacular seizure of the Portuguese liner Santa 
Maria in January 1961 was a gesture of rebellion 
against the Salazar dictatorship, had been governor 
of Huila Province in Angola and Inspector Superior 
of Colonial Administration. As Angolan delegate to 
the National Assembly in 1948, he submitted to the 
Ministry of the Colonies a report on conditions in 
Angola which was a violent denunciation of the Gov¬ 
ernment. It was promptly suppressed and despite 
Captain Galvao’s efforts had not been made public 
until he printed portions of it in his own account of 
the Santa Maria incident: “Report on Native Prob¬ 
lems in the Portuguese Colonies,” p. 57-71. As Ap¬ 
pendix II of the book, he added a paper on “Colonial¬ 
ism, Anticolonialism, Self-Determination,” which 
represented his views on the current political situa¬ 
tion in the Portuguese colonies. For Angola he 
advocated autonomy rather than immediate independ¬ 
ence, with proclamation of the right of self- 
determination. 

2079. Jack, Homer A. Angola; repression and re¬ 

volt in Portuguese Africa. New York, 
American Committee on Africa, 1960. 28 p. 

DT611.7.J3 

This pamphlet foreshadowing the 1961 revolt in 
Angola was written before the Santa Maria episode, 
and quotes the suppressed report of Galvao (above) 
and other protests against Portuguese rule. 

2080. Okuma, Thomas Masaji. Angola in ferment; 

the background and prospects of Angolan 
nationalism. Boston, Beacon Press, 1962. 
137 p. DT611.7.04 


The writer had been for a decade a missionary in 
Angola and depends in part on his personal knowledge 
and observations for this study of the forces which 
gave birth to Angolan nationalism. He analyzes Por¬ 
tuguese policy in damning terms, and gives a dispas¬ 
sionate account of events of early 1961. Professor 
Rupert Emerson comments in a preface: “Five hun¬ 
dred years is a long time [for the Portuguese] in which 
to have accomplished so shockingly little.” 

2081. Panikkar, Kavalam M. Angola in flames. 

New York, Asia Pub. House, 1962. 127 p. 

DT611.5.P3 1962a 

By the author of Revolution in Africa (no. 124), this 
pamphlet for Indian readers analyzes the current 
situation in Angola and describes Portuguese policy 
in no friendly terms. Mr. Panikkar’s picture of the 
oppressive Portuguese rule includes comment on 
Mozambique and Goa. 

2082. United Nations. General Assembly. Sub- 

Committee on the Situation in Angola. Re¬ 
port. New York, 1961. 144 p. fold. map. 

(Document A/4978) DT611.7.U5 

2083. Westwood, Andrew. “The politics of revolt 

in Angola.” Africa report, v. 7, November 
1962: 7-10, 31. DTl.A2l7,v. 7 

By a political analyst now with Brookings Institution, 
this review of the contest for political power by the 
two major parties working for the liberation of Angola 
carries the tale of events into August 1962. Holden 
Roberto’s UP A (Uniao das Populates de Angola) 
and MPLA (Movimento Popular de Liberagao de 
Angola), led by Andrade and Cruz, are explained 
with notable clarity. 

ANTHROPOLOGY, ETC. 

2084. Chatelain, Heli. Folk-tales of Angola. Bos¬ 

ton and New York, Published for the Ameri¬ 
can Folk-Lore Society by Houghton, Mifflin, 
1894. 315 p. GR1.A5, v. 1 

Fifty tales from Angola, with Ki-mbundu text, 
literal English translation, introduction, and notes, col¬ 
lected and edited by an American Africanist, formerly 
U.S. commercial agent at Luanda, and before that a 
linguist for Protestant missions in Africa. This col¬ 
lection, which was published as the first volume of 
the Memoirs of the American Folk-Lore Society, is 
referred to constantly as a landmark in Negro folk tale 
studies. 


310 


2085. Childs, Gladwyn M. Umbundu kinship and 

character. London, New York, Oxford Uni¬ 
versity Press, 1949. 245 p. illus., maps. 

DT611.C5 

Anthropological study, “being a description of the 
social structure and individual development of the 
Ovimbundu of Angola, with observations concerning 
the bearing on the enterprise of Christian missions 
of certain phases of the life and culture described.” 
The writer explained the habitat of the tribe, which 
is extended widely over the highlands of Angola, their 
political and social life, system of kinship, social struc¬ 
ture, and the development of the individual from 
babyhood through education and working life, both 
in tribal patterns and in contact with white culture. 
Comprehensive bibliographies are given for each sec¬ 
tion, noting scholarly sources in English, Portuguese 
and other languages. The title, “Umbundu,” is the 
adjective form of the plural proper name of the tribe, 
“Ovimbundu,” which means “people of the mist.” 

2086. Edwards, Adrian C. The Ovimbundu under 

two sovereignties; a study of social control and 
social change among a people of Angola. 
London, Published for the International 
African Institute by the Oxford University 
Press, 1962. xvii, 169 p. map, diagrs. 

DT611.42.E3 

Bibliography: p. 163-166. 

2087. Ennis, Merlin. Umbundu folk tales from An¬ 

gola. Collected and translated by Merlin 
Ennis. Comparative analysis by Albert B. 
Lord. Boston, Beacon Press, 1962. 316 p. 

GR360.A5E5 

The writer had collected these stories during 40 
years of missionary service in Angola, many of them 
having been transcribed by a native teacher in a vil¬ 
lage school. In the introductory essay, patterns of 
repetition in the various types of stories are examined. 

2088. Estermann, Carlos. Etnografia do sudoeste 

de Angola. 2. ed., corr. Lisboa, 19604- 
illus., fold. col. map. (Junta de Investi¬ 
gates do Ultramar. Memorias. Serie 
antropologica e etnologica, 4-5) 

DT611.42.E82 

Includes bibliographies. 

Contents.—v. 1. Os povos nao-bantos e o grupo etnico dos 
Ambos.—v. 2. Grupo etnico nhaneca-humbe. 

These comprehensive scholarly volumes are the 
first two of a trilogy concerned with peoples of south¬ 
eastern Angola. Vol. 1 takes in the Bushmen and 


kindred tribes and the ethnic group of the Ambo 
(Ovambo). In Vol. 2 Father Estermann studies 
the Nhaneca-Humbe group, covering all phases of 
history, tribal and family life, mores, art, religious 
beliefs and practises. The third volume, according to 
a review in Africa of April 1959, will deal with the 
northern Herero. A 15-page list of the writings of this 
anthropologist, Bibliografia do etnologo Padre Carlos 
Estermann, S. Sp., compiled by Afonso Costa, was pub¬ 
lished by the Instituto de Angola in Luanda in 1961. 

2089. Felgas, Helio A. Esteves. As populagoes 

nativas do Congo Portugues. Luanda, 1960. 
136 p. illus., fold, maps, tables. 

GN655.A5F4 

Bibliography: p. 133-136. 

Anthropological study of the Bacongo and related 
tribes of the northernmost province of Angola. 

2090. Hambly, Wilfrid D. The Ovimbundu of 

Angola. Chicago. 1934. 362 p. 92 

plates, maps. (Field Museum of Natural 
History, Publication 329. Anthropological 
series, v. 21, no. 2) GN655.08H3 

The author, assistant curator of African ethnology 
of the Field Museum, had conducted the Frederick 
H. Rawson-Field Museum expedition to West Africa 
in 1929-30, making investigations in Angola and 
Nigeria. His Angolan work was conducted from 
headquarters at the Elende Mission Station, with 
journeys totaling 5,000 miles in the southwest, north¬ 
west, and eastern parts of the country. The book is a 
comprehensive cultural survey, including a seven-page 
bibliography of scholarly sources, a full index, and 
many excellent plates showing artifacts and life. 

2091. McCulloch, Merran. The Ovimbundu of 

Angola. London, International African In¬ 
stitute, 1952. 50 p. (Ethnographic survey 
of Africa: West Central Africa, pt. 2) 

DT611.M17 

2092. - The southern Lunda and related peo¬ 

ples (Northern Rhodesia, Belgian Congo, 
Angola) London, International African In¬ 
stitute, 1951. llOp. (Ethnographic survey 
of Africa: West Central Africa, pt. 1) 

DT639.M3 

Two monographs in this authoritative series, synthe¬ 
sizing existent studies. The Southern Lunda and re¬ 
lated peoples occupy most of the eastern half of 
Angola, spreading over its borders into northwestern 
Rhodesia and the Katanga Province of the Belgian 


311 




Congo. Their numbers are estimated altogether at 
around 63,000, of whom 10,000 live in Angola, 10,000 
in the Congo, and the rest in 2 districts of Northern 
Rhodesia. The Ovimbundu are the dominant autoch¬ 
thonous race of Angola, their homeland the Ben- 
guela Highland in the west-central part of the country, 
though they are found as far as the coast. It is esti¬ 
mated that more than a third of the total population 
of about 4 million are Ovimbundu. Both studies fol¬ 
low the general pattern of the series, giving in outline 
form essential data of grouping and demography, 
physical environment, traditions and history, language, 
physical appearance and dress, main features of econ¬ 
omy, social organization and political structure, 
religion and magic, family rites and customs. Both 
end with full bibliographies of sources. 


2093. Redinha, Jose. Etnosociologia de nordeste de 

Angola. Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar, 
1958. 247 p. DT611.R4 

The author is Director of the Museum of Luanda. 
His study of Central Bantu tribes of the Lunda cluster 
in Northeast Angola (Luena, Quicos, Tutchokwe, 
etc.) won a prize when presented in 1956. 

2094. Santos, Eduardo dos. Sobre a ‘medicina’ e 

magia dos Quicos. Lisboa, 1960. 226 p. 
illus. (Portugal. Junta de Investigates 
do Ultramar. Estudos, ensaios e documentos, 
no. 80) DLC 

Ethnological study of the people known in English 
as the Chokewa Bantu. 


Cape Verde Islands and Portuguese Guinea 


2095. Augusto de Silva, Artur. Usos e costumes 

juridicos dos Fulas da Guine Portuguesa; en- 
saio. Bissau, Centro de Estudos da Guine 
Portuguesa, 1958. 139 p. (Centro de Es¬ 

tudos da Guine Portuguesa. Publicagoes, no. 
20) DLC 

Not available for examination. The foreword is 
by Professor Marcello Caetano. 

2096. Boletim cultural da Guine Portuguesa. v. 14- 

19464- Bissau, Centro de Estudos da Guine 
Portuguesa. illus. quarterly. DT613.B6 
The organ of the prominent Center for study and 
research on Portuguese Guinea, edited at its head¬ 
quarters in the Museu Guine Portuguesa in Bissau. 
The numbers carry substantial articles on “what is 
considered of interest ... of an historical, ethno¬ 
graphic, scientific, literary, or artistic character.” 
There are also regular sections of chronicle of the 
Province, economic statistics, notes and news, and list 
of books and publications received at the Museum. 
On the back cover, titles are given of the monographic 
publications of the Center, cited as Memorias, several 
examples of which are mentioned below (see Augusto 
da Silva, Carreira, Lima). 

2097. Cape Verde Islands. 25 anos de actividade: 

28 de Maio de 1926-28 de Maio de 1951. 
Praia, Edigoes Propaganda, 1951. 92 p. 

illus. HD4365.C3A55 

Official review of recent advances in public works, 
agricultural production, communications, public 


health, education, etc. Photographs in black and 
white and many statistics. 

2098. Carreira, Antonio. Mandingas da Guini 

Portuguesa. Publicaqao commemorativa do 
v centenario da descoberta da Guine. Lis¬ 
boa, 1947. 324 p. (Centro de Estudos da 
Guine Portuguesa. Publica$oes, no. 4) 

DT613.C27 

2099. - Vida social dos Manjacos. Publica- 

$ao commemorativa do v centenario da des- 
cuberta da Guine. Lisboa, 1947. 185 p. 

illus. (Centro de Estudos da Guine Portu¬ 
guesa. Publicasoes, no. 1) GN655.M3C3 

Two ethnological studies by a colonial administrator 
in Portuguese Guinea. The Mandingo and Man- 
jaco are tribes of the Mende-speaking peoples who are 
spread widely in western Sudanic Africa. 

2100. Coloquios cabo-verdianos. Lisboa, 1959. 182 p. 

(Junta de Investigates do Ultramar. Centro 
de Estudos Politicos e Sociais. Estudos de 
ciencias politicas e sociais, 22) DLC 

2101. Correa, Antonio A. Mendes. Ultramar Por- 

tugues. II. Ilhas de Cabo Verde. Lisboa, 
Agenda Geral do Ultramar, Divisao de Pu¬ 
blicans e Biblioteca, 1954. 262 p. illus., 
maps. JV4227.E587 

Second volume of a notable series of surveys of the 
Portuguese overseas possessions. Volume I, 1949, was 
Sintese da Africa , a general study of geography and 


312 




ethnology of the continent as a whole. This work 
covers in great detail physical and human geography 
of the Cape Verde Islands, the first eight chapters 
being on natural science, the remaining seven on 
ethnology, demography, social conditions, languages, 
culture and education, politics and government, econ¬ 
omy. Each chapter is followed by resumes in French 
and English. An earlier work by Professor Mendes 
Correa (anthropology, University of Porto) is con¬ 
cerned with ethnology of the tribes of Guinea; Uma 
Jornada cientifica na Guine Portuguesa (Lisboa, Di- 
visao de Publicagoes e Biblioteca, Agenda Geral das 
Colonias, 1947. 193 p.). 

2102. Dinis, Antonio J. Dias. 1446-1946. O V 

centenaria do descobrimento da Guine Por¬ 
tuguesa a luz de cntica historica. Braga, 
1946. 155 p., illus., maps. DT613.D55 

Study of the disputed question of the first discovery 
of Guinea by the Portuguese, analyzing the evidence 
regarding the early chronicles. 

2103. Ferreira, Manuel. Morabeza, contos de 

Cabo Verde. Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ul¬ 
tramar, 1958. 106 p. DLC 

2104. Ferreira Paulo, Leopoldina. Impresses 

digitais nos indigenas da Guine Portuguesa. 
Lisboa, Ministerio do Ultramar, Junta de In¬ 
vestigates do Ultramar, 1957. 109 p. 

(fistudos, ensaios e documentos, 37) 

GN192.P35 

Summary in French and English. 

This monograph in the branch of anthropometry 
known as dermatoglyphics is an example of the de¬ 
tailed scientific studies issued under authority of the 
Portuguese Government. 

2105. GoNgALVES, Jose Julio. O Islamismo na 

Guine Portuguesa (ensaio sociomissionologi- 
co ) Lisboa, 1961. 222 p. fold. map. illus. 

BP64.G8G6 

By a scholar connected with the Instituto Superior 
de Estudos Ultramarinos who examines the modern 
proselytizing efforts of Islam in Portuguese Guinea. 
His conclusions are alarming to the Catholic Govern¬ 
ment. Besides the incursions of Islam, Professor 
Gongalves finds that the elites are returning to 
paganism. 

2106. Gt. Brit. Foreign Office. Historical Section. 

Cape Verde Islands. London, H.M. Sta¬ 


tionery Office, 1920. 41 p. (Handbooks, 
no. 117) DT671.C2G7 

2107. - Portuguese Guinea. London, H.M. 

Stationery Office, 1920. 41 p. (Hand¬ 
books, no. 118) DT613.G7 

This conspicuous series of handbooks was prepared 
by the British Foreign Office before the Versailles 
Peace Conference with the particular purpose of 
supplying the representatives with “information in the 
most convenient form, geographical, economic, his¬ 
torical, social, religious and political,” on all regions 
with which there might be any concern. In fact, the 
only subject which is treated in more than a few short 
paragraphs is the then current politico-economic 
aspect. Thirty years after their publication they are 
naturally out of date, but for such colonies as the Cape 
Verde Islands and Portuguese Guinea, which have 
hardly been touched in English writing, they may still 
have use as supplementing standard reference books, 
encyclopedias and general geographies. 

2108. Lessa, Almerindo. Seroantropologia das 

Ilhas de Cabo Verde. Mesa redonda sobre 
o homen cabo-verdiano, por Almerindo Lessa 
e Jacques Ruffie. Lisboa, 1957. 153 p. 

(Ministerio do Ultramar. Junta de Investi¬ 
gates do Ultramar. Estudos, ensaios e 
documentos, 32) DLC 

2109. Lima, Augusto J. Santos. Organizaqao 

economica e social dos Bijagos. Publicagao 
commemorativa do V centenario da descober- 
ta da Guine. Bissau, 1947. 154 p. (Cen¬ 

tro de Estudos da Guine Portuguesa, no. 2) 

DLC 

2110. Lyall, Archibald. Black and white make 

brown; an account of a journey to the Cape 
Verde Islands and Portuguese Guinea. Lon¬ 
don, Wm. Heinemann, 1938. 303 p. illus., 
maps. DT671.C2L9 

This British writer and linguist, who is known as a 
specialist on the Balkans, in the midthirties visited the 
little known Portuguese colonies of the West African 
bulge. His book is comprehensive, informative, and 
very interesting reading. The title is explained in the 
figures he gives for the population of Cape Verde, 
about 6,000 whites, 40,000 blacks, and 104,605 of 
mixed blood. He includes a good historical sketch 
of Prince Henry the Navigator who inspired the 
Portuguese discoveries in the 15th century, a vivid 


313 






account of the “cinder-heap,” St. Vincent in the Cape 
Verde Islands, which as a coaling station is the only 
part of the colony known to the outside world, a 
critique of the Creole poetry of the Islands, and in 
continental Guinea descriptions of the life and rela¬ 
tions of Portuguese and natives, the pagan tribes of 
the coast, the Muslims of the interior, and the untamed 
Bissagos of the islands off the southern coast. He 
speaks with sympathy of the Portuguese colonizers who 
have the secret of getting on with the natives. 

The first 120 pages of Anne Morrow Lindbergh’s inspira¬ 
tional flying log, Listen! the Wind (Harcourt, 1938), are con¬ 
cerned with a stay at Praia, capital of the Cape Verde Islands. 
Though her story is a personal one, she conveys with some 
intensity the impression of the dismal island, the languor 
of its racial mixture of inhabitants, and its isolation. 

2111. Mota, Avelino Teixeira da. Guine Portu- 
guesa. Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar, 
Divisao de Publicagoes e Biblioteca, 1954. 
2 v. (Monografias dos territories do 
Ultramar) DT613.M6 

Official geographical survey giving wide coverage to 
physical features—geology, hydrography, climate, 
flora and fauna, etc., and to ethnological aspects in 
Portuguese Guinea and the islands of Sao Tome and 
Principe, as well as to economic and social develop¬ 
ment under the Portuguese administration. Chapters 


are followed by summaries in French and English, 
some by bibliographies. 

A well-presented illustrated brochure offering a short 
factual survey was published by the Agenda Geral do Ultra¬ 
mar in 1961: Guine; pequena monografia (Lisbon. 53 p.). 

A companion brochure treats the Cape Verde Islands: Cabo 
Verde; pequena monografia (Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ul¬ 
tramar, 1961. 53 p.). 

2112. Munno, Settimio, ed. In terra d’Africa. 

Milano, Pontificio Istituto missioni estere, 
1958. 156 p. plates, map. (Oltremare, 

collana di pubblicazioni missionarie, 14) 

BV3625.G817M8 
A collection of papers by Italian missionaries in 
Portuguese Guinea, depicting phases of their work 
with the primitive tribesmen. They admit sadly that 
Islam is far more effective in making converts than the 
Catholic Church; 180,000 Muslims, 19,000 Catholics, 
after 5 centuries. 

2113. Teixeira, Antonio Jose da Silva, and Luis 

Augusto Grandvaux. A agricultura do 
arquipelago de Cabo Verde; cartas agricolas, 
problemas agrarios, Barbosa. Lisboa, 1958. ^ 
178 p. fold. maps. ([Portugal] Ministerio do 
Ultramar. Memorias da Junta de Investi¬ 
gates do Ultramar. 2. ser., 2) 

S471.C215T4 

Summary in English and French. 


Sao Tome and Principe 


2114. Gt. Brit. Foreign Office. Historical Section. 
San Thome and Principe. London, H.M. 
Stationery Office, 1920. 41 p. (Hand¬ 
books, no. 119) DT615.G7 

One of the few survey accounts available in English 
of the Portuguese islands in the Gulf of Guinea known 
largely in connection with the slave trade, for which 
they were a center in the early days, and for the notori¬ 
ous controversy in the first decade of the 20th century 
regarding the system of contract labor brought from 
Angola and elsewhere to work on the cacao planta¬ 
tions. The brochure touches on this labor history in 
barest outline, its largest concern being with economic 
conditions. Its list of sources includes the main re¬ 
ports of the labor controversy. 

Among these sources there might be noted two British 
“exposures,” A Modern Slavery, by Henry W. Nevinson 
(London, New York, Harper, 1906. 216 p.), and W. A. 


Cadbury’s Labour in Portuguese West Africa (London, 2d ed., 
1910); the Portuguese answer was prepared in English by 
Eduardo Mantero and published in a large volume in Lon¬ 
don in 1913. The conspicuous medical reforms performed 
by the Portuguese, who in a few years rid the islands of' 
sleeping sickness, are recorded in English by Dr. Bruto da 
Costa and others, Sleeping Sickness: a Record of Four Years* 
War against it in Principe (London, 1916). 

The slavery issue of the servigoes (contract laborers) who 
were brought from Angola to Sao Tome and Principe and 
not sent back was brought up again before the League of Na¬ 
tions in the midtwenties, in a Report on Employment of 
Native Labor in Portuguese Africa (1925), presented to the 
Temporary Slavery Commission by an American sociologist, 
Edward Alsworth Ross, who had made a trip of investigation 
in Angola with the backing of Protestant missions, and 
American humanitarian groups. It was answered in a report 
prepared by Dr. Oliveira Santos, the Minister of Colonies 
(Reply to the Accusation addressed to the League of Na¬ 
tions, Lisbon, 1930, 91 p.). Dr. Santos attempted to show 
that Mr. Ross’ examination had been extremely superficial 
and misinformed; however, the charges resulted in further 
improvement in conditions of imported labor on the islands. 


314 


2115. Silva, Helder Lains e. Sao Tome e Principe 
e a cultura (io cafe, por Helder Lains e Silva, 
com a colaboragao no estudo dos solos, de 
Jose Carvalho Cardoso. Lisboa, Ministerio 
do Ultramar, 1958. 499 p. plates, tables, 
fold. map. (in pocket) (Memorias da Junta 
de Investigates do Ultramar, 2. ser., no. 1). 

SR270.S3S5 

An impressive ecological study beginning with a 
general account of the province in geographical, geo¬ 
logical, climatological, and economic aspects, then 
analyzing in detail its agriculture in general, and spe¬ 
cifically the coffee culture. A summary in English is 
given on pages 353-387. 


2116. Tenreiro, Francisco. A ilha de Sao Tome. 
Lisboa, Junta de Investigates do Ultramar, 
1961. 279 p. 73 plates, maps, diagrs. 
(Memorias da Junta de Investigates do Ul¬ 
tramar. 2. ser., no. 24) DT615.T4 

A comprehensive geographical survey, with chapters 
on climate and soils, colonization and agriculture, the 
isle and its peoples, socioeconomics, and economic po¬ 
sition with particular reference to the export crops of 
coffee and cocoa. There is a long classified bibliog¬ 
raphy, largely of articles in Portuguese journals, but 
including a handful of writings in English. A section 
of 73 plates concludes the volume. 


Mozambique 


2117. Annuario da Provincia de Mogambique. Lou- 

rengo Marques, A. W. Bayly & Co., annual. 
43a edigao, 1962. 1268, 84 p., maps, plans. 

DT465.L3D4 

English edition begun as Delagoa Directory (10th 
year, 1908+; 44th ed., 1943 to 46th ed., 1945, with 
title, Lourengo Marques Directory. Since 1945 the 
Library of Congress has acquired only the Portuguese 
edition, and we are not sure whether the English edi¬ 
tion is still published). The big annual tome is a 
comprehensive business register of the city of Lourengo 
Marques and other districts of Mozambique, includ¬ 
ing an encyclopedic survey of the colony as well as 
directory by towns and districts. The pages in roman 
numerals are indexes of subjects, addresses of govern¬ 
ment offices, business and industries, local names, 

, economic activities (the latter in English translation 
also). Then come the 1,268 pages of print, including 
folded maps, town plans, etc., and interspersed with 
advertisements. The separately numbered pages at 
the end are an index of advertisers. Many business 
enterprises and investments in Mozambique are British 
owned or financed, and exports from the port of 
Lourengo Marques, which is one of the best harbors 
on the East African coast, are largely from British 
South and Central Africa. 

2118. Axelson, Eric V. Portuguese in south-east 

Africa, 1600-1700. Johannesburg, Witwa- 
tersrand University Press, 1960. 226 p. 

illus. DT459.A93 1960 

Includes bibliography. 


2119. - South-east Africa, 1488-1530. Lon¬ 

don, New York, Longmans, Green, 1940. 
306 p. illus., maps, facsims. DT773.A9 
South-East Africa was prepared by this historian as 
his doctoral dissertation at the University of the Wit- 
watersrand. It is concerned with the Portuguese ac¬ 
quisition of the Arab States along the southeast African 
coast after Vasco da Gama’s landing at Mozambique 
in 1898. The book of 1960 continues the history 
through the 17th century. 

2120. Boxer, C. R., and Carlos de Azevedo. Fort 

Jesus and the Portuguese in Mombasa, 1593- 
1729. London, Hollis & Carter, 1960. 
144 p. DT434.M7B6 

Like the preceding works of Professor Axelson, this 
is a recent example of studies by English historians 
working primarily with Portuguese source materials. 
The narrative gives the history of the fort at Mombasa 
in Kenya and its troubled relations with the Portu¬ 
guese on the east coast of Africa. 

2121. Earthy, Emily D. Valenge women: the social 

and economic life of the Valenge women of 
Portuguese East Africa. London, for the 
International Institute of African Languages 
and Cultures, by Oxford University Press, 
1933. 251 p. illus., maps. DT458.E2 
Technical study of the culture of a Bantu tribe of 
Mozambique by a missionary anthropologist, with 
attention focused on the role of women in a fetishistic 
society. The book was prepared in connection with 
studies for a doctorate. 


692 - 756—63 - 21 


315 





2122. Freitas, Antonio Joaquim de. A geologia e 

o desenvolvimento economico e social de 
Mozambique. Lourengo Marques, Impr. 
Nacional de Mogambique, 1959. 396 p. 

illus., fold, maps, tables. QE337.F72 

Includes bibliographies. 

An extended economic and technical survey of geol¬ 
ogy and mining developments in Mozambique. The 
author was formerly Chief of the Services of Industry 
and Geology of the province. 

2123. Gersdorff, Ralph von. Mogambique. 

Bonn, K. Schroeder, 1958. 136 p. illus. 

(Die Lander Afrikas, Bd. 14) DT456.G4 

Includes bibliography. 

See general note on this series, no. 10. 

2124. Harris, Marvin. Portugal 1 s African wards: 

a firsthand report on labor and education in 
Mogambique. New York, American Com¬ 
mittee on Africa, 1958. 36 p. (Africa today 

pamphlets, 2) DLC-AFR 

A pamphlet attacking Portuguese policy as involv¬ 
ing forced labor. 

2125. Istituto Nazionale per il Commercio 

Estero. Mozambico. Roma, 1959. 183 p. 
fold. col. map. MC578.M618 

A concise survey of the economy of Mozambique, of 
a type not presently available in English or French. 
The first 60 pages describe economic and industrial re¬ 
sources, communications and transport, and develop¬ 
ment programs in general terms. The next part of 
about equal length analyzes foreign trade with special 
attention to the import of Italian materials, the third 
part discusses markets for particular products. 

2126. Knopfli, Josue, ed. Sinopse das materias 

oficiais publicadas no <e Boletim oficial 11 da 
Provincia de Mogambique, referida ao ano de 
1960. Lourengo Marques, Impr. Nacional 
de Mogambique, 1961. 233 p. Z3882.K6 
This continues a legal series begun in 1923 and pub¬ 
lished annually from 1929-37 and 1942 to date. 

2127. Lobato, Alexandre. Evolugao administrativa 

e economica de Mogambique, 1752-1763. 
Com um prefacio do antigo ministro do Ul¬ 
tramar, M. M. Sarmento Rodrigues. Lisboa, 
Agenda Geral do Ultramar, Divisao de Pub- 
licagoes e Biblioteca, 1957+ v. 1. (Estu- 
dos mogambicanos) JQ3671.M6L6 


2128. - Quatro estudos e uma evocagao para 

a historia de Lourengo Marques. Lisboa, 
Junta de Investigagoes do Ultramar, 1961. 
167 p. (Estudos mogambicanos) DLC 

Two works by a historian of Mozambique, in a series 
which has included a number of other studies of the 
Portuguese in East Africa. Senhor Lobato has writ¬ 
ten several other books, including a two-volume 
history, + Expansao portuguesa en Mogambique de 
1498 a 1530 (Lisboa, Agenda Geral do Ultramar, 
1954). 

2129. Maugham, R. C. F. Portuguese East Africa: 

the history, scenery and great game of Manica 
and Sofala. London, John Murray; New 
York, Dutton, 1906. 340 p. 32 plates, map. 

DT465.M17M3 

One of the few full-length books in English describ¬ 
ing the country, written by the British Consul for the 
districts of Mozambique and Zambesia, and the terri¬ 
tories of Manica and Sofala. The writer was well 
informed regarding history and had many observations 
on native life and customs, in which, however, his in¬ 
terest seemed secondary to that in elephants, rhi¬ 
noceros, and equipment for big game hunting. 

2130. Moreira, Eduardo. Portuguese East Africa: a 

study of its religious needs. London, New 
York, World Dominion Press, 1936. 104 p. 

BV3625.M65M6 

This volume, one of a long series of surveys of world 
mission fields, was written by the liaison officer of the 
Protestant missions and the Portuguese Government, 
who had recently visited the Portuguese African col¬ 
onies. He gave a historical account of the rise and 
development of evangelical missions in Mozambique, 
with special emphasis on the tension between the mis¬ 
sionaries and the Portuguese authorities who had for 
long claimed that the missions were a denationalizing 
force, working against the religious “homogeneity” 
which the Catholic power felt should be the basis of 
national unity. He considered that of recent years 
relations had improved, and that the best missionaries 
(for instance, Dr. Tucker) were collaborating fully 
with the Portuguese in acceptance of the assimilation 
policy. 

2131. Mozambique. Mogambique, documentdrio 

trimestral. Lourengo Marques. 1935 + 
illus., plates (part col.) maps, music. 

DT453.M6 


316 



This official quarterly which carries distinguished 
articles of general coverage is a valuable source for 
information on Mozambique. The issues include 
regular bibliographies of works published in Mozambi¬ 
que and received on legal deposit by the Arquivo 
Historico. 

2132. Mozambique. Direcgao dos Servigos de Agri- 

mensura. Atlas de Moqambique. Lourengo 
Marques, Empresa Modema, 1960. 43 p. 
(chiefly col. maps, part fold.) 

G2550.M6 1960 

Scale of maps 1: 1,000,000 or 1: 6,000,000. 

2133. Oliveira Boleo, Jose de. Moqambique. Lis¬ 

boa, Divisao de Publicagoes e Biblioteca, 
Agenda Geral do Ultramar, 1951. 562 p. 
plates, maps (Monografias dos territorios do 
Ultramar) DT453.04 

Bibliography: p. 539-558. 

Like others of its series, this study surveys factors of 
physical geography, geology, climate, flora and fauna, 
anthropogeography, history, politics, and social welfare 
under the Portuguese, and economic development. 
Chapters are followed by resumes in French and Eng¬ 
lish. In conclusion there is a long bibliography, 
classified by subject field, and including writings in 
various languages. 

2134. Portugal. Laws, statutes, etc. Principal le- 

gislaqao aplicavel aos indigenas da Provincia 
de Moqambique. Lourengo Marques, Im- 
prensa Nacional de Mogambique, 1960. 
385 p. DLC-LL 

2135. Rita-Ferreira, Antonio. Agrupamento e 

caracterizaqao etnica dos indigenas de Mo¬ 
qambique. Lisboa, Junta de Investigagoes 
do Ultramar, 1958. 133 p. illus., maps (in 

color). (Estudos, ensaios e documentos, 50) 

DT458.R5 

A useful ethnological handbook in two parts, each 
preceded by a many-colored map. The first shows the 
tribal groups of Mozambique, the second the larger 
linguistic groupings. The text explains chief charac¬ 
teristics of each group. The book includes a section 
of plates, resumes in French and English, and a short 
bibliography, the 77 references in which are about 
equally divided between Portuguese and English. A 
list of 49 other titles in this official series is given on a 
preliminary flyleaf. 


2136. Rodrigues, Junior. Colonizaqao; contribugao 

para o seu estudo em Mogambique. [Lou¬ 
rengo Marques?] Africa Editora, 1959. 
211 p. DT459.R6 

Journalistic study including statistical material. 
The writer, a Lourengo Marques newspaperman, is 
author of essays and reports on Mozambique and 
novels in the Mozambique setting. 

2137. Rodrigues dos Santos, Joaquim. Contri- 

buqao para o estudo da antropologia de Mo¬ 
qambique; algumas tribos do distrito de Tete. 
Porto, Tip. Mendonga, 1944. 412 p. illus., 
maps. (Republica Portuguesa. Ministerio 
das Colonias. Junta das Missoes Geograficas 
e de Investigagoes do Ultramar. Memorias. 
Serie antropologica, 2) DT465.T4R6 

This scholar, a professor at the University of Porto, 
was a noted anthropologist and author of many works 
relating to East Africa. In 1936-37 he conducted 
Portuguese expeditions studying and photographing 
tribes of Mozambique, an account of which was pub¬ 
lished by the Agenda Geral das Colonias in 1940 
(Portugal. Missao Antropologica de Moqambique ... 
2a. campanha, agosto de 1937 a Janeiro de 1938, por 
J. R. dos Santos, Junior. Lisbon, 1940. 91 p. xcv 
plates on 48 1.). The present book is a large study of 
the physical anthropology of tribes of Zambesia, par¬ 
ticularly of the district of Tete. It ends with anthro¬ 
pometric tables and almost 40 pages of bibliographical 
notes, in which the author’s own contributions are 
entered under the name Santos Junior (J. R. dos). 

2138. Santos, Manuel Pimentel Pereira dos. A 

industria em Moqambique. Lourengo Mar¬ 
ques, 1956. 122 p. tables. HG578.M6S28 
Published under the auspices of the Junta de 
Commercio Externo da Provincia de Mogambique, this 
is a thorough examination of all aspects of industries 
and foreign trade as of 1946, their development from 
1947-54, their structure in that year, and plans and 
legislation for future development. 

2139. Santos, Rui Martins dos. Uma contribuiqao 

para a analise da economia de Moqambique. 
Lisboa, Companhia de Gimentos de Mogam¬ 
bique, 1959. 373 p. tables, diagrs. 

HC578.M6S33 

Full-scale statistical study of all phases of economic 
life in Mozambique. 


317 


2140. Silva, Carlos A. Vieira da, ed. The city of 
Lourengo Marques guide. Lourengo Mar¬ 
ques, 1956. 221 p. Ulus. DT465.L3S5 
The port city of Lourengo Marques on Delagoa Bay 
(Baia da Lagoa, Bay of the Lagoon) is a favorite spot 
for the British residents of the interior of Southern 
Africa. This guidebook, illustrated with many photo¬ 
graphs of landscape, architecture, and monuments, de¬ 
votes equal space to museums, bullfights, and other 
institutions for entertainment of the visitor’s mind, and 
facilities for his physical comfort. 


2141. Tracey, Hugh. Chopi musicians, their music, 
poetry and instruments. London, New York, 
Published for the International African Insti¬ 
tute by Oxford University Press, 1948. 
180 p. illus., maps, music. ML 3760.T7 
Detailed study of the music of a tribe in Portuguese 
East Africa who are famous for their large orchestras 
of xylophones and “timbila” and orchestral dances. 
Mr. Tracey discussed their melody, lyrics, dancers and 
dances, players and leaders, commenting that they are 
considered to present the most advanced example of 
artistic endeavor in the southern part of the continent. 


318 


SPANISH 

(Rio Muni and 

Note: The Spanish possessions in the Gulf of Guinea form 
the only foothold of Spain south of the Sahara. The region, 
known until 1958 as Territorios Espanoles del Golfo de 
Guinea, and presently as Region Ecuatorial: Provincias de 
Fernando Poo y Rio Muni, consists of two administrative 
districts: the big island of Fernando Poo, lying well out in 
the Atlantic to the northwest of the Cameroons (2,017 
square kilometers); continental Spanish Guinea, which con¬ 
sists of the mainland area known also as Rio Muni (26,000 
square kilometers on the coast between the Cameroons and 
Gabon), three small islands off the southern coast, Corisco 
and two Elobeyes, Grande and Chico, and farther to the south 
the slightly larger island of Annobon. The seat of govern¬ 
ment for the territory is at Santa Isabel on Fernando Poo. 
Continental Guinea in particular is relatively undeveloped. 
Although there is a large body of literature on Spanish 
Guinea in Spanish, much of it published under official 
auspices, writing in English is so scant as to be almost non¬ 
existent. The following references in Spanish are offered 
as a sampling of material received by the Library of Congress. 

Bibliography 

2142. Berman, Sanford. Spanish Guinea: an anno¬ 
tated bibliography. Washington, 1961. 
597 1. DLC-AFR 

Prepared as a dissertation for the master’s degree in 
library science at the Catholic University of America. 
Microfilm copies of the big volume in typescript may 
be obtained from the university. This work is a 
unique contribution to African studies, and anyone do¬ 
ing research on Spanish Guinea will find it invaluable. 
After an introductory essay on the literature relating to 
the region, the bibliography proper, occupying over 
330 pages, is arranged under alphabetical subject head¬ 
ings from “Agriculture” to “Zoology,” with a pre¬ 
liminary section of “General Works”; the subject 
schema is explained on p. 14-16 of the Introduction. 
Mr. Berman has read and analyzed practically all 
entries in evaluative annotations, often of several hun¬ 
dred words. (With the exception of two or three titles 
dated after 1960, all books named in the present sec¬ 
tion are thus described.) He follows this list, which 
he speaks of as “a representative core of current and 
retrospective Guineana,” with a supplementary bibli¬ 
ography of works useful for African studies, then with 


GUINEA 

Fernando Poo) 

titles for “A Basic Library of Guineana” (p. 430-433). 
Next are provided an extended glossary (p. 434-490), 
a chronology (p. 491-527), a directory of publishers, 
periodicals, and institutions, and finally a full index 
of authors and subject matter. 


2143. Africa [revista de accion espanola] v. 1 + 

January 1942+ Madrid, Instituto de Es- 
tudios Africanos [IDEA] illus., maps, 
monthly. DT37.A1A4 

IDEA is one of the institutes of the official Spanish 
Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas. It 
took over publication of this review from a nongovern¬ 
mental organization, the Instituto de Estudios Politicos, 
in 1950. In 1960 the subtitle has been dropped, to fit 
with wider Spanish interest in other parts of Africa. 
The journal is the most ready source of information 
about the remaining Spanish possessions in Africa, now 
limited to Spanish West Africa (Spanish Sahara and 
Ifni) and Spanish Guinea. Besides articles and news 
notes, Africa carries a regular section on “Actividades 
communistas en el mundo afroasiatico,” a press review, 
a list of new publications including contents of peri¬ 
odicals, and a section of laws and decrees. 

2144. Alvarez Garcia, Heriberto R. Historia de 

la accion cultural en la Guinea espanola, con 
notas sobre la ensenanza en el Africa negra. 
Madrid, Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 
1948. 557 p. illus., maps, diagrs. 

LC2808.S72A6 

Study of Spanish educational work in West Africa 
by the Chief Inspector of Education of these tropical 
colonies. The account is largely historical. It was 
reviewed at some length in English in the quarterly 
journal of the International African Institute, Africa, 
of January 1951, p. 70-71. The reviewer concluded 
that there was no attempt, past or present, to relate 
education of the natives to African culture; “the educa¬ 
tional aim is to produce at once good Spaniards and 
good Catholic Christians.” 


319 



2145. Arbelo Curbelo, A., and R. Vellarino Ulloa. 

Contribution al estudios de la despoblacion 
indigena en los territorios espanoles del Golfo 
de Guinea, con particularidad en Fernando 
Poo. Campana sanitaria de 1939-1940. 
Madrid, 1942. 103 p. illus. 

RA352.G8A7 

At head of title: Territorios Espanoles del Golfo de Guinea. 
Servicio Sanitario Colonial. 

Study by two doctors connected with health services 
in Santa Isabel. Their analysis was based on data 
obtained by a sampling examination of African women 
on Fernando Poo regarding sterility, abortions, infant 
mortality and the prevalence of venereal diseases. 

The current efforts of the Government regarding improve¬ 
ment of health conditions are illustrated in a pictorial book¬ 
let published by IDEA in 1961, Labor sanitaria en las 
Provincias de la Region Ecuatorial (Madrid. 16 p. of text, 
5 plates, 24 p. of photographs). 

2146. Basilio, Aurelio. La vida animal en la 

Guinea Espanola. Madrid, Instituto de Es¬ 
tudios Africanos, Consejo Superior de Investi- 
gaciones Cientificas, 1952. 146 p. illus. 

QL731.B27 

New enlarged edition 1962. 190 p. 

This zoological study of Spanish Guinea is by a 
priest who is a professor of natural history in the Na¬ 
tive Seminary of Nuestra Senora del Pilar in Santa 
Isabel. It is semitechnical in style, and includes a 
systematic list of the orders of mammals as one of its 
appendixes. 

A more popular book on the wild life of the territory is 
by a big game hunter, Ram6n Tatay, La caza en Guinea 
(Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 1955. 278 p. illus.). 

The natural sciences of Spanish Guinea were illustrated 
as to botanical aspects in two books by Emilio Guinea Lopez, 
both published by IDEA, En el pais de los Bubis, relato ilus- 
trado de mi primer viaje d Fernando Poo (Madrid, 1949, 
287 p. illus.), and En el pais de los Pamues (relato ilustrado 
de mi primer viaje d la Guinea Espanola) ( Madrid, 1947. 
156 p. illus.). In the latter, besides plants, there are many 
photographs of ethnological interest. 

2147. Berman, Sanford. “Spanish Guinea: enclave 

empire.” Phylon,v. 17, Dec. 1956: 349-364. 

E185.5.P5, v. 17 

2148. - “Spanish Guinea, profile of an African 

enigma.” Africa report, v. 6, Jan. 1961: 
3-4. DT1.A217, v. 6 

Except for chapters or sections in general works on 
West Africa, and rare newspaper features, these arti¬ 
cles are the only recent writings on Spanish Guinea 
available in English. The first and longer is divided 


between a general account of the territory and discus¬ 
sion of Spanish policies and practices. (“The devel¬ 
opment of the colony—socially, politically, econom¬ 
ically—will be with reference to peninsular needs and 
resources, largely ignoring African continental evolu¬ 
tion.”) In the second Mr. Berman examines the 
current serenity of Spanish Guinea, considering that it 
results from Spanish paternalism, the policy of “limited 
assimilation” which gives the evolved African full 
civil rights, and the nonexistence of labor unions or 
other elements of opposition. He points out, however, 
a few elements that “represent potential sources of dis¬ 
content and political activation.” 

2149. Crespo Gil-Delgado, Carlos, conde de Cas¬ 

tillo Fiel. Notas para un estudio antro- 
pologico y etnologico del Bubi de Fernando 
Poo. Madrid, Instituto de Estudios Afri¬ 
canos y Instituto Bernardino de Sahagun, de 
Antropologia y Etnologia, 1949. 290 p. 

illus. DT671.F4C74 

Comprehensive ethnological and anthropometrical 
treatise on the Bubi, based on 2 years of field research 
and presented as a doctoral thesis. The work was 
published jointly by two institutes of the Consejo Su¬ 
perior de Investigaciones Cientificas. 

2150. Font Tullot, Inocengio. El clima de las 

posesiones espanolas del Golfo de Guinea. 
Madrid, Consejo Superior de Investigaciones 
Cientificas, Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 
1951. 71 p. illus. QC991.G8F6 

By a geophysicist who has studied also the climate 
of Spanish West Africa. In contrast to the desert of 
the Atlantic Sahara, Fernando Poo and Continental 
Guinea are in the tropical rain belt. They have a 4- 
month dry season, a short in-between season called 
sequilla, and a longer rainy season. Interestingly, the 
dry season on Fernando Poo runs from November to 
February, while on the mainland it is in the summer 
months. Bad climate and depopulation resulting in 
part therefrom are major problems of the region. 

2151. France. Direction de la documentation. Les 

territoires espagnols d’Afrique par Rene 
Pelissier. Paris, La Documentation fran- 
gaise, 1963. 40 p. (Notes et etudes docu- 
mentaires, n° 2.951, 3 janvier 1963). 

D411.F67, no. 2951 
In the official French series of background documen¬ 
tation, this brochure gives a concise survey of the three 
remaining territories in Africa held by Spain: Ifni (p. 
7-12); Le Sahara espagnol (p. 13—19); La Guinee 


320 



espagnole (p. 20-37). A short reading list is given 
on p. 38-39. Aspects of Guinea considered are gen¬ 
eral conditions with outline of geography, history, and 
people, evolution of political and administrative insti¬ 
tutions, economic and financial evolution, cultural and 
social evolution. The two short paragraphs of conclu¬ 
sions speak hopefully of equality of civil rights officially 
recognized since 1959-60, of active efforts toward 
literacy, and improvement of conditions of life; less 
hopefully of the climate, depopulation, and the unfor¬ 
tunate dependence on cocoa, coffee, and tropical wood 
as exports requiring price supports from the metropole. 

2152. Gt. Brit. Foreign Office. Historical Section. 

Spanish Guinea. London, H.M. Stationery 
Office, 1920. 60 p. (Handbooks, no. 125) 

DT619.G7 

This survey is one of a conspicuous series of hand¬ 
books prepared shortly after the First World War 
specially to document world conditions at that period. 
Much of its text is devoted to the outline of physical 
geography, political history, and basic social and eco¬ 
nomic conditions, which have not changed too radi¬ 
cally since its publication. No later comparable work 
is available in English. 

2153. Guinea, Spanish. Delegacion Colonial de 

Estadistica. Resumenes estadisticos del censo 
general de pohlacion del Gobierno General de 
los Territorios Espaholes del Golfo de Guinea 
al el 31 de diciembre de 1950. Madrid, 1952. 
166 p. maps. HA2237.G8A52 1950 

At head of title: Direccion General de Marruecos y 

I Colonias. Instituto de Estudios Africanos. Gobierno Gen¬ 
eral de los Territorios de Guinea. 

According to the 1950 census, the population of the 
entire region is about 200,000, including almost 4,000 
Europeans. 

2154. Guinea, Spanish. Gobierno General de los 
Territorios del Golfo de Guinea. Memoria de 
la labor realizada en el periodo 1949-1955. 
Madrid, 1956. 175 p. illus., maps, tables, 

diagrs. DLG 

Survey containing chapters on population, Chris¬ 
tianization, education, libraries, radio, press, health, 
justice, labor questions, and other government admin¬ 
istrative and economic activities. Many charts, 
graphs, and statistical tables illustrate the ascending 
march of the colonial economy. 

2155. Guinea, Spanish. Laws, statutes, etc. Leyes 
coloniales. Madrid, Imprenta Sucesores de 
Rivadeneyra, 1945. 1,462 p. DLC-LL 


Compilation in chronological order of all legisla¬ 
tion of the Territorios Espanoles del Golfo de Guinea 
from the acquisition by Spain in 1778 through the 
year 1944. Edited by Agustin Miranda Junco, whose 
name appears at head of title. 

2156. Majo Framis, Ricardo. Las generosas y 

primitivas empresas de Manuel Iradier Bulfy 
en la Guinea Espahola; el hombre y sus 
hechos. Madrid, Instituto de Estudios Afri¬ 
canos, 1954. 213 p. DT619.I7M3 

Account of one of the most celebrated Spanish ex¬ 
plorers. Iradier y Bulfy’s own narrative of his ex¬ 
plorations in the Guinea hinterland was published in 
1887 ( Africa; viajes y trabajos de la asociacidn 
euskara La Exploradora Vitoria, 2 v.; modem edition, 
Vitoria, Consejo de Cultura de la Excelentisima Dipu- 
tacion Foral de Alava, 1958+ illus.). The first 
voyage, 1875-77, was “exploration del pais de Muni, 
1875-1877”; the second, which includes treaties of 
accession to Spanish authority, was “adquisicion del 
pais del Muni, 1884.” 

2157. Moreno Moreno, Jose A. Reseha historica 

de la presencia de Espaha en el Golfo de 
Guinea. Madrid, Consejo Superior de In- 
vestigaciones Cientificas. Instituto de Estu¬ 
dios Africanos, 1952. 101 p. illus., maps. 

DT619.M6 

Short sketch of the history of Portuguese, English, 
and Spanish in Fernando Poo and the Gulf of Guinea 
from the original discovery by the Portuguese Fer¬ 
nando Poo between 1469 and 1474 to 1901, when the 
present southern boundaries were set between the 
Spanish territory and French Equatorial Africa. The 
last ten pages give a chronological resume. 

2158. Nosti, Jaime. Not as geograficas, fisicas e eco¬ 

nomicas sobre los territorios espaholes del 
Golfo de Guinea. Madrid, Consejo Superior 
de Investigaciones Cientificas, Instituto de 
Estudios Africanos, 1947. 116 p. illus., 

part, col., maps. DT619.N6 1947 

This work and a companion study, Climatologia 
de los Territorios Espaholes del Golfo de Guinea (67 
p.), were issued by Espasa-Calpe in Madrid in 1942 for 
the Direccion de Agricultura of the Government of 
Spanish Guinea. The author, an agricultural engi¬ 
neer in the colonial service, laid special emphasis on 
vegetation and agriculture in the Notas, going into de¬ 
tail regarding the cacao and coffee culture. A shorter 
paper of his, Agricultura de Guinea promesa para 


321 






Espana, published by IDEA in 1948 (90 p.), esti¬ 
mated prospects of agricultural exploitation of the 
colony. 

2159. Panyella, Augusto. Esquema de etnologia 

de los Fang Ntumu de la Guinea Espanola. 
Madrid, Consejo Superior de Investigaciones 
Cientificas, Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 
1959. 77 p. illus. GN655.F3P3 

Lectures by a professor of anthropology in the 
Chair of Primitive History of Man of the University 
of Madrid. 

2160. Rey Stolle, Alejandro. Espana en Africa, 

ayer y hoy [por] Adro Xavier [pseud.] Con 
fotografias ineditas del autor. Barcelona, 
Exclusivas Ferma, 1962. 324 p. (Biblioteca 
Ferma universal) DT619.R44 

A journalistic account of Spanish Guinea. The au¬ 
thor, a Spanish literary man, has written a number of 
travel books and popular biographies. He includes 
here several folk tales of the Bubis. 

2161. Rfos, Mateo. La Espana ignorada. Bar¬ 

celona, Editorial Hispanoi Europea, 1959. 
125 p. illus. (Coleccion Herakles) 

DT619.R5 

Pocket-size book describing Spanish Guinea, partly 
through guidebook information, partly personal travel 
narrative. 

2162. Silveira, Lufs. Description de la Isla de 

Fernando Poo en visperas del tratado de San 
lldefonso. Madrid, Consejo Superior de In¬ 
vestigaciones Cientificas, 1959. 39 p. fold, 

map. DT671.F4S5 

Text of a description of the island of Fernando Poo, 
taken from a manuscript in the Portuguese archives 
dated Mar. 3, 1772. At that time the island was a 
Portuguese colony; it was ceded to Spain, together 
with Annobon, by the treaties of San lldefonso in 
1777 and El Pardo in 1778. 

2163. Spain. Consejo Superior de Investigaciones 

Cientificas. Instituto de Estudios Africanos. 
Archivos. ano 1+ (no. 1 + ); junio 1947 + 
Madrid. illus., maps, quarterly. DT1.S75 
The catalog of publications of IDEA, the leading 
governmental institution for African studies, is re¬ 
issued periodically. It lists under broad subject head¬ 
ings the 300-odd monographs published by the In¬ 
stitute since its establishment in the early forties. 
This list is also printed in each number of the Archivos, 
scholarly review of IDEA, together with contents of 


earlier issues of the magazine from the first in 1947. 
Among the latter there appear titles of many articles 
on Spanish Guinea in varied fields of human and 
physical sciences. 

Besides the entries separately analyzed in this section, the 
following titles of studies of Guinea which appear in the 
catalog of IDEA might be noted: 

Aranzadi, Inigo de. La adivinanza en la zona de los 
Ntumu. Tradiciones orales del bosque Fang. Ma¬ 
drid, 1962. 311 p. DLG 

Beato Gonzalez, Vincente, and Ramon Villarino 
Ulloa. Capacidad mental del negro. 2. ed. Ma¬ 
drid, 1953. 116 p. illus. BF432.N5B4 

At head of title: Politico sanitaria colonial. 
Subtitle: Los methodos de Binet-Bobartag y de 
Yerkes, para determinar la edad y coeficiente mental, 
aplicados al negro. 

Capuz Bonilla, Rafael. Guia meteorologico de las 
provincias de Guinea. Madrid, 1961. 65 p. illus., 

diagrs. DLC 

Fuster Casas, Jose M. Estudio petrogenetico de los 
volcanes del Golfo de Guinea. Madrid, 1954. 152 

p. illus. QE461.F85 

- Estudio petrogrdfico de la Guinea Continental 

Espanola. Madrid, 1951. 355 p. illus. 

QE455.G8F8 

Gonzalez Echegaray, Carlos. Estudios guineos. 
v. 1: Filologia. Madrid, 1959. 125 p. illus. 

DLC 

- Morfologia y sintaxis de la lengua Bujeba. 

Madrid, 1960. 191 p. illus. DLC 

Larea Palacin, Arcadio de, and Carlos Gonzalez 
Echegaray. Leyendas y cuentos Bujebas de la 
Guinea Espanola. Transcription del idioma original, 
traduccion y notas. Madrid, 1955. 280 p. 

GR350.L3 

Martinez Dominguez, Victor. Estudio epidemioldgi- 
co y clinico de la endemia de lepra en la Guinea 
Espanola. Madrid, 1954. 113 p. illus. DLC 

Olesa Munido, Francisco F. Derecho penal apli- 
cable a indigenas en los territories espanoles del Golfo 
de Guinea. Madrid, 1953. 448 p. DLC-LL 

Ramon Alvarez, Heriberto. Leyendas y mitos de 
Guinea. Madrid, 1951. 272 p. illus. 

GR360.G8R2 

Serna Burgaleto, Jesus de la. El miho guineano, 
estudio antropometrico y psicotecnico del nino negro. 
Madrid, 1956. 163 p. GN58.G85S4 

Results of intelligence tests of 424 Guinea children. 

2164. Spain. Consejo Superior de Investigaciones 
Cientificas. Instituto de Estudios Africanos. 
La Guinea de hoy. Madrid, 1958. 40 p. 
illus. DT619.A5 1958 

Booklet introducing Spanish Guinea in an attractive 
presentation of geographic conditions, peoples, eco¬ 
nomic and social conditions. The last section de¬ 
scribes means of mass communication, including the 


322 




Public Library in Santa Isabel; three radio stations; 
a Santa Isabel daily, Ebano; a Bata weekly, Potopoto; 
a Catholic mission journal; a magazine, Bantu; and 
several governmental serials. 

2165. - Resumenes estadisticos del gobierno 

general de la Region Ecuatorial, provincias de 
Fernando Poo y Rio Muni. Madrid, maps, 
diagrs. ( Its Publicaciones) 

HA2237.G8S65 

A joint publication of IDEA and the Direccion Gen¬ 
eral de Plazas y Provincias Africanas, which in 1956 
superseded the earlier Direccion General de Marruecos 
y Colonias. This is a separate from the overall Re- 
sumen estadistica del Africa espanola, which has 
appeared periodically since 1954 (1959-60, Madrid, 
1962. 479 p); until 1958 this section was entitled Re¬ 
sumenes . . . de los territorios del Golfo de Guinea. 
The overall volume includes official data relating to 
Ifni, the Spanish Sahara, and the “plazas” of Ceuta 
and Melilla, as well as the two provinces of Spanish 
Guinea, Fernando Poo and Rio Muni. Subjects 
treated include climatology, population, industry, com¬ 
merce, transportation, public and private finance, labor 
and social activities, health, charity, culture, justice, 
and religion. 

2166. Spain. Direccion General de Marruecos y 

Colonias. Atlas historico y geografico de 
Africa espanola. Madrid, 1955. 197 p. 

maps. G2454.S7 1955 

At head of title: Direccidn General de Marruecos y 
Colonias e Institute de Estudios Africanos. Since 1958 the 
first agency has been Direccion General de Plazas y Provincias 
Africanas. 

The preface of this folio atlas is signed by J. Dias de 
Villegas, Director General of both the organizations 
responsible for its preparation and publication. It is 
in two parts, historical (p. 13-67) and geographical. 
In the first section 31 maps in color showing stages of 
the history of Spain in Africa are interspersed with 
explanatory text. In the geographical atlas the maps, 
physical, geological, political-administrative, on double¬ 
page spreads with following section of explanatory 
text, cover practically all details of geographical in¬ 
formation about Spanish African possessions. There 
is a comprehensive index of place names. 

2167. Unzueta y Yuste, Abelardo de. Geografia 

historica de la Isla de Fernando Poo. Ma¬ 
drid, Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 1947. 
494 p. illus., maps. DT671.F4U55 

Bibliography: p. 435—462. 


2168. - Guinea Continental Espanola. Ma¬ 

drid, Instituto de Estudios Politicos, 1944. 
394 p. illus., maps. DT619.U5 

Bibliography: p. 381-384. 

2169. - Islas del Golfo de Guinea (Elobeyes, 

Corisco, Annobon, Principe y Santo Tome). 
Madrid, Instituto de Estudios Politicos, 1945. 
386 p. illus., maps. DT669.U5 

Bibliography: p.373-378. 

Standard encyclopedic surveys of the Spanish 

possessions in West Africa by an authority on colonial 
trade, professor of economic geography at the Institute 
of Political Studies. The coverage includes historical, 
physical, and human geography and ethnology, social 
welfare, political administration, and economy. 

2170. Veciana Vilaldach, Antonio de. Los Bujeba 

( Bisio ) de la Guinea Espanola; contribution 
al estudio del negro africano. Madrid, Con- 
sejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas, 
Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 1956. 
166 p. illus., maps, diagrs. GN57.B3V4 
Bibliography: p. 169-173. 

2171. — 1 - La secta del Bwiti en la Guinea Es¬ 

panola. Madrid, Consejo Superior de In¬ 
vestigaciones Cientificas, 1958. 63 p. illus. 

BL2465.V37 

Includes bibliographies. 

The first-named work of this ethnologist is an ex¬ 
haustive study of the tribe, including much anthro¬ 
pometric material. The second is a monograph on 
a religious cult widely prevalent among the peoples 
of Spanish Guinea. The author discusses the legends, 
cosmology, rites and practices of the sect. 

2172. Yglesias de la Riva, A. Politica indigena en 

Guinea. Madrid, Instituto de Estudios Af¬ 
ricanos, 1947. 366 p. DT619.Y45 

This work is not a study of tribal organization, but 
an explanation of Spanish policy and laws relating to 
the African population of the colony. 

2173. Zamora Loboc, Miguel. Noticia de Anno¬ 

bon: su geografia, historia y costumbres. 
Fernando Poo, 1962. 90 p. illus. 

Reviewed in Africa (Madrid), no. 247, July 1962, 
p. 357. The author, a Spanish writer and artist, was 
brought up and lives in Annobon, where he directs 
an educational center. 


692 - 756 — 63 - 


-22 


323 



























































Index 


Note: Numbers refer to items, with a few exceptions in which pages are specified for works mentioned in notes 
unrelated to individual entries. An “n” following the number indicates reference not in the entry but in 
the annotation or related note. In the subject analysis a country breakdown has been made for the more 
heavily studied subjects. Cross references are held to a minimum; thus for the specific, there is no cross 
reference to the general—e.g., “Divination” is not cross referenced to the general discipline of “Anthro¬ 
pology,” which is broadly covering for all branches of physical and social anthropology, anthropometry, 
ethnology and ethnography, primitive religion, magic, rites and customs, etc.; also, Nigeria is not cross 
referenced to West Africa, or Katanga to Congo. Names of tribes are given in accordance with the author’s 
spelling, and geographically located in the country under study. 


A 

A. E. F., see French Equatorial Africa 
(former) 

A. O. F., see French West Africa 
Abbadie, Arnauld d’, 1522n 
Abbas, Mekki, 3, 154, 1463 
Abdul-Haggag, Y., 1505 
Abel-Smith, Brian, 1574 
Abrahams, Peter, 1850 
Abranches, Esther, 2074 
Acad6mie Malgache, 1207 
Academie Royale des Sciences d’Outre- 
Mer, 1860 

Classe des sciences morales et politi- 
ques. Memoires, 207, 1885, 1896, 
1945, 1954,1957,1978,1999,2003, 
2006, 2011, 2013, 2017, 2040 
Classe des sciences naturelles et 
medicales. Memoires, 1934, 1941 
Accra, Ghana, 609, 621 
Achebe, Chinua, 791-2 
Acholi (tribe, Uganda and Sudan), 
1380 

language, 1493n 
Acquah, lone, 621 
Adam, Pierre, 933 
Adam, Thomas R., 105 
Adamafio, Twia, 595 
Adamawa (province, Nigeria), 712, 772 
Adams, David Thickens, 568n 
Adamson, Joy, 452n 
Addicott, Len E., 2075 
Addis Ababa. Chamber of Commerce, 
1506 

Ademola, Adenekan, ed., 508 

Adetoro, J. E., ed., 793 

Adioukrou (region, Ivory Coast), 969 


Adloff, Richard, 925, 1115 
Administration et diplomatie d’Afrique 
noire et de Madagascar, 853 
Adu, Omotayo, 799 

Advertising and Press Annual of All 
Africa, 359n 
Ady, Peter, 203 
ed., 193 

Afar (people, Somalia and Ethiopia), 
1440 

Africa (London), In 
Africa (Madrid), Note on Bibliography, 
p. 1, 179n, 2143 

Africa (Rome), Note on Bibliography, 

p. 1 

Africa and International Organization, 
146 

Africa Bureau, 161 In 
Africa Digest (London), In 
Africa, Its Problems and Prospects, 
Note, p. 1 
Africa League, 156 
Africa Report (Washington), 1 

See also Note on Bibliography, p. 1 
Africa Seen by American Negroes, 2 
Africa South in Exile, 1769 
Africa Today (New York), In 
African Abstracts (London), 262 
African Affairs (London) In 

See also Note on Bibliography, p. 1 
African-American Institute (Washing¬ 
ton), see Africa Report 
Women’s Africa Committee, 228 
African Conference on the Rule of Law, 
184,189 

African Education Commission, 367-8 
African Folktales and Sculpture, 315 


African Music Society, 338 
African One-Party States, 106 
African personality, 289n, 356 
African students abroad, 375 
exchange, 379 
fellowships, 386 
in Britain, 380 
in France, 894, 895n 
in Russia, 175-6 

African Studies (Johannesburg), 1835 
African Studies Association, see African 
Studies Bulletin; Social Research in 
Africa 

African Studies Bulletin, 314 
African Women (London), 381n 
Africana Nova (Cape Town), 1761 
Africanization of civil service, 97, 104 
training programs, 385 
Congo, 1983 
Nigeria, 728 

Afrika: priroda; narody (etc.), 4n 
Afrika heute, 3 

Afrika-Instituut (Netherlands), 185 
Afrika und Ubersee, Note, p. 59 
Afrika-Verein (Hamburg), 197 
Afrique; revue mensuelle (Paris), 358, 
1176, 1197 

Afrique centrale; les rSpubliques d’ex- 
pression franqaise, 1096 
Afrique Occidental Franqaise. Togo, 
898 

Afro-Asian Organisation for Economic 
Co-operation, 198 

Agar-Hamilton, James A. I., 1780-1 
Aggrey, James E. K., about, 412 
Agni (tribe, Ivory Coast), 964, 979 
Agricultural Economics Bulletin for Af¬ 
rica, 424 


325 


Agriculture, 423-46 
bibliography, 423 
Angola, 445n 
Basutoland, 1714 
Gape Verde Islands, 2113 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1878 
East Africa, 445n, 1294 
Ethiopia, 1533, 1535 
French-speaking Africa, 877-8 
French West Africa, 915, 928 
Gambia, 554 
Ghana, 617, 619 
Kenya, 1326 
Madagascar, 1249 
Mauritania, 1016 
Mauritius, 1569 
Nigeria, 738, 763 
Northern Rhodesia, 1633 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland (Fed.), 445n 
Senegal, 1063 
Somalia, 1432, 1447 
Spanish Guinea, 2158 
Sudan, 1481, 1485, 1489-90 
bibliography, 1489n 
Uganda, 1403, 1409 
West Africa, 435 
Zanzibar, 445n 
Aguessy, Cyrille, 930-1 
Ahrens, Thomas P., 1446 
Aid, economic and technical, 151, 156-9, 
163-4, 166,170-2, 200 
bibliography, 163 
British, 215 

French, 874, 877, 880, 1043n 
Italian, 250 
U.N., 154,1443 

U.S., 158, 163-4, 170-2, 678, 1446-8 
Ainslie, Rosalynde, 127 
Ajao, Aderogba, 175 
Ajayi, F. A., 185 
Ajuluchuku, M. C. K., 715 
Akademiia nauk SSSR (Moscow) 

Institut Afrika, 176 
Institut Etnografi, 4 
Institut Iazykai Myshleniia, 294 
Institut Vostokovedenifa, 132 
Akamba (tribe, Kenya), 1335 
Akan( people, Ghana), 526, 623-4, 636, 
639-43, 648n 
Akiga, 760 

Akindele, Adolphe, 930-1 
Akinsowon, Akindele, 93 On 
Akpan, Ntieyong U., 87 
Akwawuah, Kwadwo Asojo, 601 
Albert, Andre, 1118 
Albertyn, J. R., 1823n 
Albospeyre, M., 1265 
Alexandre, P., 914n 
Alimen, Henriette, 53 
All-Africa Church Conference, Ibadan, 
1958, 391 

Allen, Bernard M., 1464 


Allen, S. W., tr.,316 
Allott, Antony N., 186 
ed., 187 

Almagia, Roberto, ed., 23n 
Almond, Gabriel A., ed., 110 
Alsop, M. H., 1829n 

Altrincham, Edward W. M. G., baron, 
1308 

Alur (tribe, Uganda and Congo), 1400 
Alvares, Canon Francisco, 1522n 
Alvarez Garcia, Heriberto R., 2144 
Amamoo, J. Godson, 566 
Amaral, Ilidio do, 2058 
Ama-Xosa (tribe, South Africa), 1845 
Amba, see Bwamba 

American Academy of Political and So¬ 
cial Science (Philadelphia), 5 
American Assembly, 157 
American Colonization Society, 675 
See also Liberia, history 
American Historical Association, see 
Guide to Historical Literature 
American Negroes and Africa, 2, 139, 
145 

American organizations concerned with 
Africa, 169, 173-4 

American Society of African Culture, 6 
American trade, early, with Mauritius, 
1575 

with Zanzibar, 1410 

American Universities Field Staff, see 
Munger, Edwin S. 

American University (Washington, 
D.C.) Foreign Areas Studies Divi¬ 
sion, 567, 1869 
Amharic languages, 1557 

literature, bibliography, 1504n 
Ammar, Abbas, 1479 
Amministrazione Fiduciaria Italiana 
della Somalia, 1427, 1435 
Amon d’Aby, F. J., 961 
Amponsah-Awhaitey conspiracy, 593 
Anderson, James N. D., 185, 188 
Anderson, Robert E., 652 
Andersson, Efraim, 392, 1973 
Andrade, Antonio Alberto de, 2034 
Andrade, Mario de, 2077n 
Andriamanjato, Richard, 1208 
Androy (region, Madagascar), 1213n, 
1222 

Anglican church, Sierra Leone, 817, 826 
ANGOLA, 445n, 1889, 2029, 2058-94 
bibliography, 1067 

Angola. Direcgao dos Servigos de Eco- 
nomia, 2059 

Angola: a Symposium, 2076 
Angolares (tribe, Sao Tome), 2055 
Animal husbandry, 444n 
See also Cattle 

Animism, see Religion, traditional 
Annaert, Jean, 1941 
Annis, Fred V., 678n 


Annobon, 2169, 2173 

See also Spanish Guinea 
Annuaire des missions catholiques au 
Congo beige, 1974 

Annuaire des republiques de V ouest 
africain, 899 

Annuaire du Tchad, 1164 
Annuaire national de la Republique 
Malgache, 1209 
Annuaire Noria, 1209n 
Annuaire statistique de la Reunion, 1250 
Ansprenger, Franz, 3, 854 
Anstey, Roger, 1884 
Anstruther, Ian, 74n 
Antaisaka (tribe, Madagascar), 1214 
UAnthropologie (Paris), 53 
Anthropology, 262-85 

bibliography, 262-3, 270, 280 
Angola, 2068, 2084-94 
Basutoland, 1712, 1717, 1720 
Bechuanaland, 1724-25, 1728-33, 

1737 

Burundi, 2003 

Cameroon, 1118, 1126, 1129, 1140, 
1142 

Central African Republic, 1154, 1157, 
1162-3 

Chad, 1167, 1170-1, 1173 
Congo (Brazzaville), 1180, 1185 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1955-72 
bibliography, 1953 
Dahomey, 936, 940-2 
East Africa, 1301-2, 1305-6 
bibliography, 262 
Ethiopia, 1546-8, 1550-1 
French Equatorial Africa, bibliogra¬ 
phy, 1095n 

French-speaking Africa, 891, 893 
bibliography, 893 
French West Africa, 911-4, 927 
Gabon, 1187-8,1190, 1201, 1204 
Gambia, 550, 554 

Ghana, 569, 622-4, 626-33, 636-49 
Guinea, 947, 951, 955 
Ivory Coast, 965, 973-4, 1091 
Kenya, 1310, 1323-5, 1328, 1335, 
1338 

Liberia, 656n, 658-62,672-3 
Madagascar, 1208, 1213-4, 1217-8, 
1226n, 1230, 1233, 1239 
bibliography, 262 
Mali, 982,985,999-1002 
Mauritania, 1019 
Mauritius, 1562 
Mozambique, 2121,2137 
Nigeria, 752, 760-90 
Northern Rhodesia, 1580, 1635-6, 
1639-43, 1647, 1650-5, 2092 
Nyasaland, 1663, 1665, 1673 
Portuguese Guinea, 2095, 2098-9, 
2101,2104,2109 


326 


Anthropology—Continued 

Portuguese Territories, 2050-1, 
2055-6 

bibliography, 2019 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1580 
Rwanda, 2003, 2013 
Sahara, 1027-8, 1036, 1038 
Senegal, 1059, 1067 
Sierra Leone, 829-30 
Somalia, 1428, 1440 
Somaliland, British, 1439 
South Africa, 1796, 1835-49 
bibliography, 1766, 1843-4 
South West Africa, 1755, 1760 
Southern Rhodesia, 1682, 1697-703 
Spanish Guinea, 2146n, 2159, 2163n, 
2170-1 

Sudan, 1475, 1492-7, 1499-501, 1503 
Swaziland, 1742-5 

Tanganyika, 1340, 1343-5, 1347, 

1353,1365-8 

Togo, 1071, 1074, 1079, 1081, 1086, 
1135 

Uganda, 1373, 1379-80, 1392, 1394- 
5, 1400, 1407 

Upper Volta, 1087-8, 1090-3 
West Africa, 520-3, 530 
bibliography, 262 
Zanzibar, 1416, 1420 
Anthropometry, see Physical anthro¬ 
pology 

Anti-colonialism, 112, 118, 124, 145, 
147, 255, 596-7, 730, 858, 872, 
895, 1055-8 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1918, 192In 
Madagascar, 1210 
West Africa, 509 
See also Nationalism 
Anti-imperialism, 78n, 83n, 132, 182, 
577,669, 852,859,1921n 
Anuario da Provincia de Mozambique, 
2117 

Anuario Estatistico do Ultramar, 2035 
Apter, David E., 125, 156, 588, 1372 
Apthorpe, R. J., ed., 102, 1598n 
Arab-African relations, 107 
Arabic language (Sudan), 1462 
Arabs, Sudan, 1475 
Zanzibar, 1420 
Aranzadi, Inigo de, 2163n 
Arbelo Curbelo, A., 2145 
Arboussier, Gabriel d’, 855 
Archaeology, 53, 55, 66-8, 70, 281 
Chad, 1170, 1174,1178 
East Africa, 1269 
Ethiopia, 1523-5 
Ghana, 579 

Northern Rhodesia, 1637 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1584 

Sahara, 1035 

South Africa, 1783-4 

Southern Rhodesia, 1689, 1691, 1694 


Anthropology—Continued 
Sudan, 1465, 1467 
West Africa, 502 
Archer, Francis B., 545 
Archives, Central Africa, 1692-3 

African, in Belgium and Holland, 498 
Ardener, Edwin W., 274, 736, 1119, 
1129n 

Ardener, Shirley, 1119 
Ardrey, Robert, 55n 
Arkell, Anthony J., 1465 
Armed forces, 111 

Basutoland (World War II), 1723n 
Bechuanaland (World War II), 1723 
British South African Police (Rho¬ 
desia), 1588 

Congo, Force Publique, 1914 
East Africa, 1295 
Senegalese, 1058 
Somali (World War II), 1477 
Sudanese (World War II), 1458 
Armstrong, Robert G., 77In 
L’Art negre, 316 
Arthur, John, 598n 
Artigue, Pierre, 1899 
Arts, 6, 314-35 
bibliography, 314 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1979, 1982 
French-speaking Africa, 848 
Ghana, 646 
Mali, 991 

Nigeria, 794-5, 806 
Portuguese Territories, 2052-4 
Tanganyika, 1344 
Uganda, 1404 
West Africa, 534, 536-8 
Arts Council of Great Britain, 794 
Ashabranner, Brent, comp., 1549 
Ashby Report, 802 

Ashanti (nation, Ghana), 284, 578, 583, 
586,591,635, 645-8 
Ashton, Edmund H., 1712 
Ashton, Ethel O., 1299, 1391n 
Ashton, Hugh, 1705 

Asian Peoples’ Anti-Communist League, 
Republic of China, 177 
Assaba (district, Mauritania), 1016 
Associagao Industrial de Angola, 2060 
Association pour l’fitude Taxonomique 
de la Flore d’Afrique Tropicale, 425 
Atger, Paul, 962 
Atlantic Charter, 160 
Atlases and maps, 44-5, 48-51 
bibliography, 42 
climate, 49n, 426 
history, 60 
population, 612 
vegetation, 425, 428 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1882 
Ghana, 612 
Kenya, 1327 
Mozambique, 2132 


Atlases and maps—Continued 
South Africa, 1776 
Spanish Guinea, 2166 
Aubert de la Rue, Edgar, 1259 
Aubreville, Andre, 426, 1097-8 
tr., 425 

Augusto de Silva, Artur, 2095 
Aujoulat, Louis, 839 
Austen, H. C. M., 1560 
Austria, Bundeskammer der Gewerbli- 
chen Wirtschaft, 225n 
Automobile Association of South Africa, 
43 

Autret, M., 478n 
Avice, Emmanuel, 963 
Awolowo, Obafemi, 716-7 
Axelson, Eric V., 2118-9 
ed., 1782 

Ayih-Dosseh, Michel, 175n 
Azande (tribe, Sudan), 341, 1485, 1494, 
1499n 

Azevedo, Avila de, 369, 2036 
Azevedo, Carlos de, 2120 
Azevedo, Joao Maria Cerqueira de, 2061 
Azevedo, Warren L. d’, comp., 651 
Azikiwe, Nnamdi, 653, 718 

B 

Baba of Karo, 761 
Babinga (tribe, Congo), 1180n 
See also Pygmies 
Bacongo (tribe, Angola), 2089 
See also Bakongo 
Baeck, L., 1999 

Baganda (tribe, Uganda), 1301n, 1391, 
1394 

language (Luganda), 139In 
Bagatta (tribe, Bechuanaland), 1730 
Bahutu (people), see Rwanda 
Baines, Thomas, 1693n 
Baker, Sir Samuel W., 1284n 
Baker, Tanya, 527 
Bakongo (tribe,Congo), 1900, 1971 
al Bakri, 61 

Bakuba (tribe, Congo), 1970 
Balandier, Georges, 241, 316, 840, 1059, 
1099,1179,1186 
Baldwin, K. D. S., 737-8, 746 
Bali (tribe, Congo), 1959 
Ballif, Noel, 1180 
Ballinger, Ronald B., 1748 
Baluba (tribe, Congo), 1900, 1956-7, 
1991-3 

Balunda (tribe, Congo), 1900 
Bambara (tribe, Mali), 985. 999, 
1001-2 

(tribe, Guinea), 95In 
Bamenda (tribe, Cameroon), 1138 
Bamileke (tribe, Cameroon), 1118, 
1129, 1140, 1147 
Bamun (tribe, Cameroon), 1144 


327 


Bananas, 444n 
Somalia, 1432 
Bancroft, Joseph A., 1628 
Banda, Hastings, ed., 1662 
Bandung Conference, 147-8 
Banem (tribe, Cameroon), 1129 
Bangui, Central African Republic, 1159 
Bangweulu Swamps (Northern Rho¬ 
desia), 1658n 
Bannerman, David A., 447 
Banque Centrale des fitats de l’Afrique 
de l’Ouest, 1069 
Ban ton, Michael P., 811 
Bantu languages, 1582 
Bapounou (tribe, Gabon), 1186 
Bara (tribe, Madagascar), 1217-8 
Barber, Frederick Hugh, 1696 
Barber, William J., 1601, 1612 
Barbour, Kenneth M., 257, 1452 
Barclays Bank, 812, 1704 
Bari (tribe, Sudan), 1499n 
Barnes, J. A., 1580, 1635 
Barns, T. Alexander, 2062 
Barnwell, Patrick J., 1561 
Barotse (tribe, Northern Rhodesia), 
1646 

Barth, Heinrich, 701 
Bartholomew, John, ed., 50 
Bartlett, Vernon, Note, p. 23 
Bascom, William, 527 J 

ed. , 264 

Basden, George T., 790n 
Basilio, Aurelio, 2146 
Bassa (tribe, Liberia), 657 
Bassari (tribe, Guinea), 95In 
(tribe, Togo), 107In 
Basset, Andr6, 30In 
Bassir, Olumbe, comp., 531 
Basuto (people, Southern Africa), 1712 
BASUTOLAND, 1707, 1712-21, 1774 
Basutoland. Government Geologist, 
1713 

Bates, Margaret L., 106 
Batten, Thomas R., 199, 229 
Batutsi (people), see Rwanda 
Bauer, Peter Tamas, 504 
Baulin, Jacques, 107 
Bauman, lone L., 445n 
Baumann, Hermann, 265 
Baumer, Guy, 1942 
Baxter, P. T. W., 1499n 
Bayne, E. A., 1424-5 
Beart, Charles, 266-7 
Beato Gonzalez, Vicente, 2163n 
Beattie, John, 1373 

Bechuana (tribe, Southern Africa), 
1837n 

BECHUANALAND, 1708, 1710n, 

1722-39, 1746n, 1774 
Beckingham, Charles F., 1519 
Beekeeping, 444n 


Beemer, H., 1837n 
Behier, Jean, 1243 
Beier, Ulli, 795, 798 
ed., 796 

Beja (tribes, Sudan), 1477 
Belchior, Manuel Dias, 2037 
Belgian administration in Congo, 1874, 
1902,1915 

in Ruanda-Urundi, 2000 
See also Colonial policies 
Belgium. Ministere des Affaires Afri- 
caines, 1861, 2000-1 
Direction de l’Agriculture . . ., 1928 
Direction des £tudes ficonomiques, 
1929 

Ministere des Colonies, see Ministere 
des Affaires Africaines 
Ministere du Congo Beige et du 
Ruanda-Urundi, see Ministere des 
Affaires Africaines 

Office de l’lnformation et des Rela¬ 
tions Publiques pour le Congo Beige 
et le Ruanda-Urundi [INFOR- 
CONGO], 1870-1, 1944, 2002 
Bell, Christopher R. V., 1426 
Bell, Walter D.,455n 
Bello, Sir Ahmadu, 719 
Bemba (group, Northern Rhodesia), 
271, 1580, 1647, 1650-1 
Benedict, Burton, 1562 
Benguela Railway, 2064 
Benin, Nigeria, 709 
Bennett, George, 1309 
Bennie, W. G., 1837n 
Bennion, Francis A. R., 589 
Benson, Mary, 1722 
Bent, R. Alan R., 1723 
Benveniste, Guy, 200 
Berg, Elliot, 156 

Berg Damara (people, South West 
Africa, etc.), 1725, 1755, 1760n 
Berkeley, G. F. H., 1520 
Berlage, Jean, 1865-6, 1975n 
Berlin Conference, 1888 
Berman, Sanford, 2142, 2147-8 
Bernard, Augustin, 23n 
Bernardi, Bernardo, 1310 
Bernus, Edmond, 968 
Berry, Jack, ed., 304 
Berthelot, Andre, 1026 
Besairie, Henri, 1244 
Bete (tribe, Ivory Coast) 974n 
Beti (tribe, Cameroun-Gabon), 914n 
Bezy, F., 1930 
Biasutti, Renato, 268 
Bibliographie ethnographique de I’A. E. 
F., 1095n 

Bibliographie ethnographique de I’Afri- 
que sud-saharienne, 1953 
Bibliographie selective des publications 
officielles frangaises, 882n 


Bibliography: 

Note, p. 1 +; 1-3, 7 
Angola, 2067 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1860-8, 1922, 
1953 

East Africa, 1267-8 
Ethiopia, 1506, 1514 
French Equatorial Africa, 1095 
French-speaking Africa, 838, 852, 882 
French West Africa, 896-7, 925 
Gambia, 544 
Ghana, 564-5, 567 
High Commission Territories, 1706 
Katanga, 1985 
Kenya, 1268 
Liberia, 651,662-3 
Madagascar, 262, 1205-6 
Mauritania, 1003, 1025 
Mauritius, 1558-9 
Mozambique, 2122, 2131 
Nigeria, 684-8 
Northeast Africa, 262 
Portuguese Guinea, 2111 
Portuguese Territories, 2018-22, 
2043n 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1577, 1615 
Sahara, 1025, 1029 
Sao Tome and Principe, 2116 
Sierra Leone, 809-10 
Somalia, 1423, 1439-40 
Somaliland, British, 1433 
South Africa, 1761-8, 1770, 1803, 
1806 

South West Africa, 1747 
Spanish Guinea, 2142, 2163 
Sudan, 1450-1, 1473 
Tanganyika, 1268, 1342, 1362 
Uganda, 1268n, 1382, 1386 
West Africa, 262, 479-80 
Zanzibar, 1268, 1412, 1416, 1420 
See also under subjects; e.g., Agri¬ 
culture 

Bibliography of African Bibliographies 
South of the Sahara, see Note on 
Bibliography, p. 1 
Bibliography of African Law, 187n 
Bidder, Irmgard, 1521 
Biebuyck, Daniel, 1900 
Biesheuvel, Simon, 1851 
Bigelow, Karl W., 37 In, 376 
Biggers, John, 481 

Bijago (tribe, Portuguese Guinea), 2109 
Bilsen, A. A. J. van, 1901 
Binet, Jacques, 230, 1120 
Binns, A. L., 372 
Biobaku, Saburi Oladeni, 702 
A Biographical Dictionary of the Anglo- 
Egyptian Sudan, 1471 
Bira (tribe, Congo), 1960 
Birch, Lionel, 566n 
Bird, Christopher, 241 
Bird, Mary, 527 


328 


Birds, 447, 454 

Bisa language (Upper Volta), 1094 
Black Orpheus (Ibadan), 796 
Blackmer, Donald L. M., ed., 163 
Blake, John W., 494 
Blanc, Robert, 258 
Blanchet, Andre, 856 
Blankenheimer, Bernard, 225n, 748n 
Blardone, Gilbert, 857 
Blaudin de The, Bernard, 1025 
Bledisloe Report, 1630 
Bleek, Dorothea F., 1737n 
Bleek, Wilhelm, 1737n 
Blenck, Erna, 175In 
Blenck, Helmut, 175In 
Blindness, 473 
Blixen, Karen, 1311 
Blond, Georges, 455n 
Blondel, F., 457, 879 
Blooah, Charles G., 672 
Blood, Sir Hilary, comp., 703 
Blundell, H. Weld, 1523n 
Boateng, E. A., 568 
Bodington, Nicolas, 1037n 
Boeck, L. de, 1954n 
Boganda, Barthelemy, 1158 
Bohannan, Laura, 278, 771n 
Bohannan, Paul J., 762-3, 771n 
ed., 201, 269 
Boisdon, D., 185 
Boiteau, Pierre, 1210 
Bol, Jean M. van., 1975 
Boletim cultural da Guine Portuguesa 
(Bissau), 2096 

Boletim geral do Ultramar (Lisbon), 
2031 

Bolton, Frances P., 172n 
Bolton, Kenneth, 1312 
Bonardi, Pierre, 1020 
Bond, Horace Mann, 376 
Bongouanou, Ivory Coast, 964 
Boone, Olga, 1962 
ed., 1953 

Borkou (region, Chad), 1166 

Bornu (region, Chad and Nigeria), 1178 

Bottin d’Outre-Mer, 885n 

Botzaris, Alejandro, 178 

Fouchaud, Joseph L., 393 

Boudry, Robert, 1211 

Boulnois, Jean, 891 

Boulou (tribe, Cameroun-Gabon), 914n 
Boundaries: 

Gambia-Senegal, 554 
Somalia—Ethiopia and Kenya, 1427, 
1442 

Bouquet, A., 1091-2 
Bourdin, Rene, 1121 
Bourgeois, R., 2003 
Bourret, F. M., 590 
Bousquet, G. H., 185 
Boutillier, Jean Louis, 964, 969 
Bouvenet, Gaston-Jean, 1121 


Bovill, E. W., 495 
ed., 1294 

Bowen, Elenore S., 520 
Bower, Penelope, 752n 
Bowles, Chester, 158 
Boxer, Charles R., 56n, 2023, 2063, 2120 
Boyd, Andrew, 44 
Boyer, Gaston, 982 
Boyns, B. M., 1489n 
Bradbury, R. E., 77In 
Bradley, Kenneth, 1620 
Brady, Cyrus Townsend, Jr., 1410 
Braekman, E. M., 1976 
Braithwaite, Edward R., 482 
Brandel, Rose, 339 
Branney, L., 1684n 
Brasio, Antonio D., 2024 
Brasseur, G., 930n 
Brasseur-Marion, Paule, 930n 
Brausch, Georges, 1902 
Brazil, Africans in, 530 
Brazza, Savorgnan de, about, 1101, 1110, 
1184 

Brazzaville, Congo, 1179 
Brelsford, William V., 1636 
ed., 1615 

Bretton, Henry L., 720 

Breuil, Henri, 1783 

Briault, Maurice, 1187-8 

Brice, Belmont, Jr., Ill 

Brice, W. C., ed., 11 

Briggs, Lloyd C., 1027-8 

British Central Office of Information. 

Reference Division, 566n 
British colonial administration, 93-9, 
101 

East Africa, 1272, 1277, 1281 
Gambia, 545 
Gold Coast, 572 

High Commission Territories, 1707— 

10 

Kenya, 1308, 1320 
Nigeria, see Native administration 
Northern Rhodesia, 1626 
Nyasaland, 1659 
Somaliland, British, 1430—1 
Sudan, 1453, 1457, 1468-9, 1474, 
1476, 1480 

Tanganyika, 1272, 1341, 1354 
Uganda, 1382, 1386, 1402 
West Africa, 505-6 
Zanzibar, 1413-5 
British East Africa Company, 1285 
British South Africa Company, 1589, 
1623-4, 1692 

British West Africa (former), 506, 
513-4,533 
Brock, J. F., 478n 
Brodie, John G., ed., 307n 
Brodrick, Alan H., tr., 53, 67, 1038 
Brom, John L., 455n, 1903n 
Bromage, W. H., 44 


Bronzes, 538, 1174 
See also Sculpture 
Brookes, Edgar H., 1804, 1829n 
Brookfield, H. C., 1570 
Broomfield, Gerald W., 133 
Brosse, Jacques, 327 
Brown, A. J., 752n 
Brown, G. Gordon, 1340 
Brown, George W., 654 
Brown, John Tom, 1724 
Brown, Ken, 1676 
Brown, Paul, 77In 
Brown, William O., 157 
ed., 5, Note, p. 23 
Bruce, James, 1522 
Bruel, Georges, 1095, 1100 
Brunet, Auguste, 1251 
Brunschwig, Henri, 841 
Brussels. Universite Libre. Institut de 
Sociologie Solvay, 1931 
Bruto da Costa, Dr., 2114n 
Bryan, G. McLeod, 394 
Bryan, M. A., 30In, 1426n 
Bryant, Alfred T., 1836 
Bubi (tribe, Fernando Poo), 2146n, 
2149,2160 

Buchanan, Keith M., 689 
Buchholzer, John, 1507 
Budge, Sir E. A. Wallis, 1523 
Buell, Raymond Leslie, 7, 655 
Buganda (kingdom, Uganda), 1372, 
1393, 1396 

Bujeba (tribe, Spanish Guinea), 2163n, 
2170 

Bulck, G. van, 30In, 1954 
Bulfy, Manuel Iradier, 2156 
Bulk-buying, British, 219 
Bulletin agricole du Congo Beige et du 
Ruanda-Urundi (Bruxelles), 1861, 
1928 

Bunyoro (tribe, Uganda), 1373 
Burger, John, 1817n 
Burke, Joseph H., 445n 
Burnor, Duane R., 375 
Burns, Sir Alan C., 134, 704 
Burrows, H. R., 1829 
Burssens, AmaatF. S., 1958n 
Burssens, H., 1955 

Burton, Sir Richard F., 932, 1284n, 
1416n 

Burton, W. F. P., 1956 
BURUNDI, 1999-2004, 2006, 2008, 
2011, 2014-6 
Burundi chrStien, 2004n 
Burundi. Office National de Presse, 
2004 

Busansi (tribe. Upper Volta), 1094 
Bushmen (people, Southern Africa), 
1725, 1937-9, 1755, 1843 
language, 1737n 
Busia, Kofi A., 591 
Busoga, Uganda, 1399n 


329 


Bussiere, Pierre, 1252 
Butt, Audrey J., 1301n, 1499n 
Buxton, David, 1508 
Buxton, Jean, 278 

Bwamba (tribe, Uganda), 278, 1407 
Bwiti (sect, Spanish Guinea), 2171 

G 

CCTA, see Commission for Technical 
Cooperation in Africa 
CIDESA, see Centre International de 
Documentation ficonomique et 
Sociale Africaine 

The C. M. B. Newsletter (Accra), 61 In 
C. M. S. Niger Mission, 707 
CRISP, see Centre de Recherche et 
d’lnformation Socio-Politiques 
CSA, see Scientific Council for Africa 
Cabot, Jean, 1165 
Cadbury, W. A., 2114n 
Caeneghem, R., 1957 
Caetano, Marcello, 2038 
Cahen, Lucien, 1872 
Cahiers d’etudes africaines (Paris), 119, 
873 

Caisse Centrale de Cooperation ficono- 
mique, 874 

Calabar, Nigeria, 697n, 764 
Calame-Griaule, Genevieve, 351 
Calder, Ritchie, 1903 
Calpin, George H., 1805 
Cambon, A., 1125 
Cameron, Sir Donald, 1341 
Cameron, Ian D., 505 
Cameron, James, 8 

CAMEROON, Federal Republic of, 
1118-52 

Cameroons Development Corporation, 
1119, 1151 

Cameroons, French. Laws, statutes, etc., 

1121 

Cameroons, Southern, 691, 758, 1119, 
1126, 1136, 1138, 1143, 1150-1 
Cameroun (former French), 1120, 
1121-6, 1128, 1141, 1149, 1152 
Cameroun. Service de la Statistique 
Generale, 1122 

Le Cameroun; aspect geographique, 
1123 

Campbell, Alexander, 135 
Campbell, Jane, 1411 
Campbell, John McLeod, 372n 
Campbell, Olwen W., 489n 
Cansdale, George S., 539—40 
Cape Colored (South Africa), 1828, 
1830 

Cape Malays (South Africa), 1838 
Cape Town. University of Cape Town. 

School of Librarianship, 1762 
CAPE VERDE ISLANDS, 2029, 2097, 
2100-1, 2103, 2107, 2110,2111n 


Capelle, Jean, 893n 
Capet, Marcel F., 900 
Capot-Rey, Robert, 1029, 1166 
Caprasse, Pierre, 1943 
Capricorn Africa Society, 1602 
Capuz Bonilla, Rafael, 2163n 
Cardaire, Marcel, 395 
Cardinall, Allan W., 564, 569 
Cardoso, Jose Carvalho, 2115 
Carnegie Commission of Investigation 
on the Poor White Question in 
South Africa, 1823 
Carney, David E., 506 
Carothers, John C., 468, 1313 
Carpenter, George W., 396 
Carr-Saunders, Sir Alexander, 370, 37In, 
1578 

Carreira, Antonio, 2098-9 
Carrington, C. E., 117 
Carrington, John F., 340 
Carrington, Richard, 448 
Carson, Patricia, 498n 
Carter, Gwendolen M., 108, 117, 1806 
ed., 106, Note, p. 23 
reviews by, 405n, 596n, 1649n 
Carter, Hazel, 1637 
Cartwright, Alan P., 1833n 
Casement, Roger, 1892n 
Castagno, Alphonso A., 1427 
Caton-Thompson, Gertrude, 1689 
Catrice, Paul, 857 
Catroux, Georges, 844n 
Cattle, 431-2, 438 

cattle culture, Ruanda-Urundi, 2007, 
2015 

Causse, Jean, 964 
Celerier, Jean, 1031 

Central African Council. Commission 
on Higher Education for Africans 
. . ., 1578 

CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC, 
1153-63 

Central Asian Research Centre, 4n 
Centre de Recherche et d’lnformation 
Socio-Politiques [CRISP], 1904-7, 
2005 

Centre d’lnformation et de Documenta¬ 
tion du Congo Beige, 1944 
Centre International de Documentation 
ficonomique et Sociale Africaine 
[CIDESA], 193n, 226 
Cerulli, Enrico, 1428 
Cerulli, Ernesta, 268, 1546 
Cesaire, Aime, 858, 950 
Ceulemans, P., 1885 
Chaamba (tribe, Sahara), 1027-8 
Chabas, Jean, 1045 
CHAD, 1164-78 

Chad. Chambre de Commerce, d’Agri- 
culture et d’lndustrie, 1164 
Chadangalara, J. W. M., 1662 
Chadwick, Owen, 1656 


Chagga (tribe, Tanganyika), 1347 
Chailley, Marcel, 901 
Changing Africa and the Christian 
Dynamic, 398 

Charbonneau, Jean, 875, 1223n 
Charbonneau, Rene, 875 
Charbonnier, Francois, ed., 1189 
Chartered companies: 

East Africa, 1285 
Nigeria, 710, 714 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1589, 1623— 
4, 1692 

Senegal, 1047, 1056 
West Africa, 501 
Chatelain, Heli, 2084 
Chater, Patricia, 1677 
Chauvet, Paul, ed., 988 
Chavannes, Charles de, 1101 
Chazelas, Victor, 1124 
Cheesman, Robert E., 1509 
Chemery, J., 1102 
Chevalier, Louis, 1245 
Chidzalo, C. P., 1662 
Chidzero, B. T. G., 117,1342, 1612 
Children, 231, 236 
health services, 472 
Ghana, 634 
Nyasaland, 1668 
Spanish Guinea, 2163n 
Childs, Gladwyn M., 2085 
Chilembwe, John, about, 1672 
Chilkovsky, Nadia, 314 
China, Communist, and Africa, 177, 
181, 183 

Chinese-African People’s Friendship As¬ 
sociation, 183n 
Chisiza, Dunduzu Kaluli, 109 
Chome, Jules, 1908-11, 1921n 
Chopi (tribe, Mozambique), 346, 2141 
Christensen, James B., 622 
Christianity, 391-4, 396-415, 421 
Ethiopia, 1554 
Nigeria, 783 
Sierra Leone, 817 
Sudan, 1462 
Uganda, 1401 
West Africa, 528 

See also Missions and missionaries; 
Separatist churches 

Chronique de politique etrangere 
(Paris), 1912-3 

Chronologie politique africaine (Paris), 
146n 

Chuka (tribe, Kenya), 1335 
Church, Frank, 172 
Church, Marguerite S., 172n 
Church, Ronald J. H., 49, 483, 527 
Churchill, Winston S., 1464n, 1542n 
Citrus industry, 445n 
Claridge, William W., 578 
Clark, J. Desmond, 1584, 1638, 1784 
ed., 70 


330 


Cleene, N. de, 1958 
Clegg, Edward M., 1603 
Clement, P., 235 
Clements, Frank, 1579 
Clemes, Gene Phillips, 469 
Clerc, Joseph, 933 
Clergy, African, training of, 414 
Clifford, W., 1621 
Climate, 426,1061, 2150, 2158 
atlas, 49n 
Cloete, Stuart, 29 
about, 9, 142 

Clove industry, Zanzibar, 1415n 
Clozel, Marie Francois Joseph, 983 
Clutton-Brock, Guy, 1612, 1657 
about, 1677 
Coblentz, Alex, 1167 
Cocoa, 444n, 542n, 606, 611, 737, 746, 
1120,2158 

Coetzee, N. S., ed., 1768 
Coffee culture, 2115, 2158 
Cohen, Sir Andrew, 88, 117, 152 
Coker, G. B. A., 721 
Cole, Desmond T., 295 
Cole, Henry B., comp, and ed., 668 
Cole, Monica M., 1770 
Cole, Robert W., 813 
Cole, Sonia M., 1269 
ed., 70 

Cole, Taylor, ed., 733 
Coleman, James S., 110-1, 157, 159, 
722,1070 
Collins, G. R., 833 
Collins, Robert C., 1466 
Collins, W. B., 602 
Collis, William R. F., 690 
Colloque sur le projet d’un Marche 
Commun Afro-Asiatique, 202 
Collyer, Pamela, 667 
Colonial Administration by European 
Powers, 89n 

Colonial legislatures, 600, 735, 1629 
Colonial policies, 7, 13, 76, 89, 99, 103, 
399 

Belgian, 1874, 1893, 1898, 1902, 1915, 
1925-6, 1940 
British, 88, 92, 99, 101 
French, 841, 843^1, 848, 851n, 857-8, 
864, 872, 904, 988, 1046, 1057, 
1104, 1106, 1232 

German, 32, 86n, 1145-6, 1283,1752 
Portuguese, 2034, 2036, 2038n, 2042, 
2044-5, 2065 
Spanish, 2143, 2155, 2172 
Colonial Review, see Oversea Quarterly 
Colonial Service, British, see British 
colonial administration 
Colonization, see European settlement 
Coloquios cabo-verdianos, 2100 
Color discrimination, see Race relations 
Colson, Elizabeth, 1639-42 
ed., 1580 


Colvin, Ian Duncan, ed., 1771 
Comba, Pierre, 1504n 
Comhaire, J. L. L., comp., 227 
Comite d’Etudes Historiques et Scienti- 
fiques de l’A.O.F., 902, 905, 1024, 
1040n 

Commission for Technical Cooperation 
in Africa [CCTA], 49n, 193, 203, 
236n, 248, 463, 467 
See also Scientific Council for 
Africa 

Committee on Africa, the War and Peace 
Aims, 160 

Common Market, 218 

See also European Economic Com¬ 
munity 

Communications media, 352, 354 
See also Press 

Communism in Africa, 175-83, 394, 
1921n, 2143 

Community (French), 861, 864, 887 
Community development, 229, 381 
Ghana, 625 
Nigeria, 741 
Uganda, 1390 

Community Development Bulletin 
(London), 38In 

Comoro Islands, 1219, 1235, 1238, 1262 
Companhia do Caminho de F6rro de 
Benguela, 2064 
Conant, F. P., 77In 
Condominas, Georges, 1212 
Conference of African States on the 
Development of Education, 371 
Conference on African Education, Cam¬ 
bridge, 1952, 372 

Conference on Educational and Occu¬ 
pational Selection in West Africa, 
532 

Conferences, international, 139, 146-8, 
463,511 

bibliography, 146 
child welfare, 231, 236 
church, 391 

education, 371-2, 390n, 532 
labor, 248 
population, 261 
social sciences, 234 
women, 228, 246 

CONGO (BRAZZAVILLE), 1179-85 
CONGO (LEOPOLDVILLE), 1860- 
998 

bibliography, 1860-8, 1922, 1953 
Congo, Belgian. Force Publique, 1914 
Congo Free State, see Congo, history; 
Leopold II 

Congo Republic (Leopoldville) Minis¬ 
try of Foreign Affairs, 1986 
Congres International des Ecrivains et 
Artistes Noirs, 348-9 
Coniagui (tribe, Guinea), 95In 


Conover, Helen F., comp., 688, 897, 
1268n, 1423 

See also Serials for African Studies 
Conrad, Joseph, 1886 
Conscience africaine (Leopoldville), 
1925n 

Considine, John J., 30 
Constitutions, 189 

French-speaking Africa, 864, 866 
Gambia, 548 
Ghana, 589, 592, 599 
Nigeria, 725 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1608 
Sierra Leone, 592 
South Africa, 1809-10 
Swaziland, 1740 
Uganda, 1381 
Consumers, African, 1370 
Conti Rossini, Carlo, 1512n, 1547-8 
Conton, William, 496 
Contract labor, 2065, 2114 
Cook, Sir Albert R., 1374 
Cook, Mercer, tr., 206, 871 
Cooke, C. K., 1584 
Cooke, H. B. S., 1694 
Cooper, T. B. K., 505 
Cooperative movement, 212, 225n, 510, 
876n 

Copley, Hugh, 449 
Corfield, F. D., 1314 
Corfitzen, W. E., 1447n, 2049 
Cornet, Pierre, 1030 
Cornet, Rene J., 1887, 1987 
Comevin, Robert, 54, 934, 1071 
Comi, Guido, ed., 1429 
Correa, Antonio A. Mendes, 2051, 2056, 
2101 

Corriere della Somalia (Mogadiscio), 
1435n 

Cory, Hans, 1343-4 
Costumes, Nigerian, 696 
Cott, Hugh Bamford, 1375 
Cotta, Gonsalves, 2077n 
Cotton, 445n 

culture, Sudan, 1481, 1489 
Couch, Margaret, comp., 364 
Council of Europe, Consultative Assem¬ 
bly, 204 

“Country-by-Country Guide to Africa”, 
In 

Coupland, Sir Reginald, 1270-1, 1285n, 
1581 

Courcier, M., 203 

Coutumiers juridiques de I’A.O.F. 902 
Couste, Pierre-Bernard, 205 
Cowan, L. Gray, 106, 507 
Cowen, Denis V., 1740 
Cox, Edward G., 61 
Cox-George, N. A. 814—5 
Crawford, Osbert G. S., 1467 
Crazzolara, J. Pasquale, 1492-3 
Creighton, Thomas R. M., 1604 


692 - 756—63 


23 


331 



Crespo Gil-Delgado, Carlos, 2149 
Crocker, Walter Russell, 89 
Crocodiles, 455n 
Crofton, Richard H., 1415n 
Crooks, John J., 816 
Crossroads Africa, 162, 167 
Crowder, Michael, 484, 705, 1046 
ed., 697 

Crowe, Sybil E., 1888 
Crowley, Daniel J., 314 
Culture contact and change, 16, 240, 
264, 276, 284 
Angola, 2069 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1897 
Dahomey, 944 

East Africa, 1275, 1277, 1306 
French-speaking Africa, 840, 893 
Ghana, 575, 577, 633 
Ivory Coast, 973-4 
Nigeria, 791-2, 797, 803 
Northern Rhodesia, 1649, 1654 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1600 
Sahara, 1031-2 
Sierra Leone, 813 
Swaziland, 1743 
Tanganyika, 1356 
Uganda, 1379, 1400 
West Africa, 487 

See also Urbanization 
Culwick, Arthur T., 1345 
Culwick, G. M., 1345 
Cunha, Joaquin Moreira da Silva, 2039 
Cunnison, Ian G., 1643 
Current History, special issue, 117n 
Curtis, Lionel, 1710n 
Cust, Robert Needham, 296 
Customary law, 185-6, 191 
bibliography, 185, 187n 
Bechuanaland, 1729 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1967 
French West Africa, 902, 923 
Ghana, 623, 644, 647 
Kenya, 1325n 

Nigeria, 721, 724, 762, 775, 779 

Northern Rhodesia, 1646 

Portuguese Guinea, 2095 

Senegal, 1045 

Somalia, 1428 

Southern Rhodesia, 1700 

Sudan, 1498 

Tanganyika, 1344 

Togo, 1079 

Uganda, 1392 

Upper Volta, 1087 

See also Anthropology 
Cuvelier, Jean, Bp., 1889 
Cyclones, Mauritius, 1565 
Cypriani, Liddio, 268 

D 

Dadzie, K. E. W., 388 
Daget, Jacques, 989 


Dahlberg, Richard E., 42 

DAHOMEY, 930-44, 970 

Daigre, Father, 1153 

Dakar, Senegal, 1053 

Dakar. Chambre de Commerce, 903 

Dale, Andrew Murray, 1652 

Dalton, George, ed., 201 

Dan (tribe, Liberia), 660-1 

Danakil (people), see Afar 

Dance, 486n 

bibliography, 314 
Congo (Brazzaville), 1180 
Northern Rhodesia, 1648 
South Africa, 1858 
Danford, John, 696 
Danquah, Joseph B., 623 
Darling, Frank F., 1622 
Dart, Raymond A., 55, 1844n 
Date-palm growing, Mauritania, 1016 
Davidson, Basil, 9, 56-7, 508, 169In, 
1874, 2065 
ed., 508 

review by, 701, 775, 1350 
Davidson, James W., 1629 
Davies, H. O., 723 
Davies, Kenneth G., 57n 
Davies, Oliver, 579 
Davies, Reginald, 1453 
Davis, Griffith J., 678n 
Davis, Hassoldt, 965 
Davis, James M., 375 
Davis, John A., 2 
Davis, Russell, comp., 1549 
Davister, Pierre, 1988 
Dean, Leonard F., ed., 1886 
Dean, Vera Micheles, 598n 
Deane, Phyllis, 1605 
Debenham, Frank, 77n, 1658, 1725 
Debrunner, H., 624 

Decary, M. Raymond, 1213, 1253, 1262 
ed., 1207n 

Decraene, Philippe, 123n 
Deffontaines, Pierre, ed., 23n 
De Graft-Johnson, John C., 58, 509 
Dei-Anang, Michael, 350 
Dekeyser, P. L., 662, 842, 1004 
De Kiewiet, Cornelius W., 1785-6, 
1807 

Delafosse, Maurice, 285n, 983n 
Delagoa Directory, see Annuario da Pro- 
vincia de Mozambique 
De La Rue, Sidney, 680n 
Delavignette, Robert L., 399, 904, 984, 
1116n 

Delamere, Lord, about, 1326 
Delcourt, Andre, 1047 
Delf, George, 1274n, 1315 
Demesse, Lucien, 1180n 
De Mestral, Claude, 400 
Denis, Jacques, 1945 
Denman, Earl, 45In 
Demographic studies, see Population 


Dermatoglyphics, 2104 
Des Africanistes russes parlent de I’Afri- 
que, 9 

Desanti, Dominique, 966 
Desanti, Hyacinthe, 935 
Deschamps, Hubert J., 351, 843, 1190, 
1214-6, 1233, 1253 
ed., 988, 1233 
Desertification, 543n 
Chad, 1166 
Kalahari, 1727 
Sahara, 1033 

See also Irrigation 
Deshler, Walter, 423 
Dessarre, Eve, 393n 
Dethine, P., 226n 
Detourbet, A. Masson, 1174 
Deutsche Afrika Gesellschaft, 10, 361 

See also Afrika heute; Die Lander 
Afrikas 

Deutsche Aussenpolitik (Berlin), special 
issue, 182n 

Devauges, Roland, 1182 
Development and Resources Corpora¬ 
tion, 967 

Deveze, Michel, 844 
Devlin Commission, 1660 
Dia, Mamadou, 206, 876, 1064 
Diamond, Stanley, 936 
Diamonds, Sierra Leone, 835 
Dias, Jorge, 2050 
Dias de Villegas, J., 2166 
Diawara (tribe, Mali), 982 
Dick-Read, Grantley, 470 
Dickins, W. H. G., 1273 
Dickson, Mora, 691 
Dieterlen, Germaine, 985 
Dike, Kenneth Onwuka, 706-8 
Dim Delobsom, A. A., 1087-8 
Dina, I. O., 746 
Dinis, Antonio J. Dias, 2102 
Dinka (tribes, Southern Sudan), 278, 
1500 

Diogenes, special issue, 351 
Diogo, Alfredo, 2077n 
Diola (tribe, Senegal), 1067 
Diop, Alioune, 316, 950 
ed., 348-9, 895 
Diop, Cheikh Anta, 59 
Diop, Majhemout, 859 
Diplomatic Press Directory of Ghana, 
570 

Diplomatic Press Directory of the Fed¬ 
eration of Nigeria, 692 
Diplomatist (London), 1048, 1510 
Directory of the Republic of the Sudan, 
1454 

Divination, 1653n 
Diziain, Roland, 1125, 1165 
Djibouti, French Somaliland, 1261, 1266 
Dogon (tribe, Mali, etc.), 914 
Doke, Clement M., 297-8, 301n, 1844n 


332 


Dolan, Eleanor F., comp., 365 
Donaldson, Kenneth, ed., 1778 
Doob, Leonard W., 352 
Doresse, Jean, 1524-5 
Dossier on Tropical Africa, 127n 
Douala, Cameroon, 1125 
Doucy, Arthur, 1946-7 
Douglas, A. J. A., 1714 
Douglas, Mary, 1900 
Dow Report, East Africa, 1290 
Dowson, Sir Ernest, 90 
Drachler, Jacob, ed., 360n 
DrachoussofF, V., 207 
Drake, Howard, comp., 366 
Drake, St. Clair, 2 
review by, 128 
Drums, 340, 343 
Dubb, Allie, ed., 1598n 
Dubois, Hubert P., 1530 
DuBois, W. E. Burghardt, 2, 89n 
Du Chaillu, Paul B., 1103 
Duffy, James, 2025-7 
ed., 112 

Dugast, I., 1126, 1129n 
Duggan-Cronin, Alfred M., 1837 
Dugue, Gil, 860 

Duignan, Peter, 136, 1205, 1617n 
Du Jonchay, Ivan, 208 
Dumon, Frederic, 861 
Dumont, Rene, 877-8 
Duncan, J. S. R., 1468-9 
Duncan, Patrick, 1715 
Duncan, Peter, 401 
Duncan, Sylvia, 401 
Dundas, Anne, 1346 

Dundas, Sir Charles, 1272, 1347, 1705, 
1749 

D’Unienville, J. R. M., 1563 
Dunn, Cyril, 1606 
Dupire, Marguerite, 968-9 
Du Plessis, Izak D., 1838 
Du Puigaudeau, Odette, 1005-6 
Durieux, Andre, 1915, 2040 
Durrell, Gerald M., 1127 
Du Sautoy, Peter, 625 

E 

Earthy, Emily D., 2121 
East, Rupert, tr., 760 
EAST AFRICA, 126, 254, 262, 388, 
445n, 1267-1307 
bibliography, 1267-8 
East Africa and Rhodesia (London), 
1286n,1405 

East Africa Royal Commission, see under 
Gt. Brit. 

East African Common Services Organi¬ 
zation, 1289,1291 

East African Institute of Social Re¬ 
search, 1288, 1300, 1305, 1317, 
1355-6, 1378-9, 1393, 1396, 1398- 
400,1407, 1409 


East African Literature Bureau, 1284n 
East African Railways and Harbours, 
1287,1292-3 

East African Standard (Nairobi), 1286n 
East African Swahili Committee, 1299n, 
1422 

Note, p. 59 

Eastern Nigeria, 87, 715, 741, 758n 
Eastman, Ernest, 656 
Eboue, Felix Adolphe, 1104, 1154 
Economic Bulletin for Africa, (Addis 
Ababa), 224 

Economic Survey Mission to Kenya, 
1316 

Economic Survey Mission to Tangan¬ 
yika, 1348 

Economics, 151, 197-225 
bibliography, 193-6, 22In 
Angola, 2058-61, 2064, 2072 
Basutoland, 1716 
Bechuanaland, 1726 
British West Africa (former), 506, 
513-4 

Burundi, 2001 
Cameroon, 1119, 1122 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1928-40 
Dahomey, 930n, 933 
East Africa, 1287, 1290 
Ethiopia, 1515, 1532, 1539, 1541, 
1553 

French Equatorial Africa, 1105, 
1111-2 

French-speaking Africa, 873-90 
French West Africa, 900, 903, 926 
Gabon, 1192, 1194, 1197 
Gambia, 554 
Ghana, 601-20 
Guinea, 945 

High Commission Territories, 1706 
Ivory Coast, 975 
Kenya, 1316-7 
Liberia, 654, 673, 678 
Madagascar, 1209n, 1220, 1222, 1241, 
1245,1247-8 
Mali, 996 
Mauritius, 1571 

Mozambique, 2049, 2122, 2125, 

2138-9 

Nigeria, 737-40, 743-54, 756-7 
Northern Rhodesia, 1630 
Nyasaland, 1661 

Portuguese territories, 2018, 2034, 
2038, 2043, 2047, 2049 
Reunion, 1250 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland (Federa¬ 
tion), 1601,1604-5, 1608-10,1616, 
1618-9, 1661 
Rwanda, 2001, 2015 
Sahara, 1030-2, 1043-4 
Senegal, 1062 

Sierra Leone, 812, 814-5, 823—4, 833, 
835 

Somalia, 1425n, 1434, 1437 


E conomics—Continued 
Somaliland, British, 1433 
South Africa, 1824-5, 1833 
Southern Rhodesia, 1683, 1688 
Spanish Guinea, 2155, 2158 
Sudan,1483, 1488, 1491 
Swaziland, 1741 
Tanganyika, 1348, 1358, 1362 
Togo, 1069, 1077 
Uganda, 1387, 1408 
West Africa, 504, 506, 513-5, 517-9 
Zanzibar, 1414 

The Economist (London), 209, 1287, 
1376-7 

Education, 364-90, 408 
bibliography, 226n, 364-6 
Burundi, 2009 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1980, 1983-4 
Ethiopia, 1534 

French-speaking Africa, 378, 894 
Guinea, 953 
Mozambique, 2124 
Nigeria, 793, 801-2, 804-5 
Northern Rhodesia, 1623 
Nyasaland, 1667 
Portuguese territories, 369, 2036 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1578 
Rwanda, 2009 
Sierra Leone, 834 
Southern Rhodesia, 1681 
Spanish Guinea, 2144 
Tanganyika, 1351 
West Africa, 532-3 

See also African students abroad 
Edwards, Adrian C., 2086 
Efik (tribe, Nigeria), 764 
Egba (tribe, Nigeria), 702 
Egerton, F. Clement C., 1128, 2066 
Egharevba, Jacob U., 709 
Egyptian influence in Africa, 107 
Egyptian Society of International Law, 
510 

Eiselen, W., 1837n 
Ekwensi, Cyprian, 797 
Elections, 121 
Kenya, 1309 
Nyasaland, 1664 
Electric power, Uganda, 1376 
Elephants, 448, 455n, 1103n 
Elias, Taslin O., 91, 190-1 592, 724 
Elisabethville, 1911-1961, 1989 
Elisofon, Eliot, 317 
Elkan, Walter, 1378 
Ellenberger, Victor, 286 
Ellis, William, 1240n 
Elton, Lord, 1464n 
Embu (tribe, Kenya), 1335 
Emerson, Rupert, 113, 156—7 
ed., 146 

Encyclopedie coloniale et maritime, 845 
Ency elope die du Congo beige, 1875 
L’Enfant africain, 231 


333 



Engholm, G. F., 121 
English language teaching, 387 
Ennis, Merlin, 2087 

Enquetes bibliographiques [series], 193n 
Epstein, Arnold L., 1644—5 
Eritrea, 1537-8, 1543-5 
Ermont, Philippe, 1009, 1051 
Eskelund, Karl, 31, 576n 
Estermann, Carlos, 2088 
Estudos ultramarinos (Lisbon), 2018 
Etats africains d’expression frangaise et 
Republique malgache, 862 
ETHIOPIA, 1504-57 
bibliography, 1506, 1514 
Ethiopia. Ministry of Commerce and 
Industry, 1532 

Press and Information Department, 
1511 

Ethiopia Observer, 1512 
Ethiopian Economic Review (Addis 
Ababa), 1532 

Ethnographic Survey of Africa, 270, 550, 
636-8, 771, 830, 1129, 1301, 1420, 
1440, 1499, 1546, 1550, 1647, 1673, 
1702, 1720, 1733, 1744, 1955, 
1959-61, 1970, 2091-2 
Ethnology, Ethnography, see Anthro¬ 
pology 

Etudes Sburneennes, 968 
Etudes mauritaniennes, 1014, 1016, 

1019 

Etudes senegalaises, 1053-4, 1059, 1063 
Etudes sociales nord-africaines , 846, 
1031-2 

Etudes soudanaises, 989 
Etudes voltaiques, 1094 
Eurafrica, 885n 

Europe France outremer (Paris) special 
issues, 457, 863, 879-80, 970, 1007, 
1049, 1130, 1194 

European Economic Community, 197, 
204-5, 207-8n, 218, 878 
Bulletin, 204 

European penetration, 75-6 

Central Africa (French), 1110, 1169 
Congo, 1884, 1888 
French-speaking Africa, 841 
Rhodesias, 1585, 1690, 1693, 1695-6 
Southeast Africa, Portuguese, 2118— 
20 

Southern Africa, 1736 
Evangelista, Julio, 2041 
Evans, Evelyn J. A., 388 
Evans, Peter, 1332n 
Evans-Pritchard, Edward E., 1494-7 
ed., 271, 357 

Ewe (people, Ghana and Togo), 637, 
1085-6 

Exploration, 74, 77, 82, 84 
Chad, 1169 
Dahomey, 932 


Exploration—Continued 
East Africa, 1282, 1284 
Ethiopia, 1522, 1528 
French Equatorial Africa, 1103, 1110 
French West Africa, 901 
Gambia, 556-7 
Ivory Coast, 980 
Nigeria, 701 

Rhodesias, 1581, 1693, 1695 
South Africa, 1782 
Spanish Guinea, 2156 
West Africa, 499-500 
Western Sudan (Mali), 987, 993 
Ezera, Kalu, 725 

F 

FAC, see Fonds d’Aide et de Coopera¬ 
tion 

FAMA, see Foundation for Mutual As¬ 
sistance in Africa 

FAO, see Food and Agriculture Or¬ 
ganization . . . 

FIDES, see Fonds d’lnvestissement pour 
le Developpement ficonomique et 
Social 

Fabian Colonial Essays, 92 
Fabri, Marcel, 1932 
Fabumni, L. A., 1463n 
Fage, J. D., 56n, 60, 69, 497, 580 
ed., 64 

Fagg, William B., 316-7, 794, 2052 
Fair, J. D., 1829n 

Falasha (Jewish group, Ethiopia), 
1551-2 

Fali (tribe, Northern Cameroons), 772 
Fallers, Lloyd A., 1379 
Fallers, Margaret Chave, 130In 
Fang (tribe, Cameroun-Gabon), 914n, 
1186 

Fang Ntumu (tribe, Spanish Guinea), 
2159,2163n 

Fanti (tribe, Ghana), 622 
Farson, Negley, 32 
Farwell, Byron, 74 
Faublee, Jacques, 1217-8 
Favrod, Charles-Henri, 35n, 114 
Fawzi, Saad Ed Din, 1455 
Fax, Elton C., 481n 
Fearn, Hugh, 1317 
Federalism, 126 
East Africa, 1289 
Eritrea, 1538, 1543n 
French-speaking Africa, 853, 860 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1372n, 
1611, 1661,1670-1 

Federation des Entreprises Congolaises, 
1933 

Feldheim, Pierre, 1946-7 
Felgas, Helio A. Esteves, 2077, 2089 
Fellowships for Africans, 375n 
Ferguson, John, 804 


Fernando Poo, 2145, 2146n, 2149, 2162, 
2167 

See also Spanish Guinea 
Ferreira, Manuel, 2103 
Ferreira Paulo, Leopoldina, 2056, 2104 
Fetichism, see Religion, traditional 
Fiawoo, D. K., 527 
Field, Margaret J., 626-9 
Figueiredo, Antonio de, 2042 
Filesi, Teobaldo, 179, 250 
Finances, 203, 221-2 
Basutoland, 1716 
Bechuanaland, 1726 
Nigeria, 750-1, 753 
Northern Rhodesia, 1630 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1605 
Swaziland, 1741 
Zanzibar, 1414 
See also Economics 
Finkelstein, Laurence S., 1427n 
Firestone plantations, Liberia, 652, 669, 
676, 683 

Fish and fishing industry, 449 
East Africa, 1297 
Ghana, 613 
Liberia, 678n 
Mauritius, 1576 
Senegal, 1059 
Sierra Leone, 823 
Somalia, 1447n 
Fitzgerald, Walter, 11 
Flavin, Martin, 1876 
Flint, John E., 710 

Fokon’olona (local government system, 
Madagascar), 1212 

Folia scientifica Africae Centralis, 1877 
Folklore, 315 
Angola, 2084, 2087 
Dahomey, 941 
Ethiopia, 1548-9, 1552 
Ghana, 640, 648 
Kenya, 1323-4 
Madagascar, 1213n, 1218 
Nigeria, 799 
Somalia, 1438 
South Africa, 1737n, 1854 
Spanish Guinea, 2160, 2163n 
Sudan, 1503 
West Africa, 523 
Folliet, Joseph, 857 

Fonds d’Aide et de Cooperation, 874, 
880 

Fonds d’lnvestissement pour le Develop¬ 
pement Fconomique et Sociale, 
874, 881 

Fonds d’lnvestissement d’Outre Mer 
[FIDOM], 874 
Font Tullot, Inocencio, 2150 
Food, 28n, 430,436,437 
French West Africa, 919 
Ghana, 616 


334 


Food and Agriculture Organization of 
the United Nations, 424, 427-8, 
438,1533 

Foran, W. Robert, 455n 
Forbes, Robert H., 1033 
Ford, Victor C. R., 1288 
'Forde, Daryll, 555, 752n, 771n 
ed., 235, 270, 282, 287, 764 
Foreign relations of African countries, 
118, 146-54 
bibliography, 149 

with Communist China, 177, 181, 183 
Egypt, 107 
Soviet Union, 175-6 
United Nations, 149, 152-5 
United States, 156-74 
Forests and forestry, 426, 440n 
French Equatorial Africa, 1097-8 
Gabon, 1203 
Ghana, 602, 614 
Liberia, 678n 
Somalia, 1447n 
West Africa, 543 
Forrester, Marion W., 1318 
Fortes, Meyer, 630-2 
ed., 271 

Fortt, J. M., 1398 
Fortune, G., 1582 
Fosbrooke, Henry, 1371 
Foster, Paul, 1275n 
Foster, Raymond S., 817 
Foundation for Mutual Assistance in 
Africa [FAMA], 464 
Fourie, L., 1755n 
Fournier, H., 1241 
Fraenkel, P. J., 1583 
Fralon, Jean, 1135 

France. Ambassade, U.S. Service de 
Presse . . . , 847n, 881, 937, 1008n, 
1043n, 1050n, 1089n, 1155n, 1191, 
1219 

Direction de la Documentation, 847, 
937, 971, 986, 1008, 1021, 1034, 
1050, 1073, 1089, 1132-3, 1155, 
1168, 1183, 1191,1220-1, 1260-1, 
2151 

Institut National de la Statistique et 
des Etudes Economiques, 882, 945 
Laws, Statutes, etc., 868n 
Office de la Recherche Scientifique et 
Technique Outre-Mer [ORSTOM], 
933, 964, 969, 1120, 1147, 1165, 
1175,1182,1190,1212 
Service des Affaires Sahariennes, 1025 
Service des Statistiques d’Outre-Mer, 
883 

La France de I’Ocean Indien, 1262 
Franck, Frederick, 33, 1200n 
Frankel, S. Herbert, 117, 210 
Franklin, Norton N., 1824 
Frantz, C., 1687 
Fraser, Douglas, 314 


Frazier, E. Franklin, 2 
Freeman-Grenville, G. S. P., 1349 
ed., 1350 

Freetown, Sierra Leone, 811 
Freitag, Ruth, comp., 423 
Freitas, Antonio Joaquim de, 2122 
FRENCH EQUATORIAL AFRICA 
(former), 1095-117 
bibliography, 1095 

French Equatorial Africa. Haut Com¬ 
missariat, 1105 

FRENCH-SPEAKING AFRICA, 838- 
895 

bibliography, 838, 852, 882n 
French Union, 857, 865, 868 
FRENCH WEST AFRICA (former), 
266-7, 896-929 
bibliography, 896-7, 925 
French West Africa. Gouvernement 
General, 938 
Frere, Suzanne, 1222 
Frewen, Richard, 1696 
Frey, Roger, 1179n 
Fripp, Constance E., ed., 1693n 
Frohlich, Gerd, 946 
Froelich, Jean C., 892, 1074, 1134 
Froment-Guieysse, Georges, ed., 845, 
970n 

Fula (tribe, Portuguese Guinea), 2095 
language, 550 

Fulani (people, Northern Nigeria, etc.), 
768,785, 790n,2095 
Fullard, Harold, ed., 48 
Furbay, Elizabeth J., 680n 
Furon, Raymond, 457-9, 1035 
Furse, Sir Ralph D., 93 
Fuster Casas, Jose M., 2163n 
Future of the Overseas Food Corpora¬ 
tion, 1369n 
Fyfe, Christopher, 818 

G 

Ga (people, Ghana), 626-8, 636 
Gabatshwana, S. M., 1722n 
GABON, 1186-204 

Gabon. Chambre de Commerce . . ., 
1192 

Direction de l’lnformation, 1193 
Gabus, Jean, 1036 
Gache, Paul, 211 
Gaisseau, Pierre D., 947 
Gaitskell, Arthur, 1481 
Galla (tribe, Ethiopia, etc.), 1550 
Gallagher, Charles F., 106 
Gallagher, John, 83 
Galletti, R., 746 
Gallieni, Joseph S., 987-8, 1223 
about, 1223n, 1226 
Gallois, L., ed., 23n 
Galvao, Henrique, 2078 
GAMBIA, 544-63, 832 
bibliography, 544 


Gambia. Laws, Statutes, etc., 546 
“Gambia, Africa’s Test Case,” 547 
“Gambia and Senegal Get Together,” 
547n 

Gambia Constitutional Conference, 548 
Gambia Oilseeds Marketing Board, 549 
Gambia-Senegal, relations, 547, 553 
Gamble, David P., 544, 550 
Games and toys, 266-7 
Gandhi, Mohandas K., 1808 
Gann, Lewis H., 136, 1617n, 1623 
Garcia de Orta (Lisbon), 2028 
Gardiner, Robert K., 232 
Gamier, Christine, 680n, 1009, 1051, 
1135 

Gary, Roman, 1103n 
Gaspar, V. M. Rabaga, 2072 
Gasse, Victor, 1246 
Gathorne-Hardy, G. M., 1542n 
Gatti, Attilio, 14n, 455n 
Gatti, Ellen, 14n 
Gaudy, M., 429 
Gautier, Emile F., 905 
Gauze, Rene, 1156 
Gbadamosi, Bakare, 7 98 
Gbaya (tribe, Central African Re¬ 
public), 1163n 
Geddes, Henry, 1103n 
Gelfand, Michael, 471, 1624, 1697-8 
Geluwe, H. van, 1959-61 
Gendarme, Rene, 1247 
Genevray, J., 657 

Geografia universale illustrata, 23n 
Geographie universelle, 23n 
Geographie universelle Larousse, 23n 
Geography, 11, 18, 20, 22-3, 26, 28 
Chad, 1166 
East Africa, 1273 
French-speaking Africa, 845, 852 
French West Africa, 905 
Gambia, 561, 825 
Ghana, 568 
Ivory Coast, 979 
Nigeria, 689, 693 
Sahara, 1029 
Sierra Leone, 825 
South Africa, 1770 
Spanish Guinea, 2158, 2167-9 
Sudan, 1452 
West Africa, 483 
Geography, economic, 213 
East Africa, 1288 
Geography, physical 
Chad, 1177-8 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1881 
Ethiopia, 1505 
Geology, 458 

Basutoland, 1713 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1872, 1881 

Ghana, 618n 

Katanga, 1996 

Mozambique, 2122 


335 



Geology—Continued 
Reunion, 1252 
Spanish Guinea, 2163n 

See also, Minerals and mining 
George, Betty, 1351 
George, John B., 1352 
Gerard, Albert, 351 
Gerard-Libois, J., ed., 1905-6 
German colonies, 32, 86n 
Gameroons, 1145-6 
East Africa, 1283 
South West Africa, 1752 
See also Partition of Africa 
Gersdorff, Ralph von, 2029, 2123 
Gerstenmaier, Eugen, 3 
Gerster, Georg, 1037 
Gervis, Pearce, 819 
Gezira scheme, Sudan, 1481, 1489 
GHANA, 564-650, 981 
bibliography, 564-5, 567 
Ghana. Government Statistician, 606 
Information Services, 566n, 607-8 
1960 Population Census of Ghana, 
603 

Second Development Plan, 604 
Town and Country Planning Divi¬ 
sion, 609 

Ghana Today (Accra), 571 
Ghana Year Book, 570n 
Gibb, H. A. R., tr., 61 
Gibbs, Peter, 1617n 
Gibson, B. D., 408 
Gicaru, Muga, 1319 
Gide, Andre, 1106 
GifFen, M. B., 1464n 
Gigon, Fernand, 948 
Giorgetti, Filberto, 341 
Girling, F. K., 1380 
Gisu (tribe, Uganda), 130In 
Githens, Thomas S., 430 
Glebo (tribe, Liberia), 656n 
Glickman, Harvey, reviews by, 116, 129, 
131, 725, 1481, 1606, 1617, 1679 
Glidyi-Ewe (tribe, Togo), 1086 
Gluckman, Max, 271-2, 274, 1646 
ed., 1580 

Goddard, Thomas N., 837n 
Goem6, V., ed., 1974 
Gold Coast, see Ghana 
Goldblatt, Isidor, 1750 
Goldie, Sir George, about, 710, 714 
Goldschmidt, Walter, 157 
Goldthorp, J. E., 274 
Gongalves, Jose Julio, 2019, 2105 
Gonidec, P. F., 864 
Gonzalez Echegaray, Carlos, 2163n 
Good, Robert C., 1916 
Goodall, Elizabeth, 1584 
Goodwin, A. J. H., 1844n 
Goody, John R., 521-22 
ed., 649 


Gorane (tribe, Chad), 1167 
Gordon, Charles George, about, 1464 
Gordon, King, 1917 
Gordon-Brown, A., ed., 1779, 1286 
Gore, Albert, 172n 
Gorer, Geoffrey, 486n 
Gorillas, 1103n 
Gorissen, Pierre, 1977 
Gorst, Sheila, 212 
Gosset, Pierre, 34 
Gosset, Renee, 34 
Gouilly, Alphonse, 906 
Gould, Peter R., 12, 610 
Gouraud, Henri J. E., 1010, 1169 
Gourou, Pierre, 213, 1934 
Government, 91, 96, 98 
Chad, 1168 

Congo (Brazzaville), 1181 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1902, 1915, 
1923 

East Africa, 1298 
Ethiopia, 1540 

French-speaking Africa, 853, 862, 864, 
866 

French West Africa, 904 
Gabon, 1193 
Ghana, 588, 600 
Guinea, 957 
Ivory Coast, 971 
Madagascar, 1248 
Mozambique, 2126-7 
Nigeria, 713, 726, 731, 735 
Rwanda, 2000, 2006 
Sierra Leone, 821 
Spanish Guinea, 2165, 2172 
Tanganyika, 1352 
Togo, 1124, 1131, 1136 
West Africa, 505-6, 508 

See also Colonial policies; Native 
administration; Politics 
Goyat, Michel, 907 
Graham, R. PI. Carson, 2067 
Grandidier, Alfred, 1224-5 
Grandidier, Guillaume, 1206, 1224-6 
Grandvaux, Luis Augusto, 2113 
Grant, Claude H. B., 454 
Grant, James, 693 
Grasses, 428 
Gray, Brian, 1723n 
Gray, Sir John Milner, 551, 1412 
Gray, Richard, 1470, 1607, 1614n 
Gray, Robert F., 1353 
Grazing, Somalia, 1447n 
Gt. Brit. Advisory Commission on the 
Review of the Constitution of the 
Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasa- 
land, 1608 

Central Office of Information, 214n, 
372n, 566n, 820, 1609 
Colonial Advisory Council of Agricul¬ 
ture, 431-2, 444n 


Great Britain—Continued 
Colonial Office: 

annual reports, 94, 552, 572, 821, 
1075, 1136, 1320, 1354, 1382, 
1413, 1430, 1564, 1659, 1707-9 
Colonial Research Studies, 552, 
554, 753-4, 757, 763, 780, 1138, 
1370, 1380, 1383, 1418, 1562, 
1644, 1717, 1719 

publications, 90, 95, 188, 214-5, 
1138, 1289, 1290n, 1382 
Commission on Financial and Eco¬ 
nomic Position [of colonies], 1414, 
1630, 1716, 1726, 1741 
Dept, of Technical Cooperation, 215 
East Africa Royal Commission, 1290 
East African Economic and Fiscal 
Commission, 1291 

Foreign Office. Historical Section, 
78n, 2106-7, 2114, 2152 
High Commissioner for Basutoland, 
the Bechuanaland Protectorate and 
Swaziland, 1706 
Ministry of Food, 1369n 
Nyasaland Commission of Inquiry, 
1660 

Office of Commonwealth Relations, 
1707-10, 1717 
Treaties, 553 

“Greater Somalia” issue, 1442 
Greaves, Lionel B., 1710n 
Green, John E. S., 1585 
Green, Lawrence G., 485, 1751 
Green, Margaret M., 765-6 
Green, Theodore F., 172n 
Greenberg, Joseph H., 299, 307n, 767 
Greene, Graham, 33, 680n 
Greenough, Richard, 373 
Greenwall, Harry J., 680n 
Grenfell, George, about, 1891 
Griaule, Marcel, 316, 318, 1170 
Griffith, V. L., 1390 
Grist, D. H., 444 
Grivot, Rene, 939, 972 
Gross, Felix, 1596n 
Grosskopf, J. F. W., 1823n 
Groundnut affair, see Peanuts, Tangan¬ 
yika 

Groves, Charles Pelham, 402 
Gruchy, Joy de, 1822n 
Grzimek, Bernard, 451 
Grzimek, Michael, 451 
Guernier, Eugene L., 75, 319 
ed., 845 

Gueye, Lamine, 865 
Guggisberg, Charles A. W., 452 
Guid’ Afrique equatoriale, 1107 
Guid’ ouest africain, 899n 
Guida per Vesportatore italiano, 225n 
Guide-annuaire de la Cote frangaise 
des Somalis, 1262 


336 





Guide to Historical Literature, see Note 
on Bibliography, p. 1 
Guide to Materials for West African 
History in European Archives, 498 
GUINEA, 945-60 

Guinea, Spanish. Delegacion Colonial 
de Estadistica, 2153 
Gobierno General de los Territorios 
del Golfo de Guinea, 2154 
Laws, Statutes, etc., 2155 
Guinee independante, 950 
Guinee; prelude a l’independence , 949 
Gulliver, P. H., 130In, 1302, 1355-6 
Gulliver, Pamala, 130In 
Gunn, Harold D., 77In 
Gunther, John, 35 
Guthrie, Malcolm, 300, 301n 
ed., 293 

Gutkind, A. E., comp., 1299n, 1400n 
Gutkind, Peter C. W., 351, 1400n 
Gwynn, Stephen L., 489n, 499 

H 

Hackett, Peter, 30In 
Hahlo, H. R., 1809-10 
Hahn, C. H. L., 1755n 
Haile Selassie, 1534 
about, 1510-1, 1517-8 
Hailey, William M. H., Baron, 13, 96, 
1711 

Hair, P. E. H., 809 
Halcrow, Sir William, 618 
Hall, Sir Douglas, 1431 
Hama, Boubou, 891 
Hambly, Wilfrid D., 2090 
Hamilton, J. A. de C., ed., 1456 
Hamilton, R. A., ed., 68 
Hammond, Richard J., 2043 
Plammond-Tooke, W. D., 1837n 
Hamon, Leo, 85 6n 
Hampate Ba, Amadou, 989 
Hance, William A., 216 
Hancock, Sir W. Keith, 1787 
Handbook of African Languages [series], 
301 

Handbook of Tanganyika, 1357 
Handbooks and guides, 46 

Central African Republic, 1156 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1875 
East Africa, 1286 
Ethiopia, 1506 

French Equatorial Africa, 1097—8 
French-speaking Africa, 885n 
French West Africa, 898-9 
Gambia, 545 
Ghana, 567, 570 
Liberia, 668 
Madagascar, 1209 
Mozambique, 2117, 2140 
Nigeria, 692, 695, 698, 700, 747 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1615, 1779 


Handbooks and guides—Continued 
Sierra Leone, 837 
South Africa, 1773-4, 1778-9 
Sudan, 1454 
Tanganyika, 1357 
West Africa, 493 
Zanzibar, 1421 
Hanley, Gerald, 1430n 
Hanna, Alexander J., 76, 1586-7 
Hanson, Russell G., 375 
Harcourt, Francois d’, 36 
Harding, Colin, 1588 
Hardy, Georges, 848, 1052 
Hardyman, J. T., 1227 
Hargreaves, J. D., 822 
Harley, George Way, 658 
ed., 672 

Harrar, J. George, ed., 465 
Harries, Lyndon, 1303-4 
Harris, Sir Douglas, 1408 
Harris, John, 684 
Harris, Lyndon, 244 
Harris, Marvin, 2124 
Harris, Norman Dwight, 78n 
Harris, Philip J., 726 
Harroy, Jean Paul, 433, 2014—5 
Hart, Philip A., 172n 
Harvard African Expedition, 659, 
1926-7 

Haswell, Margaret R., 554 
Hatch, John C., 14, 667 
Hausa (people, Northern Nigeria), 754, 
761, 767, 784 
Hauser, A., 1053 
Havlik, Jin, 15 
Haw, Richard C., 434n 
Hawkins, Edward K., 757n, 1383 
Haya (tribe, Tanganyika), 1344 
Haydon, E. S., 1384 
Hayes, Wayne L., 172n 
Hazareesingh, K., 1565 
Hazlewood, Arthur, 217, 1661 
comp., 194 
Healy, Allan M., 60n 
Hehe (tribe, Tanganyika), 1340 
Hellmann, Ellen P., 1844n 
ed., 1811 

Hempstone, Smith, 37, 1990 
Henderson, Ian, 1321 
Henderson, K. D. D., ed., 1476 
Henderson, P. D., 1661 
Hennessy, Maurice N., 1890 
Henry, Paul-Marc, 146 
Herero (people, South West Africa), 
1775,1760, 2088 
Herskovits, Frances S., 941 
Herskovits, Melville J., 16, 166, 940-2 
ed., 264 

Hertefelt, Marcel d’, 2011 
Herzog, George, 672n 
Heseltine, Nigel, 434 
Heyse, Theodore, 193n, 226n, 1862-6 


Hickman, Gladys M., 1273 
Hiddingh, Willem, 172In 
HIGH COMMISSION TERRITO¬ 
RIES, 1704-11 
bibliography, 1706 

Higher education, 370, 375, 379-80, 
383,386,394 
bibliography, 226n, 365 
Nigeria, 801, 804-5 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1578 
Highland, Genevieve A., ed., 622n 
Hilbert, John, 1163n 
Hill, Adelaide C., 2 
Hill, J. F. R., 1362 
Hill, MervynF., 1292-3 
Hill, Polly, 611 

Hill, Richard Leslie, 1450, 1471 
Hiller, V. W., ed., 1693n 
Hilliard, Frederick H., 533 
Hilton, T. E., 612 
Himmelheber, Hans, 320, 660 
Himmelheber, Ulrike, 660-1 
Hinden, Rita, ed., 92 
Hintrager, Oscar, 1752 
History, 53-86 
Angola, 1889, 2063, 2073 
Basutoland, 1718, 1721 
Bechuanaland, 1734-5 
Cameroon, 1144-6 
Chad, 1169, 1178 
Congo (Brazzaville), 1184 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1884-98 
Dahomey, 930, 932, 934, 940 
East Africa, 1270-1, 1276-8, 1280, 
1282, 1285 
Ethiopia, 1519-29 

French Equatorial Africa, 1101, 1110 
French-speaking Africa, 841, 843^1, 
848, 851-2,891 
French West Africa, 901,917 
Gabon, 1202 
Gambia, 551, 558, 560 
Ghana, 578-87 
Guinea, 954 

Ivory Coast, 961-2, 976-7, 980 
Katanga, 1987 
Kenya, 1322, 1326, 1337 
Liberia, 656, 663-4 
Madagascar, 1210, 1213n, 1215-6, 
1223-6,1228, 1240 
Mali, 987-9, 992-4 
Mauritania, 1010, 1019 
Mauritius, 1560-1, 1563, 1568 
Mozambique, 2118-20, 2128-9 
Niger, 1024 
Nigeria, 701-14, 764 
Northern Rhodesia, 1623-4 
Nyasaland, 1656 
Portuguese Guinea, 2102 
Portuguese territories, 2023, 2025, 
2027, 2033 


337 


History—Continued 
Reunion, 1251, 1255-6 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1581, 1585— 
96,1613 

Rwanda, 2007, 2017 
Sahara, 1026,1038 
Senegal, 1047, 1052,1056,1068 
Sierra Leone, 816,818, 822, 827 
Somalia, 1428, 1436 
South Africa, 1780-803 
South West Africa, 1758, 1760 
Southeast Africa, 2118-20 
Southern Rhodesia, 1678, 1682, 1690, 
1692-3, 1695-6 
Spanish Guinea, 2156-7, 2162 
Sudan, 1463-80 
Sudan, Southern, 1466, 1470 
Tanganyika, 1349-50 
Togo, 1071 
Uganda, 1385, 1389 
West Africa, 495-503 
Zanzibar, 1412, 1415-7 

See also Archaeology; Precolonial 
history 

Hlubi (tribe, South Africa), 1837 
Hobley, Charles W., 1322 
Hockey, S. W., 388 
Hodgkin, Robin A., 374 
Hodgkin, Thomas L., 56n, 115-6, 711, 
908 

Hoernle, A. Winifred, 1844n 
Hoernle, Reinhold F., 1812 
Hoffherr, Rene, 884 
Hoffman, Stanley, 146 
Hofmeyr, Jan Hendrik, 1788 
Hogg, V. W., 739 

Holas, Bohumil, 273, 662, 914n, 951, 
973-4 

Holdsworth, Mary, 3, 4n 
Hole, Hugh Marshall, 1589-93 
Holiday, special issue, 41n 
Holleman, F. D., 185 
Holleman, J. F., 1580, 1699-700 
Hollingsworth, Lawrence W., 1274, 1415 
Hollis, Sir Alfred Claud, 1323-4 
Holm, Henrietta M., 1432, 1535 
Holmes, John, 146 
Holmes, Ralph J., 1447n 
Holt, Peter M., 1472-3 
Homburger, Lilias, 265, 302 
Homen de Mello, Manuel J., 2042n 
Homicide, 269 
Hoopes, Roy H., 161 
Hopen, C. Edward, 768 
Hopgood, Cecil H., 290 
Hopkinson, Tom, 1856n 
Hornell, James, 823 
Horrabin, J. F., 45 
Horrell, Muriel, 1822n 
ed., 1822 

Horton, Robin, 69 7n 
Hoskyns, Catherine, 127 


Hotten, John Camden, ed., 1513 
Hottentot (people, Southern Africa), 
1755, 1844 

Houart, Pierre, 192In 
Houghton, D. Hobart, 1822n 
ed., 1825 

Houis, Maurice, 952 
Houphouet-Boigny, about, 598n 
Housing: 

bibliography, 226n 
Madagascar, 1213n 
Nigeria, 742 
Howard, Cecil, 489n 
ed., 500 

Howarth, David, 1625 
Howe, Russell W., 486, 1195 
Howe, Sonia E., 1228 
Howell, Paul P., 1487-8, 1498 
Howlett, Jacques, 316 
Hubbard, John, 769 
Huberich, Charles H., 663 
Huddleston, Trevor, 1826 
Huffnagel, H. P., 1533 
Hughes, A. J. B., 1701-2 
Hughes, John, 17 
Hughes, Langston, ed., 353 
Hulstaert, G., 1954n 

Human Problems in British Central 
Africa (Livingstone, Northern Rho¬ 
desia), 1598 
Hunt, John A., 1433 
Hunter, Guy, 233 

Hunter, Monica, see Wilson, Monica 
Hunter 

Hunting, 445n, 1103n, 1156, 2129, 
2146n 

Huntingford, G. W. B., 1301n, 1325, 
1499n, 1519, 1550 
Hurst, Harold E., 1482, 1487 
Hurwitz, Nathaniel, 1829n 
Husson, Philippe, 1011 
Huth, Arno, 354 
Hutt, A. McD. Bruce, 1340 
Huxley, Elspeth, 487, 1275, 1326 
Huxley, Sir Julian, 450n 
Hymans, Jacques Louis, 838n 

I 

IDEA, see Spain. Consejo Superior de 
Investigaciones Cientificas. Insti¬ 
tute de Estudios Africanos 
IFAN, see Institut Frangais d’Afrique 
Noire 

INCIDI, see International Institute of 
Differing Civilizations 
INEAC, see Institut National pour 
l’Etude Agronomique du Congo 
Beige 

INFORCONGO, see Belgium. Office de 
1’Information (etc.) 


IRSAC, see Institut pour la Recherche 
Scientifique en Afrique Centrale 
Ibadan, Nigeria. University College, 
685 

Ibadan, about 783 

Ibibio (tribe, Nigeria), 771n, 786 

Ibn Batuta, 61 

Ibo (group, Nigeria), 765-6, 771, 

773-4, 790n, 792-3, 803 
Idenburg, P. J., 3 
Idewu, Olawale, 799 
Idowu, E. Bolaji, 770 
Idrisi, 61 

Ikeotuonye, Vincent C., 718n 
Ila (language group, Northern Rho¬ 
desia) 1652 

Ila-Tonga (peoples, Northern Rho¬ 
desia), 1647 

lie Bourbon, see Reunion 
Independence, see Nationalism; Politics 
of individual countries; Self-gov¬ 
ernment 

Index to South African Periodicals, 1763 
Indians in Africa, 138 
East Africa, 1274 
Mauritius, 1562 
Natal, 1829n 
South Africa, 1808 

Indirect rule, see Native administration 
Industries, 207-8, 251 
bibliography, 226n 
Social aspects, 232, 235 
Ghana, 601 
Nigeria, 758-9 
Southern Rhodesia, 1688 
Informations Eurafdoc, 2021 
Ingham, Kenneth, 1276, 1385 
Ingold, F. J. J., 1172n 
Ingold, G., 994n 

Ingrams, William Harold, 1386, 1416, 
1566 

Initiation rites, 286 
Guinea, 947, 953 
Mali, 1002 

Northern Rhodesia, 1650 
Tanganyika, 1344n 
Initiations africaines (series), 913 
Insects, 456 

Institut d’fitudes Centrafricaines, 1108, 
1109, 1202 

Institut de Recherche Scientifique de la 
Republique Malgache, 1241 
Institut de Recherches du Togo, 1081 
Institut de Recherches Scientifiques du 
Cameroun, 1125, 1137 
Institut de Sociologie Solvay, see Brus¬ 
sels. Universite Libre 
Institut Frangais d’Afrique Noire 
[IFAN], 909-14, 1053-4 
Bulletin, 909, 1003 


338 


Institut Frangais d’Afrique Noire — 
Continued 

Initiations africaines, 273, 502, 842, 
901,913 

Memoires, 657, 662, 912, 916-7, 927, 
930, 951, 982, 1004, 1039, 1047, 
1061, 1067, 1074, 1093, 1142, 1144, 
1178 

See also Etudes eburneennes. 
Etudes senegalaises etc. 

Institut National pour l’Etude Agrono- 
mique du Congo Beige [INEAC], 
1861, 1878 

Institut pour la Recherche Scientifique 
en Afrique Centrale [IRSAC], 1877 
Institut Royal Colonial Beige, see Acad¬ 
emic Royale des Sciences d’Outre- 
Mer 

Institute of International Education, 375 
Institute of Race Relations, 137 

publications, 233, 920, 1607, 1613— 
4, 1897,1927, 2076 
Institute of Social Research, ed., 1829n 
Instituto de Estudios Africanos, see 
Spain. Consejo Superior . . . 
Inter-African Conference on Social Sci¬ 
ences, 234 

Inter-African Labour Institute, 248 
International Affairs (London), special 
issue, 117 

^ International African Institute, 235, 
287, 479, 555, 771, 914, 1499, 1647 
bibliography series, 262, 1267 

See also Ethnographic Survey of 
Africa; Handbook of African 
Languages; Monographies ethno- 
logiques africaines 

International African Seminar, Makerere 
College, 1959, 274 

International Bank for Reconstruction 
and Development, 740, 1387, 
1434 

See also Economic Survey Mission 
to Kenya, Tanganyika 
International Children’s Centre, 236, 
472 

International Congress of African Cul¬ 
ture, Salisbury, 1962, 321 
International Index, 41n 
International Institute of Differing Civi¬ 
lizations, 104n, 237 
International Labor Office, 249 
International Missionary Council, 391n 
International Seminar on Ethno-History 
in Africa, 62 

International West African Conference, 
511 

Investment, foreign, 198, 204, 208n, 210, 

220 

American, 164, 169, 652, 1619 
German, 211 


Investment—Continued 
in East Africa, 1287 

French-speaking West Africa, 926 
Ghana, 620 
Liberia, 652, 676 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1616, 
1619 

Tanganyika, 1363 
Uganda, 1377 

Inyanga (district, Southern Rhodesia), 
1694 
Irrigation 

Kalahari desert, 1727 
Mali, 998 

Somalia, 1446, 1448 
Sudan, 1481-2, 1487 
Tanganyika, 1353 
Irvine, Alexander G., 1610 
Irvine, Frederick R., 435, 613-4 
Isaacs, Harold R., 162 
Islam, 394-5, 405, 411, 416, 420 
East Africa, 1303 
Ethiopia, 1555 
French-speaking Africa, 892 
French West Africa, 906 
Mauritania (bibliography), 1003 
Nigeria, 767, 783 
Portuguese Guinea, 2105, 2112 
Sudan, 1462 
West Africa, 528-9 
Islamic law, 188 
Isnard, Hildebert, 1248n 
Issa (tribe), see Somaliland, French 
Istituto Italiano per 1’Africa, 250 
Istituto Nazionale per il Commercio 
Estero, 1483, 2125 
Italiaander, Rolf, 127n 
Italian colonial administration 
Eritrea, 1537 
Ethiopia, 1541 

Somaliland, Italian, 1427, 1429, 1435, 
1441, 1443-5 
Italians in Africa, 250 
Italo-Ethiopian War, 1542 
Italy. Ministero degli Affari Esteri, 
1435 

Iteso (tribe, Uganda), 1392 
Ivory carvings, 2052 
IVORY COAST, 961-81 
Ivory Coast. Direction de la Sta- 
tistique . . . ,975 
Izard, Michel, 1090 
Izard-Heritier, Franchise, 1090 

J 

Jabavu, Noni, 1388 

Jablow, Alta, 523 

Jack, Daniel T., 824, 1671 

Jack, Homer, A., 2079 

Jackson, Barbara Ward, 118, 218 

Jackson, Sir Frederick J., 1277 


Jackson, Henry C., 1457-9 
Jackson, I. C., 741 
Jackson, S. P., 49n 
Jacquot, Andre, 301n, 1185 
Jadot, Joseph M., 1978 
Jahn, Janheinz, 322 
Jahoda, Gustav, 633 
Jardine, Douglas, 1436 
Jarrett, Harold R., 18, 825 
Jaspan, M. A., 1647 
Jean, Suzanne, 1157 
Jeffrey, D. G. B., 372 
Jeffries, Sir Charles J., 97 
Jenny, Hans, 1507n 
Jentgen, Pierre, 2006 
Jesman, Czeslaw, 1526 
Jie (tribe, Uganda), 1302 
Jinja, Uganda, 1399 
Jobson, Richard, 556 
Joelson, F. S., ed., 1286n 
Johann, A. E., pseud., see Wollschlager 
Johannesburg. Public Library, 275 
Johnson, Albert F., 565 
Johnson, Carol A., comp., 146 
Johnson, James, 667 
Johnson, John J., ed., Ill 
Johnson, Ralph L., 1447n 
Johnson, S. J. M., 656n 
Johnson, Thomas S., 826 
Johnston, Bruce F., 436, 445n 
Johnston, Sir Harry H., 303, 664, 1389, 
1594, 1891 
about, 80 

Joint Acquisitions List of Africana, see 
Note on Bibliography, p. 1 
Jones, A. H. M., 1527 
Jones, A. M., 342, 1648 
Jones, Arthur Creech, 92, 1611 
Jones, D. H., 56n 
ed., 68 

Jones, G. I., 764, 77In, 1717 
Jones, George Howard, 541 
Jones, Hugh W., 63 
Jones, Ruth, comp., 262,479, 1267 
Jones, S. H. M., 390 
Jones, Thomas Jesse, ed., 367-8 
Jones, William O., 437 
Joos, Louis C., 56n 
Jopp, Keith, 608 
Joseph, Gaston, 976 
Joset, Paul E., 288 
Joshi, N. R., 438 
Joucla, Edmond A., 896 
Journal of African Administration, 94n 
Journal of African History, 64 
Journal of African Languages, 304 
Journal of African Law, 192 
Journal of Human Relations, 19 
Journal of Local Administration Over¬ 
seas, 94n 

Journal of Modern African Studies, 119 


339 


Journal of Negro Education, special is¬ 
sue, 376 
See also 41n 

Journees d’etudes coloniales, Antwerp, 
1935 

Joy, Charles R., 46n 
ed., 1200 

Judaism, Ethiopia, 1552—3 
Judd, Helen O., 232 
Jukum (language group), 777 
Junod, H. P., 1837n 
Junod, Henri A., 1839 
Juvenile delinquency, 236 
bibliography, 226n 

K 

Kaberry, Phyllis M., 1138 
ed., 276 

Kabre (tribe, Togo) 1079, 1081 
Kagame, Alexis, 2007 
Kahin, George Met., 147 
Kahn, Ellison, 1809—10 
Kalahari (desert, Southern Africa) 1725, 
1727, 1737-9, 1753 
Kalanda, Mabika, 1991 
Kalck, Pierre, 1158 
Kamarck, Andrew M., 157 
Kamba (tribe, Kenya) 130In 
Kambalame, John, 1662 
Kampala, Uganda, 1397, 1400 
Kane, Nora S., 1678 
Kane, Robert S., 46 
Kanza, Thomas, 1918 
Karefa-Smart, John, 41 On 
Kariba Dam (Rhodesia) 1579, 1625 
See also Tonga (tribe) 

Karp, Mark, 1437 
Kartun, Derek, 182n 
KATANGA, 1985-98 
bibliography, 1985 
Kaunda, Kenneth, 1631 
Kavirondo (region, Kenya) 271, 1338 
Kaye, Barrington, 634 
Keay, R. W. J., 425 
Kede (tribe, Northern Nigeria) 271 
Keet, B. B., 1813 
Keiser, Robert L., 665 
Keiskammahoek Rural Survey, 1822n 
Keita, Modibo, 990 
Keith, Arthur Berriedale, 1888n 
Keltie, Sir John Scott, 78n 
Kendall, Henry, 1390 
Kent, Raymond K., 1229 
KENYA, 449n, 130In, 1308-39, 1442 
bibliography, 1268 
Kenyatta, Jomo, 1328 
about, 1314n, 1315 
Keppel-Jones, Arthur, 1789-1790 
Kerharo, Joseph, 1091-2 
Kerremans-Ramioulle, M. L., 226n 
Kettner, Jin, 15 


Ketu, Dahomey, 783n 
Khoisan (peoples, South Africa) 1843 
See also Bushmen; Hottentot 
Kiersen, S., 1762n 

Kikuyu (tribe, Kenya), 130In, 1328-9, 
1331,1335 
Kilby, Peter, 758n 

Kimbangu, Simon, about, 392, 1911, 
1973 

See also Separatist Churches 
Kimble, David, 20, 20n, 98, 581 
ed. 119 

Kimble, George H. T., 20, 1619 
Kimble, Helen, ed. 119 
King, Anthony, 343 
Kingdon, Donald, 546, 727 
King’s African Rifles, 1295 
Kingsley, Mary H., 488-9, 1127n 
Kingsnorth, G. W., 65, 1280 
Kinsey, Grover, 1447n 
Kinship, 282, 627, 631, 1496, 1700-1, 
2085 

See also Anthropology 
Kirby, P. R., 1844n, 1852 
Kirdi (tribe, North Cameroun) 1142 
Kirk, John, about 1581 
Kirk-Greene, Anthony H. W., 712 
ed. 701 

reviews by, 710, 714, 768, 784 
Kirsch, M., 864n 
Kissi (tribe, Guinea) 955 
Kitchen, Helen, 1076 
ed. 185, 382 

See also Africa Report 
Kittler, Glenn D., 403 
Kivu (province, Congo) 1941 
Kiwanga, Mtema Towagale, 1345 
Klemme, Marvin, 1447n 
Kloman, E. H., 146 
Knight, R. L., 1489n 
Knight-Bruce, Bishop, 1693n 
Knopfli, Josue, ed. 2126 
Kochnitzky, Leon, 1979 
Koelle, Sigismund Wilhelm, 305 
Koffler, Camilla, 453 
Koinange, Mbiyu, 1332n 
Kombe, L., 1648 
Kondapi, C., 138 
Konde (tribe, Nyasaland) 1663 
Kong, Ivory Coast, 968 
Konkomba (tribe, Ghana) 278, 649 
(Togo) 1074 

Konkoure (region, Guinea) 945 
Kono (tribe, Guinea) 951 
Kordofan, Sudan, 782n 
Kpelle (tribe, Liberia) 673 
Krieger, Kurt, 323 
Krige, Eileen J., 1840-1, 1844n 
Krige, J. D., 1841 
Kronenberg, Andreas, 1171 
Kru (tribe, Liberia) 657 


Kruger, Rayne, 1791 
Kuczynski, Robert R., 259, 1139 
Kup, A. P., 827 
Kuper, Hilda, 1702, 1742-4 
Kuper, Leo, 1814 
Kutscher, Gert, 323 
ed., 330 

Kwashiorkor, 478n 
Kyagambiddwa, Joseph, 344, 1391 

L 

Labachery, Henri, 316 
Labor, 247-56 
bibliography, 247 
directory, 256 
Angola, 2065, 2070 
Bechuanaland, 1731 
Congo (Brazzaville) 1182 
Congo (Leopoldville) 1946-7, 1949 
East Africa, 254, 1296 
French-speaking Africa, 864, 886 
French West Africa, 907 
Mozambique, 2124 
Northern Rhodesia, 254 
Portuguese Territories 2038-9, 2047 
Sao Tome and Principe, 2114n 
South Africa, 1834 
Southern Rhodesia, 1703 
Sudan, 1455 
Tanganyika, 254, 1355 
Uganda, 1378, 1398 
West Africa, 254, 516 
Labouret, Henri, 285n, 843n, 915, 1093 
La Fontaine, J. S., 1301n 
Lagden, Sir Godfrey, 1718 
Lagos, Nigeria, 742 
Lagus, Charles, 1579n 
Lake Victoria, 1288 
Lala (tribe, Northern Rhodesia) 1648 
Lalibela, Ethiopia, 1521 
Lambarene, Gabon, 1198-200 
Lambert, H. E., 1329 
Lambert, Pierre, 1948 
Lamy, R., 1265 

Die Lander Afrikas (series) 10, 832, 
1080, 1449,2029,2123 
Land tenure 

bibliography, 193n, 226n 

law, 277, 644, 721, 724, 775, 780 

registration, 90 

Basutoland, 1719 

Dahomey, 933 

East Africa, 1290 

Ghana, 644 

Madagascar, 1246 

Nigeria, 721, 724, 763, 766, 775, 780 
Rwanda, 2016 
Tanganyika, 1356, 1359 
Uganda, 1396 
Zanzibar, 1418 
Landskron, William A., 195 


340 


Langba (tribe, Central African Re¬ 
public) 1157 

Langenhove, Fernand van, 1912, 1919 
Langsam, Walter C., ed., 86 
Languages and linguistics, 293-313, 387 
bibliography, 262, note, p. 58-9 
Chad [Teda] 117In 
Congo (Leopoldville) 1954, 1958n 
East Africa [Swahili] 1299 
Ethiopia, 1557 
bibliography, 1504 
French West Africa, 916 
Kenya, 1323-4 
Liberia, 672 
Nigeria, 769 
Pemba, 1422 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1582 
Somalia, 1426 
Southern Sudan, 1493 
Sudanese Arabic, 1462 
Togo, 916 
Upper Volta, 1094 
West Africa, 524 
Lanham, Peter, 1717n 
Lantier, Raymond, 1174 
Lapie, Pierre O., 1172 
Larea Palacin, Arcadio de, 2163n 
Larimore, Ann E., 1399n 
Lasserre, Guy, 1196 
Laszlo, Andreas E., 2068 
Lattre, Jean Michel de, 885 
Laude, N., 1880 
Laure, Rene, 208n 
Laurence, Margaret, ed., 1438 
Lavergne de Tressan, Michel de, 916 
Lavroff, D. G., 866 
Law, 184-92 

bibliography, 187n 
Cameroon, 1121 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1915, 1923, 
1942, 1948 
Ethiopia, 1531, 1536 
French-speaking Africa, 864, 868 
French West Africa, 902, 923 
Gambia, 546 
Ghana, 186, 592, 599 
Liberia, 666 
Nigeria, 724, 727, 775 
Northern Rhodesia, 1644 
Portuguese Territories, 2039—40 
Sierra Leone, 592 
South Africa, 1809 
Spanish Guinea, 2154, 2172 
Uganda, 1384 

See also Customary law; Islamic 
law 

Lawman, Tony, 1626 
Lawrance, J. C. D., 1392 
Lawson, Rowena M., 512 
Laye, Camera, 953 
Lazio, Branko M., 180 


Leaders, African, biographies, 21, 114, 
127 

training, 691 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1899, 1943 
French-speaking Africa, 867 
Gambia, 563 

Nigeria, 692,700, 703, 715 
Leakey, Louis S. B., 66, 1330-2 
ed., 70 

Leask, Thomas, 1693n 
Lebeuf, Annie M. D., 914n, 1173 
Lebeuf, Jean Paul, 772, 1159, 1174 
Leblanc, Maria, 1994 
Leblond, Ary, 1226n, 1254 
Leblond, Marius, 1226n, 1254-5, 1566n 
Lebou (tribe, Senegal) 550, 1059 
Leclerc, General, 1172 
LeCoeur, Charles, 1171 n 
LeCoeur, Marguerite, 1171n 
Lecoq, Raymond, 1140 
Lee, Ulysses, 2 
LeFebvre, Jacques, 1936 
Lefevre, Raymond, 127n, 867 
Legendre, Sidney J., 1753 
Legge, Ronald, 1579n 
Legislative council, see Colonial legisla¬ 
tures 

Legum, Colin, 120, 148, 225n, 1372n, 
1920-1 
ed., 21 

Leith-Ross, Sylvia, 773-4 
Lem, F. H., 991 
Lemarchand, Rene, 1867 
Lembezat, Bertrand, 914n, 1116n, 

1141-2 

Lemoyne, Robert, 1262 
Leopard-men, see Secret societies 
Leopold II, King of the Belgians, 1892, 
1895, 1897 
Leprosy, 469, 2163n 
Leroi-Gourhan, Andre, 893 
Le Rouvreur, Albert, 1175 
Leslau, Charlotte comp., 355 
Leslau, Wolf, 307n, 1504, 1551 
comp., 355 
ed., 1552 

Lessa, Almerindo, 2108 
Lesser Dependencies of Mauritius, 1572 
Lessing, Doris, 1687n 
Lessing, Pieter, 178n 
Lestrade, G. P., 1837n, 1844n 
Lestrange, Monique de, 914n, 95In 
Leubuscher, Charlotte, 219, 752n, 1358 
Leurquin, Philippe, 1868n, 2008 
Leuzinger, Elsy, 324 
Lewis, Hylan, 157 
Lewis, I. M., 1439—40 
review by, 1442 
Lewis, Leonard J., ed., 368 
Lewis, Roy, 828 
Lewis, Sir Samuel, about, 822 
Leyder, Jean, 226n 


Leys, Colin, 1602n, 1679 
ed., 1612 

Leys, Norman, 1333 
Lhande, Pierre, 1240n 
Lhote, Henri, 67, 1038 
LIBERIA, 106, 651-85 
bibliography, 651, 662-3 
Liberia. Bureau of Folkways, 65 6n 
Laws, Statutes, etc., 666 
“Liberia; A Guardian Survey”, 667 
Liberian Yearbook, 668 
Libraries, 384, 388 
bibliography, 388n 
Congo, 1977 
Libreville, Gabon, 1196 
Lichtervelde, Louis de, 1892 
Liebenow, J. Gus, 106 
Liege. Universite. Fondation pour les 
Recherches Scientifiques au Congo 
Beige, 2009 

Lienhardt, Godfrey, 278, 1500 
ed., 357 
review by, 1498 
Lima, Augusto J. Santos, 2109 
Lindbergh, Anne Morrow, 21 lOn 
Linton, Ralph, 317, 1230 
Lions, 451, 1293n 
Lippmann, Alphonse, 1264 
Lipscomb, J. F., 1332n 
Lipsky, George A., 1514 
List of American Doctoral Dissertations 
on Africa, see Note on Bibliogra¬ 
phy, p. 1 

Literature, African, 348-63 
anthologies, 353, 360, 362, 531 
bibliography, 314, 361 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1978 
French-speaking Africa, 895 
Ghana, 650 
Guinea, 953 

Nigeria, 791-2, 796-800, 803, 807-8 
Nyasaland, 1662 
Somalia, 1438 
South Africa, 1850-1, 1853 
Sudan, 1502 
West Africa, 531 
Little, Kenneth L., 829 
ed., 527 

Littlewood, Margaret, 1129n 
Living standards 
Cameroon, 1120 
Mali, 996 

Northern Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 
1605 

Ruanda-Urundi, 2008 
South Africa, 1822n 
See also Social studies 
Livingstone, David, 77,404, 1693n 
about, 402, 1581n 
Lloyd, Miss L. C., ed., 1737n 
Lloyd, Peter C., 527, 775 
Lobato, Alexandre, 2127-8 


341 


Lobengula, about, 1591 
Lobi (tribe, Upper Volta, etc.) 1093 
Local government, 87, 94n, 726 
Locust control, 446 
LoDagaa (tribe, Ghana, etc.) 521 
Loftus, E. A., 1284n 
Logan, Rayford W., 2, 86n 
Logoli (tribe, Kenya), 1338 
Lokoya (tribe, Sudan, etc.), 1499n 
Lomax, Louis E., 139 
London. University. School of Orien¬ 
tal and African Studies, 68 
Longmore, Laura, 1827 
Look, special issue, 41n 
Lopez, Emilio Guinea, 2146n 
Lord, Albert B., 2087 
Lorimer, E. O., ed., 240 
Lorimer, Frank, 260 
Lotuko (tribe, Sudan, etc.) 1499n 
Lougnon, Albert, 1256 
Lourengo Marques Directory, see Anua- 
rio da Provtncia de Mogambique 
Loveday, Arthur F., 1595 
Lovedu (tribe, South Africa) 1841 
Low, Donald Anthony, 1393 
Lowenstein, Allard K., 1754 
LoWiili (tribe, Ghana, etc.) 522 
Lozi (tribe, Northern Rhodesia) 1580, 
1646-7 

Luapula (region, Northern Rhodesia) 
1643 

Luba (language) see Baluba 
Lucas, Sir Charles, 78 
Luchaire, Francois, 868 
Luena (tribe, Angola) 2093 
Luganda language, 139 In 
See also Baganda 
Lugard, F. J. D., Baron, 8In, 1278 
about, 81, 85 

Lugbara (tribe, Uganda & Congo) 278, 
1395 

language, 1493 

Luguru (tribe, Tanganyika) 1371 
Luke, Harry C., 810 
Lulua (tribe, Katanga) 1991 
Lumumba, Patrice, 1921 
about, 1921n 

Lunda (tribe, Northern Rhodesia, An¬ 
gola) 1653,2092-3 
Luo (people, Sudan) 1492 
Lupi, Luis C., 2044 
Luther, Ernest W., 1515 
Luthuli, Albert J., 1815 
Luvale (tribe, Northern Rhodesia) 1655 
Lux, Andre, 251 
Ly, Abdoulaye, 1055-8 
Lyall, Archibald, 2110 
Lydekker, Richard, 449 
Lyne, Robert N., 1417 
Lynes, Tony, 1574 
Lystad, Robert A., 635 
ed., 27 


M 

Macaulay, J. B., 1804 
McColloch, C. L., 1447n 
McCord, William, 598n 
MacCrone, Ian D., 1816 
ed., 1812 

McCulloch, Merran, 235, 830, 1129n, 
2091-2 

McDermott, P. L., 1285n 
Macedo, Diogo de, 2053 
McEwen, Frank, 321n 
McGee, Gale W., 172 
MacGregor, James C., 1721n 
McKay, Vernon, 149, 157 

comp., see Guide to Historical Litera¬ 
ture 

Mackenzie, Duncan R., 1663 
Mackenzie, John, Bishop, about, 1656 
Mackenzie, Leonard A., 1727 
Mackenzie, William J. M., ed., 121 
Mackworth Praed, Cyril W., 454 
McLaughlin, E. A., 438 
Maclean, George, about, 582 
McLoughlin, Peter F., 1484 
MacMichael, Sir Harold A., 1474-5 
Macmillan, Harold, 12 
Macmillan, Mona, 1279 
Macmillan, William M., 56n, 79, 122 
McNair, James I., ed., 77 
McPhee, Allan, 513 

Madagascar a travers ses provinces, 1248 
Magic, 286, 288, 405 
Angola, 2094 
Basutoland, 1712, 1717 
Cameroons, 1135 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1956, 1971 

Guinea, 947 

Ivory Coast, 965, 1091 

Mali, 891, 982n 

Nigeria, 786 

Somaliland, French, 1264 
Southern Rhodesia, 1697 
Upper Volta, 1088, 1091 
Maes, Joseph, 1962 
Mahdiya, the, 1464, 1466, 1472, 1478 
Maigret, Julien, 1116n 
Mair, Lucy P., 99-100, 117, 241, 244, 
1394, 1664 
ed., 1338 

Maistriaux, Robert, 377, 1980 
Majo Framis, Ricardo, 2156 
MALAGASY REPUBLIC, 1205-49, 
1258 

bibliography, 262, 1205-6 
Malagasy Republic. Service de l’lnfor- 
mation, 1231 

Malcolm, D. McK., 1837n 
Malcolm, Donald W., 1359 
Malherbe, E. G., 1823n 
MALI, 982-1002, 1033 
Malim, Michael, 1567 
Malinowski, Bronislaw, 276 


Mambwe (tribe, Northern Rhodesia) 
1654 

Mandari (tribe, Southern Sudan) 278 
Mandingo (tribe, Guinea and Portu¬ 
guese Guinea) 954, 2098 
Mandinka language (Gambia) 559 
Mandja (tribe, Central African Re¬ 
public) 1162 
Manganese, 1194 
Mangin, G., 185 
Manioc, 437 

Manjaco (tribe, Portuguese Guinea) 
2099 

Mannoni, D. O., 103n, 1232 
Manners, Robert A., ed., 112 
Mano (tribe, Liberia) 658 
Manoukian, Madeline, 636-8 
Man-O-War Bay Training Center, 
Southern Cameroons, 691 
Mantero, Eduardo, 2114n 
Manue, G. R., 879 
Maquet, Jacques J., 2010-1 
Marais, Johannes S., 1792, 1828, 1844n 
Maran, Rene, 1104n, 1110 
Marbut, C. F., 442n 

Marches tropicaux et mediterraneans, 
special issue, 875n 
Marcus, Edward, 125, 220 
Marcus, Mildred R., 220 
Marein, Nathan, 1536 
Margarido, Alfredo, 351 
Marie Andre du Sacre Coeur, Sister, 
237-9 

Markets, 201-2, 211 
East Africa, 1291 
French-speaking Africa, 875 
Marketing boards, West Africa, 504, 
836 

See also Trade 
Marquard, Leopold, 1817 
Marr Institute of Language and 
Mentality, 294 
Marriage, 230, 239, 244, 282 
Bechuanaland, 1730 
Nigeria, 764n 

Northern Rhodesia, 1635n, 1640, 

1650n 

Senegal, 1045 
Southern Rhodesia, 1700 
Southern Sudan, 1496 
Marris, Peter, 742 
Mars, J., 752n 
Marsh, Zoe, 1280 
Martelli, George, 1893 
Marti, Montserrat Palau, 914n 
Martin, Eveline C., 501 
Martin, Henri, tr., 1144 
Martin du Gard, Maurice, 1226n, 1566n 
Martinez Dominguez, Victor, 2163n 
Martins, Manual Alfredo de Morais, 
2069 

Marvel, Tom, 1879 


342 


Marwick, Brian A., 1745 
Maryland in Liberia (state) 656 
Masai (tribe, Kenya and Tanganyika) 
1323 

Masefield, Geoffrey B., 1409n 
Mashonaland (region, Southern Rhode¬ 
sia) 1693n,1695, 1697-700 
Masks, 323, 537, 658n 
See also Sculpture 
Mason, Philip, 140, 1290n, 1613-4 
Mason, Reginald J., 374n 
Masse, H., 1053 

Matabeleland (region, Southern Rho¬ 
desia) 9,1693n,1695-6 
Matheson, J. K., ed., 1294 
Mathew, Gervase, 56n 
ed., 1276n 

Mathews, Sir Lloyd Wm., about, 1417 
Matthews, David, ed., 1598n 
Mau Mau, 29, 38,1313-4, 1321, 1331-2 
Maugham, R. C. F., 664n, 2129 
Maugham, Robin, 992 
Maunier, Rene, 240, 843 
Mauny, Raymond, 502, 917 
Maupoil, comp., 896 
Maurette, Fernand, 23n 
Maurice, Albert, 74 
MAURITANIA, 1003-19, 1039-40 
bibliography, 1003, 1025 
Mauritania-Morocco, relations, 1015, 
1018 

Le Mauritanien (Nouakchott), 1012 
MAURITIUS, 1255, 1258, 1266, 1558- 
76 

bibliography, 1558-9 
Mauritius. Dept, of Education, 1568 
Mauritius Chamber of Agriculture, 1569 
Mauritius Sugar Industry Research In¬ 
stitute, 1570 
Mayer, Jean, 1932 
Mayer, Philip, 1829n 
Mbandja (tribe, Congo) 1955 
Mbari Writer’s and Artist’s Club, 356n, 
800 

Mboya, Tom, 1334 
about, 598n, 1336 
Mbuiti, see Bwiti 
Meade, James, ed., 1571 
Medicine, African, 468, 471, 474, 476 
Angola, 2094 
Basutoland, 1717 
Ivory Coast, 1091-2 
Liberia, 658 

Southern Rhodesia, 1697 
Upper Volta, 1091-2 
Medicine and health services, 401, 468- 
78 

Angola, 2068 
Chad, 1013 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1952 
Gabon, 1198-200 
Liberia, 657-9 


Medicine and health services—Cont. 
Mauritania, 1013 
Nigeria, 690 

Northern Rhodesia, 1624, 1627 
Sao Tome, 2114n 
Spanish Guinea, 2145, 2163n 
Sudan, 1460 

Meek, Charles Kingsley, 277, 776-80 
Meeker, Oden, 38 
Meeus, Franciscus de, 1981 
Meinhof, Carl, 306 
Meisler, Stanley, 1060 
Melady, Thomas P., 127n 
Melby, John F., 375n 
Mellanby, Kenneth, 801 
Menard, Andre, 1253 
Mende (tribe, Sierra Leone) 829, 831 
Mendelsohn, Jack, 405 
Mendelssohn, Sidney, 1764-5 
Mendes, Afonso, 2070 
Mendiaux, fidouard, 1894 
Menelik, Emperor of Ethiopia, about, 
1520 

Meniaud, Jacques, 852n, 893n, 993-4 
Mental health, 468,474 
Mentality, African, 377, 2163n 
Mer Rouge, Afrique Orientale, 1265 
Mercier, Georges, 1032 
Mercier, Paul, 1053, 1059 
Mercier, Robert, 211 
Merker, M., 1323n 
Merlier, Michel, 1893n 
Merriam, Alan P., 314, 1922 
comp., 336 
Mersadier, Y., 1053n 
Meru (tribe, Kenya) 1310 
Metcalfe, G. E., 582 
Metzger, O. F., 1077 
Mews, Hazel, 384 
Meyer, JeanD., 1013 
Meyerowitz, Eva L. R., 639-42 
Meyers Handbuch iiber Afrika, 22 
Michel, Louis, 1207 
Michel, Serge, 1921n 
Michiels, Albert, 1880 
Middle East Journal, 1425n 
Middleton, Dorothy, 85 
Middleton, John, 278, 1301n, 1395, 1418 
ed., 278 

Middleton, Lamar, 78n 
Migeod, Frederick W. H., 524, 831, 
1143 

Migliorini, Elio, 23 
Migrations, Madagascar, 1216n 
Migratory labor, bibliography, 247 
See also Labor 

Milcent, Ernest, 106, 918, 1060 
Millikan, Max F., ed., 163 
Millin, Sarah Gertrude, 1596, 1772, 1793 
Mills, Lady Dorothy, 680n 
Minelle, Jean, 1249 


Miner, Horace M., 995 
ed., 241 

Minerals and mining, 457-62 
Basutoland, 1713 
French Equatorial Africa, 1102 
French-speaking Africa, 879 
Gabon, 1194, 1197 
Ivory Coast, 967 
Katanga, 1987, 1996-8 
Madagascar, 1243-4 
Mozambique, 2122 
Nigeria, 752 

Northern Rhodesia, 1620, 1628 
Sahara, 1030-2, 1035 
Somalia, 1447n 
South Africa, 1833 

Mission Anthropologique de l’A.O.F., 
919 

Mission Socio-Economique du Soudan, 
996 

Missionary Research Library, New York, 
407 

Missions & missionaries, Catholic, 30, 
393, 397, 399, 403, 406 
Burundi, 2004 

Central African Republic, 1153 
Congo, 1974, 1981 
East Africa, 409n 
Gabon, 1187-8 
Madagascar, 1240n 
Portuguese Guinea, 2112 
Portuguese territories, 2024, 2032, 
2057 

Missions & missionaries, Protestant, 391, 
401, 407,414 
Angola, 2067 
Bechuanaland, 1736 
Congo, 1891, 1896, 1976 
Liberia, 670 

Madagascar, 1227, 1240 
Mozambique, 2130 
Northern Rhodesia, 1599 
Nyasaland, 1656 
South West Africa, 1758 
Southern Rhodesia, 1599, 1690, 1693, 
1695 

Mitchell, J. C., 1580, 1665, 1703 
Mitchell, Sir Philip E., 1281 
Mitchison, Lois, 694 
Mitchison, Naomi H., 573 
Moqambique (Tananarive) 2131 
Mockford, Julian, 1722n 
Modisane, Bloke, 800 
Moffat, Mary, 1693n 
Moffat, Robert, 1693n 
about, 1690 

Moffett, J. P .,ed., 1357, 1362 
Mokhtarould Hamidoun, 1014 
Mombasa, Kenya, 2120 
Monckton Commission, 1608 
Moncure, Robert C., 445n 
Monfreid, Henri de, 1257, 1266 


343 


Monod, Theodore, 439, 51 In, 913, 
1039-40 

Monographies ethnologiques africaines 
[Series] 270, 914, 951n, 982n, 1173, 
1185, 1233 

Monroe, Elizabeth, 1527 
Montgomery, John D., 164 
Monthly List of Official Colonial Publi¬ 
cations, see Note, p. 19 
Moore, Francis, 557 
Moore, Gerald, ed., 360n 
Moorehead, Alan, 455, 1282, 1528 
Mopeli-Paulus, A. S., 1717n 
Moran, Willian E., 200 
Moreira, Adriano, 185, 2045 
Moreira, Eduardo, 2130 
Morel, Edmund D., 1892n 
Moreno Moreno, Jose A., 2157 
Morgaut, Marc-Edmond, 252, 886 
Morgenthau, Ruth Schachter, 156, 908 
Morocco. Ministry of Information and 
Tourism, 1015 

Morogoro (district, Tanganyika) 1371 
Morris, Colin M., 1632 
Mosmans, Guy, 406 
Moss, Frank E., 172 

Mossi (tribe, Upper Volta) 1087-8, 
1090 

Mota, Avelino Teixeira da, 2111 
Mouezy, Henri, 977 
Moussa, Pierre, 887 
Moyse-Bartlett, Hubert, 1295 
MOZAMBIQUE, 2117-41 
bibliography, 2122, 2131 
Mozambique. Direcgao dos Servigos de 
Agrimensura, 2132 
Mphahlele, Ezekiel, 356, 1853 
ed., 96, 796 

Muller, Friedrich W., 296 
Muller, Fritz F., 1283 
Mufulira Copper Mines, 1620 
Mukulehe (tribe, Cameroons) 1142 
Mukwaya, A. B., 1300n, 1396, 1398 
Muldoon, Guy D., 455n 
Mulhall, Harry, 790 
Muller, R., 1265 
Multiracial society, 1602-3 
See also Race relations 
Mumford, William B., 378 
Munger, Edwin S., 39, 1397 

comp., see Select Bibliography: Asia, 
Africa . . . 

Munier, Pierre M., 1016 
Munyangaju, Aloys, 2012 
Munno, Settimio, ed., 2112 
Murdock, George P., 279 
Murray, Pauli, 599 
Murray, W. A., 1823n 
Music and musical instruments, 336-47 
bibliography, 314, 336-7 
church music, 347 
recordings, 338n, 339 


Music and musical instruments—Cont. 
Ghana, 345, 643 
Mauritania, 1017 
Northern Rhodesia, 1648 
South Africa, 1852, 1859 
Uganda, 1391, 1404 
Musiker, Reuben, 1762n 
Musson, A. L., 1447n 
Mustafa, Sophia, 1360 

N 

NAD A (Salisbury, Southern Rhodesia) 
1680 

Nadel, Siegfried F., 271, 781-2 
Nama (tribe, South West Africa) 1755 
Nandi (tribe, Kenya) 1324-5 
el-Nasri, Abdel Rahman, 1451 
Natal Regional Survey, 1829 
National Academy of Sciences, 465 
National Conference on UNESCO, 165 
National Geographic Magazine, special 
issue, 41 n 

National parks, 450 
See also Wild Life 

Nationalism, 89, 113, 115, 117-8, 123—5, 
136, 142, 145, 179 
Angola, 2074-83 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1899, 1901, 
1918-22 

French-speaking Africa, 871, 895 

Ghana, 581, 594-8 

Kenya, 1328, 1336, 1339 

Liberia, 653 

Madagascar, 1236-7 

Nigeria, 716, 722 

Northern Rhodesia, 1631, 1634 

Nyasaland, 1666 

Tanganyika, 1361 

Uganda, 1372 

Zanzibar, 1411 

See also country breakdown under 
Politics, Race relations 
Nationalist revolt, Angola, 2074-83 
Nations nouvelles (Cotonou) 869 
Native administration, 81, 85, 87, 96, 
99 

High Commission Territories, 1711 
Nigeria, 731, 779 
Tanganyika, 1272, 1341 
Uganda, 1393 

The Native Tribes of South West Africa, 
1755 

Ndebele (tribe, Southern Rhodesia) 
1701-2 

Ndembu (tribe, Northern Rhodesia) 
1653 

N’Diaye, Jean-Pierre, 894 
N’Diaye, S., ed., 1012 
Neame, Alan, ed., 74 


Nederlands Adviesbureau voor In- 
genieurswerken in het Buitenland, 
743-4 

Negritude, 6, 349, 351, 356, 362, 871 
Neres, Philip, 920 
Neuberger, Maurine B., 172n 
Neumark, S. Daniel, 157 
Neutralism, 150-1, 206 

See also Foreign relations 
Nevinson, Henry W., 2114n 
New Nations, see National nouvelles 
New York. Museum of Primitive Art, 
325 

Newbold, Sir Douglas, 1476 
Newbury, Colin W., 503 
Newlyn, Walter T., 221 
Ngbaka (tribe, Congo) 1955 
Ngbandi (tribe, Congo) 1955 
Ngombe (tribe, Congo) 1955, 1972 
Ngonde (tribe, Nyasaland-Tanganyika) 
1675,1366-7 

Ngoni (tribe, Northern Rhodesia) 1580, 
1635 

(Nyasaland) 1668-9 
Nguni (people, South Africa) 1837 
Ngwato (tribe, Bechuanaland) 271 
Nhaneca-Humbe (group, Angola) 2088 
Niane, Djibril Tamsir, 950, 954 
Nicaise, Joseph, 241 
Nicolas, Jean Paul, 1061 
NIGER, 1020-4 

NIGERIA, 121, 126, 573, 576, 684-808 
bibliography, 684-8 
Nigeria. Cocoa Marketing Board, 746 
Commission on Post-School Certificate 
and Higher Education, 802 
Federal Ministry of Commerce and In¬ 
dustries, 747 

Federal Government Development 
Programme, 745 
Laws, Statutes, etc., 727 
National Economic Council, 748 
Nigerianisation Office, 728 
Nigeria Handbook, 695 
Nigeria in Costume, 696 
Nigeria Magazine (Lagos) 697n 
Nigeria 1960, 697 
Nigeria Yearbook, 698 
Nigerian Economic Society, 749 
Nigerian Institute of Social and Eco¬ 
nomic Research, 736, 739, 751, 
758-9, 775, 1119, 1151 
Nigerian Journal of Economic and So¬ 
cial Studies, 749 
Nigerian Publications, 686 
Nikiprowetzky, Tolia, 1017 
Nile river 

Blue Nile, 1509, 1528 
Drainage, 1487 

Nile waters questions, 1479, 1482, 
1486 


344 


Nilo-Hamitic peoples (East Africa and 
Sudan) 1301n, 1499 
Nilotic peoples (Sudan and Uganda) 
1301n,1499 
Niven, Cecil R., 713 
N’Jie, Pierre, about, 563 
Njoya, Sultan of the Bamun, 1144 
Nketia, J. H. Kwabena, 345, 643 
Nkrumah, Kwame, 594-6 
about, 598 

Nomadism, 1041, 1439 
Noon, John A., 253 
Nord, Pierre, 885n 
Northcott, William C., 1690 
Northern Nigeria, 712, 715n, 77In, 776- 
80 

NORTHERN RHODESIA, 1621-55 
Northwestern University Interdisciplin¬ 
ary Committee on African Studies, 
166 

Norton de Matos, Jose M. R., 2037n 
Nossi Be (island, Madagascar) 1213n 
Nosti, Jaime, 2158 
Not Just Peanuts, 1369n 
Notes et etudes documentaires, see 
France. Direction de la Documen¬ 
tation 

Ntara, Samuel, 1662n 
Nuba (tribe, Southern Sudan) 782n 
Nuer (tribe, Southern Sudan) 271, 1493, 
1495-7 

language, 1493n 

Nupe (tribe, Nigeria) 771n, 781-2 
Nuyens, J., 193n, 226n 
Nyakyusa (tribe, Nyasaland-Tanganyika 
border) 1356,1365-7, 1580 
Nyanza (region, Kenya) 1317 
NYASALAND, 1656-75 
Nyasaland. Committee of Inquiry into 
African Education, 1667 
Nyasaland. Delegation of Chiefs and 
Citizens, 161 In 
Nyembezi, C. L., 1854 
Nyerere, Julius, 3 
about, 598n 

Nykia (tribe, East Africa) 1301n 
Nyoro (tribe, East Africa) 1301n 
Nzekwu, Onuora, 803 
ed., 697n 

o 

OAMCE, see Organisation Africaine et 
Malgache de Cooperation Econo- 
mique 

ORSTOM, see France. Office de la Re¬ 
cherche Scientifique et Technique 
Outre-Mer 
Oakes, John B., 150 
Oberg, K., 271 

Oberjohann, Heinrich, 1103n 
O’Brien, Conor Cruise, 1995 
O’Connel, James, 733 


Odu (Ibadan) 796n 
Office du Niger, 996, 998, 1030 
Official Publications of French West 
Africa, 897 

Official Publications of British East Af¬ 
rica, 1268 

Ogrizek, Dore, ed., 46n 
O’Hara, Barratt, 172n 
Ojike, Mbonu, 242 
Okigbo, Pius Nwabafo, 750 
Okovango (river. South West Africa) 
1753 

Okuma, Thomas Masaji, 2080 
Okyeame (Accra) 796n 
Oil palms, 517, 518, 930n, 933, 969, 
1157 

Olbrechts, Frans M., 1982 
Ol’derogge, D. A., ed., 4, 315n, 1526n 
Oldham, Joseph H., 408, 1602n 
Olesa Munido, Francisco F., 2163n 
Oliveira, Antonio de, 2054 
Oliveira, Jorge E. de Costa, 2046 
Oliveira Boleo, Jose de, 2133 
Oliveira Santos, F. M., 2114n 
Oliver, Roland A., 56n, 69, 80, 409 
ed., 64, 1276n 

Oliver, Samuel Pasfield, 1240n 
Ollennu, N. A., 644 
Olubummo, Adegoke, 804 
Olugboji, Dayo, 729 
Ommanney, Francis D., 1419, 1576 
Omotayo, Adu, 799 
One-party governments, 106 
Onkole (tribe, Uganda) 271 
Oppenheimer series, 1693 
Orchard, Ronald K., ed., 391n 
Orde-Brown, G. St., J., 254, 378, 1296, 
1335 

Orewa, G. O., 751 

Organisation Africaine et Malgache de 
Cooperation Economique, 888 
Organisation Commune des Regions 
Sahariennes, 1030, 1032, 1034-5, 
1043-4 

Organization for European Economic 
Cooperation, 542 

Organization of African Unity, see In¬ 
troduction, p. IV. 

Orizu, Akweke A. Nwafor, 730 
Orlova, Antonina Semenovna, 4n, 9 
Ottenberg, Phoebe, ed., 165n, 280 
Ottenberg, Simon, ed., 165n, 280 
Ounianga (region, Chad) 1166 
Ousmane, Diallo, 950 
Ovambo (people, South West Africa) 
1755 

(Angola) 2088 

Oversea Quarterly (London) 381n 
Overseas Food Corporation, 1369n 
Ovimbundu (tribe, Angola) 2085-6, 
2090-1 


Oxford Library of African Literature 
[Series] 357 

P 

Padelford, Norman J., ed., 146 
Padirac, Raoul, 857 
Padmore, George, 123, 597, 669 
Pahouin (group, Cameroun-Gabon) 
914n 

Pales, Leon, 919 
Palmer, Mabel, 1829n 
Pamue (people, Spanish Guinea) 2146n 
Pan-African Congress on Prehistory, 70 
Pan-Africanism, 6, 120, 123-4, 149, 596, 
729, 855 

Panetta, Ester, 1963 
Panikkar, K. Madhava, 124n 
Panikkar, K. Madhu, 124, 2081 
Panis, J. C., 1042 

Pankhurst, Estelle Sylvia, 1441, 1529, 
1537-8 
ed., 1512 

Pankhurst, Richard K. P., 1538-9 
ed., 1512 

Panofsky, Hans E., comp., 247 
Panorama (Washington) 390n 
Panyella, Augusto, 2159 
Papy, Louis, 1063 
Paques, Viviana, 914n, 95In 
Paraf, Pierre, 849 
Park, Mungo, about, 499 
Parker, C. J. L., 1717n 
Parker, Franklin, 1681 
Parrinder, Edward Geoffrey, 289, 525-6, 
783 

Parties, political, 116, 127 
French-speaking Africa, 856 
Senegal, 1065 
Uganda, 1393 
Zanzibar, 1411 

Partition of Africa, 75-6, 78, 80, 83, 86, 
1271 

Paton, Alan, 1855 
Pattee, Richard, 2030 
Patterson, John H., 1293n 
Patterson, Sheila, 1830 
Paul, Andrew, 1477 

Paulme, Denise, 316, 326-7, 955, 974n, 
ed., 243 

Paulus, Jean P., 185, 1923 
Pauvert, J. C., 1099n, 1186 
Pauwels, M., 2013 
Paver, B. G., 1691 
Payne, W. J. A., 444n 
Payne, William A., 1757n 
Peace Corps, 161 
Peake, Cyrus H., 86 
Peanuts, 517, 542, 549, 1063, 1369 
Pearce, F. B., 1416n 
Pearcy, George E., 47 
Peasant agriculture, 441, 933, 984, 1935, 
1937 


345 


Pechoux, Laurent, 1078 
Pedi (tribe, South Africa), 1837 
Pedler, F. J., 514 

Pedrals, Denis-Pierre de, 53n, 281, 850 
Pedraza, Howard J., 714 
Peiser, G., 866 
Pelissier, Paul, 1063 
Pelissier, Rene, 2151 
Pellegrin, Fr., 1203n 
Pemba, see Zanzibar 
language & verse, 1422 
Perham, Margery F., 81, 101, 731, 
1326n, 1540 

ed., 82, 600, 752, 1278, 1710n 
Perier, G. D., 1979n 
Perin, Frangois, 1924 
Perin-Hockers, Maryse, 1949 
Periodicals, special issues, note, p. 9 
politico-economic, note, p. 22-3 
Perrott, Daisy V., 1299n 
Perry, Ruth, 687 

Perspectives d’outre-mer (Monaco) 
special issues, 978, 1062, 1111, 1258 
Petch, G. A., 515 
Petillon, Leon, 1925 
Petroleum 
Gabon, 1197 
Sahara, 1030, 1032 

Peul (tribe, Mali) 989, 1000 (Senegal) 
1063 

See also Fulani 

Le Peuple malgache; monographies 
ethnologiques, 1233 
Pevee, Albert, 1983 
Pfeffer, Karl H., 615, 832 
Phelps-Stokes Commission on African 
Education, 367-8, 412 
Philip (George) and Son Ltd., 48 
Phillips, Arthur, 185, 244 
Phillips, C. E. Lucas, 1617n 
Phillips, John F. V., 440, 598 
Phillips, P., 1482n 
Phillips, Ralph W., 438 
Phillips, Ray E., 1831 
Phillips Report, Southern Rhodesia, 
1683 

Physical anthropology, 268, 273, 283 
Cape Verde Islands, 2108 
Liberia, 659, 662 
Mozambique, 2137 
Nigeria, 790 

Portuguese territories, 2051, 2056 
Spanish Guinea, 2149 
Pick, Hella, 667 
Picture albums, 33, 40, 696 
Pidoux, Edmond, 1234 
Pienaar, S., 1818 
Pierson-Mathy, Mme. P., 870 
Pietermaritzburg. University of Natal. 

Dept, of Economics, 1829n 
Pifer, Alan J., 379 
Pike, K. L., 307n 


Pirn, Sir Alan W., 441, 752n, 1414, 
1630n, 1716, 1726, 1741 
Pinder, Frank E., 678n 
Pinxten, Karel, 1937 
Pippet, Gabriel, 534n 
Pirates, Madagascar, 1216 
Mauritius, 1560 
Pitcher, G. M., 564n 
Pitt, T. S. L., 1612 
Pius XII, Pope, 397 
Place, James, ed., 1284 
A Plan for the Mechanized Production 
of Groundnuts in East and Central 
Africa, 1369n 
Playne, Beatrice, 152In 
Plewman Commission, Southern Rho¬ 
desia, 1685 

Plimpton, Ruth T., 167 
Plisnier-Ladame, F., 226n 
Poetry, African, 350-1, 362, 531, 798, 
1304, 1422, 1437, 1502 
Poirier, Jean, 185, 893 
Pokomo (tribe, East Africa), 130In 
Poleman, Thomas T., 616 
Political and Economic Planning, Lon¬ 
don, 380 

Political systems, indigenous, 100, 271, 
278, 1842 
Dahomey, 936 
East Africa, 1305 
Ghana, 591, 628, 639 
Northern Rhodesia, 1635, 1643, 1655 
Nyasaland, 1675 
Tanganyika, 1368 
Uganda, 1379 

Politics, 8,15, 21-2, 35, 37,47,105-31 
Angola, 2065, 2071, 2074-83 
Basutoland, 1718 
Bechuanaland, 1710n 
Cameroon, 1130, 1132-3, 1148 
Congo (Brazzaville) 1183 
Congo (Leopoldville) 1874, 1899-927 
Dahomey, 937, 970 
Ethiopia, 1534, 1540 
French Equatorial Africa, 1115 
French-speaking Africa 844, 847-9, 
853-72 

French West Africa, 908, 918, 920, 
925,929 
Gabon, 1191 
Gambia, 547, 553, 563 
Ghana, 588, 590-1, 593-8 
Guinea, 106, 124, 948-50, 959-60 
High Commission Territories, 1705, 
1710 

Ivory Coast, 106, 971-2, 981 
Katanga, 1986, 1988, 1990-3, 1995 
Liberia, 106, 653, 663, 674, 677, 682 
Madagascar, 1211, 1221, 1227, 1229, 
1232,1236-7 
Mali, 990 

Mauritania, 1007-9, 1011, 1015, 1018 


Politics—Continued 
Niger, 970, 1020-1 
Nigeria, 715-20, 722 
Northern Rhodesia, 1631-2, 1634 
Nyasaland, 1657, 1664, 1666, 1670, 
1672 

Portuguese territories, 2026, 2030-1, 
2034, 2041-2, 2044-5, 2048 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland (Federa¬ 
tion) 1602-4, 1606-9, 1611-4, 
1617 

Rwanda, 2005, 2010-2 
Senegal, 106, 121, 1046, 1049, 1055, 
1060, 1064-5 
Sierra Leone, 121, 820 
Somalia, 1424-5, 1427, 1442 
South Africa, see Race relations 
South West Africa, 1748-50 
Spanish Guinea, 2147-8 
Sudan,1461, 1468-9 
Swaziland, 1740 
Tanganyika, 106 

Togo, 1070-3, 1075-6, 1078, 1082-5, 
1134 

Uganda, 1372, 1381, 1386, 1393, 1405 
Upper Volta, 970, 1089 
Zanzibar, 1411 

Pondo (tribe, South Africa) 1837, 1848 
Pons, V. G., 235 
Poor whites, South Africa, 1823 
Population, 28n, 258-61 
bibliography, 260 
Cameroon, 1125-6, 1139, 1165 
Central African Republic, 1159-60 
Chad, 1165, 1174n 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1932, 1934, 
1939 

French Equatorial Africa, 1114 
French West Africa, 927 
Gabon, 1186 
Ghana, 145, 603,612 
Guinea, 545 

Madagascar, 1216n, 1245 
Mauritius, 1571, 1574 
Rwanda, 2016 
Spanish Guinea, 2145, 2153 
Togo, 1081, 1139 
See also Urbanization 
Poquin, Jean J., 889 
Porter, Dorothy B., 2, 314 
Porter, Horace G., 445n 
Porto-Novo, 930, 944 
Portugal. Agenda General do Ultra¬ 
mar, 2031,211 In 

Centro do Documentagao Cientifica 
Ultramarina, 2020-1 
Commissao para o Estudo da Produ- 
tividade em Africa, 2047 
Instituto Nacional de Estatistica, 2035 
Junta das Missoes Geograficas e de 
Investigates do Ultramar, 2022, 
2028, 2032, 2055-6 
Laws, Statutes, etc., 2134 


346 





Portugal, relations with United Nations, 
2041,2048 

Portuguese administration in Africa, 
2025-7, 2030-1, 2037, 2042, 2045, 
2048 

PORTUGUESE GUINEA, 2029, 2096, 
2105,2107,2110-2 

bibliography, 2111 

Portuguese in Africa, history, 494, 2118- 

20 

PORTUGUESE TERRITORIES, 
2019-57 

bibliography, 2018-22, 2043n 
Postel, Albert Williams, 460 
Potekhin, Ivan I., 4n, 9, 574 
ed., 4. 176 

Potous, Paul L., 455n 
Pott, Douglas, 1746 
Poupart, Robert, 1950 
Powdermaker, Hortense, 1649 
Powesland, Philip G., 1378n, 1398 
Prasad, Bisheshwar, ed., 24 
Pratt, R. Cranford, 1393 
ed., 1612 
Pre, Roland, 956 

Pre-colonial history, 54, 56, 58-9, 61-2, 
72,281,852 
Cameroun, 1144 
Central African Republic, 1158 
Chad, 1170, 1174, 1178 
Dahomey, 930, 932, 936 
East Africa, 1270 
Gabon, 1190, 1202 
Guinea, 954 
Ivory Coast, 977, 980 
Madagascar, 1216 
Mali, 982, 989, 992, 1000 
Mauritania, 1019 
Niger, 1024 

Sudan, 1465, 1467, 1475 
Tanganyika, 1349-50 
West Africa, 495-6, 502, 917 
Zanzibar, 1412 
Pre-history, see Archaeology 
Presence Africaine, 895, 950 

Collection Presence africaine, 59, 291, 
1208 

Enquetes et etudes [series] 363, 859, 
878, 1056-7, 1204 

Presence africaine [period.] 206, 316, 
348-9, 950 

publications, 9, 267, 858, 871-2, 878n, 
922, 949-50, 954, 959-60, 1055, 
1058, 1065, 1140, 1208, 1236, 1238 
Press, 352, 354, 358-9, 535, 1866, 1875 
“La Presse en Afrique au sud du 
Sahara,” 358 
Prest, Alan R., 753 
Price, Frederick A., 670 
Price, J. H., 121 
Price, Roger, about, 1736 


Price, Thomas, 244n, 1672 
Priest, Jane H., 1952 
Priestly, Herbert I., 851 
*Prins, A. H. J., 130In, 1420 
Problemes agricoles au Senegal, 1063 
“The Proposed African Development 
Bank”, 222 

Prosperi, Franco, 1235 
Prost, Andre, 1094 
Prothero, R. M., 257 
Provaznik, Dusan, 15 
Proverbs, 355 

See also Folklore 
Psychoanalysis, 474 

Public Affairs Information Service Bul¬ 
letin, 4 In 

Pugh, John C., 689 
Puig, Francois, 1079 
Putnam, Anne E., 1968n 
Pygmies, 1180, 1201, 1963-6, 1968 

Q 

Quaranta di San Severino, Ferdinando, 
barone, 1541 

Queen’s Quarterly, special issue, 41n 
Quioca [or Quicos] (tribe, Angola) 
2055, 2093-4 

R 

Rabearivelo, Jean J., about, 1211 
Rabemananjara, Jacques, 950, 1236 
Rabemananjara, Raymond W., 1237 
Race relations, 31, 132-45, 292n 
bibliography, 140 
Kenya, 1319, 1326, 1328, 1333 
See also Mau Mau 
Northern Rhodesia, 1632, 1634 
Nyasaland, 1657, 1660, 1666 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1602-3, 
1607, 1613—4, 1617 
South Africa, 133, 140—1, 1804-8, 
1811-22 

South West Africa, 1754, 1756-7 
Southern Rhodesia, 1677, 1679, 

1686-7, 1690n 
Swaziland, 1746 
Race Relations Journal, 1822n 
Race Relations News, 1822n 
Rachewiltz, Boris de, 320n 
Radcliffe-Brown, Alfred R., ed., 282 
Radin, Paul, ed., 315 
Radio broadcasting, Central Africa, 
1583 
Railroads 
Angola, 2064 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1887 
Djibouti-Addis Ababa, 1261, 1530 
Kenya and Uganda, 1292 
Tanganyika, 1293 
Trans-Saharan, 1042 


Raisman Report, 1291 
Rait, Maria, 9 
Rake, Alan, 1336 
Ramon Alvarez, Heriberto, 2163n 
Randall, R. J., 1671 
Ranger, Terence, 1679n 
Rassegna distudi etiopici, 1512n 
Rattray, J. M., 428 
Rattray, Robert S., 645-8 
Raum, Otto F., 1347n 
Rawcliffe, Donovan H., 1332n 
Rayautra, Mamadou Traore, 957 
Rayner, William, 1682 
Read, Margaret, 381, 1668-9 
Reade, Winwood, 490 
Reader, D. H., 1829n 
Readers’ Guide to Periodical Literature, 
41n 

Realites (New York) 41n 

Realites africaines, 1112 

Rebelo, Horacio de Sa Viana, 2071 

Recherches africaines, 958 

Redfem, John, 1722n 

Redinha, Jose, 2093 

Reeve, Henry Fenwick, 558, 664n 

Reeves, Richard Ambrose, Bp., 1819 

Region Ecuatorial, see Spanish Guinea 

Rego, Antonio da Silva, 2033, 2057 

Reindorf, Carl C., 583 

Reinicke, Frederick G., 1447n 

Reitz, Deneys, 1794 

Religion, traditional, 287, 289, 290-2, 
405,1188n 

Congo (Leopoldville) 1956-7, 1971 
Dahomey, 942 

French-speaking Africa, 848, 891 
Gabon, 1190, 1204 
Ghana, 626, 629, 632, 641, 646 
Guinea, 951 
Kenya, 1310 
Mali, 982n, 985, 1001 
Madagascar, 1239 
Nigeria, 767, 770, 782-3, 786, 789 
Northern Rhodesia, 1641 
Rwanda, 2007n, 2013 
Southern Rhodesia, 1698-9 
Sudan, 1493, 1497, 1500 
Uganda, 1395 
West Africa, 525-6, 529-30 
Reste, Joseph F., 1113 
REUNION, 1226n, 1238, 1250-8, 1262 
Revue encyclopedique de I’Afrique, 
845n, 943, 970n, 1022 
Revue de Madagascar, 1231n 
Rey, Charles F., 1516 
Rey Stolle, Alejandro, 2160 
Reyner, A. S., 1425n 
Rhodes, Cecil, about, 1485, 1596 

See also Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 
history 


347 


Rhodes-Livingstone Institute, 102, 1597— 
8, 1640-3 

Communications, 1582, 1597, 1621 
publications, 1580, 1623, 1635, 1640- 
3,1645-6,1653-4 

Rhodes-Livingstone Papers, 1598, 
1635n, 1636, 1639, 1653n, 1655, 
1665, 1675, 1699, 1701 
Rhodes University, Grahamstown. In¬ 
stitute of Social and Economic Re¬ 
search, 1825,1832 

Rhodesia, Northern. Dept, of Agricul¬ 
ture, 1633 

Rhodesia, Southern. Advisory Com¬ 
mittee on the Development of 
Economic Resources, 1683 
Select Committee on the Resettlement 
of Natives, 1684 

Urban African Affairs Commission, 
1685 

RHODESIA AND NYASALAND (Fed¬ 
eration) 1577-625, 1670 
bibliography, 1577, 1615 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland. Central Af¬ 
rican Archives, 1577, 1692-3 
Federal Information Dept., 1615 
Ministry of Economic Affairs, 1671 
Office for Rhodesia and Nyasaland 
Affairs, 1616 

Rice, 444n, 562, 955, 1063 
Richard-Molard, Jacques, 921-2 
Richard-Toll (region, Senegal) 1063 
Richards, Audrey I., 271, 1398, 1580, 
1650-1 

ed., 1305, 1398 

Richards, Charles G., ed., 1284 
Richardson, E. M., 833 
Richardson, Irvine, 30In 
Richardson, Nathaniel R., 671 
Richmond, Anthony H., 141 
Richmond, Thomas R., 445n 
Riebeeck, Jan van, 1795 
Rigby, Christopher P., 1417n 
Rio Muni, see Spanish Guinea 
Rios, Mateo, 2161 
Rita-Ferreira, Antonio, 2135 
Ritner, Peter, 168 
Rivkin, Arnold, 151 
Road guides, 43 
Roads 

bibliography, 183n, 226n 
Somalia, 1447n 
Uganda, 1383 
West Africa, 519 

Roan Antelope Copper Mines, 1620, 
1649 

Robequain, Charles, 890, 1238 
Robert, Andre P., 185, 923 
Robert, Maurice, 1881, 1996 
Roberts, E. S., comp., 1762n 
Roberts, Stephen H., 85In 


Robins, Eric, 1579n 
Robinson, James H., 394n 
Robinson, Keith, 1694 
Robinson, Kenneth E., 838 
ed., 121 

Robinson, Ronald, 83 
Roche, Jean de la, 1104n 
Rock paintings, 67 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1587 
Sahara, 1038 
Southern Africa, 1783 
West Africa, 502 
See also Archaeology 
Rodger, Frederick C., 473 
Rodrigues, Junior, 2136 
Rodrigues dos Santos, Joaquim, 2137 
Roelandts, C. M., 739 
Roeykens, A., 1895 
Rogaly, Joe, 1686 
Rogers, Cyril A., 1687 
“Role of the Military in Sub-Saharan 
Africa”, 1295n 
Romulo, Carlos P., 147n 
Roper, Joseph I., 516 
Rosberg, Carl G., 125, 159, 1309 
Rosenstein-Rodan, P. N., 163n 
Rosenthal, Eric, 1718n 
comp., 1773 

Ross, Edward Alsworth, 2114n 
Ross, Emory, 410 
Ross, Myrta, 410 
Ross, William MacGregor, 1337 
Rothchild, Donald S., 126 
Rothmann, M. E., 1823n 
Rouch, Jane, 192In 
Rouch, Jean, 274, 914n, 951n, 982, 
1921n 

Rouck, Rene de, 1882 
Rougerie, Gabriel, 979 
Roukens de Lange, E. J., comp., 1747 
Roussier, Paul, ed., 980 
Roux, Edward, 1820 
Rowan, D. C., 221 
Rowlands, Evan C., 559 
Royal Chronicle of Abyssinia, 1523n 
Royal Institute of International Affairs, 
89n,732, 1710n 

Royal Niger Company, 710, 714 
Rozin, M. S., 461 

Ruanda-Urundi, trust territory, 2000, 
2002,2006, 2014-5 
Rubin, Leslie, 599 
Rudd, Charles Dunnell, 1693n 
Rudin, Harry R., 1145 
Ruel, M. J., 1119 
Ruffle, Jacques, 2108 
Rumeau, A., 51 

Russell, Mrs. Charles E. B., 1417n 
Russians in Africa, 9 
in Ethiopia, 1526 
Ruth Sloan Associates, 359, 382-3 


Rutherfoord, Peggy, ed., 360 
Ruud, Jorgen, 1239 
RWANDA, 2000-17 
Ryan, Isobel, 575, 699 
Ryckmans, Pierre, 1926 
Rydings, H. A., 480 

s 

SANB [South African National Bibliog¬ 
raphy] 176 In 
Sachs, Wulf, 474 

Sadler, Sir Michael Ernest, ed., 534 
Sady, Emil J., 153 
SAHARA, 1025-44 
bibliography, 1025, 1029 
Sahara, Western, see Mali, Mauritania 
Saho (tribe, Somalia, etc.), 1440 
Sailing directions, 52 
Saint Faith’s Farm, Southern Rhodesia, 
1677 

Saintoyant, Jules F., 1184 
Salvador de Sa, about, 2063 
Salvemini, Gaetano, 1542n 
Samory, about, 994 
Sampson, Anthony, 25, 1818, 1856 
Sanger, Clyde, 1617 
Santos, Almeida, 2077n 
Santos, Augusto L. Ferreira do, 2072 
Santos, Eduardo dos, 2094 
Santos, Manuel Pimentel Pereira dos, 
2138 

Santos, Rui Martins dos, 2139 
Sao (pre-Islamic civilization), 1170, 
1174 

SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE, 2029, 
2062n, 2111,2114-6 
bibliography, 2116 
Sarakole (tribe, Senegal), 1063 
Sarrault, Albert, 843n 
Sartre, Jean-Paul, 316, 362 
Saul, C.D., 1762n, 1767n 
Saunders, John T., 805 
Savonnet, G., 1053n 

Schachter, Ruth, see Morgenthau, Ruth 
S. 

Schaefer, Ludwig F., 1542 
Schapera, Isaac, 185, 271, 1728-33, 
1842-4 

ed., 404, 1693n, 1766, 1844 
Schebesta, Paul, 1964-6 
Schiffers, Heinrich, 84 
Schlippe, Pierre de, 1485 
Schlosser, Katesa, 411 
Schmalenbach, Werner, 328 
Schone Schriften aus Afrika, 361 
Schramm, Josef, 1080 
Schreiner, Olive, 131 In, 1857 
Schuller, Mary Craig, ed., 228 
Schulthess, Emil, 40 
Schwab, George, 672 


348 


Schwarz, E. H. L., 1727n 
Schweitzer, Albert, 1198-200 
Science-Afrique, 463n 
Scientific Council for Africa [CSA], 49, 
193, 258, 384, 439, 463, 466-7 
See also Commission for Technical 
Cooperation in Africa 
Scientific research, 463-7, 909-13, 

1877 

bibliography, 226n 
Scott, D. J. R., 121 
Scott, Michael, 1756-7 
Scott, Richenda, 752n 
Scott, Sir Robert, 1402, 1572 
Scudder, Thayer, 1642n 
Sculpture, 315, 317, 320, 325-6, 328, 
330, 333, 335 
Chad, 1174 

Congo (Leopoldville), 1982 
Mali, 991 
Nigeria, 794, 806 
West Africa, 536—8 

See also Arts, by country 
Seaver, George, 404n 
Sechele, about, 1735 
Secret societies, 288 
Liberia, 658n, 680 
Mali, 1002 
Sierre Leone, 829 
Tanganyika, 1344n 
Segal, Ronald, 127 
ed., 1769 

Segy, Ladislas, 329 

Select Bibliography: Asia, Africa . . . 

Note on Bibliography p. 1 
Self-government, 79, 89, 97-8, lOOn, 
102 

See also Nationalism 
Seligman, Brenda Z., 1501 
Seligman, Charles G., 283, 1501 
Sellen, Thorsten, ed., 5n 
Selous, Frederick Courtney, 1595n 
Seminar on Population Problems, Cairo, 
1962, 261 

SENEGAL, 1045-68 
Le Senegal en marche, 1064 
“The Senegambian Idea”, 547n 
Senghor, Leopold Sedar, 3, 351, 871, 
1065 
ed., 362 

Senoulo (tribe, Ivory Coast, etc.) 914n 
Separatist churches, 392, 411, 413, 421 
Congo, 1973 
East Africa, 1307 
Nyasaland, 1672 
South Africa, 1847 
Spanish Guinea, 2171 
Sere de Rivieres, Edmond, 1023, 1066 
Serer (tribe, Gambia) 550 
Serials for African Studies, 359n 
Serna Burgaleto, Jesus de la, 2163n 


Settlement and settlers, European, 75, 
78, 136 
Angola, 2158 
British West Africa, 501 
Kenya, 1326, 1332n, 1333, 1337 
Reunion, 1251 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 136 
Senegal, 1047 
South Africa, see History 
Southern Rhodesia, 1682, 1690, 1693 
Shambala (tribe, Tanganyika) 1368 
Shangaan (people, South Africa) 1837 
Shantz, Homer L., 442-3 
Sheddick, Vernon G. J., 1719-20 
Shelswell-White, Geoffrey H., 1421 
Shepherd, George W., 128 
Sheppard, Vivian L. O., 90 
Shepperson, George, 1672 
Shibeika, Mekki, 1478 
Shilluk language (Southern Sudan) 
1503 

al-Shinqltl, Ahmad ibn al-Amin, 1019 
Shirazi (people, Zanzibar) 1420 
Shona (group, Southern Rhodesia) 
1580, 1697-700, 1702 
Shore, Herbert L., 314 
Shrubsall, F., 1389n 
Sibley, James L., 673 
Sibree, James, 1240 
Sieber, Roy, 314, 806 
SIERRA LEONE, 121, 809-37 
bibliography, 809-10 
Sierra Leone. Commission of Inquiry 
into the Issue of Alluvial Diamond 
Mining Licenses, 835 
Sierra Leone. Produce Marketing 
Board, 836 

Sierra Leone Year Book, 837 

Sik, Endre, 83n 

Sillans, Roger, 1203—4 

Sillery, Anthony, 26, 1734-5 

Silva, Carlos A. Vieira da, ed., 2140 

Silva, Helder Lains e, 2115 

Silveira, Luis, 2162 

Simmonds, N. W., 444n 

Simmons, D., 764 

Simmons, J., ed., 82 

Simoons, Frederick J., 1553 

Simpson, C. L., 674 

Sithole, Ndabaningi, 142 

Skaife, Sydney H., 456 

Skinner, Snider W., 617, 1938 

Sklar, Richard L., 737n 

Slade, Ruth M., 1896-7, 1927 

Slaski, J., 1647 

Slater, Montagu, 1314n 

Slave trade and slavery, 57 

Central African Republic, 1160 
Congo, 1885 

East Africa, 1271, 1278, 1417 
Ethiopia, 1516 
Mali, 992 


Slave trade and slavery—Continued 
Nigeria, 764 
Sudan, 1484 
West Africa, 503 
See also Contract labor 
Slawecki, Leon M. S., 181 
Sleeping sickness, 2114n 
Sloan, Ruth, 307 

See also Ruth Sloan Associates 
Smet, Guy, 193n, 226n 
Smith, Anna H., ed., Note, p. 58 
Smith, Anthony, 535 
Smith, Edwin W., 160, 284, 412, 1599, 
1652,1736 
ed., 290 

Smith, F. G., 444n 
Smith, M. F., 761 
Smith, Marian W., ed., 331 
Smith, Michael G., 754, 784 
Smith, T. E., 121n 
Smuts, Jan Christiaan, 1821 
about, 7187, 1793 
Smythe, Hugh H., 2, 3, 19, 755 
Smythe, Mabel M., 3, 19, 755 
Sneguireff, I. H., ed., 294 
Snell, Geoffrey S., 1325n 
Sobo (tribe, Nigeria), 769 
Social sciences, research, 27 
bibliography, 226n 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1877,2009 
East Africa, 1300 
Gambia, 555 
Ruanda-Urundi, 2009 
Spanish Guinea, 2163 
Social studies, applied, 226-46 
bibliography, 226-7 
research, 27, 241, 1597-8 
Burundi, 1999 

Cameroon, 1119-20, 1125, 1138, 1151 
Central African Republic, 1159-61 
Chad, 1165 

Congo (Brazzaville), 1179, 1182 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1935, 1941-52 
Dahomey, 933, 944 
Ethiopia, 1553 

French Equatorial Africa, 1102 
French-speaking Africa, 840, 846 
French West Africa, 919 
Gabon, 1186, 1196 
Ghana, 591, 621, 625, 633-5 
Guinea, 953 

Ivory Coast, 964, 968-9, 973-4 
Katanga, 1994 
Kenya, 1318 

Madagascar, 1212, 1217, 1222 
Mali, 984, 995-6 
Nigeria, 699, 736, 741-2, 754-5 
Northern Rhodesia, 1621, 1639-42, 
1649,1651,1653-5 
Nyasaland, 1665, 1668-9 
Portuguese territories, 2057 


349 


Social studies—Continued 

Rhodesia and Nyasaland (Fed.), 
1598n,1600 
Rwanda, 2008, 2010 
Senegal, 1053 

Sierra Leone, 811, 813, 829, 833 
Somaliland, French, 1265 
South Africa, 1822n, 1823, 1825-34 
Southern Rhodesia, 1703 
Swaziland, 1742-3 
Tanganyika, 1355-6 
Togo, 1139 
Uganda, 1399 

West Africa, 481, 520, 522, 527 
See also Anthropology 
Socialism, African, 206, 871, 1064 
Societe Africaine de Culture, 289n 
Societe des Africanistes, Journal, see 
Note, p. 1 

Sociological Review , special issue, 527 
Sociology, see Anthropology; Social Sci¬ 
ences; Social Studies 
Sofer, Cyril, 1399 
Sofer, Rhona, 1399 
Soga, John Henderson, 1845-6 
Soga (tribe, Uganda) 1301n, 1379 
Sohier, Antoine, 185, 1967 
Sohier, Jean, 1967n 
Soil erosion, 434, 1633 

See also Desertification 
Soiuz Zhurnalistov SSSR, 192In 
Solomon, Marvin D., comp., 651 
Somali (people, Northeast Africa) 1428, 
1439-40 

language, 1426, 1428 
See also Somalia 
SOMALIA, 1423-49 
bibliography, 1423, 1439-40 
Somalia. Information Services, 1442 
“Somalia: The Problems of Underdevel¬ 
opment,” 1425n 

Somaliland, British, 1430-1, 1433, 1439 
bibliography, 1433 

SOMALILAND, FRENCH, 1238, 1253, 
1258-66 

Songhai (tribe, Mali) 891, 951, 982 
Sonjo (tribe, Tanganyika) 1353 
Soret, Marcel, 914n, 1114, 1185, 1202 
Sornay, Pierre de, 1573 
Sotho (group, Basutoland and South 
Africa) 1715, 1720,1837, 1849 
Sousa Dias, Gastao, 2073 
SOUTH AFRICA, REPUBLIC OF, 
1761-859 

bibliography, 1761-8, 1770, 1803, 
1806 

South Africa. Bureau of Census and 
Statistics, 1774 

Commission for the Socio-Economic 
Development of the Bantu Areas, 
1832 

Geological Survey, 1833 


South African Catalogue of Books, 1768 
South African Institute of Race rela¬ 
tions, 1746, 1748, 1811, 1822, 1851 
South African Police Force (Rhodesia) 
1588 

South African Public Library, 1767 

See also Bibliography of African 
Bibliographies 

SOUTH WEST AFRICA, 1747-60, 
1779 

bibliography, 1747 
Southall, Aidan W., 1398, 1400 
ed., 274 

Southern Rhodesia, 1676-703 
Southorn, Bella S., Lady, 560 
Southworth Commission, 1666 
Sovetskata Entsiklopediia, 40 
Soviet literature, 4, 9, 132, 1921n 
bibliography, 4n, 9 
Soyinka, Wole, ed., 796 
Spain. Consejo Superior de Investiga- 
ciones Cientificas. Instituto de 
Estudios Africainos [IDEA] 2143, 
2145n, 2163-5 

Direccion General de Marruecos y 
Colonias, 2166 

Direccion General de Plazas y Pro- 
vincias Africanas, 179n 
SPANISH GUINEA, 2029, 2142-73 
bibliography, 2142, 2163 
Spencer, John H., 146 
Spilsbury, Calvin C., 517 
Spiro, Herbert J., 129 
Spitz, Georges, 924, 997-8 
Splett, Oskar, ed., 3 
Squires, H. C., 1460 
Stahl, Kathleen M., 1361 
Stamp, Laurence Dudley, 28 
Stanley, Henry M., 74, 1892n 
Stanley, Richard, ed., 74 
Stanleyville, Congo, 235 
Stapf, Otto, 664 
Stapleton, G. Brian, 756 
Statistics, official sources, 195-6 
Staudenraus, P. J., 675 
Stebbing, Edward P., 543 
Steenberghen, R., 1981 
Steiner, Arthur H., 154In 
Stenmans, Alain, 1898 
Stenning, Derrick J., 785 
Stevens, G. A., 534n 

Stevenson-Hamilton, James, 1693n, 1775 
Stewart, I. G., 753 
Stewart, James, 1693n 
Stibbe, Pierre, 1237n 
Stillman, Calvin W., Note, p. 23 
Stockley, G. M., 1713 
Stoecker, Helmuth, ed., 1146 
Strasser, Daniel, 1043 
Strong, Richard P., ed., 659 
SUDAN, 1450-503 
bibliography, 1450-1, 1473 


Sudan. Commission of Inquiry into the 
Disturbances in the Southern Su¬ 
dan, 1461 

Jonglei Investigation Team, 1487 
Southern Development Investigation 
Team, 1488 

Sudan, French (former) see Mali 
Sudan Colloquial Arabic, 1462n 
Sudan Notes and Records, 1450n 
Sudan, Southern, 782n, 1450n, 1466, 
1470, 1488 

Sugar industry, Mauitius, 1569-70 
Suicide, 269 

Suid-Afrikaanse Katalogus van Boeke, 
1768 

Suid-Afrikaanse Nazionale Bibliografie, 
1761n 

Sukuma (tribe, Tanganyika) 1343-4, 
1359 

Sundkler,Bengt G. W., 413-4, 1847 
Summers, Roger, 1694 
ed., 1584 

Suret-Canale, Jean, 852, 950, 954n, 958 
Survey of Kenya, 1327 
Survey of Race Relations, 1822n 
Sutherland, Efua, 607 
Swahili, language, 1299, 130In 
poetry, 1304 

Swahili-speaking peoples, 1420 
Swanzy, H. M., ed., 650 
Swazi (people), 1742-5, 1837 
SWAZILAND, 1709, 1740-6, 1774 
Sweeney, James Johnson, 315 
Swilling, Ernst A., 1103n 
Sydow, Eckart von, 330 
Symposium on Africa, Wellesley College, 
130 

Symposium on the Artist in Tribal So¬ 
ciety, 331 

T 

Tabler, Edward C., 1695 
ed., 1696 

Tait, David, 278, 649 
Talbot, A. M., 1776 
Talbot, David A., 1517-8 
Talbot, P. Amaury, 786-90 
Talbot, W. J., 1776 
Tallensi (tribe, Ghana) 271,630-2 
Tamakloe, E. F., 569 
Tana (lake, Ethiopia) 1509 
Tanala (tribe, Madagascar) 1230 
Tananarive, Malagasy Republic, 1241 
TANGANYIKA, 1340-71 
bibliography, 1268, 1342, 1362 
Tanganyika. Ministry of Commerce 
and Industry, 1363 

Tardits, Claude, 351, 933, 944, 1147 
Tassili (mountains, Sahara) 1038 
Tassin de Saint Pereuse, Marie, 919 
Tatay, Ramon, 2146n 
Tauxier, Louis, 999-1001 


350 




Taxation, Nigeria, 751 
Taylor, A., ed., 532 
Tayor, Brian, 130In 
Taylor, Charles J., 614n 
Taylor, J. Clagett, 1364 
Taylor, John V., 415, 1401 
Taylor, Wayne C., 676 
Teacher Training, 383, 385 
Teaching and Education in Belgian 
Congo, 1984 
Teague, Michael, 561 
Technical Assistance Mission to the 
Trust Territory of Somaliland, 1443 
Teda (tribe, Sahara) 1027-8 
(Chad) 1171 

Teita (tribe, Kenya) 1301n 

Teixeira, Antonio Jose da Silva, 2113 

Tema, Ghana, 605, 608 

Tempany, Harold A., 444 

Tempels, Placide, 291 

Templin, Ralph, 19 

Tennant, R. K., 1714 

Tenreiro, Francisco, 2116 

Tescaroli, Livio, 1502 

Tevendale, W. B., 618n 

Tevoedjre, Albert, 872 

Tew, Mary, 1673 

Theal, George McCall, 1796-9 

I Theater, African, 363 
bibliography, 314 

Thembu (tribe, South Africa) 1837 
Theobald, Alan B., 1478n 
Theobald, Robert, ed., 491 
Theological schools, Protestant, 414 
Thieme, Darius, comp., 337n 
Thierry, Solange, 1242n 
Thiout, Michel, 1242 
Thomas, Benjamin E., 42 
Thomas, Elizabeth Marshall, 1737 
Thomas, H. B., 290, 1402 
Thomas, Louis V., 1067 
Thomas, Marc R., 1044 
Thompson, Cecil H., 1618 
Thompson, Leonard M., 1800 
Thompson, Virginia McLean, 106, 925, 
1115 

Thomson, A. A. M., 85 
Thomson, Joseph, 1323n 
Thurnwald, Hilde, 1306 
Thurnwald, Richard, 265, 1306 
Tibesti (region, Chad), 1171 
Tigre language (Ethiopia), 1557 
Tigrina language (Ethiopia), 1557 
Tikar (tribe, Cameroun), 1129 
Tilho, A. J. M., 1177 
Tilman, Robert O., ed., 733 
Timbuctoo, Mali, 995 
The Times (London), 50 
Timothy, Bankele, 598n 
Tindall, Joseph, 1758 
Tinker, Hugh, 117 
Tisserant, Charles, 1161 


Titmuss, Richard Morris, 1574 
Tiv (tribe, Nigeria) 278, 760, 762-3, 
771n 

TOGO, 1069-86 

Togo. Service d’Information, 1082 
Tomlinson Commission, South Africa, 
1832 

Tonga (tribe, Northern Rhodesia), 
1580, 1625, 1637, 1639-42,1647 
Toro (tribe, Uganda), 1301n 
Tothill, J. D., 1489 
ed., 1403 

Toubou (tribe, Chad), 1167 
Touchette, Joseph I., 46n 
Toucouleur (people, Senegal), 1063 
Toupet, Charles, 1003 
Toura (tribe, Ivory Coast), 974n 
Toure, Sekou, 959-60 
Toussaint, Auguste, 1558-9, 1561 
ed., 1575 

Touval, Saadia, 1425n 
Tow, Leonard, 1688 
Towert, A. M. F., 1762n 
Town planning 
Ghana, 609 
Uganda, 1390 

Townsend, E. Reginald, ed., 677 
Townsend, Mary E., 86 
Toynbee, Arnold J., 1542n 
Tracey, Hugh, 346, 1858, 2141 
comp., 1859 
Trade, 200-2, 225n 

French-speaking West Africa, 926 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1610 
Sudan,1483 
Tanganyika, 1363, 1370 

See also Common Market; Europe¬ 
an Economic Community; U.S. 
trade relations 
Trade unions, 120, 256 

Camerouns, Southern, 1151 
Congo (Leopoldville), 1950 
Sudan, 1455 
See also Labor 
Trans-Saharan railway, 1042 
Transport, 519 

East Africa, 1287n, 1288 
French-speaking Africa, 879n 
Ghana, 610 

Nigeria, 739, 743-4, 757 
See also Railroads; Roads 
Traore, Bakary, 363 
Trautman, R., 913n 
Le Travail en Afrique noire, 255 
Travel guides, see Handbooks and guides 
Trevaskis, G. K. N., 1543 
Trewartha, Glenn T., 1939 
Trezenem, fidouard, 1116 
Tribal names, indexes, 262-3, 268, 275, 
279 

Trilles, H., 1201 


Trimingham, John Spencer, 3, 416-20, 
528-9, 1462, 1554-5 
Troup, Freda, 1757n 
Trowell, Hubert C., 475 
Trowell, Kathleen Margaret, 332-3, 
1404 

Trusteeship system, U.S., 152-3 

Cameroons, 1124, 1131-2, 1134, 

1136,1149-50 

Somaliland, Italian, 1424, 1427, 

1434-5, 1437, 1441, 1443-5 
South West Africa, 1750, 1754, 1756- 
7, 1759 

Tanganyika, 1342, 1354, 1358, 1364 
Togoland, 1070, 1072, 1075, 1078, 
1083-5, 1124, 1134 
Tshekedi, Khama, 1710n, 1746n 
about, 1722 

Tswana (tribes, Bechuanaland), 1728-9, 
1733 

Tuareg (peoples, Sahara, etc.), 1027-8, 
1038 

Tubman, William, V. S., 677 
Tucker, A. N., 301n, 1426n 
Tucker, A. R., bishop, 1401n 
Turkana (tribe, Kenya), 1302 
Turnbull, Colin M., 1951, 1968 
Turner, B. L., 443 
Turner, V. W., 1647, 1653 
Tutchokwe (tribe, Angola), 2093 
Tutuola, Amos, 807-8 
Tylden, G., 1721 

u 

UAM, see Union Africaine et Malgache 
UNECA, see United Nations Economic 
Commission for Africa 
UNESCO, see United Nations Educa¬ 
tional, Scientific and Cultural Or¬ 
ganization 

Ubangi-Shari, see Central African Re¬ 
public. 

UGANDA, 1372-409 

bibliography, 1268n, 1382, 1386 
“Uganda Becomes Independent”, 1405 
Uganda Journal, 1406 
Ukeje, L. O., ed., 697 
Ullendorff, Edward, 1556-7 
Ulloa, R. Villarino, 2145, 2163n 
Umbundu, see Ovimbundu 
Underdeveloped areas, bibliography, 194 
Underwood, Leon, 536-8 
Ungo (tribe. Northern Rhodesia), 1636n 
Union Africaine et Malgache, 855, 862, 
869,888 

Union des Peuples Camerounais, 1148 
Union Miniere du Haut-Katanga, 1996- 
8 

U.S.S.R., relations with Africa, 176 
See also Communism 
United Africa Co., 518 


351 







/ 


United Nations, 373n 

Advisory Council for Somaliland, 
1444 

Dept, of Economic and Social Affairs, 
223, 1601n 

Dept, of Public Information, 154, 
1544 

Economic Commission for Africa, 154, 
196,224-5,261,371,424,519 
Library, 196n 

General Assembly. Committee on 
South West Africa, 1759 
General Assembly. Special Commit¬ 
tee on Territories under Portuguese 
administration, 2048 
General Assembly. Subcommittee on 
the situation in Angola, 2082 
Secretariat, 245, 385, 2016 
Trusteeship Council. Visiting Mis¬ 
sion to East Africa, 1445, 2016n 
Visiting Mission to West Africa, 
1083-5, 1149-50 

United Nations and Africa, 146, 149, 
152-5 

Congo, 1917,1990, 1992, 1995 
Eritrea, 1544 

Portuguese Africa, 2041, 2048 
See also Trusteeship system 
United Nations Educational, Scientific 
and Cultural Organization [UN¬ 
ESCO] 235, 371, 373, 375n, 386-8, 
452n, 1041 

Division of Natural Sciences, 51 
Education Clearing House, 387 
Mass Communication Techniques Di¬ 
vision, 354n 

UNESCO Bulletin for Libraries, 388 
U.S. Bureau of Foreign Commerce, 
225n, 748n, 926, 1619 
Bureau of International Labor Af¬ 
fairs, 256 

Congress. House. Committee on 
Foreign Affairs, 169-71 
Congress. Senate. Committee on 
Foreign Relations, 172 
Dept, of Agriculture. Economic Re¬ 
search Service, 445 

Dept, of the Army. Headquarters, 
see Africa, Its Problems and Pros¬ 
pects 

Dept, of state. Bureau of Educa¬ 
tional and Cultural Affairs, 173 
Dept, of State. External Research 
Division, 174 

Dept, of State. Office of Research 
and Analysis for the Mid-East and 
Africa, 47n 

Economic Cooperation Administra¬ 
tion, 1446-7 

Foreign Service Institute, 307n 
Hydrographic Office, 52 
Library of Congress, 146, 225n, 359n, 
423, 688, 897, 1268, 1423 


U.S. Bureau of Foreign Commerce— 
Continued 

Mutual Security Agency, 2049 
Operations Mission to Italy, 1447 
Operations Mission to Liberia, 678 
Operations Mission to the Somali Re¬ 
public, 1448 

Public Health Service, 1952 
Trade and Industrial Development 
Mission to Middle Africa, 1117 
U.S. Information Agency, 170-1 
United States and Africa 

aid, economic and technical, 158, 
163-4, 170-2 
Ethiopia, 1535 
Liberia, 678 

Portuguese territories, 2049 
Somalia, 1446-8 

educational activities in Africa, 173 
policy, 149, 156, 158-9, 163-4, 166, 
168 

relations with Liberia, 665 
trade relations, 225n, 926, 1117 
U.S. and Canadian Publications on 
Africa, see Note on Bibliography, 

p. 1 

The Unity of the Nile Valley, 1479 
Universitas (Legon, Ghana) 650n 
Universities, see Higher education 
Unzueta y Yuste, Abelardo de, 2167-9 
UPPER VOLTA, 1087-94 
Urbanization 

bibliography, 226n, 227 
social aspects, 232-5 
Burundi, 1999 
Cameroun, 1125 

Central African Republic, 1159-60 
Chad, 1174n 

Congo (Brazzaville), 1179, 1182 
Congo (Leopoldville) 1943, 1945 
Dahomey, 944 

French Equatorial Africa, 1114 
Gabon, 1196 
Madagascar, 1241 
Northern Rhodesia, 1644-5 
Senegal, 1053 

South Africa, 1826-7, 1829n, 1831-2 
Southern Rhodesia, 1685 
Uganda, 1378, 1390, 1397, 1399-400 
West Africa, 527 
Urquhart, Duncan H., 444n 
Urundi, 2004n 

Urvoy, Yves F., 927, 1024, 1178 
Ushpol, Rowse, 1762n 
Usoni, Luigi, 1545 
Usumbura, Burundi, 1999 
Uvarov, Boris P., 446 
Uwanaka, Charles U., 734 

V 

Vai (tribe, Liberia) 657 
Valenge (tribe, Mozambique), 2121 


Van der Horst, Sheila T., 1834 
Van der Plas, Charles D., 562 
Van der Post, Laurens, 143, 1674, 
1738-9 

Vandewoude, Emiel J. L. M., 1969 
Van Dongen, Irene S., 1287n 
Van Dyke, H. A., 1447n 
Vane, Michael, 476 
Van Rensburg, Patrick, 44 
Van Riebeeck Society, 1758, 1795 
Vansina, Jan, 56n, 1970, 2017 
Van Warmelo, J. J., 1837n, 1844n 
Varley, Douglas H., comp., 337 
Vathonga (tribe, South Africa) 1837 
Vaulx, Bernard de, 84n, 393n 
Vavenda (tribe, South Africa), 1837 
Veciana Vilaldach, Antonio de, 2170-1 
Vedder, Heinrich, 1755, 1760 
Vegetation, 425, 428,439, 442-3 
Gabon, 1203 
Ghana, 614 

Northern Rhodesia, 1633 
Spanish Guinea, 2146n 
Velsen, J. van, 1702 
Vere-Hodge, Edward R., 60n, 1285 
Verger, Pierre, 530 
Vergiat, Antonin M., 1162-3 
Verhaegen, Benoit, ed., 1905—7 
Verhaegen, Paul, 226n, 1945n 
Vianes, Suzanne, 1233n 
Vidal de la Blache, ed., 23n 
Viguier, Pierre, 928 
Villard, Andre, 1068 
Villari, Luigi, 1542n 
Villarino Ulloa, Ramon, 2163n 
Villiers, A., 842, 1004 
Viney, N. M., comp., 1433 
Voices of Ghana, 650 
Volta River Project, 605, 608, 618 
Vos, Pierre de, 192In 
Vugusu (tribe, Kenya) 1338 
Vulaines, Jacques, 1116n 
Vulliamy, Colwyn E., 1801 

w 

Wabena (tribe, Tanganyika), 1345 
Wachsmann, K. P., 1404 
Wachuku, J. A., 6 
Wagner, Gunter, 271, 1338 
Wakefield Report, 1369n 
Walker, Andre Raponda, 1202-4 
about, 1190 

Walker, Audrey A., comp., 1268n 
Walker, Barbara K., ed., 799 
Walker, Eric A., 89n, 1802-3 
Walker, Gilbert J., 757 
Walker, Warren S., ed., 799 
Wallace, Kathleen, 489n 
Wallerstein, Immanuel, 125, 131, 156, 
929, 981 

Wallis, J. P. R., ed., 77n, 1693 


352 


Walraet, Marcel, 1985 
Ward, Ida C., 92, 313 
Ward, William E. F., 71, 584-5 
ed., 372 

Warmelo, N. J. von, tr., 306 
Warmington, W. A., 758, 1119, 1151 
Warner, Douglas, 576 
Warner, Esther S., 679-80 
Warren, Cline, 1490 
Washington, Forrester B., 334 
Waterpower, 24, 1658, 1727 
Watkins, Mark Hanna, 307n 
Watson, George D., 689n 
Watson, Sir Malcolm, 1627 
Watson, William, 1612, 1654 
Webb, Gwenlilian, 540n 
Welbourn, Frederick B., 421, 1307 
Welch, Floretta J., 1747n 
Welch, Galbraith, 681 
Wellington, John H., 1777 
Wells, F. A., 758 
Wells, Somalia, 1446 
Welmers, William E., 299n, 307 
Weman, Henry, 347 
Werner, Alice, 308-9, 
tr., 306 

WEST AFRICA, 479-543 
bibliography, 262, 479-80 
West Africa (London), 492 
West African Directory, 493 
West African Institute of Social and 
Economic Research, 621 
See also, Nigerian Institute . . . 

West African Review (Liverpool), 547, 
563 

Westermann, Diedrich, 72, 265, 285, 
301n, 310-3, 422, 1086, 1503 
Westwood, Andrew, 2083 
Weulersse, Jacques, 144 
Wheare, Joan, 735 
Wheat, 445n 

Wheeler, Elizabeth Hunting, ed., 228 
Wheeler, J. F. G., 1576 
Whetstone, Harold V., 670n 
Whitaker, Philip, 121 
White, Charles M. N., 1655 
White Fathers, 403 

See also Missions, Catholic 
Whitehead, W., 1647 
Whiteley, Wilfred H., 351, 1422 
comp., 1299n 

Who’s Who in Nigeria, 700 
“Who’s Who in the Gambia,” 563 
Who’s Who of Southern Africa, 1778 
Who’s Who of the Federation of Rho¬ 
desia and Nyasaland, 1577n, 1779 
Who’s who, see also Leaders 
Wiedner, Donald L., 73 
Wieschhoff, Heinrich A., 103 
comp., 263 
Wight, Martin, 600 
Wigny, Pierre, 1940 


Wilbois, Joseph, 1152 
Wilcocks, Charles, 477 
Wilcocks, R. W., 1823n 
Wilcox, Francis O., 155 
Wild, Roland, 680n 
Wild life, 447-56 

conservation, 450, 452 
Cameroons, 1127 
French-speaking Africa, 842 
Mauritania, 1004 
Mozambique, 2129 
Northern Rhodesia, 1622 
Rhodesia and Nyasaland, 1579n 
South Africa, 1775 
Spanish Guinea, 2146 
West Africa, 539-40 
Wilks, Ivor, 586 

Willem Hiddingh Reprint Series, 172In 
Williams, Chancellor, 389 
Williams, Maude W., 670n 
Williams, Walter B., 670n 
Williamson, G., 444n 
Wills, J., Brian, ed., 619 
Wilson, A. T., 1633 
Wilson, Charles Morrow, 680n 
Wilson, Godfrey, 1580, 1600, 1675 
Wilson, Monica Hunter, 1365-7, 1600, 
1837n,1844n, 1848 
Wilson-Haffenden, James R., 790n 
Winans, Edgar V., 1368 
Wing, Joseph van, 1971 
ed., 1974 

Wingate, Sir Reginald, about, 1480 
Wingate, Sir Ronald, 1480 
Wingenbach, Charles, 161n 
Wingert, Paul S., 335 
Winter, Edward H., 278, 1407 
Wise, Colin, 533 

Witch doctors, see Medicine, African 
Witchcraft, 286, 289 
Ghana, 624, 626 
Kenya, 1313 
Sudan, 1494 
Upper Volta, 1088, 1091 

See also Magic; Medicine, African 
Wittman, (G. H.) Co., Inc., 620 
Woddis, Jack, 182 
Wolfe, Alvin W., 1972 
Wolfson, Freda, 587 
Wollschlager, Alfred, 41 
Wolof (tribe, Gambia), 550 
(Senegal), 1045, 1063 
Women, 228, 237-9, 243, 246, 381, 470 
bibliography, 226n 
Cameroons, 1138 
East Africa, 1306 
Katanga, 1994 
Liberia, 661 
Mozambique, 2121 
Nigeria, 773-4 
South Africa, 1827 
Wood, Alan, 1369 


Wood, Anthony St. John, 1634 
Wood, Carroll E., Jr., 430 
Wood, Susan B., 1339 
Woodruff, Harry W., 1618 
Woods, C. A., 1829n 
Woodtli, Robert, 462 
Woolf, Leonard S., 78n 
World Confederation of Organizations 
of the Teaching Profession, 390 
World Health Organization, 468, 478 
World List of Future International 
Meetings, 146n 

World Movement of Mothers, African 
Congress, 228n 

World Trade Information Series, 225n 
World Union of Catholic Women’s Or¬ 
ganizations, 246 

Worthington, Edgar B., 452, 467, 1297, 
1408 

Worthington, Stella, 1297 
Worzella, W. W., 1447n 
Wraith, Ronald E., 505n, 1298 
Wright, Fergus C., 1370 
Wright, Richard, 145, 147n, 577 
Wrigley, C. C., 1300, 1409 
Writers, African 

anthologies, 353, 366 
bibliography, 314, 361 
congresses, 321, 348-9 

See also Literature, African 
Wrong, Margaret, 92 
Wylde, A. B., 1520n 

X 

Xhosa (tribe, South Africa) 1837, 1845 
Xydias, N., 235 

Y 

Yako (tribe, Nigeria) 764 
Yakobson, Sergius, 1526n 
Yancy, Ernest J., 682 
Yao (tribe, Nyasaland) 1580, 1665 
Ydewalle, Charles d’, 1883, 1998 
Yearbook and Guide to East Africa, 1286 
Yearbook and Guide to Southern Africa, 
1779 

Yesifu, Tijani M., 759 
Yglesias de la Riva, A., 2172 
Ylla [pseud.] see Koffler, Camilla 
Yoruba (people, Nigeria) 343, 503, 
526-7, 713, 721, 770-1, 775, 783n, 
796n, 798 

Young, James C., 683 
Young, Roland A., 1371 
Young, T. Cullen, 292 
ed., 1662 

Younger, Kenneth G., 104 
about, 117 

Yushmanov, N. V., ed., 294 
YveDyak, ed., 1491 


353 





z 

Zahan, Dominique, 1002 
Zaire (Bruxelles) 1868 
Zamora Loboc, Miguel, 2173 
Zande scheme, 1485 
ZANZIBAR, 1410-22 
bibliography, 1268, 1412, 1416, 1420 


Zaria, Northern Nigeria, 754, 784 
Zartman, I. William, 183 
Zelinsky, Wilbur, 1939 
Ziegle, Henri, 1116n 
Ziervogel, D., 1849 

Zimbabwe ruins, Southern Rhodesia, 
1689, 1691 


Zischka, Anton, 208n 
Zohrer, Ludwig G. A., 1449 
Zulu (people, South Africa) 271, 1836— 
7, 1840 
folklore, 1854 
songs, 1859 

Zuylen, Pierre van, 1898 


354 


O.S. SOVERNMENT PRINTING 0FFICE:I964 





RECENT LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
PUBLICATIONS ON AFRICA 

African Music: A Briefly Annotated Bibliography.** 1964. In preparation. 
Agricultural Development Schemes in Sub-Saharan Africa: A Bibliography.** 1963. 
189 p. SI.25. 

A list of American Doctoral Dissertations on Africa.** 1962. 69 p. 35 cents. 

Official Publications of British East Africa:* 

Part I. The East Africa High Commission and Other Regional Documents. 

1960, reprinted 1961. 67 p. 60 cents. 

Part II. Tanganyika. 1962. 134 p. SI.00. 

Part III. Kenya and Zanzibar. 1962. 162 p. SI.25. 

Part IV. Uganda. 1963. 100 p. $1.00. 

Official Publications of French Equatorial Africa, French Cameroons and Togo, 
1946-1958: A Guide.** 1963. In press. 

Official Publications of French West Africa, 1946-1958: A Guide.* 1960, reprinted 
1961. 88 p. 75 cents. 

Official Publications of Sierra Leone and Gambia.** 1963. 92 p. 55 cents. 

Serials for African Studies.** Washington, 1961. 163 p. S1.00. 

United States and Canadian Publications on Africa in I960.** 1962. 98 p. 50 cents. 

OUT OF PRINT 

African Libraries, Book Production, and Archives: A List of References. 1962. 
64 p. 

Nigerian Official Publications, 1869-1959: A Guide. 1959. 153 p. 

North and Northeast Africa: A Selected, Annotated List of Writings, 1951-1957. 
1957. 182 p. 

Official Publications of Somaliland, 1941-1959: A Guide. 1960. 41 p. Positive 
microfilm available from Photoduplication Service, Library of Congress, for $2.25. 


♦Available from the Card Division, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C., 20540. 

** Available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washing¬ 
ton, D.C., 20402. 










4 

<y t*. 

% - ,* ^ V,; ,o 

^ w 0 J \V v* * 1 ' -x 

O. V * ' * ° ' a ^ -fcO v > 

V 


^‘ 


X* % 


0 %. 




■ 0 ° ; '. ,", i>' * 4$ A> -* ^|==j| 1^=^ ° A\ V ' f ‘f>. 

**s* a &, 'o»,* jy </", \<< A ■?, '< <* a° v 7 

■ ‘ 1 8 * 'b, r A s ° N c * '<s> * * ,0 • 1 1 » * l b^ 

-% ° . ®% / zgti&;* <, % v 

■*b 0 \ ; ,,,. w*A '„ 


*u 


V , YTo^i 1 O I, «* 

•5- te/rr/^r, + 

*oA 

A ^ ^ 

Or ^ * 

v* 0^ cK /- 




^ ' 1 . /_ J. 0C i.- * 

N v _/r^ ^ iP » ofvw ' V •* ' ^yy7^ ** ^ (j * 

C-- y»V y —w *\ “V ^.v't ' x> 




A A jgfS "%v ' 

,>. V\ X ' 

</> ,< v 




8 ’ ,0> O ** /* ^ . 




* .0 N 


1 A ° A s * <■ , * 0 N o ' ^ 

A ' 'jftakZ' % V r 

.X * ^ *. ** A. 

-Ci </^ 



_\. A * ■% > ^*W' * tS S>\ 

\iA / ^*;., l ,’--^ r - v. c>^ 

' -V ' /# 


j5 


\\ 

3> 

A v)8 

,0 

<s 


't> ^ 

vO v.. y o * »• ^ *; 0 

* y ' ^ % ?j> -- 0 ' 

o 0 x 

vV k, ^ 



i 0 ’ x O ^ "•M* 4° ‘ , , 




» c A " \V </> ^1 V » c A* 

> 1 ,| c v\ ,/> O I \ .; \ ; S w C. v 

^ V? ^ «> v>V 0 ^ ’V o % t ‘••',\> r ^ v? <*' 

o , V ^ ^G X <. ^ / ' 1 s v ' A ^ ' 0 « V ^ aG n c <~ f * * * s s 

, % * 81 ■ ^>c V ^ 0 ' $ , - % 91 'V , ^ 

V 


's^y%'\ / ♦>,'•-/% - °° / A -' N ° v 

; %/ ;/"m : 'W ^ ^'4 ■■/;, % / f fcf\l % / : , 

W ^ Jw * .0 ^ * 'V ^ - ^ * ,v *. 


ta A 




o 0 X 


o o5 



^ o' 


aV if* 

A?' ^ - '0 ^ O -vgr 

^ y s A o 

»V A <• g ■ -.■. ^ 

^/. v? ' .;■* J-. -a ^ ->v 


v- 

^ <1 a* ^ v ' 

v c. 75 n0 0 ^a> >,o v 

« A a ^ 

v.^ 15 v p*-. ^ 

✓ - i . -^ \ ^ <t ^ 



■ '*a 0 ; 

o ^ 


o5 ^ 

4 s ^ 9 • /^ 7 ■’ N 0 ' 0 V % * * A v * 1 ' x o 4 

* S®; V 4 -O’ * 0 - : A = ^ 4 

^ '\ V : i 'f ^ * i-; 

■ O' '-?/> 

x 7 * Vv'/ * -<y V j '■t ■ 

A, 

% 4 ^ 4 .% °o 

«>^ V 

<0 rv' 


o. r o v ' c“ " ^^<$6 

- 0 O^SSp^ - 4 VT 

: -oo' :’...AA' ++? : 

S -v -'" j ''• •'" 

Or 

<* VL- -> 

0> ^ 


0 o' 

•'■;o 4 *Sw** r 

\> »^ *»/ ^> 81 A o^* 


« •••: n ^ S ♦ k r> / 1 rfi '> ■ * ^ VJ * • l -\, « ^ • J - t(W „. w V.) « ‘ /..' : i S 

v ' > %Zfmar * 0°^ - c A ^ r ^' '' "'V ■* 0°^ • c o5 

4 '' 8 •' ’ >° \ ^ r% y ,j k ° ’V^' * ° **'> * ; ■'* 4 \ s ■=, rv * a n ° v r -», v 

A ':;%V" ^ V'^': 4 a*+ ' * * ^ \S ' V'» c '■' *'%'" ’ 4 ^ 

•>* V o /ry r '^/ O- ^ 'Jr - -.!/-■ - /7\ -t sX V o ,Ts .',L- 4 ^ *^V 

„ /'f-'- .• - oo x •••>: v-‘^ y * v :> n r ■■■- „ °o x ® ^ ^ * > / u; .- 

• ^ a ^ > 4.Wi - .oo. c - -■.:: .... : .^' ±Jj • .o o a 


o 


*- 




^ .. v Ai a °'v > ,/V 

\ . n 


1 4 „ 4 4 ^' ''’ 

^ : ,o 4 : 

^ o<‘ 

Y 0 * K ^ A 

1 * * ^ .a. . 

- ,-0 v t° «.<?£, jA v 

K*> A 
v- V 


<o v <• ** , s s .0 

r *V 4 ^ A'* 

•' £iJ&'i A J : 



'*o A 











*• / ' . f- y. 










0 o 






^ <- 0 0 > 
»,,,* '0 O 

a »A i - 


*<• 




o 0 


* 4 ^^' A 

JD t a ' ,, '« v « * 4 >4> * v 1 fl 4 

r 4* 

; ..USl <r ON 

v<V'*V ^ 

^ -VSffek". *<? c.. 

e " ^ ■ i . 1 ^ 

I •- aV <r 


x° 

s * » * ■■< N O ’ A- 

V * 

V Or 

A' 

*V *, 4 "* .* V " *. <s •»■ * * 

O * k ^ 4VJ ^ '* . s .*\ O y „ . * .u r 

' *' .>■'•, •*& "■ 

A 

^ v* 




_ A V * 


V<* V */ 















'• ^ r 

✓ Sr -w .• 

< 

o *« 6 # ' * * S A 

A ^ -6 

U -y 

^ * s 

A* V e 









w ^ v* N : 




» 

<* erg* 

'o.^ <0 

o 

o5 ^ 

\* ^ , * 















v> * ' °r 

<\ O. * n ~ i * .u V ^ .\ 











* ^ V 


/v ..-/> * -* 'A ^ -v •—-». - = a • /- r^- 


V 

A V <V 







o. 











V -.wr 'M* ^V-> S X* /% 

“* ^ v- V . * *b 0 < ! \..:«v. 





& 



o 

** ** s s A 

4 "<p 

•fV " /• r ^ ■>• 

v :: ( ’■ ,• » ° o : ■•,, 

c '/> * -1 X 0 ^ v ■%, * « , ^ * <0’ \ * 

\> ^*«, *> .<y- s^V^'^b 





.<■ 




N' f\ n c '^. ^ D * ^ . \ 

o° .‘Ll"*, ^ .-i. 4 > 

4 . -sjr > ^ -v x\ >> 

A C T ^ 







0 014 133 289 2 






































































